JP2018143407A - Game board - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game board featuring display.SOLUTION: A game board includes display means capable of displaying a first display (variation display of a decorative pattern) and a second display (variation display of a decorative pattern). The second display has a display size differing from that of the first display, and is configured to be displayable in parallel with the first display. The display means is configured such that a certain ready-to-win performance may start to be executed after display of a stop display of a certain special pattern for indicating development to a certain ready-to-win performance in one first display, and that at least in a partial state from among states in which a certain ready-to-win performance is executed, the ready-to-win pattern can be notified in the second display.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 37

Description

  The present invention relates to a game table represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine), a spinning cylinder game machine (slot machine), a sealed game machine, or a medalless slot machine.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, game machines that perform various displays have been proposed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2008-200302 A

However, the conventional game stand has room for improvement in display.
An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine having a display characteristic.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine provided with a display means, and the display means is a means capable of displaying a variable display of a set of decorative symbols (hereinafter referred to as “first display”). And the display means is a means capable of displaying a variable display (hereinafter referred to as “second display”) of a set of decorative symbols separate from the first display, and the second display. Has a display size different from that of the first display, and is configured so that the first display and the second display can be displayed in parallel. The display means can display a special symbol. A special symbol is a symbol representing development to a certain reach production, and a special symbol is a symbol that is not used as a symbol representing a big hit. In the first display, after a special symbol stop display is displayed, It is configured so that a line may be started, and in at least a part of a state where a certain reach effect is being executed, it is configured to be able to notify a tempering symbol in the second display. It is a game stand characterized by that.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to realize a game machine having a display characteristic.

It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. 1 is a schematic front view of a game board 200 of a pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front. 3 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit of the pachinko machine 100. FIG. It is an example of the display pattern of the pachinko machine 100, (a) shows an example of the stop display design of Special Figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display design of Special Figure 2, (c) is a decorative design (D) is a figure which shows an example of a usual stop display symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a special figure prefetch process. It is a figure which shows an example of the prefetch result memory | storage part for special figures 1 and for special figures 2. FIG. It is a figure explaining the content of the determination table. It is a figure explaining the content of the special figure determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flowchart of a 1st sub control part main process, (b) is a 1st sub control part command reception interruption. 4 is a flowchart of the process, (c) is a flowchart of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, and (d) is a flowchart of the first sub control unit image control process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the process in the 2nd sub control part 500 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flowchart of a 2nd sub control part main process, (b) is a 2nd sub control part command reception interruption. It is a flowchart of a process, (c) is a flowchart of a 2nd sub control part timer interruption process. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the image control of the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the image display apparatus 208 (208 ') of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the image display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the image display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the image display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the image display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the image display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the image display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the image display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the image display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the image display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of the various tables used for the production of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by embodiment of this invention from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by embodiment of this invention from the back side. 1 is a schematic front view of a game board 200 of a pachinko machine 100 according to an embodiment of the present invention as viewed from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of the control part of the pachinko machine 100 by the embodiment of the present invention. It is an example of the display symbol in the pachinko machine 100 by embodiment of this invention, Comprising: (a) shows an example of the stop display symbol of special figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display symbol of special figure 2 (C) shows an example of a decorative design, (d) is a diagram showing an example of a normal stop display design. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main process of the main control part of the pachinko machine 100 by embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interruption process of the pachinko machine 100 by embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of the special figure prefetch process in the pachinko machine 100 by embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which illustrates the state by which the prefetch result was memorize | stored in the prefetch result memory | storage part of the pachinko machine 100 by embodiment of this invention. (A) illustrates a state where the prefetch result is stored in the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1, and (b) illustrates a state where the prefetch result is stored in the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 2 (C) exemplifies the state of the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 in the electric support. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub control part of the pachinko machine 100 by embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of the 1st sub control part main process, (b) is the 1st sub control. The flow of the part command reception interrupt process is shown, and (c) shows the flow of the first sub-control part timer interrupt process. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in Example 1 of the pachinko machine 100 by embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in Example 2 of the pachinko machine 100 by embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of production in Example 3 of the pachinko machine 100 by embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in Example 4 of the pachinko machine 100 by embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in Example 5 of the pachinko machine 100 by embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in Example 6 of the pachinko machine 100 by embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of production in Example 7 of the pachinko machine 100 by embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in Example 8 of the pachinko machine 100 by embodiment of this invention in time series. It is FIG. (1) which shows the example of an effect in the modification of the pachinko machine 100 by embodiment of this invention. It is FIG. (2) which shows the example of an effect in the modification of the pachinko machine 100 by embodiment of this invention. It is FIG. (3) which shows the example of an effect in the modification of the pachinko machine 100 by embodiment of this invention. FIG. 10 is a schematic front view of a slot machine as a game machine according to a modification of the embodiment of the present invention as seen from the front. It is a figure which shows the game stand by the modification of embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the casino machine 2000, (b) is the mobile telephone 3000 provided with the memory | storage part which memorize | stores the electronic data which implement | achieves this invention. (C) shows a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention, and (d) has a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention. A home video game machine 5000 is shown, and (e) shows a data server 6000 storing electronic data for realizing the present invention. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by embodiment of this invention from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by embodiment of this invention from the back side. 1 is a schematic front view of a game board 200 of a pachinko machine 100 according to an embodiment of the present invention as viewed from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of the control part of the pachinko machine 100 by the embodiment of the present invention. It is an example of the display symbol in the pachinko machine 100 by embodiment of this invention, Comprising: (a) shows an example of the stop display symbol of special figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display symbol of special figure 2 (C) shows an example of a decoration design, (d) is a figure showing an example of a usual stop display design. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main process of the main control part of the pachinko machine 100 by embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interruption process of the pachinko machine 100 by embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the special figure prefetch process of the pachinko machine 100 by embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which illustrates the state by which the prefetch result was memorize | stored in the prefetch result memory | storage part of the pachinko machine 100 by embodiment of this invention. (A) illustrates a state where the prefetch result is stored in the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1, and (b) illustrates a state where the prefetch result is stored in the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 2 (C) exemplifies the state of the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 in the electric support. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the special figure 1 related lottery process of the pachinko machine 100 by embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the table for determination of the success / failure used with the pachinko machine 100 by embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the table for special figure determination used with the pachinko machine 100 by embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure 1 variable display time determination table which determines the variable time of the symbol fluctuation stop display in the special figure 1 variable game in the pachinko machine 100 by embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure 2 fluctuation | variation display time determination table which determines the fluctuation | variation time of the symbol fluctuation stop display in the special figure 2 fluctuation | variation game with the pachinko machine 100 by embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub control part of the pachinko machine 100 by embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of the 1st sub control part main process, (b) is the 1st sub control. The part command reception interrupt process flow is shown, (c) shows the flow of the first sub-control part timer interrupt process, and (d) shows the flow of the first sub-control part image control process. . It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub control part of the pachinko machine 100 by embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of the 2nd sub control part main process, (b) is the 2nd sub control. The flow of the part command reception interrupt process is shown, and (c) shows the flow of the second sub-control part timer interrupt process. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a flow of a selection effect control process that is one example of the effect control process (step S409) of the main process in the first sub-control unit 400 in Example 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the time operation | movement of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 1 by embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection effect performed by the 1st effect means and the 2nd effect means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 1 by embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection effect performed by the 1st effect means and the 2nd effect means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 1 by embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the time operation | movement of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 2 by embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection effect performed by the 1st effect means and the 2nd effect means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 2 by embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection effect performed by the 1st effect means and the 2nd effect means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 2 by embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the time operation | movement of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 3 by embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection effect performed by the 1st effect means and the 2nd effect means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 3 by embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection effect performed by the 1st effect means and the 2nd effect means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 3 by embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the time operation | movement of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 4 by embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection effect performed by the 1st effect means and the 2nd effect means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 4 by the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the selection effect performed by the 1st effect means and the 2nd effect means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 4 by the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the time operation | movement of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 5 by embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection effect performed by the 1st effect means and the 2nd effect means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 5 by the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the selection effect performed by the 1st effect means and the 2nd effect means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 5 by the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the selection effect performed by the 1st effect means and the 2nd effect means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 5 by the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the selection effect performed by the 1st effect means and the 2nd effect means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 5 by the embodiment of the present invention. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 6 by embodiment of this invention from the front. It is a figure which shows the operation means 700 of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 6 by embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the time operation | movement of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 6 by embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection effect performed by the 1st-3rd effect means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 6 by embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection effect performed by the 1st-3rd effect means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 6 by embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection effect performed by the 1st-3rd effect means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 6 by embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the time operation | movement of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 7 by embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection effect performed by the 1st-3rd effect means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 7 by embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection effect performed by the 1st-3rd effect means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 7 by embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection effect performed by the 1st-3rd effect means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 7 by embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection effect performed by the 1st-3rd effect means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 7 by embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the time operation | movement of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 8 by embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection effect performed by the 1st-4th effect means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 8 by embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection effect performed by the 1st-4th effect means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 8 by embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection effect performed by the 1st-4th effect means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 8 by embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the time operation | movement of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 9 by embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection effect performed by the 1st and 2nd effect means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 9 by embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the time operation | movement of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 10 by embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection production | presentation performed with the production | presentation means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 10 by embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the time operation | movement of the pachinko machine 100 in the modification 1 of Example 4 by embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection effect performed by the 1st and 2nd effect means of the pachinko machine 100 in the modification 1 by embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection effect performed by the 1st and 2nd effect means of the pachinko machine 100 in the modification 1 by embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection effect performed by the 1st and 2nd effect means of the pachinko machine 100 in the modification 1 by embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the time operation | movement of the pachinko machine 100 in the modification 2 of Example 4 by embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection effect performed by the 1st and 2nd effect means of the pachinko machine 100 in the modification 2 by embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the other example of the selection effect performed by the 1st and 2nd effect means of the pachinko machine 100 in the modification 2 by embodiment of this invention. It is FIG. (1) which shows the production | presentation performed with the production | presentation means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 11 by embodiment of this invention. It is FIG. (2) which shows the effect performed by the production | presentation means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 11 by embodiment of this invention. It is FIG. (3) which shows the production | presentation performed with the production | presentation means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 11 by embodiment of this invention. It is FIG. (4) which shows the effect performed by the production | presentation means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 11 by embodiment of this invention. It is FIG. (5) which shows the production | presentation performed with the production | presentation means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 11 by embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation performed with the production | presentation means of the pachinko machine 100 in the modification 1 of Example 11 by embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation performed with the production | presentation means of the pachinko machine 100 in the modification 2 of Example 11 by embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation performed with the production | presentation means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 12 by embodiment of this invention. It is a time chart showing the start timing and end timing of the big hit game of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 12 according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation performed with the production | presentation means of the pachinko machine 100 in the modification of Example 12 by embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation performed with the production | presentation means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 13 by embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation performed with the production | presentation means of the pachinko machine 100 in the modification of Example 13 by embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation performed with the production | presentation means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 14 by embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation performed with the production | presentation means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 15 by embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation performed with the production | presentation means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 16 by embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation performed with the production | presentation means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 17 by embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation performed with the production | presentation means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 18 by embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation performed with the production | presentation means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 19 by embodiment of this invention. FIG. 10 is a schematic front view of a slot machine as a game machine according to a modification of the embodiment of the present invention as seen from the front. It is a figure which shows the game stand by the modification of embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the casino machine 2000, (b) is the mobile telephone 3000 provided with the memory | storage part which memorize | stores the electronic data which implement | achieves this invention. (C) shows a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention, and (d) has a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention. A home video game machine 5000 is shown, and (e) shows a data server 6000 storing electronic data for realizing the present invention. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention from the back side. 1 is a schematic front view of a game board 200 of a pachinko machine 100 according to an embodiment of the present invention as viewed from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of the control part of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is an example of the display symbol in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, Comprising: (a) shows an example of the stop display symbol of special figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display symbol of special figure 2 (C) shows an example of a decorative design, and (d) shows an example of a normal stop display design. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part main process of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interruption process of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. (A) is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of the special figure prefetch process in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention. (B)-(e) is a figure which shows an example of the prefetch result memory | storage part for special figures 1 and the special figure 2 with which the main control part 300 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention was equipped. It is a figure which shows the determination table for common use in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, and the example of symbol distribution and the operation at the time of winning. It is a figure which shows the example of the determination table for the special figure in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the symbol distribution table for the special figure 1 in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, and operation | movement at the time of big hit. It is a figure which shows the example of the symbol distribution table for the special figure 2 in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, and operation | movement at the time of big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the process in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of the 1st sub control part main process, (b) is the 1st. 1 shows a flow of 1 sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing, (c) shows a flow of first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, and (d) shows a flow of image control processing. It is a figure explaining the electric long opening effect performed by the effect control process of the main process in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. (A) shows the flow of the electric long opening effect, and (b) shows an example of the electric long opening effect on the decorative symbol display device 208. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub control part 500 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of the 2nd sub control part main process, (b) is the 2nd. 2 shows the flow of the second sub-control unit command reception interrupt process, and (c) shows the flow of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, and the movable body 700,702. It is a figure explaining the serif notice display in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the preliminary notice effect in preparation applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows in stepwise another example of the preparation notice effect applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in stepwise another example of the preparation notice effect applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the preliminary notice effect in preparation applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows another example of the preliminary announcement effect in preparation applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows another example of the preliminary announcement effect in preparation applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows the example of a display in the tutorial display part TT1 applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows in stepwise another example of the preparation notice effect applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the timer notice effect applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows another example of the preliminary announcement effect in preparation applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows another example of the preliminary announcement effect in preparation applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows another example of the preliminary announcement effect in preparation applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the button repeated striking effect applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows another example of the preliminary announcement effect in preparation applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect by the description display applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows another example of the preliminary announcement effect in preparation applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows another example of the preliminary announcement effect in preparation applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows another example of the preliminary announcement effect in preparation applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows another example of the preliminary announcement effect in preparation applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows another example of an effect of the effect shown in FIG. 211 in steps. It is a figure which shows another example of the preliminary announcement effect in preparation applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the step-up notice effect applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure explaining another example of the step-up notice effect shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows another example of the step-up notice effect applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows another example of the step-up notice effect applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo-continuous production applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the button notice effect applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows another example of the production | presentation applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows another example of the production | presentation applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure shown in steps about an example of the expansion effect of a hold display frame. It is a figure shown about the example of a display of a ball removal error display. It is a figure shown about the example of a display of a ball removal error display. It is a figure shown about the example of a display of a ball removal error display. 1 is a front view of a sealed pachinko machine to which the present invention is applicable. FIG. 4 is an external perspective view of a slot machine to which the present invention can be applied as viewed from the front side (player side). It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is the figure which showed an example of the item. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production which concerns on Example 1, and the item provision production in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production and the item provision production which concern on Example 2 in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production which concerns on Example 3, and the item provision production in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production and item provision production which concern on Example 4 in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production and the item provision production which concern on Example 5 in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production and item provision production which concern on Example 6 in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production which concerns on Example 7, and the item provision production in time series. 6 is a transition diagram showing an example of screen transition in the pachinko machine 100. FIG. It is the figure which showed an example of real screen transition in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the screen transition when various menus are selected on the menu screen. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production which concerns on Example 8, and the item provision production in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production and item provision production which concern on Example 9 in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production which concerns on Example 10, and the item provision production in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production and item provision production which concern on Example 11 in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production and item provision production which concern on Example 12 in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production and item provision production which concern on Example 13 in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production and item provision production which concern on Example 14 in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production and item provision production which concern on Example 15 in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production and the item provision production based on Example 16 in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production and the item provision production based on Example 17 in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production and the item provision production which concern on Example 18 in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production and item provision production which concern on the modification 1 in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production and item provision production which concern on the modification 2 in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production and item provision production which concern on the modification 3 in time series. It is a figure explaining the example of production using the movable body 1 and the movable body 2. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of production using the movable body 1 and the movable body 2. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of production using the movable body 1 and the movable body 2. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using the movable body 90 and the movable body 90. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using the movable body 90 and the movable body 90. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using the movable body 90 and the movable body 90. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using the movable body 90 and the movable body 90. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using the movable body 90 and the movable body 90. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using the movable body 90 and the movable body 90. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using the movable body 90 and the movable body 90. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using the movable body 90 and the movable body 90. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using the movable body 90 and the movable body 90. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of production using structure 247. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of production using structure 247. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of production using structure 247. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of production using structure 247. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of production using structure 247. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of production using structure 247. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of production using structure 247. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of production using structure 247. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of production using structure 247. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of production using structure 247. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of production using structure 247. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of production using a hold icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining the example of production using a hold icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining the example of production using a hold icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining the example of production using a hold icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining the example of production using a hold icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining the example of production using a hold icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining the example of production using a hold icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining the example of production using a hold icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining the example of production using a hold icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining the example of production using a hold icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the image control of the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is the schematic front view which looked at the slot machine 2000 as a game stand by the modification of this invention from the front. It is a figure which shows the game stand by the modification of this invention, (a) shows the casino machine 3000, (b) shows the mobile telephone 4000 provided with the memory | storage part which memorize | stores the electronic data which implement | achieves this invention, (C) shows a portable game machine 5000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention, and (d) shows a home television set having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention. A game machine 6000 is shown, and (e) shows a data server 7000 storing electronic data for realizing the present invention.

  Hereinafter, a gaming table (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100 or a spinning machine such as a slot machine) according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 29, a game table according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described.

  The reference numerals shown in FIGS. 1 to 55 are used only in the description of FIGS. 1 to 55 of the present invention in principle, and even if the overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, In the description of FIGS. 1 to 55, priority is given to the reference numerals shown in FIGS. In addition, the numbers of the respective embodiments shown in FIGS. 1 to 55 are used only in the description of FIGS. 1 to 55 in principle, but each of the embodiments and other embodiments shown in FIGS. It can be applied in combination. Moreover, in the Example shown in FIGS. 1-55, the structure shown with the same code | symbol can be applied interchangeably. For example, when a plurality of display means are assigned the same reference numerals, they can be applied interchangeably as display means. When a plurality of movable means are assigned the same reference signs, they can be applied interchangeably as movable means. It is possible, and when the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to several production | presentation means, it can apply mutually as production stages, and it is the same also in another means. In addition, when there are drawings showing the same timing in a plurality of drawings, overlapping description may be omitted.

<Overall configuration>
The overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 is a gaming table that allows a player to earn profits when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a ball storage tray door 108, The apparatus 110 and the game board 200 are provided on the front surface (player side).

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop.

  The main body 104 is a door member that is provided inside the outer frame 102, has a locking function, and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. . The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. A store clerk of the store (amusement store) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and a main body opening sensor 1041 for detecting that the main body 104 is opened is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front surface side of the pachinko machine 100 through a hinge portion 112 so as to have a locking function and can be opened and closed, and is configured in a frame shape so that the inside Is a door member having an opening 116. A shop clerk can also open and close the front frame door 106 and is provided with a front frame door sensor for detecting that the front frame door 106 is opened. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A space in which the game area 124 is provided is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Note that the lamp is an example of a light emitting unit, and in the present embodiment, a light source that uses an LED is also referred to as a lamp.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be locked and openable. The door 108 with a ball storage tray is opened by pressing a release lever (not shown) that can be operated with the front frame door 106 opened. In addition, you may provide the door sensor with a ball storage tray which detects that the door 108 with a ball storage tray opened. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by operation of the player The ball launching handle 134 for launching into the game area 124, the effect button 136 for changing the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 3) by the player's operation, and the effect button 136 are incorporated in the effect button 136. Chance button lamp 138 for causing button 136 to emit light, ball lending operation button 140 for giving a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in a game store, and a return instruction for a player's balance to the card unit And a ball lending display unit (not shown) for displaying the player's balance and card unit status. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided with a lower pan full tank detection sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower pan 128 is filled with game balls. Further, an operation key unit 137 is also provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. . While the ball launching handle 134 is continuously being fired by the player, the launching device 110 sends the game ball to the game area 124 of the game board every time a predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds) elapses. This is an example of a launching means. It is also possible to provide a right-handed button that can maximize the firing intensity by being pressed while the ball launching handle 134 is being manipulated.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104. In FIG. 1, the specific configuration of the game area 124 is not shown, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG.
FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 viewed from the back side.

  The upper part of the back of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is located below the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball passing through the formed communication hole and dropping to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side in the rear view.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The payout device 152 is detachable and is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154 when mounted at a predetermined position.

  The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket passes through the tank rail 154 and temporarily flows into the payout device 152, and temporarily rotates by a predetermined angle by driving the payout motor. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152. In other words, the payout device 152 is a kind of a ball feeding device that applies a driving force to a game ball and conveys the game ball.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 is provided with a predetermined grant. Based on the establishment of the condition, the player is given (paid out) with an amount of game value (game ball) corresponding to the grant condition.

On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 (see FIG. 4) that performs overall game control processing, and processing information generated by the main control section 300 are displayed. Based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing related to the production, and the first sub-control unit 400 The second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-control unit 500 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing related to effects, and the payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to game ball payout ( 4) and a payout board case 172 for storing a payout board 170 having an error release switch 168 for releasing an error by the operation of a game clerk. A launch board case 176 that houses a launch board 174 that constitutes a launch controller 630 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing, and a power source controller 660 (see FIG. 4) that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines are configured. A power supply board case 184 that houses a power supply board 182 that includes a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by an operation of a game store clerk and a RAM clear switch 180 that is operated when the power is turned on and outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300; In addition, a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit is provided.
FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

  In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined.

  An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 substantially in the center, and around the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, and the ordinary device. A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol”, and one or more of the special symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”.

  The effect device 206 performs the effect by operating the effect movable body 224, and details thereof will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device (image display device) for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208j can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be employed.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and in the present embodiment, are constituted by 7 segment LEDs. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are predetermined symbol display means. The decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is a symbol that represents the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214 in an enhanced form. The display device 208 may also be a predetermined symbol display means.

  The universal figure hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of predetermined first variable games (detailed universal figure variable games to be described later) that are held, and in this embodiment, a predetermined number of common figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four).

  The first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of predetermined second variable games (a special figure variable game to be described later in detail) that are being held. In the embodiment, it is possible to hold a special figure variable game up to a predetermined number (for example, four, eight for the first special figure and the second special figure). The term “hold” as used herein means that the start of various determination processes (such as lottery processes) based on start-up information described later is put on hold.

  The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp (notification means) for performing notification indicating the current symbol control state. This high-probability lamp 222 is configured so as to give a notification indicating the current symbol control state from the time the power is turned on until the start of the big hit game, and thereafter does not notify the current symbol control state. Yes. In the symbol control state, when the power is turned on again, the symbol control state immediately before the power is turned off is restored. This symbol control state will be described later, but the symbol control state here may be any one of a normal state, a short-time state (electric support state), and a probability variation state. It is good also as one state in the state without special figure certain change.

  In the present specification, the term “control state” will be used to describe the state inside the gaming table (pachinko machine 100). The term “control state” includes the concept of a so-called gaming state.

  In addition, a general prize opening 226, a general figure starting opening 228, a first special figure starting opening 230, a second special figure starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234 are provided around the effect device 206. ing.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are arranged on the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). In the case of winning), the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged as prize balls to the upper plate 126 shown in FIG. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning may be referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent to a player may be referred to as a “lending ball”. They are called “balls (game balls)”.

  The normal start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 is used. One is arranged. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. The first special figure starting port 230 is a first starting region where the size of the entrance through which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball. At the same time, the special figure changing game is started by the first special figure display device 212. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting regions, and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting region in which the size of the first special diagram starting port 230 does not change.

  In the present embodiment, only one second special figure start port 232 is disposed below the general view start port 228. That is, the second special figure starting port 232 is provided on the right side of the game board 200. In the vicinity of the second special figure starting port 232, a pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid are provided. A combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special figure starting port 232 is provided. It corresponds to variable starting means, and is generally called an electric tulip (electric chew). The pair of blade members 2321 are members that change the difficulty level of winning a prize to the second special figure starting port 232. That is, when the pair of blade members 2321 is closed, it is impossible to enter the second special figure starting port 232, and the mode in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed is an open / close mode in which winning is difficult. On the other hand, when the universal figure change game is won and the universal figure display device 210 stops and displays the symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 are opened and closed at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and the second special figure starting port 232 is opened. The ball can be entered (easy winning state), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 are open is an easy winning state. In other words, the second special figure starting port 232 has either a small size (corresponding to the first size) or a large size (corresponding to the second size) of the entrance (game ball entrance). A variable starting area in which the ease of entering a game ball, which changes from one size to the other, is equivalent to an example of a second starting area. The size of the large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. In the state where the pair of blade members 2321 are opened, out of the game balls that have entered the game area 124, the second special feature that is the variable start area is more than the game ball that has entered the first special figure start opening 230 that is the fixed start area. There are more game balls entering the starting port 232 in the figure. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230 or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special diagram starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  In the present embodiment, only one variable winning port 234 is disposed below the center of the game board 200. The variable prize opening 234 includes a variable prize opening and a door member 2341 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid. The variable winning opening may be referred to as a big winning opening, and the variable winning opening 234 may be referred to as an attacker. The door member 2341 changes its state from any one of a predetermined closed state and an open state in which a game ball can easily enter the variable winning opening more than the closed state. Both the closed state and the open state are stationary states, and the closed state is a predetermined first stationary state. The closed state at the variable winning opening 234 of this embodiment is that the door member 2341 is on the player side of the game board 200. It is in a stationary state that matches the surface. On the other hand, the open state is a predetermined second stationary state, and the open state in the variable winning opening 234 of the present embodiment is rotated to the player side until the door member 2341 is substantially perpendicular to the game board 200. It is stationary. The variable winning opening 234 is kept closed until a jackpot game to be described later is started, and when the jackpot game is started, the state change is repeated between the open state and the closed state. Note that the closed state may be a state where the game ball is slightly opened to the extent that it is substantially impossible to enter, in addition to a completely closed state. Further, the variable winning opening is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 3 as long as it becomes a winning of the game ball by passing or entering the game ball. When the special figure variable game is won and the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the big hit symbol, the door member 2341 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that entered the variable prize opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out-port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won any winning opening or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the amusement island side.

  The sphere accommodated in the upper plate 126 is supplied to the firing position of the firing rail. In this pachinko machine 100, the launch motor is driven with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the player's ball launch handle 134, and the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 146 and launcher 148 into the game area 124. Launch. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or start opening (Outside the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232), winning out any winning port or starting port, or just passing through the normal start port 228, the out port 240 To reach.

<Directing device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged in an area where the game ball cannot roll. . In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are positioned behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the effect movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball naild by the game nail 238, etc., and the passed ball enters the first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate the ball.

  In this embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm 224a and a forearm 224b imitating the upper arm and forearm of a human right arm, and an upper arm motor and an elbow (not shown) that rotate the upper arm 224a to the position of the shoulder. A forearm motor (not shown) that rotates the forearm 224b at a position is provided. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 covers the inner end portions of the shielding device 246 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.

  The decoration lamps such as the speaker 120 and the frame lamp 122 shown in FIG. 1, the decoration symbol display device 208, the effect movable body 224, and the shielding device 246 shown in FIG. 3 correspond to effect means, and among these, the decoration symbol display device 208 Corresponds to an example of a decorative symbol display means.

  Further, on the game board 200, a spec sticker 290 representing the specifications of the game table is pasted at a position where it can be seen by the player.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main control unit 300 according to the command transmitted by the main control unit 300 Are provided with a payout control unit 600 for performing control relating to the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 for performing launch control of game balls, and a power supply control unit 660 for controlling the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. Yes.

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a time And a timer circuit 312 for measuring the number of times and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality of the program processing. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 has a random value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (a counter circuit) 318 (used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. This circuit includes two counters) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through each start port, winning port, variable winning port, or opening the front frame door A sensor circuit for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a sensor, an inner frame opening sensor, and a lower plate full sensor, and outputting an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302 322, a predetermined symbol display device, for example, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214, and a predetermined A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of a symbol display device, for example, the general symbol display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, a general symbol hold lamp 216, a special figure 1 hold lamp 218, a special figure 2 hold lamp 220, A drive circuit 330 for performing display control of the high-accuracy lamp 222 and the like, and various movable members such as a blade member 2321 of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 and a door member 2341 of the variable winning port 234 and the like. A drive circuit 334 for controlling the solenoid 332 is connected. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random value generation circuit 318 are provided separately, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random value generation circuit 318.

  When the sphere detection sensor 320 detects that a sphere is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230. Store in the register. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the special figure 2 starting port 232, the random number generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 passes through this information output circuit 336, an external terminal board 349, an external hall computer (not shown), etc. The game information (for example, game state) of the pachinko machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 350 included in.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is lower than a predetermined value (9 V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control section main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the 1 sub control part 400 and the payout control part 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication. The main control unit 300 sends commands and the like to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. The first sub-control unit 400 is configured not to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300. However, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 may be performed by bidirectional communication. The payout control unit 600 is configured to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300, but is configured not to transmit a signal such as a command from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. Also good.

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based mainly on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time and frequency. It is installed. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The basic circuit 402 is provided with a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier) and a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138). A driving circuit 432 for controlling the driving of the shielding device 246, a shielding device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button sensor 426 for detecting the pressing of the chance button 136, and an output from the speaker 120. A volume adjustment switch (not shown) for adjusting the volume to be operated, an operation unit sensor (not shown) for detecting pressing of each button of the setting operation unit 137, and a detection signal from these sensors is output to the basic circuit 402. Based on the signals from the sensor circuit 428 and the CPU 404, the image data stored in the ROM 406 is read out. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 434 which generates display image using a work area of VRAM436 displaying an image on a decorative symbol display device 208, is connected to.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, the number of times, and the like. doing. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The basic circuit 502 is provided with a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like are stored.

  The basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 that detects the current position of the effect movable body 224, and a detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424. Is output to the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game table frame lamp drive for controlling the game table frame lamp 542 The circuit 540 is connected to a serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and wins or rents a ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604. It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606. In addition, the payout control unit 600 has received a prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls has been paid out, or has paid out a predetermined number (for example, 25) of rental balls. The ball rental information indicating this is output to the information input circuit 350 via the external terminal board 349. A frame sensor 605 is connected to the payout control unit 600. The frame sensor 605 detects when the front frame door 106 is opened, and outputs an open signal. When the dispensing control unit 600 outputs the opening signal from the frame sensor 605, the dispensing control unit 600 outputs door opening information to the main control unit 300.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the dispensing device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a power supply of a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although a power source having a predetermined voltage is supplied to the control unit 630, a power source having a predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power source path.

<Type of design>
Next, using FIGS. 5A to 5D, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the universal figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special maps and general maps to be described will be described. FIG. 4A shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special figure.

  The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the first special figure start port 230, and the ball has entered the second special figure start port 232 The special figure 2 variable game is started on the condition that the second start port sensor has detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” by repeating all lighting of seven segments and lighting of one central segment. In addition, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 displays “fluctuation display of special figure 2” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Do. These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display according to the present invention.

  Then, when the variation time determined before the variation start of the special figure 1 (corresponding to the variation time referred to in the present invention) elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the special symbol form of the special figure 1. When the variation time determined before the start of variation 2 (this also corresponds to the variation time according to the present invention) has elapsed, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special diagram 2. Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is stopped, or after the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 2”, the stop symbol form of special figure 2 is displayed. Until stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation stop display referred to in the present invention, hereinafter, after the “variable display of special figure 1 or 2” is started, the stop symbol form of special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed. The series of displays up to is referred to as symbol variation stop display. As will be described later, the symbol variation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times. 12A shows 12 types of special figures from “Special figure A” to “Special figure L” as stop symbol forms in the symbol fluctuation stop display, and the white portions in the figure are turned off. The location of the segment to be displayed is shown, and the black portion indicates the location of the segment to be lit.

  “Special Figure A” is a 16 round (16R) special jackpot symbol (hereinafter also referred to as 16R special jackpot A or 16R probability variation A), and “Special Figure B” is a 16R special jackpot symbol (hereinafter referred to as 16R special jackpot B or 16R). "Special figure C" is a 16R jackpot symbol (hereinafter also referred to as 16R jackpot or 16R normal). In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, the determination as to whether or not a big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and the decision as to whether or not it is a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state having a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state (or a probability variation state), and a state having a low probability is referred to as a special figure low probability state (or a non-probability variation state).

  In addition, after the 16R special jackpot game ends and after the 16R jackpot game ends, the state shifts to the short time state (electric support state). Although the time reduction will be described in detail later, the state that shifts to the time reduction state is called the normal high probability state (or electric support state), and the state that does not enter the time reduction state is the normal low probability state (or non-electrical state). It is called a support state. “Special Figure A” and “Special Figure B”, which are 16R special jackpot symbols, are in a high probability state of special figure high probability, and “Special Figure C”, which is a 16R jackpot symbol, is a special figure low probability normal figure height. Probability state. These “special illustrations A” to “special illustration C” are symbols that give a relatively large profit amount to the player.

  "Special Figure D" is a 4R special jackpot symbol (hereinafter also referred to as 4R special jackpot A or 4R probability variation A), and "Special Figure E" is a 4R special jackpot symbol (hereinafter also referred to as 4R special jackpot B or 4R probability variation B). Compared with “Special Drawing A” to “Special Drawing C” which is 16R, “Special Drawing D” and “Special Drawing E” are different in that they are 4R. “Special Figure F” is a 2R special jackpot symbol (hereinafter also referred to as 2R special jackpot A or 2R probability variation A), and “Special Figure G” is also referred to as a 2R special jackpot symbol (hereinafter referred to as 2R special jackpot B or 2R probability variation B). "Special figure H" is a 2R jackpot symbol (hereinafter also referred to as 2R jackpot or 2R normal), compared to "Special Figure A" to "Special Figure C" which is 16R, "Special Figure F" ~ "Special Figure H" is different in that it is 2R. “Special Figure I” is a small hit symbol (hereinafter also referred to as “small hit”), and is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. Also, “Special Figure J” is the off symbol 1, “Special Figure K” is the off symbol 2, and “Special L” is the off symbol 3, both of which are the profits to be given to the player. Is a symbol that has a relatively small profit amount.

  FIG. 5B shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the first special figure start port 230 or the second special view start port 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special view start port 230; or On the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the second special symbol start port 232, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Displayed in the order of “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →... “Decoration display of decorative pattern” is performed.

  When the 16R probability variation A, 16R probability variation B, 16R normal variation, 4R probability variation A, 4R probability variation B, 2R probability variation A, 2R probability variation B, or 2R normal variation is notified, the same decorative design is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The symbol combination (for example, “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1”, “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”, etc.) arranged in a row is stopped and displayed. Further, when reporting 16R probability variation A, 16R probability variation B, 4R probability variation A, 4R probability variation B, 2R probability variation B, or 2R probability variation A or 2R probability variation B, three odd odd decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The symbol combinations (for example, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3”, “decoration 7—decoration 7—decoration 7”, etc.) are stopped and displayed. When notifying the small hit, “decoration 1—decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying, the symbol combination shown in FIG. 5B is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Stops symbol combinations other than.

  FIG.5 (c) shows an example of the usual stop display symbol. In the present embodiment, the stoppage display mode of the common figure is “common figure A” which is a winning symbol 1 (hereinafter also referred to as “1” per universal symbol) and a winning symbol 2 (hereinafter also referred to as “2 per universal symbol”). There are three types: “general map B” and “general map C”, which is an outlier design. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that a sphere has passed through the general-purpose start opening 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. Perform a “normal change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the usual figure variable game, the "usual figure A" or "common figure B" is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the deviation of the usual figure variable game, the "normal figure C" is stopped and displayed. To do. Also in FIG. 6C, the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, the main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  A special figure random number value, a special figure round decision random value, a special figure electricity support decision random value, and a special symbol decision random number are stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. The RAM 308 is provided with a random number counter for generating these various random number values. Further, the RAM 308 stores the number of special figure hold, a special figure winning random value, various determination (lottery) results, and the like. Hereinafter, the area for storing the number of reserved special figures in the RAM 308 may be referred to as a special figure reserved number storage area. Furthermore, the RAM 308 is provided with a special information start information storage section divided into a maximum number of areas (four in this example) that can hold the start of the determination (lottery). A random number storage area is also provided for ordinary use. As will be described later, the special information start information storage unit stores a plurality of types of start information as one set and stores each start information in a winning order (holding order) for each area.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input performs reset start by a reset interrupt, and executes main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 6 in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, to the WDT 314 The operation is permitted and the initial value is set. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared and time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies to the main control unit 300 via the second sub control unit 500 by the power supply control unit 660. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In the initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a period for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the timer circuit 312 and a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400, a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before power interruption (before power interruption), and the state before power interruption is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ) Proceeds to an initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of a game store operates the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. 2 (indicating that there is an operation). If the RAM clear signal is ON (RAM clear is necessary), the process goes to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. move on. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is set. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the power-off state. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. In addition, a transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and in the same way as the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

  In step S115, after setting for prohibition of interruption, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the normal winning random number counter and the special figure random value counter are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 20, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a random number value for a normal winning symbol provided in the RAM 308 and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 21, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  A main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 4 ms), and the main control is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The part timer interrupt process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically changed to the initial value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) so that no WDT interruption occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 4 including various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and various kinds of data are stored in the RAM 308. The data is stored in a signal state storage area provided for each sensor 320. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal). In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning port 226, the variable winning port 234, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, or the ordinary drawing starting port 228. Is determined to have passed. That is, it is determined that a prize has been received at these winning openings 234 and 226 and these starting openings 230, 232 and 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times coincides with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the first start opening sensor that detects a ball entering the first special view start opening 230, the first special view It is determined that a winning has been made at the starting port 230, that is, a game medium passing through a predetermined area has been detected, and processing associated with the subsequent winning at the first special figure starting port 230 is performed. If the presence / absence information does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with the winning to the first special figure starting port 230 thereafter. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 and step S209, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in the above step S115 is updated, and then the normal winning random number value used in the main control unit 300 and The random number counter for generating each special figure random value is updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next time, in addition to setting it in the random number counter for generating the winning random value Keep it. Further, apart from the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal signal has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. An initial value storage area is provided in the RAM 308.

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, symbols are displayed on the normal symbol display symbol update timer, the first special symbol display device 212, and the second special symbol display device 214 for timing the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the normal symbol display device 210. Various types, including a special figure display symbol update timer for timing the time to fluctuate / stop display, a timer for timing a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, etc. Update the timer.

  In step S215, winning prize counter update processing is performed. In this winning prize counter updating process, when winning prizes 234, 226 and starting holes 230, 232 are awarded, the value of the number of prize balls stored in the RAM 308 for each winning slot or each starting slot is stored. Read and add 1 to set in the original prize ball number storage area.

  In step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In the winning acceptance process, a plurality of types of start information are acquired if predetermined conditions are satisfied. The plurality of types of start information acquired here are stored as a set of start information in a vacant area corresponding to the winning order (holding order) in the start information storage unit provided in the RAM 308.

  In step S219, which is executed subsequent to step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 4 are composed of 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the normal state update process in the middle of the normal symbol display (the above-described general symbol display symbol update timer value is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Also, in the normal state update process at the timing when the normal symbol change display time has elapsed (the timing at which the value of the general symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is turned on / off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to display the lost symbol display mode. 7 segment LED on / off drive control is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines the symbol of either one of the winning symbols (the common symbol A shown in FIG. 5C) or the lost symbol (the universal symbol B shown in FIG. 5C). Display. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), The normal operation is set in the setting region, and the blade member 2321 is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 milliseconds). A signal for holding the blade member 2321 in the closed state is output to the open / close drive solenoid (332) of 2321, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is lost, the usual figure lose flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure loss flag is on, even in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the second special map start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is not in operation), and the pending general map variable game is not held. When the number is 1 or more, it is decided whether to win or not to win the result of the variable figure game by random lottery based on the random number value stored in the random number value storage area. When the winning judgment is made and the winning is made, the winning flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of a predetermined random number counter is acquired as a general-purpose timer random number value, and the general-purpose display random number is transmitted to the general-purpose display display device 210 from a plurality of fluctuation times based on the acquired general-purpose timer random number value. One time for variably displaying the figure is selected, and this variably displayed time is stored as a variably displayed time in a variably variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure number-of-holds storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  Subsequently, special figure prefetching processing (step S224) is executed. Details of the special figure prefetching process will be described later. Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following processes is performed according to the state of the special figure 2.

  For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on and off. Repeatedly turn on / off drive control. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the special figure 2 variable display (special figure 2 variable game). In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 15R big hit flag, a 5R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a small hit flag, a break flag, a special figure probability fluctuation flag, and a normal figure probability fluctuation flag. . These flags are set to ON or OFF based on the stop symbol determined in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (the timing when the special figure 2 display symbol update timer value has changed from 1 to 0), for example, the 15R jackpot flag is turned on. When the probability fluctuation flag is also on and the ordinary figure probability fluctuation flag is on, any of the special figure a, special figure b, special figure c, and special figure d shown in FIG. The special figure 2 display device 214 is configured so that the figure probability variation flag is turned off, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is turned on, and the special figure e is formed when the loss flag is turned on. 7 segment LED lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and setting indicating that the special figure 2 stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 can display the 15R special jackpot symbol (special figure a, special figure b, special figure c, special figure d), 2R normal jackpot symbol (special figure e), and lose symbol ( A fixed display of any one of the special figures f) is performed.

  Thereafter, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, if the time reduction number stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number. If not, turn off the time flag. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state).

  Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the setting of the RAM 308 is set. In order to set a special figure 2 in operation in the area and wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that a big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. In addition, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until a winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected at the variable winning opening 234, the door member is connected to a solenoid for opening / closing the door member of the variable winning opening 234 (a part of various solenoids 332). A signal for maintaining the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in a closed state is output to a solenoid for opening and closing the door member of the variable prize opening 234 (a part of various solenoids 332), and a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 The information indicating the closing period is set in. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (in this example, 15 rounds, 5 rounds, or 2 rounds), a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, the storage area of the production waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set so as to wait for a period during which an image notifying the player that the jackpot by the decorative symbol display device 208 is to be ended is displayed. Information indicating the production standby period is set in Also, if the normal probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of the big hit game, the hour / hour number (for example, 100 times) is set in the hour / hour number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 and provided in the RAM 308. Turn on the short time flag. If the ordinary probability fluctuation flag is set to OFF, the number of time reductions is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned on.

  The time saving here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. When the time reduction flag is set to ON, the normal figure high probability state (normal figure certain change) is established. There is a higher probability of hitting in the general-game variable game in the high-probability state than in the normal-game low-probability state. In addition, in the normal figure high probability state, the fluctuation time of the general figure variable game is shorter than in the normal figure low probability state (normal figure variable short). Furthermore, in the normal high probability state, compared to the normal low probability state, the opening time for one opening of the pair of blade members 2321 of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is likely to be longer (electrical chew extension). In addition, the pair of blade members 2321 are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. The state in which any one of these ordinary figure change, universal figure change, and electric Chu extension is set is referred to as an electric support (starting prize winning support by electric tulip) state.

  In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, if the game is in a high probability state during a big hit game, a large number of game balls will be placed in the special figure 2 starting port 232 until a predetermined number of game balls enter the variable prize opening 234 during the big hit game. In order to solve this, there is a problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases and the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of order, the out-of-game flag is turned on. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, first, a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 2 (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed (step S229), and then a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 1 (a special drawing 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). In the special drawing 2 related lottery process, the floating game of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 is not performed, and the state of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 are both inactive and is held. The game is executed using the first special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value in the special figure 2 random value storage area, starting from the fact that the number of variable games is 1 or more. The special figure 1 related lottery process does not perform the floating game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the state of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both inactive, and is suspended. The game is executed using the first special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value in the special figure 1 random value storage area as a starting condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more.

  Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. In addition, when the number of reserved special figure 2 variable games is 1 or more, the lottery process and the variable game related to the special figure 1 variable game hold are not performed. In addition, the notification of the result of the special symbol variable game success / failure determination by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the special symbol 2 starting port 232 is notified. Priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the present exemplary embodiment, a special figure variable game with a high advantage (in this example, special figure 2 variable game) is performed in preference to a special figure variable game with a low advantage (in this example, special figure 1 variable game). For this reason, it may be easy to give a difference in the advantage of the gaming state.

  In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (special) from the earliest (most previously stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. 2), and based on the special figure 2 winning random number value in the obtained special figure 2 start information, the value of the special figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308, and the like. Is used to determine whether to make a big hit, a small hit, or a loss (win / no decision). Next, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 on the basis of the special figure 2 random number value in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the determined success / failure determination result. The symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped after the change display is determined. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined success / failure determination result, the stop symbol, the special figure 2 holding number at the time of the determination, the acquired special figure variation time determination random number value, and the like. The variable display time (timer number) in FIG. 2 is determined using various tables.

  The main control unit 300 extracts the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, erases the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, 2 is subtracted from the special figure 2 hold number in the hold number storage area. At this time, the special figure 2 start information extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in the temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-described determination is performed based on the special figure 2 start information stored in the temporary area. You may do it.

  After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner. The order of the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process may be reversed.

  In the above description, the special figure 2 variable game having a high advantage is started in preference to the special figure 1 variable game having a low advantage, and the special figure 2 hold is prioritized over the special figure 1 hold. Special figure 2 priority fluctuation is given as an example, but special figure 1 variable game with low advantage is started over special figure 2 variable game with high advantage, and special figure 1 suspension is The special figure 1 priority fluctuation | variation digested preferentially over hold may be sufficient. In addition, priority is not given to special figure 2 variable game with high advantage and special figure 1 variable game with low advantage. The start opening winning order variation may be started in order. In the starting order winning order variation, the upper limit number of holds is 8 regardless of the special figures 1 and 2, and compared with the priority fluctuation in which the upper limit number of holds is 4 in each of the special figures 1 and 2 In some cases, the upper limit of the number of holds can be increased.

  In the above description, it is assumed that the lottery process and the variable game relating to the holding of the other special figure are not performed according to the state of the special figure, but the invention is not limited to this, and the special figure state update described above is not performed. The process and the special figure related lottery process may be performed independently in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, respectively, so that a plurality of special figures may be changed simultaneously. In addition, when a plurality of special figures are changed at the same time, a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special figure are provided on the decorative symbol display device 208 or the lottery results of each special figure are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided, and each lottery result may be displayed separately, or one display may be configured to display lottery results of a plurality of special drawings. In addition, when changes related to a plurality of special figures are performed simultaneously, the lottery result of the special figure that stopped the fluctuation may affect the lottery result of the special figure that stops the fluctuation later.

  In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (in this example, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, prefetch result information command, etc. Information that can specify the type of command), bits 0 to 10 are constituted by command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off by the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start (rotation start) command, the command data includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, a break flag, special figure probability fluctuation flag values, and a timer selected by special drawing related lottery processing. In the case of a symbol variation stop (rotation stop) command including information indicating a number, etc., including a value of various big hit flags, a small hit flag, a loss flag, a special figure probability variation flag, etc., and a winning effect start command and an end In the case of the production start command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag is included, and in the case of the big hit round number designation command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the big hit number of rounds, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230, presence / absence of winning in the special figure 2 starting port 232, winning in the variable winning ports 234 and 235 Includes presence or absence. In the case of a prefetch result information command, information such as the types of special figure 1 and special figure 2, the number of prefetches stored in a prefetch number storage area, which will be described later, and a stop symbol stored in the prefetch result storage unit are used as command data. Including.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the command data is stored in the RAM 308 as various big hit flags, small hit flags, off-set flags, special figure probability variation flag values, special figure related lottery processes, and special figures. 2. Information indicating the timer number selected in the related lottery process, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game, etc., which are put on hold is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, loss flags, special figure probability variation flags, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

  In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described special winning opening release setting transmission process, the command data includes the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held. Set the information that indicates. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission process, the command data includes the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held. Set the information that indicates.

  In step S233, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S235 following step S233, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a bottom pan full error is monitored. . When a front frame door open error or a lower pan full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating whether there is a front frame door open error or a lower pan full error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening / closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable prize opening 234, and the general diagram display device 210 and the special diagram 1 display device 212 via the drive circuits 324, 326, 330. The display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is ON. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. After that, it becomes a HALT state.

  FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the special figure prefetch process (step S224) of the main control unit timer interrupt process. In the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 prefetches the start information increased in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, predetermines the stop symbol before the success / failure judgment process, and obtains a predetermination result (special The figure prefetching result) is stored in the prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308 (see FIGS. 9A to 9C).

  Here, in the RAM 308, the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 1 prefetch result and the number of special figure 1 prefetch results stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit are specially displayed. A special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area for storing as one pre-reading number is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 1 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 1 prefetching result with the highest rank (first) is erased and the remaining special figure 1 prefetching result Are processed so that the rank of the data is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 1 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 1 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 1 prefetch result data of the lowest rank (last).

  Also, in the RAM 308, the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 2 prefetch result and the number of special figure 2 prefetch results stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit are stored in the special figure 2 prefetch. A special figure 2 look-ahead number storage area for storing numbers is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 2 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 2 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 2 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 2 prefetching result having the highest rank is deleted and the order of the remaining special figure 2 prefetching result data Are processed so that they are incremented by one. Each time the special figure 2 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 2 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 2 prefetch data having the lowest rank.

  In the special figure prefetching process, first, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the startup information of the special figure 2 has increased (step S301). The determination as to whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased is stored in, for example, the special figure 2 hold number stored in the special figure 2 hold number storage area and the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area. Special figure 2 Compared with the number of pre-reads. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special figure 2 has increased when the special figure 2 hold number is larger than the special figure 2 prefetch number, and the special figure 2 hold number is the special figure 2 prefetch number. If they are equal, it is determined that the starting information in FIG. 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the starting information of FIG. 2 has increased, the process proceeds to step S303, and if it is determined that the starting information of FIG. 2 has not increased, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S303, the increased special figure 2 starting information (a special figure 2 winning random value and a set of special figure 2 random values) is processed before the success / failure determination process in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229). FIG. 2 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 2 start information and the determination table for special determination 2 and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the special figure 2 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is selected. Prior determination is made before the success / failure determination process in the process (step S229). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S305 subsequent to step S303, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 prefetching result obtained in the prior determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 2 prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S307, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information in FIG. 1 has increased. Whether or not the starting information of the special figure 1 has increased is determined by, for example, the special figure 1 holding number stored in the special figure 1 holding number storage area and the special figure 1 pre-reading number storage as in the special figure 2. The comparison is made with the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the area. If it is determined that the start information of FIG. 1 has increased, the process proceeds to step S309, and if it is determined that the start information of FIG. Return to timer interrupt processing.

  In step S309, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not non-electric support is in progress. If it is determined that the non-electric support is being performed, the process proceeds to step S311. If it is determined that the non-electric support is not being performed (the electric support is being performed (normal high probability state)), the process proceeds to step S315. In this example, it is determined whether or not non-electric support is being performed, but it may be determined whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 prefetch notice is satisfied. For example, the execution conditions of the special figure 1 pre-reading notice include conditions such as not being in a big hit game other than being in non-electric support.

  In step S311, the increased special figure 1 start information (a special figure 1 winning random value and a pair of special figure 1 random value) is processed before the success determination process in the special figure 1 lottery process (step S231). FIG. 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information and the determination table for special determination and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the special figure 1 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is selected as the special figure 1 related lottery. Prior determination is made before the success / failure determination process in the process (step S231). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S313 following step S311, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 prefetching result obtained in the prior determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the special figure prefetch process is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  In step S315, the pre-read result for the special figure 1 in the RAM 308 is stored in the RAM 308 in place of the stop symbol information instead of pre-reading the increased special figure 1 start information and indicating that the start information is not pre-read. Stored in the earliest free area of the copy. Thereafter, the special figure prefetch process is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined. However, all start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. Further, in the above-described command setting transmission process (step S233), only the pre-read result of the starting information for the increase may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, or the pre-read result storage for special figure 1 and special figure 2 All the prefetching results in the section may be transmitted to the first sub-control section 400.

  Further, in the flowchart shown in FIG. 8, pre-reading is always executed for the increased start information of Special Figure 2, and pre-read is always executed for the increased start information of Special Figure 1 except during the electric support. However, it may be determined by lottery whether or not to pre-read the increased starting information of FIG. 1 and FIG. Alternatively, in the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the prefetch result from the main control unit 300, for example, it may be determined by lottery whether to perform prefetch notification for each hold. Regardless of the gaming state (for example, whether or not non-electric support is in progress), when the start information increases, prefetching is always executed and the prefetching result is stored in the prefetching result storage unit. The result may be configured to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to determine whether or not to perform lottery and presentation using the pre-read result.

  FIG. 9 illustrates a state in which prefetch result information and the like are stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 9A shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 9 (a), the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in this embodiment) of storage areas as the special figure 1 variable game holdable number. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of Special Figure 1 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 9A, the storage area “hold 1” stores “special symbol I” (out of line) as stop symbol information, and the storage area “hold 2” stores “special symbol I” as stop symbol information. "(Out of line)" is stored, "Special Figure A" (15R probability variable big hit) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "Hold 3", and "Special Figure I" is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "Hold 4" "(Out of line) is stored.

  FIG. 9B shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 9B, the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (4 in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the number of special figure variable games that can be held. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 9B, the storage area “hold 1” stores “special drawing f” (out of line) as stop symbol information, and the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4” have stop symbols. Information is not stored. In FIG. 9B, a state where the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as “none”.

  FIG. 9 (c) shows an example of the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 during the electric support. As shown in FIG. 9C, “undecided” information is stored in the storage area “hold 1” instead of the stopped symbol information. In the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4”, neither stop symbol information nor “undecided” information is stored.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the stop symbol information described above, whether or not to determine the result, the variable timer number (variable time), a timer group to be described later, and the like are preliminarily determined, and the information is stored in the prefetch result storage unit and the prefetch result Information can be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

  Next, refer to FIG. 10 for a table for determining whether or not there is a special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and a special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interruption process shown in FIG. While explaining. Here, FIG. 10A is a diagram illustrating an example of the high / bad determination probability table, and FIG. 10B is a diagram illustrating an example of the low probability determination table. When determining whether or not the special figure 1 is true, if the special figure high probability state, refer to the high probability table for validity determination shown in FIG. 10A, and if the special figure low probability state, Reference is made to the success / failure determination low probability table shown in FIG. Then, based on the numerical value range indicated by the referenced success / failure determination table and the acquired random number value, the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is determined. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 1 variable game, a big hit, a small hit or a loss is selected as the determination result.

  Similarly, in the case of performing the success / failure determination in FIG. 2, if it is in the special figure high probability state, it is in the special figure low probability state by referring to the high / failure determination table shown in FIG. In this case, refer to the low / probability determination table shown in FIG. Then, based on the numerical range indicated by the referenced determination table and the obtained random number value, the determination result of the special figure 2 variable game is selected. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 2 variable game, the big hit or the loss is selected as the determination result.

  FIG. 10C shows an example of the small hit determination table. When the big hit determination result is out of place, the table for determining small hits shown in FIG. 10C is referred to, and based on the numerical range indicated by the referenced small hit determining table and the acquired random number value. Then, the determination result of the special figure small hit lottery is selected. In the present embodiment, when the determination result of lottery per special figure (lottery result) is special figure 1, a small hit is selected with a probability of 2000/65536 as the result of determination of lottery, and a loss is obtained with a probability of 63536/65536. Although selected, if the determination result of lottery per special figure (lottery result) is special figure 2, the small win is not selected.

  Next, the stop that is performed based on the determination result or the like determined in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interruption process shown in FIG. A special figure determination table used for determining symbols will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 11A is a diagram showing an example of the special figure 1 symbol determination table, and FIG. 11B is a diagram showing an example of the special symbol 2 symbol determination table. When determining the stop symbol of special figure 1, refer to the special figure 1 table determination table shown in FIG. 11 (a), and based on the result of special figure 1 and the numerical range of random numbers, Select 1 stop symbol. In this embodiment, when the success / failure result of special figure 1 is a big hit, any one is selected from special figures A to G, and when the success / failure determination result of special figure 1 is a small hit, When the special figure H is selected and the result of the special figure 1 is lost, the special figure I is selected.

  In addition, when determining the stop symbol of the special figure 2, referring to the special figure 2 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11B, based on the result of special figure 2 and the numerical range of the random number value, The stop symbol of special figure 2 is drawn by lot. In the present embodiment, when the result of special figure 2 is a big hit, any one of special figures a to e is selected, and when the result of special figure 2 is lost, a special figure is selected. f is selected. After the symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined, symbol data to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device is set.

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 12A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. First, in step S401 in FIG. 12A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. . In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S409 following step S407, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated. The effect control process will be described later.

  In step S411 following step S409, a chance button control process is performed. In the chance button control process, when the press of the effect button 136 is detected, the effect data updated in step S409 is changed to the effect data corresponding to the press of the effect button 136.

  In step S413 subsequent to step S411, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, when there is a command to the VDP 434 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step S415 following step S413, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S417 following step S415, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is a command to various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S419 following step S417, shutter control processing is performed. In the shutter control process, if there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S421 following step S419, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S409, a setting is made to output this control command. Thereafter, the process returns to step S403.

  FIG. 12B is a flowchart of the first sub control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S501 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

  FIG. 12C is a flowchart of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is performed by using the timer interrupt as a trigger. Execute in the cycle. In step S601 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first sub control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S603 following step S601, a control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S421) of the first sub-control unit main process, and other random number values for effects are updated. Etc.

  FIG. 12D is a flowchart of the image control process in step S413 of the first sub control unit main process. In step S701, an instruction to transfer image data (movie data or texture data described later) is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of the frame buffer 1 and the frame buffer 2 of the VRAM 436. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the frame buffer not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S703 following step S701, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input (step S703: Yes), the process proceeds to step S705. Otherwise (step S703: No), it waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S705, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S701, the CPU 404 has information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axes and image sizes of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S707 following step S705, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 404.

  In step S709 subsequent to step S707, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input (step S709: Yes), The process proceeds to step S711, and if not (step S709: No), it waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S711, a scene display counter which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

  Next, the process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 13A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. First, in step S801 in FIG. 13A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S801. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S803 following step S801, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S805. . In step S805, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S807 following step S805, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S809 following step S807, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S807, processing such as reading the effect data (effect data by the effect movable body 224 or effect data by the lamp) corresponding to the command from the ROM 506 is performed, and the effect data is updated. If necessary, the effect data is updated.

  In step S811 following step S809, lamp control processing is performed. For example, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game table frame lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S813 following step S811, a movable body control process is performed. For example, when there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516. Thereafter, the process returns to step S803.

  FIG. 13B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub control unit 400. In step S901 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub control unit 400 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508 as an unprocessed command.

  FIG. 13C is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined by using the timer interrupt as a trigger. Execute in the cycle. In step S1001 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S803 of the second sub-control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S803, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S1003 following step S1001, an effect random number update process or the like is performed.

  Hereinafter, specific examples of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 55. As an example, the gaming table according to the present invention can execute screen display examples (production examples) in all the embodiments (examples and modifications) described below (illustrated). Although it is a game machine (with its control program installed), it is possible to execute only a part of screen display examples (production examples) of all the embodiments (examples, modifications) (with the control program installed) The game table may be a game table, or display examples (examples of production) of all the embodiments (examples and modifications), in which only a part is not executed (a part of the control program is not installed). It may be.

<Image display device>
FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of an effect centered on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment step by step. First, referring to FIG. The configuration will be described.

  The image display device 208 ′ of the present embodiment includes the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 3 (or includes a device corresponding to the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 3), and a plurality (for example, three). Image display devices (a first image display device 2081, a second image display device 2082, and a third image display device 2083.

  In this example, the image display device 208 includes a first first image display device 2081, a second second image display device 2082, and a third image display device 2083.

  As an example, the first image display device 2081 is an image display device configured by a liquid crystal display device or the like, and the display area thereof is the other two image display devices (the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083). This is an image display device that is larger than the above and does not move. In this specification, the first image display device 2081 may be referred to as a main display device or a main liquid crystal. In this example, the first image display device 2081 has a configuration similar to (or corresponds to) the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG.

  Each of the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083 is an image display device constituted by a liquid crystal display device or the like, and in this example, the sizes of both display areas are the same. In this example, the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device are arranged on both the left and right sides of the first image display device 2081. The image display device arranged on the left side of the first image display device 2081 as viewed from the player is the second image display device 2082, and the image display device arranged on the right side is the third image display device 2083. In this specification, the second image display device 2082 may be referred to as a left sub display device or a left sub liquid crystal, and the third image display device 2083 may be referred to as a right sub display device or a right sub liquid crystal.

  In this example, the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083 are arranged in the left-right direction so that the front of the first image display device 2081 is close to or separated from each other along the display surface of the first image display device 2081. It is possible to move to (slide movement).

  As an example, the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083 are shorter in length in the width direction than substantially half the length of the first image display device 2081 and slightly shorter in height. Further, the second image display device 2082 has at least the right end side portion overlapping the front side of the left end side portion of the first image display device 2081 at the initial position shown in FIG. Reference numeral 2083 denotes that at least the left end side portion overlaps the front side of the right end side portion of the first image display device 2081 at the initial position shown in FIG.

  When the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083 move so as to be close to each other from the initial position, the first image display device 2081 (display in) becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize (visual recognition). If the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083 are moved in the direction of the initial position so as to be separated from each other, the first image display device 2081 (display on) is the player It will be easier for you to see.

  The first image display device 2081 may be moved, and the second image display device 2082 and / or the third image display device 2083 may be configured not to move. Further, the size of the display area of the first image display device 2081 may be smaller than the display area of the second image display device 2082 and / or the third image display device 2083, and the sizes of these three display areas are the same. It may be. Further, the number of image display devices 208 ′ may be two, or four or more.

  Further, the number of image display devices 208 ′ may be one. In that case, all the displays shown in the following examples (production examples) are displayed on one image display device 208 ′.

<Image display device / first image display device>
The first image display device 2081 has, in its display area, a first symbol display area 208X (symbol display areas 208a to 208c) and an effect display area 208d for executing decorative symbol variation display (first variation display). As an effect display area 208d, an icon display area 800, an explanation display area TT1, and the like are provided.

  In this specification, the decorative symbols displayed in the first symbol display area 208X (symbol display areas 208a to 208c) are referred to as “first decorative symbols”.

  In FIG. 14A, in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the combination of the decorative symbols (first decorative symbols) of “decoration 3-decoration 1-decoration 4” is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, the icon display area 800 includes, for example, five areas arranged side by side, and can display one variable icon and four hold icons that are the maximum number of hold of the special figure 1 (or special figure 2) variable game. is there. In this example, a variable icon display area is provided at the right end of the icon display area 800 (near the center of the display area, below the middle symbol display area 208b). A hold icon display area corresponding to the first to fourth hold orders of the variable game is provided.

  In FIG. 14A, the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed at the right end of the icon display area 800, and on the left side thereof, there are four suggestion displays (in this example, pedestals) suggesting that four hold icons can be displayed. In correspondence with the fact that three variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are displayed on the three pedestals, respectively. In this case, the hold icon h11 is a hold icon corresponding to the earliest (most recently stored) hold, and sequentially corresponds to the hold icon h12 and the third hold corresponding to the second hold sequentially toward the left. A hold icon h13 is displayed.

  The change icon h0 is a hold icon corresponding to the change. For example, when the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 shown in FIG. 14A are digested, the change icon h0 is an icon that changes from these hold icons. Moreover, the display mode (pattern, size, etc.) of the icon displayed as the hold icon and the icon displayed as the variable icon may be the same display mode or different display modes. .

  On the right side of the icon display area 800, an explanation display area (tutorial display section) TT1 is provided. In the explanation display area TT1, various information relating to games and effects are displayed (tutorial display), and the contents are updated at an appropriate timing. In the explanation display area TT1 shown in FIG. 14 (a), “Panda is the master of Tono-sama” is displayed, and the explanation about the Tono-sama character is made.

<Image display device / second image display device>
In the second image display device 2082, a meter (button image) simulating the image of the chance button 137 is displayed at the bottom of the display area. For example, when the meter button 137 is operated (pressed), for example, a colored (other than white) colored portion of the button image increases and the button image is completely painted, the player An effect that increases expectations for the user (for example, a one-shot notification effect) is executed.

  Or, if the painted portion increases due to a certain effect and all of them are filled, it will be possible to execute the button effect once, and if the button is operated in that state, will the change be a big hit? An effect that increases expectations for the player, such as notification of whether or not, is configured.

  In addition, a stage name display area for displaying the name of the stage currently being performed and the reach name is provided below the meter. In the stage name display area of FIG. 14A, “castle town” is displayed, and it is informed that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, a second symbol display area 208Y (see (i) in the figure) is provided above the display area of the second image display device 2082 for executing a variation display of the decorative symbols (second variation display). ing.

  15 (o) to 15 (q), the second symbol display area 208Y includes three symbol display areas 208k to 208g (left symbol display area 208k, medium symbol display) for displaying decorative symbols. An area 208l and a right symbol display area 208g). In this specification, the decorative symbol displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y may be referred to as a “second decorative symbol”. When it is not necessary to distinguish from the first decorative symbol, for example, as apparent from the meaning of the text, both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be described as “decorative symbols”.

  In this example, the case where the second symbol display area 208Y is provided in the second image display device 2082 will be described as an example. However, the second symbol display area 208Y may be provided in the first image display device 2081. The third image display device 2083 may be provided.

  The variation display (second variation display) of the decoration symbol (second decoration symbol) executed in the second symbol display area 208Y is the variation display (first variation) of the first decoration symbol executed in the first symbol display area 208X. May be executed in connection with the fluctuation display). That is, the second variable display is not visible (not displayed) to the player as shown in FIG. 14 (a), and is visible (displayed) to the player as shown in FIG. 14 (j). ) May be.

  The second symbol display area 208Y (each of the left symbol display area 208k, middle symbol display area 208l, and right symbol display area 208g) is the first symbol display area 208X (left symbol display area 208a, middle symbol display area 208b, right The display area is smaller than each of the symbol display areas 208c), and the display size of the second decorative symbol is smaller than that of the first decorative symbol. The second variable display is executed in association with the first variable display executed by the first image display device 2081 and has a display size smaller than that of the first variable display. The second decorative design may be referred to as a “mini decorative design”.

  In the effect example of this embodiment shown in FIGS. 14 to 29, the second decorative design has the same (same type) design as the first decorative design as shown in FIGS. 15 (o) to 15 (q). A symbol (decorated symbol) is displayed. As will be described in detail later, at a certain timing, the second decorative symbol may display the same symbol combination as the first decorative symbol, or may display a different symbol combination. In addition, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be visible to the player at the same time, or only one of them may be visible to the player (easily visible).

<Image display device / third image display device>
In the third image display device 2083, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed in accordance with the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display area of the third image display device 2083, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Note that the Tono-sama character may or may not be displayed at all times.

<Other production methods>
As an effect device other than the image display device 208 ′, for example, a speaker 120, a fourth symbol display device 284, operating means 136 and 137, an accessory 224 A, 224 B, and 224 C are provided.

  The 4th symbol display device 284 is a device for notifying whether or not the symbol is changing (or when the symbol is stopped). For example, the symbol changing device in FIG. The symbol change notification device shown in Fig. 2 is shown by a round graphic on the right side. In the following figures, the case where each is displayed in white indicates the state in which the special figure 1 (square) or special figure 2 (round) is changing, and the case where it is displayed in gray fill. The special figure 1 (square) or special figure 2 (round) indicates the stoppage of stoppage, and when it is displayed in black, the special figure 1 (square) or special figure 2 (round) hits and stops. Shows the state. In this example, the fourth symbol display device 284 is shown as a separate structure from the image display device 208 ′, but these may be images displayed on the image display device 208 ′. Good.

  The operation means 136 and 137 are operation buttons (for example, a chance button 136 and a chance button 137), respectively.

  In addition, each of the actors 224A, 224B, and 224C is a kind of the effect movable body 224. For example, the family crest actor 224A disposed below the first image display device 2081 and the upper portion of the first image display device 2081. Are the Yatsushiro character 224B and the general character 224C. The family crest character 224A is configured to be able to move in the vertical direction according to the contents of the performance. The family crest member 224A has a built-in light-emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light-emitting modes depending on the contents of effects. Also, the Yatsushiro character 224B and the general character 224C are each configured to be able to move in the vertical direction according to the contents of the production. In addition, the Yatsushiro character 224B and the general character 224C each have a built-in light emitting means such as a full color LED, and can emit light in various light emission modes according to the contents of the production.

  Note that the speaker 120 and the fourth symbol display device 284 are shown above the image display device 208 ′ for convenience of explanation, but do not specify the positional relationship with the image display device 208 ′. The same applies to the positional relationship between the chance buttons 136 and 137 and the image display device 208 ′. Further, the family crest character 224A, the Yatsushiro character 224B, and the general character 224C are merely shown as examples of the operation, and the positional relationship with the image display device 208 ′ is not limited to that described here.

  Further, the speaker 120 is a diagram for showing audio output in each of the following embodiments, and an audio output example (for example, “don”, etc.) may be written together with the illustration of the speaker 120. The presence / absence of the example does not indicate the presence / absence of the audio output, and the audio may be output even if the example of the audio output is not described. .

  Here, the hold icon and the change icon are each configured to be changeable to white display, blue display, green display, red display, gold display, rainbow display, and the like. The chance buttons 136 and 137, the crest character 224A, the Yatsushiro character 224B and the general character 244C can be changed to white light, blue light, green light, red light, gold light, rainbow light, etc. by the built-in LED. It is configured.

  For example, in FIG. 14A, the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed in white, the hold icon h11 is displayed in blue, and the hold icons h12 and h13 are displayed in white. In addition, the hold icon and the change icon are displayed in white as a default display, and the hold icon h11 is displayed in blue and prefetched in advance. Further, the display mode (display color, shape, etc.) of the variation icon and each hold icon classifies the produced effects according to the jackpot expectation level, and notifies the classification (rank of the expectation level) (therefore, the game It is also an effect that informs the effect that the person should wait for (this will be described later). The jackpot expectation degree means an expectation degree that the determination of whether or not the variable game is successful (the result of the final symbol change display) is a big hit.

  In addition, the LED built in the chance button 136 and the chance button 137 is lit white, the LED built in the family crest 224A is lit blue, and the LED built in the eight generations 224B and the general 244C is lit white. Yes. As an example, the crest character 224A emits light of the same color (blue in this example) in conjunction with the pre-reading notice of the hold icon h11, and the built-in LED of the eight-generation character 224B and the general character 244C is rainbow-colored (rainbow) The light is emitted to notify the hit.

  14 to 55, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal symbol display device 210, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 shown in FIG. In addition, although the description of the configuration such as the general-purpose hold lamp 216 is omitted, these configurations are also provided as in FIG.

<Direction using the second decorative design>
With reference to FIGS. 14 to 29, as one embodiment of the present invention, a part of the configuration is appropriately extracted with respect to an effect example using the second decorative pattern executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. This will be described with reference to an enlarged view.

<Example A>
FIG. 14 is a diagram showing step by step an example of the effect centered on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

  First, the timing shown in FIG. 14A shows a state in which the variation of the first decorative symbol is stopped (the state in which the variation is stopped). In the first image display device 2081, “decoration 3” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c. The combination (decoration symbol combination) of the decoration symbol (first decoration symbol) of “decoration 1-decoration 4” is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, a white variation icon h0 is displayed at the right end of the icon display area 800, and four suggestion displays (in this example, pedestals) are displayed on the left side, and the hold icons h11, h12 and h13 are displayed to notify that the hold in FIG. On the other hand, the hold icons h12 and h13 are displayed in white (default), whereas the hold icon h11 is displayed in blue and a pre-reading notice is executed. In the explanation display area TT1, a tutorial display “Panda is a master of the lord” is executed.

  In the second image display device 2082, a meter (button image) is displayed, but at this timing, all the meters are filled with white to notify that the meter is zero. In the stage name display area, “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town.

  In the third image display device 2083, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown. In the upper part of the display area of the third image display device 2083, the hold of the special figure 1 is “3”. Special figure 1 and special figure 2 indicating the number of holdings in special figure 2 are “0”.

  The 4th symbol display device 284 displays both the special figure 1 (rectangle) and the special figure 2 (round shape) in gray, indicating that the off state is stopped. In addition, the chance buttons 136 and 137 have the built-in LEDs lit white. In the family crest member 224, the built-in LED emits blue light in conjunction with the pre-reading notice of the hold icon h11, and is waiting (stopped) at the initial position (in this example, below the first image display device 2081). In the Yatsushiro character 224B and the general character 244C, the built-in LED emits white light, and is waiting (stopped) at the initial position (in this example, above the first image display device 2081). Audio output from the speaker 120 is not performed at this timing.

  In the following description, the description will mainly focus on effects that have changed from previous effects with the passage of time.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 14 (b), one hold (hold corresponding to the hold icon h11 in FIG. 14 (a)) has been consumed, and symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 (not shown) has started. In the 4th symbol display device 284, the special figure 1 (square) is displayed in white and the special figure 2 (round) is displayed in gray, indicating that the variable game of the special figure 1 is being executed. .

  At this timing, in the first symbol display area 208X (symbol display areas 208a to 208c) of the first image display device 2081, the variation display (first variation display) of the first decorative symbol is performed. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol variation display (first variation display and second variation display) is represented by a downward white arrow (hereinafter, the same applies to other examples). Moreover, the white arrow shown to the same figure (b) is an elongate arrow, and shows that the decoration design is fluctuating at high speed in the aspect which has permeability | transmittance in this case. On the other hand, when the white arrow is displayed as a short (thick) arrow (for example, (e) in the same figure), it indicates that the decorative symbol fluctuates at a low speed. In the case of low-speed fluctuation, the speed may be such that the decorative symbol can be recognized.

  In addition, with the suspension of the hold, in the icon display area 800, the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are moved and displayed by moving animations, and the hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h11 moves to the right end of the icon display area 800. Is displayed as a blue fluctuation icon h0, and a pre-reading notice is made. In addition, the hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h12 becomes the hold icon h11 on the left side of the change icon h0, the hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h13 becomes the hold icon h12, and the left of the change icon h0. The white hold icons h11 and h12 are respectively displayed on the two pedestals to notify that the hold in FIG.

  In the upper part of the display area of the third image display device 2083, the special figure 1 hold is "2" and the special figure 2 hold is "0". Number display is performed.

  In the explanation display portion TT1, the characters “Panda is a master of the panda” are still displayed. Thus, the explanation display in the explanation display unit TT1 may be performed across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 14C, the decorative design (here “decoration 6”) swings (temporarily stops) in the left design display area 208a of the first image display device 2081. The timing shown is a state in which the decorative design (here “decoration 6”) has been shaken (temporarily stopped) in the right design display area 208c of the first image display device 2081, and is pretending to be a reach (tempered pie). . The timing shown in FIG. 5E is a state in which the decorative symbol (“decoration 6”) that has been subjected to fluctuation fluctuation (temporary stop) in the right symbol display area 208c starts to fluctuate again. Note that the fluctuation of “decoration 6” in the right symbol display area 208c at this timing is a low-speed fluctuation as indicated by a white short (thick) arrow. In addition, the state in which the decorative symbol starts to fluctuate (temporarily stop) and then starts low-speed fluctuation may be referred to as “decorative symbol slips” or “decorative symbol is slell”.

  In the present embodiment, when the decorative design (first decorative design) shifts, a continuous effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect) may be started. In this example, the case where the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol) shifts as one of the start conditions of the pseudo-continuous effect will be described. However, other start conditions may be used as the start condition of the pseudo-continuous effect. The design (first decorative design) may always be misaligned, may or may not be misaligned, or may not be misaligned. The same applies to the pseudo-continuous effects described below. It is.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6F is a state in which the decorative symbol (here “decoration 7”) is changing in the right symbol display area 208c (temporarily stopped). In this way, when a certain decorative design (here “decoration 6”) is shifted and another (next) decorative design (here “decoration 7”) is shaking (temporarily stopped), The stopped decorative pattern (“decoration 7”) may be referred to as a “shift eye”.

  In the present embodiment, the occurrence of misalignment of the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol) is one of notifications that the pseudo-continuous effect may be started. Note that the notification that the pseudo-continuous effect may be started may be other notifications, and may not be the occurrence of misalignment.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5G is a state in which the first animation has started in the middle symbol display area 208b where high-speed fluctuation has been performed. In this example, the first animation is an animation with a special symbol (first symbol). Here, the special symbol is a symbol of a different type from the decorative symbol representing a number, for example, one symbol among the symbols related to the execution of the continuous effect (first effect). The special symbol is also one of the decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol of the present embodiment). Specifically, the special symbol refers to a symbol in which a continuous effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect or a continuous notice effect) is started when the symbol is stopped and displayed.

  As an example, the first animation of the present embodiment is an animation (a special symbol stop animation) that indicates whether or not a special symbol is stopped and displayed in at least one of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. In the present embodiment, as an example, a case where the first animation is an animation (middle symbol beat animation) that indicates whether or not the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b will be described as an example. Here, the stop display of the special symbol may be a shaking fluctuation stop display (temporary stop display), which is the same in the following embodiments.

  When the middle symbol beat animation ends, the special symbol may be stopped and displayed, and when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the continuous effect may be executed.

  Here, the special symbol is a symbol of the character (dono) as shown in FIG. 5G, and when this special symbol (the symbol of the character (donor)) is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, for example, The pseudo-continuous production is executed as the continuous production. Thus, the special symbol related to the start of the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect may be referred to as a pseudo-continuous symbol.

  The continuous effect (pseudo-continuous effect) is started when a certain symbol (three symbols) is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. In this case, the animation that beats (first animation) may be an animation that beats whether or not the last symbol of the three symbols is stopped and displayed. In addition, the stop display in this case refers to a stop display other than the fixed display such that at least one of the three symbols includes a fluctuation fluctuation.

  That is, the timing shown in FIG. 5G is the first animation (whether the middle symbol is turned on) whether or not the pseudo-continuous design (which is a start condition) related to the start of the pseudo-continuous effect is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. (Animation) is being performed.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 11 (h), the pseudo continuous symbol temporarily stops in the middle symbol display area 208b, and at the timing shown in FIG. ing. That is, the pseudo-continuous symbol in FIG. 11H has the same display size as the decorative symbols (“decoration 6” and “decoration 7”) in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. The width of the pseudo continuous pattern (i) is increased. As a result, the right end of “decoration 6” in the left symbol display area 208a and the left end of “decoration 7” in the right symbol display area 208a start to overlap with the left end and the right end of the pseudo-continuous symbol, respectively.

  In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 5I, the second symbol display area 208Y for displaying the second decorative symbol is displayed on the upper part of the second image display device 2082. At this timing, only the second symbol display area 208Y (the frame portion indicated by a white square in the drawing) starts displaying, and the second decorative symbol is not displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6J shows a state in which the horizontal width of the pseudo-continuous symbol is further enlarged. At this timing, the “decoration 6” in the left symbol display area 208a and the “decoration 7” in the right symbol display area 208a are completely overlapped by the pseudo-continuous symbols, and cannot be visually recognized by the player (left symbol display). The decorative symbols of the area 208a and the right symbol display area 208a are both difficult to be visually recognized by the player as compared to the pseudo-continuous symbols.

  In addition, at this timing (at least a part of the state in which the first animation display (medium symbol beat animation) is displayed), the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y. Change, temporary stop display). The second decorative symbol at this timing is stopped and displayed, for example, with the symbol combination shown in FIG. In other words, the decorative symbol (here “decoration 6”) is displayed in the left symbol display area 208k as a swing variation (temporary stop), and the decorative symbol (here “decoration 7”) is displayed in the right symbol display region 208g. ) And a pseudo-continuous symbol (in this case, the symbol of the same character (dono) as in Fig. 11H) is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208l.

  In addition, as shown in the figure (i), as shown in the figure (j), without displaying "only the frame" of the 2nd design display area 208Y as a display plan area of the 2nd decoration design, as shown in the figure (j). The second decorative symbol may be displayed in the symbol display area 208Y (the second symbol display area 208Y can be recognized by the player by the start of the display of the second decorative symbol).

  At this timing, the first decorative symbol is invisible to the player due to the enlarged display of the pseudo-continuous symbol (for example, more difficult to see than the pseudo-continuous symbol or the displayed second decorative symbol), and the first animation The first decorative symbol after the end of (the state of the first decorative symbol variation stop) is unconfirmed, but the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped by the second decorative symbol (the middle symbol display region 208l of the second symbol display region 208Y). The presence or absence of the display can be recognized by the player. In other words, for advanced users, by gazing at the second decorative symbol, at this timing, the state of the first decorative symbol is stopped, that is, the special symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol) is stopped and displayed continuously. It becomes possible to recognize whether or not (pseudo-continuous production) has been started. In this way, the state of the first decorative symbol change stoppage is unconfirmed, but the second decorative symbol can be recognized by the player as to whether or not the special symbol is stopped (the presence or absence of the continuous performance) (first state). In the present specification, the “first barre” is a state in which the state is notified in place of the first decorative symbol that is invisible (difficult to see) to the player in the symbol display area 208X.

  The timing shown in FIG. 10 (k) shows a state in which the horizontal width of the pseudo-continuous symbol is further enlarged and displayed. At this timing, the “decoration 6” in the left symbol display area 208a and the “decoration 7” in the right symbol display area 208a are completely overlapped by the pseudo-continuous symbols, and cannot be visually recognized by the player (left symbol display). The decorative symbols of the area 208a and the right symbol display area 208a are both difficult to be visually recognized by the player as compared to the pseudo-continuous symbols. Further, the left and right end portions of the enlarged pseudo-continuous pattern are displayed in part of the display area of the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083, respectively. That is, one pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed over (spanning) a plurality of image display devices 208 ′ (first image display device 2081, second image display device 2082, and third image display device 2093).

  More specifically, in the second image display device 2082, the enlarged left end of the pseudo-continuous design overlaps the second decorative design, the meter, and the stage name display area. For example, the left end of the pseudo-continuous design is at least the first (In this example, the left end portion of the pseudo-continuous symbol is overlapped with the second decorative symbol, the meter, and the stage name display area). In the second decorative symbol, the stop display of the symbol combination in FIG. 15 (o) continues.

  In the third image display device 2083, the enlarged right end portion of the pseudo-continuous pattern is overlapped with a part of the display in the third image display device 2083 (in this example, a character on the stage, And overlapped with the second hold number display in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2).

  At this timing, a part of the movable body (in this example, the family crest member 244A) starts to rise and overlaps a part of the first image display device 2081 (overlaps with the first image display device 2081). . Thereby, a part of the display displayed on the first image display device 2081 is overlapped with the family crest character 224A and cannot be visually recognized by the player (or the second decorative design or movable body (family crest character 224A or the like). ) Is more difficult to see). Specifically, a pseudo-continuous pattern (a part), a part of the display of the icon display area 800 (in this example, the fluctuation icon h0 (all), the hold icon h11 and a part of the pedestal), and an explanation display A part of the tutorial display in the area TT1 is invisible to the player (or more difficult to see than the second decorative symbol or movable body (family crest character 224A, etc.)).

  In the timing shown in FIG. 11 (l), the enlarged display of the pseudo-continuous pattern is finished (the enlargement is stopped at the same size as the pseudo-continuous pattern shown in FIG. 10 (k)), and the elevated family crest character 244A is raised. , And a sound effect “don” is output from the speaker 120.

  At this timing, the symbol combination of the first decorative symbols is not visually recognized (difficult to visually recognize) by the enlarged display of the pseudo-continuous symbols, but the first decorative symbol is determined to be in a variable stop state. That is, at this timing, the player can recognize the stop display state of the special symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol) and the start of execution of the continuous effect (pseudo-continuous effect). The second decorative design is the same as (k) of FIG. 15 (state of FIG. 15 (o)).

  Therefore, even if the player does not notice the pseudo-continuous symbol stop display (first ballet) in the second symbol display area 208Y at the timing of FIG. It can be recognized that the pseudo-continuous symbol stop display and the execution start of the pseudo-continuous effect are confirmed by the operation (here, the rotation operation) of the family crest actor 244A) and / or the sound effect from the speaker 120.

  For example, the family crest character 244A starts rotating after the pseudo-continuous symbol stop display and the execution start of the pseudo-continuous rendering are confirmed. Note that the family crest member 224A may rise after starting rotation at the initial position (the position below the first image display device 2081 shown in FIG. 6 (j)). After the stop display and the start of execution of the pseudo-continuous production are confirmed, the display moves to the stop position after the ascent (position (l) in the figure).

  Note that the family crest member 244A performs movements such as ascending and descending and rotating operations even during other effects. In addition, the family crest character 244A may be configured not to perform operations such as movement and rotation such as ascending and descending during other effects, or to perform movement and rotation such as ascending and descending during other effects. Some of the operations may be performed, or only some of the operations may not be performed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (m) shows a state where the stop display of the pseudo-continuous symbol in the first symbol display area 208X is visible to the player after the first animation display is completed. Although illustration is omitted, an animation of a reduced display of an enlarged pseudo-continuous pattern is executed between FIG. 1 (l) and FIG. 1 (m), and as shown in FIG. (Display size equivalent to “decoration 6” in the left symbol display area 208a and “decoration 7” in the right symbol display area 208c). As a result, “decoration 6” that is fluctuated (temporarily stopped) in the left symbol display area 208a of the first symbol display area 208X, and a special symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol) that is fluctuated (temporarily stopped) in the middle symbol display area 208b. In addition, “decoration 7” that fluctuates (temporarily stops) in the right symbol display area 208c becomes visible to the player, and the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect is confirmed. The second decorative design is the same as (k) of FIG. 15 (state of FIG. 15 (o)). That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 5 (m), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are visible to the player at the same time in the same display mode ((temporary) stop display of the same symbol combination). Yes.

  It should be noted that the animation of the pseudo-continuous symbol reduction display executed between FIG. 1 (l) and FIG. 1 (m) is the animation display of the pseudo-continuous symbol enlarged display (for example, FIG. The execution time may be the same as that in FIG. (K)), may be short, or may be long. Moreover, the animation of the reduced display of pseudo-continuous symbols may not be executed.

  In general, as shown in FIG. 6 (m), the player stops and displays a special symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol) in the middle symbol display area 208b of the first image display device 2081 (first symbol display area 208X). This makes it possible to recognize that the start of the execution of the continuous production (pseudo-continuous production) has been confirmed. Alternatively, the player who is used to the game cannot visually recognize the state of the first decorative symbol (whether the symbol combination or (temporary) stop display is present) by the first animation display as shown in FIG. Even if it is difficult to visually recognize), it may be possible to recognize that the start of the continuous production (pseudo-continuous production) has been confirmed by the operation (in this case, the rotation operation) of the movable body (family crest actor 224A). .

  In the present embodiment, the state of the first symbol display area 208X is invisible (difficult to see) by the first animation display at a timing before those (FIG. (M), (l)). However, as shown in FIG. 6 (j), the player recognizes that the execution of the continuous production (pseudo-continuous production) has been confirmed by the second decorative symbol that is not overlapped in the first animation display. There is a case that can be made.

  In this example, the timing at which the display of the special symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol) shown in FIG. 5G is set as the start timing of the first animation, but the start timing of the first animation is limited to this timing. Absent. For example, the start timing of the first animation may be the timing at which the player can visually recognize the special symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol) shown in FIG. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the timing at which the pseudo-simultaneous symbols are temporarily stopped may be used, or the display mode of the special symbols changes at a timing later than (h) in the same figure (in this example, the pseudo-simulation as shown in (i) in the same figure). It may be the timing when the enlarged display of the continuous symbols is started).

  Also, the end timing of the first animation is, for example, until the special symbol is stopped and displayed in (m) of the first animation, or until the special symbol is stopped and displayed in (m) of FIG. When the special symbol reduction animation is executed during the same figure (m), until the reduced animation is completed, until the reduced animation is started, or until the enlarged animation is completed in the same figure (l). , And so on.

  That is, the display period of the first animation is a period defined as any combination of the start timing and the end timing of the above-mentioned first animation, but as an example, before the figure (m) When the special symbol reduction animation is executed, the first animation is displayed until the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the same figure (g) to (m). Before the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the figure (m), or before the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the figure (i) to (m). In addition, if the special symbol reduction animation is not executed before (m) in the same figure (when ending with the enlarged display), the display period of the first animation is from (g) to (l) in the same figure. (H) to FIG. (L), or (i) to (l), etc., and the same applies to the following embodiments.

  The timing shown in FIG. 9 (n) shows a state in which display of a second animation different from the first animation is started in the display area of the first image display device 2081.

  The second animation that is displayed at this timing (after the quasi-continuous symbol is stopped) is an animation that is displayed during the period until the quasi-continuous production starts, and here, it continues multiple times (for example, twice). This is an animation indicating that the execution of the pseudo-continuous production is confirmed.

  In this example, the second animation displays the character (dono) from the center to the left as shown in (n) of the figure, and the character (dono) moves to the center as shown in (o) of the figure. However, this is an animation in which the display size expands and the text “Still More !!” is displayed. In this example, the second animation is displayed only on the first image display device 2081. However, the second animation may be displayed over a plurality of image display devices 208 ′.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7 (p) shows a state in which execution of a pseudo-continuous effect that continues multiple times is started, and there is no change in the display of the icon display area and the digestion of the hold.

  At this timing, in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (first symbol display area 208X) of the first image display device 2081, the combination of the first decorative symbols “decoration 6-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. . In addition, it overlaps with a part of the first decorative design (in this example, a part of “decoration 6”) and is referred to as a display relating to the number of pseudo-continuous effects (hereinafter referred to as “pseudo continuous display”). “× 2”) indicating the number of times is displayed.

  Further, in the symbol display areas 208k to 208g (second symbol display area 208Y) of the second image display device 2082, the second decoration in the state of FIG. 15 (o) similar to FIG. 15 (j) to FIG. The display of symbols (decorative symbols including pseudo-continuous symbol stop display) continues to be displayed. As described above, in the present embodiment, even when the display of the first image display device 2081 is changed, accurate information (in this example, simulated information) is displayed according to the second decorative symbol displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y. The player can recognize that the rendition effect is being executed. In other words, the second decorative symbol displayed on the second image display device 2082 (second symbol display area 208Y) is a decorative symbol in which some information is notified to the player by displaying the decorative symbol (a combination of decorative symbols). It can be said that it is a symbol that is displayed so as to exhibit its original function. In other words, the second decorative symbol is the first decorative symbol even when the state of the first decorative symbol (whether the symbol combination or (temporary) stop display is present) is not visible or difficult for the player to see. Guarantee of information notification by.

  In this way, when a continuous effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect) is executed, a special symbol (for example, a pseudo-continuous symbol) is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b after the first animation (medium symbol beat animation) is displayed. Is stopped. Thereafter, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is resumed, a symbol other than the special symbol (for example, the decorative symbol of the same number as the right symbol display region 208c (here, “decoration 7”)) is displayed in the middle symbol display region 208b. indicate. That is, at this timing, the symbol combination of the second decorative symbol (“decoration 6-special symbol-decoration 7”) is different from the symbol combination of the first decorative symbol (“decoration 6-decoration 7-decoration 7”). It is a combination.

  In this example, in the state where the variable display of the first decorative symbol is resumed, the numerical decorative symbol is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. However, in the state where the variable display of the first decorative symbol is restarted. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the same symbol as the second decorative symbol (that is, a special symbol) may be displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 11 (q) is the same for the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol and first decorative symbol in the first symbol display region 208X of the first image display device 2081 and the second symbol display region 208Y of the second image display device 2082, respectively. This shows a state in which the variation display (high-speed variation) of the second decorative design has been resumed. Further, with the start of the decorative symbol variation display, an animation in which the pseudo-continuous number display (in this example, “× 2”) is reduced and displayed is executed.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 7 (r), the first symbol display area 208X continues to display the first decorative symbol (high-speed variation), while the second symbol display area 208Y (second decorative symbol) It is hidden.

  In the above example, after the timing shown in (i) in the figure, after displaying the variation display of the second decorative symbol as shown in (q) in the second symbol display area 208Y, ) May be temporarily stopped (stop display of pseudo-continuous symbols).

  Further, the second decorative symbol stop display (the second decorative symbol shown in FIG. 15 (j)) including the special symbol stop symbol on the second image display device 2082 (FIG. 15 (o)) is the first image display device. It is only necessary for the player to be able to see the first decorative symbol including the special symbol 2081 before the stop display (FIG. (M)). For example, at the timing shown in FIG. The stop display of the second decorative symbol including the display (FIG. 15 (o)) may be displayed, or the second decorative symbol including the special symbol stop display may be displayed at the timing shown in FIG. You may display the stop display of 2 decoration symbols (FIG. 15 (o)).

  In the same figure (j), the timing (first timing) when the right symbol (“decoration 6”) and the left symbol (“decoration 7”) are overlapped with the enlarged middle symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol), The display timing of the second decorative symbol (second timing) may be the same timing, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the first timing is after the second timing. It may be.

  In addition, in the same figure (p), even if the display timing (first timing) of the pseudo continuous display is the same timing as the display start timing (resume timing, second timing) of the first decorative symbol. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the first timing may be after the second timing.

  In addition, in the same figure (q), the start timing (first timing) of the variable display of the first decorative symbol and the start timing (second timing) of the variable display of the second decorative symbol are the same timing. Alternatively, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the first timing may be after the second timing.

  In addition, the pseudo continuous number display may be started from (q) in the same figure. In this case, the display timing of the pseudo continuous number display (first timing) and the start timing of the second decorative symbol variation display (first timing). The second timing may be the same timing, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the first timing may be after the second timing.

  Also, in FIG. 8 (r), the timing at which the pseudo continuous display is reduced from the size shown in (q) (first timing) and the timing of erasing the second decorative symbol (second timing) are as follows. The same timing may be used, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the first timing may be after the second timing.

<Matters common to each embodiment>
Matters common to the embodiments shown in FIGS. 14 to 29 including this embodiment are described.

  First, in the decorative symbol state (decorative symbol combination), which is the condition that the pseudo-continuous effect starts (may be), a shift occurs in the left symbol or right symbol (there is a special symbol in the middle symbol after that) Stop), the left symbol and the right symbol become a template (when stopped at the same symbol), the special symbol stops in the middle symbol, or the special symbol stops in the middle symbol regardless of the left symbol and right symbol Whether or not (only), etc.

  In addition, in a configuration in which a pseudo-continuous effect may be started when a misalignment occurs in the left symbol or the right design, if there is no misalignment, it becomes a tempered, and then the decorative pattern of the tempered number If the decorative pattern of the number added with 1 passes, it will develop to reach. On the other hand, when the pseudo-continuous effect is not started, if a misalignment does not occur, it becomes a temper, and thereafter, it is stopped and displayed with a numeral decorative symbol obtained by adding 1 to the tempered numeral decorative symbol.

  Also, in the configuration where the pseudo-continuous effect may be started when the left symbol and the right symbol are tempered, there is a state whether the pseudo-simultaneous symbol is stopped first, and then the number of the tempered number is displayed. If the decorative pattern of the number which added 1 to the decorative pattern passes, it will develop to reach. On the other hand, when the quasi-continuous effect is not started, the display is stopped with the numeral decoration symbol obtained by adding 1 to the numeral decoration symbol that has been tempered, and the display is lost.

  Also, for example, the left symbol is “decoration 6”, the middle symbol is “special symbol”, and the right symbol is “decoration 7” (the symbol combination “decoration 6-special symbol-decoration 7” is stopped). When the continuous production starts, the left symbol “decoration 6”, the middle symbol “special symbol”, and the right symbol “decoration 7” are stopped and displayed in the next pseudo-series production. “Decoration 6”, the right design is “decoration 6”, and it is configured to be a temperament (referred to as “decoration 6 temper”). In this case, “decoration 6 temper” is configured to have a higher probability of jackpot than reach other than “decoration 6 temper”.

  Accordingly, in the second decorative symbol, for example, as shown in FIG. 15J and FIG. 15O, among the symbol combinations “decoration 6-special symbol-decoration 7”, the symbol “decoration 6” on the left is the player. When it becomes visible, the player may be able to recognize whether or not it will become a “decoration 6 tempered” when developed into a super reach, and may increase the player's expectation.

  Some temperament designs have different expectations of jackpots. For example, the left design is “decoration 7”, the right design is “decoration 7”, and the tempering (referred to as “decoration 7 tempering”) is followed by “hot” development. Become. In such a case, it becomes possible to visually recognize that the symbol combination of “decoration 7-special symbol-decoration 8” is stopped and displayed by the second ornament symbol, so that the subsequent development is “hot” to the player. May be recognized.

  In addition, the first animation (stopping animation of special symbol) includes an enlarged display, but it may also include a rotation display, and is attached to the symbol rather than an enlarged display of the symbol itself. The effect display may include a display that gradually expands. Moreover, the display other than the second decorative pattern may be overlapped by the enlarged display of the first animation.

  In addition, the second decorative symbol will be described by taking as an example a configuration in which it may be displayed or not displayed, but the second decorative symbol is excluded except for a configuration in which a third decorative symbol to be described later is displayed (FIG. 23). May be displayed constantly.

  In addition, in one of the roaring animations of the special symbols (first animation, special symbol stop-spinning animation, middle symbol roaring animation), the second decorative symbol may occur, There is no decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol, and there may be a symbol that is caused by a stop display of the second decorative symbol by a symbol other than the special symbol.

  In addition, the stop display (redisplay) of the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol) that occurs after the pseudo-continuous effect does not include a special symbol in order to prevent the false continuous symbol from being falsely recognized again. Is desirable.

  In addition, when there are a plurality of pseudo-continuous times, the display mode of the change icon h0 changes (or can change) as the number advances (increases) increases. In this configuration, the hold icon and the fluctuation icon may be hidden at a certain timing.

  Moreover, although the case where there are a plurality of pseudo-continuous times is described as an example, the number of pseudo-continuous times may be one. The greater the number of pseudo-continuations (the longer the pseudo-continuous productions are), the higher the degree of expectation for jackpots. In addition, in each effect example described in this specification, there may be an effect with a higher degree of jackpot expectation than a pseudo-ream effect, or an effect with a lower jackpot expectation than a pseudo-ream effect. May be.

<Example B>
Next, other examples of effects will be described. FIG. 15 is a diagram showing another example of effects centered on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment step by step.

  This production example is an example in which the special symbol is not stopped and displayed after the first animation display is finished (that is, the continuous production is not started). FIGS. 15A to 15I are diagrams. Since it is the same as the timing shown in FIG. 14 (a) to FIG. In other cases, the description of the same configuration as the effect example A shown in FIG. 14 may be omitted.

  The timing shown in FIG. 15 (j) shows a state in which the horizontal width of the pseudo-continuous symbol is further enlarged. At this timing, the “decoration 6” in the left symbol display area 208a and the “decoration 7” in the right symbol display area 208a are completely overlapped by the pseudo-continuous symbols, and cannot be visually recognized by the player (left symbol display). The decorative symbols of the area 208a and the right symbol display area 208a are both difficult to be visually recognized by the player as compared to the pseudo-continuous symbols.

  In the second image display device 2082, the second decorative symbol is displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y in which only the frame portion (white square frame) has started to be displayed at the timing shown in FIG. Is done. The second decorative design in this case is displayed in the state shown in FIG. In other words, the decorative symbol (here “decoration 6”) is displayed in the left symbol display area 208k as a swing variation (temporary stop), and the decorative symbol (here “decoration 7”) is displayed in the right symbol display region 208g. )Is displayed. On the other hand, in the middle symbol display area 208l, the variation display (high-speed variation) of the decorative symbol (second decorative symbol) is being performed.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 6 (k), an animation of the reduced display of the enlarged pseudo-continuous symbols is executed in the first symbol display area 208X. As shown in FIG. The display is reduced to “decoration 6” of 208a and the display size equivalent to “decoration 7” of the right symbol display area 208c), and an animation (middle symbol scrolling display) that descends from above in the middle symbol display area 208b is executed. It shows the state.

  At this timing, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y. The second decorative design in this case is displayed in the state shown in FIG. In other words, the decorative symbol (here “decoration 6”) is displayed in the left symbol display area 208k in a swinging manner (temporarily stopped), and in the middle symbol display area 208l, the decorative symbol (second symbol, here “decoration 8”) is displayed. ) Is displayed in a stopped state, and the decorative symbol (here “decoration 7”) is displayed in the right symbol display area 208g. That is, at this timing, both the first symbol variation area 208X and the second symbol variation area 208Y are visible to the player, but the state of the first decorative symbol (whether there is a symbol combination or (temporary) stop display) And the state of the second decorative symbol (whether or not there is a symbol combination or (temporary) stop display) is different. Hereinafter, simply “decorated symbol state” refers to a state (display mode) such as a combination of decorative symbols and the presence or absence of (temporary) stop display.

  The timing shown in FIG. 11 (l) shows a state in which a numerical decoration symbol (here, “decoration 8”) is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b after the first animation display in the first symbol variation area 208X. Show. That is, after the first animation display, it is determined that the special symbol (in this case, the pseudo-continuous symbol) is not stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the continuous effect (pseudo-continuous effect) due to the stop of the special symbol is not executed. It is in the state. Here, the first animation display refers to an animation with pseudo-continuous symbols (character (donor) symbols) in FIG.

  Further, at this timing, the stop display (swing fluctuation display) of the second decorative symbol shown in (q) of the same figure is continued in the second symbol display area 208Y. That is, at this timing, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are visible to the player in the same state (a temporary stop state where the combination of decorative symbols is “decoration 6-decoration 8-decoration 7”).

  Thus, in this example, the case where the execution of the continuous effect (for example, the pseudo-continuous effect) does not start after the first animation display is shown, and in this case, the middle symbol display of the first symbol display area 208X In the area 208b, a special symbol (for example, a pseudo-continuous symbol) is not displayed in a stopped state, and a symbol of a different type from the special symbol (for example, a decorative symbol of a number) is displayed in a stopped state (a fluctuation variation display or a temporary stop display). Further, in this case, the decorative symbol (here “decoration 8”) that is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b is a numeric decorative symbol (in FIG. 14 (p)) that is displayed when the continuous effect is executed. This is a decorative symbol (third symbol) with a number different from the decorative symbol ("decoration 7") that is stopped and displayed in the symbol display area 208b.

  The timing shown in (m) of FIG. 6 shows a state in which the second decorative symbol is erased in the second image display device 2082, and the timing shown in (n) of FIG. The decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (here, the second decorative symbol (the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 6-decoration 8—decoration 7”) is stopped and displayed.

  In general, as shown in FIG. 1 (l), after the first animation has been displayed, the player can display a special image in the middle symbol display area 208b of the first image display device 2081 (first symbol display area 208X). Since the symbols (pseudo-continuous designs) are not stopped and displayed, it is possible to recognize that it has been determined that the continuous production (pseudo-continuous production) will not be executed. Alternatively, the player who is used to the game can move the movable body even when the state of the first symbol display area 208X is not visually recognized (difficult to visually recognize) by the first animation display as shown in FIG. It may be possible to recognize that the start of continuous production (pseudo-continuous production) has been confirmed by the operation (in this case, the rotation operation) of (family crest actor 224A).

  In the present embodiment, even if the stop display of the first decorative symbol is not fixed at the timing before that (the first animation display is being executed), as shown in FIG. It is determined that the continuous effect (pseudo-continuous effect) is not executed by the second decorative symbol (FIG. 15 (q)) in which the decorative symbols (numeric decorative symbols) other than the pseudo-continuous symbols are stopped and displayed in the display area 208l. In some cases, the player can recognize this.

  Alternatively, even when the first animation display is being executed at a timing before the timing shown in FIG. 10L, as shown in FIG. The player may recognize that it is determined that the continuous effect (pseudo-continuous effect) is not executed by the second decorative symbol (FIG. 15 (p)) that is fluctuating (the pseudo-continuous symbol is not stopped and displayed). There are cases where it is possible.

  In addition, in the same figure (k), if the pseudo-continuous symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b moves downward (shifts), it may return to the upper side and stop displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. Is a stop display of the pseudo-continuous symbol shown in FIG. 14 (m), and the pseudo-continuous effect is started as in FIGS. 14 (n) to (r). In this case, if the player has previously viewed the second decorative symbol with the special symbol stopped on the middle symbol, the first symbol is displayed with the special symbol stopped on the middle symbol of the second decorative symbol. If the middle symbol of the decorative symbol (pseudo continuous symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b) is shifted downward, the player may recognize that it is shifted and recognize that it returns to the upper side (becomes the first ballet).

  Note that the method of the case where the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a normal stop mode may be configured such that the expectation degree of jackpot is higher in the method in which the special symbol is shifted downward and then returned to the upper position and stopped.

  As described above, during the execution of the first animation ((j) and (k) in the figure), the first decorative symbol after the end (the state in which the variation of the first decorative symbol is stopped) is undetermined. Due to the second decorative symbol (the pseudo-continuous symbol is not stopped and displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y), the fact that the continuous effect (pseudo-continuous effect) is not performed is prejudice. That is, for example, an advanced user, etc., pays attention to the second decorative symbol, so that the state of the stop display of the special symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol) and the continuous effect (pseudo-continuous effect) before the stoppage of the variation of the first decorative symbol. ) Can be recognized.

  For example, the second decorative symbol (FIG. 15 (q)) in which the middle symbol is stopped may be displayed at the display timing of the second decorative symbol shown in FIG.

  Further, when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed as shown in FIG. 14, there is no prior ballet due to the display of the second decorative symbol, and only when the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed as shown in FIG. 15. You may do it.

  Moreover, you may make it a tip-barre generate | occur | produce in any of the case where a pseudo-continuous production is performed as shown in FIG. 14, and the case where a pseudo-continuous production is not performed as shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 15 (k), the timing (first timing) at which the animation of the scroll display of the pseudo-continuous symbol starts and the timing (second timing) at which the second decorative symbol is displayed are the same. Alternatively, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the first timing may be later than the second timing.

<Example C>
FIG. 16 is a diagram showing another example of effects centered on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment step by step.

(Example C-1)
FIGS. 7B to 7F show that the first image display device 2081 has a second symbol display area 208 </ b> Y for executing the variation display (second variation display) of the second decorative symbol. It is an example of production when there is.

  That is, FIG. 14B to FIG. 14F correspond to the timing shown in FIG. 14H to FIG. 14L, respectively, and in FIG. 14H to FIG. The second decorative symbol displayed on the two-image display device 2082 is displayed on the second symbol display area 208Y provided on the first image display device 2081.

  Specifically, at the timing shown in FIG. 16B, the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b, and at the timing shown in FIG. 16C, the horizontal width of the pseudo-continuous symbol is gradually enlarged. The right end of “decoration 6” in the left symbol display area 208a and the left end of “decoration 7” in the right symbol display area 208a start to overlap the left end and right end of the pseudo-continuous symbol, respectively. For example, on the upper left side of the one-image display device 2081, only the second symbol display area 208 </ b> Y for displaying the second decorative symbol (the frame portion indicated by a white square in the drawing) starts displaying (first symbol). 2 decorative symbols are not displayed).

  In the timing shown in FIG. 6D, the horizontal width of the pseudo-symbol pattern is further enlarged, and “decoration 6” in the left symbol display area 208a and “decoration 7” in the right symbol display area 208a are both pseudo-continuous. The symbols are completely overlapped with each other and cannot be visually recognized by the player (both decorative symbols in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208a are more difficult for the player to see than the pseudo-continuous symbols).

  Further, at this timing (at least a part of the state in which the first animation display (medium symbol beat animation) is displayed), the second symbol display area 208Y has the state shown in FIG. A second decorative symbol is displayed. In other words, the decorative symbol (here “decoration 6”) is displayed in the left symbol display area 208k as a swing variation (temporary stop), and the decorative symbol (here “decoration 7”) is displayed in the right symbol display region 208g. ) Is displayed, and the second decorative symbol is displayed in a state in which a pseudo-continuous symbol (here, the symbol of the same character (donor) as in Fig. 11H) is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208l. That is, before the end of the first animation, the stop display of the pseudo-continuous symbol in the middle symbol display area 208l is in the state of the first ballet, and at this timing (or later timing), the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect is performed. Confirmation may be recognizable to the player.

  At this timing, at least a part of the second decorative symbol or the second symbol display area 208Y overlaps a part of the first animation.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 5E, the width of the first decorative symbol pseudo-continuous pattern is further expanded, and one pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed on a plurality of image display devices 208 ′ (first image display device 2081, second image display). The image is displayed across the device 2082 and the third image display device 2093). The second decorative symbol (FIG. 15 (o)) including the pseudo-continuous symbol stop display is being displayed, and overlaps the pseudo-continuous symbol of the first decorative symbol. Also, the family crest character 244A starts to rise and overlaps a part of the first image display device 2081 (overlaps with the first image display device 2081).

  In the timing shown in FIG. 5F, the enlarged display of the pseudo-continuous pattern of the first decorative design is finished, the raised family crest member 244A rotates at the raised position, and a sound effect “don” is heard from the speaker 120. The output status is shown. The display of the second decorative symbol (FIG. 15 (o)) including the stop display of the pseudo-continuous symbol is being continued.

  As described above, in this embodiment (production example), the pseudo-continuous design of the first decorative design to be enlarged first overlaps the second decorative design (overlapped by the second decorative design), and then the second image display device. Display is started at 2082.

  Even if the player is unaware of the stop display of the pseudo-continuous symbol in the second symbol display area 208Y shown in FIG. 4D, the player operates the movable body (family crest object 244A) shown in FIG. It can be recognized that the stop display of the pseudo-continuous symbol and the start of execution of the pseudo-continuous production thereby have been confirmed by the sound effect (here, rotating operation) and / or the speaker 120. Other configurations are the same as those in FIG.

(Example C-2)
FIG. 16 (h) to FIG. 16 (l) are diagrams showing other examples of effects, and are examples of effects in which a part of the first decorative symbol is hidden during the execution of the first animation.

  FIGS. 16 (h) to (l) correspond to the timings shown in FIGS. 14 (h) to 14 (l), respectively.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 16 (h), the pseudo continuous symbol temporarily stops in the middle symbol display region 208b of the first symbol display region 208X, and at the timing shown in FIG. 16 (i), the horizontal width of the pseudo continuous symbol gradually increases. Start displaying. At this timing, the decorative symbols (first decorative symbols) in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208a are not displayed. In addition, for example, at the upper part of the second image display device 2082, only the second symbol display area 208Y (the frame portion indicated by a white square frame in the figure) for displaying the second decorative symbol starts displaying. (The second decorative design is not displayed).

  At the timing shown in FIG. 6J, the horizontal width of the pseudo-continuous symbol is further enlarged and the second decorative symbol is displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y. This second decorative design is in the state shown in FIG. In other words, the decorative symbol (here “decoration 6”) is displayed in the left symbol display area 208k as a swing variation (temporary stop), and the decorative symbol (here “decoration 7”) is displayed in the right symbol display region 208g. ) And a pseudo-continuous symbol (in this case, the character (donor) symbol) is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208l. Thereby, before the end of the first animation, the stop display of the pseudo-symbol symbols in the middle symbol display area 208l is in the state of the first barre, and at this timing (or later timing), the pseudo-sequential effects are executed. May be recognized by the player.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 5 (k), the width of the first decorative symbol pseudo-continuous pattern is further expanded, and one pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed in a plurality of image display devices 208 ′ (first image display device 2081, second image display). The image is displayed across the device 2082 and the third image display device 2093). The display of the second decorative symbol (FIG. 15 (o)) including the stop display of the pseudo-continuous symbol is being continued. At least a part of the second decorative symbol or the second symbol display area 208Y overlaps a part of the first animation displayed on the second image display device 2082.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 11 (l), the enlarged display of the pseudo-continuous pattern of the first decorative design is finished, the raised family crest member 244A rotates at the raised position, and a sound effect “don” is heard from the speaker 120. The output status is shown. The second decorative symbol including the pseudo-continuous symbol stop display is being displayed. Other configurations are the same as those in FIG.

  As described above, in this embodiment (production example), the pseudo-continuous design of the first decorative design to be enlarged is first displayed on the second image display device 2082, and then the second decorative design (FIG. 15 (o)). ) (Overlapped by the second decorative pattern).

  In this production example, the decorative symbols in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208a that are not displayed in FIG. 14 (i) are at least the second animation (pseudo) shown in FIG. 14 (n). In the state before the non-display at the timing (for example, the timing executed in the period until the start of the continuous production) (for example, the timing shown in FIG. 14 (m)) (in this example, the left symbol display area 208a displays “ The decoration symbol “decoration 6” and the decoration symbol “decoration 7” are redisplayed in the right symbol display area 208a.

  As described above, when the first decorative symbol is not displayed during the execution of the first animation, the player can recognize the state of the decorative symbol by displaying the second decorative symbol. Note that the display start timing of the second decorative symbol is the same as in the case of the effect example of FIG.

(Example C-3)
FIGS. 16 (n) to (o) are diagrams showing other examples of production, and are examples of production in the case of becoming a temper (reach) in FIG. 14 (d).

  FIG. 16 (n) corresponds to the timing shown in FIG. 14 (d). In FIG. 14 (d), an effect that makes it look like a temper (not actually a temper) is performed, but the timing shown in FIG. 16 (n). Shows the state of becoming a temperament.

  The timing shown in FIG. 16 (o) indicates a state in which a tempering (reach) effect is being executed. In this example, the decorative symbols (first decorative symbols, for example, the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208a). , “Decoration 6”) are displayed in an enlarged manner, and the decorative symbol (eg, “decoration 6”) is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b as compared to the decorative symbols in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208a. An animation that is displayed in a poorly visible state is being executed.

  Further, since the left symbol and the right symbol which are enlarged are overlapped, the high-speed fluctuation of the middle symbol itself is difficult for the player to see compared to the left symbol and the right symbol.

  Here, “animation displayed in a poorly visible state for a player” means an animation that is less visible than the left and right symbols due to high-speed fluctuation of the middle symbol, An animation that is displayed in a state where the transmittance is higher than that of the right design (decorative design is displayed lightly)

  In this case (in the case of a template), the second decorative design is not displayed on any of the image display devices 208 ′. In other words, in this embodiment, the animation display with the right symbol and / or the left symbol is in a state where the visibility of the scroll display of the middle symbol is hindered (the state where the information notification by the first decorative symbol is hindered). However, the display of the second decorative symbol (notification of the information) is not performed.

  In FIG. 4D, the display of the second decorative symbol is started, but the pseudo continuous symbol is overlapped with the second decorative symbol by the display start timing of the second decorative symbol and the expansion of the pseudo continuous symbol. The timing may be simultaneous, or may be such that after the second decorative symbol starts displaying, the pseudo continuous symbol is overlapped with the second decorative symbol by expanding the pseudo continuous symbol, After the continuous symbols are enlarged, the display may be started so that the second decorative symbols overlap the pseudo continuous symbols. The same applies to FIG.

<Example D>
FIG. 17 is a diagram showing another example of effects centered on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of this embodiment in a stepwise manner.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 14A, for example, the first decorative symbol variation display as shown in FIGS. 14B to 14C is executed, and the timing shown in FIG. 17B follows the left symbol. For example, the decorative pattern “decoration 6” in the display area 208a and the decorative symbol “decoration 7” in the right symbol display area 208a are fluctuated (temporarily stopped), and the decorative symbol is changing at high speed in the middle symbol display area 208b. Is shown.

  The timing shown in FIG. 14C corresponds to the timing shown in FIG. 14G, and is the state where the first animation has started in the middle symbol display area 208b where high-speed fluctuation has been performed. In this example, the first animation is an animation with a special symbol (first symbol), but is a special symbol (in this case, the character (princess) symbol) different from the pseudo-continuous effect stopped and displayed? This is an animation that sings about how to do it. For example, when a special symbol different from the pseudo-continuous effect (here, the character (princess) symbol) is stopped and displayed, it is the same type as the pseudo-continuous effect but another continuous effect (for example, a mini character MC described later). For example, a continuous production by a program, a continuous announcement production, etc.).

  At the timing shown in FIG. 6C, the middle symbol scrolling animation in which the special symbol of the character (princess) descends from above is executed in the middle symbol display area 208b.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 4D, in the middle symbol display area 208b, the special symbol of the character (princess) is stopped and displayed, and then, for example, a rotating animation (second position) is left unchanged. Running animation).

  In the middle symbol display area 208b, the timing shown in FIG. 5E is determined as the execution of the continuous performance is determined as the special symbol of the character (princess) is stopped and displayed in FIG. The state (for example, before a continuous production start) (2nd animation) regarding the continuous production is shown. Here, the second animation is an animation including an image in which an image of a character (princess) is displayed and a character “chance !!” is displayed.

  That is, in this production example, the display period of the first animation is, for example, until the special symbol is stopped and displayed in FIG. 4D (until the character (princess) symbol is rotated in FIG. ) Period.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (f) is the stop display of the first decorative symbol (here, “decoration 6-decoration 7-decoration 7” symbol combination stop display (swing fluctuation, temporary change) in the first symbol display area 208X. Stop)) is being executed.

  At this timing, a small character (mini character MC) is displayed above the explanation display area TT1. In this example, the mini character MC is a mini character (princess), and this display is a continuous effect (an effect display constituting at least a part of the continuous effect).

  In this example, the special symbol is a different symbol from the pseudo-continuous symbol. However, after the animation after the special symbol is stopped and displayed (second animation) is finished, the decorative symbol is displayed (stop display). In the case of redisplaying, the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208a are displayed in the decorative pattern ("decoration 6") of the left symbol display area 208a when the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed in FIG. ) And the same decorative symbol as the decorative symbol (“decoration 7”) in the right symbol display area 208a are displayed.

  In such a case, the decorative symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b is the same as the decorative symbol ("decoration 7") in the right symbol display area 208a (or the same as the decorative symbol in the left symbol display area 208a ("decoration 6")). Decorative symbols may be stopped. That is, at this timing, the special symbol (character (princess)) is stopped and displayed, and the display of the first decorative symbol resumed after the animation (second animation) is displayed, as shown in FIG. For example, the decoration display of the decoration combination of “decoration 6—decoration 7—decoration 7” is stopped (fluctuation fluctuation, temporary stop).

  The timing shown in FIG. 6G indicates that the special symbol 1 (rectangle) and the special diagram 2 (round) are both displayed in gray in the fourth symbol display device 284, and are in a state in which the disconnection is stopped. Show. In the first symbol display area 208 </ b> X of the first image display device 2081, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed (stopped with the symbol combination “decoration 6-decoration 7-decoration 7”, which is a combination of the symbols that are out of place).

  In the timing shown in FIG. 11H, one hold (hold corresponding to the hold icon h11 in FIG. 11G) has been consumed, and symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 (not shown) has started. In the 4th symbol display device 284, the special figure 1 (square) is displayed in white and the special figure 2 (round) is displayed in gray, indicating that the variable game of the special figure 1 is being executed. .

  At this timing, in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the first image display device 2081, the variation display (first variation display) of the first decorative symbol with high-speed variation is performed.

  In addition, with the suspension of the hold, in the icon display area 800, the hold icons h11 and h12 are moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h11 moves to the right end of the icon display area 800. It is displayed as a white variation icon h0. Further, the hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h12 becomes the hold icon h11 on the left side of the change icon h0, and the white hold icon h11 is displayed on the left base of the change icon h0. Is informed that the hold of 1 is 1.

  In the upper part of the display area of the third image display device 2083, the special figure 1 hold is "1" and the special figure 2 hold is "0". Number display is performed.

  Note that the mini character (princess) of the information in the explanation display part TT1 continues to be displayed (display is continued (carried over) until the next change). The number (display number) of mini characters (princesses) is increased by a special symbol (here, character (princess)) is stopped (see (d) in the figure)) during the subsequent games, As the number of displays increases, for example, the expectation degree of jackpot increases, and the player's expectation degree increases. That is, the effect of increasing (appearing) the display number of the mini character (princess) can be said to be the same kind of effect as the pseudo-continuous effect in terms of continuous effect.

  On the other hand, the pseudo-continuous production is a continuous production within one variation, while the production in which the mini character (princess) of the present embodiment appears is a continuous production (continuous production called a horizontal series) that spans multiple variations. It can be said that this is a different kind of continuous production.

Further, the effect of increasing (appearing) the display number of the mini character (princess) can be referred to as an effect display similar to the meter display in that the player's expectation level increases as the display number increases. Therefore, instead of the effect of increasing (appearing) the display number of the mini character (princess), an effect of meter display (display in which the meter increases (or decreases)) may be used.
Further, the display number of the mini character (princess) may correspond to the number of continuous effects.

  In this example, the display of the second decorative symbol is not performed on the image display device 208 ′ (no prior blurring occurs).

  In this example, the case where the special symbol of the character (princess) is rotated in the second animation display has been described. However, the configuration may be enlarged similarly to the pseudo-continuous symbol.

<Example E>
FIG. 18 is a diagram showing another example of effects centered on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment step by step.

(Example E-1)
Since the timings shown in FIGS. 7A to 7C are the same as the timings shown in FIGS. 17A to 17C, description thereof will be omitted.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 18 (d), the special symbol of the character (princess) is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display region 208b of the first symbol display region 208X, and then, for example, the vertical position is left as it is. Running, rotating animation.

  At this timing, the second decorative symbol is displayed (stopped) in the second symbol display area 208Y of the second image display device 2082. The second decorative symbol in this case is the state shown in the right figure of FIG. Specifically, in the left symbol display area 208j of the second symbol display area 208Y, a numerical decorative pattern (for example, “decoration 6”) is displayed with fluctuation (temporarily stopped), and in the middle symbol display area 208k, a numerical decoration is displayed. A symbol (for example, “decoration 7”) is stopped and displayed, and in the right symbol display area 208l, a numerical ornament symbol (for example, “decoration 7”) is displayed with fluctuation (temporary stop).

  The timings shown in FIGS. 17E to 17H are the same as the timings shown in FIGS. 17E to 17H, except that the second decorative symbol is displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y. It is.

  That is, in the same figure (e), the second animation (an animation including an image in which an image of the character (princess) is displayed and a character “chance !!”) is executed is executed, and (f) in FIG. Is executed in the first symbol display area 208X by the stop display of the first decorative symbol (here, stop display of the symbol combination “decoration 6-decoration 7-decoration 7” (fluctuation fluctuation, temporary stop)). At the same time, a mini character (princess) is displayed above the explanation display area TT1. The second decorative design maintains the state shown in the right diagram of FIG.

  In addition, the timing shown in FIG. 6G is a state in which the special symbol 1 (square) and the special diagram 2 (round) are both displayed in gray in the fourth symbol display device 284, and the deviation is stopped. It is shown that. In the first symbol display area 208 </ b> X of the first image display device 2081, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed (stopped with the symbol combination “decoration 6-decoration 7-decoration 7”, which is a combination of the symbols that are out of place). The second decorative design maintains the state shown in the right diagram of FIG.

  Thus, in the same figure (d) and the same figure (e), the 2nd decoration symbol of the combination of the same decoration design as the 1st decoration design displayed in the figure (f) and the same figure (g) is stopped and displayed. There is a tip-up.

  In this way, in this embodiment, even if the symbol is a special symbol other than the pseudo-continuous symbol, the second decorative symbol causes a tip-up, but the symbol displayed in the second decorative symbol does not include a special symbol ( There is no special symbol), and there is a tip-barre due to the combination of all decorative symbols that do not include special symbols.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 11H, one hold (hold corresponding to the hold icon h11 in FIG. 11G) is consumed, and the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the first image display device 2081 have high-speed fluctuation. The first decorative symbol variation display (first variation display) is performed, and also in the symbol display areas 208j to 208l of the second image display device 2082, the high-speed variation second ornament symbol variation display (second variation). Display). Since other configurations are the same as those in FIG.

  In this example, the display timing (first timing) of the second decorative symbol that starts display in FIG. 4D may be the same as the stop timing (second timing) of the special symbol. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the first timing may be after the second timing.

  In addition, the display timing (first timing) of the second decorative symbol for starting display in FIG. 9 (d) and the rotation start timing (second timing) of the special symbol may be the same, The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the first timing may be after the second timing.

  In addition, the start timing (first timing) of the variable display of the second decorative symbol starting in FIG. 11 (h) is the same as the start timing (second timing) of the variable display of the first decorative symbol. Alternatively, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the first timing may be after the second timing.

(Example E-2)
FIG. 18 (m) to FIG. 18 (o) are diagrams showing other examples of effects, which are examples of effects when other special symbols are displayed.

  The timings shown in (m) and (n) are the same as the timings shown in (a) and (b). The timing shown in FIG. 10 (o) is the same as the timing shown in FIG. 10 (c), but is different from the special symbol of the character (princess) in the middle symbol display area 208b of the first symbol display area 208X. (A) An animation in which a special symbol is scroll-displayed (first animation) is being executed. The special symbol in this example is, for example, a special symbol related to the high-speed pseudo-ream (for example, a special symbol displayed as “continue”), and when the special symbol related to the high-speed pseudo-ream is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. A high-speed pseudo-ream effect is executed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7 (p) shows a state in which the special symbol related to the high-speed pseudo-ream is stopped and displayed (swing fluctuation, temporary stop) in the middle symbol display area 208b of the first symbol display area. In the timing shown in (q), when the special symbol related to the high-speed pseudo-ream is stopped and displayed, the first decorative display variation display (first variation display) starts in the first symbol display area 208X, and the high-speed pseudo-ream starts. This shows a state in which the production is executed. In this case, for example, the number of executions of the high-speed pseudo-ream (in this example, “second shot”) is displayed above the icon display area 800. In the production of the high-speed pseudo-ream, a special symbol (for example, a special symbol displayed as “continue”) is scrolled, stopped (temporarily stopped), and first changed (re-changed) is displayed at a high speed, for example 100. Repeated (until the display of the number of executions of the high-speed pseudo-ream is “100th”).

  In this effect example, the special symbol may include a special symbol related to the high-speed pseudo-ream, a pseudo-continuous symbol (character (dono) symbol) as shown in FIG. 14, or a symbol in another effect mode. .

  Further, in this effect example, the second decorative symbol is not displayed and no prior ball is generated, but the second decorative symbol may be displayed. In this case, the display start timing of the second decorative symbol may be any timing from (n) to (p) in FIG. In addition, the second decorative symbol may be displayed in the figure (q). In this case, for example, the same stop display as the first decorative symbol in FIG. Display similar to the display in the first symbol display area 208X in FIG.

  14 may be developed after the normal pseudo-continuous production shown in FIG. 14, or only one of them may be executed.

<Example F>
FIG. 19 is a diagram showing step by step another example of an effect (for example, an effect of a high-speed pseudo-ream) centering on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6B to FIG. 6C is the second decorative symbol variation display (second variation display, FIG. 8F) in the second symbol display area 208Y of the second image display device 2082. ) Is the same as the timing shown in FIGS. 18 (n) to (o) except that the display is performed, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 4D, a special symbol (for example, a special symbol displayed as “continue”) related to the high-speed pseudo-ream is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display region 208b of the first symbol display region 208X. , Temporarily stopped). Even at this timing, the second decorative symbol variation display (second variation display) continues to be displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y of the second image display device 2082 (not stopped).

  In the timing shown in FIG. 6E, when the special symbol related to the high-speed pseudo-ream is stopped and displayed, the first decorative symbol variation display (first variation display) starts in the first symbol display area 208X, and the high-speed pseudo-ream starts. A state in which a pseudo-ream effect is being executed is shown. Also at this timing, the second decorative symbol variation display (second variation display) continues to be displayed (not stopped) in the second symbol display area 208Y. Other configurations are the same as the configurations of FIGS. 18 (n) to 18 (q).

  In this example, the second decorative symbol variation display (second variation display) is displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y of the second image display device 2082 during the period of FIGS. continuing. And in the period of Drawing 19 (b)-the figure (d), the 1st decoration design and the 2nd decoration design are in a different state. As described above, when the effect of the high-speed quasi-continuation is executed (even if a break (such as a temporary stop of a special symbol) may be provided during the performance of the high-speed quasi-continuation, the second variation display is continued. It may be.

  In this example, since there is no stop display (temporary stop display) of the second decorative symbol, there is no prior blurring. However, if the way of viewing is changed, there is no stop display (temporary stop display) of the second decorative symbol (the display of variation of the second decorative symbol (second variation display) continues to be displayed), so that the normal pseudo-continuation is displayed. It can also be said that the player may be able to recognize whether it is an effect or a high-speed pseudo-ream effect (for example, it can be recognized by an advanced player).

<Example G>
FIG. 20 is a diagram showing another example of effects centered on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment step by step, and is an example of effects when button effects are executed.

(Example G-1)
The timing shown in FIG. 14B is the same as that shown in FIG. 14J except that the second decorative symbol is displayed in the state shown in FIG. That is, the decorative symbol (here “decoration 6”) is displayed in the left symbol display region 208j of the second symbol display region 208Y, and the decorative symbol (here “decoration 7”) is displayed in a stopped manner (swaying fluctuation) , Temporarily stopped), and the middle symbol variation display (high-speed variation) is executed in the middle symbol display area 208k.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 5C, the pseudo continuous symbol that has been enlarged and displayed in the first symbol display area 208X stops its enlarged display. The display size of the pseudo-continuous symbols at this timing is, for example, the same display size as that in FIG. 10B, and more specifically, the display of pseudo-continuous symbols (FIG. 14G, etc.) that are scroll-displayed. The size is larger than the size and does not exceed the display area of the first image display device 2081 (a level where pseudo-continuous symbols are not displayed on the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083).

  At this timing, an effect related to the operation means (button effect) is executed. That is, an animation related to the button effect is displayed in front of the enlarged pseudo-continuous pattern (overlapping a part of the pseudo-continuous pattern). The animation related to the button effect includes, for example, a display that prompts the operation of the operation means (for example, the chance button 136) and a display that indicates a valid reception period of the operation of the chance button 136. The display for prompting the operation of the operation means is, for example, an image imitating the chance button 136 (button image BG), a character “arrow!” And an arrow, and a display indicating a valid reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 ( The elapsed time notification image TG) displays, for example, the entire reception valid period as a colored (other than white) painted image, and the filled image becomes smaller as the reception valid period elapses (the meter subtracts (decreases)). This is the display that executes the animation. In accordance with this, the chance button 136 notifies that the built-in LED is lit red and that the operation is possible.

  In this example, the button image BG and the elapsed time notification image TG are overlapped on the front of the enlarged pseudo-simulated symbol. Although the example in which the image BG and the elapsed time notification image TG overlap each other is shown, at least the elapsed time notification image TG in which a meter is subtracted and displayed on at least a part of the front of the enlarged pseudo-simultaneous symbol is shown. You may be comprised so that a part may overlap.

  Further, at this timing, in the second symbol display area 208Y, the state of FIG. 15 (p) continues for the second decorative symbol as in FIG.

  The timing shown in FIG. 4D shows a state in which the chance button 136 is operated within the valid reception period of the operation of the chance button 136. In this embodiment, until the chance button 136 is operated in the button effect, the animation of the enlarged display of the pseudo-continuous pattern is stopped, and the chance button 136 is operated within the valid reception period of the operation of the chance button 136. If this happens, the animation of the enlarged display of pseudo-continuous symbols is resumed.

  Further, at this timing, in the second symbol display area 208Y, the state of FIG. 15 (p) continues for the second decorative symbol as in FIG.

  That is, in the figure (b)-the figure (d), the state of the 1st decoration design and the 2nd decoration design differs.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E shows a state in which the enlarged display of the pseudo-continuous symbols of the first decorative symbol is resumed by the operation of the chance button 136 and the width is further enlarged. At this timing, the left and right ends of the pseudo-continuous pattern are displayed in part of the display area of the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083, respectively. That is, one pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed over (spanning) a plurality of image display devices 208 ′ (first image display device 2081, second image display device 2082, and third image display device 2093).

  Further, in the middle symbol display area 208k of the second symbol display area 208Y by the operation of the chance button 136, as shown in the lower diagram of FIG. (Provisional stop display) with the symbol combination of “pseudo-symbol-decoration 7”, and thus, the start of the pseudo-continuous effect has been confirmed (not visible in the first symbol display area 208X (difficult to see) (Instead of the first decorative symbol), a stop display of pseudo-continuous symbols is informed). In the second image display device 2082, the enlarged left end portion of the pseudo-continuous symbol overlaps the second decorative symbol, the meter, and the stage name display area. For example, the left end portion of the pseudo-continuous symbol is at least the second decorative symbol. (In this example, the left end of the pseudo-continuous symbol is overlapped with the second decorative symbol, the meter, and the stage name display area).

  In the third image display device 2083, the enlarged right end portion of the pseudo-continuous pattern is overlapped with a part of the display in the third image display device 2083 (in this example, a character on the stage, And overlapped with the second hold number display in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2).

  At this timing, the family crest member 244A starts to rise and overlaps a part of the first image display device 2081.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 6 (f), the enlarged display of the first decorative symbol pseudo-continuous pattern is finished (enlargement is stopped at the same size as the pseudo continuous symbol shown in FIG. 5 (e)), and the family crest character that has risen 244A rotates at the raised position, and a sound effect “don” is output from the speaker 120. In the state where the button image is not displayed ((e) and (f) in the figure), the first image display device 2081 and the second image display device 2082 (and the third image display device 2083) are spread over. A pseudo-continuous pattern of the first decorative design is displayed. In the second decorative design, the state shown in FIG.

  Since the configuration other than this is the same as the configuration described with reference to FIGS. 14K to 14N, description thereof will be omitted.

  In this example, the button effect is executed during the execution of the first animation (stopping animation of special symbols, animation of middle symbols). That is, the first animation includes an animation related to the button effect (button effect animation). In this case, the button effect animation is displayed only on the first image display device 2081. The button effect animation may be displayed only on the second image display device 2082 (or the third image display device 2083), or may be displayed on each of the plurality of image display devices 208 ′. One button effect animation may be displayed over the image display device 208 ′.

  When the button effect is executed, until the button effect starts (for example, until the button effect animation shown in FIG. 10C starts displaying), the first symbol display device 2081 displays an enlarged display of pseudo-continuous symbols. When (enlarged animation) is executed and the button effect starts, the enlarged display of the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped. Then, when the chance button 136 is operated within the acceptance valid period of the operation of the chance button 136, the enlarged display of the pseudo continuous symbols is resumed.

  In addition, from the start of the button effect until the chance button 136 is operated, the decorative symbol is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208k of the second image display device 2082 (the second decorative symbol is shown in FIG. 15 (p)). In this state, by operating the chance button 136, the decorative symbol (in this case, the pseudo-continuous symbol) is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208k of the second image display device 2082 (the second decorative symbol is shown in FIG. 20 (e)). In the first image display device 2081, the enlarged display of pseudo-continuous symbols is resumed.

  That is, when the chance button 136 is operated at the time t1 from the start of the button effect, the second time is earlier than when the chance button 136 is operated after the time t2 (t2> t1) from the start of the button effect. The decorative symbol can be stopped and displayed, and the presence or absence of execution of a continuous effect (here, a pseudo-continuous effect) can be recognized at an early stage (a leading ball is generated by the second decorative symbol).

  In this example, after the operation of the chance button 136, the second image display device 2082 performs the stop display of the second decorative symbol (first timing), and the first image display device 2081 displays the pseudo-continuous symbol. The timing at which the enlarged display resumes (second timing) may be the same timing, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing is earlier than the first timing. It may be early.

  Note that even when the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 10D, the second decorative symbol (medium symbol) is not stopped and the variable display may be continued in FIG.

(Example G-2)
FIGS. 11 (h) to 11 (l) show a case where the button effect is executed during the execution of the first animation, and the operation is not performed within the valid reception period of the operation of the chance button 136. The timings shown in FIGS. 1H to 1L correspond to the timings shown in FIGS. 1B to 1F, respectively, and therefore redundant description is omitted. To do.

  Even in the case where the button effect is started in (i) in the same figure, as shown in (j) and (k) in the same figure, the operation is not performed within the valid reception period of the operation of the chance button 136. In this case, the stop display of the second decorative symbol (middle symbol) is not performed, and the variable display is continued (state shown in FIG. 15 (p)).

  The timing shown in FIG. 11L indicates a state in which the acceptance period for the operation of the chance button 136 has ended. In this case, when the time expires, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and in this example, the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208k (the state shown in the lower diagram of FIG. 20 (e)).

  Further, since the operation of the chance button 136 is not performed, and the enlarged display animation of the pseudo-continuous pattern in the first image display device 2081 cannot be resumed, at the timing shown in FIG. The maximum size pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed.

(Example G-3)
FIGS. (N) to (r) are cases where the button effect is executed during the execution of the first animation, and the operation is performed within the valid reception period of the operation of the chance button 136. This is an example of the case where the pseudo-continuous symbol of the first decorative symbol is not stopped and displayed, and the timings shown in (n) to (r) of the same figure are shown in (b) to (f) of FIG. Since it corresponds to the timing shown, overlapping description is omitted.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7 (p) shows a state where the chance button 136 is operated. Then, at the timing shown in (q) in the figure, the enlarged display of the pseudo-continuous design of the first decorative design is completed, and the display size before enlargement (in the initial state) in the middle design display area 208b of the first image display device 2081 is displayed. The display size) pseudo-continuous pattern shows a state where scroll display is started. Further, in the second image display device 2082, stop display (swing fluctuation, temporary stop) of the second decorative symbol is executed. The second decorative symbol in this case is the state shown in the lower diagram of (q) in the figure, and is a (temporary) stop display of a symbol combination of a numerical decorative symbol (for example, “decoration 6-decoration 8-decoration 7”). . Thereby, the fact that the pseudo-continuous symbols of the first decorative symbols are not stopped and displayed (the execution of the pseudo-continuous effects does not start) is prejudice.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 7 (r), the first decorative symbol (for example, “decoration 6-decoration 8-decoration 7”) having the same symbol combination as the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the first symbol display area 208X. Fluctuating, temporarily stopping), and notifying that the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect does not start.

  In the present embodiment, the pseudo-continuous pattern in the first symbol display area 208X is shown in the figure (q) from the display size shown in the figure (p) between the figure (p) and the figure (q). An animation that is reduced to the display size may be executed, or after the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 10 (p), the enlarged display is temporarily resumed and enlarged to a predetermined size (for example, the maximum size). An animation that is later reduced to the display size shown in FIG.

  When the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed, when the chance button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 8 (p), the second image display device 2082 displays a second decorative pattern of numbers (for example, “decoration 6-decoration 8- That the decorative combination of the symbol combination “decoration 7” is stopped (temporarily stopped) and the first image display device 2081 executes the animation of the reduced display of the pseudo-continuous symbols, and then the pseudo-continuous effect does not start to be executed. The suggested pseudo-continuous symbols are scrolled ((p) in the figure).

  Note that the scroll display of the middle symbol (special symbol) of the first decorative symbol does not start execution of the continuous effect (pseudo-continuous effect) because the special symbol does not stop at a predetermined position and the scroll display starts. There is also a configuration in which a special symbol is stopped and displayed in a false manner (a continuous effect (a pseudo-continuous effect) is executed), and the present embodiment can be applied even with this configuration. In that case, for example, at the timing shown in FIG. 14 (q), in the second symbol display area 208Y, the second decorative symbol including the pseudo-continuous symbol stop display is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol so that the first barre occurs. Alternatively, at the timing shown in FIG. 7 (r), the first decorative design and the second decorative design (decoration of the same design combination) including the stop display of the pseudo-continuous design in the middle design as shown in FIG. (Design) may be stopped and displayed.

<Example H>
FIG. 21 is a diagram showing another example of effects centered on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of this embodiment in a stepwise manner, and is an effect example performed after the big hit temporary stop display.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5B is a state where reach is formed, and the decorative symbol (here “decoration 6”) fluctuates (temporarily stops) in the left symbol display region 208c of the first symbol display region 208X. In the right symbol display area 208c, the decorative symbol (here “decoration 6”) fluctuates (temporarily stops), and in the middle symbol display region 208b, the middle symbol fluctuates at high speed.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 5C, the middle symbol changes to low speed fluctuation in the middle symbol display area 208b. In this low-speed fluctuation, for example, when the middle symbol passes “decoration 7”, other than the deviation is determined. Further, when the middle symbol stops before “decoration 5”, or when the middle symbol stops at “decoration 7”, the deviation is determined.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6D is a state in which an effect (notice effect) indicating that there is a possibility of developing into a super reach (for example, a swordsman reach) has been started. That is, in the first image display device 2081, a reduced display animation is executed in which the left symbol and the right symbol are gradually reduced while temporarily stopped. In addition, at a certain timing during the execution of the animation of the reduced display, the second image display device 2082 starts displaying the variation display of the second decorative symbol. In the icon display area 800, a pedestal appears below the change icon h01.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E is a state in which the animation of the reduced display of the left symbol and the right symbol is further advanced in the first image display device 2081, and the first image is displayed while the left symbol and the right symbol are reduced. An animation that moves so as to be spaced apart from each other in the upper left and upper right of the display area of the device 2081 is executed. The variation display of the second decorative symbol is continued.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6F is a state in which a display (notice effect) for notifying that the super reach (for example, swordsman reach) effect is started is executed, and the first image display device 2081 cuts the swordsman. An in-image (here, a character (swordsman) and an image on which characters “swordsman see !!”) are displayed.

  In the icon display area 800, the pedestal of the change icon h0, the other hold icons h11 and h12, and the pedestal of the hold icon are deleted, and only the change icon h0 is displayed. The variation display of the second decorative symbol is continued.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6G shows a state in which the scene changes in the first image display device 2081, the confrontation scene between the character (dono) and the character (swordsman) is displayed, and the super reach production has started. Yes.

  Further, in the second symbol display area 208Y of the second image display device 2082, as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 5G, the left symbol display area 208j and the right symbol display area 208l each have a decorative symbol (both in this example). “Decoration 6”) is temporarily displayed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the display starts with the second decorative symbol in the variable display state in the reach effect ((d) in the figure), and after the notice effect (super (f) in the figure) of the super reach effect is executed. When the super reach production is started, a temporary stop of the left symbol and the right symbol of the second decorative symbol is displayed ((g) in the figure).

  The timing shown in FIG. 11H shows a state where a special effect (special display EX) is being executed in the second symbol display area 208Y. The special effect is, for example, one of the notice effects informing that the promotion effect is executed. The special effect is an effect that is not executed in the first symbol area 208X, and is, for example, a display that reduces the visibility of the second symbol display area 208Y. In this example, the character display “CHANCE” is displayed (special display EX) on the front side of the second decorative symbol shown in the right diagram of FIG. 5G, that is, over the symbol display areas 208j to 208l. )It is carried out. The special effects may or may not be executed, and the ratio of execution (appearance) varies. In other words, the probability that the special effect is executed differs depending on the super reach effect being executed. Another production having a higher jackpot expectation than a certain production is configured such that the execution probability of the special production is higher when other conditions are the same. The probability that this special effect is executed (appearance) is 0%, 5%, 10%, 30%, 50%, 70%, 100%, and the like.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6I is a state in which the scene immediately after the confrontation is displayed on the first image display device 2081. At this timing, the special display EX in the second symbol display area 208Y is erased, and the second decorative symbol in the state shown in the right diagram of FIG.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 6J, the first image display device 2081 displays the scene where the character (dono) has won, and the decorative symbol (here “decoration 6”) shakes in the middle symbol display area 208b. It shows a state of being fluctuated (temporarily stopped). Also, in the second symbol display area 208Y, as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 8 (j), the decorative symbol (here “decoration 6”) fluctuates (temporarily stops) in the middle symbol display area 208k, and the big hit The second decorative design fluctuates (temporarily stops) in the symbol combination (in this example, “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6”).

  The timing shown in FIG. 10 (k) shows a state where the button effect has started to be executed. This button effect is, for example, a jackpot symbol promotion effect, and a large button image BG that makes the first decorative symbol invisible or difficult to be viewed by the player is displayed overlapping the first decorative symbol. A display prompting an operation of 136 (in this example, a character “press!” And an image of an arrow) and an elapsed time notification image TG indicating a valid reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 are displayed.

  The display of the button image BG makes it difficult to visually recognize the first decorative symbol in the first symbol display area 208X, but the second decorative symbol is the same jackpot symbol combination as the first decorative symbol (in this example, the same symbol (J) Fluctuation fluctuation (temporary stop) by the symbol combination “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6” shown in the right figure is visible to the player.

  When the chance button 136 is operated at this timing (within the operation acceptance period indicated by the elapsed time notification image TG), the first symbol display area 208X and the second symbol display are displayed as shown in FIG. In any of the areas 208Y, the jackpot symbol combination after the promotion (here, the decoration symbol of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” sways and fluctuates (temporarily stops) and becomes visible to the player. If the opportunity button 136 is not operated during the acceptance valid period and time is up, the promotion may be promoted and the display shown in FIG.

  In this effect example, when the button effect shown in FIG. 5K is executed, it is difficult to visually recognize the first decorative symbol in the first symbol display area 208X, and the second decorative symbol is visually recognized by the player in the second symbol display area 208Y. Although it is possible, the first ballet in the second decorative symbol (the first ballet of the combination of the decorative symbols after promotion shown in FIG. 1 (l)) does not occur.

  Thus, even in the case of developing into a super reach effect, the second decorative symbol is displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y at least at any timing before the development.

  For the player, the most interesting point is the result of the success or failure of the super reach production. Therefore, even if it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the first symbol display area 208X in the super reach effect, it is necessary to convey the state of the decorative symbol to the player by the second decorative symbol displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y. The nature is low. Therefore, when the second decorative symbol is displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y during execution of the super reach effect, the special effect related to the second decorative symbol (for example, the visibility of the second decorative symbol is reduced). Such as production). This special effect is executed with a certain probability (0%, 5%, 10%, 30%, 50%, 70%, 100%, etc.) depending on the situation.

  In FIG. 4D, the timing at which the display of the second decorative symbol starts (first timing) and the timing at which the reduced display of the first decorative symbol starts (second timing) are the same timing. Alternatively, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

  Also, in the same figure (g), the timing when the left symbol and the right symbol of the second decorative symbol temporarily stop (first timing) and the timing when the super reach production starts (second timing) are the same timing. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

  Moreover, the timing at which the special effect (special display EX) of the second decorative symbol starts is not limited to the timing in FIG.

  Also, in FIG. 6 (j), notification is made of the timing at which the middle symbol of the second decorative symbol temporarily stops (first timing) and the result of whether or not the super reach effect is achieved (in this example, the character (donor) has won). The display timing (second timing) to be displayed may be the same timing, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing. Good.

  In FIG. 1L, the timing at which the first decorative symbol after promotion is displayed (first timing) and the timing at which the second decorative symbol after promotion is displayed (second timing) are the same. It may be timing, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

<Example I>
FIG. 22 is a diagram showing another example of effects centered on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment in stages, and is another example of effects performed after the big hit temporary stop display.

  Since the timing shown in FIG. 21B is the same as the timing shown in FIG. 21J, description thereof is omitted.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5C shows a state in which the button effect has started to be executed. This button effect is, for example, an extra ball effect, and a button image BG on the first image display device 281 and a display urging the user to operate the chance button 136 (in this example, the text “Add extra ball!”) An arrow image) and an elapsed time notification image TG representing a valid reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 are displayed.

  At this timing, in the second symbol display area 208Y, the jackpot symbol combination after promotion (for example, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” shown in the right figure of FIG. 10C) is temporarily stopped and displayed. Barre is occurring.

  That is, as a result of the determination of success / failure, it is assumed that 16R jackpot is actually won, but in FIG. 4B, for example, a 4R jackpot symbol combination (for example, “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6”) is temporarily stopped and displayed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 5C, the ball-out effect is executed, and in the second symbol display area 208Y, the 16R jackpot symbol combination (for example, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”) is temporarily stopped. As a result, the player may be able to recognize that the 16R jackpot has been won (first ballet by the second decorative symbol).

  In the timing shown in FIG. 6D, when the chance button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 5C, the number of extra balls is displayed (out of ball display TT2). This is a state in which an effect of notifying that the player has been added is being executed. Here, the extra ball display TT2 is a display of an image of “+600”, thereby notifying that 600 balls have been added. The state of the second decorative design is the same as the right diagram of FIG.

  In addition, the player who has visually recognized the number of extra balls displayed TT2 may be able to predict the number of rounds actually won from the number of extra balls displayed. That is, if the maximum number of balls (prize balls) in the case of 16R big hit is 2400 balls (= 15 balls × 10 counts × 16R) as an example, for example, as shown in FIG. The number of balls obtained by a combination (for example, “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6”) is 600 balls (= 15 balls × 10 counts × 4R).

  In other words, the player who has visually recognized the display of the number of extra balls shown in (d) of the figure can actually use this number (or its addition) (even if the actual number of winning rounds by the second decorative symbol is unknown). Can predict how many R jackpots are. In other words, the display of the number of extra balls in this case is a notification relating to the jackpot (notification regarding how many R jackpots the actual jackpot is (the number of rounds actually won)).

  In (e) to (i) in the figure, the button effect (progress on the ball appearance) (chance button 136 operation by the player) and the display number TT2 on the ball appearance on the ball are repeated several times. At the timing shown, an extra ball number display TT2 (in this example, “MAX”) indicating that the extra ball number has reached the maximum number is executed.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 10 (k), the 16R big hit symbol combination (for example, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”) is temporarily stopped and displayed in the first symbol display area 208X. It is notified that the number of balls (the number of prize balls) is a big hit of 2400 balls). During the period from FIG. 10C to FIG. 10K, the temporary stop display of the 16R jackpot symbol combination (for example, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”) continues in the second symbol display area 208Y. (The first ballet with the second decorative pattern is continuing).

  In this example, the maximum number of balls (prize balls) in the case of 16R big hit (for example, 2400 balls) and the number of balls that are added in the same figure (d), figure (f) and figure (h) Depending on the display TT2 (total), the player may be able to recognize that the player has won the 16R jackpot at the timing shown in FIG. In other words, it can be said that the tip ball is generated by the extra ball number display TT2 shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 8C, the timing at which the display of the second decorative symbol on the second image display device 2082 starts (first timing), and the timing at which the button effect on the first image display device 2081 starts (second). May be the same timing, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

  Thus, in one effect (for example, the jackpot symbol promotion effect shown in FIGS. 21 (k) to 21 (l)) performed after the jackpot temporary stop display, the second decorative symbol is displayed before the chance button 136 is operated. However, in other effects (for example, effects such as the appearance of adding a ball and the effect of adding bonus R shown in FIG. 22) among the effects performed after the jackpot temporary stop display, the second decorative symbol is used. The first burr (FIG. 22 (c)) may occur.

<Example J>
FIGS. 23A to 23G are diagrams showing another example of effects centering on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment in stages, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol. In addition to the above, it is an effect example in which the third decorative symbol is displayed.

(Example J-1)
FIGS. 23A to 23F are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 16A to 16F except that the third decorative symbol is displayed in the third symbol display area 208Z. Therefore, it demonstrates centering around a different point mainly and abbreviate | omits description other than that.

  As shown in FIG. 6B, the third decorative symbol is a decorative symbol displayed in the third symbol display area 208Z separately from the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol. As an example, the image display device One of 208 ′ (in this example, the first image display device 2081) is always displayed at least during the decorative symbol variation game (timing during execution of the decorative symbol variation display or stop display) (first display). 2 is a decorative symbol (displayed even if no decorative symbol is displayed). In addition, the display size of each of the third decorative symbols is at least smaller than the display size of each of the first decorative symbols, and the overall display size of the third decorative symbol is at least larger than the entire display size of the first decorative symbol. It is a small decorative design (mini decorative design). In the following description, when “the third decorative symbol is always displayed” is described, it means “the third decorative symbol is always displayed during the period in which the decorative symbol is displayed”. .

  The display of the third decorative symbol is continued during the period of FIG. 10 (a) to FIG. 10 (g). During the display, for example, as shown in FIG. You may comprise so that the position of 208Z may move.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 5G, for example, after the timing shown in FIG. 5F, the other movable bodies (the eight generations 224B and the generals 224C) descend from the initial position, and the first image display device 2081 is displayed. It is in the state which overlaps with the upper front. At this timing, a part of the pseudo-continuous symbol and a part of the second decorative symbol displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y are covered by the Yatsushiro character 224B and the general character 224C so that it can be visually recognized by the player. It is difficult (not visible).

  In the example shown in FIGS. 23 (a) to 23 (g), the first image display device 2081 is provided with the third symbol display area 208Z and is always displayed during the variable game of FIG. Yes. In this example, since the period shown in FIGS. 23 (b) to 23 (g) is during the variable game shown in FIG. 1 (timing during decorative display of the decorative symbol), the first decorative symbol is not visible to the player. Even at the timing ((d) to (g) in the figure), the second decorative symbol is not displayed (difficult to see) (the timing (b), (c), (g) in the figure) The third decorative symbol is always displayed. Note that even if a special symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol) is stopped and displayed on the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, the third decorative symbol does not have a special symbol and is displayed in a stopped state. There is no.

  Further, the third symbol display area 208Z is configured to be movable. As shown in FIGS. 9E to 9F, for example, a movable body or the like moves to the front of the image display device 208 ′, and Even when at least part of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol is difficult to visually recognize by the movable body, the third decorative symbol is always visible to the player by the movement of the third symbol display area 208Z. .

(Example J-2)
FIGS. (N) to (r) are diagrams showing another example of effects centering on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment in stages. This is another example of the effect in which the third decorative symbol is displayed in addition to the decorative symbol.

  FIGS. (N) to (o) are the same timings as the effects in FIGS. 21 (c) to 21 (d), but the second symbol display is displayed on the upper left of the first image display device 2081, for example. An area 208Y is provided to display a second decorative symbol, and a third symbol display area 208Z is provided above the explanation display area TT1 to constantly display the third decorative symbol. That is, there is a case in which a plurality of mini decorative symbols may be displayed (simultaneously) on one image display device (first image display device 2081). However, the states of the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol are different.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 11 (n), the right symbol and the left symbol (for example, “decoration 6”, respectively) of the second decorative symbol are stopped and displayed, and the middle symbol is changing at high speed (FIG. 21 (g) right). Figure state). In addition, the third decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 10 (o), a reach effect is started and a reduced movement animation of a first decorative symbol (for example, a right symbol and a left symbol in which “decoration 6” is temporarily stopped, respectively) is being executed. It is. The second decorative symbol continues the state shown in the right diagram of FIG. 21 (g), and the third decorative symbol performs variable display.

  In the figure (p) and the figure (q), the first decorative symbol approaches the second decorative symbol due to the reduced movement animation, and a part of the first decorative symbol overlaps the second decorative symbol. Is in a state where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize (not visible). The second decorative symbol continues the state shown in the right diagram of FIG. 21 (g), and the third decorative symbol performs variable display.

  FIG. 7 (r) shows a state where one (the first decorative symbol in this example) is not displayed after the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are substantially overlapped. The second decorative symbol continues the state shown in the right diagram of FIG. 21 (g), and the third decorative symbol performs variable display.

  In addition, in the example of production shown in (n) to (r) in the figure, the second decorative design is displayed on, for example, the second image display device 2082, and the first decoration is shown in (p) to (q) in the figure. The left symbol and the right symbol of the symbol move to the left and right respectively, the left symbol of the first decorative symbol is displayed on the second image display device 2082, and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol is displayed on the third image display device 2083. You may comprise. In this case, it may be configured such that the left symbol of the first decorative symbol moves in the direction of the second decorative symbol in the second image display device 2082, and is erased (not displayed) when it overlaps.

  In this example, the second decorative symbol is a decorative symbol that is displayed only for a certain period when a certain condition is satisfied, whereas the third decorative symbol is a decorative symbol that is always displayed.

  In addition, although each Example (production example) described in this specification can be applied in appropriate combination, when applied in combination with the present Example, the second decorative design in each Example is always displayed. It will never be done.

  Further, the design of the third decorative design may be different from the design of the first decorative design and the second decorative design. Even in this case, the third decorative design is always displayed.

  Also, as shown in (g), (p), and (q) in the figure, the second decorative symbol is overlapped by the first decorative symbol, a movable body, etc., and it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize (not visible). However, the third decorative symbol (which is configured to be able to move and display) is always displayed even if the first decorative symbol or the movable body moves.

  On the other hand, the third decorative symbol is configured to be visible to a player whose decorative symbol is mainly displayed in a variable manner, and it is difficult to specify the symbol compared to the second decorative symbol. Further, since the third decorative symbol does not include a special symbol, the combination (state) of the decorative symbol is not notified to the player as an alternative to the first decorative symbol, unlike the second decorative symbol.

<Example of production K>
FIG. 24 is a diagram showing another example of the effect centering on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment in stages, the second image display device (left sub liquid crystal) 2082, the third image display. It is an effect example related to the operation of the device (right sub liquid crystal) 2083.

(Example of production K-1)
FIGS. 9A to 10B show an example of effects produced by the second image display device (left sub liquid crystal) 2082 and the third image display device (right sub liquid crystal) 2083. In this example, the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 2081 is provided with a second symbol display area 208Y for displaying a second decorative symbol.

  FIG. 17A shows the timing corresponding to the timing shown in FIG. 17B. The second image display device (left sub-liquid crystal) 2082 and the third image display device (right sub-liquid crystal) 2083 are background images. Only displayed. At this timing, the left sub-liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub-liquid crystal 2083 are in the initial positions and are farthest from each other, and the left sub-liquid crystal 2082 overlaps with the left end portion of the main liquid crystal 2081 and is arranged on the left of the main liquid crystal 2081. The right sub liquid crystal 2083 overlaps with the right end portion of the main liquid crystal 2081 and is disposed on the right side of the main liquid crystal 2081.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5B shows a state in which one special symbol (for example, a pseudo-continuous symbol) is divided and displayed on the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083 at the initial position. At this timing, only the frame portion of the second symbol display area 208Y starts displaying on the main liquid crystal 2081. In this embodiment, when the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083 are moved to predetermined positions, the pseudo continuous symbols are stopped and the execution of the pseudo continuous effect is confirmed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6C is a state in which the second decorative symbol starts to be displayed on the main liquid crystal 2081 and a part thereof is overlapped by the left sub-liquid crystal 2082 and cannot be visually recognized by the player. In this example, the middle symbol display area 208k of the second decorative symbol is not overlapped with the left sub-liquid crystal 2082 at the timing shown in FIG. In the state shown in j), a special symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol) is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208k. Therefore, the player who has visually recognized this may be able to recognize the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol (execution of the pseudo-continuous effect) (the first decorative symbol has occurred).

  The timing shown in FIG. 6D is a state in which the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083 start moving (sliding) in front of the main liquid crystal 2081 so as to be close to each other. Due to the movement of the left sub liquid crystal 2082, the second decorative pattern of the main liquid crystal 2081 is completely overlapped, and the whole is not visible to the player.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E is a state in which the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083 are in contact (adjacent) at the front center of the main liquid crystal 2081 and stopped. When the left sub-liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub-liquid crystal 2083 are in contact with each other, the pseudo continuous images that are divided and displayed on both the sub-liquid crystals 2082 and 2083 are integrated (strand) over both the sub-liquid crystals 2082 and 2083. Is displayed. Thereby, it becomes the state of the stop display of a pseudo | simulation continuous symbol, and execution of the pseudo | simulation continuous effect is started after this. The first decorative design of the main liquid crystal 2081 is overlapped with the two sub liquid crystals 2082 and 2083, and most of them cannot be recognized by the player.

  On the other hand, the second decorative design once overlapped by the left sub-liquid crystal 2082 is exposed from the left side of the left sub-liquid crystal 2082, and is again visible to the player. The second decorative symbol is in the state shown in FIG. 6 (j). Similar to the display of the pseudo decorative symbol of the first decorative symbol by the two sub liquid crystals 2082 and 2083, the pseudo decorative symbol is temporarily displayed in the middle symbol display area 208k. Stop is displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6F is a state in which the left sub-liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub-liquid crystal 2083 again start moving in directions away from each other toward the initial position. At this timing, the first decorative symbol of the main liquid crystal 2081 that has been overlapped by the two sub liquid crystals 2082 and 2083 is again visible to the player. In this example, in the state where the special symbols are continuously displayed on the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083, another symbol (in this case, “decoration”) is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b of the main liquid crystal 2081. 7 ”is temporarily stopped and the combination of the first decorative symbols“ decoration 6-decoration 7-decoration 7 ”is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (first symbol display area 208X). Has been. Further, a pseudo continuous number display (in this example, “× 2” indicating two times) is displayed.

  At this timing, the second decorative design of the main liquid crystal 2081 is again overlapped with the left sub-liquid crystal 2082.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5G is a state in which the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083 are moved to the initial positions, and the special symbols displayed on both the sub liquid crystals 2082 and 2083 are not displayed. Further, at this timing, a part of the second decorative design (FIG. (J)) of the main liquid crystal 2081 is not visible to the player by overlapping with the left sub-liquid crystal 2082.

  The timing shown in FIG. 11H shows a state in which the second symbol display area 208Y and the second decorative symbol of the main liquid crystal 2081 are not displayed. The timing shown in FIG. It shows a state in which the variation display (first variation display) of the first decorative symbol is resumed.

  Note that the display start timing (first timing) of the second decorative symbol and the start timing of movement of the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083 (second timing) in FIG. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

  In addition, the second decorative symbol non-display timing (first timing) and the completion timing (end of movement) of the left sub-liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub-liquid crystal 2083 to the initial positions in FIG. 2) may be the same timing, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

  In this production example, at least one sub liquid crystal is displayed in at least one of the states in which a continuous production (pseudo-continuous production) is executed (a state corresponding to a stop display of a special symbol (pseudo-continuous design)). (At least one of the left sub-liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub-liquid crystal 2083) is configured to move to a certain position.

  The second decorative pattern is overlapped by the moving sub liquid crystal in at least a part of the period when the sub liquid crystal moves.

(Example of production K-2)
24 (m) to 24 (r) show other examples of effects by the moving left sub liquid crystal 2082 and right sub liquid crystal 2083. FIG. In this example, one of the movable sub liquid crystals (for example, the left sub liquid crystal 2082) is provided with a second symbol display area 208Y for displaying a second decorative symbol.

  (M) to (r) in the same figure, except that the second symbol display area 208Y and the second decorative symbol are displayed on the left sub-liquid crystal 2082, respectively (b) to (g). Since the configuration is the same as that shown, only different portions will be described and redundant description will be omitted.

  That is, as in the same figure (b) to (g), in this production example, in a state of notifying that a continuous production (pseudo-continuous production) is executed (a special symbol (pseudo-continuous design) is stopped) In at least one of the corresponding states, at least one of the sub liquid crystals (at least one of the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083) is configured to move to a position.

  At this time, since the second decorative symbol (FIG. (J)) is displayed on the left sub-liquid crystal 2082 after the timing of FIG. 9 (n), the second decorative symbol is displayed while the second decorative symbol is being displayed. (N) to (r)) are not overlapped by other configurations and are always visible to the player.

  The second decorative design slides in front of the main liquid crystal 2081 in the left-right direction as the left sub liquid crystal 2082 moves.

  In this way, the (auxiliary) second decorative symbol that is an alternative to the first decorative symbol is always visible to the player during the display, and is moved and displayed, so that the decorative symbol can be changed or displayed. The player can easily recognize the state such as a temporary stop display.

  In the example of production shown in FIG. 24, an example in which one special symbol is displayed by two sub liquid crystals 2082 and 2083 has been described. However, a plurality of liquid crystals including at least one sub liquid crystal (image display device 208 ′) Two special symbols may be displayed. For example, the main liquid crystal 2081 and the left sub liquid crystal 2082 may be configured to display one special symbol, the main liquid crystal 2081 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083 may be configured to display one special symbol, or all the liquid crystal display devices 208 may be configured. A configuration may be used in which one special symbol is displayed by '.

<Example of production L>
FIG. 25 is a diagram showing another example of the effect centered on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment in stages, and shows the operation of the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083. It is another related production example.

  The second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083 may be arranged above and below the first image display device 208, respectively. As an example, the image display device arranged on the upper side of the first image display device 2081 is the second image display device 2082, and the image display device arranged on the lower side is the third image display device 2083.

  As an example, the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083 have a length in the vertical (height) direction that is shorter than a half of the length of the first image display device 2081, and also have a length in the width direction. Slightly short. Further, at the initial position, the second image display device 2082 has at least the lower end side portion thereof overlapping the front side of the upper end side portion of the first image display device 2081, and the third image display device 2083 has at least the upper end side thereof. The portion overlaps the front side of the lower end side portion of the first image display device 2081.

  In this example, the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083 are arranged so that the front of the first image display device 2081 is close to or separated from each other along the display surface of the first image display device 2081. It is configured to be movable in the vertical direction (sliding movement).

(Example L-1)
First, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 25A to 25C, the second image display device 2082 and the second symbol display area 208Y for displaying the second decorative symbol are provided.

  The timing shown to (a) of the figure is the state which has started the variable display of the 1st decoration symbol. As described above, in this embodiment, the first symbol display area 208X is provided on a plurality of image display devices 208 ′ (in this example, the first image display device 2081, the second image display device 2082, and the third image display device 2083). The variable display of the first decorative symbol is displayed across the three image display devices 208 ′.

  In addition, in the case of stop display (determined display), the first decorative symbol may be configured not to straddle the three image display devices 208 ′, or the first decorative design may be displayed on the first image display device 2081. A part of the decorative design may be configured to straddle the second image display device 2082 (or the third image display device 2083), and among the first decorative symbols displayed on the first image display device 2081 Only the middle symbol may be configured to straddle the second image display device 2082 (or the third image display device 2083).

  The timing shown in FIG. 6B is the first animation (special symbol) in the first image display device 2081 that is visible to the player from between the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083. Is a state in which a stop-swing animation and a medium-scheming animation) are being executed. Further, the first animation in this case is an animation including a button effect animation, and a button image BG on the front of the special symbol (so as to overlap), an image suggesting button operation (here, “Press!”) And an elapsed time notification image TG are displayed.

  At this timing, the first animation is executed on the first image display device 2081 so that the player cannot visually recognize the first decorative symbol. On the other hand, in the second image display device 2082, at this timing, display of the second decorative symbol in the state shown in FIG. 15 (o) is started, and the decorative symbol (in this example, “decoration 6”) is displayed in the left symbol display area 208j. ), A special symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol) is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208k, and a decorative symbol (in this example, “decoration 7”) is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display region 208l, and the execution of the continuous effect (pseudo-continuous effect) is started. Is informed of the decision. In FIG. 25, all the second decorative symbols are in the state shown in FIG.

  In this example, the first animation is executed only on the first image display device 2081, but a part thereof may be executed on the second image display device 2082 and / or the third image display device 2083.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 5C, in response to the operation of the chance button 136, an effect of notifying that a continuous effect (here, a pseudo-continuous effect) is performed (in this example, a long scroll “ The notice effect in which the characters “continue” are displayed is executed. Behind the notice effect, a temporary stop display of the first decorative symbol is performed, and the left symbol (“decoration 6”) and the right symbol (“decoration 7”) are visible to the player. The symbol is overlapped with the notice effect and is not visible to the player.

  This notice effect is displayed across the three image display devices 208 ′. That is, a part of the notice effect (in this example, a part of the scroll) is also displayed on the second image display device 2082, but the second decorative design is displayed overlapping the notice effect. The decorative design is visible to the player. In other words, the first decorative symbol (particularly the middle symbol) of the first image display device 2081 is not visible to the player, but the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped by the second decorative symbol (the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed). Is recognized by the player.

  In this embodiment, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is displayed across a plurality of image display devices 208 ′, but the special symbol or button image does not straddle the plurality of image display devices 208 ′. The image is displayed on the one-image display device 2081. Here, in this embodiment, “displayed over a plurality of image display devices 208 ′” includes “displayed over a plurality of all image display devices 208 ′”. In other words, as shown in FIG. 5A, the first image display device 2081, the second image display device 2082, and the third image display device with the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083 separated from each other. This means that the first decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner across 2083.

  In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the structure by which the scroll display of the symbol (for example, middle symbol) with a 1st decoration symbol is displayed ranging over several image display apparatus 208 'may be sufficient. In addition, you may replace the structure which performs the button effect shown in FIG. 20 with a present Example.

(Example L-2)
The effect examples shown in (d) to (e) of the figure are examples in which the notice effect is executed by the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 6D, the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083 slide and move toward each other, abut (adjacent up and down), and the first decorative design is visually recognized by the player. It is a disabled state. Even at this timing, it is possible for the player to recognize the temporary stop state of the decorative symbol (the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed) by the second decorative symbol.

The timing shown in FIG. 5E is a state in which the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083 are separated and return to the initial position. At this timing, the same display as in FIG.
(Example L-3)
FIG. 25 (g) to FIG. 25 (h) show other examples of effects.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5G corresponds to the timing shown in FIG. 4C, and a continuous effect (here, a pseudo-continuous effect) is performed in response to the operation of the chance button 136. This is a state in which an effect of notifying that (in this example, a notification effect in which the characters “continue” are displayed on the scroll) is being executed. The notice effect is executed only by the first image display device 2081, and behind that, a temporary stop display of the first decorative symbol is performed, and the left symbol (“decoration 6”) and the right symbol (“decoration 7”) are displayed. Although it is visible to the player, the middle symbol is overlapped by the notice effect, and is not visible to the player.

  At this timing, the second decorative symbol is displayed on the second image display device 2082, and the player recognizes that the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped (the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped) by the second decorative symbol. It is possible.

  The timing shown in FIG. 11H is a state in which the second image display device 2082 slides downward and overlaps a part of the notice effect displayed on the first image display device 2081 (above the scroll). . In this case, a part of the notice effect displayed on the first image display device 2081 is also displayed on the second image display device 2082, and the entirety of the notice effect is visible to the player.

  In addition, the second decorative symbol moves relatively downward as the second image display device 2082 moves, but does not overlap with the notice effect displayed on the two-image display device 2082, and is visually recognized by the player. It is possible.

(Example L-4)
FIG. 25 (i) to FIG. 25 (j) show other examples of effects. In this example, the second decorative symbol is displayed above the first decorative symbol of the first image display device 2081.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5I is a state in which the first decorative design is displayed on the first image display device 2081 and a notice effect is executed overlapping with a part thereof. Behind the notice effect, a temporary stop display of the first decorative symbol is performed, and the left symbol (“decoration 6”) and the right symbol (“decoration 7”) are visible to the player. The symbol is overlapped with the notice effect and is not visible to the player.

  On the other hand, it moves to the 1st image display apparatus 2081, a 2nd decoration symbol is displayed above the 1st decoration symbol, and it can be visually recognized by a player.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6J is a state in which the second image display device 2082 slides downward and overlaps a part of the notice effect displayed on the first image display device 2081 (above the scroll). . In this case, a part of the announcement effect displayed on the first image display device 2081 is also displayed on the second image display device 2082, and the entire announcement effect is visible to the player.

  On the other hand, the second decorative symbol displayed on the first image display device 2081 is overlapped by the movement of the second image display device 2082, and a part of the second decorative symbol is not visible to the player.

(Production example L-5)
FIG. 25 (k) to FIG. 25 (l) show other examples of effects. The timing shown in FIG. 10 (k) is the same as the timing shown in FIG. 10 (i), and the second decorative symbol moves to the first image display device 2081 and is displayed above the first decorative symbol. .

  The timing shown in FIG. 6L is a state in which the second image display device 2082 slides downward and overlaps a part of the notice effect displayed on the first image display device 2081 (above the scroll). . In this case, a part of the announcement effect displayed on the first image display device 2081 is also displayed on the second image display device 2082, and the entire announcement effect is visible to the player.

  At this timing, the second decorative symbol displayed on the first image display device 2081 moves to the second image display device 2082 and is visible to the player.

  The timing at which the second decorative symbol moves may be before the second image display device 2082 is overlapped, may be at the same time as the overlap, or overlaps the second image display device 2082. It may be after.

  Thus, in the present embodiment (FIG. (A) to (c), FIG. (D) to (e), (g) to (h)), there are a plurality of special symbols. Displayed on each of the image display devices (here, the first image display device 2081 and the second image display device 2082), and the other image (here, the image of the notice effect) is displayed only on the front of one of the special symbols. The notice effect is displayed across a plurality of image display devices 208 ′ by the movement of the second image display device 2082 (or the third image display device 2083).

  In this embodiment (FIG. (K) to (l)), the image display device (here, the second image display device 2082) is moved and another image display device (here, the first image display device is here). In the case of overlapping the second decorative symbol displayed in 2081), the second decorative symbol moves to the second image display device 2082 and maintains a state that can be recognized by the player. In this case, the other display (for example, the first decorative design) does not move to the second image display device 2082, but the other display (for example, the image of the notice effect) that is overlapped by the movement of the second image display device 2082 (Part of the image) is displayed on the second image display device 2082 (moved to the second image display device 2082).

  Further, as shown in FIGS. (I) to (j), the second decorative design may not move even if it is overlapped by the moving second image display device 2082.

<Example M>
FIG. 26 is a diagram showing another example of effects centered on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment step by step.
(Example of production M-1)
The same figure (b)-the same figure (e) are the example of effects during a big hit.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5B is a state before the big hit game is started, and a jackpot symbol combination (for example, “1” is displayed as the first decorative symbol in the first symbol display area 208X of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 2081. “Decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”) is temporarily stopped and the built-in LED of the chance button 136 is rainbow-colored. In the second symbol display area 208Y of the second image display device (left sub liquid crystal) 2082, a second decorative symbol having the same contents as the first decorative symbol is displayed as shown in the lower diagram of FIG.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5C is a state of a big hit game (for example, during a round game), and an effect during a big hit is executed in the main liquid crystal 2081 (including the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083). Yes. During the big hit game, in principle, the second decorative symbol is not displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 4D is a state in which the big hit game is continued, but is a state in which the error is notified by the occurrence of an error (for example, a lower pan full tank error). The error notification is, for example, an error display E1 on the main liquid crystal 2081 (in this example, display of characters “please remove the ball”). In this case, for example, the left sub-liquid crystal 2082 displays the second decorative symbol (decorative symbol in which the big hit symbol combination (for example, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”) is temporarily stopped and displayed).

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E is a state in which the error display E1 in the main liquid crystal 2081 is not displayed due to the cancellation of the error. At this timing, the second decorative symbol is also not displayed again.

  In this case, in FIG. 4D, the timing at which the second decorative symbol is displayed (first timing) and the timing at which the error display E1 is displayed (second timing) may be the same timing. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

  In FIG. 9E, the timing at which the second decorative symbol is not displayed (first timing) and the timing at which the error display E1 is not displayed (second timing) may be the same timing. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

(Example of production M-2)
Next, (g) to (l) in the figure are examples of effects in the case of performing effects using the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 5G, in the first symbol display area 208X of the main liquid crystal 2081, the same symbol (for example, “decoration 1”) is temporarily stopped for the right symbol and the left symbol, and the middle symbol is changing. Thus, the reach production has been started. In this case, for example, in the second symbol display area 208Y of the left sub liquid crystal 2082, the second decorative symbol having the same symbol combination as the first decorative symbol (the state shown in FIG. 5F) is displayed.

  The timing shown in FIGS. 11H to 11L is a state in which the middle symbol countdown display is executed in the middle symbol display area 208b of the first symbol display area 208X. On the other hand, in the second symbol display area 208Y, the second decorative symbol continues to be displayed in the state shown in FIG. 5F (the countdown display is not performed). Thus, in the case of performing an effect using the middle symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b of the first symbol display area 208X (not limited to the countdown display), the middle symbol fluctuates in the second symbol display area 208Y. The display may be continued.

(Example of production M-3)
Next, (m) to (o) in the figure are examples of effects when a triple line reach effect is performed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (m) is a state in which a triple line reach effect by the first decorative symbol is being executed, and in this case, the second decorative symbol is not displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 9 (n) is a state in which the turning effect of the line with the first decorative symbol (in this example, “decoration 7”) is being executed. In this case, as shown in the lower diagram of FIG. 9 (n), the second decorative symbol is displayed in the same symbol combination as the decorative symbol of the line (in this example, “decoration 7”).

  The timing shown in FIG. 5 (o) is a state in which the turning effect of another line of the first decorative design (in this example, “decoration 8”) is being executed. In this case, the second decorative symbol is not displayed. Is displayed.

  In this example, the second decorative design may be displayed when a certain line is produced in triple line reach, and the second decorative design may be hidden in the case of double line reach.

  In addition, in the same figure (n), the timing (1st timing) at which a 2nd decoration symbol is displayed, and the start timing (2nd timing) of the roaring effect of a 1st decoration symbol are the same timing. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

  In FIG. 5 (o), the timing at which the second decorative symbol is not displayed (first timing) and the timing at which the first decorative symbol is turned on (second timing) are the same timing. Alternatively, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

(Example of production M-4)
27 (b) to 27 (e) are examples of effects when the second decorative symbol is displayed, for example, between FIGS. 14 (g) to 14 (h).

  The timing shown in FIG. 14B is the same as the timing shown in FIG. 14G, and the main liquid crystal 2081 is in a state where the scroll display of the middle symbol (special symbol) is being executed.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 5C, in the main liquid crystal 2081, the first decorative symbol is temporarily stopped (the special symbol is stopped), and the second decorative symbol is also in the same state as the first decorative symbol (FIG. 15 (o) state). At this timing, the main liquid crystal 2081 performs an effect (hereinafter, referred to as “display group integrated effect”) in which the display mode is integrally changed for a plurality of displays (display group G) in the display area. As an example of the display group integrated production, the display group G can be integrally enlarged, reduced, tilted, and rotated (production of one or a combination of these), or the display group can be shaken integrally. An effect to be displayed (shake vision effect) or an animation effect including these scenes. In this example, as shown in FIG. 5C, a display group integrated effect is performed to incline the display group G integrally.

  Specifically, a plurality of displays in the display area of the main liquid crystal 2081 (a plurality of display groups G including a background display) are integrally tilted with respect to an outer frame (physical frame) of the main liquid crystal 2081 ( Scene). In such a display group integrated production, a plurality of display groups G including a background display are slightly reduced and tilted integrally, so that a space is generated in the actual display area, and the space is filled with, for example, black. Is displayed.

  In this example, the second decorative design is displayed on the main liquid crystal 2081 even while the display group integrated effect is being executed. In this example, the second decorative design is not inclined and is displayed in a predetermined area. The display content (symbol combination) of the second decorative symbol is the same as the display content (symbol combination) of the first decorative symbol displayed in the display group integrated production. In this example, “decoration 6-special symbol ( It is a symbol combination of a decorative symbol of "Pseudo-continuous symbol)-Decoration 7".

  The second decorative design is displayed so as to overlap a space (black filled display) generated by the inclination of the display group G over at least a part of the inclined display group G. The second decorative symbol may be displayed so as to overlap only in the space (black fill display) generated by the inclination of the display group G, or overlap only in the inclined display group G. It may be displayed. Further, the second decorative design may be displayed with an inclination at the same angle as the display group G.

  Even if the display group integrated effect may make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the first decorative design, the combination of the decorative design (its state) may be recognized by the player using the second decorative design (second). It is possible to make a ballet with decorative designs).

  The timing shown in FIG. 6D is a state in which the display group integrated production is finished. At this timing, the display group G displayed in an inclined manner returns to the normal display state, and the second decorative symbol continues to be displayed at the same position. In this example, a part of the first decorative symbol (“decoration 6” on the left symbol) that has returned to the normal display is overlapped with the second decorative symbol. The state of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol is the same.

  The timing shown in FIG. 14E is the same as the timing shown in FIG. 14H, and the second decorative symbol is not displayed.

  In addition, in the same figure (c), the timing which the display start of the 2nd decoration symbol (1st timing) and the start timing (2nd timing) of a display group integrated production may be the same timing. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

(Example of production M-5)
(G) to (i) in the figure are examples of effects when the design of the decorative symbols changes in, for example, the special figure 1 variable game and the special figure 2 variable game.

  For example, the maximum number of reserves is 8, and the specifications differ between the special figure 1 variable game and the special figure 2 variable game (for example, the special 1 variable game has a probability variation of 50% and the special 2 variable game has a probability variation of 100%, or 16R big hit In other cases, the design of at least a part of the decorative symbol may be different between the decorative symbol that performs the variable display of the special figure 1 and the decorative symbol that performs the variable display of the special symbol 2. The present embodiment is a display example of the second decorative symbol in such a case.

  Specifically, in this example, the floating game of the special figure 2 has a higher advantage than the floating game of the special figure 1, and for example, the special figure 2 has a symbol combination of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”. 16R is a big hit in the case of the symbol combination of “decoration 3-decoration 3—decoration 3”, whereas FIG. 1 shows 16R only in the case of the symbol combination of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”. It will be a big hit.

  Further, it is assumed that the design for the 16R jackpot is different in design from at least a part of other decorative designs. For example, the mark M indicating the 16R big hit symbol is given to the right symbol (“decoration 7”) in FIG. That is, in the variable game of the special figure 1, the mark M is given only to the decoration symbol “decoration 7”, and in the special game of the special figure 2, the mark M is given to the decoration symbols “decoration 3” and “decoration 7”. Is done.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (g) is a combination of symbols shifted to the first symbol display area 208X of the main liquid crystal 2081 as a result of the variable game shown in FIG. 1 (for example, the symbol combination “decoration 3-decoration 8-decoration 7”). The first decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed.

  Since it is the variable game of special figure 1, the mark M is given only to the right design ("decoration 7") of the first decorative design, and the mark M is not given to the left design ("decoration 3").

  At this timing, the special figure 1 hold is 2, the special figure 2 hold is 2 (the total of the hold is 4), and the icon display area 800 displays the change icon h0 at the right end thereof, and the change icon On the left of h0, hold icons h11 and h12 corresponding to the hold in FIG. 1 and hold icons h21 and h22 corresponding to the hold in FIG. 2 are alternately displayed.

  In the right sub-liquid crystal 2083, the second reserved number display ("2 2" in this example) shown in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2 is performed.

  In the left sub-liquid crystal 2082, as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 10G, the second decorative symbol in the same state as the first decorative symbol is (temporarily) stopped and displayed.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 6H, the variable game of the special figure 1 is stopped, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are out of combination (for example, the symbol combination “decoration 3-decoration 8-decoration 7”). Are stopped and displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (i) is a state in which one hold in FIG. 2 has been consumed and the variable game in FIG. 2 has started. In the first symbol display area 208X of the main liquid crystal 2081, the decorative symbol fluctuation display (first fluctuation display) of the special figure 2 is started, and in the icon display area 800, the fluctuation icon h0 corresponding to the fluctuation is displayed at the left end. On the left, hold icons h11, h22, and h12 are displayed. In the right sub liquid crystal 2083, the second reserved number display (in this example, “2 1”) of the special drawings 1 and 2 is performed.

  Further, in the left sub-liquid crystal 2082, as shown in the right diagram of (i), the second decorative symbol of the symbol combination (for example, the symbol combination of “decoration 3-decoration 8-decoration 7”) is continuously stopped and displayed. However, since the variable display of the special symbol 2 is being executed, the mark M is given to the “decoration 3” of the left symbol and the “decoration 7” of the right symbol of the second decorative symbol. That is, the mark M is added to “decoration 3” of the left symbol of the second decorative symbol as compared with the state of FIG.

  When the floating game of the special figure 1 is changed to the floating game of the special figure 2, the mark M is also given to the “decoration 3” which is the 16R jackpot symbol and is notified to the player, but in the first symbol display area 208X, the high speed is displayed. It is very difficult to recognize the decorative design to which the mark M has been given since the fluctuation has started.

  Even in such a case, if the corresponding decorative design (in this example, “decoration 3”) is included in the second decorative design that is stopped and displayed, the mark M is added to the decorative design. Thus, it is possible to notify the player of the 16R jackpot symbol.

  It should be noted that, in the first decorative design and the second decorative design, the manner in which the design is switched (the manner in which the mark M is applied and erased) and the timing in which the design is switched (the timing in which the mark M is applied and erased) are made different. It may be the same or the same.

(Example of production M-6)
FIG. 5M is another example of the second decorative design, for example, a display during execution of the super reach effect.

  In general, for example, a player is often not interested in a combination of decorative symbols (which symbol is used as a template) during execution of a super reach effect. In such a case, since it is less necessary to report accurate information in the second decorative symbol, an effect using the second decorative symbol may be performed.

  In this example, for example, a special display EX (here) is used as a notice effect so that it overlaps with the second decorative symbol (the same state as the right diagram in FIG. 21 (g)) and the second decorative symbol is difficult for the player to visually recognize. Then, an effect of displaying “CHANCE” is displayed.

  Further, in addition to the second decorative symbol, another decorative symbol (third decorative symbol whose display size is smaller than the first decorative symbol) may be displayed, which makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize (notice effect is provided). Instead of the second decorative symbol (executed), the state of the decorative symbol may be displayed in the third decorative symbol. In this example, in the third symbol display area 208Z provided in the first image display device 2081, the third decorative symbol shown in the left diagram of FIG. Status) is displayed.

<Example N>
FIG. 28 is a diagram showing another example of the effect centering on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment in a stepwise manner, in the case where the ball removal display E2 and the second decorative design are displayed. It is a production example.

  In addition, in FIG. 28, the example of production | presentation in the case of performing the ball removal display E2 in the structure demonstrated so far is demonstrated, The description is abbreviate | omitted about the structure mentioned above.

  Here, the ball removal display E2 is a display that is displayed on the image display device 208 ′ when the lower pan full error has occurred, and notifies the player of the occurrence of the error, and is one of the error displays. The lower plate full tank error is an error that occurs when the lower plate 128 is full. When the lower plate full state is resolved by operating the ball discharge lever 132, the lower plate full tank error is cleared and the ball removal display E2 is displayed. Is also hidden.

(Example N-1)
The timings shown in FIG. 14B and FIG. 14C correspond to the timings of FIG. 14I and FIG. 14J, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 6B, at the timing when the width of the special symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol) gradually starts to be enlarged, for example, a part of the first decorative symbol of the main liquid crystal 2081 (in this example, the left symbol The ball removal display E2 is displayed so as to overlap with (part).

  On the other hand, at this timing, the pseudo continuous symbol does not overlap with the ball removal display E2. Further, neither the icon display area 800 nor the explanation display area TT1 overlaps the ball removal display E2.

  Although the second symbol display area 208Y is displayed on the left sub liquid crystal 2082, the display start timing (first timing) and the display start timing (second timing) of the ball removal display E2 are the same timing. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

  As shown in FIG. 6C, when the enlarged display of the pseudo-continuous symbols proceeds, a part of the pseudo-continuous symbols is overlapped by the ball removal display E2. At this timing, the second decorative design (the state shown in FIG. 15 (o)) is displayed on the left sub-liquid crystal 2082.

  The display start timing (first timing) of the second decorative symbol in the state shown in FIG. 15 (o) and the timing (second timing) at which a part of the pseudo-continuous symbol is overlapped by the ball removal display E2 are as follows. The same timing may be used, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

(Example N-2)
The timings shown in FIGS. 7E and 7F correspond to the timings shown in FIGS. 17D and 17F, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 4E, in the middle symbol display area 208b, the special symbol (character (princess)) is stopped and displayed (temporarily). A ball removal display E2 is displayed above the display area TT1. In this case, the ball removal display E2 does not overlap with any display.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 5F, the mini character (princess), which is a display related to the continuous performance, starts displaying and overlaps the ball removal display E2.

(Example N-3)
The timings shown in (h) and (i) of FIG. 20 correspond to the timings of FIG. 20 (d) and FIG. 20 (e), respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 11H, at the timing when the chance button 136 is operated (or just before the operation) within the valid reception period of the operation of the chance button 136, the ball removal display E2 is displayed below the special symbol. At this timing, the ball removal display E2 does not overlap with any display.

  The display start timing (first timing) of the second decorative symbol (here, the state shown in FIG. 15 (p)) and the display start timing (second timing) of the ball removal display E2 are the same timing. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

  Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 5I, the special symbol resumes the enlarged display by the operation of the chance button 136, and the ball removal display E2 overlaps the enlarged display. The second decorative symbol at this timing is the state shown in FIG. In this case, the display start timing (first timing) of the second decorative symbol (FIG. 15 (o)) and the timing at which a part of the pseudo-continuous symbol is overlapped by the ball removal display E2 (second timing) May be the same timing, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

(Example N-4)
The timings shown in FIGS. (K) to (m) correspond to the timings of FIGS. 24 (c) to 24 (e), respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 10 (k), at the timing when the second decorative pattern (the state of FIG. 15 (o)) starts to be displayed on the main liquid crystal 2081 and a part thereof is overlapped by the left sub-liquid crystal 2082. The ball removal display E2 is performed below the first decorative symbol (for example, the left symbol). At this timing, the ball removal display E2 does not overlap with any display.

  Even if the display start timing (first timing) of the second decorative symbol (the state shown in FIG. 15 (o)) and the display start timing (second timing) of the ball removal display E2 are the same timing. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

  Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 6L, the left sub-liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub-liquid crystal 2083 slide and move so that the left sub-liquid crystal 2082 overlaps the ball removal display E2. In this case, at least a part of the ball removal display E2 is difficult for the player to visually recognize.

  In addition, the timing shown in FIG. 6M is a state where the left sub-liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub-liquid crystal 2083 are in contact (adjacent) and stopped. Are overlapped, and at least a part of it is difficult for the player to see. Note that at least the different parts of the ball removal display E2 are overlapped by the left sub-liquid crystal 2082 between the timing shown in FIG. That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 11L, at least the left end of the ball removal display E2 is overlapped by the left sub liquid crystal 2082 (the right end is not overlapped), and at the timing shown in FIG. At least the right end portion of the blank display E2 is overlapped by the left sub liquid crystal 2082 (the left end portion is not overlapped). The second decorative design (FIG. 15 (o)) is exposed from the left sub-liquid crystal 2082, and is visible to the player.

  Further, there may be a timing at which both ends of the ball removal display E2 are not overlapped by the left sub-liquid crystal 2082 and are visible to the player at the timing between FIG. .

(Example N-5)
The timings shown in (o) and (p) correspond to the timings shown in FIGS. 25 (i) and 25 (j), respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 10 (o), the first image display device 2081 displays the first decorative design, and overlaps a part of the first design symbol at the timing when the notice effect is executed. The ball removal display E2 is performed below. At this timing, the second decorative symbol (the state shown in FIG. 15 (o)) is also displayed below the second image display device 2082 (the ball-free display E2 is substantially symmetric with respect to the notice effect (display)). .

  Even if the display start timing (first timing) of the second decorative symbol (the state shown in FIG. 15 (o)) and the display start timing (second timing) of the ball removal display E2 are the same timing. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

  In addition, the timing shown in FIG. 6 (p) is a state in which the second image display device 2082 slides downward and overlaps with a part of the notice effect displayed on the first image display device 2081 (above the scroll). It is. In this case, a part of the announcement effect displayed on the first image display device 2081 is also displayed on the second image display device 2082, and the entire announcement effect is visible to the player. Further, the second image display device 2082 that has moved partially overlaps the ball removal display E2, but the overlapped portion is also displayed on the second image display device 2082, and the ball removal display E2 is It becomes visible to the player as a whole.

  On the other hand, the second decorative symbol (the state shown in FIG. 15 (o)) displayed on the first image display device 2081 is overlapped by the movement of the second image display device 2082, and a part thereof is a player. Is invisible.

  As described above, in this production example (production example N), the display example of the ball removal display E2 has been described. However, the ball removal display E2 is hidden when the ball removal operation is performed and the lower dish full tank error is resolved. (Erased).

  In addition, when the ball removal display E2 is performed, a notification sound may be output from the speaker 120 together.

  Further, instead of the ball removal display E2, another error display (for example, a door opening error) may be displayed.

  Moreover, in the production example N-1 to the production example N-5, the ball removal display E2 is displayed at a different position, but as an example of the ball removal display E2 being displayed, the production example N-1 to the production example N- The display positions of 5 are listed. Actually, the ball removal display E2 is displayed at one predetermined location. For example, in the pachinko machine 100 configured to display the ball removal display E2 at the positions shown in FIGS. 5E and 5F, when the effects shown in FIGS. The ball removal display E2 is displayed above the explanation display area TT1 in FIGS.

  Thus, by displaying the ball removal display E2 in accordance with the second decorative symbol, the special symbol, the continuous effect (display about the continuous effect, a part of the continuous effect), etc. of the present embodiment, the player However, by focusing on the ball removal display E2, it may be possible to easily recognize the second decorative symbol, the special symbol, the continuous effect, and the like of the present embodiment.

  Alternatively, the player can display the ball removal display E2 in accordance with the second decorative symbol, the special symbol, the continuous effect (display related to the continuous effect, a partial display of the continuous effect), and the like. 2 In some cases, it is possible to make it easier to recognize the ball removal display E2 by paying attention to decorative symbols, special symbols, continuous effects, and the like.

  Further, by displaying the ball removal display E2, the user is motivated to erase the ball removal display E2 at an early stage and enjoy the effect display performed on the image display device 208 ′, and eliminate the lower plate full tank error (ball removal) ) May be prompted.

  In addition, by displaying the ball removal display E2, it is possible to focus attention on an effect display that is important when attention is paid to the ball removal display E2, and it may be possible to give a chance to remove the ball after the effect display ends. is there.

<Example of image control>
FIG. 29 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of image control related to the display of the second decorative symbol of the present embodiment.

  FIG. 4A is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the VRAM 436, and FIG. 4B is a schematic diagram showing the image display device 208 ′ (left sub liquid crystal 2082, main liquid crystal 2081, and right sub liquid crystal 2083). .

  FIGS. 7C and 7D are schematic diagrams for explaining general image control, and FIGS. 9E to 11H are adopted for partial display of the present embodiment. It is the schematic explaining the image control performed.

  As shown in FIGS. 4A and 4B, the VRAM 436 includes frame buffers A, B, and R corresponding to the left sub liquid crystal 2082 (B), the main liquid crystal 2081 (A), and the right sub liquid crystal 2083 (C), respectively. C and a work area W (for example, an area in which image data compressed in the ROM 408 is expanded and stored). Actually, two sets of frame buffers A, B, and C are provided in order to switch the display alternately (for swapping).

  For example, as shown in FIGS. 28 (g) and 28 (h), when a second decorative symbol having the same symbol combination as the first decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal 2081 is displayed on the left sub liquid crystal 2082, for example, The image control as shown in FIGS. 29C and 29D is performed.

  First, as shown in FIG. 29 (c), the VDP 434 reads out the image data of the decorative design (for example, the decorative design variation display shown in FIG. 28 (g)) stored in the ROM 406, and uses the work area W of the VRAM 436. Then, the image data is temporarily stored while being decompressed to generate a display image. Then, the display image is developed in the first set of frame buffers A1 and B1 designated in the drawing area. At this time, for example, the frame buffer A1 is expanded at the same magnification, and the frame buffer B1 is expanded and contracted in accordance with the size of the second decorative symbol.

  By swapping the designation of the drawing areas of the frame buffers A1 and B1 and the second set of frame buffers A2 and B2, the images stored in the frame buffers A1 and B1 that are not designated as the drawing areas become the main liquid crystal 2081 and It is displayed on the left sub liquid crystal 2082.

  On the other hand, for example, in the productions such as FIGS. 14H to 14J, the first decorative symbol (the decorative symbol including the middle symbol animation display (first animation display)) and the second decorative symbol (middle symbol). The display is different from the decorative design including the temporary stop display of the symbol.

  In this case, the VDP 434 reads the image data of the decorative design (for example, the first decorative design shown in FIG. 14H) stored in the ROM 406 as shown in FIG. The image data is used and temporarily stored while being decompressed to generate a display image.

  Then, as shown in (f) of the figure, the generated display image is reduced (or kept as it is) to generate another set.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 5G, a part of one display image (which becomes the first decorative design) is processed (in this case, the image of the middle design is enlarged), and the other ( The display image that becomes the second decorative design is processed as necessary (for example, reduction of the image).

  The first set of frame buffers A1 in which the display image of the first decorative design after processing and the display image of the second decorative design (after processing) are designated as the drawing area as shown in FIG. , B1 respectively (with the same size), and swapping the designation of the drawing areas of the frame buffers A1, B1 and the second set of frame buffers A2, B2, so that the frame buffer A1, which is not designated as a drawing area, The image stored in B1 is displayed on the main liquid crystal 2081 and the left sub liquid crystal 2082. Thereafter, the same processing is continuously performed in accordance with the progress of the production (animation).

  As described above, the gaming table (for example, pachinko machine 100) according to the embodiment of the present invention includes display means (for example, the image display device 208 ′, the first image display device 2081, the second image display device 2082, A gaming machine equipped with a third image display device 2083), wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display, and one of the plurality of types of display is a first decoration. This is a variation display (hereinafter referred to as “first variation display”) of a symbol (for example, a decorative symbol displayed in the first symbol display region 208X (the symbol display regions 208a to 208c)), One of the displays is a variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second variation display”) of a second decoration symbol (for example, a decoration symbol displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y (the symbol display areas 208k to 208g)). .)so The second decorative symbol (for example, the second decorative symbol at the time of fixed display, at least one second decorative symbol at the time of fixed display, the middle symbol shown in FIG. 14 (m), FIG. 15 (o), etc.) The first decorative symbol (for example, the first decorative symbol at the time of fixed display, at least one first decorative symbol at the time of fixed display, FIG. 14 (m), etc., than the decorative symbol displayed in the display area 208k) The display size of the decorative symbol displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b shown in FIG. 5 is larger, and in the first variable display, the first animation display (for example, special symbols in at least one of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c). There may be an animation that tells whether the symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped) (for example, special symbol stop animation, middle symbol animation) The gaming machine is characterized in that the second variation display is displayed in at least a part of the state in which the first animation display is displayed.

  Note that “the first animation display may be displayed in the first variation display” means that “the first animation display is started in the first variation display. Yes. In addition, the first variation display and the first animation display may be displayed at different timings, or may not be displayed at different timings.

  In addition, “the second variation display is displayed in at least a part of the state where the first animation display is displayed” means “the first animation display is displayed. In at least some of the states, a display in which the second variable display is started may be made. " Further, the second variation display and the first animation display may be displayed at different timings, or may not be displayed at different timings.

  According to such a configuration, for example, when the first animation display is started, the contents of the first variation display (the type of decorative symbol) and the state (the presence or absence of the fixed display) are unconfirmed. Even if the content or state of the first variation display may be difficult for the player to see compared to the first animation or the second variation display, the first variation display causes the first variation display to The player may be able to recognize (guess) the content and state of the display, or the subsequent effects (for example, effects related to the jackpot expectation level) May be). Thereby, the interest of a player may be able to be improved.

  In addition, there are cases where the state of symbol variation can be accurately conveyed to the player by displaying the second decorative symbol.

  In addition, for advanced players who are accustomed to the game, the result of the presentation can be recognized at an early stage by displaying the second decorative symbol (first ballet), and the motivation for the game may be increased.

  In addition, the first animation display is one of the animation displays indicating whether or not the first symbol is stopped and displayed, and after the first animation display ends, the first symbol is displayed. The first design may be displayed in a stopped manner, and the first design is a first effect (for example, a continuous effect, a pseudo-continuous effect, a continuous notice effect, an effect shown in FIGS. 14 (p) to 14 (r)), FIG. (F) to a symbol related to the start of execution of the effects shown in FIG. 17 (h) (hereinafter referred to as “first effect symbol (for example, special symbol, pseudo-continuous symbol, middle symbol in FIG. 14 (h), FIG. d) a middle symbol, FIG. 18 (p) middle symbol, etc.) ”)).

  The first symbol may be one of the symbols displayed in the first variable display.

  In addition, “the first symbol may be stopped after the first animation display is finished” means that “the first symbol is stopped after the first animation display is finished”. Display may be made ".

  In addition, the first animation display and the first symbol stop display may be displayed at different timings, or may not be displayed at different timings.

  According to such a configuration, for example, when the first animation display is started, the first effect symbol related to the start of the execution of the first effect is stopped and displayed after the end of the first animation display. Even if it is undecided or it may be difficult for the player to see compared to the first animation or the second variation display, the first effect design is displayed by the second variation display. In some cases, the player may be able to recognize (guess) the first performance (for example, performance related to the big hit expectation) whether or not the display is stopped (the second variation display may cause the first May be possible). Thereby, the interest of a player may be able to be improved.

  In addition, for example, there may be a case where the state of the symbol variation can be accurately conveyed to the player by displaying the second decorative symbol while enhancing the player's interest by performing a continuous effect based on the stop display of the special symbol. .

  In addition, for advanced players who are accustomed to the game, the result of the presentation can be recognized at an early stage by displaying the second decorative symbol (first ballet), and the motivation for the game may be increased.

  In addition, the first symbol may not be stopped after the first animation display, and the first symbol may be stopped after the first animation display. Before the end of the animation display, the second symbol (eg, special symbol, pseudo-continuous symbol, middle symbol of the second symbol display area 208Y shown in FIG. 14 (j), ), The second symbol display area 208Y in FIG. 18D, etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the second symbol is the first symbol of the first effect symbol. It may be a separate design.

  The second symbol may be one symbol among symbols displayed in the second variable display.

  In addition, “After the first animation display ends, the first symbol may not be stopped and displayed” means that “the first symbol does not stop and display after the first animation display ends. , May be made. "

  Further, “before the end of the first animation display, the second symbol is stopped and displayed in the second variation display” means “the second variation display before the end of the first animation display”. The display in which the second symbol is stopped and displayed may be made. Further, the first animation display and the second symbol stop display may be displayed at different timings, or may not be displayed at different timings.

  According to such a configuration, for example, when the first effect design is stopped and displayed after the first animation display is finished, the first animation display is started, whereby the first animation display is started. After the end, even if it is uncertain whether or not the first effect symbol is displayed in a stopped state, or it may be difficult for the player to visually recognize the first animation or the second variation display, Whether or not the first effect symbol is stopped and displayed by the second symbol that is stopped and displayed in the second variation display, the player recognizes the first effect (for example, an effect related to the jackpot expectation). In some cases, it may be possible to make a (guess) (the second symbol of the second variation display may enable a first ballet). Thereby, the interest of a player may be able to be improved.

  In addition, for example, there may be a case where the state of the symbol variation can be accurately conveyed to the player by displaying the second decorative symbol while enhancing the player's interest by performing a continuous effect based on the stop display of the special symbol. .

  In addition, for advanced players who are accustomed to the game, the result of the presentation can be recognized at an early stage by displaying the second decorative symbol (first ballet), and the motivation for the game may be increased.

  Further, in the first variation display, a display in which the first symbol is enlarged (for example, a display as shown in FIG. 14 (i) to FIG. 14 (l)) may be displayed. In the variable display, the display in which the second symbol is enlarged may not be displayed, and the first animation display may be a display including a display in which the first symbol is enlarged.

  In addition, after the first animation display is finished, a third symbol (for example, a decorative symbol different from the special symbol displayed in the middle symbol display region 208b of the first symbol display region 208X, as shown in FIG. 15 (l)). In the second variation display, when the third symbol is stopped and displayed after completion of the first animation display, the middle symbol “decoration 8” or the like of the middle symbol shown in FIG. A fourth symbol (for example, a decorative symbol different from the special symbol displayed in the middle symbol display region 208k of the second symbol display region 208Y, a symbol such as “decoration 8” of the middle symbol shown in FIG. 15 (q)) Is stopped and displayed, the third symbol is one symbol different from the first effect symbol, and the fourth symbol is one symbol different from the first effect symbol. A separate body from the third design It may be a pattern.

  Note that “the third symbol may be stopped and displayed after the end of the first animation display” means that “the third symbol is stopped and displayed after the end of the first animation display”. , May be made ". In addition, the first animation display and the third symbol stop display may be displayed at different timings, or may not be displayed at different timings.

  In addition, “the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the second variation display” means “the fourth symbol may be stopped and displayed in the second variation display”. It is.

  In addition, one of the plural types of displays is a display prompting to discharge the game ball (hereinafter referred to as “ball discharge display (for example, error display E1 shown in FIG. 26D)”). Yes, at least a part of the first animation display displayed in a state where the ball discharge display is displayed may be overlapped with the ball discharge display.

  In addition, during the display of the first animation display, at least a part of the display of the second variation display may be overlapped by the first animation display.

  Further, during the display of the first animation display, at least a part of the display of the first animation display may be overlapped by the second variation display.

  Further, during the display of the first animation display, at least a part of the display of the first variation display may be overlapped by the first animation display.

  In addition, in the first variation display, a second animation display (for example, an animation display before the start of continuous production, an animation display shown in FIGS. 14 (n) and (o), an animation display shown in FIG. 17 (e), etc.) ) May be displayed.

In addition, a first display unit (for example, the first image display device 2081) and a second display unit (for example, the second image display device 2082) are provided, and the display unit is the first display unit. Yes, the first variation display may be displayed on the first display means, and the second variation display may be displayed on the second display means.
The game machine may be a pachinko machine.

  In addition, the gaming table (for example, pachinko machine 100) according to the embodiment of the present invention includes display means (for example, the image display device 208 ′, the first image display device 2081, the second image display device 2082, and the third image display device). 2083), and a special symbol (for example, a special symbol, a pseudo-continuous symbol, a middle symbol in FIG. ) And FIG. 18 (o) middle symbols (such as a special symbol of “continue” characters), and the special symbol is not used as a symbol representing a big hit. The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display, and one of the plurality of types of display is a variable display of a set of decorative symbols (hereinafter referred to as “first variable display”). (For example, the first symbol display area 208 (Decorative display of decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c) "), and one display of the plurality of types of display is a set of decorations separate from the first variable display. Symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second variation display (for example, decorative symbol variation display in the second symbol display area 208Y (symbol display areas 208k to 208g)”), and the second variation display. The first variation display has a larger display size than the first variation display, and the first variation display and the second variation display can be displayed in parallel. The second variation display is a display with three symbols, and the first symbol is the middle symbol in the first variation display (hereinafter referred to as “first middle symbol”). Animation to ask whether or not to stop display (Hereinafter, referred to as “first animation display (for example, display of a special symbol stop animation, display of a middle symbol animation)”). , When the first symbol is stopped and displayed on the first middle symbol after the first animation display ends (hereinafter referred to as “some cases (for example, 14 (m)) ”)), and after the first animation display ends, the first symbol does not stop display on the first middle symbol (for example, 15 (l)), the middle symbol in the second variable display (hereinafter referred to as "second middle symbol") in the certain case. Are displayed in a stopped manner (for example, in the case of FIGS. 14J and 15O), the first symbol is the certain special symbol of the first display size. The second symbol is the special symbol having the second display size, and the first display size is larger than the second display size. It is a game machine.

  In the certain case, the second symbol is stopped and displayed on the second middle symbol before the end of the first animation display (for example, FIG. 14 (j), FIG. 15 (o)). In the case of ()).

  In addition, there is a case where the first symbol is stopped and displayed on the first middle symbol after the first animation display is finished (hereinafter referred to as “some cases”). In addition, after the first animation display is finished, the first symbol may not be stopped and displayed on the first middle symbol. Is configured such that the second symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol (hereinafter referred to as “second middle symbol”) in “,” means “after the first animation display ends, the first symbol The first symbol may not be stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and “the first animation display ends after the second symbol stops and displays on the second middle symbol, The first animation display Wherein after completion first the first symbol in the symbol in the are configured such that there is a case of "display stops," may be that of.

  In addition, the “stop display” may be “stop display other than the fixed display”.

  Further, the stop display other than the fixed display may be a stop display including fluctuation fluctuation in at least one of the three symbols.

  In addition, the above “animation display by the first symbol” means “animation display including a change in the display mode of the first symbol (for example, the animation display shown in FIG. 14 (g) to FIG. 14 (l)). 15 (g) to FIG. 15 (k) including animation display, rotation display, enlarged display of the symbol itself, and effect display attached to the symbol, etc. It may be.

  In addition, “animation display including change in display mode of the first symbol” according to claim 6 is “animation display including a scene in which the first symbol is enlarged (for example, (for example, FIG. 14 ( g) to the animation display shown in FIG. 15 (l), the animation display shown in FIG. 15 (g) to FIG. 15 (k), the enlarged display of the symbol itself, the effect display attached to the symbol, etc. Or the like).

  In addition, the above “animation display by the first symbol” means “animation display constituted only by a change in the display mode of the first symbol (for example, in FIG. 14 (g) to FIG. 14 (l)). The animation display shown in FIG. 15 (g) to the animation display shown in FIG.

  Further, the player may be able to recognize whether or not the pseudo continuous effect is continued by the stop display of the second symbol.

  In addition, the first variation display may be a display in which one variation display is ended when three symbols are fixedly displayed.

  In addition, one of the plurality of types of display is a variable display of a set of decorative symbols separate from the first variable display (hereinafter referred to as “third variable display (for example, FIG. 21 (e) ), And the third variation display is a display with three symbols. The variation display is a variation display in the first image display device 2081 (a variation display whose display size is smaller than the first variation display)). The third variation display is configured such that the left symbol may fluctuate, and the third variation display is configured such that the right symbol may fluctuate. The third variation display is configured to be displayed after the first variation display (for example, the variation display in the first image display device 2081 shown in FIG. 21D). May be.

  Further, the third variation display is displayed in a state where a certain super reach effect (for example, the super reach (for example, swordsman reach) effect shown in FIG. 21F) is being performed. In addition, after the certain super reach production is started, the certain special symbol is not stopped and displayed (for example, the state shown in FIG. 21 (j) and FIG. 21 (l)). There may be.

  In addition, it is a gaming machine provided with display means (for example, image display device 208 ′, first image display device 2081, second image display device 2082, and third image display device 2083), and has a special symbol (for example, Special symbols, quasi-continuous symbols, middle symbols in Fig. 14 (h) (special symbols for character "Tono"), middle symbols in Fig. 18 (o) (special symbols for characters "Continue", etc.) can be displayed. A special symbol is a symbol that is not used as a symbol representing a loss, and the display means displays a variation display of a set of decorative symbols (hereinafter referred to as “first variation display (for example, The first symbol display area 208X (decorative display of decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c) ") can be displayed, and the display means is separate from the first variable display. Variation display of the decorative pattern of the pair , "A second variation display (for example, a decorative display variation display in the second symbol display area 208Y (symbol display areas 208k to 208g)"). The first variation display has a larger display size, and the first variation display and the second variation display can be displayed in parallel. An animation display relating to a symbol (hereinafter referred to as “a certain animation display (for example, display of a special symbol stop animation, display of a middle symbol animation)”) can be displayed. , An animation display with a certain special symbol, and after the display of the certain animation display is started, In particular, there is a case where a symbol stop display is displayed (hereinafter referred to as “a certain case (for example, in the case of FIG. 14 (m))”). The game table is configured such that a stop display is displayed (for example, in the case of FIGS. 14 (j) and 15 (o)).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to make attention to an effect (for example, pseudo-continuous effect) by a certain special design, and it is possible for a careful player to recognize (guess) the result of the effect (first ballet). May be able to enhance the interest of the player. .

  Further, a certain special symbol has a certain continuous effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect, a continuous notice effect, an effect shown in FIGS. 14 (p) to 14 (r), an effect shown in FIG. 18 (q), etc.). (For example, special symbol, pseudo-continuous symbol, middle symbol in FIG. 14 (h), middle symbol in FIG. 18 (p), etc.).

  In the first variation display, a display in which a certain special symbol is enlarged (for example, a display as shown in FIGS. 14 (i) to 14 (l)) may be displayed. The display may be a display including a display in which a certain special symbol is enlarged.

  In the first variation display, a stop display of the first symbol (for example, a special symbol displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b of the first symbol display area 208X) may be displayed. In the variable display, the stop display of the second symbol (for example, the special symbol displayed in the middle symbol display area 208k of the second symbol display area 208Y) may be displayed. A special symbol having one display size, and the second symbol is a special symbol having a second display size, and the first display size is larger than the second display size. This is the display size, and “when the display of a certain special symbol is displayed in the first variation display after the display of the certain animation display is started (hereinafter referred to as“ some case ”). Configured to be) "When the display of the first symbol is stopped in the first variation display after the display of the certain animation display is started (hereinafter," the case of " And the above-mentioned “in the certain case, the second variable display is configured such that a stop display is displayed”. May be “configured such that in the certain case, a stop display of the second symbol is displayed in the second variation display”.

  In addition, the symbol variation display when the number of stop displays of a special symbol is the second number of times is more final than the symbol variation display when the number of stop displays of a special symbol is the first number of times. In particular, the big hit symbol pattern may be confirmed and displayed, and the second number may be larger than the first number.

  Further, during the display of the certain animation display, at least a part of the certain animation display is displayed as the second variation display (for example, the variation display of the second symbol display area 208Y shown in FIG. 14 (k)). May be overlapped by.

  In addition, during the display of the certain animation display, at least a part of the first variation display (for example, the variation display of the first symbol display area 208X shown in FIG. 14 (i)) is displayed as the certain animation display. May be overlapped by.

  In addition, a first display unit (for example, the first image display device 2081) and a second display unit (for example, the second image display device 2082) are provided, and the display unit is the first display unit. Yes, the first variation display may be displayed on the first display means, and the second variation display may be displayed on the second display means.

  In the state where the first variation display is displayed, the second variation display is not displayed (for example, the state shown in FIG. 14 (r)). There may be.

  Further, the “stop display” may be “a certain stop display other than the fixed display”.

  The first variation display is a display with three decorative symbols, and a certain stop display other than the fixed display is a stop display including a fluctuation variation in at least one of the three decorative symbols. It may be.

The first variation display may be a display in which one variation display is ended by displaying a fixed display of three decorative symbols.
The game machine may be a pachinko machine.

  Next, another embodiment (production example) of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 1 to 29 and the embodiment shown in FIGS. 30 to 39, the configurations denoted by the same reference numerals can be applied interchangeably. For example, when a plurality of display means are assigned the same reference numerals, they can be applied interchangeably as display means. When a plurality of movable means are assigned the same reference signs, they can be applied interchangeably as movable means. It is possible, and when the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to several production | presentation means, it can apply mutually as production stages, and it is the same also in another means.

  In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes, for example, at least all the examples (modification examples) shown in FIGS. 14 to 29 and all the examples (modification examples) shown in FIGS. (Examples) can be executed (with its control program installed), but only a part of all examples (production examples, display examples) can be executed (with the control program installed) It may be a gaming machine, or may be a gaming machine that does not execute only a part of all examples (production examples, display examples) (not equipped with only some control programs).

  FIG. 30 is a diagram for explaining matters common to the effect examples (display examples) shown in FIGS. 31 to 39. In the production examples (display examples) shown in FIG. 31 to FIG. 39 (and FIG. 14 to FIG. 29), the same reference numerals as those in FIG. 30 are the same as those shown in FIG. .

  FIG. 30 (1) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the image display device (decorative symbol display device) 208 and other effect means (movable means). As described above, for example, the image display device 208 (208 ′) shown in FIGS. 1 to 29 can be replaced with the image display device 208 in the following embodiments.

  In the display area of the image display device (decorative symbol display device) 208, a background corresponding to the effect can be displayed. Here, the background corresponds to the image of the upper left sun (background display BD), and in the following description, the background change is indicated by the change of the upper left background display BD (excluding decorative symbols and special symbols) in the display area. Shall. Basically, it is configured to make a transition (reciprocate) between a plurality of performance stages in the same gaming state, and a background display or the like corresponding to the performance stage is performed. In addition, each game state has an effect mode, and a background display corresponding to the effect mode may be performed.

  The image display device 208 also includes a first symbol display area 208X (symbol display areas 208a to 208c) that can display a variable display (first display) of a set of decorative symbols (first decorative symbols) in the display area. The display area 208d includes an icon display area 800, an information display area (explanation display area, tutorial display section) TT1, and the like.

  A set of decorative symbols (first decorative symbols) displayed in the first symbol display region 208X (symbol display regions 208a to 208c) is the same as that shown in FIG. ”,“ Decoration 3 ”,“ decoration 5 ”,“ decoration 7 ”,“ decoration 9 ”) are probability variation symbols, and even symbols (“ decoration 2 ”,“ decoration 4 ”,“ decoration 6 ”,“ decoration 8 ”) Becomes a normal symbol (short-time symbol). In addition, only “decoration 3” and “decoration 7” are symbols that notify that they are probable, and “decoration 1”, “decoration 5”, and “decoration 9” are more likely to be more probable than even symbols. The “decoration 2”, “decoration 4”, “decoration 6”, and “decoration 8” are more regular symbols than the “decoration 1”, “decoration 5”, and “decoration 9”. The symbol which notifies that there is a high possibility of being may be sufficient.

  Further, around the image display device 208, movable means (effect movable body) 224 (for example, an accessory 224A, 224B) is provided. For example, the combination items 224A and 224B are a family crest combination item 224A and an eight generation combination item 224B, and the configuration thereof is the same as that of the embodiment (production example) shown in FIGS. The eight generations 224 </ b> B can move in the vertical direction according to the contents of the effect, and when moved downward, move to the front of the image display device 208. Also, the family crest member 224A can also move in the vertical direction according to the contents of the effect, and when moved upward, moves to the front of the image display device 208. In this example, the crest character 224A is configured to be movable further to the front side than the Yatsushiro character 224B, but the reverse is also possible.

  As shown in FIG. 30 (2), in the first symbol display area 208X (symbol display areas 208a to 208c) of the image display device 208, when displayed with a downward arrow, it indicates that the decorative symbol is changing. ing. In the information display area TT1, meter display MT (MT1, MT2, MT3) is performed as an example. A plurality of meter displays MT are provided according to the characters appearing in the production (production mode), and here, as an example, three meters, a cocoon meter MT1, a princess meter MT2, and a lord meter MT3 are displayed. For example, when the の meter MT1 is full, the display color of the title at the start of the production is promoted. When the princess meter MT2 is full, the operation of the movable means 224 is confirmed, and when the lord meter MT3 is full, a strong production ( Strong button production) is confirmed. This strong effect is, for example, a strong button effect such as a button effect executed in the final phase of the swordsman reach effect, such that the size of the displayed button becomes larger (becomes a big button) than the normal button effect.

  Referring to FIG. 2 (2), the movable means (combination object) 224 will be described. The right side of the figure shows a certain effect position (a position during the effect, for example, the maximum position that can be moved) of the family crest actor 224A. In this case, the family crest member 224 </ b> A reaches the front surface of the image display device 208 and overlaps a part of the display area of the image display device 208. For example, the crest character 224A moves to a certain production position between the initial position (left figure in the figure) and a certain production position (right figure in the figure) when the pseudo-continuous pattern is stopped and displayed. Perform operations such as rotation.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 3 (3), the Yatsushiro character 224B is arranged with the upper position of the image display device 208 as an initial position, for example, and moves downward. The figure in the figure is a certain effect position of the Yatsushiro character 224B (the position during the effect, for example, the maximum position that can be moved downward). In this case, the eight generations 224 </ b> B reaches the front surface of the image display device 208 and overlaps a part of the display area of the image display device 208. Further, as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 8, the Yatsushiro character 224B is separated from the central portion into “Yatsushiro” and “General” and is configured to be movable in the left-right direction. The right side of the figure shows, for example, a certain effect position of the Yatsushiro character 224B (a position during the effect, for example, the maximum position that can move in the left-right direction). For example, when the pseudo-design symbol is stopped and displayed, the Yatsushiro character 224B also moves to a certain effect position between the initial position (the left figure in the figure) and a certain effect position (the figure in the figure or the right figure). , Perform operations such as light emission and / or horizontal movement.

  As shown in FIG. 4 (4), when the Yatsushiro character 224B is separated into “Yatsushiro” and “General” and moved to the left and right, the elevated crest character 224A can be arranged between them. . In the state shown in FIG. 4 (4), the Yatsushiro character 224B is disposed in front of the display area of the image display device 208, and the family crest character 224A is further disposed in front of the Yatsushiro character 224B (FIG. (1) )reference). As described above, the plurality of movable means 224 (for example, the accessories 224A and 224B) can be operated (moved) at the same timing, and the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has an effect pattern as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 2, a strong performance pattern in which a plurality of movable means 224 (for example, the actors 224A and 224B) operate, and either (one or only) as shown in FIG. Has a weak performance pattern that operates.

  Both the strong performance pattern and the weak performance pattern may be implemented, or either the strong performance pattern or the weak performance pattern may be implemented, or either one may be configured not to be implemented. Also good. Further, the strong effect pattern and the weak effect pattern may be switched depending on the operation mode of one type of movable means (accessory) 224.

  FIG. 5 (5) is a diagram showing a screen display example in the drawings used in the following description. In the drawings used in the following description, for example, when another rendering device 206 is illustrated in the same manner as in FIG. 5 (5), the configuration is the same as that in FIG. 5 (5), and reference numerals in FIG. .

  As shown in FIG. 5 (5), the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes, for example, a cross key (cross button) 900 having a determination button at the center, a production button 902, as other production devices (production means) 206. 904, a fourth symbol display device 284, a speaker 120, and the like. As shown in FIG. 5 (5), when each effect device 206 is shown on the left side of the image display device 208 in the following drawings, at least one of the effect devices 206 is used (or used to produce an effect). Does not represent the actual arrangement.

  The cross key 900 is used to make various settings such as volume change and brightness change using the up / down / left / right direction keys and the center determination button. Further, the cross key 900 may be configured to be used at the time of production, or may be configured not to be used at the time of production. Further, the cross key 900 may not be used when performing various settings such as volume change and brightness change.

  The production buttons 902 and 904 are, for example, chance buttons 136 and 137. The effect buttons 902 and 904 may be effect buttons different from the chance buttons 136 and 137, may be provided (two or more), or may be provided only one.

  The fourth symbol display device 284 is a device for informing whether or not the symbol is changing (or when the symbol is stopped). For example, a square figure indicates that the symbol is changing (see FIG. 1). The 4th symbol display device 2841 is a 4th symbol display device 2842 for notifying that the symbol in FIG. 2 is changing. In the following figures, the case where each is displayed in white indicates the state in which the special figure 1 (square) or special figure 2 (round) is changing, and the case where it is displayed in gray fill. Special figure 1 (square) or special figure 2 (round) indicates the stoppage of stoppage, and when it is displayed in black, the special figure 1 (square) or special figure 2 (round) Shows the status of big hit). In this example, the fourth symbol display device 284 shows an example in which notification (display) is performed by lighting, turning off, blinking, etc. of a light emitting means (such as an LED) separate from the image display device 208. The device 284 may be an image displayed in the fourth symbol display area of the image display device 208. When the fourth symbol display device 284 is configured by a light emitting means (such as an LED) that is separate from the image display device 208, the fourth symbol display device 284 is, for example, on the player side of the display surface of the image display device 208. At a certain position (for example, a part of the rendering unit including the image display device 208). The fourth symbol display device 284 notifies (displays) that the symbol is changing (during symbol stop) under the control of the first sub-control unit 400. The fourth symbol display device 284 may be configured so as to be realized by repeating lighting (lighting) and extinguishing (flashing) light emission according to a certain aspect during symbol variation, or realized by repeating lighting according to a plurality of certain aspects. You may comprise.

  A speaker 120 shown below the image display device 208 indicates that the speaker 120 can output sound. In addition, the crest character 224A and the eight-generation character 224B shown below the image display device 208 can be moved as shown in FIGS. (2) to (4) according to the contents of the production. Show.

  Similarly to the embodiment (production example) shown in FIGS. 1 to 29, the hold icon h11 (same for h12, h13, and h14) and the variation icon h0 are respectively the modes 1 to 1 shown in FIG. 30 (6). The display mode of aspect 6 can be changed. In addition, the production buttons 902 and 904 (chance buttons 136 and 137), the family crest character 224A, and the eight generations character 224B are display modes (light emission modes) of the modes 1 to 6 shown in FIG. It is configured to be changeable.

  FIG. 30 (6) is a diagram for describing color notation in the effects shown in FIGS. 31 to 39. In the drawings shown in FIGS. 31 to 39, for example, the emission color of the built-in LED of the rendering device 206 and the display color of the image display device 208 correspond to a plurality of modes (modes 1 to 6) shown in FIG. It shall be displayed in the color. Further, as shown in FIG. 6 (6), each of the modes 1 to 6 corresponds to a plurality of types of hatching and “name of hatching” which is the name of the pattern in the drawing. When the type of mode (and “name of hatching”) described in FIG. 6 is described, the corresponding hatching is attached to the drawing, and the corresponding color is displayed. It shall be. The color corresponding to the type of hatching in FIG. 6 is an example, and is not limited to the color shown in FIG.

  For example, the mode 1 is indicated by dot hatching, and the name of the hatching is “dot”. When this hatching is added, for example, the display (light emission) is “white”.

  In addition, the mode 2 is indicated by hatching with hatching, and the name of the hatching is “hatching”, and when this hatching is added, for example, it is displayed (emitted) in “blue”.

  Aspect 3 is indicated by hatching (shaded hatching), and the name of the hatching is “shaded”. When this hatching is applied, for example, “green” is displayed (light emission). Shall.

  Further, the aspect 4 is indicated by hatching of a lattice, and the name of the hatching is “lattice”. When this hatching is added, for example, the display (light emission) is performed in “red”.

  Further, the aspect 5 is indicated by vertical stripe hatching, and the name of the hatching is “vertical stripe”. When this hatching is added, for example, it is displayed (emitted) in “golden”.

  Aspect 6 is indicated by hatching with horizontal stripes, and the name of the hatching is “horizontal stripes”. When this hatching is applied, for example, “rainbow color (rainbow color)” is displayed (light emission). .

  As an example, the hold icon h11 and the fluctuation icon h0 have a display of mode 1 (“dot” hatching) (for example, white display) as a default display, and the hold icon h11 has a display of mode 2 (“hatched hatching”). The pre-reading notice is made by (for example, blue display). In addition, the family crest character 224A emits light in the same color (mode 2) in conjunction with the pre-reading notice of the hold icon h11, and the eight generations 224B has a built-in LED in the mode 6 ("horizontal stripe" hatching). (For example, a rainbow-colored lighting (rainbow light emission)) notifies the hit.

  In addition to the configuration shown in the figure, other display areas described in other embodiments (embodiments) and other display devices (for example, sub liquid crystals (the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083 shown in FIG. 14) are used. ), Other operation means, and other configurations (effect device 206) such as other light emitting means may be provided.

  With reference to FIG. 31 to FIG. 39, as one embodiment of the present invention, an effect example executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to an enlarged view in which a part of the configuration is appropriately extracted. To do. Each figure of FIGS. 31-39 is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the image display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine of this embodiment in steps.

<Production example A '>
First, an example of an effect in which a continuous effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect) is executed a plurality of times (for example, three times) will be shown.

  The timing shown in FIG. 31 (01) indicates a state in which the variation of the first decorative symbol is stopped (the state of the variation being stopped and the state of the definitive display) in the effect while displaying a certain background display BD.

  In the fourth symbol display device 284, both the special symbol 1 (square) and the special symbol 2 (round) are displayed in gray, and the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 (design variation display) (not shown). Is stopped (display end), indicating that it is in a stopped state. That is, in the 4th symbol display device 284, a stop display of the variable game is displayed, and a confirmation display of the deviation is displayed.

  As described above, on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the first special view start port 230, the first special view display device 212 starts the special view 1 variable game. “Change display of special figure 1 (design change display)” is performed. In addition, on the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the second special view start port 232, the special view 2 variable game is started on the second special view display device 214 (not shown). The change display (design change display) of FIG. 2 is performed. Then, when the variation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 When this (which also corresponds to the fluctuation time referred to in the present invention) elapses, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special diagram 2.

  When the first sub control unit 400 receives the symbol variation start command of the special symbol 1 from the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400 starts the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212, and the symbol of the special symbol 1 from the main control unit 300. When the change stop command is received, the first special symbol display device 212 ends the symbol change display (stop display).

  Further, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation start command of the special symbol 2 from the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 starts the symbol variation display on the second special symbol display device 214, and the main controller 300 displays the special symbol 2 from FIG. When the symbol change stop command is received, the first special symbol display device 212 ends the symbol change display (stop display).

  As described above, the symbol variation display of the first special symbol display device 212 and the first special symbol display device 212 finally displays a fixed display of a special symbol in a certain symbol form (for example, hit or miss). Although illustration is omitted, at the timing shown in FIG. 31 (01), for example, the first special symbol display device 212 displays a confirmed display of the special symbol of the off symbol mode.

  Further, in the image display device 208, the combination (decoration display combination) of the decoration pattern (first decoration symbol) of “decoration 4-decoration 2-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. ing. That is, in response to the stop of the symbol variation display (display end) in the one special symbol display device 212, the variation display of the first decorative symbol is stopped (variation display is terminated).

  Here, “decoration 4” stopped and displayed in the symbol display area 208a and “decoration 2” stopped and displayed in the symbol display area 208b are even symbols, and in this example, they are normal symbols (short-time symbols). Therefore, it is displayed only with a numerical symbol. On the other hand, the “decoration 7” of the right symbol stopped and displayed in the symbol display area 208c is a probability variation symbol in this example, and therefore, a symbol obtained by superimposing a symbol (“decoration 7”) on the symbol “don”. Is displayed. It is to be noted that a number symbol (decorative symbol) is superimposed on the character symbol (the symbol symbol is displayed in front of the character symbol with a small display size). In the present embodiment, in the case of the probability variation symbol, the character symbol and the number symbol are combined to be displayed as one decorative symbol, and the same applies to the following effects.

  In this example, the background of “decoration 4” of the left symbol and “decoration 2” of the middle symbol is shown in the mode 2 shown in FIG. 20 (6) (hatching of “hatched line”), for example, in blue It is displayed. In the right pattern, the background of “decoration 7” is indicated by, for example, the aspect 4 (hatching of “lattice”) shown in FIG. 30 (6), and is displayed in red, for example.

  In the icon display area 800, for example, a variation icon h0 shown in the form 1 (“dot” hatching) (for example, displayed in white) is displayed on the right end, and four suggestion displays (in this example, in the example) , Pedestal) is displayed, and hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed on two of the pedestals, respectively, to notify that the hold in FIG. In addition, the hold icons h11 and h12 are shown in, for example, the mode 1 (“dot” hatching) (for example, displayed in white), the pre-reading notice is executed, and the family crest character 224A and the eight-story character 224B are pre-read of the hold icon h11. In conjunction with the advance notice, it is shown in mode 1 ("dot" hatching), and the built-in LED emits white light, for example, and stands by (stops) at the initial position. In addition, the production buttons 902 and 904 (chance buttons 136 and 37, and so on) also emit the built-in LED in the mode 1 (“dot” hatching, for example, white) in conjunction with the prefetching notice of the hold icon h11. Audio output from the speaker 120 is not performed at this timing.

  Further, in the information display area TT1, a cocoon meter MT1, a princess meter MT2, and a meter MT3 are displayed.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, a part of the display area of the image display device 208 (for example, the upper right) is a variable display of a set of decorative symbols (second decorative symbols) separate from the first decorative symbols ( A second symbol display area 208Y capable of displaying (second display) is provided, and the first display and the second display can be displayed in parallel. 33 (23), the second symbol display area 208Y has three symbol display areas 208k to 208g (left symbol display area 208k, middle symbol display area 208l, and right symbol) for displaying decorative symbols. Display area 208g).

  As shown in FIG. 31 (01), one set (three) of decorative symbols (first decorative symbols) shown in the first symbol display area 208X is one set (three) of decorative symbols (first decorative symbols) shown in the second symbol display area 208Y. The display size is larger than the decorative pattern (second decorative pattern). Further, the individual decorative symbols shown in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c constituting the first decorative symbol are displayed more than the individual decorative symbols shown in the symbol display areas 208k to 208g constituting the second decorative symbol. The size is large. In the following description, a set (three) of the decorative symbols (first decorative symbols) shown in the first symbol display area 208X is referred to as a “deca decorative symbol”, and a pair of decorative symbols (first decorative symbols) shown in the second symbol display region 208Y ( The three (three) decorative symbols (second decorative symbols) may be referred to as “mini decorative symbols”.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 31 (01), as shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 33 (23), in the second symbol display area 208Y, the same “decoration 4-decoration 2-decoration 7” as in the first symbol display area 208X. A combination of decorative symbols (first decorative symbols) (outlier symbol combination) is stopped and displayed. In addition, “decoration 7” is stopped (decision displayed) as an ornamental symbol (a symbol obtained by superimposing a numeric symbol (“decoration 7”) on the symbol “don”).

  In the following description, the description will mainly focus on effects that have changed from previous effects with the passage of time.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 31 (02), one hold (hold corresponding to the hold icon h11 in (01) in the figure) is consumed, and symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 (not shown) starts (design variation). In the 4th symbol display device 284, the special figure 1 (square) is displayed in white and the special figure 2 (round) is displayed in gray (the third display indicating that the symbol is changing). ), Indicating that the symbol variation (design variation display of special diagram 1) in the first special symbol display device 212 (not shown) has started (the third display indicating that the symbol variation is in progress is displayed) ) In addition, the 4th symbol display apparatus 284 is comprised by light emission means, such as LED, for example, and is provided in the position nearer to the player side than the image display apparatus 208.

  At this timing, in the first symbol display area 208X (symbol display areas 208a to 208c), the variation display (first display) of the first decorative symbol is started. That is, in response to the start of symbol variation display in the special symbol 1 special symbol display device 212, the first decorative symbol variation display has started.

  In addition, in the second symbol display area 208Y (symbol display areas 208k to 208g), the variation display (second display) of the second decorative symbol is started. That is, in response to the start of symbol variation display in the special symbol 1 special symbol display device 212, the second decorative symbol variation display has started.

  In addition, with the suspension of the hold, in the icon display area 800, the hold icons h11 and h12 are moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h11 moves to the right end of the icon display area 800. For example, it is displayed as a change icon h0 of the display color of aspect 1 ("dot" hatching), and a pre-reading notice is performed. Further, the hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h12 becomes the hold icon h11 adjacent to the left of the change icon h0, and, for example, on the two pedestals on the left of the change icon h0, for example, the mode 1 ("dot" The hold icon h11 in the display color of hatching is displayed to notify that the hold in FIG.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 31 (03), the decorative design (here “decoration 6”) swings (temporarily stops) in the left design display area 208a of the image display device 208, and the timing shown in FIG. In the right symbol display area 208c, the decorative symbol (here, “decoration 6”) fluctuates (temporarily stops) and looks like reach (tempered pie). In the present embodiment, when symbols having two symbols “˜” superimposed on the upper left and lower left of each symbol are displayed, they are in a state other than the fixed display. The state other than the fixed display is, for example, a stop display other than the fixed display (for example, shaking fluctuation (temporary stop) display) or a (temporary) stop display including scroll display. It should be noted that a symbol in which two “˜” are overlapped is not actually displayed.

  That is, in the case where the first decorative symbol (a set of decorative symbols) displayed in the first symbol display area 208 </ b> X includes a decorative symbol in which two symbols “˜” are displayed on one of the three decorative symbols. The first decorative symbol is assumed to be a stop display including fluctuation fluctuation or a stop display including a scroll display, and the first decorative symbol is assumed to be a stop display other than the fixed display.

  Similarly, among the second decorative symbols (a set of decorative symbols) displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y, a decorative symbol in which two symbols “˜” are displayed is displayed on any one of the three decorative symbols. In this case, it is assumed that the first decorative design is a stop display including fluctuation fluctuation or a stop display including a scroll display, and the first decorative design is a stop display other than the fixed display.

  That is, the timings shown in FIGS. (03) and (04) are in a state in which the first decorative symbol is displaying a stop display (stop display including fluctuation of shaking).

  The timing shown in FIG. 5 (05) is a state in which the decorative symbol (“decoration 6”) that has been subjected to shaking fluctuation (temporary stop) in the right symbol display area 208c has started to fluctuate again. The change in the middle symbol display area 208b at this timing is indicated by a white long (thin) arrow, whereas the change in “decoration 6” in the right symbol display area 208c is indicated by a white short (thick) arrow. ing. In the present embodiment, the case where the decorative symbol variation display (first display and second display) is indicated by a white long (thin) arrow is high-speed variation, and the case indicated by a white short (thick) arrow Is a low-speed fluctuation (the same applies to the following production examples). Also, as shown in the right figure of FIG. (04), the decorative pattern starts to change at low speed as shown in FIG. (05) after the fluctuation fluctuation (temporary stop). There are cases where the design is "zurel".

  And in this embodiment, when a decoration design (1st decoration design) shifts, a continuous production (for example, pseudo-continuous production) may be started. In this example, the case where the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol) shifts as one of the start conditions of the pseudo-continuous effect will be described. However, other start conditions may be used as the start condition of the pseudo-continuous effect. The design (first decorative design) may always be misaligned, may or may not be misaligned, or may not be misaligned. The same applies to the pseudo-continuous effects described below. It is.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (06) is a state in which the decoration symbol (here “decoration 7”) in the right symbol display area 208c is swaying (temporarily stopped). In this way, when a certain decorative design (here “decoration 6”) is shifted and another (next) decorative design (here “decoration 7”) is shaking (temporarily stopped), The stopped decorative pattern (“decoration 7”) may be referred to as a “shift eye”.

The right symbol in this case is a probability variation symbol (decorative symbol displayed with “decoration 7” superimposed on the symbol of the character “don”).

  Note that the “displacement” is not limited to the illustrated position, and may be another position. For example, the position of the misalignment that is stopped and displayed may be positioned below other symbols (in the case of (06) in the figure, “decoration 7” in the right symbol is lower than “decoration 6” in the left symbol). May be located).

  In the present embodiment, the occurrence of misalignment of the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol) is one of notifications that the pseudo-continuous effect may be started. Note that the notification that the pseudo-continuous effect may be started may be other notifications, and may not be the occurrence of misalignment.

  The timing shown in (07) is a state in which a certain animation has started in the middle symbol display area 208b where high-speed fluctuation has been performed. In this example, a certain animation is an animation with a special symbol (first symbol). Here, a special symbol is a symbol of a different type from a decorative symbol representing a number, and is a symbol that is not used as a symbol representing a loss. For example, a certain effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect, It is a symbol related to the execution of (continuous production). The special symbol is also one of the decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol of the present embodiment). Specifically, the special symbol in this example refers to a symbol in which a continuous effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect or a continuous notice effect) is started when the symbol is stopped and displayed.

  As an example, for a certain animation (animation by a special symbol (first symbol)) executed at this timing, the special symbol is stopped and displayed in at least one of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, the middle symbol). This is an animation that shows whether or not a special symbol is stopped (an animation of a special symbol, an animation of a middle symbol (also referred to as “intermediate symbol stop animation”). (Temporary stop display) may be used, and the same applies to the following embodiments.

  When the middle symbol beat animation (middle symbol stop beat animation) ends, the special symbol may be stopped and displayed, and when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the continuous effect may be executed.

  Here, the special symbol is a symbol of a different type from the decorative symbol representing a number, and is a symbol that is not used as a symbol representing a loss. For example, as shown in FIG. "Is a symbol on which the characters" "are displayed. When this special symbol (the symbol on which the characters “NEXT” are displayed) is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, for example, a pseudo-continuous effect is executed as a continuous effect. Thus, the special symbol related to the start of the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect may be referred to as a pseudo-continuous symbol.

  The continuous effect (pseudo-continuous effect) is started when a certain symbol (three symbols) is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. In this case, the animation that beats (first animation) may be an animation that beats whether or not the last symbol of the three symbols is stopped and displayed. In addition, the stop display in this case refers to a stop display other than the fixed display such that at least one of the three symbols includes a fluctuation fluctuation.

  That is, the timing shown in (07) is related to the start of the pseudo-continuous effect in the middle symbol display area 208b of the first symbol display area 208X that performs the variable display (first display) of the first decorative symbol (start condition). This shows a state in which an animation (medium pattern beat animation) is performed by an animation relating to the special symbol (first symbol), which indicates whether or not the special symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol) is stopped and displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 10 (08) shows a state in which the pseudo-symbol symbols) are scroll-displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. Further, the timing shown in (09) of the figure shows a state in which an effect display (image) is displayed around the pseudo-continuous pattern. Note that the effect display displayed around the pseudo-continuous symbol is also a part of the pseudo-continuous symbol.

  The timing shown in FIG. 10 (10) shows a state in which the horizontal width of the pseudo-continuous pattern has started gradually enlarged display (animation display for enlargement). In other words, the pseudo-continuous symbol in FIG. 10 (09) has the same display size as the decorative symbols (“decoration 6” and “decoration 7 (probability variable symbol)”) in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. However, the width of the pseudo-continuous symbol of FIG. 10 is larger than that of the right symbol and the left symbol. As a result, the right end of “decoration 6” in the left symbol display area 208a and the left end of “decoration 7 (probability variation)” in the right symbol display area 208a are each a part of the pseudo-continuous symbol (in this example, pseudo (The part of the effect display around the continuous pattern) starts to overlap. Note that the animation display of the pseudo-continuous pattern is not a fixed display.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 11 (11), the enlarged display of the pseudo-continuous symbols continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 12 (12), the pseudo-continuous symbols are further enlarged and displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 11 (11), the left symbol (“decoration 6”) and the right symbol (“decoration 7”) are difficult for the player to visually recognize (for example, the pseudo-interpretation symbol or display) due to the enlarged pseudo-continuous symbol. In the timing shown in FIG. 12 (12), the left symbol (“decoration 6”) and the right symbol (“decoration 7”) are displayed at the timing shown in FIG. ) Is almost invisible. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 12 (12), a part of the enlarged pseudo-continuous symbol (upper right) is overlapped by a part of the second decorative symbol.

  Although not shown in the figure, for example, a part of the effect movable body 244 (for example, a family crest character) is displayed while the pseudo-continuous pattern such as (12) in FIG. 244A) starts to rise (see FIG. 30 (2)) and overlaps a part of the image display device 208 (overlaps with the image display device 208). Thereby, a part of the display displayed on the image display device 208 is overlapped with the family crest member 224A and cannot be visually recognized by the player (or from the second decorative pattern or movable body (family crest member 224A, etc.). Is also difficult to see). In addition, as shown in FIG. 30 (3) in conjunction with the animation display of the pseudo-continuous symbol, a configuration in which the Yatsushiro character 244B operates may be used, or FIG. As shown in 4), a structure in which a plurality of effect movable bodies 224 (such as family crest actor 224A and Yatsushiro actor 244B) operate may be used. A part or all of 224 may be configured not to operate. The configuration and mode of operation in which a part or all of the effect movable body 224 operates in conjunction with the animation display of the pseudo-continuous pattern may be the same as the example (effect example) shown in FIGS. Good. In addition, the configuration in which a part or all of the effect movable body 224 operates in conjunction with the animation display of the pseudo-continuous pattern, or the configuration in which the effect movable body 224 does not operate is the same in the following effect examples (even if not shown). To do.

  The timing shown in FIG. 13 (13) shows a state in which the horizontal width of the pseudo-continuous pattern is further enlarged and displayed. At this timing, “decoration 6” in the left symbol display area 208a and “decoration 7” in the right symbol display area 208a are more difficult for the player to see (left) than in the timing state shown in FIG. The decorative symbols in the symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208a are both difficult to be seen by the player as compared to the pseudo-continuous symbols.

  Further, at this timing (at least a part of a state in which a certain animation display (medium symbol beat animation) is displayed), the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y (fluctuation fluctuation). , Temporary stop display). The second decorative symbol at this timing is stopped and displayed in the symbol combination shown in FIG. 33 (24), for example. That is, the decorative symbol (here “decoration 6”) is displayed in the left symbol display area 208k as a swinging change (temporarily stopped), and the decorative symbol (here “decoration 7 (determined symbol)”) is displayed in the right symbol display region 208g. In addition to the variable (temporary stop) display, the middle symbol display area 208l displays a pseudo-continuous symbol (here, the same special symbol as the middle symbol in FIG. 31 (13) (second symbol, in this example, “NEXT”)). The displayed symbols) are stopped and displayed, and a part of the pseudo-continuous symbols (upper right) of the first decorative symbols are overlapped by a part of the second decorative symbols.

  At this timing, the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol become invisible to the player due to the enlarged display of the pseudo continuous symbol (for example, the visual symbol is more difficult to see than the pseudo continuous symbol or the displayed second decorative symbol). The first decorative symbol (the state of the first decorative symbol being suspended) after the end of the middle symbol beat animation is undefined, but the second decorative symbol (middle symbol display region 208l of the second symbol display region 208Y) This makes it possible for the player to recognize whether or not the pseudo-continuous symbols are stopped. In other words, for advanced users, by gazing at the second decorative symbol, at this timing, the state of the first decorative symbol is stopped, that is, the special symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol) is stopped and displayed continuously. It becomes possible to recognize whether or not (pseudo-continuous production) has been started. As described above, the state of the first decorative symbol variation stop is unconfirmed, but the second decorative symbol allows the player to recognize whether or not the special symbol is stopped (continuous presentation). ""

  That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 31 (13), the middle symbol beat animation is being executed, and the first decorative symbol after the end (the state of the first decorative symbol variable stop) is uncertain, The fact that the continuous effect (pseudo-continuous effect) is performed by the decoration symbol (the pseudo-continuous symbol has been stopped and displayed in the middle symbol of the second symbol display area 208Y) has been prejudice. As a result, for example, an advanced user or the like pays attention to the second decorative symbol, so that the special symbol (pseudo continuous symbol) is stopped and the continuous effect (pseudo continuous symbol) is displayed before the first decorative symbol changes. It is possible to recognize whether or not the execution of the production has been started.

  Further, at this timing, the operation of the effect movable body 244 (for example, the family crest actor 244A) may be started, or a sound effect may be output from the speaker 120. In this way, even if the player is not aware of the pseudo-continuous symbol stop display (first ballet) by the second decorative symbol, the player can start the operation of the effect movable body 244 and the sound effect from the speaker 120. In some cases, it can be recognized that the stop display of the pseudo-continuous symbols and the execution start of the pseudo-continuous production thereby have been confirmed.

  The pseudo-continuous symbol (middle symbol) of the second decorative symbol (mini-decorative symbol) displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 31 (13) has an effect display as shown in an enlarged manner in FIG. 33 (24). (In addition, the effect display of the first decorative symbol (decorative decorative symbol) may or may not overlap the pseudo continuous symbol in the second decorative symbol (mini decorative symbol). In addition, the effect display of the first decorative symbol (decorative decorative symbol) may or may not necessarily overlap the pseudo continuous symbol in the second decorative symbol (mini decorative symbol).

  The timing shown in FIG. 31 (14) shows a state in which the enlarged display (animated animation display) of the pseudo-continuous pattern is stopped and the effect display is also hidden in the first decorative design (deca decorative design). At the timing shown in FIG. 15 (15), the size of the pseudo-continuous symbol is reduced in the deca decoration symbol (reduced to the same size as the left symbol and the right symbol), and stopped display (swing fluctuation (temporary stop) in the middle symbol display area 208b). ) Is displayed). When the quasi-continuous design of the deca decoration symbol is stopped and displayed, other effects corresponding to the stop display (for example, output of sound from the speaker 120, light emission of the light emitting means, etc.) may be started. In addition, when the pseudo-decorative pattern pseudo-continuous pattern is stopped and displayed, other effects corresponding to the stop display (for example, output of sound from the speaker 120 or light emission of the light emitting means) may be surely started. It doesn't have to be started.

  As described above, in this embodiment, display of a certain animation display (medium pattern animation animation display) related to the pseudo-continuous effect performed in the variable display (first display) of the first decorative design (deca decorative design) is started. After that, in the first display, there is a case where a stop display of a certain special symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol, first symbol) may be displayed, and the variable display of the first decorative symbol (decorative symbol) ( Before the end of a certain animation display (middle symbol animation animation display) related to the pseudo-continuous effect performed in the first display), a stop display is made in the variation display (second display) of the second decorative symbol (mini decorative symbol). (At least one of the three decorative symbols is configured to display a stop display including fluctuation fluctuation).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 13 (13), the second decorative symbol (mini decorative symbol) is used, but it corresponds to the stop display of a certain effect (decorative decorative symbol pseudo-continuous symbol (first symbol)). Other effects to be performed are performed in accordance with the stop display of the pseudo-continuous symbol (first symbol) of the deca decoration symbol.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 15 (15), the stop display of a certain special symbol (pseudo-decorative symbol pseudo-continuous symbol) is displayed in the first display (decorative ornament symbol variation display). The stop display is displayed in the second display (variable display of mini decorative symbols). In this case, the mini decorative symbols are the same as in FIG. 13 (see FIG. 33 (24)), and the first display stop display and the second display stop display are the same (in this example, "Decoration 6" -pseudo-continuous symbol- "decoration 7 (probability variation)").

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 13 (13), in the first display, before the display of the stop display of the first symbol (the pseudo-decorative symbol) is started, The stop display of the second symbol (the pseudo-decorative symbol of the mini decorative symbol) is started.

  In addition, the timing of the stop display of the first symbol (a pseudo-continuous symbol of the big decorative symbol) may be the timing shown in Fig. 14 (14) or the timing shown in Fig. 15 (15). However, the timing may be between (14) and (15). In other words, a certain animation display (middle pattern beat animation display) related to the pseudo-continuous production of the first symbol (pseudo-decorative symbol) is a special symbol (first symbol) of the deca-decoration symbol in FIG. ) May be ended when the display is stopped, or the timing immediately before the state shown in FIG. 15 (immediately before the display sizes of the three symbols become equal as shown in FIG. 15). Or may end at the timing shown in FIG. 14 (timing at which the enlarged display of the first symbol is completed). In addition, when the reduced animation of the special symbol (first symbol) is executed between (14) to (15) in the same figure, the reduced animation ends at the end timing of the middle symbol beat animation display. Until, the timing until the reduced animation starts may be used.

  In this example, the timing at which the special symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol) shown in FIG. (07) starts to be displayed is the start timing of a certain animation display related to the pseudo-continuous effect (middle symbol-spinning animation display). The timing is not limited to this, and may be the scroll display start timing shown in FIG. (08), or the timing at which the special symbol display mode changes (in this example, the effect display shown in FIG. (09) is displayed). It may be the displayed timing or the timing at which enlarged display of pseudo-continuous symbols as shown in FIG.

  The start timing and end timing of a certain animation display (medium pattern-skinning animation display) related to such pseudo-continuous effects are the same in the following effect examples.

  In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 15 (15), the 4th symbol display device 284 of FIG. 1 is displayed in gray, indicating that the symbol variation display of the FIG. 1 display device 212 is continuing. That is, in the first display (decay display of the deca decoration symbol), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 display device 212 is continued in at least a part of the states in which the stop display of the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed. (The third display indicating the symbol variation is continuously displayed).

  The timing shown in FIG. 16 (16) shows a state in which an animation (second animation) different from the medium symbol pattern animation (first animation) has started to be displayed in the display area of the image display device 208. . The animation (second animation) that is displayed at this timing (after the quasi-continuous pattern is stopped) is an animation that is displayed during the period until the next quasi-continuous rendering starts, and here, multiple times (for example, (3 times) This is an animation indicating that the execution of the continuous pseudo-continuous production is confirmed.

  In this example, the second animation displays the character (dono) from the center to the left as shown in FIG. 16 (16), and the character (dono) moves to the center as shown in FIG. 17 (17). However, this is an animation in which the display size expands and the text “Still More !!” is displayed.

  During the period in which the second animation is being executed, the first decorative symbol (decorative decorative symbol) is displayed behind or hidden from the second animation and is not visible to the player (or the first decorative symbol). 2 is more difficult to see than decorative designs). On the other hand, the second decorative symbol (mini decorative symbol) continues to be displayed and is visible to the player (or easier to visually recognize than the first decorative symbol, for example).

  (18) to FIG. 32 (05) (or FIG. 31 (18) to FIG. 32 (07)) show the second execution state of the pseudo-continuous effect that continues multiple times.

  The timing shown in FIG. 18 shows a state in which execution of a pseudo continuous effect (in this case, the second time) that continues multiple times is started. In the display area of the image display device 208, the display of the second animation is finished, and the first decorative symbol is displayed again. In addition, “decoration 7 (probability variation symbol)” is stopped and displayed (swing fluctuation (temporary stop) indication) in the middle symbol of the first decoration symbol. As in the case of FIG. 17 (17), the second decorative symbol has a pseudo-continuous symbol (a symbol in which “NEXT” is displayed) stopped on the middle symbol, and at this timing, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are displayed. As for the symbols, combinations of different symbols are stopped and displayed.

  Further, for example, a pseudo continuous number display (in this example, a display of “× 2”) indicating that it is the second pseudo continuous effect is displayed above the first decorative symbol. Note that there is no change in the display of the pending digest and icon display area.

  Although not shown in the figure, in at least some of the states where the pseudo-continuous number display is displayed, certain light emitting means (for example, the LED incorporated in the accessory 224 or the effect buttons 902 and 904, Various lamps (LEDs) 418 such as a frame lamp 122 emit light in some manner. For example, when the light emission mode indicates the second pseudo-continuous production, the light emission of mode 3 (“shaded” hatching) is performed (for example, green), and it indicates the third pseudo-continuous production. Is light emission (for example, red) of aspect 4 (hatching of “lattice”). Also, if it is rich (or if it is confirmed) that the third pseudo-continuous production is executed, even if it is the second pseudo-continuous production, there is a case where light is emitted in the mode 4. Good. Further, the pseudo continuous number display displayed on the image display device 208 may be displayed in the same color as the light emission color of the light emitting means. For example, the pseudo-continuous number display in FIG. 18 is displayed in the luminescent color of the aspect 3, for example.

  In addition, the pseudo-continuous number display indicates the number of pseudo-variable games or the number of pseudo-continuous effects in which the hold is not digested (in this example, the second pseudo-change effect is started, the second time of the pseudo-continuous effect is started) The number of times that the pseudo-continuous symbols have actually been stopped and displayed (the number of times of pseudo-continuous effects that have been completed + 1) is displayed. In addition, the larger the number of pseudo-continuations, the higher the expectation degree of the big hit, for example, the pseudo-continuous number display (when the pseudo fourth variation is started) after the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed three times ( For example, when a display such as “× 4” indicating a pseudo fourth variation is made, the jackpot is determined.

  The timing shown in FIG. 19 is the first decorative symbol variation display (first display) and the second decorative symbol variation display (first display) in the first symbol display area 208X and the second symbol display area 208Y, respectively. (2) shows a restarted state. In addition, with the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, the pseudo-continuous number display (in this example, “× 2”) is reduced and displayed, for example, an animation that moves to the upper left is executed. . FIG. 20 (20) shows a state in which the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are continuously displayed, and the animation in which the pseudo consecutive number display is further reduced and moved is continued.

  The timings shown in FIGS. (21) to (25) are the same as the timings shown in FIGS. (03) to (07) except that the pseudo-continuous number display is displayed. The description is omitted.

  At the timings shown in FIGS. (26) to (28) and FIGS. 32 (01) to 32 (07), the pseudo continuous number display is not displayed, and FIGS. 31 (08) to (17) are respectively displayed. Since the timing is similar to that described in FIG.

  In this example, FIG. 31 (18) of a part of the period when the second pseudo-variable game is being executed (the pseudo-continuous effect is being executed) (from the start of the second pseudo-continuous effect until the predetermined period). ) To (25) in the period shown in FIG. 31 (26) to FIG. 32 (07), which is another period during the execution of the second pseudo continuous effect. ), The pseudo-continuous number (“× 2”) is not displayed.

  However, the display start timing and display end timing of the pseudo continuous number display are not limited to this example. For example, the display start of the pseudo-continuous number display is the timing when the first decorative symbol variation display (first display) and the second decorative symbol variation display (second display) shown in FIG. It may be displayed or displayed after that. Also, the display may be started during the period from the end of the second animation shown in FIG. 17 to the start of display of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol shown in FIG. The display end timing of the pseudo-continuous number display is the time before the player can visually recognize the pseudo-decorative design of the deca-decorated design shown in FIG. 25 (between FIG. 24 and FIG. 25). The timing may be the timing (or later) when the pseudo-decorative symbols shown in FIG. 26 (26) are scroll-displayed, or the diagram (26) and FIG. ). Further, the pseudo continuous number display may be continuously displayed over the entire period in which the number of pseudo variable games is executed (the pseudo continuous effect is executed). The display mode of the pseudo continuous number display, the timing of the display start and the display end are the same in the following effect examples.

  The timing shown in FIG. 32 (08) to FIG. 12 (12) indicates the state during execution of the third pseudo-continuous effect, except that the pseudo-continuous number display becomes three times (“× 3”). Since this is the same as the description of the timing shown in FIGS. 31 (18) to 31 (22), the description is omitted. When the pseudo continuous number display is 3, the light emitting means (for example, the accessory 224 or the effect buttons 902 and 904 is displayed in at least a part of the states in which the pseudo continuous number display is displayed. Various kinds of lamps (LEDs 418) such as built-in LEDs and frame lamps 122 emit light in, for example, mode 4 ("grid" hatching). Further, the pseudo continuous display displayed on the image display device 208 may also be displayed in the same color as the emission color of the light emitting means (mode 4 (“lattice” hatching)). For example, the pseudo continuous number display in FIG. 18 is displayed in, for example, mode 4 (“lattice” hatching).

  The timing shown in FIG. 32 (13) shows a state in which the middle symbol is changing at low speed in the variation display of the first decorative symbol. In the left design and the right design of the first decorative design, “decoration 6” is displayed in a stopped state (fluctuation fluctuation (temporary stop)), and is in a state of temporary reach. In this temple reach state, normally, the middle symbol is a temporary symbol (in this example, “decoration 6”) + 1 and the decorative symbol (in this example, “decoration 7”) is stopped and displayed. It becomes a state that develops to reach. As an example, at this timing, a state in which “decoration 7” has passed in the middle symbol is shown.

  The timing shown in FIG. 14 (14) shows a state that has shifted (developed) to the reach state. The middle symbol of the first decorative symbol (deca decorative symbol) is not displayed, and the right symbol and the left symbol are only numeric symbols. In the timing shown in FIG. 15 (15), the first decorative symbol (deca decorative symbol) is not displayed, and the third decorative symbol corresponding to the first decorative symbol (deca decorative symbol) is the upper left of the display area in this example. The state displayed in is shown. In this example, the third decorative symbol displays a symbol combination having the same content (state) as the first decorative symbol.

  The third decorative symbol is a set of decorative symbols separate from the first decorative symbol (deca decorative symbol) and the second decorative symbol (mini decorative symbol), and is a part of the display area of the image display device 208. It is displayed in the third symbol display area 208Z that can display the variable display of the third decorative symbol provided in the section. The set (three) of decorative symbols (third decorative symbols) displayed in the third symbol display area 208Z has a smaller display size than the first decorative symbol. Further, the display sizes of the individual decorative symbols constituting the third decorative symbol are smaller than the display sizes of the individual decorative symbols constituting the first decorative symbol. In addition, the third decorative design (other mini decorative design) is configured to change its size, and at the timing shown in FIG. 15 (15), the third decorative design (other mini decorative design) is The display size is larger than that of the second decorative design (mini decorative design).

  The timing shown in FIGS. 16 (18) to 18 (18) is a state in which an effect (step-up effect) that shows in a step-up form which reach is reached is executed. In the step-up effect, the effect mode (display mode, sound mode, light emission mode, operation mode, etc.) changes (steps up) in a plurality of stages. That is, the effect is repeatedly executed, and the effect is stepped up every time the effect is executed. Generally, the greater the number of changes (number of steps), the higher the reliability (expectation).

  In the timing shown in FIG. 16 (16), an image indicating the first stage (in this example, an image of “sake”) is displayed near the center of the display area of the image display device 208, and an effect of developing into a drinker reach is executed. It is in a state. At this timing, the third decorative symbol (other mini decorative symbols) gradually becomes smaller, its display size becomes smaller than the second decorative symbol (mini decorative symbols), and moves to the upper left of the display area. Yes. As shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 33 (25), the third decorative symbol displays a symbol combination similar to that in FIG.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 17 (17), an image indicating the second stage stepped up from the first stage (in this example, an image of “Zako”) is displayed near the center of the display area of the image display device 208. The stage shown in FIG. 18 (18) is in a state where the stage that is developed to Zako extermination reach is being executed, and the third stage stepped up from the second stage near the center of the display area of the image display device 208. An image to be shown (in this example, an image of “boss”) is displayed, and an effect of developing into a boss confrontation reach is being executed.

  In this example, different images (characters) appear in order to show step-up (change in the notice mode), but the shape, color, etc. of one character may change. In other words, as long as it is possible to recognize that the state of the notice means (display means, sound output means, light emitting means, movable means, etc.) as viewed from the player is changed stepwise, the step is not limited to the example described here. It can be said that it is an up production.

  The timing shown in FIG. 19 is based on the fact that the image is displayed step-up to the image showing the third stage (in this example, the “boss” image) in FIG. ), If it does not step up from the image showing the first stage (in this example, the image of “alcohol”), it will develop into a drinker reach, and in FIG. 17 (17) the image showing the second stage (in this example “Zako”). If you don't step up from this image), you will reach Zako extermination reach.

  The boss confrontation reach effect shown in FIG. 19 (19) shows a state in which the boss confrontation reach display is started in the display area of the image display device 208. In this example, the character “boss” is displayed in the approximate center, The word “boss confrontation reach” is displayed so as to wrap.

  The timings shown in FIGS. (20) to (21) indicate a state in which the boss confrontation reach effect display is being executed in the display area of the image display device 208. In this example, the character “boss” is approximately at the center. An animation is displayed, and above it is displayed the text “Development with victory over the boss”.

  The timing shown in FIG. 22 (22) shows a state in which the boss confrontation reach has been won. An image of the character “boss” having been won in the display area of the image display device 208 and the characters “Victory !!” The display is done.

  The timings shown in FIG. 23 and FIG. 27 show a state in which an effect that highlights the development destination is being executed. First, the timing shown in FIG. 23 shows a state in which the effect of highlighting the development destination has started, and a display indicating that the effect of highlighting the development destination has started in the display area of the image display device 208 (in this example). At the timing shown in FIG. 24 (24), for example, the effect button 902 (chance button 136) has a predetermined light emission mode (for example, mode 4 (“grid”). )), And the button image BG (in this example, an image simulating the effect button 902 (chance button 136)), the text “Press!” And the effective reception period of the operation of the effect button 902 Elapsed time notification image TG (in this example, a meter image in which a predetermined fill color is reduced and displayed over time) is displayed. The button image BG is displayed in the same color as the emission color of the effect button 902 (in this example, mode 4 (“lattice” hatching)).

  The timing shown in FIG. 25 indicates a state in which the operation of the effect button 902 (chance button 136) is received within the valid reception period of the operation of the effect button 902. FIG. This shows a state in which a part of the effect movable body 224 is operated due to the operation. At this timing, the family crest actor 224A emits light in the same light emission mode as the effect button 902 (for example, mode 4 ("lattice" hatching)), and rises from the initial position below the image display device 208, and the image display device 208 The state (refer FIG. 30 (2)) which moved to the front is shown. At this timing, the first decorative symbol is not displayed, but the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol are continuously displayed (variable display).

  In addition, the timing shown in FIG. 27 is the initial position above the image display device 208 while the eight generations 224B emits light in the same light emission mode as the effect button 902 (for example, mode 4 (“lattice” hatching)). After moving down to the front of the image display device 208, the Yatsushiro character 224B is separated into “Yatsushiro” and “General” and moved left and right. While the Yatsushiro character 224B is separated into “Yatsushiro” and “General”, the family crest character 224A is arranged (see FIG. 30 (4)). That is, in this example, a strong performance pattern is performed in which both the family crest actor 224A and the eight generations actor 224B operate at the same timing (for example, one of the actors 224A and 224B (for example, only the family crest actor 224A). ) Is a weak production pattern.

  The timing shown in FIG. 28 shows a state in which the strong reach pattern has been executed, so that the super reach (SP reach) effect has been developed and the SP reach effect (in this example, the swordsman reach effect) has started. Yes. At this timing, both the family crest character 224A and the Yatsushiro character 224B return to the initial positions, and in the display area of the image display device 208, the background display BD corresponding to the SP reach effect (swordsman reach effect) is performed and the swordsman reach Production display has started.

  For example, as another example of the effects shown in FIGS. (16) to (28), a reach effect (such as a step-up effect) by a comical character after reaching the reach state ((15) in the same figure). If successful, an effect using movable means or the like is performed ((26) in the figure, (27) in the same figure), and it may be developed into a super-reach effect (28 (in the figure)).

  FIG. 33 (01) to FIG. (04) show the state where the animation of the confrontation scene of the character “Tono” and the character “Swordsman” is displayed as a swordsman reach production display. 08) shows a state in which the button effect in the swordsman reach effect is being executed. Specifically, at the timings shown in FIGS. (05) to (06), the display of the start of the button effect is overlapped with the animation display of the confrontation scenes of the character “Tono” and the character “Swordsman”. Two button images BG are displayed. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. (07), the effect button 902 (chance button 136) emits light in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, mode 4 (“lattice” hatching)), and has the same color as the effect button 902 (mode 4). The button image BG displayed in (hatching of “lattice”), the text “Press!” And the elapsed time notification image TG are displayed. The timing shown in FIG. 10 (08) shows a state in which the operation of the effect button 902 (chance button 136) is received within the valid reception period of the operation of the effect button 902.

  The timing shown in FIG. 9 (09) displays the result of the confrontation triggered by the operation of the effect button 902 (chance button 136). In this example, the scene where the character “Tono” has lost the confrontation is displayed, and it is informed that the result of the reach effect is out of date.

  Further, at this timing, the second decorative symbol (mini decorative symbol) and the third decorative symbol (other mini decorative symbols) are stopped and displayed (swing fluctuation (temporary stop) indication). The second decorative symbol (mini decorative symbol) and the third decorative symbol (other mini decorative symbols) are enlarged in the same manner as shown in FIG. 33 (26). 8—Decoration 6 ”).

  In the timing shown in FIG. 10 (10), the third decorative symbol is not displayed and the corresponding first decorative symbol (deca decorative symbol) is the same symbol combination as the third decorative symbol (other mini decorative symbols). It is displayed again in the first symbol display area 208X. That is, at this timing, the first decorative symbol (decorative decorative symbol) and the second decorative symbol (mini decorative symbol) are stopped and displayed in the same combination of symbols (in this example, “decoration 6-decoration 8-decoration 6”). ing.

  The timings shown in FIGS. 11 and 12 are in a state in which the scene wipe display is executed. For example, the scene wiping display for switching scenes is a display for switching the screen so as to wipe off the previous screen display after an effect with a high expectation level for big hits such as an SP reach effect is lost. In this example, an animation display is performed in which the character “dono” rides on a motorcycle and moves from left to right in the display area. Further, in this case, only the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as an off symbol combination (in this example, “decoration 6-decoration 8-decoration 6”).

  The timing shown in FIG. 13 (13) shows a state in which the background display BD is switched to the same display as when, for example, the symbol is changing (during the pseudo continuous effect), and the stop display of the first decorative symbol is redisplayed. The first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the same combination of symbols as the second decorative symbol (in this example, “decoration 6-decoration 8-decoration 6”).

  The timing shown in FIG. 14 (14) shows a state in which the variation of the first decorative symbol is stopped (the state of variation stop, the state of the final display).

  At this timing, the 4th symbol display device 284 displays both the special figure 1 (square) and the special figure 2 (round) in gray, and the symbol variation (not shown) in the first special figure display device 212 (not shown) This shows that the symbol variation display) is stopped (display end) and is stopped off. That is, in the 4th symbol display device 284, a stop display of the variable game is displayed, and a confirmation display of the deviation is displayed.

  Further, in the image display device 208, the combination (decoration display combination) of the decorative symbols (first decorative symbols) of “decoration 6-decoration 8-decoration 6” is stopped and displayed (determined display) in the first symbol display area 208X. As shown in the enlarged view (27) in the same figure, in the second symbol display area 208Y, the combination (decoration symbol combination) of the decoration symbols (second decoration symbols) of “decoration 6-decoration 8-decoration 6” is also provided. Stop display (determined display).

  As described above, the variation display (first display) of the first decorative symbol (decorative decorative symbol) of the present embodiment is the display of the fixed symbol (stop display (fixed symbol) shown in FIG. 33 (14)). In this production example, the display of the decoration symbol confirmation display (stop display (confirmation display) shown in FIG. 33 (14)) is started. Prior to this, as shown in FIG. 31 (15), a stop display (swing fluctuation (temporary stop) display) of a certain special symbol (a pseudo-continuous design of a deca decoration symbol) is displayed.

  As described above, in the present production example, the production example in which the SP reach production after the execution of the quasi-continuous production multiple times (for example, three times) has been described.

<Example B '>
FIGS. 33 (15) to (22) show other examples of effects after FIG. 33 (08) of example A '. In FIG. 33 (08) to FIG. 14 (14), an example of an effect that is out of place in the SP reach effect (swordsman reach effect) has been shown, but FIG. 15 (15) to FIG. This is an example of an effect when the SP reach effect (swordsman reach effect) after execution of the (three times) pseudo-continuous effect is a win.

  FIG. 15 (15) shows a state at a timing prior to FIG. 08 (for example, a state in which a certain period has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. 07), and FIG. The timing shown in (8) is the same as the timing shown in (08) in the figure, and shows the state in which the operation of the effect button 902 (chance button 136) is received within the valid reception period of the operation of the effect button 902.

  The timing shown in FIG. 17 (17) displays the result of the confrontation triggered by the operation of the effect button 902 (chance button 136). In this example, the character “Tono” displays the victory scene in the confrontation, and the reach effect is achieved. It is informing that the result of is a win.

  Specifically, the background display BD changes to a display indicating “winning”, and the second decorative symbol (mini decorative symbol) is enlarged as shown in FIG. In this case, the display is stopped at “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6”). On the other hand, for the third decorative symbol (other mini decorative symbols), “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the middle symbol, and the reach display in which the middle symbol is variably displayed is continued.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 18 (18), an image is emitted while light is emitted in a light emission mode (for example, a light emission mode (for example, rainbow color) of mode 6 ("horizontal stripe" hatching)) in which the family crest actor 224A indicates "hit" The figure shows a state in which a hit is reported by moving up from the initial position below the display device 208 and moving to the front surface of the image display device 208 (see FIG. 30 (2)). Further, at this timing, the third decorative symbol is not displayed.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 19 (19), the eight generations 224B emits light in the same light emission mode as the effect button 902 (for example, mode 6 ("horizontal stripe" hatching)), and descends from the initial position above the image display device 208. Then, after moving to the front of the image display device 208, the Yatsushiro character 224B is separated into “Yatsushiro” and “General” and moved to the left and right. While the Yatsushiro character 224B is separated into “Yatsushiro” and “General”, the family crest character 224A is arranged (see FIG. 30 (4)). That is, in this example, a strong effect pattern is performed in which both the crest actor 224A and the eight generation actor 224B operate in time.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 20 (20), the family crest character 224A and the Yatsushiro character 224B return to the initial position, and the first decorative symbol (decorative decorative symbol) corresponding to the third decorative symbol is the second decorative symbol (mini decorative). In the same symbol combination as the symbol (in this example, “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6”), the first symbol display area 208X is stopped and displayed (swing fluctuation (temporary stop) is displayed). .

  At the timing shown in FIG. 21 (21), the background display BD again returns to the same display as the confrontation scene of the SP reach effect, and at the timing shown in FIG. (Variation stop state, final display state). At this timing, the 4th symbol display device 284 displays the special figure 1 (rectangle) in black and the special figure 2 (round) in gray, and displays the first special figure (not shown). It shows that the symbol fluctuation (design fluctuation display) in the device 212 is stopped (display end) and is in a state of being stopped. That is, in the 4th symbol display device 284, the variable game stop display is displayed and the winning confirmation display is displayed.

  Further, in the image display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols (first decorative symbols) of “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6” (the winning symbol combination) is stopped and displayed (determined display) in the first symbol display area 208X. As shown in enlarged view (29) in the same figure, in the second symbol display area 208Y, the combination (decoration symbol combination) of the decorative symbols (second decorative symbols) of “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6” is also provided. Stop display (determined display).

<Production example C '>
Next, another example of the effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 (01) to (11). This example is an effect example in which a symbol combination of a certain probability change symbol is confirmed and displayed through a promotion effect (probability promotion effect) after being stopped and displayed except for a symbol combination of a certain probability variation symbol (a symbol combination having three probability variation symbols). . The promotion effect may be executed, for example, in a jackpot effect display such as a challenge bonus (display of the first jackpot effect).

  The timings shown in FIGS. 34 (01) and (06) are the same as the timings shown in FIGS. 33 (15) to 33 (20), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  The timing shown in FIG. 34 (07) indicates a state in which the promotion effect is started. That is, in the same figure (06), a symbol combination other than the symbol combination of the probability variation fixed symbol (the symbol combination having three probability variation symbols) in the first symbol display area 208X (also the second symbol display area 208Y) (normal symbol ( The first decorative symbols (three symbols) are assembled from the state of stop display (swing fluctuation (temporary stop) display) in the symbol combination of “short time symbol” (in this example, “decoration 6—decoration 6—decoration 6”). It is in a state of moving downward (scrolled).

  The timing shown in FIG. 8 (08) is that the symbol combination of the probability variation fixed symbol (probability variation symbol (decoration symbol in which “decoration 7” overlaps with “decoration 7” in this example) in the first symbol display area 208X) The symbol combination in which three symbols are aligned and moved from the top (displayed in a scroll) is shown, and at the timing shown in FIG. (09), the symbol combination of the probability variation confirmed symbol is stopped and displayed in the first symbol display area 208X. It shows the state of (swing fluctuation (temporary stop) display). At this timing, as for the second decorative symbol (mini decorative symbol), the symbol combination of the normal symbol (short-time symbol) (in this example, “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6”) is stopped and displayed (swing fluctuation (temporary stop)). )

  The timing shown in FIG. 10 (10) changes to the display when the background display BD notifies, for example, the probability change confirmation, and as shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 34 (12), the first decoration is also displayed in the second decoration design. The figure shows a state in which the symbol combination of the same probability variation fixed symbol as the symbol (in this example, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” of the probability variation symbol) is stopped (shake fluctuation (temporary stop) display).

  The timing shown in FIG. 11 (11) shows a state in which the variation of the first decorative symbol is stopped (the state of the variation stop, the state of the fixed display). At this timing, the 4th symbol display device 284 displays the special figure 1 (rectangle) in black and the special figure 2 (round) in gray, and displays the first special figure (not shown). It shows that the symbol fluctuation (design fluctuation display) in the device 212 is stopped (display end) and is in a state of being stopped. That is, in the 4th symbol display device 284, the variable game stop display is displayed and the winning confirmation display is displayed.

  In addition, in the image display device 208, both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped and displayed with the symbol combination of the probability variation fixed symbol (in this example, the “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” of the probability variation symbol). Is confirmed) and the big hit is confirmed.

  In this example, in the promotion effect, at the timing shown in FIG. (09), the stop display (swing fluctuation (temporary stop) display) of the first decorative symbol (deca decorative symbol) and the second decorative symbol (mini decorative symbol) is displayed. The symbol combination does not match, and the symbol combination of stop display (swing fluctuation (temporary stop) display) of the first decorative symbol (deca decorative symbol) and the second decorative symbol (mini decorative symbol) at the timing shown in FIG. Match. In this case, at the timing shown in FIG. 10 (09), it can be said that the symbol combination of the probability variation fixed symbol is stopped and displayed (determined display) by the big decorative symbol.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, there is a tip bar with a mini decoration pattern in a certain scene (for example, a scene during a pseudo-continuous performance, the scene shown in FIG. 31 (15)), and other scenes (for example, a promotion effect). In the middle scene, the scene shown in FIG. 34 (10), etc., there is a tip-barre with a big decoration pattern (at least there is no tip-barre with a mini-decoration pattern).

  Note that the end timing of the promotion effect in this example is any one of timings (09) to (11) in FIG.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, for example, in a variable display (first display) of a deca decoration symbol, finally displays a normal symbol confirmation display (for example, confirmation display shown in FIG. 33 (22), first confirmation). Display) can be displayed, and finally a confirmation display of a probable variation symbol (for example, a confirmation display and a second confirmation display shown in FIG. 34 (11)) are displayed. The second variation display can be displayed. Both the decorative symbol (for example, “decoration 6”) that finally constitutes the fixed display of the normal symbol and the decorative symbol (for example, “decoration 7”) that finally constitutes the finalized display of the probability variable symbol both display the tempered symbol. May be configured.

  And, as a big hit after the decorative symbols are confirmed and displayed, a big hit game such as a challenge bonus (first big hit game) and a big hit game such as a big bonus (higher profits to the player than the first big hit game) The second jackpot game) can be executed. The image display device 208 displays a first jackpot effect display (for example, a probable change promotion effect) corresponding to the first jackpot game as an effect to be performed at the time of the big hit (the period when the attacker opens) after the decorative symbol is displayed in a fixed manner. Can be displayed, and a second jackpot effect display corresponding to the second jackpot game (for example, a big bonus effect display without a probable promotion effect) can be displayed. Has been.

  Further, in the state where the second variation display in which the final confirmation display of the probability variation symbol (for example, the confirmation display and second confirmation display shown in FIG. 34 (11)) is displayed, the mini decoration symbol is displayed. Probability symbol stop display (for example, stop display (determined display) shown in FIG. 34 (11)) can be displayed, and in the state where the second variation display is displayed, the probability variation symbol is stopped in the deca decoration symbol. A display (for example, a stop display (determined display) shown in FIG. 34 (11)) can be displayed. The definite decoration symbol and the mini-decoration symbol stop display are displayed after the execution of the promotion effect is started in the deca decoration symbol.

<Example D '>
With reference to FIGS. 34 (15) to (27), other production examples will be described. This effect example is an effect example in which after a stop display (stop display that appears to be out of place) other than the probability variation confirmed symbol, a revival effect is made and a big hit is achieved.

  The timings shown in FIGS. (15) to (21) are the same as the timings shown in FIGS. 33 (07) to 33 (13), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  The timing shown in FIG. 34 (22) and FIG. 23 (23) indicates a state in which the revival effect has started. The promotion effect is an effect that upgrades the type of jackpot, while the revival effect appears to be out of place (for example, in FIG. It is an effect that it will be a big hit). At this timing, for example, an effect that the liquid crystal screen of the image display device 208 is broken (freeze effect, broken effect) is being executed, and the timing shown in FIG. This shows a state in which an effect (relief effect) such as “princess”) is being executed. While the revival effect is being executed, both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are not displayed (or difficult for the player to see compared to the revival effect display), but the fourth symbol display device 284 has a symbol variation. The display indicating that it is in progress is continued.

  The timings shown in FIGS. (24) to (26) are the same as the timings shown in FIGS. 33 (18) to 33 (20), and after the revival effect, the effect by the effect movable body 224 and the like. After performing, an effect that is a big hit is performed.

  The promotion effect may be generated after the revival effect, the promotion effect may not be generated after the revival effect, or the promotion effect is always generated after the revival effect. Alternatively, the promotion effect may not be generated after the revival effect.

<Production example E '>
With reference to FIG. 35 (01) to FIG. 14 (14), another example of the effect will be described. This effect example is an effect example in which the chance eye display, which is one of the prefetch notices, is successful. Here, in the present embodiment, for example, an even numbered symbol is a pattern (in this case, a blue symbol) in an aspect 2 (“hatched” hatching), and an odd number symbol is in an aspect 4 (“lattice” hatching). ) Symbol (here, red symbol), and the chance eye display is successful when three decorative symbols of the same color are arranged. There are multiple types of chances, and the expectation that a chance of a certain type (for example, a red symbol or a blue symbol) will be a big hit than a chance item of another type (for example, a blue symbol or a red symbol) Is high. Each symbol (numerical symbol) constituting a certain chance is a symbol used as a display representing a big hit.

  The timings shown in FIGS. 35 (01) and (02) are the same as the timings shown in FIG. 31 (01) and FIG.

  FIG. 35 (04) shows the timing after a certain period of time ((03) in FIG. 35) from FIG. (02). As a left symbol of the first decorative symbol displayed in the first symbol display area 208X, This is a state in which an even-numbered symbol (here “decoration 2”) is displayed in a stopped display (swing fluctuation (temporary stop)).

  The timing shown in FIG. 10 (05) shows a state in which a certain effect display is added to the left symbol of the first decorative symbol along with the sound effect. In this example, the added effect display is an effect display in which the effect display of the transparent character “dono” is overlapped with the decoration pattern (here “decoration 2”). By adding this effect display, the player expects that the chance symbol display will be successful (the chance eye will be established) that even symbols will be stopped on the middle symbol and the right symbol, and three decorative symbols of the same color will be aligned. Can be held in. That is, this effect display is a display that suggests the establishment of a chance eye (hereinafter referred to as a chance eye suggestion effect display). The chance eye suggestion effect display is not necessarily displayed in the case of a specific decorative symbol (for example, “decoration 2” shown in FIG. (05)), and when the chance eye is established as a result. Even if there is, there is a case where the chance eye suggestion effect display is displayed and the case where it is not displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. (06) is a state in which an even symbol (in this case, “decoration 4”) is displayed as a stop symbol (shake fluctuation (temporary stop)) as the right symbol of the first decorative symbol. The timing shown in 07) indicates a state in which a chance eye suggestion effect display is displayed on the right design of the first decorative design along with the sound effect.

  The timing shown in FIG. 10 (08) is a state in which a certain animation has started in the middle symbol display area 208b where high-speed fluctuation has been performed. In this example, for example, an animation shows whether or not a chance eye is established. Specifically, in this example, an animation with a decorative design (in the case of “decoration 6” in this example) is stopped. Designed animation).

  When the middle symbol beat animation is completed, the middle symbol may be displayed with a decorative symbol of the same color as the left symbol and the right symbol in a stopped display (swing fluctuation (temporary stop) display), and a chance may be established.

  The timing shown in FIG. 10 (09) shows a state in which an even symbol (here “decoration 6”) is stopped and displayed (swing fluctuation (temporary stop)) on the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol. At this timing, as shown in an enlarged view (23) in FIG. 23, in the second symbol display area 208Y, as the second decorative symbol, three symbol combinations of the same color even number (in this example, “decoration 2- The symbol combination “decoration 6-decoration 4”) is stopped (shake fluctuation (temporary stop) is displayed). The chance eye suggestion effect display is not performed on the second decorative symbol.

  The timing shown in FIG. 10 (10) shows a state in which the chance eye suggestion effect display is displayed on the right design of the first decorative design along with the sound effect, and the timing shown in FIG. It shows the state that three even symbols of the first decorative symbol are stopped and displayed (swaying fluctuation (temporary stop)), and the effect display is displayed behind them. ing. At this timing, the chance item in the first decorative symbol is difficult for the player to visually recognize compared to the second decorative symbol due to the chance eye suggestion effect display or the effect display. Since the eye suggestion effect display is not performed, it is easier for the player to visually recognize than the first decorative symbol.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 12 (12), the special symbol 1 (square) and the special diagram 2 (round) are both displayed in gray on the fourth symbol display device 284, and the first special diagram not shown is displayed. This shows that the symbol fluctuation (design fluctuation display) in the device 212 has stopped (display end), and is in a state of being stopped off.

  Then, in the display area of the image display device 208, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped and displayed (confirmed display) in a state where three even-numbered symbols of the same color are aligned, and it is confirmed that the chance eye has been established (chance) Eye display is successful). The second decorative symbol is stopped (determined) with the same symbol combination as the first decorative symbol (in this example, “decoration 2-decoration 6-decoration 4”), as shown in enlarged view (24) in FIG. ing. Further, at this timing, the chance eye suggestion effect display and the effect display of the first decorative symbol are not displayed.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 13 (13), the special symbol 1 (square) is displayed in white in the fourth symbol display device 284, and the symbol variation (design variation display) in the first special symbol display device 212 (not shown). Indicates a state where has started.

  In the display area of the image display device 208, variable display (first display, second display) is started in the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol.

  In this production example, a chance eye suggestion production display may be displayed on the first decorative symbol, and it may be difficult for the player to visually recognize the first decorative symbol. For example, FIG. Depending on the second decorative design shown, it may be possible to recognize the formation of the chance eye. In other words, in this production example, it can also be said that the establishment of the chance eye is pre-emptive due to the second decorative symbol (the pre-emptive may occur due to the second decorative symbol).

  Further, in this example, the example of the chance eye establishment by the even number symbol (blue symbol) has been described, but the chance eye by the odd number symbol (red symbol) may be established.

  As described above, in this effect example, in the variation display (first display) of the first decorative symbol, the animation display related to a certain chance (for example, a set of three blue symbols or red symbols) (the chance symbol in the middle symbol). Is displayed so that whether the symbol that holds is stopped or not is displayed, and after the display of the middle symbol beat animation is started (after the timing of (08) in the same figure). In the variation display (middle symbol) of the first decorative symbol, there is a case where a stop indication (swing variation (temporary stop) indication) of a certain chance (for example, a blue symbol or a red symbol) is displayed. .

  In addition, before the end of the middle symbol beat animation (for example, the timing of (10) and (11) in the same figure), in the variable display (second display) of the second decorative symbol, In some cases, the stop display (swing fluctuation (temporary stop display)) of the set of three shown in the diagram (09) is displayed.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. (09) to (11), a stop display (shake) of a certain chance (for example, a blue or red pattern) in the first decorative symbol (variation display thereof). In at least a part of the state in which the fluctuation (temporary stop display) is displayed, the second decorative symbol (variation display thereof) is stopped (for example, the fluctuation fluctuation of the symbol that becomes a chance (temporary stop)) Display) is displayed.

  In this example, in the first symbol display area 208X, variable display (first display) with three symbols of the first decorative symbol is executed, and in the second symbol display area 208Y, according to the three symbols of the second decorative symbol. A variable display (second display) is executed.

  In the first symbol display area 208X, the first chance stop display may be performed, and the second chance stop display may be performed. The stop display of the first chance is a display that is displayed when each of the three symbols is stopped and displayed at a certain timing, and the stop display of the second chance is that all of the three symbols are displayed. This is a display that is displayed by stopping display at a certain timing.

  In addition, the timing of the second symbol (for example, the left symbol and the right symbol) of the first chance to stop display (shake fluctuation) and what happens to the third symbol (for example, the middle symbol). The second chance stop display (stop display of three symbols (fluctuation fluctuation)) may be displayed. In this case, whether or not the chance eye is established by the second decorative symbol (mini decorative symbol). In some cases, you may get lost.

  Further, even if it is determined that the chance eye is established by the second decoration symbol (mini decoration symbol), a certain effect (for example, the chance eye establishment) is notified in the first decoration symbol (decoration decoration symbol). The light emitted from the light emitting means (LED) and the sound output from the sound output means (speaker 120) may be performed in accordance with the stop indications (swing fluctuation stop) of the three symbols of the first chance. is there.

  Further, each time the stop indication (swing fluctuation stop) of each of the three symbols of the first chance is displayed, a certain part of the light emitting means emits light, and all of the three symbols as the first chance are displayed. There may be a case where the stop display of the second chance is displayed in advance before the stop display. In addition, after the stop display (swing fluctuation stop) of the third symbol of the first chance is displayed (after stop display of all three symbols), the three symbols of the second chance are stopped ( There may be cases where the shaking fluctuation stops).

  In addition, each of the symbols constituting the first chance eye and the second chance eye may be used as a symbol representing a loss or a big hit, but the symbols constituting the first chance eye and the second chance eye The combination is not used as a symbol combination representing a big hit.

  The chance eye suggestion effect display is overlapped with a decorative symbol (numerical symbol) when suggesting the formation of a chance eye, but when the decorative symbol (numeric symbol) is used as a symbol representing a big hit or loss. The chance eye suggestion effect display is not overlapped with the decorative symbol (numeric symbol).

  Further, the second decorative symbol (second chance eye) is displayed without being overlapped not only by the chance eye suggestion effect display but also by other effect display.

  In this production example, for example, an animation that is executed with the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol at the timings of FIGS. 35 (10) and (11) is an animation that enthuses the chance eye (medium symbol beat animation). In addition, it can be said that the decorative symbol to which the chance eye suggestion effect display is attached is the “special symbol” of the present embodiment.

  That is, in this effect example, the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol may execute an animation related to the special symbol (the decorative symbol with the chance eye suggestive effect display), and after the animation ends, A chance symbol may be established when a special symbol (decorative symbol with a chance eye suggestion effect display) is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first decorative symbol, the same special symbol may be stopped and displayed on the second decorative symbol. The stop display of the second decorative symbol causes the first decorative symbol to be stopped. There is a case where the state (mode) is premature.

  Here, a certain chance (first chance, second chance) in this production example is the first type of chance and the first type of chance display is successful (first The establishment of the type of chance item) is performed, for example, as a look-ahead notice. And when it is performed as a pre-reading notice, three symbols are stopped and displayed at every stop of a plurality of fluctuations, and a chance is established. For example, in the first change, three blue symbols are stopped and displayed, a blue symbol chance is established, and in the second variation, three red symbols are stopped and a red symbol chance is established. This is a case where the change becomes a change subject to a pre-reading notice. Also, after one symbol is stopped first, a plurality of patterns are provided, such as a pattern in which the remaining two symbols stop simultaneously and a chance eye is established, and a pattern in which three symbols stop simultaneously and a chance eye is established. Alternatively, such a pattern may not be provided.

<Production example F '>
With reference to FIGS. 35 (15) to (22), another effect example will be described. This effect example is an effect example in which the chance eye display has failed.

  Since the timings shown in FIGS. 15 to 16 are the same as the timings shown in FIGS. 07 and 08, description thereof will be omitted.

  The timing shown in FIG. 17 (17) shows a state in which the even symbol (here, “decoration 6”) is displayed in a stopped state (swing fluctuation (temporary stop) display) on the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol. At this timing, in the second symbol display area 208Y, the variation display (second display) of the second decorative symbol is continued, and none of the symbols is stopped (swaying variation stop display).

  The timing shown in FIG. 18 shows a state in which the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol moves downward (scrolled) and the chance at this timing is not established.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 19 (19), an odd symbol (in this case, a probable variation of the characters “dono” and “decoration 7”) is stopped on the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol (swing fluctuation (temporary stop) indication). Shows the state. Also at this timing, in the second symbol display area 208Y, the second decorative symbol variation display (second display) continues, and no symbol is stopped (swing variation stop display).

  The timing shown in FIG. 20 is displayed on the 4th symbol display device 284 in which the special figure 1 (square) and the special figure 2 (round) are displayed in gray, and the first special figure display (not shown). This shows that the symbol fluctuation (design fluctuation display) in the device 212 has stopped (display end), and is in a state of being stopped off.

  In the display area of the image display device 208, in the first decorative symbol, an odd symbol (in this case, a probable variable symbol of the characters “dono” and “decoration 7”) is fixedly displayed in the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol, and the chance eye Is not established (the chance eye display has failed). At this timing, the second decorative symbol is also stopped at the same symbol combination as the first decorative symbol (in this example, “decoration 2-decoration 7-decoration 4”) as shown in an enlarged view in FIG. Displayed (confirmed display). At this timing, the chance eye suggestion effect display that is displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol is not displayed.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 20, the special symbol 1 (rectangle) is displayed in white on the fourth symbol display device 284, and the symbol variation (design variation display) in the first special symbol display device 212 (not shown). Indicates a state where has started.

  In the display area of the image display device 208, variable display (first display, second display) is started in the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol.

  This production example is an example in which the chance eye is not established (the chance eye display has failed). In this case as well, for example, at the timing shown in FIG. Since the display of the second decorative symbol continues at the timing when the symbol with the possibility of establishment (in this case, “decoration 6”) has stopped swinging, the second decorative symbol does not hold the chance. It can also be said that things are ahead.

<Production example G '>
With reference to FIG. 36 (01) to FIG. 36 (14), other production examples will be described. The production examples E ′ and F ′ are the chance eye display as the pre-reading notice, but this production example is another production example in which the chance eye display which is one of the notices is successful.

  In other words, as a chance, there is also a second type of chance eye in which three symbols constituting the chance eye are stopped and displayed in one change. In this case, when three symbols are stopped and displayed (chance eye is established) It develops into a special production (for example, SP reach production).

  The chance eye of this production example is a chance eye different from the chance eye by the blue symbol and the red symbol shown in FIG. Specifically, the chance eye display is successful (chance eye is established) by combining three symbols dedicated to chance eyes (hereinafter referred to as “chance eye symbols”).

  The chance symbol in this case is a symbol that is not normally scrolled and is displayed only when the chance symbol symbol is used to stop display (for example, a symbol stop animation). In that case, it can be said that it is a special symbol.

  For one or both of the first type chance chance and the second type chance chance, only the symbols that make up the chance eye (red symbol, blue symbol, chance symbol symbol) may be special symbols. The special symbol may be displayed in a state where the chance eye suggestion effect display is attached to the symbol constituting the chance eye, or only the chance eye suggestion effect display may be the special symbol.

  The timings shown in FIGS. 36 (01) and (02) are the same as the timings shown in FIGS. 31 (01) and (02), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. (03) shows that a certain period has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. (02), and the timing shown in FIG. (04) is displayed in the first symbol display area 208X. As the left symbol of the first decorative symbol, the chance symbol symbol (here, “Princess”, which is a symbol “Princess 3”) superimposed on the symbol of the character “Princess”) is stopped (shake) In this production example, the chance symbol is shown as a decorative symbol similar to the probability variation symbol, but the chance symbol here is the same as the probability variation symbol described above. Is another chance symbol pattern (for example, princess symbol, leopard symbol, lord symbol) that is used only in the chance eye, and in this production example, “Princess princess symbol-Lord symbol- 爺 symbol” is 3 When you get them together, the chance display is successful (Chan If the chances are arranged in this order, that is, the left symbol is “Hime”, the middle symbol is “Tono”, and the right symbol is “爺”. You may configure the chance eye display to be successful, and the order is unquestioned (for example, the left symbol is “donto symbol”, the middle symbol is “爺 symbol”, the right symbol is “princess symbol”, etc.) There may be.

  In the timing shown in FIG. (05), along with the sound effect, a certain effect display (chance eye suggestion effect display) is added to the left symbol of the first decorative symbol, and the chance symbol suggestion effect display shows the middle symbol and the right symbol. In this state, the player has the expectation that the chance eye symbol is stopped and the chance eye display of three chance eye symbols succeeds (the chance eye is established).

  In this example, the chance eye suggestion effect display is performed by the light emitting means provided on the game board 200 corresponding to each of the first decorative symbols (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol). ) Is an effect display that emits light at every stop display. In this example, the light emitting means corresponding to the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol of the first decorative symbol are the left symbol display region 208a, middle symbol display region 208b, and right symbol display region 208c of the first symbol display region 208X, respectively. It is assumed that it is provided on the game board 200 on the back side. The light emitting means only needs to be provided corresponding to each of the first decorative symbols, for example, above (below) the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. It may be provided on the game board 200 on the back side or the like.

  At this timing, the light emitting means (for example, the light emitting means (LED or the like) provided on the game board 200 behind the left symbol display area 208a) corresponding to the position of the left symbol of the first decorative symbol emits light, and the first ornament is displayed. A chance eye suggestion effect display is displayed on the left symbol of the symbol.

  In this case, for example, the chance eye suggestion effect display may be displayed in the case of a specific decorative design (for example, “princess design” of the chance design shown in FIG. (05)), The chance eye suggestion effect display does not necessarily have to be displayed in the case of a specific decorative design (for example, the “princess pattern” of the chance design shown in FIG. 05). Further, when a chance eye is established as a result, the chance eye suggestion effect display may be displayed without fail, and the chance eye suggestion effect display may or may not be displayed. May be. Further, at this timing, an explanation display about the establishment of the chance eye display (in this example, “~ SP development when all Hime-dono is aligned”) is displayed, for example, above the first symbol display area 208X.

  In the timing shown in FIG. (06), as the right symbol of the first decorative symbol, the chance symbol symbol (here, the character symbol “爺”) is superimposed with a numerical symbol symbol (decorative symbol, here “decoration symbol 5”). The “爺 symbol”) is displayed in a stopped display (swing fluctuation (temporary stop)), and the timing shown in FIG. (07) shows the chance eye suggestion effect on the right symbol of the first decorative symbol along with the sound effect. The display shows the displayed state.

  At this timing, the light emitting means (for example, the light emitting means (LED or the like) provided on the game board 200 behind the right symbol display area 208c) corresponding to the right symbol position of the first decorative symbol emits light, and the first ornament is displayed. A chance eye suggestion effect display is displayed on the right pattern of the symbol.

  The timing shown in FIG. 10 (08) is a state in which a certain animation has started in the middle symbol display area 208b where high-speed fluctuation has been performed. In this example, for example, an animation is used to determine whether or not a chance eye is established. Specifically, in this example, a chance symbol symbol “don” symbol (here, a character symbol “爺” symbol number symbol ( This is an animation (medium pattern beat animation) with a decorative pattern that asks whether or not the decorative pattern (here, the symbol “decoration 7”) is stopped.

  When the middle symbol beat animation is finished, chance symbols may be established on the middle symbol, with the chance symbols of the same type as the left symbol and right symbol being stopped (shake fluctuation (temporary stop) display).

  The timing shown in FIG. (09) shows a state in which the chance symbol “dono” is stopped and displayed (swaying fluctuation (temporary stop)) on the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol. ) Indicates a state in which a chance eye suggestion effect display is displayed on the right design of the first decorative design along with the sound effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 10 (10), the light emitting means corresponding to the position of the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol (for example, the light emitting means (LED or the like) provided in the game board 200 behind the middle symbol display area 208b) The chance eye suggestion effect display is displayed on the middle symbol of the first decorative design, that is, at this timing, the chance eye suggestion effect display is displayed on any of the three chance eye designs. The production is highly anticipated.

  In the period shown in FIG. 11 (11), although not shown in the figure, after a turn animation (medium pattern turn animation) as to whether or not the chance eyes shown in FIG. Three chances symbols (in this example, “Princess design-Samurai design-Tono design”) are stopped on the first decoration symbol (determined display), and the chance eye display succeeds (chance eye is established), and the development destination An effect (for example, a button effect shown in FIGS. 32 (23) to 32 (36)) is executed.

  The timings shown in FIGS. 12 (13) and (13) are the same as the timings shown in FIGS. 32 (27) and 32 (28), respectively, and both the family crest actor 224A and the eight generations 224B have the timing. A strong production pattern production that operates in combination is executed, has developed into a super reach (SP reach) production, and an SP reach production (in this example, a swordsman reach production) has started.

  In this example of production (for example, an example of the chance eye display which is one of the notices), as shown in FIG. 36 (10), three chance symbols are stopped and displayed on the first decorative symbol (fluctuation fluctuation). (Temporary stop) is displayed), and even if the chance eye suggestion effect display is displayed on any of the three symbols (establishment of chance chance establishment is considerably high), the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. It has continued, and there has been no prior ballet due to the second decorative design.

  It should be noted that the chance eye suggestion effect display by the light emitting means in this effect example (chance eye suggestion effect display by the light emitting means corresponding to the positions of the three symbols of the first decorative symbols) is the chance eye shown in FIG. As a chance eye suggestion effect display). That is, at least one of the chance eye display (first type chance eye display) as the pre-reading notice and the chance eye display (second type chance eye display) of the notice is based on the light emitting means shown in the present production example. Opportunity suggestion effect display is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the chance eye suggestion effect display by the light emitting means may be applied to the first type chance chance display and the second type chance eye display, and is not applied in any case. It may be.

  Also, the chance chance (second chance chance) of the advance notice may be configured by, for example, the same color symbol (chance eye exclusive symbol).

  In addition, the chance item of the present embodiment may be configured by only the first type chance item, or may be configured by at least one of the first type chance item and the second type chance item. It may be configured only by the second chance. Also, it may be configured to include one of the first type of chance item and the second type of chance item, and always includes one of the first type of chance item and the second type of chance item. It may be configured by both (or including both) the first type chance chance and the second type chance opportunity.

<Example of production H '>
With reference to FIGS. 36 (15) to (22), another effect example will be described. This effect example is an effect example when the chance eye display, which is one of the notices, fails.

  The period shown in FIG. 15 (15) is shown by omitting the period before FIG. 08, and the timing shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. 17 is respectively the timing shown in FIG. Since it is the same as the description of the timing shown in FIG.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 18, the “design symbol” of the chance symbol that is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol moves downward (scrolled), and at this timing, Opportunities indicate a state of failure.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 19, the symbols other than the chance pattern (here, the decorative symbols of numbers (“decoration 8”)) are stopped and displayed in the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol (swing fluctuation (temporary stop) indication). It shows the state that was done. At this timing, the chance eye suggestion effect display in the left symbol and the right symbol continues.

  The timing shown in FIG. 20 is displayed on the 4th symbol display device 284 in which the special figure 1 (square) and the special figure 2 (round) are displayed in gray, and the first special figure display (not shown). This shows that the symbol fluctuation (design fluctuation display) in the device 212 has stopped (display end), and is in a state of being stopped off.

  In the display area of the image display device 208, in the first decorative symbol, a symbol other than the chance eye (here, a numerical decorative symbol (“decoration 8”)) is confirmed and displayed on the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol. It is in a state where it is determined that the eye is not established (the chance eye display has failed). At this timing, as shown in the enlarged view (23) in the figure, the second decorative symbol is also stopped at the same symbol combination as the first decorative symbol (in this example, “Princess symbol-decoration 8-decoration symbol”). Displayed (confirmed display). Further, at this timing, the chance eye suggestion effect display displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol is not displayed (the light emission by the light emitting means is turned off).

  In the timing shown in FIG. 21, the special symbol 1 (rectangle) is displayed in white in the fourth symbol display device 284, and the symbol variation (symbol variation display) in the first special symbol display device 212 (not shown). Indicates a state where has started.

  In the display area of the image display device 208, variable display (first display, second display) is started in the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol.

  Also in this production example, for example, before the stop display (definite display) of the first decorative symbol shown in FIG. 20 (for example, in any period shown in FIG. 17 to 19). ) In the second symbol display area 208Y, the variation display (second display) of the second decorative symbol is continued, and none of the symbols is stopped (swing variation stop display). In other words, the second decorative symbol does not give rise to a chance that a chance is not established.

<Example I '>
With reference to FIG. 37, another example of the effect will be described. This effect example is an effect example when the SP symbol, which is a special symbol, is stopped and displayed and then developed into SP reach and loses.

  Here, the SP symbol of this effect example is an example of the special symbol of this embodiment, but the pachinko machine 100 capable of implementing this effect example has the special symbol (SP symbol) described in this effect example as a special symbol. May have a configuration having only one (one type of special symbol), or may have a plurality of types as a special symbol, that is, in addition to the special symbol (SP symbol) described in this production example, other It may be a configuration having a special symbol (for example, a pseudo-continuous symbol). The same applies to the following effects where the special symbol is the SP symbol.

  The timings shown in FIG. 37 (01) and FIG. 37 (02) are the same as the timings shown in FIG. 31 (01) and FIG. In FIG. 37, the display position of the second decorative symbol (the position of the second symbol display area 208Y) is the upper center of the display area of the image display device 208 (above the middle symbol display area 208b of the first symbol display area 208Y). However, only the display position of the second decorative symbol shown in the upper left part of the display area of the image display device 208 (the position of the second symbol display area 208Y) is changed in other examples such as FIG. It is only what was done and it can carry out combining this production example and other production examples. That is, the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment may be configured to be able to execute the present effect example and other effect examples. In another example, even if the display position of the second decorative symbol (the position of the second symbol display area 208Y) may be provided at the upper center of the display area of the image display device 208, The decorative symbol display position (the position of the second symbol display area 208Y) can be implemented in combination with an effect example provided at the upper left of the image display device 208.

  The timing shown in FIG. (04) is a state in which a certain period has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. (02), and the symbol variation (design variation display) in the first special diagram display device 212 (not shown) continues. Show. At this timing, the odd symbol symbol (in this example, the symbol symbol “数字” in the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c of the first symbol display region 208Y, respectively) ”) Is overlaid on the middle symbol display area 208b, and the SP symbol, which is a special symbol, is stopped (shake fluctuation (temporarily stopped)). In addition, the second decorative symbol continues to be changed (second display).

  In this case, the middle symbol (special symbol, SP symbol) of the first decorative symbol is an effect in which whether or not the special symbol stops in the middle symbol as shown in FIG. 31 (07) to FIG. 31 (08). After the special symbol stop animation, the middle symbol animation is displayed.

  The timings shown in FIGS. 37 (05) to (06) indicate a state in which an effect that highlights the development destination is being executed. First, the timing shown in FIG. 23 indicates a state in which an effect of devel- oping is started and a state in which a part of the effect movable body 224 is operated. At this timing, the family crest actor 224A emits light in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, mode 4 (“lattice” hatching)), and rises from the initial position below the image display device 208 to the front surface of the image display device 208. The moved state (see FIG. 30 (2)) is shown. At this timing, both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are not displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. (07) is from the initial position above the image display device 208 while the Yatsushiro character 224B emits light in the same light emission mode as the family crest character 224A (eg, mode 4 (“lattice” hatching)). After descending and moving to the front surface of the image display device 208, the Yatsushiro character 224B is separated into “Yatsushiro” and “General” and moved left and right. While the Yatsushiro character 224B is separated into “Yatsushiro” and “General”, the family crest character 224A is arranged (see FIG. 30 (4)). That is, in this example, a strong effect pattern is performed in which both the crest actor 224A and the eight generation actor 224B operate in time.

  The timing shown in FIG. (07) shows a state in which the strong reach pattern has been executed to develop the super reach (SP reach) effect and the SP reach effect (in this example, the swordsman reach effect) has started. Yes. At this timing, both the family crest character 224A and the Yatsushiro character 224B return to the initial positions, and in the display area of the image display device 208, the background display BD corresponding to the SP reach effect (swordsman reach effect) is performed and the swordsman reach Production display has started.

  Also, at this timing, the first decorative symbol (deca decorative symbol) and the second decorative symbol (mini decorative symbol) are displayed again when triggered by a certain state (for example, SP reach state). The Deca decoration symbol is a probability variation symbol in which both the left symbol and the right symbol constitute a tempering symbol symbol (in this example, a probability variation symbol in which “decoration 5” of the number symbol overlaps the front of the symbol “爺”). The left design and the right design of the Deca decorative design move to the upper left and upper right of the display area, respectively, and the decorative design is displayed rotating around the vertical (vertical) direction of the display area. When the player is facing, what kind of symbol the player is invisible to the player or difficult to see.

  On the other hand, as shown in the enlarged view (22) of the mini-decoration symbol, the left symbol and the right symbol constitute a symbol design symbol that is the same as the deca-decoration symbol (in this example, “decoration 5” of the definite symbol) Is displayed in a state where the middle symbol is changing at high speed, and what kind of symbol is visible to the player or easy to see compared to the deca decorated symbol It has become. That is, in this production example, in a certain state (for example, SP reach state), the deca decoration symbol is difficult or invisible to the player, but the contents of the deca decoration symbol (what Can be recognized.

  This figure (08) shows a state where the animation of the confrontation scene of the character “Tono” and the character “Swordsman” is displayed as a swordsman reach production display, and the left design and the right design of the Deca decoration design are the same by rotation. This shows a state in which the player is more difficult to see than the timing shown in FIG. On the other hand, the mini-decorated symbol is easier for the player to see than the deca-decorated symbol as shown in FIG.

  FIGS. (09) to (11) show the state where the animation of the confrontation scenes of the character “Tono” and the character “Swordsman” is continuously displayed as a swordsman reach production display. The right symbol shows a state in which the player is more difficult to see (not visible) than the timing shown in FIG. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 22 (22), the mini-decorated symbol is easier to see (visible) than the deca-decorated symbol.

FIG. 12 (12) to FIG. 15 (15) show a state in which the button effect in the swordsman reach effect is being executed. Specifically, at the timings shown in FIGS. 12 (13) to 13 (13), the display of the start of the button effect is overlapped with the animation display of the confrontation scenes of the character “Dou” and the character “Swordsman”. Two button images BG are displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 14, the effect button 902 (chance button 136) emits light in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, mode 4 (“lattice” hatching)), and has the same color as the effect button 902 (mode 4). The button image BG displayed in (hatching of “lattice”), the text “Press!” And the elapsed time notification image TG are displayed. The timing shown in FIG. 15 (15) shows a state in which the operation of the effect button 902 (chance button 136) is received within the effective reception period of the operation of the effect button 902.

  The timing shown in FIG. 16 (16) displays the result of the confrontation triggered by the operation of the effect button 902 (chance button 136). In this example, a scene in which the character “Tono” has lost a confrontation is displayed, and a tempered symbol (this is the position of the middle symbol display region 208b of the first symbol display region 208X) in the approximate center of the display region in front of it. In the example, symbols (decoration 6 in this example) other than “decoration 5” of the probability variation symbol are stopped and displayed (swing fluctuation stop display) to notify that the result of the SP reach effect is out of place.

  In addition, as shown in the enlarged view (23) in the figure, in the mini-decorated symbol, the same symbol (in this example, “decoration 6”) as the middle symbol of the deca-decorated symbol is displayed as a stop symbol (swing fluctuation stop indicator). ) In other words, at this timing, the left and right symbols of the Deca decoration symbol continue to rotate, and the character “Tono” lost to the confrontation as a result of the content of the symbol (how it is) and the swordsman reach production. The scene is invisible to the player or difficult to see, but on the other hand, the mini-decoration symbol stop display (swing fluctuation stop display) symbol combination (in this example, “(probability variation symbol) decoration 5-decoration 6- The decoration 5 ”(of a probable variation pattern) is visible or easily visible to the player. Therefore, the player can recognize that the result of the SP reach effect is out of place by the mini decoration design (by the mini decoration design). It will be in the first ballet state).

  The timing shown in FIG. 17 (17) shows a state in which the first decorative symbol (decorative decorative symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first symbol display area 208X (swing fluctuation stop display). That is, at this timing, the first decorative symbol (decorative decorative symbol) and the second decorative symbol (mini decorative symbol) are the same out of combination (in this example, “(probable variable symbol) decorative 5-decorative symbol 6- (probable variable symbol)”. )) Decoration 5 ”).

  The timing shown in FIG. 18 and FIG. 19 is a state in which the scene wipe display is executed. Since the scene wipe display for scene switching is the same as that shown in FIGS. 33 (11) to 33 (12), description thereof will be omitted. Further, in this case, the first decorative symbol is not displayed, but only the second decorative symbol is out of combination (in this example, “decorative symbol” decoration 5-decoration 6—probable symbol ornament 5)). Is stopped.

  The timing shown in FIG. 20 (20) shows a state in which the background display BD is switched to a display different from that at the time of the SP reach effect, for example, when the symbol is changing, and the stop display of the first decorative symbol is redisplayed. The first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the same combination as the second decorative symbol (in this example, “(probability variation) decoration 5 -decoration 6 (probability variation symbol) decoration 5”)). Has been.

  The timing shown in FIG. 21 indicates a state in which the variation of the first decorative symbol is stopped (the state of variation stop, the state of finalization display).

  At this timing, the 4th symbol display device 284 displays both the special figure 1 (square) and the special figure 2 (round) in gray, and the symbol variation (not shown) in the first special figure display device 212 (not shown) This shows that the symbol variation display) is stopped (display end) and is stopped off. That is, in the 4th symbol display device 284, a stop display of the variable game is displayed, and a confirmation display of the deviation is displayed.

  Further, in the image display device 208, in the first symbol display area 208X, a combination (outlier symbol) of a decorative symbol (first decorative symbol) of “decorative symbol (decoration) 5—decoration 6—decoration symbol (decoration symbol 5)” is displayed. (Combination) is stopped (determined display), and as shown in the enlarged view (24) in FIG. 24, in the second symbol display area 208Y, “decoration (of variable variation) 5-decoration 6—decoration of positive variation) The combination of 5 ”decorative symbols (second decorative symbols) (outlier symbol combination) is stopped (determined).

  In this way, in this production example, it is possible to display a certain special symbol (for example, SP symbol) representing development to a certain reach production (for example, SP reach production, SPSP reach production, etc.) once. In the first decorative symbol variation display (first display), for example, when a special symbol stop display is displayed through a middle symbol stop animation (special symbol (SP symbol) stop-turn animation), or The execution of the reach effect (for example, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, etc.) is started.

  Then, in at least a part of the state in which a certain reach effect (for example, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, etc.) is being executed, the variable display (second display) of the second decorative symbol is the template. It is comprised so that a symbol can be alert | reported.

  Here, a special symbol (for example, SP symbol) of the present modification is a symbol that is not used as a symbol representing a big hit.

  In addition, a certain reach effect may be a certain type of reach effect or a specific reach effect. In other words, a certain special symbol (for example, SP symbol) of this modification may be a symbol for specifying and notifying that it develops to a certain type of reach effect, or a specific reach effect is specified. It may be a symbol to be notified.

  For example, there are a first type of reach production and a second type of reach production as the types of reach production, and three different productions of “A”, “B”, and “C” as the first type of reach production. Suppose that there are two different effects of “D” and “E” as the second type of reach effects. In this case, the SP symbol may be a symbol that specifies and informs that the first type of reach effect is developed or the second type of reach effect is developed. Further, the SP symbol may be a symbol that specifies and informs that any of the effects “A” to “E” is developed.

  More specifically, the second type of reach production is a super-reach production (for example, SPSP reach production (production D) and other highly-expected super-reach production (production E)), When the first reach production is other super reach production (for example, swordsman reach production (production A), other SP reach production (production B, production C)), some special design (for example, SP design) ) May be used to identify and notify either the development of a super-reach production with a high degree of expectation or the development of other super-reach production. The SP symbol is SPSP. It may be specified and informed of the development of reach production (for example, production D in which the hero who is a friend character and the boss who is an enemy character battle each other). Ji effect (e.g., effect A, the ally character and the enemy character is fighting) may be configured to identify and notify that develop into.

  In addition, in the case of the pachinko machine 100 having a super-reaching production having a high degree of expectation or other super-reaching production, it may be a design that specifies and informs that it develops to at least one of them. It may be a symbol that identifies and informs the development to one side. Moreover, the design which notifies that it develops into a super reach production, without specifying that it is a super reach production with a high expectation level or the super reach other than that may be sufficient.

  In addition, in the present production example, in a state where a certain reach production (for example, an SP reach production or an SPSP reach production) is being executed, the animation display regarding the tempering design in the variation display (first display) of the first decorative design. (For example, an animation display for displaying a tempering symbol on the left symbol and the right symbol shown in FIGS. 37 (07) to 37 (17)) is displayed. The animation display includes a scene (first scene) in which it is difficult to identify the type of decoration symbol constituting the tempering symbol and a scene (second scene) in which the type of decoration symbol constituting the tempering symbol can be identified. However, in at least some of the states in which the animation display of the first scene can be displayed (for example, the state of (07) to (16) in the figure), the variable display of the second decorative symbol ( In the second display), it is configured to be able to notify the symbol pattern.

<Production example J '>
With reference to FIG. 38 (01) to FIG. 38 (08), another example of the effect will be described. This effect example is an effect example in the case where the SP symbol which is a special symbol stops and displays and then develops into SP reach and becomes a big hit.

  The period shown in FIG. 38 (01) is the same as the period before FIG. 37 (15), and the timing shown in FIG. 38 (02) is the same as the timing shown in FIG. 37 (15). To do.

  The timing shown in FIG. 38 (03) displays the result of the confrontation in the SP reach effect triggered by the operation of the effect button 902 (chance button 136). In this example, the scene where the character “Mr.” has won the confrontation is displayed (the background display BD also changes to display of winning use), and the center of the display area in front of it (for example, in the first symbol display area 208X). In this state, the symbol pattern (in this example, “decoration 5” of the probability variation pattern) is stopped and displayed (swing fluctuation stop display) at the position of the symbol display area 208b. In addition, the left design and the right design of the first decorative design that has been rotated and displayed at the upper left and upper right of the display area also stop rotating so that the content of the design is visible to the player or easily visible to the player. As a first decorative symbol, the symbol combination of the big hit (in this example, “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5” of the probability variation symbol) is stopped and displayed (swing fluctuation stop indication), and the result of the SP reach effect is the big hit We are informing you.

  Further, at this timing, as shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 38 (09), the second decorative symbol is also a big hit symbol combination (in this example, “decorative 5-decorative 5-decorative 5” of the probability variation symbol) is stopped and displayed. (Shake fluctuation stop display).

  Thus, when notifying that the result of the SP reach effect is a big hit, the rotation of the first decorative symbol stops, and the content of the symbol becomes visible (easy to see). It is configured so that it can be easily recognized. When notifying that the result of the SP reach effect shown in the effect example I ′ is a loss, the rotation of the first decorative symbol stops, and the content of the symbol becomes visible (easy to see), and the SP reach When notifying that the result of the production is a big hit, it may be configured such that the rotation of the first decorative symbol does not stop and the content of the symbol becomes invisible (difficult to see). In the case of notifying that the result is a big hit and in the case of notifying that it is a loss, the display mode (rotation and stop mode) of the first decorative symbol may be the same.

  The timing shown in FIG. (04) rises from the initial position below the image display device 208 while emitting light in a light emission mode (for example, mode 6 (“horizontal stripe” hatching)) in which the crest character 224A indicates “hit”. And the state which has alert | reported the hit is shown by moving to the front of the image display apparatus 208 (refer FIG. 30 (2)). At this timing, the first decorative symbol is not displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5 (05) is that the eight generations 224B descends from the initial position above the image display device 208 while emitting light in the same light emission mode as the effect button 902 (eg, mode 6 ("horizontal stripe" hatching)). Then, after moving to the front of the image display device 208, the Yatsushiro character 224B is separated into “Yatsushiro” and “General” and moved to the left and right. While the Yatsushiro character 224B is separated into “Yatsushiro” and “General”, the family crest character 224A is arranged (see FIG. 30 (4)). That is, in this example, a strong effect pattern is performed in which both the crest actor 224A and the eight generation actor 224B operate in time.

  At the timing shown in FIG. (06), the family crest character 224A and the Yatsushiro character 224B return to the initial positions, and the first decorative symbol (deca decorative symbol) is the same as the second decorative symbol (mini decorative symbol). The combination (in this example, “decoration 5—decoration 5—decoration 5” of the probability variation symbol) shows a state in which the first symbol display area 208X is stopped and displayed (swing fluctuation (temporary stop) is displayed).

  At the timing shown in FIG. (07), the background display BD again returns to the same display as the confrontation scene of the SP reach effect, and at the timing shown in FIG. (Variation stop state, final display state). At this timing, the 4th symbol display device 284 displays the special figure 1 (rectangle) in black and the special figure 2 (round) in gray, and displays the first special figure (not shown). It shows that the symbol fluctuation (design fluctuation display) in the device 212 is stopped (display end) and is in a state of being stopped. That is, in the 4th symbol display device 284, the variable game stop display is displayed and the winning confirmation display is displayed.

  Further, in the image display device 208, the combination (decoration pattern combination) of the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol) of the “decorative 5-decoration 5-decoration 5” of the probability variation symbol in the first symbol display area 208X is stopped (decided). As shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 10 (10), in the second symbol display area 208Y, the combination of the decorative symbols (second decorative symbols) of “decorative 5-decorative 5-decorative 5” of the probability variation symbol (second decorative symbol) The winning symbol combination) is stopped (determined).

<Example of production K '>
With reference to FIGS. 38 (15) to (27), other effects will be described. This effect example is an effect example in the case where the SP symbol which is a special symbol is stopped and displayed and then developed into a certain reach effect other than the SP reach.

  Since the timing periods shown in FIGS. 38 (15) and (16) are the same as the timings shown in FIGS. 31 (01) and 31 (02), the description thereof is omitted.

  The period shown in FIG. 38 (17) shows another state after a certain period has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. 16 (16), and the timing shown in FIG. 18 (18) is the left of the first symbol display area 208X. The symbol design (in this example, “decoration 5” of the probability variation symbol) is stopped and displayed on the right symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and the middle symbol undergoes low-speed fluctuation and the temple reach effect (other than the SP reach effect). A certain reach production) has started to be executed. At this timing, the second decorative symbol at the upper center of the display area continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

  The timing shown in FIG. 19 (19) indicates a state in which the temple reach effect is still being executed. The middle symbol of one symbol display area 208X is not displayed, and the left symbol and the right symbol respectively display the tempered symbol. Thus, the display size is reduced, and animations moving to the upper left and upper right are executed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 20 shows a state in which the temple reach effect is still being executed, and the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol (deca decorative symbol) are the upper left and upper right of the display area, respectively. , The decorative symbols are displayed with the vertical (vertical) direction of the display area as the rotation axis, and when facing the back side, the symbols are not visible to the player or difficult to see. Has been.

  On the other hand, the mini-decorated symbol is a symbol in which the left symbol and the right symbol constitute the same tempered symbol as the deca-decorated symbol as shown in FIG. Is displayed in a state where the middle symbol is changing at high speed, and what kind of symbol is visible to the player or easy to see compared to the deca decorated symbol It has become. In other words, in this production example, when a certain state (for example, a temple reach state) is reached, the deca-decorated symbol is difficult or invisible to the player, but the contents of the deca-decorated symbol (what Can be recognized.

  Also, at this timing, an effect is started in which an image imitating which symbol is to be stopped is displayed on the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol near the center of the display area of the image display device 208. ing. For example, in this example, three ball images each displaying “decoration 6”, “SP”, and “decoration 5 (of a probable variation)” are displayed.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 21 (21), an animation is performed in which the three balls move and collide with each other. In this animation, for example, when a ball displaying “decoration 5 (probability pattern)” bounces off another ball, “decoration 5” (probability symbol) stops at the middle symbol of the first decoration symbol. For example, when a ball displaying “decoration 6” bounces off another ball, “decoration 6” stops at the middle symbol of the first ornamental symbol and loses. It is notified that it becomes.

  The timings shown in FIG. 22 and FIG. 23 show a state in which three balls collide, for example, a ball on which “decoration 6” is displayed flips other balls. In FIG. 23, only the ball displaying “decoration 6” is displayed near the middle symbol display area 208b of the first symbol display area 208X, and the other balls are not displayed.

  In the timing shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, “decoration 6” is stopped (swing fluctuation stop display) in the middle symbol display area 208 b of the first symbol display area 208 </ b> X, and the first decoration symbol is displayed. The left design and the right design show the state of continuing rotation. As shown in FIGS. (24) and (25), the contents of the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are difficult for the player to see (or cannot be visually recognized). Is visible to the player (or easily visible). However, the middle symbol of the second decorative symbol continues to be displayed even at this timing.

  The timing shown in FIG. 26 is a combination of symbols shifted to the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol in the first symbol display area 208X (in this example, “decorative symbol (decorative symbol)) decoration 5-decoration 6— (probable variable symbol). )) Decoration 5 ") is displayed in a stop display (swing fluctuation stop display). As for the 2nd decoration design, the middle design continues the variable display.

  The timing shown in FIG. 27 shows a state in which the variation of the first decorative symbol is stopped (the state of variation stop, the state of finalized display). At this timing, the 4th symbol display device 284 displays the special figure 1 (rectangle) and the special figure 2 (round shape) in gray, and the symbol variation (symbol) in the first special figure display device 212 (not shown) is displayed. The fluctuation display) is stopped (display end), indicating that it is in a state of being stopped off. That is, in the 4th symbol display device 284, a stop display of the variable game is displayed, and a confirmation display of the deviation is displayed.

  Further, in the image display device 208, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol in the first symbol display area 208X are shifted in the symbol combination (in this example, “decorative symbol” decoration 5-decoration 6-probability symbol). Decoration 5 ") is stopped (determined display), and in the second symbol display area 208Y, as shown in the enlarged view (28) in the figure," decoration 5-of-decoration 5-decoration 6- (probability variation) (5) Decoration 5 ”is stopped (determined display), indicating that the deviation has been confirmed.

  As described above, even if the reach effect is other than the SP reach effect (for example, the temple reach effect), the first decorative symbol may be rotated and displayed as shown in FIG. is there. Further, in the case of a reach effect other than the SP reach effect (for example, a temple reach effect, etc.), the first decorative symbols as shown in FIG. It may be configured. In addition, even in a reach effect other than the SP reach effect (for example, a temple reach effect, etc.), the first decorative design is always rotated as shown in FIGS. Alternatively, in the case of a reach effect other than the SP reach effect (for example, a temple reach effect, etc.), the first decorative symbol may be configured not to be rotated and displayed.

<Other production examples>
With reference to FIG. 39, another production example will be described. In addition, in the example of production (production example L ′, production example M ′, production example N ′) of FIG. 39, a background display BD different from the production examples so far is shown as an example, but it has been described so far. An effect performed in a situation (scene) in which the background display BD shown in the effect example is displayed, or a situation different from the situation (scene) in which the background display BD shown in the example effects so far is displayed It may be an effect performed in (scene) or an effect performed in both situations (scenes).

<Production example L '>
Other examples of special symbols will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 (01) to (04). The special symbol of the present embodiment may be a symbol that suggests that a certain type of jackpot effect occurs.

  The timing shown in FIG. (01) is that the decorative symbol of the same number (“decoration 2” in this example) is stopped on the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol (in this example, “swing fluctuation stop display”), and the middle symbol is slow. It is a state that is displayed in the fluctuation. In addition, three symbols are variably displayed as the second decorative symbols.

  The timing shown in FIG. (02) is a special symbol (in this example, a character with a character “dono BONUS” indicating that a certain type of jackpot effect is generated in the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol. ) Indicates a state of moving (scrolled) to the middle symbol display area 208b (for example, by reducing the special symbol stop animation (medium symbol animation)).

  Further, at this timing, as shown in the enlarged view (05) in the figure (05), the second decorative symbol is displayed with three symbol combinations (in this example, “decorative 2” for notifying that a certain type of jackpot effect is generated. -A special symbol (in this example, a symbol in which the characters "dono BONUS" are written)-decoration 2 ") is displayed in a stopped state (a shaking fluctuation stop display).

  At the timing shown in FIG. (03), a special symbol (in this example, a symbol on which the characters “dono BONUS” are written) is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol, and a certain type of jackpot effect is produced. Three symbol combinations (in this example, “decoration 2—special symbol—decoration 2”) for notifying occurrence are stopped and displayed (swing fluctuation stop display).

  The timing shown in FIG. (04) shows a state in which the variation of the first decorative symbol is stopped (the state of variation stop, the state of the fixed display). At this timing, the 4th symbol display device 284 displays the special figure 1 (square) with a black fill and the special figure 2 (round) with a gray fill, and displays the first special figure (not shown). It shows that the symbol fluctuation (design fluctuation display) in the device 212 is stopped (display end) and is in a state of being stopped. That is, in the 4th symbol display device 284, the variable game stop display is displayed and the winning confirmation display is displayed.

  In the image display device 208, the symbol combination (in this example, “decoration 2—special symbol—decoration 2”) in the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol in the first symbol display area 208X is stopped and displayed (confirmed display). In the second symbol display area 208Y, as shown in the enlarged view (06) in the figure, the same jackpot symbol combination as the first ornament symbol (in this example, “decoration 2—special symbol—decoration 2”). ) Is stopped (determined) and the big hit is confirmed.

  In this example, as shown in (02) in the figure, the symbol combination of success / failure (in this case, big hit) is stopped and displayed in the second decorative symbol before the stop display of the first decorative symbol. Although it has occurred, it may be configured so that there is no advance burr due to the second decorative symbol, or it may be configured so that a prior burr due to the second decorative symbol is generated, or it is always possible to have a prior ball due to the second decorative symbol. You may comprise so that may not arise.

<Example of production M '>
With reference to FIG. 39 (08) to FIG. 13 (13), another example of the opportunity for generating the button effect will be described.

  The timing shown in FIG. (08) is a pattern in which the same button image (image imitating the effect button 902 (chance button 136)) is displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol (hereinafter referred to as a button symbol). ) Is displayed as a stop (swing fluctuation stop display), and the middle symbol is displayed with low speed fluctuation. In addition, three symbols are variably displayed as the second decorative symbols. The button symbol may be, for example, a symbol in which the button image is superimposed on an ordinary numeric symbol.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 10 (09), in the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol, the same button symbol as the left and right symbols moves to the middle symbol display area 208b (for example, by reducing the middle symbol beat animation) (scroll display). Status).

  At the timing shown in FIG. 10 (10), the button symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol, and the combination of the same three symbols (button symbol) is stopped (swing fluctuation stop display).

  The timing shown in FIG. 11 (11) shows a state where the button effect has started to be executed. In this example, as the button effect, for example, the effect button 902 (chance button 136) emits light in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, mode 4 (“lattice” hatching)), and the button is displayed in the display area of the image display device 208. An image BG (in this example, an image simulating the effect button 902 (chance button 136)), the text “Press!”, And an elapsed time notification image TG indicating the valid reception period for the operation of the effect button 902 (in this example) Then, a meter image in which a predetermined fill color is displayed decreasing with time is displayed. The button image BG is displayed in the same color as the emission color of the effect button 902 (in this example, mode 4 (“lattice” hatching)).

  The timing shown in FIG. 12 (12) shows a state in which the operation of the effect button 902 (chance button 136) is received within the effective reception period of the operation of the effect button 902. FIG. 13 (13) shows the effect button 902. This shows a state in which an effect (for example, reach effect) due to the operation has been started. For example, in the reach effect, the same probability variation symbol (in this example, “decoration 7”) is stopped and displayed in the first symbol (the “decoration 7”), and the variation symbol of the middle symbol is displayed. ing. In the second decorative symbol, the same symbol as the first symbol is displayed. That is, as shown in enlarged view (14) in the figure, in the left symbol and the right symbol, the same probability variable symbol (in this example, “decoration 7”) is stopped (sway fluctuation stop display), and the middle symbol variation display Has been done.

  Thus, execution of the button effect of the present embodiment may be triggered by the fact that three button symbols are arranged as the first decorative symbol. In this case, the button design is not displayed in order to prevent misidentification in the second decorative design. Alternatively, the first decorative symbol and the button symbol may be displayed also in the second decorative symbol, for example, the button symbol in the second decorative symbol prior to the timing of FIG. (09) or (10). It is also possible to make a stop display with all three of them to make a ballet. There is a case where the player can be urged to prepare for the button operation by the first ballet by the second decorative design.

  It should be noted that the button symbol in this example may execute a middle symbol beat animation, and in this case, it can be said that the button symbol is a special symbol.

<Example of production N '>
With reference to FIG. 39 (15), the temper line will be described. In this example, for example, a plurality of (three in this example) tempering lines are displayed by the second decorative symbol, and as shown in enlarged view (16) in FIG. It is running.

  Then, a middle symbol beat animation is performed in which the symbol (in this example, “decoration 7” of the probability variation symbol) is stopped in the middle symbol of the first ornament symbol. In this case, in the second decorative symbol, the stop of the symbol (in this example, “decoration 7” in the probability variation symbol) is given in the middle symbol of the line (in this example, the second line) that has the same symbol combination as the first decorative symbol. A medium pattern beat animation (stop beat animation) is executed.

  In this example, the number of the first decorative symbol (deca decorative symbol) is one, but a plurality of temporary lines may be provided from the beginning, and the number of temporary lines over time The composition which performs the production which increases / decreases may be sufficient. Moreover, the number of tempering lines of a 2nd decoration design (mini decoration design) may be one, and the structure which performs the effect which the number of tempering lines increases / decreases with progress of time may be sufficient. Moreover, the number of tempering lines of a big decoration design and a mini decoration design may be in agreement, and may not be in agreement. Moreover, when performing the production | presentation which increases or decreases the number of tempering lines of a big decoration design and a mini decoration design, you may increase / decrease synchronously and may increase / decrease separately, without synchronizing.

  For example, in a configuration that produces an effect in which the number of tempering lines increases in the direction of a large decorative pattern, after performing an effect in which the number of tempering lines increases, It is also possible to execute a stop-turning animation for stopping one line at a time, and in the case of a mini-decorated pattern, it is possible to display in an easy-to-understand manner how many lines in which line are to be touched (whether the stop-turning animation is executed).

  Also, for example, in the case of a big decorative design, it shows which line of which line is hitting (whether the stop-turning animation is executed), but in the case of the mini-decorated design, it shows a turn-by-line (stop-stopping animation). May be executed). When displaying all lines of a tempering line with a big decorative symbol, it is difficult to know which tempering line is currently being played, so it may be difficult for the player to recognize which symbol should be stopped. On the other hand, in the mini-decorated symbol, since the temper line is one line, the player may easily recognize which symbol should be stopped. According to such a configuration, after the player grasps the symbol that stops at the mini decorative symbol (for example, “decoration 7”), the player can enjoy a realistic effect by watching the animation of the big decorative symbol. There are cases where it is possible.

  It should be noted that the special symbol, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol of the embodiment (effect example) shown in FIGS. 1 to 29, and the special symbol of the embodiment (effect example) shown in FIGS. The first decorative design and the second decorative design can be appropriately exchanged for implementation.

  As described above, the gaming machine (for example, pachinko machine 100) according to the present invention includes display means (for example, the image display device 208 (208 ′), the first image display device 2081, the decorative symbol display device 208, the main liquid crystal). ), And the display means displays a variable display of a set of decorative symbols (hereinafter referred to as “first display (for example, the first symbol display area 208X (the symbol display areas 208a to 208c)). The display means is capable of displaying a variable display of a set of decorative symbols separate from the first display (hereinafter referred to as “second display”). (For example, the second decorative display variation display in the second symbol display area 208Y (the symbol display areas 208k to 208g) "), and the second display is the first display. Different table The first display and the second display can be displayed in parallel, and the display means has a special symbol (for example, a middle symbol (“ NEXT ”symbol), special symbol, pseudo-continuous symbol, middle symbol in FIG. 14 (h) (special symbol for character“ Tono ”), middle symbol in FIG. 18 (o) (special symbol for“ continuation ”character), etc. ), A certain special symbol is a symbol related to a certain effect (for example, pseudo-continuous effect, continuous effect), and a certain special symbol is not used as a symbol representing a loss. In the first display, an animation display relating to a certain special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “a certain animation display (for example, display of a special symbol stop animation, middle symbol animation)”) is displayed. Possible The display is configured such that a stop display of a certain special symbol may be displayed in the first display after the display of the certain animation display is started. In the state where the stop display of a certain special symbol is displayed (for example, the state shown in FIG. 31 (15)) in the state (hereinafter referred to as “certain state”), the second. The game machine is configured such that a stop display is displayed in the display.

  According to such a configuration, since the stop display may be displayed in the second display while the stop display of a certain special symbol is displayed in the first display, the first display and The player may be able to recognize the content of the symbol stop display by at least one of the second displays.

  Even if one of the first display and the second display (for example, the first display or the second display) may be difficult for the player to visually recognize, the other display (for example, In some cases, the player can easily recognize the contents of the symbol stop display by the second display or the first display.

  In addition, when a stop display of a certain special symbol is displayed in the first display, a stop display may be displayed in the second display earlier than that. (Pseudo-continuous production etc.) can be noticed easily, and for a careful player, the result of the production can be recognized (guessed) (there may be a point-off), and the player's interest can be enhanced. There are cases where it is possible.

  Further, for example, when a certain animation display is started, the content of the first display (the type of decorative design), the state (the presence / absence of the confirmed display) is unconfirmed, the content of the first display, Even if the state may be difficult for the player to visually recognize compared to a certain animation or the second display, the second display causes the contents and state of the first display or the subsequent effects (for example, In some cases, the player may be able to recognize (guess) the performance related to the big hit expectation (the second display may enable advance ballet). Thereby, the interest of a player may be able to be improved.

  Further, there are cases where the state of symbol variation can be accurately conveyed to the player by the stop display of the second display.

  Further, for advanced players who are accustomed to the game, the result of the presentation can be recognized early by the stop display of the second display (first barre), and the motivation for the game may be enhanced.

  Further, a symbol display means (for example, a special symbol display device 212 and a special symbol 2 display device 214) is provided, and the symbol display unit is configured to be able to display a symbol variation display. In particular, it is a display in which a fixed display of a special symbol of a certain symbol aspect is displayed, and the first display is a display in which a single variable display is ended by displaying a fixed display of a decorative symbol, There is a case where a stop display of a certain special symbol is displayed before the display of the fixed display of the decorative symbol is started, and the display of the first mode ( Hereinafter, the display of “third display (for example, display of fourth symbol (display indicating variation))”) is started, and corresponds to the display start of the symbol variation display. Configured to start display of the first display. And which, in the above certain state, the third display is continuously displayed (e.g., the state shown in FIG. 31 (15)) is configured to, or may be.

  In addition, in the first display, a stop display of a first symbol (for example, a medium symbol (“NEXT” symbol) illustrated in FIG. 31 (08)) may be displayed. In the display, there is a case where a stop display of a second symbol (for example, a medium symbol (“NEXT” symbol) shown in FIG. 31 (08)) is displayed, and the first symbol is A special symbol having one display size, and the second symbol is a special symbol having a second display size, and the first display size is larger than the second display size. It is the display size, and the above-mentioned “There is a case where a stop display of a certain special symbol is displayed in the first display” means “the stop display of the first symbol is displayed in the first display”. The above-mentioned “second display”. The stomach are displayed stop display "may be that of" the stop display of the second symbol is displayed in the second display ".

  Moreover, before the display of the stop display of the first symbol is started in the first display, the display stop display of the stop display of the second symbol is started in the second display ( For example, it may be configured as shown in FIG. 31 (13).

  Further, the display of the first display is ended in response to the end of the display of the symbol variation display (for example, the stop display state shown in FIGS. 31 (01) and 33 (22)). It may be a thing.

  Further, in response to the display end of the symbol variation display, the display of the second mode (hereinafter referred to as “fourth display (for example, display end or stop display of the fourth symbol (display indicating the final display))”. .) May be configured to start display.

  In addition, at least a part of the state where the first effect (for example, the revival effect of FIG. 34 (22) and FIG. 23 (23)) is performed (hereinafter, “first state (for example, FIG. 34 (23)”). In the first state, the second display may be hidden, and in the first state, the third display may not be hidden. .

  Further, in a state where a second effect (for example, a cut-in effect, a button effect shown in FIG. 32 (24), etc.) is being performed (hereinafter referred to as “second state”), the second display is performed. May not be hidden, and in the second state, the third display may not be hidden.

  Further, the first display may be larger in display size than the second display.

  The certain animation display may be an animation display using the first symbol.

  Also, other display means (for example, light emitting means, fourth symbol display device 284, other display devices, second image display device 2082 (left sub liquid crystal), third image display device 2083 (right sub liquid crystal), sub liquid crystal ), And configured to display the third display on the other display means, and configured to display the fourth display on the other display means. There may be.

  Further, the other display means may be provided on the player side than the display means.

  The certain effect may be a continuous effect, and the continuous effect may be a pseudo-continuous effect.

  Further, the stop display may be displayed in the second display before the end of the certain animation display.

  In the first display, a display in which a certain special symbol is enlarged may be displayed, and the certain animation display may be a display including a display in which a certain special symbol is enlarged.

  Further, the “stop display” may be “a certain stop display other than the fixed display”.

  Further, the first display is a display with three decorative symbols, and a certain stop display other than the fixed display is a stop display including fluctuation fluctuation in at least one of the three decorative symbols. There may be.

  The display means is a means capable of displaying a certain chance, and is configured to display a certain chance stop display in the first display. It may be configured such that the stop display is displayed in the second display in at least a part of the states in which the stop display of the eyes is displayed.

In addition, a special symbol is a symbol representing development to a certain reach production, and a certain special symbol is a symbol that is not used as a symbol representing a big hit, The display is configured so that execution of a certain reach effect may be started after a stop display of a certain special symbol is displayed, and at least one of the states where a certain reach effect is being executed. In the state of the part, it may be configured to be able to notify the temper symbol in the second display.
The game machine may be a pachinko machine.

  In addition, the game table (for example, pachinko machine 100) according to the present invention includes display means (for example, image display device 208 (208 ′), first image display device 2081, decorative symbol display device 208, main liquid crystal). It is a gaming machine, and the display means displays a variation display of a set of decorative symbols (hereinafter referred to as “first display (for example, first symbol display area 208X (symbol display areas 208a to 208c)). The display means is capable of displaying a variable display of a set of decorative symbols separate from the first display (hereinafter referred to as “second display (for example, first display)”. 2 symbol display area 208Y (the second decorative symbol variation display in the symbol display areas 208k to 208g) "), and the second display is different from the first display. Size The first display and the second display can be displayed in parallel, and the display means has a certain chance (for example, a chance eye based on a blue symbol, a chance eye based on a red symbol, a chance eye symbol) In the first display, it is possible to display a stop display of a certain chance (for example, a stop display of a chance eye with a blue pattern shown in FIG. 35 (10)). In the second display, at least a part of the states in which a certain chance stop display is displayed in the first display (hereinafter referred to as “a certain state”). The gaming machine is configured to display a stop display (for example, the stop display shown in FIG. 35 (10)).

  According to such a configuration, when the stop display of a certain chance is displayed in the first display, the stop display may be displayed in the second display. The player may be able to recognize the content of the symbol stop display by at least one of the second displays.

  Even if one of the first display and the second display (for example, the first display or the second display) may be difficult for the player to visually recognize, the other display (for example, In some cases, the player can easily recognize the contents of the symbol stop display by the second display or the first display.

  In addition, when a stop display of a certain chance is displayed in the first display, a stop display (for example, a stop display of the same chance) may be displayed in the second display before that. As a result, it is easy for the player to focus on the stop indication of the chance, and for a careful player, the result of the stop indication of the chance can be recognized (guessed) (may be possible in advance) In some cases, the interest of the player can be enhanced.

  In addition, for example, the content of the first display (the type of decorative design) and the state (presence / absence of confirmed display) are unconfirmed, or the content and state of the first display are compared with the second display. Even if it may be difficult for the player to visually recognize, the second display allows the player to recognize (guess) the contents and state of the first display (stop display of chances) or the subsequent effects. May be possible (the second display may allow advance ballet). Thereby, the interest of a player may be able to be improved.

  Further, there are cases where the state of symbol variation can be accurately conveyed to the player by the stop display of the second display.

  Further, for advanced players who are accustomed to the game, the result of the presentation can be recognized early by the stop display of the second display (first barre), and the motivation for the game may be enhanced.

  The display means can display a certain chance of the first display size (hereinafter referred to as “first chance eye”), and the display means has a second display size. The second chance opportunity (hereinafter referred to as “second chance eye”), and the first chance stop display may be displayed in the first display. In the display, the second chance stop display may be displayed, and at least a part of the above-mentioned states in which a certain chance stop display is displayed in the first display. (Hereinafter referred to as “a certain state”) is configured such that a stop display is displayed in the second display, ”means“ the first chance item in the first display ”. The stop display is displayed In the state of at least a part of the states (hereinafter referred to as “certain state”), the second display is configured such that the second chance stop display is displayed. ” It may be.

  In the certain state, at least a part of the first chance stop display is overlapped by a certain effect display (for example, the effect image shown in FIG. 35 (11)). In the certain state, the second chance stop display may be configured to be displayed without being overlapped by the effect display.

  Further, the first display may be larger in display size than the second display.

  Further, in the first display, an animation display relating to a certain chance eye (hereinafter referred to as “a certain animation display (for example, a stop animation of the middle design of the big decorative pattern shown in FIG. 35 (08) to FIG. 10) ( The middle symbol pattern animation)) ”) is displayed, and after the display of the certain animation is started, the stop display of a certain chance is displayed in the first display. It may be configured to be.

  Further, a certain chance may not be used as a display representing a big hit.

  Each symbol constituting a certain chance may be used as a display representing a big hit.

  Further, before the end of the certain animation display, the second display is configured such that a stop display (for example, a mini decorative symbol stop display shown in FIG. 35 (09)) is displayed. It may be a thing.

  Further, the “stop display” may be “a certain stop display other than the fixed display”.

  Further, the first display is a display with three decorative symbols, and a certain stop display other than the fixed display is a stop display including fluctuation fluctuation in at least one of the three decorative symbols. There may be.

  Further, a symbol display means (for example, a special symbol display device 212 and a special symbol 2 display device 214) is provided, and the symbol display unit is configured to be able to display a symbol variation display. In particular, it is a display in which a fixed display of a special symbol of a certain symbol aspect is displayed, and the first display is a display in which a single variable display is ended by displaying a fixed display of a decorative symbol, Before the display of the fixed display of the decorative symbol is started, a stop display of a certain chance may be displayed, and the display of the first aspect (corresponding to the start of the display of the symbol variation display ( Hereinafter, the display of “third display (for example, display of fourth symbol (display indicating variation))”) is started, and corresponds to the display start of the symbol variation display. Configured to start display of the first display Are the in certain conditions, the third display is continuously displayed (e.g., the state shown in FIG. 31 (15)) is configured to, or may be.

  Also, other display means (for example, light emitting means, fourth symbol display device 284, other display devices, second image display device 2082 (left sub liquid crystal), third image display device 2083 (right sub liquid crystal), sub liquid crystal ), And the third display may be displayed on the other display means.

  The display means may be a means capable of displaying a certain special symbol, and a certain chance may be a display including the certain special symbol.

  In addition, the game table (for example, pachinko machine 100) according to the present invention includes display means (for example, image display device 208 (208 ′), first image display device 2081, decorative symbol display device 208, main liquid crystal). It is a gaming machine, and the display means displays a variation display of a set of decorative symbols (hereinafter referred to as “first display (for example, first symbol display area 208X (symbol display areas 208a to 208c)). The display means is capable of displaying a variable display of a set of decorative symbols separate from the first display (hereinafter referred to as “second display (for example, first display)”. 2 symbol display area 208Y (decorative display of decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 208k to 208g) ”), and the second display is the first display. Different display size The first display and the second display can be displayed in parallel, and the display means is a means capable of displaying a special symbol, and the special symbol is a reach effect. (For example, the swordsman reach production of FIG. 37 (07), SPSP reach production, etc.) is a design (for example, the middle design of FIG. 37 (04), SP design), a certain special design, It is a symbol that is not used as a symbol representing a big hit, and in the first display of one time, execution of a reach effect may be started after a stop display of a certain special symbol is displayed. In at least a part of the state in which a certain reach effect is executed, in the second display, the symbol pattern (for example, FIG. 37 (07) to FIG. 15 (15)). The left figure in the mini decorative pattern The gaming machine is configured to be able to notify a pattern (“decoration 5”) and a right pattern (“decoration 5”).

  According to such a configuration, since at least a part of the state where a certain reach effect is being executed is configured so that the temper symbol can be notified in the second display, the reach effect is being performed. However, there are cases where the player can be made to recognize the template.

  Also, for example, during the reach effect, the content of the first display (decoration pattern type) and the state (presence / absence of confirmed display) are unconfirmed, or the content and state of the first display are determined by the reach effect. Even if it becomes difficult to visually recognize (not visible), it may be possible to make the player recognize the tempering symbol in the second display and enhance the interest of the player.

  In addition, since the player can entertain the reach effect while displaying the tempered pattern in the second display, the careful player can recognize (guess) the result of the reach effect. May be possible), and may increase the interest of the player.

  Further, there are cases where the state of symbol variation can be accurately conveyed to the player by the stop display of the second display.

  Further, for advanced players who are accustomed to the game, the result of the presentation can be recognized early by the stop display of the second display (first barre), and the motivation for the game may be enhanced.

  The first jackpot game (for example, a challenge bonus) is configured to be executable, and the second jackpot game (for example, a big bonus) is configured to be executable. The second jackpot game is a jackpot game with a higher profit for the player, and the display means displays a first jackpot effect display corresponding to the first jackpot game (for example, a positive change promotion in the jackpot effect display) The display means is configured to be able to display a challenge bonus effect display for effecting, and the display means displays a second jackpot effect display corresponding to the second jackpot game (for example, a big bonus that does not perform a probable promotion effect) In the first display, it is configured to be able to display a first variation display in which a first fixed display is finally displayed. In the first display, it is configured to be able to display a second variable display in which a second confirmed display is finally displayed, and the first confirmed display is a first type of decorative design. Is a fixed display of three sets of a certain decorative pattern (hereinafter referred to as “first decorative pattern (for example,“ decoration 6 ”shown in FIG. 34 (7)”)). The display is a set of three decorative symbols (hereinafter referred to as “second decorative symbols (for example,“ decoration 7 ”shown in FIG. 34 (11))” of the second type of decorative symbols. It is a confirmation display, and the first jackpot effect display can be displayed after the first display is displayed, and the second jackpot effect display is displayed after the second display is displayed. In some cases, the Tempe design may be constituted by the first decorative design. The Tenpai pattern by said second decorative pattern is sometimes formed, or may be.

  Further, in a state where a certain reach effect is being executed, an animation display relating to a tempering symbol (hereinafter referred to as “a certain animation display (for example, FIG. 37 (07) to FIG. 17 (17), FIG. 38)” in the first display. (02) to an animation display of SP reach production shown in FIG. (03)) ”, and the certain animation display is the first scene (for example, FIG. 37 (07)). ~ An animation display including a scene in which the first decorative design shown in Fig. 16 (16), Fig. 38 (02) and the like is rotated, and the certain animation display is a second scene (for example, Fig. 37 (17) ) And the scene where the rotation of the first decorative symbol shown in FIG. 38 (03) stops), and the first scene is a device that constitutes the template symbol. The second scene is a scene that can identify the types of decorative symbols that make up the tempered symbols, and the above-mentioned “a certain reach effect is being executed” “At least in a part of the state, the second display is configured so that the tempering symbol can be notified” means “at least one of the states in which the certain animation display of the first scene is displayed”. In some states, it may be configured such that the temper symbol can be notified in the second display. "

  In addition, the display means is in a state where the second variation display is displayed (for example, a state shown in FIGS. 34 (1) to (11) where a variation display in which the decoration 7 is fixedly displayed is displayed. ) In a certain state, in the second display, a stop display (hereinafter, “first stop display (for example, FIG. 34 ( 11) is displayed in the state where the second variable display is displayed, and the second display is displayed in the first display. A stop display of a set of three decorative symbols of one type of decorative symbols (hereinafter referred to as a “second stop display (for example, a deca decoration (“ decoration 7 ”) shown in FIG. 34 (11)). ) ").) Can be displayed, and the first display After the execution of the promotion effect (for example, the effect shown in FIG. 34 (07) to FIG. (09) or FIG. 34 (07) to FIG. 11 (11)) is started, the first stop display is displayed. The second stop display may be configured to be displayable.

  Further, the first display may be larger in display size than the second display.

  In addition, the “certain reach effect” may be a “specific reach effect”, and the “reach effect” means “a certain type of reach effect”. There may be.

  For example, there are a first type of reach production and a second type of reach production as the types of reach production, and three different productions of “A”, “B”, and “C” as the first type of reach production. If there are two different types of productions “D” and “E” as the second type of reach production, the “specific reach production” means reach productions “A” to “E”. It is one of the reach effects, and “a certain kind of reach effect” may be a reach effect of either the first type of reach effect or the second type of reach effect.

  Further, the above “design representing development to a certain reach production” means “design representing development to a certain type of reach production”. In the display, it is configured so that execution of a certain reach effect may be started after a stop display of a certain special symbol is displayed, and “in the first display of one time, It may be configured such that execution of a certain type of reach effect may be started after a stop display of a certain special symbol is displayed.

  Also, other special symbols (for example, the middle symbol (“NEXT” symbol) shown in FIG. 31 (8)), the special symbol, the pseudo-continuous symbol, and the middle symbol of FIG. 14 (h) (the special symbol of the character “dono”). 18 (o) is a symbol related to a certain effect (for example, pseudo-continuous effect, continuous effect), and the other special symbol represents a loss. It is a symbol that is not used as a symbol. In the first display, an animation display relating to another special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “another animation display (for example, a special symbol stop animation animation, a middle symbol animation animation) Display) ”)), and the display of the other animation display is started, and then the stop display of another special symbol is displayed in the first display. The stop display is displayed in the second display in at least a part of the states in which the stop display of other special symbols is displayed in the first display. It may be configured as described above.

  The display means can display a certain chance (for example, a chance eye based on a blue symbol, a chance eye based on a red symbol, a chance eye based on a chance symbol, etc.). A chance eye stop display (for example, a chance eye stop display with a blue pattern shown in FIG. 35 (10)) can be displayed, and a certain chance stop display is displayed in the first display. Even in a state where at least a part of the present state is present, a stop display (for example, the stop display shown in FIG. 35 (10)) is displayed in the second display. Good.

  Further, the “stop display” may be “a certain stop display other than the fixed display”.

  Further, the first display is a display with three decorative symbols, and a certain stop display other than the fixed display is a stop display including fluctuation fluctuation in at least one of the three decorative symbols. There may be.

  Next, another embodiment (example of effect) of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. The embodiment shown in FIGS. 40 to 55 is an example of effects performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment shown in FIGS. 1 to 39. The overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 is shown in FIGS. Since the configuration is the same as that of the embodiment shown in FIGS. Regarding other configurations, the same configurations as those in the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 39 are described with the same reference numerals, and redundant descriptions are omitted.

<Expectation reporting effect>
With reference to FIGS. 40 to 55, an example of the effect of expectation notification effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described as one embodiment of the present invention. 40 to 55 will be described with reference to enlarged views in which a part of the configuration is appropriately extracted.

  Here, the expectation notification effect is an effect that informs the player of the effect that has occurred, or the jackpot expectation level of the effect that is scheduled to occur, or the effect that notifies the player that the player should wait (the expectation level of the jackpot is high). In the following, an example of the expectation rank notification effect and the prior expectation rank notification effect among the expectation notification effect will be described. The expected rank notification effect is an effect in which the generated effect is classified according to the jackpot expectation level, and the classification (rank of expectation level) is notified (therefore, the effect that the player should wait for is notified). The prior expectation rank notification effect refers to an effect in which the rank of expectation is notified in advance (therefore, the effect that the player should wait for is notified in advance).

<Example of production a>
FIG. 40 is a diagram illustrating an example of an expected degree notification effect centered on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment.

(Example of production a-1)
An example of the effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 (a) to (l). The same figure (a)-the figure (l) are figures which show an example of an effect in steps.

  First, the timing shown in FIG. 40 (a) indicates a state in which the fluctuation of the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) is stopped. The first image display device (main liquid crystal) 2081 displays the first symbol display. In the region 208X (symbol display regions 208a to 208c), the symbol combination of the decoration symbol (first decoration symbol) of “decoration 3—decoration 1—decoration 4” is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, a white (default) variation icon h0 is displayed at the right end of the icon display area 800, and four suggestion displays (in this example, pedestals) are displayed on the left side. (Default) hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are displayed to notify that the hold in FIG. In addition, a mini character (donor) is displayed above the icon display area 800. In the explanation display area TT1, a tutorial display “Panda is a master of the lord” is executed.

  In the second image display device (left sub liquid crystal) 2082, the second decorative symbol is displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y. In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 40 to 55, the second decorative symbol is always in the same state as the first decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal 2081 (the same symbol combination, the same variable display or stop display). In this example, the number “3-1-4” (a combination of numbers indicating out-of-order symbol combinations) is stopped and displayed. In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 40 to 55, an example in which such a simple (non-decorated) combination of numbers is displayed as the second decorative pattern will be described. In the left sub-liquid crystal 2082, the first decoration is displayed. The display for notifying the same content as the decorative pattern state of the symbol is referred to as “second decorative symbol”, and the area where the second decorative symbol is displayed is described as “second symbol display region 208Y”.

  Further, a meter (button image) is displayed on the left sub-liquid crystal 2082, but at this timing, all the meters are filled with white to notify that the meter is zero. In the stage name display area, “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town.

  Third image display device (right sub-liquid crystal 2083 shows a state in which the Tono-sama character is on the stage. In the upper part of the display area of the third image display device 2083, the hold in FIG. , And the second hold number display in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2 indicating that the hold in FIG. 2 is “0”.

  The 4th symbol display device 284 displays both the special figure 1 (rectangle) and the special figure 2 (round shape) in gray, indicating that the off state is stopped. In addition, the chance buttons 136 and 137 have the built-in LEDs lit white. The family crest character 224 has a built-in LED that emits white light, and is waiting (stopped) at an initial position (below the first image display device 2081 in this example). In the Yatsushiro character 224B and the general character 244C, the built-in LED emits white light, and is waiting (stopped) at the initial position (in this example, above the first image display device 2081). Audio output from the speaker 120 is not performed at this timing.

  In the following description, the description will mainly focus on effects that have changed from previous effects with the passage of time.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 40 (b), one hold (hold corresponding to the hold icon h11 in FIG. 40 (a)) has been consumed, and symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 (not shown) has started. In the 4th symbol display device 284, the special figure 1 (square) is displayed in white and the special figure 2 (round) is displayed in gray, indicating that the variable game of the special figure 1 is being executed. .

  At this timing, in the first symbol display area 208X (symbol display areas 208a to 208c) of the first image display device 2081, the variation display (first variation display) of the first decorative symbol is performed. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol variation display (first variation display and second variation display) is represented by a downward white arrow (hereinafter, the same applies to other examples).

  In addition, with the suspension of the hold, in the icon display area 800, the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are moved and displayed by moving animations, and the hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h11 moves to the right end of the icon display area 800. And displayed as a white variation icon h0. In addition, the hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h12 becomes the hold icon h11 on the left side of the change icon h0, the hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h13 becomes the hold icon h12, and the left of the change icon h0. The white hold icons h11 and h12 are respectively displayed on the two pedestals to notify that the hold in FIG.

  In the upper part of the display area of the third image display device 2083, the special figure 1 hold is "2" and the special figure 2 hold is "0". Number display is performed. Further, for example, level display is performed in the lower part of the display area.

  At this timing, the character effect display by the mini character (navigator character) MC is started. The mini character MC in this example is a mini character (dono). In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 40 to 55, the mini character (donor), as a general rule, executes a specific effect display (such as using a full screen) such as a jackpot effect or a super reach effect, for example. It is displayed almost always at a timing other than the timing (for example, at least when the first decorative symbol is being displayed), and has various roles. In the following description, the mini character (donor) displayed in FIG. 40A is referred to as a “normal display (default display) mini character (donor)”. In this example, the normally displayed mini character (dono) is a mini character (dono) in a standing state with its back facing, as shown in an enlarged view in FIG.

  If the mini character (dono) is not configured to be displayed almost constantly, or if character effect display is performed by a mini character MC (navigator character) other than the normal display mini character (dono), the character effect display is performed. Mini character MC appears at the timing of execution.

  In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 40 to 55, animation display in which a mini character (dono) plays a sub game (mini game) is executed as a character effect display by the mini character (dono).

  The character effect display at the timing shown in FIG. 5B is an animation display in which the mini character (donor) shoots an arrow toward the target and performs a “target” subgame. As shown in an enlarged view in the upper part of FIG. 55 (b), a mini character (donor) with an arrow is displayed on the left side of the main liquid crystal 2081 (above the icon display area 800), and on the right side of the main liquid crystal 2081 (description). The target is displayed above the display unit TT1. In this example, the target is divided into four, one of which is displayed in red, for example.

  Further, the explanation display unit TT1 displays “If it hits red ...”, and notifies that an effect is to be started according to the result of the sub game.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6C is an effect of continuing the target subgame (hereinafter referred to as “subgame effect”). Is displayed, and the state in which the arrow released by the mini character (donor) is flying toward the target is displayed as shown in the enlarged middle part of FIG. 55 (b). The arrow (partial display of the sub game effect) emitted by the mini character (dono) overlaps, for example, a part of the first decorative symbol during the flight. Note that the arrow (partial display of the sub game effect) emitted by the mini character (dono) may be overlapped with, for example, a part of the first decorative symbol during the flight.

  When the arrow reaches the target as shown in the lower part of FIG. 55 (d) and FIG. 55 (b), the result of the sub game effect is expanded like a wipe (or a balloon) as shown in FIG. Display (execution result display is executed). In this example, as the effect result display SR, a state in which an arrow hits the target red display portion is displayed in an enlarged manner. The effect result display SR (partial display of the sub game effect) is displayed (in front of the decorative symbol) in preference to the changing decorative symbol (first decorative symbol), and the changing decorative symbol (in this example) (The right design) overlaps a part of (the display of a part of the sub-game effect is not overlapped by the fluctuating decorative design (first decorative design)).

  In the timing shown in FIG. 5F, the mini character (donor) has returned to the normal display (default display) shown in FIG. 5A, and the sub-game effect has been completed. The state where the expectation rank notification effect is executed is shown.

  In the prior expectation rank notification effect, as shown in FIG. 5F, for example, the prior expectation rank display RP is performed on the right sub-liquid crystal 2083. The prior expectation rank display RP is a rank of the jackpot expectation degree when the effect is executed (after the effect) with respect to an effect that may be performed after the timing when this is displayed (for example, during the next variable game). Is a display for informing in advance. That is, the prior expectation rank notification effect is an effect of performing the prior expectation rank display RP as the notice effect.

  In this example, as shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 55 (c), a letter “A?” And a red rectangle are displayed as the prior expectation rank display RP, and the rank of the big hit expectation degree is “A”. It is informing that there is a possibility that the production will be executed. As an example, in a part of the sub game effect, a display related to the prior expectation rank display RP (for example, “red” is displayed for the purpose) may be performed, or may not be related at all. Good.

  Here, the rank of the jackpot expectation degree will be described. At least a part of the effects related to the jackpot (decision of success / failure) has a plurality of effects according to the probability of winning the jackpot after executing the effect (the expectation degree of jackpot). It is classified into rank (attribute). In this embodiment, the rank of the jackpot expectation is classified into, for example, “SSS”, “S”, “A”, “B”,. In addition, a plurality of effects may be classified into the same rank. The relationship between the rank of the jackpot expectation degree and the production will be described in detail later. For convenience of the following description, an example will be described. The hold icon changes to the hold icon of the character (dono) ("dono icon ”Is displayed), the effect of performing the pre-reading notice (“ H ”change change effect) is“ S ”, the swordsman reach effect is“ S ”, and the hold icon is changed to a red hold icon (“ red icon ”is displayed). ) The effect of performing the prefetching notice (red hold change effect) is “A”, the hold icon is changed to a blue hold icon (“blue icon” is displayed), and the effect of performing the prefetching notice (blue hold change effect) is “B”...

  Further, in the following description, “preliminary expectation rank display RP notifying that there is a possibility that an effect with a big hit expectation rank of“ O ”may be performed” is referred to as “preliminary expectation o display”. is there. For example, “preliminary expectation rank display RP informing that there is a possibility that an effect with a big hit expectation rank of“ S ”may be executed” is referred to as “preliminary expectation degree S display”. The “preliminary expectation rank display RP” informing that there is a possibility that an effect with the rank “A” is executed is referred to as “preliminary expectation degree A display”.

  That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 5F, the “prior expectation level A display” for notifying that there is a possibility that an effect with a big hit expectation rank of “A” may be executed on the right sub liquid crystal 2083b. (FIG. 55 (c)).

  In this example, one preliminary expectation rank display RP (here, “preliminary expectation A display”) is performed as a result of the target subgame effect, but the subgame effect is the same or different. A plurality of sub games may be executed, and in that case, a plurality of prior expectation rank displays RP may be performed according to the result of the sub game effect.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5G is a state in which the decorative symbols of the out of symbol combination (in this example, the symbol combination “decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 8”) are stopped and displayed on the main liquid crystal 2081. The right sub liquid crystal 2083 continues to display “preliminary expectation A display (preliminary expectation rank display RP)”.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 6H, one hold is consumed, and the 4th symbol display device 284 displays the special figure 1 (square) in white and the special figure 2 (round) in gray. The state in which the variable game of FIG. 1 is being executed is shown.

  At this timing, in the first symbol display area 208X of the main liquid crystal 2081, the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol) is displayed in a variable manner.

  In addition, with the suspension of the hold, in the icon display area 800, the hold icons h11 and h12 are moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h11 moves to the right end of the icon display area 800. It is displayed as a fluctuation icon h0 and changes to blue to give a pre-reading notice. In addition, the hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h12 becomes the hold icon h11 (white) adjacent to the left of the change icon h0, which notifies that the hold in FIG.

  In the movable body (for example, the family crest member 224A), the built-in LED is changed to emit blue light in conjunction with the blue fluctuation icon h0.

  In the upper part of the display area of the right sub-liquid crystal 2083, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 indicating that the special figure 1 hold is "1" and the special figure 2 hold is "0". Has been done. In addition, the display of “preliminary expectation A display” is continued.

  As described above, the “preliminary expectation level A display” is a display for notifying that there is a possibility that an effect with a jackpot expectation level of “A” rank is executed. For example, there is an effect in which the hold icon changes to red ("red icon" is displayed) and a pre-reading notice is given.

  However, at this timing, the hold icon (fluctuation icon h0) corresponding to the digested hold changes to blue and performs a prefetch notice (blue hold change effect). Then, the effect that the hold icon changes to blue ("blue icon" is displayed) and the pre-reading notice (blue hold change effect) is, for example, an effect with a big hit expectation of "B" rank.

  In other words, in this example, in spite of the “preliminary expectation A display” being performed, the actual jackpot expectation is other than “A” rank (for example, the big hit expectation is “B” rank). Is running.

  Thus, even when the prior expectation rank display RP is performed, the effect corresponding to the rank is not always executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 11H, when an effect of a big hit expectation that is different from the prior expectation rank display RP is being executed (here, “blue icon” is displayed), the prior expectation rank display The display of RP (here, “preliminary expectation A display”) is continued.

  As described above, the prior expectation rank display RP of the present embodiment is displayed across a plurality of change displays (in this respect, it can also be referred to as a prefetch display), but the prior expectation rank display RP is displayed only by the change. It may be displayed, or it may be displayed over a plurality of variable displays (pre-read display).

  The timing shown in FIG. 6I is a state in which another character effect display by the mini character MC is being performed. This character effect display is an animation that performs the effect of acquiring the mini item MI. For example, as shown in FIG. 55 (e), the mini character (donor) turns around and acquires the mini item MI displayed as “S”. It is an effect display. Advance expectation rank is promoted to “S” rank by acquisition of mini item “S”, and the performance that is scheduled to be performed (the effect of rank corresponding to prior expectation rank display RP) There is a possibility of being promoted to the production of “S”. That is, the acquisition effect of the mini item MI is one of the sub game effects.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 6J, the right sub-liquid crystal 2083b does not display the “preliminary expectation A display” that has been displayed so far, and instead produces an effect in which the rank of the big hit expectation is “S”. The “preliminary expectation S display” is notified to notify that there is a possibility of the occurrence. The “preliminary expectation S display” in this example is a character display “S?” And a gold rectangle display, as shown in FIG.

  That is, in FIG. 5 (f) to (i), the “preliminary expectation A display” is performed, and there is a possibility that an effect with a big hit expectation “A” may be executed (that is, the prior expectation rank is “ However, when the mini character (dono) acquires the mini item “S” at the timing shown in FIG. 6 (i), the effect of the big hit expectation is “S” is executed. (Ie, the advance expectation rank is promoted to “S”), the advance expectation rank display RP is changed from “previous expectation A display” to “advanced advance” at the timing of FIG. It is reported that there is a possibility that an effect of “S” in the jackpot expectation level is executed (promotion) changed to “expected degree S display”.

  In the present embodiment, the advance expectation rank is promoted by the mini item acquired by the mini character (donor), but a special zone (high accuracy zone) in which the advance expectation rank is easily promoted may be provided. Thereby, compared with the case where the special zone where a change on hold is easy to occur is provided, it is possible to indirectly perform the effect related to the promotion of the big hit expectation.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (k) is a state in which the effect of the big hit expectation degree “S” rank is being executed as informed of the “preliminary expectation degree S display”. That is, the icon hold area 800 change icon h0 is changed from a blue (round) icon to a character (donor) icon shown in FIG. A prefetching notice effect with a high (S rank) is executed.

  In conjunction with the change of the variation icon h0, the light emission color of the built-in LED of the movable body (here, the family crest member 224) also changes from blue to gold.

  The timing shown in (l) of FIG. 6 is based on the fact that the effect of ranking “S” rank in the jackpot expectation is executed as informed of “preliminary expectation S display” in FIG. It is in a running state.

  In the expected rank notification effect, for example, the expected rank display RN is performed on the right sub-liquid crystal 2083 as in FIG. The expectation rank display RN is a display for informing the rank of the jackpot expectation degree after the end of the effect for the effect being executed. That is, the expectation rank notification effect is an effect of performing the expectation rank display RN as a notice effect.

  Further, in the following description, the “expected degree rank display RN notifying that an effect having a big hit expectation rank of“ ◯ ”has been executed (running)” is sometimes referred to as “expected degree ○ display”. is there. For example, “expected degree rank display RN notifying that an effect having a big hit expectation rank of“ S ”has been executed (running)” is referred to as “expected degree S display”.

  In this example, as expected rank display RN, as shown in FIG. 55 (j), a letter “S”, a golden rectangle, and a letter “Tono Suspension” are displayed, and the rank of the big hit expectation is “S ”Is being executed (“ expected degree S display ”is performed).

  Note that the expected rank display RN (“expected degree S display”) is displayed in the same area as the prior expected rank display RP (“preliminary expected degree S display” such as (k) in the figure). That is, instead of “preliminary expectation S display” (overwritten), “expected expectation S display” is displayed.

  In addition, FIG. 1 (l) shows a state in which the level has been raised based on the player's function related to membership system service (here, the level has been raised from 1.2 to 1.3) and the privilege has been granted. Yes. The privilege here is, for example, release of a song.

  The level increases by adding points associated with the game (for example, adding 1 point for each symbol variation, adding 2 points by executing certain effects, etc.). The effect subject to point addition may or may not include the expectation notification effect of the present embodiment.

  Further, “opening a song” means, for example, that the number of songs that can be viewed during a big hit has increased. At this timing, a song release notification MM (enlarged in FIG. 55 (h)) for notifying that the song C has been released is displayed on the right sub liquid crystal 2083, for example, above the “expected S display”. ing.

  Note that this membership service may be able to be temporarily started even if the player is not logged in with his / her unique authentication information. Good.

  Thus, in this production example, a sub-game (for example, a target sub-game production) by a mini character (dono) is performed, and a prior expectation rank notification production is executed according to the result (for example, “pre-expectation” Degree A display "), and the advance expectation rank is promoted by a sub-game (for example, mini item acquisition effect) by the mini character (donor) (" preliminary expectation degree S display "), and a higher expectation effect (for example, , A pre-reading notice effect by “Tono Icon”, level-up by increasing points, song release).

  In addition, in the same figure (k)-the same figure (l), prior expectation rank display RP ("preliminary expectation degree S display") instantaneously changes to expectation degree rank display RN ("expected degree S display"). However, the switching display from the prior expectation rank display RP to the expectation rank display RN is based on an animation display (for example, an animation in which the front and back of a plate-like body are switched and displayed). May be. In addition, there may be a period in which both the prior expectation rank display RP and the expectation rank display RN are displayed when switching from the prior expectation rank display RP to the expectation rank display RN.

  In FIG. 11L, the display start timing (first timing) of the “expected degree S display” and the display start timing (second timing) of the music release notification MM are the same timing. Alternatively, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing (the same applies to the following embodiments).

(Example of production a-2)
40 (m) to 40 (o) are diagrams showing other examples of effects in stages.

  Since the timing shown in FIG. 5M is the same as that shown in FIG. In the timing shown in FIG. 9 (n), one hold is consumed, and the first symbol display area 208X of the main liquid crystal 2081 displays a variation of the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol). In the icon display area 800, the hold icons h11 and h12 are moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h11 moves to the right end of the icon display area 800 and is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0. The pre-reading notice is changed to red. In addition, the hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h12 becomes the hold icon h11 (white) adjacent to the left of the change icon h0, which notifies that the hold in FIG.

  Other configurations (for example, the state of the 4th symbol display device 284, the display of the second holding number in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 on the right sub-liquid crystal 2083, etc.) accompanying the digestion of the holding are shown in FIG. ), Or only the number changes depending on the number of reservations), and the description is omitted (the same applies to the following description).

  Further, in the movable body (for example, the family crest member 224A), the built-in LED changes to red light emission in conjunction with the red fluctuation icon h0.

  At this timing, the “preliminary expectation A display” display (for example, “A?” Display shown in FIG. 55C and a red rectangle display) continues from the timing shown in FIG. ing.

  In other words, in this example, “preliminary expectation A display” is performed from the timing of FIG. 5 (m), and actually corresponds to “preliminary expectation A display” at the timing shown in FIG. An effect (for example, a red-holding change effect with a jackpot expectation of “A” rank) is executed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 10 (o) is based on the fact that the effect of rank “A” rank is expected as the notification of “preliminary expectation A display” in FIG. It is in a running state.

  In this example, as expected rank display RN, as shown in FIG. 55 (i), a letter “A”, a red rectangle, and a letter “red hold” are displayed, and the rank of the big hit expectation is “A ”Is being executed (“ expected degree A display ”is performed).

  In this example, the case where the red-holding change effect is executed as an effect having an “A” rank corresponding to the “preliminary expectation A display” has been described as an example. Other productions may correspond as the “ranking production”.

  For example, when “Princess Rescue Reach Production” is classified as a performance with a jackpot expectation “A” rank, “Principal Expectation A Display” was performed and “Princess Rescue Reach Production” was executed. ” The state is that “the effect of rank“ A ”rank has been executed according to the notification of“ preliminary expectation A display ””, and in that case also, the expectation rank notification effect (“expectation A display”) Is done.

(Example of production a-3)
40 (p) to 40 (r) are diagrams showing other examples of effects in stages.

  The timing shown in (p) in the figure is the same as that in (j) in the figure, and the description is omitted. The timing shown in FIG. 6 (q) is a state in which the “preliminary expectation S display” is being performed, and the main liquid crystal 2081 performs a super reach production (swordsman reach production) with a jackpot expectation of “S” rank, for example. Is in a state where has been started.

  The timing shown in (r) of FIG. 6 is based on the fact that the effect of “S” rank of the jackpot expectation is executed as shown in the notification of “preliminary expectation S display” in (q) of FIG. It is in a running state.

  That is, in this example, as expected rank display RN, as shown in FIG. 55 (k), the letters “S”, the golden rectangle and the “swordsman reach” are displayed, and the rank of the big hit expectation is It is informing that the effect of “S” is being executed (“expected degree S display” is performed).

  Further, points are added based on the player's function related to membership system and the level is increased (here, the level is increased from 1.2 to 1.3), and a privilege is given. The privilege here is, for example, release of a song (Song C).

  In this example, the case where the swordsman reach production is executed as the production of the “S” rank corresponding to the “preliminary expectation S display” has been described as an example, but the big hit expectation is “S”. Other effects may correspond to the effect of the rank.

  For example, in the case where the “actual effect effect” is classified as an effect having a jackpot expectation “S” rank, the “actual effect effect has been executed after the“ preliminary expectation S display ”is performed” “As shown in the notification of“ preliminary expectation S display ”, the effect of“ S ”rank has been executed for the jackpot expectation is performed.” In this case, the expectation rank notification effect (“expectation S display”) is performed. .

  Conventionally, the notice effect that occurs is reported in a direct expression (for example, expression such as “Yoshimune hold is likely to appear”), but according to this embodiment, the notice effect is classified and its rank is reported. By doing so, the player may be able to guess the notice effect that occurs, and the interest of the game may be enhanced.

<Common items in each embodiment>
Hereinafter, items common to the embodiments shown in FIGS. 40 to 55 will be described.

  The prior expectation rank and the expectation rank (produce jackpot expectation degree) described in each example and the production corresponding to these (production that does not correspond) are combinations for convenience of explanation, and are limited to the descriptions in this specification. Is not to be done.

  For example, a certain effect (effect A) corresponds to only the expectation rank notification effect, but another effect (effect B) may correspond to the prior expectation rank notification effect and the expectation rank notification effect. . In addition, the advance expectation rank notification effect may be performed every time, or the advance expectation rank notification effect may be performed as a specific effect. In addition, the expectation rank notification effect may be performed every time, or the expectation rank notification effect may be performed as a specific effect.

  In addition, the time from the start of execution of the advance expectation rank notification effect to the corresponding effect (first time) and the time from the start of execution of the expectation rank notification effect to the corresponding effect (second time) are the same. The first time may be longer than the second time, or the second time may be longer than the first time.

<Example of production b>
FIG. 41 is a diagram showing another example of the expected degree notification effect centering on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

(Example b-1)
41 (b) to 41 (f) are diagrams showing other examples of effects in stages.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6B is a state in which the blue hold change effect by the change icon h0 is executed and the “preliminary expectation A display” is displayed, and is the same as the timing shown in FIG. Therefore, explanation is omitted.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6C shows a state in which the character effect display (animation for obtaining the mini item MI) by the mini character (dono) is being executed. In this example, as shown in FIG. 55 (f), the mini-character (donor) turns around and acquires the mini-item MI displayed as “Up”. By acquiring the mini-item “Up”, the currently executed effect (in this example, the blue holding change effect) is promoted to an effect with a high expectation level of jackpot.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6D is obtained by acquiring the mini item “Up” in FIG. 6C, and the blue hold change effect by the change icon h0 is, for example, the red hold change effect of the big hit expectation degree “A”. It is in a state of being promoted to.

  That is, the change icon h0 changes to red to perform pre-reading notice, and in conjunction with this, the built-in LED of the family crest member 224A changes to red light emission.

  Further, at this timing, the “preliminary expectation A display” (for example, a character display “A?” And a red rectangle) continues from the timing of FIG.

  That is, in this example, “preliminary expectation A display” is performed from the timing shown in FIG. 6B, and actually corresponds to “preliminary expectation A display” at the timing shown in FIG. An effect (for example, a red-holding change effect with a jackpot expectation of “A” rank) is executed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 8E is based on the fact that the effect of rank “A” rank is expected as the notification of “preliminary expectation A display” in FIG. It is in a running state.

  In this example, as expected rank display RN, as shown in FIG. 55 (i), a letter “A”, a red rectangle, and a letter “red hold” are displayed, and the rank of the big hit expectation is “A ”Is being executed (“ expected degree A display ”is performed).

  The timing shown in FIG. 5F is a state in which “expected degree A display” is not displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of displaying “expected degree A display”.

  The production examples shown in FIGS. 40 (i) to (j) promote the prior expectation rank display RP based on the mini-item MI acquisition effect by the mini character (donor). The rank of the jackpot expectation degree of the effect to be executed is promoted by the effect of acquiring the mini item MI by the mini character (dono).

  In FIG. 8F, the expectation rank display RN (“expectation A display”) is not displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of display, but (a plurality of expectation rank displays RN are overlapped). If displayed, the latest expected rank display RN may continue to be displayed.

  Also, the time (first time) from the start of execution of the advance expectation rank notification effect to the time when it is not displayed (the display is switched to the expectation rank display RN), and until the end of execution of the expectation rank notification effect. The time (second time) until the expectation rank display RN is not displayed may be the same, the first time may be longer than the second time, or the second time The time may be longer than the first time.

(Example b-2)
FIG. 41 (h) to FIG. 41 (l) are diagrams showing another example of effects in stages.

  The timing shown in (h) of the figure is a state in which a blue hold change effect is executed by the change icon h0 and “preliminary expectation S display” is displayed, and is the same as the timing shown in FIG. 40 (j). Therefore, explanation is omitted.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6I shows a state in which the character effect display (animation for obtaining the mini item MI) by the mini character (dono) is being executed. In this example, as shown in FIG. 55 (f), the mini-character (donor) turns around and acquires the mini-item MI displayed as “Up”. By acquiring the mini-item “Up”, the currently executed effect (in this example, the blue holding change effect) is promoted to an effect with a high expectation level of jackpot.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (j) is obtained by acquiring the mini item “Up” in FIG. 6 (i), so that the blue hold change effect by the change icon h0 is, for example, the big hit expectation degree “S” It is in a state of being promoted to.

  In other words, the change icon h0 changes to the icon (FIG. 55 (g)) to make a pre-reading notice, and in conjunction with this, the built-in LED of the family crest actor 224A changes to gold light emission.

  Further, at this timing, the “preliminary expectation S display” display (for example, “S?” Character display and gold rectangle display) is continued from the timing of FIG.

  That is, in this example, the “preliminary expectation S display” is performed from the timing shown in FIG. 11H, and actually corresponds to the “preliminary expectation S display” at the timing shown in FIG. An effect (for example, an on-hold change effect with an expected degree of jackpot of “S” rank) is being executed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 10 (k) is based on the fact that the effect of the big hit expectation degree “S” rank is executed as shown in the notice “preliminary expectation S display” in FIG. It is in a running state.

  In this example, the expectation rank display RN displays the letters “S”, the golden rectangle, and the letters “Honto” (FIG. 55 (j)), and the effect of the big hit expectation rank is “S”. Is being executed ("expected degree S display" is performed).

  Further, points are added based on the player's function related to membership system and the level is increased (here, the level is increased from 1.2 to 1.3), and a privilege is given. The privilege here is, for example, release of a song (Song C). In the right sub liquid crystal 2083, a song release notification MM is displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6L shows a state after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of “expected degree S display”. At this timing, the music release notification MM is not displayed on the right sub-liquid crystal 2083, while the “expected degree S display” (FIG. 55 (j)) is not hidden and the display is continued.

  The “expected degree A display” shown in FIG. 5F is not displayed after a lapse of a certain time (t1) from the start of display, but the “expected degree S display” is at least a display period (t1) ) The display continues for a longer period t2 (t2> t1).

  The “expectation S display” is, for example, when the next variable game (decorative display of decorative symbols) starts, or when an effect different from the effect corresponding to the “expectation S display” is executed, When the effect corresponding to “degree S display” is finished, the display is not displayed.

  Also, the time (first time) from the start of execution of the advance expectation rank notification effect to the time when it is not displayed (the display is switched to the expectation rank display RN), and until the end of execution of the expectation rank notification effect. The time (second time) until the expectation rank display RN is not displayed may be the same, the first time may be longer than the second time, or the second time The time may be longer than the first time.

  Also, the time (first display) from the display start to the display end (display switching by the expectation rank display RN) of the prior expectation rank display RP (for example, “preliminary expectation A display”) having a low jackpot expectation rank Time) and the time (first display) from the display start to display end (display switching by the expectation rank display RN) of the prior expectation rank display RP (for example, “preliminary expectation S display”) having a high jackpot expectation rank 2) may be the same, the first time may be longer than the second time, or the second time may be longer than the first time. .

(Example b-3)
FIG. 41 (n) to FIG. 41 (r) are diagrams showing another example of effects in stages.

  The timing shown in FIG. 11 (n) is a state where the blue hold change effect by the change icon h0 is executed as in the timing shown in FIG. 40 (j), but the prior expectation rank notification effect is not executed. .

  The timing shown in FIG. 5 (o) shows a state in which the character effect display (animation for obtaining the mini item MI) by the mini character (dono) is being executed. In this example, the mini character (dono) turns around and acquires the mini item displayed as “Up” (FIG. 55F). By acquiring the mini-item “Up”, the currently executed effect (in this example, the blue holding change effect) is promoted to an effect with a high expectation level of jackpot.

  The timing shown in FIG. 14 (p) is obtained by acquiring the mini item “Up” in FIG. 10 (o), so that the blue hold change effect by the change icon h0 is, for example, the big change expectation change effect of “S”. It is in a state of being promoted to. In other words, the change icon h0 changes to the icon (FIG. 55 (g)) to make a pre-reading notice, and in conjunction with this, the built-in LED of the family crest actor 224A changes to gold light emission.

  The timing shown in FIG. 14 (q) is a state in which the expectation rank notification effect is executed based on the fact that the effect with the big hit expectation level “S” rank is executed in FIG.

  In this example, the expectation rank display RN is a display diagram (45 (j)) of a letter “S”, a gold rectangle, and a letter “Honto Suspension”, and the rank of the big hit expectation degree is “S”. Is being executed ("expected degree S display" is performed).

  Further, points are added based on the player's function related to membership system and the level is increased (here, the level is increased from 1.2 to 1.3), and a privilege is given. The privilege here is, for example, release of a song (Song C). In the right sub liquid crystal 2083, a song release notification MM is displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7 (r) is the same as the timing shown in FIG. 5 (l), and shows a state after a certain time has elapsed since the start of the “expected degree S display” display. At this timing, the music release notification MM is not displayed on the right sub liquid crystal 2083, while the “expected degree S display” is not hidden and the display is continued.

  The “expected degree A display” shown in FIG. 5E is not displayed after a lapse of a certain time (t1) from the start of display, but the “expected degree S display” in FIG. The display continues for at least a period t2 (t2> t1) longer than the display period (t1) of “expected degree A display”.

  The “expectation S display” is, for example, when the next variable game (decorative display of decorative symbols) starts, or when an effect different from the effect corresponding to the “expectation S display” is executed, When the effect corresponding to “degree S display” is finished, the display is not displayed.

  Also, the time (first time) from the start of execution of the advance expectation rank notification effect to the time when it is not displayed (the display is switched to the expectation rank display RN), and until the end of execution of the expectation rank notification effect. The time (second time) until the expectation rank display RN is not displayed may be the same, the first time may be longer than the second time, or the second time The time may be longer than the first time.

  Also, the time (first display) from the display start to the display end (display switching by the expectation rank display RN) of the prior expectation rank display RP (for example, “preliminary expectation A display”) having a low jackpot expectation rank Time) and the time (first display) from the display start to display end (display switching by the expectation rank display RN) of the prior expectation rank display RP (for example, “preliminary expectation S display”) having a high jackpot expectation rank 2) may be the same, the first time may be longer than the second time, or the second time may be longer than the first time. .

  In this example, the prior expectation rank notification effect is not performed, but in that case also, the expectation rank notification effect ((q) and (r) in the figure) is the expectation when the prior expectation rank notification effect is performed. This is the same as the degree rank notification effect (((k) in the figure, (l) in the figure)) (when the expectation rank is the same).

  It should be noted that, in the case where the prior expectation rank notification effect is performed and the case where the prior expectation rank notification effect is not performed, the subsequent expectation rank notification effect (for example, (k) to (l) in FIG. (R)) may be in different states (when the expectation rank is the same). As an example, the time (first time) from the start of display of “expectation S display” when the prior expectation rank notification effect is performed and the “expectation” when the prior expectation rank notification effect is not performed. The time (second time) from the start of display of S display to the end of display (second time) is long for the first time and short for the second time (or short for the first time and long for the second time). It is.

  When the prior expectation rank notification effect is performed (for example, (b) to (d) in the figure, (h) to (j) in the same figure), the prior expectation rank notification effect is not performed (for example, , (N) to (p)), the player may be able to guess the notice effect to be generated earlier, and the interest of the game may be enhanced. For example, when the prior expectation rank notification effect is not performed, the displayed effect is not changed and it is difficult to predict the jackpot expectation level ((n) in the figure). This may end the game.

  However, if the jackpot expectation can be predicted at an early stage by the prior expectation rank notification effect (if the possibility of a performance with a high expectation of big hit can be predicted), the willingness to continue the game will not be lost, and the interest of the game will be enhanced. May be possible.

<Example c>
FIG. 42 is a diagram showing another example of the expected degree notification effect centering on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

(Production example c-1)
FIG. 42B to FIG. 42F are diagrams showing another example of effects in stages.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6B is a state in which the blue hold change effect by the change icon h0 is executed and the “preliminary expectation A display” is displayed, and is the same as the timing shown in FIG. Therefore, explanation is omitted.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6C shows a state in which the character effect display (animation for obtaining the mini item MI) by the mini character (dono) is being executed. In this example, the mini character (dono) turns around and acquires the mini item displayed as “Up” (FIG. 55F). By acquiring the mini-item “Up”, the currently executed effect (in this example, the blue holding change effect) is promoted to an effect with a high expectation level of jackpot.

  The timing shown in FIG. 4D is obtained by acquiring the mini item “Up” in FIG. 2C, and the blue hold change effect by the change icon h0 is, for example, the big change expectation change effect of “S”. It is in a state of being promoted to.

  In other words, the change icon h0 changes to the icon (FIG. 55 (g)) to make a pre-reading notice, and in conjunction with this, the built-in LED of the family crest actor 224A changes to gold light emission.

  Further, at this timing, the “preliminary expectation A display” shown in FIG. 55C (for example, the character display “A?” And the red rectangle) continues from the timing of FIG. ing.

  That is, in this example, “preliminary expectation A display” is performed from the timing shown in FIG. 6B, and actually corresponds to “preliminary expectation A display” at the timing shown in FIG. As the effects, effects of different jackpot expectations (ranks) (for example, an on-hold change effect with a jackpot expectation of “S” rank) are executed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6E is based on the expectation rank notification based on the fact that the performance with the jackpot expectation “S” rank is executed as the effect corresponding to “preliminary expectation A display” in FIG. This is a state in which the production is being executed.

  In this example, the expectation rank display RN displays the letters “S”, the golden rectangle, and the letters “Honto” (FIG. 55 (j)), and the effect of the big hit expectation rank is “S”. Is being executed ("expected degree S display" is performed).

  Further, as in this example, when the prior expectation rank display (“preliminary expectation A display”) and the corresponding jackpot expectation rank (for example, the big hit expectation is “S” rank) do not match. Can be said to be an effect (contradiction effect) in which the rank of the jackpot expectation degree of the notification content and the rank of the corresponding jackpot expectation degree contradict each other. Moreover, such contradiction effect is one of the premium effects (rare effects), and the premium effect is, for example, an effect whose rank of the big hit expectation degree is “SSS” (superlative).

  Therefore, in this embodiment, a special expectation rank display RNS (special expectation rank display RNS) is performed at the timing shown in FIG. Here, the special expectation rank display RNS is, as shown in FIG. 55 (l), a character display of “SSS”, a rainbow-colored rectangle display, and a character display of “contradiction effect”, and is displayed on the right sub liquid crystal 2083. The

  The special expectation rank display RNS (sometimes referred to as “expectation SSS display”) is displayed in parallel with “expectation S display”.

  Also, at this timing, points are added based on the player's membership service functions and the level increases (here, the level increases from 1.2 to 1.3). Show. The privilege here is, for example, release of a song (Song C). In the right sub liquid crystal 2083, a song release notification MM is displayed. In this case, the song release notification MM is displayed so as to overlap at least one of “expected degree SSS display” and “expected degree S display” (in this example, the song release notification MM is “expected release notification MM”. May be displayed so as not to overlap with each other.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5F shows a state after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of displaying “expected degree S display” and “expected degree SSS display”. At this timing, while the music release notification MM is not displayed on the right sub liquid crystal 2083, “expected degree S display (FIG. 55 (j))” and “expected degree SSS display (FIG. 55 (l))” are displayed. None of them are hidden, and the display continues.

  The “expected degree S display” and the “expected degree SSS display” are, for example, “expected degree S display” (or “expected degree SSS display”) when the next variable game (decorative display of decorative symbols) starts. When an effect different from the effect corresponding to is performed, when the effect corresponding to “expected degree S display” (or “expected degree SSS display”) is finished, the effect is hidden.

  Also, the time (first time) from the start of display of the prior expectation rank display RP to the non-display (the display is switched to the expectation rank display RN) and from the start to the end of display of the expectation rank display RN The time (second time) until the expectation rank display RN is not displayed may be the same, the first time may be longer than the second time, or the second time The time may be longer than the first time.

  Also, the time (first time) from the start of display of the prior expectation rank display RP to non-display (the display is switched to the expectation rank display RN) and the start of display of the special expectation rank display RNS are ended. Until the special expectation rank display RNS is not displayed (second time) may be the same, the first time may be longer than the second time, The time 2 may be longer than the first time.

  In FIG. 9E, the display start timing (first timing) of “expected degree SSS display” and the display start timing (second timing) of “expected degree S display” are the same. Alternatively, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

  Also, the display end timing (first timing) of the “expected degree SSS display” and the display end timing (second timing) of the “expected degree S display” may be the same, or the first The timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

(Production example c-2)
Another example of the effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 (h) to (i). FIGS. 11H to 11I are diagrams showing another example of effects in stages.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6H is a state in which a blue hold change effect is executed by the change icon h0 and “preliminary expectation S display” is displayed as shown in FIG. Since the timing is the same as that shown in j), the description is omitted.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6I shows a state in which a character effect display (animation that performs a mini item acquisition effect) by a mini character (dono) is being executed. In this example, the mini character (dono) turns around and acquires the mini item displayed as “Up” (FIG. 55F). By acquiring the mini-item “Up”, the currently executed effect (in this example, the blue holding change effect) is promoted to an effect with a high expectation level of jackpot.

  The timing shown in (j) of FIG. 6 indicates that the blue hold change effect by the fluctuation icon h0 is obtained by acquiring the mini item “Up” in FIG. It is in a state of being promoted to.

  That is, the change icon h0 changes to red to perform pre-reading notice, and in conjunction with this, the built-in LED of the family crest member 224A changes to red light emission.

  Further, at this timing, the “preliminary expectation S display” display (for example, “S?” Character display and gold rectangle display) is continued from the timing of FIG.

  That is, in this example, the “preliminary expectation S display” shown in FIG. 55 (d) is performed from the timing shown in FIG. 55 (i). In fact, at the timing shown in FIG. As an effect corresponding to “degree S display”, an effect of a different jackpot expectation level (rank) (for example, a red-holding change effect with a jackpot expectation level of “A” rank) is executed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 10 (k) is based on the expectation rank notification based on the fact that the performance with the jackpot expectation “A” rank is executed as the effect corresponding to “preliminary expectation S display” in FIG. This is a state in which the production is being executed.

  In this example, as expected rank display RN, as shown in FIG. 55 (i), a letter “A”, a red rectangle, and a letter “red hold” are displayed, and the rank of the big hit expectation is “A ”Is being executed (“ expected degree A display ”is performed).

  In other words, this example also shows a contradictory effect in which the prior expectation rank display (“preliminary expectation S display”) and the corresponding jackpot expectation rank (for example, the big hit expectation is “A” rank) are inconsistent. Running.

  Therefore, a special expectation rank display RNS (special expectation rank display RNS) is performed at the timing shown in FIG. Here, the special expectation rank display RNS is a character display of “SSS”, a rainbow-colored rectangle display, and a character display of “contradiction effect”, and is displayed on the right sub liquid crystal 2083 (FIG. 55 (l)).

  The special expectation rank display RNS (“expectation SSS display”) is displayed in parallel with the “expectation A display”.

  Also, at this timing, points are added based on the player's membership service functions and the level increases (here, the level increases from 1.2 to 1.3). Show. The privilege here is, for example, release of a song (Song C). In the right sub liquid crystal 2083, a song release notification MM is displayed. In this case, the song release notification MM is displayed so as to overlap at least one of “expected degree SSS display” and “expected degree A display” (in this example, the song release notification MM is “expected May be displayed so as not to overlap with each other.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6L shows a state after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of displaying “expected degree A display” and “expected degree SSS display”. At this timing, in the right sub liquid crystal 2083, the song release notification MM and the “expected degree A display” are not displayed, while the “expected degree SSS display (FIG. 55 (l))” is not hidden. The display continues.

  Note that the “expected degree SSS display” is, for example, when the next variable game (decorative display of decorative symbols) is started, or when an effect different from the effect corresponding to the “expected degree SSS display” is executed. When the effect corresponding to “degree SSS display” is finished, the display is not displayed.

  Also, the time (first time) from the start of display of the prior expectation rank display RP to the non-display (the display is switched to the expectation rank display RN) and from the start to the end of display of the expectation rank display RN The time (second time) until the expectation rank display RN is not displayed may be the same, the first time may be longer than the second time, or the second time The time may be longer than the first time.

  Also, the time (first time) from the start of display of the prior expectation rank display RP to non-display (the display is switched to the expectation rank display RN) and the start of display of the special expectation rank display RNS are ended. Until the special expectation rank display RNS is not displayed (second time) may be the same, the first time may be longer than the second time, The time 2 may be longer than the first time.

  In FIG. 11L, the display start timing (first timing) of “expected degree SSS display” is the same as the display start timing (second timing) of “expected degree A display”. Alternatively, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

  In FIG. 10L, the display end timing (first timing) of the song release notification MM and the display end timing (second timing) of “expected degree A display” may be the same. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 42, for example, a plurality of expected rank displays RN are displayed on the right sub liquid crystal 2083. In this way, when a plurality of expectation rank displays RN are displayed and the contents are the same, one expectation rank display RN and the number thereof (for example, “× 2”, “× 3”). ”Or the like, or may be displayed so as to overlap part or all of the expected rank display RN (the same applies to the music release notification MM).

  Further, in the case where a plurality of expected rank displays RN are displayed in an overlapping manner, the expectation is not displayed (or difficult to view) (overlapping) due to the operation of the operation means (for example, the chance button 136). The degree rank display RN may be displayed (redisplayed) on the forefront. Alternatively, a plurality of expectation rank display RNs are displayed, but in a configuration in which only one latest expectation rank display RN can be displayed, the previous expectation rank display RN is displayed again by a button operation. Also good.

  Moreover, it cannot be redisplayed by button operation, and only the latest expectation rank display RN may be visible to the player.

  The configuration in which the plurality of expectation rank displays RN are displayed (the display example and the redisplay example) is the same in the other embodiments.

  In the present embodiment shown in FIGS. 40 to 55, the respective examples can be applied in combination with each other, and the present production example C shown in FIG. 42 is the same, but only the configuration of the present production example C is provided in this embodiment. It is good also as a structure which does not contain.

  Moreover, in this embodiment shown in FIGS. 40-55, it is good also as a structure which does not include the structure only of another one production example.

<Example of production d>
FIG. 43 is a diagram illustrating an example of an expectation notification effect centered on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment.

(Example d-1)
Another example of the effect will be described with reference to FIG. 43 (b) to FIG. 43 (f). FIGS. 5B to 5F are diagrams showing another example of effects in stages.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6B is a state in which the blue hold change effect by the change icon h0 is executed and the “preliminary expectation A display” shown in FIG. 55C is displayed, and FIG. Since the timing is the same as that shown in FIG.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6C shows a state in which the character effect display (animation for obtaining the mini item MI) by the mini character (dono) is being executed. In this example, as shown in FIG. 55 (f), the mini-character (dono) turns around and acquires a mini-item displayed as “Up”. By acquiring the mini-item “Up”, the currently executed effect (in this example, the blue holding change effect) is promoted to an effect with a high expectation level of jackpot.

  The timing shown in FIG. 4D is obtained by acquiring the mini item “Up” in FIG. 2C, and the blue hold change effect by the change icon h0 is, for example, the big change expectation change effect of “S”. It is in a state of being promoted to.

  In other words, the change icon h0 changes to the icon (FIG. 55 (g)) to make a pre-reading notice, and in conjunction with this, the built-in LED of the family crest actor 224A changes to gold light emission.

  Further, at this timing, the “preliminary expectation A display” shown in FIG. 55C (for example, the character display “A?” And the red rectangle) continues from the timing of FIG. ing.

  That is, in this example, “preliminary expectation A display” is performed from the timing shown in FIG. 6B, and actually corresponds to “preliminary expectation A display” at the timing shown in FIG. A jackpot expectation degree (rank) effect different from the effect (for example, a big change expectation effect with a jackpot expectation degree of “S” rank) is executed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E is a state in which the expectation rank notification effect is being executed based on the fact that the expectation degree of jackpot is “S” rank.

  In this example, as the expectation rank display RN, as shown in FIG. 55 (j), a letter “S”, a golden rectangle, and a letter “Tono Suspension” are displayed, and the rank of the big hit expectation degree is “S”. Is being executed ("expected degree S display" is performed).

  In addition, at this timing, since the effect of rank “A” rank corresponding to the prior expectation rank display (“preliminary expectation A display”) is not executed, the “preliminary expectation A display” display (FIG. 55 (c)) continues.

  Also, at this timing, points are added based on the player's membership service functions and the level increases (here, the level increases from 1.2 to 1.3). Show. The privilege here is, for example, release of a song (Song C). In the right sub liquid crystal 2083, a music release notification MM (FIG. 55 (h)) is displayed.

  That is, on the right sub-liquid crystal 2083, “preliminary expectation A display”, “expectation S display”, and song release notification MM are displayed. The song release notification MM includes “preliminary expectation A display” and “expectation S display”. ”Is displayed so as to overlap with at least one of them (in this example, the song release notification MM overlaps with“ expected degree S display ”), but is displayed so as not to overlap any of them. May be.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5F shows a state after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the “preliminary expectation A display (FIG. 55C)” and “expectation S display (FIG. 55J)”. ing. At this timing, while the music release notification MM is not displayed on the right sub liquid crystal 2083, neither the “preliminary expectation A display” nor the “expectation S display” is displayed, and the display continues. Yes.

  The “expected degree S display” is different from the effect corresponding to the “expected degree S display” (or “expected degree SSS display”) when, for example, the next variable game (decorative display of decorative symbols) starts. When the effect is executed, it is not displayed when the effect corresponding to the “expected degree S display” (or “expected degree SSS display”) ends.

  In addition, the “preliminary expectation A display” is a display that continues to be displayed because the corresponding effect (the effect of the big hit expectation is “A” rank) is not executed at this timing. It is hidden by execution of the jackpot expectation degree “A” rank production).

  Also, the display end timing (first timing) of “expected degree S display” and the display end timing (second timing) of “preliminary expectation A display” may be the same, or the first The timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

(Example d-2)
With reference to FIG. 43 (h) to FIG. 43 (l), another example of the effect will be described.
(H) to (l) in the drawing are diagrams showing another example of effects in stages.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6H is a state in which the blue hold change effect is executed by the change icon h0 and the “preliminary expectation S display (FIG. 55D)” is displayed, and FIG. Since the timing is the same as that shown in FIG.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6I shows a state in which the character effect display (animation for obtaining the mini item MI) by the mini character (dono) is being executed. In this example, the mini character (dono) turns around and acquires the mini item displayed as “Up”. By acquiring the mini-item “Up”, the currently executed effect (in this example, the blue holding change effect) is promoted to an effect with a high expectation level of jackpot.

  The timing shown in (j) of FIG. 6 indicates that the blue hold change effect by the fluctuation icon h0 is obtained by acquiring the mini item “Up” in FIG. It is in a state of being promoted to.

  That is, the change icon h0 changes to red to perform pre-reading notice, and in conjunction with this, the built-in LED of the family crest member 224A changes to red light emission.

  Further, at this timing, the “preliminary expectation S display” display (for example, the character display “S?” Shown in FIG. 55D and the display of a gold rectangle) continues from the timing of FIG. ing.

  That is, in this example, the “preliminary expectation S display” is performed from the timing shown in FIG. 11H, and actually corresponds to the “preliminary expectation S display” at the timing shown in FIG. A jackpot expectation (rank) effect different from the effect (for example, a red-holding change effect with a jackpot expectation “A” rank) is executed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 10 (k) is a state in which the expectation rank notification effect is executed based on the fact that the effect of rank “A” is executed.

  In this example, as the expected rank display RN, the letters “A”, the red rectangle and the “red hold” shown in FIG. 55 (i) are displayed, and the jackpot expectation rank is “A”. It is informing that the effect is being executed ("expected degree A display" is performed).

  In addition, at this timing, the effect of “S” rank corresponding to the prior expectation rank display (“preliminary expectation S display”) is not executed, so the display of “preliminary expectation S display” (see FIG. 55 (d)) continues.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6L shows a state after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the “preliminary expectation S display” and “expectation A display”. At this timing, in the right sub liquid crystal 2083, “expected degree A display” is not displayed, while “preliminary expected degree S display” is continuously displayed.

  Note that the “preliminary expectation S display” is a display that continues to be displayed because the corresponding effect (effect with a big hit expectation of “S” rank) is not executed at this timing. It is not displayed when the big hit expectation is “S” rank).

  In FIG. 10L, the display end timing (first timing) of “expected degree A display” and the display end timing (second timing) of “preliminary expectation S display” are the same. Alternatively, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

  In the present embodiment (production example d), a configuration has been described in which a plurality of prior expectation rank displays RP or expectation rank displays RN are displayed without overlapping, but a plurality of prior expectation rank displays RP or expectations are displayed. A configuration may be adopted in which part of the degree rank display RN is displayed in an overlapping manner.

  Further, in the present embodiment (production example d), the configuration in which the plurality of prior expectation rank displays RP or the expectation rank display RN are displayed vertically (in a vertical arrangement) has been described. The RP or the expected rank display RN may be displayed on the left and right (side by side).

  Further, in the present example (production example d), the case where the ranks of the expectation rank display RN and the prior expectation rank display RP are different has been described as an example, but the same is true even if both ranks are the same.

<Example of production e>
FIG. 44 is a diagram showing another example of the expected degree notification effect centering on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

(Production example e-1)
44 (b) to 44 (h) are diagrams showing other examples of effects in stages.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6B is a state in which the blue hold change effect is executed by the change icon h0 and the “preliminary expectation A display (FIG. 55C)” is displayed, and FIG. Since the timing is the same as that shown in FIG.

  FIG. 4D shows a sub game effect (for example, a target “shown in FIG. 55B”) by a mini character (donor) at a certain timing, as shown in FIGS. 40B to 40E. As a result, “preliminary expectation S display (FIG. 55 (d))” is added to the “preliminary expectation A display (FIG. 55 (c))” on the right sub liquid crystal 2083. Is displayed. In this case, the “preliminary expectation A display” displayed earlier is displayed in the lower row, and the “preliminary expectation S display” displayed later is displayed in a vertical row in the upper row.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E shows a state in which the character effect display (animation for obtaining the mini item MI) by the mini character (dono) is being executed. In this example, the mini character (dono) turns around and acquires the mini item displayed as “Up” ((f) in FIG. 55) The effect currently being executed by acquiring the mini item “Up” (in this example, , Blue hold change production) will be promoted to a production with a high expectation level of jackpot.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (f) is obtained by acquiring the mini item “Up” in FIG. 4 (e), so that the blue hold change effect by the change icon h0 is, for example, the red hold change effect of the big hit expectation degree “A”. It is in a state of being promoted to.

  That is, the change icon h0 changes to red to perform pre-reading notice, and in conjunction with this, the built-in LED of the family crest member 224A changes to red light emission.

  Further, at this timing, the “preliminary expectation S display” and the “preliminary expectation A display” are continuously displayed from the timing of FIG. 5D (FIGS. 55D and 55C).

  That is, in this example, “preliminary expectation A display” is performed from the timing of FIG. 5B, and actually corresponds to “preliminary expectation A display” at the timing shown in FIG. A jackpot expectation (rank) effect (for example, a red-holding change effect with a jackpot expectation “A” rank) is executed.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 6G, the expectation rank notification effect is executed based on the fact that the expectation degree of jackpot is “A” rank is executed (“expected degree A display” is performed). State. In this case, “expected degree A display” is switched to “preliminary expected degree A display” and is displayed.

  In addition, at this timing, the display of the “preliminary expectation S display” is continued because the performance of the big hit expectation corresponding to the prior expectation rank display (“preliminary expectation S display”) is not executed. doing.

  The timing shown in FIG. 11H shows a state after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the display of “expected degree A display”. At this timing, in the right sub liquid crystal 2083, “expected degree A display” is not displayed, while “preliminary expected degree S display” is continuously displayed.

  Note that the display of the “preliminary expectation S display” at this timing is moved to the area where the “expectation A display” is displayed because the “expectation A display” displayed in the lower row is not displayed. (Slide) is displayed.

  Note that the “preliminary expectation S display” is a display that continues to be displayed because the corresponding effect (effect with a big hit expectation of “S” rank) is not executed at this timing. It is not displayed when the big hit expectation is “S” rank).

  In this way, display is started at different timings of the prior expectation rank display RP, and a plurality of prior expectation rank displays RP (here, “preliminary expectation S display”, “preliminary expectation S display”) are displayed at the same time. In this case, one prior expectation rank display RP displayed earlier is displayed in the lower stage, and the other prior expectation rank display RPs are displayed so as to be stacked on the upper stage in the order added thereafter.

  Then, corresponding to any one of the plurality of prior expectation rank indications RP (the effect of jackpot expectation (rank) is executed to become the expectation rank indication RN, and the expectation rank indication RN (after a certain period of time, etc.) If the expected rank display RN displayed in the lower row is not displayed, the prior expected rank display RP or the expected rank display RN displayed in the upper row is displayed in the lower row. In other words, when the lower-level prior expectation rank display RP or the expectation rank display RN is not displayed, the upper section The prior expectation rank display RP or the expectation rank display RN sequentially moves to the lower display area and is displayed again.

(Example e-2)
44 (j) to 44 (p) are diagrams showing another example of effects in stages.

  The timings shown in FIGS. (J) to (m) are the same as the timings shown in FIGS. (B) to (e) and will not be described.

  The timing shown in FIG. 11 (n) is obtained by acquiring the mini item “Up” in FIG. 11 (m), so that the blue hold change effect by the change icon h0 is, for example, the big hit expectation degree “S” It is in a state of being promoted to.

  In other words, the change icon h0 changes to the icon (FIG. 55 (g)) to make a pre-reading notice, and in conjunction with this, the built-in LED of the family crest actor 224A changes to gold light emission.

  Further, at this timing, the “preliminary expectation S display” and the “preliminary expectation A display” (FIGS. 55D and 55C) are continued from the timing shown in FIG.

  That is, in this example, the “preliminary expectation S display” is performed from the timing shown in FIG. 11L, and actually corresponds to the “preliminary expectation S display” at the timing shown in FIG. A jackpot expectation degree (rank) effect (for example, an on-hold change effect with a jackpot expectation degree of “S” rank) is executed.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 5 (o), the expectation rank notification effect is executed based on the fact that the expectation of jackpot expectation is “S” rank (“expected degree S display” is performed). State. Note that the “expected degree S display” in this case is displayed after being switched (replaced) to “preliminary expected degree S display”.

  Also, at this timing, points are added based on the player's membership service functions and the level increases (here, the level increases from 1.2 to 1.3). Show. The privilege here is, for example, release of a song (Song C). In the right sub liquid crystal 2083, a song release notification MM is displayed.

  In addition, at this timing, the display of the “preliminary expectation A display” is continued because the effect of rank “A” rank corresponding to the prior expectation rank display (“preliminary expectation A display”) is not executed. doing.

  That is, in the right sub-liquid crystal 2083, “prior expectation A display (FIG. 55 (c))”, “expectation S display (FIG. 55 (j))”, song release notification MM (FIG. 55 (h)) Are displayed in this order, and the song release notification MM overlaps at least the “expected degree S display” (the release notification MM is displayed so as not to overlap the “expected degree S display”. Good).

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (p) shows a state after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the “expected degree S display”. At this timing, the music release notification MM is not displayed on the right sub liquid crystal 2083, while the display of “expected degree S display” and “preliminary expected degree A display” is continued.

  The “preliminary expectation level A display” is a display that has been continuously displayed because a corresponding effect (effect with a big hit expectation level of “A” rank) is not executed at this timing. It is hidden by execution of the jackpot expectation degree “A” rank production).

(Example e-3)
FIG. 44 (q) to FIG. 44 (r) are diagrams showing another example of effects in stages.

  Since the timing shown in (q) of FIG. 41 is the same as the timing shown in FIG. 41 (n), description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 40 (r) shows a sub game effect (for example, the target “shown in FIG. 55 (b)” shown in FIG. 55 (b) at a certain timing, as shown in FIG. 40 (b) to FIG. 40 (e). As a result, “Preliminary Expectation A Display” and “Preliminary Expectation S Display” are displayed simultaneously on the right sub liquid crystal 2083. In this case, for example, “preliminary expectation A display” having a low jackpot expectation rank is displayed in a lower row, and “preliminary expectation S display” having a high jackpot expectation rank in a top row. The display order may be reversed.

  As described above, in this embodiment (production example e), the configuration in which the plurality of prior expectation rank displays RP or the expectation rank display RN are displayed without overlapping is described. A configuration may be adopted in which part of the degree rank display RN is displayed in an overlapping manner.

  Further, in the present embodiment (production example e), the configuration in which the plurality of prior expectation rank displays RP or the expectation rank display RN are displayed vertically (in a vertical arrangement) has been described. The RP or the expected rank display RN may be displayed on the left and right (side by side).

  Further, in this embodiment (production example e), the case where the rank of the expectation rank display RN and the rank of the prior expectation rank display RP are different has been described as an example, but the same is true even if both ranks are the same.

<Example of production f>
FIG. 45 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the expected degree notification effect centering on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6B is a state in which the blue hold change effect by the change icon h0 is executed and the “preliminary expectation A display” is displayed, and is the same as the timing shown in FIG. Therefore, explanation is omitted.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6C is a timing at which, for example, the transition from the first to the second of the pseudo-continuous performance is performed, and the movable body (in this example, the eight-generation role 224B and the general role 224C) is executed. State. For example, the Yatsushiro character 224B and the general character 224C in which the built-in LED is lit white at the initial position indicated by the broken line change to blue light and descend from the initial position, and a part of the main liquid crystal 2081 is displayed. It is an effect that overlaps (for example, a part of the variation display of the first decorative design), and as an example, it is an effect effect with a jackpot expectation of “A” rank.

  Further, at this timing, the “preliminary expectation A display” (for example, “A?” Display and a red rectangle display) is continued from the timing of FIG.

  That is, in this example, “preliminary expectation A display” is performed from the timing of FIG. 5B, and actually corresponds to “preliminary expectation A display” at the timing shown in FIG. An effect (for example, an effect effect with a big hit expectation degree of “A” rank) is executed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6D is based on the fact that the effect of rank “A” rank is expected as the notification of “preliminary expectation A display” in FIG. It is in a running state. The Yatsushiro character 224B and the general character 224C have returned to the initial positions.

  In this example, as the expectation rank display RN, as shown in FIG. 55 (m), the letters “A”, the red rectangle and the “logo drop” are displayed, and the rank of the big hit expectation degree is “A”. Is being executed ("expected degree A display" is performed).

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E shows a state in which “preliminary expectation A display (FIG. 55C)” is displayed again on the left sub-liquid crystal 2082.

  In the pseudo-continuous effect, a plurality of effects are repeatedly executed. For example, in this production example, as the pseudo-continuous production (part of), the eight generations 224B and the generals 224C execute the production that repeatedly descends and rises as shown in FIGS. To do. That is, the accessory effect corresponding to the “preliminary expectation A display” displayed in FIG. 5B is an effect that continues until the pseudo-continuous effect ends.

  Accordingly, even if the display changes from “preliminary expectation level A display” to “expectation level A display” due to the descent of the Yatsushiro role 224B and the general role 224C (Fig. (D), again Fig. (E) "Preliminary expectation A display" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG.

  In this case, the “preliminary expectation A display” is redisplayed at a predetermined timing (for example, timing when the Yatsushiro character 224B and the general character 224C return to the initial position from the position shown in FIG. 8C). (It is displayed over the “Expectation A display”). Alternatively, it may be switched from “preliminary expectation level A display” (switched by an animation display or the like in which the “expectation level A display” is turned over).

  The timing shown in FIG. 6G is the timing when the pseudo-rendition production is shifted from the second to the third, for example, and the production of the eight-seventh feature 224B and the general feature 224C (the jackpot expectation is “A” rank) Is a state in which the effect production) is executed.

  In addition, at this timing, the “preliminary expectation A display” display (for example, a character display “A?” And a red rectangle display) is continued.

  The timing shown in FIG. 11H is based on the fact that the effect of rank “A” rank in the jackpot expectation is executed according to the notification “preliminary expectation A display” in FIG. Is running. The Yatsushiro character 224B and the general character 224C have returned to the initial positions. In this case, the “expected degree A display” is a display of a letter “A”, a red rectangle, and a letter “logo drop” as shown in FIG.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (i) is a state in which the effect production which is a part of the pseudo-continuous production is finished, and the jackpot expectation corresponding to the “expectation A display” is the production (work) As shown in FIG. 55 (n), a display indicating the end of the effect (in this example, the word “Done”) is superimposed (overlapped) on the “expectation A display” based on the end of the effect. Is displayed).

  At the timing shown in FIG. 6 (j), after a certain period of time has elapsed since the start of the display of “expected degree A display”, the “expected degree A display” and display indicating the end of the effect that overlapped therewith are not displayed. Is (erased).

  In (j) in the figure, the timing at which “expected degree A display” is not displayed (first timing) and the display indicating the end of the production (marks with “completed” characters) are not displayed. The same timing (second timing) may be the same timing, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

  Further, in this example, “preliminary expectation A display” is switched to “expected expectation A display” in FIG. 4D, but in one effect (for example, one pseudo-continuous effect) When an operation of an object (up and down movement in this example) is performed, “preliminary expectation A display” may be continued without switching to “expectation A display” during the period of the effect.

  Further, in this example, the case where “preliminary expectation A display” and “expectation A display” are displayed has been described, but “expectation S display” (“preliminary expectation S display” that does not disappear even after the corresponding production ends. In the case of “degree S display”), the display is continued together with the display indicating the end of the production (mark including the characters “completed”) in FIG.

<Example g>
46 to 47 are diagrams showing another example of the expected degree notification effect centering on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

  The timings shown in FIGS. 46 (b) to 46 (f) are the same as the timings shown in FIGS. 44 (d) to 44 (h), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 6H, in the state in which “preliminary expectation S display” is performed, a super reach production (swordsman reach production) with a big hit expectation degree of “S” rank is executed on the main liquid crystal 2081, for example. Is in a state where has been started. In the icon display area 800 of the main liquid crystal 2081, only the variation icon h0 is displayed in red, and the family crest character 224A is also lit in red in conjunction with the variation icon h0.

  The timing shown in (i) of FIG. 55 is based on the fact that the performance with the big hit expectation degree of “S” rank is executed as shown in the notification of “preliminary expectation degree S display” in FIG. As shown, a letter “S”, a golden rectangle, and a letter “Swordsman Reach” are displayed to notify that the performance of the jackpot expectation rank “S” is being executed (“expectation degree” S display "is performed).

  Further, points are added based on the player's function related to membership system and the level is increased (here, the level is increased from 1.2 to 1.3), and a privilege is given. The privilege here is, for example, release of a song (Song C), and a song release notification MM (FIG. 55 (h)) for notifying that the song C has been released is displayed at the top of the “expectation S display”. Has been.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (j) displays the confrontation scene in the super reach production (swordsman reach production). In the right sub-liquid crystal 2083, the “expected S display” continues to be displayed, but the song is released. The notification MM is not displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (k) is a state in which the animation display before the start of the button production is executed so as to overlap the front of the confrontation scene in the super reach production (swordsman reach production). “Display” continues to display. Instead of the button effect start animation display, a simple effect image (not related to the button effect) may be displayed.

  The timing shown in (l) of FIG. 4 shows a state where the button effect is executed. That is, an animation related to the button effect is displayed in front of the confrontation scene in the super reach effect (swordsman reach effect). The animation relating to the button effect is, for example, an image imitating the chance button 136 (button image BG) and a display (elapsed time notification image TG) indicating a valid reception period of the operation of the chance button 136. The button image BG is displayed in red, which is the same as the display color of the variation icon h0 and the lighting color of the family crest member 224A, and the chance button 136 can be operated with the built-in LED lighting in red accordingly. Is informed.

  Note that the display start timing of the button image BG (first timing) and the red lighting timing of the chance button 136 (second timing) may be the same timing, or the first timing is the second timing. The second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5 (m) shows a state in which the chance button 136 has been operated within the valid reception period of the operation of the chance button 136.

  The timing shown in (n) to (q) of FIG. 11 is a state where a series of effects based on the operation of the chance button 136 is being performed. A series of effects based on the operation of the chance button 136 is, for example, from the initial position (for example, below the main liquid crystal 2081) indicated by a broken line, as shown in FIG. Ascending to the front of the main liquid crystal 2081, the eight generations 224 </ b> B and the general 224 </ b> B are also lit in rainbow colors and repeatedly move up and down above the main liquid crystal 2081. In addition, the image display device 208 ′ performs illumination display, special image (animation) display, and the like, and the chance buttons 136 and 137 also perform an effect in which the built-in LED is lit in rainbow colors ((n) to FIG. 10). (P)). Then, the family crest character 224A returns to the initial position ((q) in the figure), and a series of effects based on the operation of the chance button 136 is completed. In the same figure (n) to (q), a series of effects based on the operation of the chance button 136 is also performed on the right sub liquid crystal 2083, and the prior expectation rank display RP (expected degree rank display RN). Is hidden.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (r) shows a state where the character (dono) has won in the super reach production (swordsman reach production). That is, on the main liquid crystal 2081, an image in which the character (donor) has won the character (swordsman) and a character “Victory” are displayed. Further, each of the objects (family crest character 224A, Yatsushiro character 224B, and general character 224C) continues to be rainbow-colored at the initial position, and the chance buttons 136 and 137 also continue to be rainbow-colored.

  FIG. 47 (a) is a state following FIG. 46 (r), and in the display area of the main liquid crystal 2081, a decorative symbol of a jackpot symbol combination (here, “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6”) is displayed. (Swing fluctuation display, temporary stop display).

  At the timing shown in FIG. 5B, the symbol combination of the jackpot symbol combination (here, “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6”) is stopped and displayed in the display area of the main liquid crystal 2081, and the four symbol display device 284 is displayed. The special figure 1 (rectangle) is displayed in black, and the special figure 2 (round) is displayed in gray, indicating that the special figure 1 is in a hit stop state.

  The timing shown in FIG. 3C is a state in which a mission achievement display (notification) MA is displayed. In this example, the mission achievement display MA corresponds to the display of the button effect in FIGS. 46 (m) and 46 (n), “NO11: I saw a big button”, and the character (donor) in FIG. 46 (r). Corresponding to the display of the victory scene and the stop display of the jackpot decoration symbol in FIG. 27B, the display is “NO52: Swordsman reach and jackpot”.

  In this embodiment, a mission achievement display MA is displayed separately from the prior expectation rank display RP and the expectation rank display RN. A plurality of mission achievement indications MA are prepared, and the player can obtain an advantageous privilege according to the type (contents) and number by collecting the mission achievement indications MA.

  Unlike the advance expectation rank display RP (expectation rank display RN) that informs the rank of the jackpot expectation degree of the performance to be executed, the mission achievement display MA is a display corresponding to the membership system service, and the progress of the game This is a display (notification) that has a low direct relationship with. For this reason, the mission achievement display MA does not interfere with the performance, and is notified when sufficient time has elapsed since the execution of a certain performance, such as notification when the change is stopped so as not to be confused with notification corresponding to a certain change. It is.

  After the mission achievement display MA is displayed, the jackpot game is started as shown in FIG. 4D, the probability change promotion effect is executed (FIG. 5F), and the jackpot game is ended (FIG. )).

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5I, after the jackpot game is over, the mission achievement display MA is informed that the probability is changed (in this example, “NO21: probability change promotion”). For example, the display is performed at any one of the jackpot end intervals (from the end of the last round of the jackpot game to the end of the jackpot game) in order to prevent the first hit.

  On the other hand, the prior expectation rank display RP and the expectation rank display RN) of the present embodiment may be notified before the final stage of the production corresponding to these branches. For example, if a red-holding change effect (for example, a jackpot expectation “A”) is executed, a prior expectation is expected even if there is a possibility that the red-holding change effect (for example, a jackpot expectation “S”) is subsequently promoted. There may be a case where “preliminary expectation A display” is performed as the degree rank display RP (determined by the red hold change effect).

<Example h>
FIG. 48 is a diagram showing another example of the expected degree notification effect centering on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

(Example h-1)
48 (b) to 48 (e) are diagrams showing another example of effects in stages.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6B is a state in which the decorative symbols of the out-of-order symbol combination (in this example, the symbol combination “decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 8”) are stopped and displayed on the main liquid crystal 2081. In the icon display area 800, the change icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are each displayed in white to notify that the hold in FIG.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 6C, one hold is consumed, and the change icon h0 changes to blue in the icon display area 800 to perform pre-reading notice. Further, the hold icon h11 is displayed in white to notify that the hold in FIG.

  The timing shown in (d) of the figure is a state in which it is informed that a certain effect (here, the blue holding change effect shown in (c) of the same figure) has been executed by the mini character (dono) dialogue. . Specifically, as shown in the enlarged view in the lower part of FIG. 4D, the balloon SS is displayed on the mini character (dono), and the letters “hold is blue change” are displayed, and the blue hold change effect is executed. It is informed (after the fact) that it was done.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E is a state in which the post-announcement of the performance by the mini character (dono) is not displayed.

  The post-notification of the performance by the mini character (dono) in this embodiment (notification by the line of the mini character (dono)) does not notify the rank of the jackpot expectation degree of the effect, and is executed after this timing. This is a notification that is different from the prior expectation rank display RP of the present embodiment because it is not intended to notify in advance about the production that may be performed.

(Example h-2)
FIG. 48 (h) to FIG. 48 (l) are diagrams showing another example of effects in stages.

  The timing shown in FIG. 11H is the same as the timing shown in FIG.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 6 (i), one hold is consumed, and in the icon display area 800, the change icon h0 changes to red and a pre-reading notice is performed. Further, the hold icon h11 is displayed in white to notify that the hold in FIG.

  The timing shown in (j) of the figure is a state in which a mini-character (dono) notifies that a certain effect (here, the red-holding change effect shown in (i) of the same figure) has been executed. Specifically, a balloon SS is displayed on the mini character (dono), and a character “hold is red change” is displayed to notify that the red hold change effect has been executed (subsequently).

  At the timing shown in (k) in the figure, for example, as shown in the enlarged view in the lower part of (k) in the same figure, an image overlapping the display area of the expectation rank display RN of the right sub liquid crystal 2083 (for example, A visual effect image AE that is easy to focus on) is displayed. In this case, for example, the player guides the player's line of sight to the display area of the expectation rank display RN by displaying an arrow from the vicinity of the mini character (dono) toward the display area of the expectation rank display RN. The display is also done.

At the timing shown in FIG. 10L, the visual effect image AE is not displayed, and the expectation rank display RN (in this example, “expected degree A display”) is visible to the player.

  In the present embodiment, the post-notification of the performance by the mini character (dono) (the post-notification similar to FIG. 11D) and the expectation rank display RN by the mini character (dono) are performed. The prior expectation rank display RP of the embodiment is not performed.

(Example h-3)
FIG. 48 (n) to FIG. 48 (r) are diagrams showing another example of effects in stages.

  The timing shown in FIG. 11 (n) is the same as that shown in FIG. 40 (g), and detailed description thereof is omitted. However, in the right sub-liquid crystal 2083, the prior expectation rank display RP shown in FIG. 55 (c) (in this case) Is a state in which “preliminary expectation A display” is displayed.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 5 (o), one hold is consumed, and in the icon display area 800, the change icon h0 changes to red and a pre-reading notice is performed. Further, the hold icon h11 is displayed in white to notify that the hold in FIG.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7 (p) is a state in which a normal display mini-character (dono) is informing that a certain effect (here, the red-holding change effect shown in FIG. 5 (o)) has been executed. is there. Specifically, a balloon SS as shown in the enlarged diagram (d) below is displayed on the mini character (dono), and the text “Hold is red change” is displayed, and the red hold change effect is executed. It is informed (after the fact) that it was done.

  At the timing shown in (q) in the figure, similarly to (k) in the figure, an image (for example, an overlapped display area of the prior expected rank display RP (“preliminary expectation A display”) of the right sub liquid crystal 2083 (for example, A visual effect image or the like that is easily noticed by the player is displayed. In this case, however, the visual effect image is displayed behind the “preliminary expectation level A display” and the “preliminary expectation level A display” is visible to the player, as shown in the enlarged diagram (q) below. It has become.

  The visual effect image is not displayed at the timing shown in FIG. Also, in the same figure (o), “Preliminary Expectation A Display” is switched to “Replacement Expectation A Display” based on the performance of the “A” rank of jackpot expectation. Thus, the “expected degree A display” is visible to the player.

  In the present embodiment, post-notification of the effect by the mini character (dono) (post-notification similar to (d) in the figure), the prior expectation rank display RP, and the expectation rank display RN are performed.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 1L and 1R, the expectation rank display RN is performed with the same effect (display mode) regardless of the presence / absence of the prior expectation rank display RP. However, the effect (display mode) in which the expected rank display RN is performed may be different depending on the presence or absence of the prior expected rank display RP.

<Example i>
FIG. 49 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the expected degree notification effect centering on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

(Example h-1)
The timing shown in FIG. 5B is a state in which the mission notification effect is being executed by the mini character (donor) during the execution of the variable display of decorative symbols on the main liquid crystal 2081. Specifically, a balloon SS indicating “Tempered with 7 symbols” is displayed on the mini character (dono) to notify the mission.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6D shows a state in which “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol and the left symbol in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, respectively, and the mission (7 symbol template) is achieved.

  In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 9E, an effect based on the achievement of the mission shown in FIG. In this example, the effect based on the achievement of the mission is a display of characters indicating that it is a big hit (here, “iron plate!”).

  In this embodiment, as a result of the mission notification effect by the mini character (donor) in FIG. 5B, a display that suggests that if the mission is achieved, it will be a big hit is executed. However, in the mission notification effect of FIG. 7B, the mission may not be achieved (for example, 7 symbols are not stopped and displayed), and the rank of the big hit expectation is not notified. This is an effect different from the prior expectation rank notification effect (advance expectation rank display RP).

  In addition, although illustration is omitted, in FIG. 9E, in addition to the characters indicating that a big hit is made (here, “iron plate!”), An expectation rank display RN may be displayed.

<Example j>
FIG. 50 is a diagram illustrating another example of the expected degree notification effect centering on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment in a stepwise manner, and showing an example of an appearance mode of the prior expectation rank display RP. FIG.

  The timing shown in FIG. 50B is a state in which the main liquid crystal 2081 is performing the variable display of the first decorative symbol. In the icon display area 800, a white variation icon h0 is displayed at the right end, and white hold icons h11 and 12 are displayed on the left. In addition, a timer notice effect is executed on the main liquid crystal 2081. In this example, the timer notice effect overlaps a part of the display of the first decorative symbol and displays a blue timer TM as shown in an enlarged view in the lower part of FIG. It is a blue timer effect that displays.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6D is a state in which the timer TM is 0, and a display indicating that the timer TM is 0 is performed. At this timing, a mini-character MC2 different from the normal-display mini-character MC (mini-character) is displayed on the front of the first decorative symbol variation display so as to overlap a part of the decorative symbol. Is done. In this example, the mini character MC2 is a mini character (donor) shown enlarged in the lower diagram of FIG. Then, after the timer TM and the mini character MC2 are not displayed, the prior expectation rank display RP (here, “preliminary expectation A display”) is displayed on the right sub liquid crystal 2083, as shown in FIG. Is done.

  In this way, the prior expectation rank display RP (here, “preliminary expectation A display”) is a character effect display (for example, a mini character) by a mini character that appeared later at the timing shown in FIG. May be displayed in connection with (Appearance effect display) ((e) in the figure).

  The timing shown in FIG. 5G is a state in which one hold is consumed and the next liquid crystal 2081 starts displaying a variation of the decorative pattern. At this timing, since an effect corresponding to “preliminary expectation A display” is not executed, “preliminary expectation A display” is continuously displayed on the right sub-liquid crystal 2083.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 11H, another timer notice effect is executed in the main liquid crystal 2081. In this timer notice effect, a red timer TM is displayed so as to overlap with a part of the variable display of the first decorative symbol as shown in the lower diagram of FIG. Red timer production. The red timer effect is an effect corresponding to “preliminary expectation A display”.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 6 (i), the timer TM starts counting down as shown in the enlarged right figure of FIG. 5 (i), and the red timer effect corresponding to the “preliminary expectation A display” is executed. Thus, “preliminary expectation A display” is switched to “expectation A display” (replaced) and displayed.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 6J, the countdown of the timer TM proceeds as shown in the enlarged right diagram of FIG. 6J, and “expected degree A display” is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the display of “expected degree A display”. "Is not displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 11L is a state in which the timer TM has become 0 as shown in the enlarged right figure in FIG. 11L, and a display indicating that the timer TM is 0 is performed. . At this timing, the mini character MC2 (mini character (donor)), which is different from the normal display mini character (donor), overlaps with a part of the decorative symbol on the front of the variable display of the first decorative symbol. Is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 11M, when a red change effect is executed in which the white change icon h0 changes to a red icon by the red timer effect, the right sub liquid crystal 2083 is displayed as shown in FIG. Expected rank display RN (here, “expected degree S display”) is displayed in the section.

  When displaying a timer with a short timer notice effect, the prior expectation rank display RP is more easily displayed than when displaying a long timer. In addition, when displaying a timer with a long timer notice effect, the prior expectation rank display RP may be displayed more easily than when displaying a short timer.

  Further, when a timer with a short timer notice effect is displayed, the expectation rank display RN is more easily displayed than when a long timer is displayed. Note that when a timer with a long timer notice effect is displayed, the expectation rank display RN may be displayed more easily than when a short timer is displayed.

  In addition, when displaying a timer with a short timer notice effect, the prior expectation rank display RP having a higher jackpot expectation is easier to display than when displaying a long timer. In addition, when displaying a timer with a long timer notice effect, the prior expectation rank display RP having a higher jackpot expectation may be displayed more easily than when displaying a short timer.

  Further, when a timer with a short timer notice effect is displayed, an expectation rank display RN with a high jackpot expectation is more likely to be displayed than when a long timer is displayed. When a timer with a long timer notice effect is displayed, an expectation rank display RN with a high jackpot expectation may be displayed more easily than when a short timer is displayed.

<Example of production k>
FIG. 51 is a diagram illustrating another example of the expected degree notification effect centered on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, and is a diagram illustrating another example of the appearance form of the prior expectation rank display RP. It is.

(Example of production k-1)
FIG. 51B to FIG. 51E are diagrams showing other examples of effects in stages.

  The timing shown in FIG. 51 (b) is a state in which the main liquid crystal 2081 is performing the stop display (swing fluctuation display, temporary stop display) of the first decorative symbol. The symbol combination of the first decoration symbol is, for example, “decoration 4—special symbol—decoration 8”. The special symbol is, for example, a pseudo-continuous symbol.

  This special symbol is an image related to the prior expectation rank display RP (in this example, a character display “A?” And a red rectangle display as shown in an enlarged view in the lower part of FIG. The image RPG imitating the expectation rank display RP) is included (applied), and the special symbol stop display displays the prior expectation rank display RP (in this example, “preliminary expectation A” in the right sub-liquid crystal 2083). Display ") is displayed ((c) in the figure).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 4D, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (determined display). In this case, the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol is a special symbol, but as shown in the enlarged diagram in the lower diagram (d), “4-5-8” is displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y, It is notified that the decorative symbol of the symbol combination “decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 8” has been stopped and displayed. And the change display of the following 1st decoration symbol is performed by digestion of holding | maintenance (the figure (e)).

(Example of production k-2)
FIG. 51 (h) to FIG. 51 (k) are diagrams showing another example of effects in stages.

  The timing shown in FIG. 51 (h) is a state in which the first decorative symbol is being displayed in the main liquid crystal 2081, and FIG. 51 (i) is a state in which the button effect has been executed. This button effect is an effect related to whether or not to execute the advance expectation rank notification effect (whether to display the advance expectation rank display RP). In this example, a button image BG and an elapsed time notification image TG that overlap each other are displayed on the front face of the first decorative symbol variation display. In addition, as shown in the enlarged view (i) in the figure below, the button image BG and the elapsed time notification image TG are displayed on the back side (and the front side of the first decorative symbol) on the image ( For example, an image RPG imitating the prior expectation rank display RP) is included. In this case, at least one of the button image BG, the elapsed time notification image TG, and the image RPG simulating the prior expectation rank display RP is displayed as a rank (for example, jackpot) of the display (possible) prior expectation rank display RP. The display is related to the degree of expectation “A”) (for example, red display). In this case, the chance button 136 also emits light of the same color (red).

  If the chance button 136 is operated within the acceptance valid period of the operation of the chance button 136 as shown in FIG. 10J, the prior expectation rank is based on the button effect as shown in FIG. A display RP (in this case, “preliminary expectation A display”) is displayed.

  As an appearance mode other than this, as shown in the same figure (m), in advance based on the display of a mini-item MI (expanded in the lower part of the figure (m)) imitating the prior expectation rank display RP. An expectation rank display RP may be displayed. For example, when the mini item MI imitating the prior expectation rank display RP is used by a mini character (donor), the prior expectation rank display RP is displayed on the right sub liquid crystal 2083, for example.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9 (n), the prior expectation rank display RP may be displayed based on the display of the hold icon RI imitating the prior expectation rank display RP. In this case, the prior expectation rank display RP is displayed on, for example, the right sub-liquid crystal 2083 in the variation in which the hold icon RI imitating the prior expectation rank display RP (expanded in FIG. The prior expectation rank display RP may be displayed on, for example, the right sub-liquid crystal 2083 in a change before the hold icon RI imitating the prior expectation rank display RP is digested.

<Example of production l>
FIG. 52 is a diagram showing another example of the expected degree notification effect centering on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

(Example of production 1-1)
52 (b) to 52 (d) are diagrams showing another example of effects in stages.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 52 (b), in the main liquid crystal 2081, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the prior expectation rank display RP (in this example, “preliminary expectation A display”) is displayed on the right sub liquid crystal 2083. ) Is displayed.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 5C, one hold is consumed, the change icon h0 changes from white to red, and a red hold change effect is executed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6D is based on the fact that the red-holding change effect with the jackpot expectation degree “A” rank is executed, as shown in FIG. Degree A display ". At the same time, “preliminary expectation S display” is performed.

  In this case, the effect corresponding to the “preliminary expectation S display” is, for example, an effect related to the hold (for example, a hold change change effect). That is, the change icon h0 displayed in red at this timing may be notified that there is a possibility of being promoted to the icon (promoted in two stages). In addition, you may make it change not to 2 steps | paragraphs but to 3 steps | paragraphs or more (promotion), In this case, 3 or more prior expectation rank display RP is performed simultaneously.

(Production example 1-2)
FIG. 52 (h) to FIG. 52 (k) are diagrams showing another example of effects in stages.

  The timing shown in FIG. 52 (h) is the same as the timing shown in FIG. 40 (e), and is a state in which the sub game effect has been successful.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (i) is based on the success of the subgame effect, for example, in the right sub liquid crystal 2083, the prior expectation rank display PR (for example, “preliminary expectation A display”) is performed. At the same time, the display related to the advance expectation rank display PR (for example, band display) is performed over the main liquid crystal 2081, the left sub liquid crystal 2082, and the right sub liquid crystal 2083. The display related to the prior expectation rank display PR is the same color as the color corresponding to the rank of the prior expectation rank display PR (in this example, a red band display), and the big hit expectation (in this example) “A”) is displayed in a telop, for example, so that the player can easily see it. In this case, the prior expectation rank display PR is a still image, and the display related to the prior expectation rank display PR is a moving image, thereby making it easier for the player to recognize the prior expectation rank.

  FIG. 10K is a display example when another prior expectation rank display PR (for example, “preliminary expectation S display”) is added. Also in this case, for example, the prior expectation rank display PR (for example, “preliminary expectation S display”) is performed on the right sub liquid crystal 2083, and the main liquid crystal 2081, the left sub liquid crystal 2082, and the right sub liquid crystal 2083 are preliminarily displayed. Display related to the expected rank display PR (for example, band display and telop display) is performed.

  Further, in this case, for example, the display related to the prior expectation rank display PR (“preliminary expectation S display”) added later is the prior expectation rank display PR (“preliminary expectation A display” previously displayed). ”) In front of (so as to overlap the previous display).

  The prior expectation rank display PR includes a display of a still image displayed on the right sub liquid crystal 2083 and a display related to the prior expectation rank display PR by a band display and a telop display. Only a still image displayed on the liquid crystal 2083 is displayed.

  Alternatively, the expectation rank display PN may include a display of a still image displayed on the right sub liquid crystal 2083 and a display regarding the expectation rank display PN by band display and telop display.

<Example of production m>
FIG. 53 is a diagram showing an example of the effect notification effect step by step with the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment as the center.

  The timings shown in FIGS. 53 (a) to 53 (e) are the same as the timings shown in FIGS. 40 (a) to 40 (e), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 5F, the mini character (donor) has returned to the normal display (default display) shown in FIG. 5A, and the sub-game effect has been completed. A state in which the notice effect is executed is shown.

  In this timer notice effect, a red timer TM (shown enlarged in the right figure (f)) is displayed overlapping with a part of the variable display of the first decorative symbol, for example, a countdown display of 30 seconds. It is a red timer production to be performed. The timer notice effect is a notice effect that informs that a certain effect will be executed after the elapse of a predetermined period (in this case, 30 seconds counted down).

  The timing shown in FIG. 11H is a state in which the timer TM is 0 as shown in the enlarged right diagram of FIG. 11H, and a display indicating that the timer TM is 0 is performed. . At this timing, the mini character MC2 (mini character), which is different from the normal display mini character MC (mini character), is overlapped with the part of the decorative symbol in front of the variation display of the first decorative symbol. Character (dono)) is displayed.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 5I, the change icon h0 changes from white to red, and the red hold change effect is executed. In conjunction with this, the crest character 244A also changes from white lighting to red lighting.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6J is based on the fact that the red-holding change effect having the jackpot expectation degree “A” rank is executed in FIG. Display ".

  As described above, in this embodiment, the “red timer effect” is performed in the timer notice effect, and the red-holding change effect with the jackpot expectation degree “A” rank is executed after the timer ends.

  That is, for example, timer notice effects with different display modes (for example, timer notice effects such as “red timer effect” and “blue timer effect” with different colors, shapes, patterns, etc.) In advance, the rank of the jackpot expectation level of the effect to be executed later is notified in advance by performing the timer notice effect, and after the timer notice effect, the effect belonging to the corresponding rank of the jackpot expectation level is executed. Thus, the timer notice effect can be made to function in the same manner as the prior expectation rank notification effect of the present embodiment. That is, by applying the present embodiment (embodiment M), all of the above-described prior expectation rank notification effects of the present embodiment can be performed by replacing them with timer notice effects.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure provided with both the timer notice effect of a present Example, and the above-mentioned prior expectation rank alerting effects other than a present Example.

<Various tables of prior expectation rank notification production>
FIG. 54 is an example of various tables applied to the present embodiment (effect example a to effect example m).

  FIG. 54 (a) is an example of an effect rank table showing the correspondence between each effect and the rank (attribute) of the jackpot expectation degree.

  As shown in the figure, the rank (attribute) of the jackpot expectation is, for example, “SSS”, “S”, “A”, “B”... In addition, in some of the effects performed on the game machine of the present embodiment, an expectation level that is a big hit after execution of the effect is set in advance, and “SSS”, “ S ”,“ A ”,“ B ”...

  For example, the contradictory production has a jackpot expectation rank of “SSS”, the Tongue change change production has a jackpot expectation rank of “S”, the swordsman reach production has a jackpot expectation rank of “S”, The jackpot expectation rank is “A”, the princess rescue reach production is “A”, the red timer production is the jackpot expectation rank is “A”, and the blue holding change production is the rank of the jackpot expectation Is “B”, and the blue timer production is such that the rank of the big hit expectation is “B”.

  In addition, this table is provided with a table for prior expectation rank notification effect and a table for expectation rank notification effect, and an effect corresponding to each is set. Therefore, there is an effect that is not set in the table for the advance expectation rank notification effect, and there is an effect that is set in the table for the expectation rank notification effect. For example, if the swordsman reach production is set in the table for the expectation rank notification effect, but not set in the table for the advance expectation rank notification effect, the advance expectation rank notification effect is executed for the swordsman reach production. Only the expectation rank notification effect is executed.

  In addition, except for special cases such as contradiction effects, for example, the effect that is the target of the prior expectation rank notification effect is the target of the expectation rank notification effect, so the effect set in the table for the prior expectation rank notification effect is In principle, it is set in the table for expectation rank notification effect.

  In addition, the rank is a relative classification (for example, a classification in a reach production, a classification in a pending change production) among a plurality of productions of the same type, and the rank of the jackpot expectation is the same. Even if there is, the jackpot expectation (numerical value) varies depending on the type of production (for example, reach production or holding change production). For example, in the example of FIG. 5A, the princess rescue reach production has a jackpot expectation rank set to A, but this is relatively classified into rank A among a plurality of reach productions. Not too much. For example, when comparing the expectation of jackpot between the swordsman reach and the princess rescue reach, the swordsman reach has a higher expectation of the jackpot, so the swordsman reach is ranked “S” and the princess rescue reach is ranked “A”. Classification is made.

  In addition, even if the rank of the big hit expectation is the same, there may be a large difference in the big hit expectation depending on the type of performance. (For example, when compared with the type of production, the reach production generally has a higher jackpot expectation than the hold change production, etc.).

  Therefore, for example, the princess rescue reach production with a big hit expectation rank of “A” is higher in the big hit expectation degree (numerical value) than the hold change production with a big hit expectation degree of “S”. is there.

  That is, when the types of effects are different, the big hit expectation is not necessarily set in the order of the rank in FIG.

  Further, the correspondence relationship between the rank of jackpot expectation degree and effects and the effects that are set in FIG. 5A are merely examples for convenience of explanation, and are not limited to the relationships shown here.

  The ranking is set in consideration of not only the big hit expectation but also the rare degree (in the case of special effects such as contradiction effects), the number of points of the membership system service, and the like.

  FIG. 54B is a mini item table showing a list of mini items applicable to this embodiment and their functions.

  When the mini character (donor) acquires the mini item shown in FIG. 5B, the production corresponding to each item is executed. In addition, the kind of mini item is not restricted to what was shown to the same figure.

  54 (c) to (f) are examples of a temporary storage area for effect management provided in the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400, and are a reserved color information table used when changing a reserved icon. And a setting example thereof.

  As shown in FIG. 5C, the reserved color information table includes, for example, information on the variation (table item “related”) of FIG. 1 and reserved 1 to 4 (table item “hold 1” in FIG. 1). "To" hold 4 ") are stored. Each of “related” and “hold 1” to “hold 4” is further divided into items of “previous (related)”, “this time”, “next time”, “next time”, and “next time”. The color information of the hold icon is stored every time.

  Each time the hold is digested, as shown in FIG. 5C, the color information of the hold icon is reset to the previous one (previous and previous hold), and the hold icon changes.

  Hereinafter, an example of setting color information will be described in detail. FIG. 4D corresponds to the information on the hold icon shown in FIG.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 40 (a), a white change icon h0 and hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are displayed in the icon display area 800 (default, displayed as “default” in the figure). In this case, as shown in the “(previous) relevant” item in FIG. 54 (d), “define” (white, the same applies hereinafter) corresponding to the change icon h0 and “hold” corresponding to the hold icon h11. “Default” is set to “1”, “Default” is set to “hold 2” corresponding to the hold icon h12, and “Default” is set to “hold 3” corresponding to the hold icon h13.

  As the color information of “current”, “default” is set in “hold 1”, “default / preliminary A” is set in “hold 2”, and “default” is set in “hold 3”. Here, “default / preliminary A” of “hold 2” indicates that the hold icon is displayed by default and “preliminary expectation A display” is displayed as the prior expectation rank display RP.

  In addition, “blue → red” is set in “hold 2” as “next” color information, “default” is set in “hold 3”, and “default” is set in “hold 3” as color information “next time”. Has been. Here, “blue → red” of “hold 2” indicates that the display color of the hold icon is changed to blue and then changed to red.

  Further, (e) in the figure corresponds to the information on the hold icon shown in FIG. 40 (f), for example.

  With the hold, the setting information in the hold color information setting table is updated as shown in FIG. At the timings of FIGS. 40B to 40F, the white variation icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the icon display area 800. In this case, as the “(previous) relevant” color information, “default” is set for “related”, “default / preliminary A” is set for “hold 1”, and “default” is set for “hold 2”.

  That is, “hold 1” (hold icon h11 in FIGS. 40B to 40F) is displayed by default, and when hold 2 in the previous change becomes hold 1, the change display in that state is in progress (FIG. 40 (b) to (f)), “preliminary expectation A display” is displayed as the prior expectation rank display RP.

  In addition, “blue → red” is set in “hold 1”, “default” is set in “hold 2”, and “default” is set in “hold 2” as “next” color information. Has been.

Further, (f) in the figure corresponds to the information on the hold icon shown in FIGS. With the hold, the setting information in the hold color information setting table is updated as shown in FIG. 41B and 41C, a blue variation icon h0 and a white hold icon h11 are displayed in the icon display area 800. In this case, “blue → red” is set in “related” and “default” is set in “hold 1” as color information of “(previous) related”. This is because, when the hold 1 in the previous change becomes that, the hold icon is changed to blue during the change display in that state (FIGS. 41B and 41C), and then further changed to red ( 41 (d) to (f)).
In addition, “default” is set to “hold 1” as the color information of “current”.

  Hereinafter, other examples (production examples) of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 78.

  56 to 158 are used only in the description of FIGS. 56 to 158 in principle, and even when overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, FIGS. 56 to 158 are used. In the explanation of Fig. 56, the reference numerals shown in Figs. 56 to 158 are used only for the explanation of FIGS. 56 to 158 in principle. However, the embodiments shown in FIGS. 56 to 158 and other embodiments are combined with each other. Can be applied. In addition, when there are drawings showing the same timing in a plurality of drawings, overlapping description may be omitted.

  First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side). As an external structure, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden or metal frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales office. The main body 104 is referred to as an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. In addition, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is configured in a frame shape so as to be inside thereof. Is a door member having an opening 116. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, a front frame door opening sensor (not shown) that detects opening of the front frame door 106 when the front frame door 106 is opened is provided.

  The front frame door 106 can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “balls”) in a portion below the opening 116 and guide the game balls to the launching device 110. The upper plate 126 is provided, the lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 by the player's operation are discharged to the lower plate 128. A ball release button 130, a ball discharge lever 132 for discharging game balls stored in the lower plate 128 by a player's operation to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box), and a player's operation to the launcher 110. The ball launching handle 134 for launching the guided game ball to the game area 124 of the game board 200, and a channel that changes the effect mode of various effect devices 206 (not shown in FIG. 56) by the player's operation. A button 136, a chance button lamp 138 that causes the chance button 136 to emit light, a setting operation unit 137 that allows various settings and the like by operation of a setting person (for example, a player or a game shop clerk), and a card unit (CR unit) A ball lending operation button 140 for instructing ball lending, a return operation button 142 for instructing the card unit to return the player's balance, and a ball lending display section for displaying the player's balance and card unit status ( (Not shown). In addition, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. .

  The setting operation unit 137 is a push button type switch that can be pressed by the setter, and a confirm (OK) button, an upper button positioned above the confirm button, a lower button positioned below the confirm button, and confirm A right button positioned to the right of the button, a left button positioned to the left of the confirm button, and a cancel (C) button positioned further to the right of the right button. The setting operation unit 137 includes an operation unit sensor that detects the pressing of each button. The setting operation unit 137 of this example has a unit structure in which buttons and operation unit sensors are integrated. At least one of the buttons of the setting operation unit 137 functions as a chance button that changes the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 58) by the player's operation when a predetermined condition is satisfied. It may be.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  FIG. 57 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 56 viewed from the back side. The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is formed at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 for guiding a ball that has passed through the communicating hole and dropped to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface is provided.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the payout control unit 600 (see FIG. 59). The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. To pay out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and control related to effects based on the processing information generated by the main control section 300 The first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub-board that performs control processing related to effects based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. An error canceling switch that configures a second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control unit 500, a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to the payout of game balls, and that releases an error by the operation of a game clerk Discharge board case 172 for storing a payout board 170 provided with 168, launch board constituting a launch control unit 630 for performing control processing relating to the launch of a game ball A launch board case 176 for storing 74, a power control unit 660 for supplying power to various electrical gaming machines, and a power switch 178 for turning on / off the power by the operation of a game clerk and an RWM clear by being operated when the power is turned on A power board case 184 that houses a power board 182 that includes an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs a signal to the main controller 300, and a CR interface 186 that transmits and receives signals between the payout controller 600 and the card unit are provided. ing.

  The main board 156, the first sub board 160, the second sub board 164 and the like are provided on the back surface of the game board 200 because they need to be changed for each model, and the payout board 170, the launch board 174, the power board 182 and the like are provided. Since it is used in common by a plurality of models, the outer frame 102 is provided.

  FIG. 58 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined. An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 at substantially the center. The effect device 206 performs the effect by operating the effect movable body 224, and details thereof will be described later.

  The game board 200 of this example is a so-called game board for right-handed machines. In the right-handed machine, by changing the launch strength of the game ball by operating the ball launching handle 134, the falling path of the game ball is divided into a right path on the right side from the effect device 206 and a left path on the left side from the effect device 206. be able to. In this example, the ease of entering a ball in the ordinary figure starting port 228, special figure 1 starting port 230, special figure 2 starting port 232 (open state), variable winning ports 234, 235 (open state), etc., which will be described later, is as follows. The game ball that falls on the right path is different from the game ball that falls on the left path.

  About each of the normal figure starting port 228, the special figure 2 starting port 232, and the variable prize opening 235, these general figure starting port 228, the special figure 2 starting port 232, and the variable prize winning port 235 are arranged on the right path. Therefore, it is relatively easy to enter a game ball falling on the right path, and it is relatively difficult or impossible to enter a game ball falling on the left path. On the other hand, for each of the special figure 1 starting port 230 and the variable winning port 234, due to the influence of the arrangement pattern of the game nails 238, the warp device 242, and the like, the entrance of the game ball falling on the left path is relative. It is relatively easy to enter a game ball that falls on the right path. In the present embodiment, a right-handed machine is taken as an example, but a right-handed machine may be used.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for displaying decorative images and various images (moving images or still images) used for production. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four symbol display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, an effect display area 208d, and a fourth symbol display area 208e. 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c display different decorative symbols, the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect, and the fourth symbol display area 208e displays the fourth symbol. . Furthermore, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d, and 208e can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the example shown in FIG. 58, the display position of the fourth symbol display area 208e is fixed to the lower end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 58, one fourth symbol display area 208e corresponding to each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is provided (two in total), but both special figure 1 and special figure 2 are provided. There may be provided only one fourth symbol display area 208e corresponding to. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  Below the gaming area 124, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol hold lamp 218, and a second special symbol hold lamp 220 A normal symbol holding lamp 216 and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. In addition, hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol”, the special symbol as “special symbol”, the first special symbol as “special symbol 1”, and the second special symbol as “special symbol 2”.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in the present embodiment. The special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214 are display devices for displaying the special figure, and are configured by 7 segment LEDs in the present embodiment.

  The multi-purpose hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general-purpose variable games that are on hold (details will be described later). It is possible to hold. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 and the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games that are held (details will be described later). In the present embodiment, the special figure variable games are predetermined. It is possible to hold up to a number (for example, 4). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. Turns on when switching to the probability state, and turns off when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, there are predetermined ball entrances such as a general prize opening 226, a general figure start opening 228, a special figure 1 start opening 230, a special figure 2 start opening 232, and a variable prize opening around the rendering device 206. 234 and 235 are disposed.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are provided on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). In the case of winning, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In the present embodiment, a game ball is paid out to a player as a consideration for winning (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “prize ball”) and a ball lent to a player (hereinafter referred to as “lending ball”). May be included).

  The normal start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed through a predetermined area of the game area 124. In the present embodiment, the game board 200 includes One is arranged on the right path. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one special figure 1 starting port 230 is provided at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the special opening 1 starting port 230, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls as prize balls to the upper plate 126. Then, the special figure variable game (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “special figure 1 variable game”) by the special figure 1 display device 212 is started. Note that the ball that has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The special figure 2 starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electrical chew), and in this embodiment, only one is provided on the right path. The special figure 2 starting port 232 is provided with a pair of blade members 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right. When the blade members 232a are closed, it is impossible to enter a ball. When 210 hits and stops and displays the symbol, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the special opening 2 232, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. Then, a special figure variable game (hereinafter, also referred to as “special figure 2 variable game”) by the special figure 2 display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the special figure 2 starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The variable winning openings 234 and 235 are called a large winning opening or an attacker. In the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is provided below the center of the game board 200, and the variable winning opening 235 is on the right path. Only one is provided. The variable prize winning openings 234 and 235 include door members 234a and 235a that can be freely opened and closed, respectively, and balls cannot be entered while the door members 234a and 235a are closed. If the special figure display device stops and displays the jackpot symbol after winning the special figure variation game, for example, one door member of the variable prize opening 234, 235 is closed at a predetermined time interval (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing time) It opens and closes at a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times) for a time of 1.5 seconds. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234 or the variable winning opening 235, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls is used as a winning ball for the upper plate 126. To discharge. The balls that have entered the variable winning openings 234 and 235 are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disk-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with strength according to the operation amount of the player's ball launch handle 134, and The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are made to pass through the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 by the 146 and the launcher 148, and are launched into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the direction of travel by the batting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning port (general winning port 226, variable winning ports 234, 235) Winning out the starting port (Special Figure 1 starting port 230, Special Figure 2 starting port 232), winning out any winning port or starting port, or just passing through the normal starting port 228 To reach.

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the stage device 206, a warp device 242 (242a, 242b) and a front stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is placed in the area where the game ball cannot roll. It is arranged. In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door or a shutter) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are positioned behind the warp device 242, the front stage 244, and the effect movable body 224. The warp device 242 discharges the game ball that has entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the front stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b. The front stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball carried by a nail of the game board 200, and the passed ball is in the center of the front stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry to 230.

  The effect movable body 224 of this example includes a horizontally long flat panel on which the model name of the pachinko machine 100 and the like are displayed. The effect movable body 224 is movable by a stepping motor (not shown) so that the front of the decorative symbol display device 208 can be moved in the vertical direction within a plane substantially parallel to the display screen.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 covers the inner end portions of the shielding device 246 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good. The shielding device 246 of this example is configured to expose the lower end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 even when the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed. As a result, the fourth symbol display area 208e located at the lower end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is visible regardless of the open / closed state of the shielding device 246.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that controls the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a command transmitted by the main control unit 300 The payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the game ball payout, the launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game ball, and the power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. Yes.

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and data temporarily. A RAM 308 for storing, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time and the number of times, and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in program processing are mounted. Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  Further, the basic circuit 302 includes a random value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (a counter circuit) 318 that is used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. This circuit includes two counters) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through each start port, winning port, variable winning port, or opening the front frame door A sensor circuit for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a sensor, an inner frame opening sensor, and a lower plate full sensor, and outputting an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302 322, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device such as the special figure 1 display device 212 or the special figure 2 display device 214, and a predetermined figure A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the display device, for example, the general map display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, the general map hold lamp 216, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220, the high Drive circuit 330 for performing display control of the center lamp 222 and the like, and predetermined movable members, for example, the blade member 232a of the special figure 2 starting port 232, the door member 234a of the variable winning port 234, and the door of the variable winning port 235 A drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 and the like for driving the members 235a and the like to open and close is connected. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random value generation circuit 318 are provided separately, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random value generation circuit 318.

  When the sphere detection sensor 320 detects that a sphere is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230. Store in the register. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the special figure 2 starting port 232, the random number generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) via the information output circuit 336. 100 game information (for example, game state) is output.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 has a voltage value of the power source. When the voltage is less than a predetermined value (9 V in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 starts from the start signal output circuit 340. When a signal is input, game control is started (main control unit main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the first control unit 300 Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication. The main control unit 300 sends commands and the like to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. The first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 are configured such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300. However, the information communication between the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the payout control unit 600 may be performed by bidirectional communication.

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, the number of times, and the like are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418, and a drive for performing drive control of the effect movable body 224. A circuit 422, an effect movable body sensor 424 that detects the current position of the effect movable body 224, a chance button detection sensor 426 that detects pressing of the chance button 136, and an operation unit that detects pressing of each button of the setting operation unit 137 A sensor (not shown), a sensor circuit 428 for outputting a detection signal from a predetermined detection sensor, for example, the effect movable body sensor 424 and the chance button detection sensor 426 to the basic circuit 402, and a control program and various effect data are stored. A ROM 406 for connecting to the PC. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. . A driving circuit for controlling the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 is connected to the basic circuit.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604 It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed, and communication with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606. In addition, when the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is performed by bidirectional communication, the various sensors 320 detect the front frame door opening sensor that detects the opening of the front frame door 106. May be transmitted to the payout control unit 600 without being transmitted to the sensor circuit 322, and the payout control unit 600 may output the received detection result to the main control unit 300.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the launch control unit are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although a predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.

  Next, the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the universal figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed using FIGS. The types of figures and ordinary drawings will be described. FIG. 60 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of FIG. 1, and FIG. 60 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of FIG. The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the special figure 1 start opening 230, and the special figure 2 start opening 232 indicates that the ball has entered 2 The special figure 2 variable game is started on condition that the start sensor is detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. When the special figure 2 variable game is started, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs “variable display of special figure 2” by repeating all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. . These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display in the present embodiment. When the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation in FIG. 1 elapses, the special figure 1 display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1 and the fluctuation time determined before the fluctuation starts in the special figure 2. After the elapse, the special figure 2 display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 2. Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is stopped, or after the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 2”, the stop symbol form of special figure 2 is displayed. Until stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol fluctuation stop display referred to in the present embodiment, the stop symbol mode of special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed after the "fluctuation display of special figure 1 or 2" is started. A series of displays until this is done is referred to as symbol variation stop display. The symbol variation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  In FIG. 60 (a), six types of special illustrations “Special Illustration A” to “Special Illustration F” are shown as the stop symbol forms in the symbol variation stop display of Special Illustration 1. FIG. In FIG. 60 (a), the white portions in the figure indicate the segment locations where the light is extinguished, and the black portions indicate the location where the segments are illuminated. “Special figure A” is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and “Special figure B” is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, determination of whether or not a big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and determination of whether or not a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is a special figure variation game after the jackpot game ends, and the difference in probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot). Hereinafter, a state with a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “special figure certain change” or simply “probable change”), and a state with a low probability is specially designated. This is called a low probability state. In addition, after the 15R special jackpot game ends and after the 15R jackpot game ends, both shift to the time-saving state (electric support state). Although the short time will be described in detail later, the short time state is referred to as a normal high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “general probability change”), and the non-short time state is referred to as a general low probability state. “Special Figure A”, which is a 15R special jackpot symbol, is a symbol that becomes a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state after the jackpot game ends, and “Special Figure B”, which is a 15R jackpot symbol, is a special chart after the jackpot game ends. It is a symbol that becomes a low probability normal state high probability state. These “special chart A” and “special chart B” are symbols that have a relatively high degree of advantage over the player.

  "Special figure C" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden probability change, and is a symbol that becomes a special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state after the jackpot game ends. That is, “Special Figure C” is 2R compared to “Special Figure A” which is 15R. “Special figure D” is a 2R jackpot symbol called latent probability variation or hidden probability variation, and is a symbol that becomes a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state after the jackpot game ends.

  “Special figure E” is a small hit symbol, and after the small hit game is completed, the game state before the small hit game is executed is maintained. In addition, “special drawing F” is an off symbol, and is a symbol with a relatively small advantage to the player.

  In FIG. 60 (b), four types of special figures “Special figure a” to “Special figure d” are shown as the stop symbol forms in the symbol fluctuation stop display of Special figure 2. In FIG. 60 (b), the white portions in the figure indicate the segment locations where the light is extinguished, and the black portions indicate the location where the segments are illuminated. “Special figure a” is a 15R special jackpot symbol, and “Special figure b” is a 15R jackpot symbol. “Special figure a”, which is a special 15R jackpot symbol, is a symbol that becomes a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state after the jackpot game ends, and “Special figure b”, which is a 15R jackpot symbol, is a special figure after the jackpot game ends. It is a symbol that becomes a low probability normal state high probability state. These “special drawing a” and “special drawing b” are symbols with which the degree of advantage relative to the player is relatively large.

  "Special figure c" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden probability change, and is a symbol that becomes a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state after the jackpot game ends. The “special chart d” is an off-line symbol, and is a symbol that has a relatively small advantage over the player.

  FIG. 60C shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 9” and “Decoration 10” represent the numbers “1” to “9” and “0”, respectively. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the special figure 1 starting port 230 or the special figure 2 starting port 232, that is, the ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, or the special figure 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided on the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the start port 232. In the symbol display area, “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... → “decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →. “Change design of symbols”.

  When notifying 15R special big hit of "Special Figure A", 15R big hit of "Special Figure B", 15R special big hit of "Special Figure a", and 15R big hit of "Special Figure b", the symbol display area 208a ˜208c, the combination of symbols in which three same decorative symbols are arranged (for example, “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1”, “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”, etc.) is stopped and displayed. When the 15R special jackpot of “Special Figure A” and the 15R special jackpot of “Special Figure a” are explicitly notified, a combination of three symbols with the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, “Decoration 3-Decoration 3- “Decoration 3”, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”, etc.) are stopped and displayed.

  Further, when a 2R big hit called “special drawing D” latent probability change (hidden probability change) or a special hit of “special drawing E” is notified, “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. To do. When a 2R jackpot called “special drawing C” or “special drawing c” is called a sudden probability change, “decoration 1-decoration 3—decoration 5” is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, in the case of notifying the special symbol F and the special symbol d, a symbol combination other than the symbol combination shown in FIG. 60C is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  FIG. 60D shows an example of a usual stop display symbol. In the present embodiment, there are two types of stoppage display modes of “normal map A”, which is a winning symbol, and “general symbol B”, which is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that the sphere has passed through the general start port 228, the general map display device 210 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment. Perform a “normal change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure A” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the deviation of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure B” is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 60 (d), the white portions in the drawing indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  Next, a main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input starts reset by a reset interrupt and executes the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In the initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is set. Enable operation, set initial values, etc. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms (milliseconds) is set in WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103 following step S101, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted. In step S105 following step S103, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value. It is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased when the voltage is less than (9 V in this embodiment). Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In the initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, a second output port) 1) a process of outputting a clear signal from the output port 1), a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like.

  In step S109 subsequent to step S107, it is determined whether or not the state before power interruption (before power interruption) is restored. If the state before power interruption is not restored (the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is changed). In the case of initializing), the process proceeds to initialization processing (step S113). Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of an amusement store operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is turned on (indicates that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is set. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. In addition, a transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and in the same way as the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

  In step S115 subsequent to step S113, the basic random number initial value updating process is performed after setting the interrupt prohibition. In this basic random number initial value update processing, initial value generation for generating an initial value of a special figure determining random value counter for generating a special figure determining random value for use in a lottery for determining a stop symbol in a special figure variable game Update random number counter. In addition, an initial value generation random number counter for generating an initial value of a general winning random number counter for generating a normal winning random number used for determining whether or not the normal game is changed is updated. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a special figure determining random value counter and its initial value generating random number counter, and a regular winning random number counter and its initial value generating random number counter. In step S115, the initial values of two initial value generation random number counters are updated respectively. For example, if the initial value generation random number counter can take a numerical value range of 0 to 99, a value is acquired from the initial value generation random number counter, 1 is added to the acquired value, and then the original initial value generation random number counter is obtained. To remember. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 100, 0 is stored in the original initial value generation random number counter. The other initial value generation random number counters are similarly updated. Note that the initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step S207 described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

  Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process. The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed. In step S203 following step S201, the WDT is set so that the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial set value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) and no WDT interrupt occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). It is restarted periodically (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms, which is the main controller timer interrupt period).

  In step S205 subsequent to step S203, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower pan full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. The input is monitored for the presence or absence of a detection signal, and stored in a signal state storage area provided for each of the various sensors 320 in the RAM 308. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interruption process is started, in step S205, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal. In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 59, winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal) is stored. In step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal present). If it matches with the information (indicating that there is), the entry to the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, 235, the special figure 1 starting opening 230, and the special figure 2 starting opening 232, or the ordinary figure starting opening 228 It is determined that there was a passage. In other words, it is determined that there has been a winning at these winning ports 226, 234, 235 and the starting ports 230, 232, 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before, no previous detection signal, no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S205, if the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is configured to be performed by bidirectional communication, the front frame door opening sensor 107 that detects the opening of the front frame door 106. The presence / absence of a door opening detection signal output from the payout control unit 600 that has received the detection result from is monitored and stored in a door detection signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308.

  In step S207 and step S209 following step S205, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then a special figure determination random number value used in the main control unit 300 is generated. The special figure determining random value counter and the common figure winning random value counter for generating the common winning random value are updated. For example, when the numerical value range that can be taken as the special figure determination random value is 0 to 99, the value is acquired from the special figure determination random value counter provided in the RAM 308 in order to generate the special figure determination random value. After adding 1 to the value, it is stored in the original special figure determination random value counter. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 100, 0 is stored in the original special figure determination random value counter. If it is determined that the special figure determination random value counter has made a round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the special figure determination random value counter is acquired. And set in the special figure determination random value counter. For example, a value is acquired from a special figure determination random value counter that fluctuates in a numerical value range of 0 to 99, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. When the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the special figure determination random value counter, and the special figure determination random value counter In addition to setting, the initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the special figure determination random value counter has made one round next. In addition to the initial value storage area for determining that the special figure determining random value counter has made one round next, an initial value storage for determining that the common figure winning random number counter has made one round An area is provided in the RAM 308. The special figure determining random value counter may be provided with a counter for acquiring the random number value for special figure 1 and a counter for acquiring the random value for special figure 2 or the same counter. May be used.

  In step S211 following step S209, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated. Specifically, the value of the special figure timer number determining random value counter for generating the special figure timer number determining random value for determining the symbol changing time in the special figure changing game or its initial value is updated. In addition, the value of the random number value counter for determining the general-purpose timer number for generating the random number value for determining the general-purpose timer number for determining the symbol variation time in the general-purpose variable game or its initial value is updated.

  In step S213 following step S211, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the time for displaying and changing the symbol on the special symbol display device 212 and the time for displaying and changing the symbol on the special symbol display device 212 are counted. Special figure 1 display symbol update timer, Special figure 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the special figure 2 display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined time Various timers including a timer for counting the closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S215 subsequent to step S213, a winning opening counter updating process is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when the winning openings 226, 234, 235 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228 have been won, the number of winning balls stored in the RAM 308 for each winning opening or for each starting opening is stored. The value of the area is read and 1 is added to set the original prize ball number storage area.

  In step S217 following step S215, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, it is determined whether or not there has been a winning at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the special figure 2 starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting port 228, and the variable winning ports 234, 235. Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S205.

  If there is a winning at the special figure 1 starting port 230 and the corresponding special figure 1 reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full (in this example, the full number is 4), the random number value generation circuit (Hard Random Number Circuit) A jackpot determination random number value generated by applying predetermined processing to a value stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the starting port 230 of the special figure 1 of 318 is provided in the RAM 308. The special figure determining random value is acquired from the special figure determining random value counter and stored in the special figure 1 random value storage area in the acquisition order. A set of random numbers for jackpot determination and a special figure determination random value in the special figure 1 random value storage area (hereinafter abbreviated as "special figure 1 random value group" or "special figure 1 start information") is a special figure. 1 is stored in the same number as the number of the special figure 1 hold stored in the hold number storage area. In the special figure 1 random value storage area, each time the special figure 1 holding number decreases, the data of a set of special figure 1 random values having the highest holding order (the first and most recently stored) is stored. In addition to being erased, the remaining special figure 1 random value set data is processed so that the holding order is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 1 holding number increases by one, the new special figure 1 random value set data is added to the next holding order of the special figure 1 random value set data having the lowest (last) holding order. Written.

  When the special figure 2 starting port 232 is won and the corresponding special figure 2 reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full (in this example, the reserved number 4 is full), the random value generation circuit A special jackpot determination random number value generated by performing predetermined processing on the value stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the start port 232 of the special figure 2 of 318 is acquired, and the special jackpot special feature provided in the RAM 308 is acquired. The big hit special figure determining random value is acquired from the figure determining random value counter and stored in the special figure 2 random value storage area in the order of acquisition. Special figure 2 random value for determining big hit and random figure for determining special figure for big hit (hereinafter referred to as "special figure 2 random value set" or "special figure 2 starting information") Are stored as many as the number of the special figure 2 hold stored in the special figure 2 hold number storage area. In the special figure 2 random value storage area, each time the special figure 2 holding number is decreased, the data of the special figure 2 random value pair with the highest holding order is erased, and the remaining special figure 2 random number values are stored. Processing is performed so that the holding order of the set of data is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 2 holding number increases by one, the new special figure 2 random value set data is written in the next holding order of the special figure 2 random value set data having the lowest holding order.

  If there is a winning at the general figure starting port 228 and the corresponding general figure holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is acquired from the general figure winning random number counter as the normal winning random number Store in the usual random number storage area. When there is a winning at the variable winning opening 234, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning opening 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening 234. When a winning is made at the variable winning opening 235, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning opening 235 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening 235.

  In step S219 following step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. Note that the output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221 following step S219, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the general diagram state update process in the middle of the normal map change display (the value of the above-described general map display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the general map display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the general map display device 210 performs normal variable display (normal map variable game).

  Also, in the general state update process at the timing when the normal map change display time has elapsed (the timing at which the value of the general map display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), When the 7-segment LED constituting the general-purpose display device 210 is turned on / off to control the display mode, and the normal-map hit flag is off, the general-purpose display is displayed so that the display mode of the off symbol is displayed. The 7 segment LED constituting the device 210 is controlled to be turned on / off. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the on / off drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the universal symbol display device 210 determines either the winning symbol (general symbol A shown in FIG. 60 (d)) or the off symbol (general symbol B shown in FIG. 60 (d)). Display. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, for 500 ms). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  In addition, if the result of the usual figure variation game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), A normal operation is set in the setting area, and a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds), a solenoid for driving to open / close the blade member 232a of the special opening 2 232 (a part of various solenoids 332), A signal for holding the 232a in the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Further, if the result of the usual figure variation game is out of place, the usual figure hit flag is turned off as will be described later. In the case where the usual figure hit flag is off, even in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the special map 2 start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is inactive), and the number of the general map variable games that are on hold If the number is 1 or more, whether or not to win the result of the floating figure game based on the random number lottery based on the random number value stored in the above-mentioned common random number value storage area A hit determination to be determined is performed, and in the case of winning, a flag for a normal figure provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of unsuccessful election, the flag for the usual figure is set to OFF. Also, regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the random number value counter for determining the normal timer number for generating the normal timer number determining random value is obtained as the random number value for determining the normal timer number. Based on the random number value for determining the general-purpose timer number, one time for displaying the general-purpose figure on the general-purpose display device 210 is selected from a plurality of variable times, and this variable display time is set as the normal-type variable display time. , It is stored in the usual variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure number-of-holds storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  In step S224 following step S223, special figure prefetching processing is performed. In the special figure prefetching process, when the number of special figure reservations stored in the special figure holding number storage area increases, the start information related to the increased holding is prefetched, and the special symbols related lottery symbols for special figure variable games are drawn. Pre-determination is performed before the success / failure determination in the process. The flow of the special figure prefetch process will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64. It should be noted that the special figure prefetching process may be executed in the winning acceptance process (step S217).

  Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following plural (in this example, nine) processes is performed in accordance with the special figure 2 state.

  For example, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing of the special figure 2 fluctuation start, a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value of the special figure 2 holding number stored in the special figure 2 holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is shown in FIG. Re-store in the reserved number storage area. At the same time, the blinking of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 is controlled. For example, assuming that the four LEDs of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 in FIG. 58 are LED numbers 1-4 in order from the left to the right in the figure, the LEDs corresponding to the special figure 2 holding number are red, for example, in order from the smallest LED number. Turn on and turn off the others.

  Also, for example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on. Performs lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns off. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the special figure 2 variable display (special figure 2 variable game). In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 includes a 15R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a first small hit flag, a second small hit flag, a first off flag, a second off flag, a special figure probability variation flag, and a normal figure. A flag for each probability variation flag is prepared. In the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the special figure 2 display symbol update timer value has changed from 1 to 0), the 15R big hit flag is on, and the special figure probability fluctuation When the flag is also on and the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure a and 15R jackpot flag shown in FIG. 60B are on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, and the common figure probability fluctuation flag is on. Is the special figure b, the 2R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability variation flag is on, the general figure probability variation flag is on, and the special figure c is on. In this manner, the 7 segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on / off, and a setting indicating that the special figure 2 is being stopped is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 has the 15R special jackpot symbol (special figure a), the 15R big jackpot symbol (special figure b), the sudden probability variation symbol (special figure c), and the outlier symbol (special figure d). ) Confirm display of any one of the symbols. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, for 500 ms). With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. Also, if the electric support number stored in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, the subtraction result is changed from 1 to 0. In this case, if the special figure probability is not changing (details will be described later), the time reduction flag is turned off. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Also, if the probability variation number stored in the probability variation number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the probability variation number, and if the subtraction result is 1 to 0, the special figure probability variation flag. Turn off.

  Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In the setting area, the special figure 2 is in operation and waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that the big win by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. Therefore, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Alternatively, the door member 234a is held in the open state by the solenoid for driving to open / close the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234 until the winning of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable prize opening 234. In addition to outputting a signal, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in a closed state is output to the solenoid for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234, and information indicating the closing period is stored in the storage area of the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area. The control for opening the variable winning opening 235 during the big hit game is the same as the control method for the variable winning opening 234. In addition, a variable winning opening that is opened for each jackpot symbol may be set.

  In addition, the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 15 rounds or 2 rounds), and in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds) In other words, the effect standby period is stored in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to wait for a period during which an image for informing the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is to be ended is displayed. Set the information indicating. Also, if the ordinary probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, the power support number (for example, 100 times) is set in the power support number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 simultaneously with the end of the big hit game, and the RAM 308 Turns on the hourly flag provided in. If the usual probability fluctuation flag is set to OFF, the power support count storage unit does not set the power support count, and the time reduction flag is not turned ON. The short-time state here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit game to the start of the next big hit game. If the short time flag is set to ON at this time, it is in the normal figure high probability (normal figure certain change) state. There is a higher probability of hitting in the general-game variable game in the high-probability state than in the normal-game low-probability state. In addition, in the normal figure high probability state, the fluctuation time of the general figure variable game is shorter than in the normal figure low probability state (normal figure variable short). Furthermore, in the normal high probability state, compared to the normal low probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 is likely to be longer (electrical chew extension). In addition, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. The state in which any one of these ordinary figure change, universal figure change, and electric Chu extension is set is referred to as an electric support (starting prize winning support by electric tulip) state.

  In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, if the game is in a high probability state during a big hit game, a large number of game balls will be placed in the special figure 2 starting port 232 until a predetermined number of game balls enter the variable prize opening 234 during the big hit game. In order to solve this, there is a problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases and the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases.

  If the special figure probability variation flag is set to ON, the probability variation number (for example, 80 times) is set in the probability variation number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 simultaneously with the end of the big hit game.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium. Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of place, the out-of-game flag is turned on as will be described later. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. However, in this example, since the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is different from the stop symbol aspect of special figure 2, the timing at which the special figure 1 variable display time has elapsed (the value of the special figure 1 display symbol update timer becomes 1 to 0) The special figure 1 state update process starting at the same time) is different from the special figure 2 state update process. In the special figure 1 state update process started at the above timing, for example, when the 15R big hit flag is on and the special figure probability variation flag is on, the special figure A shown in FIG. When the figure probability fluctuation flag is off, the special figure B, 2R jackpot flag is on, when the figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure C, 2R jackpot flag is on, and the figure probability fluctuation flag is off 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 1 display device 212 so that the special figure D, the special figure E when the small hit flag is on, and the special figure F when the off flag is on, respectively. ON / OFF drive control is performed, and a setting indicating that the special figure 1 stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control in the special figure 1 state update process started at the above timing, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs a fixed display of any one of the special figures A to F. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, first, a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 2 (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed (step S229), and then a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 1 (a special drawing 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). In the special drawing 2 related lottery process, the floating game of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 is not performed, and the state of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 are both inactive and is held. It is executed by using the first special figure 2 start information in the special figure 2 random value storage area on the condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more. The special figure 1 related lottery process does not perform the floating game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the state of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both inactive, and is suspended. It is executed by using the first special figure 1 start information in the special figure 1 random value storage area on the condition that the number of variable games is one or more.

  Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. In addition, when the number of reserved special figure 2 variable games is 1 or more, the lottery process and the variable game related to the special figure 1 variable game hold are not performed. The notification of the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variable game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the special figure 2 starting port 232 is notified. 1 is performed in preference to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the starting port 230. In the present embodiment, a special figure variable game (for example, special figure 2 variable game) with a high advantage is played with priority over a special figure variable game (for example, special figure 1 variable game) with a low advantage. For this reason, it may be easy to give a difference in the advantage of the gaming state.

  In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229), a special figure 2 random value set (starting information) is obtained from the first (most recently stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. Obtaining and determining whether or not to make a big hit, determining whether or not to make a big hit using a determination table (not shown), and determining the time from the start of the variable display in FIG. 2 to the stop display Then, determination of a symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the fluctuation display of the special symbol 2 is performed. After the first special figure 2 random value set is extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area, the storage of the special figure 2 random value set in the special figure 2 random value storage area is cleared, and the special figure 2 Subtract 1 from the number of holds. At this time, the set of the special figure 2 random value extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in the temporary area (an example of the second starting information storage means) provided in the RAM 308, You may make it perform the above-mentioned determination based on the group of the said special figure 2 random value memorize | stored in this temporary area | region.

  After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner.

  In the above description, the special figure 2 variable game having a high advantage is started in preference to the special figure 1 variable game having a low advantage, and the special figure 2 hold is prioritized over the special figure 1 hold. Special figure 2 priority fluctuation is given as an example, but special figure 1 variable game with low advantage is started over special figure 2 variable game with high advantage, and special figure 1 suspension is The special figure 1 priority fluctuation | variation digested preferentially over hold may be sufficient. In addition, priority is not given to special figure 2 variable game and special figure 1 variable game, and the start opening prize is started in the order in which the special figure variable games related to the holding of each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are held at the start opening. It may be a forward variation. In the starting order winning order variation, the upper limit number of holds is 8 regardless of the special figures 1 and 2, and compared with the priority fluctuation in which the upper limit number of holds is 4 in each of the special figures 1 and 2 In some cases, the substantial upper limit of the number of holds can be increased.

  In the above description, it is assumed that the lottery process and the variable game relating to the holding of the other special figure are not performed according to the state of the special figure, but the invention is not limited to this, and the special figure state update described above is not performed. The process and the special figure related lottery process may be performed independently in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, respectively, so that a plurality of special figures may be changed simultaneously. In addition, when a plurality of special figures are changed at the same time, a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special figure are provided on the decorative symbol display device 208 or the lottery results of each special figure are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided, and the lottery results may be displayed separately, or the lottery results of a plurality of special drawings may be displayed in one area. In addition, when fluctuations related to a plurality of special figures are performed simultaneously, the lottery result of the special figure that stopped the fluctuation may affect the lottery result of the special figure that stops the fluctuation later.

  In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (in this embodiment, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, prefetch result information command, etc. Information that can specify the type of command), bits 0 to 10 are constituted by command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off by the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data includes 15R big hit flag and 2R big hit flag values stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, a small hit flag, a loss flag, a special figure probability variation. In the case of a symbol variation stop command, including the value of the flag, the variation time of the special symbol variable game selected in the special symbol related lottery process, the value of the 15R big hit flag or 2R big hit flag, the small hit flag, This includes the value of the off flag, special figure probability variation flag, etc., including the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. The value of the figure probability variation flag, the number of big hit rounds, etc. are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230, presence / absence of winning in the special figure 2 starting port 232, winning in the variable winning ports 234 and 235 Includes presence or absence. In the case of a prefetch result information command, information indicating the types of special figure 1 and special figure 2, the prefetch number stored in the prefetch number storage area described later, the stop symbol stored in the prefetch result storage unit, etc. Included.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the value of the 15R big hit flag, 2R big hit flag, the small hit flag, the off flag, the special figure probability variation flag, and the special figure 1 related data stored in the RAM 308 as command data. Information indicating the variation time of the special figure variable game selected in the lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game, etc., are set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the value of the 15R big hit flag, the value of the 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

  In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described winning prize opening release setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games held, etc. Set the information indicating. In the above-described winning prize closing setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games held, etc. Set the information indicating.

  In step S233, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information). In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S235 following step S233, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a full tray error is monitored. When the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening / closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable prize opening 234, and the general diagram display device 210 and the special diagram 1 display device 212 via the drive circuits 324, 326, 330. The display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port (I / O 310).

  In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is ON. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. After that, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.

  FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of special figure prefetching processing (step S224) of the main control unit timer interrupt processing. In the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 prefetches the start information increased in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, predetermines the stop symbol before the success / failure judgment process, and obtains a predetermination result (special The figure prefetching result) is stored in the prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308 (see FIGS. 64A to 64C).

  In the special figure prefetching process, first, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the special figure 2 start information has increased (step S301). The determination as to whether or not the special figure 2 start information has increased is made, for example, by referring to the special figure 2 hold number stored in the special figure 2 hold number storage area and the special figure stored in the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area. 2 Compared with the number of pre-reads. The main control unit 300 determines that the special figure 2 start information has increased when the special figure 2 reservation number is larger than the special figure 2 prefetch number, and the special figure 2 reservation number is equal to the special figure 2 prefetch number. Determines that the special figure 2 starting information has not increased. If it is determined that the special figure 2 start information has increased, the process proceeds to step S303. If it is determined that the special figure 2 start information has not increased, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S303, the increased special figure 2 start information is pre-read from the special figure 2 random value storage area before the success / failure determination process in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229). Then, using the pre-read special figure 2 start information and the determination table for special determination 2 and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the special figure 2 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is shown in FIG. Prior determination is made before the success / failure determination process in the related lottery process (step S229). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S305 subsequent to step S303, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 prefetching result obtained in the prior determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 2 prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S307, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the special figure 1 start information has increased. The determination as to whether or not the special figure 1 start information has increased is made, for example, in the special figure 1 holding number storage area and the special figure 1 prefetch number storage area stored in the special figure 1 holding number storage area, as in FIG. The comparison is made with the stored special figure 1 look-ahead number. If it is determined that the special figure 1 start information has increased, the process proceeds to step S309. If it is determined that the special figure 1 start information has not increased, the special figure prefetch process is terminated and the main control unit timer interrupt process is completed. Return to.

  In step S309, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not non-electric support is in progress. If it is determined that the non-electric support is being performed, the process proceeds to step S311. If it is determined that the non-electric support is not being performed (the electric support is being performed), the process proceeds to step S315. In this example, it is determined whether or not non-electric support is being performed, but it may be determined in step S309 whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 prefetch notice is satisfied. For example, the execution conditions of the special figure 1 pre-reading notice include conditions such as not being in a big hit game other than being in non-electric support.

  In step S311, the increased special figure 1 start information is pre-read from the special figure 1 random value storage area before the success / failure determination process in the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231). Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information and the determination table for special determination 1 and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the special figure 1 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is shown in FIG. Prior determination is made before the success / failure determination process in the related lottery process (step S231). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S313 following step S311, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 prefetching result obtained in the prior determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the special figure prefetch process is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  In step S315, the pre-read result for the special figure 1 in the RAM 308 is stored in the RAM 308 in place of the stop symbol information instead of pre-reading the increased special figure 1 start information and indicating that the start information is not pre-read. Stored in the earliest free area of the copy. Thereafter, the special figure prefetch process is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined. However, all start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. Further, in the above-described command setting transmission process (step S233), only the pre-read result of the starting information for the increase may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, or the pre-read result storage for special figure 1 and special figure 2 All the prefetching results in the section may be transmitted to the first sub-control section 400.

  Further, in this embodiment, pre-reading is always executed for the increased special figure 2 starting information, and pre-reading is always executed for the increased special figure 1 starting information except during the electric support. It may be determined by lottery whether or not to pre-read the starting information of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Alternatively, in the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the prefetch result from the main control unit 300, for example, it may be determined by lottery whether to perform prefetch notification for each hold. Regardless of the gaming state (for example, whether or not non-electric support is in progress), when the starting information increases, prefetching is always executed and the prefetching result is stored in the prefetching result storage unit, and the prefetching is performed. The result may be configured to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may determine whether or not to execute the lottery and the rendering using the pre-read result.

  FIG. 64 illustrates a state in which prefetch result information and the like are stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 64A shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 64 (a), the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 has, for example, the same number (four in this embodiment) of storage areas as the number of special figure variable games that can be held. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of Special Figure 1 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 64A, the storage area “hold 1” stores “special figure F” (out of line) as stop symbol information, and the storage area “hold 2” stores “special figure F” as stop symbol information. ”(Out of line) is stored,“ Special Figure A ”(15R special jackpot) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area“ Hold 3 ”, and“ Special Figure F ”is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area“ Hold 4 ”. "(Disconnection) is stored.

  FIG. 64B shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 64 (b), the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in this embodiment) of storage areas as the special figure 2 variable game holdable number. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 64B, the storage area “hold 1” stores “special drawing d” (out of line) as stop symbol information, and the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4” have stop symbols. Information is not stored. In FIG. 64B, a state where the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as “none”.

  FIG. 64 (c) shows an example of the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 during the electric support. As shown in FIG. 64C, “undecided” information is stored in the storage area “hold 1” instead of the stopped symbol information. In the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4”, neither stop symbol information nor “undecided” information is stored.

  In the above description, an example is given in which only stop symbols are determined in advance and only stop symbol information is stored in the prefetch result storage unit. And may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 as prefetch result information.

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 6B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing (strobe interrupt processing) of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 6C is a flowchart of the timer variable update interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, in step S401 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. This initialization process takes about 30 seconds, for example.

  In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. . In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S409 following step S407, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

  In step S411 subsequent to step S409, when it is detected that the chance button has been pressed, the effect data updated in step S409 is changed to effect data corresponding to the press of the chance button.

  In step S413 following step S411, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S415 subsequent to step S413, if there is a command to the various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S417 following step S415, if there is a command to the effect movable body 224 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 422.

  In step S419 following step S417, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S409, the control command is set to be output, and the process returns to step S403. .

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S501 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). Execute in the cycle. In step S601 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 in the first sub control unit main process shown in FIG. Is stored in the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S603 subsequent to step S601, transmission of a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S419 in the main process of the first sub-control unit 400, update processing of random numbers for other effects, and the like are performed.

  Next, examples described below will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 73. First, the configuration used in common among the configurations shown in the drawings used in the following embodiments will be described with reference to FIG. 66 (a) as an example. 66 (a) shows a decorative symbol display device 208, a special figure 1 display device 212, a special figure 2 display device 214, and a special figure 1 holding lamp that constitute a part of the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 218 and the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 and the speaker 120 are schematically shown. The special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are shown below the decorative symbol display device 208, and the special figure 2 display device 214 is shown in FIG. It is shown on the right side of the display device 212. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 is shown on the upper side of the special figure 1 display device 212, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 is shown on the upper side of the special figure 2 display device 214. In addition, the extinguished portions of the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, and the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 are shown in white, and the lighting portions are shown in black. The speaker 120 is shown on the right side of the special figure 2 display device 214.

  Further, in the embodiments shown in FIGS. 66 to 73, description will be given of an effect example in the case where the gaming state is a special figure high probability common figure high probability state (hereinafter referred to as “probable substation support state”). The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, in the case of winning the big win of any of the special figure A, special figure C, special figure a, or special figure c, in the special figure variable game of 80 times after the big hit game ends. This is a so-called ST machine that is in a positive transformation support state. In the positive transformation support state, as shown in FIG. 66 (a), symbol display areas 208a to 208c for performing decorative display variation display and stop display are allocated to the upper left corner of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The effect display area 208d is assigned to almost the entire image display area. If necessary, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c may be enlarged and displayed in the center of the image display area.

  Further, the state in which all the segments are represented in white in the special figure 2 display device 214 indicates that the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is being executed. The same applies to the special figure 1 display device 212. In addition, the variation display of each decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c during the execution of the special symbol variable game is indicated by a downward arrow.

  A fourth symbol display area is provided in the upper right corner of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The upper side in the 4th symbol display area is the 4th symbol display area 208e1 for the special figure 1, and the lower side is the 4th symbol display area 208e2 for the special figure 2. While the special figure 1 variable game is not in operation, an image representing “◯” painted in light ink color as the special figure 1 fourth graphic is displayed in the special graphic 1 fourth graphic display area 208e1. While the special figure 2 variable game is not in operation, an image representing “□” painted in a light black color as the special figure 2 fourth graphic is displayed in the special graphic 2 fourth symbol display area 208e2. While the special figure 1 variable game is in operation, an image representing a white “◯” as the special figure 1 fourth symbol is displayed in the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area 208e1. While the special figure 2 variable game is in operation, an image representing white “□” is displayed in the special figure 2 fourth symbol display area 208e2 as the special figure 2 fourth symbol.

  A vertically long hold icon display area A is provided at the right end in the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the hold icon display area A, four circular images are displayed side by side in the vertical direction. In the probable substation support state, the number of reservations in the special fluctuation side of FIG. 2 is displayed in the hold icon display area A. In the hold icon display area A, the lowermost circular image corresponds to the hold of the special figure 2 with the hold order of the first place, and the second circular image from the bottom corresponds to the hold of the special figure 2 with the hold order of the second place. The third circle image from the bottom corresponds to the hold of the special figure 2 with the third hold order, and the fourth (top) circle image from the bottom corresponds to the hold of the special figure 2 with the fourth hold order. doing. When the circular image is displayed in a predetermined color (light ink color in this example), the circular image is referred to as a holding icon, and the special figure 2 variable game of the holding order corresponding to the circular image is held. Represents that. In addition, when the circular image is displayed in white, it indicates that the special figure 2 variable game of the holding order corresponding to the circular image is not held. Further, the pachinko machine 100 may display a hold icon in red, green, blue, or a character image display mode, and execute a pre-reading advance notice for notifying the determination result of the reserved special figure variation game. . The prefetching notice is executed based on the prefetching result by the special figure prefetching process shown in FIG. Note that a hold icon corresponding to the hold shown in FIG. 1 on the non-priority fluctuation side may be displayed in the hold icon display area A in the probability substation support state.

  Further, in the probability transformation support mode, a character string image indicating the remaining number of special figure variable games executed in the probability transformation support mode is displayed above the center of the effect display area 208d. In FIG. 66 (a), since the remaining number of special figure variable games executed in the probability substation support state is 80, a character string image of “80 remaining” is displayed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 58, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is provided with a general start port 228 and a special view start port 232 on the right path. Will proceed. As shown in FIG. 66 (a), a right-pointing white arrow image is displayed at the upper right of the effect display area 208d, and a “right-handed” character string image is displayed in the arrow image and right-handed. This is reported to the player.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, in the probable substation support state, a wilderness background image and an animation of Yoshimune running in the wilderness are displayed in the effect display area 208d. In the positive transformation support state, a character image of Yoshimune is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and a notice effect, a reach effect, etc. are executed.

  A horizontally long rectangular music selection area B is displayed at the upper left in the effect display area 208d. A music composed of a horizontally long rectangular frame image in the music selection area B and a character string image of any of “Song 1” to “Song n” (n is a natural number of 2 or more) displayed in the frame image. The display is displayed. The music displayed in the center of the music selection area B and indicated by the music display indicated by the downward black arrow is the currently selected music. The player can select the music output from the speaker 120 by switching the music display displayed in the center of the music selection area B by operating the left and right buttons of the setting operation unit 137. When the frame image of the music display is displayed in white and the character string image of any of “Song 1” to “Song n” is displayed in the frame image, the music indicated by the music display is selected. It is possible. Further, when the frame image of the music display is displayed in light ink color and an image representing “?” Is displayed in the frame image, the music corresponding to the music display cannot be selected. . Further, the music selection operation by the player may be possible only during the execution of the symbol variation display (special symbol variation game), may be possible only in the probable substation support state, or the special diagram low probability normal diagram. Only the low probability state may be possible, the special figure high probability ordinary figure only the low probability state may be possible, the special figure low probability ordinary figure high probability state only may be possible, or the jackpot game It may be possible only inside or always possible. Moreover, in the state where the music selection area B is displayed, the music selection operation by the player may always be possible.

  The music that can be selected in this embodiment is a music including a song. The speaker 120 outputs the accompaniment and singing of the currently selected music. In addition, a lyrics display area C for displaying a character string image (hereinafter simply referred to as “lyrics”) representing lyrics corresponding to the song singing is provided below the center of the effect display area 208d. The lyric display area C is partitioned by a horizontally-long rectangular frame image, and lyrics are displayed in the frame image. Note that the lyrics display area C may not be partitioned by the frame image, and the lyrics may be displayed immediately above the background image.

  In the present embodiment, the length of the music output from the speaker 120 may be longer than the longest variation time among all the variation times of the variation display of the special figure. , It may be longer than the longest fluctuation time at the time of winning the big hit in the probability transformation support state, may be longer than the shortest fluctuation time at the big hit in the probability transformation support state, It may be longer than the longest fluctuation time at the time of disconnection, may be longer than the shortest fluctuation time at the time of disconnection in the probable substation support state, or may be longer than the longest fluctuation time at the big hit in the non-probable substation support state Longer than the shortest fluctuation time at the time of big hit in the non-probable substation support state, or longer than the longest fluctuation time at the time of disconnection in the non-probable substation support state However, from the shortest fluctuation time at the time of disconnection in the reliable substation support state May be long, it may be longer than the shortest of the variation time of the total time-varying. Note that the length of the music may be longer than the total variation time, longer than some of these variation times, or shorter than the other portions.

(Example 1) Next, the effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of this embodiment is demonstrated using FIG. First, an effect example 1 in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 (a) to 66 (f). 66 (a) to 66 (f) show, in this order, production example 1 in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. It should be noted that, in the diagrams showing the example effects in chronological order, the passage of time between one diagram and the next diagram does not necessarily match between the diagrams.

  FIG. 66 (a) shows a state in which the first special figure 2 variable game started after the end of the big hit game of the second consecutive resort is executed. Here, Renso means winning a big hit in the promising substation support state. On the other hand, winning a big hit in a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state is called a first win. Two consecutive villas are to shift to a promising substation support state based on winning in the first win, and to win a big hit in the probable substation support state. In other words, 2 consecutive villas are to win the second big hit from the first win.

  Further, in the state shown in FIG. 66 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 4, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 4. The currently selected music is “Song 1”. In the present embodiment, the song 1 is set as a song “Acorn Roll”. From the speaker 120, the song “Acorn” is output together with the accompaniment, and the lyrics “Acorn Roller” is displayed in the lyrics display area C. In the present embodiment, the lyrics for each measure are displayed in the lyrics display area C. The lyrics for every two measures may be displayed in the lyrics display area C. In the music selection area B, instead of the character string image of “Song 1”, a character string image representing the title of the music (in this example, a character string image of “Acorn Roller”) may be displayed. The same applies to the music 2 and the like described later. During the execution of the special figure 1 variable game, the lyric display may be displayed or the lyric display may be hidden.

  In addition, in the probable substation support state, the player can perform a music selection operation, and the number of music that can be selected is set according to the number of consecutive games. Only one song, song 1, can be selected in the probable power support state after winning the first win, and two songs, song 1 and song 2, can be selected in the probable power support state after two consecutive villas. . Note that the number of songs that can be selected in the probable substation support state after winning the first win may be two or three or more. In addition, the number of songs that can be selected may be increased by one song each time a series is performed, may be increased by two songs, or may be increased by three or more songs.

  FIG. 66 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is completed. The result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of place, “Special figure d” is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device 214, and “decoration 2-decoration 8-decoration 3” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Stop is displayed. The speaker 120 outputs a singing “Korokoro” along with the accompaniment.

  FIG. 66 (c) shows a state in which one hold in FIG. 2 has been consumed and the next special figure 2 variable game has started. The number of holds in the special figure 2 is decreased by 1 to 3. Further, the remaining number of special figure variable games executed in the probable substation support state is 79 times. In addition, the song “Dongkorokoro” advances to the next measure, and the lyrics displayed in the lyrics display area C are switched from “Dongkorokoro” to “Donbrico”. From the speaker 120, the song “Donbrico” is output along with the accompaniment.

  Further, prior to the start of the special figure 2 variable game, the main control unit 300 makes a determination of success / failure by referring to a determination table (not shown) stored in the ROM 306, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of sync. And “Special Figure d” is selected as the off symbol. In the present embodiment, the special symbol 2 has only one special symbol “special diagram d”. Therefore, when the result of the special figure 2 variable game is wrong, it is uniquely “special diagram d”. Is selected. Next, the main control unit 300 executes a lottery process with reference to a special figure 2 fluctuation time determination table (not shown) stored in the ROM 306, and determines the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation game, for example, 1 second. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation start command from the main control unit 300, performs a lottery process using an effect lottery table (not shown) stored in the ROM 406, and performs a reach effect and a special feature being executed. It decides not to execute the notice effect of the figure variation game.

  FIG. 66 (d) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is completed. The result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of place, “Special figure d” is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device 214, and “decoration 2-decoration 8-decoration 3” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Stop is displayed. In addition, the song “Donguri Korokoro” advances to the next measure, and the lyrics displayed in the lyrics display area C are switched from “Donbrico” to “Addition to Oike”. From the speaker 120, the singing “Fill in the pond” is output together with the accompaniment.

  FIG. 66 (e) shows a state in which one special figure 2 hold is consumed and the next special figure 2 variable game is started. The number of holds in the special figure 2 is decreased by 1 to 2. Further, the remaining number of special figure variable games executed in the probable substation support state is 78 times. In addition, the song “Donguri Korokoro” advances to the next measure, and the lyrics displayed in the lyrics display area C are switched from “Fill in the pond” to “Now hard”. From the speaker 120, the song “Come on” is output along with the accompaniment.

  Further, prior to the start of the special figure 2 variable game, the main control unit 300 makes a determination of success / failure by referring to a determination table (not shown) stored in the ROM 306, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of sync. And “Special Figure d” is selected as the off symbol. Next, the main control unit 300 executes a lottery process with reference to a special figure 2 fluctuation time determination table (not shown) stored in the ROM 306, and determines the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation game, for example, 1 second. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation start command from the main control unit 300, performs a lottery process using an effect lottery table (not shown) stored in the ROM 406, and performs a reach effect and a special feature being executed. It decides not to execute the notice effect of the figure variation game.

  FIG. 66 (f) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is completed. The result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of place, “Special figure d” is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device 214, and “decoration 2-decoration 8-decoration 3” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Stop is displayed. In addition, the song “Dongkorokoro” advances to the next measure, and the lyrics displayed in the lyrics display area C are switched from “Come on now” to “Dome comes out”. From the speaker 120, the song “Dojoga” is output together with the accompaniment.

  Thus, in Production Example 1 of the present embodiment, music including a song is output from the speaker 120, and lyrics corresponding to the song are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Next, production example 2 in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 (g) to 66 (l) show production example 2 in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment in this order in chronological order. 66 (g) to 66 (j) are the states shown in FIGS. 66 (a) to 66 (d), the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 66 (k) shows a state in which the third measure of the song “Dongori Koroko” (the measure of “Additional to the pond”) has been completed and the next measure (the measure of “Sadai”) has been advanced. Show. In the lyrics display area C, the lyric “Sadai” is displayed, but at the time shown in FIG. 66 (k), the singing of the fourth measure has not yet started, and only the accompaniment is output from the speaker 120. ing. In this way, when the measure of the music advances to the next, the lyrics display may be switched before the singing of the next measure is started. In addition, the switching of the lyric display when proceeding to the next measure may be performed simultaneously with the start of the singing of the next measure or after the start of the singing.

  FIG. 66 (l) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is completed. The result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of place, “Special figure d” is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device 214, and “decoration 2-decoration 8-decoration 3” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Stop is displayed. In addition, the singing of the fourth measure of the song “Donguri Korokoro” has started, and the song “Saitai” is output from the speaker 120 together with the accompaniment.

  As described above, in the production example 2 of this embodiment, when the music advances to the next measure, the lyrics display of the next measure is started before the singing of the next measure is started.

(Example 2) Next, the effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2 of this embodiment is demonstrated using FIG. First, the example production 1 in the pachinko machine 100 by a present Example is demonstrated using FIG. 67 (a)-(e). 67 (a) to 67 (e) show, in this order, production example 1 in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment in time series.

  FIG. 67 (a) shows a state in which the first special figure 2 variable game started after the end of the big hit game of the second consecutive resort is executed. The number of holds in FIG. 1 is 4, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 4. The currently selected music is “Acorn Roller” of “Song 1”. From the speaker 120, the song “Acorn” is output together with the accompaniment, and the lyrics “Acorn Roller” is displayed in the lyrics display area C.

  FIG. 67 (b) shows a state in which the notice effect is started during the execution of the special figure 2 variable game. The speaker 120 outputs a singing “Korokoro” along with the accompaniment. Prior to the start of the notice effect, a continuous notice including a countdown display until the notice effect is started may be executed in the effect display area 208d. In the notice effect of this example, an animation in which the character Yoshimune finds an enemy is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and a balloon image including a character string image of “Enemy?” As a word of Yoshimune.

  FIG. 67 (c) shows a state in which the notice effect is continued, and the effect display area 208d includes a balloon including a character string image “??” instead of the character string image “??”. An image is displayed. In addition, the song “Dongkorokoro” advances to the next measure, and the lyrics displayed in the lyrics display area C are switched from “Dongkorokoro” to “Donbrico”. From the speaker 120, the song “Donbrico” is output along with the accompaniment.

  FIG. 67 (d) shows a state in which the notice effect ends without developing and an animation in which Yoshimune runs is displayed in the effect display area 208 d. In addition, the song “Donguri Korokoro” advances to the next measure, and the lyrics displayed in the lyrics display area C are switched from “Donbrico” to “Addition to Oike”. From the speaker 120, the singing “Fill in the pond” is output together with the accompaniment.

  FIG. 67 (e) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is completed. The result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of place, “Special figure d” is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device 214, and “decoration 2-decoration 8-decoration 3” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Stop is displayed. In addition, the song “Donguri Korokoro” advances to the next measure, and the lyrics displayed in the lyrics display area C are switched from “Fill in the pond” to “Now hard”. From the speaker 120, the song “Come on” is output along with the accompaniment.

  Thus, in the production example 1 of the present embodiment, the lyrics display is continued even during the execution of the announcement production.

  Next, an effect example 2 in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 (f) to 67 (j) show production example 2 in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment in this order in time series.

  FIG. 67 (f) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 67 (a), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 67 (g) shows a state in which the notice effect is started during the execution of the special figure 2 variable game. Prior to the start of the notice effect, a continuous notice including a countdown display until the notice effect is started may be executed in the effect display area 208d. The countdown display is the same as the countdown display displayed prior to the start of the notice effect shown in FIG. In the notice effect of this example, an animation in which the character Yoshimune finds an enemy is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and a balloon image including a character string image of “Enemy?” As a word of Yoshimune. The character image and balloon image of Yoshimune displayed in the effect display area 208d in the notice effect of this example are the same as the character image and balloon image of Yoshimune displayed in the notice effect shown in FIG.

  Further, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can execute a plurality of types of notice effects, and the lyrics display area C and the lyrics display are erased while the notice effects of this example are being executed. Note that a lyrics display may be displayed during execution of a notice effect different from the notice effect of the present example. The erasing timing of the lyrics display area C and the lyrics display may be at the start of the countdown display described above, may be during the display of the countdown display, or may be at the start of the notice effect. It may be after the start of the notice effect. Also, if the lyrics display is erased during the notice effect, there is a higher probability that it will develop into a super reach effect, and the probability of winning a big hit in the special figure variation game being executed is higher. . In addition, the music output from the speaker 120 continues as it is even after the lyric display area C and the lyric display are erased, and the singing “Korokoro” is output from the speaker 120 together with the accompaniment.

  FIG. 67 (h) shows a state in which the notice effect is continued. In the effect display area 208d, instead of the animation of Yoshimune who found the enemy and the character string image of “Enemy?” A balloon image including the character string image “is displayed. In addition, the song “Donguri Korokoro” advances to the next measure, and the song “Donbrico” is output from the speaker 120 together with the accompaniment. In addition, the lyric display area C and the lyric display are maintained in an erased state.

  FIG. 67 (i) shows a state in which the notice effect has evolved into a super reach A effect. In the symbol display areas 208a and 208c, “decoration 3” is displayed in a manner that swings up and down (hereinafter referred to as “fluctuation variation display”), and the variation display of the ornament symbol is reached. In the effect display area 208d, a character image of Yoshimune is displayed on the left side, an enemy character image is displayed on the right side, and an animation of a scene where Yoshimune and the enemy face each other is displayed. In addition, a character string image of “SP reach A” is displayed below the center of the effect display area 208d to notify that the effect of super reach A has started.

  On the condition that the super reach production is started, the music selection area B is deleted, and the output of the music “Acorn Roller” being selected from the speaker 120 is interrupted. The speaker 120 outputs a sound effect of Super Reach A in place of the music “Donguri Korokoro”. The timing at which the song selection area B is erased and the output of the song “Acorn Roller” from the speaker 120 is interrupted may be at the same time as the start of the super reach production, or the song “Acorn” immediately after the start of the super reach production. It may be at the end of one measure of "Korokoro". In addition, the music selection operation is impossible during the period in which the music selection area B is not displayed. Thus, when the super reach effect is started, the music selection area B is erased and the music selection operation becomes impossible.

  FIG. 67 (j) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is completed. The result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of place, “Special figure d” is stopped on the special figure 2 display device 214, and “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 3” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Stop is displayed. If the result of the special figure variation game is out of place, after the animation of the scene where Yoshimune loses to the enemy in the Super Reach A production is displayed in the production display area 208d, the Super Reach A production ends and the symbol display In the areas 208a to 208c, a decorative pattern of the combination at the time of deviation is displayed.

  Also, the output of the interrupted song “Donguri Koro” has been resumed, and the lyrics display area C displays the lyrics of “Dojo is coming out”. From the speaker 120, the song “Dojo” is displayed along with the accompaniment. Is output. In this example, the song “Acorn Roller” is restarted at the same time as the end of the decorative symbol variation display. Note that the output restart timing of the song “Acorn Roller” may be the decorative symbol stop display period, or may be the start of the decorative symbol variation display corresponding to the next special symbol variable game, It may be simultaneously with the end of the production of Super Reach A.

  Also, in this example, the music is progressing internally even when the output of the music “Acorn Roller” is being interrupted, and the output of the music is resumed from where it has progressed internally. In this example, while the output is interrupted, the music progresses internally and the measures of “Fill in the pond” and “Now,” have ended, and the song has started from the beginning of the measure of “Dojo comes out”. Output has been resumed. Note that the music may be resumed from the point where the output was interrupted, from the beginning of the measure when the output was interrupted, or from the measure following the measure when the output was interrupted. Good.

  As described above, in the production example 2 of the present embodiment, the output of the selected music and the display of the lyrics are interrupted during the execution of the super reach production.

(Example 3) Next, the effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3 of this embodiment is demonstrated using FIG. First, the example production 1 in the pachinko machine 100 by a present Example is demonstrated using Fig.68 (a)-(e). 68 (a) to 68 (e) show, in this order, production example 1 in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment in time series.

  68 (a) to 68 (c) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 67 (f) to 67 (h), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 68D shows a state in which the effect of super reach A has been started. In the symbol display areas 208a and 208c, “decoration 3” is displayed in a swinging manner, and the ornamental symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In the effect display area 208d, a character image of Yoshimune is displayed on the left side, an enemy character image is displayed on the right side, and an animation of a scene where Yoshimune and the enemy face each other is displayed. In addition, a character string image of “SP reach A” is displayed below the center of the effect display area 208d to notify that super reach A has started.

  On the condition that the super reach production is started, the music selection area B is deleted, and the output of the music “Acorn Roller” being selected from the speaker 120 is interrupted. The speaker 120 outputs a music for Super Reach A in place of the music “Acorn Roll”. In the present embodiment, “Snow and Konko” of nursery rhymes is set as the music exclusively for Super Reach A. From the speaker 120, the singing “Yukiya” is output together with the accompaniment. As described above, when the super reach effect is started, the music selection area B is deleted. When the super reach production is started, the lyrics display may be deleted.

  In this example, a song with relatively long one-bar lyrics, such as the song “Donguri Korokoro”, displays the lyrics for each bar, and a relative one-bar lyrics, such as the song “Yukiya Konko”. For short songs, lyrics are displayed every two bars. As shown in FIG. 68 (d), when lyrics are displayed every two bars, a space is provided between the bars of the lyrics, and “Snow and Konko” is displayed in the lyrics display area C. Moreover, the lyrics display of the music only for super reach may be displayed without being hidden by a button image, a cut-in image, or a movable body, which will be described later. For example, the lyrics display of the music for exclusive use by Super Reach may be hidden by being displayed at a position that does not overlap the button image or the movable body. In addition, the lyrics display of music for exclusive use of Super Reach is hidden by a button image, cut-in image, and movable body, which will be described later, and the lyrics display of music that can be selected by the player (for example, “Acorn Roller”) The cut-in image may be displayed without being hidden by the movable body.

  FIG. 68 (e) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is completed. The result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of place, “Special figure d” is stopped on the special figure 2 display device 214, and “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 3” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Stop is displayed. If the result of the special figure variation game is out of place, after the animation of the scene where Yoshimune loses to the enemy in the Super Reach A production is displayed in the production display area 208d, the Super Reach A production ends and the symbol display In the areas 208a to 208c, a decorative pattern of the combination at the time of deviation is displayed.

  Also, the output of the interrupted music “Donguri Koro” has been resumed, and the lyrics display area C displays the lyrics of “Addition to Oike”. From the speaker 120, along with the accompaniment, “Oike” "Fucked" is output. In this example, the song “Acorn Roller” is restarted at the same time as the end of the decorative symbol variation display. Note that the restart timing of the song “Acorn Roller” may be the stop display period of the decorative symbol, the start of the decorative symbol variable display corresponding to the next special symbol variable game, or the supermarket. It may be simultaneously with the end of the reach production.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 100 may execute the effect by causing the frame lamp 122 or the game board lamp 532 to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode that matches the output of the music. For example, these lamps may emit light in a light-emitting manner that matches the melody of the song “Donguri Korokoro” and the performance may be executed. As in this example, when the output of the song “Acorn Roller” is interrupted from the speaker 120 due to the start of the super reach effect, the effect by the light emission of the lamp that matches the melody of the song “Acorn Roller” is also possible. These lamps are interrupted, and these lamps are lit in a light-emitting manner in accordance with the melody of the musical piece “Snow and Konko” for super reach production. In addition, the production by the lamp lighting in accordance with the song “Acorn Roller” progressed without interruption internally, and progressed internally when the output of the song “Acorn Roller” was resumed from the speaker 120. It may be resumed from. Thus, the sound effect and the light emission effect corresponding to the sound can be executed before and after the music is interrupted. It should be noted that the effect by the lamp emission corresponding to the song “Acorn Roller” may be interrupted internally, and may be resumed from where it was interrupted when the output of the song “Acorn Roller” was resumed from the speaker 120. Thereby, before and after the interruption of the music, there may be a case where the effect of the sound and the effect of the light emission corresponding to the sound are shifted and the effect is changed so that the player is not bored with the effect.

  In this example, the song “Acorn Roller” is resumed from where it was interrupted. As shown in FIG. 68 (c), since it ends at the end of the measure of “Donbrico”, as shown in FIG. 68 (e), from “Addition to the pond” next to the measure of “Donbrico”. Has been resumed. If the song “Acorn Roller” is interrupted at the end of the song “Donbuco” in “Donbrico”, the song “Rico” in the measure of “Donbrico” may be resumed. As described above, when the music is interrupted in the middle of the measure, the music may be resumed from the middle of the interrupted measure. Also, if the music that can be selected by the player (in this example, the nursery rhyme “Donguri Korokoro” of song 1) is interrupted, even if the music is resumed from the beginning of No. 2 of that music (the nursery rhyme “Dongorokoro”) Alternatively, the output of another song that can be selected by the player (for example, song 2 (song “Sakura Sakura”)) may be started.

  Next, an effect example 2 in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 (f) to (i) show production example 2 in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment in this order in time series.

  FIG. 68 (f) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 68 (d), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In FIG. 68 (g), the song “Yukiya Konko” advances to the next measure, and the song “Konko” is output from the speaker 120 together with the accompaniment.

  FIG. 68 (h) shows a state in which the cut-in effect is being executed while the super reach effect is being executed. In this example, the cut-in effect is executed by displaying the cut-in image on the entire surface of the effect display area 208d. The cut-in image of this example is composed of a character image of Yoshimune and a balloon image including a character string image of “game! Further, when the cut-in image of this example is displayed, the lyrics display area C and the lyrics display are deleted. Thereby, during the execution of the cut-in effect, the lyrics display of the music is erased and interrupted. In addition, the song “Yukiya Konko” advances to the next measure, and the song “Aya” is output from the speaker 120 together with the accompaniment.

  FIG. 68 (i) shows a state in which an animation of a scene in which Yoshimune and the enemy slash is displayed in the effect display area 208d after the cut-in image is deleted and the cut-in effect ends. Also, the lyrics display area C and the lyrics display are displayed, and the lyrics display is resumed. The lyric display may be resumed at the same time as the cut-in image is erased or after the cut-in image is erased. Also, the song “Yukiya Konko” advances to the next measure, and the song “Konko” is output from the speaker 120 together with the accompaniment.

  Thus, in the production example 2 of the present embodiment, when the production display such as the cut-in image is displayed, the lyrics display is not displayed.

(Example 4) Next, the effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 4 of this embodiment is demonstrated using FIG. First, the example production 1 in the pachinko machine 100 by a present Example is demonstrated using FIG. 69 (a)-(e). FIGS. 69A to 69E show, in this order, production example 1 in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series.

  69 (a) and 69 (b) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 67 (a) and 67 (b), and the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 69C shows a state in which an operation effective period (operation reception period during which an operation is accepted) in which the operation of the chance button 136 is valid during the execution of the notice effect is started. Prior to the start of the operation valid period of the chance button 136, an image imitating the chance button 136 in the effect display area 208d and an image having a relatively small display size (hereinafter referred to as a “mini button image”). 800 is displayed. Thereby, the player is notified that the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has started. The mini button image 800 may be displayed at the same time as the start of the operation valid period of the chance button 136, or may be displayed after the operation effective period of the chance button 136 is started.

  In addition, the song “Dongkorokoro” advances to the next measure, and the lyrics displayed in the lyrics display area C are switched from “Dongkorokoro” to “Donbrico”. From the speaker 120, the song “Donbrico” is output along with the accompaniment.

  The mini button image 800 is displayed so as to overlap at least part of the lyrics display in the lyrics display area C. Since the mini button image 800 is displayed in front of the lyrics display in the lyrics display area C, a part of the lyrics display in the lyrics display area C is hidden by the mini button image 800. As shown in FIG. 69 (c), the lower half of the mini button image 800 is displayed so as to overlap the upper center portion of the lyrics display area C, and the upper part of the “mumble” of the lyrics “Donbrico” is displayed by the mini button image 800. Hidden and invisible.

  FIG. 69D shows a state in which an effect based on the pressing of the chance button 136 (single pressing) during the operation effective period is being executed. In the operation effective period of this example, a single press of pressing the chance button 136 only once is requested, and the operation effective period of this example ends when the chance button 136 is pressed once. When the chance button 136 is pressed once, the mini button image 800 is deleted. Further, in this example, based on the single press of the chance button 136 during the operation effective period, an effect that suggests whether or not the notice effect is developed into a super reach effect is executed. If the chance button 136 is not pressed during the operation valid period, the effect is not executed. In the effect display area 208d, a balloon image including a character string image of “??” is displayed instead of the character string image of “Is it an enemy?”, Suggesting that the notice effect does not develop into a super reach effect. Production is being performed. In addition, the song “Donguri Korokoro” advances to the next measure, and the lyrics displayed in the lyrics display area C are switched from “Donbrico” to “Addition to Oike”. From the speaker 120, the singing “Fill in the pond” is output together with the accompaniment.

  FIG. 69 (e) shows a state in which the notice effect ends without developing and an animation in which Yoshimune runs is displayed in the effect display area 208d. In addition, the song “Donguri Korokoro” advances to the next measure, and the lyrics displayed in the lyrics display area C are switched from “Fill in the pond” to “Now hard”. From the speaker 120, the song “Come on” is output along with the accompaniment.

  Thus, in the production example 1 of the present embodiment, when the production display of the mini button image 800 is displayed, the mini button image 800 and a part of the lyrics display are displayed in an overlapping manner.

  Next, an effect example 2 in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 (f) to 69 (j) show a production example 2 in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in this order in time series.

  The states shown in FIGS. 69 (f) and 69 (g) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 67 (a) and 67 (b), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 69 (h) shows a state in which the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started during the execution of the notice effect. In this example, prior to the start of the operation valid period of the chance button 136, an image simulating the chance button 136 in the effect display area 208d and having a relatively large display size (hereinafter referred to as a “deca button image”). ) 802 is displayed. Thereby, the player is notified that the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has started. It should be noted that the display of the big button image 802 may be started simultaneously with the start of the operation valid period of the chance button 136, or may be started after the operation effective period of the chance button 136 is started.

  In addition, the song “Donguri Korokoro” advances to the next measure, and the song “Donbrico” is output from the speaker 120 together with the accompaniment.

  The big button image 802 is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the lyrics display in the lyrics display area C. Since the deca button image 802 is displayed in front of the lyric display in the lyric display area C, a part of the lyric display in the lyric display area C is hidden by the deca button image 802. As shown in FIG. 69 (h), the lower part of the deca button image 802 is displayed so as to overlap the central portion of the lyrics display area C, and the entire lyrics “Donbrico” is hidden by the deca button image 802 and cannot be viewed.

  When the deca button image 802 is displayed, it is more likely to develop into a super reach effect than when the mini button image 800 is displayed, and it is more likely to win a big win in the special figure variation game being executed. It has become. In other words, the big hit reliability of the big button image 802 is set to be higher than the big hit reliability of the mini button image 800. As described above, the image having a larger display size among a plurality of types of images simulating the chance button 136 may be set so that the big hit reliability becomes higher. Further, the decabutton image 802 has a higher ratio of hiding the lyrics display than the minibutton image 800. As described above, an image in which the big hit reliability is set to be relatively high may have a larger area overlapping the lyric display than an image in which the big hit reliability is set to be relatively low.

  FIG. 69 (i) shows a state in which an effect based on the fact that the chance button 136 is pressed (single press) during the operation effective period is being executed. In the operation effective period of this example, a single press of pressing the chance button 136 only once is requested, and the operation effective period of this example ends when the chance button 136 is pressed once. When the chance button 136 is pressed once, the deca button image 802 is deleted. Further, in this example, based on the single press of the chance button 136 during the operation effective period, an effect that suggests whether or not the notice effect is developed into a super reach effect is executed. If the chance button 136 is not pressed during the operation valid period, the effect is not executed. In the effect display area 208d, a balloon image including a character string image of “discovery” is displayed instead of the character string image of “enemy?”, And an effect suggesting that the notice effect is developed into a super reach effect. Is running. In addition, the song “Donguri Korokoro” advances to the next measure, and the lyrics displayed in the lyrics display area C are switched from “Donbrico” to “Addition to Oike”. From the speaker 120, the singing “Fill in the pond” is output together with the accompaniment.

  FIG. 69 (j) shows a state in which the notice effect has been developed into a super reach A effect. In the symbol display areas 208a and 208c, “decoration 3” is displayed in a swinging manner, and the ornamental symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In the effect display area 208d, a character image of Yoshimune is displayed on the left side, an enemy character image is displayed on the right side, and an animation of a scene where Yoshimune and the enemy face each other is displayed. In addition, a character string image of “SP reach A” is displayed below the center of the effect display area 208d to notify that the effect of super reach A has started. On the condition that the super reach production is started, the music selection area B is deleted, and the output of the music “Acorn Roller” being selected from the speaker 120 is interrupted. The speaker 120 outputs a sound effect of Super Reach A in place of the music “Donguri Korokoro”. As described above, when the super reach effect is started, the music selection area B is deleted.

  Thus, in the production example 2 of the present embodiment, when the production display of the deca button image 802 is displayed, the deca button image 802 and the entire lyrics display are displayed in an overlapping manner.

  Further, when an image imitating the chance button 136 is displayed, an effect image may be displayed so as to surround the image. The larger the display size of the image imitating the chance button 136, the larger the display size of the effect image. Further, the effect image may be displayed overlapping with at least a part of the lyrics display. For example, the effect image surrounding the big button image 802 may have a higher ratio of hiding the lyrics display than the effect image surrounding the mini button image 800. The reverse is also possible. In addition, the visibility of the lyrics display decreases as the ratio of the hidden lyrics increases. Further, the transmittance of the effect image may be 0% or may be larger than 0% (for example, 50%).

(Example 5) Next, the effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 5 of this embodiment is demonstrated using FIG. First, the example production 1 in the pachinko machine 100 by a present Example is demonstrated using FIG. 70 (a)-(e). 70 (a) to 70 (e) show, in this order, production example 1 in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment in time series.

  FIGS. 70A and 70B show a state in which the same effects as the effects shown in FIGS. 67A and 67B are being executed. In this example, as shown in FIG. 70A, a movable body 804 is arranged on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The movable body 804 has a vertically-long rectangular flat plate shape, and is labeled “Yoshimune” on the surface. The movable body 804 is driven by, for example, a stepping motor and is guided in a guide groove (not shown), and can move in the left-right direction on the front surface of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and parallel to the display screen. It is. In the state shown in FIG. 70A, the movable body 804 is located at the initial position. The drive control of the movable body 804 may be executed by the first sub control unit 400 or the second sub control unit 500. The movable body 804 may be driven by a link mechanism.

  FIG. 70 (c) shows a state in which the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started during execution of the notice effect. In this example, prior to the start of the operation valid period of the chance button 136, an image simulating the chance button 136 in the effect display area 208d and having an intermediate display size (hereinafter referred to as “button image”). 806 is displayed. Thereby, the player is notified that the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has started. The button image 806 may be displayed at the same time as the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started, or may be displayed after the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started.

  Also, the button image 806 in this example is not displayed overlapping the lyrics display area C, unlike the mini button image 800 shown in FIG. 69 (c) and the big button image 802 shown in 14 (h). Thus, depending on the type of image imitating the chance button 136, it may be displayed overlapping the lyric display or may not be displayed overlapping the lyric display.

  FIG. 70D shows a state in which an effect based on the pressing of the chance button 136 (single pressing) during the operation effective period is being executed. In the operation effective period of this example, a single press of pressing the chance button 136 only once is requested, and the operation effective period of this example ends when the chance button 136 is pressed once. When the chance button 136 is pressed once, the button image 806 is deleted. In this example, the movable body 804 moves leftward from the initial position based on the single press of the chance button 136 during the operation effective period. When the chance button 136 is not pressed during the operation valid period, the movable body 804 does not move from the initial position. The movable body 804 is stopped approximately at the center of the front surface of the decorative symbol display device 208. The position indicated by the dotted line on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in FIG. 70 (d) is the initial position of the movable body 804, and the movable body 804 can move the range of the position in FIG. 70 (d) from the initial position. is there. Further, during the operation valid period, the player may be required to repeatedly hit the chance button 136 or press the button for a long time. In this case, the operation effect of the movable body 804 is executed only when the player executes the continuous hitting of the chance button 136 or the long press of the button. Similarly, the player may be required to repeatedly hit the chance button 136 or press and hold the button during the operation valid period when the mini button image 800 or the big button image 802 is displayed. In this case, the cut-in effect and the notice effect are executed only when the player performs a continuous hit of the chance button 136 or a long button press.

  Further, when the button image 806 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the lyrics display, the button image 806 is erased when the chance button 136 is pressed once, and the entire lyrics display becomes invisible. After that, a part of the lyrics display is hidden by the movable body 806 by the movement of the movable body 806. As described above, when the chance button 136 is operated in a state where a part of the lyric display is hidden, a period in which the entire lyric display can be visually recognized may be provided.

  In addition, in the effect display area 208d, a balloon image including a character string image of “discovery” is displayed instead of the character string image of “Is it an enemy?”, Suggesting that the notice effect is developed into a super reach effect. The production to be performed is executed. In addition, the song “Donguri Korokoro” advances to the next measure, and the lyrics displayed in the lyrics display area C are switched from “Donbrico” to “Addition to Oike”. From the speaker 120, the singing “Fill in the pond” is output together with the accompaniment.

  In addition, since the movable body 804 has moved to substantially the center of the front surface of the decorative symbol display device 208, at least a part of the lyrics display in the lyrics display area C is hidden. In this example, part of the “pond” and the entire “Hama” are hidden in the lyrics “addicted to the pond”. The movable body 804 may have a width equal to or greater than the width of the lyrics display area C, and the entire lyrics display may be hidden by the movable body 804. As described above, in this example, at least a part of the lyrics display is hidden by the operation effect of the movable body 804 that is executed based on the pressing of the chance button 136. Moreover, since the movable body 804 moved toward the left, the lyrics displayed from the right are hidden by the movable body 804 from the rear side. In addition, when the movable body 804 is arranged on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the movable body 804 moves toward the right side, the lyrics displayed from the right are hidden by the movable body 804 from the front side. . Further, when the movable body 804 is arranged below the decorative symbol display device 208 and moves upward, the movable body 804 is hidden by the movable body 804 from the lower side of the horizontally displayed lyric display, and the movable body 804 is hidden by the decorative symbol display device. When it is arranged above 208 and moves downward, it is hidden by the movable body 804 from the upper side of the horizontally displayed lyric display. Thus, the direction in which the lyrics display starts to be hidden differs depending on the arrangement position and the moving direction of the movable body 804 at the initial position.

  FIG. 70 (e) shows a state in which the notice effect has evolved into a super reach A effect. In the symbol display areas 208a and 208c, “decoration 3” is displayed in a swinging manner, and the ornamental symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In the effect display area 208d, a character image of Yoshimune is displayed on the left side, an enemy character image is displayed on the right side, and an animation of a scene where Yoshimune and the enemy face each other is displayed. In addition, a character string image of “SP reach A” is displayed below the center of the effect display area 208d to notify that the effect of super reach A has started. On the condition that the super reach production is started, the music selection area B is deleted, and the output of the music “Acorn Roller” being selected from the speaker 120 is interrupted. The speaker 120 outputs a sound effect of Super Reach A in place of the music “Donguri Korokoro”. Further, the movable body 804 moves rightward and returns to the initial position. As described above, when the super reach effect is started, the music selection area B is deleted.

  Thus, in the production example 1 of the present embodiment, a part of the lyrics display is hidden by the operation production of the movable body 804 that is executed based on the operation of the chance button 136.

  Next, production example 2 in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 (f) to (i) show, in this order, production example 2 in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment in time series.

  FIGS. 70 (f) and (g) show a state in which the same effects as the effects shown in FIGS. 67 (a) and 67 (b) are being executed.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 70 (f), a movable body 808 is disposed below the decorative symbol display device 208. The movable body 808 has a circular shape, and has a family crest (for example, a trefoil) pattern on the surface. The movable body 808 is driven by, for example, a stepping motor and guided in a guide groove (not shown) to move in the vertical direction on the front surface of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and parallel to the display screen. Is possible. The drive control of the movable body 808 may be executed by the first sub control unit 400 or the second sub control unit 500.

  In the state shown in FIG. 70 (f), the movable body 808 is located at the initial position. In the state where the movable body 808 is located at the initial position, approximately 2/3 of the upper part is arranged at a position where it overlaps with the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and approximately 1/3 of the lower part is disposed on the decorative symbol display device It is located below the display screen 208 and behind the stage 244 shown in FIG. 58 so that it cannot be viewed by the player.

  In this example, as shown in FIGS. 70 (f) and (g), the movable body 808 overlaps the central portion of the lyrics display area C and the central portion of the lyrics display area C is hidden. The display is displayed so as not to be hidden by the movable body 808. For example, the lyrics display area C of this example is provided horizontally longer than the examples shown in FIGS. 70A to 70E, and the lyrics “Acorn” is displayed on the left side of the lyrics display area C and overlaps the movable body 808. A predetermined space is provided in the part, and the lyrics “Korokoro” is displayed on the right side of the lyrics display area C. Thereby, the player can visually recognize the entire lyrics display.

  FIG. 70 (h) shows a state in which the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started during the execution of the notice effect. In this example, a button image 806 is displayed. Thereby, the player is notified that the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has started. The button image 806 may be displayed at the same time as the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started, or may be displayed after the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started.

  In addition, the song “Dongkorokoro” advances to the next measure, and the lyrics displayed in the lyrics display area C are switched from “Dongkorokoro” to “Donbrico”. The lyrics “Donbu” is displayed on the left side of the lyrics display area C, a predetermined space is provided in a portion overlapping the movable body 808, and the lyrics “Rico” is displayed on the right side of the lyrics display area C. Thereby, the player can visually recognize the entire lyrics display. Also, the speaker 120 outputs a singing “Donbrico” along with the accompaniment.

  FIG. 70 (i) shows a state in which an effect is executed based on the chance button 136 being pressed (single press) during the operation effective period. In the operation effective period of this example, a single press of pressing the chance button 136 only once is requested, and the operation effective period of this example ends when the chance button 136 is pressed once. When the chance button 136 is pressed once, the button image 806 is deleted. Also, in this example, a horizontally-long rectangular (band-like) cut-in image 810 is displayed in the effect display area 208d when the chance button 136 is pressed during the operation effective period. The cut-in image 810 includes a character string image “CHANCE !!” at the center. When the chance button 136 is not pressed during the operation valid period, the cut-in image 810 is not displayed.

  In addition, in the effect display area 208d, a balloon image including a character string image of “discovery” is displayed instead of the character string image of “Is it an enemy?”, Suggesting that the notice effect is developed into a super reach effect. The production to be performed is executed. In addition, the song “Donguri Korokoro” advances to the next measure, and the lyrics displayed in the lyrics display area C are switched from “Donbrico” to “Addition to Oike”. The cut-in image 810 is displayed in front of the lyrics display area C, and is displayed so as to overlap the upper half of the lyrics display area C. Thereby, a part of the lyric display is hidden in the cut-in image, so that the lyric display is difficult or impossible to read. In addition, the speaker 120 outputs the song “Fuck in the Pond” along with the accompaniment.

  Thus, in the production example 2 of the present embodiment, a part of the lyrics display is hidden by the production display of the cut-in image 810 displayed based on the operation of the chance button 136.

(Example 6) Next, the effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 6 of this embodiment is demonstrated using FIG. First, the example production 1 in the pachinko machine 100 by a present Example is demonstrated using FIG. 71 (a)-(f). 71 (a) to (f) show, in this order, production example 1 in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment in time series.

  FIG. 71 (a) shows a state in which the first special figure 2 variable game started after the end of the big hit game of the second consecutive resort is executed, as in FIG. 66 (a). In this example, the lyrics display can be switched on and off by pressing the upper button or the lower button of the setting operation unit 137. When the lyric display is on, the lyric display is displayed in the lyric display area C, and when the lyric display is off, the lyric display end area C is not displayed and the lyric display is not displayed. In addition, if the upper or lower button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed when the lyric display is on, the lyric display is switched to the off state. If the lyric display is off, the upper of the setting operation unit 137 is displayed. When the button or the down button is pressed, the lyrics display is switched on. In the lower left corner of the effect display area 208d, a lyric display switching notification image 812 including a horizontally-long rectangular frame image and a character string image of “Lyrics ON / OFF with up / down button” displayed in the frame image is displayed. Then, the player is informed that the lyrics display can be switched on and off by pressing the upper button or the lower button of the setting operation unit 137.

  In this example, since the lyrics display is set to the on state, the lyrics of “Acorn Roller” are displayed in the lyrics display area C. In addition, a song “Acorn” is output from the speaker 120 together with the accompaniment.

  The on / off switching operation of the lyrics display may be possible only during execution of the decorative symbol variation display. In addition, the lyrics display switching notification image 812 is not displayed while the super reach effect is being executed, but the on / off switching operation of the lyrics display is enabled, and the lyrics display during the super reach effect is turned on, The result of the off-switching operation may be reflected after the end of the super reach production. For example, the super reach effect is started with the lyrics display turned off, and the upper button or the lower button of the setting operation unit 137 is displayed while the super reach effect is being executed and the lyrics display switching notification image 812 is not displayed. When pressed, the lyrics display is switched on. Since the lyrics display is not displayed during execution of the super reach effect, the result of the on / off switching operation of the lyrics display is reflected in the display after the super reach effect is finished, and the lyrics display is started.

  FIG. 71 (b) shows a state in which the notice effect is started during the execution of the special figure 2 variable game. The speaker 120 outputs a singing “Korokoro” along with the accompaniment. Prior to the start of the notice effect, a countdown display until the notice effect starts may be displayed in the effect display area 208d. In the notice effect of this example, an animation in which the character Yoshimune finds an enemy is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and a balloon image including a character string image of “Enemy?” As a word of Yoshimune.

  FIG. 71 (c) shows a state in which the notice effect is continued, and the effect display area 208d includes a balloon including a character string image of “???” instead of the character string image of “Is it an enemy?”. An image is displayed. In addition, the song “Donguri Korokoro” advances to the next measure, and the song “Donbrico” is output from the speaker 120 together with the accompaniment. Further, when the player presses the upper button or the lower button of the setting operation unit 137, the lyrics display is switched to the off state, and the lyrics display area C and the lyrics display are erased.

  FIG. 71 (d) shows a state in which the notice effect ends without developing and an animation in which Yoshimune runs is displayed in the effect display area 208d. In addition, the song “Donguri Korokoro” advances to the next bar, and the speaker 120 outputs the singing “Fuck in the Pond” along with the accompaniment.

  FIG. 71 (e) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is completed. The result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of place, “Special figure d” is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device 214, and “decoration 2-decoration 8-decoration 3” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Stop is displayed. Also, the song “Donguri Korokoro” advances to the next measure, and the speaker 120 outputs the song “Come hard” along with the accompaniment.

  FIG. 71 (f) shows a state in which one special figure 2 hold is consumed and the next special figure 2 variable game is started. The number of holds in the special figure 2 is decreased by 1 to 3. Further, the remaining number of special figure variable games executed in the probable substation support state is 79 times. Further, when the player presses the upper button or the lower button of the setting operation unit 137, the lyrics display is switched to the on state, and the lyrics display area C and the lyrics display are displayed. The song “Donguri Korokoro” has advanced to the next measure, and the lyrics displayed in the lyrics display area C have been switched from “Now it ’s hard” to “Dome comes out”. From the speaker 120, the song “Dojoga” is output together with the accompaniment.

  Thus, in the production example 1 of the present embodiment, the lyrics display can be switched on / off by the operation of the setting operation unit 137.

  Next, the example 2 of the production in the pachinko machine 100 by a present Example is demonstrated using FIG.71 (g)-(j). 71 (g) to (j) show, in this order, production example 2 in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment in time series.

  As shown in FIG. 71 (g), in this example, the lyrics display is set to off. For this reason, the lyrics display area C is not displayed, and the lyrics display is not displayed. The effects shown in FIGS. 71 (g) and 71 (h) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 71 (a) and 71 (b) except for the presence or absence of lyric display.

  FIG. 71 (i) shows a state in which the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started during the execution of the notice effect. In this example, a button image 806 is displayed below the center of the effect display area 208d. Thereby, the player is notified that the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has started. The button image 806 may be displayed at the same time as the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started, or may be displayed after the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started.

  In addition, the song “Donguri Korokoro” advances to the next measure, and the song “Donbrico” is output from the speaker 120 together with the accompaniment.

  FIG. 71 (j) shows a state in which the lyrics display is switched to the on state by pressing the upper button or the lower button of the setting operation unit 137 while the button image 806 is displayed. The lyrics display area C is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the lyrics display is displayed. In addition, the song “Donguri Korokoro” advances to the next measure, the lyrics display area C displays the lyrics “Addition to Oike”, and the speaker 120 outputs the song “Addition to Oike” along with the accompaniment. Has been.

  In this example, a part of the lyrics display area C is displayed so as to overlap the button image 806. Since the button image 806 is displayed in front of the lyrics display area C, a part of the lyrics display in the lyrics display area C is hidden by the button image 806. In this example, the upper part of “Hama” of the lyrics “Fill in the pond” overlaps the button image 806 and is hidden.

  Thus, depending on the timing at which the lyrics display is switched on, a part of the lyrics display may be hidden when the display of the lyrics display is started. For example, when the timing when the lyrics display is started overlaps with the timing when the cut-in image 810 is displayed, or when the movable body 804 moves to the position shown in FIG. A part of the lyric display may be hidden by the cut-in image 810 or the movable body 804.

(Example 7) Next, the effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 7 of this embodiment is demonstrated using FIG. First, the example production 1 in the pachinko machine 100 by a present Example is demonstrated using FIG. 72 (a)-(e). 72 (a) to 72 (e) show, in this order, production example 1 in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment in time series.

  Since the states shown in FIGS. 72A and 72B are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 69A and 69B, description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 72 (c) shows a state in which the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started during the execution of the notice effect. In this example, prior to the start of the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the button image 806 is displayed below the center of the effect display area 208d. Thereby, the player is notified that the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has started.

  In addition, the song “Dongkorokoro” advances to the next measure, and the lyrics displayed in the lyrics display area C are switched from “Dongkorokoro” to “Donbrico”. From the speaker 120, the song “Donbrico” is output along with the accompaniment.

  The button image 806 is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the lyrics display in the lyrics display area C. Since the button image 806 is displayed in front of the lyrics display in the lyrics display area C, a part of the lyrics display is hidden by the button image 806. As shown in FIG. 72 (c), the lower part of the button image 806 is displayed so as to overlap the central part of the lyrics display area C, and the upper half or more of the lyrics “Donbrico” is hidden by the deca button image 802. Thereby, the lyrics display is hidden to the extent that it is difficult to read.

  FIG. 72D shows a state in which the operation valid period of the chance button 136 continues because the chance button 136 is not pressed. For this reason, the button image 806 is continuously displayed. In addition, the song “Donguri Korokoro” advances to the next measure, and the lyrics displayed in the lyrics display area C are switched from “Donbrico” to “Addition to Oike”. However, since the button image 806 continues to be displayed without changing the display position, the upper part of the lyrics “Add to the pond” of the lyrics “Add to the pond” is hidden by the button image 806. Thereby, the lyrics display is hidden to the extent that it is difficult to read. In addition, the speaker 120 outputs the song “Fuck in the Pond” along with the accompaniment.

  FIG. 72 (e) shows a state where the operation valid period of the chance button 136 continues because the chance button 136 is not pressed. For this reason, the button image 806 is continuously displayed. In addition, the song “Saa Dai” has advanced to the next measure, and the lyrics displayed in the lyrics display area C have been switched from “Still in the Pond” to “Saa Dai”. However, since the button image 806 continues to be displayed without changing the display position, the upper part of the lyrics “Now” is hidden by the button image 806. Thereby, the lyrics display is hidden to the extent that it is difficult to read. Further, the speaker 120 outputs the song “Come on” along with the accompaniment.

  In this way, at least a part of the lyrics display is continuously hidden by the button image 806 in a period in which the chance button 136 is not pressed even when the button image 806 is displayed. Thereby, even when the music advances to the next measure and the lyrics display is switched to the next measure, at least a part of the lyrics display of the next measure may be hidden by the effect display of the button image 806. is there. Further, when the right button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed while the button image 806 is displayed to switch from the song 1 to the song 2, the lyrics display of the song 2 is hidden by the button image 806 and displayed. May be started.

  Next, production example 2 in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 (f) to 72 (k) show, in this order, production example 2 in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment in time series.

  The states shown in FIGS. 72 (f) and (g) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 69 (a) and 69 (b), and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 72 (h) shows a state in which the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started during the execution of the notice effect. In this example, prior to the start of the operation effective period of the chance button 136, the button image 806 is displayed below the center of the effect display area 208d, and the remaining operation effective period is below the button image 806 in the effect display area 208d. A gauge image (meter image) 814 indicating the time is displayed. The gauge image 814 has a black horizontally long rectangular shape, and represents the remaining time of the operation valid period of the chance button 136 as a length. In this example, the button image 806 and the gauge image 814 are displayed to notify the player that the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has started. The gauge image 814 may be displayed at the same time as the start of the operation valid period of the chance button 136, or may be displayed after the operation effective period of the chance button 136 is started. Further, the button image 806 and the gauge image 814 may be displayed at the same time, or one of them may be displayed first.

  In addition, the song “Dongkorokoro” advances to the next measure, and the lyrics displayed in the lyrics display area C are switched from “Dongkorokoro” to “Donbrico”. From the speaker 120, the song “Donbrico” is output along with the accompaniment.

  In this example, the gauge image 814 is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the lyrics display in the lyrics display area C. Since the gauge image 814 is displayed in front of the lyrics display in the lyrics display area C, a part of the lyrics display is hidden by the gauge image 814. As shown in FIG. 72 (h), the lower part of the gauge image 814 is displayed so as to overlap the upper center part of the lyrics display area C, and the upper part of the lyrics “Donbrico” is hidden by the gauge image 814. The lower part of the gauge image 814 may be displayed so as to overlap the lower part of the lyrics display, and the button image 806 may be displayed so as to overlap the upper part of the lyrics display.

  FIG. 72 (i) shows a state in which the operation valid period of the chance button 136 continues because the chance button 136 is not pressed. For this reason, the button image 806 and the gauge image 814 are continuously displayed. Further, the length of the gauge image 814 is shortened, and it is displayed that the remaining time of the operation effective period has decreased. In addition, the song “Donguri Korokoro” advances to the next measure, and the lyrics displayed in the lyrics display area C are switched from “Donbrico” to “Addition to Oike”. In addition, the upper part of “Ikebamama” in the lyrics “Ikegabama” is hidden by the gauge image 814. In addition, the speaker 120 outputs the song “Fuck in the Pond” along with the accompaniment.

  During the operation effective period, the gauge image 814 is displayed so as to become shorter from the left to the right. The lyrics are displayed from left to right. For this reason, when the gauge image 814 is shortened, the portion visible from the front side of the lyric display is enlarged, and for example, the singing and the visible portion of the lyric display may coincide with each other. Further, when the music advances to the next measure while the gauge image 814 is shortened and the lyric display is switched to the next measure, the top portion of the lyric display of the next measure becomes visible.

  FIG. 72 (j) shows a state in which the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is continued because the chance button 136 is not pressed. For this reason, the button image 806 and the gauge image 814 are continuously displayed. Further, the length of the gauge image 814 is shortened, and it is displayed that the remaining time of the operation effective period has decreased. In addition, the song “Donguri Korokoro” advances to the next measure, and the lyrics displayed in the lyrics display area C are switched from “Fill in the pond” to “Now hard”. In addition, the upper portion of “Large” in the lyrics “Now” is hidden by the gauge image 814. Further, the speaker 120 outputs the song “Come on” along with the accompaniment.

  FIG. 72 (k) shows a state where the operation valid period of the chance button 136 continues because the chance button 136 is not pressed. For this reason, the button image 806 and the gauge image 814 are continuously displayed. Further, the length of the gauge image 814 is shortened, and it is displayed that the remaining time of the operation effective period has decreased. In addition, the song “Dongkorokoro” advances to the next measure, and the lyrics displayed in the lyrics display area C are switched from “Come on now” to “Dome comes out”. In addition, the upper part of “Tele come” in the lyrics “Take me out” is hidden by the gauge image 814. In addition, the speaker 120 outputs a singing “Doujo comes out” along with the accompaniment.

  Thus, in the production example 2 of the present embodiment, the gauge image 814 displaying the lyrics is displayed so as to overlap the lyrics display.

Example 8 Next, effects in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 8 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. First, the example production 1 in the pachinko machine 100 by a present Example is demonstrated using FIG. 73 (a)-(c). 73 (a) to 73 (c) show, in this order, production example 1 in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment in chronological order.

  The state shown in FIG. 73 (a) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 66 (a), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 73B shows a state in which the player has pressed the right button of the setting operation unit 137 to switch from the song 1 to the song 2. In the center of the music selection display area B, a music display of “Song 2” is displayed. However, the result of the music selection operation is not reflected, and the lyrics “Acorn Roller” of the song “Acorn Roller” of the song 1 is displayed in the lyric display area C. It is output.

  FIG. 73 (c) shows a state in which the result of the music selection operation is reflected and the lyrics display and output of music 2 are being executed. In the present embodiment, the song “Sakura Sakura” is set as the song 2. From the speaker 120, the song “Sakura” is output along with the accompaniment, and the lyrics display area C displays the lyrics of “Sakura Sakura”. The lyrics of the song “Sakura Sakura” are displayed every two bars.

  When the music is switched in this example, the lyrics display is first switched to the lyrics display of the music 2, and then the music output from the speaker 120 is switched from the music 1 to the music 2.

  Next, production example 2 in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 (d) to 73 (f) show, in this order, production example 2 in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment in chronological order.

  The states shown in FIGS. 73 (d) and (e) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 73 (a) and 73 (b), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 73 (c) shows a state in which the result of the music selection operation is reflected, and the song “Sakura” is output from the speaker 120 together with the accompaniment. The lyrics display does not reflect the result of the music selection operation, and the lyrics display area C displays the lyrics “Dongbrico” of “Dongkorokoro” of song 1.

  When the music is switched in this example, the music output from the speaker 120 is switched from the music 1 to the music 2, and then the lyrics display is switched to the music 2 lyrics display.

  Next, Production Example 2 in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 (g) and 73 (h) show a production example 2 in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment in this order in time series.

  FIG. 73 (g) shows a state in which the song selection operation is reflected, and the song “Sakura” is output from the speaker 120 together with the accompaniment. The lyrics display in the lyrics display area C is not displayed.

  FIG. 73 (h) shows a state where the lyric display is switched to the lyric display of song 2. In the lyrics display area C, the lyrics “Sakura Sakura” of the song “Sakura Sakura” are displayed. In addition, the music “Sakura” has advanced to the second measure, and the song “Sakura” is output from the speaker 120 together with the accompaniment.

  Thus, at the time of music switching, the lyrics display of the music 2 may be started after the lyrics display of the music 1 is once erased. The lyric display start timing of the song 2 is after the output of the song 2 from the speaker 120 is started, and may be, for example, when the song 2 enters the second measure.

  Next, effects in the pachinko machine 100 according to a modification of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, the effect by the modification 1 of this embodiment is demonstrated using Fig.74 (a). In this example, the lower end of the button image 806 is in contact with the upper end of the central portion of the lyrics display area C so that the gauge image 814 is in front of the lyrics display in the lyrics display area C and overlaps the lower part of the lyrics display. It is displayed. As a result, the upper part of the lyrics “Acorn Roller” is displayed between the gauge image 814 and the button image 806. The button image 806 may overlap at least a part of the lyrics display.

  Next, the effect by the modification 2 of this embodiment is demonstrated using FIG.74 (b). In this example, a horizontally long hold icon display area D is provided below the effect display area 208d. In the hold icon display area D, a maximum of 4 hold icons corresponding to the hold in FIG. 1 can be displayed, and a maximum of 4 hold icons corresponding to the hold in FIG. 2 can be displayed. A hold icon can be displayed. In addition, a square variation icon display area E is provided on the left side of the hold icon display area D. In the variation icon display area E, an icon corresponding to the digested suspension (hereinafter referred to as “variation icon”) is displayed.

  In this example, the hold icon 816 of the display pattern of the face pattern of Yoshimune displayed third from the left is displayed so as to overlap a part of the lyrics display. A hold icon 816 is displayed in front of the lyrics display in the lyrics display area C, and a part of the lyrics display is hidden by the hold icon 816. Thus, the hold icon may be displayed so as to overlap the lyrics display.

  The hold icon 816 is displayed as a pre-reading notice of the special figure variable game held third. Since the display size of the hold icon for prefetching notice is larger than the display size of the default circular hold icon, it overlaps a part of the lyrics display. For this reason, when four or more hold icons for prefetching notices are displayed, the lyrics display may be hidden by the hold icon for prefetching notices so that it is difficult to read. Further, since the variation icon display area E is arranged at a predetermined interval from the lyrics display area C, the variation icon and the lyrics display do not overlap.

  Next, the effect by the modification 3 of this embodiment is demonstrated using FIG.74 (c), (d). 74 (c) and 74 (d) show examples of effects in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present modification in this order in chronological order.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 74C, a princess character image (hereinafter referred to as “princess”) 818 is displayed at the lower right of the effect display area 208d. Using the princess 818, a hold icon change effect, a pre-reading notice effect, a notice effect of the change, a tutorial effect, a conversation notice display, and the like can be executed.

  FIG. 74 (c) shows a state in which the hold icon change effect is started. The animation in which the princess 818 emits an arrow toward the hold icon to be changed is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the hold icon change effect is executed. In this example, a pre-reading notice effect is executed for the special figure 1 variable game with the third holding order. As shown in FIG. 74D, a notice animation in which an arrow flies toward the third hold icon 820 from the left is displayed. In addition, the notice animation and a part of the lyrics display are displayed overlapping each other. Since the notice animation is displayed in front of the lyrics display, a part of the lyrics display is hidden by the notice animation.

  FIG. 74D shows a state in which an arrow hits the hold icon 820 and the display mode of the hold icon 820 has changed. The display mode of the hold icon 820 has changed from the default circular display mode to the display mode of Yoshimune's face. In this example, the hold icon display area D and the lyrics display area C are arranged with a predetermined interval, so that the changed hold icon 820 is displayed so as not to overlap the lyrics display.

  Next, the effect by the modification 4 of this embodiment is demonstrated using FIG.74 (e). In this example, as shown in FIG. 74 (e), the lyric display is displayed in two upper and lower stages. For example, when a song includes a plurality of parts, the lyrics for each part may be displayed in the upper lyric display area F and the lower lyric display area G. Also, the upper lyric display and the lower lyric display displayed for each part may be different. In addition, only the upper lyric display may be hidden by an effect display such as a cut-in image or a button image or a movable body, or only the lower lyric display may be hidden by an effect display or a movable body such as a cut-in image or a button image. Alternatively, the upper and lower lyric display may be hidden by an effect display such as a cut-in image or a button image or a movable body.

  Next, the effect by the modification 5 of this embodiment is demonstrated using FIG.74 (f), (g). FIG. 74 (f) shows a state where the frame of the lyrics display area C is displayed in light ink color. The display mode of the lyrics display area C shown in FIG. 74 (f) is a default display mode.

  FIG. 74 (g) shows a state in which the frame of the lyrics display area C is displayed in red (indicated by cross-hatching in the figure). In this example, the inside of the frame of the lyrics display area C is displayed in red and the notice effect is executed. The colors in the frame of the lyrics display area C are set to, for example, red, green, and blue in descending order of the jackpot reliability. In this way, the jackpot reliability may be indicated in the form of lyric display.

  Next, the effect by the modification 6 of this embodiment is demonstrated using Fig.75 (a). In this example, an error image 822 is displayed at the lower left of the effect display area 208d. The error image 822 of this example displays a lower pan full tank error, and includes a character string image of “please remove the ball”. In the error image 822, the lower plate full sensor detects that the lower plate 128 is full, and the first sub-control unit 400 receives a command including information that the lower plate full error has occurred from the main control unit 300. It is displayed based on what you did. Therefore, the error image 822 is not erased unless the lower pan full error is eliminated, more specifically, unless the ball discharge lever 132 is operated.

  The error image 822 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the lyrics display area C. The lyric display may be hidden by a plurality of types of display such as an effect display such as a button image 806 and an error display such as an error image 822. For example, the display area of the lyrics display may be larger in the effect display than the error display, or vice versa. Further, the effect display may hide the front side of the lyrics display, and the error display may hide the rear side of the lyrics display, or vice versa.

  Next, the effect by the modification 7 of this embodiment is demonstrated using FIG.75 (b)-(d). 75 (b) to 75 (d) show examples of effects in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present modification in this order in time series.

  FIG. 75 (b) shows a state where the button introduction animation is displayed. The button introduction animation is an animation for notifying that the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started. In the button introduction animation of this example, a button image 806a having a transmittance of 50% is displayed to the left of the effect display area 208d, and a button image 806b having a transmittance of 50% is displayed to the right of the effect display area 208d. An animation in which the button images 806a and 806b move to the center of the effect display area 208d is displayed.

  FIG. 75C shows a state in which the button introduction animation is being executed. The button images 806a and 806b have moved to the vicinity of the center of the effect display area 208d. After the button images 806a and 806b are completely overlapped, the button introduction animation is ended.

  FIG. 75D shows a state in which the button introduction animation is finished and the button image 806 is displayed. After the button images 806a and 806b completely overlap, when the button images 806a and 806b change to the button image 806, the button introduction animation ends.

  The button introduction animation in this example is displayed without overlapping the lyrics display. More specifically, the button images 806a and 806b are displayed without overlapping the lyrics display. On the other hand, the button image 806 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the lyrics display.

  Next, the effect by the modification 8 of this embodiment is demonstrated using FIG.75 (e) and (f). 75 (e) and 75 (f) show an example of effects in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present modification in this order in chronological order.

  In this modification, a predetermined mission is given to the player, and when the mission is achieved, an image for notifying the mission achievement is displayed. In the mission of this example, the mission achievement condition is, for example, that a predetermined effect display is executed. Mission achievement ranks A, B, and C are assigned in descending order of the jackpot reliability of the predetermined effect display.

  FIG. 75 (e) shows a state in which the mission of rank C has been achieved. A rank C achievement image 824 is displayed at the lower right of the effect display area 208d. The rank C achievement image 824 includes a horizontally-long rectangular frame image and a character string image of “rank C achievement” displayed in the frame image. The rank C achievement image 824 is displayed without overlapping the lyrics display area C.

  FIG. 75 (f) shows a state in which the mission of rank A has been achieved. A rank A achievement image 826 is displayed below the rank C achievement image 824 at the lower right of the effect display area 208d. The rank A achievement image 826 includes a horizontally-long rectangular frame image and a character string image “Rank A achievement” displayed in the frame image.

  In this example, the rank C achievement image 824 that displays the achievement of the rank C mission that was achieved the first time is displayed without overlapping the lyrics display area C, and the mission achievement of rank A that was achieved the second time is displayed. The rank A achievement image 826 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the lyrics display area C. As described above, when a plurality of missions are achieved, an effect display for notifying the completion of the mission may be displayed overlapping the lyrics display.

  Next, the effect by the modification 9 of this embodiment is demonstrated using FIG.75 (g). FIG. 75G shows the timing of the singing output from the speaker 120 and the timing of the lyrics display on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 75 (g) represents the passage of time from left to right, and shows the state of singing output from the speaker 120 on the upper stage and the state of lyrics display on the decorative symbol display device 208 on the lower stage.

  In this example, prior to the singing output, the lyric display “Acorn Roller” is displayed at time t1, and the singing “Acorn Roller” is output at time t2 after the lyric display is started. Also, at time t3, the lyrics display “Acorn Roller” is erased, and the song “Acorn Roller” ends.

  In the second measure of the music, like the first measure, the lyric display “Donbrico” is displayed at time t4 and the singing “Donbrico” is output at time t5 after the lyric display is started. The At time t6, the lyrics display “Donbrico” is erased, and the song “Donbrico” ends.

  In this example, after the display of the lyrics for one measure is started, the singing of the one measure is started. The start timing of lyric display and the start timing of singing output may be simultaneous, or the start timing of lyric display may be later than the start timing of singing output. Further, in this example, the display of the lyrics of the one measure is finished simultaneously with the end of the singing of one measure. In addition, after the end of the singing of one measure, the lyric display of the one measure may end or vice versa. Further, when proceeding to the next measure, the lyric display may be temporarily hidden, or the lyric display of the next one measure after the one measure may be started simultaneously with the end of the display of the one measure.

  FIG. 75 (h) to FIG. 75 (k) are diagrams for explaining effects by the modification 9A of the present embodiment, and show examples of effects in the pachinko machine 100 according to this modification in this order in time series.

  FIG. 11H shows a state in which a button introduction animation (button production introduction animation, fade-in animation) is started. A button image 806a having a transmittance of 50% is displayed on the left side of the effect display area 208d, a button image 806b having a transmittance of 50% is displayed on the right side of the effect display area 208d, and the button images 806a and 806b are effect display. An animation that moves to the center of the area 208d is displayed.

  Further, in the same figure (i), after the button images 806a and 806b move to the vicinity of the center of the effect display area 208d, and the button images 806a and 806b are completely overlapped as shown in the same figure (j). The button introduction animation is finished.

  In this modification, FIGS. 75 (h) to (j) show a state in which the button introduction animation is being executed. In this modification, the period from the start of the button introduction animation (FIG. (H)) to the end of the button introduction animation (FIG. (J)) is when the chance button 136 is operated. Even if it exists, the operation is not accepted as an effective operation.

  In addition, the error image 822 from the start of the button introduction animation is displayed (in this example, the lower pan full error is displayed, and the display including the character string image “Pull out sphere” (ball-free display)). Although displayed, the button introduction animation does not overlap the error image 822 (the button introduction animation is not overlapped with the error image 822).

  FIG. 9K shows a state after the button images 806a and 806b are completely overlapped, and then the button images 806a and 806b are changed to the button image 806 to complete the button introduction animation. That is, the operation of the chance button 136 is effectively received, and the button image 806 and the gauge image (meter image) 814 are displayed. After this timing, the gauge image 814 is shortened, and the meter starts to decrease. In this example, neither the button image 806 nor the gauge image 814 overlaps the error image 822 (both the button image 806 and the gauge image 814 are not overlapped with the error image 822).

  The gauge image 814 may be displayed at the same time as the start of the operation valid period of the chance button 136, or may be displayed after the operation effective period of the chance button 136 is started. Further, the button image 806 and the gauge image 814 may be displayed at the same time, or one of them may be displayed first.

  FIG. 75 (l) to FIG. 75 (o) are diagrams for explaining effects by the modification 9B of the present embodiment, and show examples of effects in the pachinko machine 100 according to the modification in this order in time series. The modification 9B is an example of “better button effect” than the modification 9A. “Good button effect” means that the effect display displayed when the chance button 136 is operated is higher than the button effect of the modified example 9A, or the expectation degree of the big hit is high. It is easy to produce. Further, even if the effect display displayed when the chance button 136 is operated is the same as the button effect of the modified example 9A, it is an effect that has a high expectation level for the big hit.

  FIGS. 75 (l) to 75 (o) show a state during execution of a “good button introduction animation” that can be expected to be a “good button effect” as compared with FIGS. 75 (h) to (j).

  First, FIG. 1 (l) shows a state where the button introduction animation is started. In this case, a button image 806a having a transmittance of 50% is displayed in the upper left of the effect display area 208d, a button image 806b having a transmittance of 50% is displayed in the upper right of the effect display area 208d, and the button images 806a and 806b are displayed. Is displayed in the center of the effect display area 208d. For example, a button image 806c with a transmittance of 50% is displayed at the lower left of the effect display area 208d, and a button image 806d with a transmittance of 50% is displayed at the lower right of the effect display area 208d. Then, an animation in which the button images 806c and 806d move to the center of the effect display area 208d is displayed. In addition, an error image 822 (in this example, a lower pan full error is displayed and a display including a character string image of “please remove the ball” (ball removal display)) is displayed. Then, the error image 822 and part of the button introduction animation do not overlap.

  Further, in FIG. 5 (m), the button images 806a and 806b move to the vicinity of the center of the effect display area 208d, and the button images 806c and 806d move to the vicinity of the center of the effect display area 208d, for example, at the same timing. Moving. At this timing, a part of the button introduction animation (in this example, the button images 806 c and 806 d are overlapped with the error image 822.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 9 (n), the button images 806a and 806b are completely overlapped, and the button images 806c and 806d are completely overlapped with each other, for example, at the same timing (the button images 806a and 806b are also completely overlapped). The button introduction animation is terminated after the state is reached.

  In FIG. 5 (o), after the button images 806a, 806b, 806c, and 806d are completely overlapped, the button images 806a, 806b, 806c, and 806d change to a large button image (deca button image) 806 ′, and the button introduction animation is changed. This is the state after finishing. That is, the operation of the chance button 136 is effectively accepted, and a large button image 806 ′ and a gauge image (meter image) 814 are displayed. After this timing, the gauge image 814 is shortened, and the meter starts to decrease. In this example, neither the large button image 806 ′ nor the gauge image 814 overlaps the error image 822 (neither the large button image 806 ′ nor the gauge image 814 overlaps the error image 822).

  The gauge image 814 may be displayed at the same time as the start of the operation valid period of the chance button 136, or may be displayed after the operation effective period of the chance button 136 is started. Further, the large button image 806 ′ and the gauge image 814 may be displayed at the same time, or one of them may be displayed first.

  In this modified example, a large button image 806 ′ and a gauge image 814 are always displayed after the button introduction animation is finished, and the button effect is executed. However, even if the button effect is included, Good. In the case of a configuration including a Gase button effect, the “good button introduction animation” may be easier to achieve the button effect than the “button introduction animation” of the modified example 9A, and instead of this, or in addition to this The configuration may be such that a “good button effect” can be expected when the button effect is established.

  Note that neither the button image 806 of the modified example 9A (FIG. 75 (k)) nor the big button image 806 ′ of the modified example 9B (FIG. 75 (o)) overlaps with the error display 822. Only in the case of one of the production examples in Example 9B, some display (for example, the button image 806, the big button image 806 ′, the gauge image 814, etc.) may be configured to overlap the error display 822.

  Note that the button images 806, 806a to 806d and the large button image 806 ′ shown in FIG. 75 may all be one of the images imitating the operation means.

  FIG. 75 (p) to FIG. 75 (r) are diagrams for explaining effects by the modification 9C of the present embodiment, and show examples of effects in the pachinko machine 100 according to this modification in this order.

  FIG. 5 (p) shows a state where the button introduction animation is finished and the button effect is started. That is, the operation of the chance button 136 is effectively received, and the button image 806 and the gauge image (meter image) 814 are displayed. After this timing, the gauge image 814 is shortened, and the meter starts to decrease. In this example, neither the button image 806 nor the gauge image 814 overlaps the error image 822 (both the button image 806 and the gauge image 814 are not overlapped with the error image 822).

  FIG. 6 (q) shows a state after the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period of the chance button 136 (FIG. (P)), and the button image 806 and the gauge image (meter image) 814 are not displayed. Thus, another effect image (in this example, a cut-in image of a character (dono)) is displayed. Further, the error image 822 is continuously displayed.

  FIG. 7 (r) shows a state in which “better performance” is executed than in FIG. 6 (q). For example, a cut-in image of a character (donor) larger than FIG. 7 (r) is displayed. ing. The “good performance” is an effect with a high expectation degree of jackpot, and the image (r) of FIG. (Q)) is displayed after the effect image (the cut-in image of the small character (dono))) is displayed. After the effect image (the cut-in image of the large character (donor)) is displayed, it is configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed.

  In addition, in the “good effect” shown in FIG. 7 (r), the effect image (the cut-in image of the large character (donor)) is overlapped with the error image 822. Note that, in this example, only the case of (r) in the same figure (r) and (q) in the same figure (q) is configured to overlap the error image 822. In the case of (r) in the figure (in the case of “good production”), the area overlapping with the error image 822 is larger than in the case of (q) in the figure (production having a lower hit expectation degree than “good production”). In the case of (r) in the figure (in the case of “good performance”), the error image 822 is 100% overlapped (always overlaps), but in the case of FIG. The effect that the expectation degree of jackpot is lower than the effect))) may be configured such that the error image 822 overlaps with 0% (no overlap).

  Next, the effect by the modification 10 of this embodiment is demonstrated using FIG. 76 (a)-(c). 76 (a) to 76 (c) show examples of effects in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present modification in this order in chronological order.

  As shown in FIG. 76 (a), the lyrics display area C of this example is displayed above the center of the effect display area 208d. Further, in FIG. 76 (a), the button introduction animation is started to be displayed. In the button introduction animation of this example, a button image 806a having a transmittance of 50% is displayed at the upper left of the effect display area 208d, and a button image 806b having a transmittance of 50% is displayed at the upper right of the effect display area 208d. An animation in which the button images 806a and 806b move below the center of the effect display area 208d is displayed.

  FIG. 76B shows a state in which the button introduction animation is being executed. The button images 806a and 806b have moved to the vicinity of the center of the effect display area 208d. Further, the button images 806a and 806b are displayed so as to overlap a part of the lyrics display in the lyrics display area C.

  FIG. 76C shows a state in which the button introduction animation is finished and the button image 806 is displayed. After the button images 806a and 806b completely overlap, when the button images 806a and 806b change to the button image 806, the button introduction animation ends.

  The button introduction animation in this example is not displayed so as to overlap a part of the lyrics display in the entire display period, but is displayed so as to overlap a part of the lyrics display in the intermediate display period. The button introduction animation in this example is displayed so that the lyrics display is hidden in the middle of the display, instead of hiding the lyrics display at the beginning. Further, the button image 806 displayed after the button introduction animation ends is displayed so as not to overlap the lyrics display.

  Next, the effect by the modification 11 of this embodiment is demonstrated using FIG.76 (d), (e). FIGS. 76D and 76E show examples of effects in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present modification in this order in chronological order.

  FIG. 76 (d) shows a state in which the effect of super reach A is being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a and 208c, “decoration 3” is displayed in a swinging manner, and the ornamental symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In the effect display area 208d, a character image of Yoshimune is displayed on the left side, an enemy character image is displayed on the right side, and an animation of a scene where Yoshimune and the enemy face each other is displayed. Further, the music selection area B is not displayed during execution of the super reach effect.

  Further, during the production of Super Reach A in this example, the music “Snow and Konko” is output from the speaker 120. A song “Yukiya” is output from the speaker 120 together with the accompaniment, and the lyrics “Yukiya Konko” is displayed in the lyrics display area C.

  FIG. 76 (e) shows a state in which the song “Snow and Konko” has advanced to the second measure during the production of Super Reach A. In the second measure of “Snow and Konko”, the lyrics display area C is deleted, and instead, a cut-in image 824 including the lyrics display “Konko” is displayed. The cut-out image 824 has a mode in which lyrics are displayed in a horizontally-long rectangular frame image inclined to the upper right. In addition, the song “Konko” is output from the speaker 120 together with the accompaniment. Note that the cut-in image 824 including the lyric display may be displayed including the entire lyrics of the one measure in the whole of one measure, or may include a part of the lyrics of the one measure as part of the one measure. It may be displayed, or may be displayed including a plurality of measures including the entire lyrics of the plurality of measures. Further, the cut-in image 824 may be displayed as a notice effect, and the big hit reliability may be set by the character color of the lyrics display or the color in the frame image.

  76 (f) to FIG. 76 (k) are diagrams for explaining effects by the modification 10A of the present embodiment, and FIGS. 76 (l) to 76 (m) are according to the modification 10B of the present embodiment. FIG. 76 (n) to FIG. 76 (o) are diagrams for explaining the effects. 76 (f) to FIG. 76 (o) (Modifications 10A to 10C) have at least a chance button 136 and a cross button 900 as a common configuration. Here, the cross button 900 is a button having at least an upper button 900a, a lower button 900b, a left button 900c, and a right button 900d.

  The left button 900c and the right button 900d are, for example, buttons used mainly for selecting (switching) music output from the speaker 120 during ST (during electric support).

  Further, the upper button 900a and the lower button 900b are buttons used for changing the volume of a sound (music) output from the speaker 120, for example (different from the button for switching the lyrics display on / off state shown in FIG. 71. ). For example, as shown in FIG. 5F, when one of the upper button 900a and the lower button 900b is operated in the volume meter non-display state, the volume meter 901 is displayed. The sound meter 901 is 1-6. For example, every time the upper button 900a is operated, the volume meter 901 increases by one, and every time the lower button 900b is operated, the volume meter 901 decreases by one. Even if the down button 900b is operated when the volume meter 901 is “1”, the volume remains “1”, and when the up button 900b is operated when the volume meter 901 is “6”, the volume “6” is maintained. It remains. Further, when the up / down buttons 900a and 900b are operated in the volume meter non-display state, the volume meter 901 indicating the current volume may be displayed first, or the volume meter 901 always starts from “1”. It may be a configuration. The volume meter 901 is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) from the last operation.

  In the modified examples 10A to 10C, the light amount can be changed with the left and right buttons 900c and 900d. However, at least during ST (during electric support) is assigned to music selection (switching), the light amount is changed in this state. Can not. In addition, the music cannot be selected (switched) during SP reach during ST (during electric support), but the light quantity cannot be changed even in that case. On the other hand, during the big hit, the light amount may be changed with the left and right buttons 900c and 900d. In that case, it is better to change the light amount during the big hit. Further, during the big hit, the light quantity may not be changed with the left and right buttons 900c and 900d.

  Further, the up / down buttons 900a, 900b and / or the left / right buttons 900c, 900d may be used for back button effects. The back button effect refers to an effect in which some effect is performed when the button is operated in a state where there is no operation instruction for the button (there may be another button operation instruction). Here, it may be configured such that a certain effect appears more easily when a button without an operation instruction is operated than when a button with an operation instruction is operated, and it is not a back button effect. There may be an effect that does not appear (for example, a one-shot notification effect).

  Next, each modification will be described. First, with reference to FIGS. 76 (f) to 76 (k), an effect produced by the modification 10 </ b> A of the present embodiment will be described. FIGS. 76 (f) to 76 (k) show examples of effects in the pachinko machine 100 according to this modification in this order in chronological order.

  FIG. 76F shows a state where the button introduction animation is started. A button image 806a having a transmittance of 50% is displayed on the left side of the effect display area 208d, a button image 806b having a transmittance of 50% is displayed on the right side of the effect display area 208d, and the button images 806a and 806b are effect display. An animation that moves to the center of the area 208d is displayed. In this state, an error image 822 (in this example, a lower pan full error is displayed and a display including a character string image of “please remove the sphere”) is displayed. There is no overlap.

  In FIG. 5G, the button images 806a and 806b have moved to the vicinity of the center of the effect display area 208d. At this timing, the volume meter 901 is displayed by operating the up / down buttons 900a and 900b in FIG. 8F, and notifies that the volume can be changed. The error image 822 continues to be displayed, but does not overlap with the button introduction animation or the volume meter 901.

  In FIG. 11H, the button images 806a and 806b are completely overlapped. At this timing, a part of the button introduction animation (button images 806a and 806b) is overlapped with the volume meter 901. On the other hand, a part of the button introduction animation (a part of the button images 806 a and 806 b) and the volume meter 901 are not overlapped by the error image 822.

  FIG. 5I shows a state after the button images 806a and 806b are completely overlapped and then the button images 806a and 806b are changed to the button image 806 and the button introduction animation is finished. That is, the operation of the chance button 136 is effectively received, and the button image 806 and the gauge image (meter image) 814 are displayed. Further, the volume meter 901 is not displayed, and notifies that the volume cannot be changed. The timing when the button image 806 and the gauge image (meter image) 814 are displayed (first timing) and the timing when the volume meter 901 is not displayed (second timing) may be the same timing, The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

After this timing, the gauge image 814 is shortened, and the meter starts to decrease. In this example, neither the button image 806 nor the gauge image 814 overlaps the error image 822 (both the button image 806 and the gauge image 814 are not overlapped with the error image 822).

  The gauge image 814 may be displayed at the same time as the start of the operation valid period of the chance button 136, or may be displayed after the operation effective period of the chance button 136 is started. Further, the button image 806 and the gauge image 814 may be displayed at the same time, or one of them may be displayed first.

  FIG. 6J shows a state in which, for example, the lower button 900b is operated within the operation effective period of the chance button 136. FIG. 10K shows that the lower button 900b is operated within the operation effective period of the chance button 136. As a result, the button image 806 and the gauge image (meter image) 814 are hidden, and another effect image (for example, a notice effect, in this example, a cut-in image of a large character) is displayed as a back button effect. It is in the state. In addition, the volume meter 901 that has been hidden is displayed again to notify that the volume can be changed. The error image 822 continues to be displayed, and a part of the cut-in image is overlapped by the error image 822 and the volume meter 901.

  In this modified example, when the up / down buttons 900a and 900b are operated during the button introduction animation, the volume meter 901 is displayed and the volume can be changed as shown in FIGS. If the up / down buttons 900a and 900b are operated during the button production, the volume meter 901 is displayed again, and the volume can be changed. For example, a cut-in image is displayed as the back button production. The

  Note that when the chance button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 6J (within the operation valid period of the chance button 136), the cut-in image as the back button effect shown in FIG. For example, other effects (such as an effect of displaying the cut-in image shown in FIG. 75 (q)) are executed. In this case, the cut-in image does not overlap with the error image 822 (see FIG. 75 (q)).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 76 (l) and (m), an effect produced by the modified example 10B of the present embodiment will be described. FIGS. 76 (l) and 76 (m) show examples of effects in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present modification in this order in time series.

  FIG. 76 (l) shows a state where the button introduction animation is started. A button image 806a having a transmittance of 50% is displayed on the left side of the effect display area 208d, a button image 806b having a transmittance of 50% is displayed on the right side of the effect display area 208d, and the button images 806a and 806b are effect display. An animation that moves to the center of the area 208d is displayed. In this state, an error image 822 (in this example, a lower pan full error is displayed and a display including a character string image of “please remove the sphere”) is displayed. There is no overlap.

  In addition, at this timing, it is notified that the auto button mode is being set by an auto button notification 903 (in this example, “auto button ON” is displayed). The auto button mode is a mode in which an effect that is performed after a button operation is performed without any button operation. For example, when the gauge image 814 is shortened to some extent (for example, when it is shortened to about half). The effect performed after the button operation is performed. It is also possible for the player to operate the button while the auto button mode is set. In this case, an effect that is performed after the button is operated is executed. In this case, the auto button mode is canceled. (Although described in Modification 10C, there are some exceptions). The setting method of the auto button mode can be turned on, for example, by long-pressing the button, and can be set from the menu screen as another method.

  In FIG. 5 (m), the button images 806a and 806b have moved to the vicinity of the center of the effect display area 208d. At this timing, the volume meter 901 is displayed when the up / down buttons 900a and 900b are operated in FIG. 1 (l) to notify that the volume can be changed. In addition, it is notified that the auto button is not set by the auto button notification 903 (in this example, the display of the characters “auto button OFF”). At this timing, the error image 822 is continuously displayed, but does not overlap with the button introduction animation or the volume meter 901.

  In this modification, when the up / down buttons 900a and 900b are operated during the button introduction animation, the volume meter 901 is displayed and the volume can be changed (the back button effect is not executed). Further, the auto button notification 903 and the error image 822 do not overlap.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 76 (n) and (o), an effect produced by the modified example 10B of the present embodiment will be described. 76 (n) and (o) show an example of effects in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present modification in this order in chronological order.

  FIG. 76 (n) shows a state after the button introduction animation ends. That is, the operation of the chance button 136 is effectively accepted, the button image 806 and the gauge image (meter image) 814 are displayed, the gauge image 814 is shortened, and the meter starts to decrease. .

  In addition, at this timing, it is notified that the auto button is being set by an auto button notification 903 (in this example, the display of the characters “auto button ON”).

  In this example, the error image 822 is displayed, but neither the button image 806 nor the gauge image 814 overlaps the error image 822 (both the button image 806 and the gauge image 814 are overlapped with the error image 822). Not) Further, the auto button notification 903 and the error image 822 do not overlap.

  FIG. 10 (o) shows a state after the down button 900b has been operated, for example (n) in the figure, within the operation effective period of the chance button 136. The button image 806 and the gauge image (meter image) 814 are shown in FIG. This is a state in which another effect image (in this example, a cut-in image of a large character (donor)) is displayed as a back button effect. In addition, the volume meter 901 that has been hidden is displayed again to notify that the volume can be changed. The error image 822 continues to be displayed, and a part of the cut-in image is overlapped by the error image 822 and the volume meter 901.

  Further, at this timing, an auto button notification 903 (in this example, the display of the characters “auto button OFF”) notifies that the auto button is being set. The auto button notification 903 overlaps a part of the cut-in image, but the auto button leaving 903 and the error image 822 do not overlap.

  In this modification, a plurality of chance buttons that can be operated are provided (chance buttons 136 and other chance buttons not shown), and chance buttons that are not instructed at the timing shown in FIG. When the chance button (shown) is operated, an effect display (for example, display of a cut-in image of a large character) is performed as a back button effect (notice effect), and the auto button mode is turned off ((o) in FIG. )), When one of the up and down buttons 900a and 900b is operated as shown in the figure (n), the volume meter 901 is displayed and the volume can be changed. ) (For example, display of a cut-in image of a large character), but the auto button mode is turned off. It may be configured so as not et al. The up / down buttons 900a and 900b are buttons used when the auto button mode is turned on / off on the menu screen.

  In addition, in the case of a configuration in which another chance button is provided and the back button effect is executed by operating another chance button, the back button effect is not executed by the operation of the up / down buttons 900a and 900b. May be.

  Note that the configurations described as the up and down buttons 900a and 900b in the modified examples 10A to 10C can be similarly implemented even with the left and right buttons 900c and 900d.

  Further, in each modification in which the error image 822 shown in FIGS. 75 and 76 is displayed, a configuration in which only the button introduction animation is overlapped by the error image 822 (for example, FIGS. 75 (m) and (n)). May be applied to the music selection area B shown in FIG. 66 and the like, or the music selection area B shown in FIG. 66 and the like may be overlapped by the error image 822.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present example is a so-called singing pachinko machine. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present example always outputs music during the super reach production, and displays the lyrics as a telop as shown in FIG. 76 (d), or at the center of the display area as shown in FIG. 76 (e). Display lyrics with a relatively large display size. The lyrics display in the cut-in image 824 may be hidden by another effect display (for example, the cut-in image 810, the button image 806, etc.) or the movable body 804, etc. Note that the telop display of the lyrics displayed in the lyrics display area C even for the same music is hidden by another effect display or movable body, and the lyrics display in the cut-in image 824 is not hidden by the other effect display or movable body. It may be, or vice versa. Further, the lyrics display in the cut-in image 824 may be hidden by an effect display (for example, the cut-in image 810) displayed when the chance button 136 is pressed. When the lyrics display in the cut-in image 824 is hidden, the output of music from the speaker 120 may be continued, or the output of music from the speaker 120 may be interrupted. Further, the lyrics display in the cut-in image 824 may be displayed while displaying the lyrics display in the lyrics display area C. In this case, the start timing of the lyrics display in the lyrics display area C and the start timing of the lyrics display in the cut-in image 824 may be the same or different. The end timing of displaying lyrics in the lyrics display area C and the end timing of displaying lyrics in the cut-in image 824 may be the same or different. In addition, the lyrics display in the lyrics display area C may be displayed in accordance with the singing output from the speaker 120, and the lyrics display in the cut-in image 824 may be displayed in deviation from the singing output from the speaker 120. Further, the lyrics display in the lyrics display area C may be displayed in a manner shifted from the output of the song from the speaker 120, and the lyrics display in the cut-in image 824 may be displayed together with the output of the song from the speaker 120.

  Next, a characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 76 again.

(1) The game table according to this embodiment is
Sound output means (for example, speaker 120);
A game machine comprising display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208),
The sound output means can output music (for example, nursery rhyme “Donguri Koro”, nursery rhyme “Yukiya Konko”, song “Sakura Sakura”),
The music includes a song,
The display means can display a plurality of types of display,
One of the plural types of displays is a display (hereinafter referred to as a “first display”) of lyrics corresponding to the singing (for example, lyrics such as “acorn rolls”).
One of the plurality of types of display is an effect display (for example, a mini button image 800, a deca button image 802, a button image 806, button images 806a and 806b, a cut-in image 810, a gauge image 814, a hold icon 816, Mission achievement notification image such as rank A achievement image 826) (hereinafter referred to as "second display"),
When the second display is displayed, the second display is configured to overlap at least a part of the first display (for example, FIG. 69 (c), (h), 72 (c)-(e), FIGS. 72 (h)-(k), FIGS. 74 (a), (b), 75 (a), (d), (f), and FIG. 76 (b). ), A game table characterized by that.

  According to the above configuration, there is a case where the entertainment of the game can be improved by making the player pay attention to the effect display that is displayed overlapping the lyrics display while enjoying the music output by the sound means.

(2) The gaming machine according to (1),
Operating means (for example, a chance button 136),
The game table, wherein the second display is an image imitating the operation means (for example, a mini button image 800, a deca button image 802, a button image 806, and button images 806a and 806b).

(3) The gaming machine according to (1),
Operating means (for example, a chance button 136),
The game table characterized in that the second display is an effect display (for example, a cut-in image 810) displayed after the operation means is operated.

(4) The gaming machine according to (3),
The gaming table according to claim 2, wherein the second display is not displayed when the operation means is not operated.

(5) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4),
One of the plurality of types of display is a display of a notice animation (for example, a notice animation of a pending change effect shown in FIG. 74C) (hereinafter referred to as “third display”).
When the third display is displayed, the gaming table is configured so that the third display overlaps at least a part of the first display.

(6) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5),
A first symbol display means (for example, the special symbol 1 display device 212) capable of executing the first symbol variation display (for example, the special symbol 1 variation display);
A second symbol display means (for example, the special symbol 2 display device 214) capable of executing the second symbol variation display (for example, the special symbol 2 variation display);
A determination unit for determining whether or not to perform the determination (for example, a special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and a special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) of the main control unit timer interruption process shown in FIG. 62);
The first symbol variation display is a display that stops and displays a symbol (for example, the symbol shown in FIG. 60 (a)) corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination,
The game table characterized in that the second symbol variation display is a display that stops and displays a symbol (for example, the symbol shown in FIG. 60 (b)) corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination.

(7) The gaming machine according to (6),
The display means is capable of executing a decorative display variation display,
The game table according to claim 1, wherein the decorative symbol variation display is a display for stopping and displaying a decorative symbol corresponding to the result of the determination of success or failure.

(8) The gaming machine according to (6) or (7),
First control means (for example, main control unit 300);
Second control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400),
The first control means is means including the success / failure determination means,
The game machine characterized in that the second control means is means capable of executing control in accordance with a command from the first control means.

(9) The gaming machine according to (8),
The first control means can control the first symbol display means,
The first control means can control the second symbol display means;
The game machine characterized in that the second control means is capable of controlling the display means.

(10) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (9),
The gaming table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100) or a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 1000).

  When the second display overlaps at least a part of the first display, a part of the second display is erased.

(11) operation means (for example, chance button 136);
Sound output means (for example, speaker 120);
A game machine comprising display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208),
The sound output means is capable of outputting a song including a song (for example, a nursery rhyme “Dongorokoro”, a nursery rhyme “Yukiya Konko”, a song “Sakura Sakura”),
The display means can display a plurality of types of display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a display of lyrics corresponding to the song (for example, lyrics such as “Acorn Roller”) (hereinafter referred to as “first display”).
One of the plurality of types of displays is a display prompting the operation means to operate (for example, a mini button image 800, a deca button image 802, a button image 806, a gauge image 814) (hereinafter referred to as “second display”). And
The second display is a display that may be displayed overlapping with at least a part of the first display (hereinafter referred to as “first part”) (for example, FIG. 69 (c)). 69 (h), 72 (c), 72 (h), 74 (a)),
A game table, wherein the second display is erased in accordance with an operation of the operation means (see, for example, FIGS. 69 (d) and 69 (i)).

(12) The gaming machine according to (11) above,
By erasing the second display, the overlap of the second display with the first portion is eliminated, so that the entire first display is displayed (for example, FIG. 69D). , See FIG. 69 (i)).

(13) The game stand according to (11) or (12) above,
2. The game table according to claim 2, wherein the second display is a display that is erased when the operation valid period of the operation means ends even when the operation means is not operated.

(14) The game stand according to any one of (11) to (13),
The game table characterized in that the second display is a display including an image (for example, a mini button image 800, a deca button image 802, a button image 806) imitating the appearance of the operation means.

(15) The game stand according to any one of (11) to (14) above,
The game machine characterized in that the second display is a display including a character image (for example, a character image of “PUSH !!”) that prompts the operation means to operate.

(16) The gaming machine according to any one of (11) to (15),
One display of the plurality of types of display is an effect display (for example, an effect display indicating whether or not the notice effect shown in FIG. 69 (d) or 69 (i) develops into a super reach effect) Cut-in image 810) (hereinafter referred to as "third display"),
The second display is a display that is displayed during the operation effective period of the operation means (see, for example, FIG. 69 (d), FIG. 69 (i), and FIG. 70 (i)).
The third display is a display that starts to be displayed in response to an operation of the operation means (see, for example, FIG. 69 (d), FIG. 69 (i), and FIG. 70 (i)). Amusement stand.

(17) The game stand according to any one of (11) to (16) above,
A first symbol display means (for example, the special symbol 1 display device 212) capable of executing the first symbol variation display (for example, the special symbol 1 variation display);
A second symbol display means (for example, the special symbol 2 display device 214) capable of executing the second symbol variation display (for example, the special symbol 2 variation display);
Start information acquisition means (for example, winning acceptance process (step S217) of the main control unit timer interruption process shown in FIG. 62) capable of acquiring start information (for example, special figure 1 start information, special figure 2 start information);
NG determination means capable of executing NG determination based on the start-up information (for example, a special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and a special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) of the main control unit timer interruption process shown in FIG. 62)) When,
A first area in which game balls can enter (for example, special figure 1 starting port 230);
A second area (for example, special figure 2 starting port 232) in which a game ball can enter,
The starting information acquisition means is means capable of acquiring first starting information (for example, special figure 1 starting information) when a game ball enters the first area,
The starting information acquisition means is means capable of acquiring second starting information (for example, special figure 2 starting information) when a game ball enters the second area,
The first symbol variation display is a display for stopping and displaying a symbol (for example, the symbol shown in FIG. 60 (a)) corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination based on the first start information.
The second symbol variation display is a display for stopping and displaying a symbol (for example, the symbol shown in FIG. 60 (b)) corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination based on the second start information. To play.

(18) The gaming machine according to (17) above,
The display means is capable of executing a decorative display variation display,
The game table according to claim 1, wherein the decorative symbol variation display is a display for stopping and displaying a decorative symbol corresponding to the result of the determination of success or failure.

(19) The game stand according to (17) or (18) above,
First control means (for example, main control unit 300);
Second control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400),
The first control means is means including the success / failure determination means,
The game machine characterized in that the second control means is means capable of executing control in accordance with a command from the first control means.

(20) The gaming machine according to (19) above,
The first control means can control the first symbol display means (for example, see FIG. 59),
The first control means can control the second symbol display means (for example, see FIG. 59),
The game machine characterized in that the second control means can control the display means (see, for example, FIG. 59).

(21) The gaming machine according to any one of (11) to (20) above,
The game table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).

(22) The gaming machine according to any one of (11) to (16) above,
The gaming table is a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 1000).

(23) operation means (for example, chance button 136);
A game machine comprising display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208),
The display means displays a plurality of types of display (for example, display of lyrics, display for prompting the operation of the chance button 136 of the mini button image 800, the deca button image 802, and the button image 806, the chances shown in FIGS. 106 (b) to (d). An image imitating the button 136, a message “Please select a song”, and an effect selection effect display shown in FIGS. 143 (a) to 143 (g) can be displayed.
One display of the plurality of types of display is a first display (for example, display of lyrics),
One display among the plurality of types of display is a second display (for example, button introduction animation shown in FIGS. 75B and 75C, FIGS. 76A and 76B, and operation of the chance button 136). An animation that warns that the validity period will start)
One of the plural types of displays is a third display (for example, a button image 806),
The third display is a display prompting the operation means to operate, and the second display is a display performed before the display of the third display is started (for example, FIG. ) To (c))
The second display is a display that may be displayed in a state where the operation of the operation means is not accepted,
In some cases, the second display overlaps and is displayed on at least a part of the first display (hereinafter referred to as “first part”) (for example, see FIG. 76B). A game stand characterized by that.

(24) The game stand according to (23) above,
The first display is a display of lyrics (for example, display of lyrics of a nursery rhyme “Donguri Koro”),
The game machine characterized in that the second display is a display related to the operation means (for example, a button introduction animation, an animation for notifying that the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started). .

(25) The game stand according to (23) or (24) above,
When the second display (for example, button images 806a and 806b having a transmittance of 50%) is displayed in an overlapping manner on the first part, the first part is visible. A game stand characterized by that.

(26) The gaming machine according to any one of (23) to (25),
The gaming machine is characterized in that an operation of the operating means is accepted during a period in which the third display is displayed (see paragraph “0229”).

(27) The gaming machine according to any one of (23) to (26) above,
There is no case where the third display overlaps the first display (see, for example, FIG. 76 (c)).

(28) The gaming table according to any one of (23) to (27),
The game table according to claim 2, wherein the second display is an animation display (for example, a button introduction animation or an animation for notifying that the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started).

(29) The game stand according to any one of (23) to (28),
The game table characterized in that the second display is a display in which a plurality of images (for example, button images 806a and 806b) simulating the operation means are displayed.

(30) The gaming table according to any one of (23) to (29) above,
The gaming table according to claim 3, wherein the third display is a display including an image (for example, a button image 806) simulating the operation means.

(31) The game stand according to any one of (23) to (30) above,
Sound output means (for example, speaker 120),
The game table characterized in that the sound output means is capable of outputting music including singing (for example, nursery rhyme “Donguri Korokoro”, nursery rhyme “Yukiya Konko”, song “Sakura Sakura”, etc.).

(32) The gaming machine according to any one of (23) to (31) above,
The game table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).

(33) The gaming machine according to any one of (23) to (31) above,
The gaming table is a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 1000).
In the said embodiment, you may comprise as follows.
At the bar break, the lyrics are displayed before the singing output.
There are cases where the lyrics display is hidden or not hidden even in the same effect display.
During super reach production, a song different from the song selected by the player is played.

  The music for the super reach production (for example, the nursery rhyme “Snow and Konko”) may be played only during the super reach production, or may be played other than during the super reach production.

  Moreover, the lyrics display may be displayed and hidden over the cut-in image or the button image only when the music for super-reaching production is reproduced.

  In addition, the lyrics display is hidden by an effect that starts based on the operation of the operating means.

  When the lyric display is switched on / off, the lyric display displayed later may be hidden by the previously displayed button image or cut-in image.

  If the operation timing of the operation means is delayed during the operation valid period, the lyrics display of a plurality of measures and the lyrics display of a plurality of songs are hidden by a button image or the like and cannot be read.

Also, the gauge image (meter image) overlaps the lyrics display, but the lyrics display becomes visible as the gauge decreases.
Moreover, the music should just contain a song, such as a song, a folk song, and a classic.

  In addition, in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, special figure high probability ordinary figure low probability state, special figure low probability ordinary figure high probability state, jackpot gaming state, the music selected by the player is output from the sound output means. May be.

  In addition, what was called a lamp | ramp so far is an example of a light emission means, and a lamp | ramp can be substituted if it emits light, such as LED and a cold cathode tube.

  For example, the above embodiment can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that circulates and uses game balls enclosed in a game machine. For example, the pachinko machine may be an enclosed pachinko machine that encloses a sphere and circulates the enclosed sphere in the pachinko machine, and this enclosed pachinko machine uses the enclosed sphere as a launch ball, The ball payout may be executed by electronic display.

  Note that the items described in the above detailed description, in particular, the items described in the examples and the modifications can be combined.

  In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is used as an example of a game table, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine 1000 as shown in FIG.

  The game machine according to the present invention corresponds to each reel shown in FIG. 77, “a plurality of types of symbols 1002 and a plurality of reels 1002 which are rotationally driven, a start lever 1004 for instructing the rotation of the reels. A stop button 1006 for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, lottery means (lottery prize internal lottery) for determining whether or not internal winning of a plurality of types of winning combinations is successful, and a lottery result of the lottery means The combination of symbols displayed by the reel stop control means (reel stop control processing) that performs stop control for stopping the rotation of the reels and the reels stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means corresponds to the winning combination. And a determination means (winning determination process) for determining whether or not the symbol combination is predetermined, and when the symbol stop mode is a predetermined winning mode, it corresponds to the predetermined winning mode In addition to payout control means (medal payout process 1008) for performing game medium payout processing for paying out game media to be played, effect means 1010 for executing effects based on the lottery result of the lottery means is provided. A launching device 1014 that launches a ball into the game area 1012, a winning opening 1016 configured to be able to enter a ball launched from the launching device, a detection means 1018 that detects a ball that has entered the winning opening 1016, A payout means 1020 for paying out a ball when the detection means 1018 detects a ball, a variable display device 1022 for variably displaying a predetermined symbol (identification information), and a shutter 1024 movable to a position for shielding the variable display device 1022 And a movable body 1026 that operates in a predetermined operation mode, and the variable display device 1022 displays a symbol when the game ball enters the winning opening and wins. And the stopped displayed After moving, are also suitable for the slot machine 1000 "is a rendering device 1010, such as to produce a game.

  FIG. 78 (a) shows a game stand according to the present invention. “Insert a bill into the bill insertion slot 2002, execute a lottery based on the bet 2004 and start 2006 operation, and display the lottery result on the lottery result display device 2008. Then, at the time of winning, the number of bonus coins is added to the remaining credit number, and when cashout 2009 is selected, the casino machine 2000 issues a receipt from the receipt issuing machine 2010 with a code corresponding to the remaining credit number. It may be.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 5B, the cellular phone 3000 having a storage unit for storing the electronic data for realizing the present invention, and the electronic data for realizing the present invention as shown in FIG. The present invention may be applied to a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing the video data and a home video game machine 5000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention.

  More specifically, the mobile phone 3000 in FIG. 5B includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to the game through a mobile phone line, and acquired data about the game (this book And a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  The portable game machine 4000 in FIG. 6C includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to the game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and acquired data related to the game (the present invention). And a control unit for controlling the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit. The home video game machine 5000 in FIG. 6D includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to a game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and acquired data ( And a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 5E, the present invention may be applied to a data server 6000 that stores electronic data for realizing the present invention. In some cases, the electronic data for realizing the present invention is downloaded from the data server 6000 to the home video game machine 5000 shown in FIG.

  In addition, a game can be executed by applying the present invention to a game program that simulates the operation of a real machine such as a pachinko machine for a home game machine. In that case, a DVD-ROM, CD-ROM, FD (flexible disk), or any other recording medium can be used as a recording medium for recording the game program.

Furthermore, the present invention has been described by taking a pachinko machine and a slot machine as examples of game machines, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and may be applied to an arrangement ball game machine, a ball ball game machine, a smart ball, and the like.
The present invention according to the above embodiment can be summarized as follows.

(Appendix 1)
Sound output means;
A game machine comprising display means,
The sound output means can output music,
The music includes a song,
The display means can display a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a display of lyrics corresponding to the singing (hereinafter referred to as “first display”),
One of the plurality of types of display is an effect display (hereinafter referred to as “second display”),
When the second display is displayed, the gaming table is configured so that the second display overlaps at least a part of the first display.

(Appendix 2)
The game machine according to appendix 1,
With operating means,
The game table, wherein the second display is an image imitating the operation means.

(Appendix 3)
The game machine according to appendix 1,
With operating means,
The game table characterized in that the second display is an effect display displayed after the operation means is operated.

(Appendix 4)
A game machine as set forth in appendix 3,
The gaming table according to claim 2, wherein the second display is not displayed when the operation means is not operated.

(Appendix 5)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 1 to 4,
One of the plurality of types of display is a display of a notice animation (hereinafter referred to as “third display”),
When the third display is displayed, the gaming table is configured so that the third display overlaps at least a part of the first display.

(Appendix 6)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 5,
A first symbol display means capable of executing a first symbol variation display;
A second symbol display means capable of executing a second symbol variation display;
A determination unit for determining whether or not to perform the determination, and
The first symbol variation display is a display that stops and displays the symbol corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination,
The gaming table according to claim 2, wherein the second symbol variation display is a display for stopping and displaying a symbol corresponding to the result of the determination of success or failure.

(Appendix 7)
A game machine as set forth in appendix 6,
The display means is capable of executing a decorative display variation display,
The game table according to claim 1, wherein the decorative symbol variation display is a display for stopping and displaying a decorative symbol corresponding to the result of the determination of success or failure.

(Appendix 8)
The game stand according to appendix 6 or 7,
A first control means;
A second control means,
The first control means is means including the success / failure determination means,
The game machine characterized in that the second control means is means capable of executing control in accordance with a command from the first control means.

(Appendix 9)
The game stand according to appendix 8,
The first control means can control the first symbol display means,
The first control means can control the second symbol display means;
The game machine characterized in that the second control means is capable of controlling the display means.

(Appendix 10)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 1 to 9,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine or a slot machine.

(Appendix 11)
Operation means;
Sound output means;
A game stand comprising display means,
The sound output means can output a song including a song,
The display means can display a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a display of lyrics corresponding to the singing (hereinafter referred to as “first display”),
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a display prompting the operation of the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “second display”).
The second display is a display that may be displayed overlapping with at least a part of the first display (hereinafter referred to as “first part”),
A gaming table, wherein the second display is erased in response to an operation of the operating means.

(Appendix 12)
A gaming machine according to appendix 11,
The gaming table is characterized in that the entire first display is displayed by eliminating the overlap of the second display with the first portion by erasing the second display. .

(Appendix 13)
A gaming machine according to appendix 11 or 12,
2. The game table according to claim 2, wherein the second display is a display that is erased when the operation valid period of the operation means ends even when the operation means is not operated.

(Appendix 14)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 11 to 13,
The gaming table according to claim 2, wherein the second display is a display including an image imitating an appearance of the operation means.

(Appendix 15)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 11 to 14,
The gaming table according to claim 2, wherein the second display is a display including a character image prompting the operation of the operation means.

(Appendix 16)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 11 to 15,
One of the plurality of types of display is an effect display (hereinafter referred to as “third display”),
The second display is a display that is displayed during an operation effective period of the operation means,
The gaming table according to claim 3, wherein the third display is a display that starts to be displayed in response to an operation of the operation means.

(Appendix 17)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 11 to 16,
A first symbol display means capable of executing a first symbol variation display;
A second symbol display means capable of executing a second symbol variation display;
Starting information acquisition means capable of acquiring starting information;
Correct / incorrect determination means capable of executing correct / incorrect determination based on the starting information;
The first area where game balls can enter,
A second area where game balls can enter,
The starting information acquisition means is means capable of acquiring first starting information when a game ball enters the first area,
The starting information acquisition means is means capable of acquiring second starting information when a game ball enters the second area,
The first symbol variation display is a display that stops and displays a symbol corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination based on the first start information,
The gaming table according to claim 2, wherein the second symbol variation display is a display for stopping and displaying a symbol corresponding to the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second start information.

(Appendix 18)
The gaming machine according to appendix 17,
The display means is capable of executing a decorative display variation display,
The game table according to claim 1, wherein the decorative symbol variation display is a display for stopping and displaying a decorative symbol corresponding to the result of the determination of success or failure.

(Appendix 19)
The game stand according to appendix 17 or 18,
A first control means;
A second control means,
The first control means is means including the success / failure determination means,
The game machine characterized in that the second control means is means capable of executing control in accordance with a command from the first control means.

(Appendix 20)
The gaming machine according to appendix 19,
The first control means can control the first symbol display means,
The first control means can control the second symbol display means;
The game machine characterized in that the second control means is capable of controlling the display means.

(Appendix 21)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 11 to 20,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine.

(Appendix 22)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 11 to 16,
A gaming machine, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine.

(Appendix 23)
Operation means;
A game stand comprising display means,
The display means can display a plurality of types of display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The third display is a display prompting the operation of the operation means,
The second display is a display performed before the display of the third display is started,
The second display is a display that may be displayed in a state where the operation of the operation means is not accepted,
A gaming table, wherein the second display may be displayed overlapping at least a part of the first display (hereinafter referred to as “first part”).

(Appendix 24)
The game stand according to appendix 23,
The first display is a display of lyrics,
The game table, wherein the second display is a display related to the operation means.

(Appendix 25)
The gaming machine according to appendix 23 or 24,
A gaming table, wherein when the second display overlaps and is displayed on the first part, the first part is visible.

(Appendix 26)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 23 to 25,
The gaming table, wherein an operation of the operation means is accepted during a period in which the third display is displayed.

(Appendix 27)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 23 to 26,
The gaming table, wherein the third display does not overlap with the first display.

(Appendix 28)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 23 to 27,
The game table, wherein the second display is an animation display.

(Appendix 29)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 23 to 28,
The gaming table, wherein the second display is a display in which a plurality of images simulating the operation means are displayed.

(Appendix 30)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 23 to 29,
The game table characterized in that the third display is a display including an image simulating the operation means.

(Appendix 31)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 23 to 30,
With sound output means,
The game stand according to claim 1, wherein the sound output means is capable of outputting music including singing.

(Appendix 32)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 23 to 31,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine.

(Appendix 33)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 23 to 31,
A gaming machine, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine.

  As described above, the gaming table (for example, pachinko machine 100) according to the embodiment of the present invention includes the first operation means (for example, chance button 136) provided at a position where the player can operate, And a display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208), wherein the display means can display a plurality of types of display, and one of the plurality of types of display is: It is a first display (for example, an introductory animation that can be expected to be an effect that tends to have a high expectation level for big hits, an animation shown in FIGS. 75 (l) to 75 (n)). One of the displays is a second display (for example, an image display prompting an operation of the chance button 136, for example, a button image 806 'in FIG. 75 (o)), and one of the plurality of types of displays. Table Is a third display (for example, the lyrics shown in FIG. 75 (a) (“Acorn Roller”), the ball removal display 882 shown in FIG. 75 (a), the rank C achievement image 824 in FIG. 75 (e), etc.). The first display is an animation display related to the first operation means (hereinafter referred to as “first animation”), and the second display is an appearance of the first operation means. The third display is a display of the character display, and the display of the second display is started after the display of the first display is started. In the first animation displayed in the state where the third display is displayed (for example, an image at a certain timing in the first animation, FIG. 75 (m ), Button images 806c and 8 in FIG. 75 (n), etc. 06d, etc.) are overlapped with the third display.

  It should be noted that other button images displayed after the first display (for example, the button image 806 shown in FIG. 75 (p)) and other animation displays (for example, those with a big hit expectation lower than the first animation) Introductory animation in the case of an easy-to-make effect, the second display displayed after the animation shown in FIGS. 75 (h) to 75 (j)), other button images (for example, displayed after another animation display) One or more of the button images 806) shown in FIG. 75 (k) may be provided, and conversely, one or more of these may not be provided.

  According to such a configuration, there is a case where the third display can be focused while enhancing the interest of the player.

  Further, the third display may be a display prompting to discharge the game ball (for example, an error display (ball removal display) 822 shown in FIG. 75).

  In addition, sound output means (for example, the speaker 120) and second operation means (for example, the up and down buttons 900a shown in FIGS. 76 (f) and (g)) provided at positions where the player can operate. 900b), and the sound output means is a means capable of outputting an effect sound according to a set volume, and is configured to be capable of executing a plurality of types of effects, and among the plurality of types of effects The first effect is the first effect, and the first effect is one effect of the notice effect (for example, the effect of the back button effect, the cut-in image shown in FIG. 75 (k), etc.). The first effect is an effect including a first effect sound, and in the state where the first display is displayed, the operation of the first operation means is not accepted, and While the second display is displayed, The operation of the first operation means is accepted, and when the first operation means is operated in a state where the first display is displayed, the first effect is not executed, When the first operation means is operated while the second display is displayed, the first effect may be executed (for example, FIG. 75 (p), (r), etc.). When the second operating means is operated while the first display is displayed, the volume may be changed, and when the second display is displayed, the second display is displayed. When the operation means is operated, the volume may be changed. When the second operation means is operated in a state where the second display is displayed, the first effect is executed. There may be cases (for example, FIG. 76 (k)).

  The “state where the first display is displayed” is a “state where the second display is not displayed and a state where there is no display regarding the second operation means”.

The “state where the second display is displayed” is a “state where the first display is not displayed and a state where there is no display regarding the second operation means”.
In this case, the volume is not changed even if the first operating means is operated.
The production includes at least one of display, sound, and light.

  One of the plurality of types of display is a seventh display, and the seventh display is a display indicating a volume (for example, a volume meter 901 shown in FIGS. 76 (g), (h), etc.). When the second operation means is operated in a state where the first display is displayed, the seventh display is displayed (for example, FIG. 76 (g)). ) When the second operation means is operated while the second display is displayed, the seventh display is displayed (for example, FIG. 76 (k)), and the sound output means is A means capable of outputting an error sound may be used.

  Note that “the volume may be changed” means that the volume is not necessarily changed by the operation of the second operation means. For example, there may be a case where the player is allowed to change the volume with a switch or the like provided on the back of the gaming machine 100, and there are cases where the change is not allowed. In the first operation of the second operation means, there is a case where only the display indicating the currently set volume (display of the volume meter 901) is performed and the volume is not changed. Further, when the volume meter 901 is already at the maximum state and the second operation means for increasing the volume is operated (for example, the upper button 900a), the volume is not changed (for example, the volume is not changed) ( (Only, sure) The volume is not changed.

  According to such a configuration, since the volume can be changed (adjusted) by operating the second operation means during the introduction animation, the button effect starts after the introduction animation ends, and the second operation means is operated. In this case, the first effect may be enjoyed at a volume according to the player's preference.

  Further, the auto button mode can be set, and when the first operation means is operated while the first display is displayed, the auto button mode is turned off when the auto button mode is on. When the first operation means is operated in a state where the second display is displayed, the auto button mode is turned off when on, and in the state where the first display is displayed. When the second operation means is operated, it is not turned off even when the auto button mode is on, and the second operation means is operated in a state where the second display is displayed. Even if the auto button mode is on, it may not turn off.

  The auto button mode is a mode in which an effect that is performed after a button operation is performed without any button operation. For example, when the gauge image 814 is shortened to some extent (for example, when it is shortened to about half). The effect performed after the button operation is performed. It is also possible for the player to operate the button while the auto button mode is set. In this case, an effect that is performed after the button is operated is executed. In this case, the auto button mode is canceled. (Although described in Modification 10C, there are some exceptions). The setting method of the auto button mode can be turned on, for example, by long-pressing the button, and can be set from the menu screen as another method.

  Further, the auto button mode can be set, and when the first operation means is operated while the first display is displayed, the auto button mode is turned off when the auto button mode is on. When the first operation means is operated in a state where the second display is displayed, the auto button mode is turned off when on, and in the state where the first display is displayed. When the second operation means is operated, it is turned off when the auto button mode is on (for example, FIGS. 76 (l) and (m)), and the second display is displayed. When the second operation means is operated, it may be turned off when the auto button mode is turned on (for example, FIGS. 76 (n) and (o)).

  In addition, you may comprise so that it may have a 3rd operation means (chance button different from the chance button 136), and a 1st effect may be performed when a 3rd operation means is operated. In the case of having this configuration, the first effect may not be executed when the second operating means is operated.

  In addition, one display among the plurality of types of display is a fourth display (for example, a cut-in image 824), the fourth display is one display of a notice display, and the fourth display The one effect may be an effect including the fourth display.

  For example, the first effect may include a cut-in image 824 and sound output from the speaker 120 (for example, singing output).

  One of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display (for example, a cut-in image 810), and the fifth display is different from the fourth display of the notice display. May be displayed.

  In addition, one effect among the plurality of effects is a second effect, and the second effect is an effect different from the first effect among the notice effects, The second effect is an effect including a second effect sound (for example, “Snow and Konko” of the song), and the second effect sound and the first effect sound are different effect sounds. Also good.

  One of the plural types of displays is a sixth display (for example, the lyrics shown in FIG. 75 (a) (“Acorn Roller”), the rank C achievement image 824 in FIG. 75 (e), etc.) The sixth display may be a display different from the third display in the character display.

  In this case, the sixth display may overlap (do) with the first animation or may not (not) overlap.

  One of the plurality of types of display is an eighth display, and the eighth display is an animation display related to the first operation means different from the first animation ( Hereinafter, it is “second animation (for example, an introduction animation of an effect having a lower jackpot expectation than the first animation, animation shown in FIGS. 75 (h) to 75 (j)”). The second animation displayed in a state where the third display is displayed may be configured not to overlap the third display.

  Further, the gaming table may be a slot machine, and the gaming table may be a pachinko machine.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 79 to 158, game machines (for example, ball game machines such as pachinko machines 100, enclosed game machines, slot machines, etc.) according to other embodiments (production examples) of the present invention are used. The body gaming machine) will be described in detail. 79 to 158 are used only in the description of FIGS. 79 to 158 in principle, and even if the overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, FIGS. 79 to 158 are used. In the explanation of Fig. 79, priority is given to the reference numerals shown in Figs. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side). As an external structure, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is referred to as an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. In addition, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via a hinge portion 112 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function by the lock unit 105, and is configured in a frame shape. Thus, the door member has an opening 116 inside thereof. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. In addition, a front frame door opening sensor 107 that detects the opening of the front frame door 106 when the front frame door 106 is opened is provided.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a lock function and be openable and closable. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by operation of the player 200 ball launching handles 134 for launching into the game area 124, chance buttons 136 for changing the effects of the various effects devices 206 by the player's operation, and the chance button 136 to emit light. Operation means 700 for performing settings relating to a game (for example, setting of time and setting of effect contents) by operation of the sbutton lamp 138 and a setter (for example, an operator, a game shop clerk, or a player in a manufacturing factory of the pachinko machine 100) (Described later), a ball lending operation button 140 for instructing ball lending to a card unit (CR unit) installed in the game store, and a return operation button 142 for instructing the card unit to return the balance of the player. And a ball rental display unit 144 that displays the balance of the player and the state of the card unit. In addition, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. .

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  FIG. 80 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 79 viewed from the back side. The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is formed at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball that has passed through the communicating hole and dropped to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. To pay out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and control related to effects based on the processing information generated by the main control section 300 The first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub-board that performs control processing related to effects based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. An error canceling switch that configures a second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control unit 500, a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to the payout of game balls, and that releases an error by the operation of a game clerk Discharge board case 172 for storing a payout board 170 provided with 168, launch board constituting a launch control unit 630 for performing control processing relating to the launch of a game ball A launch board case 176 for storing 74, a power control unit 660 for supplying power to various electrical gaming machines, and a power switch 178 for turning on / off the power by the operation of a game clerk and an RWM clear by being operated when the power is turned on A power board case 184 that houses a power board 182 that includes an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs a signal to the main controller 300, and a CR interface 186 that transmits and receives signals between the payout controller 600 and the card unit are provided. ing.

  FIG. 81 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined. An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 at substantially the center, and around the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, and the normal symbol. A holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. The effect device 206 performs the effect by operating the effect movable body 224, and details thereof will be described later. In addition, hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol”, the special symbol as “special symbol”, the first special symbol as “special symbol 1”, and the second special symbol as “special symbol 2”.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The decorative symbol display device 208 has a display range in which one small, for example, circular symbol can be displayed. The fourth symbol display area (not shown in FIG. (Shown). In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. The special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214 are display devices for displaying the special figure, and are configured by 7-segment LEDs in this embodiment.

  The multi-purpose hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general-purpose variable games (details will be described later) that are on hold. In this embodiment, the general-purpose variable games are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, two). It is possible to do. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games that are held (details will be described later). In the present embodiment, a predetermined number of special figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. Turns on when switching to the probability state, and turns off when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, there are predetermined ball entrances such as a general prize opening 226, a general figure start opening 228, a special figure 1 start opening 230, a special figure 2 start opening 232, and a variable prize opening around the rendering device 206. 234 is provided.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (wins in the general winning holes 226). In this case, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In the present embodiment, a game ball is a ball that is paid out to a player as a consideration for winning (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “prize ball”), and a ball that is lent to a player (hereinafter referred to as “lending ball”). Is included).

  The normal start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 is used. One is arranged. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one special figure 1 starting port 230 is provided at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the special opening 1 starting port 230, a payout device 152, which will be described later, is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variable game by the special figure 1 display device 212 is started. Note that the ball that has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The special figure 2 starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric chew), and in the present embodiment, only one is provided directly below the special figure 1 starting port 230. The special figure 2 starting port 232 includes a wing member 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right. While the wing member 232a is closed, it is impossible to enter a sphere. When the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the special opening 2 232, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. Then, the special figure variable game by the special figure 2 display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the special figure 2 starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The variable winning opening 234 is called a large winning opening or an attacker, and in the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is disposed below the center of the game board 200. The variable winning opening 234 is provided with a door member 234a that can be opened and closed. When the door member 234a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball. In this case, the door member 234a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, an opening time of 29 seconds and a closing time of 1.5 seconds) at a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that entered the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with strength according to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, The outer rod 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 148 and are launched into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or start opening (Special Figure 1 Start Port 230, Special Figure 2 Start Port 232) Wins the Out Port 240 without winning any of the winning ports or start ports, or just passing through the normal start port 228 To do.

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged in an area where the game ball cannot roll. In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door or a shutter) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding means are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the effect movable body 224. The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b. The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball carried by a nail of the game board 200. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry.

  In this embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm 224a and a forearm 224b imitating the upper arm and forearm of a human right arm, and an upper arm motor and an elbow (not shown) that rotate the upper arm 224a to the position of the shoulder. A forearm motor (not shown) that rotates the forearm 224b at a position is provided. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 covers the inner end portions of the shielding device 246 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that controls the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a command transmitted by the main control unit 300 The payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the game ball payout, the launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game ball, and the power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. Yes.

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and data temporarily. A RAM 308 for storing, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time and the number of times, and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in program processing are mounted. Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 also includes a random value generation circuit 318 used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit includes 2 counters) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball passing through each starting port, winning port, variable winning port, front frame door opening sensor, and inner frame A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including an open sensor and a lower plate full sensor, and outputting a comparison result with an amplification result and a reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302; Drive circuit 324 for controlling the display of the special symbol display device 212 or the special symbol 2 display device 214, a predetermined symbol display device, for example, A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the general-purpose display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, a general-purpose reservation lamp 216, a special figure 1 retention lamp 218, a special figure 2 retention lamp 220, and a high-accuracy medium lamp 222 And the like, and a variety of solenoids 332 for opening and closing a predetermined movable member, for example, the blade member 232a of the special figure 2 starting port 232, the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234, and the like. A driving circuit 334 is connected.

  When the sphere detection sensor 320 detects that a sphere is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230. Store in the register. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the special figure 2 starting port 232, the random number generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) via the information output circuit 336. 100 game information (for example, game state) is output.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 has a voltage value of the power source. When the voltage is less than a predetermined value (9 V in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 starts from the start signal output circuit 340. When a signal is input, game control is started (main control unit main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the first control unit 300 Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. Note that information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the first sub control unit 400. However, the first sub-control unit 400 is configured not to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300. In addition, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is a two-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to transmit a signal such as a command to the payout control unit 600. Also, a signal such as a command can be transmitted to the main control unit 300.

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time and frequency are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138), and a shielding device 246. A drive circuit 432 for performing drive control, a shielding device sensor 430 that detects the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button detection sensor 426 that detects pressing of the chance button 136, and detection of the shielding device sensor 430 and the chance button The sensor circuit 428 that outputs the detection signal from the unit 724 to the basic circuit 402, the ROM 406 for storing the control program and various effect data, and the image data stored in the ROM 406 based on the signal from the CPU 404 are read out. Use the VRAM 436 work area to generate a display image. And VDP434 for displaying an image on the decorative pattern display device 208 and (Video Display Processor), is connected to. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time and frequency. It is equipped with. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and controls a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, and an image display A ROM 506 storing data and the like is provided.

  Further, the basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for performing drive control of the effect movable body 224, a drive circuit 517 for performing drive control of the chance button drive unit 708, and the current position of the effect movable body 224. A movable body sensor 424 to be detected, a sensor circuit 518 for outputting a detection signal from the movable body sensor 424 to the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game table A game table frame lamp drive circuit 540 for controlling the frame lamp 542, and serial communication control for performing lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game table frame lamp drive circuit 540 The circuit 520 is connected.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604 It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed, and communication with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606. Also, the payout control unit 600 receives the detection result of the front frame door opening sensor 107 that detects the opening of the front frame door 106, and outputs the received result to the main control unit 300.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the launch control unit are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although a predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 83, the types of special maps and general maps that are stopped and displayed by the special map display device 212, the special map display device 214, and the general map display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. FIG. 83 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol pattern of FIG. FIG. 83 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol pattern of FIG. The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the special figure 1 start opening 230, and the special figure 2 start opening 232 indicates that the ball has entered 2 The special figure 2 variable game is started on condition that the start sensor is detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. When the special figure 2 variable game is started, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs “variable display of special figure 2” by repeating all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. . These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display in the present embodiment. When the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation in FIG. 1 elapses, the special figure 1 display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1 and the fluctuation time determined before the fluctuation starts in the special figure 2. After the elapse, the special figure 2 display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 2. Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is stopped, or after the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 2”, the stop symbol form of special figure 2 is displayed. Until stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation stop display referred to in the present embodiment, hereinafter, after the “variable display of special figure 1 or 2” is started, the stop symbol form of special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed. A series of displays until this is done is referred to as symbol variation stop display. As will be described later, the symbol variation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  In FIG. 83 (a), six types of special figures from “Special figure A” to “Special figure F” are shown as the stop symbol forms in the symbol fluctuation stop display of Special Figure 1. FIG. In FIG. 83 (a), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on. “Special figure A” is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and “Special figure B” is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, the determination as to whether or not the big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and the decision as to whether or not it is a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the big hit and the special big hit is a difference in the special figure variable game after the big hit game, and the probability of winning the big hit is high (probable big hit) or low (normally big hit). Hereinafter, a state having a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and a state having a low probability is referred to as a special figure low probability state. In addition, after the 15R special big hit game ends and after the 15R big hit game ends, the state shifts to the electric support state (referred to as a short time state together with the variable time reduction state of the special figure variable game). Although the time-short state will be described in detail later, the state that shifts to the time-short state is referred to as a normal high-probability state, and the state that does not shift to the time-short state is referred to as a normal-low probability state. “Special figure A”, which is a 15R special jackpot symbol, is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state (probability variation state) after the jackpot game is ended, and “Special figure B”, which is a 15R jackpot symbol, is a jackpot The game state after the game ends is a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state (electric support state or short time state). Note that the timing when the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state and the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state are reached is the start of the first special figure variable game after the end of the big hit game. These “special chart A” and “special chart B” are symbols that have a relatively high degree of advantage over the player.

  "Special figure C" is a 2R big hit symbol and is called sudden probability change. Sudden probability change will be in the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state after the big hit game, like the 15R special big hit symbol. "Special figure D" is a 2R big hit symbol and is called latent probability variation. The latent probability change becomes a special figure high probability low probability state (latency probability variation state) after the big hit game ends.

  “Special figure E” is a small hit symbol, and after the small hit game, the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state (may be referred to as a normal state or a normal game state). In the small hit game, the attacker is released the same number of times as the “special drawing C” and “special drawing D” (twice in the case of this embodiment). Further, the “special drawing F” is a detachment symbol, which is a symbol that does not release an attacker and has a relatively small advantage for the player.

  In FIG. 83 (b), four types of special figures from “special figure a” to “special figure d” are shown as stop symbol forms in the symbol fluctuation stop display of special figure 2. In FIG. 83 (b), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on. “Special figure a” is a 16 round (16R) special jackpot symbol, and “Special figure b” is an 8R special jackpot symbol. In both “special chart a” and “special chart b”, the gaming state after the end of the big hit game becomes a special chart high probability ordinary figure high probability state. These “special drawing a” and “special drawing b” are symbols with which the degree of advantage relative to the player is relatively large.

  “Special figure c” is an 8R jackpot symbol, and after the jackpot game is over, a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state is entered. The “special drawing d” is an off symbol, the attacker does not release, and the symbol has a relatively small advantage for the player.

  FIG. 83 (c) shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the special figure 1 starting port 230 or the special figure 2 starting port 232, that is, the ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, or the special figure 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided on the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the start port 232. In the symbol display area, “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →. “Change design of symbols”.

  When notifying 15R big hit, 15R special big hit, 16R special big hit, 8R big hit, or 8R special big hit, a combination of symbols in which three same decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, “decoration 1- “Decoration 1-decoration 1”, “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”, etc.) are stopped and displayed. When the 15R special jackpot or the 16R special jackpot is explicitly notified, a combination of symbols in which three same decorative symbols are arranged (for example, “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” or “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”). Etc.) is stopped and displayed.

  Further, when notifying the latent probability change or the small hit, a combination of symbols in which three decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3” or “decoration 1-decoration 3”). -Decoration 5 ") is stopped and displayed.

  On the other hand, when notifying of the difference between “special drawing K” and “special drawing h”, symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in FIG. 83C are stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  In the present embodiment, the combination of decorative symbols and the type of jackpot are uniquely determined. However, the player may not know which combination of decorative symbols is which jackpot.

  FIG. 83 (d) shows an example of a usual stop display symbol. In the present embodiment, there are two types of stoppage display modes of “normal map A”, which is a winning symbol, and “general symbol B”, which is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that the sphere has passed through the general start port 228, the general map display device 210 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment. Perform a “normal change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure A” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the deviation of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure B” is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 83 (d), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  Next, a main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input resets by a reset interrupt and executes the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG. 84 according to the control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In the initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is set. Enable operation, set initial values, etc. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms (milliseconds) is set in WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103 following step S101, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted. In step S105 following step S103, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value. It is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased when the voltage is less than (9 V in this embodiment). Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In the initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, a second output port) 1) a process of outputting a clear signal from the output port 1), a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like.

  In step S109 subsequent to step S107, it is determined whether or not the state before power interruption (before power interruption) is restored. If the state before power interruption is not restored (the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is changed). In the case of initializing), the process proceeds to initialization processing (step S113). Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of an amusement store operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is turned on (indicates that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is set. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. A RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 82 has a transmission information storage area. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and in the same way as the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

  In step S115 subsequent to step S113, the basic random number initial value updating process is performed after setting the interrupt prohibition. In this basic random number initial value update processing, initial value generation for generating an initial value of a special figure determining random value counter for generating a special figure determining random value for use in a lottery for determining a stop symbol in a special figure variable game Update random number counter. In addition, an initial value generation random number counter for generating an initial value of a general winning random number counter for generating a normal winning random number used for determining whether or not the normal game is changed is updated. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a special figure determining random value counter and its initial value generating random number counter, and a regular winning random number counter and its initial value generating random number counter. In step S115, the initial values of two initial value generation random number counters are updated respectively. For example, if the initial value generation random number counter can take a numerical value range of 0 to 99, a value is acquired from the initial value generation random number counter, 1 is added to the acquired value, and then the original initial value generation random number counter is obtained. To remember. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 100, 0 is stored in the original initial value generation random number counter. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. Note that the initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step S207 described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

  Next, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process. The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed. In step S203 following step S201, the WDT is set so that the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial set value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) and no WDT interrupt occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). It is restarted periodically (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms, which is the main controller timer interrupt period).

  In step S205 subsequent to step S203, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of the various sensors 320 including the above-described inner frame opening sensor, lower pan full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to detect the detection signal. The presence / absence is monitored and stored in a signal state storage area provided for each of the various sensors 320 in the RAM 308. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interruption process is started, in step S205, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal. In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 82, winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal) is stored. In step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal present). If there is a match with the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the special figure 1 starting opening 230, and the special figure 2 starting opening 232, or the normal figure starting opening 228 is passed. Judge that there was. In other words, it is determined that a prize has been awarded to the winning ports 226 and 234 and the starting ports 230, 232, and 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S205, the door provided in the RAM 308 is monitored for the presence or absence of a door opening detection signal output from the dispensing control unit 600 that has received the detection result from the front frame door opening sensor 107 that detects opening of the front frame door 106. Store in the detection signal state storage area.

  In step S207 and step S209 following step S205, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then a special figure determination random number value used in the main control unit 300 is generated. The special figure determining random value counter and the common figure winning random value counter for generating the common winning random value are updated. For example, when the numerical value range that can be taken as the special figure determination random value is 0 to 99, the value is acquired from the special figure determination random value counter provided in the RAM 308 in order to generate the special figure determination random value. After adding 1 to the value, it is stored in the original special figure determination random value counter. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 100, 0 is stored in the original special figure determination random value counter. If it is determined that the special figure determination random value counter has made a round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the special figure determination random value counter is acquired. And set in the special figure determination random value counter. For example, a value is acquired from a special figure determination random value counter that fluctuates in a numerical value range of 0 to 99, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. When the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the special figure determination random value counter, and the special figure determination random value counter In addition to setting, the initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the special figure determination random value counter has made one round next. In addition to the initial value storage area for determining that the special figure determining random value counter has made one round next, an initial value storage for determining that the common figure winning random number counter has made one round An area is provided in the RAM 308. The special figure determining random value counter may be provided with a counter for acquiring the random number value for special figure 1 and a counter for acquiring the random value for special figure 2 or the same counter. May be used.

  In step S211 following step S209, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated. Specifically, the value of the special figure timer number determining random value counter for generating the special figure timer number determining random value for determining the symbol changing time in the special figure changing game or its initial value is updated. In addition, the value of the random number value counter for determining the general-purpose timer number for generating the random number value for determining the general-purpose timer number for determining the symbol variation time in the general-purpose variable game or its initial value is updated.

  In step S213 following step S211, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the time for displaying and changing the symbol on the special symbol display device 212 and the time for displaying and changing the symbol on the special symbol display device 212 are counted. Special figure 1 display symbol update timer, Special figure 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the special figure 2 display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined time Various timers including a timer for counting the closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S215 subsequent to step S213, a winning opening counter updating process is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when winning holes 226, 234 and starting holes 230, 232, 228 have been won, the value of the number-of-a-number-ball storage area provided for each winning hole or each starting hole is stored in the RAM 308. Read and add 1 and set to the original prize ball number storage area.

  In step S217 following step S215, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, it is determined whether or not there has been a winning at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the special figure 2 starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting port 228 and the variable winning port 234. Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S205.

  If there is a winning at the special figure 1 starting port 230 and the corresponding special figure 1 reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full (in this example, the full number is 4), the random number value generation circuit (Hard Random Number Circuit) A random number value for hit determination generated by performing predetermined processing on the value stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the starting port 230 of the special figure 1 of 318 is provided in the RAM 308. The special figure determining random value is acquired from the special figure determining random value counter and stored in the special figure 1 random value storage area in the acquisition order. A pair of random numbers for hit determination and special figure determination random values in the special figure 1 random value storage area (hereinafter abbreviated as "special figure 1 random value group" or "special figure 1 start information") is special. 1 is stored in the same number as the number of the special figure 1 hold stored in the hold number storage area. In the special figure 1 random value storage area, each time the special figure 1 holding number decreases, the data of a set of special figure 1 random values having the highest holding order (the first and most recently stored) is stored. In addition to being erased, the remaining special figure 1 random value set data is processed so that the holding order is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 1 holding number increases by one, the new special figure 1 random value set data is added to the next holding order of the special figure 1 random value set data having the lowest (last) holding order. Written.

  When the special figure 2 starting port 232 is won and the corresponding special figure 2 reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full (in this example, the reserved number 4 is full), the random value generation circuit (Hard Random Number Circuit) A random number value for hit determination generated by performing predetermined processing on a value stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 start port 232 of 318 is provided in the RAM 308. The special figure determining random value is acquired from the special figure determining random value counter and stored in the special figure 1 random value storage area in the acquisition order. A pair of random numbers for hit determination and random number for determination of special figure in the special figure 2 random value storage area (hereinafter abbreviated as "special figure 2 random value set" or "special figure 2 start information") 2 is stored as many as the number of the special figure 2 hold stored in the hold number storage area. In the special figure 2 random value storage area, each time the special figure 2 holding number is decreased, the data of the special figure 2 random value pair with the highest holding order is erased, and the remaining special figure 2 random number values are stored. Processing is performed so that the holding order of the set of data is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 2 holding number increases by one, the new special figure 2 random value set data is written in the next holding order of the special figure 2 random value set data having the lowest holding order.

  If there is a winning at the general figure starting port 228 and the corresponding general figure holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is acquired from the general figure winning random number counter as the normal winning random number Store in the usual random number storage area. When there is a winning at the variable winning opening 234, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning opening 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening.

  In step S219 following step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. Note that the output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221 following step S219, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the general diagram state update process in the middle of the normal map change display (the value of the above-described general map display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the general map display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the general map display device 210 performs normal variable display (normal map variable game).

  Also, in the general state update process at the timing when the normal map change display time has elapsed (the timing at which the value of the general map display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), When the 7-segment LED constituting the general-purpose display device 210 is turned on / off to control the display mode, and the normal-map hit flag is off, the general-purpose display is displayed so that the display mode of the off symbol is displayed. The 7 segment LED constituting the device 210 is controlled to be turned on / off. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the on / off drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the universal symbol display device 210 determines the symbol of either one of the winning symbols (the universal symbol A shown in FIG. 83 (d)) or the off symbol (the universal symbol B shown in FIG. 83 (d)). Display. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, for 500 ms). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  In addition, if the result of the usual figure variation game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), A normal operation is set in the setting area, and a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds), a solenoid for driving to open / close the blade member 232a of the special opening 2 232 (a part of various solenoids 332), A signal for holding the 232a in the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. In addition, if the result of the usual figure variation game is out of place, the usual figure out flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure off flag is on, even in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the special map 2 start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is inactive), and the number of the general map variable games that are on hold If the number is 1 or more, whether or not to win the result of the floating figure game based on the random number lottery based on the random number value stored in the above-mentioned common random number value storage area A hit determination to be determined is performed, and in the case of winning, a flag for a normal figure provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of unsuccessful election, the flag for the usual figure is set to OFF. Also, regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the random number value counter for determining the normal timer number for generating the normal timer number determining random value is obtained as the random number value for determining the normal timer number. Based on the random number value for determining the general-purpose timer number, one time for displaying the general-purpose figure on the general-purpose display device 210 is selected from a plurality of variable times, and this variable display time is set as the normal-type variable display time. , It is stored in the usual variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure number-of-holds storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  In step S224 following step S223, special figure prefetching processing is performed. In the special figure prefetching process, when the number of special figure reservations stored in the special figure holding number storage area increases, the start information related to the increased holding is prefetched, and the special symbols related lottery symbols for special figure variable games are drawn. Pre-determination is performed before the success / failure determination in the process. The flow of the special figure prefetch process will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87.

  In the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, a special figure prefetching result storage unit that stores a special figure prefetching result (also referred to as a prior determination result) as a result of executing the special figure prefetching process is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four prefetch results of special figure 1 in this example. Also, in the RAM 308, there is provided a special figure 1 prefetch number storage area for storing the number of special figure 1 prefetch results stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit as the special figure 1 prefetch number. Each time the special figure 1 prefetch number increases by one, the main control unit 300 writes new special figure 1 prefetch result information in the next rank after the special figure 1 prefetch result information of the lowest rank (last).

  When erasing the first special figure 1 start information in the special figure 1 start information storage area, the main controller 300 simultaneously erases the first special figure 1 prefetch result information in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage part. At the same time, 1 is subtracted from the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the special figure 1 prefetch number storage area. When the information of the first special figure 1 prefetch result is deleted, the remaining special figure 1 prefetch information is processed so that the rank of the information is advanced by one.

  The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 2 can store up to four prefetch results of special figure 2 in this example. Also, in the RAM 308, a special figure 2 prefetch number storage area for storing the number of prefetch results of special figure 2 stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit as the special figure 2 prefetch number is provided. Each time the special figure 2 prefetch number increases by one, the main control unit 300 writes new special figure 2 prefetch result information in the next rank after the special figure 2 prefetch result information of the lowest rank (last).

  When erasing the first special figure 2 start information in the special figure 2 start information storage area, the main controller 300 simultaneously erases the first special figure 2 prefetch result information in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit. At the same time, 1 is subtracted from the special figure 2 prefetch number stored in the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area. When the information of the first special figure 2 prefetching result is deleted, the remaining special figure 2 prefetching information is processed so that the rank of the information is advanced by one.

  In the present embodiment, the prefetch process is performed for the increment of the hold, but the special figure prefetch process may be performed for all the hold each time. Also, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), which will be described later, the prefetch result information may be transmitted only in increments, or the prefetch result information for all suspensions may be transmitted.

  Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following plural (in this example, nine) processes is performed in accordance with the special figure 2 state.

  For example, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing of the special figure 2 fluctuation start, a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value of the special figure 2 holding number stored in the special figure 2 holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is shown in FIG. Re-store in the reserved number storage area. At the same time, the blinking of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 is controlled. For example, if the four LEDs of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 in FIG. 81 are LED numbers 1-4 in order from the left to the right in the figure, the LEDs corresponding to the special figure 2 holding number are red, for example, from the youngest LED number. Turn on and turn off the others.

  Also, for example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on. Performs lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns off. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the special figure 2 variable display (special figure 2 variable game). In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  In addition, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 includes flags for a 15R big hit flag, a 16R big hit flag, an 8R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a small hit flag, an outlier flag, a special figure probability fluctuation flag, and an ordinary figure probability fluctuation flag. It is prepared. In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), the 15R big hit flag is off and the 16R big hit flag is off 83 (b) when ON, 8R big hit flag is OFF, 2R big hit flag is OFF, small hit flag is OFF, outlier flag is OFF, special figure probability fluctuation flag is ON, and ordinary figure probability fluctuation flag is ON. Special figure a, 15R big hit flag is off, 16R big hit flag is off, 8R big hit flag is on, 2R big hit flag is off, small hit flag is off, outlier flag is off, special figure probability variation flag is on, and Special figure b when the normal probability fluctuation flag is on, 15R big hit flag is off, 16R big hit flag is off, 8R big hit flag is on, 2R big hit flag is off Is off, small hit flag is off, outlier flag is off, special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, and normal figure probability fluctuation flag is on, special figure c, 15R big hit flag is off, 16R big hit flag is off 8R big hit flag is off, 2R big hit flag is off, small hit flag is off, outlier flag is on, special figure probability variation flag is off, and normal figure probability variation flag is off As shown, the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on / off, and a setting indicating that the special figure 2 is being stopped is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 can display the 16R special big hit symbol (special figure a), the 8R special big hit symbol (special figure b), the 8R special big hit symbol (special figure c), and the off symbol (special figure). d) Confirm and display one of the symbols. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, for 500 ms). With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. Also, if the electric support number stored in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, the subtraction result is changed from 1 to 0. In this case, if the special figure probability is not changing (details will be described later), the time reduction flag is turned off. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In the setting area, the special figure 2 is in operation and waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that the big win by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. Therefore, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until a winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected at the variable winning opening 234, the door is connected to a solenoid for opening / closing the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234 (a part of various solenoids 332). A signal for holding the member 234a in the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in a closed state is output to an opening / closing solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) of the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234, and a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 is provided. Information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that is started at the timing when the door member opening / closing control is repeated a predetermined number of times (16 rounds or 8 rounds in the present embodiment) and finished, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds) In other words, the effect standby period is stored in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to wait for a period during which an image for informing the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is to be ended is displayed. Set the information indicating. Also, if the ordinary probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, the power support number (for example, 100 times) is set in the power support number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 simultaneously with the end of the big hit game, and the RAM 308 Turns on the hourly flag provided in. If the usual probability fluctuation flag is set to OFF, the power support count storage unit does not set the power support count, and the time reduction flag is not turned ON. The short-time state here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. If the short time flag is set to ON at this time, it is in the normal figure high probability (normal figure certain change) state. There is a higher probability of hitting in the general-game variable game in the high-probability state than in the normal-game low-probability state. In addition, in the normal figure high probability state, the fluctuation time of the general figure variable game is shorter than in the normal figure low probability state (normal figure variable short). Furthermore, in the normal high probability state, compared to the normal low probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 is likely to be longer (electrical chew extension). In addition, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. The control state due to the universal figure change, the universal figure change, and the electric Chu extension is collectively referred to as an electric support (starting prize winning support by electric tulip) state. In addition, a time-short state including a control state in which the fluctuation time of the special figure variable game is also shortened is called.

  In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, if the game is in a high probability state during a big hit game, a large number of game balls will be placed in the special figure 2 starting port 232 until a predetermined number of game balls enter the variable prize opening 234 during the big hit game. In order to solve this, there is a problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases and the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium. Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of place, the out-of-game flag is turned on as will be described later. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, first, a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 2 (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed (step S229), and then a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 1 (a special drawing 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. When the number of special figure 2 variable games held is larger than 0, the lottery process or the variable game related to the special figure 1 variable game hold is not performed. The notification of the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variable game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the special figure 2 starting port 232 is notified. 1 is performed in preference to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the starting port 230. In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229), a special figure 2 random value set (starting information) is obtained from the first (most recently stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. Obtaining and determining whether or not to make a big hit, determining whether or not to make a big hit using a determination table (not shown), and determining the time from the start of the variable display in FIG. 2 to the stop display Then, determination of a symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the fluctuation display of the special symbol 2 is performed. After the first special figure 2 random value set is extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area, the storage of the special figure 2 random value set in the special figure 2 random value storage area is cleared, and the special figure 2 Subtract 1 from the number of holds. At this time, the set of the special figure 2 random value extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in the temporary area (an example of the second starting information storage means) provided in the RAM 308, You may make it perform the above-mentioned determination based on the group of the said special figure 2 random value memorize | stored in this temporary area | region.

  In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (in this embodiment, basic command, symbol variation start command, prefetch result information command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, etc. Information that can specify the type of command), bits 0 to 10 are constituted by command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off by the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the 15R big hit flag, 16R big hit flag, 8R big hit flag, 2R big hit flag, small hit flag stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 are not included in the command data. 15R jackpot flag in the case of a symbol variation stop command, including information indicating the flag value, the flag value of the special symbol probability variation flag, and the flag value of each of the common symbol probability variation flags, the timer number selected in the special symbol related lottery process , 16R big hit flag, 8R big hit flag, 2R big hit flag, small hit flag, outlier flag, special figure probability variation flag values, etc., and in the case of 15R big hit (or 15R special big hit) start command, 15R big hit flag Value, number of big hit rounds, special figure probability variation flag value, hourly flag value, etc. In the case of the 16R special jackpot start command, the value of the 16R jackpot flag, the number of jackpot rounds, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the value of the short time flag, etc. In the case of a 2R jackpot start command, including the flag value, hourly flag value, electric support number value, etc., in the case of a 2R jackpot start command, the value of the 2R jackpot flag, the number of jackpot rounds, the special figure probability variation flag value, the value of the hourly flag In the case of a jackpot end command, the special figure probability variation flag value, hourly flag value, electric support number value, etc., and in the case of a winning effect start command and an end effect start command, the special figure probability In the case of a big hit round number designation command, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of big hit rounds, etc. are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning at the special figure 1 starting port 230, presence / absence of winning at the special figure 2 starting port 232, presence / absence of winning at the variable winning port 234, etc. including.

  The prefetch result information command includes prefetch result information stored in the prefetch result storage unit together with the types of special figures 1 and 2 in the command data. The prefetch result information in the prefetch result information command may be only an increment or may include prefetch result information for all suspensions. In the present embodiment, the prefetch result information command includes prefetch result information for all suspensions.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the 15R big hit flag, 16R big hit flag, 8R big hit flag, 2R big hit flag value, special figure probability variation flag value, special figure 1 stored in the RAM 308 as command data are also shown. Information indicating the timer number selected in the related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, and the like are set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the value of the 15R big hit flag, 16R big hit flag, 8R big hit flag, 2R big hit flag, special figure probability variation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. To do. In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described winning prize opening release setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games held, etc. Set the information indicating. In the above-described winning prize closing setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games held, etc. Set the information indicating. In step S233, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information). In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S235 following step S233, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a full tray error is monitored. When the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening / closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable prize opening 234, and the general diagram display device 210 and the special diagram 1 display device 212 via the drive circuits 324, 326, 330. The display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

  In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is ON. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. After that, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.

  Next, the special figure prefetching process (step S224 in FIG. 85) will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the flow of special figure prefetch processing. First, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the special figure 2 start information has increased (step S251). It is determined whether or not the special figure 2 starting information has increased, the special figure 2 holding number stored in the special figure 2 holding number storage area and the special figure 2 prefetching stored in the special figure 2 prefetching number storage area. Compare with the number. The main control unit 300 compares the special figure 2 hold number with the special figure 2 prefetch number, and if the special figure 2 hold number is larger than the special figure 2 prefetch number, the special figure 2 start information is increased. If it is determined that the special figure 2 holding number is equal to the special figure 2 look-ahead number, it is determined that the special figure 2 start information has not increased.

  When it is determined that the special figure 2 start information is increasing, the main control unit 300 acquires a special figure 2 random number set related to the increased special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 start information storage area. Then, the hit determination random number value and the special figure determination random number value in the acquired special figure 2 start information are prefetched. Then, prior to the success / failure determination in the special figure 2 lottery process (step S229), using the pre-read random number for hit determination and the big hit determination table (not shown), the determination of whether or not the hit / failure is a big hit or small Pre-determination is made as to whether it is a win or a loss (step S252). Next, the main control unit 300 uses the pre-read special figure determination random value and the special figure determination table (not shown) to predetermine a symbol (stopped symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the fluctuation display of the special diagram 2 ( Step S252). Note that these pre-determination processes are executed by referring to the jackpot determination table and special figure determination table (see FIGS. 89 and 90) used at the time of determination of success / failure, but a special determination table is prepared for the prefetching process. May be.

  Next, the main control unit 300 uses the pre-determined special figure 2 variable game stop symbol information as a special figure 2 prefetching result in the preemptive space of the special figure 2 prefetching result storage unit provided in the RAM 308. Store (step S253), and proceed to step S254. If the main control unit 300 determines in step S251 that the special figure 2 start information has not increased, the main control unit 300 proceeds to step S254 without executing steps S252 and S253.

  Next, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the special figure 1 start information has increased (step S254). The determination as to whether or not the special figure 1 starting information has increased is made, for example, in the same manner as in the special figure 2, the special figure 1 reservation number stored in the special figure 1 reservation number storage area and the special figure 1 prefetch number storage area This is performed by comparing the number of special figure 1 look-ahead stored in FIG. If it is determined that the special figure 1 start information has increased, the process proceeds to step S255, and if it is determined that the special figure 1 start information has not increased, the special figure prefetch process is terminated.

  In step S <b> 255, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not non-electric support is being performed as an undetermined information setting condition. As the undetermined information setting condition, when the pre-reading result notification time is included in the electric support period, it is included in the jackpot game, or the case where the jackpot symbol is pre-determined for the suspension related to the special figure 1 etc. Can be mentioned.

  If the main control unit 300 determines that the undetermined information setting condition is not established, the main control unit 300 acquires a set of special figure 1 random number values related to the increased special figure 1 start information from the special figure 1 start information storage area. Then, the hit determination random number value and the special figure determination random number value in the acquired special figure 1 start information are prefetched. Prior to the success / failure determination in the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231), using the pre-determined random number for hit determination and the big hit determination table (not shown), whether or not the win / fail determination becomes a big hit or small A pre-determination is made as to whether it is a win or a loss (step S256). Next, the main control unit 300 uses the pre-read special figure determination random value and the special figure determination table (not shown) to pre-determine a symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the fluctuation display of the special diagram 1 ( Step S256). Note that these pre-determination processes are executed by referring to the jackpot determination table and special figure determination table (see FIGS. 89 and 90) used at the time of determination of success / failure, but a special determination table is prepared for the prefetching process. May be.

  Next, the main control unit 300 stores the pre-determined special figure 1 variable game stop symbol as a special figure 1 prefetching result in the earliest free area of the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit provided in the RAM 308. (Step S257), the special figure prefetching process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S255 that the undetermined information setting condition is satisfied, the main control unit 300 does not prefetch the increased special figure 1 start information, and prefetches the "undecided" information for special figure 1 The result is stored in the result storage unit, and the special figure prefetching process is terminated.

  FIG. 87 illustrates a state where the prefetch result is stored in the prefetch result storage unit. FIG. 87A illustrates a state in which the prefetch result is stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit, and FIG. 87B illustrates the prefetch result stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit. This is an example of the state being performed. FIG. 87C illustrates information stored in the special chart 1 prefetch result storage unit in the electric support.

  As shown in FIG. 87 (a), the pre-reading result storage unit for special figure 1 has, for example, the same number (four in this embodiment) of storage areas “pre-reading result 1” to the reserveable number of special figure 1 variable games. It has “look-ahead result 4”. The storage areas “prefetch result 1” to “prefetch result 4” are associated with the reservation order of the special figure 1 start information storage area.

  As shown in FIG. 87 (b), the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in this embodiment) of storage areas "prefetch result 1" to the number of special figure 2 variable games that can be held. It has “look-ahead result 4”. The storage areas “prefetch result 1” to “prefetch result 4” are associated with the reservation order of the special figure 2 start information storage area.

  In FIG. 87A, “prefetch result 1” indicates that the stop symbol “special drawing F” is stored as the prefetch result 1. Similarly, the stop symbol “special diagram F” is stored in “prefetch result 2”, the stop symbol “special diagram A” is stored in “prefetch result 3”, and the stop symbol “special” is stored in “prefetch result 4”. FIG. F ”is stored.

  In FIG. 87 (b), the stop symbol “special drawing d” is stored in “prefetch result 1”, and the state in which stop symbol information is not stored in “prefetch result 2” to “prefetch result 4” is illustrated. Has been. In FIG. 89, a state in which information such as a stop symbol is not stored is expressed as “none”.

  In FIG. 87 (c), “unread information” is stored in “prefetch result 1” instead of the stop symbol. When undetermined information is stored, it is expressed as “undetermined information”. In “prefetch result 2” to “prefetch result 4”, “none” in which information such as stop symbols is not stored is stored.

  Next, the special drawing 1 related lottery process in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment executes, for example, the special drawing 1 related lottery process based on the flow shown in FIG. The special figure 1 related lottery process is executed, for example, when the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 controls the ROM 306, the RAM 308, and the like.

  FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing an exemplary flow of the special figure 1 related lottery process. As shown in FIG. 88, in the special figure 1 related lottery process, first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol or special electric accessory is in operation, that is, whether or not a special figure variable game or a winning game is in progress (step S301). . For example, if the main control unit 300 determines that the special figure variable game or the winning game is in progress, the main control unit 300 ends the special figure 1 related lottery process without executing steps S303 to S321 to be described later, and during the special figure variable game or the winning game. If it is determined that it is not, the process proceeds to step S303.

  In step S303 subsequent to step S301, it is determined whether or not there is a holding ball, that is, whether or not a special figure 1 random number set is stored in the special figure 1 holding number storage area. For example, if the main control unit 300 determines that the special figure 1 random value pair is stored in the special figure 1 holding number storage area, the main control unit 300 proceeds to step S305, and the special figure 1 random value set stores the special figure 1 holding number storage area. If it is determined that it is not stored in the area, the special drawing 1 related lottery process is terminated without executing steps S305 to S321 described later.

  In step S305 subsequent to step S303, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 probability variation flag is in an on state. For example, if the main control unit 300 determines that the special figure 1 probability variation flag is on, the main control unit 300 proceeds to step S307, and if it determines that the flag is not on, the main control unit 300 proceeds to step S309.

  In step S307 subsequent to step S305, the success / failure determination is executed using the high / failure determination probability table [special view 1] for special view 1 described later with reference to FIG. 89 (b). Since the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a gaming machine of a special figure 2 priority change machine that changes in preference to the special figure 2 over the special figure 1, for example, the main control unit 300 has a special figure 2 reservation number storage area. The special figure 2 random value set stored first is read, and if the special figure 2 random value set is not stored, the special figure 1 random value stored first in the special figure 1 holding number storage area. , And a determination of success / failure is performed with reference to the high probability table for determination of success / failure [Special Figure 1] shown in FIG. 89B, and the process proceeds to step S311.

  On the other hand, in step S309 subsequent to step S305, the success / failure determination is executed by using a low / probability determination probability table [Special Figure 1] for special figure 1 described later with reference to FIG. 89 (a). The processing in step S309 is the same as that in step S307 except that the table to be referred to in the determination of success / failure is a low probability table for success / failure determination [see FIG. 1] shown in FIG. . When the process of step S309 ends, the main control unit 300 proceeds to step S311.

  In step S311 following step S307 or step S309, it is determined whether or not the determination result is a big hit. For example, if the main control unit 300 determines that the determination result is a big hit, the process proceeds to step S319. If the main control unit 300 determines that the determination result is not a big hit, the process proceeds to step S313.

  In step S319 following step S311, a big hit symbol is determined. For example, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure determination table for special figure 1 shown in FIG. Referring to FIG. 1], a symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the special figure 1 variable game is determined, and the process proceeds to step S321.

  On the other hand, in step S313 following step S311, it is determined whether or not the determination result is a small hit. For example, if the main control unit 300 determines that the determination result is a small hit, the process proceeds to step S317, and if the determination result is not a small hit, the main control unit 300 proceeds to step S315.

  In step S317 subsequent to step S313, a small hit symbol is determined. For example, the main control unit 300 refers to the special figure determination table [Special Figure 1] shown in FIG. 92 (a) for the special figure determination random value in the special figure 1 random value set used for the determination. Then, the stop symbol after the special figure 1 variable game is determined, and the process proceeds to step S321. In the present embodiment, since there is one small hit symbol, it is determined as “Special E” with a probability of 100%.

  On the other hand, in step S315 subsequent to step S313, a missing symbol is determined. Referring to the special figure determination table [Special Figure 1] shown in FIG. 90 (a), the stop symbol after the special figure 1 variable game is determined, and the process proceeds to Step S321. In the present embodiment, since there is only one off symbol, it is determined as “special drawing F” with a probability of 100%.

  In step S321 following step S315, S317, or S319, the variation time is determined according to the symbol. For example, the main control unit 300 refers to the special figure 1 fluctuation time determination table shown in FIG. 91 to determine the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display in the special figure 1 fluctuation game. Since the special drawing 2 related lottery process is the same, the description thereof is omitted.

  Next, the success / failure determination table and the special figure determination table used in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 and 90. FIG. The tables shown in FIGS. 89 and 90 are stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, for example. 89 (a) to 89 (d) are used in the success / failure determination process of special figure 1 or special figure 2 in special figure 1 or special figure 2 related lottery process (steps S229 and S231) of the main control unit timer interruption process. An example of the success / failure determination table is shown. FIG. 89 (a) shows the table for special figure 1 used during the special figure low probability, and FIG. 89 (b) shows the table for special figure 1 used during the special figure high probability. FIG. 89 (c) shows a table for special figure 2 used during the special figure low probability, and FIG. 89 (d) shows a table for special figure 2 used during the special figure high probability.

  89 (a) and 89 (b), the success / failure determination table [Special Figure 1] includes “Special Figure Probability” in the first column from the left, “Random Number Range” in the second column, “Random Number Range” in the third column, It is composed of items of “result of determination”. The “low probability” in the “special figure probability” in the first column shown in FIG. 89 (a) indicates that the gaming state at the time of the determination is a special figure low probability state. The “random number range” in the second column indicates a numerical range (0 to 65535) of random numbers to be compared with the acquired hit determination random number value. The “random number range” is divided into four values of a numerical value 0 to 10000, a numerical value 10001 to 10219, a numerical value 10220 to 10383, and a numerical value 10384 to 65535. In the third column, the “results of success / failure determination” is assigned “low probability”, “0” to 10000, “loss” corresponding to the values 10384 to 65535, and “big hit” corresponding to the values 10001 to 10219. The “small hit” is assigned corresponding to the numerical values 10220 to 10383.

  “High probability” in the “special figure probability” in the first column shown in FIG. 89 (b) indicates that the gaming state at the time of the determination is a special figure high probability state. The “random number range” in the second column indicates a numerical range (0 to 65535) of random numbers to be compared with the acquired hit determination random number value. The “random number range” is divided into four values of a numerical value 0 to 10000, a numerical value 10001 to 12185, a numerical value 12186 to 12349, and a numerical value 12350 to 65535. In the third column, “Win / Fail determination result” is assigned “high probability”, “0” to 10000, “loss” corresponding to the values 12350 to 65535, and “big hit” corresponding to the values 10001 to 12185. , “Small hit” is assigned corresponding to the numerical values 12186 to 12349.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 determines whether the result of the special figure 1 variable game is winning (winning) or not winning (missing) with respect to the acquired random number for hit determination. The success / failure determination is performed with reference to the determination table [Special Figure 1]. For example, if the gaming state at the time of the determination of success / failure is a special figure high probability state, the basic circuit 302 reads out the high probability table for determination of success / failure [Special Figure 1] shown in FIG. When the gaming state is a special figure low probability state, the probability determination low probability table [Special figure 1] shown in FIG. 89 (a) is read from the ROM 306 and referred to.

  FIG. 89 (c) shows a table for special figure 2 used during the special figure low probability, and FIG. 89 (d) shows a table for special figure 2 used during the special figure high probability. 89 (c) and 89 (d), the success / failure determination table [Special Figure 2] has “Special Figure Probability” in the first column from the left, “Random Number Range” in the second column, “Random Number Range” in the third column, It is composed of items of “result of determination”. “Low probability” in the “special figure probability” in the first column shown in FIG. 89 (c) indicates that the gaming state at the time of the determination is a special figure low probability state. The “random number range” in the second column indicates a numerical range (0 to 65535) of random numbers to be compared with the acquired hit determination random number value. The “random number range” is divided into three values: a numerical value 0 to 10000, a numerical value 10001 to 10219, and a numerical value 10220 to 65535. In the third column, the “result of determination” is assigned “low probability”, “0” to 10000, “loss” corresponding to the values 10220 to 65535, and “big hit” corresponding to the values 10001 to 10219. ing. In FIG. 2, “small hit” is not assigned.

  The “high probability” in the “special figure probability” in the first column shown in FIG. 89 (d) indicates that the gaming state at the time of the determination is a special figure high probability state. The “random number range” in the second column indicates a numerical range (0 to 65535) of random numbers to be compared with the acquired hit determination random number value. The “random number range” is divided into three values: a numerical value 0 to 10,000, a numerical value 10001 to 12185, and a numerical value 12186 to 65535. In the third column, “Win / Fail determination result” is assigned “high probability”, “0” to “10000”, “loss” corresponding to the values 12186 to 65535, and “big hit” corresponding to the values 10001 to 12185. ing. In FIG. 2, “small hit” is not assigned.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 determines whether the result of the special figure 2 variable game is winning (winning) or not winning (missing) with respect to the acquired random number for hit determination. The success / failure determination is performed with reference to the determination table [Special Figure 2]. For example, if the gaming state at the time of the determination of success / failure is a special figure high probability state, the basic circuit 302 reads the high probability table for determination of success / failure [Special Figure 2] shown in FIG. When the gaming state is a special figure low probability state, the probability determination low probability table [special figure 2] shown in FIG. 89C is read from the ROM 306 and referred to.

  In the present embodiment, the small hit probability of special figure 2 is set to 0 as one example in which the small hit probability of special figure 2 is lower than the small hit probability of special figure 1. Of course, a special random number range may be set in the special figure 2 as a small hit. Further, the small hit probability of special figure 2 may be the same as or higher than special figure 1.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the special figure 1 win / fail judgment result by the special figure 1 variable game is selected with the first probability, and the special figure 2 win / fail judgment result by the special figure 2 variable game is obtained by the first probability. Small hits are selected with a lower second probability.

  The pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is a special figure 2 priority change machine. Further, the small hit probability of the special figure 2 success / failure determination result based on the special figure 2 variable game is lower than the small hit probability of the special figure 1 success / failure determination result based on the special figure 1 variable game. For this reason, during the electric support, a penalty is given to the player who does not play the game intended by the pachinko machine developer so as to increase the small hit, and the pachinko machine developer is encouraged to play the game as intended. There are cases where it is possible. For example, in the case where the special figure 2 starting port is arranged in the right area of the game board 200, the developer intends that the player makes a right turn in the electric support state. In this case, if the player does not make a right strike and makes a left strike different from the intention of the developer, if the player is in a disadvantageous state, the player thinks that it is more advantageous to hit the right. There is a case that can be made. Further, since the small hit probability of the special figure 2 win / fail determination result based on the special figure 2 variable game is low, the small hit in the electric support is often the special figure 1 win / fail determination result based on the special figure 1 variable game. Therefore, by changing the production that can be changed when a predetermined change condition is established, the player is indirectly notified that the special figure 2 starting port 232 has not entered too much, thereby suppressing gambling. May be possible.

  In addition, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the small hit probability of the special figure 2 success / failure determination result based on the special figure 2 variable game is lower than the small hit probability of the special figure 1 success / failure determination result based on the special figure 1 variable game. Therefore, by reducing the small hits that are disadvantageous in terms of performance in the special figure 2 variable game, it is possible to highlight that the special figure 2 variable game is more advantageous than the special figure 1 variable game and to improve the interest of the game. There is a case.

  FIG. 90 shows a special figure determination table. FIG. 90A shows a special figure determination table [special figure 1] for special figure 1. FIG. FIG. 90B shows a special figure determination table for special figure 2 [special figure 2]. In FIG. 90 (a), the special figure determination table [special figure 1] is composed of items of "result / no-good determination result", "random number range", and "stop symbol" from the left column. The “win / fail judgment result” in the left column is divided into “big hit”, “small hit”, and “out of line”. “Big hit” indicates a case where it is determined as “big hit” as a result of the hit determination using the determination table [special figure 1] shown in FIG. 89 (a) or 89 (b). As a result of the success / failure determination using the special figure success / failure determination table [Special Figure 1], the case where “small hit” is determined is shown, and “out” indicates the success / failure using the special figure success / failure determination table [Special Figure 1]. As a result of the determination, a case where it is determined as “disconnected” is shown.

  The item “random number range” in the middle column of the table shown in FIG. 90A indicates the numerical range of random numbers to be compared with the acquired special figure determination random number value. The “random number range” is divided into four values of 0-24, numerical values 25-49, numerical values 50-54, and numerical values 55-99, corresponding to the item “big hit” in the left column “result of judgment”. Corresponding to “small hit”, it is divided into one of numerical values 0 to 99, and corresponding to “off”, it is divided into one of numerical values 0 to 99.

  The item “stop symbol” in the right column of the table shown in FIG. 90A represents a stop symbol in the special figure 1 variable game. The “stop symbol” is “big hit” and the range of the design random number corresponds to the numerical values 0 to 24, “special drawing A (15R probability variation)”, the numerical values 25 to 49, “special drawing B (15R)”, Stop symbols of “special drawing C (sudden probability change)” corresponding to numerical values 50 to 54 and “special drawing D (latency probability change)” corresponding to numerical values 55 to 99 are assigned. In addition, the “stop symbol” is assigned a stop symbol pattern of “special drawing E (small hit)” corresponding to the value “0” to “99” in the “random hit” range. Further, the “stop symbol” is assigned a stop symbol pattern of “special drawing F (missing)” corresponding to “0” and “99” in the range of the symbol random number.

  As described above, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 causes the special figure 1 display device 212 to display any one of the special figures A to F when the determination result based on the ball entering the special figure 1 starting port 230 is a big hit. Whether to stop the display of the stop symbol pattern is determined with reference to the special figure determination table [Special Figure 1] for the acquired special figure determination random value. In addition, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 displays the stop symbol form of the special figure E on the special figure 1 display device 212 when the determination result based on the entrance to the special figure 1 starting port 230 is a small hit. Decide what to do. Further, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 causes the special figure 1 display device 212 to stop and display the stop symbol form of the special figure F when the determination result based on the winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230 is out of place. To decide.

  In FIG. 90 (b), the special figure determination table [special figure 2] is composed of items of "result / no-good determination result", "random number range", and "stop symbol" from the left column. In order to facilitate understanding, a “description of symbol” is attached to the right side of the “stop symbol”. The “win / fail judgment result” in the left column is divided into “big hit”, “small hit”, and “out of line”. “Big hit” indicates a case where it is determined as “big hit” as a result of the hit determination using the determination table [special drawing 2] shown in FIG. 89 (c) or FIG. 89 (d). The case where it is determined as “out of” as a result of the determination as to whether or not the figure determination table [Special Figure 2] is used is shown.

  The item “random number range” in the middle column of the table shown in FIG. 90B indicates the numerical range of random numbers to be compared with the acquired special figure determination random number value. “Random number range” is divided into three values of 0 to 69, 70 to 74, and 75 to 99 corresponding to the item “big hit” in the left column “result of judgment”, and corresponds to “out of” Thus, it is divided into one of numerical values 0 to 99.

  The item “stop symbol” in the right column of the table shown in FIG. 90B represents a stop symbol in the special figure 2 variable game. The “stop symbol” is “big hit” and the range of the design random number corresponds to the numerical values 0 to 69, “special diagram a (16R probability variation)”, and the numerical value 70 to 74 corresponds to “special diagram b (8R probability variation)”. , Corresponding to the numerical values 75 to 99, the special symbol c (8R) stop symbol form is respectively assigned. Further, the “stop symbol” is assigned a stop symbol pattern of “special drawing d (missing)” corresponding to “0” and “99” in the range of the symbol random number.

  As described above, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 causes the special figure 2 display device 214 to display any one of the special figure a to the special figure c when the success / failure determination result based on the ball entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 is a big hit. It is determined with reference to the special figure determination table [special figure 2] with respect to the acquired special figure determination random value whether or not the stop symbol pattern is to be stopped and displayed. Further, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 causes the special figure 2 display device 214 to stop and display the stop symbol form of the special figure d when the determination result based on the winning in the special figure 2 starting port 232 is out of place. To decide.

  FIG. 91 shows an example of the special figure 1 variable display time determination table for determining the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation stop display in the special figure 1 variable game. The special figure 1 variable display time determination table is mainly used in the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) of the main control unit timer interruption process. The data table shown in FIG. 91 is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, for example. As shown in FIG. 91, the special figure 1 variable display time determination table has four items of “stop symbol”, “variable time”, “random number selection range”, and “effect mode on the decorative symbol display device” from the left column. It is configured.

  In the special figure 1 variable time determination table, sub-tables are divided for each item “stop symbol”. In the present embodiment, the first to fifth sub-tables are provided. The first sub-table is used when the “stop symbol” is special figure A or special figure B. This sub-table is used in common regardless of whether the game state at the time of the determination is a power support or a non-power support. The “random number selection range” in the first sub-table is divided into three values: a numerical value 0 to 1000, a numerical value 1001 to 20000, and a numerical value 20001 to 65535. If the acquired random number for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of the numerical value 0 to 1000, the effect that the variation time is 15000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is per normal reach is selected. If the random number for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of 1001 to 20000, an effect in which the variation time is 45000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is per super reach A is selected. If the special figure timer number determination random number value is in the range of numerical values 20001 to 65535, an effect in which the variation time is 65000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is per super reach B is selected.

  The second sub-table is used when the “stop symbol” is special figure C. This sub-table is used in common regardless of whether the game state at the time of the determination is a power support or a non-power support. The “random number selection range” in the second sub-table is divided into three values: a numerical value 0 to 30000, a numerical value 30001 to 45000, and a numerical value 45001 to 65535. If the acquired special figure timer number determination random number value is within the range of the numerical value 0 to 30000, the effect that the variation time is 12000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is the chance stop is selected. If the random number for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of the numbers 30001 to 45000, the effect that the variation time is 45000 ms and the effect on the decorative symbol display device 208 is Super reach A lose / chance stop is selected. . Here, the super reach A losing / chance stop is a display in which the chance eye is stopped after the effect of notifying the decorative symbol display device 208 that the super reach A is off is completed. The special figure stop symbol is stopped and displayed after at least the chance display. If the special figure timer number determination random number value is within the range of values 45001 to 65535, an effect that the variation time is 65000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is Super reach B loss / chance stop is selected. . Here, the super reach B losing / chance eye stop is a display that stops the chance eye after the effect of notifying the decorative symbol display device 208 that the super reach B is off is completed. The special figure stop symbol is stopped and displayed after at least the chance display.

  The third sub-table is used when the “stop symbol” is special figure D or special figure E. This sub-table is used in common regardless of whether the game state at the time of the determination is a power support or a non-power support. The “random number selection range” in the third sub-table is divided into two values, a numerical value 0 to 30000 and a numerical value 30001 to 65535. If the acquired special figure timer number determination random number value is within the range of the numerical value 0 to 30000, the effect that the variation time is 12000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is the chance stop is selected. If the random number value for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of the numerical values 30001 to 65535, an effect that the variation time is 15000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is the normal reach lose / chance stop is selected. Here, the normal reach loss / chance eye stop is a display for stopping the chance eye after the effect of notifying the decorative symbol display device 208 that the normal reach is off is completed. The special figure stop symbol is stopped and displayed after at least the chance display.

  The fourth sub-table is used when the “stop symbol” is the special figure F, the game state at the time of the determination of success / failure is the non-electric support, and the number of holds in the special figure 1 is three. The “random number selection range” in the fourth sub-table is divided into four values of a numerical value 0 to 65000, a numerical value 65001 to 65400, a numerical value 65401 to 65500, and a numerical value 65501 to 65535. If the acquired random number for determining the special figure timer number is in the range of the numerical value 0 to 65000, the effect that the variation time is 3000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is shortened is selected. If the random number value for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of the numerical values 65001 to 65400, the effect that the variation time is 10,000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is normal reach loss is selected. If the special figure timer number determination random number value is within the range of numerical values 65401 to 65500, an effect in which the variation time is 40,000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is Super reach A lose is selected. If the special figure timer number determination random number value is within the range of numerical values 65501 to 65535, an effect in which the variation time is 60000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is Super reach B loss is selected.

  The fifth sub-table is for the case where the stop symbol is special figure F, the game state at the time of determination of success / failure is non-electric support and the number of holdings of special figure 1 is 0 to 2, or the game at the time of determination of success / failure It is used when the status is electric support and the number of holds in Fig. 1 is 0-3. The “random number selection range” in the fifth sub-table is divided into four values of a numerical value 0 to 50000, a numerical value 50001 to 60000, a numerical value 60001 to 65000, and a numerical value 65001 to 65535. If the acquired special figure timer number determination random number value is in the range of the numerical value 0 to 50000, the effect that the variation time is 8000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is lost is selected. If the random number value for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of the numerical values 50001 to 60000, the effect that the variation time is 10000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is normal reach loss is selected. If the special figure timer number determination random number value is in the range of 60001 to 65000, an effect in which the effect time on the decorative symbol display device 208 is Super Reach A Loss with a variation time of 40000 ms is selected. If the special figure timer number determination random number value is within the range of the numerical values 65001 to 65535, an effect in which the variation time is 60000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is Super reach B loss is selected.

  FIG. 92 shows an example of the special figure 2 fluctuation display time determination table for determining the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation stop display in the special figure 2 fluctuation game. The special figure 2 variable display time determination table is mainly used in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) of the main control unit timer interrupt process. The data table shown in FIG. 92 is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, for example. As shown in FIG. 92, the special figure 2 variable display time determination table includes four items of “stop symbol”, “variable time”, “random number selection range”, and “effect mode on the decorative symbol display device” from the left column. It is configured.

  In the special figure 2 variable time determination table, sub-tables are divided for each item “stop symbol”. In the present embodiment, there are four sub-tables from first to fourth. The first sub-table is used when the stop symbol is special figure a to special figure c. This sub-table is used in common regardless of whether the game state at the time of the determination is a power support or a non-power support. The “random number selection range” in the first sub-table is divided into three values: a numerical value 0 to 1000, a numerical value 1001 to 20000, and a numerical value 20001 to 65535. If the acquired random number for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of the numerical value 0 to 1000, the effect that the variation time is 15000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is per normal reach is selected. If the random number for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of 1001 to 20000, an effect in which the variation time is 45000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is per super reach A is selected. If the special figure timer number determination random number value is in the range of numerical values 20001 to 65535, an effect in which the variation time is 65000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is per super reach B is selected.

  The second sub-table is used when the “stop symbol” is the special figure d, and the gaming state at the time of the determination of success / failure is the electric support, and the number of holds in the special figure 2 is 1 to 3. The “random number selection range” in the second sub-table is divided into one of numerical values 0 to 65535. When the acquired random number for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of the numerical value 0 to 65535, the effect that the variation time is 1500 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is an extremely shortened loss is selected.

  The third sub-table is used when the “stop symbol” is the special figure d, and the gaming state at the time of the determination of success / failure is the electric support, and the holding number of the special figure 2 is 0. The “random number selection range” in the third sub-table is divided into one of numerical values 0 to 65535. If the acquired special figure timer number determination random number value is in the range of numerical values 0 to 65535, an effect in which the effect time on the decorative symbol display device 208 is lost with a variation time of 8000 ms is selected.

  The fourth sub-table is used when the “stop symbol” is the special figure d, the game state at the time of the determination of success / failure is non-electric support, and the number of holds in the special figure 2 is 0-3. The “random number selection range” in the fourth sub-table is divided into four values: a numerical value 0 to 50000, a numerical value 50001 to 60000, a numerical value 60001 to 65000, and a numerical value 65001 to 65535. If the acquired special figure timer number determination random number value is in the range of the numerical value 0 to 50000, the effect that the variation time is 8000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is lost is selected. If the random number value for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of the numerical values 50001 to 60000, the effect that the variation time is 10000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is normal reach loss is selected. If the special figure timer number determination random number value is in the range of 60001 to 65000, an effect in which the effect time on the decorative symbol display device 208 is Super Reach A Loss with a variation time of 40000 ms is selected. If the special figure timer number determination random number value is within the range of the numerical values 65001 to 65535, an effect in which the variation time is 60000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is Super reach B loss is selected.

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 6B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing (strobe interrupt processing) of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 6C is a flowchart of the timer variable update interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 4D is a flowchart of the image control process of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, in step S401 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. This initialization process takes about 30 seconds, for example.

  In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. . In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S409 following step S407, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated. Details of the effect control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S411 subsequent to step S409, when it is detected that the chance button has been pressed, the effect data updated in step S409 is changed to effect data corresponding to the press of the chance button.

  In step S413 subsequent to step S411, if there is a command to the VDP 434 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step S415 subsequent to step S413, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S417 following step S415, if there is a command to the various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S419 following step S417, if there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S421 following step S419, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S409, the control command is set to be output, and the process returns to step S403. .

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S501 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). Execute in the cycle. In step S601 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 in the first sub control unit main process shown in FIG. Is stored in the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S603 subsequent to step S601, transmission of a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S421 in the main process of the first sub-control unit 400, update processing of random numbers for other effects, and the like are performed.

  Next, the image control process in step S413 in the main process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing. In step S701, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 436. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S703 following step S701, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S705. Wait for the input signal to be input. In step S705, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S701, the CPU 404 has information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis and image size of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 sets parameters according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

  In step S707 following step S705, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 404. In step S709 following step S707, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S711. Waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input. In step S711, a scene display counter which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

  Next, the processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 8C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500.

  First, in step S801 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S801. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S803 following step S801, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S805. . In step S805, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S807 following step S805, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S809 following step S807, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S807, the effect data corresponding to this command is read from the ROM 506, and if the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

  In step S811 following step S809, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game table frame lamp 542, the command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S813 following step S811, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516, and the process returns to step S803.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects the strobe signal output from the first sub control unit 400. In step S901 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first sub control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, the second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and a timer interrupt process is performed in response to this timer interrupt. Execute in the cycle. In step S1001, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S803 in the second sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 94A, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S803, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S1003 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, an effect random number update process is performed.

  Next, Example 1 of the rendering operation by the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 to 98. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the flow of a selection effect control process that is one of the effect control processes (step S409) of the main process in the first sub-control unit 400. In the selection effect control process, the first sub-control unit 400 first determines whether it is the start timing of the selection effect (step S1101). Here, the start timing of the selection effect may be, for example, a standby state in which the symbol variation game is not performed (including during the demonstration screen), or may be during a special diagram variation game. Further, the gaming state may be any of a normal gaming state, a probability variation state, a short time state, and the like. Further, it may be a predetermined round during the jackpot game (for example, the first round of 15R jackpot), or all the rounds during the jackpot game (for example, excluding the start effect and end effect of the jackpot game). Good.

  The first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S1103 if it is determined in step S1101 that it is the selection effect start timing, and ends the selection effect control process if it is determined that it is not the selection effect start timing. When the process proceeds to step S1103, the first sub-control unit 400 displays a selection effect. As a display example of the selection effect, for example, description of the effect (for example, performance of the song by the speaker 120) selected by the player at a predetermined position of the decorative symbol display device 208 (for example, a song name or description of the song) ) Is included. Also, displaying the effects that can be selected by the player is also included in the display of the selected effects. For example, a display of an effect list for causing the player to select one of a plurality of effects, and a display for prompting the player to select (for example, a display prompting the player to press the chance button 136) are also included in the display of the selected effect. .

  When the selection effect is displayed, the first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not a selection operation by the player has been performed (step S1105). Examples of the selection operation include, for example, pressing the chance button 136, pressing any one of the direction keys 139, and the like. If it is determined in step S1105 that there is no selection operation, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S1109 and performs a continuation process of the currently executed effect (for example, effect A and effect α in FIG. 96) to select the selected effect. The control process ends. If it is determined in step S1105 that there has been a selection operation, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S1107 and determines whether it is the production start timing. If it is determined in step S1107 that it is not the production start timing, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S1109 and performs the continuation processing of the currently executed production (for example, production A and production α in FIG. 96) to select the production effect. The control process ends. If it is determined in step S1107 that it is the production start timing, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S1111 and selects a process for executing the selected production (eg, production B, production β in FIG. 96). The effect control process ends.

  Examples of the production start timing in step S1107 include the elapse of a specified time, the end of the delay time until the selection result is reflected, and the start timing of the special figure variable game. The execution of the selected effect in step S1111 includes transmitting a command related to the selected effect to each control means (image, sound, etc.).

  FIG. 96 shows the temporal operation of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 1 according to the present embodiment. The horizontal axis of FIG. 96 shows a time series, and time has passed from left to right. In the upper part of FIG. 96, t0 to t6 indicate various operations, or the start and end times of production. The middle part of FIG. 96 shows the execution state of various effects by the effect means. The first effect means of this example includes a decorative symbol display device 208, and the second effect means includes a speaker 120. The lower part shows the operating means. The operation means of this example includes a chance button 136, for example.

  First, at time t0, the first effect means is executing effect A (eg, included in the first effect) or starts effect A from time t0, and the second effect at time t0. It is assumed that the effect means is executing the effect α (eg, included in the first effect) or starts the effect α from the time point t0. Further, it is assumed that at time t0, the operation means is in a selectable period in which the player can select an effect by pressing the chance button 136 or at the start of the period. When the player presses the chance button 136 of the operation means at a time t1 when a certain time has elapsed from time t0, the first effect means ends the effect A and the effect B (for example, included in the second effect). To start). In the second effect means, the effect α ends and the effect β (for example, included in the second effect) is started. In addition, on the operation means, on the condition that the chance button 136 is pressed, the selectable period ends at the time t1, and the selectable period in which the effect selection is impossible is started. The non-selectable period is a period during which the detection result of the sensor is not accepted even if the selection operation is performed. The non-selectable period is a predetermined T seconds.

  Even if the player depresses the chance button 136 at, for example, time t2 during the non-selectable period, the selection is not accepted, so the effects of both the first effect means and the second effect means are not changed.

  The operation means enters the selectable period again after time t3 when the predetermined T seconds elapse and the selectable period ends. When the player depresses the chance button 136 of the operation means at a time t4 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t3, the effect B is ended and the effect C is started in the first effect means. In the second effect means, the effect β ends and the effect γ starts. Further, the selectable period of the operation means ends at the time t4, and the selectable period in which the effect selection is impossible is started. The non-selectable period is a predetermined T seconds.

  Even if the player presses the chance button 136 during the non-selectable period, the selection is not accepted, so the effects of both the first effect means and the second effect means are not changed.

  The operation means again enters the selectable period from time t5 after the selectable period ends. When the player presses the chance button 136 of the operation means at a time t6 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t5, the effect C is ended and the effect D is started in the first effect means. In the second effect means, the effect γ ends and the effect δ starts.

  According to this embodiment, since the operation result of the selection means is not accepted (invalidated) for T seconds after the selected production starts, the player cannot select the production. Since the player always sees the selected effect for a certain period, it may be possible to prevent an unintended change of the effect due to an erroneous operation.

  97 and 98 show selection effects executed by the first effect means and the second effect means of the pachinko machine 100 in the first embodiment. 97 (a) to 97 (d) and FIG. 98 (a) show the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 included in the first effect means. 97 (A) to 97 (D) and FIG. 98 (A) schematically show the speaker 120 included in the second effect means. In each figure, (a) and (A), (b) and (B), (c) and (C), and (d) and (D) show the production of the same period, respectively.

  FIG. 97A shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t0 shown in FIG. At the time t0, the special figure variation game is executed, and in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decoration 0 to decoration 9 sequentially move from the top to the bottom in the left middle right decorative symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c. The decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner (indicated by a downward arrow in the figure). In the lower right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, for example, a selection effect display area 800 is provided in a horizontally-long rectangular frame shape. In the selected effect display area 800, an effect A is displayed in which a character string “M1: Might be there ...” is displayed. In the selection effect in this example, the name of the song flowing from the speaker 120 is displayed in characters. As shown in FIG. 97 (A), at the time point t0, an effect α in which a song 810 having a song name “May be there ...” flows from the speaker 120.

  FIG. 97 (b) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t1 shown in FIG. As described with reference to FIG. 96, the time point t1 is a time point when the player presses the chance button 136. At the time t1, the special symbol variation game is continuously executed, and the decorative symbol variation display is performed in the left middle right decorative symbol display regions 208a, 208b, 208c in the center of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the selected effect display area 800 at the lower right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect A for displaying the character string “M1: Might be there” at the time t1 ends, and “M2: Production B is started to display the character string “Kiseki no Universe”. The character string “M2: miracle universe” in the production B indicates the title of the song flowing from the speaker 120. Further, at time t1, the production α that the song 810 “may be there” on the speaker 120 is finished, and the song name is “Kiseki no Universe” as shown in FIG. 97 (B). The production β in which the song 810 flows is started. In the operating means, the selectable period ends at time t1, and a T-selectable non-selectable period of T seconds is displayed in which no effect selection is possible even if the chance button 136 is pressed.

  FIG. 97 (c) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t2 shown in FIG. At the time t2, the special symbol variation game is continuously executed, and the decorative symbol variation display is performed in the left middle right decorative symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. As described with reference to FIG. 96, since the time point t2 is within the period in which T seconds have not elapsed since the time point t1 and cannot be selected, even if the player presses the chance button 136 at the time point t2, It is invalidated and the production is not changed. For this reason, in the selected effect display area 800 at the time point t2, the effect B that displays the character string “M2: miracle universe” is continued. In addition, as shown in FIG. 97 (C), the production β is continued from the speaker 120 at the time point t2, in which the song 810 having the song name “Kiseki no Universe” flows.

  FIG. 97 (d) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t4 shown in FIG. At the time point t4, the special symbol variation game is continuously executed, and the decorative symbol variation display is performed in the left middle right decorative symbol display regions 208a, 208b, and 208c in the center of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. As described with reference to FIG. 96, since the time point t4 is within the selectable period started at the time point t3, when the player presses the chance button 136, the selection effect display area 800 displays “M2: Kiseki” at the time point t4. The production B for displaying the character string “universe” is finished, and the production C for displaying the character string “M3: Your Fragrance” is started. The production C displays the character string of the song title of the song that flows from the speaker 120 called “M3: Your Fragrance”. Also, at time t4, the stage 120 in which the song 810 of “Kiseki no Universe” flows is finished at the speaker 120, and the stage γ in which the song 810 whose title is “Your Fragrance” flows is shown in FIG. 97C. Is started. In the operation means, the selectable period ends at time t4, and a T unselectable period of T seconds is displayed in which no effect selection is possible even if the chance button 136 is pressed.

  FIG. 98A shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at time t6 shown in FIG. At time t6, the special symbol variation game is continuously executed, and the decorative symbol variation display is performed in the left middle right decorative symbol display regions 208a, 208b, 208c in the center of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. As described with reference to FIG. 96, since the time point t6 is within the selectable period started at the time point t5, when the player presses the chance button 136, the selection effect display area 800 displays “M3: Your The effect C for displaying the character string “Kakera” ends, and the effect D for displaying the character string “M4: Mega! Giga! Summer!” Is started. The production D displays a character string of a song title of a song flowing from the speaker 120, “M4: Mega! Giga! Summer!”. Further, at time t6, the production γ in which the song “810 of yours” is played on the speaker 120 is finished, and as shown in FIG. 98 (A), the song 810 with the song name “Mega! Giga! Summer!” The flowing effect δ is started. In the operating means, the selectable period ends at time t6, and a T unselectable period of T seconds in which the effect selection is impossible even when the chance button 136 is pressed is started.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes, for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a speaker 120 as an effect means capable of executing at least an effect, and as an effect changing means capable of changing at least an effect, for example, a first sub control unit 400 includes an effect control process ((step S409) and a sound control process (step S415)), an operation means that can be operated by the player, for example, a chance button 136, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is the first The first effect (for example, effect A) and the second effect (for example, effect B) can be executed at least, and the first sub-control unit 400 starts from the first effect when a predetermined condition is satisfied. As change control that can be changed at least to the second effect, for example, step S1107 of the selected effect control process shown in FIG. 1 is executed, and the predetermined condition is satisfied at least by the player operating the operating means during the execution of the first effect (for example, pressing the chance button 136). The changing means is characterized in that an operation of the operating means by the player is not accepted for a predetermined period (for example, T seconds) after the predetermined condition is established.

  According to the pachinko machine 100, since the selection of the effect is not accepted by the operation means for a predetermined period after the selected effect is started (disabled), the player cannot select the effect. Thereby, since the player always views the selected effect for a certain period, it may be possible to prevent an unintended change of the effect due to an erroneous operation.

  The selection effect display area of the present embodiment displays a character string, but may display an image. The selection effect display area may be a combination of an image and a character string, only an image, only a character string, or the like. The same applies to the selection effect display areas shown in the second and subsequent embodiments.

  The operation means may be other than the chance button, and may be any operation means that can be operated by the player, such as a handle or a direction key. The operation means shown in the second and subsequent embodiments is also the same.

  FIG. 99 shows the temporal operation of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 2 according to the present embodiment. The horizontal axis in FIG. 99 shows a time series, and time has passed from left to right. In the upper part of FIG. 99, t0 to t6 indicate various operations, or the start and end times of effects. The middle part of FIG. 99 shows the execution state of various effects by the effect means. The first effect means of this example includes a decorative symbol display device 208, and the second effect means includes a speaker 120. The lower part shows the operating means. The operation means of this example includes a chance button 136, for example.

  First, at time t0, the first effect means is executing effect A (eg, included in the first effect) or starts effect A from time t0, and the second effect at time t0. It is assumed that the effect means is executing the effect α (for example, included in the second effect) or starts the effect α from the time point t0. Further, it is assumed that at time t0, the operation means is in a selectable period in which the player can select an effect by pressing the chance button 136 or at the start of the period. In this embodiment, the production selection is always possible. When the player presses the chance button 136 of the operation means at a time t1 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t0, the first effecting means ends the effect A and the effect B (at the time t3 T seconds after the time t1. For example, it is included in the third effect). In the second effect means, the effect α ends and the effect β (for example, included in the fourth effect) is started. Thus, in the present embodiment, the selected effect is reflected in the first and second effect means when a delay time of T seconds elapses after selection of the effect by pressing the chance button 136, and the first effect is produced. To the third effect, and similarly, the second effect is switched to the fourth effect.

  Further, when the player presses the chance button 136 of the operation means at time t2 during the delay time of T seconds, at the time t4 T seconds after time t2, the first effect means ends the effect B and the effect C Is started. In the second effect means, the effect β ends and the effect γ starts. In this example, if there is an operation for selecting an effect again during the delay period, the delay periods are overlapped, but after the previously started delay period ends, the next delay period starts. It may be.

  When a player depresses the chance button 136 of the operation means at a time t5 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t4, the effect C is ended and the effect D is completed at the first effect means at a time t6 T seconds after the time t5. Be started. In the second effect means, the effect γ ends and the effect δ starts.

  According to the present embodiment, it is possible to give the player a sense of incongruity by reflecting the changed result after a while, and to attract the player's attention until the changed performance is started. There are cases where it is possible. If the changed result is immediately reflected in the production, the production will be monotonous, but by performing the production using the time lag as described above, variations can be made in the production, and the player You may not be bored.

  100 and 101 show selection effects executed by the first effect means and the second effect means of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment. 100 (a) to (d) and FIGS. 101 (a) to (c) show display areas of the decorative symbol display device 208 included in the first effect means. 100 (A) to (D) and FIGS. 101 (A) to (C) schematically show the speaker 120 included in the second rendering means. In each figure, (a) and (A), (b) and (B), (c) and (C), and (d) and (D) show the production of the same period, respectively.

  FIG. 100A shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t0 shown in FIG. At the time t0, the special figure variation game is executed, and in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decoration 0 to decoration 9 sequentially move from the top to the bottom in the left middle right decorative symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c. The decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner (indicated by a downward arrow in the figure). In the lower right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, for example, a selection effect display area 800 is provided in a horizontally-long rectangular frame shape. In the selected effect display area 800, an effect A is displayed in which a character string “M1: Might be there ...” is displayed. In the selection effect in this example, the name of the song flowing from the speaker 120 is displayed in characters. As shown in FIG. 100 (A), at the time point t0, an effect α in which a song 810 having a song name “may be there ...” flows from the speaker 120.

  FIG. 100B shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t1 shown in FIG. As described with reference to FIG. 99, the time point t1 is a time point when the player presses the chance button 136. At the time t1, the special symbol variation game is continuously executed, and the decorative symbol variation display is performed in the left middle right decorative symbol display regions 208a, 208b, 208c in the center of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, even if the player presses the chance button 136 with the intention of changing the effect, the effect is not changed until T seconds of a predetermined delay time have elapsed. For this reason, in the selected effect display area 800 at the lower right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect A that displays the character string “M1: It may be there” continues at the time point t1. Also, as shown in FIG. 100 (B), at the time point t1, the production α that the song 810 “may be there” continues on the speaker 120.

  FIG. 100 (c) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t2 shown in FIG. As described with reference to FIG. 99, the time point t2 is a time point when the player presses the chance button 136. At the time t2, the special symbol variation game is continuously executed, and the decorative symbol variation display is performed in the left middle right decorative symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, even if the player intends to change the production and presses the chance button 136, the production is not changed because it is during the predetermined delay time. For this reason, in the selected effect display area 800 at the lower right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect A that displays the character string “M1: It may be there” continues at the time point t1. Also, as shown in FIG. 100 (C), at time t1, an effect α that the song 810 “may be there” continues on the speaker 120.

  FIG. 100D shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t3 shown in FIG. The time point t3 is a time point when a predetermined delay time T seconds has elapsed since the time point t1 when the player first pressed the chance button 136. At the time point t3, the special symbol variation game is continuously executed, and the decorative symbol variation display is performed in the left middle right decorative symbol display regions 208a, 208b, and 208c in the center of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the time t3, in the selected effect display area 800, the effect A that displays the character string “M1: Might be there ...” ends, and the effect B that displays the character string “M2: miracle universe” is displayed. Be started. The production B displays the character string of the song title of the song “M2: miracle of miracle” flowing from the speaker 120. Also, at time t3, the production α that the song 810 “M1: It may be there ...” is finished on the speaker 120, and as shown in FIG. The production [beta] in which the song 810 of "" flows is started.

  FIG. 101A shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at time t4 shown in FIG. Time t4 is a time when a predetermined delay time T seconds elapses from time t2 when the player presses the chance button 136 following time t1. At the time point t4, the special symbol variation game is continuously executed, and the decorative symbol variation display is performed in the left middle right decorative symbol display regions 208a, 208b, and 208c in the center of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. At time t4, in the selected effect display area 800, the effect B for displaying the character string “M2: miracle of miracle” is finished, and the effect C for displaying the character string “M3: Your Fragrance” is started. The production C displays the character string of the song title of the song “M3: Your Fragrance” flowing from the speaker 120. In addition, at time t4, the production β in which the music 810 “M2: Universe of miracle” flows on the speaker 120 is finished, and as shown in FIG. 101 (A), the music 810 whose music title is “Your Fragrance” flows. The production γ is started.

  FIG. 101 (b) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t5 shown in FIG. As described with reference to FIG. 99, the time point t5 is a time point when the player presses the chance button 136. At the time point t5, the special symbol variation game is continuously executed, and the decorative symbol variation display is performed in the left middle right decorative symbol display regions 208a, 208b, and 208c in the center of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, even if the player presses the chance button 136 with the intention of changing the effect, the effect is not changed until T seconds of a predetermined delay time have elapsed. For this reason, in the selected effect display area 800 at the lower right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect C that displays the character string “M3: Your Fragrance” continues at time t5. Also, as shown in FIG. 101 (B), at time t5, an effect γ in which the song “810” of “Your Fragrance” continues on the speaker 120.

  FIG. 101 (c) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t6 shown in FIG. The time point t6 is a time point when a predetermined delay time T seconds has elapsed since the time point t5 when the player pressed the chance button 136. At time t6, the special symbol variation game is continuously executed, and the decorative symbol variation display is performed in the left middle right decorative symbol display regions 208a, 208b, 208c in the center of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the time point t6, in the selected effect display area 800, the effect C for displaying the character string “M3: Your Fragrance” ends, and the effect D for displaying the character string “M4: Mega! Giga! Summer!” Is started. . The production D displays a character string of a song title of “M4: Mega! Giga! Summer!” Flowing from the speaker 120. Also, at time t6, the stage γ in which the song 810 of “Kimi no Kakera” flows on the speaker 120 ends, and as shown in FIG. 101 (C), a song 810 with the song name “Mega! Giga! Summer!” The flowing effect δ is started.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes, for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a speaker 120 as an effect means capable of executing at least an effect, and as an effect changing means capable of changing at least an effect, for example, a first sub control unit 400 (step S409) and sound control processing (step S415), the decorative symbol display device 208 includes a first effect (for example, effect A) and a third effect (for example, effect). B) can be executed at least, the speaker 120 can execute at least a second effect (for example, an effect α) and a fourth effect (for example, an effect β), and the first sub-control unit 400 can As the first change control that can be changed at least from the first effect to the third effect when one condition is satisfied (for example, an operation by the operation means), for example, FIG. The step S1107 of the selected effect control process shown in FIG. 95 is Yes and the effect selected in step S1111 is executed, and the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the second condition is satisfied (for example, an operation by the operating means). If there is, as the second change control that can be changed at least from the second effect to the fourth effect, for example, step S1107 of the selected effect control process shown in FIG. The first change control is a control that is executed after the first time has elapsed since the first condition is satisfied (for example, after T seconds), and the second change control. The control is characterized in that the control is executed after the second time has elapsed since the second condition is satisfied (for example, after T seconds).

  According to the pachinko machine 100, the first effect is changed to the third effect after the first time has elapsed, and the second effect is changed to the fourth effect after the second time has elapsed. Therefore, there are cases where the player's interest can be improved because various effects can be performed.

  More specifically, the result of the change after a certain amount of time is reflected to give the player a sense of incongruity and can attract the player's attention until the changed performance starts. There is a case. If the changed result is immediately reflected in the production, the production will be monotonous, but by performing the production using the time lag as described above, variations can be made in the production, and the player You may not be bored.

  In the pachinko machine 100, the time when the first condition is satisfied is at least coincident with the time when the second condition is satisfied. According to the pachinko machine 100, since the establishment time of the first condition and the second condition overlap, there are cases where the effect can be more noticed. In addition, there may be cases where variations in production can be increased. In addition, there may be a case where a variation can be given to the execution timing of the effect even though the change conditions for the plurality of effects are satisfied at substantially the same timing.

  FIG. 102 shows a temporal operation of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 3 according to the present embodiment. The horizontal axis of FIG. 102 shows a time series, and time has passed from left to right. In the upper part of FIG. 102, t0 to t6 indicate various operations or points in time when the production starts or ends. The middle part of FIG. 102 shows the execution state of various effects by the effect means. The first effect means of this example includes a decorative symbol display device 208, and the second effect means includes a speaker 120. The lower part shows the operating means. The operation means of this example includes a chance button 136, for example.

  First, at time t0, the first effect means is executing effect A (eg, included in the first effect) or starts effect A from time t0, and the second effect at time t0. It is assumed that the effect means is executing the effect α (for example, included in the second effect) or starts the effect α from the time point t0. Further, it is assumed that at time t0, the operation means is in a selectable period in which the player can select an effect by pressing the chance button 136 or at the start of the period. In this embodiment, the production selection is always possible. When the player presses the chance button 136 of the operation means at a time t1 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t0, the first effect means ends the effect A and the effect B (for example, included in the third effect) from the time t1. Will be started). On the other hand, in the second effect means, the effect α ends at the time t3 T seconds after the time t1, and the effect β (for example, included in the fourth effect) is started. Thus, in the present embodiment, the selection result is reflected in the first effect means simultaneously with the selection of the effect by pressing the chance button 136 (first time is zero), and the first effect is changed to the third effect. When a delay time of T seconds (second time T seconds) has passed after selection of the effect by pressing the chance button 136, the selected effect is reflected in the second effect means, and the second effect To the fourth production.

  Further, when the player presses the chance button 136 of the operation means at a time point t2 during the delay time of T seconds in the second effect means, the effect B is ended and the effect C is finished in the first effect means at the time point t2. Be started. On the other hand, the production β is continued in the second production means. At time t4, which is T seconds after time t2, the second effect means ends the effect β and starts the effect γ. In this example, if there is an operation for selecting an effect again during the delay period, the delay periods are overlapped, but after the previously started delay period ends, the next delay period starts. It may be.

  When the player presses the chance button 136 of the operation means at a time t5 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t4, the effect C is ended and the effect D is started in the first effect means at the time t5. On the other hand, the production β is continued in the second production means. At time t6 T seconds after time t5, the second effect means ends the effect γ and starts the effect δ.

  In the present embodiment, the first time is zero, which is different from T second of the second time. According to the pachinko machine 100, since the first time and the second time are different, the production may be more noticeable. In addition, there may be cases where variations in production can be increased. Furthermore, there are cases where variations can be given to the execution timing of effects.

  103 and 104 show a selection effect executed by the first effect means and the second effect means of the pachinko machine 100 in the third embodiment. 103 (a) to 103 (d) and FIGS. 104 (a) to 104 (c) show display areas of the decorative symbol display device 208 included in the first effect means. 103 (A) to 103 (D) and FIGS. 104 (A) to 104 (C) schematically show the speaker 120 included in the second rendering means. In each figure, (a) and (A), (b) and (B), (c) and (C), and (d) and (D) show the production of the same period, respectively.

  FIG. 103A shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t0 shown in FIG. At the time t0, the special figure variation game is executed, and in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decoration 0 to decoration 9 sequentially move from the top to the bottom in the left middle right decorative symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c. The decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner (indicated by a downward arrow in the figure). In the lower right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, for example, a selection effect display area 800 is provided in a horizontally-long rectangular frame shape. In the selected effect display area 800, an effect A is displayed in which a character string “M1: Might be there ...” is displayed. In the selection effect in this example, the name of the song flowing from the speaker 120 is displayed in characters. As shown in FIG. 103 (A), at the time point t0, an effect α in which a song 810 having a song name “may be there” is played from the speaker 120.

  FIG. 103 (b) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t1 shown in FIG. As described with reference to FIG. 102, the time point t1 is a time point when the player presses the chance button 136. At the time t1, the special symbol variation game is continuously executed, and the decorative symbol variation display is performed in the left middle right decorative symbol display regions 208a, 208b, 208c in the center of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, when the player presses the chance button 136 at the time t1 with the intention of changing the production, the character string “M1: May be there ...” is displayed in the selection production display area 800 at the time t1. The effect A to be displayed is finished and the effect B to display the character string “M2: miracle universe” is started. On the other hand, the production α is continued in the second production means.

  FIG. 103 (c) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t2 shown in FIG. As described with reference to FIG. 102, the time point t2 is a time point when the player presses the chance button 136. At the time t2, the special symbol variation game is continuously executed, and the decorative symbol variation display is performed in the left middle right decorative symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, when the player presses the chance button 136 with the intention of changing the effect, the effect is immediately changed from effect B to effect C in the first effect means. At the time t2, in the selected effect display area 800, the effect B displaying the character string “M2: miracle of miracle” ends, and the effect C displaying the character string “M3: Your Fragrance” is started. On the other hand, in the second effect means, the effect is not changed because it is during the predetermined delay time. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 103 (C), at the time point t1, the effect α that the song 810 “may be there” continues on the speaker 120.

  FIG. 103 (d) shows an effect performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t3 shown in FIG. The time point t3 is a time point when a predetermined delay time T seconds has elapsed since the time point t1 when the player first pressed the chance button 136. At the time point t3, the special symbol variation game is continuously executed, and the decorative symbol variation display is performed in the left middle right decorative symbol display regions 208a, 208b, and 208c in the center of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the time point t3, the effect C is continued in the selected effect display area 800. Also, at time t3, the production α that the song 810 of “M1: It may be there ...” is finished at the speaker 120, and the title of the song is “the universe of Kiseki” as shown in FIG. The production [beta] in which the song 810 of "" flows is started.

  FIG. 104A shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t4 shown in FIG. Time t4 is a time when a predetermined delay time T seconds elapses from time t2 when the player presses the chance button 136 following time t1. At the time point t4, the special symbol variation game is continuously executed, and the decorative symbol variation display is performed in the left middle right decorative symbol display regions 208a, 208b, and 208c in the center of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the time t4, the effect C continues in the selected effect display area 800. Also, at time t4, the stage 120 in which the song 810 of “Kiseki no Universe” flows on the speaker 120 is finished, and the stage γ in which the song 810 whose title is “Your Fragrance” flows is shown in FIG. 104 (A). Is started.

  FIG. 104 (b) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t5 shown in FIG. As described with reference to FIG. 102, the time point t5 is a time point when the player presses the chance button 136. At the time point t5, the special symbol variation game is continuously executed, and the decorative symbol variation display is performed in the left middle right decorative symbol display regions 208a, 208b, and 208c in the center of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, when the player presses the chance button 136 at the time t5 with the intention of changing the effect, the effect C for displaying the character string “M3: Your Fragrance” in the selected effect display area 800 ends at the time t5. Then, the production D for displaying the character string “M4: Mega! Giga! Summer!” Is started. On the other hand, the effect γ is continued in the second effect means.

  FIG. 104 (c) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t6 shown in FIG. The time point t6 is a time point when a predetermined delay time T seconds has elapsed since the time point t5 when the player pressed the chance button 136. At time t6, the special symbol variation game is continuously executed, and the decorative symbol variation display is performed in the left middle right decorative symbol display regions 208a, 208b, 208c in the center of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the time t6, the effect D continues in the selected effect display area 800. Also, at time t6, the stage γ in which the song “810 of yours” is played on the speaker 120 is finished, and as shown in FIG. The flowing effect δ is started.

  It should be noted that while the special figure variable game is stopped, the presentation may not be changed even if the chance button 136 is pressed. For example, when the chance button 136 is pressed until the special figure variable game is finished and the next special figure variable game is started, the selection operation may be accepted, and the result of the selection operation is not accepted. You may do it. Even when the demonstration screen is being executed, the result of the selection operation may not be accepted. In addition, when the state until the special figure variable game is stopped is included in the period until the selection result is reflected, the result of the selection operation may not be accepted. Also, the result of the selection operation may not be accepted only when there is a hold until the next special figure variable game is started after the special figure variable game is ended.

  Further, even during the special figure change, the selection operation may not be accepted during a specific period (for example, when one of a plurality of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed).

  Further, the delay in this embodiment may include a time from when the operating means is operated until it is received. For example, the time from when the sensor is detected until the control command is sent to the sub-control unit 400 may be included.

  In addition, the modification regarding reception of the result of these selection operation is applicable also to another Example.

  FIG. 105 shows a temporal operation of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 4 according to the present embodiment. The horizontal axis in FIG. 105 represents a time series, and time has passed from left to right. In the upper part of FIG. 105, t0 to t5 indicate various operations, or the start and end times of effects. The middle part of FIG. 105 shows the execution state of various effects by the effect means. The first effect means of this example includes a decorative symbol display device 208, and the second effect means includes a speaker 120. The lower part shows the operating means. The operation means of this example includes a chance button 136, for example.

  First, at time t0, the first effect means is executing effect A or the effect A is started from time t0, and at time t0, the second effect means is the effect α (for example, included in the first effect). It is assumed that the production α is started or the production α is started from the time point t0. Further, it is assumed that at time t0, the operation means is in a selectable period in which the player can select an effect by pressing the chance button 136 or at the start of the period. In this embodiment, the production selection is always possible during a predetermined period. For example, in the first round of the big hit game, it may be possible to always select an effect by the operation means. When the player depresses the chance button 136 of the operation means at a time t1 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t0, the effect A ends and the effect B starts at the first effect means from the time t1. On the other hand, in the second production means, the production is changed on the condition that a waiting time of T seconds has elapsed since the player operated the operation means, and the production is performed until the standby time has elapsed. No changes are made. Therefore, the production α is continued at time t1.

  Further, when the player depresses the chance button 136 of the operation means at the time point t2 during the waiting time of T seconds in the second effect means, the effect B is ended and the effect C is started in the first effect means. On the other hand, since the time T1 from the time point t1 to the time point t2 is shorter than the standby time T, the production α is continued without changing the production in the second production means at the time t2.

  Further, when the chance button 136 is pressed at time t2, the measurement of the standby time started by the first sub-control unit 400 by pressing the previous chance button 136 is reset, and a new standby time is set from time t2. The

  Further, when the player depresses the chance button 136 of the operation means at a time point t3 during the waiting time of T seconds in the second effect means, the effect C is ended and the effect D is started in the first effect means. On the other hand, since the time T2 from the time point t2 to the time point t3 is shorter than the standby time T, the production α is continued without changing the production at the second production means at the time t3.

  Further, when the chance button 136 is pressed at time t3, the measurement of the standby time started by pressing the previous chance button 136 is reset, and a new standby time is set from time t3.

  At time t4 when the waiting time T seconds has elapsed from time t3, the second effect means ends the effect α and starts the effect δ (for example, included in the second effect). On the other hand, the production D is continued in the first production means.

  In the present embodiment, the first effect means reflects the selected effect immediately, and the second effect means does not reflect unless the standby time elapses after selection. In other words, if the predetermined time period T seconds has not passed since the selection, the second effect means does not start the selected effect, thereby preventing the annoyance felt by starting the effect that changes immediately. There are cases where it is possible.

  Time t5 indicates the end time of the selectable period in which the effect can be selected by the operation means. For example, the case where the first round of the jackpot game is a selectable period but the second round is a nonselectable period is included. Hereinafter, the case where the time t5 is the start time of the second round of the jackpot game will be described. When the time T3 from the time t3 when the player last pressed the chance button 136 to the start time t5 of the second round is longer than the waiting time T from the time t3, the second effect means produces the effect δ at the time t4. To time t5, and further in the second round from time t5. In the first effect means, a new effect D ′ is executed from time t5. When the time T3 from the time t3 when the player last pressed the chance button 136 to the start time t5 of the second round is shorter than the waiting time T from the time t3, the effect in the second effect means is not changed.

  106 and 107 show selection effects executed by the first effect means and the second effect means of the pachinko machine 100 in the fourth embodiment. 106 (a) to (d) and FIGS. 107 (a) to (d) show display areas of the decorative symbol display device 208 included in the first effect means. 106 (A) to (D) and FIGS. 107 (A) to (D) schematically show the speaker 120 included in the second rendering means. In each figure, (a) and (A), (b) and (B), (c) and (C), and (d) and (D) show the production of the same period, respectively.

  FIG. 106A shows an effect performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 before the time t0 shown in FIG. Before the time t0, the result of the special figure variation game is a big hit, and the start effect of the big hit game is executed, and the “big hit” display is performed in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. As shown in FIG. 106 (A), before the time point t0, an effect in which a song 810 of a big hit start BGM (background music) flows from the speaker 120 is executed.

  FIG. 106B shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t0 shown in FIG. At time t0, for example, an effect at 1R (first round) where a 15R big hit game is started is shown. The number of rounds is displayed as “1R” in the upper right area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a selection effect is executed. A selection screen for selecting an effect is displayed, and an effect list is displayed. For example, "M1: May be there ..." indicating the song code and the song title as production 1, "M2: Space of miracle" showing the song code and song title as production 2, and song code as production 3. “M3: Kimi no Kakera” indicating the song title, “M4: Mega! Giga! Summer!” Indicating the song code and song title as production 4, and “M5: Onsen” showing the song code and song title as production 5 "Hormones" are sequentially displayed from the upper left to the lower right of the display area. Further, an explanation screen to the player with an image imitating the chance button 136 in the lower left and a message “Please select a song” (may be a notification prompting selection of an effect (for example, a song)) and a downward arrow. Is displayed. The selection screen and the explanation screen are displayed as the 1R effect. In addition, the selection screen and the explanation screen are in the state shown in FIG. 106 (a) or during the big hit round (from the 1R effect until the final round (in this example, 15R, 16R, 8R, 2R)), For example, it may be displayed when the player presses the chance button 136.

  In this state, the currently selected effect on the selection screen is displayed with a thick frame. As shown in FIG. 106 (b), the production 1 is selected on the selection screen at time t0. In this embodiment, when the chance button 136 is pressed once, the selected effect frame is shifted downward by one. In this example, on the selection screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t0, the effect frame that displays the character string “M1: May be there ...” is displayed in bold, and other effect frames are usually displayed. An effect A to be displayed is executed. Also, as shown in FIG. 106 (B), at time t0, an effect α in which a song 810 having a song name “may be there” is played from the speaker 120. That is, the production α is executed simultaneously with the production A. The effect α may be executed after the effect A is executed, or may be executed before the effect A is executed.

  FIG. 106C shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t1 shown in FIG. As described with reference to FIG. 105, the time point t1 is a time point when the player presses the chance button 136. At time t1, 1R of the jackpot game is continuing. In this example, when the player presses the chance button 136 at the time t1 with the intention of changing the production, the character string “M2: miracle space” is displayed on the selection screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time t1. An effect B is executed in which the frame is displayed thick and the other effect frames are normally displayed. On the other hand, in the speaker 120, the effect is changed on the condition that the waiting time of T seconds has elapsed from the time when the player operates the operating means, so the effect is not changed until the waiting time has elapsed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 106 (C), the production α is continued at the time point t1.

  FIG. 106 (d) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t2 shown in FIG. When the player depresses the chance button 136 of the operation means at a time point t2 during the T second waiting time on the speaker 120 of the second effect means, the selection screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time t2 displays “M3: Your The effect frame that displays the character string “Kakera” is displayed in bold, and the effect C in which the other effect frames are normally displayed is executed. On the other hand, the time T1 from the time point t1 to the time point t2 (for example, T1 = 0.5 seconds) is shorter than the waiting time T (for example, T = 1 second), so as shown in FIG. At time t2, the production is not changed at the speaker 120, and the production α is continued.

  Further, when the chance button 136 is pressed at time t2, the measurement of the standby time started by pressing the previous chance button 136 is reset, and a new standby time T (= 1 second) is set from time t2. .

  FIG. 107 (a) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t3 shown in FIG. When the player depresses the chance button 136 of the operation means at a time point t3 during the T second waiting time on the speaker 120, “M4: Mega! Giga! Summer!” Is displayed on the selection screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t3. The effect D in which the effect frame for displaying the character string is displayed thick and the other effect frames are normally displayed is executed. On the other hand, since the time T2 from the time point t2 to the time point t3 (for example, T2 = 0.5 seconds) is shorter than the standby time T, as shown in FIG. The production α is continued without being performed.

  Further, when the chance button 136 is pressed at time t3, the measurement of the standby time started by pressing the previous chance button 136 is reset, and a new standby time T (= 1 second) is set from time t3. .

  FIG. 107 (b) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t4 shown in FIG. At the time t4 when the waiting time T seconds has elapsed from the time t3, the speaker 120 has finished the production α in which the music 810 with the music name “may be there ...” has ended, as shown in FIG. 107 (B). In addition, the production δ in which the song 810 having the song name “Mega! Giga! Summer!” Flows is started. On the other hand, the effect D is continued in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 107 (c) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t5 shown in FIG. Time t5 indicates the start time of the second round of the jackpot game. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a new effect D ′ is executed from time t5. At time t5, on the selection screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect frame displaying the character string “M4: Mega! Giga! An effect D ′ in which the display contrast of the other effect frames is reduced with respect to the effect frame is executed. Thereby, the player can know that the production including the performance of “Mega! Giga! Summer!” Has been confirmed.

  When the effect D ′ is executed for a predetermined period from time t5, as shown in FIG. 107 (d), the effect of the image associated with the song “Mega! Giga! Summer!” Is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Displayed in the area. In this example, since the time T3 from the time t3 when the player last pressed the chance button 136 to the start time t5 of the second round is longer than the waiting time T from the time t3, the production δ is timed from the time t4. The process is executed until t5, and as shown in FIGS. 107 (C) and (D), the effect δ is also executed in the second round from time t5. The production δ may be such that the song continues from before the time t5, or may start from the beginning of the song again from the time t5. In addition, the effect D ′ may be a notification (or display) indicating that the execution of the effect D is confirmed.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes, for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a speaker 120 as an effect means capable of executing at least an effect, and as an effect change means capable of changing the effect at least, for example, a first sub-control unit For example, a chance button 136 is provided as an operation means that can be operated by the player, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is a first design display device 208 that includes a production control process (step S409) and a sound control process (step S415). At least an effect (for example, an effect α) and a second effect (for example, an effect δ) can be executed, and the first sub-control unit 400 changes the first effect from the first effect when a predetermined condition is satisfied. As the change control that can be changed to at least the second effect, for example, step S1107 of the selected effect control process shown in FIG. The predetermined condition is that the player operates the operating means during the execution of the first presentation, and a predetermined waiting time (for example, 1 At least when the second) elapses.

  According to the pachinko machine 100, the selected effect is immediately reflected in the first effect means, and the selected effect is not reflected in the second effect means unless T seconds have elapsed after selection. In other words, if the predetermined period does not elapse after the selection, the second effect means does not start the selected effect, so that the annoyance felt by starting the effect immediately selected after selection can be prevented. There is.

  FIG. 108 shows temporal operations of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 5 according to the present embodiment. The horizontal axis of FIG. 108 shows a time series, and time has passed from left to right. In the upper part of FIG. 108, t0 to t7 indicate various operations, or the start and end times of effects. The middle part of FIG. 108 shows the execution state of various effects by the effect means. The first effect means of this example includes a decorative symbol display device 208, and the second effect means includes a speaker 120. The lower part shows the operating means. The operation means of this example includes a chance button 136, for example.

  First, at time t0, the first effect means is executing effect A or starting effect A from time t0, and at time t0, the second effect means is executing effect α or from time t0. It is assumed that the production α has started. Further, it is assumed that at time t0, the operation means is in a selectable period in which the player can select an effect by pressing the chance button 136 or at the start of the period. When the player depresses the chance button 136 of the operation means at a time t1 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t0, the first effect means ends the effect A and the effect B is started. In the second effect means, the effect α ends and the effect β starts.

  The time point t2 indicates a point in time when a certain time has elapsed from the time point t1 and the effect L is further started in addition to the effect B in the first effect means. The effect L includes an effect that prompts the player to operate the operating means (pressing the chance button 136). The operation means used in the effect L is the same as the operation means used in the effect selection. With the operating means, on the condition that the effect L has been started, the selectable period ends at the time t2, and an unselectable period in which the effect cannot be selected is started. That is, the operation reception valid period of the operation means in the effect L using the operation means (for example, the chance button 136) is a selection effect non-selectable period. The non-selectable period here is a regulation period that is performed in order to prioritize the effect L over the selection effect in reflecting the reception result of the operation means. The meaning is different from the non-selectable period in the first embodiment. The non-selectable period is a predetermined T seconds. For example, when the player depresses the chance button 136 at the time t3 during the non-selectable period, the depressing is effective for the effect L and does not select the effect for the first and second effect means. The effects of both the first effect means and the second effect means are not changed. Note that the selectable period may be immediately after the operation means is operated during the operation reception valid period. For example, the selectable period may also be between time t3 and time t4. Further, the second rendering means may reflect the operation result after a certain period as in the second to fourth embodiments when the selection operation is performed during the operation reception valid period.

  When a predetermined T second elapses and the selectable period ends, the operation means enters the selectable period again. When the player presses the chance button 136 of the operation means at a time point t4 during the selectable period, the first effect means ends the effect B and starts the effect C. In the second effect means, the effect β ends and the effect γ starts.

  The production L ends at time t5. When the player presses the chance button 136 of the operation means at a time t6 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t5, the effect C is ended and the effect D is started in the first effect means. In the second effect means, the effect γ ends and the effect δ starts.

  According to the present embodiment, since the operation result of the selection means is not accepted (invalidated) for T seconds after the production L different from the selection production starts, the player can select the production. Can not. There are cases where the player can concentrate on the production L for a certain period of time and can improve the interest.

  109 to 112 show selection effects executed by the first effect means and the second effect means of the pachinko machine 100 according to the fifth embodiment. 109 (a) to 112 (d) show display areas of the decorative symbol display device 208 included in the first effect means. 109A to 112D schematically show the speaker 120 included in the second rendering means. In each figure, (a) and (A), (b) and (B), (c) and (C), and (d) and (D) show the production of the same period, respectively.

  FIG. 109A shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t0 shown in FIG. At the time t0, the special figure variation game is executed, and in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decoration 0 to decoration 9 sequentially move from the top to the bottom in the left middle right decorative symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c. The decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner (indicated by a downward arrow in the figure). In the lower right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, for example, a selection effect display area 800 is provided in a horizontally-long rectangular frame shape. In the selected effect display area 800, an effect A is displayed in which a character string “M1: Might be there ...” is displayed. In the selection effect in this example, the name of the song flowing from the speaker 120 is displayed in characters. As shown in FIG. 109 (A), at the time point t0, an effect α in which a song 810 having a song name “may be there” is played from the speaker 120.

  FIG. 109B shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t1 shown in FIG. As described with reference to FIG. 108, the time point t1 is a time point when the player presses the chance button 136. At the time t1, the special symbol variation game is continuously executed, and the decorative symbol variation display is performed in the left middle right decorative symbol display regions 208a, 208b, 208c in the center of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the selected effect display area 800 at the lower right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect A for displaying the character string “M1: Might be there” at the time t1 ends, and “M2: Production B is started to display the character string “Kiseki no Universe”. The character string “M2: miracle universe” in the production B indicates the title of the song flowing from the speaker 120. Also, at time t1, the production α that the song 810 “may be there” on the speaker 120 is ended, and as shown in FIG. 109 (B), the song name is “Kiseki no Universe”. The production β in which the song 810 flows is started.

  FIG. 109 (c) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t2 shown in FIG. As described with reference to FIG. 108, the time point t2 is a time point when a certain time has elapsed from the time point t1 and the effect L is further started in addition to the effect B on the decorative symbol display device 208. As shown in FIG. 109 (c), in the effect L, for example, an image is displayed so as to partially hide the left middle right decorative symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c. The image includes, for example, a character image 903 indicating a samurai on the left side, and an explanation image 901 imitating a chance button 136 and an indicator indicating an operation reception period of the button on the right side. The display indicating the operation reception period may be other than the gauge, and may be, for example, a numerical display or a display by the number of images such as characters. The chance button 136 is shared by the operation means used for the effect L and the operation means used for the effect selection. As shown in FIG. 109 (C), the effect β is continued in the speaker 120.

  FIG. 109 (d) illustrates a state in which the effect L is being executed. It is shown that the black bar of the indicator in the explanation image 901 is shortened, and the operation reception period is shortening. The special figure variable game continues, and the effect B continues in the selection effect display area 800. As shown in FIG. 109 (D), the effect β continues in the speaker 120.

  FIG. 110A shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t3 shown in FIG. As described with reference to FIG. 108, the time point t3 is a time point when the player presses the chance button 136. At the time point t3, the special symbol variation game is continuously executed, and the decorative symbol variation display is performed in the left middle right decorative symbol display regions 208a, 208b, and 208c in the center of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. Since the time t3 is in a period during which selection is impossible, pressing of the chance button 136 is not accepted, and in the selected effect display area 800, the effect B displaying the character string “M2: miracle universe” continues. On the other hand, since the effect L is during the operation acceptance period, pressing of the chance button 136 is accepted, and the effect that the character “chance?” Is displayed in the explanation image 901 is executed. As shown in FIG. 110 (A), in the speaker 120, the production β in which the song 810 having the song name “Kiseki no Universe” continues is continued.

  FIG. 110 (b) shows an effect performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t4 shown in FIG. As described with reference to FIG. 108, the time point t4 is a time point when the player presses the chance button 136. At the time point t4, the special symbol variation game is continuously executed, and the decorative symbol variation display is performed in the left middle right decorative symbol display regions 208a, 208b, and 208c in the center of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the time t4, the operation acceptance period at the effect L has already ended and the selectable period is in effect. Therefore, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the effect B displaying the character string “M2: miracle universe” ends, and “M3 Production C is started to display the character string: Also, at time t4, the stage 120 in which the song 810 of “Kiseki no Universe” flows on the speaker 120 is finished, and the stage γ in which the song 810 whose title is “Your Fragrance” flows is shown in FIG. 110 (B). Is started. On the other hand, for the effect L, an effect of notifying the result of the special figure variable game is performed. The advance notice is given in a manner determined based on a predetermined reliability. In this example, an effect is displayed in which a character image 905 showing a princess on the right side, for example, on the lower side of the description image 901 and the character image 903, and characters “Do your best! The explanation images 901 and 907 and the character images 903 and 905 hide the left middle decorative symbol display areas 208a and 208b and a part of the right decorative symbol display area 208c. On the other hand, the selection effect display area is not hidden. Part or all of the selected effect display area may be hidden by effect L (description images 901 and 907, character images 903 and 905).

  FIG. 110C shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t5 shown in FIG. As described with reference to FIG. 108, the effect L ends at time t5, the character images 903 and 905 and the explanation images 901 and 907 disappear from the display area, and a state in which the special figure variable game continues is visually recognized. . In the selected effect display area 800, the effect C is continued. Further, the effect γ is continued as shown in FIG.

  If no operation means is operated for T seconds from the start of execution of the effect L (t2), the character images 903 and 905 and the explanation images 901 and 907 disappear from the display area as in FIG. 110C. You may do it. Further, the character image 903 and the explanation image 901 may be displayed as in FIG. 110A, and the character images 903 and 905 and the explanation images 901 and 907 are displayed as in FIG. 110B. May be.

  The explanation image may be an effect (notification, display) that suggests the reliability of the change, or may be a prefetch effect (notification, display) that indicates the reliability of the change after the change. Good.

  FIG. 110 (d) shows an effect performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t6 shown in FIG. At time t6, the special symbol variation game is continuously executed, and the decorative symbol variation display is performed in the left middle right decorative symbol display regions 208a, 208b, 208c in the center of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the left decorative design display area 208a, the design of the decoration 2 is stopped and displayed. As described with reference to FIG. 108, when the player presses the chance button 136 at the time t6, the effect C for displaying the character string “M3: Your Fragrance” is terminated at the time t6 in the selection effect display area 800. Then, the production D for displaying the character string “M4: Mega! Giga! Summer!” Is started. The production D displays a character string of a song title of a song flowing from the speaker 120, “M4: Mega! Giga! Summer!”. At time t6, the stage γ in which the song 810 of “Your Fragrance” flows on the speaker 120 is finished, and as shown in FIG. 110 (D), a song 810 with the song name “Mega! Giga! Summer!” The flowing effect δ is started.

  FIG. 111 (a) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t7 shown in FIG. At time t7, the special symbol variation game is continuously executed, the symbol of decoration 2 is displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 208a, the symbol of decoration 5 is displayed in the middle decorative symbol display region 208b, and the right decorative symbol display region 208c. Is displayed with a decoration 0 symbol, which fluctuates. In the selected effect display area 800, the effect D is continued at time t7. In addition, as shown in FIG. 111A, the effect δ is continued in the speaker 120. It should be noted that the selection / selection may not be changed during fluctuation of the shaking. Further, the selection effect may be changeable. In this case, both may be changed, and one (for example, the effect by the first effect means) can be changed, and the other (the effect by the second effect means) is changed with a delay. May be.

  FIG. 111 (b) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 after time t7 shown in FIG. After time t7, the special symbol variation game symbol variation stop display is performed, the left decorative symbol display area 208a displays the decoration 2 symbol stopped, the middle decorative symbol display region 208b displays the decoration 5 symbol stopped, and the right In the decorative symbol display area 208c, it is informed that the symbol of decoration 0 is stopped and displayed and the game is shifted to the special symbol variable game. In the selected effect display area 800, the effect D is continued after time t7. In addition, as shown in FIG. 111 (B), the effect δ is continued in the speaker 120. When the symbol is determined, the selected effect may not be performed, for example, a silence state may be set.

  FIG. 111C shows another example of the effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t7 shown in FIG. At time t7, the special symbol variation game is continuously executed, the symbol of decoration 2 is stopped and displayed in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and the middle decorative symbol display region 208b is still in a reach state. In the selected effect display area 800, the effect D is continued at time t7. Further, as shown in FIG. 111C, the speaker 120 starts a reach effect that causes the reach BGM to flow. The reach BGM is started after the left and right decorative symbol display areas 208a and 208 are stopped and displayed. During the reach, the selection / selection may not be changed. Further, the selection effect may be changeable. Even if it can be changed, one side (for example, the effect by the first effect means) is notified, and the other (the effect by the second effect means) is not notified (for example, the reach BGM is displayed). In order to flow, the changed BGM may not be heard). Further, both may be changed, and one (for example, the effect by the first effect means) can be changed, and the other (the effect by the second effect means) is changed with a delay. Also good. The reach BGM may be started before the left and right decorative symbol display areas 208a and 208 are stopped and displayed, or the reach BGM is started simultaneously with the left and right decorative symbol display areas 208a and 208 being stopped and displayed. Good.

  FIG. 111 (d) shows a super reach effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 after time t 7 shown in FIG. 108 following FIG. 111 (c). In the super reach effect, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in a relatively small display area 911 at the upper right of the display area. Further, the selection effect display area 800 disappears and no selection effect is performed. A super reach effect image 913 is displayed in a large area in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, as shown in FIG. 111 (D), the effect δ ends in the speaker 120 and the super reach BGM is started. After the super reach effect image 913 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the super reach BGM is started. Note that the selection effect may not be performed during super reach. In this case, the result of the selection operation may be reflected. Note that the same processing as in the reach may be performed. It should be noted that a fourth symbol (not shown) may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 at least during symbol variation. Note that the super reach BGM may be started before the super reach effect image 913 is displayed on the decorative design display device, and at the same time the super reach effect image 913 is displayed on the decorative design display device. The reach BGM may be started.

  FIG. 112 (a) shows the reach effect in the special figure variable game or the super reach effect that is performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 subsequent to FIG. 111 (c) or 111 (d). In the left and right decorative design display areas 208a and 208c, the design of decoration 2 is displayed in a swinging manner, and in the middle decorative design display region 208b, the design of decoration 3 is displayed in a swinging manner. Further, the selection effect display area 800 disappears and no selection effect is performed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 112 (A), the reach BGM and the super reach BGM are finished and become silent in the speaker 120 (shown as silence 820 in the figure). After the middle decorative symbol display area is swayed and displayed, it is silent. After the middle decorative symbol display area is stopped and displayed, it is silent. It should be noted that the middle decoration symbol display area may be silent before the middle decoration symbol display area is swayed, or may be silenced at the same time as the middle decoration symbol display area is swayed and displayed.

  FIG. 112 (b) shows a state in which the final display is confirmed as a result of the special figure variable game performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 following FIG. 112 (a). The decoration 2 symbol is stopped and displayed in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and the decoration 3 symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle decorative symbol display area 208b. Further, the selection effect display area 800 disappears and no selection effect is performed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 112B, the speaker 120 is in a silent state. After the middle decorative symbol display area is swayed and displayed, it is silent. After the middle decorative symbol display area is stopped and displayed, it is silent. It should be noted that the middle decoration symbol display area may be silent before the middle decoration symbol display area is swayed, or may be silenced at the same time as the middle decoration symbol display area is swayed and displayed.

  FIG. 112 (c) shows a reach effect in the special figure change game or a shake change effect in the super reach effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 subsequent to FIG. 111 (c) or 111 (d). In the left middle right decorative symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, the symbol of decorative 2 is displayed in a shaking manner. Further, the selection effect display area 800 disappears and no selection effect is performed. Also, as shown in FIG. 112 (c), in the speaker 120, the reach BGM and the super reach BGM are finished and are in a silent state (indicated as a silent 820 in the figure).

  FIG. 112 (d) shows a state in which the jackpot confirmation display is performed as a result of the special figure variable game performed in the decorative symbol display device 208 following FIG. 112 (c). In the left middle right decorative symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, the symbol of decorative 2 is stopped and displayed. Further, the selection effect display area 800 disappears and no selection effect is performed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 112D, the speaker 120 is silent. Note that the selection effect display area 800 may be displayed even in the state shown in FIGS. 112 (a) to 112 (d).

  FIG. 113 shows a game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 6 according to the present embodiment. The game board 200 shown in FIG. 81 has only one liquid crystal display device, and the liquid crystal display device functions as the decorative symbol display device 208, whereas the game board 200 of this embodiment shown in FIG. It is characterized in that a plurality of liquid crystals are provided. In the game board 200 shown in FIG. 113, the first liquid crystal display device (main liquid crystal display device) functions as the decorative symbol display device 208, and the second liquid crystal display device (sub liquid crystal display device) functions as the effect display device 915. It is supposed to be. The effect display device 915 is disposed above the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, the first liquid crystal display device is larger than the second liquid crystal display device, but the size of the liquid crystal display region may be the same or vice versa. For example, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a decorative symbol display, a fourth symbol, various effects including a selection effect, an error display, and the like, and the effect display device 915 performs various effects including a hold display and a selection effect. The decorative symbol display device 208 may perform the hold display, and the effect display device 915 may perform the decorative symbol, the fourth symbol, an error display, and the like. Also, the effect on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect on the effect display device 915 may be linked. Further, the effect display device 915 may be provided in the effect movable body 224, and the operation of the effect movable body 224 may be interlocked with the effect on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect on the effect display device 915. The decorative symbol display device 208 may be provided in the effect movable body 224.

  A lamp 940 shaped like a character string “Yatsushiro” is arranged on the upper right side of the game board 200 shown in FIG. The lamp 940 is included in various lamps 418 shown in FIG. 82, and can change the color according to the current background mode, for example, based on control by the first sub-control unit 400.

  FIG. 114 shows the operating means 700 of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 6 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 114 shows the external appearance of the operating means 700 as viewed from above. The operation unit 700 has an operation unit 702. The operation unit 702 includes a chance button 136, a setting operation unit 139, an operation unit decoration member 720, a chance button lamp 138 (see FIG. 79), a ball extraction button 130, and a chance button detection unit (press detection sensor) 724 (FIG. 82). See).

  The chance button 136 includes a chance button cap 704 and a chance button decoration member 706. The chance button cap 704 is formed of a transparent resin material, for example, and has a hollow cylindrical shape whose upper surface is closed. The upper surface of the chance button 704 is formed in a curved shape that swells upward. Since the chance button cap 704 is formed of a transparent resin material, the player can visually recognize the light emitted from the chance button lamp 138 disposed below the chance button cap 704. The chance button decoration member 706 is configured to rotate.

  In the chance button 136, a drive unit (see FIG. 82) 708 of the chance button 136 is arranged. The driving unit 708 controls the vibration motor connected to the second sub control unit 500. Thus, the player can feel that the chance button cap 704 is vibrating.

  As shown in FIG. 114, the chance button 136 is arranged from the left in the operation unit decoration member 720. A setting operation unit 139 is disposed on the right side of the chance button 136. The setting operation unit 139 is a push button type switch that can be pressed by the player, and a confirmation (OK) button 139a, an upper button 139b positioned behind the confirmation button 139a, and a lower button positioned in front of the confirmation button 139a. A button 139c, a right button 139d positioned to the right of the confirm button 139a, a left button 139e positioned to the left of the confirm button 139a, and a cancel (clear) button 139f positioned further to the right of the right button 139d. I have. The setting operation unit 136 includes an operation unit sensor that detects pressing of the buttons 139b to 139f. The setting operation unit 139 of this example has a unit structure in which the buttons 139b to 139f and the operation unit sensor are integrated. The player can input the player's unique identification information by operating the buttons 139b to 139f, and store his / her player information and the like in an external server.

  As shown in FIG. 114, a ball removal button 130 is attached to the right of the setting operation unit 139 of the operation unit base 722. The upper surface of the ball removal button is exposed from an opening of a predetermined shape provided on the operation unit decoration member 720. Thereby, the player can push the ball removal button 130 to discharge the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when the chance button lamp 138 is in a light emitting state, the chance button 136 is in a light emitting state. In addition, when the change button decoration member 706 is rotated by the operation of an electric motor (not shown), the chance button 136 is rotated. Further, when the chance button cap 704 is vibrated by the operation of the vibration motor of the drive unit 708 of the chance button 136, the chance button 136 is vibrated.

  FIG. 115 shows the temporal operation of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 6 according to the present embodiment. The horizontal axis in FIG. 115 represents a time series, and time has passed from left to right. 115, t0 to t7 in the upper stage indicate various operations, or the start and end times of effects. The middle part of FIG. 115 shows the execution state of various effects by the first effect means and the second effect means in order from the top. The first effect means of this example includes a decorative symbol display device 208, and the second effect means includes a speaker 120. The first operation means is used to select an effect by the first and second effect means. The first operation means of this example includes a chance button 136 of the operation means 700, for example. The lower part of FIG. 115 shows execution states of various effects by the third effect means. The third effect means of this example includes an effect display device 915. The second operation means is used to select an effect by the third effect means. The second operation means of this example includes a setting operation unit 139 of the operation means 700, for example. By selecting one of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139, an effect is selected by the second operation means.

  First, time t0 is the start time of the special figure variable game. Whether the first effect means is executing effect A at time t0 or starting effect A from time t0, and whether the second effect means is executing effect α at time t0, effect α from time t0 Is assumed to have started. Further, it is assumed that the first operation means at the time point t0 is during a selectable period during which the player can select an effect by pressing the chance button 136 or at the start point of the period. In the first operation means, the selectable period continues at least until time t7. It is assumed that the third effect means is executing the effect X at the time t0 or has started the effect X from the time t0. In addition, at time t0, the second operation means is during a selectable period in which an effect can be selected by pressing any of the buttons 139a to 139e of the player's setting operation unit 139, or at the start of the period. To do. In the second operating means, the selectable period continues at least until time t7.

  When the player presses the chance button 136 of the first operation means at a time t1 when a certain time has elapsed from time t0, the first effect means ends the effect A and the effect B is started. In the second effect means, the effect α ends and the effect β starts. At time t1, the player is pressing the chance button 136 of the first operating means, but since none of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operating means is pressed, the second Production selection by the operating means is not performed. Production X continues in the third production means.

  When the player presses the chance button 136 of the first operation means at a time t2 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t1, the effect B is ended and the effect C is started in the first effect means. In the second effect means, the effect β ends and the effect γ starts.

  When the player depresses one of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means at a time t3 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t2, the selection provided in the RAM 408 of the first sub control unit 400 Although the value of the effect counter increases by 1, the effect X continues in the third effect means. At time t3, the player is pressing one of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means, but the first button is not pressed because the chance button 136 of the first operation means is not pressed. Production selection by the operating means is not performed. Therefore, the first effect means continues the effect C, and the second effect means continues the effect γ.

  When the player depresses one of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means at a time t4 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t3, the selection provided in the RAM 408 of the first sub control unit 400 Although the value of the effect counter increases by 1, the effect X continues in the third effect means. At time t4, the player is pressing one of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operating means, but the first button is not pressed because the chance button 136 of the first operating means is not pressed. Production selection by the operating means is not performed. Therefore, the first effect means continues the effect C, and the second effect means continues the effect γ.

  The time point t5 is a time point when the special figure variation game for T seconds started at the time point t0 is finished and the next special figure variation game is started. The number of times pressed by the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means during the special figure variable game started at time t0 is stored in the selection effect counter. The first sub-control unit 400 determines an effect to be executed by the third effect means based on the number of times of pressing. In this example, since the number of times of pressing is two, the second effect Z is selected from the effect X using the effect list arranged in the order of effects X, Y, Z,. Therefore, the effect Z is executed from the third effect means from the time point t5. At time t5, the chance button 136 of the first operation means is not pressed, so that the effect selection by the first operation means is not performed. Therefore, the first effect means continues the effect C, and the second effect means continues the effect γ.

  When the player depresses the chance button 136 of the first operation means at a time t6 when a certain time has elapsed from time t5, the effect C is ended and the effect D is started in the first effect means. In the second effect means, the effect γ ends and the effect δ starts. At time t6, the chance button 136 of the first operation means is pressed, but none of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means is pressed, so the second operation means No production selection is made. Production Z continues in the third production means.

  The time point t7 is a time point when the special figure variation game for T seconds started at the time point t5 is finished and the next special figure variation game is started. From time t5 to time t7, the setting operation unit 139 of the second operating means is not pressed and the value of the selected effect counter is zero, so that the effect Z continues in the third effect means from time t7.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, the selection result is reflected periodically (every T seconds) by the third rendering means corresponding to the second operation means. If there is a selection operation during T seconds, it is reflected at the next stage where the effect can be started.

  116 to 118 show selection effects executed by the first to third effect means of the pachinko machine 100 in the sixth embodiment. 116, 117 (a) to 117 (c) and FIG. 118 (a), (b) show the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 included in the first effect means at the bottom, The display area of the effect display device 915 included in the effect means is shown in the upper part. 116 (A) to 117 (C) and FIGS. 118 (A) and 118 (B) schematically show the speaker 120 included in the second rendering means. In each figure, (a) and (A), (b) and (B), and (c) and (C) show the effects of the same period, respectively.

  FIG. 116 (a) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect display device 915 at the time point t0 shown in FIG. At the time point t0, the special-figure variable game is finished, and the decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 0 stops in the left middle right ornamental symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c in the center of the display area of the ornamental symbol display device 208 of the first effect means. It is displayed, and the next special figure variable game starts immediately after this. In the lower right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, for example, a selection effect display area 800 is provided in a horizontally-long rectangular frame shape. In the selected effect display area 800, an effect A is displayed in which a character string “M1: Might be there ...” is displayed. In the selection effect in this example, the name of the song flowing from the speaker 120 is displayed in characters. On the effect display device 915 of the third effect means, an effect X for notifying (displaying) that the background mode being executed is the “Yoshimune mode” is executed. As shown in FIG. 116 (A), at the time point t0, an effect α in which a song 810 having a song name “may be there” is played from the speaker 120.

  FIG. 116B shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect display device 915 at the time point t1 shown in FIG. At time t1 when a certain time has elapsed from time t0, an image in which decoration 0 to decoration 9 sequentially move from top to bottom in each of the left middle right decorative symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c at the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner (indicated by a downward arrow in the figure). When the player depresses the chance button 136 of the first operation means at the time t1, in the selection effect display area 800 of the first effect means, the characters “M1: May be there ...” at the time t1. The effect A for displaying the column is ended, and the effect B for displaying the character string “M2: miracle universe” is started. The character string “M2: miracle universe” in the production B indicates the title of the song flowing from the speaker 120. Also, at the time point t1, the effect α flowing through the song 810 “may be there” ends on the speaker 120 of the second effect means, and as shown in FIG. The production β in which the song 810 of “Kiseki no Universe” flows is started. At time t1, the player is pressing the chance button 136 of the first operating means, but since none of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operating means is pressed, the second Production selection by the operating means is not performed. Production display device 915 as the third production means continues production X (Yoshimune mode).

  FIG. 116 (c) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect display device 915 at the time point t2 shown in FIG. At a time point t2 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t1, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the left middle right decorative symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c. When the player depresses the chance button 136 of the first operation means at the time point t2, in the selection effect display area 800 of the first effect means, the effect B that displays the character string “M2: miracle universe” at the time point t2. Is finished, and the production C for displaying the character string “M3: Your Fragrance” is started. The character string “M3: Your Fragrance” in the production C indicates the name of the song that flows from the speaker 120. Also, at time t2, the stage β in which the song 810 of “M2: miracle universe” flows is finished on the speaker 120 of the second production means, and as shown in FIG. The production [beta] in which the song 810 of "" flows is started. At time t2, the player presses the chance button 136 of the first operation means, but the second operation means does not press any of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139, so the second Production selection by the operating means is not performed. Production display device 915 as the third production means continues production X (Yoshimune mode).

  FIG. 117 (a) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect display device 915 at the time point t3 shown in FIG. At a time point t3 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t2, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the left middle right decorative symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c. When the player presses one of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means at the time t3, the value of the selection effect counter provided in the RAM 408 of the first sub control unit 400 increases by 1. However, production X (Yoshimune mode) continues in the third production means. At time t3, the player is pressing one of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means, but the first button is not pressed because the chance button 136 of the first operation means is not pressed. Production selection by the operating means is not performed. Therefore, in the selected effect display area 800, the effect C for displaying the character string “M3: Your Fragrance” continues at time t3. In addition, as shown in FIG. 117 (A), the performance of the song 810 having the song name “Your Fragrance” continues on the speaker 120.

  117 (b) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect display device 915 at the time point t4 shown in FIG. At a time t4 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t3, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the left middle right decorative symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c. When the player presses one of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means at the time t4, the value of the selection effect counter provided in the RAM 408 of the first sub control unit 400 increases by 1. However, production X (Yoshimune mode) continues in the third production means. At time t4, the player is pressing one of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operating means, but the first button is not pressed because the chance button 136 of the first operating means is not pressed. Production selection by the operating means is not performed. Therefore, in the selected effect display area 800, the effect C for displaying the character string “M3: Your Fragrance” continues at time t4. In addition, as shown in FIG. 117 (B), the effect γ in which the song 810 having the song name “Your Fragrance” flows on the speaker 120 continues.

  117 (c) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect display device 915 at the time point t5 shown in FIG. The time point t5 is a time point when the special figure variation game for T seconds started at the time point t0 ends and the next special figure variation game starts. At the time t5, the special-figure variable game ends, and the decoration 1-decoration 6-decoration 7 stops in the left middle right ornamental symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c at the center of the display area of the ornamental symbol display device 208 of the first effect means. It is displayed, and the next special figure variable game starts immediately after this. The number of times pressed by the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means during the special figure variable game started at time t0 is stored in the selection effect counter. The first sub-control unit 400 determines an effect to be executed by the third effect means based on the number of times of pressing. In this example, since the number of times of pressing is two, the second effect Z (princess mode) is selected from the effect X using the effect list arranged in the order of effects X, Y, Z,. Therefore, from time t5, the effect Z for notifying (displaying) that the background mode being executed from the effect display device 915 is the “princess mode” is executed. In this example, the effect Z (“princess mode”) is displayed simultaneously with the start of the change. The production Z may be started before the fluctuation starts. Further, the effect Z may be started simultaneously with the start of fluctuation. It should be noted that the production Z does not have to be started before the change starts. At time t5, the chance button 136 of the first operation means is not pressed, so that the effect selection by the first operation means is not performed. Accordingly, the effect C is continued on the decorative symbol display device 208, and as shown in FIG. 117C, the effect γ in which the song 810 having the song name “Your Fragrance” continues on the speaker 120.

  FIG. 118A shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect display device 915 at the time point t6 shown in FIG. At time t6 when a certain time has elapsed from time t5, an image in which decoration 0 to decoration 9 sequentially moves from top to bottom in each of the left middle right decorative symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c at the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner (indicated by a downward arrow in the figure). When the player depresses the chance button 136 of the first operation means at the time t6, in the selection effect display area 800 of the first effect means, an effect C that displays the character string “M3: Your Fragrance” at the time t6. Is finished, and the production D for displaying the character string “M4: Mega! Giga! Summer!” Is started. The character string “M4: Mega! Giga! Summer!” In the production D indicates the name of the song that flows from the speaker 120. Also, at time t6, the production γ in which the song 810 of “Your Fragrance” 810 is finished on the speaker 120 of the second production means, and the song name is “Mega! Giga! Summer” as shown in FIG. The production δ in which the song 810 of “!” Flows is started. At time t6, the player presses the chance button 136 of the first operation means, but since the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means are not pressed, the second Production selection by the operating means is not performed. In the effect display device 915 as the third effect means, the effect Z (princess mode) is continued.

  FIG. 118 (b) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect display device 915 at the time point t7 shown in FIG. The time point t7 is a time point when the special figure variation game for T seconds started at the time point t5 is finished and the next special figure variation game is started. The decorative display of the decorative symbols is displayed in the left middle right decorative symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c. In the selection effect display area 800 of the first effect means, the effect C for displaying the character string “M4: Mega! Giga! Summer!” Continues at time t7. From time t5 to time t7, the setting operation unit 139 of the second operating means is not pressed and the value of the selected effect counter is zero, so effect Z (princess mode) continues in effect display device 915 from time t7. To do. In addition, as shown in FIG. 118 (B), the effect δ in which the song 810 having the song name “Mega! Giga! Summer!” Flows on the speaker 120 continues.

  FIG. 119 shows temporal operations of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 7 according to the present embodiment. The horizontal axis of FIG. 119 shows a time series, and time passes from left to right. 119 in the upper part of FIG. 119 indicates various operations or the time point of starting and ending the production. The middle part of FIG. 119 shows execution states of various effects by the first effect means and the second effect means in order from the top. The first effect means of this example includes a decorative symbol display device 208, and the second effect means includes a speaker 120. The first operation means is used to select an effect by the first and second effect means. The first operation means of this example includes a chance button 136 of the operation means 700, for example. The lower part of FIG. 119 shows execution states of various effects by the third effect means. The third effect means of this example includes an effect display device 915. The second operation means is used to select an effect by the third effect means. The second operation means of this example includes a setting operation unit 139 of the operation means 700, for example. By selecting one of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139, an effect is selected by the second operation means.

  First, time t0 is the start time of the special figure variable game. Whether the first effect means is executing effect A at time t0 or starting effect A from time t0, and whether the second effect means is executing effect α at time t0, effect α from time t0 Is assumed to have started. Further, it is assumed that the first operation means at the time point t0 is during a selectable period during which the player can select an effect by pressing the chance button 136 or at the start point of the period. In the first operation means, the selectable period continues until at least time t10.

  When the player presses the chance button 136 of the first operation means at a time t1 when a certain time has elapsed from time t0, the first effect means ends the effect A and the effect B is started. On the other hand, in the second production means, the production is changed on the condition that the waiting time of Ta seconds has elapsed from the time when the player operated the operation means, and the production is performed until the standby time has elapsed. No changes are made. Therefore, the production α is continued at time t1. It is assumed that the third effect means is executing the effect X at the time t0 or has started the effect X from the time t0. Further, it is assumed that the second operation means at the time point t0 is during a selectable period in which an effect can be selected by pressing any of the buttons of the player's setting operation unit 139 or at the start time of the period. In the second operating means, the selectable period continues at least until time t10. At time t1, the player is pressing the chance button 136 of the first operating means, but since none of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operating means is pressed, the second Production selection by the operating means is not performed. Production X continues in the third production means.

  Further, when the player presses the chance button 136 of the operation means at a time point t2 during the Ta second standby time in the second effect means, the effect B is ended and the effect C is started in the first effect means. On the other hand, since the time T1 from the time point t1 to the time point t2 is shorter than the standby time Ta, the second effect means does not change the effect at the time point t2 and the effect α is continued. At time t2 when a certain time has elapsed from time t1, none of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means is pressed, so that the effect selection by the second operation means is not performed. Production X continues in the third production means.

  Further, when the chance button 136 is pressed at time t2, the measurement of the standby time started by the first sub-control unit 400 by pressing the previous chance button 136 is reset, and a new standby time is set from time t2. The

  Further, when the player depresses the chance button 136 of the operation means at a time point t3 during the waiting time of T seconds in the second effect means, the effect C is ended and the effect D is started in the first effect means. On the other hand, since the time T2 from the time point t2 to the time point t3 is shorter than the standby time Ta, the production α is continued without changing the production in the second production means at the time t3. At a time t3 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t2, none of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means is pressed, so that the effect selection by the second operation means is not performed. Production X continues in the third production means.

  Further, when the chance button 136 is pressed at time t3, the measurement of the standby time started by pressing the previous chance button 136 is reset, and a new standby time is set from time t3.

  When the player depresses one of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means at a time t4 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t3, the selection provided in the RAM 408 of the first sub control unit 400 Although the value of the effect counter increases by 1, the effect X continues in the third effect means. At time t4, the player is pressing one of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operating means, but the first button is not pressed because the chance button 136 of the first operating means is not pressed. Production selection by the operating means is not performed. Thus, the first effect means continues the effect D, and the second effect means continues the effect α.

  At the time t5 when the standby time Ta seconds elapses from the time t3, there is no depression of the chance button 136 within the period from the time t3 to the time t5, and the time T3 (> Ta) from the time t3 to the next depression of the chance button 136. Since the time t8 has elapsed, the second effect means ends the effect α and starts the effect δ. On the other hand, the production D is continued in the first production means.

  When the player depresses one of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means at a time t6 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t5, the selection provided in the RAM 408 of the first sub control unit 400 Although the value of the effect counter increases by 1, the effect X continues in the third effect means. At time t6, the player is pressing one of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operating means, but the first button is not pressed because the chance button 136 of the first operating means is not pressed. Production selection by the operating means is not performed. Therefore, the first effect means continues the effect D, and the second effect means continues the effect δ.

  The time point t7 is the time point when the special figure variation game for Tb seconds started at the time point t0 is finished and the next special figure variation game is started. The number of times pressed by the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means during the special figure variable game started at time t0 is stored in the selection effect counter. The first sub-control unit 400 determines an effect to be executed by the third effect means based on the number of times of pressing. In this example, since the number of times of pressing is two, the second effect Z is selected from the effect X using the effect list arranged in the order of effects X, Y, Z,. Therefore, the effect Z is executed from the third effect means from the time point t7. At time t7, the chance button 136 of the first operation means is not pressed, so that the effect selection by the first operation means is not performed. Therefore, the first effect means continues the effect D, and the second effect means continues the effect δ.

  Further, when the player presses the chance button 136 of the operation means at a time point t8 after the waiting time of T seconds in the second effect means, the effect D ends and the effect E starts in the first effect means. . On the other hand, in the second effect means, the effect is changed on the condition that a waiting time of Ta seconds has elapsed from the time when the player operates the operation means. Therefore, the effect is not changed until the wait time elapses. I will not. Therefore, the production δ is continued at time t8. At a time point t8 when a certain time has elapsed from time t7, none of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means is pressed, so that the effect selection by the second operation means is not performed. Production Z continues in the third production means.

  The time point t9 is a time point when the special figure variation game for Tb seconds started at the time point t7 is completed and the next special figure variation game is started. The number of times pressed by the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means during the special figure variable game started at time t7 is stored in the selection effect counter. The first sub-control unit 400 determines an effect to be executed by the third effect means based on the number of times of pressing. In this example, since the number of times of pressing is 0, the 0th effect (ie, effect Z) is selected from effect Z using the effect list arranged in the order of effects X, Y, Z,. Therefore, the effect Z is executed from the third effect means from the time point t9. At time t9, the chance button 136 of the first operation means is not pressed, so that the effect selection by the first operation means is not performed. Therefore, the first effect means continues the effect E, and the second effect means continues the effect δ.

  At the time t10 when the waiting time Ta seconds has elapsed from the time t8, the chance button 136 is not pressed within the period from the time t8 to the time t10, and the time T4 (> Ta) from the time t8 until the next chance button 136 is pressed. Therefore, the second effect means ends the effect δ and starts the effect ε. On the other hand, the production E is continued in the first production means.

  120 to 123 show selection effects executed by the first to third effect means of the pachinko machine 100 according to the seventh embodiment. 120 (a) to 122 (c) and FIGS. 123 (a) and 123 (b) show the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 included in the first rendering means in the lower stage. The display area of the effect display device 915 included in the effect means is shown in the upper part. 120A to 122C and FIGS. 123A and 123B schematically show the speaker 120 included in the second rendering means. In each figure, (a) and (A), (b) and (B), and (c) and (C) show the effects of the same period, respectively.

  FIG. 120A shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect display device 915 at the time point t0 shown in FIG. At the time point t0, the special-figure variable game is finished, and the decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 0 stops in the left middle right ornamental symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c in the center of the display area of the ornamental symbol display device 208 of the first effect means. It is displayed, and the next special figure variable game starts immediately after this. In the lower right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, for example, a selection effect display area 800 is provided in a horizontally-long rectangular frame shape. In the selected effect display area 800, an effect A is displayed in which a character string “M1: Might be there ...” is displayed. In the selection effect in this example, the name of the song flowing from the speaker 120 is displayed in characters. On the effect display device 915 of the third effect means, an effect X for notifying (displaying) that the background mode being executed is the “Yoshimune mode” is executed. As shown in FIG. 120 (A), at the time point t0, an effect α in which a song 810 having a song name “May be there ...” flows from the speaker 120.

  FIG. 120B shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect display device 915 at the time point t1 shown in FIG. As described with reference to FIG. 119, the time point t1 is a time point when the player presses the chance button 136. At time t1, the special figure variation game is continuing. In the selected effect display area 800 of the first effect means, the effect A that displays the character string “M1: may be there” at the time t1 ends, and the characters “M2: miracle universe” are displayed. Production B displaying the columns is started. The character string “M2: miracle universe” in the production B indicates the title of the song flowing from the speaker 120. On the other hand, in the speaker 120, the effect is changed on the condition that the waiting time of Ta seconds has elapsed since the player operated the first operating means. Therefore, the effect is not changed until the waiting time elapses. I will not. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 120 (B), at the time point t1, the production α in which the song 810 having the song name “May be there ...” is continued. At time t1, the player presses the chance button 136 of the first operation means, but the second operation means does not press any of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139, so the second Production selection by the operating means is not performed. Production display device 915 as the third production means continues production X (Yoshimune mode).

  120 (c) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect display device 915 at the time point t2 shown in FIG. When the player depresses the chance button 136 of the first operation means at the time t2 during the Ta second standby time on the speaker 120 of the second effect means, the time t2 is selected in the selection effect display area 800 of the first effect means. Then, the effect B for displaying the character string “M2: miracle of miracle” is finished, and the effect C for displaying the character string “M3: Your Fragrance” is started. The character string “M3: Your Fragrance” in the production C indicates the name of the song that flows from the speaker 120. On the other hand, since the time T1 from the time point t1 to the time point t2 (for example, T1 = 0.5 seconds) is shorter than the waiting time Ta (for example, Ta = 1 second), as shown in FIG. At time t2, the effect is not changed on the speaker 120, and the effect α in which the song 810 having the song name “may be there” continues is played. At time t2, the player presses the chance button 136 of the first operation means, but none of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means is pressed. Production selection by the operating means is not performed. Production display device 915 as the third production means continues production X (Yoshimune mode).

  Further, when the chance button 136 is pressed at time t2, the measurement of the standby time started by pressing the previous chance button 136 is reset, and a new standby time Ta (= 1 second) is set from time t2. .

  FIG. 121 (a) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect display device 915 at the time point t3 shown in FIG. When the player presses the chance button 136 of the first operation means at the time t3 during the Ta second standby time on the speaker 120 of the second effect means, the time t3 is displayed in the selection effect display area 800 of the first effect means. Then, the effect C for displaying the character string “M3: Your Fragrance” ends, and the effect D for displaying the character string “M4: Mega! Giga! Summer!” Is started. The character string “M4: Mega! Giga! Summer!” In the production D indicates the name of the song that flows from the speaker 120. On the other hand, the time T2 from the time point t2 to the time point t3 (for example, T2 = 0.8 seconds) is shorter than the waiting time Ta (for example, Ta = 1 second), so as shown in FIG. At time t3, the presentation is not performed on the speaker 120 and the production α is continued. At the time t3, the player presses the chance button 136 of the first operation means, but the second operation means does not press any of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139. Production selection by the operating means is not performed. Production display device 915 as the third production means continues production X (Yoshimune mode).

  Further, when the chance button 136 is pressed at the time point t3, the measurement of the standby time started by pressing the previous chance button 136 is reset, and a new standby time Ta (= 1 second) is set from the time point t3. .

  FIG. 121 (b) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect display device 915 at the time point t4 shown in FIG. At a time point t4 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t3, the decorative symbol variation display continues in the left middle right decorative symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c. When the player presses one of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means at the time t4, the value of the selection effect counter provided in the RAM 408 of the first sub control unit 400 increases by 1. However, production X (Yoshimune mode) continues in the third production means. At time t4, the player is pressing one of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operating means, but the first button is not pressed because the chance button 136 of the first operating means is not pressed. Production selection by the operating means is not performed. Therefore, in the selected effect display area 800, the effect D for displaying the character string “M4: Mega! Giga! Summer!” Continues at time t4. In addition, as shown in FIG. 121 (B), an effect α in which a song 810 having a song name “May be there ...” is continued from the speaker 120.

  FIG. 121 (c) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect display device 915 at the time point t5 shown in FIG. At a time point t5 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t4, the decorative symbol variation display is continued in the left middle right decorative symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c. At the time t5 when the standby time Ta seconds has elapsed from the time t3, the chance button 136 of the first operating means is not pressed within the period from the time t3 to the time t5, so the production α is finished in the second directing means. The production δ is started. As shown in FIG. 121 (C), an effect δ in which a song 810 having a song name “Mega! Giga! Summer!” Flows from the speaker 120 is started. On the other hand, the production D is continued in the first production means. Further, in the third effect means, effect X (Yoshimune mode) continues.

  FIG. 122A shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect display device 915 at the time point t6 shown in FIG. At time t6, the decorative symbol variation display continues in the left middle right decorative symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c. When the player presses one of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means at time t6, the value of the selection effect counter provided in the RAM 408 of the first sub control unit 400 increases by 1. However, production X (Yoshimune mode) continues in the third production means. At time t6, the player is pressing one of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operating means, but the first button is not pressed because the chance button 136 of the first operating means is not pressed. Production selection by the operating means is not performed. Therefore, in the selected effect display area 800, effect D for displaying the character string “M4: Mega! Giga! Summer!” Continues at time t6. In addition, as shown in FIG. 122 (A), an effect δ in which a song 810 having a song name “Mega! Giga! Summer!” Flows from the speaker 120 is continued.

  FIG. 122B shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect display device 915 at the time point t7 shown in FIG. The time point t7 is a time point when the special figure variation game for Tb seconds started at the time point t0 ends and the next special figure variation game starts. At the time t7, the special-figure variable game is finished, and the decoration 1-decoration 6-decoration 7 stops in the left middle right ornamental symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c at the center of the display area of the ornamental symbol display device 208 of the first effect means. It is displayed, and the next special figure variable game starts immediately after this. The number of times pressed by the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means during the special figure variable game started at time t0 is stored in the selection effect counter. The first sub-control unit 400 determines an effect to be executed by the third effect means based on the number of times of pressing. In this example, since the number of times of pressing is two, the second effect Z (princess mode) is selected from the effect X using the effect list arranged in the order of effects X, Y, Z,. Therefore, from time t7, the effect Z for notifying (displaying) that the background mode being executed from the effect display device 915 is the “princess mode” is executed. In this example, the effect Z (“princess mode”) is displayed simultaneously with the start of the change. The production Z may be started before the fluctuation starts. Further, the effect Z may be started simultaneously with the start of fluctuation. It should be noted that the production Z does not have to be started before the change starts. At time t7, the chance button 136 of the first operation means is not pressed, so that the effect selection by the first operation means is not performed. Therefore, the effect D is continued in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect δ in which the song 810 with the song name "Mega! Giga! Summer!" Flows continues on the speaker 120 as shown in FIG. 122 (B).

  FIG. 122 (c) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect display device 915 at the time point t8 shown in FIG. At time t8, the special figure variation game started at time t0 continues. When the player presses the chance button 136 of the first operation means at time t8, the character string “M4: Mega! Giga! Summer!” Is displayed at time t8 in the selection effect display area 800 of the first effect means. The effect D to be displayed is ended and the effect E to display the character string “M5: hot spring hormone” is started. The character string “M5: hot spring hormone” in the production E indicates the name of the music flowing from the speaker 120. On the other hand, in the speaker 120, the effect is changed on the condition that the waiting time of Ta seconds has elapsed since the player operated the first operating means. Therefore, the effect is not changed until the waiting time elapses. I will not. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 122 (C), at the time t8, the effect δ in which the song 810 having the song name “Mega! Giga! Summer!” Flows is continued. At time t8, the player presses the chance button 136 of the first operation means, but the second operation means does not press any of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139, so the second Production selection by the operating means is not performed. In the effect display device 915 as the third effect means, the effect Z (princess mode) is continued.

  FIG. 123 (a) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect display device 915 at the time point t9 shown in FIG. The time point t9 is a time point when the special figure variation game for Tb seconds started at the time point t7 ends and the next special figure variation game starts. At the time t9, the special figure variable game is finished, and the decoration 3-decoration 9-decoration 8 stops in the left middle right ornamental symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c at the center of the display area of the ornamental symbol display device 208 of the first effect means. It is displayed, and the next special figure variable game starts immediately after this. At time t9, the chance button 136 of the first operation means is not pressed, so that the effect selection by the first operation means is not performed. Therefore, the effect E is continued in the decorative symbol display device 208. From time t7 to time t9, the setting operation unit 139 of the second operating means is not pressed and the value of the selected effect counter is zero, so effect Z (princess mode) continues in effect display device 915 from time t9. To do. Also, as shown in FIG. 123 (A), the effect δ in which the song 810 with the song name “Mega! Giga! Summer!” Flows on the speaker 120 continues.

  FIG. 123 (b) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect display device 915 at the time point t10 shown in FIG. At a time point t10 when a certain time has elapsed from time t9, the decorative symbol variation display continues in the left middle right decorative symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c. At the time t10 when the waiting time Ta seconds elapses from the time t8, the chance button 136 of the first operating means is not pressed during the period from the time t8 to the time t10, so the effect δ ends in the second directing means. The production ε is started. As shown in FIG. 123 (B), an effect ε in which a song 810 having a song name “hot spring hormone” flows from the speaker 120 is started. On the other hand, the production E is continued in the first production means. Further, in the third effect means, effect Z (princess mode) continues.

  FIG. 124 shows a temporal operation of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 8 according to the present embodiment. The horizontal axis of FIG. 124 shows a time series, and time passes from left to right. In the upper part of FIG. 124, t0 to t7 indicate various operations, or the start and end times of production. The middle part of FIG. 124 shows execution states of various effects by the first effect means and the second effect means in order from the top. The first effect means of this example includes a decorative symbol display device 208, and the second effect means includes a speaker 120. The first operation means is used to select an effect by the first and second effect means. The first operation means of this example includes a chance button 136 of the operation means 700, for example. The lower part of FIG. 124 shows execution states of various effects by the third effect means and the fourth effect means. The third effect means of this example includes an effect display device 915, and the fourth effect means includes a lamp 940. The second operation means is used to select an effect in the third and fourth effect means. The second operation means of this example includes a setting operation unit 139 of the operation means 700, for example. By selecting one of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139, an effect is selected by the second operation means.

  First, time t0 is the start time of the special figure variable game. Whether the first effect means is executing effect A at time t0 or starting effect A from time t0, and whether the second effect means is executing effect α at time t0, effect α from time t0 Is assumed to have started. Further, it is assumed that the first operation means at the time point t0 is during a selectable period during which the player can select an effect by pressing the chance button 136 or at the start point of the period. In the first operation means, the selectable period continues at least until time t7. It is assumed that the third effect means is executing the effect X at the time t0 or has started the effect X from the time t0. It is assumed that the fourth effect means is executing the effect χ at the time t0 or has started the effect χ from the time t0. In addition, at time t0, the second operation means is during a selectable period in which an effect can be selected by pressing any of the buttons 139a to 139e of the player's setting operation unit 139, or at the start of the period. To do. In the second operating means, the selectable period continues at least until time t7.

  When the player presses the chance button 136 of the first operation means at a time t1 when a certain time has elapsed from time t0, the first effect means ends the effect A and the effect B is started. In the second effect means, the effect α ends and the effect β starts. At time t1, the player is pressing the chance button 136 of the first operating means, but since none of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operating means is pressed, the second Production selection by the operating means is not performed. The third effect means continues the effect X, and the fourth effect means continues the effect χ.

  When the player presses the chance button 136 of the first operation means at a time t2 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t1, the effect B is ended and the effect C is started in the first effect means. In the second effect means, the effect β ends and the effect γ starts.

  When the player depresses one of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means at a time t3 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t2, the selection provided in the RAM 408 of the first sub control unit 400 Although the value of the effect counter increases by 1, the effect X continues in the third effect means. On the other hand, the fourth effect means ends the effect χ and starts the effect ψ. At time t3, the player is pressing one of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means, but the first button is not pressed because the chance button 136 of the first operation means is not pressed. Production selection by the operating means is not performed. Therefore, the first effect means continues the effect C, and the second effect means continues the effect γ.

  When the player depresses one of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means at a time t4 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t3, the selection provided in the RAM 408 of the first sub control unit 400 Although the value of the effect counter increases by 1, the effect X continues in the third effect means. On the other hand, in the fourth effect means, the effect ψ ends and the effect ω starts. At time t4, the player is pressing one of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operating means, but the first button is not pressed because the chance button 136 of the first operating means is not pressed. Production selection by the operating means is not performed. Therefore, the first effect means continues the effect C, and the second effect means continues the effect γ.

  The time point t5 is a time point when the special figure variation game for T seconds started at the time point t0 is finished and the next special figure variation game is started. The number of times pressed by the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means during the special figure variable game started at time t0 is stored in the selection effect counter. The first sub-control unit 400 determines an effect to be executed by the third effect means based on the number of times of pressing. In this example, since the number of times of pressing is two, the second effect Z is selected from the effect X using the effect list arranged in the order of effects X, Y, Z,. Therefore, the effect Z is executed from the third effect means from the time point t5. On the other hand, in the fourth effect means, the effect ω ends and the effect ω ′ is started. At time t5, the chance button 136 of the first operation means is not pressed, so that the effect selection by the first operation means is not performed. Therefore, the first effect means continues the effect C, and the second effect means continues the effect γ.

  When the player depresses the chance button 136 of the first operation means at a time t6 when a certain time has elapsed from time t5, the effect C is ended and the effect D is started in the first effect means. In the second effect means, the effect γ ends and the effect δ starts. At time t6, the chance button 136 of the first operation means is pressed, but none of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means is pressed, so the second operation means No production selection is made. Therefore, the third effect means continues the effect Z, and the fourth effect means continues the effect ω ′.

  The time point t7 is a time point when the special figure variation game for T seconds started at the time point t5 is finished and the next special figure variation game is started. From time t5 to time t7, the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means is not pressed and the value of the selection effect counter is zero. Therefore, the effect Z is continued in the third effect means from time t7, In the fourth effect means, the effect ω ′ is continued.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, the selection result is reflected periodically (every T seconds) by the third rendering means corresponding to the second operation means. If there is a selection operation during T seconds, it is reflected at the next stage where the effect can be started. In the fourth effect means corresponding to the second operation means, the operation result is immediately reflected.

  125 to 127 illustrate selection effects executed by the first to fourth effect means of the pachinko machine 100 according to the eighth embodiment. 125, 126 (a) to (c) and 127 (a), (b) of FIG. 127 show the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 included in the first effect means in the lower stage, The display area of the effect display device 915 included in the effect means is shown in the upper part. 125A and 125B and FIGS. 127A and 127B schematically show the speaker 120 included in the second effect means and the lamp 940 included in the fourth effect means. Is shown. In each figure, (a) and (A), (b) and (B), and (c) and (C) show the effects of the same period, respectively.

  FIG. 125 (a) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect display device 915 at the time point t0 shown in FIG. At the time point t0, the special-figure variable game is finished, and the decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 0 stops in the left middle right ornamental symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c in the center of the display area of the ornamental symbol display device 208 of the first effect means. It is displayed, and the next special figure variable game starts immediately after this. In the lower right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, for example, a selection effect display area 800 is provided in a horizontally-long rectangular frame shape. In the selected effect display area 800, an effect A is displayed in which a character string “M1: Might be there ...” is displayed. In the selection effect A in this example, the name of a song flowing from the speaker 120 is displayed in characters. On the effect display device 915 of the third effect means, an effect X for notifying (displaying) that the background mode being executed is the “Yoshimune mode” is executed. As shown in FIG. 125 (A), at the time point t0, an effect α in which a song 810 having a song name “May be there ...” is executed from the speaker 120 of the second effect means. Further, the lamp 940 of the fourth effect means executes an effect χ in which the LED of the color corresponding to the effect X (Yoshimune mode) emits light and the character “Yatsushiro” is visually recognized.

  FIG. 125 (b) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect display device 915 at the time point t1 shown in FIG. At time t1 when a certain time has elapsed from time t0, an image in which decoration 0 to decoration 9 sequentially move from top to bottom in each of the left middle right decorative symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c at the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner (indicated by a downward arrow in the figure). When the player depresses the chance button 136 of the first operation means at the time t1, in the selection effect display area 800 of the first effect means, the characters “M1: May be there ...” at the time t1. The effect A for displaying the column is ended, and the effect B for displaying the character string “M2: miracle universe” is started. The character string “M2: miracle universe” in the production B indicates the title of the song flowing from the speaker 120. Also, at time t1, the speaker α of the second effect means ends the effect α in which the song 810 “may be there” ends, and the song name is as shown in FIG. 125 (B). The production β in which the song 810 of “Kiseki no Universe” flows is started. At time t1, the player is pressing the chance button 136 of the first operating means, but since none of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operating means is pressed, the second Production selection by the operating means is not performed. Therefore, the effect X is continued in the effect display device 915 of the third effect means. As shown in FIG. 125 (B), the fourth effect means continues the effect χ.

  FIG. 125 (c) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect display device 915 at the time point t2 shown in FIG. At a time point t2 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t1, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the left middle right decorative symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c. When the player depresses the chance button 136 of the first operation means at the time point t2, in the selection effect display area 800 of the first effect means, the effect B that displays the character string “M2: miracle universe” at the time point t2. Is finished, and the production C for displaying the character string “M3: Your Fragrance” is started. The character string “M3: Your Fragrance” in the production C indicates the name of the song that flows from the speaker 120. Also, at time t2, the stage β in which the music “810: universe of miracle” 810 is finished at the speaker 120 of the second production means, and as shown in FIG. The production [beta] in which the song 810 of "" flows is started. At time t2, the player presses the chance button 136 of the first operation means, but the second operation means does not press any of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139, so the second Production selection by the operating means is not performed. In the effect display device 915 as the third effect means, the effect X is continued. Also, as shown in FIG. 125C, the fourth effect means continues the effect χ.

  126 (a) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect display device 915 at the time point t3 shown in FIG. At a time point t3 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t2, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the left middle right decorative symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c. When the player presses one of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means at the time t3, the value of the selection effect counter provided in the RAM 408 of the first sub control unit 400 increases by 1. However, production X (Yoshimune mode) continues in the third production means. The effect display device 915 displays a character image of “爺” along with a display of “from the next variation to a heel mode”. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 126 (A), in the lamp 940 of the fourth effect means, the operation at the setting operation unit 139 is immediately reflected, the effect χ ends, and the effect ψ starts. At time t3, the player is pressing one of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means, but the first button is not pressed because the chance button 136 of the first operation means is not pressed. Production selection by the operating means is not performed. Therefore, in the selected effect display area 800, the effect C for displaying the character string “M3: Your Fragrance” continues at time t3. Also, as shown in FIG. 126 (A), the performance of the song 810 with the song name “Your Fragrance” continues on the speaker 120.

  126 (b) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect display device 915 at the time point t4 shown in FIG. At a time t4 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t3, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the left middle right decorative symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c. When the player presses one of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means at the time t4, the value of the selection effect counter provided in the RAM 408 of the first sub control unit 400 increases by 1. However, production X (Yoshimune mode) continues in the third production means. The effect display device 915 displays a character image of “Princess” along with the display “Princess mode from next change”. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 126 (B), the operation at the setting operation unit 139 is immediately reflected on the lamp 940 of the fourth effect means, the effect ψ is ended, and the effect ω is started. At time t4, the player is pressing one of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operating means, but the first button is not pressed because the chance button 136 of the first operating means is not pressed. Production selection by the operating means is not performed. Therefore, in the selected effect display area 800, the effect C for displaying the character string “M3: Your Fragrance” continues at time t4. In addition, as shown in FIG. 126 (B), the effect γ in which the song 810 having the song name “Your Fragrance” flows on the speaker 120 continues.

  FIG. 126 (c) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect display device 915 at the time point t5 shown in FIG. The time point t5 is a time point when the special figure variation game for T seconds started at the time point t0 ends and the next special figure variation game starts. At the time t5, the special-figure variable game ends, and the decoration 1-decoration 6-decoration 7 stops in the left middle right ornamental symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c at the center of the display area of the ornamental symbol display device 208 of the first effect means. It is displayed, and the next special figure variable game starts immediately after this. The number of times pressed by the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means during the special figure variable game started at time t0 is stored in the selection effect counter. The first sub-control unit 400 determines an effect to be executed by the third effect means based on the number of times of pressing. In this example, since the number of times of pressing is two, the second effect Z (princess mode) is selected from the effect X using the effect list arranged in the order of effects X, Y, Z,. Therefore, from time t5, the effect Z for notifying (displaying) that the background mode being executed from the effect display device 915 is the “princess mode” is executed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 126 (C), the effect ω is ended and the effect ω ′ is started in the lamp 940 of the fourth effect means. In the effect ω ′, the LED of the color corresponding to the effect “Z” in the “princess mode” emits light and the character “Yatsushiro” is visually recognized. In this example, after the LED of the color corresponding to the effect Z is emitted from the lamp 940 (after the light is emitted at a predetermined brightness), the display of the image of the effect Z (“princess mode”) is completed. . At time t5, the chance button 136 of the first operation means is not pressed, so that the effect selection by the first operation means is not performed. Therefore, the effect C is continued in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect γ in which the song 810 having the song name “Your Fragrance” continues on the speaker 120 as shown in FIG. 126 (C). Note that the light emission of the lamp 940 and the display of the effect Z may be started at the same time, the display of the effect Z may be started after the light emission of the lamp 940 is started, and the lamp after the display of the effect Z is started. The light emission of 940 may be started. In addition, the lamp 940 may emit the LED of the color corresponding to the effect Z, and at the same time, the display of the effect Z (“princess mode”) may be completed, or the display of the effect Z (“princess mode”) is completed. Later, the lamp 940 may emit an LED of a color corresponding to the effect Z.

  FIG. 127 (a) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect display device 915 at the time point t6 shown in FIG. At time t6 when a certain time has elapsed from time t5, an image in which decoration 0 to decoration 9 sequentially moves from top to bottom in each of the left middle right decorative symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c at the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner (indicated by a downward arrow in the figure). When the player depresses the chance button 136 of the first operation means at the time t6, in the selection effect display area 800 of the first effect means, an effect C that displays the character string “M3: Your Fragrance” at the time t6. Is finished, and the production D for displaying the character string “M4: Mega! Giga! Summer!” Is started. The character string “M4: Mega! Giga! Summer!” In the production D indicates the name of the song that flows from the speaker 120. At time t6, the production γ in which the song 810 of “Kimi no Kakera” flows is finished on the speaker 120 of the second production means, and the song title is “Mega! Giga! Summer” as shown in FIG. The production δ in which the song 810 of “!” Flows is started. At time t6, the player presses the chance button 136 of the first operation means, but since the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means are not pressed, the second Production selection by the operating means is not performed. In the effect display device 915 as the third effect means, the effect “Z” of “princess mode” is continued. Also, as shown in FIG. 127 (A), the effect ω ′ is continued in the lamp 940 of the fourth effect means.

  127 (b) shows the effect performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect display device 915 at time t7 shown in FIG. At the time t7, after the special figure variation game is finished, the decoration 3-decoration 9-decoration 8 is displayed in the left middle right ornamental symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c at the center of the display area of the ornamental symbol display device 208 of the first effect means. The display is stopped, and the next special figure variation game is started immediately after this. In the selection effect display area 800 of the first effect means, the effect C for displaying the character string “M4: Mega! Giga! Summer!” Continues at time t7. From time t5 to time t7, the setting operation unit 139 of the second operating means is not pressed and the value of the selected effect counter is zero, so that the effect Z continues in the effect display device 915 from time t7. In addition, as shown in FIG. 127 (B), in the speaker 120 of the third effect means, the effect δ in which the song name 810 “Mega! Giga! Summer!” Flows continues, and the lamp 940 of the fourth effect means. Then, the production ω ′ is continued. Note that the lamp 940 of the fourth effect means may be the one that executes the selected effect when the next special figure variable game is started, similarly to the effect display device 915.

  FIG. 128 shows temporal operations of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 9 according to the present embodiment. The horizontal axis of FIG. 128 shows a time series, and time has passed from left to right. In the upper part of FIG. 128, t0 to t9 indicate various operations, or the start and end times of effects. The middle part of FIG. 128 shows the execution state of various effects by the first effect means and the second effect means in order from the top. The first effect means of this example includes a decorative symbol display device 208, and the second effect means includes a speaker 120. The first operation means is used to select an effect by the first and second effect means. The first operation means of this example includes a setting operation unit 139 of the operation means 700, for example. By selecting one of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139, the effect selection by the first operation means is performed. The lower part of FIG. 128 shows execution states of various effects by the first effect means based on the second operation means. The second operation means of this example includes a chance button 136 of the operation means 700, for example. As described above, in this example, the first effect means executes the selection effect by the first operation means and the second operation means, and two kinds of effects proceed simultaneously.

  First, time t0 is the start time of the special figure variable game. Whether the first effect means is executing effect A at time t0 or starting effect A from time t0, and whether the second effect means is executing effect α at time t0, effect α from time t0 Is assumed to have started. At the time t0, the first operation means is during a selectable period in which an effect can be selected by pressing any one of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 by the player, or at the start of the period. To do. The selectable period of the first operating means continues at least until time t9. Further, at time t0, the first effect means is executing effect X or starting effect X from time t0. In addition, it is assumed that the second operating means at the time point t0 is during a selectable period in which the player can select an effect by pressing the chance button 136 or at the start point of the period. In the second operating means, the selectable period continues at least until time t9.

  When the player depresses one of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the first operation means at a time t1 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t0, the first effect means ends the effect A and the effect. B is started. On the other hand, in the second production means, the production is changed on the condition that the waiting time of Ta seconds has elapsed from the time when the player operated the operation means, and the production is performed until the standby time has elapsed. No changes are made. Therefore, the second effect means continues the effect α at time t1. At time t1, any one of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the first operation unit is pressed, but the chance button 136 of the second operation unit is not pressed, so the second operation unit No production selection is performed. Accordingly, in the first effect means, the effect B is started and the effect X is continued.

  Further, when the player presses one of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the first operation means at the time point t2 during the waiting time of Ta seconds in the second effect means, the first effect means The production B is finished and the production C is started. On the other hand, since the time T1 from the time point t1 to the time point t2 is shorter than the standby time Ta, the second effect means does not change the effect at the time point t2 and the effect α is continued. At a time t2 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t1, the chance button 136 of the second operating means is not pressed, so that the effect selection by the second operating means is not performed. Therefore, in the first effect means, effect C is started and effect X is continued.

  Furthermore, when any one of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 is pressed at the time point t2, the waiting time that has been started in the first sub-control unit 400 by pressing any of the previous buttons 139a to 139e is measured. Is reset, and a new waiting time is set from time t2.

  Further, when the player depresses the chance button 136 of the operation means at a time point t3 during the waiting time of T seconds in the second effect means, the effect C is ended and the effect D is started in the first effect means. On the other hand, since the time T2 from the time point t2 to the time point t3 is shorter than the standby time Ta, the production α is continued without changing the production in the second production means at the time t3. At a time t3 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t2, the chance button 136 of the second operation means is not pressed, so that the effect selection by the second operation means is not performed. Accordingly, the first effect means starts the effect D and continues the effect X.

  Furthermore, when any one of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 at the time point t3 is pressed, the measurement of the standby time started by pressing any one of the previous buttons 139a to 139e is reset, and a new one is started from the time point t3. Is set to the waiting time.

  When the player depresses the chance button 136 of the second operation means at a time t4 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t3, the first effect means ends the effect X and starts the effect X ′. At time t4, the player presses the chance button 136 of the second operation means, but the first operation means does not press any of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139, so the first Production selection by the operating means is not performed. Therefore, the first effect means continues the effect D with the start of the effect X ′, and the second effect means continues the effect α.

  At time t5 when the standby time Ta seconds has elapsed from time t3, none of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 is pressed during the period from time t3 to time t5, and the setting operation unit 139 is next from time t3. Any one of the buttons 139a to 139e is pressed at time t7 when the time T3 (> Ta) has elapsed, so that the production α is finished and the production δ is started in the second production means. On the other hand, the production D and the production X ′ are continued in the first production means.

  The time point t6 is a time point when the special figure variation game for Tb seconds started at the time point t0 is finished and the next special figure variation game is started. In addition, for the production by the first production means related to the second operation means, the production is changed with a predetermined probability as the special figure variable game is started. In the first effect means, the effect X ′ ends and the effect Y starts at time t6. Accordingly, the first effect means continues the effect D with the start of the effect Y, and the second effect means continues the effect δ.

  Further, when the player presses one of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the first operation means at a time point t7 after the waiting time of T seconds in the second effect means, the first effect means Then, the production D is finished and the production E is started. On the other hand, in the second effect means, the effect is changed on the condition that a waiting time of Ta seconds has elapsed from the time when the player operates the operation means. Therefore, the effect is not changed until the wait time elapses. I will not. Therefore, the production δ is continued at time t7. At time t7, since the chance button 136 of the second operation means is not pressed, the effect selection by the second operation means is not performed. In the first effect means, the effect Y is continued with the start of the effect E.

  The time point t8 is a time point when the special figure variation game for Tb seconds started at the time point t6 is finished and the next special figure variation game is started. The production of the first production means related to the second operation means is changed with the start of the special figure variation game with a predetermined probability. The production Y continues without being changed. Accordingly, the first effect means continues the effect E together with the effect Y, and the second effect means continues the effect δ.

  At time t9 when the standby time Ta seconds has elapsed from time t7, there is no depression of each button 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 within the period from time t7 to time t9, and the next setting operation unit 139 from time t7. Since the time T4 (> Ta) has elapsed until any one of the buttons 139a to 139e is pressed, the second effect means ends the effect δ and starts the effect ε. On the other hand, the production E and the production Y are continued in the first production means. As described above, in this embodiment, the third effect means in the seventh embodiment is changed to the first effect means, and an example in which a plurality of selected effects are displayed on the first effect means is shown. Yes. It should be noted that the timing at which the effect is switched may be at the start of fluctuation. In addition, the timing at which the effect changes is when the symbol stops (decoration symbol stops and shakes or when the symbol on the special symbol display device stops), or when a big hit starts (a big hit is displayed in the display area). For example, when the round lamp is lit), when the big hit ends (when the big hit end effect is displayed in the display area, when the round lamp is turned off, etc.) For example, 10 seconds) may have elapsed.

  FIG. 129 shows a selection effect executed by the first and second effect means of the pachinko machine 100 in the ninth embodiment. 129 (a) and (b) of FIG. 129 show display areas of the decorative symbol display device 208 included in the first effect means. 129 (A) and (B) of FIG. 129 schematically show the speaker 120 included in the second rendering means. 129 (a) and (A), (b) and (B) in FIG. 129 each show the production of the same period.

  FIG. 129 (a) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 between the time point t3 and the time point t4 shown in FIG. FIG. 129A shows an effect performed by the speaker 120 between the time point t3 and the time point t4 shown in FIG. In the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a decorative symbol variable game by a special symbol variable game is executed. In the left middle right decorative symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner (indicated by arrows in the figure). On the lower right side in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a selection effect display area 800 is provided. In the selected effect display area 800, an effect of displaying the song code and song name of the song that can be output from the speaker 120 is performed. At a time point between time point t3 and time point t4, an effect D in which a character string “M4: Mega! Giga! Summer!” Is displayed in the selected effect display area 800 is executed. Below the selected effect display area 800, a character string 955 “Change BGM with direction keys” is displayed to notify that the effect D can be changed to another effect. The direction key is one of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the first operation means. An effect display area 950 is provided on the lower left side in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the effect display area 950, an effect X in which a character image of “Yoshimune mode” and a character image of “Tono-sama” are displayed under the character is executed. Below the effect display area 950, a character string “mode change by chance button” is displayed to notify that the effect X can be changed to another effect. FIG. 129 (A) shows that an effect α in which a song 810 having a song name “may be there” is played on the speaker 120.

  FIG. 129 (b) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 between the time point t4 and the time point t5 shown in FIG. FIG. 129 (B) shows an effect performed by the speaker 120 between time t4 and time t5 shown in FIG. In the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a decorative symbol variable game by a special symbol variable game is executed. In the left middle right decorative symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner (indicated by arrows in the figure). At a time point between time t4 and time t5, effect D in which a character string “M4: Mega! Giga! Summer!” Is displayed in selected effect display area 800 is executed. Below the selected effect display area 800, a character string 955 “Change BGM with direction keys” is displayed to notify that the effect D can be changed to another effect. In the effect display area 950, an effect X 'in which a character "Yoshimune mode next change to 爺 mode" and a character image of "爺" is displayed below the character is executed. In this example, the characters “Yoshimune mode next change to 爺 mode” and “爺” character image are displayed simultaneously. Note that the character image of “爺” may be displayed after the characters “Yoshimune mode next change to 変 動 mode” are displayed, and vice versa. Below the effect display area 950, a character string “mode change by chance button” is displayed to notify that the effect X ′ can be changed to another effect. FIG. 129 (B) shows that an effect α in which a song 810 having a song name “may be there” is played on the speaker 120.

  FIG. 130 shows a temporal operation of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 10 according to the present embodiment. The horizontal axis of FIG. 130 shows a time series, and time has passed from left to right. In the upper part of FIG. 130, t0 to t4 indicate various operations or points in time when the production starts or ends. The middle part of FIG. 130 shows the execution state of various effects by the effect means. The production means of this example includes a decorative symbol display device 208, and the operation means includes, for example, a chance button 136.

  First, at time t0, the production means is executing one production (first production) A or starts production A from time t0, and the production means further produces the other production (second production) α. It is assumed that the production α is started from the time point t0. Further, it is assumed that at time t0, the operation means is in a selectable period in which the player can select an effect by pressing the chance button 136 or at the start of the period. In the present embodiment, the effect selection is always possible during a predetermined period (t0 to t4). When the player depresses the chance button 136 of the operation means at a time t1 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t0, the effect means ends one effect A and starts the effect B at the time t1. The other effect is such that the effect is changed on the condition that a waiting time of T seconds has elapsed since the player operated the operating means, and the effect is not changed until the waiting time elapses. I will not. Therefore, at the time t1, the production α is continued with the start of the production B.

  When the player depresses the chance button 136 of the operation means at a time point t2 during the waiting time of T seconds, one effect B is ended and the effect C is started. Since the time T1 from the time point t1 to the time point t2 is shorter than the standby time T, the effect α is continued at the time point t2 without changing the other effect.

  Further, when the chance button 136 is pressed at time t2, the measurement of the standby time started by the first sub-control unit 400 by pressing the previous chance button 136 is reset, and a new standby time is set from time t2. The

  At the time point t3 when the waiting time T seconds has elapsed from the time point t2, the effect means continues one effect C and the other effect α ends and the effect γ starts.

  The present embodiment is characterized in that a plurality of selection effects are performed by one effect means with respect to the selection effects described in the fourth embodiment. Also in the present embodiment, one effect is immediately reflected on the selected effect, and the other effect is not started until the standby time has elapsed after selection. In other words, if the predetermined time period T seconds has not passed since the selection, the selected effect is not started in the other effect, and the annoyance felt by starting the effect that changes immediately can be prevented. There is.

  Time t4 indicates the end time of the selectable period during which the effect can be selected by the operation means. For example, the special figure variable game from time t0 to time t4 includes a selectable period, but the special figure variable game from time t4 includes a nonselectable period. Hereinafter, the case where the time point t4 is the start time of the special figure variable game and the special figure variable game is not selectable will be described. If the time T2 from the time t2 to the time t4 when the player last pressed the chance button 136 is longer than the waiting time T from the time t2, the effect means executes the other effect γ from the time t3 to the time t4. Further, the special figure variation game from time t4 is also executed. From time t4, one effect C ′ is started as one effect. If the time T2 from the time t2 when the player last pressed the chance button 136 to the start time t4 of the next special figure variable game is shorter than the waiting time T from the time t2, the other effect is not changed.

  FIG. 131 shows a selection effect executed by the effect means of the pachinko machine 100 in the tenth embodiment. 131 (a) to 131 (d) show display areas of the decorative symbol display device 208 included in the effect means. 131 (a) to 131 (d), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 0 in the left middle right decorative symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c as a result of the special figure variable game. Has been. In this example, at least a selection effect can be executed while the symbol is changing and when the symbol is stopped. It should be noted that the selection effect may be executed only while the symbol is changing, and the selection effect can be executed only when the symbol is stopped.

  FIG. 131 (a) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 between time t0 and time t1 shown in FIG. Production A is executed as one production. In the production A, the character image 965 of “Tono-sama” is displayed using the entire background of the display area. In addition, the production α is executed as the other production. In the effect α, a horizontally-long rectangular mode display area 960 is defined in the upper right corner of the display area, and a character string “Yoshimune mode” is displayed in the mode display area 960.

  FIG. 131 (b) shows an effect performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 between time t1 and time t2 shown in FIG. Production B is executed as one production. In effect B, the character image 965 of “爺” is displayed using the entire background of the display area. In addition, the production α is continued as the other production, and the character string “Yoshimune mode” is displayed in the mode display area 960.

  FIG. 131 (c) shows an effect performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 between time t2 and time t3 shown in FIG. Production C is executed as one production. In effect C, the “princess” character image 965 is displayed using the entire background of the display area. In addition, the production α is continued as the other production, and the character string “Yoshimune mode” is displayed in the mode display area 960.

  FIG. 131 (d) shows an effect performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 between time t3 and time t4 shown in FIG. As one effect, the effect C continues and the “princess” character image 965 is displayed using the entire background of the display area. In addition, the production α is finished and the production γ is executed as the other production. In the effect γ, a character string “princess mode” is displayed in the mode display area 960.

  FIG. 132 shows a temporal operation of the pachinko machine 100 in Modification 1 of Example 4 according to the present embodiment. The horizontal axis of FIG. 132 shows a time series, and time has passed from left to right. 132, t0 to t5 and tv to ty in the upper part of FIG. 132 indicate various operations or points in time when the production starts or ends. The middle part of FIG. 132 shows the execution state of various effects by the effect means. The first effect means of this example includes a decorative symbol display device 208, and the second effect means includes a speaker 120. The lower part shows the operating means. The operation means of this example includes a chance button 136, for example.

  First, at time t0, the first effect means is executing effect A or starting effect A from time t0, and at time t0, the second effect means is executing effect α or from time t0. It is assumed that the production α has started. Further, it is assumed that at time t0, the operation means is in a selectable period in which the player can select an effect by pressing the chance button 136 or at the start of the period. Production selection is always possible during a predetermined period. In this example, it is always possible to select effects during the entire period, but for example, it is possible to select effects only in the first round of the big hit game, for example, or it is possible to always select effects only during a predetermined special figure variation game It may be. When the player depresses the chance button 136 of the operation means at a time t1 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t0, the effect A ends and the effect B starts at the first effect means from the time t1. On the other hand, in the second production means, the production is changed on the condition that a waiting time of T seconds has elapsed since the player operated the operation means, and the production is performed until the standby time has elapsed. No changes are made. Therefore, the production α is continued at time t1.

  Further, when the player depresses the chance button 136 of the operation means at the time point t2 during the waiting time of T seconds in the second effect means, the effect B is ended and the effect C is started in the first effect means. On the other hand, since the time T1 from the time point t1 to the time point t2 is shorter than the standby time T, the production α is continued without changing the production in the second production means at the time t2.

  Further, when the chance button 136 is pressed at time t2, the measurement of the standby time started by the first sub-control unit 400 by pressing the previous chance button 136 is reset, and a new standby time is set from time t2. The

  Further, when the player depresses the chance button 136 of the operation means at a time point t3 during the waiting time of T seconds in the second effect means, the effect C is ended and the effect D is started in the first effect means. On the other hand, since the time T2 from the time point t2 to the time point t3 is shorter than the standby time T, the production α is continued without changing the production at the second production means at the time t3.

  Further, when the chance button 136 is pressed at time t3, the measurement of the standby time started by pressing the previous chance button 136 is reset, and a new standby time is set from time t3.

  At time t4 when the waiting time T seconds has elapsed from time t3, the second effect means ends the effect α and starts the effect δ. On the other hand, the production D is continued in the first production means.

  In the present embodiment, the first effect means reflects the selected effect immediately, and the second effect means does not reflect unless the standby time elapses after selection. In other words, if the predetermined time period T seconds has not passed since the selection, the second effect means does not start the selected effect, thereby preventing the annoyance felt by starting the effect that changes immediately. There are cases where it is possible.

  The time point tv is the time point when the decorative symbol in the special figure variable game is stopped and displayed. Time t5 is a time when a predetermined Ta seconds have elapsed from time tv. When the time T3 from the time t3 to the time t5 when the player last pressed the chance button 136 is longer than the standby time T from the time t3, the second effect means executes the effect δ from the time t4 to the time t5. Is done. The second production means stops the production for a certain period from time t5. When the second rendering means is the speaker 120, a silent state is entered. In terms of control, a command for making a sound may be output from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control 400. When the time T3 from the time point t3 to the time point t5 when the player last pressed the chance button 136 is shorter than the waiting time T from the time point t3, the effect α in the second effect means is not changed.

  The time point tw is a time point when Tb (> Ta) seconds have elapsed from the time point tv. From the time tw, the first effect means ends the effect D and starts the effect D ′. The effect D ′ is, for example, a demonstration screen (demo screen). When the player depresses the chance button 136 of the operation means at a time tx when a certain time has elapsed from the time tw, the effect D ′ is ended and the effect E is started in the first effect means. On the other hand, the stopped state of the effect continues in the second effect means.

  A point in time ty when a certain time has elapsed from the point in time tx is a start point of the special figure variable game. When the period Tc from the time point tx to the time point ty is Tc ≧ T, the effect ε is started from the time point ty by the second effect means. When the period Tc is Tc <T, the production δ starts with the second production means from the time ty.

  133 to 135 show selection effects executed by the first effect means and the second effect means of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first modification. 133 and 134 (a) to (d) and FIGS. 135 (a) to 135 (c) show display areas of the decorative symbol display device 208 included in the first effect means. 133 and 134A to 135D and FIGS. 135A to 135C schematically show the speaker 120 included in the second rendering means. In each figure, (a) and (A), (b) and (B), (c) and (C), and (d) and (D) show the production of the same period, respectively.

  FIG. 133 (a) shows an effect performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 before time t0 shown in FIG. Before the time point t0, the special figure variation game has been executed. In the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decoration 2 is displayed in a swinging manner in the left decorative symbol display area 208a, and the decoration 5 is displayed in the middle decorative symbol display area 208b. Is displayed in a swinging manner, and decoration 0 is displayed in a swinging manner in the right decorative design display area 208c. In the lower right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, for example, a selection effect display area 800 is provided in a horizontally-long rectangular frame shape. In the selected effect display area 800, an effect A is displayed in which a character string “M1: Might be there ...” is displayed. In the selection effect in this example, the name of the song flowing from the speaker 120 is displayed in characters. As shown in FIG. 133 (A), at the time point t0, an effect α in which a song 810 having a song name “may be there” is played from the speaker 120.

  FIG. 133B shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t0 shown in FIG. At the time t0, the special figure variation game is in progress, the decoration 2 is displayed in the stopped state in the left decorative symbol display area 208a, the decoration 5 is displayed in the stopped state in the middle decorative symbol display area 208b, and the right decorative symbol is displayed. The decoration 0 is displayed in a stopped state in the display area 208c. In the selected effect display area 800, the effect A is continued. As shown in FIG. 133 (B), the production α is continued from the speaker 120 at time t0.

  FIG. 133 (c) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t1 shown in FIG. At time t1, the decorative symbol display device 208 continues to display the decorative symbol in a stopped state. When the player presses the chance button 136 at the time point t1, the effect A ends in the selected effect display area 800 of the decorative symbol display device 208 of the first effect means, and is referred to as “M2: miracle universe”. Production B for displaying the character string is started. On the other hand, in the second production means, the production is changed on the condition that a waiting time of T seconds has elapsed since the player operated the operation means, and the production is performed until the standby time has elapsed. No changes are made. Therefore, at the time point t1, as shown in FIG. 133C, the production α is continued from the speaker 120.

  FIG. 133 (d) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t2 shown in FIG. At time t2, the decorative symbol display device 208 continues to display the decorative symbol in a stopped state. When the player presses the chance button 136 of the operation means at a time point t2 during the T second standby time on the speaker 120 of the second effect means, the effect B is displayed in the selected effect display area 800 of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t2. At the end, the production C for displaying the character string “M3: Your Fragrance” is started. On the other hand, since the time T1 from the time point t1 to the time point t2 (for example, T1 = 0.5 seconds) is shorter than the waiting time T (for example, T = 1 second), as shown in FIG. At time t2, the production is not changed at the speaker 120, and the production α is continued.

  Further, when the chance button 136 is pressed at time t2, the measurement of the standby time started by pressing the previous chance button 136 is reset, and a new standby time T (= 1 second) is set from time t2. .

  FIG. 134 (a) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t3 shown in FIG. At the time point t3, the decorative symbol display device 208 continues to display the decorative symbol in a stopped state. When the player depresses the chance button 136 of the operation means at a time point t3 during the T second waiting time on the speaker 120, “M4: Mega! Giga! Summer!” Is displayed on the selection screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t3. An effect D for displaying a character string is executed. On the other hand, the time T2 from the time point t2 to the time point t3 (for example, T2 = 0.5 seconds) is shorter than the standby time T. Therefore, as shown in FIG. The production α is continued without being performed.

  Further, when the chance button 136 is pressed at time t3, the measurement of the standby time started by pressing the previous chance button 136 is reset, and a new standby time T (= 1 second) is set from time t3. .

  FIG. 134 (b) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t4 shown in FIG. At the time t0, the special figure variation game is in progress, the decoration 2 is displayed in the stopped state in the left decorative symbol display area 208a, the decoration 5 is displayed in the stopped state in the middle decorative symbol display area 208b, and the right decorative symbol is displayed. The decoration 0 is displayed in a stopped state in the display area 208c. At the time t4 when the waiting time T seconds has elapsed from the time t3, the speaker 120 has finished the production α in which the music 810 with the music name “may be there ...” has ended, as shown in FIG. 134 (B). In addition, the production δ in which the song 810 having the song name “Mega! Giga! Summer!” Is started. On the other hand, the effect D is continued in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  A time point tv shown in FIG. 132 is a time point when the decorative symbol in the special figure variable game is stopped and displayed. Time t5 is a time when a predetermined Ta seconds have elapsed from time tv. FIG. 134 (c) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t5 shown in FIG. On the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect D is continued. In addition, as shown in FIG. 134 (C), the effect is stopped at the speaker 120 from the time point t5 and the sound becomes silent. Note that when Ta seconds have elapsed since the special figure fluctuation stop, not only the speaker 12 is silenced, but another BGM may be played. Also, when making silence, the volume may be gradually decreased, or the volume may be decreased at a stroke.

  FIG. 134 (d) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point tw shown in FIG. The time point tw is a time point when Tb (> Ta) seconds have elapsed from the time point tv. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect D is ended and the effect D ′ is started from the time point tw. The effect D ′ includes an effect by a demonstration screen including the characters “Yoshimune”. Further, as shown in FIG. 134D, the speaker 120 is kept silent at the time point tw.

  FIG. 135 (a) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point tx shown in FIG. At the time tx, the effect on the speaker 120 is silent after the time tw. If the player presses the chance button 136 of the operating means while the demo screen is displayed at this time tx, the demo screen disappears, and the decoration 2 is stopped and displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 208a in the special figure variable game. An image is displayed in which the decoration 5 is stopped and displayed in the symbol display area 208b, and the decoration 0 is stopped and displayed in the right decoration symbol display area 208c. In addition, the selection effect display area 800 is displayed again, and the effect E for displaying the character string “M5: hot spring hormone” is started. On the other hand, in the speaker 120 of the second effect means, the effect is changed on the condition that the waiting time of T seconds has elapsed since the player operated the operating means. No change is made. Therefore, at the time point tx, the speaker 120 maintains a silent state as illustrated in FIG. As described above, in this example, if a selection operation is performed while the demo screen is displayed, the demo display is canceled and the symbol display screen is displayed. However, after the demo screen is displayed for a certain period of time, the symbol display screen is displayed. You may make it do. Further, the selection operation may not be performed while the demonstration screen is displayed.

  FIG. 135 (b) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time ty shown in FIG. The time point ty is a time point when the special figure variation game is started after a time period of Tc seconds from the time point tx. In the selection effect display area 800, the effect E for displaying the character string “M5: hot spring hormone” is continued. On the other hand, in the speaker 120, when the period Tc from the time point tx to the time point ty is Tc ≧ T with respect to the standby time T, as shown in FIG. The production ε in which the song 810 having the song name “hot spring hormone” flows is started.

  FIG. 135 (c) also shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time ty shown in FIG. In the selection effect display area 800, the effect E for displaying the character string “M5: hot spring hormone” is continued. On the other hand, in the speaker 120, when the period Tc from the time point tx to the time point ty is Tc <T with respect to the waiting time T, as shown in FIG. A production δ in which a song 810 having the song name “Mega! Giga! Summer!” Is started.

  FIG. 136 shows a temporal operation of the pachinko machine 100 in the second modification of the fourth example according to the present embodiment. The horizontal axis of FIG. 136 shows a time series, and time passes from left to right. In the upper part of FIG. 136, t0 to t5 indicate various operations, or the start and end times of effects. 136 shows the execution state of various effects by the effect means. The first effect means of this example includes a decorative symbol display device 208, and the second effect means includes a speaker 120. The lower part shows the operating means. The operation means of this example includes a chance button 136, for example.

  This modification is characterized in that, in addition to the operation shown in the fourth embodiment, when the pachinko machine 100 is in an error state, the first and second rendering means display an error. For this reason, since the time operation shown in FIG. 136 is the same as the time operation shown in FIG. 105 of the fourth embodiment except for the error display, the description of the same operation will be omitted. As shown in FIG. 136, when an error state occurs in the pachinko machine 100 at a certain time between the time t0 and the time t1, the first effect means displays an error together with the selected effect. The error display is performed until a time after time t5 when the error state disappears. Further, as shown in FIG. 136, the error sound is output together with the selected effect in the second effect means in synchronization with the error display in the first effect means.

  In the example shown in FIG. 136, the error display and the output of the error sound are started simultaneously. However, the error image may be displayed first and the error sound may be output after a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). Or vice versa. In addition, an error image is displayed first for an error output pattern that always outputs an error display and an error sound, and if the error state is not resolved even after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds from error detection), the error sound is displayed. May be output, or vice versa. That is, an error output pattern that cancels a delayed output when the error state is resolved may be used. Further, the error sound may continuously flow until the error state is canceled, or the output of the error sound may be terminated after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the error state.

  FIG. 137 shows a selection effect executed by the first and second effect means of the pachinko machine 100 in the second modification. 137 (a) to (d) show the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 included in the first effect means. 137 (A) to (D) schematically show the speaker 120 included in the second rendering means. In each figure, (a) and (A), (b) and (B), (c) and (C), and (d) and (D) show the production of the same period, respectively.

  FIG. 137 (a) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t0 shown in FIG. At the time point t0, the special-figure variable game is finished, and in the center of the display area of the decorative design display device 208 of the first effect means, the decoration 0 to decoration 9 are displayed from the top in the left middle right decorative design display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, respectively. The decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the images that move sequentially downward (indicated by downward arrows in the figure). In the lower right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, for example, a selection effect display area 800 is provided in a horizontally-long rectangular frame shape. In the selected effect display area 800, an effect A is displayed in which a character string “M1: Might be there ...” is displayed. In the selection effect in this example, the name of the song flowing from the speaker 120 is displayed in characters. As shown in FIG. 137 (A), at time t0, an effect α in which a song 810 having a song name “May be there ...” flows from the speaker 120.

  FIG. 137 (b) shows the effects performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 from the time point t1 to the time point t2 shown in FIG. Time t1 is the time when the player presses the chance button 136. At time t1, the special figure variation game is continuing. In the selected effect display area 800 of the first effect means, the effect A that displays the character string “M1: may be there” at the time t1 ends, and the characters “M2: miracle universe” are displayed. Production B displaying the columns is started. The character string “M2: miracle universe” in the production B indicates the title of the song flowing from the speaker 120. On the other hand, in the speaker 120, the effect is changed on the condition that the waiting time of Ta seconds has elapsed since the player operated the first operating means. Therefore, the effect is not changed until the waiting time elapses. I will not. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 137 (B), at the time point t1, the production α in which the song 810 having the song name “May be there ...” continues. Further, the pachinko machine 100 is in an error state from a certain time point between the time point t0 and the time point t1, and, as shown in FIG. An error display in which the character string of “error !!” is displayed with a higher contrast than the effect related to the floating game is displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 137 (B), at the time point t1, the speaker 120 outputs a sound error sound 830 that informs “error !!” with a sound larger than the effect α. In this example, the display of “error !!” on the decorative symbol display device and the output of error sound from the speaker are started simultaneously. Note that an error sound may be output from the speaker after “error !!” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device. After the error sound is output from the speaker, “error !!!!” is output on the decorative symbol display device. May be displayed. In addition, while the pachinko machine 100 is in an error state, the error sound 830 is output from the speaker 120 together with the output of the production α 810 of the production α as described above. You may not hear it. Furthermore, the way of outputting the music 810 and the error sound 830 may be changed depending on the content of the error state. For example, in the case of “ball full tank error of lower plate 128” for mainly informing the player, the error notification can be ended by the player moving the ball from the lower plate to the box. The volume may be lower than the error sound 830 or the same state, and both the music 810 and the error sound 830 may be output. In the case of “payout error”, “magnet detection error”, etc., it is a serious error that needs to be confirmed by the store clerk, so only an error sound may be output.

  FIG. 137 (c) shows the effects performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 from the time point t2 to the time point t3 shown in FIG. At time t2, the special figure variation game is continuing. When the player depresses the chance button 136 of the first operation means at the time t2 during the Ta second standby time on the speaker 120 of the second effect means, the time t2 is selected in the selection effect display area 800 of the first effect means. Then, the effect B for displaying the character string “M2: miracle of miracle” is finished, and the effect C for displaying the character string “M3: Your Fragrance” is started. The character string “M3: Your Fragrance” in the production C indicates the name of the song that flows from the speaker 120. On the other hand, since the time T1 from the time point t1 to the time point t2 (for example, T1 = 0.5 seconds) is shorter than the waiting time Ta (for example, Ta = 1 second), as shown in FIG. At time t2, the effect is not changed on the speaker 120, and the effect α in which the song 810 having the song name “may be there” continues is played. Further, the error state of the pachinko machine 100 continues, and as shown in FIG. 137 (c), the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 has a higher contrast than the effect related to the special figure variable game at the time t2. An error is displayed with a large string of “Error!”. Further, as shown in FIG. 137 (C), at the time t2, the speaker 120 outputs a sound error sound 830 that notifies “error !!” with a sound larger than the effect α at the time point t2.

  FIG. 137 (d) shows the effects performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 from time t4 to time t5 shown in FIG. At a time point t4 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t3, the decorative symbol variation display continues in the left middle right decorative symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c. In the selected effect display area 800, an effect D for displaying a character string “M4: Mega! Giga! Summer!” Is performed at time t4. Also, as shown in FIG. 137 (D), an effect δ in which a song 810 having a song name “Mega! Giga! Summer!” Flows from the speaker 120 is performed. Further, the error state of the pachinko machine 100 continues, and as shown in FIG. 137 (d), the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 has a higher contrast than the effect related to the special figure variable game at the time t4. An error is displayed with a large string of “Error!”. Further, as shown in FIG. 137 (D), at the time t2, the speaker 120 outputs a sound error sound 830 that notifies “error !!” with a sound larger than the effect δ, at the time t2. As described above, the selection effect can be performed even in the error state, but the selection effect may not be performed in the error state. Further, there may be a case where a selection effect can be performed for each error content, and a case where the selection effect display area 800 may not be displayed during the error, and at least a part or all of the selection effect is displayed due to the error display. May be in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize (or cannot be visually recognized).

  FIG. 138 shows another example of the selection effect executed by the first and second effect means of the pachinko machine 100 in the second modification. 138 (a) to 138 (d) show display areas of the decorative symbol display device 208 included in the first effect means. 138 (A) to 138 (D) schematically show the speaker 120 included in the second rendering means. In each figure, (a) and (A), (b) and (B), (c) and (C), and (d) and (D) show the production of the same period, respectively.

  FIGS. 138 (a) and (A) show the effects performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t0 shown in FIG. 136, and the same effect operations as those shown in FIGS. Yes.

  138 (b), (B) to FIGS. 138 (d), (D), the time points of the production correspond to FIGS. 137 (b), (B) -137 (d), (D), respectively. . In FIGS. 137 (b) to 137 (d), the selection effect display area 800 is displayed even during the error state so that the selection effect can be performed. In contrast, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 138 (b) to 138 (d), an error display image indicating that an error has occurred in the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The selection effect cannot be performed during the error state. Note that even when the selection effect display area is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the selection effect may be performed. In this example, the display of the error display image on the decorative design display device and the output of the error sound from the speaker are started simultaneously. After the error display image is displayed on the decorative design display device, an error sound may be output from the speaker. After the error sound is output from the speaker, the error display image is displayed on the decorative design display device. You may make it do.

  Next, Example 11 to Example 19 will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 to 156. First, a configuration that is used in common among the configurations illustrated in the drawings used in the following embodiments will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 139 (a) and 139 (g). FIG. 139 (a) shows a decorative symbol display device 208, a special figure 1 display device 212, a special figure 2 display device 214, and a universal map display device that constitute a part of the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 210, special figure 1 holding lamp 218, special figure 2 holding lamp 220, and general figure holding lamp 216 are schematically shown. The special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the special figure display device 210, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220, and the universal figure hold lamp 216 are shown below the decorative symbol display device 208. The special figure 2 display device 214 is shown on the right side of the special figure 1 display device 212, and the universal figure display device 210 is shown on the right side of the special figure 2 display device 214. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 is shown on the upper side of the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 is shown on the upper side of the special figure 2 display device 214, and the universal figure hold lamp 216 is shown on the universal map display device 210. Shown on the top. The special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the universal map display device 210, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220, and the universal figure hold lamp 216 are shown in white. The illuminated portion is shown in black. In addition, since the maximum number of the usual figure hold in this embodiment can be accumulated, four LEDs of the usual figure hold lamp 216 are provided.

  In FIG. 139 (a), symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c for performing decorative display variation display and stop display are assigned to the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. When the predetermined display is executed by enlarging the effect display area 208d, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced and displayed in an area other than the center of the image display area, for example, the lower right corner as necessary. In some cases.

  A fourth symbol display area is provided on the upper right side in the effect display area 208d. The upper side in the fourth symbol display area is the fourth symbol display area t3 for ordinary symbols, the middle side is the fourth symbol display area t1 for special symbols 1, and the lower side is the fourth symbol display region t2 for special symbols 2. It is. When the special figure 1 variable game is not in operation, an image representing “◯” as the special figure 1 fourth symbol is displayed in the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area t1. While the special figure 2 variable game is not in operation, an image representing “Δ” is displayed in the special symbol 2 fourth symbol display area t2 as the special symbol 2 fourth symbol. While the usual figure variable game is not in operation, an image representing “◇” is displayed in the fourth figure display area t3 for ordinary figures as the fourth figure of the ordinary figure. Further, during the execution of the special figure variable game or the normal figure variable game, a white background image is displayed as the fourth symbol in each of the fourth symbol display areas t1 to t3.

  A region surrounded by a square frame at the lower center of the effect display region 208d is a variation icon display region C in which variation icons can be displayed. The variation icon is an icon displayed in the variation icon display area C when the hold is consumed and the special figure variation game is started. By changing the display mode of the variation icon in the variation icon display area C, whether or not the special figure variation game is successful can be notified with a predetermined reliability (the variation notice). The frame image on the outer periphery of the variation icon display area C may be displayed only when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the variation icon is not displayed in the variation icon display area C). It may be displayed constantly or may not be displayed at all times. Further, only the hold icon may be displayed without displaying the fluctuation icon.

  A horizontally long rectangular figure 1 holding icon display area A is provided adjacent to the change icon display area C on the lower left side in the effect display area 208d. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area A, a number of special figure 1 hold icons a1, a2, etc. corresponding to the number of holds are displayed. Further, according to the display mode of the special figure 1 hold icon, whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable game related to the hold is appropriate can be notified (pre-reading notice) with a predetermined reliability. In this example, a white circular hold icon is displayed as the display mode with the lowest reliability. In this embodiment, a maximum of four special figure 1 hold icons can be displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area A. A plurality of special figure 1 hold icons are arranged and displayed in order from right to left in the special figure 1 hold icon display area as the holding order decreases. In this example, only the special figure 1 hold icon display area is displayed, but the special figure 2 hold icon display area may be displayed together. In that case, for example, a vertically long rectangular special figure 2 reserved icon display area B is provided adjacent to the right side surface of the effect display area 208d. The special figure 2 hold icon display area B is not displayed when there is no special figure 2 hold, and is displayed only when the special figure 2 hold is accumulated, but may be always displayed. Good. During the promiscuous electric power supply support, it is easy for a game ball to enter the special figure 2 start port 232, so that the player can easily visually recognize the special figure 2 hold icon displayed in the special figure 2 hold icon display area B. As described above, the display position of the special figure 1 hold icon display area A and the display position of the special figure 2 hold icon display area B are switched.

  Further, the state in which all segments are represented in white in the special figure 1 display device 212 indicates that the special figure 1 variable display is being performed (see FIG. 139 (b)). The same applies to the special figure 2 display device 214 and the universal figure display device 210. In addition, the variation display of each decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c during execution of the special symbol variable game is indicated by a downward arrow (see FIG. 139 (f)).

  FIG. 139 (g) shows a state where a button effect is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 as a display means. The display of the button effect includes a display related to the chance button 136 as the first type of display. Among the displays related to the chance button 136, there is a button display. In the button display, an operation request image having a display form imitating the chance button 136 (hereinafter may be referred to as “button image”) and a button operation acceptance valid period (hereinafter referred to as “operation valid period”). At least one of an effective period image indicating the remainder of (there is) and a display prompting other button operations is included. In addition, the display of the button effect can include an effect display such as a notice notice executed in conjunction with the button display as the second display. The display of the button effect is performed by any one of still image display and animation display or a combination of them. The effective period image in the present embodiment is an image (for example, a meter (gauge) image) that changes the display mode from the start position to the end position with the passage of time. A countdown display may be used.

  The special figure variable game and jackpot game shown in the following embodiments are executed by the same control operation as described in the above embodiments. In the following embodiments, the effects performed in the special figure variation game and the jackpot game will be specifically described, and the control operation will be referred to only when the necessity arises.

(Example 11) A special figure variable game and a jackpot game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 11 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 to 143. First, an example of a flow of a series of effects when the result of the special figure variation game is a big hit will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 and 140. FIG. 139 (a) to FIG. 140 (h) show special figure variable games in this order in time series. In the figure showing the special figure variation game in time series, the passage of time between one figure and the next figure does not necessarily match between the figures.

  FIG. 139 (a) shows a state in which the variable games of FIG. 1 and FIG. 2 are not operating, and the ordinary variable game is also not operating. The special figure 1 display device 212 stops displaying the special figure “Special figure F”. The special figure 2 display unit 214 stops and displays the special symbol “special figure d”. The general-purpose display device 210 stops and displays the symbol “General-purpose B”. Each of the fourth symbol display areas t1 to t3 in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the fourth symbol indicating that the game is inactive. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed as a combination of ornamental symbols, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the previous special-figure variable game is wrong has been missed. Yes.

  The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 reports that there are two special figure 1 holds. The special figure 2 hold lamp 220 notifies that there is no special figure 2 hold. A general hold lamp 216 informs that there is no general hold.

  In the special figure 1 hold icon display area A, two special figure 1 hold icons a1 and a2 are displayed in a white circular display mode.

  FIGS. 139 (b) to (f) show a state where the special figure 1 variable game is started. In this embodiment, the special figure 1 variable game is started in the same manner as the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, and the special figure 1 display device 212 starts the variable display. The fourth symbol in the region t1 starts to display a variation (see FIG. 139 (b)), and then a special animation 1 holding icon reduction animation is displayed (see FIGS. 139 (c) to (e)). Then, the decorative symbol variation display is started (see FIG. 139 (f)). Note that the order of the start time of these operations may be changed.

  In the display of the reduced animation of the special figure 1 hold icon, the special figure 1 hold icons that are displayed start to move to the right all at once (see FIG. 139 (c)), and the special figure 1 with the highest hold order is displayed. The hold icon a1 goes over the special figure 1 hold icon display area A and enters the variable icon display area C, and the remaining hold icons move to the right one position from the original position to raise the hold rank by one respectively. (See FIGS. 139 (c) to (e)). An icon image that has entered the variation icon display area C is referred to as a variation icon.

  FIG. 139 (g) shows a state in which the display of the button effect is started in the effect display area 208d. A horizontally long button effect area is secured in the center of the effect display area 208d, a character image is displayed in the left quarter of the button effect area, and a button image is displayed in the remaining three quarters. And button display for displaying a valid period image. The validity period image is displayed at the bottom of the button image. The display priority of the button effect area is set higher than the display priority of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. For this reason, the symbol variation display of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c on the rear side of the button effect area is hidden by the image of the button effect area and cannot be visually recognized. By seeing the image shown in FIG. 139 (g), the player knows that the button effect has been started, but at this stage, since the countdown of the operation valid period has not started, it is in a state where the button operation cannot be accepted. Even if 136 is pressed, the pressing operation is not accepted.

  FIG. 139 (h) shows a button operation acceptance permission state after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the button display shown in FIG. 139 (g) started. Although the display in the button effect area has not changed, since the countdown of the operation valid period has started at this stage, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the pressing operation is accepted.

  FIG. 139 (i) shows a state where the button operation acceptance effective period has slightly passed and the bar-shaped portion of the display of the effective period image is somewhat shortened in the right direction.

  FIG. 139 (j) illustrates an example of a button effect displayed when the player presses the chance button 136 and the press is accepted. The button image and the effective period image are erased, and an image of the character string “Chance!” Is displayed in the right quarter of the button effect area. The display of the character string image may be a notice of the result of the special figure variation game. Further, it may be a notice of the possibility of developing into SP (super) reach production. In this example, the display of the button effect ends with the display of the character string image.

  FIG. 139 (k) shows a state where the button effect area has disappeared and the decorative symbol variation display in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c is visible.

  In FIG. 139 (l), “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped in a swinging fluctuation state in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, and the decorative symbol fluctuation display is continued in the middle symbol display area 208b. The state where the reach production is started is shown.

  FIG. 139 (m) shows a state where the image display of the reach effect gradually changes to the entire white display by the fade-out process. The symbol display areas 208a to 208c are moved to the lower right corner of the image display area, and the decorative symbol variation is reduced and displayed. The special figure 1 hold icon display area A, the special figure 1 hold icon, the fluctuation icon display area C, and the fluctuation icon are not displayed during the SP reach effect shown in FIGS. 139 (m) to 140 (h).

  FIG. 139 (n) to FIG. 140 (a) show a state where an SP reach effect with a scene where two samurai fight is executed. 140 (b) to (d) are a continuation of the SP reach production, and an effect that one samurai has won is made, and it is highly probable that the result of the determination of whether or not the change is correct is likely to be a hit. doing. FIG. 140D shows a state in which the combination of decorative symbols is temporarily stopped at “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c displayed in a reduced size.

  FIG. 140 (e) shows a state where the image display of the SP reach effect is gradually changed to a white display by the fade-out process. The fourth symbol display areas t1 to t3 are displayed, but the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are not displayed.

  In FIG. 140 (f), the symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c are enlarged to the original position in the center of the image display area, and “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is temporarily stopped and displayed as a combination of ornamental symbols. Indicates the state.

  FIG. 140 (g) shows a state in which “Special Figure A” of the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212. In the fourth symbol display area t1 for the special figure 1 in the image display area, the fourth graphic indicating that the special figure 1 variable game is not operating is stopped and displayed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” indicating a hit as a combination of ornamental symbols is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 140 (h) shows a big hit start display, and shows a state in which a character string image of “probable big hit” is displayed on almost the entire image display area and it is notified that the 15R special big hit has been won. In this embodiment, if the determination result is special figure A, and the decoration symbol is a combination for probability variation big hit, the big hit start display is displayed as “probability big hit”, and the result is determined as special figure A or special figure. In FIG. B, when the decorative symbol is a combination for big hit, the big hit start display is displayed as “big hit”.

  140 (f ′) to (h ′), in the same state as FIG. 139 (l), when the reach effect of “decoration 6” is started in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, In place of the effects of FIGS. 140 (f) to 140 (h), the effects in the case of winning 15R jackpot are illustrated. FIG. 140 (f ′) continues from FIG. 140 (e). In FIG. 140 (f ′), the symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c are enlarged to the original position in the center of the image display area, and “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6” is temporarily stopped and displayed as a combination of ornamental symbols. It shows the state.

  FIG. 140 (g ′) shows a state in which “Special Figure B” of the big hit symbol is stopped on the Special Figure 1 display device 212. In the image display area, the fourth symbol indicating that the special figure 1 variable game is not operating is stopped and displayed in the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area t1. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6” indicating a winning combination as a combination of ornamental symbols is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 140 (h ′) shows a state in which a “big hit” character string image is displayed on almost the entire image display area, and it is notified that the 15R big hit has been won.

  141 (a) to 141 (b) exemplify the continuation of another SP reach production continued from FIG. 140 (a), where one samurai has been defeated, and whether or not the change is appropriate is determined. A notice is given that the result is likely to be out of sync. The special figure 1 hold icon display area A and the special figure 1 hold icon are not displayed during the SP reach production shown in FIGS. 141 (a) to 141 (c). FIG. 141 (b) shows a state in which the combination of decorative symbols is temporarily stopped at “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c displayed in a reduced size.

  FIG. 141 (c) shows a state where the image display of the SP reach effect is gradually changed to a white display by the fade-out process. The fourth symbol display areas t1 to t3 are displayed, but the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are not displayed.

  In FIG. 141 (d), the symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c are enlarged to the original position in the center of the image display area, and “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” is temporarily stopped as a combination of ornamental symbols. Indicates the state. In this state, the display of the special figure 1 hold icon display area A, the special figure 1 hold icon, the variable icon display area C, and the variable icon is resumed and is displayed until the end of the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 141 (h). The

  FIG. 141 (e) shows a state where the special symbol “Special Figure F” is stopped and displayed on the Special Figure 1 display device 212. In the image display area, the fourth symbol indicating that the special figure 1 variable game is not operating is stopped and displayed in the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area t1. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” indicating a deviation as a combination of ornamental symbols is stopped and displayed.

  141 (f) to 141 (h) show the display of the erasure animation of the variation icon. In this example, after the special figure variable game is finished, the display of the change icon deletion animation is executed while the decorative symbol is stopped. Note that the display of the animation for deleting the variation icon may be executed at another timing. FIG. 141 (f) shows a state in which the fluctuation icon starts to move downward from the fluctuation icon display area C, and the lower third of the circular outline of the fluctuation icon has disappeared outside the image display area. Yes. FIG. 141 (g) shows a state in which the fluctuation icon has moved further downward and the fluctuation icon has disappeared outside the image display area to such an extent that the upper part of the circular outline can be visually recognized. FIG. 141 (h) shows a state in which the fluctuation icon has completely disappeared from the fluctuation icon display area C and the display of the fluctuation icon erasure animation has been completed. It should be noted that the deletion animation of the variation icon may be performed during symbol variation, for example, at the timing before one decorative symbol (for example, the left decorative symbol) is temporarily displayed. The timing after a temporary stop display of a symbol (for example, the left decorative symbol) may be performed, or may be the timing before or after a plurality of decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol fluctuates. It may be the timing before or after being displayed.

  Next, an example of the flow of an effect when the result of the special figure variable game is a big hit and the big hit game is executed (hereinafter, may be referred to as a “big hit effect”) will be described with reference to FIG. 142. 142 (a) to 142 (g) show the jackpot effects in this order in chronological order. A speaker 120 is displayed on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in each figure of FIG. In the figure showing the big hit effect in time series, the time lapse between one figure and the next figure does not necessarily match between the figures. FIG. 142 (a) shows the same state as FIG. 140 (h) continued from FIG. 140 (g). Almost the entire image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes the effect display area 208d, and a character string image of “probable big hit” is displayed in the center of the effect display area 208d to notify that the 15R special big hit has been won. ing. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 notifies that there is one special figure 1 hold.

  While the character string image of “probable big hit” is displayed in the effect display area 208d, in principle, no sound flows from the speaker 120, but BGM or SE (sound effect: sound effect) for notifying the 15R special big hit, etc. May be output, BGM or SE output during the 15R special jackpot round may be output, or an effect that has been performed before being notified that the 15R special jackpot has been won, such as SP reach The BGM output in the middle big hit finalizing effect may be continuously output.

  FIG. 142 (b) shows a state in which the jackpot effect (the effect including the second effect and the fourth effect described later) in the 15R special jackpot game is started in the first round. On almost the entire surface of the effect display area 208d, a second effect (effect H ') in which a movie in which a princess character appears is displayed from the beginning (first). From the speaker 120, the music of the 4th production (production O ') corresponding to the 2nd production is flowing from the head of music. A character string image “may be there” is displayed in the lower left corner of the effect display area 208d. The character string image indicates the movie name of the displayed movie and the song name of the current song. In the upper right corner of the effect display area 208d, the number of rounds in which the big hit effect is executed is displayed. In this example, a character string image of “1R” is displayed, and it is notified that the number of rounds is “1”. “Decoration 7” is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d, and it is confirmed that the big hit has been stopped and displayed with the symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”. In this embodiment, the character string image “1R” and the symbol combination “decoration 7” constitute a part of the big hit effect. The same applies to the following embodiments.

  FIG. 142 (c) shows a state in which the big hit effect of the 15R special big hit is continued, the second round to the tenth round have already been completed, and the big hit effect in the eleventh round is being executed. In the effect display area 208d, the last scene of the movie is displayed, and the ending of the song flows from the speaker 120. In addition, a character string image of “11R” is displayed in the upper right corner of the effect display area 208d, and it is notified that the number of rounds is “11”. In addition, before the eleventh round of big hit game is started, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 has one to four holdings of special figure 1 due to the winning of three balls in the special figure 1 starting port 230. It has been reported that it has increased. Thereafter, the first round of the big hit effect by the movie and the song ends.

  FIG. 142 (d) shows a state in which the first round of the big hit effect has been completed and the second round of the big hit effect by the movie and the song has started during the eleventh round. In the effect display area 208d, a movie in which a princess character appears is displayed from the top, and music is played from the top of the speaker 120.

  Effects such as movies and songs may be repeatedly executed. In addition, when the effect is repeatedly executed, control for returning from the end point of the effect to the start point of the effect, such as setting a loop in the effect data, or control for returning to the middle part of the effect from the end point of the effect is possible. It may be. Moreover, you may make it the data in which an effect is repeated be performed.

  FIG. 142 (e) shows a state in which the big hit effect is continuously executed in the fifteenth round which is the final round. Even after the final round is over and the attacker 234 is closed, the big hit effect is executed for a certain period of time. A character string image of “15R” is displayed in the upper right corner of the effect display area 208d to notify that the number of rounds is “15”. In addition, as the number of game balls passed through the normal start port 228 by the time the big hit game of the 15th round was started, the normal figure hold ramp 216 increased from 0 to 4 It has been reported that.

  In the interval from the end of the final round and the closing of the attacker 234 to the start of the jackpot end effect shown in FIG. Also good. In this case, the jackpot effect may be continuously executed only on the speaker 120, or the jackpot effect may be continuously executed only on the effect display area 208d. Here, the fixed period may be a period shorter than the interval, a period having the same length as the interval, or a period longer than the interval. Also, the big hit effect may be executed halfway through the big hit end effect, or may be executed until the end of the big hit end effect. In the interval, the big hit effect may be stopped, deleted, interrupted, terminated, or stopped.

  FIG. 142 (f) shows a state in which the big hit end effect for notifying that the big hit game has ended is started. A character string image of “probability change entry” is displayed in the left third area of the effect display area 208d, a samurai character image is displayed in the remaining one third area, and the jackpot ends from the speaker 120. It is notified that the BGM for production flows and shifts to the probability fluctuation state.

  The effect display area 208d and the speaker 120 of the decorative symbol display device 208 may continue to execute the same effect as the jackpot effect executed during the jackpot round during the jackpot end effect, or may be executed during the jackpot round. An effect different from the big hit effect may be executed. Further, only one of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the speaker 120 may continuously execute the same effect as the big hit effect executed during the big hit round.

  FIG. 142 (g) shows a state in which a variable display start waiting time for a special figure to be described later is in progress. For a period before a predetermined time (for example, 4 ms) elapses after the condition device activation signal described later is turned off, the “decoration 7” displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c before the start of the big hit game is displayed. The combination of the decoration symbol “decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed again. A character string image “probably changing” is displayed in the upper left corner of the effect display area 208d. In addition, a fourth symbol indicating that the game is not in operation is stopped and displayed in each of the fourth symbol display areas t1 to t3 in the upper right corner of the effect display area 208d. Since the probability change is in progress, the display positions of the special figure 1 hold icon display area A and the special figure 2 hold icon display area B are switched. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area A, four special figure 1 hold icons are displayed in a white circular display mode. In the special figure 2 hold icon display area B, no special figure 2 hold icon is displayed. Also, the next special figure variation game has not started.

  A jackpot production with a promising jackpot (playing when the game state after the jackpot is a special figure high-predictive figure and a high-promise) and other big jackpot effects (the game state after the big jackpot is special Alternatively, for the special drawing high-probability normal drawing high-definition, different effects may be performed, or the same effects may be performed. In addition, even if the gaming state after the big hit ends in a special figure high-precision ordinary figure high-predictive state, the jackpot big hit effect and a part or all of the gaming state after the big hit ends in a special figure low-predictive normal figure high-precision It may be the same. Further, the effect may be continuously executed during the interval.

  Next, in order to determine the execution of the jackpot effect including the second effect and the fourth effect shown with reference to FIGS. 142 (b) to 142 (e), FIGS. The jackpot effect performed in the interval will be described with reference to FIG. The jackpot effects shown in FIGS. 143 (a) to 143 (h) are selected in this order from the first effect and the third effect, and the second effect and the fourth effect to be executed in the jackpot game (hereinafter referred to as the fourth effect). , Sometimes referred to as “effect selection effect”). FIG. 143 (i) shows a state in which the big hit effect including the second effect and the fourth effect selected in the effect selection effect is started. In these figures, the passage of time between one figure and the next figure does not necessarily match between the figures.

  A speaker 120 is displayed on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in each drawing of FIG. In FIGS. 144 to 146, 148 to 154, and 156 thereafter, the speaker 120 is displayed on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the present embodiment and the subsequent embodiments, the decorative symbol display device 208 that is a display means is used as an example of the first effect means, and the speaker 120 that is a sound output means is used as an example of the second effect means. is there.

  FIG. 143 (a) shows a state continued from FIG. 142 (a), and shows a state in which an effect selection effect is started. Nearly the entire image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is an effect display area 208d, and a horizontally-long rectangular frame image is displayed at the center of the effect display area 208d. Almost the entire area of the frame image is a display area for movie playback. In addition, a character string image indicating the title of the effect is displayed below the display area. The effect title indicates the movie name of the movie that can be selected as the first effect executed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the song name of the song that can be selected as the third effect executed by the speaker 120. As will be described later, the third effect is an effect corresponding to the first effect. In the effect selection effect in the present embodiment, the first effect is selected and executed during the first period. Further, the third effect is selected and executed during the third period. In both of the first period and the third period in this embodiment, the chance button 136 is pressed as shown in FIG. 143 (h) from the point in time when the effect selection effect shown in FIG. This is a period from the completion of the fade-out process shown until the end of the effect selection effect.

  In the upper left corner of the effect display area 208d, a character string image of “Please select an effect” is displayed in order to prompt the player to select a jackpot effect to be executed in the jackpot game. A direction key image simulating the direction key 139 is displayed in the lower left corner of the effect display area 208d, and a button image simulating the chance button 136 is displayed on the right side thereof. Below the direction key image, a character string image of “Select” is displayed, and it is informed that an effect executed as a selectable effect can be changed to another effect by operating the direction key 139. . In addition, a character string image of “OK” is displayed below the button image, and when the chance button 136 is pressed, the second image executed in the second period started after the end of the first period. It informs that it is possible to determine the effect and the fourth effect executed in the fourth period started after the end of the third period. In addition, the number of rounds in which the effect selection effect is executed is shown in the upper right corner of the effect display area 208d. In this example, a character string image of “1R” is displayed, and it is notified that the number of rounds is “1”. “Decoration 7” is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d, and it is confirmed that the big hit has been stopped and displayed with the symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”.

  In the frame image, a movie in which a princess character whose movie name may be there appears is displayed as one of a plurality of effects displayed during the first period. Production H is being executed. At the beginning of production H, the beginning (first) image of the movie is displayed in a paused state (still image state). At this time, no music is flowing from the speaker 120 and there is no sound. This state is the default effect mode of the effect selection effect according to the present embodiment. Next, the temporary stop of the image is canceled after a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, 0.5 seconds later), and a movie effect using a moving image is started in the frame image. In synchronism with the start of the movie production, the speaker 120 starts the song with the song name “may be there” as one of the multiple productions displayed during the third period. The execution of the production O flowing from is started. Thereafter, in this example, the player operates the first (first) direction key 139 during the execution of the effect selection effect by the effect H and the effect O. In this example, the operation of the direction key 139 is performed after the movie effect by the moving image is started. However, the operation of the direction key 139 may be performed before the movie effect by the moving image is started. In this example, the start of the movie production by the moving image and the start of the song are synchronized, but they may not be synchronized. Moreover, the start of the movie production by the moving image and the music may be started at the same time.

  FIG. 143 (b) shows a state after an effect selection effect has been executed and the player has operated the first direction key 139 during the execution of the effect selection effect by effect H and effect O. FIG. ing. When the direction key 139 is operated, the fade-out process is started. Due to the fade-out process, the frame image gradually changes to white and the display of the effect H becomes invisible, and in synchronization with this, the music flowing from the speaker 120 gradually decreases and becomes silent and the performance of the effect O is performed. It becomes impossible to listen. It should be noted that an effect for switching may be executed instead of the fade-out process, and an effect next to effect H (for example, effect I) may be executed immediately. The same applies to the examples of effects in which the subsequent fade-out process is executed, and the effect executed next to the effect that is being executed may be executed immediately without executing the fade-out process. .

  In the present embodiment, the movie production by the movie and the song are finished at the same time, but the movie production may be erased first and the song may be erased thereafter, and vice versa. Also good. Moreover, the start of the movie production by the moving image and the music may be started at the same time. The same applies to the following embodiments.

  In this embodiment, the display (or display between effects and effects) by the fade-out process of FIG. 143 (b) is executed for a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second). Here, when the operation of the direction key 139 is further performed (for example, 0.02 seconds after the start of display) during the display by the fade-out process of FIG. 143 (b), after the end of the display by the fade-out process (that is, after the elapse of 0.1 second), the effect selection effect of FIG. 143 (g) described later may be executed, and the fade-out of FIG. 143 (b) is performed. The display by the process is terminated in the middle (for example, the display by the fade-out process in FIG. 143 (b) is completed in 0.02 seconds), and the display by the fade-out process in FIG. The display by the fade-out process of FIG. 143 (b) may be terminated halfway (for example, the display by the fade-out process of FIG. 143 (b) may be performed). It ends at .02 sec), the predetermined time period the display by fade-out process in Fig. 143 (f) (e.g., may be 0.1 seconds) performed as. The same applies to the following embodiments.

  FIG. 143 (c) shows a state in which the effect selection effect after the fade-out process is executed. The execution of the effect I is started in the frame image, and the execution of the effect P is started in the speaker 120. As a result of the operation of the direction key 139, the effect is switched from the effect H to the effect I and from the effect O to the effect P in this way. A character string image showing the title of the effect is displayed below the display area for movie playback in the frame image.

  In the frame image, execution of an effect I that displays a movie in which a character with the name of the movie “Kiseki no Universe” appears as one of a plurality of effects displayed during the first period Is started. At the beginning of the production I, the first (first) image of the movie is displayed in a paused state (still image state). At this time, no music is flowing from the speaker 120 and there is no sound. Next, the temporary stop of the image is canceled after a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, 0.5 seconds later), and a movie effect using a moving image is started in the frame image. In synchronism with the start of the movie production, a song with the title “Kiseki no Universe” flows from the speaker 120 as one of a plurality of productions displayed during the third period. Production P is started. The movie is started from the beginning of the production I (the start timing of the first period), and the production P is started from the speaker 120 after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the production I (for example, 0.5 seconds later). On the contrary, the output of the music by the speaker 120 is started from the beginning of the production P, and the production I is started after a predetermined period from the start of the production P (for example, 0.5 seconds later). The production I and the production P may be started in synchronization with the start timing of the first period.

  In the present embodiment, the production of the movie effect by the moving image is started, and the music is started after a lapse of a predetermined period from the start of the movie effect, but the reverse may be possible. Moreover, the movie production by the moving image and the song may be started in synchronism, or the movie production by the moving image and the song may be started at the same time. The same applies to the following embodiments.

  FIGS. 143 (d) to (e) show a state where an effect selection effect by effect I and effect P is executed following FIG. 143 (c). In this example, the player then operates the second direction key 139 during the execution of the effect selection effect by the effect I and the effect P.

  FIG. 143 (f) shows a state after the effect selection effect has been executed, and the player has operated the second direction key 139 while the effect selection effect by effect I and effect P is being executed. ing. When the direction key 139 is operated, the fade-out process is started. Due to the fade-out process, the frame image gradually changes to white and the display of the effect I becomes invisible, and in synchronization with this, the music flowing from the speaker 120 gradually decreases and becomes silent, and the performance of the effect P is performed. It becomes impossible to listen. An effect for switching may be executed instead of the fade-out process.

  FIG. 143 (g) shows a state in which the effect selection effect after the fade-out process is executed. The execution of the effect H is started in the frame image, and the execution of the effect O is started in the speaker 120. As a result of the operation of the direction key 139, the effect is switched from the effect I to the effect H and from the effect P to the effect O in this way. A character string image showing the title of the effect is displayed below the display area for movie playback in the frame image.

  In the frame image, an effect that displays a movie in which a princess character whose movie name is “may be there” appears as one of a plurality of effects displayed during the first period H is executed. At the beginning of the production H, the top (first) image of the movie is displayed in a paused state (still image state). At this time, no music is flowing from the speaker 120 and there is no sound. Next, the temporary stop of the image is canceled after a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, 0.5 seconds later), and a movie effect using a moving image is started in the frame image. In synchronism with the start of the movie production, the speaker 120 starts the song with the song name “may be there” as one of the multiple productions displayed during the third period. The execution of the production O flowing from is started.

  In this example, the player then presses the chance button 136 during the execution of the effect selection effect by the effect H and the effect O. By pressing the chance button 136, the effect H started in FIG. 143 (g) is determined as the first effect, and the effect O started in FIG. 143 (g) is determined as the third effect. The title of the third effect is the same as the movie name of the first effect, and the third effect is an effect corresponding to the first effect. Further, by pressing the chance button 136, the second effect executed in the second period starting from FIG. 143 (i) is determined, and executed in the fourth period starting from FIG. 143 (i). A fourth performance is determined. If the effect is determined, the effect that is being executed is stopped, the movie displays the first still image displayed, and the BGM or sound for determination may be output. And / or the movie being executed may be executed as it is. The timing at which the effect is stopped may be the timing at which the effect is determined (for example, FIG. 143 (g)), but the timing at which display by the fade-out process is being performed (for example, FIG. 143 (h)). It may be the timing when the display by the fade-out process ends. The same applies to the following embodiments.

  FIG. 143 (h) shows a state in which the effect selection effect is ended by pressing the chance button 136 during the execution of the effect selection effect by the effect H and the effect O. When the chance button 136 is pressed, the fade-out process is started. As a result of the fade-out process, the effect display area 208d gradually changes to white, and the display of the effect H becomes invisible and enters a stopped state. In synchronism with this, the music flowing from the speaker 120 becomes gradually smaller and becomes silent (stopped), making it impossible to hear the performance O. The fade-out process is completed and the effect selection effect ends. Further, the fade-out process is completed, and the first effect and the third effect, and the first period and the third period are also ended.

  With the end of the effect selection effect, the movie image display, the character string image of “Please select effect”, the direction key image, and the button image are not displayed, but the character image of “1R” and “decoration 7” The big hit effect by the display of “” continues to be executed.

  FIG. 143 (i) shows a state where the big hit effect including the second effect and the fourth effect selected in the effect selection effect is started, and FIG. 142 (b) following FIG. 142 (c). It shows the same state. In the second period starting from FIG. 143 (i), the movie in which the princess character whose movie name is “may be there” appears from the top (first) on almost the entire display area 208d. The second effect (effect H ′) is executed. Thus, since the effect H is the same movie as the effect H ′, the first effect is an effect included in a part of the second effect. Also, in the fourth period starting from FIG. 143 (i), the fourth production in which the song whose title is “may be there” is played from the speaker 120, corresponding to the second production. (Production O ′) is executed. As described above, the effect O is the same song as the effect O ′, and therefore the third effect is an effect included in a part of the fourth effect. A character string image “may be there” is displayed in the lower left corner of the effect display area 208d. The character string image indicates the movie name of the displayed movie and the song name of the current song.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is described in a control manner as follows. The decorative symbol display device 208 executes, for example, a plurality of effects such as effects H and effects I in the first period (period shown in FIGS. 143 (a) to 143 (h)) in which the effect selection effect is executed. One of the effects H and I is the first effect. When the chance button 136 is pressed in the first period, the first sub control unit 400 determines an effect to be executed in the second period (a period starting from FIG. 143 (i)). In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 ends the first effect in the first case (when the chance button 136 is pressed during the first period in which the first effect is being executed), and the second effect is displayed. In this period, the effect executed in the second period is executed from the beginning.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the second effect (effect H ′) executed in the second period is determined when the chance button 136 is pressed, and the determined effect H ′ is the head. Since the game table is started again from the above, it is possible to realize a game machine having a feature in the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, since the production H ′ is started from the top, the player may easily recognize that the second period has started. Furthermore, since the first performance (production H) being executed is stopped when the chance button 136 is pressed, it may be easier for the player to confirm that the press of the chance button 136 has been accepted. .

  According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the fourth effect (effect O ′) executed in the fourth period is determined when the chance button 136 is pressed, and the determined effect O ′ is the head. Since the game is started again from the above, it is possible to realize a game machine having a feature of the speaker 120. In addition, since the production O ′ is started from the top, the player may easily recognize that the fourth period has started. Further, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the third effect (production O) being executed is stopped, so that it may be easy for the player to confirm that the press of the chance button 136 is accepted. .

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the player can visually recognize that the second period has started by starting the second effect (effect H ′) in the effect display area 208d from the top. May be able to be easily recognized. Further, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the first effect (production H) being executed is stopped, so that it is easy for the player to visually confirm that the press of the chance button 136 is accepted. There is a case.

  Also, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the player recognizes audibly that the fourth period has started by starting the production O ′ executed in the fourth period from the beginning. May be easier to do. Further, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the third performance (production O) being executed is stopped, so that it is easy for the player to aurally confirm that the press of the chance button 136 is accepted. There is a case.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the second effect executed in the second period and the fourth effect executed in the fourth period are determined at the same time. During the period until the chance button 136 is pressed in the third period, at least a part of the first effect (effect H) by the effect display area 208d is executed and the third effect (effect O) by the speaker 120 is executed. In some cases, the player can be more entertained by executing at least a part of. In addition, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the effect being executed in both the speaker 120 and the effect display area 208d stops halfway, so that the player is more aware that the chance button 136 has been pressed. It may be easier to recognize.

  In addition, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the third effect can be determined from a plurality of effects such as the effect O and the effect P, so that the player may be entertained.

  In addition, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, there are cases where the player can be entertained with the production by the plurality of production means of the speaker 120 and the decorative symbol display device 208 (production display area 208d).

  In the present embodiment, the effect selection effect is executed in the first round (1R) in the big hit, but may be executed in other rounds (2R, 3R,..., The final round). In the following embodiments, the effect selection effect may be executed in other rounds.

  In the present embodiment, one production selection effect is executed by one big hit production, but a plurality of production selection productions may be executed by one big hit production. In the following embodiments, a plurality of effect selection effects may be executed in one big hit effect.

  In the present embodiment, the once determined effect cannot be changed again, but the once determined effect may be changed again. It should be noted that, even in the following embodiments, the once determined effect may be changed again.

  In this embodiment, after a still image is displayed for a certain period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds) after the movie effect is selected, the selected effect movie is displayed. The display may be executed, or may be executed after (or immediately after) the production is selected. Also in the following embodiments, the movie effect may be displayed as described above.

  In this embodiment, the selected effect is executed when a certain time (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses after the effect in which the music flows is selected, but may be executed simultaneously with the selection of the effect. , It may be executed after (or immediately after) the production is selected. Also in the following embodiments, the effect that the music flows as described above may be displayed.

  In the present embodiment, even when the chance button 136 is not pressed, the effect (second effect or fourth effect) is determined when the specific round (1R in this example) is completed. To be. If the chance button 136 is not pressed, the effect selection period (first period or third period) may not be terminated until the big hit ends. That is, when the chance button 136 is not pressed, an effect selection screen (effect selection effect) may be displayed at all times until the end of the big hit.

  The jackpot effect selected in the present embodiment may be continuously executed from the first round to the fifteenth round, or the above-mentioned effect selection effect is executed every round and the jackpot executed every round. An effect may be selected.

  It should be noted that the production data such as a song or a movie executed in the production selection production may be the same data as the production data executed as the selected jackpot production, or different data may be used. . If the same data is used, the part to be executed during the production selection effect may be specified.

  When the chance button 136 is pressed before the end of the first round after the first round is started as in this example, the effect selection effect may be ended even before the end of the first round. Further, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 146, the effect selection effect may be executed continuously during the period from the start of the first round to the end thereof.

  In addition, in the case where an effect that can be selected in the effect selection effect is one effect (for example, the movie α and the song A corresponding to the movie α), if the selection operation with the direction key is performed, the display by the fade-out process is performed. After the execution, the one effect (for example, movie α and song A corresponding to movie α) may be started again from the beginning, and the subsequent effect before the display by the fade-out process is executed. You may be made to do.

  Note that when the effect that can be selected in the effect selection effect is one effect (for example, the movie α and the song A corresponding to the movie α), the selection operation by the direction key may not be performed. In this case, the direction key image displayed in the effect display area 208d and the character string image of “Select” are displayed differently from the state in which the selection operation can be performed (for example, different colors and transparency from when the “Select” character can be selected). Display the directional key image in a different color or transparency than when it is selectable, or erase one of the directional key image and the “Select” character string image and display the other. The direction key image and the character string image of “Select” may not be displayed.

  In addition, when the effect that can be selected in the effect selection effect is one effect (hereinafter referred to as effect X. For example, movie α and song A corresponding to movie α), an effect that can be selected in the future (hereinafter referred to as effect Y). ) Is displayed (for example, the area of the frame image), and the cursor is moved from the effect X to the region where the effect Y is displayed by operating the direction key, and only the determination operation is restricted. You may make it do. Here, in the area where the effect Y is displayed, the display related to the effect Y (for example, the display of a still image such as a song title or a movie) is different from the case where the effect Y can be selected (for example, a frame image). The background is gray, the still image is displayed in black and white), but the effect Y is displayed in the same manner as when the effect Y can be selected. Also good. In addition, a display (for example, a display in which “??????” is described in the frame image) is displayed in a region where the effect Y is displayed, so that the fact that the effect Y can be selected is not displayed. Also good.

  Note that the first period is ended when the chance button 136 is operated, and the display by the fade-out process in FIG. 143 (h) may be executed in the second period. In addition, the first period is ended after the display by the fade-out process is completed (immediately) or simultaneously with the end, and the second period is started after the first round of FIG. 143 (i) is started (immediately) or simultaneously. It may be.

  Next, a variation 1 of the jackpot game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This modification is characterized by an effect selection effect in the jackpot effect. The jackpot effects shown in FIGS. 144 (a) to 144 (h) show in time series the effect selection effects for selecting the first effect and selecting the second effect to be executed in the jackpot game in this order. Moreover, FIG. 144 (i) has shown the state by which the big hit effect including the 2nd effect selected by the effect selection effect was started. In these figures, the passage of time between one figure and the next figure does not necessarily match between the figures. Moreover, since the effect display mode in the effect display area 208d in the effect selection effect of the present modification is the same as the effect display mode of the eleventh embodiment, the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 144 (a) shows a state continued from FIG. 142 (a), and shows a state in which an effect selection effect is started. The effect H is executed in the frame image, and the title of the effect “may be there” is displayed below the effect H. The effect title indicates the movie name of a movie that can be selected as the first effect executed by the decorative symbol display device 208.

  At the beginning of production H, the beginning (first) image of the movie is displayed in a paused state (still image state). At this time, BGM for effect selection flows from the speaker 120. This state is the default effect mode of the effect selection effect according to this modification. The production selection BGM may start from the prelude. In the following embodiments, the production selection BGM may be started from the prelude or may not be started.

  FIG. 144 (b) shows a state in which the effect H has shifted from still image display to video display after a predetermined time has elapsed. A BGM for effect selection continues to flow from the speaker 120.

  FIG. 144 (c) shows a state in which the effect selection effect is executed, the movie effect by the moving image is continuously executed in the frame image, and the BGM for effect selection continues to flow from the speaker 120.

  FIG. 144 (d) shows a state in which the fade-out process has been performed in the frame image after a predetermined time has elapsed since the display of the effect H. In the present modification, when the player does not operate the direction key 139 until a predetermined time elapses, a fade-out process for interrupting a movie effect by a moving image is executed. When the fade-out process is started, the frame image gradually changes to white, and the display of the effect H becomes invisible during the movie effect. On the other hand, BGM for effect selection flows from the speaker 120 continuously.

  FIG. 144 (e) shows a state in which the effect selection effect after the fade-out process is being executed. The frame image is a default effect mode in which the top image of the movie of effect H is displayed as a still image. Further, a BGM for selecting an effect continues to flow from the speaker 120.

  FIG. 144 (f) shows a state in which the effect H has shifted from still image display to moving image display after a predetermined time has elapsed. A BGM for effect selection continues to flow from the speaker 120. Thereafter, in this example, the player presses the chance button 136 during the execution of the effect selection effect. By pressing the chance button 136, the effect H started from FIG. 144 (e) is determined as the first effect. Further, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the second effect to be executed in the second period starting from FIG. 144 (i) is determined.

  FIG. 144 (g) shows the state of the effect selection effect after the chance button 136 is pressed. When the chance button 136 is pressed, the movie production by the moving image is interrupted, and the top image of the movie is displayed in a still image state. Further, the width of the frame portion of the frame image is also displayed thick so that the player's attention is directed to the movie display in the frame image. Thereby, it is notified that the production H is determined as the first production. Further, a BGM for selecting an effect continues to flow from the speaker 120. The production H may be still image display or may be shifted to video display.

  FIG. 144 (h) shows a state in which the fade-out process is executed following the notification that the effect H is determined as the first effect by pressing the chance button 136. As a result of the fade-out process, the effect display area 208d gradually changes to white, and the display of the effect H becomes invisible and enters a stopped state. In synchronism with this, the BGM flowing from the speaker 120 gradually decreases and becomes silent (stopped), making it impossible to hear the performance O. The fade-out process is completed and the effect selection effect ends. Further, the fade-out process is completed, and the first effect and the first period are completed.

  FIG. 144 (i) shows a state where the big hit effect including the second effect selected in the effect selection effect is started, and shows the same state as FIG. 142 (b) following FIG. 142 (c). ing. In the second period starting from FIG. 144 (i), the second effect (effect H ′) is executed on almost the entire surface of the effect display area 208d. Thus, since the effect H is the same movie as the effect H ′, the first effect is an effect included in a part of the second effect. Also, from the speaker 120, a song corresponding to the second effect (song name “may be there”) flows from the top.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the effect H ′ that is executed in the second period is determined when the chance button 136 is pressed, and the determined effect is restarted from the top, so It is possible to realize a game machine having a feature in the symbol display device 208. In addition, since the production H ′ is started from the top, the player may easily recognize that the second period has started. Furthermore, since the first performance (production H) being executed is stopped when the chance button 136 is pressed, it may be easier for the player to confirm that the press of the chance button 136 has been accepted. .

  Next, a second variation of the jackpot game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This modification is characterized by an effect selection effect in the jackpot effect. The jackpot effects shown in FIGS. 145 (a) to 145 (h) show the effect selection effects for selecting the first effect and selecting the second effect to be executed in the jackpot game in this order. FIG. 145 (i) shows a state in which the big hit effect including the second effect selected in the effect selection effect is started. In these figures, the passage of time between one figure and the next figure does not necessarily match between the figures. Further, the description of the same effect display mode as that of the eleventh example in the effect display area 208d in the effect selection effect of the present modification will be omitted.

  FIG. 145 (a) shows a state continued from FIG. 142 (a), and shows a state in which an effect selection effect is started. In the upper left corner of the effect display area 208d, a character string image of “Please select a song” is displayed in order to prompt the player to select a jackpot effect to be executed in the jackpot game. In addition, a horizontally-long rectangular music selectable area is displayed at the lower right of the character string image, and can be selected as a first effect executed by the speaker 120 serving as an effect means in the center of the music selectable area. A character string image of “May be there” is displayed, which is the name of the song. In addition, a horizontally-long rectangular music display area is displayed at the lower right of the music selectable area, and in the center of the music display area, the name of the music that can be displayed in the music selectable area is “Kiseki no Universe”. A character string image is displayed.

  In this modification, the outer periphery of the selectable area of the music is displayed with a thick line so that the player can easily see the names of the songs that can be selected, and the character string image of “may be there” is displayed larger. ing. On the other hand, the outer periphery of the music display area is displayed with a thin line so that it is less conspicuous than the music selectable area, and the character string image of “Kiseki no Universe” is displayed smaller. Also, no music is flowing from the speaker 120, and there is no sound. This state is the default effect mode of the effect selection effect according to this modification.

  A direction key image simulating the direction key 139 is displayed in the lower left corner of the effect display area 208d, and a button image simulating the chance button 136 is displayed on the right side thereof. A character string image of “Select” is displayed below the direction key image. The character string image of “Select” notifies that the selectable music piece can be changed by operating the direction key 139. In this example, each time the player operates the direction key 139, the song name displayed in the song selection display area is moved to the song display area and displayed, and the song name displayed in the song display area is displayed as a song selection display. The music that can be selected can be changed by moving to the area and displaying it. In addition, a character string image of “OK” is displayed below the button image. The “determined” character string image informs that by pressing the chance button 136, it is possible to determine the music as the second effect executed in the second period starting from FIG. 145 (i) described later. ing.

  As described above, in this example, the selectable music piece can be changed by operating the direction key 139 by the player. However, regardless of whether or not the player operates the direction key 139, a certain period (for example, 5 Each time (second), the song name displayed in the song selection display area and the song name displayed in the song display area may be automatically switched. In the following embodiments, song names may be automatically replaced every time a certain period elapses.

  In this modification, the music that can be selected by the operation of the direction key 139 can be changed, and the music performed in the big hit effect can be determined by pressing the chance button 136 thereafter. By changing the music that can be selected by long-pressing the chance button 136 or scrolling the touch panel (not shown), and then pressing the chance button 136 once or tapping the touch panel, the second You may make it determine the music performed in a period. In the following embodiments, the above operation may be performed.

  FIG. 145 (b) shows that a song whose title is “may be there” is output from the speaker 120 as one of a plurality of effects displayed during the first period. A state in which the execution of the effect O flowing from the top is started is shown. In this example, after that, during the execution of the effect selection effect, the player performs the first operation of the direction key 139. The selectable music is changed by the operation.

  FIG. 145 (c) shows a state immediately after the effect selection effect has been executed and the player has operated the first direction key 139. The song name “may be there” displayed in the song selection display area is moved and displayed in the song display area, and the song name “Kiseki no Universe” displayed in the song display area is displayed in the song selection display area. Is moved and displayed. Until a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses immediately after selection, no music is flowing from the speaker 120 and there is no sound.

  FIG. 145 (d) shows that a song whose title is “Kiseki no Universe” from the speaker 120 as one of a plurality of effects displayed during the first period has elapsed from the beginning. The state where the execution of the flowing effect P is started is shown. In this example, the player then performs the second operation of the direction key 139 during execution of the effect selection effect.

  FIG. 145 (e) shows a state after the effect selection effect has been executed and the player has operated the direction key 139 for the second time. A character string image of “May be there” is displayed in the music selectable area, and a character string image of “Kiseki no Universe” is displayed in the music display area. No music is flowing from the speaker 120, and there is no sound.

  FIG. 145 (f) shows a song whose title is “may be there” from the speaker 120 as one of a plurality of effects displayed during the first period after a predetermined time has elapsed. Shows a state in which the execution of the production O flowing from the top is started. Thereafter, in this example, the player presses the chance button 136 during execution of the effect selection effect. By pressing the chance button 136, the effect O started in FIG. 145 (f) is determined as the first effect. Further, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the second effect to be executed in the second period starting from FIG. 145 (i) is determined.

  FIG. 145 (g) shows a state in which an effect selection effect is executed immediately after the chance button 136 is pressed. When the chance button 136 is pressed, the speaker 120 finishes (stops) the execution of the effect O, and a decision sound that informs the player that the second effect has been determined flows. When the chance button 136 is pressed, the music selectable area changes to black, and the character string image “may be there” changes to a white display, thereby giving the player a second indication. It is notified that the production O ′ has been determined as the production.

  FIG. 145 (h) shows a state in which the fade-out process has been executed following the notification that the effect O is determined as the first effect by pressing the chance button 136 and the effect O ′ is determined as the second effect. ing. By the fade-out process, the effect display area 208d gradually changes to white, and the display of the music selectable area and the music display area becomes invisible. The fade-out process is completed and the effect selection effect ends. Further, the fade-out process is completed and the first period ends.

  At the end of the production selection production, the character string image of “Please select a song”, the direction key image, and the button image will be hidden, but the “1R” character string image and “decoration 7” display will be a big hit The production continues to be executed.

  FIG. 145 (i) shows a state where the big hit effect including the second effect selected in the effect selection effect is started, and shows the same state as FIG. 142 (b) following FIG. 142 (c). ing. In the second period starting from FIG. 145 (i), the speaker 120 executes the second effect (effect O ′) from the beginning of the song. Thus, since the effect O is the same music as the effect O ′, the first effect is an effect included in a part of the second effect. In addition, on almost the entire surface of the effect display area 208d, a movie effect corresponding to the second effect (movie name “may be there”) is displayed from the top.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the effect O ′ to be executed in the second period is determined when the chance button 136 is pressed, and the determined effect is restarted from the beginning, so that the speaker A gaming table with 120 features can be realized. In addition, since the production O ′ is started from the top, the player may easily recognize that the second period has started. Furthermore, since the first performance (production H) being executed is stopped when the chance button 136 is pressed, it may be easier for the player to confirm that the press of the chance button 136 has been accepted. .

  In addition, in a state where the production O is being executed, the player selects the production P by performing the first operation of the direction key 139, and immediately after that, the second operation of the direction key 139 is performed again quickly. When selected, the song of the selected effect O may be started from the continuation of the song of the effect O that was executed immediately before, or may be started from the beginning. In this case, the music of the effect P selected by the first operation may or may not flow.

(Example 12) FIG. 139 to FIG. 142 regarding the special figure variable game and the jackpot game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 12 of the present embodiment (provided that FIG. 142 (b) is the second round) , With reference to FIG. Since FIGS. 139 to 142 are described in the eleventh embodiment, description thereof is omitted here.

  With reference to FIG. 146, the jackpot effect performed in the period between FIG. 142 (a) and FIG. 142 (b) in order to determine the execution of the jackpot effect including the second effect and the fourth effect will be described. . The jackpot effects shown in FIGS. 146 (a) to 146 (i) are the effect selection effects in which the first effect and the third effect are selected in this order, and the second effect and the fourth effect to be executed in the jackpot game are selected. Are shown in time series. Moreover, FIG. 146 (j) shows a state in which the big hit effect including the second effect and the fourth effect selected in the effect selection effect is started. In these figures, the passage of time between one figure and the next figure does not necessarily match between the figures.

  FIG. 146 (a) shows a state continued from FIG. 142 (a), and shows a state in which an effect selection effect is started. As an example of the first effect means, almost the entire image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 which is a display means is an effect display area 208d, and a horizontally long rectangular frame image is displayed at the center of the effect display area 208d. ing. Almost the entire area of the frame image is a display area for movie playback. In addition, a character string image indicating the title of the effect is displayed below the display area. The title of the effect is a movie name of a movie that can be selected as the first effect executed by the decorative symbol display device 208, and a third that is executed by the speaker 120 that is a sound output means as an example of the second effect means. The song names of songs that can be selected as production are shown. As will be described later, the third effect is an effect corresponding to the first effect. In the effect selection effect in the present embodiment, the first effect is selected and executed during the first period. Further, the third effect is selected and executed during the third period. In both the first period and the third period in this embodiment, the fade-out process is completed as shown in FIG. 146 (i) from the time when the effect selection effect shown in FIG. 146 (a) is started (effect display area). 208d completely changes to white) and the effect selection effect ends.

  In the upper left corner of the effect display area 208d, a character string image of “Please select an effect” is displayed in order to prompt the player to select a jackpot effect to be executed in the jackpot game. A direction key image simulating the direction key 139 is displayed in the lower left corner of the effect display area 208d, and a button image simulating the chance button 136 is displayed on the right side thereof. Below the direction key image, a character string image of “Select” is displayed, and it is informed that an effect executed as a selectable effect can be changed to another effect by operating the direction key 139. . In addition, a character string image of “OK” is displayed below the button image, and when the chance button 136 is pressed, the second image executed in the second period started after the end of the first period. It informs that it is possible to determine the effect and the fourth effect executed in the fourth period started after the end of the third period. In addition, the number of rounds in which the effect selection effect is executed is shown in the upper right corner of the effect display area 208d. In this example, a character string image of “1R” is displayed, and it is notified that the number of rounds is “1”. “Decoration 7” is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d, and it is confirmed that the big hit has been stopped and displayed with the symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”.

  In the frame image, a movie in which a princess character whose movie name may be there appears is displayed as one of a plurality of effects displayed during the first period. Production H is being executed. At the beginning of production H, the beginning (first) image of the movie is displayed in a paused state (still image state). At this time, no music is flowing from the speaker 120 and there is no sound. This state is the default effect mode of the effect selection effect according to the present embodiment. Next, the temporary stop of the image is canceled after a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, 0.5 seconds later), and a movie effect using a moving image is started in the frame image. In synchronism with the start of the movie production, the speaker 120 starts the song with the song name “may be there” as one of the multiple productions displayed during the third period. The execution of the production O flowing from is started. In this example, thereafter, the player operates the first (first) direction key 139 during the execution of the effect selection effect by the effect H and the effect O. In this example, the operation of the direction key 139 is performed after the movie effect by the moving image is started. However, the operation of the direction key 139 may be performed before the movie effect by the moving image is started. In this example, the start of the movie production by the moving image and the start of the song are synchronized, but they may not be synchronized.

  FIG. 146 (b) shows a state after an effect selection effect has been executed and the player has operated the first direction key 139 during the execution of the effect selection effect by effect H and effect O. FIG. ing. When the direction key 139 is operated, the fade-out process is started. Due to the fade-out process, the frame image gradually changes to white and the display of the effect H becomes invisible, and in synchronization with this, the music flowing from the speaker 120 gradually decreases and becomes silent and the performance of the effect O is performed. It becomes impossible to listen. An effect for switching may be executed instead of the fade-out process.

  FIG. 146 (c) shows a state in which the effect selection effect after the fade-out process has been executed. The execution of the effect I is started in the frame image, and the execution of the effect P is started in the speaker 120. As a result of the operation of the direction key 139, the effect is switched from the effect H to the effect I and from the effect O to the effect P in this way. A character string image showing the title of the effect is displayed below the display area for movie playback in the frame image.

  In the frame image, execution of an effect I that displays a movie in which a character with the name of the movie “Kiseki no Universe” appears as one of a plurality of effects displayed during the first period Is started. At the beginning of the production I, the first (first) image of the movie is displayed in a paused state (still image state). At this time, no music is flowing from the speaker 120 and there is no sound. Next, the temporary stop of the image is canceled after a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, 0.5 seconds later), and a movie effect using a moving image is started in the frame image. In synchronism with the start of the movie production, a song with the title “Kiseki no Universe” flows from the speaker 120 as one of a plurality of productions displayed during the third period. Production P is started.

  FIGS. 146 (d) to 146 (e) show a state where an effect selection effect by effect I and effect P is being executed following FIG. 146 (c). In this example, the player then operates the second direction key 139 during the execution of the effect selection effect by the effect I and the effect P.

  FIG. 146 (f) shows a state after the effect selection effect has been executed and the player has operated the second direction key 139 while the effect selection effect by effect I and effect P is being executed. ing. When the direction key 139 is operated, the fade-out process is started. Due to the fade-out process, the frame image gradually changes to white and the display of the effect I becomes invisible, and in synchronization with this, the music flowing from the speaker 120 gradually decreases and becomes silent, and the performance of the effect P is performed. It becomes impossible to listen. An effect for switching may be executed instead of the fade-out process.

  FIG. 146 (g) shows a state in which the effect selection effect after the fade-out process is being executed. The execution of the effect H is started in the frame image, and the execution of the effect O is started in the speaker 120. As a result of the operation of the direction key 139, the effect is switched from the effect I to the effect H and from the effect P to the effect O in this way. A character string image showing the title of the effect is displayed below the display area for movie playback in the frame image.

  In the frame image, an effect that displays a movie in which a princess character whose movie name is “may be there” appears as one of a plurality of effects displayed during the first period H is executed. At the beginning of the production H, the top (first) image of the movie is displayed in a paused state (still image state). At this time, no music is flowing from the speaker 120 and there is no sound. Next, the temporary stop of the image is canceled after a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, 0.5 seconds later), and a movie effect using a moving image is started in the frame image. In synchronism with the start of the movie production, the speaker 120 starts the song with the song name “may be there” as one of the multiple productions displayed during the third period. The execution of the production O flowing from is started.

  In this example, thereafter, the first round ends without the chance button 136 being pressed during the execution of the effect selection effect by the effect H and the effect O. When the chance button 136 is not pressed, at the end of the first round, the effect H started in FIG. 146 (g) is determined as the first effect, and the effect O started in FIG. 146 (g) is the third effect. It is determined as a production. As described above, the title of the third effect is the same as the movie name of the first effect, and the third effect is an effect corresponding to the first effect. In addition, the second presentation to be executed in the second period starting from FIG. 146 (j) is determined by the end of the first round, and is executed in the fourth period starting from FIG. 146 (j). A fourth performance is determined.

  FIG. 146 (h) shows the state of the effect selection effect immediately after the attacker 234 is closed and the first round is completed. A period between FIG. 146 (h) and the next FIG. 146 (i) is called an inter-round interval. The character string image “1R” informing that the number of rounds is “1” is deleted in the interval between rounds. Here, the interval between rounds will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 147 (a) is a time chart showing the start timing and end timing of the big hit game. In this FIG. 147 (a), in order from the top, a special symbol changing signal, a condition device operation signal, an accessory continuous operation device operation signal, a special electric agent release signal, a special electric agent operation signal, an attacker 234, An attacker solenoid signal is shown.

  Special symbol changing signal, condition device activation signal, accessory continuous activation device activation signal, special electric accessory release signal, special electric accessory activation signal are signals as seen from the game rules. If it is on, the special symbol display device is in operation, and if it is off, it is inactive (stopped). If the condition device activation signal is on, the attacker 234 is operating (opening operation, maintaining the open state, closing operation, maintaining the closed state), and if off, it is not operating (closing). . In addition, if the accessory continuous operation device activation signal is ON, the special electric accessory has been activated a plurality of times. The special electric accessory release signal is a signal that maintains the open state of the special electric accessory. If the special electric accessory operating signal is on, the attacker 234 is in the opening operation, maintaining the open state, or in the closing operation, and if off, the attacker 234 is in the closing state. The special symbol fluctuation signal, the condition device activation signal, the accessory continuous activation device activation signal, the special electric accessory release signal, and the special electric accessory activation signal are signals output to an external device (for example, a hall computer). It is.

  The “opening” of the attacker 234 shown in FIG. 147 (a) corresponds to the opening operation or maintaining the open state, and the “closed” of the attacker 234 corresponds to the closing operation or maintaining the closed state. Also, the attacker solenoid signal shown in FIG. 147 (a) is a signal for maintaining the open state, which is transmitted to the solenoid that opens and closes the attacker 234. The arrow A in FIG. 147 (a) corresponds to the fixed display time of the special symbol stop symbol. The arrow B corresponds to a jackpot game start effect time (a jackpot start display time). Arrow C corresponds to the closing operation time of the attacker 234. The arrow D corresponds to a jackpot game end effect time (a jackpot end display time). The arrow E corresponds to the special display fluctuation display waiting time, and when there is a special figure 1 or special figure 2 suspension, the special symbol fluctuation starts after the fluctuation display start waiting time elapses. See the dotted line part of the signal).

  The start timing of the big hit game may be the timing when the special figure changing signal is turned off, the timing when the condition device activation signal is turned on, or the accessory continuous actuation device activation signal is It may be the timing when the special electric accessory release signal is first turned on, or the timing when the special electric accessory operating signal is first turned on. Alternatively, it may be the timing when the attacker 234 starts the first opening, or the timing when the attacker solenoid signal is first turned on.

  On the other hand, the end timing of the jackpot game may be the timing when the condition device operation signal is turned off, the timing when the accessory continuous operation device operation signal is turned off, or the condition device operation signal. And / or when the accessory continuous actuating device activation signal is on, it may be the timing at which the special electric accessory release signal is finally turned off from on, or the condition device activation signal and / or the instrument continuous signal When the actuator activation signal is on, it may be the timing when the special electric instrument operating signal is finally turned off from the on state, or the condition apparatus activation signal and / or the accessory continuous actuator activation signal may be In the case of being on, it may be the timing when the attacker 234 last changed from “open” to “close”, the condition device activation signal and / or the service item. When the continuous operation device operation signal is on, it may be the timing at which the attacker solenoid signal is finally turned off from on, or the condition device operation signal and / or the accessory continuous operation device operation signal is turned off. May be the timing at which the variable waiting time has elapsed.

  FIG. 147 (b) is an enlarged view of a portion surrounded by an ellipse indicated by a one-dot chain line in FIG. Even when the special electric accessory release signal is turned off, the special electric accessory operating signal is on for a while (here, the period of the arrow a). During the period indicated by the arrow a, the attacker 234 performs a closing operation and an opening end effect (for example, a display effect) of the attacker 234 is executed. Note that the period indicated by the arrow a may be only the period during which the attacker 234 performs the closing operation. The period of the arrow b elapses from when the special electric accessory operating signal is turned off to when it is turned on. The interval between rounds corresponding to the interval between rounds may be a period indicated by an arrow b shown in FIG. 147 (b), or a period obtained by combining the arrows a and b shown in FIG. May be.

  The open period (open state maintaining period) of the attacker 234 shown in FIG. 147 corresponds to a period (long term) in which the game ball can easily enter, and hereinafter, the opening of the attacker 234 during this period will be referred to as a packer. is there. On the other hand, there are cases where the opening period of the attacker 234 is a period (short period) in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter. Hereinafter, the opening of the attacker 234 during this period may be referred to as a paca.

  The start timing of one round may be when the special electric accessory release signal is turned on or when the special electric accessory operating signal is turned on, and the attacker 234 is released. The case may be a case where the attacker solenoid signal is turned on.

  The end timing of one round may be when the special electric accessory release signal is turned off or when the special electric accessory operating signal is turned off, and the attacker 234 is closed. The case may be the case where the attacker solenoid signal is turned off.

  Returning to FIG. 146 (h), the round display such as “1R” is erased in the decorative symbol display device 208 during the round interval. During the interval between rounds, the round display of “finished round” may be continuously displayed, and when the next round is started, the round display of “next round” may be displayed. In this case, the round display of “finished round” may be deleted, and the next round display may be displayed during the interval between rounds. It should be noted that in the embodiments before and after this, the same display as described above may be displayed for the round display in the interval between rounds.

  The timing at which the presentation in the present embodiment is determined is after the attacker 234 is closed, but may be the same as the timing when the attacker 234 is closed, from when the attacker 234 is closed until the attacker 234 is opened again. It may be determined between the time when the attacker 234 is reopened and the time when the attacker 234 is opened again.

  In the present embodiment, after the next round (2R) of the specific round is started, the effect selected in the specific round (1R) is started, but the effect selected simultaneously with the end of the specific round. May be started, may be started after (or immediately after) a particular round, or may be started during an inter-round interval.

  When an effect is selected just before the end of the effect selection period (the period from the start to the end of 1R), the effect may not be executed, or the effect may be executed. For example, it may be 0.4 seconds before the end of the round.

  In this embodiment, when it is detected that a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) has entered the attacker 234, or when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the attacker 234 was opened, Is terminated (the attacker 234 is closed). In this case, the rendering means may end the execution of the selected rendering before a certain period of time has elapsed since the attacker 234 was opened (for example, 28 seconds have passed since the attacker 234 was opened).

  As shown in FIG. 146 (h), when the attacker 234 is closed and the first round is completed, the movie effect by the moving image is interrupted and stopped, and the first image of the movie is displayed in a still image state. Further, the width of the frame portion of the frame image is also displayed thick so that the player's attention is directed to the movie display in the frame image. Thereby, it is notified that the production H is determined as the first production. In addition, no music flows from the speaker 120, and the speaker 120 is silent (stopped). The production H may be still image display or may be shifted to video display. In addition, when the production H shifts to the moving image display, the execution of the production O in which a song having a song name “may be there” flows from the head may be started from the speaker 120.

  In this example, after the first round is finished, the effect H is determined as the first effect, and the effect O is determined as the third effect. As described above, the title of the third effect is the same as the movie name of the first effect, and the third effect is an effect corresponding to the first effect. In addition, by the end of the first round, the second effect executed in the second period starting from FIG. 146 (j) is determined, and in the fourth period starting from FIG. 146 (j). A fourth performance to be executed is determined.

  FIG. 146 (i) shows a state where the first round has ended and the second round has started, and the effect selection effects by effects H and effects O have ended. In the upper right corner of the effect display area 208d, a character string image of the number of rounds “2R” of the rounds in which the big hit effect is executed is displayed. When the first round is finished, the fade-out process is started. By the fade-out process, the effect display area 208d gradually changes to white, and the display of the effect H becomes invisible. The fade-out process is completed and the effect selection effect ends. Further, the fade-out process is completed, and the first period and the third period are ended.

  With the end of the effect selection effect, the movie image display, the character string image of “Please select effect”, the direction key image, and the button image are not displayed, but the character image of “2R” and “decoration 7” The big hit effect by the display of “” continues to be executed.

  FIG. 146 (j) shows a state where the big hit effect including the second effect and the fourth effect selected in the effect selection effect is started after the attacker 234 is released in the second round, and FIG. It shows the same state as FIG. 142 (b) following c). In the second period starting from FIG. 146 (j), a movie in which a princess character whose movie name is “may be there” appears from the top (first) on almost the entire display area 208d. The second effect (effect H ′) is executed. Thus, since the effect H is the same movie as the effect H ′, the first effect is an effect included in a part of the second effect. Also, in the fourth period starting from FIG. 146 (j), the fourth effect in which the song whose title is “may be there” is played from the speaker 120, corresponding to the second effect. (Production O ′) is executed. As described above, the effect O is the same song as the effect O ′, and therefore the third effect is an effect included in a part of the fourth effect. A character string image “may be there” is displayed in the lower left corner of the effect display area 208d. The character string image indicates the movie name of the displayed movie and the song name of the current song.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is described in a control manner as follows. The decorative symbol display device 208 executes a plurality of effects such as effects H and effects I, for example. One of the effects H and I is the first effect. The first effect is an effect executed during the big hit period (the period shown in FIGS. 146 (a) to (i)). The jackpot is composed of, for example, a plurality of rounds from the first round to the fifteenth round, and one of the plurality of rounds is the first round. The first sub-control unit 400 performs the second period (for example, the period starting from FIG. 146 (j)) in the first period (the period shown in FIGS. 146 (a) to (i)). It is a means to determine. The second period is a period that starts after the first period ends. The first sub-control unit 400 determines an effect to be executed in the second period when the first round is completed. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 ends the first presentation in the first case (when the first round is finished during the first period in which the first presentation is executed), and the second period. Then, the effect to be executed in the second period is executed from the top.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the effect H ′ to be executed in the second period is determined when the first round is completed, and the determined effect is restarted from the beginning, so the decorative design A game stand having the characteristics of the display device 208 can be realized. In addition, since the production H ′ is started from the top, the player may easily recognize that the second period has started. Further, since the first effect (effect H) being executed is stopped when the first round ends, it may be easier for the player to confirm that the first round has ended.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the effect O ′ to be executed in the fourth period is determined when the first round is completed, and the determined effect is restarted from the beginning, so that the speaker 120 It is possible to realize a game stand with features. In addition, since the production O ′ is started from the top, the player may easily recognize that the fourth period has started. Furthermore, since the third performance (production O) being executed is stopped when the first round is ended, it may be easier for the player to confirm that the first round has ended.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the player can visually recognize that the second period has started by starting the second effect (effect H ′) in the effect display area 208d from the top. May be able to be easily recognized. In addition, when the first round ends, the first effect (effect H) being executed is stopped, so that it may be easier for the player to visually confirm that the first round has ended.

  Also, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the player recognizes audibly that the fourth period has started by starting the production O ′ executed in the fourth period from the beginning. May be easier to do. In addition, when the first round is completed, the third performance (production O) that is being executed is stopped, so that it may be easier for the player to visually confirm that the first round has ended.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the second effect executed in the second period and the fourth effect executed in the fourth period are determined at the same time. During the period until the first round ends in the third period, at least a part of the first effect (effect H) by the effect display area 208d is executed and the third effect (effect O) by the speaker 120 is executed. The player may be more entertained by executing at least a part. In addition, when the first round is finished, the effect being executed in both the speaker 120 and the effect display area 208d stops halfway, so that it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the first round has ended. There is.

  In addition, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the third effect can be determined from a plurality of effects such as the effect O and the effect P, so that the player may be entertained.

  In addition, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, there are cases where the player can be entertained with the production by the plurality of production means of the speaker 120 and the decorative symbol display device 208 (production display area 208d).

  In the present embodiment, even when the chance button 136 is not pressed, the effect (second effect or fourth effect) is determined when the specific round (1R in this example) is completed. To be. If the chance button 136 is not pressed, the effect selection period (first period or third period) may not be terminated until the big hit ends. That is, when the chance button 136 is not pressed, an effect selection screen (effect selection effect) may be displayed at all times until the end of the big hit.

  In the present embodiment, the effect is determined when the chance button 136 is pressed or a specific round is completed, but the effect may be determined only when the chance button 136 is pressed. Further, the effect may be determined only when a specific round is completed.

  The jackpot effect selected in the present embodiment may be continuously executed from the first round to the fifteenth round, or the above-mentioned effect selection effect is executed every round and the jackpot executed every round. An effect may be selected.

  It should be noted that the production data such as a song or a movie executed in the production selection production may be the same data as the production data executed as the selected jackpot production, or different data may be used. . If the same data is used, the part to be executed during the production selection effect may be specified.

  As described in FIG. 143, when the chance button 136 is pressed before the end of the first round, the stage selection effect is ended even before the end of the first round. Good. Further, as in this example, when the chance button 136 is not pressed during the period from the start of the first round to the end, the effect selection effect is continuously executed until the end of the first round. May be. The effect selection effect may be ended only in one of the cases described above.

  Next, a variation of the big hit game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This modification is characterized by an effect selection effect in the jackpot effect. The jackpot effects shown in FIGS. 148 (a) to 148 (i) show in time series the effect selection effects for selecting the first effect and selecting the second effect to be executed in the jackpot game in this order. FIG. 148 (j) shows a state in which the big hit effect including the second effect selected in the effect selection effect is started. In these figures, the passage of time between one figure and the next figure does not necessarily match between the figures. Further, the description of the same effect display mode as that of the twelfth embodiment in the effect display area 208d in the effect selection effect of this modification will be omitted.

  FIG. 148 (a) shows a state continued from FIG. 142 (a), and shows a state in which an effect selection effect is started. In the upper left corner of the effect display area 208d, a character string image of “Please select a song” is displayed in order to prompt the player to select a jackpot effect to be executed in the jackpot game. In addition, a horizontally-long rectangular music selectable area is displayed at the lower right of the character string image, and can be selected as a first effect executed by the speaker 120 serving as an effect means in the center of the music selectable area. A character string image of “May be there” is displayed, which is the name of the song. In addition, a horizontally-long rectangular music display area is displayed at the lower right of the music selectable area, and in the center of the music display area, the name of the music that can be displayed in the music selectable area is “Kiseki no Universe”. A character string image is displayed.

  In this modification, the outer periphery of the selectable area of the music is displayed with a thick line so that the player can easily see the names of the songs that can be selected, and the character string image of “may be there” is displayed larger. ing. On the other hand, the outer periphery of the music display area is displayed with a thin line so that it is less conspicuous than the music selectable area, and the character string image of “Kiseki no Universe” is displayed smaller. Also, no music is flowing from the speaker 120, and there is no sound. This state is the default effect mode of the effect selection effect according to this modification.

  A direction key image simulating the direction key 139 is displayed in the lower left corner of the effect display area 208d, and a button image simulating the chance button 136 is displayed on the right side thereof. A character string image of “Select” is displayed below the direction key image. The character string image of “Select” notifies that the selectable music piece can be changed by operating the direction key 139. In this example, each time the player operates the direction key 139, the song name displayed in the song selection display area is moved to the song display area and displayed, and the song name displayed in the song display area is displayed as a song selection display. The music that can be selected can be changed by moving to the area and displaying it. In addition, a character string image of “OK” is displayed below the button image. The “determined” character string image informs that by pressing the chance button 136, it is possible to determine the music as the second effect executed in the second period starting from FIG. 148 (j) described later. ing.

  In this modification, the music to be executed in the jackpot effect is determined by the end of the first round. Instead, for example, the music to be executed in the jackpot effect is determined by pressing the chance button 136. May be. Further, by changing the music that can be selected by long-pressing the chance button 136 or scrolling the touch panel (not shown), and then pressing the chance button 136 once or tapping the touch panel, You may make it determine the music performed in a period. In the following embodiments, the above operation may be performed.

  FIG. 148 (b) shows that a song whose title is “may be there” is output from the speaker 120 as one of a plurality of effects displayed during the first period. A state in which the execution of the effect O flowing from the top is started is shown. In this example, after that, during the execution of the effect selection effect, the player performs the first operation of the direction key 139. The selectable music is changed by the operation.

  FIG. 148 (c) shows a state immediately after the effect selection effect has been executed and the player has operated the first direction key 139. The song name “may be there” displayed in the song selection display area is moved and displayed in the song display area, and the song name “Kiseki no Universe” displayed in the song display area is displayed in the song selection display area. Is moved and displayed. Until a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses immediately after selection, no music is flowing from the speaker 120 and there is no sound.

  FIG. 148 (d) shows that a song with the title “Kiseki no Universe” from the speaker 120 is displayed as one of a plurality of effects displayed during the first period after a predetermined time has elapsed. The state where the execution of the flowing effect P is started is shown. In this example, the player then performs the second operation of the direction key 139 during execution of the effect selection effect.

  FIG. 148 (e) shows a state after the effect selection effect has been executed and the player has operated the direction key 139 for the second time. A character string image of “May be there” is displayed in the music selectable area, and a character string image of “Kiseki no Universe” is displayed in the music display area. No music is flowing from the speaker 120, and there is no sound.

  In FIG. 148 (f), a predetermined time has elapsed, and the title of the song “may be there” is output from the speaker 120 as one of a plurality of effects displayed during the first period. The state where the execution of the production O in which the music flows from the top is started is shown.

  FIG. 148 (g) shows a state where an effect selection effect by effect O is being executed. In this example, the first round ends without the chance button 136 being pressed during the execution of the effect selection effect by the effect O. When the chance button 136 is not pressed, the effect O is stopped by the end of the first round, and the effect O that starts in FIG. 148 (f) and ends in FIG. 148 (g) is determined as the first effect. . Moreover, the 2nd effect performed in the 2nd period started from FIG. 148 (j) is determined by completion | finish of a 1st round.

  FIG. 148 (h) shows the state of the effect selection effect immediately after the attacker 234 is closed and the first round is completed. A period between FIG. 148 (h) and the next FIG. 148 (i) is called an inter-round interval. As described with reference to FIGS. 146 and 147, the character string image of “1R” informing that the number of rounds is “1” is deleted in the interval between rounds. When the first round is ended, the execution of the effect O is ended (stopped) in the speaker 120, and a decision sound for notifying the player that the second effect has been determined flows. In addition, the inside of the music selectable area is changed to black, and the character string image “may be there” is changed to a white display, so that the effect O ′ is determined as the second effect for the player. Inform you.

  FIG. 148 (i) shows a state in which the first round is finished, the second round is started, and the effect selection effect is finished. In the upper right corner of the effect display area 208d, a character string image of the number of rounds “2R” of the rounds in which the big hit effect is executed is displayed. When the first round is finished, the fade-out process is started. By the fade-out process, the effect display area 208d gradually changes to white, and the display of the music selectable area and the music display area becomes invisible. The fade-out process is completed and the effect selection effect ends. Further, the fade-out process is completed and the first period ends.

  At the end of the production selection production, the character string image of “Please select a song”, the direction key image, and the button image will be hidden, but the “2R” character string image and “decoration 7” display will be a big hit The production continues to be executed.

  FIG. 148 (j) shows a state in which the big hit effect including the second effect selected in the effect selection effect is started, and FIG. 142 (b) following FIG. 142 (c) (however, FIG. 142 ( b) shows the same state as in the second round). In the second period starting from FIG. 148 (j), the speaker 120 performs the second effect (effect O ′) from the beginning of the song. Thus, since the effect O is the same music as the effect O ′, the first effect is an effect included in a part of the second effect. In addition, on almost the entire surface of the effect display area 208d, a movie effect corresponding to the second effect (movie name “may be there”) is displayed from the top.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the effect O ′ to be executed in the second period is determined when the first round is completed, and the determined effect is restarted from the beginning, so the decorative design A game stand having the characteristics of the display device 208 can be realized. In addition, since the production O ′ is started from the top, the player may easily recognize that the second period has started. Furthermore, since the first effect (effect O) being executed is stopped when the first round is ended, it may be easier for the player to confirm that the first round has ended.

  In addition, in a state where the production O is being executed, the player selects the production P by performing the first operation of the direction key 139, and immediately after that, the second operation of the direction key 139 is performed again quickly. When selected, the song of the selected effect O may be started from the continuation of the song of the effect O that was executed immediately before, or may be started from the beginning. In this case, the music of the effect P selected by the first operation may or may not flow.

(Example 13) FIGS. 139 to 142 (refer to FIG. 142 (b) is in the second round) regarding the special figure variable game and jackpot game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 13 of the present embodiment. , With reference to FIG. Since FIGS. 139 to 142 are described in the eleventh embodiment, description thereof is omitted here.

  With reference to FIG. 149, the jackpot effect performed in the period between FIG. 142 (a) and FIG. 142 (b) in order to determine execution of the jackpot effect including the second effect and the fourth effect will be described. . The jackpot effects shown in FIGS. 149 (a) to (h) are selected in this order from the first effect and the third effect, and the second effect and the fourth effect to be executed in the jackpot game are selected. Are shown in time series. FIG. 149 (i) shows a state in which the big hit effect including the second effect and the fourth effect selected in the effect selection effect is started. In these figures, the passage of time between one figure and the next figure does not necessarily match between the figures.

  FIG. 149 (a) shows a state continued from FIG. 142 (a), and shows a state in which an effect selection effect is started. As an example of the first effect means, almost the entire image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 which is a display means is an effect display area 208d, and a horizontally long rectangular frame image is displayed at the center of the effect display area 208d. ing. Almost the entire area of the frame image is a display area for movie playback. In addition, a character string image indicating the title of the effect is displayed below the display area. The title of the effect is a movie name of a movie that can be selected as the first effect executed by the decorative symbol display device 208, and a third that is executed by the speaker 120 that is a sound output means as an example of the second effect means. The song names of songs that can be selected as production are shown. As will be described later, the third effect is an effect corresponding to the first effect. In the effect selection effect, the first effect is selected and executed during the first period. Further, the third effect is selected and executed during the third period. In both the first period and the third period in this embodiment, the fade-out process is completed as shown in FIG. 149 (h) from the time when the effect selection effect shown in FIG. 149 (a) is started (effect display area). 208d completely changes to white) and the effect selection effect ends.

  In the upper left corner of the effect display area 208d, a character string image of “Please select an effect” is displayed in order to prompt the player to select a jackpot effect to be executed in the jackpot game. A direction key image simulating the direction key 139 is displayed in the lower left corner of the effect display area 208d, and a button image simulating the chance button 136 is displayed on the right side thereof. Below the direction key image, a character string image of “Select” is displayed, and it is informed that an effect executed as a selectable effect can be changed to another effect by operating the direction key 139. . In addition, a character string image of “OK” is displayed below the button image, and when the chance button 136 is pressed, the second image executed in the second period started after the end of the first period. It informs that it is possible to determine the effect and the fourth effect executed in the fourth period started after the end of the third period. In addition, the number of rounds in which the effect selection effect is executed is shown in the upper right corner of the effect display area 208d. In this example, a character string image of “1R” is displayed, and it is notified that the number of rounds is “1”. “Decoration 7” is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d, and it is confirmed that the big hit has been stopped and displayed with the symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”.

  Corresponding to the movie in which the princess character with the movie name “may be there” appeared as one of the multiple effects displayed during the first period in the frame image An effect H for displaying a still image is executed. The effect H in this example is a still image for effect selection effect, and is an image that is not displayed in the movie. At this time, no music is flowing from the speaker 120 and there is no sound. Next, the temporary stop of the image is canceled after a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, 0.5 seconds later), and a movie effect using a moving image is started in the frame image. In synchronism with the start of the movie production, a song whose song name may be there flows from the speaker 120 as one of a plurality of productions displayed during the third period. Although the execution of the production O is started, the production O in the present example is an production mode in which the rust portion in the middle of the song is flowed from the top. In this example, thereafter, the player operates the first (first) direction key 139 during the execution of the effect selection effect by the effect H and the effect O. In this example, the operation of the direction key 139 is performed after the movie effect by the moving image is started. However, the operation of the direction key 139 may be performed before the movie effect by the moving image is started. In this example, the start of the movie production by the moving image and the start of the song are synchronized, but they may not be synchronized. The effect H and / or the effect I may be displayed in a state where an image in the middle of the movie is paused. Alternatively, one of the songs or movies may be started from the middle and the other may be started from the beginning.

  FIG. 149 (b) shows a state after an effect selection effect has been executed and the player has operated the first direction key 139 during the execution of the effect selection effect by effect H and effect O. FIG. ing. When the direction key 139 is operated, the fade-out process is started. Due to the fade-out process, the frame image gradually changes to white and the display of the effect H becomes invisible, and in synchronization with this, the music flowing from the speaker 120 gradually decreases and becomes silent and the performance of the effect O is performed. It becomes impossible to listen. An effect for switching may be executed instead of the fade-out process.

  FIG. 149 (c) shows a state in which the effect selection effect after the fade-out process has been executed. The execution of the effect I is started in the frame image, and the execution of the effect P is started in the speaker 120. As a result of the operation of the direction key 139, the effect is switched from the effect H to the effect I and from the effect O to the effect P in this way. A character string image showing the title of the effect is displayed below the display area for movie playback in the frame image.

  In the frame image, a still image corresponding to the movie in which the character with the movie name “Kieki no Universe” appears is displayed as one of the multiple effects displayed during the first period. The execution of the production I is started. The effect I in this example is a still image for effect selection effect, and is an image that is not displayed in the movie. At this time, no music is flowing from the speaker 120 and there is no sound. Next, the temporary stop of the image is canceled after a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, 0.5 seconds later), and a movie effect using a moving image is started in the frame image. In synchronism with the start of the movie effect, the speaker 120 produces an effect P in which a song with the song name “Kiseki no Universe” flows as one effect among the plurality of effects displayed during the third period. In this example, it is executed from the chorus part in the middle of the song.

  FIG. 149 (d) shows a state in which an effect selection effect by effect I and effect P is being executed following FIG. 149 (c). The rust portion continues to flow from the speaker 120, and an effect corresponding to the song is displayed in the frame image. In this example, the player then operates the second direction key 139 during the execution of the effect selection effect by the effect I and the effect P.

  FIG. 149 (e) shows a state after an effect selection effect has been executed, and the player has operated the second direction key 139 during the execution of the effect selection effect by effect I and effect P. ing. When the direction key 139 is operated, the fade-out process is started. Due to the fade-out process, the frame image gradually changes to white and the display of the effect I becomes invisible, and in synchronization with this, the music flowing from the speaker 120 gradually decreases and becomes silent, and the performance of the effect P is performed. It becomes impossible to listen. An effect for switching may be executed instead of the fade-out process.

  FIG. 149 (f) shows a state in which the effect selection effect after the fade-out process is being executed. The execution of the effect H is started in the frame image, and the execution of the effect O is started in the speaker 120. As a result of the operation of the direction key 139, the effect is switched from the effect I to the effect H and from the effect P to the effect O in this way. A character string image showing the title of the effect is displayed below the display area for movie playback in the frame image.

  In the frame image, a movie in which a princess character whose movie name may be there appears is displayed as one of a plurality of effects displayed during the first period. Production H is being executed. In the effect H in this example, an image in the middle of the movie is displayed in a paused state. At this time, no music is flowing from the speaker 120 and there is no sound. Next, the temporary stop of the image is canceled after a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, 0.5 seconds later), and a movie effect using a moving image is started in the frame image. In synchronism with the start of the movie production, the speaker 120 sends a song whose title is “may be there” as one of the multiple productions displayed during the third period. Has been run from the rust portion. In this example, the start of the movie production by the moving image and the start of the song are synchronized, but they may not be synchronized. In this example, after that, the first round ends during the execution of the effect selection effect by effect H and effect O.

  FIG. 149 (g) shows the state of the effect selection effect immediately after the attacker 234 is closed and the first round is completed. A period between FIG. 149 (g) and the next FIG. 149 (h) is called an inter-round interval. As described with reference to FIGS. 146 and 147, the character string image of “1R” informing that the number of rounds is “1” is deleted in the interval between rounds.

  As shown in FIG. 149 (g), when the attacker 234 is closed without the chance button 136 being pressed and the first round is completed, the movie production by the movie is interrupted and stopped, and an image in the middle of the movie is displayed. Displayed as a still image. Also, the music flowing from the speaker 120 is interrupted and is stopped. When the chance button 136 is not pressed, at the end of the first round, the effect H started in FIG. 149 (f) is determined as the first effect, and the effect O started in FIG. 149 (f) is the third effect. As determined. The title of the third effect is the same as the movie name of the first effect, and the third effect is an effect corresponding to the first effect. In addition, the second presentation executed in the second period starting from FIG. 149 (i) is determined by the end of the first round, and is executed in the fourth period starting from FIG. 149 (i). A fourth performance is determined. Further, the width of the frame portion of the frame image is also displayed thick so that the player's attention is directed to the movie display in the frame image. Thereby, it is notified that the production H is determined as the first production. The production H may be still image display (stop state) or may be shifted to video display again. Further, when the production H shifts to the moving image display, the execution of the production O flowing from the rust portion in the middle of the song whose title is “may be there” from the speaker 120 may be started.

  FIG. 149 (h) shows a state where the first round has ended and the second round has started, and the effect selection effects by effects H and effects O have ended. In the upper right corner of the effect display area 208d, a character string image of the number of rounds “2R” of the rounds in which the big hit effect is executed is displayed. When the first round is finished, the fade-out process is started. By the fade-out process, the effect display area 208d gradually changes to white, and the display of the effect H becomes invisible. The fade-out process is completed and the effect selection effect ends. Further, the fade-out process is completed, and the first period and the third period are ended.

  With the end of the effect selection effect, the movie image display, the character string image of “Please select effect”, the direction key image, and the button image are not displayed, but the character image of “2R” and “decoration 7” The big hit effect by the display of “” continues to be executed.

  FIG. 149 (i) shows a state in which the big hit effect including the second effect and the fourth effect selected in the effect selection effect is started after the attacker 234 is released in the second round, and FIG. It shows the same state as FIG. 142 (b) following c). In the second period starting from FIG. 149 (i), the movie in which the princess character whose movie name is “may be there” appears from the top (first) on almost the entire display area 208d. The second effect (effect H ′) is executed. Also, in the fourth period starting from FIG. 149 (i), the fourth production in which the song whose title is “may be there” is played from the speaker 120, corresponding to the second production. (Production O ′) is executed. A character string image “may be there” is displayed in the lower left corner of the effect display area 208d. The character string image indicates the movie name of the displayed movie and the song name of the current song.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is described in a control manner as follows. The speaker 120 executes a plurality of effects such as an effect O and an effect P, for example. One of the effects O and P is the first effect. The first sub-control unit 400 executes in the second period (for example, the period starting from FIG. 149 (i)) in the first period (for example, the period shown in FIGS. 149 (a) to (h)). It is means that can determine the production to be performed. The second period is a period that starts after the first period ends. The first sub-control unit 400 is a means for determining an effect to be executed in the second period when the first condition is satisfied. The case where the first condition is satisfied is a case where the first round is completed. The speaker 120 is a means for executing only a part of the first effect during the first period. In the first case (the first sub-control unit 400 performs the first operation during the first period). When the first effect is executed and the first round is completed), the first effect is ended, and in the second period, the effect that is executed in the second period can be executed from the top.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, only a part of the production O is executed in the first period, so that it is possible to realize a game machine having a characteristic of the speaker 120. In addition, when the production O ′ is started from the top, the player may be able to easily recognize that the second period has started. Further, only part of the effect O is executed in the first period, so that it may be possible for the player not to get bored even when the effect O ′ is executed from the beginning in the second period. .

  Next, a variation of the jackpot game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This modification is characterized by an effect selection effect in the jackpot effect. The jackpot effects shown in FIGS. 150 (a) to 150 (e) show in time series the effect selection effects for selecting the first effect and selecting the second effect to be executed in the jackpot game in this order. FIG. 150 (f) shows a state in which the big hit effect including the second effect selected in the effect selection effect is started. In these figures, the passage of time between one figure and the next figure does not necessarily match between the figures. In addition, the description of the same effect display mode as that of the thirteenth embodiment in the effect display area 208d in the effect selection effect of this modification will be omitted.

  FIG. 150 (a) shows a state continued from FIG. 142 (a), and shows a state in which an effect selection effect is started. In the upper left corner of the effect display area 208d, a character string image of “Please select a song” is displayed in order to prompt the player to select a jackpot effect to be executed in the jackpot game. In addition, a horizontally-long rectangular music selectable area is displayed at the lower right of the character string image, and can be selected as a first effect executed by the speaker 120 serving as an effect means in the center of the music selectable area. A character string image of “May be there” is displayed, which is a song name of a simple song (effect O). In addition, a horizontally-long rectangular music display area is displayed at the lower right of the music selectable area. In the center of the music display area, “Kiseki” is the name of the music (production P) that can be displayed in the music selectable area. The character string image of “The Universe” is displayed. In the effect selection effect, the first effect is selected and executed during the first period. In the first period in this example, the fade-out process is completed as shown in FIG. 150 (e) from the time when the effect selection effect shown in FIG. 150 (a) is started (the effect display area 208d turns completely white). It is a period until the time when the production selection production is finished.

  In this modification, the outer periphery of the selectable area of the music is displayed with a thick line so that the player can easily see the names of the songs that can be selected, and the character string image of “may be there” is displayed larger. ing. On the other hand, the outer periphery of the music display area is displayed with a thin line so that it is less conspicuous than the music selectable area, and the character string image of “Kiseki no Universe” is displayed smaller. Also, no music is flowing from the speaker 120, and there is no sound. This state is the default effect mode of the effect selection effect according to this modification.

  A direction key image simulating the direction key 139 is displayed in the lower left corner of the effect display area 208d, and a button image simulating the chance button 136 is displayed on the right side thereof. A character string image of “Select” is displayed below the direction key image. The character string image of “Select” notifies that the selectable music piece can be changed by operating the direction key 139. In this example, each time the player operates the direction key 139, the song name displayed in the song selection display area is moved to the song display area and displayed, and the song name displayed in the song display area is displayed as a song selection display. The music that can be selected can be changed by moving to the area and displaying it. In addition, a character string image of “OK” is displayed below the button image. The “determined” character string image informs that by pressing the chance button 136, it is possible to determine the music as the second effect executed in the second period starting from FIG. 150 (f) described later. ing.

  FIG. 150B shows an effect in which the song title is “may be there” from the speaker 120 as one of a plurality of effects displayed during the first period after a predetermined time has elapsed. This shows a state in which the production of flowing the chorus part in the middle of the O song from the beginning has been started.

  FIG. 150 (c) shows a state in which the effect of flowing the rust portion is continued. Thereafter, fade-out processing is executed, and as the process proceeds to the end of the chorus, the music flowing from the speaker 120 gradually becomes smaller and becomes silent, and the performance O cannot be heard. An effect for switching may be executed instead of the fade-out process.

  FIG. 150D shows that the fade-in process is executed after the fade-out process is executed, and the chorus portion of the effect O is first as one effect among the plurality of effects displayed during the first period. This shows a state in which the production starting from is started. In this example, after that, the player presses the chance button 136. By pressing the chance button 136, the effect O started in FIG. 150D is determined as the first effect. In FIGS. 150 (b) and 150 (d), the same production is performed from the beginning of the chorus part in the middle of the production of the production O whose title is “may be there” from the speaker 120. However, each is a separate production.

  FIG. 150 (e) shows a state in which the effect selection effect is ended by pressing the chance button 136 during the execution of the effect selection effect. When the chance button 136 is pressed, the fade-out process is started. By the fade-out process, the effect display area 208d gradually changes to white, and the display of the music selectable area and the music display area becomes invisible. In addition, the music flowing from the speaker 120 becomes gradually smaller and becomes silent (stopped), and the performance of the production O cannot be heard. The fade-out process is completed and the effect selection effect ends. Further, the fade-out process is completed, and the first effect and the first period are ended.

  At the end of the production selection production, the character string image of “Please select a song”, the direction key image, and the button image will be hidden, but the “1R” character string image and “decoration 7” display will be a big hit The production continues to be executed.

  FIG. 150 (f) shows a state where the big hit effect including the second effect selected in the effect selection effect is started, and shows the same state as FIG. 142 (b) following FIG. 142 (c). ing. In the second period starting from FIG. 150 (f), the second effect (effect O ′) in which the song whose title is “may be there” is played from the speaker 120 from the beginning. In addition, on almost the entire surface of the effect display area 208d, a movie effect corresponding to the second effect (movie name “may be there”) is displayed from the top.

  During production selection production, when playing BGM instead of production O performed in FIGS. 150 (c) and 150 (d), during the performance of one of the plurality of musical pieces constituting the BGM. A fade-in process may be performed, and a fade-out process may be performed when other music is played. When there is a single piece of music constituting the BGM, control for setting the output volume of the BGM and control for designating the range of effects to be executed may be executed for the music.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, only a part of the production O is executed in the first period, so that it is possible to realize a game machine having a characteristic of the speaker 120. In addition, when the production O ′ is started from the top, the player may be able to easily recognize that the second period has started. Further, only part of the effect O is executed in the first period, so that it may be possible for the player not to get bored even when the effect O ′ is executed from the beginning in the second period. .

(Example 14) A jackpot game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 14 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The present embodiment is characterized in that an effect selection effect is executed over a plurality of rounds unless the chance button 136 is pressed. In the present embodiment, a case where the chance button 136 is not pressed in the first round and the chance button 136 is pressed in the second round will be described.

  In this example, the outer periphery of the song selectable area is displayed with a thick line so that the player can easily see the song names of the selectable songs, and is the song name of the song (effect O) that can be selected as the first effect. The character string image “may be there” is displayed larger. On the other hand, the outer periphery of the music display area is displayed with a thin line so that it is less conspicuous than the music selectable area, and the character string image of “Kiseki no Universe” is displayed smaller. From the speaker 120, the middle of the song of the production O whose title is “may be there” is flowing. In the effect selection effect, the first effect is selected and executed during the first period. In the first period of the present embodiment, the effect selection effect ends after the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 151 (e) is pressed from the time when the previous effect selection effect shown in FIG. 151 (a) is started. This is the period until

  A direction key image simulating the direction key 139 is displayed in the lower left corner of the effect display area 208d, and a button image simulating the chance button 136 is displayed on the right side thereof. A character string image of “Select” is displayed below the direction key image. The character string image of “Select” notifies that the selectable music piece can be changed by operating the direction key 139. In this example, each time the player operates the direction key 139, the song name displayed in the song selection display area is moved to the song display area and displayed, and the song name displayed in the song display area is displayed as a song selection display. The music that can be selected can be changed by moving to the area and displaying it. In addition, a character string image of “OK” is displayed below the button image. The “determined” character string image informs that, by pressing the chance button 136, the music as the second effect executed in the second period can be determined.

  151A to 151B show a state in which an effect selection effect by effect O is being executed. In this example, the first round ends without the chance button 136 being pressed during the execution of the effect selection effect by the effect O.

  FIG. 151 (c) shows the state of the effect selection effect immediately after the attacker 234 is closed and the first round is completed. A period between FIG. 151 (c) and the next FIG. 151 (d) is an inter-round interval. As described with reference to FIGS. 146 and 147, the character string image of “1R” informing that the number of rounds is “1” is deleted in the interval between rounds. Even after the first round is finished, the execution of the effect O is continued in the speaker 120.

  FIG. 151 (d) shows a state where the first round has ended and the second round has started, and the effect selection effect has continued. The execution of the production O is continued in the speaker 120. In the upper right corner of the effect display area 208d, a character string image of the number of rounds “2R” of the rounds in which the big hit effect is executed is displayed. In this example, the player presses the chance button 136 during the execution of the effect selection effect by the effect O. By pressing the chance button 136, the effect O being executed at the time of FIG. 151 (d) is determined as the first effect. Further, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the second effect (effect O ′) executed in the second period starting after FIG. 151 (e) is determined.

  FIG. 151 (e) shows a state in which the effect selection effect after the start of the second round is continued. When the chance button 136 is pressed, the speaker 120 finishes the execution of the effect O, and a decision sound for notifying the player that the second effect has been determined flows. Also, the music selectable area changes to black, and the character string image of “may be there” changes to a white display, thereby notifying the player that the second effect has been determined. .

  In this example, the chance button 136 is pressed in the middle of the second round. However, when the chance button 136 is not pressed, the round is completed (in this example, the first button is the same as described in the twelfth embodiment). The production O may be determined as the first production at the end of the second round, and the production O ′ may be decided as the second production. As long as the chance button 136 is not pressed, the first effect and the second effect are not determined, and the effect selection effect may be continuously executed until the end of the fifteenth round.

(Example 15) A jackpot game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 15 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The jackpot effects shown in FIGS. 152 (a) to 152 (h) show, in this order, the effect selection effects for selecting the first effect and selecting the second effect to be executed in the jackpot game in time series. FIG. 152 (i) shows a state where the big hit effect including the second effect selected in the effect selection effect is started. In these figures, the passage of time between one figure and the next figure does not necessarily match between the figures. FIG. 152 (a) shows a state in which the execution of the effect selection effect is started in the first round. The effect selection effect is started from the start time of the first round. In the upper left corner of the effect display area 208d, a character string image of “Please select a story” is displayed in order to prompt the player to select a jackpot effect to be executed in the jackpot game. In addition, two horizontally long story name display areas are displayed vertically below the character string image. A character string image indicating a story name is displayed in each of the upper and lower two story name display areas. When a story is selected, a movie corresponding to the story can be selected as a first effect executed by the decorative symbol display device 208. In the upper story name display area, a character string image of “[First episode] happening in castle town (hereinafter referred to as“ first episode ””) is displayed, and in the lower story name display area, “[ Second episode] A character string image of “Reunion with Echigoya (hereinafter abbreviated as“ second episode ”)” is displayed. In addition, on the right side of the story name display area, an area for displaying a still image in which a movie corresponding to the selected story is paused at a predetermined position, an area for displaying a synopsis corresponding to the selected story, A square synopsis display area having a line is displayed. In the effect selection effect, the first effect is selected and executed during the first period. In the first period of this embodiment, from the time when the effect selection effect shown in FIG. 152 (a) is started, the chance button 136 is pressed as described later, and the fade-out process shown in FIG. 152 (h) is completed. This is the period up to the point when the production selection production ends.

  In this example, the outer periphery of the story name display area where the selected story name is displayed is displayed with a thick line so that the player can easily see the story name of the selected story. The outer periphery of the displayed story name display area is displayed with a thin line. In this example, the outer periphery of the story name display area in which “first story” is displayed is displayed with a bold line. On the other hand, the outer periphery of the story name display area where “second story” is displayed is displayed with a thin line. Also, in the synopsis display area, the display of the movie and the synopsis corresponding to the selected story has not started, and a BGM for story selection is flowing from the speaker 120. This state is the default effect mode of the effect selection effect according to this example.

  A direction key image simulating the direction key 139 is displayed in the lower left corner of the effect display area 208d, and a button image simulating the chance button 136 is displayed on the right side thereof. A character string image of “Select” is displayed below the direction key image. The character string image of “Select” notifies that the selectable story can be changed by operating the direction key 139. In this example, the outer periphery of the story name display area that is selected each time the player operates the direction key 139 is displayed with a bold line. In addition, a character string image of “OK” is displayed below the button image. The character string image “determine” informs that the movie as the second effect executed in the second period can be determined by pressing the chance button 136. In addition, the number of rounds in which the effect selection effect is executed is shown in the upper right corner of the effect display area 208d. In this example, a character string image of “1R” is displayed, and it is notified that the number of rounds is “1”. “Decoration 7” is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d, and it is confirmed that the big hit has been stopped and displayed with the symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”.

  In FIG. 152 (b), an effect selection effect is executed, a still image of a movie corresponding to “first story” is displayed in the synopsis display area, and an effect (an outline corresponding to the selected story is displayed). Hereinafter, there is a case where “production J” may be executed. Also, the still image of the movie may be switched, and the outline display may be switched correspondingly. In this example, after that, during the execution of the effect selection effect, the player performs the first operation of the direction key 139.

  FIG. 152 (c) shows a state after the effect selection effect has been executed and the player has operated the first direction key 139. By operating the direction key 139, the outer periphery of the lower story name display area is displayed with a bold line, and the selected story is changed to “second story”. When the direction key 139 is operated, the fade-out process is started. By the fade-out process, the outline display area gradually changes to white, and the still image and the outline display become invisible. An effect for switching may be executed instead of the fade-out process.

  FIG. 152D shows a state in which an effect selection effect is executed, a still image of a movie corresponding to “second story” is displayed in the synopsis display area, and an outline corresponding to the selected story is displayed. Is shown. Also, the still image of the movie may be switched, and the outline display may be switched correspondingly. In this example, the player then performs the second operation of the direction key 139 during execution of the effect selection effect.

  FIG. 152 (e) shows a state after the effect selection effect has been executed and the player has operated the direction key 139 for the second time. By operating the direction key 139, the outer periphery of the upper story name display area is displayed with a bold line, and the selected story is changed to “first story”. When the direction key 139 is operated, the fade-out process is started. By the fade-out process, the outline display area gradually changes to white, and the still image and the outline display become invisible. An effect for switching may be executed instead of the fade-out process.

  FIG. 152 (f) shows a state in which the effect selection effect is being executed and the effect J is being executed. Also, the still image of the movie may be switched, and the outline display may be switched correspondingly. Thereafter, in this example, the player presses the chance button 136 during the execution of the effect selection effect.

  FIG. 152 (g) shows a state in which an effect selection effect is executed immediately after the chance button 136 is pressed. By pressing the chance button 136, the effect J started from FIG. 152 (f) is determined as the first effect. Further, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the second effect to be executed in the second period starting from FIG. 152 (i) is determined. When the chance button 136 is pressed, the speaker 120 finishes executing the BGM effect for selecting a story, and a decision sound for notifying the player that the second effect has been determined flows.

  In FIG. 152 (h), when the chance button 136 is pressed, the effect J is determined as the first effect, and the effect that is a movie including an image in which Yoshimune is reading the newspaper is determined as the second effect. Indicates the executed state. By the fade-out process, the effect display area 208d gradually changes to white, and the display of the effect selection effect becomes invisible. The fade-out process is completed and the effect selection effect ends. Further, the fade-out process is completed, and the first effect and the first period are completed.

  When the effect selection effect ends, the synopsis display area display, the story name display area, the character string image of “Please select a story.”, The direction key image, and the button image are hidden, but the “1R” The big hit effect by the display of the character string image and “decoration 7” continues to be executed.

  FIG. 152 (i) shows a state in which the big hit effect including the second effect selected in the effect selection effect is started. In the second period starting from FIG. 152 (i), the effect J ′, which is a movie including an image of Yoshimune reading a newspaper, is executed from the beginning, and the speaker 120 corresponds to the second effect in synchronization therewith. BGM is executed from the beginning of the song. In this example, in the second period, the production J ′ is started from the top, but a still image may be started.

  In this embodiment, the story outline is displayed in the synopsis display area, but a part of the story (for example, a part of the sentence) displayed after the story is determined may be displayed. The same applies to the following embodiments.

  In the present embodiment, the still image of the movie displayed after the story is determined is displayed in the synopsis display area, but a part of the movie may be displayed. Still images that are not displayed in the story may be displayed. The same applies to the following embodiments.

(Example 16) A jackpot game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 16 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The present embodiment is characterized in that the synopsis corresponding to the selected story displayed in the synopsis display area is displayed as an animation. FIGS. 153 (a) to 153 (i) show the effect selection effects according to this embodiment in time series. In these figures, the passage of time between one figure and the next figure does not necessarily match between the figures. Further, the description of the same effect display mode as that of the fifteenth embodiment in the effect display area 208d in the effect selection effect of the present embodiment will be omitted.

  FIG. 153 (a) shows a state in which the execution of the effect selection effect is started in the first round. The effect selection effect is started from the start time of the first round. The outer periphery of the story name display area in which “first story” is displayed is displayed with a bold line. On the other hand, the outer periphery of the story name display area where “second story” is displayed is displayed with a thin line. Also, in the synopsis display area, the display of the movie and the synopsis corresponding to the selected story has not started, and a BGM for story selection is flowing from the speaker 120. This state is the default effect mode of the effect selection effect according to this example.

  FIG. 153 (b) shows a state in which an effect selection effect has been executed and an animation display in which the synopsis corresponding to the selected story “first story” is gradually displayed in the synopsis display area is started. . About one-third of the outline is animated. In addition, the still image of the movie corresponding to “First episode” is not displayed.

  75 (c) shows a state in which the effect selection effect has been executed, the synopsis animation display has ended, and the full text of the synopsis corresponding to the selected story “first story” is displayed in the synopsis display area. Yes.

  In FIG. 153 (d), the effect selection effect is executed, the still image of the movie corresponding to “first story” is displayed in the synopsis display area, and the full text of the synopsis corresponding to the selected story is displayed. It shows the state. Also, the still image of the movie may be switched, and the outline display may be switched correspondingly. In this example, after that, during the execution of the effect selection effect, the player performs the first operation of the direction key 139.

  FIG. 153 (e) shows a state after the effect selection effect has been executed and the player has operated the first direction key 139. By operating the direction key 139, the outer periphery of the lower story name display area is displayed with a bold line, and the selected story is changed to “second story”. When the direction key 139 is operated, the fade-out process is started. By the fade-out process, the outline display area gradually changes to white, and the still image and the outline display become invisible. An effect for switching may be executed instead of the fade-out process.

  FIG. 153 (f) shows a state in which an effect selection effect has been executed and an animation display in which the synopsis corresponding to the selected story “second story” is gradually displayed in the synopsis display area is started. . About one-third of the outline is animated. In addition, the still image of the movie corresponding to “second episode” is not displayed.

  FIG. 153 (g) shows a state where the effect selection effect has been executed, the synopsis animation display has been completed, and the full text of the synopsis corresponding to the selected story “second story” has been displayed in the synopsis display area. ing. In this example, the player then performs the second operation of the direction key 139 during execution of the effect selection effect.

  FIG. 153 (h) shows a state after the effect selection effect has been executed and the player has operated the direction key 139 for the second time. By operating the direction key 139, the outer periphery of the upper story name display area is displayed with a bold line, and the selected story is changed to “first story”. When the direction key 139 is operated, the fade-out process is started. By the fade-out process, the outline display area gradually changes to white, and the still image and the outline display become invisible. An effect for switching may be executed instead of the fade-out process.

  FIG. 153 (i) shows a state in which an effect selection effect has been executed, and an animation display is started in which the synopsis corresponding to the selected story “first story” is gradually displayed in the synopsis display area. Yes. About one-third of the outline is animated. In addition, the still image of the movie corresponding to “First episode” is not displayed. In this way, even if the summary animation is displayed once, it may be executed again from the beginning.

  FIG. 153 (i ′) shows a state in which an effect selection effect is executed instead of FIG. 153 (i) after the fade-out process in FIG. 153 (h) is performed. In the synopsis display area, a still image of a movie corresponding to “first story” is displayed, and the full text of the synopsis corresponding to the selected story is displayed. As described above, when the still image of the movie once displayed and the outline are displayed again, the movie may be displayed all at once. In this embodiment, the animation that displays the same synopsis is executed only for the first time in one production selection period, and when it is selected again, the animation is canceled and all the animation is displayed. Here, if the story is changed to the next story in the middle of the first animation, and if a story that has been animated halfway is selected again, cancel the animation and display all the outlines. Alternatively, it may be executed from the middle of the animation executed before the change, or may be executed again from the beginning.

(Example 17) A jackpot game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 17 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the first effect selected during the first period and the third effect selected during the third period are separately selected, and the second effect executed in the second period. And the fourth effect executed in the fourth period is selected (determined) separately. The jackpot effects shown in FIGS. 154 (a) to (e) are selected in this order from the first effect and the third effect, and the effect selection effect for selecting the second effect and the fourth effect to be executed in the jackpot game. Are shown in time series. Further, FIGS. 154 (f) to 154 (g) show a state where the big hit effect including the second effect and the fourth effect selected in the effect selection effect is started and executed. In these figures, the passage of time between one figure and the next figure does not necessarily match between the figures. In addition, in the effect display mode in the effect display area 208d in the effect selection effect of the present embodiment, the description of the same effect display mode as that of the embodiment 15 in FIGS. 154 (a) to (b) is omitted, and FIG. Description of the same effect display mode as in the fourteenth embodiment in (c) to (e) will be omitted.

  In FIG. 154 (a), when the effect J is executed in the effect display area 208d and the BGM for story selection is flowing from the speaker 120, the effect selection effect immediately after the chance button 136 is pressed is executed. Indicates the state. By pressing the chance button 136, the effect J shown in FIG. 154 (a) is determined as the first effect. Further, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the second effect to be executed in the second period starting from FIG. 154 (f) is determined. When the chance button 136 is pressed, the speaker 120 finishes executing the BGM for selecting a story, and a decision sound for notifying the player that the effect J ′ has been determined as the second effect flows. The first period in this embodiment is a period from the time when the previous effect selection effect shown in FIG. 154 (a) is started to the time when the fade-out process shown in FIG. 154 (b) is completed.

  FIG. 154 (b) shows a state in which the fade-out process has been executed following the notification that the effect J is determined as the first effect by pressing the chance button 136 and the effect J ′ is determined as the second effect. ing. Due to the fade-out process, the effect display area 208d gradually turns white and the display of the effect J becomes invisible. The fade-out process is completed, and the first effect and the first period are completed.

  At the end of production J, the display of the synopsis display area, the story name display area, the character string image of “Please select a story.”, The direction key image, and the button image are hidden, but the character “1R” is displayed. The big hit effect by the display of the row image and “decoration 7” continues to be executed.

  FIG. 154 (c) shows that an effect selection effect is being executed, the third period is started, and a song (effect O) that can be selected as the third effect executed by the speaker 120 in the music selectable area. This shows a state in which a character string image of “may be there” is displayed as a song title. In the song display area, a character string image of “Kiseki no Universe”, which is the song name of the song (effect P) that can be displayed in the song selectable area, is displayed. Also, no music is flowing from the speaker 120, and there is no sound.

  FIG. 154 (d) shows a state in which the execution of the production O in which a song whose title is “may be there” starts flowing from the head after a predetermined time has elapsed. In this example, the player then presses the chance button 136 during the execution of the effect O. By pressing the chance button 136, the effect O started in FIG. 154 (c) is determined as the third effect. Further, by pressing the chance button 136, the fourth effect to be executed in the fourth period starting from FIG. 154 (f) is determined.

  FIG. 154 (e) shows a state in which an effect selection effect is executed immediately after the chance button 136 is pressed. When the chance button 136 is pressed, the execution of the effect O (third effect) is ended (stopped) on the speaker 120, and a decision sound for notifying the player that the fourth effect has been determined flows. When the chance button 136 is pressed, the music selectable area changes to black, and the character string image of “may be there” changes to a white display, thereby giving the player a fourth color. It is notified that the production O ′ has been determined as the production. In this example, the third period ends thereafter.

  FIG. 154 (f) shows a state where the big hit effect including the second effect and the fourth effect selected in the effect selection effect is started. In the second period starting from FIG. 154 (f), the second effect (effect J ′) is executed from the beginning. Further, in the fourth period starting from FIG. 154 (f), the fourth effect (effect O ′) is executed from the speaker 120. In addition, a character string image of “may be there” is displayed in the upper left corner of the effect display area 208 d, and indicates the name of the song flowing from the speaker 120.

  FIG. 154 (g) shows a state in which the jackpot effect including the second effect and the fourth effect selected in the effect selection effect is being executed, which is displayed in the upper left corner of the effect display area 208d. The display of the character string image “may be there” has disappeared.

  In the present embodiment, once selected story and music cannot be changed, but either one of the story and music cannot be changed, and the other is a period in which the production can be changed (for example, the timing of FIG. 154 (f)). To the end of 15R) may be changed to any timing. In addition, both the story and the music may be changeable at any timing in a period during which the effect can be changed (for example, a period from the timing of FIG. 154 (f) to the end of 15R).

(Example 18) A special figure variable game and a jackpot game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 18 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 155 (a) shows a state in which the same special figure 1 variable game as that in FIG. 139 (f) is being executed. FIG. 155 (b) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced and displayed on the upper right side of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and most of the image display area is used for the effect display area 208d. Is shown. FIG. 155 (c) shows a state in which the character image “Yoshimune roulette!” Is displayed in the effect display area 208d and the pre-reach effect is started.

  In FIG. 155 (d), a horizontally long image display area I is defined in the upper left quarter of the effect display area 208d, and a movie a ′ that can be selected as the first effect in the image display area I is shown in FIG. The display is started, and the effect selection effect is started. Movie a ′ suggests an SP reach production with a scene in which two samurai fight, starting from FIG. 139 (n). In the effect selection effect, the first effect is selected and executed during the first period. In the first period in the present embodiment, the fade-out process is completed as shown in FIG. 155 (o) from the time when the effect selection effect shown in FIG. 155 (d) is started (the effect display area 208d is completely white). It is a period until the time when the production selection production is finished.

  FIG. 155 (e) shows a state in which the movie a ′ is being displayed in the image display area I. FIG. 155 (f) shows a state in which the display of the movie a ′ is being executed in the image display area I, and a horizontally long rectangular image display area II is defined in the upper right quarter of the effect display area 208d. This shows a state in which the display of the movie b ′ is started in the image display area II. FIG. 155 (g) shows a state where the display of the movie a ′ is executed in the image display area I and the display of the movie b ′ is executed in the image display area II.

  FIG. 155 (h) shows that the movie a ′ is displayed in the image display area I and the movie b ′ is displayed in the image display area II, and the lower right quadrant of the effect display area 208d. A horizontally long rectangular image display area III is defined in one area, a still image c is displayed in the image display area III, and then a horizontally long rectangular image is displayed in the lower left quarter of the effect display area 208d. The display area IV is demarcated and the display of the movie d ′ is started in the image display area IV. Thereafter, in the image display area I, the moving image display of the movie a ′ is completed and the still image a is displayed.

  In FIG. 155 (i), the still image a is displayed in the image display area I, and the movie b ′ is displayed in the image display area II. Thereafter, the movie b ′ in the image display area II is displayed. Indicates a state in which the moving image display is completed and the still image b is displayed. A still image c is displayed in the image display area III, and a movie d ′ is displayed in the image display area IV.

  In FIG. 155 (j), the still image a is displayed in the image display area I, the still image b is displayed in the image display area II, and the still image c is displayed in the image display area III. A state in which the display of the movie d ′ is being executed in the area IV is shown. Thereafter, the moving image display of the movie d ′ is completed in the image display area IV, and the still image d is displayed. Next, in a state where still images a to d are displayed in all of the image display areas I to IV, the brightness of the image display area I becomes high, and the brightness of the other three image display areas II to IV is relatively low. The production is executed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 155 (k), an effect is produced in which the brightness of the image display area II is increased and the brightness of the other three image display areas I, III, and IV is relatively decreased.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 155 (l), an effect is executed in which the brightness of the image display area III is increased and the brightness of the other three image display areas I, II, and IV is relatively decreased. In addition, a button effect is started, a button image is displayed at the center of the effect display area 208d, and an effective period image is displayed below the button image to prompt the player to press the chance button 136.

  Next, in FIG. 155 (m), an effect is performed in which the brightness of the image display area IV is increased and the brightness of the other three image display areas I to III is relatively decreased. In addition, the button operation acceptance valid period has slightly elapsed, and the bar-shaped portion of the valid period image display is slightly shortened to the right. By repeating the states of FIGS. 155 (j) to (m) in this order, the order in which one of the image display areas I to IV becomes brighter than the other three is in the order of I to IV. The luminance region is visually recognized as rotating. Thereby, the player can obtain a feeling that the roulette is rotating in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 155 (n) repeats the states of FIGS. 155 (j) to (m) several times in this order. As a result of the player pressing the chance button 136 in the button operation acceptance permission state, the image display area I is This shows a state in which the rotation of the high luminance area is stopped in the high luminance state. The still image a displayed in the image display area I at this time is determined as the first effect. In addition, after the chance button 136 is pressed, the effects of the movies a ′, b ′, and d ′ may be executed again in the image display areas I, II, and IV.

  FIG. 155 (o) is the same as FIG. 139 (m) subsequent to FIG. 139 (n), and shows a state in which the effect selection effect is ended by pressing the chance button 136. When the chance button 136 is pressed, the fade-out process is started. Due to the fade-out process, the effect display area 208d gradually changes to white, and the image display areas I to IV and the still images a to d become invisible. The fade-out process is completed and the effect selection effect ends. Further, the fade-out process is completed, and the first effect and the first period are also ended. Thereafter, in the second period starting from FIG. 139 (n), the SP reach effect, which is the second effect with a scene where two samurai fight, is executed. The effect selection effect may be executed not only during the big hit game, but also during the special figure variable game as in this example, or may be executed on the customer waiting screen.

(Example 19) The special figure variable game and jackpot game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 19 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 to 142 and 156. FIG. Since FIGS. 139 to 142 are described in the eleventh embodiment, description thereof is omitted here. FIGS. 156 (a) to (j) show the jackpot effects in this order in time series. In the figure showing the big hit effect in time series, the time lapse between one figure and the next figure does not necessarily match between the figures. FIG. 156 (a) shows the same state as FIG. 140 (h) continued from FIG. 140 (g). Almost the entire image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes the effect display area 208d, and a character string image of “probable big hit” is displayed in the center of the effect display area 208d to notify that the 15R special big hit has been won. ing. In this example, the first period starts thereafter.

  FIG. 156 (b) shows a state where an effect selection effect is being executed. In the upper left corner of the effect display area 208d, a character string image of “Please select a song” is displayed in order to prompt the player to select a jackpot effect to be executed in the jackpot game. In addition, a horizontally-long rectangular music selectable area is displayed at the lower right of the character string image, and can be selected as a first effect executed by the speaker 120 serving as an effect means in the center of the music selectable area. A character string image of “May be there” is displayed, which is the name of the song. In addition, a horizontally-long rectangular music display area is displayed at the lower right of the music selectable area, and in the center of the music display area, the name of the music that can be displayed in the music selectable area is “Kiseki no Universe”. A character string image is displayed. In addition, the number of rounds in which the effect selection effect is executed is shown in the upper right corner of the effect display area 208d. In this example, a character string image of “1R” is displayed, and it is notified that the number of rounds is “1”. “Decoration 7” is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d, and it is confirmed that the big hit has been stopped and displayed with the symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”.

  In FIG. 156 (b), the outer periphery of the song selectable area is displayed with a thick line so that the player can easily recognize the song names of the selectable songs, and the character string image “may be there” is enlarged. It is displayed. On the other hand, the outer periphery of the music display area is displayed with a thin line so that it is less conspicuous than the music selectable area, and the character string image of “Kiseki no Universe” is displayed smaller. Also, no music is flowing from the speaker 120, and there is no sound. This state is the default effect mode of the first jackpot effect selection effect.

  A direction key image simulating the direction key 139 is displayed in the lower left corner of the effect display area 208d, and a button image simulating the chance button 136 is displayed on the right side thereof. A character string image of “Select” is displayed below the direction key image. The character string image of “Select” notifies that the selectable music piece can be changed by operating the direction key 139. In FIG. 156 (b), each time the player operates the direction key 139, the song name displayed in the song selection display area is moved to the song display area and displayed, and the song name displayed in the song display area is displayed. The music that can be selected can be changed by moving to the music selection display area and displaying it. In addition, a character string image of “OK” is displayed below the button image. The “determined” character string image informs that, by pressing the chance button 136, the music as the second effect executed in the second period can be determined.

  Also, although not shown in FIG. 156 (b), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the effect selection effect, an effect in which a song whose title is “may be there” flows from the speaker 120 from the beginning. The execution of O is started. In the production O, a chorus part in the middle of a song may be produced from the beginning. Thereafter, in this example, the player presses the chance button 136 during execution of the effect selection effect. By pressing the chance button 136, the effect O started in FIG. 156 (b) is determined as the first effect. In addition, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the second effect executed in the second period starting from FIG. 156 (c) is determined.

  Further, when the chance button 136 is pressed during the execution of the effect selection effect, the fade-out process is started, and the performance of the effect O cannot be heard. The fade-out process is completed and the effect selection effect ends. Further, the fade-out process is completed, and the first effect and the first period are ended.

  FIG. 156 (c) shows a state where the big hit effect including the second effect selected in the effect selection effect is started, and shows the same state as FIG. 142 (b) following FIG. 142 (c). ing. In the second period starting from FIG. 156 (c), a second effect (effect O ′) in which a song whose title is “may be there” is played from the speaker 120 from the beginning. In addition, on almost the entire surface of the effect display area 208d, a movie effect corresponding to the second effect (movie name “may be there”) is displayed from the top. In the production O ′, the chorus part in the middle of the song may be played from the beginning, and the movie production may be an production mode corresponding to this.

  FIG. 156 (d) shows a state in which the big hit end effect for notifying that the big hit game has ended is started, and shows the same state as FIG. 142 (f) following FIG. 142 (g). A character string image of “probability change entry” is displayed in the left third area of the effect display area 208d, a samurai character image is displayed in the remaining one third area, and the jackpot ends from the speaker 120. It is notified that the BGM for production flows and shifts to the probability fluctuation state.

  FIG. 156 (e) shows the state in which the stage selection effect is started by winning the second 15R special jackpot in the special figure variation game executed several times from FIG. 142 (g). Yes. The description of the same aspect as the effect display mode shown in FIG. 156 (b) in the effect display area 208d in the effect selection effect in FIG. 156 (e) will be omitted. The “second” character string image is displayed below the “1R” character string image in the effect display area 208d, and it is informed that the two consecutive villas are in operation. In the effect display area 208d, a character string image of “may be there” is displayed in the music selectable area, and a music display area below the music selectable area (hereinafter, “music display area 1”). The character string image of “Kiseki no Universe” is displayed. Further, in the second row, a second music display area (hereinafter referred to as “music display area 2”) is displayed below the music display area 1, and the third music “ A character string image of “Your Fragrance” is displayed. Also, no music is flowing from the speaker 120, and there is no sound. This state is the default effect mode of the effect selection effect after 2 consecutive resorts. In this example, in the default effect mode, the oldest song name is displayed in the song selectable area, but a newly added song may be displayed. In this example, the number of songs that can be displayed in the song selectable area is increased by one every time one reed is added. Thus, there are cases where the player can be entertained by increasing the types of effects executed in the second period that can be confirmed in the first period.

  Although not shown in FIG. 156 (e), after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the stage selection effect of the second jackpot of the jackpot game, the song title “may be there” is displayed from the speaker 120. The execution of the production O in which the music flows from the beginning is started. In the production O, a chorus part in the middle of a song may be produced from the beginning.

  FIG. 156 (f) shows a state after the player operates the right direction key 139 during the execution of the effect selection effect of the second consecutive game of the big hit game. When the right direction key 139 is operated once, the character string image “may be there” displayed in the music selectable area is moved to the music display area 2 and displayed in the music display area 1. The character string image of “Kiseki no Universe” that has been moved to the song selectable area is displayed, and the character image of “Your Fragrance” that was displayed in the song display area 2 is moved to the song display area 1 Displayed. Conversely, when the left direction key 139 is operated once, the song name displayed in the song selectable area is moved and displayed in the song display area 1, and the song name displayed in the song display area 1 is displayed in the song display area 2. The music title displayed in the music display area 2 is displayed in the music selectable area. When the player continues to operate the right direction key 139 a plurality of times, for example, the character string image “may be there” displayed in the music selectable area is displayed in the music display area 2. -> Music display area 1-> Music selectable area-> Music display area 2 Move in a rotary manner. The same applies when the left direction key 139 is continuously operated a plurality of times.

  Although not shown in FIG. 156 (f), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the effect selection effect, an effect is started in which a song whose song name is “Kiseki no Universe” flows from the head. Moreover, in the said production | presentation, it is good also as a production | presentation aspect which flows the chorus part in the middle of a music from the head.

  FIG. 156 (g) shows a state in which the effect selection effect of the third consecutive resort and the fourth consecutive resort of the big hit game is finished and the effect selection effect of the fifth consecutive resort is started. A character string image of “fifth” is displayed below the character string image of “1R” in the effect display area 208d to notify that five consecutive villas are being operated. In the fifth series, there are six songs that can be displayed in the song selectable area. Although not shown in FIG. 156 (g), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the effect selection effect of the fifth consecutive resort, a song whose title is “may be there” is started from the speaker 120. The execution of the flowing effect O is started. In the production O, a chorus part in the middle of a song may be produced from the beginning.

  FIG. 156 (h) shows a state after the player has operated the right direction key 139 once during the execution of the effect selection effect of the fifth consecutive game of the big hit game. The character string image of “May be there” displayed in the song selectable area is deleted, and the character image of “Kiseki no Universe” displayed in the song display area 1 moves to the song selectable area The character string image of “Kimi no Kakera” displayed in the music display area 2 is moved to the music display area 1 and displayed, and “Mega! Giga! Summer! Is displayed in the music display area 2. As described above, a new music is displayed in the music display area 2 by operating the button on the right side of the direction key 139.

  Although not shown in FIG. 156 (h), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the effect selection effect, an effect is started in which a song whose song name is “Kiseki no Universe” flows from the head. Moreover, in the said production | presentation, it is good also as a production | presentation aspect which flows the chorus part in the middle of a music from the head.

  FIG. 156 (i) shows a state after the player further operates the right direction key 139 during execution of the effect selection effect of the fifth consecutive game of the big hit game. The character image of “Kiseki no Universe” displayed in the song selectable area is deleted, and the character image of “Your Fragrance” displayed in the song display area 1 is moved to the song selectable area and displayed. Then, the character string image of “Mega! Giga! Summer!” Displayed in the music display area 2 is moved to the music display area 1 and displayed, and the character string of “hot spring hormone” added to the fourth row An image is displayed in the music display area 2.

  Although not shown in FIG. 156 (i), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the effect selection effect, an effect is started in which a song whose title is “Your Fragrance” flows from the speaker 120. Moreover, in the said production | presentation, it is good also as a production | presentation aspect which flows the chorus part in the middle of a music from the head.

  FIG. 156 (j) shows a state after the player has operated the left direction key 139 once during the execution of the effect selection effect of the fifth consecutive game of the big hit game. The character string image of “Your Fragrance” displayed in the music selectable area is moved to the music display area 1 and displayed, and the character string “Mega! Giga! Summer!” Displayed in the music display area 1 is displayed. The image is moved to the music display area 2 and displayed, and the character string image of “Kiseki no Universe” is displayed in the music selectable area. Thus, when the player operates the left direction key 139 once, it is possible to return to the effect mode shown immediately before.

  Although not shown in FIG. 156 (j), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the effect selection effect, an effect is started in which a song whose song name is “Kiseki no Universe” flows from the head. Moreover, in the said production | presentation, it is good also as a production | presentation aspect which flows the chorus part in the middle of a music from the head.

  In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is used as an example of a game table, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine 1000 as shown in FIG.

  The game machine according to the present invention corresponds to each reel shown in FIG. A stop button 1006 for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, lottery means (lottery prize internal lottery) for determining whether or not internal winning of a plurality of types of winning combinations is successful, and a lottery result of the lottery means The combination of symbols displayed by the reel stop control means (reel stop control processing) that performs stop control for stopping the rotation of the reels and the reels stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means corresponds to the winning combination. And determining means (winning determination process) for determining whether or not the symbol combination is predetermined, and when the symbol stop mode is a predetermined winning mode, In addition to payout control means (medal payout process 1008) for performing game medium payout processing for paying out game media to be played, the effect means 1010 for executing effects based on the lottery result of the lottery means, A launching device 1014 that launches a ball into the game area 1012, a winning opening 1016 configured to be able to enter a ball launched from the launching device, a detection means 1018 that detects a ball that has entered the winning opening 1016, A payout means 1020 for paying out a ball when the detection means 1018 detects a ball, a variable display device 1022 for variably displaying a predetermined symbol (identification information), and a shutter 1024 movable to a position for shielding the variable display device 1022 And a movable body 1026 that operates in a predetermined operation mode, and the variable display device 1022 is designed to receive a game ball in the winning opening. And the stopped displayed after varied is also suitable to the slot machine 1000 "is a rendering device 1010, such as to produce a game.

  The game table according to the present invention is shown in FIG. 158 (a). “Insert a bill into the bill insertion slot 2002, execute a lottery based on the bet 2004 and start 2006 operation, and display the lottery result on the lottery result display device 2008. Then, at the time of winning, the number of bonus coins is added to the remaining credit number, and when cashout 2009 is selected, the casino machine 2000 issues a receipt from the receipt issuing machine 2010 with a code corresponding to the remaining credit number. It may be.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 5B, the cellular phone 3000 having a storage unit for storing the electronic data for realizing the present invention, and the electronic data for realizing the present invention as shown in FIG. The present invention may be applied to a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing the video data and a home video game machine 5000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention.

  More specifically, the mobile phone 3000 in FIG. 5B includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to the game through a mobile phone line, and acquired data about the game (this book And a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  The portable game machine 4000 in FIG. 6C includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to the game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and acquired data related to the game (the present invention). And a control unit for controlling the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit. The home video game machine 5000 in FIG. 6D includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to a game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and acquired data ( And a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 5E, the present invention may be applied to a data server 6000 that stores electronic data for realizing the present invention. In some cases, the electronic data for realizing the present invention is downloaded from the data server 6000 to the home video game machine 5000 shown in FIG.

  In addition, a game can be executed by applying the present invention to a game program that simulates the operation of a real machine such as a pachinko machine for a home game machine. In that case, a DVD-ROM, CD-ROM, FD (flexible disk), or any other recording medium can be used as a recording medium for recording the game program.

  Furthermore, the present invention has been described by taking a pachinko machine and a slot machine as examples of game machines, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and may be applied to an arrangement ball game machine, a ball ball game machine, a smart ball, and the like.

  Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 158 again.

(A1) The game stand according to this embodiment is
Production means (for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 120);
A gaming table (for example, a pachinko machine 100) including operating means (for example, a chance button 136),
The rendering means starts with a first rendering (for example, a period that starts when the chance button 136 is pressed after FIG. 143 (a) and is pressed after FIG. 143 (g)). For example, it is means for executing at least a part of the effect H or effect O) shown in FIG.
The production means has at least a second production (for example, production H ′ or production O ′ shown in FIG. 143 (i)) in the second period (for example, the period after the chance button 136 is pressed). A viable means,
The first effect is at least a part of the second effect (for example, the effect H shown in FIG. 143 (g) is included in part of the effect H ′ shown in FIG. 143 (i)). And
When the operation means is operated (for example, pressing the chance button 136) during the first period, the effect means stops at least the first effect (for example, fade-out shown in FIG. 143 (h)). Processing) possible means,
The second period is a period that starts after the first period ends (for example, a period that starts from FIG. 143 (i)),
The first period is a period that ends at least when the operation means is operated (for example, a period that ends in FIG. 143 (h)),
In the second period, the second effect is started from the beginning (for example, as shown in FIG. 143 (i), the effect H ′ is executed from the beginning of the movie, or the effect O ′ is It is executed from the beginning).

  According to the above gaming machine, the effect executed in the second period is determined when the operating means is operated, and the determined effect is restarted from the beginning, so that the game characterized by the effect means A stand can be realized. Moreover, the player may be able to easily recognize that the second period has started by starting the second effect from the beginning. Furthermore, when the operation means is operated, the first performance being executed is stopped, so that it may be easier for the player to confirm that the operation means is accepted.

  The production means may be a means for executing only a part of the first production during the first period, or may be a means for executing all of the first production. Good. Further, the effect means may be means for executing one or more effects different from the first effect during the first period. Further, when the operation means is operated during the first period, the effect means may be a means that only the first effect being executed is stopped, or the first effect being executed is displayed. A plurality of effects including it may be stopped, or all effects including the first effect being executed may be stopped.

  Further, “can be stopped” may indicate “can be ended” or may be “can be ended”. Further, it may indicate that “it may not be terminated”. Further, “can be stopped” may indicate “must be stopped” or “may not be stopped”. In addition, “stop” indicates “stopping temporarily in the middle of the production”, but “stopping at the end of the production” may also be included. Further, “stopping at the end of the production” may not be included. The stop may be “interruption”, “cancel”, or “end”.

  Further, the first period may be a period that is ended only when the operation means is operated. Further, the first period may be a period that ends when a certain period of time has elapsed since the first period was started, even when the operation means was not operated. Moreover, when the first period is included in the period of the big hit effect, the first period may be a period that is ended when a specific round is ended, even when the operation means is not operated.

  Further, the case where the operation means is operated may be a case where the operation means is operated by the player, and a case where the operation means is operated and detected by the detection means (sensor). Alternatively, the effect control means may receive the command that the operation means has been operated.

  Further, the second period may be a period that starts immediately after the end of the first period, or may be a period that ends at the same time as the end of the first period. In addition, there may be one or a plurality of periods different from the first period and the second period between the first period and the second period. Further, there may be no other period between the first period and the second period.

  Further, the effect means may be a means that the second effect is always executed during the second period, or may be a means that the second effect may not be executed. For example, when the island simultaneous effect is started before the second period is started after the first period is started, the second effect may not be executed. Further, a means for executing a plurality of effects including the second effect may be used, or a means for executing only the second effect may be used.

(A2) The game stand according to (A1),
The first effect includes a plurality of effects (for example, an effect H shown in FIGS. 143 (a) and (g), an effect I shown in FIGS. 143 (c) to 143 (e)), or a diagram in the first period. A game stand characterized by being one of effects determined from effects O shown in 143 (a) and (g) and effects P shown in FIGS. 143 (c) to 143 (e).

  According to the above gaming machine, the player may be entertained by determining the first effect from the plurality of effects. The effect means may be an effect determined from two or more effects included in the plurality of effects during the first period. If there is only one effect that can be executed in the second period, only the one effect may be executed in the first period, and the second period is not executed. Only the period may be executed. In addition, for example, when the number of consecutive villas has reached a predetermined number of times such as two consecutive villas, three consecutive villas, or when the mission of the opening condition of the achievement is achieved while setting the user mode When is established, the effects that can be executed during the second period may be increased.

  The operation means is a first operation means (chance button 136), and includes a second operation means (direction key 139), and the rendering means performs the second operation during the first period. When there is an operation of the means, the first effect may be determined from a plurality of effects. In this way, “change of production” and “decision of production” may be executed by operation of different operation means, and “change of production” and “decision of production” depend on the operation direction of one operation means. Either of these may be executed.

  In addition, the effect executed in the second period may be changed at a constant period during the period of the first period, for example, scrolling at a period of 5 seconds. In addition, the fact that the effect is selected may indicate that “the effect is determined”, may include “change of the effect”, or may not include it. Further, it may indicate only that “the production is changed”.

(A3) The game stand according to (A1) or (A2),
The game stand, wherein the effect means is display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208).

  According to the above gaming machine, the player may be able to visually recognize that the second period has started by starting the second effect from the display unit from the top. Further, when the operation means is operated, the first performance being executed is stopped, so that it may be easy for the player to visually confirm that the operation means is accepted. .

(A4) The gaming machine according to (A1) or (A2),
The game stand characterized in that the effect means is sound output means (for example, a speaker 120).

  According to the above gaming machine, there are cases where it is possible for the player to make it easier for the player to audibly recognize that the second period has started by starting the second effect from the beginning. In addition, when the operation means is operated, the first performance being executed is stopped, so that it may be easier for the player to aurally confirm that the operation means is accepted. .

(A5) The game stand according to (A1) or (A2),
A plurality of production means are provided,
At least one of the plurality of effect means is a first effect means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208),
The first effect means is the effect means,
At least one of the plurality of effect means is a second effect means (for example, a speaker 120).

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, there are cases where the player can be entertained with the production by a plurality of production means. In addition, three or more effect means may be provided.

(A6) The game stand according to (A5),
In the third period (for example, the period starting from FIG. 143 (a) and ending when the chance button 136 is pressed after FIG. 143 (g)), the second rendering means is in the third period. Means for executing at least a part of the production (eg, production O shown in FIG. 143 (g)),
The second effect means executes at least the fourth effect (for example, the effect O ′ shown in FIG. 143 (i)) in the fourth period (for example, the period after the chance button 136 is pressed). Possible means,
The third effect is at least a part of the fourth effect (for example, the effect O shown in FIG. 143 (g) is included in a part of the effect O ′ shown in FIG. 143 (i)). And
The second effect means stops at least the third effect (for example, FIG. 143 (h)) when the operation means is operated (for example, pressing of the chance button 136) in the third period. The fade-out process shown in FIG.
The fourth period is a period that starts after the third period ends (for example, a period that starts from FIG. 143 (i)),
The third period is a period that ends at least when the operation means is operated (for example, a period that ends in FIG. 143 (h)),
In the fourth period, the fourth effect starts from the beginning (for example, the effect O ′ is executed from the beginning of the song as shown in FIG. 143 (i)). Stand.

  According to the gaming table, when the operation means is operated, the third performance being executed stops, so that the player can easily confirm that the operation means is accepted. There is.

  The second effect means may be a means for executing only a part of the third effect during the third period, or a means for executing all of the third effect. May be. The effect means may be a means for executing one or more effects different from the third effect during the third period. Further, the effect means may be a means for stopping only the third effect when the operation means is operated during the third period, and a plurality of effects including the third effect are stopped. Alternatively, all the effects including the third effect may be stopped.

  Further, the third period may be a period that is ended only when the operation means is operated. Further, the third period may be a period that ends when a certain period has elapsed since the start of the third period, even when the operation means is not operated. Further, when the third period is included in the period of the big hit effect, the third period may be a period that is ended when the specific round is ended, even when the operation means is not operated.

  The third period may be a period that starts before the first period, may be a period that starts after the first period, or starts at the same time as the first period. It may be a period of time. The third period may be a period that ends before the first period, may be a period that ends after the first period, and ends at the same time as the first period. It may be a period of time.

  For example, the first effect such as a movie may not be linked to the third effect, or may be linked. Also, the second effect such as a movie may or may not be linked to the fourth effect.

  The second effect means may be a means that the fourth effect is necessarily executed during the fourth period, or may be a means that the fourth effect may not be executed. . For example, the fourth effect may not be executed when the island simultaneous effect is started between the start of the third period and the start of the fourth period. Further, a means for executing a plurality of effects including the fourth effect may be used, or a means for executing only the fourth effect may be used.

  In addition, when the second effect is not executed during the second period in the first effect means, the second effect means does not execute the fourth effect during the period of the fourth period. It may be a means or a means for executing the fourth effect.

(A7) The game stand according to (A6),
The third period is the first period,
The fourth period is the second period,
The third effect (for example, the effect O shown in FIG. 143 (g)) is an effect corresponding to the first effect (for example, the effect H shown in FIG. 143 (g)),
The fourth effect (for example, the effect O ′ shown in FIG. 143 (i)) is an effect corresponding to the second effect (for example, the effect H ′ shown in FIG. 143 (i)). A game table.

  According to the above gaming machine, since the effects executed by each of the first effect means and the second effect means are determined at the same time, during the period until the operation means is operated in the first period, In some cases, the player can be more entertained by executing at least a part of the first effect by the second effect means and also executing at least a part of the third effect by the second effect means. is there. Moreover, it may be possible to make it easier to recognize that the operation of the operation means has been received by stopping both the first effect means and the second effect means in the middle. Note that “the third effect is an effect corresponding to the first effect” means that the effect is composed of the first effect and the third effect such as execution of a movie corresponding to the song. It may be.

(A8) The game stand according to any one of (A1) to (A7),
The game table is a pachinko machine or a slot machine.

  According to the above gaming machine, the effect executed in the second period is determined when the operation means is operated, and the determined effect is restarted from the beginning, so the pachinko that has the characteristics of the effect means. Machine or slot machine can be realized.

(A9) effect means (for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 120);
Production control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) capable of controlling at least the production means;
A gaming table (for example, a pachinko machine 100) including operating means (for example, a chance button 136),
The effect means includes a plurality of effects (for example, effects H shown in FIGS. 143 (a) and (g), effects I shown in FIGS. 143 (c) to (e), or FIGS. 143 (a) and (g)). Is a means capable of executing at least the production O shown in FIG. 143 and the production P shown in FIGS.
At least one of the plurality of effects is a first effect (for example, effect H or effect O shown in FIG. 143 (g)),
In the first period (for example, the period starting from FIG. 143 (a) and ending when the chance button 136 is pressed after FIG. 143 (g)), the effect control means is a second period. (For example, a period after the chance button 136 is pressed)
The second period is a period that starts after the first period ends (for example, a period that starts from FIG. 143 (i)),
The effect control means is a means for executing control for determining at least an effect to be executed in the second period when the first condition is satisfied,
The requirement that the first condition is satisfied is a requirement that includes at least the operation of the operation means (for example, pressing of the chance button 136),
In the first case, the effect means ends the first effect, and in the second period, the effect that is executed in the second period can be executed from the beginning (for example, in FIG. 143 (i) As shown, the production H ′ can be executed from the beginning of the movie, or the production O ′ can be executed from the beginning of the song).
The first case is a case where the first period is in progress.
Said 1st case is a case where said 1st production is performed by said production control means,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the first case is a case where the first condition is satisfied.

  According to the above gaming machine, the player recognizes that the second period has started by executing the control that starts the first effect determined in the first period from the beginning in the second period. May be easier to do. Also, when the operation means is operated, the control for temporarily ending the first effect being executed is executed, and the control is executed from the beginning (first) of the second effect after the second period is started. Is executed, it may be possible for the player to easily recognize that the second effect has been determined.

  The effect control means may be a means for controlling only one effect means, or a means for controlling a plurality of effect means. Further, the effect means may be a means for executing only a plurality of effects, or may be a means for executing notifications other than the plurality of effects (injustice notification, notification of gaming state, notification of how to hit, etc.). Good. Further, the effect determination control may be a control for determining only the first effect as an effect executed in the second period, and as an effect of executing a plurality of effects including the first effect in the second period. Control to determine may be sufficient. The requirements for the first condition to be satisfied are not only that the operating means has been operated, but (1) that the operating means has been operated, and (2) that a certain period has elapsed since the start of the first period. The requirement may include any one, two, or all of (3) the case where the first period is included in the jackpot presentation period and the specific round has ended. The effect determination control may be executed only when any one of the requirements (1) to (3) is satisfied, or when the two requirements (1) to (3) are satisfied. May be executed when all the above requirements (1) to (3) are satisfied. Further, another requirement that does not include all the requirements (1) to (3) may be used.

(A10) The game stand according to (A9),
At least one of the plurality of effects is a second effect (for example, an effect H ′ or an effect O ′ shown in FIG. 143 (i)),
The stage control means is a means for executing control for determining at least the second stage as an stage for performing the second stage (hereinafter referred to as “stage determination control”). .

(A11) The gaming machine according to (A9) or (A10),
The production control means is a means for executing control (hereinafter referred to as “production change control”) for changing from the production being performed to another production when the second condition is satisfied,
The second condition is a condition that may be satisfied at least during the first period,
The production control means is a means capable of executing the production change control one or more times when the production period is in the first period,
One of the other effects to be changed is the first effect, the game stand.

  According to the above game console, by determining the first effect from a plurality of effects, the player may be able to increase the variations of effects that can be confirmed in the second period and entertain the player. . The requirement that the second condition is satisfied may be a condition that may be satisfied only during the period of the first period, and may be satisfied in one or more periods other than the first period. It may be a certain condition. Further, when there is no changeable effect other than the effect that is being executed (when there is one selectable effect), the effect change control may not be executed even during the first period. Moreover, you may make it perform control which performs production | presentation change control and selects the production in execution again. In addition, the number of times that the effect control unit can execute the effect change control in the first period may be limited (for example, 10 times). Further, the production control means may be able to execute the production change control as many times as possible during the first period.

(A12) The gaming machine according to (A10) or (A11),
The first period is a period that is ended at least when the third condition is satisfied,
The gaming machine characterized in that the requirement that the third condition is satisfied is a requirement that includes at least the execution determination control being executed.

  Note that the first period may be a period that ends only when the third condition is satisfied. In addition, for example, a condition other than the third condition such as an effect selection effect during a big hit where the effect is not determined until the operation means is operated, or a case where the big hit effect is ended (for example, the end of 15R) is satisfied. In some cases, the period may be terminated. In addition, the requirement that the third condition is satisfied may be that the effect determination control is executed. In addition, the requirement that the third condition is satisfied may be that different control other than the effect determination control (for example, start control of island simultaneous effect, end control of jackpot effect, etc.) is executed.

(B1) The game stand according to this embodiment is
Production means (for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 120);
A gaming table (for example, a pachinko machine 100) including operating means (for example, a chance button 136),
The effect means is means for executing at least a big hit effect (for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 146 (a) to (j)) when the big hit (for example, the 15R special big hit shown in FIG. 83).
The jackpot is composed of at least a plurality of rounds (for example, the first round to the 15th round),
At least one of the plurality of rounds is a first round (eg, a first round),
The effect means is at least one of the first effects (for example, the effect H or the effect O shown in FIG. 146 (g)) during the first period (for example, the period shown in FIGS. 146 (a) to (i)). Is a means of executing
The production means executes at least a second production (for example, production H ′ or production O ′ shown in FIG. 146 (j)) in a second period (for example, a period starting from FIG. 146 (j)). Possible means,
The first effect is at least a part of the second effect (for example, the effect H shown in FIG. 146 (g) is included in a part of the effect H ′ shown in FIG. 146 (j)). And
The first period is a part of a period during which the jackpot effect is executed (for example, the period shown in FIGS. 146 (a) to (j)),
The production means is a means capable of at least stopping the first production (for example, production H shown in FIG. 146 (h)) when the first round is completed in the first period.
The second period is a period that starts after the first period ends (for example, a period that starts from FIG. 146 (j)),
The first period is a period that is at least terminated when the first round is terminated (for example, a period that is terminated in FIG. 146 (i)),
In the second period, the second effect is started from the beginning (for example, as shown in FIG. 146 (j), the effect H ′ is executed from the beginning of the movie, or the effect O ′ is It is executed from the beginning).

  According to the above gaming machine, the effect executed in the second period is determined when a specific round is completed, and the determined effect is restarted from the beginning, so that the game characterized by the effect means A stand can be realized. Moreover, the player may be able to easily recognize that the second period has started by starting the second effect from the beginning. Further, when the first round is finished, the first performance being executed stops, so that the player may easily recognize that the first round is finished.

  The effect means may be a means that at least the big hit effect is executed only in the case of the big hit, and in the case of the small hit, the same effect as the big hit such as a hidden probability change may be executed. . Further, there may be a big hit without a first period, for example, a big hit without appearing balls such as hidden probability change or sudden probability change, or a big hit in which the game state after the big hit is a special low probability state. The jackpot may be composed of two or more rounds, or may be composed of one round.

  Further, the effect means may be a means for executing only a part of the first effect during the first period, or a means for executing all of the first effect. . Further, the effect means may be means for executing one or more effects different from the first effect during the first period. Further, the first period may be a period shorter than the period in which the big hit effect is executed, may be a longer period, or may be the same period.

  The effect means may be a means for stopping only the first effect when the first round ends during the first period, and a plurality of effects including the first effect are stopped. Alternatively, all effects including the first effect may be stopped.

  Further, “can be stopped” may indicate “can be ended”, may indicate “to be ended”, and may indicate “may not be ended”. Further, “can be stopped” may indicate “must be stopped” or “may not be stopped”. “Stop” means “stop once in the middle of the production”, but “stop at the end of the production” may be included, and “stop at the end of the production” may not be included. May be. The “stop” may be “interrupt”, “stop”, or “end”.

  Further, the second period may be a period that starts immediately after the end of the first period, or may be a period that ends at the same time as the end of the first period. In addition, there may be one or a plurality of periods different from the first period and the second period between the first period and the second period. Further, there may be no other period between the first period and the second period. The first period may be a period that ends after the first round ends, or may be a period that ends at the same time as the end of the first round.

(B2) The game stand according to (B1),
In the first period, the first effect includes a plurality of effects (for example, the effect H shown in FIGS. 146 (a) and (g), the effect I shown in FIGS. 146 (c) to (e)), or the diagram. 146 (a) or (g) or a stage determined from one of the effects determined from effects P shown in FIGS. 146 (c) to 146 (e).

  According to the above gaming machine, the player may be entertained by determining the first effect from the plurality of effects. The effect means may be an effect determined from two or more effects included in the plurality of effects during the first period. If there is only one effect that can be executed in the second period, only the one effect may be executed in the first period, and the second period is not executed. Only the period may be executed. In addition, for example, when the number of consecutive villas has reached a predetermined number of times such as two consecutive villas, three consecutive villas, or when the mission of the opening condition of the achievement is achieved while setting the user mode When is established, the effects that can be executed during the second period may be increased.

  The operation means is a first operation means (chance button 136), and includes a second operation means (direction key 139), and the rendering means performs the second operation during the first period. When there is an operation of the means, the first effect may be determined from a plurality of effects. In this way, “change of production” and “decision of production” may be executed by operation of different operation means, and “change of production” and “decision of production” depend on the operation direction of one operation means. Either of these may be executed.

  In addition, the effect executed in the second period may be changed at a constant period during the period of the first period, for example, scrolling at a period of 5 seconds. In addition, the fact that the effect is selected may indicate that “the effect is determined”, may include “change of the effect”, or may not include it. Further, it may indicate only that “the production is changed”.

(B3) The game stand according to (B1) or (B2),
At least one of the plurality of rounds is a second round (for example, the second round starting from FIG. 146 (i)),
The second round is a round that starts after the first round;
The gaming table, wherein the second period is a period at least started (for example, a period starting from FIG. 146 (j)) when the second round is started.

  According to the above gaming machine, when the first round is finished, the first production being executed is stopped, and when the next second round is started, the second production is started from the top. The player may be able to easily recognize that the second round has started. The first period may be a period that ends between the end of the first round and the start of the second round, or a period that ends after the second round starts. It may be. The second period may be a period that is started only when the second round is started, or may be started in a round other than the second round. Further, there may be a case where the second round is started at a timing other than the start of the second round.

(B4) The game stand according to any one of (B1) to (B3),
The game stand, wherein the effect means is display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208).

  According to the above gaming machine, the player may be able to visually recognize that the second period has started by starting the second effect from the display unit from the top.

  Further, when the first round is finished, the first performance being executed is stopped, so that the player may easily visually recognize that the first round is finished.

(B5) The game stand according to any one of (B1) to (B3),
The game stand characterized in that the effect means is sound output means (for example, a speaker 120).

  According to the above gaming machine, there are cases where it is possible for the player to make it easier for the player to audibly recognize that the second period has started by starting the second effect from the beginning. Also, when the first round is completed, the first performance being executed is stopped, so that the player may be audibly aware that the first round has ended.

(B6) The game stand according to any one of (B1) to (B3),
A plurality of production means are provided,
At least one of the plurality of effect means is a first effect means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208),
The first effect means is the effect means,
At least one of the plurality of effect means is a second effect means (for example, a speaker 120).

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, there are cases where the player can be entertained with the production by a plurality of production means. In addition, three or more effect means may be provided.

(B7) The game stand according to (B6),
In the third period (for example, the period shown in FIGS. 146 (a) to (i)), the second effect means is at least one of the third effects (for example, the effect O shown in FIG. 146 (g)). Is a means of executing
The second effect means can execute at least the fourth effect (for example, the effect O ′ shown in FIG. 146 (j)) in the fourth period (for example, the period starting from FIG. 146 (j)). Means,
The third effect is an effect that is at least part of the fourth effect (for example, the effect O shown in FIG. 146 (g) is included in part of the effect O ′ shown in FIG. 146 (j)). And
One of the plurality of rounds is a third round (eg, the first round),
The fourth period is a period that starts after the third period ends (for example, a period that starts from FIG. 146 (j)),
The third period is a period that ends at least when the third round (for example, the round that starts in FIG. 146 (a) and ends in FIG. 146 (g)) ends.
In the fourth period, the fourth effect starts from the beginning (for example, as shown in FIG. 146 (j), the effect O ′ is executed from the beginning of the song). Stand.

  According to the above game console, when the third round is finished, the third performance being executed stops, so that the player may easily recognize that the third round is finished. The effect means may be a means for stopping only the third effect when the third round ends during the third period, and a plurality of effects including the third effect are stopped. Alternatively, all the effects including the third effect may be stopped.

  The third period may be a period that starts before the first period, may be a period that starts after the first period, or starts at the same time as the first period. It may be a period of time. The third period may be a period that ends before the first period, may be a period that ends after the first period, and ends at the same time as the first period. It may be a period of time.

  The first effect may not be linked to the third effect. In addition, for example, the first production such as a movie may be linked with the third production. The third round may be a round before the first round, and a back round. It may be. In addition, the second effect may not be linked to the fourth effect. For example, the second effect such as a movie may be linked to the fourth effect.

  The second effect means may be a means that the fourth effect is necessarily executed during the fourth period, or may be a means that the fourth effect may not be executed. . For example, the fourth effect may not be executed when the island simultaneous effect is started between the start of the third period and the start of the fourth period. A means for executing a plurality of effects including the fourth effect may be used, or a means for executing only the fourth effect may be used.

  Further, when the second effect is not executed during the second period in the first effect means, the second effect is not executed during the period of the fourth period. Means may be used, and means for executing the fourth effect may be used.

(B8) The game stand according to (B7),
The third period is the first period,
The fourth period is the second period,
The third round is the first round,
The third effect (for example, the effect O shown in FIG. 146 (g)) is an effect corresponding to the first effect (for example, the effect H shown in FIG. 146 (g)),
The fourth effect (for example, the effect O ′ shown in FIG. 146 (j)) is an effect corresponding to the second effect (for example, the effect H ′ shown in FIG. 146 (j)). A game table.

  According to the above gaming machine, since the effects executed by each of the first effect means and the second effect means are determined at the same time, in the period until the first round in the first period ends, When at least a part of the first effect by the first effect means is executed and at least a part of the third effect by the second effect means is also executed, so that the player can be more entertained There is. Note that “the third effect is an effect corresponding to the first effect” means that the effect is composed of the first effect and the third effect such as execution of a movie corresponding to the song. It may be.

(B9) The gaming machine according to any one of (B1) to (B8),
The game table is a pachinko machine or a slot machine.

  According to the above gaming machine, the effect executed in the second period is determined when the operation means is operated, and the determined effect is restarted from the beginning, so the pachinko that has the characteristics of the effect means. Machine or slot machine can be realized.

(B10) effect means (for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 120);
Production control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) capable of controlling at least the production means;
A gaming table (for example, a pachinko machine 100) including operating means (for example, a chance button 136),
The effect means includes a plurality of effects (for example, effects H shown in FIGS. 146 (a) and (g), effects I shown in FIGS. 146 (c) to (e), or FIGS. 146 (a) and (g)). Is a means capable of executing at least the production O shown in FIG. 146 and the production P shown in FIGS.
At least one of the plurality of effects is a first effect (for example, an effect H shown in FIG. 146 (g) or an effect O shown in FIG. 146 (g)),
The first effect is an effect executed at least during the jackpot period (for example, the period shown in FIGS. 146 (a) to (j)),
The jackpot is composed of at least a plurality of rounds (for example, the first round to the 15th round),
At least one of the plurality of rounds is a first round (eg, a first round),
In the first period (for example, the period shown in FIGS. 146 (a) to (i)), the effect control means performs the effect performed in the second period (for example, the period starting from FIG. 146 (j)). Is a determinable means,
The second period is a period that starts after the first period ends (for example, a period that starts from FIG. 146 (j)),
The effect control means is a means for determining at least an effect to be executed in the second period when the first condition is satisfied,
The requirement that the first condition is satisfied is a requirement that includes at least the end of the first round,
In the first case, the effect means is a means capable of ending the first effect and executing an effect executed in the second period from the beginning in the second period.
The first case is a case where the first period is in progress.
Said 1st case is a case where said 1st production is performed by said production control means,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the first case is a case where the first condition is satisfied.

  According to the above gaming machine, it is determined that the second period has started by executing the control that starts the first effect determined in the first period from the beginning (first) in the second period. May be easier for a person to recognize. Also, when the operation means is operated, the control for temporarily ending the first effect being executed is executed, and the control is executed from the beginning (first) of the second effect after the second period is started. Is executed, it may be possible for the player to easily recognize that the second effect has been determined.

  The effect control means may be a means for controlling only one effect means, or a means for controlling a plurality of effect means. Further, the effect means may be a means for executing only a plurality of effects, or may be a means for executing notifications other than the plurality of effects (injustice notification, notification of gaming state, notification of how to hit, etc.). Good. Further, the effect determination control may be a control for determining only the first effect as an effect executed in the second period, and as an effect of executing a plurality of effects including the first effect in the second period. Control to determine may be sufficient. The requirements for the first condition to be satisfied are not only that the operating means has been operated, but (1) that the operating means has been operated, and (2) that a certain period has elapsed since the start of the first period. The requirement may include any one, two, or all of (3) the case where the first period is included in the jackpot presentation period and the specific round has ended. The effect determination control may be executed only when any one of the requirements (1) to (3) is satisfied, or when the two requirements (1) to (3) are satisfied. May be executed when all the above requirements (1) to (3) are satisfied. Further, another requirement that does not include all the requirements (1) to (3) may be used.

(B11) The game table according to (B10),
At least one of the plurality of effects is a second effect (for example, an effect H ′ or an effect O ′ shown in FIG. 146 (j)),
The stage control means is a means for executing control for determining at least the second stage as an stage for performing the second stage (hereinafter referred to as “stage determination control”). .

(B12) The game stand according to (B10) or (B11),
The production control means is a means for executing control (hereinafter referred to as “production change control”) for changing from the production being performed to another production when the second condition is satisfied,
The requirement that the second condition is satisfied is a requirement that includes at least the period of the first period,
The production control means is a means capable of executing the production change control one or more times when the production period is in the first period,
One of the other effects to be changed is the first effect, the game stand.

  According to the above game console, by determining the first effect from a plurality of effects, the player may be able to increase the variations of effects that can be confirmed in the second period and entertain the player. .

(B13) The game table according to (B11) or (B12),
The first period is a period that is ended at least when the third condition is satisfied,
The gaming machine characterized in that the requirement that the third condition is satisfied is a requirement that includes at least the execution determination control being executed.

(C1) The game stand according to this embodiment is
Production means (for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 120);
A gaming table (for example, a pachinko machine 100) including operating means (for example, a chance button 136),
The effect means is a part of the first effect (for example, the effect H or the effect O shown in FIG. 149 (g)) during the first period (for example, the period shown in FIGS. 149 (a) to (h)). Is a means to perform only
The production means executes at least a second production (for example, production H ′ or production O ′ shown in FIG. 149 (i)) in a second period (for example, a period starting from FIG. 149 (i)). Possible means,
The production means is a means capable of at least stopping the first production (for example, production H shown in FIG. 149 (g)) when the first period ends.
The second period is a period that starts after the first period ends (for example, a period that starts from FIG. 149 (i)),
In the second period, the second effect is started from the beginning (for example, as shown in FIG. 149 (i), the effect H ′ is executed from the beginning of the movie, or the effect O ′ is It is executed from the beginning).

  According to the above gaming machine, only a part of the first performance is executed in the first period, so that it is possible to realize a gaming machine characterized by the production means. Moreover, the player may be able to easily recognize that the second period has started by starting the second effect from the beginning. Furthermore, only a part of the first effect is executed in the first period, so that the player can be prevented from getting bored even when the second effect is executed from the beginning in the second period. There is a case.

  The production means may be a means for stopping only the first production when the first period ends, or a plurality of productions including the first production may be stopped. You may make it stop all the productions including this production. Further, “can be stopped” may indicate “can be ended” or may be “can be ended”. Further, it may indicate that “it may not be terminated”. Further, “can be stopped” may indicate “must be stopped” or “may not be stopped”.

  In addition, “stop” indicates “stopping temporarily in the middle of the production”, but “stopping at the end of the production” may also be included. Further, “stopping at the end of the production” may not be included. The “stop” may be “interrupt”, “stop”, or “end”.

  Further, the second period may be a period that starts immediately after the end of the first period, or may be a period that ends at the same time as the end of the first period. In addition, there may be one or a plurality of periods different from the first period and the second period between the first period and the second period. Further, there may be no other period between the first period and the second period.

  Further, the effect means may be a means that the second effect is always executed during the second period, or may be a means that the second effect may not be executed. For example, when the island simultaneous effect is started before the second period is started after the first period is started, the second effect may not be executed. Further, a means for executing a plurality of effects including the second effect may be used, or a means for executing only the second effect may be used.

(C2) The game stand according to (C1),
The production means executes the first production from the middle during the first period (for example, as shown in FIG. 149 (g), the production H is executed from the middle of the movie, or the production O is performed. A game table characterized by being a means (executed from the middle of a song).

  According to the above gaming machine, since the first production executed during the first period starts from the middle of the production, the entire first production is not understood until the second period is started, It may be possible to entertain the player. The directing means may be a means in which the first effect is executed in the middle only during the first period, and the first effect is also in the middle in other periods other than the first period. It may be a means that may be executed.

(C3) The gaming machine according to (C1) or (C2),
The production means performs the first production halfway during the first period (for example, as shown in FIG. 149 (f), production H is executed halfway through the movie, or production O is performed. A game stand characterized by being a means to be executed halfway through a song.

  According to the above gaming machine, the first performance executed during the first period ends in the middle of the production, so that the entire first production is not understood until the second period is started. May be entertained. The directing means may be a means in which the first effect is executed halfway only during the first period, and the first effect is also halfway in other periods other than the first period. It may be a means that may be executed.

  Further, the directing means is a means in which only a part of the first directing is executed during the period of the first period. It may be “an effect that starts in the middle and ends in the middle of the first effect”, and “an effect that starts in the middle of the first effect and runs to the end of the first effect” It may also be “an effect that starts from the beginning of the first effect and is executed halfway through the first effect”.

(C4) The gaming machine according to any one of (C1) to (C3),
The first effect includes a plurality of effects (for example, an effect H shown in FIGS. 149 (a) and (f), an effect I shown in FIGS. 149 (c) to (d)), or a diagram in the first period. 149 (a) or (f), or a stage determined from one of effects determined from effects P shown in FIGS. 149 (c) to 149 (d).

  According to the above game console, by determining the first effect from a plurality of effects, the player may be able to increase the variations of effects that can be confirmed in the second period and entertain the player. .

  The effect means may be an effect determined from two or more effects included in the plurality of effects during the first period. If there is only one effect that can be executed in the second period, only the one effect may be executed in the first period, and the second period is not executed. Only the period may be executed. In addition, for example, when the number of consecutive villas has reached a predetermined number of times such as two consecutive villas, three consecutive villas, or when the mission of the opening condition of the achievement is achieved while setting the user mode When is established, the effects that can be executed during the second period may be increased.

  The operation means is a first operation means (chance button 136), and includes a second operation means (direction key 139), and the rendering means performs the second operation during the first period. When there is an operation of the means, the first effect may be determined from a plurality of effects. In this way, “change of production” and “decision of production” may be executed by operation of different operation means, and “change of production” and “decision of production” depend on the operation direction of one operation means. Either of these may be executed.

  In addition, the effect executed in the second period may be changed at a constant period during the period of the first period, for example, scrolling at a period of 5 seconds. In addition, the fact that the effect is selected may indicate that “the effect is determined”, may include “change of the effect”, or may not include it. Further, it may indicate only that “the production is changed”.

(C5) The gaming machine according to any one of (C1) to (C4),
A plurality of production means are provided,
At least one of the plurality of effect means is a first effect means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208),
The first effect means is the effect means,
At least one of the plurality of effect means is a second effect means (for example, a speaker 120).

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, there are cases where the player can be entertained with the production by a plurality of production means. In addition, three or more effect means may be provided.

(C6) The game stand according to (C5),
In the third period (for example, the period shown in FIGS. 149 (a) to (g)), the second effect means is at least one of the third effects (for example, the effect O shown in FIG. Is a means of executing
The second effect means can execute at least a fourth effect (for example, an effect O ′ shown in FIG. 149 (h)) in a fourth period (for example, a period starting from FIG. 149 (h)). Means,
The second effect means is a means capable of stopping at least the third effect (for example, the fade-out process shown in FIG. 149 (g)) when the third period ends.
The fourth period is a period that starts after the third period ends (for example, a period that starts from FIG. 149 (h)),
In the fourth period, the fourth effect starts from the beginning (for example, the effect O ′ is executed from the beginning of the song as shown in FIG. 149 (h)). Stand.

  According to the above game console, only a part of the third effect is executed in the third period, so that the player will not get bored even if the fourth effect is executed from the beginning in the fourth period. You may be able to The second effect means may be a means for executing only a part of the third effect during the third period, or a means for executing all of the third effect. May be. The effect means may be a means for executing one or more effects different from the third effect during the third period. The second effect means may be a means for stopping only the third effect being executed when the third period ends, and a plurality of effects including the third effect are stopped. Alternatively, all the effects including the third effect may be stopped.

  The third period may be a period that starts before the first period, may be a period that starts after the first period, or starts at the same time as the first period. It may be a period of time. The third period may be a period that ends before the first period, may be a period that ends after the first period, and ends at the same time as the first period. It may be a period of time. Further, for example, the first effect such as a movie may not be linked to the third effect, or may be linked to the third effect. Also, for example, the second effect such as a movie may not be linked to the fourth effect, or may be linked to the fourth effect.

  The second effect means may be a means that the fourth effect is necessarily executed during the fourth period, or may be a means that the fourth effect may not be executed. . For example, the fourth effect may not be executed when the island simultaneous effect is started between the start of the third period and the start of the fourth period. Further, a means for executing a plurality of effects including the fourth effect may be used, or a means for executing only the fourth effect may be used. In addition, when the second effect is not executed during the second period in the first effect means, the second effect means does not execute the fourth effect during the period of the fourth period. It may be a means or a means for executing the fourth effect.

(C7) The game stand according to (C6),
The second effect means executes the third effect in the middle of the third period (for example, the effect O is executed in the middle of the music as shown in FIG. 149 (f)). A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the above gaming machine, since the third performance that is executed during the third period starts from the middle of the production, the third production is not understood until the fourth period starts, It may be possible to entertain the player. The second effect means may be a means in which the third effect is executed halfway only during the period of the third period, and the third effect is also performed in other periods other than the third period. May be a means that may be executed in the middle.

  Further, in the first effect means, when the first effect is being executed from the middle, the second effect means may be a means in which the third effect is being executed from the middle. The means for starting the production may be started from the top.

(C8) The game stand according to (C6) or (C7),
The second effect means executes the third effect halfway during the third period (for example, the effect O is executed halfway as shown in FIG. 149 (f)). A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the above gaming machine, the third performance that is executed during the third period ends in the middle of the production, so that the entire third production is not understood until the fourth period is started. May be entertained. The second effect means may be a means in which the third effect is executed halfway only during the period of the third period, and the third effect is also performed in other periods other than the third period. May be a means that may be executed halfway.

  Further, in the first effect means, when the first effect is executed halfway, the second effect means may be a means in which the third effect is executed halfway. It may be a means executed until the end of the production.

  In addition, the production means is a means in which only a part of the third production is executed during the period of the third period. It may be “an effect that starts in the middle and ends in the middle of the third effect”, and “an effect that starts from the middle of the third effect and runs to the end of the third effect” It may also be “an effect that starts from the beginning of the third effect and is executed halfway through the third effect”.

(C9) The gaming machine according to any one of (C6) to (C8),
The third period is the first period,
The fourth period is the second period,
The third effect (for example, the effect O shown in FIG. 149 (f)) is an effect corresponding to the first effect (for example, the effect H shown in FIG. 149 (f)). Amusement stand.

  According to the above gaming machine, since the effects executed by each of the first effect means and the second effect means are determined at the same time, in the period until the first round in the first period ends, When at least a part of the first effect by the first effect means is executed and at least a part of the third effect by the second effect means is also executed, so that the player can be more entertained There is. Note that “the third effect is an effect corresponding to the first effect” means that the effect is composed of the first effect and the third effect such as execution of a movie corresponding to the song. It may be.

(C10) The gaming machine according to any one of (C1) to (C9),
The game table is a pachinko machine or a slot machine.

  According to the above gaming machine, the effect executed in the second period is determined when the operation means is operated, and the determined effect is restarted from the beginning, so the pachinko that has the characteristics of the effect means. Machine or slot machine can be realized.

(C11) effect means (for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 120);
A game machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100) including production control means (for example, a first sub-control unit 400) capable of controlling at least the production means,
The effect means includes a plurality of effects (for example, effects H shown in FIGS. 149 (a) and (f), effects I shown in FIGS. 149 (c) to (d), or FIGS. 149 (a) and (f)). Is a means capable of executing at least the effect O shown and the effect P) shown in FIGS. 149 (c) to (d),
At least one of the plurality of effects is a first effect (for example, effect H or effect O shown in FIG. 149 (f)),
In the first period (for example, the period shown in FIGS. 149 (a) to (g)), the effect control means is performed in the second period (for example, the period starting from FIG. 149 (h)). Is a determinable means,
The second period is a period that starts after the first period ends,
When the first condition is satisfied (for example, when the chance button 136 is pressed or when the first round is completed), the effect control means performs an effect to be executed in the second period. At least a means of determining,
The production means is means for executing only a part of the first production when the first period is in progress.
In the first case, the effect means is a means capable of ending the first effect and executing an effect executed in the second period from the beginning in the second period.
The first case is a case where the first period is in progress.
Said 1st case is a case where said 1st production is performed by said production control means,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the first case is a case where the first condition is satisfied.

  According to the above gaming machine, it is determined that the second period has started by executing the control that starts the first effect determined in the first period from the beginning (first) in the second period. May be easier for a person to recognize. Also, when the operation means is operated, the control for temporarily ending the first effect being executed is executed, and the control is executed from the beginning (first) of the second effect after the second period is started. Is executed, it may be possible for the player to easily recognize that the second effect has been determined.

  The effect control means may be a means for controlling only one effect means, or a means for controlling a plurality of effect means. Further, the effect means may be a means for executing only a plurality of effects, or may be a means for executing notifications other than the plurality of effects (injustice notification, notification of gaming state, notification of how to hit, etc.). Good. Further, the effect determination control may be a control for determining only the first effect as an effect executed in the second period, and as an effect of executing a plurality of effects including the first effect in the second period. Control to determine may be sufficient. The requirements for the first condition to be satisfied are not only that the operating means has been operated, but (1) that the operating means has been operated, and (2) that a certain period has elapsed since the start of the first period. The requirement may include any one, two, or all of (3) the case where the first period is included in the jackpot presentation period and the specific round has ended. The effect determination control may be executed only when any one of the requirements (1) to (3) is satisfied, or when the two requirements (1) to (3) are satisfied. May be executed when all the above requirements (1) to (3) are satisfied. Further, another requirement that does not include all the requirements (1) to (3) may be used.

(C12) The game stand according to (C11),
At least one of the plurality of effects is a second effect (for example, an effect H ′ or an effect O ′ shown in FIG. 149 (h)),
The stage control means is a means for executing control for determining at least the second stage as an stage for performing the second stage (hereinafter referred to as “stage determination control”). .

(C13) The gaming machine according to (C11) or (C12),
The production control means is a means for executing control (hereinafter referred to as “production change control”) for changing from the production being performed to another production when the second condition is satisfied,
The requirement that the second condition is satisfied is a requirement that includes at least the period of the first period,
The production control means is a means capable of executing the production change control one or more times when the production period is in the first period,
One of the other effects to be changed is the first effect, the game stand.

  According to the above game console, by determining the first effect from a plurality of effects, the player may be able to increase the variations of effects that can be confirmed in the second period and entertain the player. .

(C14) The gaming table according to (C12) or (C13),
The first period is a period that is ended at least when the third condition is satisfied,
The gaming machine characterized in that the requirement that the third condition is satisfied is a requirement that includes at least the execution determination control being executed.

(1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment
Production means (for example, second production means (speaker 120), see FIGS. 105 to 107 (the same applies below)),
A gaming table (for example, a pachinko machine 100) including operating means (for example, a chance button 136),
The effect means is a means capable of executing at least one effect (hereinafter referred to as “first effect” (for example, effect α)) of a plurality of effects,
In the first case (for example, when a waiting time of T seconds elapses from time t3 when the chance button 136 was pressed during the selectable period (time t4)), the plurality of production means Is a means to be changed to another effect (hereinafter referred to as “second effect” (for example, effect δ)),
Said 1st case is a case where it is a 1st period (for example, selectable period (time t0-t5)),
The first case is a case where a first time (for example, T seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the operation means (for example, pressing of the chance button 136 (time t3)) (for example, time t4). And
The production means is executed by the production means in the second period (for example, the period after the end of the first period) in the second case (for example, when the selectable period ends (time t5)). Is a means for determining at least an effect (hereinafter referred to as “third effect” (for example, effect δ)),
The second case is a case where an effect determining condition (for example, the end of the selectable period (time t5)) is established,
The second period is a period that starts after the end of the first period,
The effect means is means for starting the third effect from the beginning in the third case (for example, when the second period is started (time t5)),
Said 3rd case is a case where said 2nd period is started, It is characterized by the above-mentioned. (2) In the pachinko machine 100,
The first period is a period that is at least ended when an end condition (for example, end of a selectable period) is satisfied,
The requirement that the end condition is satisfied is a requirement that includes at least that a second time (for example, a time from time t0 to t5) has elapsed since the start of the first period (for example, time t0). Features. (3) In the pachinko machine 100,
The first period is an effect change period (for example, a selectable period),
The effect change period means that the change from the first effect to the second effect can be executed one or more times (for example, time (T3-T) in FIG. 105 = time t4 to t5 is time T The longer period is a period in which a change can be made a plurality of times by pressing the chance button 136 during the period from the time t4 to the time t5. (4) In the pachinko machine 100,
The first period is a period in which at least a big hit is executed (see, for example, FIG. 105). (5) In the pachinko machine 100,
The jackpot is composed of at least a plurality of rounds,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the first period is a period that is executed at least during one round of the plurality of rounds (for example, see FIG. 105).

(1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment
Display means (for example, first effect means (decorative symbol display device 208));
Sound output means (for example, second rendering means (speaker 120));
Production control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) capable of at least controlling the production;
A game table (for example, a pachinko machine 100) provided with operation means (for example, a chance button 136) provided at a position at which the player can operate at least;
The sound output means is means capable of outputting at least a first song (for example, production α (see FIG. 105; the same applies hereinafter)),
The sound output means is means capable of outputting at least a second song (for example, production δ),
The display means is a means capable of executing at least title display (for example, production A) of the first song,
The display means is means capable of at least executing title display (for example, effect D) of the second song,
The production control means is a means capable of executing at least first control (for example, title display change control) when a first condition (for example, detection of pressing of the chance button 136) is established. ,
The production control means is means capable of executing second control (for example, song change control) when the first condition is established,
The production control means can at least start the second control after the second condition (for example, the start of the production changeable period (start of the selectable period (paragraph “0242”)) is established. Means,
The effect control means is a means for ending at least the second control before the establishment of the third condition (for example, the end of the changeable period of the effect (end of the selectable period (paragraph “0249”)). And
The production control means is a means capable of executing third control (for example, song determination control) when the third condition is established,
The requirement for satisfying the first condition is a requirement including at least that an operation of the operation means (for example, pressing of the chance button 136) is detected,
The first control is a control that can be changed at least from the title display of the first song to the title display of the second song,
The second control is a control that can be changed at least from the first song to the second song,
The second control is a control executed at least after the first control,
The second control is a control executed after a first time (for example, T seconds) has elapsed since the establishment of the first condition,
The third control is a control for determining at least a song output by the sound output means after the third condition is satisfied,
The production control means is a means capable of changing at least from the first music to the second music by the second control in the first case (for example, when a waiting time of T seconds elapses). And
The production control means is a means that does not change at least from the first music to the second music by the second control in the second case (for example, when the waiting time of T seconds does not elapse). Yes,
The first case is a case where the first time has passed since the first condition was finally satisfied,
The second case is a case where the first condition is satisfied again before the first time elapses after the first condition is satisfied.
The sound output means is means capable of outputting at least a song changed by the effect control means (hereinafter referred to as “third song” (for example, effect δ)) in the first case,
The production control means is means for performing control to end the output of the third song when the third condition is satisfied,
The production control means is means for performing a fourth control (for example, a control that starts from the beginning of a song) when the third condition is established,
The fourth control is characterized in that the music determined by the third control is started from the beginning. (2) In the pachinko machine 100,
The effect control means is a means capable of executing the first control one or more times in an effect change period (for example, a selectable period),
The production control means is a means capable of executing the second control one or more times during the production change period.
The production change period is a period in which the production can be changed at least,
The effect change period is a period that is performed at least for a second time. (3) In the pachinko machine 100,
The effect change period is a period that is executed at least in the big hit. (4) In the pachinko machine 100,
The jackpot is composed of at least a plurality of rounds,
The effect change period is a period that is executed at least during one round of the plurality of rounds. (5) In the pachinko machine 100,
The operation means is a means provided with a first operation section (for example, a chance button 136),
The operation means is a means provided with a second operation unit (for example, a direction key of the setting operation unit 139),
The requirement for establishing the first condition is a requirement including at least that an operation of one of the first operation unit and the second operation unit is detected. It is characterized by that. (6) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment
Production means (for example, second production means (speaker 120), see FIGS. 105 to 107 (hereinafter the same),
A game machine comprising at least an effect control means (for example, a first sub-control unit 400) capable of controlling the effect means;
The effect means is a means capable of executing at least a plurality of effects,
At least one of the plurality of effects is a first effect (for example, an effect α),
The effect control means can determine an effect to be executed in a second period (for example, a period after the end of the first period) in a first period (for example, a selectable period (time t0 to t5)). And
The second period is a period that starts after the first period ends,
When the first effect is executed by the effect means, and the effect control means determines that the first effect is to be executed in the second period, the effect means It is good also as the game stand characterized by being a means which can be executed from the beginning in the second period after the first effect is finished once.

(1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment
Production means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 or the speaker 120) capable of at least producing the production;
A game machine comprising at least an effect changing means capable of changing the effect (for example, an effect control process (step S409) and a sound control process (step S415) by the first sub-control unit 400),
The effect means is capable of executing at least a first effect (for example, effect A), and the effect means is capable of executing at least a second effect (for example, effect α). The means is capable of executing at least a third effect (for example, effect B), and the effecting means is capable of executing at least a fourth effect (for example, effect β),
When the first condition is satisfied (for example, an operation by the operation unit), the effect changing unit determines that the first change control (for example, step S1107 of the selected effect control process shown in FIG. 95 is Yes and step S1111). At least)
When the second condition is satisfied (for example, an operation by the operating unit), the effect changing unit determines that the second change control (for example, step S1107 of the selected effect control process shown in FIG. 95 is Yes and step S1111). At least)
The first change control is at least changeable from the first effect to the third effect,
The second change control is at least changeable from the second effect to the fourth effect,
The first change control is a control executed after a first time has elapsed since the first condition is satisfied (for example, after T seconds),
The second change control is a control executed after a second time has elapsed since the second condition is satisfied (for example, after T seconds).

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, the first effect is changed to the third effect after the first time has elapsed, and the second effect is the fourth effect after the second time has elapsed. Since it is possible to perform a variety of performances, the player's interest may be improved.

  More specifically, the result of the change after a certain amount of time is reflected to give the player a sense of incongruity and can attract the player's attention until the changed performance starts. There is a case. If the changed result is immediately reflected in the production, the production will be monotonous, but by performing the production using the time lag as described above, variations can be made in the production, and the player You may not be bored.

(2) In the pachinko machine 100,
The time when the first condition is satisfied is at least coincident with the time when the second condition is satisfied.

  According to the pachinko machine 100, since the establishment time of the first condition and the second condition overlap, there are cases where the effect can be more noticed. In addition, there may be cases where variations in production can be increased. In addition, there may be a case where a variation can be given to the execution timing of the effect even though the change conditions for the plurality of effects are satisfied at substantially the same timing.

(3) In the pachinko machine 100,
The first time is different from the second time.

  According to the pachinko machine 100, since the first time and the second time are different, the production may be more noticeable. In addition, there may be cases where variations in production can be increased. Furthermore, there are cases where variations can be given to the execution timing of effects.

(4) In the pachinko machine 100,
The directing means is capable of executing at least a plurality of selection effects that can be selected by the player.
The first selection effect of the plurality of selection effects is at least capable of executing the first effect,
The first selection effect is at least capable of executing the third effect,
The second selection effect among the plurality of selection effects is capable of executing at least the second effect,
The second selection effect is characterized in that at least the fourth effect can be executed.

  According to the pachinko machine 100, the directing means can execute a selection effect that allows the player to select an effect, so that the player feels uncomfortable and has not been reflected immediately even though it has been selected. In some cases, the production can be made more noticeable. In addition, the player may be able to be surely notified of what the currently selected effect is from among the selected effects.

(5) In the pachinko machine 100,
The production means is a plurality of production means,
A first effect unit (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) of the plurality of effect units is capable of at least executing the first effect,
The first effect means is capable of executing at least the third effect,
A second rendering means (for example, the speaker 120) of the plurality of rendering means is capable of executing at least the second rendering,
The second effect means is characterized in that it can execute at least the fourth effect.

  According to the pachinko machine 100, since the first effect means can execute the first effect and the second effect means can execute the second effect, the player feels uncomfortable and pays attention to the changed effect. There is a case that can be made.

(6) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment
Production means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 or the speaker 120) capable of at least producing the production;
Production changing means capable of changing at least the production (for example, production control processing (step S409) and sound control processing (step S415) by the first sub-control unit 400),
A game table provided with operation means (for example, a chance button 136) that can be operated by a player,
The production means can execute at least a first production (for example, production A),
The production means can execute at least a second production (for example, production B),
When the change condition is established, the effect changing means performs change control (for example, the effect selected in step S1111 when step S1107 of the selected effect control process shown in FIG. 95 is Yes),
The change control is at least changeable from the first effect to the second effect,
The change condition is satisfied at least by the player operating the operation means during the execution of the first effect,
The effect changing means is characterized in that an operation of the operating means by a player is not accepted during a predetermined period after the change condition is satisfied.

  According to the pachinko machine 100, since the selection of the effect is not accepted (disabled) by the operating means for a predetermined period after the selected effect is started, the player cannot select the effect. Thereby, since the player always views the selected effect for a certain period, it may be possible to prevent an unintended change of the effect due to an erroneous operation.

(7) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment
Production means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 or the speaker 120) capable of at least producing the production;
Production changing means capable of changing at least the production (for example, production control processing (step S409) and sound control processing (step S415) by the first sub-control unit 400),
A game table provided with operation means (for example, a chance button 136) that can be operated by a player,
The production means is capable of executing at least a first production (for example, production α),
The production means can execute at least a second production (for example, production δ),
The effect changing means is capable of executing at least change control (for example, the effect selected in step S1111 when step S1107 of the selected effect control process shown in FIG. 95 is Yes) when the change condition is satisfied. Yes,
The change control is at least changeable from the first effect to the second effect,
The change condition is satisfied at least when a player operates the operation means during execution of the first effect and a predetermined period has elapsed since the operation has been performed. Features.

According to the pachinko machine 100, the first effect means is immediately reflected on the selected effect, and the second effect means is not reflected unless T seconds elapse after selection. In other words, if the predetermined period does not elapse after the selection, the second effect means does not start the selected effect, so that it is possible to prevent the annoyance felt by starting the effect that changes immediately. There is.
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be made.

  For example, in the configuration described in the above embodiment, the configuration described as “at least ... possible” can be interpreted by replacing the part with “only possible ...”. For example, the display means described as “at least the first effect can be stopped” can be interpreted as replacing the effect means “only the first effect can be stopped”. In addition, the configuration described as “means for executing at least a part of the first effect” may be that only a part of the first effect may be executed, It can also be interpreted as “means for performing all of the production”.

  In addition, the configuration described as “... possible” in the above-described embodiment is interpreted by replacing the part with “... may not be included, or necessarily includes ...” You can also For example, the configuration described as “means capable of executing at least the second effect” is replaced with “means that may not execute the second effect or includes a configuration that is always executed”. Can also be interpreted.

  Further, for example, the first condition may be satisfied at a timing different from the second condition. As a specific example, for example, the operation effect of the chance button 136 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player operates the chance button 136 (satisfaction of the first condition). Next, one minute later, the speaker 120 instructs “Press the chance button!” And the player operates the chance button 136 again (the second condition is satisfied). The same chance button 136 may not be used. A combination of the chance button 136 and other operation means (direction key, trigger, first chance button, second chance button) is also possible. By doing so, there may be cases where variations in performance can be increased.

  For example, the first condition may be the same condition as the second condition. As a specific example, for example, one operation means performs a predetermined operation (depressing a predetermined number of times (one or more times) (continuous hitting), long pressing, sliding, a predetermined key operation (for example, a direction key is “up / down / left / right”) Or the like) may be used as the condition (condition (1)). Alternatively, the condition (condition (2)) may be a case where the number of games digested from a certain point in time (or the number of special figure fluctuations) exceeds a predetermined number. In the case of a pachinko machine, for example, at the time of probability change state, at the start of a short time, at the start of a specific performance mode (a mode for sudden probability change or small hits, a mode in which only the performance changes without changing the game state) This corresponds to the start of the change from the electric support to the non-electric support state. In the case of a slot machine, this applies to the start of ART, RT, and AT. In addition, it corresponds to the case when the power is turned on in common with both of the pachinko machine slot machines. Further, the condition (condition (3)) may be a case where a predetermined number of game media (game balls, medals, etc.) acquired at the time of hitting are exceeded. By doing this, although the change can be made under the same condition, the reflected time of the changed effect is different, so that the player may be given a sense of discomfort.

  For example, the first condition may be different from the second condition. As a specific example, the first condition may be when the first operating means is operated, and the second condition may be when the second operating means is operated. That is, a difference in operation means may be used as a condition. Alternatively, the first condition is when the operating means is operated for the first number of times (for example, once), and the second condition is when the operating means is operated for the second number of times (for example, 5 times). Also good. That is, the difference in operation may be a condition. In addition, a difference in operation such as long press, slide, and predetermined key operation may be used as a condition. Furthermore, the first condition may be when the operating means is operated, and the second condition may be the above condition (2). The first condition may be when the operating means is operated, and the second condition may be the above condition (3). Further, the first condition and the second condition may be different patterns when the condition (2) is present. Moreover, the pattern in which the predetermined number of said conditions (3) differs by the 1st condition and the 2nd condition may be sufficient. The first condition may be the condition (2), and the second condition may be the condition (3). In the above description, the first condition and the second condition can be applied in reverse. By doing so, since the start time of the effect varies depending on the conditions, there may be cases where the variation of the effect can be increased.

  Further, for example, the first time and the second time may be the same. By doing so, it may be possible to reduce a sense of incongruity due to a delay in reflecting the selected performance.

  Further, for example, one effect may be a selection effect and the other effect may be a change effect. The first effect means (second effect means) can execute the selection effect, and the second effect means (first effect means) may not perform at least the selection effect. As a specific example, the effect performed by the second effect means (first effect means) is an effect that is changed by the operation of the operation means in any of the above conditions (1), (2), or (3). There may be. By doing so, there may be cases where variations in performance can be increased.

  Further, for example, the presentation may be changed by a method other than the operation means. It is not necessarily changed by the operation by the operation means, and it is of course possible to change the production in a control manner when a certain condition is satisfied. For example, a predetermined effect or a randomly selected effect may be performed when the condition is satisfied. By doing so, there may be cases where variations in performance can be increased.

  For example, a single operating means may be used. A selection effect of at least the first effect means and the second effect means may be selectable with one operation means. For example, it may be possible to select the output of the music on the speaker 120 and the selection of the music name on the decorative symbol display device 208 with a single operation means. By doing so, there are cases where attention can be paid to the reflection of the selection result.

  Further, for example, the first operation means may correspond to the first effect means, and the second operation means may correspond to the second effect means. For this purpose, a plurality of operation means are provided. The operation of the first operation means corresponds to the first effect means, and the operation of the second operation means corresponds to the second effect means. For example, the chance button 136 may correspond to the decorative symbol display device 208, and the direction key 139 may correspond to the effect display device 915. By doing so, there are cases where attention can be paid to the reflection of the selection result.

  Further, for example, a plurality of selection effects may be performed by the first effect means (or the second effect means). For example, as shown in the embodiment, the first selection effect and the third selection effect may be executable by the first effect means. By doing so, there are cases where variations can be given to the game method of the player and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, for example, a plurality of selection effects may be performed by the first rendering means (or the second rendering means), a plurality of operation means may be used, and the same operation means may be used by the same rendering means. For example, the first selection effect of the first effect means corresponds to the first operation means, and the second selection effect of the second effect means corresponds to the second operation means. The third selection effect of the first (second) effect means corresponds to the first (second) operation means. By doing so, there are cases where variations can be given to the game method of the player and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, for example, a plurality of selection effects may be provided by the first effect means (or the second effect means), and a plurality of operation means may be used, and the same effect means may be used as different operation means. . For example, the first selection effect of the first effect means corresponds to the first operation means, and the second selection effect of the second effect means corresponds to the second operation means. The third selection effect of the first (second) effect means corresponds to the second (first) operation means. During execution of the third selection effect, at least the fourth effect can be selected. By doing so, there are cases where variations can be given to the game method of the player and the interest of the game can be improved.

For example, the first time and the second time may be limited as follows. (A) After selecting an effect, the first effect means cannot accept the operation of the operation means only for the first time and the second effect means only for the second time. (B) After the effect is selected, the execution of the effect of the first effect means is delayed by the first time, and the execution of the effect of the second effect means is executed with a delay of the second time. (C) Execution of the first effect means (second effect means) is delayed for the first time (second time) after the effect is selected. The production of the second production means (first production means) is delayed for a second time (first time) shorter than the first time (second time). The shorter time may not be delayed (that is, reflected immediately). (D) After the effect is selected, the first effect means (second effect means) is not executed unless the first time (second time) has elapsed. For the second effect means (first effect means), it is possible to apply a modification such as delaying the second time (first time), not accepting the operation, or reflecting immediately without delay. is there.
By doing so, the following effects can be obtained.

  In (a) above, there are cases where it is possible to prevent the selection of an unintended effect due to an erroneous operation.

  In the case of the delay from the operation to the end of the change in (b) and (c) above, there are cases where the selection result can be reflected without a sense of incongruity while preventing other effects from being obstructed.

  In the case of the specific time delay in the above (b) and (c), a sense of incongruity is given and the player can be noticed.

  In (d) above, it may be possible to prevent the player from performing an effect that is not desired. In some cases, the player can be prevented from feeling bothersome.

  Further, for example, the production may be changed by operating the operation means. Even if it is possible to change the first effect to the third effect by providing an operation means that can be operated by the player and operating the operation means during the execution of the first effect (satisfaction of the first condition) Good. Further, the second effect may be changed to the third effect by operating the operation means (satisfaction of the second condition) during execution of the second effect. Note that “by operating the operating means” is precisely “by detecting that the operating means has been operated”. Even if operated by the player, the effect cannot be changed unless detected by the sensor.

  Further, for example, the third rendering means and one operation means may be combined. Three rendering means may correspond to one operation means. The third effect means may be capable of executing the fourth selection effect. In addition, during execution of the fourth selection effect, at least the fifth effect may be selectable. In this way, even if a plurality of effects are selected by one operation means, there is a difference in the reflection of the effects by the operation means, which may give the player a sense of incongruity and allow the selection results to be reflected. is there.

  Further, for example, the third rendering means and a plurality of operation means may be combined. The first effect means and the second effect means may correspond to the first operation means, and the third effect means may correspond to the second operation means. By doing so, there are cases where variations can be given to the game method of the player and the interest of the game can be improved.

  The first condition is established when a selection operation by the player is detected during the effective period, and the second condition is when the selection operation by the player is detected during the effective period. It may be established.

  The first condition may be satisfied when the execution requirement is satisfied, and the second condition may be satisfied when the execution requirement is satisfied. The execution requirement may be satisfied when a selection operation by the player is detected during the effective period. The first condition is established when any one of the plurality of first requirements is satisfied, and one of the plurality of first requirements is the execution It may be a requirement. The second condition is established when any one of the plurality of second requirements is satisfied, and one of the plurality of second requirements is: It may be the execution requirement.

  Further, in the above embodiment, for example, when the player presses the chance button 136 of the operation means at the time t1, for example, the effect A is ended and the effect B is started, for example. The production A may be gradually started and the production B may be gradually started over a predetermined time from the time point t1. In this case, when the effects A and B include images, the effect A image fades out and the effect B image fades in. When the productions A and B include music, voice, etc., the volume of the production A gradually decreases and the volume of the production B gradually increases.

Further, the second gaming state of the plurality of gaming states may be a gaming state that is more advantageous for the player than the first gaming state of the plurality of gaming states.
The second gaming state may be a big hit.

  In addition, the first gaming state is a win-winning win with a first probability by lottery (for example, a special figure low-probability low-probability state), and the second gaming state is determined by the lottery. Winning a big hit with a probability of two (for example, a special figure high-precision normal figure high-precision state, a special figure low-precision normal figure high-precision (electric support) state), the first probability is the second probability It may be lower than the probability. Note that the probability indicates the probability that a special figure or ordinary figure will be a big hit.

  Further, the first gaming state may be a small hit and the second gaming state may be a big hit.

  The first gaming state is a first jackpot (for example, special figure B and special figure c in FIG. 83A), and the second gaming state is a second jackpot (for example, FIG. 83 ( Special figure A, special figure a, special figure b) of a) may be used.

  The first gaming state is a first jackpot (for example, special figure C, special figure D, special figure b, special figure c in FIG. 83 (a)), and the second gaming state is the first gaming state. It may be a big hit (for example, special figure A, special figure B, special figure a in FIG. 83 (a)).

  The first gaming state is a first jackpot (for example, special figure C and special figure D in FIG. 83A), and the second gaming state is a second jackpot (for example, FIG. 83 ( Special figure A, special figure B, special figure a, special figure b, special figure c) of a) may be used.

  In addition, the selection effect may vary the display mode (shape, image, character string, color, size, transparency, sound, etc.) depending on the gaming state.

  In addition, the selection effect may be such that the display mode in the first gaming state and the display mode in the second gaming state are different.

  Further, for example, the size of the selection effect in the second gaming state (the area of the display region, the image, etc.) is larger than the size of the selection effect in the first gaming state (the area of the display region, the image, etc., the volume, etc.). , Volume, etc.) may be large. The reverse is also possible. Further, the transparency of the selection effect (display mode) in the second gaming state may be higher than the transparency of the selection effect (display mode) in the first gaming state. The reverse is also possible. The color of the selection effect in the first gaming state (for example, the character string, the image, or the color of the background of the display area) may be different from the color of the selection effect in the second gaming state.

  In addition, the selection effect may not be displayed depending on the gaming state.

  Further, the selection effect may not be executed when the game state is the first game state, but may be executed only when the game state is the second game state.

  In addition, the selection effect may be executed at least in the first gaming state and the second gaming state.

Further, the selection effect may be executed only in the first game state and the second game state.
The selection effect may be executable in any gaming state.

It should be noted that at least the selection effect may not be performed during the sudden success of the odd change.
Note that at least the selection effect need not be performed during the big hit effect of the latent probability change.
During the small hit effect, at least the selection effect may not be performed.
It should be noted that the effect during the change of the latent probability and the effect during the small hit may be the same.
Note that selection and selection may be performed at least suddenly.
It should be noted that at least the selection effect may be performed during the sudden success of the odd change.
Note that at least the selection effect may be performed during the big hit effect of the latent probability change.
Note that at least the selection effect may be performed during the small hit effect.

  In addition, what was called a lamp | ramp so far is an example of a light emission means, and a lamp | ramp can be substituted if it emits light, such as LED and a cold cathode tube.

  In the above embodiment, the first period is a period during which the operation of the chance button 136 can be accepted. Here, in the first period, the chance button lamp 138 is turned on, and the chance button lamp 138 is turned off when the chance button 136 is operated or after the first period ends (immediately) or simultaneously. The first period and the period for accepting the operation of the chance button 136 may coincide with each other, but the first period may include the chance button reception period or vice versa. The “when the chance button 136 is operated” may be “when the chance button 136 is pressed” or “when the chance button 136 is pressed and then released”. Here, “when the chance button 136 is pressed” means that the command is detected when the sensor that detects the operation of the chance button 136 changes from OFF (non-operation state (OFF)) to ON (operation state (ON)). It may indicate that it is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Further, “when the chance button 136 is pressed and then released” means that the command is the first sub-control when the sensor that detects the operation of the chance button 136 changes from ON (operation state) to OFF (non-operation state). It may indicate that the data is transmitted to unit 400. In the first period, the chance button lamp 138 may be turned off regardless of the operable state or the impossible state, or may be always turned on.

  In the above embodiment, the direction key (setting operation unit) 139 is not provided with a lamp, but the direction key 139 may be provided with a lamp (hereinafter referred to as “direction key lamp”). Here, when the direction key lamp is provided, the description regarding the chance button lamp 138 may be replaced with the direction key lamp. The direction key lamp may be configured to light up the entire direction key 139, but may be provided in each of the operable direction keys (buttons) 139b to 139e. For example, the up key 139b and the down key When the key 139c is operable, the lamp of the upper key 139b and the lamp of the lower key 139c may be turned on. In the first period, the direction key lamp is lit even when it is operated, but may be turned off during the operation, or may be turned on again when it is not operated. May be.

  In addition, the embodiment described above and the embodiments described below can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that circulates and uses game balls enclosed in the game machine. For example, the pachinko machine may be an enclosed pachinko machine that encloses a sphere and circulates the enclosed sphere in the pachinko machine, and this enclosed pachinko machine uses the enclosed sphere as a launch ball, The ball payout may be executed by electronic display.

Note that the items described in the above and the following detailed description, in particular, the items described in the embodiments and the modifications can be combined.
The game table of the above embodiment is expressed as follows, for example.

(Appendix a1) Production means,
A game machine comprising operating means,
The effect means is means for executing at least a part of the first effect in the first period,
The production means is a means capable of executing at least a second production in the second period,
The first effect is an effect that is at least part of the second effect,
The production means is means capable of stopping at least the first production when the operation means is operated in the first period,
The second period is a period that starts after the first period ends,
The first period is a period that is at least ended when the operation means is operated.
The game table, wherein the second presentation is started from the top during the second period.

(Appendix a2) The game stand according to appendix a1,
The gaming machine characterized in that the first effect is one of effects determined from a plurality of effects in the first period.

(Supplementary note a3) The game stand according to supplementary note a1 or a2,
The game stand characterized in that the effect means is a display means.

(Supplementary note a4) The game stand according to supplementary note a1 or a2,
The game stand characterized in that the effect means is sound output means.

(Supplementary note a5) The game stand according to supplementary note a1 or a2,
A plurality of production means are provided,
At least one of the plurality of presentation means is a first presentation means,
The first effect means is the effect means,
At least one of the plurality of effect means is a second effect means.

(Supplementary note a6) The game stand according to supplementary note a5,
The second effect means is means for executing at least a part of the third effect in the third period,
The second effect means is a means capable of executing at least a fourth effect in a fourth period,
The third effect is an effect that is at least part of the fourth effect,
The second effect means is a means capable of at least stopping the third effect when the operation means is operated in the third period.
The fourth period is a period that starts after the third period ends,
The third period is a period that is at least ended when the operation means is operated.
In the fourth period, the fourth stage starts from the top, and the game table is characterized in that

(Supplementary note a7) The game stand according to supplementary note a6,
The third period is the first period,
The fourth period is the second period,
The third effect is an effect corresponding to the first effect,
The game machine characterized in that the fourth effect is an effect corresponding to the second effect.

(Supplementary note a8) The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes a1 to a7,
The game table is a pachinko machine or a slot machine.

(Appendix a9) Production means,
Production control means capable of controlling at least the production means;
A game machine comprising operating means,
The effect means is a means capable of executing at least a plurality of effects,
At least one of the plurality of effects is a first effect,
The effect control means is means capable of determining an effect to be executed in the second period in the first period,
The second period is a period that starts after the first period ends,
The effect control means is a means for executing control for determining at least an effect to be executed in the second period when the first condition is satisfied,
The requirement that the first condition is satisfied is a requirement that includes at least that the operation means has been operated,
In the first case, the effect means is a means capable of ending the first effect and executing an effect executed in the second period from the beginning in the second period.
The first case is a case where the first period is in progress.
Said 1st case is a case where said 1st production is performed by said production control means,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the first case is a case where the first condition is satisfied.

(Appendix b1) Production means,
A game machine comprising operating means,
The effect means is a means for executing at least a jackpot effect when it is a jackpot,
The jackpot is composed of at least a plurality of rounds,
At least one of the plurality of rounds is a first round;
The effect means is means for executing at least a part of the first effect in the first period,
The production means is a means capable of executing at least a second production in the second period,
The first effect is an effect that is at least part of the second effect,
The first period is a part of a period in which the jackpot effect is executed,
The production means is means capable of stopping at least the first production when the first round is completed in the first period;
The second period is a period that starts after the first period ends,
The first period is a period that is at least ended when the first round is ended;
The game table, wherein the second presentation is started from the top during the second period.

(Appendix b2) The game stand according to appendix b1,
The gaming machine characterized in that the first effect is one of effects determined from a plurality of effects in the first period.

(Appendix b3) The game stand according to appendix b1 or b2,
At least one of the plurality of rounds is a second round;
The second round is a round that starts after the first round;
The gaming table according to claim 2, wherein the second period is a period at least started when the second round is started.

(Appendix b4) The game stand according to any one of appendices b1 to b3,
The game stand characterized in that the effect means is a display means.

(Appendix b5) The game stand according to any one of appendices b1 to b3,
The game stand characterized in that the effect means is sound output means.

(Appendix b6) The game stand according to any one of appendices b1 to b3,
A plurality of production means are provided,
At least one of the plurality of presentation means is a first presentation means,
The first effect means is the effect means,
At least one of the plurality of effect means is a second effect means.

(Appendix b7) The game stand according to appendix b6,
The second effect means is means for executing at least a part of the third effect in the third period,
The second effect means is a means capable of executing at least a fourth effect in a fourth period,
The third effect is an effect that is at least part of the fourth effect,
One of the plurality of rounds is a third round;
The fourth period is a period that starts after the third period ends,
The third period is a period that is at least ended when the third round is ended,
In the fourth period, the fourth stage starts from the top, and the game table is characterized in that

(Supplementary note b8) The game stand according to Supplementary note b7,
The third period is the first period,
The fourth period is the second period,
The third round is the first round,
The third effect is an effect corresponding to the first effect,
The game machine characterized in that the fourth effect is an effect corresponding to the second effect.

(Appendix b9) The game stand according to any one of appendices b1 to b8,
The game table is a pachinko machine or a slot machine.

(Appendix b10) Production means;
Production control means capable of controlling at least the production means;
A game machine comprising operating means,
The effect means is a means capable of executing at least a plurality of effects,
At least one of the plurality of effects is a first effect,
The first effect is an effect executed at least during the jackpot period,
The jackpot is composed of at least a plurality of rounds,
At least one of the plurality of rounds is a first round;
The effect control means is means capable of determining an effect to be executed in the second period in the first period,
The second period is a period that starts after the first period ends,
The effect control means is a means for determining at least an effect to be executed in the second period when the first condition is satisfied,
The requirement that the first condition is satisfied is a requirement that includes at least the end of the first round,
In the first case, the effect means is a means capable of ending the first effect and executing an effect executed in the second period from the beginning in the second period.
The first case is a case where the first period is in progress.
Said 1st case is a case where said 1st production is performed by said production control means,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the first case is a case where the first condition is satisfied.

(Appendix c1) Production means,
A game machine comprising operating means,
The production means is means for executing only a part of the first production in the first period,
The production means is a means capable of executing at least a second production in the second period,
The production means is a means capable of stopping at least the first production when the first period ends,
The second period is a period that starts after the first period ends,
The game table, wherein the second presentation is started from the top during the second period.

(Appendix c2) The game stand according to Appendix c1,
The game stand according to claim 1, wherein the effect means is means for executing the first effect from the middle during the first period.

(Appendix c3) The gaming table according to appendix c1 or c2,
The game stand according to claim 1, wherein the presentation means is means for executing the first presentation partway during the first period.

(Appendix c4) The game stand according to any one of appendices c1 to c3,
The gaming machine characterized in that the first effect is one of effects determined from a plurality of effects in the first period.

(Appendix c5) The gaming machine according to any one of appendices c1 to c4,
A plurality of production means are provided,
At least one of the plurality of presentation means is a first presentation means,
The first effect means is the effect means,
At least one of the plurality of effect means is a second effect means.

(Appendix c6) The game stand according to appendix c5,
The second effect means is means for executing at least a part of the third effect in the third period,
The second effect means is a means capable of executing at least a fourth effect in a fourth period,
The second effect means is a means capable of stopping at least the third effect when the third period ends,
The fourth period is a period that starts after the third period ends,
In the fourth period, the fourth stage starts from the top, and the game table is characterized in that

(Appendix c7) The game stand according to appendix c6,
The game table characterized in that the second effect means is means for executing the third effect from the middle in the third period.

(Appendix c8) The game stand according to appendix c6 or c7,
The game table characterized in that the second effect means is means for executing the third effect partway during the third period.

(Supplementary note c9) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes c6 to c8,
The third period is the first period,
The fourth period is the second period,
The gaming machine characterized in that the third effect is an effect corresponding to the first effect.

(Appendix c10) The game stand according to any one of appendices c1 to c9,
The game table is a pachinko machine or a slot machine.

(Appendix c11) Production means;
A game machine comprising at least an effect control means capable of controlling the effect means,
The effect means is a means capable of executing at least a plurality of effects,
At least one of the plurality of effects is a first effect,
The effect control means is means capable of determining an effect to be executed in the second period in the first period,
The second period is a period that starts after the first period ends,
The effect control means is a means for determining at least an effect to be executed in the second period when the first condition is satisfied,
The production means is means for executing only a part of the first production when the first period is in progress.
In the first case, the effect means is a means capable of ending the first effect and executing an effect executed in the second period from the beginning in the second period.
The first case is a case where the first period is in progress.
Said 1st case is a case where said 1st production is performed by said production control means,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the first case is a case where the first condition is satisfied.

  Next, other examples of the gaming machine (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a spinning game machine such as a slot machine) according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side). As an external structure, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is referred to as an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. In addition, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is configured in a frame shape so as to be inside thereof. Is a door member having an opening 116. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, a front frame door opening sensor (not shown) that detects opening of the front frame door 106 when the front frame door 106 is opened is provided.

  The front frame door 106 can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “balls”) in a portion below the opening 116 and guide the game balls to the launching device 110. The upper plate 126 is provided, the lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 by the player's operation are discharged to the lower plate 128. A ball release button 130, a ball discharge lever 132 for discharging game balls stored in the lower plate 128 by a player's operation to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box), and a player's operation to the launcher 110. The ball launching handle 134 for launching the guided game ball to the game area 124 of the game board 200, and the effect of changing the effect mode of various effect devices 206 (not shown in FIG. 159) by the player's operation. A card button 136, a chance button lamp 138 that causes the chance button 136 to emit light, a setting operation unit 137 that allows various settings and the like by operation of a setting person (for example, a player or a game shop clerk), and a card unit (CR unit) A ball lending operation button 140 for instructing ball lending, a return operation button 142 for instructing the card unit to return the player's balance, and a ball lending display section for displaying the player's balance and card unit status ( (Not shown). In addition, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. .

  The setting operation unit 137 is a push button type switch that can be pressed by the setter, and a confirm (OK) button, an upper button positioned above the confirm button, a lower button positioned below the confirm button, and confirm A right button positioned to the right of the button, a left button positioned to the left of the confirm button, and a cancel (C) button positioned further to the right of the right button. The setting operation unit 137 includes an operation unit sensor that detects the pressing of each button. The setting operation unit 137 of this example has a unit structure in which buttons and operation unit sensors are integrated. At least one of the buttons of the setting operation unit 137 functions as a chance button that changes the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 161) by the player's operation when a predetermined condition is satisfied. It may be.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  FIG. 160 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 159 as seen from the back side. The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is formed at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball that has passed through the communicating hole and dropped to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is displayed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the payout control unit 600 (see FIG. 162). The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. To pay out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the drawing, the main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control unit 300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and the production based on the processing information generated by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs the control process and the first sub-board 160 that houses the first sub-board 160 that includes the rotary volume control switch 161 that adjusts the volume output from the pachinko machine 100 by the operation of the game shop clerk. A second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-control unit 500 that performs a control process related to the production based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400; An error release switch that constitutes a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to payout of game balls and that releases an error by the operation of a game store clerk 68, a payout board case 172 for storing a payout board 170, a launch board case 176 for housing a launch board 174 that constitutes a launch control unit 630 for performing a control process relating to the launch of a game ball, and a power source for various electrical gaming machines. And a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by the operation of a game clerk and an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs an RWM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when the power is turned on. A power board case 184 that houses the power board 182, a CR interface unit 186 that transmits and receives signals between the dispensing control unit 600 and the card unit, and a main board for outputting information of the pachinko machine 100 to an external hall computer or the like 156, the first sub-board 160, etc. and the hall computer, etc. It is provided with a relay substrate 188, the to relay.

  The main board 156, the first sub board 160, the second sub board 164 and the like are provided on the back surface of the game board 200 because they need to be changed for each model, and the payout board 170, the launch board 174, the power board 182 and the like are provided. Since it is used in common by a plurality of models, the outer frame 102 is provided.

  FIG. 161 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined. An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 at substantially the center. The effect device 206 performs the effect by operating the effect movable body 224, and details thereof will be described later.

  The game board 200 of this example is a so-called game board for right-handed machines. In the right-handed machine, by changing the launch strength of the game ball by operating the ball launching handle 134, the falling path of the game ball is divided into a right path on the right side from the effect device 206 and a left path on the left side from the effect device 206. be able to. In this example, to a normal symbol starting port 228, a normal symbol starting port 229, a first special symbol starting port 230, a second special symbol starting port 232 (open state), variable winning ports 234, 235 (open state), etc., which will be described later. The ease of entering the ball differs between a game ball that falls on the right path and a game ball that falls on the left path.

  For each of the normal symbol start port 229, the second special symbol start port 232 and the variable winning port 235, the normal symbol start port 229, the second special symbol start port 232 and the variable winning port 235 are arranged on the right path. Therefore, it is relatively easy to enter the game ball falling on the right path, and it is relatively difficult or impossible to enter the game ball falling on the left path. On the other hand, for each of the normal symbol starting port 228, the first special symbol starting port 230, and the variable winning port 234, a game that falls on the left path due to the influence of the arrangement pattern of the game nails 238, the warp device 242, and the like. It is relatively easy to enter a ball, and it is relatively difficult to enter a game ball that falls on the right path. In the present embodiment, a right-handed machine is taken as an example, but a right-handed machine may be used.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for displaying decorative images and various images (moving images or still images) used for production. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  Below the gaming area 124, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol hold lamp 218, and a second special symbol hold lamp 220 A normal symbol holding lamp 216 and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. In addition, hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol”, the special symbol as “special symbol”, the first special symbol as “special symbol 1”, and the second special symbol as “special symbol 2”.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in the present embodiment. The special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214 are display devices for displaying the special figure, and are configured by 7 segment LEDs in the present embodiment.

  The universal figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of universal figure floating games (details will be described later) that are on hold. It is possible to hold. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 and the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games that are held (details will be described later). In the present embodiment, the special figure variable games are predetermined. It is possible to hold up to a number (for example, 4). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. Turns on when switching to the probability state, and turns off when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, a predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general winning opening 226, a normal start port 228, 229, a special view 1 start port 230, and a special view 2 start port 232, are variable around the rendering device 206. Winning ports 234 and 235 are arranged.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are provided on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). In the case of winning, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In the present embodiment, a game ball is paid out to a player as a consideration for winning (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “prize ball”) and a ball lent to a player (hereinafter referred to as “lending ball”). May be included).

  The general map start port 228 and the general map start port 229 are configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed through a predetermined area of the game area 124. In the embodiment, one general-purpose start port 228 is disposed on the left path of the game board 200, and one general-purpose start port 229 is disposed on the right path. Unlike the ball that entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the ordinary drawing starting port 228 or the universal drawing starting port 229 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map start port 228 or the general map start port 229, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one special figure 1 starting port 230 is provided at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the special opening 1 starting port 230, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls as prize balls to the upper plate 126. Then, the special figure variable game (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “special figure 1 variable game”) by the special figure 1 display device 212 is started. Note that the ball that has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The special figure 2 starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electrical chew), and in this embodiment, only one is provided on the right path. The special figure 2 starting port 232 is provided with a pair of blade members 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right. When the blade members 232a are closed, it is impossible to enter a ball. When 210 hits and stops and displays the symbol, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the special opening 2 232, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. Then, a special figure variable game (hereinafter, also referred to as “special figure 2 variable game”) by the special figure 2 display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the special figure 2 starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The variable winning openings 234 and 235 are called a large winning opening or an attacker. In the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is provided below the center of the game board 200, and the variable winning opening 235 is on the right path. Only one is provided. The variable winning openings 234 and 235 are each provided with a door member that can be freely opened and closed, and a ball cannot be entered while the door member is closed. If the special figure display device stops and displays the jackpot symbol after winning the special figure variation game, for example, one door member of the variable prize opening 234, 235 is closed at a predetermined time interval (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing time) It opens and closes at a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times) for a time of 1.5 seconds. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, 235, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as a winning ball. The balls that have entered the variable winning openings 234 and 235 are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disk-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with strength according to the operation amount of the player's ball launch handle 134, and The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are made to pass through the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 by the 146 and the launcher 148, and are launched into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the direction of travel by the batting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning port (general winning port 226, variable winning ports 234, 235) or Wins at the starting port (Special Figure 1 starting port 230, Special Figure 2 starting port 232), or wins without winning any of the winning port or starting port, or just passing through the normal starting ports 228, 229 Reach mouth 240.

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the stage device 206, a warp device 242 (242a, 242b) and a front stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is placed in the area where the game ball cannot roll. It is arranged. Further, a fourth symbol display device 248 for displaying the fourth symbol is disposed on the upper right side of the effect movable body 224. The 4th symbol display device 248 includes two square lamps. The two lamps are arranged side by side. For example, LEDs are used as the light sources of these two lamps. The upper lamp corresponds to FIG. 1 and the lower lamp corresponds to FIG. The fourth symbol display device 248 may include only one common lamp corresponding to both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Further, the fourth symbol may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Moreover, the 4th symbol display apparatus may be provided in the production | presentation apparatus 206 (center accessory) like this example. In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door or a shutter) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are positioned behind the warp device 242, the front stage 244, and the effect movable body 224. The warp device 242 discharges the game ball that has entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the front stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b. The front stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball carried by a nail of the game board 200, and the passed ball is in the center of the front stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry to 230.

  The effect movable body 224 of this example includes a horizontally long flat panel on which the model name of the pachinko machine 100 and the like are displayed. The effect movable body 224 is movable by a stepping motor (not shown) so that the front of the decorative symbol display device 208 can be moved in the vertical direction within a plane substantially parallel to the display screen.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 covers the inner end portions of the shielding device 246 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main control unit 300 according to the command transmitted by the main control unit 300 The payout control unit 600 controls the game ball payout, the launch control unit 630 performs the game ball launch control, and the power supply control unit 660 controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. .

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a time And a counter timer 312 for measuring the number of times and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in the program processing. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  Further, the basic circuit 302 includes a random value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (a counter circuit) 318 that is used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. This circuit includes two counters) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through each start port, winning port, variable winning port, or opening the front frame door A sensor circuit for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a sensor, an inner frame opening sensor, and a lower plate full sensor, and outputting an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302 322, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device such as the special figure 1 display device 212 or the special figure 2 display device 214, and a predetermined figure A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the display device, for example, the general map display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, the general map hold lamp 216, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220, the high Driving circuit 330 for performing display control of the center lamp 222 and the like, and various movable members such as a blade member 232a of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 and door members of the variable winning ports 234 and 235 are opened and closed. A drive circuit 334 for controlling the solenoid 332 is connected. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random value generation circuit 318 are provided separately, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random value generation circuit 318.

  When the sphere detection sensor 320 detects that a sphere is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230. Store in the register. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the special figure 2 starting port 232, the random number generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is lower than a predetermined value (9 V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control section main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the 1 sub control part 400 and the payout control part 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication. The main control unit 300 sends commands and the like to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. The first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 are configured such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300. However, the information communication between the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the payout control unit 600 may be performed by bidirectional communication.

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based mainly on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time and frequency. It is installed. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The basic circuit 402 is provided with a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier) and a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138). A driving circuit 432 for controlling the driving of the shielding device 246, a shielding device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button sensor 426 for detecting the pressing of the chance button 136, and an output from the speaker 120. A volume adjustment switch 161 (not shown in FIG. 162) for adjusting the volume to be operated, an operation unit sensor (not shown) for detecting depression of each button of the setting operation unit 137, and detection signals from these sensors A sensor circuit 428 that outputs to the basic circuit 402 and a signal stored in the ROM 406 based on a signal from the CPU 404 Are connected to the VDP (Video Display Processor) 434 for displaying an image on the decorative pattern display unit 208 generates display image using a work area of VRAM436 reads image data or the like, the.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, the number of times, and the like. doing. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The basic circuit 502 is provided with a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like are stored.

  The basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 that detects the current position of the effect movable body 224, and a detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424. Is output to the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game table frame lamp drive for controlling the game table frame lamp 542 The circuit 540 is connected to a serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and wins or rents a ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604. It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch control are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to the unit 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.

  Next, referring to FIGS. 163A to 163D, the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the universal figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of figures and ordinary drawings will be described. FIG. 163 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of FIG. 1, and FIG. 163 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of FIG. The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the special figure 1 start opening 230, and the special figure 2 start opening 232 indicates that the ball has entered 2 The special figure 2 variable game is started on condition that the start sensor is detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. When the special figure 2 variable game is started, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs “variable display of special figure 2” by repeating all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. . These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display in the present embodiment. When the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation in FIG. 1 elapses, the special figure 1 display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1 and the fluctuation time determined before the fluctuation starts in the special figure 2. After the elapse, the special figure 2 display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 2. Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is stopped, or after the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 2”, the stop symbol form of special figure 2 is displayed. Until stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol fluctuation stop display referred to in the present embodiment, the stop symbol mode of special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed after the "fluctuation display of special figure 1 or 2" is started. A series of displays until this is done is referred to as symbol variation stop display. The symbol variation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  In FIG. 163 (a), seven types of special figures “Special figure A” to “Special figure G” are shown as the stop symbol forms in the symbol fluctuation stop display of special figure 1. In FIG. 163 (a), the white portions in the drawing indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on. "Special Figure A" is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, "Special Figure B" is a 7R special jackpot symbol, and "Special Figure C" is a 7R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, whether or not a big hit in the special figure variable game is determined by lottery of hardware random numbers, and whether or not a special big hit is determined and the number of rounds are determined by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is a special figure variation game after the jackpot game ends, and the difference in probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot). Hereinafter, a state with a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “special figure certain change” or simply “probable change”), and a state with a low probability is specially designated. This is called a low probability state. In addition, after the 15R special jackpot game ends, after the 7R special jackpot game ends and after the 7R jackpot game ends, the state shifts to the time-saving state (electric support state). Although the short time will be described in detail later, the short time state is referred to as a normal high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “general probability change”), and the non-short time state is referred to as a general low probability state. “Special Figure A”, which is a 15R special jackpot symbol, and “Special Figure B”, which is a 7R special jackpot symbol, are symbols that become a special figure high probability common figure high probability state after the jackpot game ends, and are 7R jackpot symbols. “Special figure C” is a symbol that becomes a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state after the end of the big hit game. These “special drawing A”, “special drawing B”, and “special drawing C” are symbols that have a relatively large advantage over the player.

  "Special figure D" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden probability change, and is a symbol that becomes a special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state after the jackpot game ends. That is, “Special Figure D” is 2R compared to “Special Figure A” which is 15R and “Special Figure B” which is 7R.

  “Special figure E” is a 2R jackpot symbol called latent probability variation or hidden probability variation. As will be described later, when “Special Figure E” is stopped and displayed in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state (so-called “open” time 100 ms × 2R) ends. If the special figure E is stopped and displayed in a state other than the low probability state, the special figure high probability will be displayed after the big hit game (opening time 29000 ms × 2R). Transition to the high probability state (see FIGS. 169 (a) and (b)). In other words, the “special figure E” indicates that the action during the big hit game and the game state to be shifted thereafter are determined according to the game state when the stop display is made (in this example, whether or not the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state). It is a different design.

  “Special figure F” is a small hit symbol, and is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. Further, the “special chart G” is an off-line symbol, and is a symbol that is relatively less advantageous to the player.

  In FIG. 163 (b), four types of special figures “Special figure a” to “Special figure d” are shown as the stop symbol forms in the symbol fluctuation stop display of Special figure 2. “Special figure a” is a 15R special jackpot symbol, “Special figure b” is a 7R special jackpot symbol, “Special figure c” is a 7R jackpot symbol, and “Special figure d” is a missed symbol. In the present embodiment, seven types of special maps (of which five types are big hits) are used as the special symbol 2 as the special symbols 1 to 7 as shown in FIG. As the stop symbol pattern, four types of special maps (three of which are big hits) are used. By configuring in this way, there is a case where it is possible to provide a difference between the advantages of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 without changing the probability of being a big hit and the probability of being probable among the big wins. In this example, the big hit of Special Figure 1 includes sudden probability changes and latent probability changes that hardly give out balls, whereas the big hit of Special Figure 2 does not include sudden probability changes and latent probability changes. The advantage of special figure 2 is higher than that of special figure 1.

  FIG. 163 (c) shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 9” and “Decoration 10” represent the numbers “1” to “9” and “0”, respectively. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the special figure 1 starting port 230 or the special figure 2 starting port 232, that is, the ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, or the special figure 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided on the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the start port 232. In the symbol display area, “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... → “decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →. “Change design of symbols”.

  And then, "Special Figure A" 15R special jackpot, "Special Figure B" 7R special jackpot, "Special Figure C" 7R big jackpot, "Special Figure a" 15R special jackpot, "Special Figure b" 7R special jackpot When the 7R jackpot of “special drawing c” is notified, a combination of symbols in which three same decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, “decoration 1 -decoration 1 -decoration 1” or Display “decoration 2—decoration 2”). When the 15R special jackpot of “Special Figure A” and the 15R special jackpot of “Special Figure a” are explicitly notified, a combination of three symbols with the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, “Decoration 3-Decoration 3- “Decoration 3”, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”, etc.) are stopped and displayed.

  In addition, when notifying 2R big hit called “special drawing E” latent probability change (hidden probability change) or “special drawing F” small hit, “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. To do. When a 2R jackpot called “sudden change” of “special drawing D” is notified, “decoration 1-decoration 3—decoration 5” is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when notifying of the difference between “special drawing G” and “special drawing d”, symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in FIG. 163 (c) are stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  FIG. 163 (d) shows an example of a usual stop display symbol. In this embodiment, there are three types of stop-display modes for normal maps: “general map A” and “general map B” which are hit symbols, and “general map C” which is a misplaced symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that the sphere has passed through the general map start port 228 and the general map start port 229, the general map display device 210 turns on all seven segments and displays one in the center. Repeatedly turn on the segment of “Usual change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure A” or “special figure B” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the deviation of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure C” is stopped and displayed. To do. Also in FIG. 163 (d), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal is input executes a main control unit main process according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306 after resetting by a reset interrupt.

  First, in step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In the initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is set. Enable operation, set initial values, etc. In this embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103 following step S101, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted. In step S105 subsequent to step S103, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value. When it is less than (9 V in this example), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In the initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, a second output port, etc.) 1) a process of outputting a clear signal from the output port 1), a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like.

  In step S109 subsequent to step S107, it is determined whether or not the state before power interruption (before power interruption) is restored. If the state before power interruption is not restored (the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is changed). In the case of initializing), the process proceeds to initialization processing (step S113). Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when an RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 is operated by a store clerk or the like is on (indicating that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is on (RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, all 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 is added to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0. Thus, the checksum is calculated, and it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off. In the command setting transmission process (step S233) in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later, the first sub control unit 400. Sent to.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and, like the power recovery command, the command setting transmission process (in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300) ( In step S233), it is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

  In step S115 subsequent to step S113, the basic random number initial value updating process is performed after setting the interrupt prohibition. In this basic random number initial value update process, the initial values of four random number counters for generating the normal winning random number, the special random number, the special figure 1 random value, and the special figure 2 random value are generated. The four initial value generation random number counters and the two random number counters for generating each of the normal figure variation time determination random value and the special figure variation time determination random value are updated. For example, if the numerical value range that can be taken as the random number value for determining the normal time variation is 0 to 100, the value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the random value for determining the normal time variation time provided in the RAM 308 and acquired. Then, 1 is added to the obtained value and stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. The initial value generation random number counter is also updated in a basic random number initial value update process (step S207) described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

  Next, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process. The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this example, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt processing is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. At a predetermined cycle.

  First, in step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed. In step S203 following step S201, the WDT 314 is periodically updated so that the WDT 314 count value exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this example) and no WDT interruption occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). Therefore (in this example, the restart is performed once in about 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt).

  In step S205 subsequent to step S203, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower pan full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. The input is monitored for the presence or absence of a detection signal, and stored in a signal state storage area provided for each of the various sensors 320 in the RAM 308. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interruption process is started, in step S205, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the sphere detection sensor, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal.

  In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal) is stored. In step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is pre-determined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal present, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning opening 226, the variable winning openings 234, 235, the special figure 1 starting opening 230, and the special figure 2 starting opening 232, or the ordinary drawing starting opening 228. 229, it is determined that there was a passage. In other words, it is determined that a prize has been received at these winning ports 226, 234, 235 and the starting ports 230, 232, 228, 229. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before, no previous detection signal, no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 subsequent to step S205, a basic random number initial value update process is performed, and in the next step S209, a basic random number update process is performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the initial value generation random number counter updated in step S115 is updated, and then used in the main control unit 300. Four random number counters for generating the random value, the special figure 1 random value, and the special figure 2 random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made a round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired, and the random number counter storage area Set to.

  For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating a normal winning random value has made one round next, in addition to setting the random number counter for generating a winning random value Keep it. In addition to the above initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal signal has made one round next, the random number counter for generating the random number value for the normal value, generating the random number value for the special figure 1 The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for use and the random number counter for generating the special figure 2 random number value have made one round each. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the special figure 1 random value and the counter for acquiring the special figure 2 random value are provided separately, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211 following step S209, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213 following step S211, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the time for displaying and changing the symbol on the special symbol display device 212 and the time for displaying and changing the symbol on the special symbol display device 212 are counted. Special figure 1 display symbol update timer, Special figure 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the special figure 2 display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined time Various timers including a timer for counting the closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S215 subsequent to step S213, a winning opening counter updating process is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when the winning holes 226, 234, 235 and the starting holes 230, 232, 228, 229 have been won, a prize ball provided in the RAM 308 for each winning hole or for each starting hole. The value in the number storage area is read out, and 1 is added to set the original prize ball number storage area.

  In step S217 following step S215, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, it is determined whether or not there has been a prize at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the special figure 2 starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting ports 228 and 229, and the variable winning ports 234 and 235. Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S205.

  When the special figure 1 starting port 230 is won and the corresponding special figure 1 holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the special figure 1 starting port 230 of the random number generation circuit (hard random number circuit) 318 A special figure 1 winning random number value generated by performing predetermined processing on a value stored in a corresponding built-in counter value storage register is acquired, and a special figure is generated from a special figure 1 random number generation random number counter provided in the RAM 308. One random value is acquired and stored in the special figure 1 random value storage area in the order of acquisition. The special figure 1 winning random number values and the special figure 1 random number values in the special figure 1 random value storage area are stored in the same number as the special figure 1 reservation number stored in the special figure 1 reservation number storage area. In the special figure 1 random value storage area, each time the special figure 1 holding number decreases, the data of the combination of the special figure 1 winning random number and the special figure 1 random value having the highest holding order (first) is deleted. At the same time, processing is performed so that the data holding order of the remaining special figure 1 winning random number value and special figure 1 random value group is incremented by one. Also, each time the special figure 1 holding number increases, a new special figure 1 is added to the next holding order of the data of the combination of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random value having the lowest (last) holding order. The data of a set of winning random numbers and special figure 1 random values is written.

  When the special figure 2 starting port 232 is won and the corresponding special figure 2 reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, a built-in counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232 of the random number generation circuit 318 The special figure 2 winning random number value generated by performing predetermined processing on the value stored in the value storage register is acquired, and the special figure 2 random number value is acquired from the special figure 2 random value generation random number counter provided in the RAM 308. Then, they are stored in the special figure 2 random value storage area in the order of acquisition. The special figure 2 winning random number values and the special figure 2 random number values in the special figure 2 random number storage area are stored in the same number as the special figure 2 reservation number stored in the special figure 2 reservation number storage area. In the special figure 2 random value storage area, each time the special figure 2 hold number decreases, the data of the combination of the special figure 2 winning random value and the special figure 2 random value with the highest holding order is deleted, and the remainder The special ranking 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random value set data are processed so that the holding order is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 2 hold number increases by one, a special special figure 2 winning random number value is added to the next holding rank of the data of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random value group having the lowest holding order. And special figure 2 random value set data is written.

  Also, special figure 1 starting information (a pair of special figure 1 winning random value and special figure 1 random value) or special figure 2 starting information (a pair of special figure 2 winning random value and special figure 2 random value) has been newly acquired. In this case, the special figure prefetching process is executed using the start information. Details of the special figure prefetching process will be described later.

  If there is a winning at the general chart start port 228 or the general map start slot 229, and the corresponding general map hold number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is automatically displayed from the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal chart. Obtained as a winning random number value, obtains a regular random number value from a random number counter for generating a regular random number value provided in the RAM 308, and stores it in a regular random value storage area in the order of acquisition. The number of combinations of the random numbers and the common random numbers in the random number value storage area is stored in the same number as the number of reserved general numbers stored in the general number hold number storage area. In the standard random number storage area, each time the number of pending charts decreases by one, the data of the combination of the random number value and the random number value with the highest ranking (first) in the ranking is deleted and the remaining Is processed so that the holding order of the data of the pair of the common figure winning random number and the common figure random number is incremented by one. In addition, each time the number of pending orders increases by one, a new winning figure random number value and a new standing figure winning random number value in the next holding rank of the data of the combination of the random number value and the random number value with the lowest ranking (last) Data of a set of regular random numbers is written. When there is a winning at the variable winning opening 234, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning opening 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening 234. When a winning is made at the variable winning opening 235, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning opening 235 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening 235.

  In step S219 following step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. Note that the output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221 following step S219, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the general diagram state update process in the middle of the normal map change display (the value of the above-described general map display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the general map display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the general map display device 210 performs normal variable display (normal map variable game). Also, in the general state update process at the timing when the normal map change display time has elapsed (the timing at which the value of the general map display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), When the 7-segment LED constituting the general-purpose display device 210 is turned on / off to control the display mode, and the normal-map hit flag is off, the general-purpose display is displayed so that the display mode of the off symbol is displayed. The 7 segment LED constituting the device 210 is controlled to be turned on / off. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the universal symbol display device 210 is either one of the winning symbols (common symbol A or universal symbol B shown in FIG. 163 (d)) and the off symbol (common symbol C shown in FIG. 163 (d)). The final symbol is displayed. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), A normal operation is set in the setting area, and a predetermined open period (for example, 2 seconds), a solenoid for driving to open / close the blade member 232a of the special opening 2 232 (a part of various solenoids 332), A signal for holding 232a in the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 500 ms), A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening and closing driving, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the usual figure fluctuation game is out of place, the usual figure flag is turned off. In the case where the usual figure hit flag is off, even in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the special map 2 start port 232 is not performed (the state of the normal map is inactive), and the number of the general map variable games that are on hold Is set to be 1 or more, and is executed using a pair of the first ordinary winning random number value and the ordinary random number value in the ordinary random number value storage area.

  The main control unit 300 obtains the normal start information (a combination of the normal winning random number and the normal random number) from the earliest (most recently stored) holding position in the normal random number storage area. On the basis of the obtained normal figure winning random number value in the usual figure starting information, the value of the usual figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308, etc., the success / failure determination table stored in the ROM 306 (FIGS. 167 (a) and (b) described later) (Ref.) Is used to determine whether or not to win or not (determination of success / failure). Next, the main control unit 300, based on the general random number value in the acquired general map start information and the determined determination result, etc., determines the general map determination table stored in the ROM 306 (the hit shown in FIG. 167 (c)). The symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the normal variation display is determined using the hour action table). Next, the main control unit 300, for example, selects various tables (for example, timer number selection (not shown)) stored in the ROM 306 based on the determined success / failure determination result, the stop symbol, the acquired random number for determining the normal time change time, and the like. The normal fluctuation display time (timer number) is determined using a table, and the fluctuation display time is stored in the normal figure fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the normal figure fluctuation display time.

  The main control unit 300 extracts the earliest general chart start information from the normal random number value storage area, erases the earliest general chart start information from the normal random number value storage area, and Decrease the number of reserved maps in the area by 1. At this time, the general chart start information taken out from the standard random number storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-mentioned determination is made based on the general chart start information stored in the temporary area. Also good.

  The main control unit 300 sets the common figure flag provided in the RAM 308 to ON when the determination result is successful (winning), and sets the common figure flag to OFF when not successful.

  Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following processes is performed according to the state of the special figure 2.

  For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on and off. Repeatedly turn on / off drive control. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the special figure 2 variable display (special figure 2 variable game). In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 15R big hit flag, a 7R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a small hit flag, a loss flag, a special figure probability fluctuation flag, and a normal figure probability fluctuation flag. . These flags are set to ON or OFF based on the stop symbol determined in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (the timing when the special figure 2 display symbol update timer value has changed from 1 to 0), for example, when the 15R big hit flag is on 163 (b), when the special figure a, 7R big hit flag is on, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure b, 7R big hit flag is on, and when the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, When the special flag c and the off flag are turned on, the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is controlled to be turned on / off so that the special figure d is displayed. 2 is set to indicate that the stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs fixed display of any one of the special figures a to d.

  Thereafter, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, if the time reduction number stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number. If not, turn off the time flag. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Also, if the probability variation number stored in the probability variation number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the probability variation number, and if the subtraction result is 1 to 0, the special figure probability variation flag. Turn off.

  Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the setting of the RAM 308 is set. In order to set a special figure 2 in operation in the area and wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that a big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. In addition, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Or until the opening of the door member of the variable prize opening 234, 235 (a part of various solenoids 332). In addition, a signal for holding the door member in the opened state is output, and information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in a closed state is output to a solenoid for opening / closing the door member of the variable prize opening 234, 235 (a part of various solenoids 332), and a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 is used. Information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, the door member opening / closing control is repeated a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 15 rounds or 7 rounds in the case of Special Figure 2, 15 rounds, 7 rounds or 2 rounds in the case of Special Figure 1) and finished. In the special figure 2 state update process started at the timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period in which an image for informing the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is ended is displayed. Therefore, information indicating the effect standby period is set in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Also, if the normal probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of the big hit game, the hour / hour number (for example, 100 times) is set in the hour / hour number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 and provided in the RAM 308. Turn on the short time flag. If the ordinary probability fluctuation flag is set to OFF, the number of time reductions is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned on.

  The short time here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit game to the start of the next big hit game. When the time reduction flag is set to ON, the normal figure high probability state (normal figure certain change) is established. There is a higher probability of hitting in the general-game variable game in the high-probability state than in the normal-game low-probability state. In addition, in the normal figure high probability state, the fluctuation time of the general figure variable game is shorter than in the normal figure low probability state (normal figure variable short). Furthermore, in the normal high probability state, compared to the normal low probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 is likely to be longer (electrical chew extension). In addition, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. The state in which any one of these ordinary figure change, universal figure change, and electric Chu extension is set is referred to as an electric support (starting prize winning support by electric tulip) state.

  In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, if the game is in a high probability state during a big hit game, a predetermined number of variable winning holes 234 and 235 will be placed in the special figure 2 start opening 232 during the big hit game until a game ball enters. There is a problem that game balls enter and the number of game balls that can be acquired during a big hit increases, resulting in an increase in euphoria. This is to solve this problem.

  If the special figure probability variation flag is set to ON, the probability variation number (for example, 10,000 times) is set in the probability variation number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 simultaneously with the end of the big hit game.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of order, the out-of-game flag is turned on. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. However, in this example, since the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is different from the stop symbol aspect of special figure 2, the timing at which the special figure 1 variable display time has elapsed (the value of the special figure 1 display symbol update timer becomes 1 to 0) The special figure 1 state update process starting at the same time) is different from the special figure 2 state update process. In the special figure 1 state update process started at the above timing, for example, when the 15R big hit flag is on and the special figure probability variation flag is on, the special figure A shown in FIG. When the figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure B, the 7R big hit flag is on, when the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, the special figure C, the 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, When the figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure D, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and when the common figure probability fluctuation flag is off, the special figure E, the small hit flag is on The special segment F is controlled to turn on / off the 7-segment LED constituting the special diagram 1 display device 212 so that the special flag F is turned on and the special flag G is turned on. Special map 1 stop To set indicating that it is being displayed. By performing this control in the special figure 1 state update process started at the above timing, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs a fixed display of any one of the special figures A to G. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, first, a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 2 (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed (step S229), and then a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 1 (a special drawing 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). In the special drawing 2 related lottery process, the floating game of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 is not performed, and the state of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 are both inactive and is held. The game is executed using the first special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value in the special figure 2 random value storage area, starting from the fact that the number of variable games is 1 or more. The special figure 1 related lottery process does not perform the floating game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the state of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both inactive, and is suspended. The game is executed using the first special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value in the special figure 1 random value storage area as a starting condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more.

  Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. In addition, when the number of reserved special figure 2 variable games is 1 or more, the lottery process and the variable game related to the special figure 1 variable game hold are not performed. In addition, the notification of the result of the special symbol variable game success / failure determination by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the special symbol 2 starting port 232 is notified. Priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the present embodiment, a special figure variable game with a high advantage (in this example, special figure 2 variable game) is given priority over a low special figure variable game (in this example, special figure 1 variable game). . For this reason, it may be easy to give a difference in the advantage of the gaming state.

  In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (special) from the earliest (most previously stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. 2), and based on the special figure 2 winning random number value in the obtained special figure 2 start information, the value of the special figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308, and the like. Is used as a big hit or a small hit (in this example, the small hit can be selected only in FIG. 1) using the determination table (see FIGS. 168 (a) to (d) described later). Or whether it is determined to be out of place (judgment determination). Next, the main control unit 300 determines the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 (FIG. 169 (a), Using the symbol distribution table shown in FIG. 170 (a), the symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the variation display of the special diagram 2 is determined. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined success / failure determination result, the stop symbol, the special figure 2 holding number at the time of the determination, the acquired special figure variation time determination random number value, and the like. The variable display time (timer number) in FIG. 2 is determined using various tables (for example, a timer number selection table not shown).

  The main control unit 300 extracts the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, erases the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, 2 is subtracted from the special figure 2 hold number in the hold number storage area. At this time, the special figure 2 start information extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in the temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-described determination is performed based on the special figure 2 start information stored in the temporary area. You may do it.

  After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner.

  In the above description, the special figure 2 variable game having a high advantage is started in preference to the special figure 1 variable game having a low advantage, and the special figure 2 hold is prioritized over the special figure 1 hold. Special figure 2 priority fluctuation is given as an example, but special figure 1 variable game with low advantage is started over special figure 2 variable game with high advantage, and special figure 1 suspension is The special figure 1 priority fluctuation | variation digested preferentially over hold may be sufficient. In addition, priority is not given to special figure 2 variable game and special figure 1 variable game, and the start opening prize is started in the order in which the special figure variable games related to the holding of each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are held at the start opening. It may be a forward variation. In the starting order winning order variation, the upper limit number of holds is 8 regardless of the special figures 1 and 2, and compared with the priority fluctuation in which the upper limit number of holds is 4 in each of the special figures 1 and 2 In some cases, the substantial upper limit of the number of holds can be increased.

  In the above description, it is assumed that the lottery process and the variable game relating to the holding of the other special figure are not performed according to the state of the special figure, but the invention is not limited to this, and the special figure state update described above is not performed. The process and the special figure related lottery process may be performed independently in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, respectively, so that a plurality of special figures may be changed simultaneously. In addition, when a plurality of special figures are changed at the same time, a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special figure are provided on the decorative symbol display device 208 or the lottery results of each special figure are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided, and the lottery results may be displayed separately, or the lottery results of a plurality of special drawings may be displayed in one area. In addition, when fluctuations related to a plurality of special figures are performed simultaneously, the lottery result of the special figure that stopped the fluctuation may affect the lottery result of the special figure that stops the fluctuation later.

  In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (in this embodiment, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, prefetch result information command Information that can specify the type of command, etc.), bits 0 to 10 are constituted by command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type). Further, in the present embodiment, a symbol variation start command and a symbol variation stop command related to a common symbol are also included as command types.

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off by the command transmission process described above. In addition, if the command type is a special symbol design change start (rotation start) command, the command data includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, outlier flags, special figure probability fluctuation flags, and special drawing related lottery processing. In the case of the symbol variation stop (rotation stop) command, including information indicating the timer number selected in, including the values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, outlier flags, special figure probability variation flags, etc. In the case of a start command and an end production start command, information including the value of a special figure probability variation flag, etc., and in the case of a jackpot round number designation command, information indicating the value of a special figure probability variation flag, the number of big hit rounds, etc. Is included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230, presence / absence of winning in the special figure 2 starting port 232, winning in the variable winning ports 234 and 235 Contains information indicating presence or absence. In the case of a prefetch result information command, information indicating the types of special figure 1 and special figure 2, the prefetch number stored in the prefetch number storage area described later, the stop symbol stored in the prefetch result storage unit, etc. Included.

  In addition, if the command type is a normal symbol variation start (rotation start) command, the command data includes values such as a universal symbol per unit flag, a general symbol deviation flag, a general symbol probability variation flag, etc. Information that includes information about the determined stop symbol and variation time, and in the case of a regular symbol variation stop (rotation stop) command, information indicating the value of the universal symbol per unit flag, the usual symbol deviation flag, the common symbol probability variation flag, etc. Is included.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the command data includes values such as various big hit flags, small hit flags, off-set flags, and special figure probability variation flags stored in the RAM 308, special figure 1 related lottery processes, and special figures. Information indicating the timer number selected in the FIG. 2 related lottery process, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, loss flags, special figure probability variation flags, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

  In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described special winning opening release setting transmission process, the command data includes the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held. Set the information that indicates. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission process, the command data includes the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held. Set the information that indicates.

  In step S233, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S235 following step S233, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a bottom pan full error is monitored. . When a front frame door open error or a lower pan full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating whether there is a front frame door open error or a lower pan full error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable prize winning ports 234 and 235, and the general diagram display device 210 and the special figure 1 display via the drive circuits 324, 326 and 330. Display data to be output to the device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is ON. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, the interrupt permission is set, and the like. Thereafter, the main control unit main process shown in FIG. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. After that, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.

  FIG. 166 (a) is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the special figure prefetch process executed in the winning acceptance process (step S217). In the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 prefetches the increased start information (newly acquired start information) in each of special figure 1 and special figure 2, and pre-stops the stop symbol before the success / failure determination process. The pre-determination result (special drawing prefetching result) is stored in the prefetching result storage unit (see FIGS. 166 (b) to 166 (e)) in the RAM 308.

  Here, in the RAM 308, the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 1 prefetch result and the number of special figure 1 prefetch results stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit are specially displayed. A special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area for storing as one pre-reading number is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 1 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 1 prefetching result with the highest rank (first) is erased and the remaining special figure 1 prefetching result Are processed so that the rank of the data is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 1 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 1 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 1 prefetch result data of the lowest rank (last).

  Also, in the RAM 308, the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 2 prefetch result and the number of special figure 2 prefetch results stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit are stored in the special figure 2 prefetch. A special figure 2 look-ahead number storage area for storing numbers is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 2 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 2 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 2 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 2 prefetching result having the highest rank is deleted and the order of the remaining special figure 2 prefetching result data Are processed so that they are incremented by one. Each time the special figure 2 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 2 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 2 prefetch data having the lowest rank.

  In the special figure prefetching process, first, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased (step S301). The determination as to whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased is made, for example, by referring to the special figure 2 hold number stored in the special figure 2 hold number storage area and the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area. The comparison is made with the number of pre-reads in FIG. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special figure 2 has increased when the special figure 2 hold number is larger than the special figure 2 prefetch number, and the special figure 2 hold number is equal to the special figure 2 prefetch number. It is determined that the starting information in Fig. 2 has not increased. When it is determined that the start information of FIG. 2 has increased, the process proceeds to step S303, and when it is determined that the start information of FIG. 2 has not increased, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S303, the increased special figure 2 starting information (a special figure 2 winning random value and a set of special figure 2 random values) is processed before the success / failure determination process in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229). FIG. 2 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 2 start information and the determination table for special determination 2 and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the special figure 2 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is selected. Prior determination is made before the success / failure determination process in the process (step S229). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S305 subsequent to step S303, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 prefetching result obtained in the prior determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 2 prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S307, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information of FIG. 1 has increased. The determination as to whether or not the start information of FIG. 1 has increased is made, for example, in the same way as in FIG. 2, the special figure 1 hold number stored in the special figure 1 hold number storage area and the special figure 1 prefetch number storage area This is done by comparing the special figure 1 pre-reading number stored in. If it is determined that the start information of FIG. 1 has increased, the process proceeds to step S309. If it is determined that the start information of FIG. Return to the winning acceptance process (step S217).

  In step S309, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not non-electric support is in progress. If it is determined that the non-electric support is being performed, the process proceeds to step S311. If it is determined that the non-electric support is not being performed (the electric support is being performed), the process proceeds to step S315. In this example, it is determined whether or not non-electric support is being performed, but it may be determined in step S309 whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 prefetch notice is satisfied. For example, the execution conditions of the special figure 1 pre-reading notice include conditions such as not being in a big hit game other than being in non-electric support.

  In step S311, the increased special figure 1 start information (a special figure 1 winning random value and a pair of special figure 1 random value) is processed before the success determination process in the special figure 1 lottery process (step S231). FIG. 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information and the determination table for special determination and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the special figure 1 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is selected as the special figure 1 related lottery. Prior determination is made before the success / failure determination process in the process (step S231). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S313 following step S311, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 prefetching result obtained in the prior determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the special figure prefetching process is terminated, and the process returns to the winning acceptance process (step S217) of the main control unit timer interruption process.

  In step S315, the pre-read result for the special figure 1 in the RAM 308 is stored in the RAM 308 in place of the stop symbol information instead of pre-reading the increased special figure 1 start information and indicating that the start information is not pre-read. Stored in the earliest free area of the copy. Thereafter, the special figure prefetching process is terminated, and the process returns to the winning acceptance process (step S217) of the main control unit timer interruption process.

  In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined. However, all start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. Further, in the above-described command setting transmission process (step S233), only the pre-read result of the starting information for the increase may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, or the pre-read result storage for special figure 1 and special figure 2 All the prefetching results in the section may be transmitted to the first sub-control section 400.

  In the present embodiment, pre-reading is always executed for the increased starting information of Special Figure 2, and pre-reading is always executed for the increased starting information of Special Figure 1 except during the electric support. Further, it may be determined by lottery whether to pre-read the starting information of the increased special figure 1 and special figure 2. Alternatively, in the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the prefetch result from the main control unit 300, for example, it may be determined by lottery whether to perform prefetch notification for each hold. Regardless of the gaming state (for example, whether or not non-electric support is in progress), when the start information increases, prefetching is always executed and the prefetching result is stored in the prefetching result storage unit. The result may be configured to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may determine whether or not to execute the lottery and effect using the pre-read result.

  166 (b) to 166 (e) exemplify a state in which prefetch result information and the like are stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 166 (b) shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 166 (b), the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in this embodiment) of storage areas as the number of special figure 1 variable games that can be held. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of Special Figure 1 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 166 (b), “Special Figure G” (out of line) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area “hold 1”, and “Special Figure G” is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area “hold 2”. "(Out of line)" is stored, "Special Figure F" (small hit) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "Hold 3", and "Special Figure A" is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "Hold 4". (15R special jackpot) is stored.

  FIG. 166 (c) shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 166 (c), the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in this embodiment) of storage areas as the number of special figure variable games that can be held. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 166 (c), “Special Figure d” (out of line) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area “hold 1”, and stop symbols are stored in the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4”. Information is not stored. In FIG. 166 (c), a state in which stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as “none”.

  FIG. 166 (d) shows an example of the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 during the electric support. As shown in FIG. 166 (d), “undecided” information is stored in the storage area “hold 1” instead of the stopped symbol information. In the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4”, neither stop symbol information nor “undecided” information is stored.

  As shown in FIG. 166 (e), in each storage area of the special chart 1 prefetch result storage section, not the stop symbol information but the “timer number” indicating the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable game is the prefetch result. May be stored. In the example shown in FIG. 166 (e), “timer 3” is stored as timer number information in the storage area “hold 1”, “timer 5” is stored as timer number information in the storage area “hold 2”, No timer number information is stored in the storage areas “hold 3” and “hold 4”. In FIG. 166 (e), a state in which timer number information is not stored is represented as “none”. In addition, when timer number information is stored in each storage area of the special chart 1 prefetch result storage unit, the timer number may be set so as to correspond to the success / failure result.

  In the above description, an example is given in which stop symbols and timer numbers are pre-determined, and stop symbol information and timer number information are stored in the prefetch result storage unit. While being stored in the result storage unit, it may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 as prefetching result information.

  Next, various tables used in the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. Various tables shown in FIGS. 167 to 170 are stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, for example.

  FIGS. 167 (a) and 167 (b) show an example of the success / failure determination table used when the success / failure determination is performed in the common drawing related lottery process (step S223). The success / failure determination table shown in FIGS. 167 (a) and 167 (b) is composed of items of “normal probability”, “random number range”, and “correction result”. The item “normal figure probability” indicates the normal figure probability (ordinary figure low probability or common figure high probability) at the time of determination of success or failure. The item “Random number range” indicates a numerical range to be compared with the acquired normal winning random number value. Here, the possible range of the normal winning random number in this example is 0 to 99 (the range of the numerical range is 100).

  The correct / incorrect determination table shown in FIG. 167 (a) is a normal / incorrect determination table used when the normal probability at the time of determination is low. As shown in FIG. 167 (a), when this success / failure determination table is used, the probability of winning is 1/100 (that is, 1%), and the probability of loss is 99/100.

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 167 (b) is a normal / failure determination table used when the normal probability at the time of determination is high. As shown in FIG. 167 (b), when this success / failure determination table is used, the probability of winning is about 100/100 (that is, 100%), and the probability of loss is 0%. When this success / failure determination table is compared with the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 167 (a), the winning probability is 100 times. In this way, it is possible to design so that only the hit is selected in the usual high probability state (during short-time operation). Further, the probability of deviation may be higher than 0% at the time of short-time operation, but the probability of hit selection being higher at the time of short-time operation than at the time of short-time operation (ordinary low probability state).

  FIG. 167 (c) shows a table for symbol distribution and hit operation for ordinary use. The numerical value in the “distribution” column in the table is the random number range distribution rate for each symbol (that is, the symbol of each symbol, which is compared with the general random number value when the stop symbol is determined in the general symbol related lottery process (step S223)). Equal to selection probability). As shown in FIG. 167 (c), in the case where the success / failure determination result of the common figure variation game is a win, the distribution ratio of each winning symbol is 50% for the common figure A and 50% for the common figure B. Normal maps A and B are symbols in which the electric chew release operation is executed after the normal variable game. It should be noted that when the determination result is out of order, only one out of the ordinary figure C is selected as the out of order symbol, so in the case of out of place, the ordinary figure C is selected with a probability of 100%. When the general figure C is selected, the electric chew release operation is not executed after the universal figure variable game.

  As shown in FIG. 167 (c), after the general figure A is stopped and displayed, the opening operation of the special figure 2 starting port (electrical chew) 232 is executed. When the game state at the time of the stop display of FIG. A is not operating for a short time, the blade member 232a of the electric Chu 232 is first opened for 100 ms, then closed for 5000 to 10000 ms, and then opened for 5400 ms. To do. When the game state at the time of the stop display in FIG. A is short-time operation, the blade member 232a of the electric Chu 232 is first opened for 1800 ms, then closed for about 2000 ms, then opened again for 1800 ms, It closes for about 2000 ms and opens again for 1800 ms.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 167 (c), after the general figure B is stopped and displayed, the opening operation of the special figure 2 starting port (electrical chew) 232 is executed. When the game state at the time of the stop display in FIG. B is not operating for a short time, the blade member 232a of the electric Chu 232 is opened only once for 100 ms. When the game state at the time of the stop display in FIG. B is short-time operation, the blade member 232a of the electric Chu 232 is first opened for 2400 ms, then closed for about 2000 ms, then opened for about 1450 ms, and again It closes for about 2000 ms and opens again for 1450 ms.

  FIGS. 168 (a) to 168 (d) show examples of the determination table used for determining whether or not the lottery process is performed in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) or the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231). Yes. 168 (a) to 168 (d) are configured with items of “special figure probability”, “random number range”, and “correction determination result”. The item “special figure probability” indicates a special figure probability (special figure low probability or special figure high probability) at the time of determination of success or failure. The item “random number range” indicates a numerical range to be compared with the acquired special figure 2 winning random value or the special figure 1 winning random value. Here, the possible range of the special figure 2 winning random value and the special figure 1 winning random value of this example is 0 to 65535 (the range of the numerical value range is 65536).

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 168 (a) is a success / failure determination table for special figure 1 that is used when the special figure probability at the time of success / failure determination is low. As shown in FIG. 168 (a), when this success / failure determination table is used, the big hit probability is about 1/299 (= 219/65536), and the small hit probability is about 1/399 (= 165 / 65536).

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 168 (b) is a success / failure determination table for special figure 1 that is used when the special figure probability at the time of success / failure determination is high. As shown in FIG. 168 (b), when this success / failure determination table is used, the big hit probability is about 1/30 (= 2185/65536), and the small hit probability is about 1/399. When this success / failure determination table is compared with the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 168 (a), the big hit probability is about 10 times and the small hit probability is the same.

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 168 (c) is a success / failure determination table for special figure 2 that is used when the special figure probability at the time of the validity determination is low. As shown in FIG. 168 (c), when this success / failure determination table is used, the big hit probability is about 1/299 and the small hit probability is zero.

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 168 (d) is a success / failure determination table for special figure 2 that is used when the special figure probability at the time of determination of success / failure is high. As shown in FIG. 168 (d), when this success / failure determination table is used, the big hit probability is about 1/30 and the small hit probability is zero. When this success / failure determination table is compared with the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 168 (c), the probability of jackpot is about 10 times.

  FIG. 169 (a) shows a symbol distribution table for special figure 1. FIG. The numerical value in the “distribution” column in the table is a distribution ratio of random numbers for each symbol (that is, each symbol) compared with the special symbol 1 random value when determining the stop symbol in the special symbol 1 related lottery process (step S231). It is equal to the symbol selection probability). As shown in FIG. 169 (a), when the success / failure determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit, the special symbol A (15R special big hit) is 30%, and the special figure B (7R special big hit) is 25%, special figure C (7R big hit) is 25%, special figure D (sudden probability big hit) is 10%, special figure E (latent probability big hit) is 10% is there. Special drawings A, B, D, and E, excluding special drawing C, are symbols for which the probability change is activated after the big hit game ends. The ratio of probability variation jackpots (special drawings A, B, D, E) in the jackpot of the special figure 1 variable game, that is, the probability variation probability is 75%.

  Special illustrations A, B, and D are the gaming state (special figure high probability, special figure low probability, normal figure high probability (during short-time operation), normal figure low probability (due to short-time inactive) at the time of determination of success / failure (during symbol stop display) Regardless of the time)), the time is shortened (no time reduction is set) after the big hit game ends. The special figure C is a symbol in which the time is shortened (the number of time reductions is 100 times) after the big hit game is finished, regardless of the game state at the time of the determination of success or failure. The special figure E is a symbol in which the short time is activated after the big hit game is completed only when the gaming state at the time of the determination is a special figure high probability state or a normal figure high probability state. That is, when special figure E is stopped and displayed in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, the time reduction does not operate after the big hit game ends. For example, when special figure E is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol continuously several times from a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, the time reduction does not operate after the first stop display (special figure high probability normal figure) However, after the second and subsequent stops, the short time is activated (the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state is entered). In the special figure 1 variable game jackpot, the probability of time reduction is 90% in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state and 100% in the other game states.

  In this example, there is only one kind of small hits symbol and off symbol in the special figure 1 variable game. Therefore, when the result of the special figure 1 variable game is determined to be a small hit, the special figure F is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the special figure 1 random value, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is determined. If it is out of place, the special figure G is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the special figure 1 random value. However, a plurality of types of small hit symbols and outlier symbols may be provided in the same manner as the big hit symbols, and may be determined by lottery using special figure 1 random numbers.

  FIG. 169 (b) shows an example of the big hit operation in each symbol of the special figure 1. As shown in FIG. 169 (b), in the jackpot game after the special figure A is stopped and displayed, the attacker is released for 15R at 29000 ms per 1R. Similarly, in the jackpot game after special figure B or special figure C is stopped and displayed, the attacker is released for 7R at 29000 ms per 1R, and in the jackpot game after special figure D is stopped and displayed, the attacker is released. Is performed 2R at 29000 ms per 1R.

  As for special figure E, the operation of the big hit game differs depending on the game state at the time of the symbol stop display. In the big hit game after the special figure E is stopped and displayed in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, the attacker is released 2R at 100 ms per 1R. In this big hit game, it is difficult to enter a game ball because the opening time is short. On the other hand, in the big hit game after the special figure E is stopped and displayed in a game state other than the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, 2R is played at 29000 ms per 1R. In this big hit game, it is easy to enter a game ball because the opening time is relatively long.

  In the small hit game after the special figure F is stopped and displayed, the 100 ms attacker release is performed twice in one release opportunity. That is, the attacker operates in the same manner in the big hit game after the special figure E is stopped and displayed in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state and the small hit game after the special figure F is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 170 (a) shows a symbol distribution table for special figure 2. FIG. The numerical value in the “distribution” column in the table is the distribution ratio of the random number range for each symbol (that is, each symbol) that is compared with the special symbol 2 random value when determining the stop symbol in the special symbol 2 related lottery process (step S229). It is equal to the symbol selection probability). As shown in FIG. 170 (a), when the success / failure determination result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the special symbol a (15R special big hit) is 70%, and the special figure b (7R special big hit) is 5%, special figure c (7R big hit) is 25%. Special figures a and b are symbols for which the probability change is activated after the big hit game ends. The ratio of probability variation jackpots (special figures a and b) in the special figure 2 variable game jackpot, that is, the probability variation probability is 75%, which is the same as the probability variation probability of the special figure 1 variable game.

  Special illustrations a and b indicate the game state at the time of the success / failure determination (design stop display) (special figure high probability, special figure low probability, normal figure high probability (during short-time operation), normal figure low probability (during short-time inactive) Regardless of the), the time is shortened (no time reduction setting is set) after the big hit game ends. The special figure c is a symbol in which the time is shortened (the number of time reductions is 100 times) after the big hit game is finished, regardless of the game state at the time of determination of success / failure. The probability that the time is given in the big hit of the special figure 2 variable game is 100% regardless of the game state.

  In this example, there is only one type of outlier symbol in the special figure 2 variable game. Accordingly, when the result of determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable game is correct is out of order, the special figure d is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the special figure 2 random value. However, a plurality of types of missing symbols may be provided in the same manner as the jackpot symbol, and may be determined by lottery using special figure 2 random values.

  FIG. 170 (b) shows an example of the big hit operation in each symbol of the special figure 2. FIG. As shown in FIG. 170 (b), in the jackpot game after special figure a is stopped and displayed, the attacker is released for 15R at 29000 ms per 1R, and after special figure b or special figure c is stopped and displayed. In the big hit game, the attacker is released 7R at 29000ms per 1R.

  As shown in FIGS. 169 and 170, the special figure 2 has a higher probability of being given a shorter time than the special figure 1, and the open time of the attacker is long (or the R number is large). Therefore, it can be considered that the special figure 2 is more advantageous than the special figure 1.

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 171 and 172. FIG. 171 (a) is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. First, in step S401 in FIG. 171 (a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. . In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S409 following step S407, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated. Of the various processes executed in the effect control process, the electric long open effect will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S411 following step S409, a chance button control process is performed. In the chance button control process, when the pressing of the chance button 136 is detected, the effect data updated in step S409 is changed to the effect data corresponding to the pressing of the chance button 136.

  In step S413 subsequent to step S411, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, when there is a command to the VDP 434 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step S415 following step S413, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S417 following step S415, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is a command to various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S419 following step S417, shutter control processing is performed. In the shutter control process, if there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S421 following step S419, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S409, a setting is made to output this control command. Thereafter, the process returns to step S403.

  FIG. 171 (b) is a flowchart showing the flow of the first sub control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S501 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

  FIG. 171 (c) is a flowchart showing the flow of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this example, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Run in cycles. In step S601 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first sub control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S603 following step S601, a control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S421) of the first sub-control unit main process, and other random number values for effects are updated. Etc.

  FIG. 171 (d) is a flowchart showing the flow of the image control process (step S413) of the first sub-control unit main process. In step S701, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 436. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S703 following step S701, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S705. Wait for the input signal to be input.

  In step S705, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S701, the CPU 404 has information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis and image size of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S707 following step S705, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 404.

  In step S709 following step S707, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S711. Waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S711, a scene display counter which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

  FIG. 172 (a) shows the flow of the electric long opening effect process executed in the effect control process of the main process in the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 172 (b) shows an example of the electric tulong opening effect on the decorative symbol display device 208. The electric-chu-long opening effect is an effect that can be executed during a normal-game variable game, and the special-image 2 start opening (electric-chu) 232 is opened for a long time and / or multiple times (hereinafter referred to as a multi-game variable game). This may be referred to as long open). It should be noted that, even after the normal fluctuation stop, the electric-chu-long opening effect (for example, a notification effect such as “electric-chu-opening!”) May be continued based on the normal signal stop symbol.

  172 (a) is an electric-chu-long opening effect process in the command process (step S407) of the main process of the first sub-control unit 400 in FIG. 171 (a). This is executed when a (start rotation) command is received.

  First, sub-control unit 400 first determines whether or not the electric long opening effect execution restriction flag for restricting the execution of electric long opening effect is off (step S801). The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the value of the electric long open effect execution restriction flag stored in a predetermined area in the RAM 408 and determines whether or not the execution of the electric long open effect is restricted. For example, even when the electric tulong release effect is executed during display darkness in which the entire image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is black, the player cannot visually recognize the effect and the effect of the electric chew long release effect cannot be obtained. . Therefore, in such a case, the electric long-long opening effect execution restriction flag is turned on based on the effect based on the determination result of the special figure fluctuation game during display darkening. In addition, when the entire image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is not dark-displayed and the fluctuation time of the normal figure fluctuation game is long enough to execute the electric-chu-long opening effect, It is possible to perform an electric Chulong opening effect that can entertain the user. Therefore, in such a case, the electric long-long opening effect execution restriction flag is turned off based on the effect or demonstration effect based on the determination result of the special figure fluctuation game.

  If the electric-chu-long opening effect execution restriction flag is on in step S801, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the electric-chu-long opening effect is restricted, and controls the electric-chu-long opening effect. Other control processes are executed, this process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process effect control process (step S409).

  If the electric-chu-long opening effect execution restriction flag is off in step S801, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the electric-chu long opening effect can be executed, and proceeds to step S803 to start the usual symbol variation (start rotation). It is determined whether or not the result of determining whether or not the normal-game variable game is successful by referring to information about the normal-game hit flag and the normal-use flag from the command data of the command.

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S803 that the result of determining whether or not the normal figure variation game is successful, the process proceeds to step S805, where the first sub-control unit 400 determines the normal figure from the command data of the normal symbol change start (rotation start) command. With reference to the information regarding the stop symbol, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol of the normal figure variable game is the normal symbol A.

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S805 that the stop symbol of the usual figure variable game is the usual figure A, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S807, selects the effect whose effect type is “success pattern”, and opens the electric tulong. Set as production. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S809, executes other control processing for the electric long open effect based on the “success pattern”, ends this processing, and performs the main process effect control. The process returns to the process (step S409).

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S805 that the usual variable game is not the usual figure A, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S811, selects an effect whose effect type is “failure pattern A”, and releases the electric tulong. Set as production. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S809, executes other control processing for the electric-chu-long opening effect based on “failure pattern A”, ends this processing, and produces the main processing effect. The process returns to the control process (step S409).

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S803 that the result of determining whether or not the normal game is a winning game is not successful, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S815 and executes an electric tulong opening false (gasse) effect execution lottery process. In the electric long open false effect execution lottery process, a random value is extracted from the random counter for electric long open false effect execution lottery provided in the RAM 408, and the electric long open false effect execution lottery table stored in the ROM 406 is stored. Is used to determine whether or not the random number value is a hit.

  The first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not to execute the electric long open false effect based on the result of the determination in step S815 (step S817).

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S817 to execute the electric-chu-long opening false effect, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S821, selects an effect whose effect type is “failed pattern B”, and sets it as an electric-chu-long opening effect. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S809, executes other control processing for the electric-chu-long opening effect based on “failure pattern B”, ends this processing, and produces the main processing effect. The process returns to the control process (step S409).

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S817 that the electric-chu-long opening false effect is not executed, the first sub-control unit 400 executes another control process for not executing the electric-chu-long opening effect, ends this processing, and performs the main processing. The process returns to the effect control process (step S409).

  In the processing of the electric-chu-long opening effect shown in FIG. 172, when the electric-chu-long opening effect execution restriction flag is off, the electric-chu-long opening effect is always performed if it is a win. The lottery may be performed in the same manner as when the game is off, and the presentation may be performed only when the lottery is won. Also, in this example, when the electric chew is open for a short time (short open) (general figure B), the production of “failure pattern A” is set, and when the electric chew is not released (general figure C), “failure pattern A” is set. The effect “B” is set, but the same effect may be performed with a deviation (common figure B) from the hit (normal figure B).

  FIG. 172 (b) shows an example of the electric long open effect. FIG. 172 (b) shows the display effect being executed in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The entire surface of the image display area becomes the effect display area 208d, and for example, a background effect named “Land Stage” is executed. In the front of the background effect, the decoration display of the decoration pattern in which “decoration 1” to “decoration 10” sequentially move from top to bottom in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c (indicated by a downward arrow in the figure). Is running. A change icon display area a is arranged on the lower left side in the effect display area 208d, and a change icon of a pattern imitating a car is displayed. On the right side of the fluctuation icon display area a, a special figure hold display area c for displaying special figure hold is arranged, and a hold icon b having a pattern imitating an automobile is displayed. On the lower right side in the effect display area 208d, an electric long open effect area d is arranged. An ordinary figure display device 210 (not shown) starts the ordinary figure variation game, the execution of the electric-chu-long opening effect is not restricted, and the electric-chu-long opening effect area d is executed. As an electric Chu-long opening effect, an image of a samurai character operating the lottery machine is displayed along with a display of “help chance drawing”, and the special figure 2 start opening 232 is won by winning the ordinary figure variable game. There is a roaring effect that makes the player expect that it may be released long. As shown in FIG. 172 (b), a part of the right symbol display area 208c is hidden by the electric-chu long opening effect. In addition, a part of the right side area of the special figure hold display area c is also hidden. As described above, when the electric-chu-long opening effect may make it difficult to confirm at least part of the decorative symbol variation display, or when the decorative symbol variation display makes it difficult to confirm at least part of the electric-chu long opening effect. There may be.

  Next, processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 173 (a) is a flowchart of a main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. First, in step S901 in FIG. 173 (a), various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S901. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S903 following step S901, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S905. . In step S905, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S907 following step S905, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S909 following step S907, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S907, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 506 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

  In step S911 following step S909, lamp control processing is performed. For example, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game table frame lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S913 following step S911, a movable body control process is performed. For example, when there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516. Thereafter, the process returns to step S903.

  FIG. 173 (b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub control unit 400. In step S1001 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub control unit 400 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508 as an unprocessed command.

  FIG. 173 (c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this example, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Run in cycles. In step S1101 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S903 of the second sub-control unit main process, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. Therefore, in step S903, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S1103 following step S1101, an effect random number update process or the like is performed.

  Next, specific examples of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 174 to 192. First, the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIGS. 174 to 192 will be described with reference to FIG. 174 (1). FIG. 174 (1) and each drawing to be described later show the decorative symbol display device 208 in the center. In the example shown in FIG. 174 (1), “decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed (determined display) in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the ornamental symbol display device 208. In FIGS. 174 to 192, even-numbered decorative symbols (“decoration 2”, “decoration 4”, “decoration 6”, “decoration 8”, “decoration 10”) are displayed surrounded by a vertically-long rectangular frame display. The inside of the frame display is Aspect 3 (shown by right-up hatching in FIGS. 174 to 192 (for example, blue)). In FIG. 174 to FIG. 192, odd-numbered decorative symbols (“decoration 1”, “decoration 3”, “decoration 5”, “decoration 7”, “decoration 9”) are surrounded by a vertically-long rectangular frame display. The inside of the frame display is Aspect 5 (indicated by lattice hatching in FIGS. 174 to 192 (for example, red)). In addition, the frame display surrounding the odd number of decorative symbols is displayed so that the display size is larger than that of the frame display, and the lower right corners of the frame display are matched in the vertically long frame display including the character image in the frame. For example, as shown in FIG. 174 (1), “decoration 7” is displayed in a frame display including a character image of Yoshimune. The pachinko machine 100 displays the frame display surrounding the three decorative symbols displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the mode 3 or the mode 5, thereby determining whether or not the special figure variable game is successful by a predetermined jackpot reliability (expected degree). ) Can be executed, and a character image can be displayed in a frame display surrounding an odd number of decorative symbols. The display of the pre-reading notice in which the inside of the frame display surrounding the three decorative symbols is displayed in the form 3 is the display of the pre-reading notice in the chance of the aspect 3, and the inside of the frame display surrounding the three decorative symbols is displayed in the form 5. The display of the pre-reading notice is the display of the pre-reading notice of the chance of the fifth aspect. The big hit reliability (expected degree) in the prefetching notice of the chance is set higher in the aspect 5 than in the aspect 3. Note that the pachinko machine 100 may display the decorative symbol itself in red or blue to execute a pre-reading notice for the chance. Further, the odd number of decorative symbols may include a character image. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays, for example, an aspect 1 (for example, white), an aspect 2 (for example, white blinking), an aspect 3 (for example, blue), an aspect 4 (for example, green), an aspect 5 (for example, It can be displayed in seven types: red), aspect 6 (for example, gold), and aspect 7 (for example, gold).

  In the lower center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variable icon display area e capable of displaying a variable icon is provided. When the hold is digested and the special figure variable game is started, the hold icon corresponding to the special figure variable game becomes the variable icon. The variation icon is displayed so as to be placed on the upper surface of the cylindrical pedestal image (table) displayed in the variation icon display area e. By changing the mode (display mode) of the variation icon, it is possible to execute the advance notice of the variation with a predetermined jackpot reliability regarding whether or not the special figure variation game is successful.

  A special figure 1 hold icon display area f is provided on the left side of the fluctuation icon display area e. In the special figure 1 holding icon display area f, the number of holding icons of the special figure 1 corresponding to the number of holdings of the special figure 1 can be displayed. The pachinko machine 100 can notify the special figure 1 on-hold icon display area f of the number of special icons 1 on-line game according to the number of the special icons on the special figure 1 and also put on hold according to the mode of each on-hold icon. It is possible to execute a pre-reading notice with a predetermined jackpot reliability regarding whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful. The special figure 1 hold icon display area f is roughly divided into four areas of a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area from right to left. An elliptical pedestal image indicating the display position of the hold icon in FIG. 1 is displayed at the bottom of each of the first to fourth areas. The first to fourth areas correspond to the first to fourth holding ranks, respectively. In the first area, the hold icon of FIG. 1 corresponding to the earliest (most recently stored) hold is displayed. Similarly, in the second to fourth areas, the hold icons corresponding to the second to fourth hold are displayed. The hold icons in FIG. 1 are displayed respectively. In the example shown in FIG. 174 (1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 2, and the hold icons f1 and f2 are displayed in the first area and the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f, respectively. . The hold icons f1 and f2 are displayed overlapping the upper end portion of the pedestal image. In the example shown in FIG. 174 (1), the hold icons f1 and f2 are displayed in a circular form of form 1 (shown by dot hatching (for example, white) in FIGS. 174 to 192). Aspect 1 A circular aspect is a default aspect, and is the aspect with the lowest jackpot reliability among a plurality of aspects. Note that the default mode may be a mode of a hold icon corresponding to a hold whose special figure 1 prefetch result is “undecided”, and the reliability of the default mode in this case is not set.

  In addition, three meter images (gauge images) g1, g2, and g3 are displayed on the right side of the variation icon display area e. Meter images g1, g2, and g3 are displayed side by side in this order from the left. The meter image g1 includes three horizontally-long rectangular frame images arranged at the lower end, a character image of “爺” arranged in the frame image, and a horizontally-long rectangular shape stacked vertically from the upper end of the frame image. Segmented images. The meter image g2 includes three horizontally-long rectangular frame images arranged at the lower end, “Princess” character images arranged in the frame image, and three horizontally-oriented rectangular shapes stacked vertically from the upper end of the frame image. Segmented images. The meter image g3 includes three horizontally-long rectangular frame images arranged at the lower end, a character image of “dono” arranged in the frame image, and a horizontally-long rectangular shape stacked vertically from the upper end of the frame image. Segmented images. In the initial state, the segment images of the meter images g1, g2, and g3 are displayed in white. Meter images g1, g2, and g3 are displayed in red one segment at a time. The state where all segments of the meter image g1 are displayed in red is a state where the meter image g1 is full, and the state where all the segments of the meter image g2 are displayed in the mode 5 is that the meter image g2 is full. The state in which all segments of the meter image g3 are displayed in red is a state in which the meter image g3 is full. When all the segment-like images of the meter image g1 are displayed in red and the meter image g1 is full, an effect that promotes the title color at the start of the effect is executed. When all the segment images of the meter image g2 are displayed in red and the meter image g2 is full, it is determined that the effect that the movable body (movable means) operates is executed. When all the segment images of the meter image g3 are displayed in red and the meter image g3 is full, it is determined that the strong button effect is executed. Details of these effects will be described later.

  A special figure 2 hold icon display area may be provided on the right side of the fluctuation icon display area e. In the special figure 2 holding icon display area, the number of holding icons of the special figure 2 corresponding to the number of holdings of the special figure 2 can be displayed. When the special figure 2 hold icon display area is provided, the meter images g1, g2, and g3 may be displayed or may not be displayed. The special figure 2 hold icon display area may be provided above the special figure 1 hold icon display area f.

  As shown in FIG. 174 (1), a fifth symbol display area h capable of displaying the fifth symbol is provided at the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The fifth symbol is displayed by combining the three symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol. During execution of special figure 1 or special figure 2 variable game, the symbols in the middle left and right of the fifth symbol are “1” → “2” → “3” → ... → “9” → “0” → “ Fluctuation display of the fifth symbol is performed in the order of “1” →... In the example shown in FIG. 174 (1), the fifth symbol of the combination “2-4-7” is displayed. In the fifth symbol, as in the case of the decorative symbol, it is possible to stop and display the three symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol to notify the result of the special symbol variation game.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 174 (1), an image of the sun pattern is displayed in the upper left corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The image of the sun pattern is displayed when the production stage is a fine stage. Although illustration is omitted, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a background image corresponding to the effect stage.

  Further, in FIG. 174 (1) and each drawing described later, the configuration necessary for the description of the embodiment is extracted from the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 in the region on the paper surface separated by the one-dot chain line. In FIG. 174 (1) and each figure described later, in a region on the paper surface separated by a constant chain line, the speaker 120, the movable body 700, the movable body 702, the chance button 136, the chance button 704, and the setting operation unit 137 are displayed. And the fourth pattern lamps i1 and i2 are schematically shown. The pachinko machine 100 includes a movable body 700 and a movable body 702 as movable means. Details of the movable bodies 700 and 702 will be described later.

  A predetermined BGM (background music) is output from the speaker 120 during the game. The chance button 704 is an operation means that is disposed on the front side of the front frame door 106 and can be operated by the player. The fourth symbol lamps i1 and i2 are lamps for informing the fourth symbol, and are arranged at predetermined positions on the board of the gaming board 200 shown in FIG. 161, for example. The fourth symbol is a symbol indicating whether or not a special figure variable game is being executed. The fourth symbol lamp i1 has a square external shape, and notifies the fourth symbol for the special symbol 1. The fourth symbol lamp i2 has a circular appearance, and notifies the fourth symbol for the special symbol 2. The fourth symbol lamp i1 blinks white when the special figure 1 variable game is executed, and turns off when the special figure 1 variable game is not executed. Similarly, the fourth symbol lamp i2 blinks white when turned on during execution of the special figure 2 variable game, and turns off while the special figure 2 variable game is not executed. The fourth symbol may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Moreover, the downward arrow shown in the center lower end portion of FIG. 174 (1) indicates that the state shown in FIG. 174 (1) and the state shown in FIG. 174 (2) continue in time series. . Also in each figure mentioned later, the downward arrow shown in the center lower end part of each figure has shown that it continues with the following figure in time series.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 174 (1) to (9) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 174 (1) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a symbol combination “decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 7” in the case of a loss is shown, which indicates that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct. Stop display (confirmation display, permanent stop display). Further, the fifth symbol of the combination “2-4-7” is stopped and displayed in the fifth symbol display area h. In the state shown in FIG. 174 (1), the hold icons f1 and f2 are displayed in a circular form of aspect 1. Aspect 1 A circular aspect is a default aspect and is the aspect with the lowest jackpot reliability among a plurality of aspects.

  In FIG. 174 (2), when the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown) starts the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol variable display, the fourth symbol, and the fifth symbol variable display are started. Shows the state. The downward arrows shown in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c indicate a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed, and the downward arrows illustrated in the fifth symbol display region h indicate the fifth symbol variation display. Indicates the displayed state. Also, with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the hold icon reduction animation is executed, and the hold icon f1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f becomes the change icon e1 and the change icon. Moving to the display area e, the hold icon f2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. In the state shown in FIG. 174 (2), the hold icon reduction animation is finished, and the movement of the fluctuation icon e1 and the hold icon f2 is completed. Further, as shown in FIG. 174 (2), the variation icon is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. This may facilitate identification of the variation icon and the hold icon.

  FIG. 174 (3) shows a state in which the display j1 that can specify the mode (for example, color) of the serif notice display is displayed before the serif notice display is started. The display j1 is moved and displayed from the center of the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the lower right. In the figure, a downward-pointing arrow shown at the upper left of the display j1 represents the locus and the moving direction of the display j1. The display j1 has a circular shape, the upper half is displayed in a transparent manner, and the lower half is displayed in an aspect 3 (for example, blue). The lower half mode 3 of the display j1 corresponds to the mode of the serif notice display k1 started in FIG. 174 (4) described later, and the display j1 is a display related to the mode of the serif notice display. The serif notice display is a notice display of the change, and the jackpot reliability is set according to the mode. By the display j1, the player can know the mode of the serif notice display before the display of the serif notice display is started. Note that the display j1 may not include a display in a form corresponding to the form of the line notice display.

  FIG. 174 (4) shows a state in which the display of the notice advance notice k1 is started. In this example, the display of the line advance notice k1 is started after the display j1 is deleted. However, the display of the line advance notice k1 may be started while the display j1 is displayed. The display k1 may be displayed. The display j1 may be erased after stopping in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, or may continue to move to the lower right and move out of the display area to be erased. Further, as shown in FIG. 174 (4), the serif notice display k1 is a scroll picture, and the serif notice display k1 is displayed as a picture in which the scroll is wound at the beginning of display. Further, the serif notice display k1 is aspect 3.

  FIG. 174 (5) shows a state where the serif notice display k1 is displayed in an animation in which the scroll is opened in the right direction.

  FIG. 174 (6) shows a state in which a serif notice display k1 in which the scroll is completely opened is displayed. The serif notice display k1 in which the scroll is completely opened has a horizontally long rectangular shape, and becomes a balloon display in which a character display representing the character's serif is displayed in the rectangle. The balloon mode of the balloon display of the serif notice display k1 is mode 3.

  In FIG. 174 (7), a character image display n1 including a character image of 婆 (hereinafter referred to as “婆”) m1 and a character image of “婆” is displayed overlapping the left end portion of the serif notice display k1. It shows the state that was done. The serif notice display k1 may be a display including 婆 m1 and character name display n1.

  FIG. 174 (8) shows a state where the display of the mini game display o1 is started. In this example, the mini game display o1 is displayed on the right side of the serif notice display k1 so as to overlap the serif notice display k1. The mini game display o1 may be displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the serif notice display k1, or may be displayed without overlapping the serif notice display k1. The mini game (sub game) based on the mini game display o1 is started in association with the serif notice display k1. The mini game display o1 includes an inverted triangular arrow image and four circular images. The four circular images are displayed in a line in the horizontal direction. From the left, the aspect 1 circular image, the aspect 4 circular image (shown by cross hatching in FIGS. 174 to 192 (for example, green)), the aspect 1 A circular image and an aspect 5 circular image are arranged in this order. The arrow image of the mini game display o1 is displayed on the left side of the leftmost aspect 1 circular image at the beginning of display. The mini game based on the mini game display o1 is executed in such a manner that the arrow image moves to the right. The mini game is a winning acquisition corresponding to the winning image displayed to the left from the position where the arrow image is stopped. The aspect 1 circular image is an outlier image, and the aspect 4 circular image and the aspect 5 circular image are winning images. More specifically, the mini-game is lost when the arrow image stops above the leftmost aspect 1 circular image, and the arrow image stops when the arrow image stops above the second aspect 4 circular image from the left. When the arrow image is stopped above the third aspect 1 circular image from the left, the winning acquisition corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image is obtained, and the arrow image is positioned at the rightmost position. Stopping above the aspect 5 circular image results in winning corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image and winning corresponding to the aspect 5 circular image.

  FIG. 174 (9) shows a state in which a character string image “Tono is Yatsushiro Shogun” is displayed in the serif notice display k 1. The character string image of “Tono is Yatsushiro Shogun” is a character display of the character display indicating the words of 婆 m1. In the state shown in FIG. 174 (9), the mini game with the mini game display o1 is ended. In this example, the mini-game is started after the character string image is displayed in the serif notice display k1. The start of the movement of the arrow image is the start of the mini game. The mini-game may be started before the character string image is displayed in the serif notice display k1, or displayed at the same time as the character string image is displayed in the serif notice display k1. The display may be started, or may be started while the character string image is being displayed in the serif notice display k1. In this example, since the arrow image of the mini game display o1 is stopped above the leftmost aspect 1 circular image, the result of the mini game is out of place. For this reason, the effect display started when winning in the mini game is not started after this.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of this example can display a certain type of line notice display k1. The serif notice display k1 is a display including a character display (in this example, “Tono is Yatsushiro Shogun”) representing the line of 婆 m1. The character display of this example is a character display including the contents related to the character of Tono. In addition, there is a case where a mini game with the mini game display o is started in association with the serif notice display k1. According to the pachinko machine 100 of this example, by displaying the serif notice display k1 including the character display of the contents related to the character, the serif notice display k1 can be noticed by a novice player, and the serif notice display k1. In some cases, it is possible to make it easier for the player to pay attention to the mini-game by playing the mini-game in relation to the game.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 174 (10) to (17) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 174 (10) shows a state in which the speech advance notice k1 is displayed during the execution of the special figure variable game. In this example, as shown in FIG. 174 (10), a character string image of “Brown tea is good” is displayed in the serif notice display k1. The character string image of “tea is delicious” is a character display of the character display representing the words of 婆 m1. In the state shown in FIG. 174 (10), the mini game with the mini game display o1 is ended. In this example, since the arrow image of the mini game display o1 is stopped above the second aspect 4 circular image from the left, the result of the mini game is a winning acquisition corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image. In this example, when the winning result corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image is derived as a result of the mini game, the display of the serif notice display k2 is started as shown in FIG. 174 (12) described later.

  FIG. 174 (11) shows a state in which the display j2 that can specify the color of the serif notice display k2 is displayed before the display of the serif notice display k2 is started. The display j2 is moved and displayed from the vicinity of the aspect 4 circular image of the mini game display o1 to the upper right. The display j2 in this example appears from the vicinity of the aspect 4 circular image of the mini game display o1 and starts to be displayed. In the drawing, an upper right arrow shown at the lower left of the display j2 represents the locus and the moving direction of the display j2. The display j2 has a circular shape, the upper half is displayed in a transparent manner, and the lower half is displayed in an aspect 3. The mode 3 in the lower half of the display j1 corresponds to the mode (for example, color) of the serif notice display k2 started in FIG. 174 (12) described later, and the display j2 is related to the mode of the serif notice display k2. It is a display. The serif notice display k2 is a notice display of the change, and the jackpot reliability is set according to the mode. By the display j2, the player can know the mode of the speech advance notice display before the display of the notice advance notice k2 is started.

  FIG. 174 (12) shows a state in which the display of the notice advance notice k2 is started. In this example, the display of the line advance notice k2 is started after the display j2 is deleted. However, the display of the line advance notice k2 may be started while the display j2 is being displayed, or the line advance notice is displayed simultaneously with the deletion of the display j2. The display k1 may be displayed. The display j2 may be erased after stopping in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, or may be erased by moving to the upper right and moving outside the display area. Also, as shown in FIG. 174 (12), the serif notice display k2 is a scroll picture, and the serif notice display k2 is displayed as a picture in which the scroll is wound at the beginning of display. Further, the serif notice display k2 is an aspect of aspect 3.

  FIG. 174 (13) shows a state in which the dialogue advance notice k2 is displayed in an animation in which the scroll opens leftward.

  FIG. 174 (14) shows a state where a serif notice display k2 in which the scroll is completely opened is displayed. The serif notice display k2 in which the scroll is completely opened has a horizontally long rectangular shape, and becomes a balloon display in which a character display indicating the character's serif is displayed in the rectangle. The balloon mode of the speech balloon display of the serif notice display k2 is mode 3.

  FIG. 174 (15) shows a state where 婆 m2 and a character name display n2 including a character image of “婆” are displayed overlapping the right end portion of the serif notice display k2. The serif notice display k2 may be a display including 婆 m2 and character name display n2.

  FIG. 174 (16) shows a state where the display of the mini game display o2 is started. In this example, the mini game display o2 is displayed on the left side of the serif notice display k2 so as to overlap the serif notice display k2. The mini game display o2 may be displayed so as to overlap at least part of the serif notice display k2, or may be displayed without overlapping the serif notice display k2. The mini game by the mini game display o2 is started in association with the serif notice display k2. Similar to the mini game display o1, the mini game display o2 includes an inverted triangular arrow image and four circular images. The four circular images are displayed in a line in the horizontal direction, and are arranged in the order of the mode 1 circular image, the mode 4 circular image, the mode 1 circular image, and the mode 5 circular image from the right. The arrow image of the mini game display o2 is displayed on the right side of the rightmost mode 1 circular image at the beginning of display. The mini game based on the mini game display o2 is executed with the arrow image moved to the left. The mini game is a winning game corresponding to the winning image displayed to the right from the position where the arrow image is stopped. The aspect 1 circular image is an outlier image, and the aspect 4 circular image and the aspect 5 circular image are winning images. More specifically, the mini-game is lost when the arrow image stops above the rightmost aspect 1 circular image, and when the arrow image stops above the second aspect 4 circular image from the right, When the arrow image is stopped above the third aspect 1 circular image from the right, the winning acquisition corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image is obtained, and the arrow image is leftmost. Stopping above the aspect 5 circular image results in winning corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image and winning corresponding to the aspect 5 circular image.

  FIG. 174 (17) shows a state in which a character string image “suitable for Daifuku” is displayed in the serif notice display k 2. The character string image “fits well with Daifuku” is a character display in the character display representing the words of 婆 m2. In the state shown in FIG. 174 (17), the mini game with the mini game display o2 is ended. In this example, the mini game is started after the character string image is displayed in the serif notice display k2. The start of the movement of the arrow image is the start of the mini game. The mini-game may be started before the character string image starts to be displayed in the serif notice display k2, or displayed at the same time as the character string image is started to be displayed in the serif notice display k2. The display may be started, or may be started while the character string image is being displayed in the serif notice display k2. In this example, since the arrow image of the mini game display o2 stops above the rightmost mode 1 circular image, the result of the mini game is out of place. For this reason, the effect display started when winning in the mini game is not started after this.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present example derives the hit corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image as a result of the mini game by the mini game display o1 started in association with a certain type of notice notice display k1. Then, the display of the notice advance notice k2 is started. The result of the mini game on the mini game display o1 can be derived without operating the chance button 136. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 has a variation display (a special display variation display) in which display of a certain effect display (for example, the second speech advance notice display k2) is not started by derivation of the result of the mini-game misalignment. The variation display (display of the special figure variation) in which the display of a certain effect display is started by deriving the result of winning the mini game is configured to be easier to be finalized and displayed in a big hit mode. For example, rather than the variable display in which the dialogue notice display of “Tono is Yatsushiro Shoja” is displayed as the first dialogue notice display instead of the line notice notice display of “Daifuku Well Fit” as the second dialogue notice display, The variable display in which the line notice display “suitable for Daifuku” is displayed as the second line notice display is configured to be more easily finalized and displayed in a big hit mode.

  In addition, a mini game different from the mini games of the mini game displays o1 and o2 may be executed. There may be a case where at least a part of the mini game execution period of the mini game display o1, o2 overlaps with at least a part of the other mini game execution period.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 174 (18) to (25). FIGS. 174 (18) to (25) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 174 (16) shows a state in which the display j3 is displayed during the execution of the special figure variable game. The display j3 is a display that can specify the mode (for example, color) of the serif notice display k3 before the display of the serif notice display k3 shown in FIG. 174 (19) described later is started. The display j3 is moved and displayed from the center of the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the lower right. In the figure, a downward-pointing arrow shown at the upper left of the display j3 represents the locus and the moving direction of the display j3. The display j3 has a circular shape, the upper half is displayed in a transparent manner, and the lower half is displayed in the form 1. The mode 1 in the lower half of the display j3 corresponds to the mode of the serif notice display k3 started in FIG. 174 (19) described later, and the display j3 is a display related to the mode of the serif notice display. The serif notice display k3 is a look-ahead notice display. With the display j3, the player can know the mode of the serif notice display k3 before the display of the serif notice display k3 is started.

  FIG. 174 (19) shows a state in which the display of the dialog notice display k3 is started. In this example, the display of the line advance notice k3 is started after the display j3 is deleted. However, the display of the line advance notice k3 may be started while the display j3 is displayed, or the display of the line advance notice k3 may be simultaneously performed. The display k3 may be started. The display j3 may be erased after stopping in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, or may continue to move to the lower right and move outside the display area to be erased. In addition, as shown in FIG. 174 (19), the serif notice display k3 is a scroll picture, and the serif notice display k3 is displayed as a picture in which the scroll is wound at the beginning of display. Further, the serif notice display k3 is an aspect of aspect 1.

  FIG. 174 (20) shows a state in which the dialogue advance notice k <b> 3 is displayed with an animation in which the scroll is opened in the right direction.

  FIG. 174 (21) shows a state where a serif notice display k3 in which the scroll is completely opened is displayed. The serif notice display k3 in which the scroll is completely opened has a horizontally long rectangular shape, and becomes a balloon display in which a character display representing the character's serif is displayed in the rectangle. The balloon mode of the balloon display of the serif notice display k3 is mode 1.

  In FIG. 174 (22), a character name display n3 including a character image of a girl (hereinafter referred to as “girl”) m3 and a character image of “girl” is displayed overlapping the left end portion of the line notice display k3. It shows the state that was done. The serif notice display k3 may be a display including the girl m3 and the character name display n3.

  FIG. 174 (23) shows a state in which the display of the mini game display o1 is started. In this example, the mini game display o1 is displayed, but the mini game by the mini game display o1 is not started. When the mini game is not started, the mini game display o1 may not be displayed.

  FIG. 174 (24) shows a state in which a character string image of “blue preparation” is displayed in the speech notice display k3. The character string image of “blue preparation” is a character display of the character display representing the line of the girl m3.

  FIG. 174 (25) shows a state in which the mode of the hold icon f2 is changed from the mode 1 circle to the mode 3 circle. The character string image of “blue preparation” in the serif notice display k3 is a display for notifying that the mode of the hold icon changes to the mode 3. Further, the jackpot reliability of the hold icon is, in order from the lowest, Aspect 1 (for example, white), Aspect 3 (for example, blue), Aspect 4 (for example, green), Aspect 5 (for example, red), Aspect 6 (for example, red) , Gold) and aspect 7 (for example, iridescent). Further, even after the character string image is displayed in the serif notice display k3, the mini game by the mini game display o1 is not performed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present example can display a serif notice display k3 as a display of a certain kind of serif notice. The serif notice display k3 is a display including a certain character display (in this example, “blue preparation”) among the character displays representing the lines of the girl m3. Further, the serif notice display k3 is a display as a prefetch notice. The mini game by the mini game display o1 is not executed in association with the serif notice display k3 which is the pre-read notice display.

According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present example, in order to confirm whether the mini game is successful, the player is instantly focused on the speech balloon of the dialogue notice display, and the game in which the characters of the dialogue notice display are displayed in the eyes The player sees the serif notice display, and through the serif notice display, the player can deepen the understanding of the production and double the enjoyment of the game.
The serif notice display is necessary to deepen the understanding of the characters and production.

  The serif notice display is not used as a notice with a relatively high expectation of the big hit, so it can be displayed frequently and has a role of having a gap between games.

  However, in recent game machines, there are an increasing number of players who are tired of the conventional dialogue notice display.

  Even if a hot notice display is occasionally made with a line notice display, there is no point for a player who is not looking at the line notice display in the first place.

  If you don't look at the serif notices that have the above-mentioned role, it will be a monotonous game of whether or not you win big.

  In addition, a game machine equipped with a mini game is also known as a new production, but the player pays attention to the mini game, and the player who does not see the serif notice display is increasingly not seeing the serif notice display End up.

  However, mini-games can be anything other than jackpots, and play a role of having a gap between games, so it is good to pay attention to mini-games. The pachinko machine 100 of this example will deepen and deepen the game so that the players who have moved their interest in mini-games will be able to entertain the full effect of the game table by focusing attention on the serif notice display again. .

  In addition, for example, when the speech announcement display balloon has a relatively high reliability level, the mini game may have a success pattern and a failure pattern. If the speech balloon is a mode with relatively high jackpot reliability, it will always be a win in the mini game, and if the speech warning display speech is in a mode with relatively low jackpot reliability, be sure to It may be off.

  In the case where the speech announcement display balloon is in a mode with relatively high jackpot reliability, even if it is a pattern in which the mini game fails, the expectation degree of jackpot may be higher than when the mini game is not performed.

  The position at which the mini game is displayed overlaps at least a part of the speech announcement display speech balloon, and may be the head side or the tail side of the text in the speech balloon display. Further, the position where the mini game is displayed may be, for example, outside the speech notice display balloon.

  The character display of the serif notice display may be displayed step by step gradually from the beginning of the character.

The type of mini game (successful success, success and great success, etc.) varies depending on the content of speech, the manner of speech balloons, and the character. For example, if the Tono character display is displayed, it is a gambling tic content that will be a great success or failure in a mini game, and if a princess character is displayed, there is no great success but it is a reliable type with many successes It may be content.
There may be a case in which a pre-reading notice is given in the second notice notice display.

  The character of the first serif notice display may move to the second serif notice display, and the first serif notice display may be erased.

  In addition to characters, the speech notice display may include voice or animation that moves the mouth of the character, for example. For example, there is no animation in which a speech or character's mouth moves, which will be described later, even if the speech warning display k 1, k 2, and the like shown in FIG. In some cases, the notice notice display shown in FIG. Note that there is no sound effect related to the mini game while the mini game is running, and the sound effect may or may not be output when the result of the mini game is derived.

  Next, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the movable bodies 700 and 702 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 175 (1) is a diagram illustrating the positional relationship in the front-rear direction of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the movable bodies 700 and 702 included in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Thereafter, when the pachinko machine 100 is installed in, for example, an island facility, the player side facing the pachinko machine 100 is referred to as “front” (front, front side, front surface, etc.), and vice versa. Side, rear surface, etc.). In addition, when the pachinko machine 100 is installed in, for example, an island facility, the vertical upper direction is “up” (upper, upper, upper, upper end, etc.) when viewed from the player, and the opposite is “lower” (lower, lower, Lower, lower end, etc.). In addition, when the pachinko machine 100 is installed in, for example, an island facility, the horizontal left when viewed from the player is “left” (left, left, left end, etc.), and the opposite is “right” (right, right, Right end).

  FIG. 175 (1) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 and the movable bodies 700 and 702 are viewed from the front upper right to the rear lower left. The front-rear positions of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the movable bodies 700 and 702 are in the order of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movable body 702, and the movable body 700 from the rear side. The movable bodies 700 and 702 are disposed in the effect device 206 of the game board 200 shown in FIG.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 175 (1), the movable body 702 has movable portions 702a and 702b. The movable portion 702a is disposed on the left side of the movable body 702, and the movable portion 702b is disposed on the right side of the movable body 702. The movable part 702a has a horizontally long rectangular flat plate, and is arranged so that the surface of the flat plate is orthogonal to a virtual straight line extending in the front-rear direction. Similarly, it has a horizontally long rectangular flat plate, and is arranged so that the surface of the flat plate is orthogonal to a virtual straight line extending in the front-rear direction. A part of the model name of the pachinko machine 100 (in this example, “Yatsushiro”) is written on the flat surface of the movable part 702a, and the model name of the pachinko machine 100 is displayed on the flat surface of the effect movable body 702b. A part (in this example, “General”) is written. Moreover, full color LED is arrange | positioned at the flat plate surface of movable part 702a, 702b, and movable body 702 is the aspect 1 (for example, white), aspect 2 (for example, white blinking), aspect 3 (for example, for example). Blue, Aspect 4 (for example, green), Aspect 5 (for example, red), Aspect 6 (for example, gold), Aspect 7 (for example, iridescent) can emit light. In the state shown in FIG. 175 (1), the movable body 702 emits light in the mode 1. Further, the right end portion of the movable portion 702a located at the initial position and the left end portion of the movable portion 702b located at the initial position are in contact with each other, and the movable portion 702a is movable to the left from the initial position, and the movable portion 702b. Can move to the right from the initial position. For example, a stepping motor is used as a drive source for the movable parts 702a and 702b. In the state shown in FIG. 175 (1), the movable portion 702a is located at the left end of the moving range, and the movable portion 702b is located at the right end of the moving range.

  The movable body 700 has a circular shape and is decorated with a family crest on the front surface. Moreover, the movable body 700 has a full color LED, for example, aspect 1 (for example, white), aspect 2 (for example, white blinking), aspect 3 (for example, blue), aspect 4 (for example, green), It is possible to emit light in a plurality of colors of Aspect 5 (for example, red), Aspect 6 (for example, gold), and Aspect 7 (for example, iridescent). In the state shown in FIG. 175 (1), the movable body 700 emits light in the mode 1.

  Driving control (movement control) of the movable bodies 70 and 702 is executed by the second sub-control unit 500 shown in FIG. Further, the light emission control of the LEDs provided in the movable bodies 700 and 702 is executed by the second sub-control unit 500 shown in FIG.

  Next, the operation of the movable body 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 175 (2a) and (2b). FIG. 175 (2a) shows a state in which the movable body 700 is located at the initial position. The initial position of the movable body 700 is below the decorative symbol display device 208. The movable body 700 is driven by, for example, a stepping motor or the like, and can move up and down in a plane in front of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and parallel to the display screen.

  FIG. 175 (2b) shows a state in which the movable body 700 has moved upward. An upward arrow shown below the movable body 700 represents a locus and a moving direction of the movable body 700. In addition, a circular diagram shown below in the drawing represents an initial position of the movable body 700. In the state shown in FIG. 175 (2b), the movable body 700 is located at the upper end of the movement range. The movable body 700 may be movable upward from the position in FIG. 175 (2b).

  Next, the operation of the movable body 702 will be described with reference to FIGS. 175 (3a) to (3c). FIG. 175 (3a) shows a state in which the movable body 702 is located at the initial position. In the state shown in FIG. 175 (3a), the movable portions 702a and 702b are located at the initial position, and the right end portion of the movable portion 702a and the left end portion of the movable portion 702b are in contact with each other. The initial position of the movable body 702 is above the decorative symbol display device 208. The movable body 702 is driven by, for example, a stepping motor or the like, and can move up and down in a plane in front of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and parallel to the display screen.

  FIG. 175 (3b) shows a state in which the movable body 702 has moved downward. A downward arrow shown below the movable body 702 represents the trajectory and moving direction of the movable body 702. In addition, a rectangular diagram shown in the upper part of the drawing represents an initial position of the movable body 702. In the state shown in FIG. 175 (3b), the movable body 702 is located at the lower end of the movement range. The movable body 702 may be movable downward from the position in FIG. 175 (3b).

  FIG. 175 (3c) shows a state where the movable part 702a has moved to the left and the movable part 702b has moved to the right. A left-pointing arrow illustrated on the movable portion 702a indicates a locus and a moving direction of the movable portion 702a, and a left-pointing arrow illustrated on the movable portion 702a indicates a locus and a moving direction of the movable portion 702a. In the state shown in FIG. 175 (3c), the movable portion 702a is located at the left end of the moving range, and the movable portion 702b is located at the right end of the moving range. In the state shown in FIG. 175 (3c), the moving length from the initial position of the movable portion 702a and the moving length from the initial position of the movable portion 702b are the same length. The movable portion 702a may be moved to the left from the position in FIG. 175 (3c), and the movable portion 702b is movable to the right from the position in FIG. 175 (3c). Also good.

  FIG. 175 (4) shows a state in which the movable bodies 700 and 702 are started from the initial position. In the drawing, a circular diagram illustrated below represents an initial position of the movable body 700, and a rectangular diagram illustrated above represents an initial position of the movable body 702. In the state shown in FIG. 175 (4), the movable body 700 stops at the uppermost position of the movement range, and the movable body 702 stops at the lowermost position of the movement range. The movable body 702a is located at the left end of the movement range, and the movable body 702b is located at the right end of the movement range. When the movable body 700 and the movable body 702 overlap in the front-rear direction, if the movable portions 702a, 702b of the movable body 702 are positioned at the initial position, almost the entire movable portions 702a, 702b are in the front-rear direction. Since it overlaps, it becomes invisible to the player. By moving the movable parts 702a and 702b to the left and right, when the movable body 700 and the movable body 702 overlap in the front-rear direction, the movable parts 702a and 702b can be moved to the left and right to be visible to the player. .

  Next, the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 175 (5) shows a display example of the decorative symbol display device 208 during execution of the special figure 1 variable game. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208b, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed, and in the fifth symbol display region h, the fifth symbol variation display is displayed. The variation icon display area e displays a variation icon e0 having a circular shape 1 and the special icons 1 hold icon display area f displays hold icons f1 and f2. In addition, below, although the example of the effect performed in relation to execution of special figure 1 variable game is demonstrated, these effects may be performed in connection with execution of special figure 2 variable game. Further, the pachinko machine 100 may have a movable body in addition to the movable bodies 700 and 702. A display device such as a liquid crystal display device may be disposed on these movable bodies.

  In addition, the decorative symbols shown in FIGS. 174 and 175 and FIGS. 177 to 192 to be described later can be displayed in a production mode such as a fine stage, a cloudy stage, a dragonfly ZONE, and a super dragonfly ZONE. The decoration pattern may be different depending on the production mode. The decorative symbol display device 208 can display a decorative symbol of a certain aspect in at least a part of stages and production modes, and can display a decorative symbol of a different aspect from a certain aspect in a different stage or production mode. It may be.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 176, the dialogue notice display will be described. FIG. 176 is a table for explaining the dialogue notice display. The table shown in FIG. 176 includes items of “NO”, “first serif notice display”, and “second serif notice display”. The item “NO” indicates the identification number of the line notice display. In this example, 21 line notice display of “NO01” to “NO21” is provided.

  The item of “first serif notice display” is, for example, the first serif notice display performed in a state where no serif notice display such as the serif notice display k1 shown in FIGS. 174 (5) to (9) is performed. Show. The item of “first line notice display” is composed of items of “character”, “speech mode”, “mini game”, and “line contents”. The item “Character” indicates a character displayed during the line preview display. The item “balloon mode” indicates the mode (for example, display color) of the speech balloon display of the speech notice display. “Aspect 1” is, for example, white, “Aspect 3” is, for example, blue, “Aspect 4” is, for example, green, and “Aspect 5” is, for example, red. “Aspect 2” is not provided, but “Aspect 2” may be provided. For example, “mode 2” is a mode of white blinking. The item “mini game” indicates whether or not the mini game is started in connection with the line notice display. When the item “mini game” is “◯”, the mini game is started, and when the item “mini game” is “×”, the mini game is not started. As shown in FIG. 176, the mini-game is started in association with the first dialogue notice display of “NO01” to “NO17”, but the first dialogue notice display of “NO18” to “NO21” is displayed. Relatedly, the mini game is configured not to be started. The item “line contents” indicates the contents of the character display indicating the lines of the characters in the line notice display. For example, in the case of the “NO01” line notice display, the character string image “I welcome” is displayed as the character display indicating the line of “Character A (Staff)”.

  The item “second line notice display” is, for example, the second line displayed when the first line notice display such as the line notice display k2 shown in FIGS. 174 (12) to (17) is being performed. It shows about the notice notice display. The item “second line notice display” is composed of items of “character”, “speech mode”, “mini game”, and “line contents”. “-” Of each item indicates that the second serif notice display is not displayed. As shown in FIG. 176, the second notice advance display is not displayed in the “NO01”, “NO02”, “NO04”, “NO07”, “NO18” to “NO21” dialogue advance notice display. Whether or not the second serif notice display is displayed may be based on the result of the mini-game started in connection with the first serif notice display, or the first serif notice display or The second notice warning display is always displayed in the case of the notice notice display (for example, “NO03”, “NO05”, “NO06”, “NO08” to “NO17”). May be. The item “Character” indicates a character displayed during the line preview display. The item “balloon mode” indicates the display mode (for example, display color) of the speech balloon display of the speech notice display. In the second serif notice display, modes “mode 3” to “mode 5” are provided. “Aspect 3” is, for example, blue, “Aspect 4” is green, and “Aspect 5” is red. In addition, although “mode 1” and “mode 2” are not provided in the second serif notice display, “mode 1” and “mode 2” may be provided. The item “mini game” indicates whether or not the mini game is started in connection with the line notice display. When the item “mini game” is “◯”, the mini game is started, and when the item “mini game” is “×”, the mini game is not started. As shown in FIG. 176, since the mini-game is started in relation to the second dialogue notice display of “NO03”, “NO05”, “NO06”, “NO08” to “NO17”, the second When the line notice display is displayed, the mini game is always started in association with the second line notice display. A serif notice display may be provided in which the mini-game is not started when the second serif notice display is displayed. If a win is made in the mini-game started in connection with the second dialog notice display, an advantageous effect for the player is started. Details of this effect will be described later. The item “line contents” indicates the contents of the character display indicating the lines of the characters in the line notice display. For example, in the case of the “NO3” line notice display, a character string image “suitable for Daifuku” is displayed as a character display indicating the line of “Character B (婆)”.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 176, when the second serif notice display is displayed, the “character” in the first serif notice display is different from the “character” in the second serif notice display. In such a case, the first and second serif notice displays are conversation notice notices. For example, in the case of the “NO08” line notice display, the first line notice display is “Character” is “Character D (Echigoya)”, “Line contents” is “Smell”, and 2 The first dialogue notice display is “Character” is “Character F (爺)”, “Self content” is “Is it a thing?”, And the first dialogue notice display is Echigoya's dialogue and 2 A conversation is established with the first line warning display, and the first and second lines are displayed.

  Further, the “NO01” to “NO17” line notice display is a notice display of the change, and the jackpot reliability differs for each mode. The jackpot reliability is aspect 3, aspect 4, and aspect 5 in ascending order. For example, in a mini-game, a hit result is displayed when a relatively high hit reliability display is displayed, rather than when a relatively low hit reliability display is displayed. May be easily derived. For example, it may be easier to derive the winning result when the dialogue notice display of the aspect of the aspect 4 is displayed than when the dialogue notice display of the aspect of the aspect 3 is displayed.

  Also, “NO18” to “NO21” lines are displayed in advance, and the jackpot reliability is “NO18”, “NO19”, “NO20”, and “NO21” in descending order.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 177 (1) to (21) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 177 (1) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a symbol combination “decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 7” in the case of a loss is shown, which indicates that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct. Stop is displayed. Further, the fifth symbol of the combination “2-4-7” is stopped and displayed in the fifth symbol display area h. In the state shown in FIG. 177 (1), the hold icons f1 and f2 are displayed in a circular form of aspect 1. Aspect 1 A circular aspect is a default aspect and is the aspect with the lowest jackpot reliability among a plurality of aspects.

  In FIG. 177 (2), when the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown) starts the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol variable display, the fourth symbol, and the fifth symbol variable display are started. Shows the state. Also, with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the hold icon reduction animation is executed, and the hold icon f1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f becomes the change icon e1 and the change icon. Moving to the display area e, the hold icon f2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. In the state shown in FIG. 177 (2), the hold icon decreasing animation is finished, and the movement of the fluctuation icon e1 and the hold icon f2 is completed.

  FIG. 177 (3) shows a state in which the display j1 that can specify the mode of the serif notice display is displayed before the display of the serif notice display is started. The display j1 is displayed in such a manner that the display j1 moves downward from the center of the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the figure, a downward-pointing arrow shown at the upper left of the display j1 represents the locus and the moving direction of the display j1. The display j1 has a circular shape, the upper half is displayed in a transparent manner, and the lower half is displayed in an aspect 3. The lower half mode 3 of the display j1 corresponds to the mode of the serif notice display k1 started in FIG. 177 (4) described later, and the display j1 is a display related to the mode of the serif notice display. The serif notice display is a notice display of the change, and the jackpot reliability is set according to the mode. By the display j1, the player can know the mode of the serif notice display before the display of the serif notice display is started.

  FIG. 177 (4) shows a state in which the display of the dialog notice display k1 is started. In this example, after the display j1 is erased, the line notice display k1 is displayed. The serif notice display k1 is a scroll pattern, and the serif notice display k1 is displayed as a picture in which the scroll is wound at the beginning of display. Further, the serif notice display k1 is an aspect of aspect 3.

  FIG. 177 (5) shows a state in which the serif notice display k1 is displayed in an animation mode in which the scroll opens in the right direction.

  FIG. 177 (6) shows a state in which a serif notice display k1 in which the scroll is completely opened is displayed. The serif notice display k1 in which the scroll is completely opened has a horizontally long rectangular shape, and becomes a balloon display in which a character display representing the character's serif is displayed in the rectangle. The balloon mode of the balloon display of the serif notice display k1 is mode 3.

  FIG. 177 (7) shows a state where 婆 m1 and a character name display n1 including a character image of “婆” are displayed so as to overlap the left end portion of the serif notice display k1. The serif notice display k1 may be a display including 婆 m1 and character name display n1.

  FIG. 177 (8) shows a state where the display of the mini game display o1 is started. In this example, the mini game display o1 is displayed on the right side of the serif notice display k1 so as to overlap the serif notice display k1.

  FIG. 177 (9) shows a state in which a character string image “Tono is Yatsushiro Shogun” is displayed in the serif notice display k 1. The character string image of “Tono is Yatsushiro Shogun” is a character display of the character display indicating the words of 婆 m1. In the state shown in FIG. 177 (9), the mini game is being executed by the mini game display o1. In this example, the mini-game is started after the character string image is displayed in the serif notice display k1. The start of the movement of the arrow image is the start of the mini game.

  FIG. 177 (10) shows a state in which a mini game is being executed by the mini game display o1. The arrow image of the mini game display o1 is just before the stop.

  FIG. 177 (11) shows a state in which the mini game with the mini game display o1 is completed. The stop of the arrow image on the mini game display o1 is the end of the mini game. Since the arrow image of the mini game display o1 is stopped above the leftmost aspect 1 circular image, the result of the mini game is out of place. For this reason, the effect display started when winning in the mini game is not started after this.

  FIG. 177 (12) shows a state where 婆 m1 and character name display n1 are deleted. In this example, 婆 m1 and character name display n1 are erased at the same time, but either one of these displays may be erased first.

FIG. 177 (13) shows a state in which the character string image of “Tono is Yatsushiro Shogun” in the serif notice display k1 has been deleted.
FIG. 177 (14) shows a state in which the mini game display o1 is deleted.

  FIG. 177 (15) shows a state in which the erasing animation of the speech notice display k1 is started. The erase animation of the serif notice display k1 displays a display in which the scroll is wound leftward.

  FIG. 177 (16) shows a state where the scroll of the serif notice display k1 is completely wound. The serif notice display k1 is erased after being completely wound.

  FIG. 177 (17) shows a state where the serif notice display k1 is deleted. In this example, the character (in this example, 婆 m1) and the character name display n1, the character string image of the dialogue (in this example, “Tono is Yatsushiro Shogun”), the mini-game display o1, and the dialogue notice display k1 are deleted in this order. Is done. Note that these erasing orders can be arbitrarily set.

  FIG. 177 (18) shows a state in which “decoration 6” is temporarily stopped (swing fluctuation display) in a manner in which “decoration 6” slightly swings up and down in the left symbol display area 208 a. In the figure, two wavy lines illustrated in the upper left and lower right of “decoration 6” indicate that “decoration 6” slightly fluctuates up and down.

  FIG. 177 (19) shows a state in which “decoration 8” is temporarily stopped and displayed in a mode in which the “decoration 8” slightly swings up and down in the right symbol display area 208c. In the figure, two wavy lines illustrated in the upper left and lower right of “decoration 8” indicate that “decoration 8” slightly fluctuates up and down.

  FIG. 177 (20) shows a state where “decoration 5” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b in a manner that slightly swings up and down. In the figure, two wavy lines illustrated in the upper left and lower right of “decoration 5” indicate that “decoration 5” slightly fluctuates up and down. In the frame display surrounding “decoration 5”, a character image of a frog is displayed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 6—decoration 5—decoration 8” which is a shifted symbol form is temporarily displayed.

  FIG. 177 (21) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of date ("special figure G"). In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 6—decoration 5—decoration 8”, which is an outlier design mode indicating that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful, is stopped. In the fifth symbol display area, the fifth symbol of the combination “6-5-8” is stopped and displayed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of this example can display a certain type of line notice display k1. The serif notice display of this example is a notice notice display of “NO02” shown in FIG. The serif notice display k1 is a display including a character display (in this example, “Tono is Yatsushiro Shogun”) representing the line of 婆 m1. The character display of this example is a character display including the contents related to the character of Tono. In addition, there is a case where a mini game with the mini game display o is started in association with the serif notice display k1. According to the pachinko machine 100 of this example, by displaying the serif notice display k1 including the character display of the contents related to the character, the serif notice display k1 can be noticed by a novice player, and the serif notice display k1. In some cases, it is possible to make it easier for the player to pay attention to the mini-game by playing the mini-game in relation to the game.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 177 (22) to 178 (19). FIG. 177 (22) to FIG. 178 (19) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 177 (22) shows a state continued from FIG. 177 (6). In the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a serif notice display k1, 婆 m1, and a character name display n1 are displayed.

  FIG. 177 (23) shows a state where the display of the mini game display o1 is started. In this example, the mini game display o1 is displayed on the right side of the serif notice display k1 so as to overlap the serif notice display k1.

  FIG. 177 (24) shows a state in which a character string image of “Brown is delicious” is displayed in the serif notice display k1. The character string image of “Tono is Yatsushiro Shogun” is a character display of the character display indicating the words of 婆 m1. In the state shown in FIG. 177 (24), the mini game is being executed by the mini game display o1. In this example, the mini-game is started after the character string image is displayed in the serif notice display k1. The start of the movement of the arrow image is the start of the mini game.

  FIG. 177 (25) shows a state where the mini game is being executed by the mini game display o1.

  FIG. 177 (26) shows a state where the mini game is being executed by the mini game display o1. The arrow image of the mini game display o1 is just before the stop.

  FIG. 177 (27) shows a state in which the mini game with the mini game display o1 is completed. The stop of the arrow image on the mini game display o1 is the end of the mini game. Since the arrow image of the mini game display o1 is stopped above the aspect 4 circular image, the result of the mini game is a winning acquisition corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image. In this example, when the winning result corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image is derived as a result of the mini game, the display of the serif notice display k2 is started as shown in FIG.

  FIG. 178 (1) shows a state continued from FIG. 177 (27), and the state in which the display j2 that can specify the mode of the serif notice display k2 is displayed before the display of the serif notice display k2 is started. Show. The display j2 is displayed in a manner of moving to the upper right from the vicinity of the aspect 4 circular image of the mini game display o1. The display j2 in this example appears from the vicinity of the aspect 4 circular image of the mini game display o1 and starts to be displayed. In the drawing, an upper right arrow shown at the lower left of the display j2 represents the locus and the moving direction of the display j2. The display j2 has a circular shape, the upper half is displayed in a transparent manner, and the lower half is displayed in an aspect 3. The lower half mode 3 of the display j1 corresponds to the mode of the serif notice display k2 started in FIG. 178 (2) described later, and the display j2 is a display related to the mode of the serif notice display k2. The serif notice display k2 is a notice display of the change, and the jackpot reliability is set according to the mode. By the display j2, the player can know the mode of the speech advance notice display before the display of the notice advance notice k2 is started.

  FIG. 178 (2) shows a state in which the display of the dialog notice display k2 is started. In this example, after the display j2 is erased, the display of the dialog notice display k2 is started. The serif notice display k2 is a picture of a scroll, and the serif notice display k2 is displayed as a picture in a state in which the scroll is wound at the beginning of display. Further, the serif notice display k2 is an aspect of aspect 3.

  FIG. 178 (3) shows a state in which the dialogue advance notice k2 is displayed in an animation in which the scroll opens leftward.

  FIG. 178 (4) shows a state in which a serif notice display k2 in which the scroll is completely opened is displayed. The serif notice display k2 in which the scroll is completely opened has a horizontally long rectangular shape, and becomes a balloon display in which a character display indicating the character's serif is displayed in the rectangle. The balloon mode of the speech balloon display of the serif notice display k2 is mode 3.

  FIG. 178 (5) shows a state where 婆 m2 and a character name display n2 including a character image of “婆” are displayed overlapping the right end portion of the serif notice display k2. The serif notice display k2 may be a display including 婆 m2 and character name display n2.

  FIG. 178 (6) shows a state in which the mini game display o2 is started to be displayed. In this example, the mini game display o2 is displayed on the left side of the serif notice display k2 so as to overlap the serif notice display k2.

  FIG. 178 (7) shows a state in which a character string image “suitable for Daifuku” is displayed in the serif notice display k 2. The character string image “fits well with Daifuku” is a character display in the character display representing the words of 婆 m2. In addition, a mini game based on the mini game display o2 is being performed.

  FIG. 178 (8) shows a state where the mini game is being executed by the mini game display o2. The arrow image of the mini game display o2 is just before the stop.

  FIG. 178 (9) shows a state in which the mini game with the mini game display o2 is completed. In this example, since the arrow image of the mini game display o2 stops above the rightmost mode 1 circular image, the result of the mini game is out of place. For this reason, the effect display started when winning in the mini game is not started after this.

  FIG. 178 (10) shows a state in which 婆 m1, character name display n1, 婆 m2, and character name display n2 are deleted. In this example, these displays are erased at the same time, but these displays may be erased in any order.

  FIG. 178 (11) shows a state in which the character string image “tea is delicious” in the serif notice display k1 and “suitable for Daifuku” in the serif notice display k2 are deleted. These character string images are erased at the same time, but either one may be erased first.

  FIG. 178 (12) shows a state where the mini game displays o1 and o2 are erased. These displays are erased at the same time, but either one may be erased first.

  FIG. 178 (13) shows a state in which the erasing animation for the line notice notices k1 and k2 is started. The erase animation of the serif notices k1 and k2 is displayed in a display in which the scroll is wound.

  FIG. 178 (14) shows a state in which the scrolls of the serif notice indications k1 and k2 are completely wound. The serif notices k1 and k2 are erased after being completely wound.

  FIG. 178 (15) shows a state in which the line preview notices k1 and k2 are deleted. In this example, a character (in this example, 婆 m1, m2) and character name display n1, n2, a character string image of lines (in this example, “tea is delicious”, “suitable for Daifuku”), mini game display O1, o2, and serif notice display k1, k2 are deleted in this order. Note that these erasing orders can be arbitrarily set.

  FIG. 178 (16) shows a state in which “decoration 6” is temporarily stopped (swing fluctuation display) in a manner in which “decoration 6” slightly swings up and down in the left symbol display area 208 a. In the figure, two wavy lines illustrated in the upper left and lower right of “decoration 6” indicate that “decoration 6” slightly fluctuates up and down.

  FIG. 178 (17) shows a state in which “decoration 8” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208 c so as to slightly swing up and down. In the figure, two wavy lines illustrated in the upper left and lower right of “decoration 8” indicate that “decoration 8” slightly fluctuates up and down.

  FIG. 178 (18) shows a state where “decoration 5” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208 b in a manner that slightly fluctuates up and down. In the figure, two wavy lines illustrated in the upper left and lower right of “decoration 5” indicate that “decoration 5” slightly fluctuates up and down. In the frame display surrounding “decoration 5”, a character image of a frog is displayed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 6—decoration 5—decoration 8” which is a shifted symbol form is temporarily displayed.

  FIG. 178 (19) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of date ("special figure G"). In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 6—decoration 5—decoration 8”, which is an outlier design mode indicating that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful, is stopped. In the fifth symbol display area, the fifth symbol of the combination “6-5-8” is stopped and displayed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present example derives the hit corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image as a result of the mini game by the mini game display o1 started in association with a certain type of notice notice display k1. Then, the display of the notice advance notice k2 is started. The serif notice display of this example is a notice notice display of “NO03” shown in FIG. The result of the mini game on the mini game display o1 can be derived without operating the chance button 136.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 179 (1) to (20) show an example of the performance of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 179 (1) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a symbol combination “decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 7” in the case of a loss is shown, which indicates that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct. Stop is displayed. Further, the fifth symbol of the combination “2-4-7” is stopped and displayed in the fifth symbol display area h. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 179 (1), the hold icons f1 and f2 are displayed in the circular form of aspect 1.

  In FIG. 179 (2), in response to the start of the special figure 1 variable game by the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown), the decorative display, the fourth graphic, and the fifth graphic of the variable display are started. Shows the state. Also, with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the hold icon reduction animation is executed, and the hold icon f1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f becomes the change icon e1 and the change icon. Moving to the display area e, the hold icon f2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. In the state shown in FIG. 179 (2), the hold icon reduction animation is finished, and the movement of the fluctuation icon e1 and the hold icon f2 is completed.

  FIG. 179 (3) shows a state in which the display j3 is displayed during the execution of the special figure variable game. The display j3 is a display in which the mode of the serif notice display k3 can be specified before the display of the serif notice display k3 shown in FIG. 179 (3) described later is started. The display j3 is moved and displayed from the center of the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the lower right. In the figure, a downward-pointing arrow shown at the upper left of the display j3 represents the locus and the moving direction of the display j3. The display j3 has a circular shape, the upper half is displayed in a transparent manner, and the lower half is displayed in the form 1. The mode 1 in the lower half of the display j3 corresponds to the mode of the serif notice display k3 started in FIG. 179 (4) described later, and the display j3 is a display related to the mode of the serif notice display. The serif notice display k3 is a look-ahead notice display. With the display j3, the player can know the mode of the serif notice display k3 before the display of the serif notice display k3 is started.

  FIG. 179 (4) shows a state in which the display of the notice advance notice k3 is started. In this example, after the display j3 is erased, the display of the dialog notice display k3 is started. The serif notice display k3 is a scroll picture, and the serif notice display k3 is displayed as a picture in which the scroll is wound at the beginning of display. Further, the serif notice display k3 is an aspect of aspect 1.

  FIG. 179 (5) shows a state in which the dialogue advance notice k3 is displayed as an animation in which the scroll is opened in the right direction.

  FIG. 179 (6) shows a state where a serif notice display k 3 in which the scroll is completely opened is displayed. The serif notice display k3 in which the scroll is completely opened has a horizontally long rectangular shape, and becomes a balloon display in which a character display representing the character's serif is displayed in the rectangle. The balloon mode of the balloon display of the serif notice display k3 is mode 1.

  FIG. 179 (7) shows a state in which the character name display n3 including the character image “girl” and the girl m3 overlaps with the left end portion of the line notice display k3. The serif notice display k3 may be a display including the girl m3 and the character name display n3.

  FIG. 179 (8) shows a state where the display of the mini game display o1 is started. In this example, the mini game display o1 is displayed, but the mini game by the mini game display o1 is not started. When the mini game is not started, the mini game display o1 may not be displayed.

  FIG. 179 (9) shows a state in which a character string image of “blue preparation” is displayed in the serif notice display k 3. The character string image of “blue preparation” is a character display of the character display representing the line of the girl m3.

  FIG. 179 (10) shows a state in which the mode of the hold icon f2 is changed from the mode 1 circle to the mode 3 circle. The character string image of “blue preparation” in the serif notice display k3 is a display for notifying that the mode of the hold icon changes to the mode 3. Further, even after the character string image is displayed in the serif notice display k3, the mini game by the mini game display o1 is not performed.

  FIG. 179 (11) shows a state in which the girl m3 and the character name display n3 are deleted. In this example, the girl 婆 m3 and the character name display n3 are erased at the same time, but one of these displays may be erased first.

FIG. 179 (12) shows a state where the character string image of “blue preparation” in the speech notice display k 3 is deleted.
FIG. 179 (13) shows a state in which the mini game display o1 is deleted.

  FIG. 179 (14) shows a state in which the erasing animation of the speech notice display k3 is started. The erase animation of the serif notice display k3 displays a display in which the scroll is wound leftward.

  FIG. 179 (15) shows a state in which the scroll of the serif notice display k3 is completely wound. The serif notice display k3 is erased after being completely wound.

  FIG. 179 (16) shows a state where the serif notice display k3 is deleted. In this example, the character (in this example, girl m3) and the character name display n3, the character string image of the line (in this example, “blue preparation”), the mini game display o1, and the line notice display k3 are deleted in this order. . Note that these erasing orders can be arbitrarily set.

  FIG. 179 (17) shows a state in which “decoration 6” is temporarily stopped (swing fluctuation display) in a manner in which “decoration 6” slightly swings up and down in the left symbol display area 208 a. In the figure, two wavy lines illustrated in the upper left and lower right of “decoration 6” indicate that “decoration 6” slightly fluctuates up and down.

  FIG. 179 (18) shows a state in which “decoration 8” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208 c in a manner that slightly swings up and down. In the figure, two wavy lines illustrated in the upper left and lower right of “decoration 8” indicate that “decoration 8” slightly fluctuates up and down.

  FIG. 179 (19) shows a state in which “decoration 5” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b in a manner that slightly swings up and down. In the figure, two wavy lines illustrated in the upper left and lower right of “decoration 5” indicate that “decoration 5” slightly fluctuates up and down. In the frame display surrounding “decoration 5”, a character image of a frog is displayed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 6—decoration 5—decoration 8” which is a shifted symbol form is temporarily displayed.

  FIG. 179 (20) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of date ("special figure G"). In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 6—decoration 5—decoration 8”, which is an outlier design mode indicating that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful, is stopped. In the fifth symbol display area, the fifth symbol of the combination “6-5-8” is stopped and displayed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present example can display a serif notice display k3 as a display of a certain kind of serif notice. The serif notice display k3 is a display including a certain character display (in this example, “blue preparation”) among the character displays representing the lines of the girl m3. The serif notice display k3 is a display as a prefetch notice, and is a notice notice display of “NO18” shown in FIG. The mini game by the mini game display o1 is not executed in association with the serif notice display k3 which is the pre-read notice display.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 180 (1) to FIG. 182 (9), an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. 180 (1) to 182 (9) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 180 (1) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a symbol combination “decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 7” in the case of a loss is shown, which indicates that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct. Stop is displayed. Further, the fifth symbol of the combination “2-4-7” is stopped and displayed in the fifth symbol display area h. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 180 (1), the hold icons f1 and f2 are displayed in the circular form of aspect 1.

  In FIG. 180 (2), in response to the start of the special figure 1 variable game by the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown), the decorative display, the fourth graphic, and the fifth graphic of the variable display are started. Shows the state. Also, with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the hold icon reduction animation is executed, and the hold icon f1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f becomes the change icon e1 and the change icon. Moving to the display area e, the hold icon f2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. In the state shown in FIG. 180 (2), the hold icon reduction animation is finished, and the movement of the fluctuation icon e1 and the hold icon f2 is completed.

  FIG. 180 (3) shows a state in which the display j4 that can specify the mode of the serif notice display is displayed before the display of the serif notice display is started. The display j4 is moved and displayed from the center of the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the lower right. In the drawing, a downward-pointing arrow shown at the upper left of the display j4 represents the locus and the moving direction of the display j4. The display j4 has a circular shape, the upper half is displayed in a transparent manner, and the lower half is displayed in an aspect 4. The lower half mode 4 of the display j4 corresponds to the mode 4 of the serif notice display k4 started in FIG. 180 (4) described later, and the display j4 is a display related to the mode of the serif notice display. The serif notice display is a notice display of the change, and the jackpot reliability is set according to the mode. With the display j4, the player can know the mode of the line notice display before the line notice display is started.

  FIG. 180 (4) shows a state in which the display of the notice advance notice k4 is started. In this example, after the display j4 is erased, the display of the dialog notice display k4 is started. The serif notice display k4 is a picture of a scroll, and the serif notice display k4 is displayed as a picture in a state where the scroll is wound at the beginning of display. Further, the serif notice display k4 is an aspect of aspect 4.

  FIG. 180 (5) shows a state in which the dialogue advance notice k4 is displayed in an animation in which the scroll is opened in the right direction.

  FIG. 180 (6) shows a state where a serif notice display k4 in which the scroll is completely opened is displayed. The serif notice display k4 in which the scroll is completely opened has a horizontally long rectangular shape, and becomes a balloon display in which a character display representing the character's serif is displayed in the rectangle. The balloon mode of the speech balloon display of the serif notice display k4 is mode 4.

  In FIG. 180 (7), a character image display n4 including a princess character image (hereinafter referred to as "princess") m4 and a character image of "princess" is displayed overlapping the left end portion of the line notice display k4. It shows the state that was done. The serif notice display k4 may be a display including the princess m4 and the character name display n4.

  FIG. 180 (8) shows a state where the display of the mini game display o1 is started. In this example, the mini game display o1 is displayed on the right side in the serif notice display k4 so as to overlap the serif notice display k4.

  FIG. 180 (9) shows a state in which a character string image “Now” is displayed in the line notice display k4. The character string image of “Now” is a character display of the character display representing the line of the princess m4. In the state shown in FIG. 180 (9), the mini game is being executed by the mini game display o1. In this example, the mini-game is started after the character string image is displayed in the serif notice display k4. The start of the movement of the arrow image is the start of the mini game.

  FIG. 180 (10) shows a state in which the mini game is being executed by the mini game display o1. The arrow image has moved to the right.

  FIG. 180 (11) shows a state where the mini game is being executed by the mini game display o1. The arrow image has moved to the right.

  FIG. 180 (12) shows a state in which the mini game is being executed by the mini game display o1. The arrow image has moved to the right.

  FIG. 180 (13) shows a state in which the mini game is being executed by the mini game display o1. The arrow image is just before stopping.

  FIG. 180 (14) shows a state in which the mini game with the mini game display o1 is completed. The stop of the arrow image on the mini game display o1 is the end of the mini game. Since the arrow image of the mini game display o1 is stopped above the aspect 5 circular image, the result of the mini game is a winning corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image and a winning corresponding to the aspect 5 circular image. The hit corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image is the start of the second serif notice display, and the hit corresponding to the aspect 5 circular image is the aspect of the second serif notice display. In this example, when the winning results corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image and the aspect 5 circular image are derived as a result of the mini-game, as shown in FIG. Is displayed. The serif notice display in this example is a "NO16" serif notice display shown in FIG.

  FIG. 180 (15) shows a state in which the display j5 that can specify the mode of the serif notice display k5 is displayed before the serif notice display k5 that is the second serif notice display is started. The display j5 is moved and displayed from the vicinity of the aspect 4 circular image of the mini game display o1 to the upper right. The display j5 of this example appears from the vicinity of the aspect 4 circular image of the mini game display o1 and starts to be displayed. In the figure, an upper right arrow shown at the lower left of the display j5 represents the locus and the moving direction of the display j5. The display j5 has a circular shape, the upper half is displayed in a transparent manner, and the lower half is displayed in the form 5. The lower half mode 5 of the display j5 corresponds to the mode of the serif notice display k5 started in FIG. 180 (16) described later, and the display j5 is a display related to the mode of the serif notice display k5. The serif notice display k5 is a notice display of the change, and the jackpot reliability is set according to the mode. With the display j5, the player can know the mode of the speech advance notice display before the display of the notice advance notice k5 is started.

  FIG. 180 (16) shows a state in which the display of the dialog notice display k5 is started. In this example, after the display j5 is erased, the display of the dialog notice display k5 is started. The serif notice display k5 is a scroll pattern, and the serif notice display k5 is displayed as a scrolled picture at the beginning of display. Further, the serif notice display k5 is an aspect of aspect 5.

  FIG. 180 (17) shows a state where the serif notice display k <b> 5 is displayed as an animation in which the scroll opens leftward.

  FIG. 180 (18) shows a state in which a serif notice display k5 in which the scroll is completely opened is displayed. The serif notice display k5 in which the scroll is completely opened has a horizontally long rectangular shape, and becomes a balloon display in which a character display representing the character's serif is displayed in the rectangle. The speech balloon display mode of the speech notice display k5 is mode 5.

  In FIG. 180 (19), a character image display n5 including a character image of “dono” (hereinafter referred to as “dono”) m5 and a character name display “n” is displayed overlapping the right end portion of the serif notice display k5. Is done. The serif notice display k5 may be a display including a lord m5 and a character name display n5.

  FIG. 180 (20) shows a state in which the display of the mini game display o2 is started. In this example, the mini game display o2 is displayed on the left side in the serif notice display k5 so as to overlap the serif notice display k5. In addition, a character string image of “strategy start” is displayed in the serif notice display k5. The character string image of “strategy is start” is a character display of the character display indicating the line of the m5.

  FIG. 180 (21) shows a state in which the mini game is started by the mini game display o2.

  FIG. 180 (22) shows a state where the mini game is being executed by the mini game display o2. The arrow image has moved to the left.

  FIG. 180 (23) shows a state in which the mini game is being executed by the mini game display o2. The arrow image has moved to the left.

  FIG. 180 (24) shows a state in which the mini game is being executed by the mini game display o2. The arrow image has moved to the left.

  FIG. 180 (25) shows a state in which the mini game with the mini game display o2 is completed. In this example, since the arrow image of the mini game display o2 stops above the leftmost aspect 5 circular image, the result of the mini game corresponds to the hit corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image and the aspect 5 circular image. Earn per hit. The hit corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image is that one gauge image g3 is accumulated, and the hit corresponding to the aspect 5 circular image is that one gauge image g3 is accumulated. When the winning results corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image and the aspect 5 circular image are derived as a result of the mini game, an effect display in which two gauge images g3 are accumulated is started as shown in FIG. The

  FIG. 180 (26) shows a state in which the effect display in which two gauge images g3 are accumulated is started. An animation in which the p1 and p2 move from the circular image of the aspect 5 circular image of the mini game display o2 to the gauge image g3 is displayed. In the figure, a lower right arrow shown in the upper left of the ridges p1 and p2 indicates the trajectory and moving direction of the ridges p1 and p2.

FIG. 180 (27) shows a state where the effect display in which two gauge images g3 are accumulated is completed. Two segment images of the gauge image g3 are displayed in red, and two gauge images g3 are accumulated.
FIG. 180 (28) shows a state in which two gauge images g3 are accumulated.

  FIG. 181 (1) shows a state continued from FIG. 180 (28), and shows a state in which the princess m4, the character name display n4, the lord m5, and the character name display n5 are deleted. In this example, these displays are erased at the same time, but these displays may be erased in any order.

  FIG. 181 (2) shows a state where the character string image of “finally” in the serif notice display k 4 and “operation start” in the serif notice display k 5 are deleted. These character string images are erased at the same time, but either one may be erased first.

  FIG. 181 (3) shows a state where the mini game displays o1 and o2 are erased. These displays are erased at the same time, but either one may be erased first.

  FIG. 181 (4) shows a state in which the erasing animation of the line notice notices k4 and k5 is started. In the erase animation of the serif advance notices k4 and k5, an indication that the scroll is wound is displayed.

  FIG. 181 (5) shows a state in which the scrolls of the line notice notices k4 and k5 are completely wound. The serif notice indications k4 and k5 are erased after being completely wound.

  FIG. 181 (6) shows a state in which the line preview notices k 4 and k 5 are deleted. In this example, a character (in this example, princess m4, lord m5) and character name display n4, n5, a character string image (in this example, “Now”, “Operation start”), mini game display o1, It is erased in the order of o2 and serif notice display k4, k5. Note that these erasing orders can be arbitrarily set.

  FIG. 181 (7) shows a state in which “decoration 6” is temporarily stopped (swing fluctuation display) in a manner in which the “decoration 6” slightly swings up and down in the left symbol display area 208 a. In the figure, two wavy lines illustrated in the upper left and lower right of “decoration 6” indicate that “decoration 6” slightly fluctuates up and down.

  FIG. 181 (8) shows a state in which “decoration 6” is temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner in which the “decoration 6” slightly swings up and down in the right symbol display area 208 c. In the figure, two wavy lines illustrated in the upper left and lower right of “decoration 6” indicate that “decoration 6” slightly fluctuates up and down.

  FIG. 181 (9) shows a state in which the normal reach effect is started. During the normal reach effect and the super reach effect described later, the decorative symbol variation display in the symbol display areas 208a to 208 is deleted. A liquor barrel image is displayed in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is suggested that a normal reach effect compared to drinking is started when a final display of the liquor barrel image is performed.

  FIG. 181 (10) shows a state in which the enemy character image (hereinafter referred to as “enemy”) is displayed in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 without the display of the sake barrel image being confirmed. . It is suggested that the normal reach production of enemy annihilation starts when the enemy confirmation display is performed.

  FIG. 181 (11) shows a state in which the enemy image is not displayed and the boss character image (hereinafter referred to as “boss”) is displayed in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is suggested that the normal reach production of the boss confrontation is started when the boss confirmation display is performed.

  FIG. 181 (12) shows a state in which the boss confirmation display is performed. In the upper center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a character string image of “boss confrontation reach” is displayed in a rectangular frame display, and a part of the frame display is overlapped to display the boss. Has been.

  FIG. 181 (13) shows a state in which the boss confrontation reach is started. A character string image of “-Development with victory over the boss” is displayed in the upper part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is suggested that when the boss wins the boss, the super reach production starts. Has been. During normal reach production such as boss confrontation reach, the special figure 1 hold icon display area f and all special figure 1 hold icons (in this example, the hold icon f1) are erased.

  FIG. 181 (14) shows a state in which an effect display in which one gauge image g3 is accumulated is started during the boss confrontation reach. The gauge images g1 to g3 may accumulate irregularly. An animation is displayed in which the p3 that appears in the upper left part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 moves to the gauge image g3. In the figure, the arrow shown above the ridge p3 indicates the locus and movement direction of the ridge p3.

  FIG. 181 (15) shows a state where the effect display in which one gauge image g3 is accumulated is finished. Three segment images of the gauge image g3 are displayed in red, and the gauge image g3 is full. A character string image “Preparation OK” is displayed above the gauge image g3.

  FIG. 181 (16) shows a state where the boss confrontation reach is won. A character string image of “win” is displayed at the upper center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a lost boss is displayed below the character string image.

  FIG. 181 (17) shows a state in which the start effect of the strong button effect is started. The strong button effect is an effect that prompts the player to press the chance button 136 whose pressing surface protrudes upward, and the start effect of the strong button effect is an effect that is performed before the strong button effect is started. In the start effect of the strong button effect, four wavy effect images are displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 181 (18) shows a state in which the start effect of the strong button effect is being performed. An animation is displayed in which an effect image having an elliptical shape and a jagged edge jumps out from the gauge image g3 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the drawing, the arrow shown above the gauge image g3 represents the locus and moving direction of the jagged effect image.

  FIG. 181 (19) shows a state in which a button image simulating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a meter image indicating the operation valid period of the chance button 136 are displayed below and a strong button effect is started. The pressing surface of the chance button 136 protrudes upward, and the button image is displayed in a manner corresponding to a state where the pressing surface of the chance button 136 protrudes upward. Further, the button image is displayed in the form of aspect 5. In addition, a downward arrow image and a character string image of “Press!” Are displayed above the button image, and the chance button 136 emits light in the mode 5, and the pressing of the chance button 136 is urged. Further, the entire segment-like image of the gauge image g3 is displayed in black, and a character string image of “completed” is displayed overlapping the segment-like image, and the gauge image g3 is fully filled. It is notified that the button production has started.

  FIG. 181 (20) shows a state in which the operation valid period has started. The meter of the meter image indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period has decreased.

  FIG. 181 (21) shows a state immediately after the chance button 136 is pressed during the operation effective period. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed during the strong button effect, the movable body 700 emits light in the aspect 5, moves upward, and stops. In the strong button effect, when the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation effective period, the operation effective period ends.

  FIG. 181 (22) shows a state in which the movable body 702 has moved downward and the movable portions 702a and 702b have moved left and right. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed during the strong button effect, the movable body 702 emits light in the aspect 5, moves downward, and stops.

FIG. 181 (23) shows a state in which the super reach production swordsman reach is started after the movable bodies 700 and 702 are moved to the initial positions. The movable bodies 700 and 702 are turned on in the mode 1 after moving to the initial position. In the swordsman reach production, the background image of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is night, and a crescent moon image is displayed in the upper left of the display area. In addition, a character string image of “Swordsman Reach” is displayed in a rectangular frame display at the upper center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. A character image of a swordsman (hereinafter referred to as “swordsman”) is displayed.
FIG. 181 (24) shows a state where a swordsman's reach performance is being performed.

  FIG. 181 (25) shows a state in which a balloon display is displayed. The balloon display is displayed in a horizontally long rectangular shape below the lord and the swordsman, and is an aspect of aspect 1. In the balloon display, a character string image of “[Swordsman] Fufufu” is displayed as a dialogue display of the swordsman.

  FIG. 181 (26) shows a state in which a balloon display is displayed. The balloon display is displayed in a horizontally long rectangular shape below the lord and the swordsman, and is an aspect of aspect 1. In the balloon display, a character string image of “[Mr.

  FIG. 181 (27) shows a state in which an animation in which the swordsman and the swordsman cut each other is displayed.

  FIG. 181 (28) shows a state in which the button introduction animation is displayed. The button introduction animation is an effect display that may be displayed before the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started. In the button introduction animation of this example, for example, an animation in which button images q1 and q2 having a transmittance of 50% move from the left and right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 toward the center of the display area is displayed.

  FIG. 182 (1) shows a state continued from FIG. 181 (28), and shows a state where a button introduction animation is displayed. The button images q1 and q2 have moved to the vicinity of the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The button introduction animation of this example ends when the button images q1 and q2 completely overlap.

  FIG. 182 (2) shows a state where the button introduction animation has been completed. After the button images q1 and q2 overlap, a button image and a meter image indicating the operation effective period are displayed below the button image. In addition, a downward arrow image and a character string image of “Press!” Are displayed on the upper part of the button image, the chance button 136 emits light in the mode 5, and the pressing of the chance button 136 is urged. Further, the button image is displayed in the form of aspect 5.

  FIG. 182 (3) shows a state in which the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has started. The meter of the meter image indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period has decreased.

  FIG. 182 (4) shows a state immediately after the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation valid period. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation valid period, the button image and the meter image are deleted, and the result of the swordsman reach is displayed. In this example, since the lord loses to the swordsman, an animation that the lord falls is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, when the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation effective period of this example, the operation effective period ends.

  FIG. 182 (5) shows a state in which the display of the variation display of the decorative symbol is resumed and “decoration 8” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b in a manner that slightly swings up and down. In the figure, two wavy lines illustrated in the upper left and lower right of “decoration 8” indicate that “decoration 8” slightly fluctuates up and down. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 6—decoration 8—decoration 6” which is a shifted symbol form is temporarily displayed.

  FIG. 182 (6) shows a state where the wipe effect display is displayed. In the wipe effect display of this example, the wipe display is displayed so as to wipe off areas other than the fifth symbol display area of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the wipe display of this example includes a rider riding a motorcycle and a character string image of “CR XXXX (for example, the title name of the pachinko machine 100)”.

  FIG. 182 (7) shows a state where the wipe effect display is displayed. During the wipe effect display, an animation is displayed in which the rider on the motorcycle moves from left to right.

  FIG. 182 (8) shows a state where the wipe effect display has been completed. The erase of the wipe display is the end of the wipe effect display. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 6-decoration 8-decoration 6” is temporarily stopped and displayed. In the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, an image of the sun pattern and a background image corresponding to the sunny stage are displayed.

  FIG. 182 (9) shows a state where the special figure 1 variable game is finished. The result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of date ("special figure G"). In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 6—decoration 8—decoration 6”, which is an off symbol pattern indicating that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful, is stopped. In the fifth symbol display area, the fifth symbol of the combination “6-8-6” is stopped and displayed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present example derives the hit corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image as a result of the mini game by the mini game display o1 started in association with a certain type of notice notice display k1. Then, the display of the notice advance notice k2 is started. The serif notice display in this example is a "NO16" serif notice display shown in FIG. The result of the mini game on the mini game display o1 can be derived without operating the chance button 136.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 182 (10) to FIG. 182 (15), an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 182 (10) to FIG. 182 (15) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 182 (10) shows a state continued from FIG. 180 (21).

  FIG. 182 (10) shows a state in which the mini game is being executed by the mini game display o2. The arrow image has moved to the left.

  FIG. 182 (11) shows a state where the mini game is being executed by the mini game display o2. The arrow image has moved to the left.

  FIG. 182 (12) shows a state where the mini game is being executed by the mini game display o2. The arrow image is in the state just before stopping.

  FIG. 182 (13) shows a state in which the mini game with the mini game display o2 is completed. In this example, since the arrow image of the mini game display o2 stops above the third aspect 1 circular image from the right, the result of the mini game is a win corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image. The hit corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image is that one gauge image g3 is accumulated. In this example, when the winning result corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image is derived as a result of the mini game, an effect display in which two gauge images g3 are accumulated as shown in FIG. 182 (14) described later is started.

  FIG. 182 (14) shows a state in which the effect display in which one gauge image g3 is accumulated is started. An animation in which the p1 p4 moves from the circular image of the aspect 1 circular image of the mini game display o2 to the gauge image g3 is displayed. In the drawing, a downward-pointing arrow shown at the upper left of the ridge p4 indicates the locus and movement direction of the ridge p4.

  FIG. 182 (15) shows a state where the effect display in which one gauge image g3 is accumulated is finished. One segment image of the gauge image g3 is displayed in red, and one gauge image g3 is accumulated. Thus, in the mini game based on the mini game display o2, there is a case where the arrow image stops on the third aspect 1 circular image from the left and the winning corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image is obtained.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 183 (1) to (11) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 183 (1) shows a state where the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a symbol combination “decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 7” in the case of a loss is shown, which indicates that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct. Stop is displayed. Further, the fifth symbol of the combination “2-4-7” is stopped and displayed in the fifth symbol display area h. In addition, the hold icons f1 and f2 having the circular form 1 are displayed.

  In FIG. 183 (2), when the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown) starts the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol variable display, the fourth symbol, and the fifth symbol variable display are started. Shows the state. The downward arrows shown in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c indicate a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed, and the downward arrows illustrated in the fifth symbol display region h indicate the fifth symbol variation display. Indicates the displayed state. Also, with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the hold icon reduction animation is executed, and the hold icon f1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f becomes the change icon e1 and the change icon. Moving to the display area e, the hold icon f2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. In the state shown in FIG. 183 (2), the hold icon reduction animation is finished, and the movement of the fluctuation icon e1 and the hold icon f2 is completed.

  FIG. 183 (3) shows a state in which the step-up notice is started. The step-up notice is a notice of the change. In the step-up notice in this example, the character images are sequentially switched, and when a certain character image is stopped and displayed, an effect display next to the step-up notice is started. In FIG. 183 (3), a character image of Princess Chibi (hereinafter referred to as “Chibi Princess”) r1 is displayed on the right side of the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a character string image of “SU1” is displayed above it. ing. “SU1” indicates Step 1 of the step-up notice.

  FIG. 183 (4) shows a state in which the step-up notice is being executed. In place of the little princess r1 on the right side of the center of the display area of the decorative design display device 208, a character image (hereinafter referred to as “爺”) r2 of a frog and a character string image of “SU2” are displayed above it. . “SU2” indicates step 2 of the step-up notice.

  FIG. 183 (5) shows a state in which the step-up notice is being executed. A princess r3 is displayed on the right side of the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 instead of the heel r2, and a character string image of “SU3” is displayed above the princess r3. “SU3” indicates that step 3 is a step-up notice.

  FIG. 183 (6) shows a state in which the step-up notice is being executed. Instead of the princess r3 on the right side of the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a princess r4 and a character string image of “SU4” are displayed above it. “SU4” indicates step 4 of the step-up notice.

  FIG. 183 (7) shows a state in which the step-up notice is finished. In the step-up advance notice in this example, the stop display is not performed for a certain character image, so the effect display following the step-up advance notice is not started.

  FIG. 183 (8) shows a state in which “decoration 6” is temporarily stopped (swing fluctuation display) in a manner in which “decoration 6” slightly swings up and down in the left symbol display area 208a. In the figure, two wavy lines illustrated in the upper left and lower right of “decoration 6” indicate that “decoration 6” slightly fluctuates up and down.

  FIG. 183 (9) shows a state in which “decoration 8” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208 c in a manner that slightly swings up and down. In the figure, two wavy lines illustrated in the upper left and lower right of “decoration 8” indicate that “decoration 8” slightly fluctuates up and down.

  FIG. 183 (10) shows a state in which “decoration 5” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b in a manner that slightly swings up and down. In the figure, two wavy lines illustrated in the upper left and lower right of “decoration 5” indicate that “decoration 5” slightly fluctuates up and down. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 6—decoration 5—decoration 8” which is a shifted symbol form is temporarily displayed.

  FIG. 183 (11) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of date ("special figure G"). In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 6—decoration 5—decoration 8”, which is an outlier design mode indicating that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful, is stopped. In the fifth symbol display area, the fifth symbol of the combination “6-5-8” is stopped and displayed.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 183 (12) to 184 (22). FIG. 183 (12) to FIG. 184 (22) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 183 (12) shows a state where the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a symbol combination “decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 7” in the case of a loss is shown, which indicates that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct. Stop is displayed. Further, the fifth symbol of the combination “2-4-7” is stopped and displayed in the fifth symbol display area h. In addition, the hold icons f1 and f2 having the circular form 1 are displayed.

  In FIG. 183 (13), in accordance with the start of the special figure 1 variable game by the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown), the decorative display of the variable display, the fourth graphic, and the fifth graphic of the variable display are started. Shows the state. The downward arrows shown in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c indicate a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed, and the downward arrows illustrated in the fifth symbol display region h indicate the fifth symbol variation display. Indicates the displayed state. Also, with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the hold icon reduction animation is executed, and the hold icon f1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f becomes the change icon e1 and the change icon. Moving to the display area e, the hold icon f2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. In the state shown in FIG. 183 (13), the hold icon reduction animation is finished, and the movement of the fluctuation icon e1 and the hold icon f2 is completed.

  FIG. 183 (14) shows a state in which the step-up notice is started. Princess Chibi r1 is displayed on the right side of the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the character string image “SU1” is displayed above it. “SU1” indicates Step 1 of the step-up notice.

  FIG. 183 (15) shows a state in which the step-up notice is being executed. In place of the little princess r1 on the right side of the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a heel r2 and a character string image of “SU2” are displayed above it. “SU2” indicates step 2 of the step-up notice.

  FIG. 183 (16) shows a state in which the step-up notice is being executed. A princess r3 is displayed on the right side of the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 instead of the heel r2, and a character string image of “SU3” is displayed above the princess r3. “SU3” indicates that step 3 is a step-up notice.

  FIG. 183 (17) shows a state in which the step-up notice is being executed. Instead of the princess r3 on the right side of the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a princess r4 and a character string image of “SU4” are displayed above it. “SU4” indicates step 4 of the step-up notice. In the present example, since the step 4 of the step 4 is stopped and displayed, the next effect display of the step-up notice is started. In addition, if it progresses to step 4 of step-up, it will become easy to perform a swordsman reach in the said special figure fluctuation game.

  FIG. 183 (18) shows a state in which the dialogue advance notice display is started as an effect display next to the step up advance notice. In the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a symbol r4 and a serif notice display s1 are displayed. In the serif notice display s1, a character string image of “I will come to mind” is displayed as a serif of r4. Further, the serif notice display s1 is an aspect of aspect 5. The serif notice display s1 is a different kind of serif notice display from the serif notice display shown in FIG. Further, the serif notice display s1 and the lord r4 are notice notices of the change.

  FIG. 183 (19) shows a state in which “decoration 6” is temporarily stopped (swing fluctuation display) in a manner in which “decoration 6” slightly swings up and down in the left symbol display area 208 a. In the figure, two wavy lines illustrated in the upper left and lower right of “decoration 6” indicate that “decoration 6” slightly fluctuates up and down.

  FIG. 183 (20) shows a state in which “decoration 6” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208 c so as to slightly shake up and down. In the figure, two wavy lines illustrated in the upper left and lower right of “decoration 6” indicate that “decoration 6” slightly fluctuates up and down.

  FIG. 183 (21) shows a state in which the normal reach production is started. During the normal reach effect and the super reach effect described later, the decorative symbol variation display in the symbol display areas 208a to 208 is deleted. A liquor barrel image is displayed in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is suggested that a normal reach effect compared to drinking is started when a final display of the liquor barrel image is performed.

  FIG. 183 (22) shows a state in which an enemy character image (hereinafter referred to as “enemy”) is displayed in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 without the display of the sake barrel image being confirmed. . It is suggested that the normal reach production of enemy annihilation starts when the enemy confirmation display is performed.

  FIG. 183 (23) shows a state where the enemy image is not displayed and the boss character image (hereinafter referred to as “boss”) is displayed at the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is suggested that the normal reach production of the boss confrontation is started when the boss confirmation display is performed.

  FIG. 183 (24) shows a state where the confirmation display of the boss is performed. In the upper center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a character string image of “boss confrontation reach” is displayed in a rectangular frame display, and a part of the frame display is overlapped to display the boss. Has been.

  FIG. 183 (25) shows a state in which the boss confrontation reach is started. A character string image of “-Development with victory over the boss” is displayed in the upper part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is suggested that when the boss wins the boss, the super reach production starts. Has been. During normal reach production such as boss confrontation reach, the special figure 1 hold icon display area f and all special figure 1 hold icons (in this example, the hold icon f1) are erased.

  FIG. 184 (1) shows a state continued from FIG. 183 (25), and shows a state where a boss confrontation reach effect is being executed.

  FIG. 184 (2) shows a state where the boss confrontation reach is won. A character string image of “win” is displayed at the upper center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a lost boss is displayed below the character string image.

  FIG. 184 (3) shows a state where the start effect of the button effect is started. The button effect is an effect that prompts the player to press the chance button 136, and the start effect of the button effect is an effect that is performed before the button effect is started. In the start effect of the button effect, four wavy effect images are displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 184 (4) shows a state in which a button image simulating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a meter image indicating the operation effective period of the chance button 136 are displayed below and a strong button effect is started. In addition, a downward arrow image and a character string image of “Press!” Are displayed above the button image. The chance button 136 emits light in the mode 5 and the pressing of the chance button 136 is prompted.

  FIG. 184 (5) shows a state in which the operation valid period has started. The meter of the meter image indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period has decreased.

  FIG. 184 (6) shows a state immediately after the chance button 136 is pressed during the operation effective period. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed during the button production, the movable body 700 emits light in the aspect 5, moves upward, and stops. In the button effect of this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation effective period, the operation effective period ends.

  FIG. 184 (7) shows a state where the movable body 702 has moved downward and the movable portions 702a and 702b have moved left and right. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed during the button effect, the movable body 702 emits light in the mode 5 and moves downward to stop.

FIG. 184 (8) shows a state in which the swordsman reach of super reach production is started after the movable bodies 700 and 702 are moved to the initial positions. The movable bodies 700 and 702 are turned on in the mode 1 after moving to the initial position. In the swordsman reach production, the background image of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is night, and a crescent moon image is displayed in the upper left of the display area. In addition, a character string image of “Swordsman Reach” is displayed in a rectangular frame display at the upper center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Shows a swordsman.
FIG. 184 (9) shows a state where the reach effect of the swordsman is being performed.

  FIG. 184 (10) shows a state in which a balloon display is displayed. The balloon display is displayed in a horizontally long rectangular shape below the lord and the swordsman, and is an aspect of aspect 1. In the balloon display, a character string image of “[Swordsman] Fufufu” is displayed as a dialogue display of the swordsman.

  FIG. 184 (11) shows a state in which a balloon display is displayed. The balloon display is displayed in a horizontally long rectangular shape below the lord and the swordsman, and is an aspect of aspect 1. In the balloon display, a character string image of “[Mr.

  FIG. 184 (12) shows a state in which an animation in which the swordsman and the swordsman cut each other is displayed.

  FIG. 184 (13) shows a state in which the button introduction animation is displayed. The button introduction animation is an effect display that may be displayed before the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started. In the button introduction animation of this example, for example, an animation in which button images q1 and q2 having a transmittance of 50% move from the left and right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 toward the center of the display area is displayed.

  FIG. 184 (14) shows a state where the button introduction animation is displayed. The button images q1 and q2 have moved to the vicinity of the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The button introduction animation of this example ends when the button images q1 and q2 completely overlap.

  FIG. 184 (15) shows a state where the button introduction animation has been completed. After the button images q1 and q2 overlap, a button image and a meter image indicating the operation effective period are displayed below the button image. In addition, a downward arrow image and a character string image of “Press!” Are displayed on the upper part of the button image, the chance button 136 emits light in the mode 5, and the pressing of the chance button 136 is urged. Further, the button image is displayed in the form of aspect 5.

  FIG. 184 (16) shows a state in which the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started. The meter of the meter image indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period has decreased.

  FIG. 184 (17) shows a state immediately after the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation valid period. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation valid period, the button image and the meter image are deleted, and the result of the swordsman reach is displayed. In this example, since the lord loses to the swordsman, an animation that the lord falls is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, when the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation effective period of this example, the operation effective period ends.

  FIG. 184 (18) shows a state in which the display of the decorative symbol variation display is resumed and “decoration 8” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208 b in a manner that slightly fluctuates up and down. In the figure, two wavy lines illustrated in the upper left and lower right of “decoration 8” indicate that “decoration 8” slightly fluctuates up and down. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 6—decoration 8—decoration 6” which is a shifted symbol form is temporarily displayed.

  FIG. 184 (19) shows a state where the wipe effect display is displayed. In the wipe effect display of this example, the wipe display is displayed so as to wipe off areas other than the fifth symbol display area of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the wipe display of this example includes a rider riding a motorcycle and a character string image of “CR XXXX (for example, the title name of the pachinko machine 100)”.

  FIG. 184 (20) shows a state where the wipe effect display is displayed. During the wipe effect display, an animation is displayed in which the rider on the motorcycle moves from left to right.

  FIG. 184 (21) shows a state where the wipe effect display is completed. The erase of the wipe display is the end of the wipe effect display. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 6-decoration 8-decoration 6” is temporarily stopped and displayed. In the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, an image of the sun pattern and a background image corresponding to the sunny stage are displayed.

  FIG. 184 (22) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of date ("special figure G"). In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 6—decoration 8—decoration 6”, which is an off symbol pattern indicating that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful, is stopped. In the fifth symbol display area, the fifth symbol of the combination “6-8-6” is stopped and displayed.

  The pachinko machine 100 of this example may be configured to start display of a speech advance notice such as a speech advance notice s1 for a step-up advance notice as a response display of the operation of the chance button 136 or the chance button 700. In this case, if the operation of the chance button 136 or the chance button 700 is performed in a state where the button image (operation display) representing the appearance of the chance button 136 or the chance button 700 is displayed, a step-up notice is given as a response display. A serif notice display may be started. In this case, there are cases where serif notice displays k1, k2, k4, k5, etc. are displayed, and at least a part of the serif notice displays such as serif notice displays k1, k2, k4, k5, etc. are displayed as operation indications. Is overlapped by.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 185 (1) to FIG. 187 (9), an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 185 (1) to FIG. 187 (9) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 185 (1) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a symbol combination “decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 7” in the case of a loss is shown, which indicates that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct. Stop is displayed. Further, the fifth symbol of the combination “2-4-7” is stopped and displayed in the fifth symbol display area h. A hold icon f1, f2 is displayed in a circular form.

  In FIG. 185 (2), when the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown) starts the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative pattern variable display, the fourth graphic, and the fifth graphic variable display are started. Shows the state. Also, with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the hold icon reduction animation is executed, and the hold icon f1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f becomes the change icon e1 and the change icon. Moving to the display area e, the hold icon f2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. The hold icon decreasing animation is finished, and the movement of the fluctuation icon e1 and the hold icon f2 is completed.

  FIG. 185 (3) shows a state in which the display j4 that can specify the mode of the serif notice display is displayed before the display of the serif notice display is started. The display j4 is moved and displayed from the center of the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the lower right. In the drawing, a downward-pointing arrow shown at the upper left of the display j4 represents the locus and the moving direction of the display j4. The display j4 has a circular shape, the upper half is displayed in a transparent manner, and the lower half is displayed in an aspect 4. The lower half mode 4 of the display j4 corresponds to the mode of the serif notice display k4 started in FIG. 185 (4) described later, and the display j4 is a display related to the mode of the serif notice display. The serif notice display is a notice display of the change, and the jackpot reliability is set according to the mode. With the display j4, the player can know the mode of the line notice display before the line notice display is started.

  FIG. 185 (4) shows a state in which the display of the notice advance notice k4 is started. In this example, after the display j4 is erased, the display of the dialog notice display k4 is started. The serif notice display k4 is a picture of a scroll, and the serif notice display k4 is displayed as a picture in a state where the scroll is wound at the beginning of display. Further, the serif notice display k4 is an aspect of aspect 4.

  FIG. 185 (5) shows a state where the serif notice display k4 is displayed in an animation in which the scroll is opened in the right direction.

  FIG. 185 (6) shows a state in which a serif notice display k4 in which the scroll is completely opened is displayed. The serif notice display k4 in which the scroll is completely opened has a horizontally long rectangular shape, and becomes a balloon display in which a character display representing the character's serif is displayed in the rectangle. The balloon mode of the speech balloon display of the serif notice display k4 is mode 4.

  FIG. 185 (7) shows a state in which a character name display n4 including a princess m4 and a character image of “princess” is displayed overlapping the left end portion of the serif notice display k4. The serif notice display k4 may be a display including the princess m4 and the character name display n4.

  FIG. 185 (8) shows a state where the display of the mini game display o1 is started. In this example, the mini game display o1 is displayed on the right side in the serif notice display k4 so as to overlap the serif notice display k4.

  FIG. 185 (9) shows a state in which a character string image “Now” is displayed in the line notice display k4. The character string image of “Now” is a character display of the character display representing the line of the princess m4. In the state shown in FIG. 185 (9), the mini game is being executed by the mini game display o1. In this example, the mini-game is started after the character string image is displayed in the serif notice display k4. The start of the movement of the arrow image is the start of the mini game.

  FIG. 185 (10) shows a state where the mini game is being executed by the mini game display o1. The arrow image has moved to the right.

  FIG. 185 (11) shows a state in which a mini game is being executed by the mini game display o1. The arrow image has moved to the right.

  FIG. 185 (12) shows a state where the mini game is being executed by the mini game display o1. The arrow image has moved to the right.

  FIG. 185 (13) shows a state where the mini game is being executed by the mini game display o1. The arrow image is just before stopping.

  FIG. 185 (14) shows a state in which the mini game with the mini game display o1 is completed. The stop of the arrow image on the mini game display o1 is the end of the mini game. Since the mini-game display o1 is stopped above the aspect 5 circular image of the arrow image, the result of the mini game is a winning corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image and a winning corresponding to the aspect 5 circular image. The hit corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image is the start of the second serif notice display, and the hit corresponding to the aspect 5 circular image is the aspect of the second serif notice display. In this example, when the winning results corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image and the aspect 5 circular image are derived as a result of the mini-game, as shown in FIG. Is displayed. The serif notice display in this example is a "NO16" serif notice display shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 185 (14), a step-up notice is started. Princess Chibi r1 is displayed on the right side of the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the character string image “SU1” is displayed above it. As described above, the step-up notice may be performed during the display of the line notice display.

  FIG. 185 (15) shows a state in which the display j5 that can specify the mode of the serif notice display k5 is displayed before the serif notice display k5 that is the second serif notice display is started. The display j5 is moved and displayed from the vicinity of the aspect 4 circular image of the mini game display o1 to the upper right. The display j5 of this example appears from the vicinity of the aspect 4 circular image of the mini game display o1 and starts to be displayed. In the figure, an upper right arrow shown at the lower left of the display j5 represents the locus and the moving direction of the display j5. The display j5 has a circular shape, the upper half is displayed in a transparent manner, and the lower half is displayed in the form 5. The mode 3 in the lower half of the display j5 corresponds to the mode of the serif notice display k5 started in FIG. 180 (16) described later, and the display j5 is a display related to the mode of the serif notice display k5. The serif notice display k5 is a notice display of the change, and the jackpot reliability is set according to the mode. With the display j5, the player can know the mode of the speech advance notice display before the display of the notice advance notice k5 is started.

  In FIG. 185 (15), a step-up notice is executed. In place of the little princess r1 on the right side of the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a heel r2 and a character string image of “SU2” are displayed above it.

  FIG. 185 (16) shows a state in which the display of the dialog notice display k 5 is started. In this example, after the display j5 is erased, the display of the dialog notice display k5 is started. The serif notice display k5 is a scroll pattern, and the serif notice display k5 is displayed as a scrolled picture at the beginning of display. Further, the serif notice display k5 is an aspect of aspect 5.

  In FIG. 185 (16), a step-up notice is executed. A princess r3 is displayed on the right side of the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 instead of the heel r2, and a character string image of “SU3” is displayed above the princess r3. “SU3” indicates that step 3 is a step-up notice.

  FIG. 185 (17) shows a state in which the serif notice display k5 is displayed in an animation in which the scroll opens leftward. In addition, a step-up notice is being executed, and a lord r4 is displayed instead of the princess r3 on the right side of the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The upper part of the lord r4 is displayed so as to overlap with the serif notice display k5. Further, the entire character string image of “SU4” is overlapped with the serif notice display k5 and thus cannot be visually recognized.

  FIG. 185 (18) shows a state where a serif notice display k5 in which the scroll is completely opened is displayed. The serif notice display k5 in which the scroll is completely opened has a horizontally long rectangular shape, and becomes a balloon display in which a character display representing the character's serif is displayed in the rectangle. The speech balloon display mode of the speech notice display k5 is mode 5.

  Further, in FIG. 185 (18), since step 4 r4 is stopped and displayed, an effect display next to the step-up notice is started. Dialog notice display is started as an effect display next to the step-up notice. In the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a symbol r4 and a serif notice display s1 are displayed. In the serif notice display s1, a character string image of “I will come to mind” is displayed as a serif of r4. Further, the serif notice display s1 is an aspect of aspect 5. In this example, the line advance notice display s1 for the step up advance notice is displayed during the display of the notice advance notices k4 and k5. A part of the serif notice display s1 and a part of the character r4 are displayed so as to overlap with the serif notice displays k4 and k5. Thus, during the display of the serif notice display shown in FIG. 176, a serif notice display different from the type shown in FIG. 176 (in this example, the serif notice display of the step-up notice) may be displayed. In addition, when the dialog notice display shown in FIG. 176 is displayed overlapping the line advance notice display of the step-up notice, the dialog notice display shown in FIG. 176 is not displayed as shown in FIG. 183 (18). When the line advance notice display of the step up notice is displayed or when the line advance notice display shown in FIG. 176 is displayed as shown in FIG. 180 (20) and the line advance notice display of the step up notice is not displayed, The big hit symbol pattern is easily displayed in a fixed symbol variation display during execution. In addition, when the line notice display shown in FIG. 176 overlaps with the line advance notice display of the step-up notice, it is easy to win in the mini games o1 and o2. In addition, even if the mini game o1 or o2 is out of place, or when the second serif notice display k5 shown in FIG. 176 is displayed overlapped with the step up notice serif notice display s1. The display of the big hit symbol may be easier to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display during the execution than in the case where the display of the dialogue advance notice k5 is not started and the line advance notice display s1 is displayed.

  In FIG. 185 (19), the serif notice display s1 and the shrine r4 are erased, and overlap with the right end of the serif notice display k5, so that the character image of the shrine (hereinafter referred to as “dono”) m5 and “dono” A character name display n5 including the character image is displayed. The serif notice display k5 may be a display including a lord m5 and a character name display n5.

  FIG. 185 (20) shows a state where the display of the mini game display o2 is started. In this example, the mini game display o2 is displayed on the left side in the serif notice display k5 so as to overlap the serif notice display k5. In addition, a character string image of “strategy start” is displayed in the serif notice display k5. The divided character string image of “Operation start” is a character display of the character display indicating the line of the m5.

  FIG. 185 (21) shows a state in which a mini game based on the mini game display o2 is started.

  FIG. 185 (22) shows a state where the mini game is being executed by the mini game display o2. The arrow image has moved to the left.

  FIG. 185 (23) shows a state where the mini game is being executed by the mini game display o2. The arrow image has moved to the left.

  FIG. 185 (24) shows a state where the mini game is being executed by the mini game display o2. The arrow image has moved to the left.

  FIG. 185 (25) shows a state in which the mini game with the mini game display o2 is completed. In this example, since the arrow image of the mini game display o2 stops above the leftmost aspect 5 circular image, the result of the mini game corresponds to the hit corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image and the aspect 5 circular image. Earn per hit. The hit corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image is that one gauge image g3 is accumulated, and the hit corresponding to the aspect 5 circular image is that one gauge image g3 is accumulated. When the winning results corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image and the aspect 5 circular image are derived as a result of the mini game, an effect display in which two gauge images g3 are accumulated as shown in FIG. 185 (26) described later is started. The

  FIG. 185 (26) shows a state where an effect display in which two gauge images g3 are accumulated is started. An animation in which the p1 and p2 move from the circular image of the aspect 5 circular image of the mini game display o2 to the gauge image g3 is displayed. In the figure, a lower right arrow shown in the upper left of the ridges p1 and p2 indicates the trajectory and moving direction of the ridges p1 and p2.

FIG. 185 (27) shows a state where the effect display in which two gauge images g3 are accumulated is completed. Two segment images of the gauge image g3 are displayed in red, and two gauge images g3 are accumulated.
FIG. 185 (28) shows a state where two gauge images g3 are accumulated.

  FIG. 186 (1) shows a state continued from FIG. 185 (28), and shows a state where the princess m4, the character name display n4, the lord m5, and the character name display n5 are deleted. In this example, these displays are erased at the same time, but these displays may be erased in any order.

  FIG. 186 (2) shows a state in which the character string image “Now” on the line notice display k4 and “Operation start” on the line notice display k5 are deleted. These character string images are erased at the same time, but either one may be erased first.

  FIG. 186 (3) shows a state where the mini game displays o1 and o2 are erased. These displays are erased at the same time, but either one may be erased first.

  FIG. 186 (4) shows a state in which the deletion animations for the line preview notices k4 and k5 are started. The erase animation of the serif notices k4 and k5 is displayed in a display in which the scroll is wound.

  FIG. 186 (5) shows a state in which the scrolls of the serif notice indications k4 and k5 are completely wound. The serif notice indications k4 and k5 are erased after being completely wound.

  FIG. 186 (6) shows a state in which the line notice notices k4 and k5 are deleted. In this example, a character (in this example, princess m4, lord m5) and character name display n4, n5, a character string image (in this example, “Now”, “Operation start”), mini game display o1, It is erased in the order of o2 and serif notice display k4, k5. Note that these erasing orders can be arbitrarily set.

  FIG. 186 (7) shows a state in which “decoration 6” is temporarily stopped (swaying fluctuation display) in a manner in which “decoration 6” slightly swings up and down in the left symbol display area 208 a. In the figure, two wavy lines illustrated in the upper left and lower right of “decoration 6” indicate that “decoration 6” slightly fluctuates up and down.

  FIG. 186 (8) shows a state in which “decoration 6” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c so as to slightly swing up and down. In the figure, two wavy lines illustrated in the upper left and lower right of “decoration 6” indicate that “decoration 6” slightly fluctuates up and down.

  FIG. 186 (9) shows a state in which the normal reach effect has been started. During the normal reach effect and the super reach effect described later, the decorative symbol variation display in the symbol display areas 208a to 208 is deleted. A liquor barrel image is displayed in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is suggested that a normal reach effect compared to drinking is started when a final display of the liquor barrel image is performed.

  FIG. 186 (10) shows a state in which the enemy character image (hereinafter referred to as “enemy”) is displayed in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 without performing the final display of the sake barrel image. . It is suggested that the normal reach production of enemy annihilation starts when the enemy confirmation display is performed.

  FIG. 186 (11) shows a state in which the enemy image is not displayed and the boss character image (hereinafter referred to as “boss”) is displayed in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is suggested that the normal reach production of the boss confrontation is started when the boss confirmation display is performed.

  FIG. 186 (12) shows a state in which the boss confirmation display is performed. In the upper center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a character string image of “boss confrontation reach” is displayed in a rectangular frame display, and a part of the frame display is overlapped to display the boss. Has been.

  FIG. 186 (13) shows a state in which the boss confrontation reach is started. A character string image of “-Development with victory over the boss” is displayed in the upper part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is suggested that when the boss wins the boss, the super reach production starts. Has been. During normal reach production such as boss confrontation reach, the special figure 1 hold icon display area f and all special figure 1 hold icons (in this example, the hold icon f1) are erased.

  FIG. 186 (14) shows a state in which an effect display in which one gauge image g3 is accumulated is started during the boss confrontation reach. The gauge images g1 to g3 may accumulate irregularly. An animation is displayed in which the p3 that appears in the upper left part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 moves to the gauge image g3. In the figure, the arrow shown above the ridge p3 indicates the locus and movement direction of the ridge p3.

  FIG. 186 (15) shows a state where the effect display in which one gauge image g3 is accumulated is finished. Three segment images of the gauge image g3 are displayed in red, and the gauge image g3 is full. A character string image “Preparation OK” is displayed above the gauge image g3.

  FIG. 186 (16) shows a state where the player has won the boss confrontation reach. A character string image of “win” is displayed at the upper center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a lost boss is displayed below the character string image.

  FIG. 186 (17) shows a state in which the start effect of the button effect is started. The button effect is an effect that prompts the player to press the chance button 136, and the start effect of the button effect is an effect that is performed before the button effect is started. In the start effect of the button effect, four wavy effect images are displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 186 (18) shows a state in which a button effect is started by displaying a button image imitating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a meter image indicating the operation valid period of the chance button 136 below the button image. The button image is displayed in the aspect 5. In addition, a downward arrow image and a character string image of “Press!” Are displayed above the button image. The chance button 136 emits light in the mode 5 and the pressing of the chance button 136 is prompted.

  FIG. 186 (19) shows a state in which the operation valid period is started. The meter of the meter image indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period has decreased.

  FIG. 186 (20) shows a state immediately after the chance button 136 is pressed during the operation effective period. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed during the button production, the movable body 700 emits light in the aspect 5, moves upward, and stops. In the button effect of this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation effective period, the operation effective period ends.

  FIG. 186 (21) shows a state where the movable body 702 has moved downward and the movable portions 702a and 702b have moved left and right. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed during the button effect, the movable body 702 emits light in the mode 5 and moves downward to stop.

FIG. 186 (22) shows a state in which the super reach production swordsman reach is started after the movable bodies 700 and 702 are moved to the initial positions. The movable bodies 700 and 702 are turned on in the mode 1 after moving to the initial position. In the swordsman reach production, the background image of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is night, and a crescent moon image is displayed in the upper left of the display area. In addition, a character string image of “Swordsman Reach” is displayed in a rectangular frame display at the upper center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Shows a swordsman.
FIG. 186 (23) shows a state in which the reach effect of the swordsman is being performed.

  FIG. 186 (24) shows a state in which a balloon display is displayed. The balloon display is displayed in a horizontally long rectangular shape below the lord and the swordsman, and is an aspect of aspect 1. In the balloon display, a character string image of “[Swordsman] Fufufu” is displayed as a dialogue display of the swordsman.

  FIG. 186 (25) shows a state where a balloon display is displayed. The balloon display is displayed in a horizontally long rectangular shape below the lord and the swordsman, and is an aspect of aspect 1. In the balloon display, a character string image of “[Mr.

  FIG. 186 (26) shows a state in which an animation in which the swordsman and the swordsman cut each other is displayed.

  FIG. 186 (27) shows a state where the button introduction animation is displayed. The button introduction animation is an effect display that may be displayed before the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started. In the button introduction animation of this example, for example, an animation in which button images q1 and q2 having a transmittance of 50% move from the left and right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 toward the center of the display area is displayed.

  FIG. 186 (28) shows a state where the button introduction animation is displayed. The button images q1 and q2 have moved to the vicinity of the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 187 (1) shows a state continued from FIG. 186 (28), and shows a state in which the start effect of the strong button effect is started before the button images q1 and q2 completely overlap. An animation is displayed in which an effect image having an elliptical shape and a jagged edge jumps out from the gauge image g3 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the drawing, the arrow shown above the gauge image g3 represents the locus and moving direction of the jagged effect image.

  FIG. 187 (1) shows a state in which a strong button effect is started by displaying a button image imitating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a meter image indicating the operation valid period of the chance button 136 below the button image. The pressing surface of the chance button 136 protrudes upward, and the button image is displayed in a manner corresponding to a state where the pressing surface of the chance button 136 protrudes upward. Further, the button image is displayed in the form of aspect 5. In addition, a downward arrow image and a character string image of “Press!” Are displayed above the button image. The chance button 136 emits light in the mode 5 and the pressing of the chance button 136 is prompted. Further, the entire segment-like image of the gauge image g3 is displayed in black, and a character string image of “completed” is displayed overlapping the segment-like image, and the gauge image g3 is fully filled. It is notified that the button production has started.

  FIG. 187 (3) shows a state in which the operation valid period is started. The meter of the meter image indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period has decreased.

  FIG. 187 (4) shows a state immediately after the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation valid period. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation effective period during the strong button production, the button image and the meter image are deleted, and the result of the swordsman reach is displayed. In this example, since the lord processes the swordsman, an animation of a scene where the lord wins the swordsman is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, in the upper left corner of the display area, a balloon image including a character image of “celebration” is displayed instead of the attached image, and it is congratulated to win a big hit. In addition, when the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation effective period during the strong button production, the operation effective period ends.

  FIG. 187 (5) shows a state in which the movable body 700 emits light in the aspect 7 (for example, rainbow color), moves upward and stops after the end of the swordsman reach. In this example, when the images of the swordsman and the swordsman are deleted and the swordsman reach is finished, the effect that the movable body 700 moves is executed. An effect that the movable body 700 moves during execution of the swordsman reach may be executed.

  FIG. 187 (6) shows a state in which the movable body 702 emits light in the aspect 7, moves downward, and the movable portions 702a and 702b move to the left and right. In this example, when the images of the lord and the swordsman are erased and the swordsman reach is finished, an effect of moving the movable body 702 is executed. An effect that the movable body 702 moves during execution of the swordsman reach may be executed.

  FIG. 187 (7) shows a state in which the display of the decorative symbol variation display is resumed after the movable bodies 700 and 702 are moved to the initial positions. “Decoration 6” was temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b in a manner that slightly swings up and down. In the figure, two wavy lines illustrated in the upper left and lower right of “decoration 6” indicate that “decoration 6” slightly fluctuates up and down. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6”, which is a jackpot symbol, is temporarily displayed.

  FIG. 187 (8) shows a state where the background display has returned to normal. In the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, an image of the sun pattern and a background image corresponding to the sunny stage are displayed.

  FIG. 187 (9) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit ("Special figure B"). In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6”, which is a big hit symbol form, indicating that the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit is stopped and displayed. In the fifth symbol display area, the fifth symbol of the combination of “6-6-6” is stopped and displayed.

  In this example, the step-up notice is executed in a state where the line notice notice shown in FIG. 176 is displayed. In the step-up advance notice in this example, if the stop display is not performed for a certain character image, the next effect display (in this example, the line advance notice display s1) is not performed, and the mini-game display o1 performed in relation to the line advance notice display is performed. In the mini game executed by o2, when the arrow image passes the winning image (aspect 4 circular image), the winning is obtained, and a certain effect display (in this example, a serif notice display k5) is displayed. . In this way, an effect (in this example, a step-up notice) that is not advantageous to the player unless stopped by a certain pattern, and an effect (in this example, it may be advantageous even if an arrow passes through an image) Mini-game) may be performed during the same symbol variation display. It should be noted that at least a part of the period in which an effect that is not advantageous to the player unless stopped by a pattern and an effect that may be advantageous even if an arrow passes through an image may overlap. .

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 188 (1) to 188 (19) show example effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 188 (1) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed, and in the fifth symbol display region h, the fifth symbol variation display is displayed. In addition, the variation icon display area e displays a variation icon e1 having a circular shape 1 and the special figure 1 holding icon display region f displays a holding icon f2 having a circular shape 1.

  FIG. 188 (2) shows a state where “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a so as to slightly swing up and down.

  FIG. 188 (3) shows a state in which “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c in a manner that slightly swings up and down.

  FIG. 188 (4) shows a state in which “decoration 5” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208c in a manner that slightly swings up and down.

  FIG. 188 (5) shows a state in which Yoshimune t1 pushing “decoration 2” in the left symbol display area 208a is displayed. By the Yoshimune t1, the display in which “decoration 2” in the right symbol display area 208a is changed to the ornament symbol including the character image is performed. In this example, the odd-numbered decorative symbols include character images, “decoration 3” includes a princess, “decoration 5” includes a spear, and “decoration 7” includes a shrine.

  FIG. 188 (6) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. “Decoration 3” includes the princess. As a result, in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, a decorative symbol having a combination of “decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 7” is temporarily stopped and displayed. The decoration symbol of the combination of “decoration 3—decoration 5—decoration 7” is a red chance eye, and the pre-reading notice target is a symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon f2.

  FIG. 188 (7) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of date ("special figure G"). In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 5—decoration 7”, which is an out symbol design, indicating that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of display. In the fifth symbol display area, the fifth symbol of the combination “3-5-7” is stopped and displayed.

  In FIG. 188 (8), the special symbol 1 display device 212 (not shown) starts the special symbol 1 variable game, and the decorative symbol variable display, the fourth symbol, and the fifth symbol variable display are started. Shows the state. Also, with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the hold icon reduction animation is executed, and the hold icon f1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f becomes the change icon e2 and the change icon. It has moved to the display area e. In the left symbol display area 208a, the princess t2 included in the “decoration 3” is continuously displayed. The princess t2 is a display related to the serif notice display k6 started in FIG. 188 (10) described later.

  FIG. 188 (9) shows a state immediately before the princess t2 starts moving downward. A downward arrow illustrated on the left side of the princess t2 indicates the moving direction of the princess t2.

  FIG. 188 (10) shows a state in which the display of the dialogue notice display k6 is started. In this example, the princess t2 moves downward to become the princess m6, and a serif notice display k6 indicating the serif of the princess m6 is displayed. The mode of the serif notice display k6 is mode 4. In addition, a character name display n6 including a princess m6 and a character image of “princess” is displayed overlapping the left end portion of the serif notice display k6. The serif notice display k6 may be a display including a princess m6 and a character name display n6. In addition, a character string image of “this time live is” is displayed in the serif notice display k6. The character string image of “this time is live” is a character display of the character display representing the line of the princess m6. In addition, a mini game based on the mini game display o1 is being executed.

  FIG. 188 (11) shows a state where the mini game is being executed by the mini game display o1. The arrow image has moved to the right.

  FIG. 188 (12) shows a state in which a mini game is being executed by the mini game display o1. The arrow image is just before stopping.

  FIG. 188 (13) shows a state in which the mini game based on the mini game display o 1 has been completed. The stop of the arrow image on the mini game display o1 is the end of the mini game. Since the arrow image of the mini game display o1 is stopped above the aspect 4 circular image, the result of the mini game is a win corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image. The hit corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image is the start of the second dialogue notice display. In this example, when the winning result corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image is derived as a result of the mini game, the display of the second serif notice display k7 is started as shown in FIG. 188 (15) described later. The serif notice display in this example is a "NO15" serif notice display shown in FIG.

  FIG. 188 (14) shows a state in which the display j7 that can specify the mode of the serif notice display k7 is displayed before the display of the serif notice display k7 that is the second serif notice display is started. The display j7 is moved and displayed from the vicinity of the aspect 4 circular image of the mini game display o1 to the upper right. The display j7 of this example appears from the vicinity of the aspect 4 circular image of the mini game display o1 and starts to be displayed. In the figure, an arrow pointing to the upper right shown in the lower left of the display j7 represents the locus and the moving direction of the display j7. The display j7 has a circular shape, the upper half is displayed in a transparent manner, and the lower half is displayed in an aspect 4. The lower half mode 4 of the display j7 corresponds to the mode of the serif notice display k7 started in FIG. 188 (15) described later, and the display j7 is a display related to the mode of the serif notice display k7. The serif notice display k7 is a notice display of the change, and the jackpot reliability is set according to the mode. With the display j7, the player can know the mode of the serif notice display before the display of the serif notice display k7 is started.

  FIG. 188 (15) shows a state in which the display of the dialogue advance notice k7 is started. In this example, after the display j7 is erased, the display of the dialog notice display k7 is started. The serif notice display k7 is a picture of a scroll, and the serif notice display k7 is displayed as a picture in a state where the scroll is wound at the beginning of display. Further, the serif notice display k7 is an aspect of aspect 4.

  FIG. 188 (16) shows a state where the serif notice display k <b> 5 is displayed with an animation in which the scroll opens leftward.

  FIG. 188 (17) shows a state in which a serif notice display k7 in which the scroll is completely opened is displayed. The serif notice display k7 in which the scroll is completely opened has a horizontally long rectangular shape, and becomes a balloon display in which a character display representing the character's serif is displayed in the rectangle. The balloon mode of the balloon display of the line preview k7 is mode 4.

  In FIG. 188 (18), a character name display n7 including a character image of “爺” and “爺” is displayed overlapping the right end portion of the line notice display k7. The serif notice display k7 may be a display including 爺 m7 and character name display n7.

  FIG. 188 (19) shows a state where the display of the mini game display o2 is started. In this example, the mini game display o2 is displayed on the left side in the serif notice display k7 so as to overlap the serif notice display k7. In addition, a character string image of “when” is displayed in the serif notice display k7. The character string image of “when” is a character display of the character display indicating the line of 爺 m7. In this example, description of the effects ahead of this is omitted, but after that, a super reach effect such as Hime Live Reach is executed, and the jackpot symbol form is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 189 (1a) and (1b), an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. 189 (1a) and (1b) show an example of the performance of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 189 (1a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is being executed. In this example, a tutorial display (description display) u1 of a book pattern is displayed at the lower right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The tutorial display u1 displays a game method, a description of a production, a description of a character, and the like. In this example, a character string image of “swordsman is a lord of the lord” is displayed in the tutorial display u1, and an explanation display of the swordsman is displayed.

  The black dots shown between FIG. 189 (1a) and FIG. 189 (1b) indicate the passage of time.

  FIG. 189 (1 b) shows a state in which a speech notice display k 1 is displayed. In this example, the serif notice display k1 is displayed overlapping with a part of the tutorial display u1. In this manner, the serif notice display may be displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the character display related to the character such as the tutorial display.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 189 (2a) to (2c). FIGS. 189 (2a) to (2c) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 189 (2a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is being executed. In this example, a character string image of “Now” is displayed in the serif notice display k4. The character string image of “Now” is a character display of the character display representing the line of the princess m4. Further, in the mini game based on the mini game display o1, since the arrow image is stopped above the aspect 5 circular image, the result of the mini game is a hit corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image and the hit corresponding to the aspect 5 circular image. Will be acquired. The hit corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image is the start of the second serif notice display, and the hit corresponding to the aspect 5 circular image is that the second serif notice display is displayed in the serif notice display k4. In this example, when the winning results corresponding to the mode 4 circular image and the mode 5 circular image are derived as a result of the mini game, the second time is displayed in the serif notice display k4 as shown in FIG. 189 (2c) described later. The line notice display starts.

  FIG. 189 (2b) shows a state in which the character string image in the serif notice display k4 has been deleted.

  FIG. 189 (2 c) shows a state in which a character string image “Continue!” Is displayed in the serif notice display k 4. The character string image of “Continue !!” is a character display of the character display representing the line of the princess m4 and is a second line notice display.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 189 (3a) to (3d). FIGS. 189 (3a) to (3d) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 189 (3a) shows a state where the special figure variable game is being executed. In this example, a level display u2 indicating the degree of the player's pachinko machine 100 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The level of this example is “LV: 10”. When the gauge in the level display u2 is full, the level is increased by one.

  FIG. 189 (3b) shows a state in which the mini game based on the mini game display o1 is completed. Since the arrow image is stopped above the aspect 4 circular image, the result of the mini-game is a winning acquisition corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image. The hit corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image is to obtain 10 points for the experience value for raising the level of the player.

  FIG. 189 (3c) shows a state where the player has acquired 10 points. The experience value display u3 is moving from the vicinity of the mini game display o toward the level display u2. The experience value display u3 includes the character “+10” in the oval frame display, and notifies that 10 experience values have been acquired.

  FIG. 189 (3c) shows a state where the player has acquired 10 points. The gauge in the level display u2 is increased by the experience value 10.

  In the above production example, when a win is made in a mini game, the second serif notice display, the gauge images g1 to g3 are metered up, the contents of the serif notice display are changed (FIGS. 189 (2a) to (2c)), and the experience value is increased. An effect display is performed. When a win is made in a mini game, at least two of these effects may be combined. The level display u2 may always be displayed. Further, the level display u2 may not be provided or may not be displayed.

  Next, an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 189 (4a) to (4d). FIGS. 189 (4a) to (4d) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 189 (4a) shows a state where the special figure variable game is being executed. In the lower right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, history displays v1, v2, and v3 for notifying the history of the dialog notice display are displayed. The history displays v1 to v3 have a substantially square shape, and are displayed side by side in the order of the history display v1, the history display v2, and the history display v3 from the left side. The history display v1 displays the character image of the previous serif notice display, the history display v2 displays the character image of the previous serif notice display, and the history display v3 displays the previous three serif notice display. The character image is displayed. In FIG. 189 (4a), princesses are displayed in the history displays v1 and v2, and 爺 is displayed in the history display v3.

  FIG. 189 (4 b) shows a state in which the dialog notice display k 4 is displayed as a history. The princess who is the character of the serif notice display k4 is moving from the princess m4 toward the history display v1. In the drawing, a downward-pointing arrow shown on the left side of the moving princess indicates the locus and moving direction of the princess. In addition, the princess in the history display v1 moves toward the history display v2 and the princess in the history display v2 moves toward the history display v3 so as to be pushed out by the princess. The wrinkles displayed in the history display v3 are deleted.

  FIG. 189 (4c) shows a state where the princess has been moved. Princesses are displayed in the history displays v1 to v3. In this example, when the same character image is displayed in the history displays v1 to v3, the advance notice item is acquired.

  FIG. 189 (4d) shows a state in which the advance notice item u1 has been acquired. The notice item u1 has a treasure chest pattern, and is displayed in stock in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The notice item includes, for example, a pseudo-ream item in which the pseudo-ream effect starts, a promotion item that is promoted so that the title mode (color) of the effect display is a higher-hit reliability, and a cut-in effect is a higher-hit reliability There is a promotion item that becomes a high aspect. Further, a specific character (for example, the staff shown in FIG. 176) may not be displayed as a history in the history displays v1 to v3, and the second serif notice display is not displayed as a history in the history displays v1 to v3. May be.

  Next, examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 190 (1) to 190 (4) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 190 (1) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a symbol combination “decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 7” in the case of a loss is shown, which indicates that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct. Stop is displayed. Further, the fifth symbol of the combination “2-4-7” is stopped and displayed in the fifth symbol display area h. In addition, the hold icons f1 and f2 are displayed in a circular form. The production stage is a sunny stage.

  In FIG. 190 (2), as the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown) starts the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol variable display, the fourth symbol, and the fifth symbol variable display are started. The state is shown. Also, with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the hold icon reduction animation is executed, and the hold icon f1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f becomes the change icon e1 and the change icon. Moving to the display area e, the hold icon f2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f.

  FIG. 190 (3) shows a state where the movable body 700 moves upward and rotates clockwise. The movable body 700 may be rotatable. In addition, the movable body 700 emits light in the aspect 3.

  FIG. 190 (4) shows a state in which the effect stage has changed to a cloudy stage. In this example, the movable body 700 is moved before the effect stage is changed. Since it becomes a cloudy stage, the sun image on the decorative symbol display device 208 is switched to a cloud image, and the background image corresponding to the cloudy stage is switched. In this example, the effect stage changes after the movable body 700 returns to the initial position. The production stage may change while the movable body 700 moves to the initial position, or may change at the same time as the movement to the initial position is completed. When the movable body 700 returns to the initial position, it returns to the light emission of aspect 1.

  Next, examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 190 (5) to 190 (7) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 190 (5) shows a state in which the movable body 700 is rotating while the special figure variable game is being executed. The production stage is a sunny stage.

  FIG. 190 (6) shows a state where the production stage is changed to the ZONE stage. In this example, the movable body 700 is moved before the effect stage is changed. Since it becomes the Tono ZONE stage, the sun image on the decorative symbol display device 208 is switched to a cloud and lightning image, and the character string images of “~ Tono ZONE to” and “Tono ZONE” are displayed, corresponding to the Tono ZONE stage. Switch to the background image. Tono ZONE is a stage for notice, and is a stage with higher reliability than a sunny stage or a cloudy stage. Note that the advance notice of Tono ZONE may be a notice of the change or a prefetch notice. In this example, the effect stage changes after the movable body 700 returns to the initial position. The production stage may change while the movable body 700 moves to the initial position, or may change at the same time as the movement to the initial position is completed. When the movable body 700 returns to the initial position, it returns to the light emission of aspect 1.

  FIG. 190 (7) shows a state in which the stage stage of Tono ZONE is being executed. In the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a character string image of “you can expect in the order of super-don ZONE> don ZONE” is displayed, and the super-don ZONE has higher jackpot reliability than the super-ZONE Is informed. In this way, a plurality of stage stages dedicated to the notice may be provided.

  Next, examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 190 (8) to (11) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 190 (8) shows a state in which the speech advance notice k4 is displayed while the special figure variable game is being executed. The production stage is a sunny stage.

  FIG. 190 (9) shows a state where the movable body 700 moves upward and rotates clockwise. In addition, the movable body 700 emits light in the aspect 3. In addition, a mini game is played by the mini game display o1.

  FIG. 190 (10) shows a state in which the production stage is changed to the Tono ZONE stage. In this example, the production stage is switched during the display of the dialogue notice display. When the effect stage is switched to Tono ZONE, the serif notice display k4, the princess m4, the character name display n4, and the mini game display o1 are deleted. For this reason, the mini game is canceled before the result of the mini game on the mini game display o1 is derived.

  FIG. 190 (11) shows a state in which the stage stage of Tono ZONE is being executed. As in this example, the mini-game display may be erased before the mini-game result is derived. As described above, the display about the mini game may be deleted before the result of losing the result of the mini game is derived.

  Next, examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 190 (12) to (15) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 190 (12) shows a state in which the speech advance notice k4 is displayed while the special figure variable game is being executed. The production stage is a sunny stage.

  FIG. 190 (13) shows a state in which the movable body 700 moves upward and rotates clockwise. In addition, the movable body 700 emits light in the aspect 3. In addition, a mini game is played by the mini game display o1.

  FIG. 190 (14) shows a state in which an effect display is displayed indicating that the effect stage may change to the ZONE stage. In this example, during the effect display in which the effect stage may be switched to Tono ZONE, the serif notice display k4, the princess m4, the character name display n4, and the mini game display o1 are deleted. For this reason, the mini game is interrupted before the result of the mini game on the mini game display o1 is derived.

  FIG. 190 (15) shows a state in which the stage is continued on a fine stage without the stage being shifted to Tono ZONE. As in this example, when the effect display that may be switched to the lord ZONE is finished, the display of the serif notice display k4, the princess m4, the character name display n4, and the mini game display o1 is resumed. The mini game is resumed from the point of interruption. In this way, the mini game may be interrupted and then resumed.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 191 (1a) to (1d) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 191 (1a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is being executed. In this example, a character string image of “Now” is displayed in the serif notice display k4. The character string image of “Now” is a character display of the character display representing the line of the princess m4. In addition, a mini game based on the mini game display o1 is being executed.

  FIG. 191 (1b) shows a state in which the button image u4 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the serif notice display k4. The button image u4 is an image that mimics the appearance of the chance button 136, and is an image that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136. Further, the button image is displayed in the form of aspect 5. In addition, a downward arrow image and a character string image of “Press!” Are displayed above the button image. The chance button 136 emits light in the mode 5 and the pressing of the chance button 136 is prompted. In this example, the meter image indicating the operation valid period is not displayed.

  FIG. 191 (1c) shows a state in which the mini game on the mini game display o1 is finished. The arrow image stops above the rightmost aspect 5 circular image.

  FIG. 191 (1d) shows a state where the chance button 136 is pressed. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the item u5 is acquired. The item u5 is an item related to the change of the hold icon.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 191 (2a) to (2c). FIGS. 191 (2a) to (2c) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 191 (2a) shows a state where the special figure variable game is being executed. In this example, a character string image of “Now” is displayed in the serif notice display k4. In addition, a mini game based on the mini game display o1 is being executed.

  FIG. 191 (2 b) shows a state in which a button image u 4 is overlapped with a part of the serif notice display k 4 and a meter image indicating the operation valid period is displayed below the button image u 4. Yes. Further, from the left, an image corresponding to the “A” option, an image corresponding to the “B” option, and an image corresponding to the “C” option are displayed above the button image u4. In FIG. 191 (2b), the option “A” is selected, and a cursor display is displayed on the image corresponding to the option “A”. The player can select the selection of “A”, “B”, and “C” by operating the left and right keys of the setting operation unit 137 to move the cursor display. For example, when the chance button 136 is pressed while the cursor is displayed on the option “A”, “A” is selected. Further, the button image is displayed in the form of aspect 5. Further, a downward arrow image and a character string image of “Choose!” Are displayed above the button image, and the chance button 136 emits light in the mode 5 and the pressing of the chance button 136 is urged.

  FIG. 191 (2c) shows a state where an image corresponding to the option “B” is selected. The player can move the cursor display to the image corresponding to the option “B” by operating the right button of the setting operation unit 137 once from the state of FIG. 191 (2 b). Note that the operations of the setting operation unit 137 and the chance button 136 are valid during the operation valid period indicated by the meter image.

  As described above, the button image and the meter image may be displayed so as to overlap the dialogue notice display. The options “A” to “C” may be selection of items that can be acquired or selection of reach production. It should be noted that the cursor display is automatically moved and displayed in the order of “A”, “B”, and “C”, and when the chance button 136 is pressed, the cursor display is stopped and the option may be determined. In this case, the option selected depending on the pressing timing of the chance button 136 may be different, or the option selected regardless of the pressing timing of the chance button 136 may be determined by lottery.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 191 (3a) to (3d). FIGS. 191 (3a) to (3d) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 191 (3 a) shows a state in which the speech advance notices k 4 and k 5 are displayed while the special figure variable game is being executed. A character string image of “Join the Tono ZONE” is displayed in the serif notice display k5, and it is predicted that the character will enter the Tono ZONE. Further, the mini game with the mini game display o2 is not started. The production stage is a sunny stage.

  FIG. 191 (3 b) shows a state where the movable body 700 moves upward and rotates clockwise. In addition, the movable body 700 emits light in the aspect 3. Also, the mini game with the mini game display o2 is not started. As in this example, the mini-game is not started immediately before entering the palace ZONE.

  FIG. 191 (3 c) shows a state where the production stage is changed to the ZONE stage. In this example, the production stage is switched during the display of the dialogue notice display. When the effect stage is switched to Tono ZONE, the serif notice display k4, k5, princess m4, Tono m5, character name display n4, n5, mini game display o1, 02 are deleted. For this reason, the mini game display o2 is erased without starting the mini game.

  FIG. 191 (3d) shows a state where the stage stage of Tono ZONE is being executed. As in this example, the display of the mini game may be erased before the mini game is started.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 191 (4a) to (4c). FIGS. 191 (4a) to (4c) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 191 (4 a) shows a state in which the speech advance notice k 4 is displayed while the special figure variable game is being executed. In the mini game of the mini game display o1, the result of the mini game is a hit since the arrow is stopped on the aspect 5 circular image. For this reason, since the second line notice display is displayed, the line notice display k5 is started to be displayed. In addition, a star-shaped mark display u7 including a ridge is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The mark display u7 is an item display for notifying the transition to the lord ZONE.

  The black dots shown between FIG. 191 (4a) and FIG. 191 (4b) indicate the passage of time.

  FIG. 191 (4 b) shows a state in which the dialogue notice display k 5 is displayed. A character string image of “Join the Tono ZONE” is displayed in the serif notice display k5. Further, an effect image u8 is displayed overlapping the mark display u7. The effect image u8 is displayed when the item of the mark display u7 is used. In this example, the transition to Tone ZONE is foretold in the second serif notice display k5 and the mark display u7.

  FIG. 191 (4c) shows a state in which the mini game display o2 is displayed. In this example, the mini-game with the mini-game display o2 is not started since the process moves to Tono ZONE. Note that after this, even in the case of transition to Tono ZONE, the mini game with the mini game display o2 may be started. In this case, when the mini-game display o2 is a win in the mini-game, a character string image of “Let's rush into ZONE ZONE” may be displayed in the serif notice display k5.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 192 (1) to 192 (5) show example effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 192 (1) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a symbol combination “decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 7” in the case of a loss is shown, which indicates that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct. Stop is displayed. Further, the fifth symbol of the combination “2-4-7” is stopped and displayed in the fifth symbol display area h. In addition, the hold icons f1 and f2 are displayed in a circular form.

  In FIG. 192 (2), as the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown) starts the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol variable display, the fourth symbol, and the fifth symbol variable display are started. Shows the state. Also, with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the hold icon reduction animation is executed, and the hold icon f1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f becomes the change icon e1 and the change icon. Moving to the display area e, the hold icon f2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f.

  In FIG. 192 (2), a timer notice display u9 is displayed. The timer notice display u9 displays a countdown for a predetermined time, and when the time reaches 0, a predetermined effect in which the movable body or the like operates is executed. The timer notice display u9 is an aspect 6 (indicated by vertical hatching in FIG. 192 (for example, gold)). The jackpot reliability of the timer notice display u9 is in the order of mode 1, blinking white, mode 3, mode 4, mode 5, mode 6, and mode 7 from the lowest. The timer notice display is displayed in a larger display size as the jackpot reliability is higher. Since the timer notice display u9 of this example is aspect 7, it is displayed in a relatively large display size. In FIG. 192 (2), a character string image “in preparation” is displayed in the timer advance notice u9, and the timer advance notice u9 is a display in preparation before the countdown starts. The timer notice display u9 is a display corresponding to the first image RDY being prepared shown in FIG. 201 (b) or 225 (a2), the third image RDY3 being shown in FIG. 225 (a2), or the like. The pachinko machine 100 of this example can display the timer notice effect shown in FIG. 201 and FIG. 225 (a2).

  FIG. 192 (3) shows a state in which the display j4 that can specify the mode of the serif notice display is displayed before the display of the serif notice display is started. A part of the display j4 is displayed overlapping the timer notice display u9. Note that the entire display j4 may overlap the timer notice display u9.

  FIG. 192 (4) shows a state in which the display of the dialog notice display k4 is started. A part of the serif notice display k4 is displayed overlapping the timer notice display u9.

  FIG. 192 (5) shows a state where the serif notice display k4 is displayed in an animation in which the scroll is opened in the right direction. A part of the serif notice display k4 is displayed overlapping the timer notice display u9.

  Black dots illustrated between FIG. 192 (5) and FIG. 192 (6) indicate the passage of time.

  FIG. 192 (6) shows a state in which a character name display n4 including a princess m4 and a character image of “princess” is displayed overlapping the left end portion of the serif notice display k4. A part of the serif notice display k4, a part of the princess m4, and a part of the character name display n4 are displayed overlapping the timer notice display u9.

  FIG. 192 (7) shows a state where the timer notice display u9 has moved downward. The timer preview display u9 is moved and displayed before the countdown display of the timer preview display u9 is started.

  FIG. 192 (7) shows a state in which the countdown display of the timer notice display u9 is started. In this example, 99 seconds are counted down.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 192 (9) to (13) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 192 (9) shows a state in which the speech advance notice k 4 is displayed while the special figure variable game is being executed.

FIG. 192 (10) shows a state in which the freeze effect display is started. The freeze effect display of this example is an effect display that makes the player feel as if time has stopped due to the freeze of the display other than the decorative symbol change display and the fifth symbol change display. When the freeze effect display is started, the clock display u10 is displayed, and the execution time of the freeze effect display is measured and displayed. The clock display u10 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the serif notice display k4.
FIG. 192 (11) shows a state where the freeze effect display is being executed.

The black dots shown between FIG. 192 (11) and FIG. 192 (12) represent the passage of time.
FIG. 192 (12) shows a state in which the freeze effect display is being executed.

  FIG. 192 (12) shows a state in which the freeze effect display is finished. The freeze effect display in this example is performed for 1 minute. Since the serif notice display k4 is the time during which the freeze effect display is ended, it is deleted after the freeze effect display ends. Further, only the result of the mini game that should have been played during the freeze effect display is reflected. For this reason, two gauge images g3 are collected. Note that the length of the freeze effect display is 1 minute as in this example, longer than 1 minute, less than 1 minute, or relatively short called short freeze (for example, A few seconds). In the case of a short freeze, the movement display of the arrow of the mini game is not omitted, and the execution time of the freeze effect display is not measured and displayed.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present example can display the serif notice display shown in FIG. 174 and the like, and can play a mini game in association with the serif notice display. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present example can execute the preliminary notice effect during preparation shown in FIG. 193 and the timer notice effect shown in FIG. For example, the preliminary notice effect or the timer notice effect may be executed during display of the serif notice display or within the same symbol variation display as the display of the serif notice display. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to this example is in preparation for the preliminary announcement shown in FIGS. 194 to 198, 200, 202 to 204, 206, and 208 to 213 related to the preliminary announcement in preparation shown in FIG. 193. The preliminary notice effect during preparation may be executed within the same symbol variation display as the display of the speech advance notice display or the display of the speech advance notice display.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present example can display the serif notice display shown in FIG. 174 and the like, and can play a mini game in association with the serif notice display. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present example can execute the conversation notice display shown in FIG. For example, the conversation notice display shown in FIG. 229 may be executed while the line notice display is being displayed or within the same symbol variation display as the line notice display. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present example can display a character that suggests a character included in the serif notice display as shown in FIG. 229 (6) before the display of the serif notice display is started. Further, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present example can execute the conversation notice display shown in FIGS. 230 to 248 related to the conversation notice display shown in FIG. 229, and the same pattern as the line notice display is being displayed. These conversation notice displays may be executed within the variable display.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present example can display the serif notice display shown in FIG. 174 and the like, and can play a mini game in association with the serif notice display. The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can execute the meter increase effect and the item provision effect shown in FIG. For example, the meter increase effect and the item provision effect may be executed during display of the serif notice display or within the same symbol variation display as the display of the serif notice display. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to this example can execute the meter increase effect and the item provision effect shown in FIGS. 251 to 256 and FIGS. 260 to 273 related to the meter increase effect and the item provision effect shown in FIG. Yes, the meter increase effect and the item provision effect may be executed during display of the serif notice display or within the same symbol variation display as the serif notice display.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present example can display the serif notice display shown in FIG. 174 and the like, and can play a mini game in association with the serif notice display. The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can execute the operation effects of the movable bodies 1 and 2 that are also executed during the display of the balloon display shown in FIG. For example, the movable bodies 1 and 2 shown in FIG. 274 are operated during the display of the speech advance notice display or within the same symbol variation display as the display of the speech advance notice display, and at least a part of the speech advance notice display is moved to the movable bodies 1 and 2. An effect operation that overlaps with each other may be executed. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to this example can execute the rendering operations of the movable bodies 1 and 2 shown in FIGS. 275 and 276 related to the rendering operation of the movable bodies 1 and 2 shown in FIG. These effects may be executed during the display or within the same symbol variation display as the speech advance notice display.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present example can display the serif notice display shown in FIG. 174 and the like, and can play a mini game in association with the serif notice display. The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can execute the effect display of the balloon display shown in FIG. For example, the effect display of the balloon display shown in FIG. 307 may be executed during the display of the speech advance notice display or within the same symbol variation display as the display of the speech advance notice display. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present example can execute the balloon display effect display shown in FIGS. 308 to 327 related to the balloon display effect display shown in FIG. These balloon display effects may be displayed within the same symbol variation display.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present example can display the serif notice display shown in FIG. 174 and the like, and can play a mini game in association with the serif notice display. The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can execute the pseudo-continuous effects shown in FIGS. 328 (g) to (p). For example, the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed during display of the serif notice display or within the same symbol variation display as the display of the serif notice display. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present example can execute the effect display shown in FIGS. 328 to 342 related to the pseudo-continuous effect shown in FIG. 328, and the same symbol variation as that during the display of the line advance notice display or the line advance notice display. These effects may be displayed within the display.

  Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 159 to 192 again.

(A1)
A game machine provided with a display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208),
The display means is a means capable of displaying a certain type of serif notice display (for example, serif notice display k1, k4, k6),
The certain type of notice notice display is a display that may include a character display of contents related to a certain character,
A game table, wherein a mini-game (for example, a mini-game based on the mini-game display o1) may be started in association with the certain type of line notice display.

  According to the gaming table having the configuration, by displaying the first display k1 including the character display of the contents relating to the character, the first display can be noticed by a novice player, and the first display In some cases, it is possible to make it easier for the player to pay attention to the mini-game by playing the mini-game in relation to the game.

(A2)
The game stand according to A1 above,
Operating means (for example, a chance button 136),
The result of a certain mini game can be derived without operation of the operation means,
When a certain result (for example, a winning result) (hereinafter referred to as a “first result”) is derived as a result of a certain mini-game, display of a certain effect display is started. And
When a certain result (for example, a result of loss) (hereinafter referred to as “second result”) different from the first result is derived as a result of a certain mini game, a certain effect display is displayed. Is configured not to start,
The variation display in which the display of a certain effect display is started by the derivation of the first result is more final than the variable display in which the display of a certain effect display is not started by the derivation of the second result. A game table characterized in that it is structured so as to be confirmed and displayed in a big hit mode.

(A3)
The game stand according to A2 above,
The certain type of notice notice display is a display including a speech balloon (for example, speech notice display of speech notice k1, k4, k6),
The balloon may be displayed in a plurality of types,
One aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is a first aspect (for example, aspect 3),
One aspect of the plurality of kinds of aspects is a second aspect (for example, aspect 4),
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects,
Rather than a certain mini-game in which the balloon mode is started in connection with the certain type of serif notice display of the first mode, the balloon mode is the certain type of serif of the second mode. A game table characterized in that a certain mini-game started in connection with a notice display is configured such that the first result is more easily derived.

(A4)
The game stand according to A3 above,
A game table configured to play a mini game (for example, a mini game with a mini game display o1) in the balloon.

(A5)
The game table according to A3 or A4 above,
A certain type of character display representing the lines of characters (for example, 婆, 爺, 殿) is configured to be displayed in the balloon.
A plurality of types of character display can be displayed as the certain type of character display,
One character display of the plurality of types of character display is a first character display (for example, “Tono is Yatsushiro Shogun”),
One character display of the plurality of types of character display is a second character display (for example, “fits well with Daifuku”),
The first character display and the second character display are different character displays,
The variable display in which the second character display is displayed is finally displayed in the big hit mode rather than the variable display in which the first character display is displayed without displaying the second character display. A game table characterized by being easily configured.

(A6)
The game stand according to any one of A3 to A5 above,
A game that is configured to perform a display (for example, display j1, j4) that suggests a form of the speech balloon before the display of the certain type of dialog notice display is started. Stand.

(A7)
The game stand according to any one of A2 to A6 above,
A game table characterized in that a certain effect display is a display of the certain type of line notice display.

(A8)
The game stand according to any one of A2 to A7 above,
After a certain mini-game is started and before the result is derived, the display about the certain mini-game may be erased (see, for example, FIG. 190 (10)). A characteristic game stand.

(A9)
The game stand according to any one of A2 to A8 above,
A symbol display means (for example, special figure 1 display device 212 or special figure 2 table device 214) capable of displaying a symbol variation display is provided,
The display means is configured to be able to display a decorative symbol variation display corresponding to the symbol variation display,
The symbol display means is configured to be able to display a symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “losing symbol variation display”) in which the final symbol pattern is finally displayed.
The symbol display means is configured to be able to display a symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as a “hit symbol variation display”) in which the jackpot symbol mode is finally displayed.
The display means is configured to be able to display a decorative symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as a “loss variation variation display”) displayed in correspondence with the loss symbol variation display.
The display means is configured to be able to display a decorative symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as a “hit variation variation display”) displayed corresponding to the jackpot symbol variation display.
The loss variation display is a variation display that finally displays a fixed display (hereinafter, referred to as a “first fixed display”) of a certain combination (for example, a combination in the case of disparity) decorative symbols,
The big hit variation display is finally referred to as a fixed display (hereinafter, “second fixed display”) of a decorative pattern of a certain combination (for example, a combination in the case of winning) different from the first fixed display. ) Is a variable display,
The display of the first fixed display is started in response to the end of the loss symbol variation display,
In response to the end of the jackpot symbol variation display, the display of the second confirmation display is started,
3. The variation in which the display of a certain effect display is started by the derivation of the first result, rather than the variable display in which the display of the certain effect display is not started by the derivation of the second result. “The display is configured so that it is easier to be finalized and displayed in a big win mode” means that “the display of a certain effect display was not started by the derivation of the second result” Also, the decorative symbol variation display in which the display of a certain effect display is started by derivation of the first result is configured such that the second fixed display is more easily displayed. '' A game stand characterized by that.

(A10)
The game stand according to any one of A2 to A9 above,
A game table characterized by being configured to be able to display a display (for example, display j2) suggesting that a certain effect display is displayed before a certain mini-game is started.

(A11)
The game stand according to any one of A2 to A10 above,
Timer notice effect (for example, timer notice effect of timer notice display u9) can be executed,
A game table, wherein the certain effect display may be displayed in association with the timer notice effect.

(A12)
The game stand according to any one of A2 to A11 above,
The game table, wherein the certain effect display is a display that is started only by derivation of the first result.

(A13)
The game stand according to any one of A1 to A12 above,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a display representing a plurality of types of certain characters,
One of the displays representing the plurality of types of characters is a first character display (for example, a princess),
One of the displays representing the plurality of types of characters is a second character display (for example, Tono),
The first character display and the second character display are separate displays,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of decorative symbols,
One of the plurality of types of decorative symbols is a decorative symbol including the first character display (hereinafter referred to as “certain decorative symbol”).
Among the certain types of serif notice displays, a serif notice display (for example, the princess m6 serif notice display k6 shown in FIG. 188 (10)) is a display including the second character display (hereinafter, “or” "Serial notice display"),
A certain chance including the certain decorative design (hereinafter referred to as “certain chance”) is configured to be displayed,
The gaming table is configured such that the certain line notice display is displayed after the certain chance stop is displayed (for example, see FIGS. 188 (7) to (10)).

(A14)
The game stand according to A13 above,
Before the certain chance eyes are stopped and displayed, a combination of decorative symbols that are not chance eyes (for example, “decoration 2—decoration 5—decoration 7” shown in FIG. 188 (5)) (hereinafter, “non-existence”). ”Opportunity Eye”) may stop appearing,
An amusement stand characterized in that an effect (for example, an effect shown in FIG. 188 (5)) for changing the non-certain chance to the certain chance can be executed.

(A15)
The game stand according to A13 or A14 above,
A gaming machine characterized by being configured to display the certain chance in a certain state among a plurality of types of state.

(A16)
The game stand according to any one of A1 to A15,
The certain type of dialogue notice display is a display including any one of a plurality of types of characters,
Before the display of the certain type of serif notice display is started, it is possible to display a display (for example, the character image g2 shown in FIG. 229) suggesting a character included in the certain type of serif notice display. A game table characterized by being configured.

(A17)
The game stand according to any one of A1 to A16 above,
“A certain mini-game may be started in connection with the certain kind of serif notice display” described in A1 above means “after the display of the certain kind of notice notice display is started” , A certain mini-game may be started before the display of the certain type of notice notice display is ended.

(A18)
The game stand according to any one of A1 to A17,
A certain type of serif notice display (hereinafter referred to as “second type serif notice display”) is different from the certain type of serif notice display (hereinafter referred to as “first type serif notice display”). Configured to be viewable,
Both the first type of serif notice display (for example, serif notice display k1, k2, k4, k5, 6) and the second type of serif notice display (for example, serif notice display s1) are displayed. There is a state that is displayed,
A configuration in which a certain mini-game is not started when only the second type serif notice display of the first type serif notice display and the second type serif notice display is displayed. (See, for example, FIG. 183 (18)).

  According to the gaming machine having such a configuration, if a mini-game is always started in connection with the serif notice display, players who have become accustomed to the game tend not to pay attention to the serif notice display. In some cases, the mini-game may not be started when displaying the serif notice display, so that a player who has become accustomed to the game may be allowed to focus on the serif notice display.

(A19)
The game stand according to A18 above,
With operating means,
As the response display of the operation of the operation means, the display of a certain serif notice display of the second type serif notice display is started,
When an operation of the operation means is performed in a state where a display indicating the appearance of the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “operation display”) is displayed, a response display of the second type serif notice display It is configured to start the display of a certain dialog notice display,
A gaming table, wherein at least a part of the display of the first type of dialogue notice display is overlapped by the operation display.

(A20)
The game stand according to any one of A1 to A19 above,
A game table characterized in that a mini-game includes a variable display (for example, a moving display of an arrow image).

(A21)
The game stand according to any one of A1 to A20 above,
The game table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).

(A22)
The game stand according to any one of A1 to A20 above,
The gaming table is a slot machine (for example, slot machines 1000 and 2000).

  When the effect of reaching a big hit (reach effect) is regarded as a main game, a mini game that can be executed in parallel with the main game can also be called a sub game.

  194 (a4) as a mini game, the target TGT effect shown in FIG. 194, the effect that the drum (roulette) rotates to notify the predetermined result, the effect of defeating the enemy, and the little princess shown in FIG. 211 Chibi Hime Musou's production with the mission of annihilating the subordinates, a comparison between Tono and Udon's drink shown in Fig. 211 (b), a bowling chance production shown in Fig. 214 (a3), and a golf shown in Fig. 214 (b4) A game effect may be executed.

  The display of the mini game includes at least an animation display with an image other than characters (including variable display), and a result of success (winning) or failure (out of) is derived (for example, heat → hot → hot? When the result of success is derived, another effect (a certain effect display) is started.

  A conversation notice display is established when a conversation between two or more characters is established. The 1 line notice display is also referred to as a comment notice.

  Next, another specific example of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 193 to 226. Moreover, the effect display shown below may be performed by animation. Needless to say, the embodiments described below can be applied to any of the embodiments described so far. That is, each effect shown in FIGS. 193 to 226 is an effect that is performed in a state where the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is opaque, and can be executed by each effect shown in FIGS. 193 to 226. In the pachinko machine 100, the effect tangled with the transmission effect and the effect means on the back side is the effect described with reference to FIGS. Note that the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 193 to 226 are used only in the explanation of the embodiment shown in FIGS. 193 to 226 in principle, and even if the overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, Priority is given to the code | symbol shown in 193-FIG.

  FIG. 193 to FIG. 226 are diagrams showing stepwise modification examples of effects centering on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. In FIGS. 193 to 226, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the universal figure hold. The lamp 216 is not shown. 193 to 226 show an example in which three decorative symbol display devices are arranged in a row. That is, the first decorative symbol display device 208L disposed at the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, the second decorative symbol display device 208M disposed on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decoration. The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N arranged on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as sub-display devices. The length in the width direction of 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is shorter than the half of the length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the height is slightly shorter. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M has its right end side portion overlapped with the front side of the left end side portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N has the left end side portion thereof as the first end portion. One decorative symbol display device 208N overlaps the front side of the right end side portion. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable in directions close to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they are closest to each other. It is configured to be able to. The names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not necessarily displayed in a variable manner with respect to each display device. However, it is added here just in case that the interpretation of the display device is not narrowed. Further, a combination of these decorative symbol display devices (first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, and third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as an effect display means, and the effect display means is a decoration symbol. It is also possible to display various fluctuations or to display a plurality of types of effects. In the present embodiment, an example is shown in which various images are displayed on each of the plurality of decorative symbol display devices. However, all of them may be displayed on one decorative symbol display device. . In addition, a transparent light guide plate is arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L through the light guide plate. . The light guide plate has a predetermined lens cut in the transmission region. A light emitter such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side edge of the light guide plate, and light from the light emitter is reflected forward by the lens cut portion, so that the transmission region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is configured so that it can appear to be. In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 193 to 226, the light guide plate is subjected to a lens cut having a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image. The light guide plate is configured such that the thickness of the portion of the region where light is refracted toward the player is thinner than the thickness of the light irradiated. Therefore, the display states of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be easily visible. Further, the light guide plate may be movable. Further, the light guide plate may be provided on the near side of at least one of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, FIGS. 193 to 226 show the states of the fourth symbol display devices 284a1 and 284a2, and the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol display device 284a1 corresponding to the special symbol 1 have a rectangular shape. It blinks during the fluctuation display of FIG. 1, and lights up in the lighting mode of loss or the jackpot lighting mode during the stop display of FIG. Further, the special figure 2 4th symbol display device 284a2 corresponding to the special figure 2 has a circular shape, blinks during the fluctuation display of the special figure 2, and lights up the losing state during the stop display of the special figure 2. Or it lights in the lighting mode of jackpot. In addition, in FIGS. 193 to 226, the speaker 120 and the effect buttons 136 and 136z are shown.

  FIG. 193 is a diagram illustrating an example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment in a stepwise manner.

  As shown in FIG. 193 (a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a user interface (UI) unit UI3 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a change icon at the center thereof. h0 is displayed in a state of being placed on a pedestal, and a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variation icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 193 (a), since two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 and the two hold icons h11 and h12 are both in the default display mode (white circular display mode). Further, a tutorial display section TT1 as an explanation display section is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and various information relating to games and effects is displayed (tutorial display), and the contents are updated at an appropriate timing. Is done. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 193 (a), “Panda is a Tono-sama teacher” is displayed, and the relationship between the panda character and the Tono-sama character is described. The tutorial display unit TT1 is not limited to the explanation display, but may be a notice display or a demonstration effect display, or may not be displayed. Here, as a tutorial display, an explanation about the character that appears, an explanation about a notice (for example, a timer notice), and the like are displayed. Note that the jackpot expectation degree may be notified according to a display mode of the tutorial display (for example, displayed in blue or displayed in red). In this case, this tutorial display may be a notice display of a position in the notice display. In the present specification, for the sake of convenience, the displayed display is described as a tutorial display. That is, it can be said that the tutorial display part TT1 in this effect example is an area for displaying something. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. The UI unit UI3 is preferentially displayed during the display of the decorative symbols in a variable manner and is provided in an area that does not overlap with the display area of the decorative symbols, but may overlap with the display area of the decorative symbols. As described above, the UI unit UI3 functions as a display frame that configures the hold icon display region, the variable icon display region, and the tutorial display unit TT1. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 193 (a) has a default display mode displayed in blue, and the display mode may change according to the progress of the game.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 as an explanation display unit for displaying the name of the stage and reach currently being performed is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 193 (a), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, a reception number display 850 indicating the number of receptions of the operation of the effect button 136 is displayed at the center of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In the example shown in FIG. 193 (a), the number of receptions 850 of the character string image “0 more” is displayed, and the number of receptions of the operation of the effect button 136 is zero. A stock button image 852 simulating the effect button 136 is displayed below the reception count display 850. The stock button image 852 has three lines drawn at equal intervals in the vertical direction, and the stock button image 852 is divided into four regions. The stock button image 852 also functions as a meter by changing the display color of these divided areas from white to, for example, green. In the example shown in FIG. 193 (a), all four areas of the stock button image 852 are displayed in white, and the meter is zero.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. This Tono-sama character may be called a navigation character. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed. Note that the Tono-sama character may or may not be displayed at all times. Further, the stage name display unit ST1 and the character of Tono-sama may be configured to be a display included in the UI part UI3, or to be displayed so that at least a part thereof overlaps the front side of the UI part UI3.

  Further, a family crest member 224E, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and can move in the vertical direction and rotate according to the effect contents. It is configured to be able to. Further, the family crest member 224E includes a light emitting means such as a full color LED, and can emit light in various light emission modes depending on the contents of the production. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an Yatsushiro character 224Fa and a general character 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged, and each moves in the vertical direction according to the effect contents. It is configured to be able to. In addition, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the shogun character 224Fb each have a built-in light emitting means such as a full color LED, and can emit light in various light emission modes according to the contents of the production.

  As shown in FIG. 193 (b), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state where the tutorial display unit TT1 of the UI unit UI3 is closed by a shutter image. In other words, a display (shutter image display) before another display (display of “in preparation”) is performed instead of a certain display (explanation display) in a certain area (tutorial display section TT1). It can be said. Note that at least a part of the character display that was displayed before the shutter image was displayed during the display of the shutter image may be displayed.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 193 (c), the tutorial display portion TT1 is completely closed by the shutter image. This shutter image can be said to be a pre-preparation image preview display that is displayed before the display of the pre-preparation image RDY, which will be described later, is started. In addition, the shutter image may be displayed when the notice display is performed on the tutorial display unit TT1. Further, the shutter image may be configured to be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes so that the big hit expectation varies depending on the display mode of the shutter image. The display mode of the shutter image may be displayed in only one type. It may be configured not to show the big hit expectation degree only.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 193 (d), the state in which the shutter image is opened is shown in the tutorial display portion TT1 closed by the shutter image. At this time, the shutter image is displayed open by a predetermined open animation. When the shutter image is released, the tutorial display unit TT1 displays a preparing image RDY on which characters “preparing” are displayed. In other words, the image RDY in preparation is displayed so as to overlap the display area of the tutorial display unit TT1, and can be said to overlap the UI unit UI3. At the timing shown in FIG. 193 (d), the background color of the image RDY being prepared is green, that is, the display mode of the image RDY being prepared shown in FIG. 193 (d) is the default display mode. . Note that the image RDY being prepared can be changed to a plurality of types of display modes, and even when the image RDY being prepared is displayed in a display mode different from the default display mode (for example, the background color is red) when the display of the image RDY being prepared It may be possible to change to another display mode after the display is started in the default display mode. In the case where the shutter image described above can be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes, it may be related to the display mode of the image being prepared RDY. For example, when the shutter image is red, a red preparing image RDY may be displayed (easy to be displayed). This effect example is configured such that a certain effect (for example, a timer notice, a mini game, or the like) may be performed on the tutorial display unit TT1 by displaying the image RDY in preparation.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 193 (e), the UI unit UI3 is shown changing from a blue display mode to a gold display mode. In this effect example, it is suggested that the display mode of the hold icon is easily changed by setting the display mode of the UI unit UI3 to the golden display mode. That is, the UI part UI3 in the golden display mode functions as a pre-reading notice. As described above, when the UI unit UI3 is displayed in the gold display mode, the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when it is displayed in the blue display mode. Note that the UI part UI3 in the gold display mode may function as a notice of the symbol variation display, or function as a direct pre-read notice display, not as a change notice of the display mode of the hold icon. There may be cases. Further, the display mode of the UI unit UI3 may be configured to be in a default mode before the hold icon (pre-read target hold icon) whose display mode has changed is digested, or whether or not the pre-read target change has been determined. It may be configured so as to be in a default mode after a display (for example, display of a decorative symbol indicating a big hit or a loss) is performed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 193 (f), a ninja character NJ4 is displayed in the upper right part of the tutorial display section TT1. The ninja character NJ4 is a character that may be displayed when the display mode of the hold icon is changed. In this production example, the ninja character NJ4 is displayed so as to overlap the tutorial display portion TT1 on which the image RDY being prepared is displayed. Therefore, when the image RDY being prepared and the character NJ4 of the ninja can be noted. There is.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 193 (g), the on-hold change animation is started, and the ninja character NJ4 throws a shuriken toward the first on-hold icon h11. A state of hitting the hold icon h11 is shown. At this time, the entire first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect EF4, and is in a state of difficulty in visual recognition as compared with a state where the effect EF4 is not covered. Note that the effect EF4 is also displayed on the hold icon next to the target hold icon. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 193 (g), the effect 2 is arranged next to the first hold icon h11. A part of the first hold icon h12 is also overlapped with the effect EF4. In this effect example, it can be said that the hold change animation performed before the hold icon changes functions as the hold change pre-effect display. The hold change prior effect display may include the display of the ninja character NJ4, that is, a series of animations from when the display of the hold icon is changed after the display of the ninja character NJ4 is started. May be used as a pending change prior effect display. Moreover, it is good also as a pending | holding change prior effect display only with the display of ninja character NJ4. In addition, the display of the ninja character NJ4 displayed after the hold change may or may not be included in the hold change prior effect display. Note that the display mode of the hold icon may not change even if the hold change animation is performed. Moreover, the structure by which the display of the image RDY in preparation is started after the effect display regarding Ninja character NJ4 may be sufficient. Conversely, the ninja character NJ4 may be configured not to display the image RDY being prepared. Moreover, it may be configured such that the image RDY being prepared is more likely to appear when there is a hold icon displayed in the pre-read mode than when there is no hold icon. According to this configuration, the state in which the hold icon has changed after the appearance of the ninja character NJ4 can be expected to appear in the image RDY being prepared. It may function as a prior notification of a different object, such as an icon change and a ready image RDY, or a subject change different from the pre-reading notice and the notice.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 193 (h), a state is shown in which the effect EF4 is deleted and the first hold icon h11 is displayed with the display mode changed. The first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 193 (h) is changed from the default display mode to the red display mode. The family crest member 224E also emits red light in accordance with the display mode of the first hold icon h11. Note that the crest character 224E may be emitted in red after the first hold icon h11 starts to be displayed in red, or the first crest icon 224E may be emitted in red. The hold icon h11 may start displaying in a red display mode, or the crest character 224E may emit red light at the timing when the first hold icon h11 starts displaying in a red display mode.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 193 (i), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the on-hold change animation ends and the ninja character NJ4 is erased. In addition, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and are stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 7”. This “decoration 3—decoration 5—decoration 7” combination of decorative symbols is a combination of loses, but is also a chance eye combination. That is, the pre-reading notice is performed by deriving and displaying the combination of chances. Opportunities are easily derived and displayed when the hold icon is displayed in the pre-read display mode, but the chances are displayed with an appropriate probability regardless of the display mode of the hold icon. May be. Further, it may be configured such that when the chance eyes are displayed, the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the chance eyes are not displayed. It should be noted that after the ninja character NJ4 is erased, the decorative symbol stop display may be performed sequentially, or after the decorative symbol sequential stop display is started, the ninja character NJ4 may be erased. Further, the decorative symbols may be sequentially stopped and displayed at the timing when the ninja character NJ4 is deleted. Note that the variation icon h0 is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 193 (i), but the variation icon h0 may be deleted at the timing when the symbol is fixedly displayed.

  Thereafter, when symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 193 (j), the hold icons h11 and h12 are moved and displayed by the moving animation, respectively, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The hold icon at the position is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed and becomes the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11. , Move on the corresponding pedestal. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 193 (j), the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the tutorial display unit TT1, the image RDY being prepared is continuously displayed, that is, the image RDY being prepared is displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays. On the other hand, the ninja character NJ4 displayed in the previous symbol variation display is a display that is not displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays, but may be displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays. . On the other hand, the Tono-sama character displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N can be said to be a character displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 193 (k), the state where “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol respectively and the reach state is formed is shown. The “decoration 4” displayed on the left and right are respectively swaying fluctuations, and the middle symbols are variably displayed at high speed. Note that the display screen may be darkened as a notice effect before reaching the reach state, and the UI unit UI3 may be temporarily hidden. However, until the super reach is started, the UI unit UI3 is basically It is not hidden.

  Thereafter, FIG. 193 (l) shows a state of transition to super reach (swordsman reach). Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. "Decoration 4" forming a reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen. Thereby, it may be possible to easily recognize that the “decoration 4” is in the reach state. The number-of-receptions display 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are deleted at the timing of transition to super reach. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an effect display (super reach transition display) for shifting to the super reach is performed, and the family crest character 224E rises and rotates to lower the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It overlaps with the front side. Therefore, it is difficult to visually recognize the fluctuation icon h0 and some of the hold icons (for example, the hold icon h11) by being overlapped by the family crest member 224E. The family crest character 224E also overlaps a part of the image RDY being prepared. It is informed that the movement to the super reach is caused by the rising / rotating operation of the family crest member 224E. Note that the operation of the crest character 224E may be started after the super reach transition display is started, or the super reach transition display may be started after the operation of the crest character 224E is started. The operation of the family crest character 224E may be started at the timing when the reach shift display is started. Also, in this production example, when transitioning to at least swordsman reach among the super reach, after the super reach transition display is started, the UI part UI3 is framed out together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display part TT1. , Hidden. The UI unit UI3 may be hidden before the super reach transition display is started. Thus, in this effect example, when shifting to a specific super reach, the UI unit UI3 is hidden, and at least the hold icon is hidden. Moreover, the structure which displays the reach name (title) of SP reach may be sufficient, and you may comprise so that UI part UI3 may be non-displayed in the state in which the reach name of SP reach is displayed at least. In addition, in the configuration in which a frame is displayed around the image being prepared RDY, the display of the frame may be a part of the UI unit UI3. In this configuration, it can be said that not all of the UI unit UI3 is hidden, but a part of the UI unit UI3 is hidden. In addition, when the image RDY being prepared is not displayed, the surrounding frame is not displayed. In this case, it can be said that all of the UI unit UI3 is not displayed. That is, it can be said that the non-display range of the UI part UI3 after the super reach transition is different depending on whether or not the image RDY being prepared is displayed in the state before the transition to the super reach. The display of the image RDY being prepared is not configured to be able to specify a certain notice display or a certain aspect of the effect. Note that the UI unit UI3 may not be hidden even when the swordsman reach is reached.

  FIG. 193 (m) shows a state in which the swordsman reach is started. In addition, when shifting to the swordsman reach, the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, but the display of the change icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. Further, when the image RDY being prepared is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1, only the image RDY being prepared is displayed, and the tutorial display unit TT1 itself is framed out together with the UI unit UI3. That is, in the image RDY in preparation, the display position in the state where the UI unit UI3 is displayed and the display position after being hidden are the same position. The family crest member 224E is moved downward and returned to the initial position. Here, the crestman 224E may return to the initial position after the start of the swordsman reach, the swordsman reach may start after the crestman 224E returns to the initial position, or the crestman 224E. The swordsman reach may be started at the timing when returns to the initial position.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 193 (n), the image RDY being prepared is overlapped with the effect EF5, and the display state is more difficult to visually recognize than the state where it is not overlapped with the effect EF5. . That is, it can be said that the display of the image RDY in preparation is finished, and it can also be said that the display before the start of a certain notice display is started. Furthermore, it can be said that a certain notice display itself is started by the display of the effect EF5. Furthermore, in this effect example, it can also be said that the image RDY being prepared is displayed (hidden) when the hold icon is in the non-display state (the UI unit UI3 is in the display state).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 193 (o), a state is shown in which the mini game is started in the area where the image RDY being prepared is displayed. This mini game is an example of a notice display that is started after the display of the image RDY in preparation is finished, but the mini game may be started without going through the display of the image RDY in preparation. In this case, the big win symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed in the case of passing through the display of the image RDY in preparation than in the case of not passing through the display of the image RDY in preparation. In this example, the display of the image being prepared RDY is ended and the mini game is started. However, the display of the image RDY being prepared may be ended and the timer notice effect may be started. Further, the result of the determination of success / failure may be displayed suddenly, for example, the characters “iron plate” are displayed without the mini game or the timer notice effect. When the mini game is started, Tono-sama's mini character MC1 and target TGT are displayed. The target TGT is configured by an area divided into four equal parts, and at least one of the four areas (the upper area in the production example shown in FIG. 193 (o)) is the winning area. The hit area is hit with an arrow, and a reliable announcement of the jackpot is made. Note that the number of hit areas is not limited to one, and there may be a plurality of hit areas, the entire area may be hit, or the entire area may be a non-hit area. In a configuration in which there are a plurality of types of mini games and timer notices, a certain type of mini game and timer notice may be configured to always pass through the display of the image RDY being prepared (Configuration 1). Conversely, another type of mini game or timer notice may be configured (configuration 2) so as not to go through the display of the image RDY being prepared. Both Configuration 1 and Configuration 2 may be provided, or either one may be provided.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 193 (p), the state where the arrow emitted by the Tono-sama mini character MC1 is stuck in the target area of the target TGT is shown. That is, a state of great success as a result of the mini game as the notice display is shown. In addition, you may comprise so that the display which shows the result of a mini game may be displayed by the cut different from the cut shown in FIG. It should be noted that the display of another cut may be performed regardless of success or failure, or may be configured to be performed only in the case of a specific result. In this effect example, when a certain notice display is a mini game, the result display part of the mini game may be a certain effect. In the case where a certain notice display is a mini game, the display of “iron plate” may be a second certain effect, or may be configured such that a second certain effect is performed after a certain effect.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 193 (q), the characters “iron plate” are displayed on the square background, and the iron plate image TP tilted about 15 degrees counterclockwise is displayed. . This iron plate image TP is a notice display for notifying that the big hit is confirmed. Thus, in this production example, it can be said that the notice display according to the result of the mini game is performed, that is, another notice display according to the result of the notice display is performed. Further, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed instead of the mini game, it can be said that the notice display is performed when the countdown of the timer display is completed and becomes zero. In addition, when a timer notice effect is performed, another notice display may be displayed in the state after the countdown is completed and becomes 0 in one cushion (for example, the countdown is completed). Including the start of another notice immediately before it reaches 0).

  FIG. 194 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment. Note that at least one example of a plurality of other examples may be provided, or conversely, at least one example may be omitted. The same applies to the following drawings.

  FIG. 194 (a1) is an effect following FIG. 193 (l). In the description of the present embodiment, the exemplification is illustrated as a continuation of the production example in FIG. 193. Also good. The same applies to the following drawings. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 194 (a1) to (a3) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 193 (m) to (o), the description thereof will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 194 (a4), it is shown that the arrow emitted by Tono-sama's mini character MC1 deviates from the target TGT and flies to a region different from the target TGT. That is, a state in which the mini-game as the notice display has failed is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 194 (a5), the first decorative symbol display device 208L does not display the iron plate image TP, and shows that the swordsman reach is continuously performed. In this production example, when only the difference between failure or success of the mini game is made, it is easier to finally determine and display the jackpot symbol when the mini game is successful. In addition, a timer notice effect may be performed instead of a mini game, for example, a false timer notice effect that displays nothing even when the countdown of the timer display is completed and becomes 0 may be displayed. When the countdown is completed and becomes 0, an effect with low reliability (for example, a character “chance” is displayed somewhere small) may be performed.

  FIG. 194 (b1) is also an effect following FIG. 193 (l). Since the effects shown in FIGS. 194 (b1) to (b3) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 193 (m) to (o), the description thereof will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 194 (b4), the arrow emitted by Tono-sama's mini character MC1 hits the target TGT but shows a state where it is stuck in the non-contact area. In other words, this production example shows that the mini-game is successful but not very successful.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 194 (b5), the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays a princess cut-in image HCI on which a “chance” character and a princess character are displayed on a background of horizontal stripes. ing. In this production example, if you compare the success of the mini game or the great success, it will be easier to finally display the big hit symbol when it is a great success than when it is a success. .

  FIG. 194 (c1) is also an effect following FIG. 193 (l). Since the effects shown in FIGS. 194 (c1) to (c2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 193 (m) to (n), the description thereof will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 194 (c3), a mini game different from the mini game shown in FIG. 193 (o) is started in the area where the image RDY being prepared is displayed. It is shown. The mini game shown in FIG. 194 (c3) is also an example of the notice display that starts after the display of the image RDY in preparation is completed. When the mini game is started, the cylindrical drum DRM extending in the horizontal direction starts to rotate with the horizontal direction as a rotation axis. A plurality of symbols (identification information) are displayed on the surface of the drum DRM, and the success or failure of the mini game is displayed by the identification information displayed when the drum DRM is stopped and displayed. In this production example, the mini game shown in FIG. 194 (c3) is started more easily than the mini game shown in FIG. 193 (o). The mini game shown in (o) may be configured to be more successful. In addition, when the mini game shown in FIG. 194 (c3) is started, the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the mini game shown in FIG. 193 (o) is started. However, the mini game shown in FIG. 193 (o) may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easier to be confirmed and displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 194 (c4), the drum DRM is stopped and the symbol on which the characters “iron plate” are displayed is derived, and a state in which the mini game is very successful is shown.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 194 (c5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the iron plate image TP is displayed, and a state in which a notice effect of confirming the big hit is being performed is shown.

  Note that, compared to the effect example shown in FIG. 193, the mini game is performed in the effect shown in FIG. 193, but in the effect example shown in FIG. 194, a timer notice effect may be performed, or vice versa. . Moreover, both timer notice effects may be performed, and in this case, the background color and the countdown time may be different.

  FIG. 195 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment.

  FIG. 195 (a1) shows a state in which the swordsman reach is started. In this effect example, unlike FIG. 193 (m), the image RDY in preparation is not displayed. In FIG. 195 (a1), the change icon h0 is displayed in red, and accordingly, the family crest actor 224E is also set in red.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 195 (a2), a state in which a mini game is started is shown. This effect example shows a state in which the mini game is started without going through the display of the image RDY being prepared. In this case, the big win symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed in the case of passing through the display of the image RDY in preparation than in the case of not passing through the display of the image RDY in preparation.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 195 (a3), a state in which the arrow emitted by the Tono-sama mini character MC1 is stuck in the area around the target TGT is shown. That is, a state of great success as a result of the mini game as the notice display is shown.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 195 (a4), the iron plate image TP as the notice display is displayed, and it is notified that the big hit is confirmed.

  As described above, in this production example, the example in which the mini game is started without displaying the image RDY in preparation is shown, but this may be executed only during super reach, It may be executed not only during the super reach, but may be configured to be executed even during the super reach. In addition, after the third display is finished in the first state, there may be a pattern in which a certain notice display (a certain effect) is performed from the first state to the second state. Also good. In addition, a certain notice display (a certain effect) performed after the third display is finished in the first state may extend over the next change. And after a 3rd display is complete | finished in a 2nd state, a certain notice display (especially a certain production | presentation) may start at least in this 2nd state, and may be complete | finished.

  FIG. 195 (b1) is an effect following FIG. 193 (l). Since the effects shown in FIGS. 195 (b1) to (b2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 193 (m) to (n), the description thereof will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 195 (b3), a state in which a timer notice effect is started instead of a mini game is shown in the area where the image RDY being prepared is displayed. This timer notice effect is also an example of a notice display that is started after the display of the image RDY in preparation is finished. When the timer notice effect is started, the timer display is displayed in the area where the image RDY being prepared is displayed, and then the countdown starts. As a result of the countdown, when “0:00” indicating 0 second is reached, a certain notice display is started. In the effect example shown in FIG. 195 (b3), “10:00” is displayed as the timer display, and then the countdown is started. In addition, after the countdown is started, there may be a case where a fake timer notice effect is started in which the timer notice effect ends before “0:00”. In addition, it may be easier for the jackpot symbol to be finally displayed when the timer notice effect is started than when the mini game is started, or it may be easier than when the timer notice effect is started. In the event that is started, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily. Note that the timer notice effect in the present embodiment is a certain effect display (for example, in a display area different from the display area in which the timer display is performed after “0:00” indicating 0 second is obtained as a result of the countdown. , The iron plate image TP) is performed, but after “0:00” indicating 0 second is reached, another effect display (for example, “iron plate” is displayed in the display area where the timer display is performed). Display in a display area that is different from the display area in which the timer display is performed after performing a display capable of specifying a certain effect display or a display related to a certain effect display such as “chance”. You may comprise so that effect display (for example, iron plate image TP) may be performed. Further, the timer notice effect in the present embodiment is configured to display up to “0:00” indicating 0 seconds as a result of the countdown, but displays up to “1” indicating 1 second, or , “00:01” may be displayed. Specifically, “10” is displayed as the timer display, and then the countdown is started. Then, after “1” is displayed, another effect display (for example, a certain effect display such as “iron plate” can be specified in the display area where the timer display has been performed, or “chance” is displayed. After performing such a display related to a certain effect display), a certain effect display (for example, iron plate image TP) may be performed in a display area different from the display area where the timer display is performed ( Here, the countdown display may be until “1” is displayed, until just before another effect display is displayed, or until another effect display is displayed. ). The time from when “1” is displayed until the display of another effect display is started is the same (substantially the same) as the time from when “2” is displayed until the display of “1” is started. (That is, it is displayed at the timing of “0” in “2” → “1” → “0”) or may be different. In addition, when a pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed as a certain effect display, a display indicating “NEXT” or “continuation” may be displayed as another effect display. In addition, a timer display (for example, “10:00”) is displayed immediately after the display of the image RDY in preparation is completed, but after the display of the image RDY in preparation is completed, another display is displayed. (For example, a display indicating that the timer display is counted up from 0 or a display related to the timer display such as “until the next chance increases, after”) is displayed. You may comprise so that another display may not be displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 195 (b4), as a result of the countdown, the timer display is “0:00” and the countdown is completed.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 195 (b5), the iron plate image TP as the notice display is displayed, and it is notified that the big hit is confirmed. That is, it can be said that the timer notice effect is a notice display of displaying the iron plate image TP as a certain notice display. In each effect example shown in the present embodiment, effects other than the iron plate image TP may be performed as a certain effect.

  FIGS. 195 (c1) to (c3) are effects following FIG. 195 (b2). In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 195 (c1), a state in which the timer notice effect is started is shown in the area where the image RDY being prepared is displayed. In the timer notice effect shown in FIG. 195 (c1), in addition to the timer display, the remaining time display meter MT4 is displayed in an area different from the area where the image RDY being prepared is displayed. The display mode of the remaining time display meter MT4 changes so as to gradually become shorter corresponding to the remaining time of the timer display. Then, the remaining time display meter MT4 disappears at the timing when the timer display becomes “0:00”. In this effect example, a state in which the timer notice effect is performed is shown by the display by numbers in the timer display and the display in a display mode other than the numbers. Note that only a decrease display of the meter by the remaining time display meter MT4 is first performed, and for example, when the remaining time becomes 3 seconds, a countdown by a timer display may be started. In this case, the decrease rate of the remaining time display meter MT4 may change before and after the countdown by the timer display starts. In addition, two or more remaining time display meters having different remaining times may be provided, each of which may be displayed in a length corresponding to the remaining time, or two or more remaining time display meters having the same remaining time but different lengths may be provided. It may be displayed. In this case, for example, the decrease rate of the longer remaining time display meter may be faster than the decrease rate of the shorter remaining time display meter. In addition, when a plurality of remaining time display meters are displayed, different notice displays may be performed when the remaining time display meters disappear. Further, two or more remaining time display meters having the same length may be provided so that the decreasing speeds thereof are different.

  Further, in this effect example, an effect of extending the execution time of the timer notice effect may be performed. For example, when the effect is extended, the number 0 may be deleted and the meter may be restored again. Further, the length of the meter may be different depending on the timer notice time. Moreover, the decreasing speed of the meter may not be constant, and for example, it may not decrease at a constant speed at a certain timing. Also, a plurality of meters may be displayed, and the length of a certain meter is long. For example, the rate of decrease may be increased from the middle, so that it may be shorter than the length of the other meter. Moreover, the rate of decrease of the meter may not be constant. For example, the rate of decrease may be faster or slower in a state where numbers are also displayed.

  FIG. 196 is a diagram illustrating an example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment in a stepwise manner.

  FIG. 196 (a1) shows a state in which the swordsman reach is started. In this effect example, unlike FIG. 193 (m), the image RDY in preparation is not displayed. Thereafter, after the reach effect is performed as shown in FIGS. 196 (a2) to (a3), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 196 (a4) performs the combined animation and displays A pair of semi-transparent button images 136q are displayed from the upper left and right of the screen. Here, the united animation may be referred to as button production introduction animation or fade-in animation (IN animation). This semi-transparent button image 136q notifies that the button image 136a is materialized and the button notice effect is started by being combined. Here, the introduction animation may be included in the button notice effect. The pair of semi-transparent button images 136q move toward the center while being close to each other. In this example, the example in which the two translucent button images 136q are combined has been described. For example, an effect in which the four translucent button images 136q are combined may be performed. In this case, two translucent buttons are displayed. The button image 136a is instantiated and the button notice effect is more easily started when the effect that the four translucent button images 136q are combined is performed than when the effect that the image 136q is combined is performed. It may be. Note that the operation of the effect button 136 is not yet accepted during the display of the combined animation. In addition, when a deca button image 136aL, which will be described later, is displayed and a button notice effect is started, a merge animation may be performed using the same translucent button image 136q, or by a translucent button image corresponding to the deca button image 136aL. A coalesced animation may be performed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 196 (a5), a pair of semi-transparent button images 136q are shown closer to each other.

  When the merged animation is successful, as shown in FIG. 196 (a6), the button image 136a is materialized and the button notice effect is started. When the button notice effect is started, the operation of the effect button 136 is accepted, a character “press” is displayed together with an animation indicating that the button image 136a is pressed, and the button image 136a is further left below. A time meter MT is displayed to notify the remaining time of the operation reception period. The effect button lamp 138 provided on the effect button 136 also emits red light in response to the start of the operation valid period. The button notice effect may be started after the operation reception period of the effect button 136 is started, or the operation reception period of the effect button 136 may be started after the button notice effect is started.

  FIGS. 196 (b1) to (b6) show modified examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 195 (b1) to (b5). Since the effects shown in FIGS. 196 (b1) to (b3) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 195 (b1) to (b3), the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 196 (b4) shows a state in which the above-described coalescence animation is started when the timer display countdown is performed in the timer notice effect. At this time, the timer display in the timer preview display indicates “2:00”, indicating that a preview display corresponding to the timer preview effect is performed after 2 seconds. Here, the timing at which the translucent button image 136q is merged by the merge animation corresponds to the timing at which the countdown of the timer display is “0:00” and the countdown is completed. And the timer notice effect indicate that the start of the button notice effect has been announced. In addition, even if the timer notice effect is started and the timer display is displayed, the countdown may not be started immediately, and the timer display may be counted down in accordance with the start of the combined animation. According to this, there is a case where the notice effect executed as a result of the timer notice effect being performed can be easily specified. In addition, during the display of the combined animation, the display of the image being prepared RDY may be terminated and the timer notice effect may be started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 196 (b5), a pair of semi-transparent button images 136q are closer to each other, and a state immediately before the combination is completed is shown. At this time, the timer display of the timer notice display is “0:00”, indicating that the countdown is completed. Note that the timer display may be “0:00” after the merge animation is completed, or the timer display may be “0:00” at the timing when the merge animation is completed.

  FIG. 196 (b6) shows a state in which the coalesced animation is successful, the deca button image 136aL is materialized, the button notice effect is started, and the operation acceptance state is started. In this effect example, the deca button image 136aL is more easily displayed when both the timer notice effect and the united animation are performed than when only one of the timer notice effect and the united animation is performed. It has become. Further, in this effect example, when the effect button 136 is operated in a state where the deca button image 136aL is displayed, for example, the iron plate image TP is displayed.

  FIG. 196 (c1) is a modification of the effects shown in FIGS. 196 (b3) to (b6). Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 196 (c1) to (c2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 196 (b3) to (b4), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 196 (c3), a state immediately before the pair of semi-transparent button images 136q come close to each other and the combination is completed is shown. In the effect example shown in FIG. 196 (c3), when the pair of semi-transparent button images 136q come close to each other, the effect EF6 overlaps at least part of the pair of semi-transparent button images 136q, rather than the state where they do not overlap. The translucent button image 136q is difficult to visually recognize. Therefore, the player may have a sense of expectation as to whether or not the combined animation is successful.

  When the combined animation is successful, the button notice effect by the big button image 136aL is started as shown in FIG. 196 (c4). Since the effect shown in FIG. 196 (c4) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 196 (b6), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As described above, the example of the effect shown in FIG. 196 also shows an example in which the image RDY being prepared ends during the execution of super reach. Note that there may or may not be a pattern in which the display of the preparing image RDY ends and the timer notice starts while the introductory animation is displayed.

  FIG. 197 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 197 (a), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variation icon h0 placed on the pedestal at the center thereof. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 197 (a), one variable display in FIG. 1 is held, so one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 has a red display mode, that is, a display mode for the change notice, and the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and the image RDY being prepared is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 197 (a). In this preparing image RDY, the background color is red, and the jackpot symbol is easier to be finally displayed than in the case of the green background color which is the default display mode. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the UI unit UI3 illustrated in FIG. 197 (a) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 197 (a), “castle town” is displayed, and it is informed that the current stage is a castle town. The second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

  Further, a family crest member 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and a red light emission mode is set in accordance with the display color of the variation icon h0. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an Yatsushiro character 224Fa and a general character 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 197 (b), the image RDY being prepared is overlapped with the effect EF5, and the display state is more difficult to visually recognize than the state where it is not overlapped with the effect EF5. . That is, the end effect of displaying the image RDY in preparation is started. Thus, in this effect example, it can be said that the display of the image RDY in preparation other than the super reach is finished.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 197 (c), a state in which the timer notice effect is started is shown in the tutorial display portion TT1 (that is, the region where the image RDY being prepared is displayed). ing. When the timer notice effect is started, a timer display is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1, and then the countdown starts. In the effect example shown in FIG. 197 (c), “90:00” is displayed as the timer display, and then the countdown is started. The background color of the timer display is red following the background color of the image RDY being prepared. In this production example, a state in which the timer notice production is started before the super reach is developed is shown. The timer display that is displayed when the timer notice effect is started is a long time of “90:00”, and it can be estimated that the symbol variation display time is long, so that the expectation for the big hit may be improved. Thus, in this effect example, when the displayed timer display time is displayed for a long time (long time) such as “90:00”, the time is relatively short such as “10:00”. It is configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than when it is displayed with (short time). In this effect example, since the background color of the image RDY being prepared is red, the timer display is likely to be started in a long time in the timer notice effect. Further, in this effect example, since the timer display is long time and the background is red, the reliability of the big hit is dramatically improved.

  FIG. 197 (d) shows a state of transition to super reach (swordsman reach). Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. "Decoration 4" forming a reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen. The number-of-receptions display 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are deleted at the timing of transition to super reach. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an effect display (super reach transition display) for shifting to the super reach is performed, and the family crest character 224E rises and rotates to lower the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It overlaps with the front side. For this reason, the fluctuation icon h0 and a part of the hold icon (for example, the hold icon h11) are difficult to visually recognize because the family crest member 224E is overlapped. Also, the family crest character 224E overlaps with a part of the timer notice display during the countdown display of the timer display. It is informed that the movement to the super reach is caused by the rising / rotating operation of the family crest member 224E. At the timing shown in FIG. 197 (d), the timer display is “30:00”.

  FIG. 197 (e) shows a state in which the above-described coalescence animation is started when the timer display countdown is performed in the timer notice effect. At this time, the timer display in the timer preview display indicates “2:00”, indicating that a preview display corresponding to the timer preview effect is performed after 2 seconds. Again, the timing at which the translucent button image 136q is merged by the merge animation corresponds to the timing at which the countdown of the timer display is “0:00” and the countdown is completed. And the timer notice effect indicate that the start of the button notice effect is forewarned.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 197 (f), a pair of semi-transparent button images 136q are closer to each other, and a state immediately before the combination is completed is shown. At this time, the timer display of the timer notice display is “0:00”, indicating that the countdown is completed. In this production example, the background color of the timer notice display is red, and the jackpot symbol is easier to be confirmed and displayed than when the default background color is displayed, but it may be the same. Note that the reliability of the jackpot may be the same when the timer notice display is the default background color and when the timer background display color is the red background color.

  FIG. 197 (g) shows that the coalesced animation is successful, the deca button image 136aL is materialized and the button notice effect is started, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed, and the operation acceptance state is started. Yes. In this effect example, the longer the time for which the timer counts down in the timer display, the easier it is to win.

  FIG. 198 is a diagram showing step by step another example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to this embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 198 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variation icon h0 placed on the pedestal at the center thereof. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 198 (a1), since one variable display of FIG. 1 is held, one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 has a red display mode, that is, a display mode for the change notice, and the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. The family crest character 224E has a red light emission mode in accordance with the display color of the variation icon h0. Further, a tutorial display portion TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and the image RDY being prepared is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 198 (a1). This preparing image RDY has a green background and is in a default display mode. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the UI unit UI3 illustrated in FIG. 198 (a1) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 198 (a1), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. The second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

  In addition, a family crest character 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and an eight-generation character 224Fa, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is arranged above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. And a general character 224Fb are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 198 (a2), the image RDY in preparation is overlapped with the effect EF5, and the display state is more difficult to visually recognize than the state where it is not overlapped with the effect EF5. .

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 198 (a3), a state is shown in which the mini game is started in the area where the image RDY being prepared is displayed. When the mini game is started, Tono-sama's mini character MC1 and target TGT are displayed. The target TGT is made up of regions divided into four equal parts, and the upper region of the four regions is the winning region. High notice is being made. In this production example, a state in which a mini game is being performed before the transition to super reach is shown.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 198 (a4), the state where the arrow emitted by Tono-sama's mini character MC1 is stuck in the area hitting the target TGT is shown. That is, a state of great success as a result of the mini game as the notice display is shown.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 198 (a5), since the mini game was very successful, the display mode of the change icon h0 changes from the red display mode to the gold display mode, that is, the change icon h0. The notice by is ranked up. The family crest member 224E also emits light in gold according to the display color of the variation icon h0. Note that the crest character 224E may be changed from the red light emission mode to the gold light emission mode after the change icon h0 changes from the red display mode to the gold display mode, or the family crest character 224E emits red light. The change icon h0 may change from a red display mode to a gold display mode after changing to a mode or a gold light emission mode, or the timing at which the change icon h0 changes from a red display mode to a gold display mode Thus, the family crest character 224E may be changed from a red light emission mode to a gold light emission mode. In the tutorial display unit TT1, the closing operation using the shutter image is started, and the display of the displayed mini game is shifted to a state where it cannot be visually recognized using the shutter image. Note that the closing operation by the shutter image may be started after the display mode of the variation icon h0 is changed, or the display mode of the variation icon h0 may be changed after the closing operation by the shutter image is started. The closing operation by the shutter image may be started at a timing when the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 changes. In this example, the display mode of the variation icon h0 is changed as a result of the mini game. However, the hold icon may be changed.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 198 (a6), the state in which the tutorial display portion TT1 is completely closed by the shutter image is shown. Thereby, the display of the mini game is completely erased by the shutter image.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 198 (a7), the shutter image is shown open in the tutorial display portion TT1 closed by the shutter image. At this time, the tutorial display unit TT1 is in a non-display state in which no display is performed. Note that when the shutter image is released, the tutorial display may be started, or another notice display, timer notice display, or mini-game may be started. Alternatively, a grayed-out display may be performed after the shutter image is released.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 198 (b1) to (b8), an example will be described in which a mini game is started without displaying the image RDY being prepared.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 198 (b1), since one variable display of Special Figure 1 is held, one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 is in a red display mode and is displayed as a notice. The hold icon h11 is in a default display mode. In the tutorial display section TT1, “Panda is a master of the lord” is displayed, and the relationship between the panda character and the lord of the character is described. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the UI unit UI3 illustrated in FIG. 198 (b1) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 198 (b2), a state is shown in which the tutorial display unit TT1 of the UI unit UI3 is closed by the shutter image. Thereby, the explanation display displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 is hidden.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 198 (b3), the state in which the tutorial display portion TT1 is completely closed by the shutter image is shown. This shutter image can be said to be a mini-game notice display that is displayed before the display of a mini-game to be described later is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 198 (b4), a state in which the shutter image is opened is shown in the tutorial display portion TT1 closed by the shutter image. At this time, the shutter image is displayed open by a predetermined open animation. In this effect example, when the shutter image is released, a mini game is started on the tutorial display section TT1. That is, in this production example, a state in which the mini game starts is shown instead of the explanation display that has been performed so far. It can also be said that the mini game starts without displaying the image RDY in preparation. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 198 (b4) to (b8) are performed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 198 (b4) to (b8) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 198 (a3) to (a7), the description thereof is omitted. It should be noted that after the mini game is over, explanation display may be performed on the tutorial display unit TT1, or grayed out display may be performed.

  FIG. 199 is a diagram showing stepwise display examples in the tutorial display unit TT1 applicable to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 199 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variation icon h0 placed on the pedestal at the center thereof. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 199 (a1), since one variable display of FIG. 1 is held, one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 has a red display mode, that is, a display mode for the change notice, and the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. The family crest character 224E has a red light emission mode in accordance with the display color of the variation icon h0. Also, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 199 (a1), “Panda is a master of the lord” is displayed. And the relationship between Tono-sama's character. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the UI unit UI3 illustrated in FIG. 199 (a1) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 199 (a1), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. The second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

  In addition, a family crest character 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and an eight-generation character 224Fa, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is arranged above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. And a general character 224Fb are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 199 (a2), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state in which the tutorial display unit TT1 of the UI unit UI3 is closed by a shutter image. That is, it can be said that display (shutter image display) before another display (preliminary display) is performed instead of a certain display (explanation display) in a certain region (tutorial display section TT1). . Note that at least a part of the character display that was displayed before the shutter image was displayed during the display of the shutter image may be displayed.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 199 (a3), the state in which the tutorial display portion TT1 is completely closed by the shutter image is shown. This shutter image can be said to be a display before the notice display that is displayed before the notice display described later is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 199 (a4), a state in which the shutter image is opened is shown in the tutorial display unit TT1 that has been closed by the shutter image. At this time, the shutter image is displayed open by a predetermined open animation. In the tutorial display section TT1, when the shutter image is released, a notice display made up of the characters “Intense heat” is displayed instead of the image RDY being prepared, the mini game, and the timer notice effect. The notice display of “Intense heat” may be displayed as a result of a mini game or a timer notice effect. In this case, if the mini-game or timer notice effect is displayed as a result, the jackpot symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed than when the mini-game or timer notice effect is displayed. Good. In addition, the notice display of “extreme heat” may not be displayed as a result of the mini game or the timer notice effect. Further, in this effect example, it is not necessary to perform an effect of closing the tutorial display portion TT1 with a shutter image before performing a notice display such as “Intense heat”.

  FIG. 199 (b1) to FIG. 199 (b8) show an effect example showing how the notice icon appears in the tutorial display section TT1. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 199 (b1) to (b3) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 199 (a1) to (a3), the description thereof will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 199 (b4), a state in which the shutter image is opened is shown in the tutorial display unit TT1 that has been closed by the shutter image. At this time, the shutter image is displayed open by a predetermined open animation. The tutorial display unit TT1 shows a state in which a timer notice notice icon I81 appears to notify that the timer notice effect is performed when the shutter image is released. Thereby, it is foretold that the timer notice effect will be performed. Other notice icons may appear.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 199 (b5), the timer advance notice icon I81 displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 jumps out of the tutorial display unit TT1 and moves upward while expanding. The situation is shown.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 199 (b6), the closing operation using the shutter image is started in the tutorial display unit TT1.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 199 (b7), the state in which the tutorial display portion TT1 is completely closed by the shutter image is shown. This makes it difficult to visually recognize the display state in the tutorial display unit TT1. In this production example, until the shutter image is completely closed, the state in which the timer notice notice icon I81 is displayed is informed that the timer notice notice icon I81 is stocked. The image may be deleted when the closing operation by the shutter image is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 199 (b8), a state in which the shutter image is opened is shown in the tutorial display unit TT1 that has been closed by the shutter image. At this time, the shutter image is displayed open by a predetermined open animation. The tutorial display unit TT1 displays a ready image RDY when the shutter image is released. At the timing shown in FIG. 199 (b8), the image RDY in preparation is in a default display mode. This in-preparation image RDY is displayed when the timer notice notice icon I81 is stocked. That is, the start of the timer notice effect is notified by displaying the image RDY in preparation. In this example, the display mode of the image being prepared RDY for notifying the start of the timer preview effect is the same as the display mode of the image RDY being prepared for notifying the start of the mini game. It may be. In addition, a mini game or a timer notice effect may be started without displaying the in-preparation image RDY.

  FIG. 200 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment. Here, even if the end timing of the third display, the start and end timing of a certain notice display, and the start and end timing of a certain effect are different states among the subdivided states of the second state It may be the same state.

  FIG. 200 (a1) is an effect following FIG. 193 (l). Note that the effect shown in FIG. 194 (a1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. In the effect shown in FIG. 200 (a1), the display may be started after the image RDY being prepared is developed to super reach.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 200 (a2), the duel scene animation continues, and then, as shown in FIG. 200 (a3), the main character Tono wins the enemy swordsman, A combination of decorative patterns of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4” is derived, and fluctuation fluctuation is started. At this time, the image RDY in preparation is still displayed. In other words, it can be said that the image RDY being prepared is displayed in a state where the display indicating that it is a big hit is being made. In order to congratulate that it is a big hit, the family crest character 224E, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa, and the general character 224Fb emit light in a rainbow display manner that emits light in multiple colors.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 200 (a4), the image RDY being prepared is overlapped with the effect EF5, and the display state is more difficult to visually recognize than the state where it is not overlapped with the effect EF5. ing.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 200 (a5), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state where the timer notice effect is started in the area where the image RDY being prepared is displayed. When the timer notice effect is started, the timer display is displayed in the area where the image RDY being prepared is displayed, and then the countdown starts. As a result of the countdown, when “0:00” indicating 0 second is reached, a certain notice display is started. In the effect example shown in FIG. 200 (a5), “3:00” is displayed as the timer display, and then the countdown is started. In addition, after the countdown is started, there may be a case where a fake timer notice effect is started in which the timer notice effect ends before “0:00”.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 200 (a6), as a result of the countdown, the timer display is “0:00” and the countdown is completed.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 200 (a7), a character “Go” is displayed in the display area where the timer display is performed, and a notice effect is started. Yes. The display of the character “Go” may or may not be performed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 200 (a8), a state in which the promotion effect of the big hit symbol is started is shown. Then, as shown in FIG. 200 (a9), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the deca button image 136aL is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT to notify that the operation effective period of the effect button 136 has started. The display of the big button image 136aL corresponds to a certain notice effect, that is, corresponds to the notice effect executed as a result of the timer notice effect being performed. Here, for example, when the timer notice effect is not performed, the jackpot symbol promotion effect may not be started, and when the jackpot symbol promotion effect is started, the default display is displayed instead of the deca button image 136aL. The mode button image 136a may be displayed. Also, a mini game may be played instead of the timer notice effect. Further, even when the timer notice effect or the mini game is not performed, the big button image 136aL may be displayed.

  After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 200 (a9), the jackpot of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is obtained from the combination of the ornament symbols of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4” It is notified that the probabilistic big hit has been confirmed. That is, it is notified that the jackpot symbol has been promoted.

  200 (b1) to 200 (b4) illustrate a state in which the timer display countdown by the timer notice effect is started during the continuation of the duel scene animation in the super reach.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 200 (b1) shows that the duel scene animation continues. At this time, the timer notice effect is started, and the timer notice display is displayed in the display area where the tutorial display unit TT1 was displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 200 (b1), “10:00” is displayed as the timer display on the timer notice display, and then the countdown is started. Note that the time when the countdown is started may be before the development of super reach, after the development of super reach, or at the timing of development of super reach. It may be before the transition to the state, or after the transition to the reach state and before the development to the super reach.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 200 (b2), the button notice effect has been started, and the state in which the button image 136a in the default display mode is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT is shown. That is, a state in which the final judge effect is started is shown. On the other hand, in the timer notice display, the countdown of the timer display continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 200 (b2), the timer display indicates “9:00”. That is, in this effect example, a state in which the timer display countdown by the timer notice effect is performed during the operation reception period of the effect button 136 is shown. Here, the operation reception period of the effect button 136 is longer than the length of the operation reception period of the effect button 136 in the final judge effect and the length of the countdown in the timer notice effect.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 200 (b3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 200 (b4), the protagonist wins over the enemy swordsman, “Decoration 4”. The combination of the decorative pattern of “decoration 4—decoration 4” is derived, and fluctuation fluctuation is started. On the other hand, in the timer notice display, it is suggested that the countdown of the timer display is still continued, that is, the promotion effect of the jackpot symbol may be performed after that. In this effect example, the timer display is not set to “0:00” even when the effect button 136 is not operated in the final judge effect. This is because, for example, a combination of lost decorative symbols is displayed in the final judge effect, and then the revival effect is performed at the timing when the timer display becomes “0:00”. Conversely, the count may be zero when the effect button 136 is not operated in the final judge effect.

  FIG. 201 is a diagram showing an example of a timer notice effect applicable to the present embodiment in a stepwise manner. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 201 (a) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 199 (a1), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 201 (b) shows a state where the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is switched to the image RDY in preparation. In the preparation example image RDY in this effect example, only one type of display mode is prepared, and change display to other display modes is not performed. As described above, in this effect example, the reliability of the big hit is not known in the display mode of the image RDY being prepared. In addition, when there are a plurality of types of a certain notice display or a certain effect, it is not possible to know which certain notice display or a certain effect is performed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 201 (c), a state in which the timer preview display is started from the preparatory image RDY displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is switched to the timer preview display. . In this effect example, one of the background colors in the timer notice display is selected from a plurality of colors, and the reliability of the jackpot is indicated by the background color. In the effect example shown in FIG. 201 (c), the background color of the timer notice display is blue, which is a low reliability mode. In addition, the timer display in the timer preview display is “10:00”, and it is notified that a certain preview display may be displayed 10 seconds after the countdown starts. In addition, before or after the timer display countdown starts, an effect may be performed in which the background color of the timer notice display changes and the reliability is improved in the middle.

  Thereafter, the timer display countdown in the timer notice display starts, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 201 (d) shows that the timer display is “0:00” and the countdown is completed. Further, the decoration symbol is shown in a state where “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and the reach state is reached. It should be noted that the reach state may be reached after the timer display becomes “0:00”, the timer display may become “0:00” after the reach state is reached, or the timer display is “ The reach state may be reached at the time of “0:00”. In this production example, when the countdown of the timer display becomes 0, there is a corresponding relationship with the display indicating that the timer display is developed to super reach, and the display always develops to super reach.

  When the countdown of the timer display is completed, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 201 (e), the character “Go” is displayed instead of the timer display in the tutorial display area TT1, and a certain notice display is displayed. It is informing that it will start.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 201 (f), the button notice effect is started, the default button image 136a is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT, and the operation acceptance state of the effect button 136 is started. The situation is shown. In the tutorial display section TT1, the display of “Go” is erased and is not displayed. In this effect example, the start of the button notice effect is not a notice display that starts as a result of the timer notice effect, but a notice that is displayed when the result button 136 is operated as a result of the button notice effect being operated. The display corresponds to a notice display that starts as a result of the timer notice effect. The tutorial display section TT1 may be in a non-display state after the button notice effect is started, or the button notice effect may be started after the tutorial display portion TT1 is in a non-display state. The tutorial display unit TT1 may be hidden at the timing when the button notice effect is started. By not displaying the tutorial display after the display of “Go”, there is a case where the effect of concentrating on other effects (for example, button effects) may be achieved.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 201 (g), a state in which the gauge of the remaining time meter is reduced according to the time after the button notice effect is started and the operation effective period is started is shown. ing.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 201 (h), it is determined that the button notice effect has been successful, and the process proceeds to super reach (swordsman reach) as shown in FIG. 201 (i). Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. "Decoration 4" forming a reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen. Thereby, it may be possible to easily recognize that the “decoration 4” is in the reach state. The number-of-receptions display 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are deleted at the timing of transition to super reach. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an effect display (super reach transition display) for shifting to the super reach is performed, and the family crest character 224E rises and rotates to lower the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It overlaps with the front side. Therefore, it is difficult to visually recognize the fluctuation icon h0 and some of the hold icons (for example, the hold icon h11) by being overlapped by the family crest member 224E. The family crest character 224E also overlaps a part of the tutorial display portion TT1. It is informed that the movement to the super reach is caused by the rising / rotating operation of the family crest member 224E. Also, in this production example, when transitioning to at least swordsman reach among the super reach, after the super reach transition display is started, the UI part UI3 is framed out together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display part TT1. , Hidden. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that a certain notice display performed as a result of the timer notice effect corresponds to the development of super reach.

  FIG. 201 (j) shows a state in which the swordsman reach is started. In addition, when shifting to the swordsman reach, the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, but the display of the change icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. Since the tutorial display unit TT1 is not displayed, no display is performed after the tutorial display unit TT1 is framed out together with the UI unit UI3. The family crest member 224E is moved downward and returned to the initial position.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 201 (k) shows a state in which the cut-in image HCI of the princess is displayed. This princess cut-in image HCI is displayed suddenly without going through the button notice effect, timer notice effect, or mini-game, and has low reliability, but the button notice effect or timer notice effect or You may make it display as a result of having played the mini game. Further, instead of the princess cut-in image HCI, for example, an iron plate image TP may be displayed.

  FIG. 202 is a diagram illustrating another example of the preliminary notice effect that is applicable to the present embodiment in stages. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 202A to 202C are the same as those in FIGS. 201A to 201C, the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 202 (d) shows a state in which an animation in which a Tono-sama character as a navigation character throws a bomb is performed. Specifically, the character of Tono-sama displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N throws a bomb while screaming “not yet”, and this bomb is displayed from the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the first decorative symbol display. Move across device 208L. Then, this bomb heads to the tutorial display portion TT1 where the timer display is being counted down, and bursts in the vicinity above the tutorial display portion TT1.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 202 (e), the state in which the countdown of the timer display is interrupted and the image RDY in preparation is displayed again is shown. At the time when the timer notice effect is started, the timer display is “10:00”, and the timing at which the button notice effect is started is notified, but when the timer notice effect is interrupted, It may be recognized that it did not correspond to the button notice effect. It should be noted that the jackpot symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed when the timer notice effect interruption effect by the navigation character is performed than when the timer notice effect interruption effect by the navigation character is not performed. When an effect that interrupts the countdown of the timer display is performed, the time until the timer counts up by extending the timer display time instead of displaying the image RDY in preparation may be extended. Good or the countdown speed may be slow. In addition, for example, the timer notice has an advantage that it is easy to predict the timing of 0 because the countdown speed does not change, which is why the future is determined by the end timing of the image RDY being prepared (that is, the start timing of the timer notice). There is a case.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 202 (f), the state in which the button notice effect is started, the default button image 136a is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT, and the operation acceptance state of the effect button 136 is started. It is shown. In the tutorial display unit TT1, the image RDY being prepared is continuously displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 202 (g), a state in which the gauge of the remaining time meter is reduced according to the time after the button notice effect is started and the operation effective period is started is shown. ing.

  After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 202 (h), it is determined that the button notice effect is successful, and the process proceeds to super reach (swordsman reach) as shown in FIG. 202 (i). Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. "Decoration 4" forming a reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen. Thereby, it may be possible to easily recognize that the “decoration 4” is in the reach state. The number-of-receptions display 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are deleted at the timing of transition to super reach. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an effect display (super reach transition display) for shifting to the super reach is performed, and the family crest character 224E rises and rotates to lower the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It overlaps with the front side. Therefore, it is difficult to visually recognize the fluctuation icon h0 and some of the hold icons (for example, the hold icon h11) by being overlapped by the family crest member 224E. The family crest character 224E also overlaps a part of the tutorial display portion TT1 on which the image RDY being prepared is displayed. It is informed that the movement to the super reach is caused by the rising / rotating operation of the family crest member 224E. Also, in this production example, when transitioning to at least swordsman reach among the super reach, after the super reach transition display is started, the UI part UI3 is framed out together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display part TT1. , Hidden.

  FIG. 202 (j) shows a state in which the swordsman reach is started. In addition, when shifting to the swordsman reach, the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, but the display of the change icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. The tutorial display unit TT1 is not displayed together with the UI unit UI3, but the image RDY being prepared is continuously displayed. The family crest member 224E is moved downward and returned to the initial position.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 202 (k), a state in which the timer notice display is switched from the image RDY being prepared to the timer notice display is shown. Specifically, the timer notice display after the restart is changed to a golden background color, which indicates that the reliability of the jackpot is improved. In FIG. 202 (k), the timer display in the timer notice display indicates “10:00”, and it is notified that a notice notice may be displayed 10 seconds after the countdown is restarted. Has been. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the timer display countdown by the timer notice production is being performed during super reach (swordsman reach). In addition, the start timing of the timer notice effect is set to an appropriate timing. For example, before the start of super reach, after the start of super reach, before reaching the reach state, or after reaching the reach state, the super reach starts. May also be started at the previous timing. In addition, the timer display when the timer notice effect is resumed can be appropriately set to time, and may be started from “9:00” indicating the time at the time of interruption, for example.

  Thereafter, the timer display countdown in the timer notice display starts, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 202 (l) shows that the timer display is “0:00” and the countdown is completed.

  When the countdown of the timer display is completed, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 202 (m) displays the letters “Go” instead of the timer display, and starts a notice display. We are reporting.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 202 (n), an iron plate image TP as a notice display is displayed to notify that the jackpot is confirmed. That is, it can be said that the timer notice effect corresponds to the notice display of the iron plate image TP as a certain notice display. In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 201, the notice display corresponding to the timer notice effect is not developed to super reach, but the timer notice effect is extended, and as a result, a cut-in image displayed during super reach. As a result, the cut-in image has high reliability. As described above, in this production example, the countdown is “0:00” at a good location in super reach, and an example in which a good production is performed is shown. In addition, the expectation degree of jackpot is higher as the end timing of the image RDY in preparation (start timing of a certain notice display) is later in a certain fluctuation.

  FIG. 203 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment. Note that the effects shown in FIG. 203A are the same as those in FIG.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 203 (b) shows a state in which the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is switched to the ready image RDY. At this time, “TIMER × 2” is displayed above the tutorial display portion TT1 on which the image RDY being prepared is displayed, indicating that the timer notice effect is performed twice. The display of “TIMER × 2” may be displayed simultaneously with the display of the image being prepared RDY, or may be displayed after the image being prepared RDY is displayed. You may make it produce that it is performed twice, thinking that it will be performed once. Instead of displaying “TIMER × 2”, for example, two images RDY in preparation may be displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 203 (c), a state in which the timer preview display is started by switching from the preparatory image RDY displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 to the timer preview display is shown. . The background color of the timer notice display is blue, which has a low reliability. Here, the default display mode in which the background color of the timer notice display is green may be used. In addition, the timer display in the timer preview display is “10:00”, and it is notified that a certain preview display may be displayed 10 seconds after the countdown starts.

  Thereafter, the timer display countdown in the timer notice display starts, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 203 (d), the timer display becomes “0:00” and the countdown is completed. Further, the decoration symbol is shown in a state where “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and the reach state is reached. When the countdown of the timer display is completed, the display of “TIMER × 2” displayed above the tutorial display section TT1 is erased, and it is notified that the first timer notice effect has been consumed and ended. ing. Note that the display of “TIMER × 2” may be difficult to visually recognize by displaying the effect when the timer display becomes “0:00”. Further, the display of “TIMER × 2” may be left without being erased. In addition, when a plurality of preparation displays are displayed, a state in which the display related to the preparation display is once hidden after the first preparation display is completed may be provided.

  When the timer display countdown is completed, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 203 (e), the character “Go” is displayed instead of the timer display in the tutorial display area TT1, and a notice display is displayed. It is informing that it will start.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 203 (f), the button notice effect is started, the default button image 136a is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT, and the operation acceptance state of the effect button 136 is started. The situation is shown. At this time, the button image 136a and the remaining time meter MT overlap the decorative design. In the tutorial display section TT1, the display of “Go” is erased and is not displayed. Therefore, it may appear that there is no stock for the timer notice effect. In this effect example, the start of the button notice effect is not a notice display that starts as a result of the timer notice effect, but a notice that is displayed when the result button 136 is operated as a result of the button notice effect being operated. The display corresponds to a notice display that starts as a result of the timer notice effect.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 203 (g), a state in which the gauge of the remaining time meter is reduced in accordance with the time from the start of the button notice effect and the start of the operation valid period is shown. ing. At this time, the ready image RDY is displayed again on the tutorial display unit TT1, and it is notified that the second timer notice effect is started. However, when the ready image RDY is displayed again, the first ready image RDY is displayed. It is displayed enlarged compared to when it is displayed. Therefore, the fluctuation icon h0 and a part of the decorative design may be overlapped by the preparing image RDY. In this way, there is a case where the image RDY being prepared is temporarily hidden and further overlapped, thereby causing more attention.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 203 (h), it is determined that the button notice effect is successful, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L, as shown in FIG. 203 (i), shifts to super reach. Display is made and it develops into super reach (swordsman reach). Further, the family crest member 224E rises and rotates and overlaps the front side of the lower center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Also, the family crest member 224E overlaps with a part of the enlarged image RDY in preparation, and is more difficult to see than a state where it is not overlapped with the family crest member 224E. Note that the image RDY in preparation may be overlapped with the family crest actor 224E only when it is enlarged and not overlapped when it is not enlarged. Further, after the super reach transition display is started, the UI part UI3 is framed downward together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display part TT1, and is not displayed. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that a certain notice display performed as a result of the timer notice effect corresponds to the development of super reach.

  FIG. 203 (j) shows a state in which the swordsman reach is started. In addition, when shifting to the swordsman reach, the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, but the display of the change icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. The tutorial display unit TT1 is not displayed together with the UI unit UI3, but the image RDY being prepared is continuously displayed. Since the image RDY in preparation is enlarged and displayed, a part of the fluctuation icon h0 is overlapped, and the swordsman character in the reach effect display is also overlapped. As described above, the preparation-in-progress image RDY that is enlarged may be displayed even during execution of super reach. The family crest member 224E is moved downward and returned to the initial position.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 203 (k) shows a state in which the timer preview display is switched from the ready image RDY to the timer preview display and the second timer preview effect is started. Specifically, the timer notice display after the start is changed to a golden background color, which indicates that the reliability of the jackpot is improved. In FIG. 203 (k), the timer display in the timer notice display indicates “3:00”, and it is notified that a notice notice may be displayed 3 seconds after the countdown starts. Has been. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the timer display countdown by the timer notice production is being performed during super reach (swordsman reach). Further, in this effect example, the size of the timer preview display is set to be the same as the size of the preparatory image RDY that is displayed in an enlarged manner. The symbols are easy to confirm. Further, when the background color of the timer notice display is gold, it may be displayed in an enlarged manner. Moreover, even if the background color of the timer notice display is a color other than gold, it may be displayed enlarged. Also, in this effect example, the background color of the second timer notice effect is more reliable than the first timer notice effect, but the timer display time is shorter. Note that the timer display time may be longer for the second timer notice effect than for the first timer notice effect.

  Thereafter, the timer display countdown in the timer notice display starts, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 203 (l) shows that the timer display is “0:00” and the countdown is completed.

  When the countdown of the timer display is completed, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 203 (m) displays the letters “Go” instead of the timer display, and starts a notice display. We are reporting.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 203 (n), an iron plate image TP as a notice display is displayed to notify that the jackpot is confirmed. That is, it can be said that the second timer notice effect corresponds to the notice display of the iron plate image TP as a certain notice display. In this effect example, there may be a case where it is possible to dramatically improve the expectation for the big hit by informing in advance that the timer notice effect will be performed twice.

  Thus, in this effect example, when the image RDY being prepared is displayed as the number of clothes, when one image RDY is digested, all the images RDY being prepared are displayed in the same symbol variation display. Shown to be digested.

  FIG. 204 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of a preliminary notice effect that is applicable to the present embodiment. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 204 (a1) to (a2) are the same as those in FIGS. 200 (a1) to (a2), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 204 (a3), a state is shown in which the display of the long press effect by the long press effect display is started. In the long press effect display, an area where the Tono-sama character is drawn is arranged above, and an area where the swordsman character is drawn below is arranged. According to the operation amount of the long press operation of the effect button 136 , The size of both areas is displayed so as to change relatively. The ready image RDY is also displayed when the long press effect is started. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 204 (a3), the operation valid period of the effect button 136 has not started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 204 (a4), a state in which acceptance of a long press operation by a long press effect is started is shown. That is, a state in which the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started is shown. In this long press effect, the remaining time gauge MT is not displayed but may be displayed. In addition, a state in which the timer notice display is switched from the image RDY in preparation to the timer notice display is shown. Specifically, the timer notice display is changed to a green background color, indicating that the reliability is not so high. Further, in FIG. 204 (a4), the timer display in the timer notice display indicates “5:00”, and it is notified that a notice notice may be displayed 5 seconds after the countdown is started. Has been. That is, in this effect example, the operation valid period and the countdown time of the timer display coincide. Note that they do not have to match completely. The timer notice effect may be started after the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 may be started after the timer notice effect is started, The timer notice effect may be started at the timing when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started.

  FIG. 204 (a5) shows a state in which a long press operation of the effect button 136 by the player is performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 204 (a5), the timer display in the timer notice display is “4:00”.

  FIG. 204 (a6) shows a state in which the player continues to press and hold the effect button 136. At this time, in the effect display for long press, the area where the character of the lord placed above is drawn is enlarged, and the area where the character of the swordsman placed below is reduced accordingly, This character is shown to be dominant. This has been suggested to tend to produce advantageous results. At the timing shown in FIG. 204 (a6), the timer display in the timer notice display is “3:00”.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 204 (a7), the timer display is “0:00”, the countdown is completed, and the character “Go” is displayed. Further, the long press effect is continuously performed, and the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is still continuing. That is, it can be said that the character display of “Go” is displayed during the operation effective period of the effect button 136. Also, in the effect display for long press, the area where the Tono-sama character arranged above is further expanded, and the area where the swordsman character arranged below is further reduced, It has been shown that Tonosama's character is by far the dominant. The long press effect may be ended after the character “Go” is displayed, the character “Go” may be displayed after the long press effect is ended, or “Go” may be displayed. The long press effect may end at the timing when the character “is displayed. Further, the operation valid period may end after the character “Go” is displayed, the character “Go” may be displayed after the operation effective period ends, or “Go” may be displayed. The operation valid period may end at the timing when the character "" is displayed.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 204 (a8), the characters “one blow” are displayed, and the deca button image 136aL is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT, and the button notice effect is started, and the operation is effective. It shows how the period has been set again. That is, this button notice effect can be said to be an example of a button operation effect performed following the long press effect. In other words, it can be said that a plurality (types) of button effects are continuously performed. Here, the set operation valid period may be set again after the operation valid period in the long press effect is once ended, or may be set continuously after the operation valid period in the long press effect. May be.

  After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 204 (a9), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 204 (a10), the protagonist wins over the enemy swordsman, “Decoration 4”. The combination of the decorative pattern of “decoration 4—decoration 4” is derived, and fluctuation fluctuation is started. At this time, the family crest character 224E, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa, and the general character 224Fb emit light in a rainbow light-emitting manner so as to congratulate them on the big hit.

  Thus, in this production example, the long-press part finishes the preparation display and the timer display countdown starts, and the countdown is completed between the long-press part and the next part or at the end of the long-press part. Thus, “0:00” is shown, and an example in which the button effect performed in the next part is good is shown.

  204 (b1) to 204 (b5) show a state in which a long press effect is performed in the swordsman reach, but a timer notice effect is not performed.

  Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 204 (b1), after the long press effect by the long press effect display is started, the reception of the long press operation is started, and the effect button 136 is displayed. A state in which a long press operation is performed is shown. In this example, the timer notice effect is not performed.

  However, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 204 (b2), the long press operation of the effect button 136 is continued, but in the effect display for long press, the Tono-like character arranged above is drawn. The area is reduced, and the area where the swordsman character placed below is drawn is enlarged, indicating that Tono-sama's character is inferior (adversary character swordsman character dominance) . This suggests that it is difficult to achieve advantageous results.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 204 (b3), the character “Blow” is displayed, and the button image 136a in the default display mode is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT, and the button notice effect is provided. It is shown that the operation valid period has been set again. As described above, when the timer notice effect is not performed when the long press effect is performed, the deca button image 136aL is not easily displayed, and the button image 136a in the default display mode is easily displayed. In addition, when the long notice effect is not performed when the long press effect is performed, the deca button image 136aL may not be displayed.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 204 (b4), the main character, Tono, loses to the enemy swordsman in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 204 (b5). The combination of the decorative pattern of the decoration “decoration 5—decoration 4” is derived, and fluctuation fluctuation is started. Note that the flow may be a case where it does not go through the mini game or the timer notice effect, and may be a big hit.

  FIG. 205 is a diagram showing, in a stepwise manner, one example of a button hit effect that can be applied to this embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 205 (a), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variation icon h0 placed on the pedestal at the center thereof. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 205 (a), since one variable display in FIG. 1 is held, one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 and the hold icon h11 are both in the default display mode. Further, a tutorial display portion TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0. In the tutorial display portion TT1 shown in FIG. 205 (a), “Panda is the master of the lord” is displayed, and the panda character And the relationship between Tono-sama's character. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 205 (a), the button repeated striking effect has been started, and the explanation of “set the meter to MAX within the time by button striking” is performed. A button image 136a is displayed together with the letters “preparation”, and an operation amount meter MT11 in which five memories are arranged in the vertical direction is displayed on the left side of the display screen. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 205 (a), before the start of accepting continuous operation of the effect button 136, that is, before the start of the operation valid period, the effect button lamp 138 is also lit in white. In this effect example, it can be said that the display of “preparation” displayed above the button image 136a is a display corresponding to the image RDY being prepared (preparation effect display of button striking effect). When the button repeated striking effect is started, the decorative symbol that has been subjected to the variable display on the first decorative symbol display device 208L moves to the upper side of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and is displayed in a reduced manner. In addition, the UI unit UI3 illustrated in FIG. 205A is in a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 205 (a), “Castle Town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. The second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

  In addition, a family crest character 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and an eight-generation character 224Fa, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is arranged above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. And a general character 224Fb are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 205 (b), a state in which the acceptance of the continuous operation of the effect button 136 is started is shown. Specifically, the character “preparation” displayed above the button image 136a is changed to the character “start”, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the button image 136a, so that the operation effective period is started. The effect button lamp 138 emits red light. In this effect example, it can also be said that the button repeated effect (the main effect) is started at the timing when the operation effective period is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 205 (c), the gauge of the remaining time meter MT is displayed as the time elapses from the operation effective period, and on the right side of the button image 136a, A countdown display with numbers is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 205 (c), “5” is displayed as the countdown display, and it is notified that the time until the operation valid period ends is 5 seconds. When the countdown in the countdown display is completed, there is a possibility that a certain notice effect is performed. Therefore, it can be said that the countdown effect by the countdown display corresponds to the timer notice effect.

  FIG. 205 (d) shows a state in which the player has started a continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 205 (d), “4” is displayed as the countdown display, and it is notified that there are four seconds until the operation effective period ends.

  In FIG. 205 (e), the player continuously performs the striking operation of the effect button 136. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the operation amount meter MT11 has one red memory according to the number of repeated striking operations. It is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 205 (e), “3” is displayed as the countdown display, and it is notified that there are three seconds until the operation valid period ends.

  In FIG. 205 (f), the player continuously performs the striking operation of the effect button 136, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state where three memories of the operation amount meter MT11 are displayed in red. Has been. At the timing shown in FIG. 205 (f), “1” is displayed as the countdown display, and it is informed that one second is left until the operation valid period ends.

  FIG. 205 (g) shows a state in which the countdown display on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is “0”, the operation valid period ends, and the player performs the continuous operation of the effect button 136. In addition, the memory of the operation amount meter MT11 is displayed in red three, that is, it is indicated that the button striking effect has failed. The effect button lamp 138 is lit in red, but the lighting state may be switched from red to white at the timing when the operation effective period ends, or before the operation effective period ends. The lighting state of the effect button lamp 138 may be switched from red to white.

  If the button repeated strike effect fails, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 205 (h) displays "Sorry ..." to notify that the button repeated strike effect has failed. In this example, in a pachinko machine that can execute a countdown display-like effect in addition to the timer notice, a certain notice display may not include this countdown display.

  FIG. 206 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 206 (a), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variation icon h0 placed on the pedestal at the center thereof. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 206 (a), since two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are all in the default display mode. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 206 (a), a first preparing image RDY1 is displayed. The function of the first image RDY being prepared is the same as that of the image RDY being prepared. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the UI unit UI3 illustrated in FIG. 206A is in a default display form displayed in blue. In this example, the second image RDY is displayed above the first image RDY1, and a plurality of images are displayed at the same time. The first preparation image RDY1 and the second preparation image RDY2 are each provided with a corresponding effect (such as a timer notice effect or a mini game). These images in preparation (the first image RDY1 and the second image RDY2) function as pre-reading notices. In addition, any of the images being prepared has a green background color and is in a default display mode. In addition, these images in preparation may be displayed at the same time, or may be displayed after the other image is displayed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 206 (a), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. The second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

  FIG. 206 (b) shows a state in which the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 206 (a) is finished and the next symbol variation display is started. Specifically, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the hold icons h11 and h12 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The change icon h0 is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11, and each moves onto the corresponding pedestal. To do. In addition, the variable display of decorative symbols has been started. Note that the first image RDY1 and the second image RDY2 are continuously displayed, that is, it can be said that these images being prepared are displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 206 (c), the first preliminary image RDY1 displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is switched to the timer notice display, and the timer notice effect is started. ing. Note that the background color of the timer notice display corresponding to the first image RDY1 being prepared is green, which is the default display mode. In addition, the timer display in the timer notice display is “5:00”, and it is reported that a notice notice may be displayed 5 seconds after the countdown starts. In this effect example, when one of a plurality of images in preparation is activated (digested) and the effect is started, all other images in preparation are digested. Note that the images in preparation are all digested in one symbol variation display, but the notice icon may be carried over until the next symbol variation display.

  FIG. 206 (d) shows a state in which the timer display in the timer notice display corresponding to the first image RDY1 being prepared is “0:00” and the countdown is completed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 206 (e), the characters “Go” are displayed in the area where the timer notice display corresponding to the first image RDY1 being prepared is displayed, and the timer notice effect related to this timer notice display is displayed. It is informed that a corresponding notice display is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 206 (f), the characters “Go” are deleted together with the display area, and the second image RDY2 is slid downward and moved to the position of the tutorial display portion TT1. Image moving animation is being made in preparation. In addition, a notice effect (preceding start notice effect) corresponding to the completion of the timer display countdown by the timer notice effect corresponding to the first image RDY1 in preparation is started, and a state where the ninja character NJ4 appears is shown. Has been. The ninja character NJ4 displayed here is the same as the ninja character NJ4 that may be displayed when the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 193 (f) is changed. It may be a character. In addition, in this effect, the image moving animation in preparation may start after the preceding start notice effect starts, or the advance start notice effect may start after the image moving animation in preparation starts, The image moving animation in preparation may start at the timing when the preceding start notice effect starts. Further, the ninja character NJ4 shown in FIG. 206 (f) overlaps with the second image RDY2 being prepared, but may be overlapped with the second image RDY2 being prepared.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 206 (g), the pending change animation is started, and the ninja character NJ4 throws a shuriken toward the change icon h0 and hits the change icon h0. Has been. At this time, the entire variation icon h0 is covered by the effect EF4, and the state is difficult to visually recognize compared to the state where the effect EF4 is not covered.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 206 (h), as a result of the pending change animation, the change icon h0 changes from the default display form to a red display form, and the change notice is started.

  FIG. 206 (i) shows a state in which “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and then the state shifts to super reach (swordsman reach). Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. "Decoration 4" forming a reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen. The number-of-receptions display 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are deleted at the timing of transition to super reach. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an effect display (super reach transition display) for shifting to the super reach is performed, and the family crest character 224E rises and rotates to lower the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It overlaps with the front side. Therefore, it is difficult to visually recognize the fluctuation icon h0 and some of the hold icons (for example, the hold icon h11) by being overlapped by the family crest member 224E. The family crest character 224E also overlaps a part of the second image RDY2 in preparation. It is informed that the movement to the super reach is caused by the rising / rotating operation of the family crest member 224E. Further, in this effect example, after the super reach transition display is started, the UI unit UI3 is framed downward together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display unit TT1, and is not displayed.

  FIG. 206 (j) shows a state in which the swordsman reach is started. In addition, when shifting to the swordsman reach, the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, but the display of the change icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. The tutorial display unit TT1 is not displayed together with the UI unit UI3, but the display of the second preparing image RDY2 is continuously maintained. The family crest member 224E is moved downward and returned to the initial position.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 206 (k), the second preliminary image RDY2 is switched to the timer warning display, and the timer warning effect is started. The timer notice display has a golden background color, indicating that the reliability of the jackpot is improved. In FIG. 206 (k), the timer display in the timer notice display indicates “10:00”, and it is notified that a notice notice may be displayed 10 seconds after the countdown is restarted. Has been. Note that the timer notice display is a default display mode at the start of display, and there is a case where a promotion display such as a change to a golden background color is performed after the display is started (for example, after the countdown is started). Also good.

  Thereafter, the timer display countdown in the timer notice display starts, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 206 (l) shows that the timer display is “0:00” and the countdown is completed.

  When the countdown of the timer display is completed, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 206 (m) displays the letters “Go” instead of the timer display, and starts a notice display. We are reporting.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 206 (n), an iron plate image TP as a notice display is displayed to notify that the jackpot is confirmed. That is, it can be said that the timer notice effect corresponding to the second preparation image RDY2 corresponds to the notice display of the iron plate image TP as a certain notice display. In this production example, after one of the plurality of images in preparation is digested, a new image in preparation is not displayed, but after one of the plurality of images in preparation is digested, a new preparation is performed. A middle image may be displayed.

  FIG. 207 is a diagram showing step-by-step examples of effects by explanation display applicable to the present embodiment. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 207 (a1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 207 (a2), the explanation display in the tutorial display section TT1 is changed from “Panda is Tono-sama's master” to “Tosama is Yatsushiro general”. . In this effect example, when the explanation display in the tutorial display section TT1 is switched, the above-described opening / closing display by the shutter image is not performed, but is performed by the switching display between the explanation displays. In this effect example, in one symbol variation display, when the explanation display is switched, the opening / closing display by the shutter image is not performed and the switching display between the explanation displays is performed.

  FIG. 207 (b1) to FIG. 207 (b3) illustrate a state in which opening / closing display is performed using a shutter image when the explanation display is switched. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 207 (b1) to (b2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 193 (a) to (b), the description thereof will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 207 (b3), the shutter image is opened before the tutorial display portion TT1 based on the shutter image is completely closed, and an explanation display of “Tosama is Yatsushiro Shogun” is displayed. The state of being done is shown. That is, it is shown that the open / close display by the shutter image is not a precursor display in which a preview display is performed, but a false precursor display. Here, the shutter image may be opened after the tutorial display unit TT1 is completely closed by the shutter image. Although it was expected that the notice display would be started by such an effect, the display of the shutter image could be opened and closed by disappointing the player because the explanation display was made without the notice display being started. You may be able to have expectations.

  FIG. 208 is a diagram showing, in a stepwise manner, another example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment. FIGS. 208 (a1) to (a3) show another example of effects following FIG. 193 (e). 208 (a1) to FIG. 208 (a2) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 193 (f) to FIG.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 208 (a3), the effect EF4 is deleted, but the display mode of the first hold icon h11 remains the default display mode. . As described above, a failure effect in which the display mode does not change even when the pending change animation described above with reference to FIG. 193 may be performed. A plurality of types of characters appearing in the pending change animation may be prepared, and the rate at which the display mode of the pending icon changes varies depending on the characters appearing in the pending change animation.

  In the above-described pending change animation, the ninja character NJ4 is displayed overlapping the UI part UI3. For example, as shown in FIG. 208 (b1), the ninja character NJ4 is displayed above the UI part UI3. The portion UI3 may not overlap. In this case, in the pending change animation, the ninja character NJ4 may or may not overlap the UI part UI3.

  FIG. 209 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 209 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variation icon h0 placed on the pedestal at the center thereof. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 209 (a1), since one variable display of FIG. 1 is held, one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 and the hold icon h11 are both in the default display mode. Also, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 209 (a1), “Panda is a master of lord” is displayed, and the panda character And the relationship between Tono-sama's character. In this example effect, the decorative symbol is moved above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and displayed in a reduced size. In addition, the UI unit UI3 illustrated in FIG. 209 (a1) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 209 (a1), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. The second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

  In addition, a family crest character 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and an eight-generation character 224Fa, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is arranged above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. And a general character 224Fb are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 209 (a2), a state in which a roulette effect as a mini game is started is shown. In this roulette effect, a circular roulette wheel RR is divided into three equal sections. A cocoon region is arranged above the three sections, a princess region is arranged at the lower left, and a little princess region is arranged at the lower right. When the roulette effect is started, each region is displayed in a flashing manner by blinking in red, and a notice display corresponding to the region that is finally lit in red is prepared. It should be noted that the symbol variation display at which the roulette effect starts and the symbol variation display at which the preparation-in-progress display or the like ends may be the same or different. In a configuration in which a display indicating that the roulette effect is started is performed, the symbol variation display in which the display is performed may be the same as the symbol variation display in which the preparation in progress display or the like ends. There may be. By the combination of the above description, the display can be referred to as a pre-reading notice display.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 209 (a3), a state in which all the regions are lit in red as a result of the variable display of the roulette effect is shown. That is, it is informed that a notice display corresponding to the character of the samurai, a notice display corresponding to the princess character, and a notice display corresponding to the princess Chibi character are prepared.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 209 (a4), the first preparing image RDY1 is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 with the princess character HME added to the upper right portion thereof, and is displayed on the upper left of the display screen. Is displayed such that the third preparing image RDY3 is adjacent to the frog character GII, and the Chibi princess character CHM is displayed below the third preparing image RDY3. That is, when a character is caused to appear, each character appears at a position corresponding to the character, and when a preparatory image is displayed, the character is displayed at a position corresponding to the character. It can also be said that the appearing character itself may correspond to the image being prepared. Further, the relationship between the appearing character and the effect to be executed may be 1: 1 or 1: N (N> 1). In addition, a certain effect may be executed by digesting a plurality of characters (the relationship between the character and the effect may be N (N> 1): 1).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 209 (a5), the Chibi princess character CHM moves upward and overlaps the lower left corner of the third preparing image RDY3. That is, it can be said that a certain notice display overlaps with another notice display. Thereby, it is informed that the notice display corresponding to the character CHM of Chibi princess starts.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 209 (a6), a state is shown in which an animation in which the Princess Chibi character CHM casts an object toward the variation icon h0 is performed. When the object reaches the fluctuation icon h0, the effect EF7 is displayed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is difficult to view. That is, the notice display corresponding to the princess Chibi character CMH is a notice display by changing the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 209 (a7), the effect EF7 is deleted, and the change icon h0 is easily visible. At this time, the display mode of the change icon h0 is changed from the default display mode to the red display mode, and a state in which the change notice by the change icon h0 is started is shown.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 209 (a8), display is started in a manner in which the frog character GII vibrates. Thereby, it is notified that the notice display corresponding to the character GII of the heel starts.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 209 (a9), a state is shown in which the mini game is started in the area where the third image RDY3 being prepared arranged adjacent to the spear character GII is displayed. Has been. When the mini game is started, the cylindrical drum DRM extending in the horizontal direction starts to rotate with the horizontal direction as a rotation axis. A plurality of symbols (identification information) are displayed on the surface of the drum DRM, and the success or failure of the mini game is displayed by the identification information displayed when the drum DRM is stopped and displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 209 (a10), the drum DRM is stopped and the symbol with the characters “Intense heat” is derived, which suggests that there is a high possibility of a big hit. Yes. In other words, the change notice is made by deriving the characters “Intense Heat” from the drum DRM. It can be said that this effect is not an effect that changes the display mode of something, but an effect that makes a big hit announcement.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 209 (a11), display in a manner in which the princess character HME vibrates is started. Thereby, it is notified that the notice display corresponding to the princess character HME starts. Since the princess character HME is displayed overlapping the UI part UI3, the display of the UI part UI3 may be noticed by the vibration display of the princess character HME.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 209 (a12), a state in which the timer notice effect is started is shown in the area where the first image RDY1 in preparation is displayed. The notice display corresponding to the princess character HME is a timer notice effect. When the timer notice effect is started, a timer display is displayed in the area where the first image RDY1 being prepared is displayed, and then the countdown starts. When the result of the countdown is “0:00”, a certain notice display is started. In the effect example shown in FIG. 209 (a12), “30:00” is displayed as the timer display, and then the countdown is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 209 (a13), as a result of the countdown, the timer display is “0:00” and the countdown is completed. Then, the princess character HME ascends and moves to a position different from the first preparing image RDY1 to notify that the notice display corresponding to the timer notice effect is started. That is, it can be said that an effect similar to the display of “Go” shown in FIG. 206 (m) is performed.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 209 (a14), a super reach transition display is performed, and a state of developing into a super reach (swordsman reach) is shown. The notice display corresponding to the princess character HME corresponds to the development to the swordsman reach. Although not shown, the family crest member 224E rises and rotates and overlaps the front side of the lower center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, in this effect example, the background color of the super reach transition display is gold, and it is reported that the reliability of the big hit is high. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 is not displayed because the countdown by the timer display is completed. Further, after the super reach transition display is started, the UI part UI3 is framed downward together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display part TT1, and is not displayed.

  In this production example, all the images in preparation are digested before the development of super reach. However, at least one image may be digested after the development of super reach. For example, an iron plate image TP is displayed. A mini game or a timer notice effect may be performed.

  FIG. 209 (b1) shows a state in which only the eyelid region of the three regions is lit in red in the roulette effect described above with reference to FIG. 209 (a2). In other words, only the notice display corresponding to the frog character is prepared among the notice display corresponding to the character of the samurai, the notice display corresponding to the princess character, and the notice display corresponding to the princess Chibi character. Informed.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 209 (b2), the third preparing image RDY3 is displayed so that the character GII of the heel is adjacent. In other words, a spear character GII appears at a position corresponding to the spear character GII, and an image that is being prepared to appear along with the spear character GII is also displayed at a position adjacent to the spear character GII. Therefore, in this effect example, only a mini game by the drum DRM is performed.

  FIG. 210 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment.

  The effect shown in FIG. 210 (a1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 209 (a3). However, “× 2” is displayed in the area of Princess Chibi, and a notice display corresponding to the character CHM of Princess Chibi is displayed. It will be prepared twice.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 210 (a2), the first preparing image RDY1 is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 with the princess character HME added to the upper right portion thereof, and is displayed on the upper left of the display screen. Is displayed such that the third preparing image RDY3 is adjacent to the frog character GII, and below the third preparing image RDY3, two Chibi princess characters CHM1 and CHM2 are displayed. Note that when a plurality of effects by the samurai character GII and the princess character HME are prepared, for example, two identical characters can be displayed on one image being prepared. Specifically, when a plurality of effects by the princess character HME are prepared, this can be realized by displaying one first preparing image RDY1 and displaying two princess characters HME. Conversely, a single character may be used to display a plurality of images being prepared.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 210 (a3), one of the two Chibi princess characters CHM1 moves upward and appears in the lower left corner of the third preparing image RDY3. The overlapping state is shown. Thereby, it is notified that the first notice display of the two notice displays corresponding to the princess Chibi character CHM1 starts.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 210 (a4), a state is shown in which an animation is performed in which the Princess Chibi character CHM1 casts an object toward the variation icon h0. When the object reaches the fluctuation icon h0, the effect EF7 is displayed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is difficult to view. That is, it is notified that the notice display is started due to the change in the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 corresponding to the character CMH1 of the princess Chibi.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 210 (a5), the effect EF7 is deleted, and the change icon h0 is easily visible. At this time, the display mode of the change icon h0 is changed from the default display mode to the red display mode, and a state in which the change notice by the change icon h0 is started is shown.

  Furthermore, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 210 (a6), the other Chibi princess character CHM2 of the two Chibi princess characters moves upward, and the lower left corner of the third preparing image RDY3. It shows how it overlaps with the part. Thereby, it is informed that the second notice display corresponding to Princess Chibi character CHM2 starts.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 210 (a7), a state is shown in which an animation is performed in which the princess Chibi character CHM2 casts an object toward the variation icon h0. When the object reaches the fluctuation icon h0, the effect EF7 is displayed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is difficult to view. That is, it is notified that the notice display by the variation icon is ranked up due to the change in the display mode of the variation icon h0 corresponding to the princess Chibi character CMH2.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 210 (a8), the effect EF7 is erased and the change icon h0 is easily visible. At this time, the display mode of the change icon h0 is changed from the display mode of the red notice to the display form of the gold notice, and the change notice by the change icon h0 is ranked up.

  FIG. 210 (b1) to FIG. 210 (b4) show another effect example following FIG. 210 (a3). The effect shown in FIG. 210 (b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 210 (b2), after the object cast by the Princess Chibi character CHM1 reaches the variation icon h0 and the effect EF7 is displayed, the dark display BL in which the entire display screen is darkened is displayed. The portion where the effect EF7 was displayed shines in white, and the display in such a manner that the light extends horizontally from there is performed. At this time, the first preparing image RDY1 and the second preparing image RDY3 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L are not displayed. In addition, when another mini game is started while the change display of the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is being performed, the mini game is also temporarily hidden due to the darkness of the display screen. It may be. Further, when a plurality of images in preparation are displayed, all the images in preparation may be temporarily hidden, or only some images in preparation are temporarily hidden. You may make it do. As described above, the state where the dark display BL is displayed may be referred to as a fourth state. In this production example, the first state where the hold icon is displayed together with the UI part UI3 and the second state where the hold icon is hidden together with the UI part UI3 are referred to as the first state. From the state to the fourth state, it may be the second state after becoming the first state again, may be the second state from the first state, There may be a case where the first state changes to the fourth state and then the second state.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 210 (b3), the state where the light of the portion where the effect EF7 is displayed is displayed in an enlarged manner.

  Thereafter, when the dark display is completed, as shown in FIG. 210 (b4), the change icon h0 is changed from the default display mode to the red display mode, and the effect is resumed. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 210 (b4) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 210 (a5), and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 210 (c1) to FIG. 210 (c3) show another example of effects following FIG. 209 (a6). Note that the effect shown in FIG. 210 (c1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 210 (c2), display is started in a manner in which the character GII of the heel vibrates, and “Go” is displayed in the area where the third image RDY3 being prepared is displayed. A character is displayed to notify that a mini game is started. It should be noted that the display of “Go” may start after the heel character GII starts vibrating, or the heel character GII may start vibrating after the display of “Go” starts. The display of “Go” may be started at the timing when the samurai character GII starts to vibrate. Thereby, it is notified that the notice display corresponding to the character GII of the heel starts.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 210 (c3) shows that the mini game is started in the area where the third image RDY3 being prepared arranged adjacent to the frog character GII is displayed. Has been. In this effect example, when the mini game is started, the region where the third image RDY3 being prepared is displayed is enlarged and moved to the approximate center of the display screen, and the effect due to the rotation of the drum DRM is started. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the area where the mini game is performed is performed in an area different from the area where the image being prepared is displayed. It should be noted that the case where the mini game is started after “Go” is displayed may be more likely to be a big hit than the case where the mini game is started without displaying “Go”. . Further, it may be more likely that the mini game will be a big hit than the case where the mini game is enlarged and displayed. Note that the display from the display of the image being prepared to the start of the mini game, the timer notice effect, or the like may be performed in another area. When the third display and a certain notice display (a certain effect) are performed in the same region, the place where the first display and the second display are performed is different, so the display of the third display system is easier to understand. There may be an effect.

  FIG. 211 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment. Here, the display device (display device 1) on which the left effect display is performed and the display device (display device 2) on the right effect display may be separate display devices. In that case, a third display (a certain notice display) may be made on the display device 2.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 211 (a), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variation icon h0 placed on the pedestal at the center thereof. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 211 (a), since one variable display in FIG. 1 is held, one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 has a red display mode and is the display mode of the change notice, but the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and the preparing image RDY is displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 211 (a). In this example effect, the decorative symbol is moved above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and displayed in a reduced size. In addition, the UI unit UI3 illustrated in FIG. 211A is in a default display form displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 211 (a), “Castle Town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. The second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

  Further, a family crest member 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and emits red light in accordance with the display color of the variation icon h0. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an Yatsushiro character 224Fa and a general character 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 211 (b), a multi-chance up notice is started. When the multi-chance up notice is started, the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is divided into left and right parts, and a left notice display area CUL and a right notice display area CUR are formed. In the left-hand notice display area CUL, “Chibi princess is in SP reach with annihilation” is displayed, and Chibi princess Musou directing is performed with the mission of annihilating a large number of children. In the display area CUR, “Tono is going to SP reach with victory” is displayed, and the drinking comparison is performed between the niece and Tono-sama and the mission is that Ton-sama wins the drinking comparison. In this production example, it is configured to shift to Super Reach when at least one of the missions in the Chibi Hime Musou production and the drinking comparison production is achieved, and the reliability increases when both missions are achieved. Has been. In addition, after the Chibi Hime Musou production is started, the drinking comparison production may be started, after the Drinking Comparison production is started, the Chibi Hime Musou production may be started, or both productions start simultaneously May be. Further, in this production example, when at least one of the mission in the Chibi Hime Musou production and the mission in the drinking comparison production is achieved, it may be a big hit.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 211 (c), a state in which a mini game is started in the tutorial display area TT1 is shown during the execution of both the Chibi Hime Musou effect and the drink comparison effect. Yes. When the mini game is started, Tono-sama's mini character MC1 and target TGT are displayed. The target TGT is composed of areas divided into four equal parts, and the upper area of the four areas is the winning area, and a chance-up notice is given when an arrow hits the winning area. It has come to be. Note that the number of hit areas is not limited to one, and there may be a plurality of hit areas, the entire area may be hit, or the entire area may be a non-hit area.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 211 (d) shows a state in which the arrow emitted by the Tono-sama mini character MC1 is stuck in the area hitting the target TGT. That is, a state in which a mini game as a notice display is successful is shown.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 211 (e), the chance-up cut-in image WCI on which the character “chance” is displayed is displayed in the left-hand notice display area CUL in which the Chibi princess Musou effect is performed. Thus, it is notified that the mission in the Chibi Hime Musou production corresponding to the area where the chance-up cut-in image WCI is displayed has been easily achieved. As described above, in this effect example, the area in which the image RDY being prepared is displayed and the area in which the notice display is performed do not coincide with each other, and it may be possible to improve the interest by giving the player a sense of incongruity. . The chance up cut-in image WCI may be displayed in the right side notice display area CUR where the drinking comparison effect is performed, or the chance is increased in both the left side notice display area CUL and the right side notice display area CUR. A cut-in image WUI may be displayed. Note that the tutorial display section TT1 is not displayed when the mini game is completed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 211 (f), a state is shown in which the child is completely annihilated and the mission is achieved in the Chibi Hime Musou effect displayed in the left notice display area CUL.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 211 (g), the character “completely annihilated” is displayed along with the display of Princess Chibi in the left-hand notice display area CUL, and the mission of the Princess Chibi Musou effect is achieved. Is informed. In the right notice display area CUR, the drinking comparison effect continues.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 211 (h), the state is shown in which the mission has been achieved because Tono-sama won the bowl in the drinking comparison effect displayed in the right notice display area CUR.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 211 (i), the word “Victory” is displayed together with the display of Tono-sama in the right notice display area CUR to notify that the mission in the drinking comparison effect has been achieved. Has been.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 211 (j) shows a state in which the swordsman reach is started. In addition, when shifting to the swordsman reach, the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, but the display of the change icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. In this production example, the swordsman reach was started because the mission in the drinking comparison production was achieved, and the mission in the Chibi Hime Musou production was achieved, so Princess Chibi appeared as a friend of Tonama. In addition, if the mission in the drinking comparison production is achieved and the mission in the Chibi Hime Musou production fails, it shifts to Swordsman Reach, but Princess Chibi does not appear, the mission in the Chibi Hime Musou production is achieved, and the drinking comparison production If you fail to complete the mission, move to Super Reach for Princess Chibi. That is, in this effect, the contents of the effect to be developed afterwards differ depending on the success or failure of the two missions.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 211 (k), a princess cut-in image HCI in which a “chance” character and a princess character are displayed is displayed on a background of horizontal stripes. As a result, although the reliability of the jackpot is improved, it is suggested that the reliability is not so high because it is not a notice display started via a mini-game or timer notice effect that was started from the image RDY being prepared. ing.

  FIG. 212 is a diagram showing another effect example of the effect shown in FIG. 211 in stages. The effects shown in FIGS. 212 (a) to 212 (b) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 211 (a) to 211 (b), and thus description thereof is omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 212 (c), a state is shown in which both the Chibi Hime Musou effect and the drink comparison effect are performed. In this effect example, the display of the image RDY in preparation is continued, and the mini game has not yet started. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the notice display corresponding to the image RDY being prepared is not started before the transition to super reach. This effect continues from FIG. 212 (c) to FIG. In FIG. 212 (e), the chance-up cut-in image WCI corresponding to the success of the mini game is not displayed. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 212 (f) to (j) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 212 (f) to (j) are that the image RDY being prepared is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 with respect to the effects shown in FIGS. 211 (f) to (j). Since it is the same except for it, description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 212 (k), the image RDY being prepared is overlapped with the effect EF5, the display of the image RDY being prepared is terminated, and a notice display corresponding to the image RDY being prepared is displayed. It is informed that it will start.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 212 (l), a state is shown in which a mini game is started in the area where the image RDY being prepared is displayed. When the mini game is started, Tono-sama's mini character MC1 and target TGT are displayed. The target TGT is composed of areas divided into four equal parts, and the upper area of the four areas is the winning area, and a chance-up notice is given when an arrow hits the winning area. It has come to be. Note that the number of hit areas is not limited to one, and there may be a plurality of hit areas, the entire area may be hit, or the entire area may be a non-hit area.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 212 (m), a state in which an arrow emitted by the Tono-sama mini character MC1 is stuck in the area hitting the target TGT is shown. That is, a state in which a mini game as a notice display is successful is shown.

  Then, the iron plate image TP is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 212 (n). This iron plate image TP is a notice display for notifying that the big hit is confirmed. Thus, in this production example, the mini game is started after the transition to the super reach, and the reliability is higher than the case where the mini game is started and the corresponding notice is displayed before the transition to the super reach. There is a high notice display.

  FIG. 213 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 213 (a1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 209 (a1), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 213 (a2), a “reach when caught” display is performed, and a state in which a chase effect with the mission that Tono-sama catches Echigoya is started is shown. Yes. When the chase effect is started, the sub-window WP3 appears in the upper right part of the display screen, and the display related to the variable display of the decorative symbols displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 213 (a1) (main display). Is displayed. As described above, in this effect example, there is a case where the state of the symbol variation display can be grasped in the background before a certain effect is executed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 213 (a3), the state that Tono-sama is close to Echigoya is shown. On the other hand, in the sub-window WP3, the main display is continuously performed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 213 (a4), Tono-sama captured Echigo-ya and the mission was achieved. Thereby, it will be notified that it will reach. At this time, the image RDY being prepared may be displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 to indicate that the reach is being prepared. Thereby, by displaying the notice display corresponding to the result of the mission (mini game) in stock, it may be possible for the player to easily recognize that the reach as the notice display occurs.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 213 (a5), the chasing effect is ended, and the main display displayed in the sub-window WP3 is displayed again on the entire display screen, and then the “decoration 4” is reached. The situation is shown. In this production example, it is indicated that the reach has occurred due to the success of the mission in the chase production. In addition, when displaying the main display in full screen, it may be performed by enlarging the subwindow WP3 (wipe display), or may be switched and displayed. Further, when the main display becomes a full screen display, the image RDY in preparation may be displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1.

  FIGS. 213 (b1) to (b2) show another effect example related to the display of the subwindow during the execution of the chasing effects shown in FIGS. 213 (a1) to (a5).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 213 (b1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variation icon h0 placed on the pedestal in the center thereof. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 213 (b1), since one variable display of FIG. 1 is held, one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the fluctuation icon h0 has a red display mode and is the display mode of the notice, but the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 213 (b1), a first preparing image RDY1 is displayed. Further, the third image RDY3 being prepared is displayed in the upper left part of the display screen. In this example effect, the decorative symbol is moved above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and displayed in a reduced size. Further, the UI unit UI3 illustrated in FIG. 213 (b1) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 211 (a), “Castle Town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. The second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

  Further, a family crest member 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and emits red light in accordance with the display color of the variation icon h0. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an Yatsushiro character 224Fa and a general character 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 213 (b2), the chasing effect described above is started. When the chase effect is started, the sub-window WP3 appears in the upper right part of the display screen, and the display related to the variable display of the decorative symbols displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 213 (b1) (main display). Is displayed. The first preparing image RDY1 and the third preparing image RDY3 are continuously displayed without changing the display position. In this case, only the first image RDY1 displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 of the two images RDY1 and RDY3 is displayed on the subwindow WP3 in the subwindow WP3, and the third image RDY3 is prepared. Is not displayed in the sub-window WP3. As described above, even in this effect example, there are cases where the state of the symbol variation display can be grasped in the background before a certain effect (chasing effect) is executed. In this effect example, the sub window WP3 and the image being prepared are displayed at positions that do not overlap each other, but the image being prepared may overlap the sub window WP3 and the image being prepared may overlap the sub window WP3. You may make it overlap.

  FIGS. 213 (c1) to (c2) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 213 (b1) to (b2). Note that the effect shown in FIG. 213 (c1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 213 (b1), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 213 (c2), the chasing effect described above is started. When the chase effect is started, the sub-window WP3 appears in the upper right part of the display screen, and the display related to the variable display of the decorative symbols displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 213 (c1) (main display). Is displayed. In this production example, among the first preparing image RDY1 and the third preparing image RDY3, the third preparing image RDY3 is continuously displayed without changing the display position, but the first preparing image RDY1 is displayed only in the subwindow WP3 as the main display is displayed in the subwindow WP3, and the first image RDY1 displayed at the position where it has been displayed is deleted.

  FIG. 213 (d1) to FIG. 213 (d2) show the display mode of the image being prepared when the background display is tilted. Note that the effect example shown in FIG. 213 (d1) is the same as the effect example shown in FIG.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 213 (d2), the background display is reduced to about 3/4 and a shake vision effect is performed in which the reduced background image is tilted about 10 degrees counterclockwise. The situation is shown. In this case, the in-preparation image RDY displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is maintained in the display state without changing the display mode or the display position. That is, it is shown that the image RDY being prepared does not tilt with the background display.

  FIG. 214 is a diagram showing step by step an example of a step-up notice effect applicable to this embodiment. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 214 (a1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 209 (a1), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 214 (a2), a state is shown in which the first step-up display unit SUA rises from below the UI unit UI3 and is lifted to display the UI unit UI3. Yes. Specifically, the first step-up display unit SUA has the same width as the UI unit UI3, and a character “A” indicating that it is the first stage of the step-up notice is displayed on the left side. A mini game display area for performing a mini game as a step-up notice is formed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 214 (a3), a state in which a mini game is started in the mini game display area is shown. When the mini-game is started, “Striking” is displayed in the mini-game display area, and a display indicating that the Tono-sama character throws a bowling ball is performed. In other words, this mini game is a bowling chance game whose mission is to take a strike in a bowling game.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 214 (a4), the Tono-like character throws a bowling ball and faces the ten pins arranged in a pyramid shape.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 214 (a5), the bowling ball collides with the pins, and all the ten pins fall down to strike and the mission is achieved. .

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 214 (a6), the preparing image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1, and it is notified that the corresponding mini game or timer notice effect is started. . Note that the image RDY in preparation has a green background color and is in a default display mode.

  When the bowling chance game is over, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 214 (a7), the first step-up display unit SUA moves downward and out of the frame, and the UI unit UI3 returns to the default position.

  FIG. 214 (b1) to FIG. 214 (b8) describe another example of the step-up notice. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 214 (b1) to (b2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 214 (a1) to (a2), the description thereof is omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 214 (b3), the second step-up display unit SUB rises from below the first step-up display unit SUA, and lifts the UI unit UI3 and the first step-up display unit SUA. In this way, the display is shown. Specifically, the second step-up display unit SUB has the same width as the UI unit UI3, and the letter “B” indicating the second stage of the step-up notice is displayed on the left side. A mini game display area for performing a mini game as a step-up notice is formed. In this production example, it is easier for the mission to succeed when the mini game is played on the second step-up display unit SUB than when the mini game is played on the first step-up display unit SUA. In addition, when the mini game succeeds in the second step-up display unit SUB, the big hit symbol is likely to be finally determined and displayed, rather than in the case where the mini game succeeds in the first step-up display unit SUA.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 214 (b4), a state in which a mini game is started in the mini game display area is shown. When the mini game is started, the message “Cup in” is displayed in the mini game display area, and a display indicating that the character of Tono is putting is performed. In other words, this mini game is a golf game whose mission is to cup in with a pad.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 214 (b5), the state where the Tono-sama character puts and the golf ball moves toward the cup is shown.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 214 (b6), the state where the golf ball is cupped in and the mission is achieved is shown.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 214 (b7), the preparing image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1, and it is notified that the corresponding mini game or timer notice effect is started. . It is reported that the image RDY in preparation has a red background color and high reliability of the big hit.

  When the bowling chance game ends, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 214 (b8), the first step-up display unit SUA and the second step-up display unit SUB move downward and out of the frame, and the UI unit UI3 returns to the default position.

  In this example, the example of success in the bowling chance game and the golf game has been described. For example, in the bowling chance game, a message indicating that the pins have not collapsed is displayed to notify the mission failure. Alternatively, in the golf game, a mission failure may be notified by displaying a state in which the player has not cuped in. Also, in this production example, the Tono-sama character appeared in the bowling chance game and the golf game, but other characters may appear. For example, when a princess character appears, the Tono-sama character appeared. It may be suggested that the reliability of the jackpot is higher than the case.

  FIG. 215 is a diagram for describing another example of the step-up notice effect shown in FIG. 214. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 215 (a1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 214 (a1), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 215 (a2), a state is shown in which the first step-up display unit SUA rises from below the UI unit UI3 and is lifted to display the UI unit UI3. Yes. At this time, the explanation display and the change icon h0 displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 are deleted. That is, in this effect example, when the first step-up display unit SUA appears, a state in which a certain item in the UI unit UI3 is hidden is shown. The explanation display may be deleted after the first step-up display unit SUA starts displaying, the first step-up display unit SUA may be displayed after the explanation display is erased, The explanation display may be deleted at the timing when the one-step-up display unit SUA starts to be displayed. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 215 (a3) to (a5) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 215 (a3) to (a5) are not shown on the tutorial display section TT1, and the effects shown in FIGS. 214 (a3) to (a5). The description is omitted because it is the same except that the fluctuation icon h0 is not displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 215 (a6), it is continuously shown that the mission has been achieved.

  When the bowling chance game is over, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 215 (a7), the first step-up display unit SUA moves downward and out of the frame, and the UI unit UI3 returns to the default position. Note that the explanation display and the change icon h0 remain hidden.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 215 (a8), a state is shown in which the variation icon h0 is redisplayed in a red display mode. That is, it is shown that the change icon h0 is changed to the display mode of the change notice and redisplayed. Note that the image RDY being prepared may be displayed before the display mode of the variation icon h0 is changed and redisplayed, and may be routed through a mini game, a timer notice effect, or the like.

  215 (b1) to FIG. 215 (b3) show other display modes of the step-up notice effect. The effect shown in FIG. 215 (b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 215 (a1), but differs in that the four pedestals in the hold icon display area are not displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 215 (b2), a state is shown in which the first step-up display unit SUA rises from below the UI unit UI3 and is displayed so as to lift the UI unit UI3. Yes. At this time, the explanation display and the change icon h0 displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 are deleted. Further, in this effect example, the display position is not changed in spite of the hold icon h11 moving upward in the UI part UI3. Therefore, the hold icon h11 overlaps the mini game display area of the first step-up display part SUA. The situation is shown. That is, when the first step-up display unit SUA appears, it can be said that a certain display (hold icon h11) does not move even if the UI unit UI3 moves.

  FIG. 215 (b3) The first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the bowling chance game is started in the mini game display area. As described above, since the hold icon h11 overlaps the mini game display area, a part of the character display of “Make Strike” is hidden. That is, it can be said that a part of the mini game is hidden by the hold icon h11.

  FIG. 216 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the step-up notice effect applicable to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 216 (a), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variation icon h0 placed on the pedestal at the center thereof. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 216 (a), one variable display in FIG. 1 is held, so one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 has a red display mode and is the display mode of the change notice, but the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and is not displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 216 (a). Note that the UI unit UI3 illustrated in FIG. 216 (a) has a default display mode displayed in blue. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 216 (a), the state of transition to super reach (swordsman reach) is shown. Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. "Decoration 4" forming a reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen. Thereby, it may be possible to easily recognize that the “decoration 4” is in the reach state. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an effect display (super reach transition display) for shifting to the super reach is performed, and the family crest character 224E rises and rotates to lower the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It overlaps with the front side. Therefore, it is difficult to visually recognize the fluctuation icon h0 and some of the hold icons (for example, the hold icon h11) by being overlapped by the family crest member 224E. The family crest character 224E also overlaps a part of the tutorial display portion TT1. It is informed that the movement to the super reach is caused by the rising / rotating operation of the family crest member 224E.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 216 (a), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

Further, the family crest member 224E emits red light in accordance with the display color of the variation icon h0. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an Yatsushiro character 224Fa and a general character 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged.
FIG. 216 (b) shows a state in which the crest character 224E has returned to the initial position.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 216 (c), a state is shown in which an animation (UI part FO animation) in which the UI part UI3 is framed out below the display screen is started. When the UI part FO animation is started, the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area is deleted.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 216 (d) to FIG. 216 (f), the UI unit UI3 frames out by the UI unit FO animation. At this time, the change icon h0 is not out of frame with the UI unit UI3, and the display state is maintained with the display position lowered as shown in FIG. 216 (f).
FIG. 216 (g) shows a state in which the swordsman reach is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 216 (h), the first step-up display unit SUA is lifted up and displayed so as to lift the variation icon h0. That is, in this production example, since the UI part UI3 is not displayed, there is nothing to lift, but the variation icon h0 is displayed, so that only the variation icon h0 is moving. Can do.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 216 (i) shows a state in which the above-described bowling chance game as a mini game is started in the mini game display area. When the bowling chance game is started, the message “Strike Strike” is displayed in the mini game display area, and a display showing how the Tono-sama character throws a bowling ball is displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 216 (j), the state that the Tono-like character throws a bowling ball toward the ten pins arranged in a pyramid shape is shown.

  After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 216 (k), the bowling ball collides with the pins, and all the ten pins fall down to strike and the mission is achieved. .

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 216 (l), it is notified that the image RDY being prepared appears in the lower right corner of the display screen and the corresponding mini game or timer notice effect is started. Is done. Note that the image RDY in preparation has a green background color and is in a default display mode. FIG. 216 (l) shows a state in which the first step-up display unit SUA moves downward and out of the frame. At this time, the image RDY in preparation is overlapped with the first step-up display unit SUA, and as shown in FIG. The part is difficult to see.

  FIG. 217 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the step-up notice effect applicable to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 217 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variation icon h0 placed on the pedestal at the center thereof. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 217 (a1), since one variable display in FIG. 1 is held, one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the fluctuation icon h0 has a red display mode and is the display mode of the notice, but the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 217 (a1), a first preparing image RDY1 is displayed. The first preparing image RDY1 has a green background color and is in a default display mode. In addition, the UI unit UI3 illustrated in FIG. 217 (a1) has a default display mode displayed in blue. In addition, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 217 (a1) shows a state of transition to super reach (swordsman reach). Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. "Decoration 4" forming a reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen. Thereby, it may be possible to easily recognize that the “decoration 4” is in the reach state. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an effect display (super reach transition display) for shifting to the super reach is performed, and the family crest character 224E rises and rotates to lower the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It overlaps with the front side. Therefore, it is difficult to visually recognize the fluctuation icon h0 and some of the hold icons (for example, the hold icon h11) by being overlapped by the family crest member 224E. The family crest character 224E also overlaps a part of the tutorial display portion TT1. It is informed that the movement to the super reach is caused by the rising / rotating operation of the family crest member 224E. In this production example, an example is shown in which the first in-preparation image RDY1 is already displayed when shifting to super reach.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 217 (a1), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

  Further, the family crest member 224E emits red light in accordance with the display color of the variation icon h0. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an Yatsushiro character 224Fa and a general character 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged.

  FIG. 217 (a2) shows a state in which the crest character 224E has returned to the initial position.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 217 (a3), a state is shown in which an animation (UI part FO animation) in which the UI part UI3 is framed out below the display screen is started. When the UI part FO animation is started, the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area is deleted.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 217 (a4) to (a6), the UI unit UI3 frames out by the UI unit FO animation. At this time, the variation icon h0 and the first image RDY1 in preparation are not out of frame together with the UI unit UI3, and as illustrated in FIG. 217 (a6), the variation icon h0 is displayed in a state where the display position is lowered. The first display image RDY1 is maintained, and the display state is maintained without changing the display position.
FIG. 217 (a7) shows a state in which the swordsman reach is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 217 (a8), the first step-up display unit SUA is lifted up and displayed so as to lift the variation icon h0. That is, in this production example, since the UI part UI3 is not displayed, there is nothing to lift, but the variation icon h0 is displayed, so that only the variation icon h0 is moving. Can do. Further, the first preparing image RDY1 is displayed without overlapping the first step-up display SUA without changing the display position. Note that the first image RDY1 in preparation may be overlapped with the first step-up display SUA. The first step-up display unit SUA may be lifted, and the first preparing image RDY1 may also be moved upward.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 217 (a9) shows a state in which the above-described bowling chance game as a mini game is started in the mini game display area. When the bowling chance game is started, the message “Strike Strike” is displayed in the mini game display area, and a display showing how the Tono-sama character throws a bowling ball is displayed. However, the mini game display area of the first step-up display SUA is overlapped with the first image RDY1 being prepared, and is more difficult to see than when not overlapped. The same applies to the following effects.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 217 (a10), the Tono-like character throws a bowling ball and goes toward the ten pins arranged in a pyramid shape.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 217 (a11), the bowling ball collides with the pins, and all the ten pins fall down to strike and the mission is achieved. .

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 217 (a12), the third preparing image RDY3 appears in the upper left corner of the display screen, and the corresponding mini game or timer notice effect is started. Is notified. That is, when a certain number of images in preparation are displayed in a certain area and a new image in preparation is displayed, the new image in preparation is displayed in another area. Can do. Note that the third preparatory image RDY3 has a green background color and is in a default display mode. Further, as shown in FIGS. 217 (a12) to (a13), the first step-up display unit SUA moves downward and out of the frame.

  FIG. 217 (b1) to FIG. 217 (b2) are diagrams showing another display mode of the UI unit FO animation. Note that FIG. 217 (b1) is an effect following FIG. 217 (a3). Further, the effect shown in FIG. 213 (b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 217 (a4), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 217 (b2), the swordsman reach is started after the UI part FO animation is completed. In this production example, the UI unit UI3 is out of frame by the UI unit FO animation, but it is shown that only the pedestal on which the change icon h0 is placed is maintained in a manner in which the display position is lowered. That is, even if the UI unit UI3 is out of frame, a part of the UI unit UI3 is displayed.
FIG. 218 is a diagram showing an example of a pseudo-continuous effect applicable to the present embodiment in stages.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 218 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variation icon h0 placed on the pedestal at the center thereof. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 218 (a1), since two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are all in the default display mode. Further, a tutorial display portion TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0. In the tutorial display portion TT1 shown in FIG. 218 (a1), the image RDY being prepared is displayed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Note that the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 218 (a1) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 211 (a), “Castle Town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. The second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

  In addition, a family crest character 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and an eight-generation character 224Fa, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is arranged above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. And a general character 224Fb are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 218 (a2), the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol and the right symbol, with “decoration 6” on the left symbol and “decoration 7” on the right symbol. The state of being stopped is shown. Note that the middle symbol is being displayed in a variable manner.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 218 (a3), the middle symbol fluctuates at a low speed, and the pseudo continuous symbol composed of Tono-sama's symbols is scrolled in from the upper part of the display screen. ing.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 218 (a4), a state in which the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed on the middle symbol is shown.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 218 (a5), the pseudo-continuous symbol stop animation that produces whether or not the pseudo-ream starts is started. When the quasi-continuous symbol stop animation is started, the UI part UI3 leaves the frame by the UI part FO animation, leaving the change icon h0 and the image RDY being prepared. Here, the UI part FO animation may be started after the pseudo-continuous symbol stop animation is started, the pseudo-continuous symbol stop animation may be started after the UI part FO animation is started, or the pseudo-continuous symbol design is started. The UI part FO animation may be started at the timing when the stop animation starts. Moreover, the pseudo-continuous symbol stop animation may be started after the UI part FO animation is completed. As described above, in this production example, the UI unit UI3 is not displayed in a certain state such as when performing pseudo-continuous production or when a pseudo-series is established. When the pseudo-continuous symbol stop animation is started, the pseudo-continuous symbols expand in the horizontal direction as shown in FIGS. 218 (a5) to (a7).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 218 (a6), the pseudo-continuous symbol further expands, overlaps the left symbol and the right symbol, and the left symbol and the right symbol are difficult to visually recognize. ing.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 218 (a7), the pseudo-continuous symbol further expands, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N Is displayed. At this time, the pseudo-continuous pattern is also expanded in the vertical direction, and a part thereof is overlapped by the image RDY being prepared. The pseudo-continuous symbols are also overlapped with the stage name display portion ST1, the reception count display 850, and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device. It is also overlapped with the Tono-sama character displayed at 208N and the second reserved number display. At this time, the family crest character 224E starts to rise and overlaps a part of the pseudo-continuous pattern.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 218 (a8), the family crest member 224E rotates, and a sound “don” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that a pseudo-ream is performed.

  FIG. 218 (a9) shows a state in which the pseudo-continuous symbol stop animation is finished and the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed in the original display mode, and the UI unit UI3 is framed in by the frame-in animation (UI unit FI animation). Has been. It should be noted that the UI part FI animation may be started after the quasi-continuous symbol stop animation has ended, the UI part FI animation may be started before the quasi-continuous symbol stop animation ends, or the pseudo-continuous symbol stop animation. The UI part FI animation may be started at the timing when the animation ends. Note that the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped due to fluctuations in the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 6-pseudo-continuous symbols-decoration 7”, and then the second variation of the decorative symbols is displayed by the pseudo-ream. The

  FIG. 218 (b1) to FIG. 218 (b3) show an example of display before and after the Stechen effect performed at the time of mode transition or stage change. Since the effect shown in FIG. 218 (b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 218 (a1), the description thereof is omitted.

  In FIG. 218 (b2), the Stechen effect is started, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are dark-displayed, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L It shows a state in which the approximate center shines and light rays extend from there to the left and right. At this time, the light beam is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In this effect example, it is shown that the UI unit UI3 is not displayed during the dark display by the stechen effect. In addition, in this effect example, a state in which the image RDY being prepared is not displayed in the dark display by the stechen effect is also shown. In addition, during the dark display, the image RDY being prepared may end and a mini game or a timer notice effect may be started.

  FIG. 218 (b3) shows a state in which the stechen effect is finished. In this effect example, after the stechen effect is ended, the same display as before the start of the stechen effect is performed. That is, it is shown that it was a fake Stechen effect in which neither mode transition nor stage change was performed.

  FIG. 219 is a diagram showing an example of a button notice effect applicable to the present embodiment step by step.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 219 (a), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variation icon h0 placed on the pedestal at the center thereof. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 219 (a), since one variable display of FIG. 1 is held, one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 has a red display mode and is the display mode of the change notice, but the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. Further, a tutorial display portion TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and is not displayed in the tutorial display portion TT1 shown in FIG. 219 (a). Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 219 (a) has a notice display mode displayed in gold. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 219 (a), a state in which the swordsman reach is started is shown. Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. "Decoration 4" forming a reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen. Thereby, it may be possible to easily recognize that the “decoration 4” is in the reach state. This production example shows an example in which the UI part UI3 is displayed even during execution of the swordsman reach.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, all of the stage name display portion ST1, the reception count display 850, and the stock button image 852 are deleted, and the background display is also the background display of the swordsman reach.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 is displayed at the upper part of the display screen, but the Tono-sama character is not displayed. The background display is also the background display of Swordsman Reach.

  Further, the family crest member 224E emits red light in accordance with the display color of the variation icon h0. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an Yatsushiro character 224Fa and a general character 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 219 (b), a united animation is started, and a pair of semi-transparent button images 136q are displayed from the upper left and right of the display screen, and they approach each other while approaching each other. Is moving. Note that the operation of the effect button 136 is not yet accepted during the display of the combined animation.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 219 (c), a state immediately before the pairing of semi-transparent button images 136q comes close to each other and the combination is completed is shown. In the effect example shown in FIG. 219 (c), when the pair of semi-transparent button images 136q come close to each other, the effect EF6 overlaps at least part of the pair of semi-transparent button images 136q, rather than the state where they do not overlap. The translucent button image 136q is difficult to visually recognize. Therefore, the player may have a sense of expectation as to whether or not the combined animation is successful. FIG. 219 (c) shows that the UI unit UI3 is out of frame by the UI unit FO animation. It should be noted that the effect EF6 may be displayed after the UI unit UI3 is out of frame, the effect EF6 may be displayed before the UI unit UI3 is out of frame, or the effect at the timing when the UI unit UI3 is out of frame. EF6 may be displayed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 219 (d), the coalesced animation is successful, the deca button image 136aL is materialized, the button notice effect is started, and the remaining time meter MT is also displayed, and the operation acceptance state is displayed. It shows how it started. As described above, in this effect example, an example is shown in which the UI unit UI3 is not displayed during a period in which the button notice effect is performed by at least the button image 136a (deca button image 136aL).
FIG. 220 is a diagram showing an example of effects that can be applied to the present embodiment in stages.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 220 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variation icon h0 placed on the pedestal at the center thereof. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 220 (a1), since two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are all in the default display mode. Further, on the right side of the variation icon h0, a tutorial display part TT1 is arranged. In the tutorial display part TT1 shown in FIG. 220 (a1), “Panda is the master of the lord” is displayed, and the panda character And the relationship between Tono-sama's character. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 220 (a1), the first special symbol display device 212 is stopped and displayed as a lost symbol, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays a loss of “decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 6”. Stopped display with a combination of decorative symbols. In addition, the special figure 1 4th pattern 284a1 is also lit in a display mode of loss. In addition, UI part UI3 shown to FIG. 218 (a1) is set as the notice display aspect displayed in red.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 211 (a), “Castle Town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. The second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

  In addition, a family crest character 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and an eight-generation character 224Fa, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is arranged above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. And a general character 224Fb are arranged.

  In FIG. 220 (a2), the state in which the symbols are stopped and displayed is shown. At this time, the variation icon h0 is deleted in the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  Thereafter, when the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, the UI decorative wipe display portion WP4 that covers the entire UI portion UI3 is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 220 (a3). The Tono-sama character riding on the motorcycle enters the frame from the left side of the UI part wipe display part WP4, and as shown in FIGS. 220 (a3) to (a5), the character sprints toward the right end. . That is, in this production example, the UI unit wipe display unit WP4 is displayed in order to return the display mode of the UI unit UI3 from the preview display mode to the default display mode, and the UI unit wipe display unit WP4 displays the production. In some cases, the display mode of the UI unit UI3 can be naturally changed. For example, when the display is lost due to the super reach effect and the display is returned to the original display, the entire display screen may be covered with the wipe display unit and the effect display may be performed on the wipe display unit.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 220 (a6), the appearance by the Tono-sama character in the UI portion wipe display portion WP4 is ended, and the UI portion wipe display portion WP4 is deleted. When the UI unit wipe display unit WP4 is deleted and the UI unit UI3 is displayed, the hold icon corresponding to the display position of the first hold icon h11 is placed on the base on which the change icon is displayed and the change icon is displayed. The hold icon that was at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes h1 and becomes the first hold icon h11 and moves onto the corresponding pedestal. In the tutorial display section TT1, the display “Tosama is Yatsushiro Shogun” is displayed, and the explanation display is changed before and after the display of the UI section wipe display section WP4.

  In this example, the UI part wipe display unit WP4 may not be displayed or may be performed in the state where the image RDY being prepared is displayed. If the UI wipe display unit WP4 is displayed while the image RDY being prepared is displayed, the image RDY being prepared is not displayed during that time, and as a result, the image RDY being prepared is displayed soon. The mini-game or timer notice effect may be started after finishing.

  220 (b1) to 220 (b4) show examples of display on the tutorial display unit TT1.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 220 (b1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variation icon h0 placed on the pedestal at the center thereof. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 220 (b1), since one variable display in FIG. 1 is held, one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 is displayed in gold and is in the display mode of the change notice, but the hold icon h11 is in the default display mode. The family crest member 224E also emits light in gold according to the display color of the variation icon h0. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and is not displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 220 (b1). In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Note that the UI unit UI3 illustrated in FIG. 220 (b1) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 220 (b1), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. The second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

  In addition, a family crest character 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and an eight-generation character 224Fa, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is arranged above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. And a general character 224Fb are arranged.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 220 (b2) to (b4), in the tutorial display unit TT1, a swordsman character scrolls in from below and continuously moves his / her line of sight from the top of the head to the feet. It shows how the swordsman character is scrolled. Further, as shown in FIG. 220 (b4), after the swordsman character's feet are displayed, the swordsman character is scroll-displayed in such a manner that the line of sight is continuously moved from the feet to the top of the head. That is, a continuous scroll display between the top of the swordsman character and the feet is displayed in a reciprocating manner. In this effect example, the tutorial display unit TT1 shows an example in which the entire character is displayed by displaying a part of the character while continuously scrolling.

  In this production example, for example, when the explanation display is not resumed or when only the hold icon is hidden (the UI unit UI3 is displayed), a certain display using the UI unit UI3 is used. It can be said that an example of performing is shown.

  FIG. 221 is a diagram showing step by step another example of effects that can be applied to this embodiment. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 to which the example of production shown in FIG. 221 can be applied can be divided into, for example, a first special figure start opening and a second special figure start opening per start opening, and in a normal gaming state There are so-called MAX 8 machines (sometimes referred to as 8 storage order machines) that can hold 8 variable displays. Here, a description will be given using a MAX8 machine as an example.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 221 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variation icon h0 placed on the pedestal in the center thereof. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed on the left side of the change icon h0. Four hold icons are arranged in front and back in a staggered arrangement so that eight hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 221 (a1), a total of seven variable displays in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2 are held, and thus seven hold icons h1 to h7 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 and the hold icons h1 to h7 are all in the default display mode. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 221 (a1), “Panda is a master of the lord” is displayed and an explanation display is provided. It has been broken. In this example effect, the decorative symbol is moved above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and displayed in a reduced size. In addition, the UI unit UI3 illustrated in FIG. 221 (a1) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 221 (a1), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. The second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed. According to the second number-of-holds display, at the timing shown in FIG. 221 (a1), it is notified that four special figures 1 are held and three special figures 2 are held.

  In addition, a family crest member 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an Yatsushiro character 224Fa and a general character 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged.

  FIG. 221 (a2) shows a state in which a game ball has won a prize at the second special figure starting port, and the total number of suspensions of special figures 1 and 2 has become eight. Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, when the eighth hold icon h8 is displayed, the first hold icon h1 to the seventh hold icon h7 and the change icon h0 that are already displayed. It is shown that the display mode is changed from the default display mode to the display mode of the heel imitating the face of the heel. The UI unit UI3 also changes from the default display mode to a special display mode displayed in gold. In addition, the speaker 120 outputs a sound “pong” to notify that the hold is full. In this effect example, an example of an effect that changes the UI unit UI3, the change icon h0, and the hold icons h1 to h8 all at once when the reserve is full is shown. In this example effect, the number of symbol variation displays corresponding to the hold icon indicating the display mode of the bag may be notified.

  FIG. 221 (b1) shows a situation where a swordsman reach is being performed. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 221 (b1), the second hold number display is displayed. According to the second hold number display, the special figure 1 is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 221 (b1). It is informed that four are reserved and three special figures 2 are reserved.

  FIG. 221 (b2) shows a state in which a game ball has won a prize at the second special figure starting port, and the total number of suspensions of special figures 1 and 2 has become eight. Specifically, in the second number-of-holds display in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is notified that four special figures 1 are held, four special figures 2 are held, and the speaker 120. Will output a voice “Pong” to notify that the hold is full.

  FIG. 221 (b3) shows a situation where the super reach is lost, the swordsman reach is finished, and the display returns to the castle town stage display. Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, when the production of the swordsman reach is completed and the castle town stage is returned, the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 4” is displayed and shaken. Temporary stop display due to fluctuation is performed. In addition, since the swordsman reach became full during the performance of the swordsman reach, the UI part UI3 was changed from the default display mode to the special display mode displayed in gold, and all of the change icons h0 and the hold icons h1 to h8 Changes from the default display mode to the display mode of the bag. In this production example, when the UI unit UI3 is hidden by the super reach, the UI unit UI3, the change icon, and the hold icon are displayed when the UI unit UI3 is redisplayed. The example of the effect which changes a display mode is shown.

  FIGS. 221 (c1) to (c4) are diagrams for explaining another aspect of the effects shown in FIGS. 221 (b1) to (b3). Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 221 (c1) to (c2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 221 (b1) to (b2), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 221 (c3) shows a situation in which the super reach is lost, the swordsman reach is finished, and the display returns to the castle town stage display. Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, when the production of the swordsman reach is completed and the castle town stage is returned, the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 4” is displayed and shaken. Temporary stop display due to fluctuation is performed. Moreover, in this production example, while the execution of the production of the swordsman reach has become full, the display of the UI unit UI3, the change icon h0, and the hold icons h1 to h8 is not changed, and the full fill is achieved. A character “MAX” indicating that it has been displayed is displayed above the change icon h0. Thereafter, the symbols are fixedly displayed in a state where the display modes of the UI unit UI3, the change icon h0, and the hold icons h1 to h8 are not changed.

After that, when symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 221 (c4), the UI unit UI3 changes from the default display mode to the special display mode displayed in gold, and changes. All of the icon h0 and the hold icons h1 to h8 are changed from the default display mode to the bag display mode. Thereafter, the hold icons h1 to h8 are respectively moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h1 is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed to become the change icon h0. The hold icons at the display positions of the second hold icon h2 to the eighth hold icon h8 become the first hold icon h1 to the seventh hold icon h7, respectively, and move to the corresponding pedestals. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 221 (c4), the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the tutorial display section TT1, “Panda is the master of the lord” is displayed and the explanation is displayed.
FIG. 222 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of effects applicable to the present embodiment.

  In the effects shown in FIGS. 222 (a1) to (a3) and 222 (b1) to (b2), the UI part UI4 has a variable icon display area, a hold icon display area, a tutorial display part TT4, and a stage name. The display unit ST2 is integrally displayed on the lower part of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In this production example as well, when the super reach is reached, the UI portion frames out below the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It may be left. When the notice icon is stocked, the explanation display in the tutorial display section TT4 and the stage name display section ST2 is deleted. Further, in this effect example, the image being prepared can be displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 and the stage name display section ST2.

  As shown in FIG. 222 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit UI4 surrounded by a square frame is disposed at the bottom of the display screen. The UI unit UI4 shown in FIG. 222 (a1) has a hold icon display area in the center. The hold icon display area is partitioned by four frames, and one hold icon is displayed in each frame. In addition, a variation icon display area is formed at the upper center of the UI unit UI4, and the variation icon is displayed in a manner of being placed on a frame formed by the UI unit UI4. At the timing shown in FIG. 222 (a1), two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, so two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 and the two hold icons h11 and h12 are both in the default display mode. A tutorial display section TT4 as an explanation display section is arranged on the right side of the hold icon display area, and a stage name display section ST2 is arranged on the left side of the hold icon display area. Since the functional configurations of the tutorial display unit TT4 and the stage name display unit ST2 are the same as those of the tutorial display unit TT1 and the stage name display unit ST1 described above, description thereof is omitted here. In the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 222 (a1), “With notice icon digestion ...” is displayed, and in the stage name display section ST2, “Castle Town Stage” is displayed. It is reported that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is also displayed.

  Further, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224F and the general character are above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. 224Fb is arranged.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 222 (a2) shows a state in which the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 is switched to the first preparing image RDY1. The first preparing image RDY1 has a green background color and is in a default display mode.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 222 (a3), the stage name displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 is switched to the fourth image RDY4 being prepared. The fourth preparatory image RDY4 has a green background color and is in a default display mode. Thus, in this effect example, an example in which an image in preparation is displayed in each of a plurality of explanation display portions is shown.

  FIG. 222 (b1) to FIG. 222 (b2) are diagrams showing another effect example following FIG. 222 (a1). Note that the effect shown in FIG. 222 (b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 222 (a2), and the description thereof will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 222 (b2), the fourth preparation image RDY4 is displayed on the display frame of the stage name display unit ST2 while the stage name displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 is continuously displayed. A state of being displayed at a position shifted upward is shown. That is, a state where the image being prepared overlaps with a part of the area where the explanation display is displayed is shown. Such a display mode can also be applied to the tutorial display unit TT4.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 222 (c1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a balloon part TT3 as a third tutorial display part (explanation display part) is displayed on the right side of the display screen together with a spear character GY1. ing. The samurai character GY1 and the speech balloon TT3 are displays that may be displayed when a conversation effect (or a speech effect) is performed, such as a tutorial display (description display) or a notice display. At the timing shown in FIG. 222 (c1), in response to the line display by Princess Chibi's character CH1, the line display "here is" is displayed in the balloon TT3, and the conversation notice continues. Here, the samurai character GY1 and the speech balloon TT3 are overlapped by the first decorative symbol, but the samurai character GY1 and the speech balloon TT3 may be overlapped by the first decorative symbol. Further, the frog character GY1 and the balloon portion TT3 may be arranged at a position that does not overlap the first decorative symbol. The spear character GY1 and the balloon part TT3 may be displayed at the same timing, or after the spear character GY1 is displayed, the balloon part TT3 may be displayed, or the balloon part TT3 is displayed. A spear character GY1 may be displayed later. Further, the conversation announcement by the princess Chibi character CH1 and the samurai character GY1 may be performed by operating the effect button 136. In the tutorial display portion TT1, it is not displayed. Note that the timing at which the tutorial display portion TT1 is not displayed may be the timing after the spear character GY1 is displayed, or the timing before the spear character GY1 is displayed. Also good. Further, the timing at which the explanation display on the tutorial display portion TT1 is erased may be the same as the timing at which the frog character GY1 is displayed. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing differs depending on the case. Further, the plurality of arrows are displayed so as to pierce the right side of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 222 (c2), the crest character 224E is lifted from the initial position and overlapped with the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. More specifically, the crest character 224E completely covers the hold display frame FL1 after movement, and also includes a part of the first hold icon h11, a part of the tutorial display part TT1, and one of the balloon parts TT2. Each part is covered.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 222 (c3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an extended animation (extended animation) of the hold display frame FL1 is performed, and the hold display frame FL1 is expanded upward, and the crest character 224E is displayed. A state of appearing above is shown. That is, it can be said that the portion where the hold display frame FL1 is not overlapped with the family crest member 224E appears. Further, the expanded hold display frame FL1 overlaps the balloon part TT2 and overlaps the balloon part TT2, but does not overlap the balloon part TT3 and does not overlap. That is, in this effect example, there is a case where the speech notice (balloon portion TT3) displayed later does not overlap even if the hold display frame FL1 is expanded. As described above, the display mode of the extended hold display frame FL1 may be referred to as an extended display mode. In this production example, the hold display frame FL1 before expansion and the hold display frame FL1 after expansion are shown, but the extended animation includes one in which the hold display frame FL1 expands in stages.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 222 (c4), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows the appearance of the ninja character NJ1 in the upper part of the hold display frame FL1. Note that the ninja character NJ1 is partially overlapped with the family crest character 224E, and is more difficult to view than when the crest character 224E is not partially overlapped.

  FIG. 222 (c5) shows a state in which the family crest member 224E descends toward the initial position. As a result, a portion of the ninja character NJ1 that is not overlapped with the family crest member 224E is enlarged, so that the visual recognition is easy. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state where the ninja character NJ1 is throwing the shuriken SH1. The shuriken SH1 is moving toward the tutorial display section TT1.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 222 (c6), the crest character 224E is returned to the initial position. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 overlaps the tutorial display portion TT1, and the effect EF2 is displayed in which a part of the tutorial display portion TT1 explodes. This effect EF2 makes it difficult to visually recognize a part of the tutorial display portion TT1. Thereby, a notice may be displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1, and the player may have a sense of expectation that the reliability of the jackpot may be increased.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 222 (c7), the preparing image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1, and it is notified that the corresponding mini game or timer notice effect is started. . This in-preparation image RDY has a green background color and is in a default display mode. In this effect, instead of the image RDY in preparation, a timer notice display may be displayed and the timer notice effect may be started, a mini game may be started, or a notice display may be performed. .
FIG. 223 is a diagram showing, in a stepwise manner, an example of the expansion effect of the hold display frame.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 223 (a1), the UI unit UI2 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. The UI unit UI2 in this effect example has a hold icon display area on the left side. The hold icon display area is partitioned by four frames, each forms a hold display frame, and one hold icon is displayed in each frame. At the timing shown in FIG. 223 (a1), four hold icons are accommodated in each frame in the hold icon display area, and the second of the first hold icons h11 to fourth hold icons h14. The hold icon h12 is a display mode of a pre-reading notice (for example, a display mode that lights up in blue), and the other hold icons are set as default display modes. In addition, a variation icon display area is formed above the frame in which the first hold icon h11 is accommodated, and the variation icon h0 is displayed in the variation icon display area during symbol variation display. Here, the area where the change icon h0 is displayed may also be included in the UI unit UI2. A tutorial display section TT7 is arranged on the right side of the hold icon display area. At the timing shown in FIG. 223 (a1), the tutorial display portion TT7 displays the image RDY being prepared. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Note that neither the fluctuation icon h0 nor the first hold icon h11 to the fourth hold icon h14 overlap the decorative symbol.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed at the top of the display screen. In this production example, none of the stage name display section ST1, the reception count display 850, and the stock button image 852 is displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 is displayed at the upper part of the display screen, but the Tono-sama character is not displayed. The background display is also the background display of Swordsman Reach.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224Fa and the general character character 224Fb are disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 223 (a1), the family crest character 224E emits blue light in accordance with the display color of the second hold icon h12.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 223 (a2), the hold icon display area is shown being enlarged. The enlarged display of the hold icon display area can be performed by, for example, an animation display that gradually increases. At the timing shown in FIG. 223 (a2), the hold display frame that accommodates the second hold icon h12, which is the display mode of the pre-reading notice, is enlarged and displayed at the center of the display screen. In other words, in this effect example, it can be said that the hold display frame in which the second hold icon h12 is accommodated is displayed in an expanded manner. Further, in this effect example, the tutorial display unit TT7 is outside the display screen due to the enlarged display of the hold display frame, but the image RDY being prepared displayed in the tutorial display unit TT7 does not change the display position. The tutorial display part TT7 is separated and displayed in the lower right part of the display screen. At this time, the image RDY in preparation may overlap with a part of the hold display frame or the hold icon. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 223 (a2), the first decorative symbol is variably displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 223 (a3), the emission color of the family crest character 224E that has emitted blue light changes to green. That is, it can be said that the display color of the second hold icon h12 is foreseeing a change from blue to green.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 223 (a4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display color of the enlarged second hold icon h12 is changed from blue to green. Thereby, the player may be able to increase a sense of expectation for the big hit with respect to the symbol variation display related to the hold corresponding to the second hold icon h12.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 223 (a5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold icon display area is reduced to return to the default display mode. The reduced display of the hold icon display area can be performed by, for example, an animation display that gradually reduces. In this effect example, the hold display frame can be expanded in this way, and the display mode of the hold icon can be changed with the expanded hold display frame. Further, in this effect example, the ready image RDY is displayed in a manner in which it is accommodated in the tutorial display portion TT7 that appears by the reduced display of the hold icon display area.

  FIGS. 223 (b1) to (b2) show other forms of the effects shown in FIGS. 223 (a1) to (a5). Note that the effect shown in FIG. 223 (b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 223 (b2) shows a state where the hold icon display area is enlarged and displayed in the manner described above with reference to FIG. 223 (a2). At this time, the hold icon display area is displayed below the display screen, and is overlapped by the ready image RDY together with the enlarged hold icon. Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 223 (b2), the sub-window WP3 appears in the upper right part of the display screen, and it relates to the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 223 (b1). The display (main display) is displayed. In the display in the sub window WP3, the UI unit UI2 is not displayed, but may be displayed. Further, the sub-window WP3 overlaps a part of the enlarged hold icon display area. As described above, in this effect example, there is a case where the state of the symbol variation display can be grasped in the background before a certain effect is executed.

  Next, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs will be described with reference to FIGS. 224 to 226. Here, FIG. 224 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a ball removal error display, FIG. 225 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a ball removal error display, and FIG. 226 illustrates a display example of a ball removal error display. FIG. The display position of the warning message for the ball removal error (hereinafter referred to as “ball removal error display”) is a fixed location, but it is possible to appropriately set which position is the display position. is there. In the following description, a display example including a variation of the display position of the ball removal error display is shown below. Note that this ball removal error display is erased when the ball removal button 130 is operated and the lower pan full state is eliminated and the ball removal error is eliminated. Moreover, although the example of an effect shown below shows about the example of a ball removal error display, it is applicable also to the door open error etc. which generate | occur | produce when the front frame door 106 is opened, for example. Further, when a ball removal error display is being performed, an error sound may be output together or may not be output.

  224 (a1) to FIG. 2 (a2) show examples of warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effects shown in FIG. 193 (c) to FIG. Has been. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 224 (a1), a state in which a ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed overlapping a part of the tutorial display portion TT1 that is closed by the shutter image is shown. ing. In the ball removal error display ERR1, a message “please remove the ball” is displayed, and it is urged to produce a game ball stored in the lower plate and cancel the full state of the lower plate.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 224 (a2), a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps the tutorial display portion TT1 in which the shutter image is opened and the image RDY in preparation is displayed. The state of being displayed is shown. Thereby, it may become possible to notice the image RDY in preparation by looking at the ball removal display. Further, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the image RDY being prepared. In addition, by removing the ball early and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to entertain the effect display performed there. Further, it may be possible to give a chance to remove the ball when the ball removal error display ERR1 and the image RDY in preparation are simultaneously viewed and the display of the image RDY in preparation is completed.

  The production examples shown in FIGS. 224 (b1) to (b2) are, for example, display examples of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the production examples shown in FIGS. 195 (c1) to (c2). Has been. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 224 (b1), the remaining time display meter MT4 shows a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlapping. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that one of the timer notices composed of a plurality of displays is overlapped by the ball removal error display ERR1.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 224 (b2), when the remaining time display meter MT4 becomes shorter as the remaining time of the timer display becomes shorter, the overlap state due to the ball removal error display ERR1 is eliminated, and the remaining time display meter MT4. Is easily visible. Thereby, the remaining time display meter MT4 may be noticed by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. Further, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the remaining time display meter MT4. In addition, by removing the ball early and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to entertain the effect display performed there. Further, when the ball removal error display ERR1 and the remaining time meter MT4 are viewed at the same time, the display of the remaining time meter MT4 may be finished to give a chance to remove the ball.

  Examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 224 (c1) to (c2) are, for example, display examples of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effects examples shown in FIGS. 196 (b4) to (b5). Has been. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 224 (c1), the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps the enemy swordsman character, but does not overlap the translucent button image 136q related to the combined animation. No appearance is shown. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 may overlap with the translucent button image 136q in the combined animation.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 224 (c2), when the semi-transparent button image 139q comes close, a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 is overlapped. Thereby, it may become possible to notice the united animation by looking at the display without the ball. In some cases, it is possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the combined animation. In addition, by removing the ball early and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to entertain the effect display performed there. In addition, there may be a case where the ball removal error display ERR1 and the combined animation are viewed at the same time, and when the combined animation is displayed, a chance to remove the ball is given.

  224 (d1) to FIG. 2 (d2) show examples of display of warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effects shown in FIG. 203 (f) to FIG. Has been. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 224 (d1), a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed so as to overlap the right symbol of the decorative symbol and the remaining time meter MT. The UI unit UI3 including TT1 is not overlapped.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 224 (d2), the preparation-in-progress image RDY is displayed again in the tutorial display unit TT1, and it is notified that the second timer notice effect is started, but the preparation-in-progress image RDY is displayed again. Sometimes, the enlarged image RDY is displayed compared to when the first preparing image RDY is displayed. Therefore, the preparatory image RDY is overlapped by a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 that has not overlapped the tutorial display portion TT1 until now. Thereby, it may become possible to notice the enlarged image RDY being prepared by looking at the ball-free display. Further, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the image RDY being prepared. In addition, by removing the ball early and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to entertain the effect display performed there. In addition, there may be a case where the ball removal error display ERR1 and the enlarged image RDY being prepared are simultaneously viewed, and when the display of the image RDY being prepared is completed, a chance to remove the ball may be given.

  224 (e1) to FIG. 2 (e2) show examples of warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effects shown in FIG. 204 (a5) to FIG. Has been. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 224 (e1), a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 partially overlaps the area where the character of the swordsman is drawn, but the character of Tono is drawn. There is no overlap in the area.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 224 (e2), as a result of the player's long press operation of the effect button 136, the area where the character of the lord placed above is drawn is enlarged. A part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps the area where the character is drawn. Thereby, it may become possible to notice the superiority or inferiority of the Tono-sama character and the enemy swordsman character who see the ball-free display. Further, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by observing the superiority or inferiority of the Tono-sama character and the enemy swordsman character. In addition, by removing the ball early and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to entertain the effect display performed there. In addition, the ball removal error display ERR1 and the superiority and inferiority of the Tono-sama character and the enemy swordsman character are simultaneously observed. May be possible.

  224 (f1) to FIG. (F2) show examples of display of warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the examples shown in FIG. 206 (e) to FIG. Has been. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 224 (f1), a state where a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps the second image RDY2 being prepared is shown. On the other hand, there is no overlap with the display area in which the characters “Go” are displayed (the display area in which the first image RDY being prepared is displayed).

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 224 (f2), the characters “Go” are erased together with the display area, the second image RDY2 being slid downward, and the position of the tutorial display portion TT1. An image moving animation is being prepared. In addition, a notice effect (preceding start notice effect) corresponding to the completion of the timer display countdown by the timer notice effect corresponding to the first image RDY1 in preparation is started, and a state where the ninja character NJ4 appears is shown. Has been. At this time, the overlap state between the ball removal error display ERR1 and the second image being prepared RDY2 is eliminated. On the other hand, a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps the ninja character NJ4. Further, the ball removal error display ERR1 may not overlap the ninja character NJ4. Accordingly, it may be possible to notice the display of the second ready image RDY2 and the display of the ninja character NJ4 by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. Further, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the second preparing image RDY2 or the ninja character NJ4. In addition, by removing the ball early and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to entertain the effect display performed there. In addition, the ball removal error display ERR1, the second image RDY2 being prepared, and the ninja character NJ4 can be seen simultaneously, and when the second image RDY2 and the ninja character NJ4 are displayed, a chance to remove the ball can be given. There is a case.

  225 (a1) to FIG. 2 (a2) show an example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effects shown in FIG. 209 (a3) to FIG. Has been. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 225 (a1), a ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed on the left side of the roulette wheel RR. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 is not overlapped with any display.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 225 (a2), the first preparing image RDY1 is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 with the princess character HME added to the upper right portion thereof, and is displayed on the upper left of the display screen. Is displayed such that the third preparing image RDY3 is adjacent to the frog character GII, and the Chibi princess character CHM is displayed below the third preparing image RDY3. At this time, a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 is overlapped with the princess Chibi character CHM. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that at least a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps a part of the plurality of images in preparation. Thereby, it may be possible to notice at least one of a plurality of images in preparation (including characters) by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. Further, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at a plurality of images in preparation. In addition, by removing the ball early and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to entertain the effect display performed there. In addition, there may be a case where the ball removal error display ERR1 and the plurality of images in preparation are simultaneously viewed, and when the display of the image in preparation is finished, a ball removal is given.

  225 (b1) to FIG. 2 (b2) show examples of display of warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effects shown in FIG. 209 (b1) to FIG. Has been. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 225 (b1), a ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed on the left side of the roulette wheel RR. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 is not overlapped with any display.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 225 (b2), the third preparing image RDY3 is displayed so that the character GII of the spider is adjacent. In other words, a spear character GII appears at a position corresponding to the spear character GII, and an image that is being prepared to appear along with the spear character GII is also displayed at a position adjacent to the spear character GII. In this case, unlike the example of the effect shown in FIG. 225 (a2), since the image being prepared corresponding to a certain effect (Princess Chibi's character CHM) is not displayed, the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed in any display. There is no overlap.

  The production examples shown in FIGS. 225 (c1) to (c2) are, for example, display examples of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the production examples shown in FIGS. 211 (b) to (e). Has been. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 225 (c1), in the effect shown in FIG. 211 (b), a state in which the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed in the approximate center of the left notice display area CUL is shown. Yes. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 is not overlapped with any display.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 225 (c2), in the effect shown in FIG. 211 (e), the mini game is executed based on the image RDY being prepared displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1. As a result of the success, it is shown that the chance up cut-in image WCI is displayed in the left notice display area CUL. At this time, it is shown that a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps the chance up cut-in image WCI. Thereby, it may be possible to notice the display of the chance-up cut-in image WCI by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. In some cases, the ball removal error display ERR1 may be noticed by looking at the chance-up cut-in image WCI. In addition, by removing the ball early and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to entertain the effect display performed there. In addition, there may be a case where the ball removal error display ERR1 and the chance-up cut-in image WCI are simultaneously viewed, and when the display of the chance-up cut-in image WCI is finished, the ball removal is given.

  225 (d1) to FIG. 2 (d2) show examples of warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effects shown in FIG. 213 (b1) to FIG. Has been. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 225 (d1), the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed above the tutorial display section TT1 in the effect example shown in FIG. 213 (b1). . At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 is not overlapped with any display.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 225 (d2), the chasing effect described above is started. When the chase effect is started, the sub window WP3 appears in the upper right part of the display screen, and the display related to the variable display of the decorative symbols displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 225 (d2) (main display). Is displayed. The first preparing image RDY1 and the third preparing image RDY3 are continuously displayed without changing the display position. In this case, only the first image RDY1 displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 of the two images RDY1 and RDY3 is displayed on the subwindow WP3 in the subwindow WP3, and the third image RDY3 is prepared. Is not displayed in the sub-window WP3. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 is not displayed in the sub-window WP3, and is continuously displayed without changing the display position. At this time, at least a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 may be overlapped with the sub window WP3.

  225 (e1) to (e2) show examples of display of warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the examples shown in FIGS. 213 (d1) to (d2), for example. Has been. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 225 (e1), the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen in the effect example shown in FIG. 213 (d1). . At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 is not overlapped with any display.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 225 (e2), the background display is reduced to about 3/4, and the reduced background image is tilted about 10 degrees counterclockwise, and a shake vision effect is performed. The state of being broken is shown. In this case, the in-preparation image RDY displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is maintained in the display state without changing the display mode or the display position. That is, it is shown that the image RDY being prepared does not tilt with the background display. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 is maintained in the display state without changing the display position or tilting even when the shake vision effect is performed. At this time, since the background image is inclined, the blank portion is represented in black. Then, a part of the sphere removal error display ERR1 is overlapped with this blank portion. For example, when the sphere removal error display ERR1 is displayed in black characters, it is assimilated with the color of the blank portion, and a part thereof It may be difficult to see.

  225 (f1) to FIG. 215 (f2) show examples of warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the examples shown in FIGS. 214 (a1) to (a2), for example. Has been. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 225 (f1), the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed above the tutorial display section TT1 in the effect example shown in FIG. 214 (a1). . At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 is not overlapped with any display.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 225 (f2), the first step-up display unit SUA is raised from below the UI unit UI3 and is displayed as being lifted up from the UI unit UI3. Has been. At this time, at least a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps with the tutorial display unit TT1 due to the rise of the UI unit UI3. That is, since the display area of the UI part UI3 is enlarged, the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps the UI part UI3. Thereby, it may be possible to notice the occurrence of the effect in the first step-up display unit SUA by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. Further, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by watching the UI unit UI3 rise. In addition, by removing the ball early and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to entertain the effect display performed there. Further, it may be possible to give a chance to remove the ball when the display of the first step-up display unit SUA is finished by simultaneously viewing the effects of the ball removal error display ERR1 and the first step-up display unit SUA.

  Examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 226 (a1) to (a2) are, for example, display examples of warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effects examples shown in FIGS. 216 (d) to (e). Has been. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 226 (a1), in the effect example shown in FIG. 216 (d), a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 is overlapped with the upper part of the tutorial display portion TT1. It is shown. That is, in this effect example, before the UI part UI3 is out of frame by the UI part FO animation, the ball removal error display ERR1 is overlapped with the UI part UI3.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 226 (a2), the UI unit UI3 is shown out of frame by the UI unit FO animation. In this effect example, it is shown that the overlap state of the ball removal error display ERR1 to the UI part UI3 is canceled while the UI part UI3 is out of the frame by the UI part FO animation.

  Examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 226 (b1) to (b2) are, for example, display examples of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effects examples shown in FIGS. 220 (a3) to (a5). Has been. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 226 (b1), a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps the UI part wipe display part WP4 in the effect example shown in FIG. 220 (a3). It is shown. At this time, the character does not overlap the character on the motorcycle displayed on the UI part wipe display part WP4.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 226 (b2), a state where the character on the motorcycle moves to the right end portion of the UI portion wipe display portion WP4 is shown. At this time, a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 is overlapped with the character on the motorcycle together with the UI part wipe display part WP3. Thereby, it may be possible to notice the effect display on the UI part wipe display part WP3 by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. In some cases, the ball removal error display ERR1 can be noticed by looking at the effect display on the UI portion wipe display portion WP3. In addition, by removing the ball early and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to entertain the effect display performed there. Further, it may be possible to give a chance to remove the ball when the ball display error display ERR1 and the effect display on the UI part wipe display unit WP3 are simultaneously viewed and the effect display on the UI unit wipe display unit WP3 is finished.

  The production examples shown in FIGS. 226 (c1) to (c2) are, for example, display examples of warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the production examples shown in FIGS. 223 (b1) to (b2). Has been. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 226 (c1), in the effect example shown in FIG. 223 (b1), the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and a part thereof is over the decorative symbol. The wrapping is shown. Note that there is no overlap with other displays.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 226 (c2), the hold icon display area is shown being enlarged. At this time, the hold icon display area is displayed below the display screen, and is overlapped by the ready image RDY together with the enlarged hold icon. In addition, in the effect example shown in FIG. 226 (c2), the sub-window WP3 appears in the upper right part of the display screen, and it relates to the variable display of the decorative symbols displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 226 (c1). The display (main display) is displayed. In the display in the sub window WP3, the UI unit UI2 is not displayed. Further, the sub-window WP3 overlaps a part of the enlarged hold icon display area. At this time, a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps the sub-window WP3, and the other part overlaps the hold icon display area. Note that the ball removal error display ERR1 is not displayed in the sub-window WP3, and the display position is maintained. Thereby, it may be possible to notice the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon in the hold icon display area enlarged by viewing the ball removal error display ERR1. Further, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon in the hold icon display area. In addition, by removing the ball early and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to entertain the effect display performed there. In addition, the ball removal error display ERR1 and the hold icon display area change effect in the hold icon display area are simultaneously viewed, and when the change effect of the hold icon display form in the hold icon display area is finished, an opportunity to remove the ball is given. May be possible.

  The effect examples shown in FIGS. 226 (d1) to (d3) show variations of the display mode of the ball removal error display ERR1.

  The ball removal error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 226 (d1) is a display mode in which the display “please remove the ball” is surrounded by a rectangular frame, and the background is transparent. Therefore, even when the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed, the display of the ball removal error display ERR1 can be made conspicuous and the influence of the visibility of the display on the back side of the ball removal error display ERR1 can be reduced. There is a case.

  The ball removal error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 226 (d2) has the same mode as the ball removal error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 226 (d1), but the background is opaque. Therefore, when the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed, the visibility of the ball removal error display ERR1 is improved, but the back side of the ball removal error display ERR1 may be difficult to see.

  The ball removal error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 226 (d3) is another display mode of the ball removal error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 226 (d2), and the display of “Please remove the ball” is outlined on a black background. It is set as the aspect represented by these.

  In the embodiment described above, the three decorative symbol display devices, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 280M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N have been described. Needless to say, even the pachinko machine 100 having only one is applicable. Further, the present invention can be applied to a pachinko machine provided with two decorative symbol display devices, or can be applied to a pachinko machine provided with four or more decorative symbol display devices.

  As described above, the example in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine (bullet ball game machine) has been described in detail. However, the game table of the present invention is not limited to this example. For example, a medal or a game ball (pachinko ball) is used. The present invention can also be applied to a spinning machine (slot machine) to be used. That is, the pachinko machine 100 described so far is a pachinko (1 type + 1 type), but other pachinko (eg, 1 type, 2 types, 3 types, 1 type + 2 types, etc.), slot etc. Parrot, jade ball). More specifically, when a medal (game medium) is inserted and the start lever is operated to rotate the reel, the winning combination is determined internally by internal lottery, and the stop button is operated to stop the reel In addition, if a combination of symbols predetermined according to the internal decision is displayed on the symbol display window, a winning combination is established, and if a winning combination with a medal payout is established, a prescribed number of medals are paid out, etc. It may be a spinning machine (slot machine) that gives a privilege to the player. Alternatively, a predetermined number of game balls are encapsulated as encapsulated balls, the encapsulated spheres are fired into a game area to play a game, and a predetermined game value is given to a player based on the fact that the encapsulated balls win a predetermined entry area. It is also possible to use an enclosed ball game table that can be circulated by launching the enclosed ball that has won the predetermined entry area or the enclosed ball that has not won the prize into the game area.

As described above, the present invention can be applied to various types of game machines, and will be described more specifically with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 227 is a front view of a sealed pachinko machine to which the present invention is applicable.

  In a sealed pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 227, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game table. That is, the game medium launched from the launching means 901 to the game area 902 can be discharged from the game area 902 and supplied to the launching means 901 again. In addition, a display means 903 for displaying information on the number of game media (award balls, rental balls, total number of balls, etc.) and other information is disposed below the game area 902 on the front of the game table. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown in 159 are not provided.

  FIG. 228 is an external perspective view of a slot machine to which the present invention can be applied as viewed from the front side (player side).

  The slot machine 1000 includes a main body 1001 and a front door 1002 that is attached to the front surface of the main body 1001 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 1001. Inside the center of the main body 1001 (not shown in FIG. 228), three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011 and right reel 1012) having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface are stored. It is configured to rotate inside. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by driving means such as a stepping motor.

  In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 228, an appropriate number of symbols are printed on the belt-like member at equal intervals, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are configured by affixing the belt-like member to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame material. . When viewed from the player, the symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are generally displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 1013 so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each of the reels 1010 to 1012, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player varies. That is, each of the reels 1010 to 1012 functions as a display unit that displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols in a variable manner. In addition to the reel, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be used as such a display means. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 228, three reels are provided in the center of the slot machine 1000, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

  A backlight (not shown in FIG. 228) for illuminating individual symbols displayed on the symbol display window 1013 is disposed on the back surface of each reel 1010 to 1012. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be illuminated evenly. In the slot machine 1000, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each reel 1010 to 1012. The light projecting unit and the light receiving unit of this optical sensor are provided. A light shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the two. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

  The winning line display lamp 1020 is a lamp indicating a winning line 1014 that is valid. The effective pay line is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as a game medium. There are 5 winning lines 1014. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line is valid, and when two medals are betted, the upper horizontal winning line and the lower horizontal winning line are added. If three are valid and three medals are bet, five lines including a right-down winning line and an upper-right winning line are valid as winning lines. The number of winning lines 1014 is not limited to five. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, the right Five lines, the down line and the upper right line, may be valid as the winning lines.

  The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been won internally in the internal lottery or that a bonus game is in progress. The game medal insertable lamp 1024 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert a game medal. The replay lamp 1022 informs the player that the current game is replayable (the medal need not be inserted) when winning a replay that is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1028 is an effect lamp.

  The bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) stored electronically in the slot machine 1000. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 228, every time the bet button 1030 is pressed, a maximum of three cards are inserted. When the bet button 1031 is pressed, two cards are inserted, and when the bet button 1032 is pressed. Three cards are inserted. Hereinafter, the bet button 1032 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 1029 turns on the lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a prescribed number of medals are inserted, the game start is informed that a game start operation is possible. The lamp 1021 is turned on.

  The medal slot 1034 is an slot for the player to insert a medal when starting a game. In other words, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 1030 to 1032, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 1034. is there. The stored number display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display 1026 is a display for displaying various types of internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) as numerical values. The payout number display unit 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination.

  The start lever 1035 is a lever type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when a desired medal number is inserted into the medal insertion slot 1034 or when the bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated and the start lever 1035 is operated, the reels 1010 to 1012 start to rotate. The operation on the start lever 1035 is referred to as a game start operation. In this slot machine 1000, based on the operation of the start lever 1035, an internal lottery process for performing a lottery to determine which of the plurality of roles is won is executed. It is determined whether the player is in a relatively advantageous state or a relatively unfavorable state.

  The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039. Stop buttons 1037 to 10310 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 1035, and are associated with the reels 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation on the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. Note that a light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039. When the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 can be operated, the light emitter can be turned on to notify the player.

  The medal return button 1033 is a button that is pressed to remove a medal when the inserted medal is clogged. The settlement button 1043 is a button for adjusting the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and the bet medals and discharging them from the medal payout exit 1055. Door key hole 1040 is a hole into which a key for unlocking front door 1002 of slot machine 1000 is inserted. The medal payout exit 1055 is a payout exit for paying out medals.

  In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 228, the same operation key unit 1090 as the operation key unit 181 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 159 is provided between the MAX bet button 1032 and the medal slot 1034. ing. This operation key unit 1090 also has a cross key, an OK button, and a cancel button. Further, next to the operation key unit 1090, the same effect button 1091 as the chance button 136 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 159 is provided.

  The sound hole 1060 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. Side lamps 1044 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps for exciting games. A rendering device 1080 is disposed above the front door 1002. This rendering device 1080 includes a door (shutter) member 1063 including two right doors 1063a and 1063b that can be opened and closed in a horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 (illustrated) disposed on the back side of the door member 1063. When the two right doors 1063a and 1063b are opened in the horizontal direction in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) is displayed in front of the slot machine 1000 (player). Side). In addition, even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it should just be comprised so that various effect images and various game information can be displayed, for example, it consists of a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, or a projector and a screen. A display device or the like may be used. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape and is configured so that the player can visually recognize the entire display screen. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 228, the display screen is a rectangular flat surface, but may be a square flat surface. In addition, a decorative object (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen, and a part of the peripheral edge of the display screen may be hidden by the decorative object, so that the display screen looks irregular. Furthermore, the display screen may have a curved surface.

  In the slot machine 1000 described above, as operation means, in addition to the bet buttons 1030 to 1032, the start lever 1035, the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, etc., the operation key unit 1090 (an example of the first operation means and the third operation means). ) And effect buttons 1091 (an example of second operation means). Further, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 228, the display panel 1070 displaying the titles of devices and the like can protrude toward the front side. Further, a light emitting diode (LED) is built in the display panel 1070. The display panel 1070 shown in FIG. 228 is in the initial position. When the display panel 1070 protrudes toward the front side, the display panel 1070 can perform a push-in operation, and functions as an operation unit (button) in the same manner as the transmission unit 191. This corresponds to an example of one operating means, and also corresponds to an example of a movable means. Further, each button of the operation key unit 1090, the effect button 1091, and the display panel 1070 can vibrate. However, the buttons of the operation key unit 1090 may not vibrate.

In the above description, “a game machine equipped with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.] There,
One of the plural types of displays is a first display [for example, a change effect display (holding change) of the display mode of the holding icon by the ninja character NJ4 shown in FIGS. 193 (f) to (g). Etc.)
One display of the plurality of types of display is a second display [for example, a holding icon having a red display mode shown in FIG. 193 (h), etc.]
One display of the plurality of types of display is a third display [for example, an image RDY being prepared shown in FIG. 193 (d), etc.]
The first display is a display of a character related to the second display,
The second display is a display of a hold icon in a display mode of a prefetch notice,
The third display is a display indicating that it is waiting for the display start of a certain notice display [for example, the display of the mini game shown in FIG. 193 (o) to FIG.
The display of the second display may be started after the display of the first display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 193 (f) to (h), a ninja character NJ4 The display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed from the default display mode to the red display mode after the hold change pre-effect display is performed by
The third display may be started in the first state [For example, as shown in FIG. 193 (d), the UI unit UI3 displaying the hold icons h11 and h12 is being prepared. The display of the image RDY has started, etc.]
In some cases, the third display started in the first state may end in the second state [for example, as shown in FIG. 193 (d) to FIG. The preparation-in-progress image RDY that has been displayed in the state in which the part UI3 is displayed has been displayed in the state in which the UI part UI3 is not displayed, etc.]
After the display of the third display is completed in the second state, the display of the certain notice display may be started in the second state [for example, FIG. 193 (n) to FIG. As shown in (o), after the display of the in-preparation image RDY is finished, the display of the mini game is started in a state where the UI unit UI3 is hidden],
After the certain notice display is displayed, a certain effect [for example, display of the iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 193 (q)] may be started [for example, FIG. 193 (o) to FIG. As shown in (q), when the display result of the mini game is a great success, the iron plate image TP is displayed],
The certain effect is a notice regarding the symbol variation display being executed [for example, the notice image indicating that the iron plate image TP shown in FIG.
There is a case where the second state is entered after the first state [For example, as shown in FIG. 193 (l) to FIG. UI unit UI3 is hidden, etc.]
The first state is one of states where a hold icon can be displayed,
The game machine characterized in that the second state is one of the states in which the hold icon is not displayed [for example, a state in which the UI unit UI3 is not displayed in the swordsman reach, etc.]. Was explained.

  Although the conventional game table has room for improvement in the display means, according to this game table, it is possible to realize a game table having features in the display means.

  In addition, according to this gaming machine, it is easy to understand that the third display, which is one of the displays that are displayed in advance of the notice display, is a notice display other than the hold icon, and it is possible to concentrate on the fluctuation. You may be able to entertain.

  In addition, according to this game machine, for beginners, it is possible to entertain and entertain whether it is the advance notice or the look-ahead notice by displaying the preparation in progress. In some cases, it is easy to understand if the display is about, and it is possible to clarify the expectation.

  In addition, according to this game table, it may be easy to understand which notice is to be given depending on the timing of completion of the preparation display.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying displays other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  In addition, the first display may be a character display related only to the second display, or may be a character display related to a display other than the second display. The first display may be a character display that is always related to the second display, or may be a character display that may not be related to the second display.

  Further, only the third display may be started in the first state, or a display other than the third display may be started in the first state. In addition, the third display may always be started in the first state, or the third display may not be started in the first state.

  Further, the third display may be started only in the first state, or the third display may be started in a state other than the first state.

  In addition, the third display that is started in the first state may end only in the second state, or the third display that is started in the first state. However, the display may end even in a state other than the second state. In addition, the third display that has started display in the first state may necessarily end in the second state, and the third display that has started display in the first state may be The display may not end in the state of.

  In addition, after the display of the third display is finished in the second state, only the display of a certain notice display may be started in the second state. After the display of the display is completed, the display of a display other than a certain notice display may be started in the second state. In addition, after the display of the third display is completed in the second state, the display of a certain notice display may always be started in the second state, or the display of the third display in the second state. After the process is completed, there may be a case where the display of a certain notice display is not started in the second state.

  Further, only after the display of the third display is completed in the second state, the display of a certain notice display may be started in the second state. In addition to the end of the display of the display, there may be a case where the display of a certain notice display is started in the second state.

  In addition, after the display of the third display is finished in the second state, the display of a certain notice display may be started only in the second state. After the display of the display is completed, the display of a certain notice may be started even in a state other than the second state.

  Further, only a certain effect may be started after a certain notice display is displayed, or an effect other than a certain effect is also started after a certain notice display is displayed. There may be cases. Also, after a certain notice display is displayed, a certain effect may be always started, or after a certain notice display is displayed, a certain effect may not be started.

  Further, a certain effect may be started only after a certain notice display is displayed, or a certain effect may be started even after a certain notice display is displayed. There may be.

  Further, a certain effect may be a notice relating only to the symbol variation display being executed, or may be a notice relating to a display other than the symbol variation display being executed. In addition, a certain effect may be a notice regarding the currently displayed symbol variation display, or may be a notice that is not related to the currently displayed symbol variation display.

  In addition, the second state may be entered only after the first state, or the second state may be entered even after a state other than the first state. In addition, the second state may be necessarily set after the first state, or the second state may not be set after the first state.

  The first state may be one of the states in which only the hold icon can be displayed, or may be one of the states in which a display other than the hold icon can be displayed. . The first state may be one of the states where the hold icon is always displayed, or may be one of the states where the hold icon may not be displayed.

  The second state may be one of the states where only the hold icon is not displayed, or may be one of the states where no display other than the hold icon is displayed. The second state may be one of the states where the hold icon is not always displayed, or may be one of the states where the hold icon may be displayed.

  Here, the first display may be a display of a character relating to a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon, or may be an effect display in the calibration of a character (navigator character) that is always displayed. .

  The second display may be a display that changes from a hold icon in the default display mode to a hold icon in the pre-read notice display mode.

  In addition, the third display may be a character display in preparation, a character display, a notification item display, or a timer display countdown in the timer notification display. It may be a display during execution.

  Further, a certain notice display may be a display during the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display, a mini game, or a notice effect.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a sixth display [for example, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 193 (a)],
The sixth display is a display of an image displayed at least on the back of the hold icon,
The hold icon can be displayed in the state where the sixth display is displayed [for example, the hold icon can be displayed in the state where the UI unit UI3 is displayed, etc.]
The hold icon is configured not to be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed. [For example, as shown in FIG. 193 (m), when the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, the hold icon is not displayed. An icon is not displayed, etc.]. ”Was also explained.
According to this game table, there is a case where the hold icon can be made conspicuous.

  Here, the sixth display may be a display of an image displayed on the back side of only the hold icon, or may be a display of an image displayed on the back side of a display other than the hold icon. Further, the sixth display may be a display of an image that is always displayed at least on the back of the hold icon, or may be a display of an image that is not displayed at least on the back of the hold icon.

  Further, it may be configured such that only the hold icon can be displayed in the state where the sixth display is displayed, or a display other than the hold icon can be displayed in the state where the sixth display is displayed. It may be. In addition, the hold icon may be displayed without fail when the sixth display is displayed, or the hold icon may not be displayed when the sixth display is displayed. It may be configured.

  In addition, the hold icon may be configured to be displayed only when the sixth display is displayed, or the hold icon may be displayed even in a state other than the state where the sixth display is displayed. It may be.

  Further, it may be configured not to display only the hold icon when the sixth display is not displayed, or to display no display other than the hold icon when the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured. In addition, the hold icon may not be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed, and the hold icon may be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured.

  Also, the hold icon may be configured not to be displayed only when the sixth display is not displayed, or the hold icon is not displayed even in a state other than the state where the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured.

In the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be overlapped with the third display in some cases [for example, FIG. As shown in d), the image RDY in preparation is displayed superimposed on the tutorial display part TT1 in the UI part UI3, etc.]
The display position of the third display in the first state and the display position of the third display in the second state are the same display position [for example, the image RDY in preparation shown in FIG. 193 (d) And the display position of the image RDY in preparation shown in FIG. 193 (m) are the same, etc.]. ”Was also explained.

  According to this game stand, by displaying the third display around the hold icon that is often seen, it is strongly impressed that the third display is not a pre-reading notice due to a change in the display mode of the hold icon. At the same time, there are cases where it is possible to prevent an oversight by notifying that a notice other than a change in the display mode of the hold icon is being made.

  Here, in the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed so as to overlap only the third display. The display of at least a part of the six displays may be displayed so as to overlap the display other than the third display. Further, at least a part of the display of the sixth display in the first state may be displayed so as to be always overlapped with the third display. It may be configured such that at least a part of the display overlaps with the third display and may not be displayed.

  Further, at least a part of the sixth display in the first state may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the third display. In the first state, the sixth display A display other than at least a part of the display may be displayed so as to overlap the third display.

In addition, the sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types.
One aspect of the plural types of aspects is the first aspect [for example, the default display aspect displayed in blue shown in FIG. 193 (a), etc.]
One aspect of the plurality of kinds of aspects is a second aspect [for example, a golden display aspect shown in FIG. 193 (e), etc.]
The case where the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. In the symbol variation display, the big hit symbol is likely to be confirmed and displayed [For example, when the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 193 (e) is displayed in the golden display mode, the display mode of the hold icon is likely to change. And the like, the jackpot symbol is easy to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon to be prefetched]. ”Was also explained.

  Here, the sixth display may be able to be displayed only in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may be displayed in an aspect other than the first aspect and the second aspect. May be. Further, the sixth display may be always displayed in the first mode and the second mode, or may not be displayed in the first mode and the second mode. Good.

  In addition, when the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, the symbol variation display is more effective than when the sixth display is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. Only the jackpot symbol may be confirmed and displayed in the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. In the case of changing to a mode, symbols other than the jackpot symbol may be more easily displayed in the symbol variation display. In addition, when the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, the symbol variation display is more effective than when the sixth display is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. The jackpot symbol may always be confirmed and the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode than when the sixth display is not changed from the first mode to the second mode. In the case of changing to, the big hit symbol may not be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display.

  Further, only when the sixth display changes from the first mode to the second mode, the jackpot symbol may be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display, or the sixth display is the first mode. Even in cases other than the case of changing from the second mode to the second mode, the big hit symbol may be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display.

In addition, the sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types.
One aspect of the plural types of aspects is the first aspect [for example, the default display aspect displayed in blue shown in FIG. 193 (a), etc.]
One aspect of the plurality of kinds of aspects is a second aspect [for example, a golden display aspect shown in FIG. 193 (e), etc.]
The case where the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. The display of the second display is likely to start [For example, when the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 193 (e) is displayed in a gold display mode, a red display mode hold icon is easily displayed. Etc.], a game table characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  Here, the sixth display may be able to be displayed only in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may be displayed in an aspect other than the first aspect and the second aspect. May be. Further, the sixth display may be always displayed in the first mode and the second mode, or may not be displayed in the first mode and the second mode. Good.

  In addition, when the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, the second display is more likely to be the second than when the sixth display is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. Only the display of the display may be easily started, or the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, compared to the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. The display display other than the second display may be easier to start when the change is made. In addition, when the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, the second display is more likely to be the second than when the sixth display is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. The display of the display may be started without fail, and the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode than when the sixth display is not changed from the first mode to the second mode. There may be a case where the display of the second display does not start when the change has occurred.

  In addition, the display of the second display may be started only when the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, and the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect. The display of the second display may be easily started even in cases other than the case where the mode is changed.

  In addition, “at least a part of the first display overlaps with the sixth display [for example, as shown in FIG. 193 (f), a ninja character NJ4 is placed in the UI unit UI3. A game stand characterized by overlapping, etc.]. ”Was also explained.

  According to this game table, if attention is paid to the sixth display, various information can be obtained, and the game can be easily understood.

  Here, at least a part of the first display may be configured to overlap only with the sixth display, or at least a part of the first display may overlap with a display other than the sixth display. It may be configured to. Further, at least a part of the first display may be configured to always overlap the sixth display, and at least a part of the first display may not overlap the sixth display. May be configured.

  Further, only a part of the first display may be configured to overlap with the sixth display, or the entire first display may be configured to overlap with the sixth display. .

  “The first display and the sixth display are configured so as not to overlap. [For example, as shown in FIG. 208 (b1), the ninja character NJ4 overlaps the UI part UI3. A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  According to this game stand, if attention is paid to the sixth display, it may seem that the third display seems to be a display related to the change display of the hold icon, but it is not so.

  Here, only the first display and the sixth display may be configured not to overlap, or the display other than the first display and the sixth display may be configured not to overlap. Good. In addition, the first display and the sixth display may be configured not to overlap each other, or the first display and the sixth display may be configured to overlap. .

Further, “a certain reach production [for example, super reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIG. 193 (m) to FIG.
The first state is one of the states before the execution of the certain reach effect is started [for example, super reach (swordsman reach shown in FIGS. 193 (m) to (q)). The state before) is started]
The second state is a state in which the certain reach effect is being executed [for example, a state in which the super reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIG. 193 (m) to FIG. , A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  According to this game table, it may be easy to notice whether or not a certain reach state is reached.

  Here, only a certain reach effect may be configured to be executable, or a reach effect other than a certain reach effect may be configured to be executable. Further, a certain reach effect may be executed without fail, or a certain reach effect may not be executed.

  Further, the first state may be one of the states before the execution of only a certain reach effect, or before the execution of a reach effect other than a certain reach effect is started. It may be one of the states. Further, the first state may be one of the states before the execution of a certain reach effect is always started, or one of the states where the execution of a certain reach effect is not started. It may be in a state.

  Further, the second state may be a state where only a certain reach effect is being executed, or may be a state where a reach effect other than a certain reach effect is being executed. Further, the second state may be a state where a certain reach effect is always executed, or may be a state where a certain reach effect is not executed.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display [for example, a display of a mini game shown in FIG. 193 (o) to FIG.
One display of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display [for example, display of the iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 193 (q), etc.]
The certain notice display is a notice for notifying that the certain effect is started [for example, in the mini game shown in FIGS. 193 (o) to (p), an arrow released by Tono-sama mini character MC1. Etc. foreseeing the display of the iron plate image TP by piercing the area around the target TGT],
The fourth display may be displayed as the certain notice display,
The game table, wherein the fifth display may be displayed as the certain effect. ”Was also explained.

  Here, a certain notice display may be for notifying only that a certain effect is started, or may be for notifying that a certain effect is started. In addition, a certain notice display may be a notice that a certain effect is started, or may not be a notice that a certain effect is started.

  Further, only the fourth display may be displayed as a certain notice display, or a display other than the fourth display may be displayed as a certain notice display. Further, the fourth display may always be displayed as a certain notice display, or the fourth display may not be displayed as a certain notice display.

  In addition, only the fifth display may be displayed as a certain effect, or a display other than the fifth display may be displayed as a certain effect. Further, the fifth display may be displayed as a certain effect, or the fifth display may not be displayed as a certain effect.

  In addition, “the third display that has been displayed in a certain symbol variation display may be continuously displayed after the next symbol variation display is started [for example, FIG. i) to an image RDY in preparation as being displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays as shown in (j) of FIG. ”Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the third display can give a sense of expectation over a plurality of variations, and the goal is also easy to understand.

  Here, there may be a case where the third display that has started display in a certain symbol variation display is continuously displayed only after the next symbol variation display to be started. There may be a case where the third display that is started in the symbol variation display is continuously displayed other than after the next symbol variation display is started. In addition, the third display that has been displayed in a certain symbol variation display may always be continuously displayed after the next symbol variation display is started, or in a certain symbol variation display. There may be a case where the third display from which display has started is not continuously displayed even after the next started symbol variation display is started.

  In addition, “the first display which has been displayed in a certain symbol variation display is erased before the next symbol variation display is started [for example, FIG. 193 (f) to FIG. As shown in h), the ninja character NJ4 is not displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays, etc.]. ”Was also explained.

  Here, the first display that has been displayed in a certain symbol variation display may be deleted only before the next symbol variation display is started, or the display may be displayed in a certain symbol variation display. The first display that is started may be erased other than before the next symbol variation display that is started. In addition, the first display that has started display in a certain symbol variation display may be necessarily deleted before the next symbol variation display is started, or the display starts in a certain symbol variation display. The displayed first display may not be erased before the symbol variation display to be started next is started.

  In addition, “the certain effect may be executed in the area where the third display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 199 (a4), the letters“ hot ”in the tutorial display portion TT1. Etc.] may be displayed, etc.]. ”Was also explained.

  Here, there may be a case where only a certain effect is executed in the area where the third display is displayed, and an effect other than the certain effect is also executed in the area where the third display is displayed. There may be cases. In addition, a certain effect may always be executed in the area where the third display is displayed, or a certain effect may not be executed in the area where the third display is displayed.

  Further, a certain effect may be executed only in the area where the third display is displayed, or a certain effect is executed in an area other than the area where the third display is displayed. There may be cases.

In addition, “the operation means [for example, the production button 136 etc.] that can be operated by the player,
One of the plurality of types of display is a seventh display [for example, a deca button image 136aL shown in FIG. 196 (b6)],
The seventh display is a display prompting the operation of the operation means,
The seventh display is a display that starts after the third display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 196 (b1) to (b6), the decabutton image 136aL is prepared. The middle image RDY is displayed after the display is started, etc.]
When the operation means is operated during the display of the seventh display, the certain effect is started [for example, when the effect button 136 is operated while the deca button image 136aL shown in FIG. 196 (b6) is displayed, the iron plate Image TP is displayed]
The third display is a display that ends before the display of the seventh display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 196 (b1) to (b6), the image RDY in preparation Is displayed before the display of the decabutton image 136aL is started, etc.]. ”Was also explained.

  Here, the operation means may be capable of being operated only by the player, or may be operable by a person other than the player. The operation means may be always operated by the player, or may not be operated by the player.

  Further, the seventh display may prompt only the operation of the operation means, or may prompt other than the operation of the operation means. Further, the seventh display may always prompt the operation of the operation means, or may not prompt the operation of the operation means.

  The seventh display may be started only after the third display is started, or the display is started even after the third display is started. There may be. The seventh display may be one that always starts after the third display is started, or one that does not start after the third display starts. Also good.

  Also, an effect may be started whenever the operating means is operated during display of the seventh display, and an effect is not started when the operating means is operated during display of the seventh display. There may be cases. Further, if the operating means is operated only during the display of the seventh display, a certain effect may be started. If the operating means is operated other than during the display of the seventh display, a certain effect is generated. May be started. An effect may be started when the operating means is operated during the display of only the seventh display, and when the operating means is operated while a display other than the seventh display is also displayed, May be started.

  The third display may end only before the display of the seventh display is started, or the display is ended other than before the display of the seventh display is started. You may do. In addition, the third display may always end before the display of the seventh display is started, or the display does not end before the display of the seventh display starts. There may be.

In addition, “one of the plural types of displays is an eighth display [for example, the combined animation shown in FIG. 196 (b4) to FIG.
The eighth display is a display for notifying that the display of the seventh display is started [For example, as shown in FIGS. 196 (b4) to (b6), the button notification effect is displayed by a combined animation. For example, the display of the deca button image 136aL is forewarned],
The gaming table according to claim 3, wherein the third display is a display that is ended during the display of the eighth display. ”Was also explained.

  Here, the eighth display may be a notice that only the start of the display of the seventh display is started, or a notice that other than the start of the display of the seventh display is started. It may be. In addition, the eighth display may always give notice that the display of the seventh display will start, or may not give notice that the display of the seventh display will start. There may be.

  Further, the third display may end only during display of the eighth display, or may end during display of a display other than the eighth display. Further, the third display may always end during display of the eighth display, or may not end during display of the eighth display.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is a ninth display [for example, the variation icon h0 shown in FIG. 203 (a)],
The ninth display is a display of a fluctuation icon,
There are cases where two of the third displays are displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 206 (a), two images RDY1 and RDY2 in preparation may be displayed],
After the display of one of the two third displays is completed, the display mode of the other is changed [for example, as shown in FIG. 203 (g), the image RDY in preparation is displayed enlarged. etc],
The third display whose display mode has changed overlaps the ninth display [For example, as shown in FIG. 203 (g), the enlarged image RDY being prepared for display overlaps the fluctuation icon h0. Etc.], a game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  According to this game table, it may be easy to notice that two third displays are displayed.

  Here, only two third displays may be displayed, three or more third displays may be displayed, and only one third display is displayed. It may be done.

  In addition, after the display of one of the two third displays is finished, only the display mode of the other may change, or after the display of one of the two third displays is finished, Display modes other than the above display modes may also be changed. In addition, after the display of one of the two third displays is finished, the display mode of the other may be changed, or after the display of one of the two third displays is finished, There may be a case where the display mode of does not change.

  In addition, the display mode of the other may change only after the display of one of the two third displays is finished, or even after the display of one of the two third displays is finished. The other display mode may change.

  Further, the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap only the ninth display, or the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap other displays than the ninth display. Good. In addition, the third display whose display mode has changed may necessarily overlap the ninth display, and the third display whose display mode has changed may not overlap the ninth display. .

  In addition, only the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap the ninth display, and displays other than the third display whose display mode has changed may also overlap the ninth display. .

  In addition, when two of the third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays is completed in one symbol variation display [for example, FIG. 203 (b) to FIG. As shown, the two ready images RDY are all digested in the same symbol variation display, etc.]. ”Was also explained.

  Here, when two third displays are displayed, only the display of all the third displays may be completed in one symbol variation display, or when two third displays are displayed. The display of all the displays other than the third display may be ended in one symbol variation display. In addition, when two third displays are displayed, all the third displays may be terminated in one symbol variation display, or when two third displays are displayed. The display of all the third displays may not end in one symbol variation display.

  In addition, when two third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays may end only in one symbol variation display, or when two third displays are displayed. In the symbol variation display other than the one symbol variation display, the display of all the third displays may be terminated. Moreover, only when the third display is displayed, the display of all the third displays may be ended in one symbol variation display, or other than when the third display is displayed. In this case, all the third display may be ended in one symbol variation display.

In addition, “one of the plural types of displays is a tenth display [for example,“ Panda is a master of the panda ”displayed in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 193 (a)”. Explanation display etc.]
The tenth display is an explanatory display,
The tenth display is a display that is displayed in the first display area of the display means when displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 193 (a), the explanation display is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1. Etc.]
The third display is a display that may be displayed in the first display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 193 (d), the image RDY in preparation is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1. Etc.], a game table characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  Here, the tenth display may be displayed only in the first display area of the display means when displayed, or the first display area in the display means when displayed. Other than that, it may be displayed. In addition, when displayed, it may be displayed in the first display area of the display means. When displayed, it may not be displayed in the first display area of the display means. It may be.

  Further, the third display may be displayed only in the first display area, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area. Also good. Further, the third display may be always displayed in the first display area, or may not be displayed in the first display area.

  In addition, the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100 or the like]. ”Was also explained.

In the above description, “a game machine equipped with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.] There,
One of the plurality of types of display is the first display [characters related to the change icon display mode of the hold icon (hold change prior effect display), for example, FIG. 193 (f) to FIG. Ninja character NJ4 etc.]
One display of the plurality of types of display is a second display [a hold icon in the display mode of the prefetch notice, for example, a hold icon in the red display mode shown in FIG. 193 (h),
One display of the plurality of types of display is a third display [preparing display, such as an image RDY being prepared shown in FIG. 193 (d), etc.]
The first display is a display of a character related to the second display,
The second display is a display of a hold icon in a display mode of a prefetch notice,
The third display is a certain notice display [mini game or timer notice such as the mini game shown in FIGS. 193 (o) to (p), or FIGS. 195 (b3) to (b4). Is a display indicating that it is waiting for the start of display of the timer notice effect, etc.
The display of the second display may be started after the display of the first display is started [the hold icon after the hold change prior effect display by the character is started. Is displayed in a pre-read notice display mode. For example, as shown in FIGS. 193 (f) to (h), the first hold icon is displayed after the hold change prior effect display by the ninja character NJ4 is performed. The display mode of h11 has changed from the default display mode to the red display mode, etc.]
The third display may be started in the first state. [Preparation display starts in the state where the hold icon is displayed. For example, FIG. 193 (d) As shown, the display of the image RDY in preparation is started in a state where the UI unit UI3 displaying the hold icons h11 and h12 is displayed]
The third display that has started displaying in the first state is configured so that the display may end in the second state. [The display is started in the state in which the hold icon is displayed. The display is completed when the hold icon is not displayed. For example, as shown in FIGS. 193 (d) to (n), the display is started when the UI unit UI3 is displayed. The ready image RDY has been displayed in a state where the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, etc.]
After the display of the third display is completed in the second state, the display of the certain notice display may be started in the second state. After the display of the preparation display is finished in the display state, a mini game or a timer notice is started. For example, as shown in FIGS. 193 (n) to (o), the preparation image RDY is displayed. After finishing, the display of the mini-game is started with the UI unit UI3 being hidden, or as shown in FIGS. 195 (b1) to (b4), the image RDY being prepared After the display is finished, the timer notice effect is started in a state where the UI unit UI3 is hidden, etc.],
After the certain notice display is displayed, a certain effect [the notice, for example, the display of the iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 193 (q), the button notice effect by the deca button 136aL shown in FIG. 196 (c4), etc.] [When the mini-game display result is a great success or the countdown is completed by the timer notice, the notice is started. For example, FIG. 193 (o) to FIG. As shown, when the display result of the mini game is very successful, the iron plate image TP is displayed. As shown in FIGS. 196 (c1) to (c4), when the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display is completed. Button announcement effect by deca button 136aL is started],
The certain effect is a notice regarding the symbol variation display being executed,
The second state may be entered after the first state [the transition from the state in which the hold icon can be displayed to the state in which the hold icon is not displayed, for example, FIG. 193 As shown in (l) to (m) in the figure, when shifting to the swordsman reach, the displayed UI unit UI3 is hidden, and the hold icon can be displayed to the hidden state. Etc.],
The first state is one of the states in which the hold icon can be displayed (for example, the state where the UI unit UI3 before the transition to the swordsman reach is displayed),
The game machine characterized in that the second state is one of the states in which the hold icon is not displayed [for example, a state in which the UI unit UI3 is hidden in the swordsman reach, etc.]. Was explained.

  Although the conventional game table has room for improvement in the display means, according to this game table, it is possible to realize a game table having features in the display means.

  In addition, according to this gaming machine, it is easy to understand that the third display, which is one of the displays that are displayed in advance of the notice display, is a notice display other than the hold icon, and it is possible to concentrate on the fluctuation. You may be able to entertain.

  In addition, according to this game machine, for beginners, it is possible to entertain and entertain whether it is the advance notice or the look-ahead notice by displaying the preparation in progress. In some cases, it is easy to understand if the display is about, and it is possible to clarify the expectation.

  In addition, according to this game table, it may be easy to understand which notice is to be given depending on the timing of completion of the preparation display.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying displays other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  In addition, the first display may be a character display related only to the second display, or may be a character display related to a display other than the second display. The first display may be a character display that is always related to the second display, or may be a character display that may not be related to the second display.

  Further, only the third display may be started in the first state, or a display other than the third display may be started in the first state. In addition, the third display may always be started in the first state, or the third display may not be started in the first state.

  Further, the third display may be started only in the first state, or the third display may be started in a state other than the first state.

  In addition, the third display that is started in the first state may end only in the second state, or the third display that is started in the first state. However, the display may end even in a state other than the second state. In addition, the third display that has started display in the first state may necessarily end in the second state, and the third display that has started display in the first state may be The display may not end in the state of.

  In addition, after the display of the third display is finished in the second state, only the display of a certain notice display may be started in the second state. After the display of the display is completed, the display of a display other than a certain notice display may be started in the second state. In addition, after the display of the third display is completed in the second state, the display of a certain notice display may always be started in the second state, or the display of the third display in the second state. After the process is completed, there may be a case where the display of a certain notice display is not started in the second state.

  Further, only after the display of the third display is completed in the second state, the display of a certain notice display may be started in the second state. In addition to the end of the display of the display, there may be a case where the display of a certain notice display is started in the second state.

  In addition, after the display of the third display is finished in the second state, the display of a certain notice display may be started only in the second state. After the display of the display is completed, the display of a certain notice may be started even in a state other than the second state.

  Further, only a certain effect may be started after a certain notice display is displayed, or an effect other than a certain effect is also started after a certain notice display is displayed. There may be cases. Also, after a certain notice display is displayed, a certain effect may be always started, or after a certain notice display is displayed, a certain effect may not be started.

  Further, a certain effect may be started only after a certain notice display is displayed, or a certain effect may be started even after a certain notice display is displayed. There may be.

  Further, a certain effect may be a notice relating only to the symbol variation display being executed, or may be a notice relating to a display other than the symbol variation display being executed. In addition, a certain effect may be a notice regarding the currently displayed symbol variation display, or may be a notice that is not related to the currently displayed symbol variation display.

  In addition, the second state may be entered only after the first state, or the second state may be entered even after a state other than the first state. In addition, the second state may be necessarily set after the first state, or the second state may not be set after the first state.

  The first state may be one of the states in which only the hold icon can be displayed, or may be one of the states in which a display other than the hold icon can be displayed. . The first state may be one of the states where the hold icon is always displayed, or may be one of the states where the hold icon may not be displayed.

  The second state may be one of the states where only the hold icon is not displayed, or may be one of the states where no display other than the hold icon is displayed. The second state may be one of the states where the hold icon is not always displayed, or may be one of the states where the hold icon may be displayed.

  Here, the first display may be a display of a character relating to a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon, or may be an effect display in the calibration of a character (navigator character) that is always displayed. .

  The second display may be a display that changes from a hold icon in the default display mode to a hold icon in the pre-read notice display mode.

  In addition, the third display may be a character display in preparation, a character display, a notification item display, or a timer display countdown in the timer notification display. It may be a display during execution.

  Further, a certain notice display may be a display during the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display, a mini game, or a notice effect.

Note that the third state is one of the states where the hold icon can be displayed,
The fourth state is one of the states where the hold icon is not displayed,
The third state is a state different from the first state,
The game machine according to claim 4, wherein the fourth state is a state different from the second state. It may be.

  In addition, “the gaming table, wherein the display of the third display that has been started in the first state may end in the first state. It may be.

  In addition, “the gaming table, wherein the display of the third display started in the first state may end in the third state. It may be.

  In addition, the gaming table, wherein the third display that has been started in the first state may end in the fourth state. It may be.

  Further, the first state may include a state in which the symbol variation display (decorative symbol, special symbol) is being executed.

  In addition, the gaming machine is configured such that a certain effect may be started after the certain notice display is displayed. It may be.

  A certain notice display is not limited to a true notice display, and may be a false notice display in which a certain effect is not started.

  Further, when a certain notice display is a mini game, a certain effect may be a display indicating the result of the mini game.

  The character is not limited to a person but may be a mini-item display such as a notice item.

  Further, “the display of the second display may be started after the display of the first display is started” is “the display of the second display is started after the display of the first display is started”. In some cases, the display for starting the display of “is sometimes made”. Here, the first display may or may not be displayed in another scene. The second display may or may not be displayed in another scene.

  Further, “it is configured to be in the second state after the first state” means “may be in the second state following the first state” It may be configured as described above.

  Further, there may be a case where the first state is followed by the second state without passing through another state (for example, the fourth state). Moreover, after passing through another state (for example, a 3rd state or a 3rd state) after a 1st state, you may transfer to a 2nd state. Moreover, in the state where one symbol variation display is made, the first state may be shifted to the second state.

  In addition, a certain effect may fade in while a certain notice display fades out.

In addition, “one of the plural types of displays is a sixth display [display of an image including a reserved icon display area, such as the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 193 (a)],
The sixth display is a display of an image displayed at least on the back of the hold icon,
The hold icon is configured to be displayed in a state where the sixth display is displayed [the hold icon is enabled to be displayed in a state where an image including a hold icon display area is displayed, for example, The hold icon can be displayed while the UI part UI3 is displayed.]
The hold icon is configured not to be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed. [The hold icon is not displayed when the image including the hold icon display area is not displayed. For example, FIG. ), The hold icon is not displayed in a state where the UI unit UI3 is hidden, and the like]. ”Was also explained.
According to this game table, there is a case where the hold icon can be made conspicuous.

  Here, the sixth display may be a display of an image displayed on the back side of only the hold icon, or may be a display of an image displayed on the back side of a display other than the hold icon. Further, the sixth display may be a display of an image that is always displayed at least on the back of the hold icon, or may be a display of an image that is not displayed at least on the back of the hold icon.

  Further, it may be configured such that only the hold icon can be displayed in the state where the sixth display is displayed, or a display other than the hold icon can be displayed in the state where the sixth display is displayed. It may be. In addition, the hold icon may be displayed without fail when the sixth display is displayed, or the hold icon may not be displayed when the sixth display is displayed. It may be configured.

  In addition, the hold icon may be configured to be displayed only when the sixth display is displayed, or the hold icon may be displayed even in a state other than the state where the sixth display is displayed. It may be.

  Further, it may be configured not to display only the hold icon when the sixth display is not displayed, or to display no display other than the hold icon when the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured. In addition, the hold icon may not be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed, and the hold icon may be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured.

  Also, the hold icon may be configured not to be displayed only when the sixth display is not displayed, or the hold icon is not displayed even in a state other than the state where the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured.

  Note that the sixth display may be a display that does not overlap with the decorative pattern being changed.

In addition, in a configuration in which a part of the sixth display is overlapped with a part of the third display, a part of the display different from the part of the third display is overlapped with the decorative design. May be.
The sixth display may include a display of a pedestal of a holding icon.
The sixth display may include a display of a pedestal of a variation icon.
The sixth display may be a display different from the display of the background image.

Further, in the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be overlapped with the third display and displayed [the hold icon is displayed. In this state, a part of the image including the hold icon display area is displayed so as to overlap the preparation display. For example, as shown in FIG. 193 (d), the preparation image RDY is a tutorial in the UI unit UI3. Etc. displayed on the display unit TT1]
The display position of the third display in the first state and the display position of the third display in the second state are the same display position [the display of the ready display in the state where the hold icon is displayed The position and the display position of the ready display in the non-display state of the hold icon are the same. For example, the display position of the ready image RDY shown in FIG. 193 (d) and the ready image shown in FIG. 193 (m) RDY display position is the same, etc.]. ”Was also explained.

  According to this game stand, by displaying the third display around the hold icon that is often seen, it is strongly impressed that the third display is not a pre-reading notice due to a change in the display mode of the hold icon. At the same time, there are cases where it is possible to prevent an oversight by notifying that a notice other than a change in the display mode of the hold icon is being made.

  Here, in the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed so as to overlap only the third display. The display of at least a part of the six displays may be displayed so as to overlap the display other than the third display. Further, at least a part of the display of the sixth display in the first state may be displayed so as to be always overlapped with the third display. It may be configured such that at least a part of the display overlaps with the third display and may not be displayed.

  Further, at least a part of the sixth display in the first state may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the third display. In the first state, the sixth display A display other than at least a part of the display may be displayed so as to overlap the third display.

In addition, the sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types.
One aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is the first aspect [default display aspect, for example, the default display aspect displayed in blue shown in FIG. 193 (a), etc.]
One aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is a second aspect [a display form of a notice or prefetch notice, such as a gold display form shown in FIG. 193 (e), etc.]
The case where the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. The display of the second display is configured to be easier to start [the display of the hold icon than when the image including the hold icon display area does not change from the default display form to the display form of the pre-reading notice. When the image including the area is changed from the default display mode to the display mode of the pre-reading notice, the hold icon of the display mode of the pre-reading notice is more easily displayed. For example, the UI unit UI3 illustrated in FIG. When displayed in a gold display mode, a red display mode hold icon is easily displayed, etc.]. ”Was also explained.

  Here, the sixth display may be able to be displayed only in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may be displayed in an aspect other than the first aspect and the second aspect. May be. Further, the sixth display may be always displayed in the first mode and the second mode, or may not be displayed in the first mode and the second mode. Good.

  In addition, when the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, the second display is more likely to be the second than when the sixth display is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. Only the display of the display may be easily started, or the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, compared to the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. The display display other than the second display may be easier to start when the change is made. In addition, when the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, the second display is more likely to be the second than when the sixth display is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. The display of the display may be started without fail, and the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode than when the sixth display is not changed from the first mode to the second mode. There may be a case where the display of the second display does not start when the change has occurred.

  In addition, the display of the second display may be started only when the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, and the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect. The display of the second display may be easily started even in cases other than the case where the mode is changed.

  In addition, “when the sixth display changes from the first mode to the second mode than when the sixth mode does not change from the first mode to the second mode. Is configured so that display of the second display is easier to start ”means that in a certain state, the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect. The display of the second display is more easily started when the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth display does not change. It may be.

In addition, the sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types.
One aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is the first aspect [default display aspect, for example, the default display aspect displayed in blue shown in FIG. 193 (a), etc.]
One aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is a second aspect [a display form of a notice or prefetch notice, such as a gold display form shown in FIG. 193 (e), etc.]
The case where the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. In the symbol variation display, the jackpot symbol is configured to be confirmed and displayed more easily [the hold icon display than when the image including the hold icon display area does not change from the default display mode to the display mode of the pre-reading notice. When the image including the area is changed from the default display mode to the display mode of the pre-reading notice, it is more likely to be a big hit, for example, when the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 193 (e) is displayed in the gold display mode Therefore, the display mode of the hold icon is likely to change, and therefore, the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon to be read ahead. There, etc.], the amusement machine, characterized in that. ”Was also explained.

  Here, the sixth display may be able to be displayed only in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may be displayed in an aspect other than the first aspect and the second aspect. May be. Further, the sixth display may be always displayed in the first mode and the second mode, or may not be displayed in the first mode and the second mode. Good.

  In addition, when the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, the symbol variation display is more effective than when the sixth display is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. Only the jackpot symbol may be confirmed and displayed in the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. In the case of changing to a mode, symbols other than the jackpot symbol may be more easily displayed in the symbol variation display. In addition, when the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, the symbol variation display is more effective than when the sixth display is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. The jackpot symbol may always be confirmed and the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode than when the sixth display is not changed from the first mode to the second mode. In the case of changing to, the big hit symbol may not be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display.

  Further, only when the sixth display changes from the first mode to the second mode, the jackpot symbol may be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display, or the sixth display is the first mode. Even in cases other than the case of changing from the second mode to the second mode, the big hit symbol may be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display.

  In addition, “when the sixth display changes from the first mode to the second mode than when the sixth mode does not change from the first mode to the second mode. Is configured so that the jackpot symbol is easier to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display ”means“ in a certain state, the sixth display changes from the first mode to the second mode. The case where the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode is configured so that the big hit symbol is more easily confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display than when the sixth mode is not changed. It may be.

  Further, “at least a part of the sixth display may be displayed so as to overlap the first display [at least part of the image including the hold icon display area is displayed. Overlapping with the character related to the change effect display (hold change prior effect display) of the hold icon display, for example, as shown in FIG. 193 (f), a part of the UI part UI3 overlies the ninja character NJ4. A game stand characterized by being wrapped. ”Was also explained.

  According to this game table, if attention is paid to the sixth display, various information can be obtained, and the game can be easily understood.

  Here, at least a part of the sixth display may be displayed so as to overlap only the first display, or at least a part of the sixth display may be displayed. You may be comprised so that it may be overlapped and displayed also on displays other than a 1st display. Further, at least a part of the sixth display may be displayed so as to be always overlapped with the first display, or at least a part of the sixth display may be displayed. It may be configured such that it may be overlapped with one display and not displayed.

  In addition, at least a part of the sixth display may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the first display, or other than at least a part of the sixth display. The display may be configured to be overlapped with the first display.

  Further, a part of the sixth display may be displayed so as to overlap the first display, or the entire display of the sixth display may be changed to the first display. You may be comprised so that it may be displayed by overlapping.

  Further, at least a part of the first display may be configured to overlap only with the sixth display, or at least a part of the first display may overlap with a display other than the sixth display. It may be configured as follows. Further, at least a part of the first display may be configured to always overlap the sixth display, and at least a part of the first display may not overlap the sixth display. May be configured.

  Further, only a part of the first display may be configured to overlap with the sixth display, or the entire first display may be configured to overlap with the sixth display. .

  In addition, in a state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be displayed without being overlapped with the first display. In the state where both the configured image [character including the hold icon display area and the character related to the change effect display of the hold icon display mode (hold change prior effect display) are displayed, the image including the hold icon display area is displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 208 (b1), the UI part UI3 is overlapped with the ninja character NJ4, which is not overlapped with the character related to the change effect display display (hold change prior effect display) of the hold icon. A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  According to this game stand, if attention is paid to the sixth display, it may seem that the third display seems to be a display related to the change display of the hold icon, but it is not so.

  Here, in a state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be displayed without being overlapped only with the first display. Or, in the state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be displayed without overlapping with the display other than the first display. May be configured. Further, in a state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be configured to be displayed without necessarily overlapping the first display, In a state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may not be displayed without being overlapped with the first display.

  In addition, in a state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, only the sixth display may be displayed without being overlapped with the first display. In addition, when both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the display other than the sixth display may be displayed without being overlapped with the first display. May be. Further, the sixth display may be displayed without being overlapped with the first display only when both the first display and the sixth display are displayed. In addition, even in a state other than the state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be displayed without overlapping the first display. It may be configured.

  In addition, only the first display and the sixth display may be configured not to overlap, or the display other than the first display and the sixth display may be configured not to overlap. . In addition, the first display and the sixth display may be configured not to overlap each other, or the first display and the sixth display may be configured to overlap. .

In addition, “a certain reach production [specific super reach production, for example, super reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIG. 193 (m) to FIG.
The first state is one of the states before the execution of the certain reach effect [the state before the start of the specific super reach effect, for example, FIG. The state before the super reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIG.
The second state is a state where the certain reach effect is being executed [a state where a specific super reach effect is being executed, for example, the super reach (swordsman shown in FIGS. 193 (m) to (q)). A game table characterized in that the reach is in a state of being executed. ”Was also explained.

  According to this game table, it may be easy to notice whether or not a certain reach state is reached.

  Here, only a certain reach effect may be configured to be executable, or a reach effect other than a certain reach effect may be configured to be executable. Further, a certain reach effect may be executed without fail, or a certain reach effect may not be executed.

  Further, the first state may be one of the states before the execution of only a certain reach effect, or before the execution of a reach effect other than a certain reach effect is started. It may be one of the states. Further, the first state may be one of the states before the execution of a certain reach effect is always started, or one of the states where the execution of a certain reach effect is not started. It may be in a state.

  Further, the second state may be a state where only a certain reach effect is being executed, or may be a state where a reach effect other than a certain reach effect is being executed. Further, the second state may be a state where a certain reach effect is always executed, or may be a state where a certain reach effect is not executed.

  Note that the first state may be a reach state before developing to SP reach in a certain change, and the second state may be a state during execution of SP reach in the certain change.

In addition, the first state is a state before the SP reach in a certain fluctuation and further reaches a reach state, and the second state is an SP in the certain fluctuation. It may be in a state where the reach is being executed.
That is, the first state and the second state may be one set.

  In addition, the game stand characterized in that the certain notice display is a timer notice display [for example, display of a timer notice effect shown in FIGS. 196 (b3) to (b5)]. ”Was also explained.

  Note that the timer notice display may have a plurality of modes. Here, the aspect includes at least one of color, time, size, and the like.

  Further, when there are a plurality of types of timer notice displays, a certain kind of timer notice display may be used.

  In addition, the gaming table is characterized in that the certain notice display is a mini game display [for example, a mini game display shown in FIGS. 193 (o) to (q)]. ”Was also explained.

  The mini game may have a plurality of modes. Here, the aspect includes at least one of color, time, size, and the like.

  Further, when there are a plurality of types of mini-games, it may be a certain type of mini-game.

In addition, one of the plural types of displays is a fourth display [one of the notices, for example, a button notice effect display by the big button 136aL shown in FIG. 196 (b6), etc.]
The gaming table is configured such that the fourth display may be displayed as the certain effect. ”Was also explained.

  Here, only a fourth display may be displayed as a certain effect, or a display other than the fourth display may be displayed as a certain effect. May be. Further, the fourth display may be always displayed as a certain effect, or the fourth display may not be displayed as a certain effect.

In addition, “one of the plural types of displays is a fifth display [one of the notices, for example, the display of the iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 193 (q), etc.],
The gaming table is configured such that the fifth display may be displayed as the certain effect. ”Was also explained.

  Here, only a fifth display may be displayed as a certain effect, or a display other than the fifth display may be displayed as a certain effect. May be. Further, the fifth display may be always displayed as a certain effect, or the fifth display may not be displayed as a certain effect.

  The fourth display and the fifth display may be different displays. Here, when the fifth display is displayed than when the fourth display is displayed, the jackpot symbol may be displayed more easily than when the fifth display is displayed. When the fourth display is displayed, the big hit symbol may be more easily displayed.

  In addition, when the fifth display is a display that appears only under special conditions, it is displayed only when at least one of the third display mode and a certain notice display mode is a certain mode There may be.

  Further, “the third display that has been displayed in a certain symbol variation display may be continuously displayed even after the next symbol variation display is started. [Preparation display in which display is started in a certain symbol variation display is continuously displayed after the next symbol variation display is started, for example, as shown in FIGS. 193 (i) to (j). In addition, the preparation image RDY is displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays, etc.].

  According to this gaming machine, the third display can give a sense of expectation over a plurality of variations, and the goal is also easy to understand.

  Here, there may be a case where the third display that has started display in a certain symbol variation display is continuously displayed only after the next symbol variation display to be started. There may be a case where the third display that is started in the symbol variation display is continuously displayed other than after the next symbol variation display is started. In addition, the third display that has been displayed in a certain symbol variation display may always be continuously displayed after the next symbol variation display is started, or in a certain symbol variation display. There may be a case where the third display from which display has started is not continuously displayed even after the next started symbol variation display is started.

  In addition, “the first display that has been displayed in a certain symbol variation display may be erased before the next symbol variation display to be started [a certain symbol The character related to the change effect display (hold change prior effect display) of the display mode of the hold icon that has been displayed in the variable display is deleted before the next symbol variable display is started. For example, FIG. 193 (f As shown in FIG. 5H, the ninja character NJ4 is not displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays, etc.]. ”Was also explained.

  Here, the first display that has started display in a certain symbol variation display may be configured to be deleted only before the next symbol variation display to be started, The first display that has been started in a certain symbol variation display may be erased other than before the next symbol variation display is started. In addition, the first display that is started in a certain symbol variation display may be necessarily deleted before the next symbol variation display is started, In the display, the first display that has started to be displayed may not be erased before the symbol variation display to be started next is started.

  It should be noted that a certain notice display and a certain effect may or may not be performed across the symbol variation display. Further, a certain notice display and a certain effect may or may not be performed from the first state to the second state (from the second state to the first state).

  In addition, “in the area where the third display is displayed, the certain effect may be executed [the notice is executed in the area where the display in preparation is displayed, For example, as shown in FIG. 199 (a4), there may be a case where a notice display including characters of “hot” may be displayed on the tutorial display portion TT1 in which the image RDY being prepared is displayed. Amusement stand. ”Was also explained.

  Here, there may be a case where only a certain effect is executed in the area where the third display is displayed, and an effect other than the certain effect is also executed in the area where the third display is displayed. There may be cases. In addition, a certain effect may always be executed in the area where the third display is displayed, or a certain effect may not be executed in the area where the third display is displayed.

  Further, a certain effect may be executed only in the area where the third display is displayed, or a certain effect is executed in an area other than the area where the third display is displayed. There may be cases.

In addition, it comprises “operating means [buttons and levers, for example, production buttons 136 etc.] that can be operated by the player
One display of the plurality of types of display is a seventh display [display of buttons and lever images, such as a large button image 136aL shown in FIG. 196 (b6), etc.]
The seventh display is a display prompting the operation of the operation means,
The seventh display is a display that is started after the third display is started [the display of images of buttons and levers is started after the preparation display is started, For example, as shown in FIGS. 196 (b1) to (b6), the decabutton image 136aL is displayed after the image RDY being prepared is displayed, etc.]
When the operation means is operated during the display of the seventh display, the certain effect is started. [When the button (or lever) is operated during the display of the image of the button or lever, the notice is given. For example, when the production button 136 is operated while the deca button image 136aL shown in FIG. 196 (b6) is displayed, the iron plate image TP is displayed]
The third display is a display that is terminated before the display of the seventh display is started. [Preparation display is completed before the button or lever image is displayed. For example, as shown in FIGS. 196 (b1) to (b6), the ready image RDY is displayed before the display of the decabutton image 136aL is started, etc.]. ”Was also explained.

  Here, the operation means may be capable of being operated only by the player, or may be operable by a person other than the player. The operation means may be always operated by the player, or may not be operated by the player.

  Further, the seventh display may prompt only the operation of the operation means, or may prompt other than the operation of the operation means. Further, the seventh display may always prompt the operation of the operation means, or may not prompt the operation of the operation means.

  The seventh display may be started only after the third display is started, or the display is started even after the third display is started. There may be. The seventh display may be one that always starts after the third display is started, or one that does not start after the third display starts. Also good.

  Also, an effect may be started whenever the operating means is operated during display of the seventh display, and an effect is not started when the operating means is operated during display of the seventh display. There may be cases. Further, if the operating means is operated only during the display of the seventh display, a certain effect may be started. If the operating means is operated other than during the display of the seventh display, a certain effect is generated. May be started. An effect may be started when the operating means is operated during the display of only the seventh display, and when the operating means is operated while a display other than the seventh display is also displayed, May be started.

  The third display may end only before the display of the seventh display is started, or the display is ended other than before the display of the seventh display is started. You may do. In addition, the third display may always end before the display of the seventh display is started, or the display does not end before the display of the seventh display starts. There may be.

  The seventh display may be a big button image of the normal button image and the big button image. Here, in the case where the normal button image is displayed and the case where the big button image is displayed, the case where the big button image is displayed may make it easier to confirm and display the big hit symbol.

  The seventh display may be a button image of a special color of the normal color of the button image and the special color of the button image. Here, when the normal color button image is displayed and when the special color button image is displayed, the special color button image is displayed more easily when the big hit symbol is more easily displayed. Good.

  Further, the seventh display may be an image of another operation means among the images of the operation means (second button, lever, etc.) different from the normal button image and the button. Here, in the case where the normal button image is displayed and the case where the image of the operation means different from the button is displayed, the case where the image of the operation means different from the button is displayed is the jackpot symbol. The confirmation display may be easy.

In addition, “one of the plural types of displays is an eighth display [for example, the combined animation shown in FIG. 196 (b4) to FIG.
The eighth display is a display for notifying that the display of the seventh display is started [For example, as shown in FIGS. 196 (b4) to (b6), the button notification effect is displayed by a combined animation. For example, the display of the deca button image 136aL is forewarned],
The gaming table according to claim 3, wherein the third display is a display that is ended during the display of the eighth display. ”Was also explained.

  Here, the eighth display may be a notice that only the start of the display of the seventh display is started, or a notice that other than the start of the display of the seventh display is started. It may be. In addition, the eighth display may always give notice that the display of the seventh display will start, or may not give notice that the display of the seventh display will start. There may be.

  Further, the third display may end only during display of the eighth display, or may end during display of a display other than the eighth display. Further, the third display may always end during display of the eighth display, or may not end during display of the eighth display.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is a ninth display [for example, the variation icon h0 shown in FIG. 203 (a)],
The ninth display is a display of a fluctuation icon,
Two third displays may be displayed [two preparation displays may be displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 206 (a), two preparation images RDY1 and RDY2 are displayed. Etc.],
After the display of one of the two third displays is finished, the display mode of the other changes, and after the display of one of the two preparation displays is finished, the other display is being prepared. The display mode of the display changes, for example, as shown in FIG. 203 (g), the image RDY under preparation is enlarged and displayed]
The third display whose display mode has changed overlaps with the ninth display [the display in preparation whose display mode has changed overlaps with the fluctuation icon, for example, as shown in FIG. 203 (g) The displayed game-ready image RDY overlaps the fluctuation icon h0, etc.]. ”Was also explained.

  According to this game table, it may be easy to notice that two third displays are displayed.

  Here, only two third displays may be displayed, three or more third displays may be displayed, and only one third display is displayed. It may be done.

  In addition, after the display of one of the two third displays is finished, only the display mode of the other may change, or after the display of one of the two third displays is finished, Display modes other than the above display modes may also be changed. In addition, after the display of one of the two third displays is finished, the display mode of the other may be changed, or after the display of one of the two third displays is finished, There may be a case where the display mode of does not change.

  In addition, the display mode of the other may change only after the display of one of the two third displays is finished, or even after the display of one of the two third displays is finished. The other display mode may change.

  Further, the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap only the ninth display, or the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap other displays than the ninth display. Good. In addition, the third display whose display mode has changed may necessarily overlap the ninth display, and the third display whose display mode has changed may not overlap the ninth display. .

  In addition, only the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap the ninth display, and displays other than the third display whose display mode has changed may also overlap the ninth display. .

  In addition, “when two of the third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays is completed in one symbol variation display [two displays in preparation are displayed. In the same symbol variation display, for example, as shown in FIGS. 203 (b) to (k), the two images RDY in preparation are all digested in the same symbol variation display. Etc.], a game table characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  Here, when two third displays are displayed, only the display of all the third displays may be completed in one symbol variation display, or when two third displays are displayed. The display of all the displays other than the third display may be ended in one symbol variation display. In addition, when two third displays are displayed, all the third displays may be terminated in one symbol variation display, or when two third displays are displayed. The display of all the third displays may not end in one symbol variation display.

  In addition, when two third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays may end only in one symbol variation display, or when two third displays are displayed. In the symbol variation display other than the one symbol variation display, the display of all the third displays may be terminated. Moreover, only when the third display is displayed, the display of all the third displays may be ended in one symbol variation display, or other than when the third display is displayed. In this case, all the third display may be ended in one symbol variation display.

“One of the plural types of displays is a tenth display [explanation display, for example,“ Panda is a master of the lord ”displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 193 (a)”. Displayed explanation display etc.]
The tenth display is an explanatory display,
The tenth display is a display that is displayed in the first display area of the display means when displayed [the explanatory display is displayed in a specific display area when displayed, for example, As shown in FIG. 193 (a), the explanation display is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1, etc.]
The third display is a display that may be displayed in the first display area [the preparation display is displayed in a specific display area in which an explanation display is displayed. For example, FIG. As shown in FIG. 4), the in-preparing image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 on which an explanation display is displayed. ”Was also explained.

  Here, the tenth display may be displayed only in the first display area of the display means when displayed, or the first display area in the display means when displayed. Other than that, it may be displayed. In addition, when displayed, it may be displayed in the first display area of the display means. When displayed, it may not be displayed in the first display area of the display means. It may be.

  Further, the third display may be displayed only in the first display area, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area. Also good. Further, the third display may be always displayed in the first display area, or may not be displayed in the first display area.

  In addition, “display indicating that the display of a certain notice display is waiting” is “character display being prepared [for example,“ preparing ”in the image RDY being prepared shown in FIG. 193 (d)]. A game stand characterized by “character display, etc.”. ”Was also explained.

In addition, “one of the plural types of displays is an eleventh display [ball-free display, such as a ball-free error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 224 (a1)],
The eleventh display is a display prompting the player to discharge the game ball [for example, in the ball removal error display ERR1, the character display “Please remove the ball” prompts removal of the ball, etc.]
In a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the third display is displayed so as to overlap the eleventh display. [In the state where both the preparation display and the ball removal display are displayed, at least a part of the preparation display overlaps the ball removal display. For example, as shown in FIG. 224 (a2) In addition, the ready image RDY is overlapped with the ball removal error display ERR1, etc.]. ”Was also explained.

  Here, the eleventh display may be a display prompting only to discharge the game ball, or may be a display prompting anything other than discharging the game ball. In addition, the eleventh display may be a display that always prompts the player to discharge the game ball, or a display that may not prompt the user to discharge the game ball.

  In addition, the eleventh display may be a display that prompts the player to discharge only the game ball, or a display that prompts the player to discharge other than the game ball.

  In addition, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the third display is displayed so as to overlap only the eleventh display. In the state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the third display overlaps with the display other than the eleventh display. It may be configured to be. In addition, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the third display is always overlapped with the eleventh display. In a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the third display is displayed without being overlapped with the eleventh display. It may be configured so that there may be cases.

  In addition, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, only at least a part of the third display is displayed so as to overlap the eleventh display. In the state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, the display other than at least a part of the third display is also overlapped with the eleventh display. It may be configured to be displayed. In addition, only in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the third display is displayed so as to overlap the eleventh display. Even in a state other than the state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the third display is overlapped with the eleventh display. May be configured to be displayed.

  In addition, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, a part of the third display is displayed so as to overlap the eleventh display. Alternatively, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, the entire display of the third display is displayed so as to overlap the eleventh display. May be.

  Further, in the state where both the certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the notice display is overlapped with the eleventh display. [In the state where both the mini game and timer notice and the ball removal display are displayed, at least a part of the mini game and timer notice is overlapped with the ball removal display. As shown in 224 (b1), the remaining time display meter MT4 is overlapped with the ball removal error display ERR1, etc.]. ”Was also explained.

  Here, in a state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the notice display is overlapped with only the eleventh display. It may be configured, and in a state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the notice display overlaps with a display other than the eleventh display. And may be configured to be displayed. Further, in a state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the notice display is surely overlapped with the eleventh display. In a state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the notice display is displayed without being overlapped with the eleventh display. It may be configured so that there may be cases.

  In addition, in a state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the notice display is overlapped with the eleventh display. In the state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, the display other than at least a part of the certain notice display is also overlapped with the eleventh display. It may be configured to be displayed. Further, only in a state where both a certain notice display and an eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of a certain notice display is displayed so as to overlap the eleventh display. Even in a state other than the state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the certain notice display is overlapped with the eleventh display. May be configured to be displayed.

  In addition, in a state where both a certain notice display and an eleventh display are displayed, a part of the notice display is overlapped with the eleventh display. Alternatively, in a state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, the whole display of the certain notice display is displayed so as to overlap the eleventh display. May be.

  In addition, the game table is a pachinko machine [a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100 or the like]. ”Was also explained.

  In addition, the game table is a slot machine [rotating-type game machine]. ”Was also explained.

  Note that the hold icon may be used in a display indicating that the start of a certain effect in the slot machine is being held, but this can be realized according to this game machine.

  Next, another specific example of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 229 to 248. It should be noted that the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 229 to 248 are used only in the description of the embodiment shown in FIGS. 229 to 248 in principle, and even when the overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings. The reference numerals 229 to 248 are prioritized.

  First, the effect display on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of this example will be described with reference to FIG. At the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, there are a special figure 1 hold number aa1, a special figure 4 aa2 figure, a special figure 2 hold number aa3, a special figure 2 figure aa4, and a general figure hold number aa5. The normal 4th symbol aa6 is displayed. The special figure 1 hold number aa1 is a display that expresses the hold number of the special figure 1 with a number, the special figure 2 hold number aa3 is a display that shows the hold number of the special figure 2 with a number, and the general figure hold number aa5 is a normal figure. It is the display which shows the number of hold of the number. Further, a variation icon display area c capable of displaying a variation icon is provided at the lower right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area c is a hold icon display area. In the example shown in FIG. 229 (1), the special figure 1 hold icons a1, a2, a3, a4 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1, b2, b3 Are displayed side by side in this order so as to alternate from the left. The pachinko machine 100 of this example is a winning order variation machine in which a mechanism for alternately winning game balls is provided in the special figure 1 starting opening and the special figure 2 starting opening in the game board, and the suspension is digested in the winning order. . In addition, a horizontally long rectangular display area d is provided at the lower right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the display area d, tutorial display, message display, and the like are displayed. When there is no content to be displayed in particular, a character string image of “in preparation” is displayed.

  Next, an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 229 (1) to (38) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 229 (1) shows a state where the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 4—decoration 8”, which is the off symbol mode, is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 229 (2) shows a state in which the variation display of the decorative symbol and the variation display of the fourth symbol are started in accordance with the special symbol 1 display device 212 (not shown) being started. Yes. Also, with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the hold icon reduction animation is executed, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 displayed in the hold icon display area becomes the change icon c1 and moves to the change icon display area c. Then, the special figure 1 hold icons a2 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 move to the left.

  FIG. 229 (3) shows a state in which a button image f1 simulating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a meter image f2 indicating an operation effective period during which the operation of the chance button 136 is valid are displayed. The button image f1 and the meter image f2 are displays that prompt the player to operate the chance button 136.

  FIG. 229 (4) shows a state in which the operation effective period has started. The remaining time of the operation effective period indicated by the meter image f2 is reduced.

  FIG. 229 (5) shows a state where the player is operating the chance button 136. In this example, the chance button 136 is pressed once. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation valid period, the display of the conversation notice display is started. When the chance button 136 is not pressed once during the operation valid period, the conversation notice display may be started, or the conversation notice display may not be started with a predetermined probability.

FIG. 229 (6) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is started. In the conversation notice display of this example, first, a character image (2) (hereinafter referred to as “爺”) g2 is displayed.爺 g2 appears from the upper right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.
FIG. 229 (7) shows a state where 爺 g2 is moving to the left.
FIG. 229 (8) shows a state where 爺 g2 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 229 (9) shows a state in which 爺 g2 changes to a character image (hereinafter referred to as “dono”) g1 while 爺 g2 moves to the left. The shrine g1 has moved to the left.

  FIG. 229 (10) shows a state where the gutter g1 is stopped. As shown in FIGS. 229 (6) to (10), the decorative symbol display device 208 can display a moving animation of a character. The moving animation of the character in this example is a display including the gutter g1 and 爺 g2.

  FIG. 229 (11) shows a state in which the display of the character name display (hereinafter referred to as “character name display”) h1 including the character image of “dono” is started. The character name display h1 appears from the upper right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The character name display h1 has moved to the left.

  FIG. 229 (12) shows a state in which the balloon display i1 has started to be displayed. The balloon display i1 appears from the center of the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The balloon display i1 has moved to the left.

  FIG. 229 (13) shows a state where the character name display h1 and the balloon display i1 are moved to the left.

  FIG. 229 (14) shows a state where the character name display h1 and the balloon display i1 are moved to the left.

  FIG. 229 (15) shows a state where the character name display h1 and the balloon display i1 are stopped. The character name display h1 stops above the shrine g1, and the balloon display i1 stops near the right side of the shrine g1.

  FIG. 229 (16) shows a state in which a display of a dialogue that is a dialogue (line) of the gutter g 1 is started to be displayed in the balloon display i 1. The dialogue display starts from the left side of the character string image. In FIG. 229 (16), a character image of “noon” is displayed.

  FIG. 229 (17) shows a state in which a speech display is displayed in the balloon display i1. In FIG. 229 (17), a character string image of “AM” is displayed.

  FIG. 229 (18) shows a state in which a speech display is displayed in the balloon display i1. In FIG. 229 (18), a character string image of “Morning in the morning” is displayed.

  FIG. 229 (19) shows a state where the display of the speech display in the balloon display i1 is completed. In the balloon display i, a character string image of “morning weather” and a symbol of “sun mark” are displayed as a speech display.

  FIG. 229 (20) shows a state in which a button image f1 simulating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a meter image f2 indicating the operation valid period during which the operation of the chance button 136 is valid are displayed.

  FIG. 229 (21) shows a state in which the operation valid period has started. The remaining time of the operation effective period indicated by the meter image f2 is reduced.

  FIG. 229 (22) shows a state where the player is operating the chance button 136. In this example, the chance button 136 is pressed once. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation valid period, the conversation notice display is continuously started. When the chance button 136 is not pressed once during the operation valid period, the conversation notice display may be continuously displayed, or the conversation notice display may be terminated without continuing with a predetermined probability. Good.

FIG. 229 (23) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is continued. In this example, first, when the conversation notice display is continued, 爺 g2 is displayed.爺 g2 appears from the lower left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.
FIG. 229 (24) shows a state where 爺 g2 is moving to the right.
FIG. 229 (25) shows a state where 爺 g2 is moving to the right.
FIG. 229 (26) shows a state where 爺 g2 is moving to the right.
FIG. 229 (27) shows a state where 爺 g2 is stopped.

  FIG. 229 (28) shows a state in which the display of the character name h2 including the character image “爺” is started. The character name display h2 appears from the center of the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The character name display h2 has moved to the right.

  FIG. 229 (29) shows a state in which the balloon display i2 has started to be displayed. The balloon display i2 appears from the lower left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The balloon display i2 has moved to the right.

  FIG. 229 (30) shows a state in which the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 are moved to the right.

  FIG. 229 (31) shows a state where the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 are moved to the right.

  FIG. 229 (32) shows a state where the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 are stopped. The character name display h2 stops above 爺 g2, and the balloon display i2 stops near the left side of 爺 g2.

  FIG. 229 (33) shows a state in which the display of the speech display, which is the speech (diagram) of 爺 g 2, is started in the balloon display i 2. The dialogue display starts from the left side of the character string image. In FIG. 229 (33), a character image of “O” is displayed.

  FIG. 229 (34) shows a state in which a speech display is displayed in the balloon display i2. In FIG. 229 (34), a character string image of “noon” is displayed.

  FIG. 229 (35) shows a state in which a speech display is displayed in the balloon display i2. In FIG. 229 (35), a character string image “Noon weather is” is displayed.

  FIG. 229 (36) shows a state where the display of the speech display in the balloon display i2 is completed. In the balloon display i2, a character image of “noon weather” and a symbol of “cloudy mark” are displayed as a speech display.

  FIG. 229 (37) shows a state in which “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208 a after the conversation notice display is completed.

  FIG. 229 (38) shows a state in which “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c after the conversation notice display is completed. Although the subsequent illustration is omitted, in this example, the reach effect at “decoration 7” is started thereafter. Note that the reach effect may not be started after the end of the conversation notice display.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present example has a first display (first line notice display shown in FIG. 229 (19)) and a second display (second line shown in FIG. 229 (36)). (Notice display) can be displayed. The first display includes the gutter g1, the balloon display i1, the dialogue display in the balloon display i1, and the character name display h1 displayed in FIG. 229 (19). The second display includes 爺 g2, the balloon display i2, the dialogue display in the balloon display i2, and the character name display h2 displayed in FIG. 229 (36). The first conversation notice display is displayed by the first display and the second display. In addition, the first display and the second display in this example are the notices of the change. Moreover, in this example, after 爺 g2 is displayed in FIGS. 229 (6) to (8), the first display is displayed.爺 g2 may be displayed before the first display. According to the pachinko machine 100 of this example, the player can expect that the second display may be displayed by notifying that the second display including 爺 g2 is displayed, There are cases where the interest of the player can be improved.

  Next, an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 230 (1) to (38). 230 (1) to (38) show an example of the performance of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. Since the states shown in FIGS. 230 (1) to 230 (5) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 229 (1) to (5), the description thereof is omitted.

FIG. 230 (6) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is started. In the conversation advance notice display of this example, first, the hall g1 is displayed. The gutter g1 appears from the upper right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.
230 (7) to 230 (10) show a state in which the gutter g1 is moving to the left.

  Since the states shown in FIGS. 230 (10) to (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 229 (10) to (38), description thereof will be omitted. In this example, in FIG. 230 (19), the ton g1 is displayed from the beginning before the ton display is displayed, and other characters such as 爺 g2 are not displayed. As described above, 爺 g2 may not be displayed before the display of the first display.

  Next, an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 231 (1) to (38). FIGS. 231 (1) to (38) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. Since the states shown in FIGS. 231 (1) to (22) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 229 (1) to (22), description thereof is omitted.

FIG. 231 (23) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is continued. In this example, first, when the conversation notice display is continued, a princess character image (hereinafter referred to as “princess”) g3 is displayed. The princess g3 appears from the lower left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.
FIG. 231 (24) shows a state where the princess g3 is moving rightward.
FIG. 231 (25) shows a state where the princess g3 is moving rightward.

  FIG. 231 (26) shows a state in which the princess g3 is changed to 爺 g2 while the princess g3 is moving rightward.爺 g2 has moved to the right.

  Since the states shown in FIGS. 231 (27) to (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 229 (27) to (38), description thereof will be omitted. In this example, the princess g3 is a character that does not appear in the second display shown in FIG. 231 (36). According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present example, the character is different when the second display is displayed by performing the gusset notice that displays the princess g3 that does not appear in the second display shown in FIG. 231 (36). In some cases, the player's intention can be struck and the player's interest can be improved.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 232 (1) to (38). FIGS. 232 (1) to (38) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. Since the states shown in FIGS. 232 (1) to (5) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 229 (1) to (5), description thereof is omitted.

FIG. 232 (6) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is started. In the conversation notice display of this example, the princess g3 is displayed first. The princess g3 appears from the upper right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.
FIG. 232 (7) shows a state where the princess g3 is moving to the left.
FIG. 232 (8) shows a state where the princess g3 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 232 (9) shows a state in which the princess g3 is changed to the lord g1 while the princess g3 is moving to the left. The shrine g1 has moved to the left.

  Since the states shown in FIGS. 232 (10) to (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 229 (10) to (38), description thereof will be omitted. In this example, the princess g3 is a character that does not appear in the first display shown in FIG. According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present example, the character is different when the first display is displayed by performing the gusset notice that displays the princess g3 that does not appear in the first display shown in FIG. 232 (10). In some cases, the player's intention can be struck and the player's interest can be improved.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 233 (1) to (38) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. Since the states shown in FIGS. 233 (1) to (25) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 229 (1) to (25), description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 233 (26) shows a state in which 爺 g2 changes to princess g3 while 爺 g2 moves to the right. Princess g3 is moving to the right.
FIG. 233 (27) shows a state where the princess g3 is stopped.

  FIG. 233 (28) shows a state in which the display of the character name h3 including the character image “Princess” is started. The character name display h3 appears from the center of the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The character name display h3 has moved to the right.

  FIG. 233 (29) shows a state where the balloon display i3 has been displayed. The balloon display i3 appears from the lower left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The balloon display i3 has moved to the right.

  FIG. 233 (30) shows a state where the character name display h3 and the balloon display i3 are moved to the right.

  FIG. 233 (31) shows a state where the character name display h3 and the balloon display i3 are moved to the right.

  FIG. 233 (32) shows a state where the character name display h3 and the balloon display i3 are stopped. The character name display h3 stops above the princess g3, and the balloon display i3 stops near the left side of the princess g3.

  FIG. 233 (33) shows a state in which the display of the dialogue that is the dialogue (sentence) of the princess g3 is started in the balloon display i3. The dialogue display starts from the left side of the character string image. In FIG. 233 (33), the character image “PM” is displayed.

  FIG. 233 (34) shows a state where a speech display is displayed in the balloon display i3. In FIG. 233 (34), the character string image “Afternoon weather is” is displayed.

  FIG. 233 (35) shows a state where a speech display is displayed in the balloon display i3. In FIG. 233 (35), the character string image “Afternoon weather is” is displayed.

  FIG. 233 (36) shows a state where the display of the speech display in the balloon display i3 is completed. In the balloon display i3, a text image of “afternoon weather” and a symbol of “rain mark” are displayed as a speech display.

  Since the states shown in FIGS. 233 (37) and (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 229 (37) and (38), description thereof is omitted. The decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present example includes a first display (first line notice display shown in FIG. 233 (19)) and a second display (second line shown in FIG. 233 (36)). (Notice display) can be displayed. The first display includes the gutter g1, the balloon display i1, the dialogue display in the balloon display i1, and the character name display h1 displayed in FIG. 233 (19). The second display includes the princess g3, the balloon display i3, the dialogue display in the balloon display i3, and the character name display h3 displayed in FIG. 233 (36). The first conversation notice display is displayed by the first display and the second display. In addition, the first display and the second display in this example are the notices of the change. In this example, 爺 g2 is displayed in FIGS. 233 (23) to (25) after 爺 g2 is displayed in FIGS. 233 (6) to (8), but 爺 g2 is displayed in FIG. ) Is a Gase notice that does not appear in the conversation notice display shown in FIG. According to the pachinko machine 100 of this example, it is possible to poke the player's intention by changing the character when the conversation notice display is displayed by performing the gasse notice that displays 爺 g2 that does not appear in the conversation notice display. In some cases, the interest of the player can be improved.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 234 (1) to (38) show example effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. Since the states shown in FIGS. 234 (1) to (5) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 229 (1) to (5), description thereof is omitted.

FIG. 234 (6) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is started. In the conversation notice display of this example, 爺 g2 is first displayed.爺 g2 appears from the upper right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.
FIG. 234 (7) shows a state where 爺 g2 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 234 (8) shows a state in which 爺 g2 changes to princess g3 while 爺 g2 moves to the left. Princess g3 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 234 (9) shows a state in which the princess g3 is changed to the lord g1 while the princess g3 is moving to the left. The shrine g1 has moved to the left.

  Since the states shown in FIGS. 234 (10) to (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 229 (10) to (38), description thereof will be omitted. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 234 (6) to (10), the character image changes twice during the movement animation (moving display) of the character, and the moving display of the three character images is displayed. In this example, 爺 g2, princess g3, and lord g1 are displayed in this order, but may be displayed in the order of princess g3, 姫 g2, and lord g1. Further, four or more character images may be displayed during the moving display of the character image.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 235 (1) to (38), an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment will be described. 235 (1) to (38) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. Since the states shown in FIGS. 235 (1) to (5) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 229 (1) to (5), description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 235 (6) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is started. In the conversation advance notice display of this example, first, the hall g1 is displayed. The gutter g1 appears from the upper right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 235 (7) shows a state where the gutter g1 is changed to 爺 g2 while the gutter g1 is moving to the left.爺 g2 has moved to the left.

  FIG. 235 (8) shows a state in which 爺 g2 changes to princess g3 while 爺 g2 moves to the left. Princess g3 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 235 (9) shows a state in which the princess g3 is changed to the lord g1 while the princess g3 is moving to the left. The shrine g1 has moved to the left.

  Since the states shown in FIGS. 235 (10) to (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 229 (10) to (38), description thereof will be omitted. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 235 (6) to (10), during the character's moving animation display, the character image makes a round of three characters in the order of lord g1, 爺 g2, princess g3, and lord g1. Is displayed. It should be noted that four or more characters may be displayed so as to make one round or half of the movement animation display of the character. Further, a plurality of character images may be displayed in a circle during the character movement animation display shown in FIGS. 235 (23) to (27).

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 235 (1) to (38) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. Since the states shown in FIGS. 235 (1) to (5) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 229 (1) to (5), description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 236 (6) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is started. In the conversation advance notice display of this example, first, the hall g1 is displayed. The gutter g1 appears from the upper right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 236 (7) shows a state in which the gutter g1 is changed to 爺 g2 while the gutter g1 is moving to the left.爺 g2 has moved to the left. Note that the gutter g1 may change to 爺 g2 when the entire gutter g1 shown in FIG. 236 (6) is not displayed.

  FIG. 236 (8) shows a state in which 爺 g2 changes to princess g3 while 爺 g2 moves to the left. Princess g3 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 236 (9) shows a state in which the princess g3 is changed to 爺 g2 while the princess g3 is moving to the left. The shrine g1 has moved to the left.

  FIG. 236 (10) shows a state in which the gutter g1 is stopped after the gutter g2 is changed to the gutter g1 while the gutter g2 is moving to the left. It should be noted that it may be changed to g1 after heel g2 stops or simultaneously with the stop.

  Since the states shown in FIGS. 236 (11) to (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 229 (11) to (38), description thereof will be omitted. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 236 (6) to (10), the character image is displayed in the order of three characters g, g, g2, princess g3, g2, g Is displayed. The character may change in the reverse order, like princess g3, 爺 g2, and lord g1, after changing in the order of lord g1, 爺 g2, and princess g3. In addition, during the character movement animation display, four or more characters may make a round and may be displayed so as to change in the reverse direction. Also, during the character movement animation display shown in FIGS. 236 (23) to (27), a display in which the characters change as shown in FIGS. 236 (6) to (10) may be displayed.

  Next, an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 237 (1) to (38). 237 (1) to (38) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. Since the states shown in FIGS. 237 (1) to (5) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 229 (1) to (5), description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 237 (6) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is started. In the conversation notice display of this example, 爺 g2 is first displayed.爺 g2 appears from the upper right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 237 (7) shows a state in which an animation in which the expression of 爺 g2 changes is displayed while 爺 g2 moves to the left. Thus, an animation in which the aspect of 爺 g2 changes during the movement animation of 爺 g2 may be displayed.

  FIG. 237 (8) shows a state where 爺 g2 is changed to 殿 g1 while 爺 g2 is moving to the left. The shrine g1 has moved to the left.

  FIG. 237 (9) shows a state in which an animation in which the expression of the lord g1 changes while the lord g1 is moving to the left is displayed. In this way, an animation in which the mode of the hall 1 changes during the movement animation of the hall g1 may be displayed.

  FIG. 237 (10) shows a state in which the gutter g1 stops after the expression of the gutter g1 changes. It should be noted that an animation in which the facial expression of the glute g1 changes after the glaze g1 stops or at the same time as the stop may be displayed. In this example, in the character movement animation, the display period of the gutter g1 displayed in the conversation notice shown in FIG. 237 (19) is longer than the display period of 爺 g2. Thus, in the character movement animation, the character display period displayed in the conversation notice display may be the longest.

  Since the states shown in FIGS. 237 (11) to (22) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 229 (11) to (22), description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 237 (23) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is continued. In this example, first, when the conversation notice display is continued, 爺 g2 is displayed.爺 g2 appears from the lower left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 237 (24) shows a state in which an animation in which the expression of 爺 g2 changes is displayed while 爺 g2 moves to the right. Thus, an animation in which the aspect of 爺 g2 changes during the movement animation of 爺 g2 may be displayed.

  FIG. 237 (25) shows a state in which an animation in which the expression of 爺 g2 changes is displayed while 爺 g2 moves to the right. Thus, an animation in which the aspect of 爺 g2 changes during the movement animation of 爺 g2 may be displayed.

  FIG. 237 (26) shows a state in which an animation in which the expression of 爺 g2 changes is displayed while 爺 g2 moves to the right. In this way, an animation in which the mode of the hall 1 changes during the movement animation of the hall g1 may be displayed.

  FIG. 237 (27) shows a state where 爺 g2 is stopped. An animation in which the facial expression of 爺 g2 changes after 表示 g2 stops or simultaneously with the stop may be displayed.

  Since the states shown in FIGS. 237 (28) to (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 229 (38) to (38), description thereof will be omitted. As in this example, a display in which the character aspect (for example, facial expression) changes may be displayed during the display of the movement animation of the character.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 238 (1) to (40) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. Since the state shown in FIG. 238 (1) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 232 (36), description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 238 (2) shows a state in which “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a.

  FIG. 238 (3) shows a state in which “decoration 8” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 238 (4) shows a state in which a pseudo-continuous decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208 a. The pseudo-ream decorative pattern is displayed when the pseudo-ream effect display is performed. The pseudo-ream is an effect of performing pseudo-variation as if the decorative symbol variation display was performed a plurality of times during one special figure variation game, and is a notice effect of the variation. After the decoration pattern of the pseudo ream is displayed, the second display of the variable display of the decoration ream (second time of the pseudo ream) is started.

  FIG. 238 (5) shows a state in which the second pseudo-continuation is started. In addition, the movable body 700 shown in FIG. 175 has moved upward and stopped. In addition, during the second execution of the pseudo-continuous, “× 2” is displayed in the display area d to notify that the second time of the pseudo-continuous is being executed.

  FIG. 238 (6) shows a state in which a button image f1 simulating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a meter image f2 indicating an operation effective period during which the operation of the chance button 136 is effective are displayed. The button image f1 and the meter image f2 are displays that prompt the player to operate the chance button 136.

  FIG. 238 (7) shows a state in which the operation valid period has started. The remaining time of the operation effective period indicated by the meter image f2 is reduced.

  FIG. 238 (8) shows a state where the player is operating the chance button 136. In this example, the chance button 136 is pressed once. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation valid period, the second conversation notice display is displayed. Note that the first conversation notice display is the conversation notice display shown in FIG. When the chance button 136 is not pressed once during the operation valid period, the second conversation notice display may be displayed, or the second conversation notice display is not started with a predetermined probability. May be.

FIG. 238 (9) shows a state in which the second conversation notice display is started. In the conversation notice display of this example, the princess g3 is displayed first. The princess g3 appears from the upper right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.
FIG. 238 (10) shows a state where the princess g3 is moving to the left.
FIG. 238 (11) shows a state where the princess g3 is moving to the left.
FIG. 238 (12) shows a state where the princess g3 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 238 (13) shows a state where the princess g3 is stopped. 238 (9) to (13) are shown in FIGS. 229 (6) to (10), 231 (6) to (10), 232 (6) to (10), FIG. 233 (6) to (10), FIG. 234 (6) to (10), FIG. 235 (6) to (10), FIG. 236 (6) to (10), and FIG. 237 (6) to (10) An animation similar to the animation may be displayed.

  FIG. 238 (14) shows a state where the display of the character name display h3 is started. The character name display h3 appears from the upper right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The character name display h3 has moved to the left.

  FIG. 238 (15) shows a state where the balloon display i3 has been displayed. The balloon display i3 appears from the center of the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The balloon display i3 has moved to the left.

  FIG. 238 (16) shows a state where the character name display h3 and the balloon display i3 are moved to the left.

  FIG. 238 (17) shows a state where the character name display h3 and the balloon display i3 are moved to the left.

  FIG. 238 (18) shows a state where the character name display h3 and the balloon display i3 are stopped. The character name display h3 stops above the princess g3, and the balloon display i3 stops near the right side of the princess g3.

  FIG. 238 (19) shows a state in which the display of the dialogue that is the dialogue (sentence) of the princess g3 is started in the balloon display i3. The dialogue display starts from the left side of the character string image. In FIG. 238 (19), a character image of “noon” is displayed.

  FIG. 238 (20) shows a state in which a speech display is displayed in the balloon display i3. In FIG. 238 (21), a character string image of “afternoon” is displayed.

  FIG. 238 (21) shows a state in which a speech display is displayed in the balloon display i3. In FIG. 238 (21), a character string image of “Afternoon weather is” is displayed.

  FIG. 238 (22) shows a state where the display of the speech display in the balloon display i3 is completed. In the balloon display i3, a character string image of “afternoon weather is” and a symbol of “rain mark” are displayed as a speech display.

  FIG. 238 (23) shows a state in which a button image f1 simulating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a meter image f2 indicating an operation valid period during which the operation of the chance button 136 is valid are displayed.

  FIG. 238 (24) shows a state in which the operation effective period is started. The remaining time of the operation effective period indicated by the meter image f2 is reduced.

  FIG. 238 (25) shows a state where the player is operating the chance button 136. In this example, the chance button 136 is pressed once. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation valid period, the conversation notice display is continuously started. When the chance button 136 is not pressed once during the operation valid period, the conversation notice display may be continuously displayed, or the conversation notice display may be terminated without continuing with a predetermined probability. Good.

FIG. 238 (26) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is continued. In this example, first, when the conversation notice display is continued, 爺 g2 is displayed.爺 g2 appears from the lower left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.
FIG. 238 (27) shows a state where 爺 g2 is moving to the right.
FIG. 238 (28) shows a state where 爺 g2 is moving to the right.
FIG. 238 (29) shows a state where 爺 g2 is moving to the right.
FIG. 238 (30) shows a state where 爺 g2 is stopped.

  FIG. 238 (31) shows a state in which the display of the character name h2 including the character image “爺” is started. The character name display h2 appears from the center of the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The character name display h2 has moved to the right.

  FIG. 238 (32) shows a state in which the display of the balloon display i2 is started. The balloon display i2 appears from the lower left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The balloon display i2 has moved to the right.

  FIG. 238 (33) shows a state where the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 are moved to the right.

  FIG. 238 (34) shows a state where the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 are moved to the right.

  FIG. 238 (35) shows a state where the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 are stopped. The character name display h2 stops above 爺 g2, and the balloon display i2 stops near the left side of 爺 g2.

  FIG. 238 (36) shows a state in which the display of the dialogue that is the dialogue (sentence) of 爺 g 2 is started in the balloon display i 2. The dialogue display starts from the left side of the character string image. In FIG. 238 (36), a character image of “O” is displayed.

  FIG. 238 (37) shows a state in which a speech display is displayed in the balloon display i2. In FIG. 238 (37), a character string image of “noon” is displayed.

  FIG. 238 (38) shows a state in which a speech display is displayed in the balloon display i2. In FIG. 238 (38), a character string image of “noon weather is” is displayed.

  FIG. 238 (39) shows a state where the display of the speech display in the balloon display i2 is completed. In the balloon display i2, a character image of “noon weather” and a symbol of “cloudy mark” are displayed as a speech display. In addition, the mode of the balloon display i2 changes from white to blue, and the mode of the character name display h2 changes from white to blue. The big hit reliability is set higher in blue than in white. In this way, in the second conversation notice display, a display with high jackpot reliability may be displayed.

  FIG. 238 (40) shows a state in which “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c after the conversation notice display ends. Although the subsequent illustration is omitted, in this example, the reach effect at “decoration 7” is started thereafter.

  In this example, after the first conversation notice display (first conversation notice display) shown in FIG. 238 (1) is displayed, the second conversation notice display (second conversation notice display shown in FIG. 238 (39) is displayed. (Conversation notice display) is displayed. As described above, a plurality of conversation notice displays may be displayed in one special figure variable game. Note that the greater the number of conversation announcements displayed, the higher the jackpot reliability may be set.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 239 (1) to (38). 239 (1) to (38) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. Since the states shown in FIGS. 239 (1) to (15) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 229 (1) to (15), description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 239 (16) to (18) show a state in which a moving display (moving animation) of the dialogue display is displayed. The serif display moves from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 toward the left balloon display h1. In this way, the movement animation of the serif display may be displayed.

  FIG. 239 (19) shows a state where the speech display is stopped in the balloon display h1.

  Since the states shown in FIGS. 239 (20) to (32) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 229 (20) to (32), description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 239 (33) to (35) show a state in which the movement display (movement animation) of the dialogue display is displayed. The serif display moves from the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 toward the left balloon display h2. In this way, the movement animation of the serif display may be displayed.

  FIG. 239 (36) shows a state where the speech display is stopped in the balloon display h1.

  Since the states shown in FIGS. 239 (37) and (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 229 (37) and (38), description thereof will be omitted. In this example, a moving animation with a dialogue display is displayed. In this way, the movement animation of the serif display may be displayed.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 240 (1) to (38). 240 (1) to 240 (38) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. The states shown in FIGS. 240 (1) to 240 (5) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 229 (1) to (5), and a description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 240 (6) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is started. In the conversation notice display of this example, 爺 g2 is displayed.爺 g2 appears from the lower right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.
FIG. 240 (7) shows a state where 爺 g2 is moving to the left.
FIG. 240 (8) shows a state where 爺 g2 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 240 (9) shows a state in which 爺 g2 changes to a character image (hereinafter referred to as “dono”) g1 while 爺 g2 moves to the left. The shrine g1 has moved to the left.

  FIG. 240 (10) shows a state where the gutter g1 is stopped. 240 (6) to (10), the decorative symbol display device 208 can display a moving animation of a character. The moving animation of the character in this example is a display including the gutter g1 and 爺 g2.

  FIG. 240 (11) shows a state in which the display of the character name display (hereinafter referred to as “character name display”) h1 including the character image “Tono” is started. The character name display h1 appears from the center of the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The character name display h1 has moved to the left.

  FIG. 240 (12) shows a state in which the balloon display i1 has started to be displayed. The balloon display i1 appears from the lower right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The balloon display i1 has moved to the left.

  FIG. 240 (13) shows a state in which the character name display h1 and the balloon display i1 are moved to the left.

  FIG. 240 (14) shows a state in which the character name display h1 and the balloon display i1 are moved to the left.

  FIG. 240 (15) shows a state where the character name display h1 and the balloon display i1 are stopped. The character name display h1 stops above the shrine g1, and the balloon display i1 stops near the right side of the shrine g1.

  FIG. 240 (16) shows a state in which the display of the dialogue that is a dialogue (dialogue) of the gutter g1 is started in the balloon display i1. The dialogue display starts from the left side of the character string image. In FIG. 240 (16), a character image of “noon” is displayed.

  FIG. 240 (17) shows a state in which a speech display is displayed in the balloon display i1. In FIG. 240 (17), a character string image of “AM” is displayed.

  FIG. 240 (18) shows a state where a speech display is displayed in the balloon display i1. In FIG. 240 (18), a character string image of “Morning in the morning” is displayed.

  FIG. 240 (19) shows a state where the display of the speech display in the balloon display i1 is completed. In the balloon display i, a character string image of “morning weather” and a symbol of “sun mark” are displayed as a speech display. In this example, as compared with FIG. 229 (19), the lord g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display are displayed below the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 240 (20) shows a state in which a button image f1 simulating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a meter image f2 indicating an operation valid period during which the operation of the chance button 136 is valid are displayed. The button image f1 and the meter image f2 are displayed so as to overlap a part of the balloon display h1 (a part of the first display).

  FIG. 240 (21) shows a state in which the operation valid period is started. The remaining time of the operation effective period indicated by the meter image f2 is reduced.

  FIG. 240 (22) shows a state where the player is operating the chance button 136. In this example, the chance button 136 is pressed once. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation valid period, the conversation notice display is continuously started. When the chance button 136 is not pressed once during the operation valid period, the conversation notice display may be continuously displayed, or the conversation notice display may be terminated without continuing with a predetermined probability. Good.

  FIG. 240 (23) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is continued. In this example, first, when the conversation notice display is continued, 爺 g2 is displayed.爺 g2 appears from the lower left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Simultaneously with the appearance of 爺 g2, an animation is displayed in which the gutter g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display move upward. The start timing of the animation may be before the appearance of 爺 g2 or after the appearance of 爺 g2.

  FIG. 240 (24) shows a state in which 爺 g2 moves to the right, and the lord g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display move upward. In addition, 爺 g2 is displayed so as to overlap part of the gutter g1 and the balloon display h1.

  FIG. 240 (25) shows a state in which 爺 g2 moves to the right, and the lord g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display move upward.

  FIG. 240 (26) shows a state in which 爺 g2 moves to the right, and the lord g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display move upward.

  FIG. 240 (27) shows a state in which 爺 g2 is stopped, and the lord g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display are stopped.

  The states shown in FIGS. 240 (28) to (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 229 (28) to (38), and the description thereof will be omitted. In this example, an animation is displayed in which the first display of the shrine j1 etc. moves at the start of the display of the second display such as 爺 g2 in the conversation preview display.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 241 (1) to (38) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. Since the states shown in FIGS. 241 (1) to (22) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 240 (1) to (22), description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 241 (23) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is continued. In this example, first, when the conversation notice display is continued, 爺 g2 is displayed.爺 g2 appears from the lower left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Simultaneously with the appearance of 爺 g2, an animation is displayed in which the gutter g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display move upward. The start timing of the animation may be before the appearance of 爺 g2 or after the appearance of 爺 g2.

  FIG. 241 (24) shows a state in which 爺 g2 moves to the right, and the lord g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display move upward. In addition, 爺 g2 is displayed so as to overlap part of the gutter g1 and the balloon display h1.

  FIG. 241 (25) shows a state in which 爺 g2 moves to the right, and the lord g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display move upward.

FIG. 241 (26) shows a state in which 爺 g2 has moved to the right, and the lord g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display are stopped.
FIG. 241 (27) shows a state where 爺 g2 is stopped.

  In the states shown in FIGS. 241 (28) to (32), an animation in which the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 move to the left is displayed, as in the states shown in FIGS. 229 (28) to (32). In this example, the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 are displayed overlapping the character g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display. In the present example, the moving animation of the second display such as 爺 g2 in the conversation notice display is displayed overlapping the first display such as the shrine j1.

  241 (32) to (35) show a state in which a line display is displayed in the balloon display h2, similarly to the states shown in FIGS. 229 (32) to (35).

  FIG. 241 (36) shows a state where the display of the speech display in the balloon display i2 is completed. In the balloon display i2, a character image of “noon weather” and a symbol of “cloudy mark” are displayed as a speech display. In this example, the speech balloon display h2 and the speech display in the speech balloon display h2 are displayed overlapping the speech balloon display h1 and the speech display in the speech balloon display h1.

  Since the states shown in FIGS. 241 (37) and (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 241 (37) and (38), description thereof will be omitted. In this example, the second display such as 爺 g2 in the conversation notice display is displayed so as to overlap the first display such as the shrine j1.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 242 (1) to (38) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. Since the states shown in FIGS. 242 (1) to (5) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 229 (1) to (5), description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 242 (6) to (10) show a state in which a character movement animation is displayed as in FIGS. 229 (6) to (10). In this example, the display sizes of 爺 g2 and 殿 g1 are larger than those shown in the examples shown in FIGS. 229 (6) to (10).

  FIGS. 242 (11) to (19) show a state where the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display are displayed as in FIGS. 229 (11) to (19). In this example, the display size of the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display is larger than the example shown in FIGS. 229 (11) to (19).

  FIG. 242 (20) shows a state in which a button image f1 simulating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a meter image f2 indicating an operation valid period during which the operation of the chance button 136 is valid are displayed. The button image f1 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the balloon display h1 (a part of the first display).

  FIG. 242 (21) shows a state in which the operation valid period has started. The remaining time of the operation effective period indicated by the meter image f2 is reduced.

  FIG. 242 (22) shows a state where the player is operating the chance button 136. In this example, the chance button 136 is pressed once. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation valid period, the conversation notice display is continuously started. When the chance button 136 is not pressed once during the operation valid period, the conversation notice display may be continuously displayed, or the conversation notice display may be terminated without continuing with a predetermined probability. Good.

  FIG. 242 (23) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is continued. In this example, first, when the conversation notice display is continued, 爺 g2 is displayed.爺 g2 appears from the lower left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Simultaneously with the appearance of 爺 g2, an animation in which the display size of the shrine g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display is reduced is displayed. The start timing of the animation may be before the appearance of 爺 g2 or after the appearance of 爺 g2.

  FIG. 242 (24) shows a state in which 爺 g2 moves to the right and an animation in which the display size of the shrine g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display is reduced is displayed.

  FIG. 242 (25) shows a state in which 爺 g2 moves to the right and an animation in which the size of the display g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display is reduced is displayed.

  FIG. 242 (26) shows a state in which 爺 g2 moves to the right and an animation in which the display size of the shrine g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display is reduced is displayed.

  FIG. 242 (27) shows a state where 爺 g2 is stopped and the animation in which the display size of the shrine g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display is reduced is finished. The display sizes of the shrine g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display are the same as the examples shown in FIGS. 229 (6) to (36).

  Since the states shown in FIGS. 242 (28) to (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 229 (28) to (38), description thereof will be omitted. In this example, the first display of the gutter g1 etc. in the conversation preview display is enlarged until the second display such as 爺 g2 starts to be displayed. The first display is reduced. In the state shown in FIG. 242 (36), a part of the balloon display h1 may be displayed so as to overlap with a part of the balloon display h2. In this case, the display size of the balloon display h1 is the balloon display. The display size may be overlapped with a part of h2.

Next, an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 243 (1) to (38) show example effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. In FIGS. 243 (1) to (38), the same effects as the conversation notice display shown in FIGS. 240 (1) to (38) are performed. For this reason, detailed description of the conversation notice display in this example is omitted.
FIG. 243 (1) shows the same state as FIG. 240 (1).

  FIG. 243 (2) shows a state in which the timer notice display j has been displayed. In the timer notice display j, a character string image of “attention!” Is displayed in a horizontally long rectangular frame. The timer notice display j performs a countdown display for a predetermined time, and when the countdown reaches 0 seconds, a predetermined effect (for example, operation of a movable body or a predetermined notice display) is performed. Before the countdown starts, a character string image of “attention!” Is displayed in the timer notice display j.

FIGS. 243 (3) and (4) show the same state as FIGS. 240 (3) and (4) except that the timer notice display j is displayed.
FIG. 243 (5) shows the same state as FIG. 240 (5).

  FIG. 243 (6) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is started as in FIG. 240 (6). In this example, the countdown display of the timer notice display j is also started with the start of the conversation notice display. In this example, a countdown display of 40 seconds is performed.

  In FIGS. 243 (6) to (19), a conversation notice display is displayed as in FIGS. 240 (6) to (19). In this example, a countdown display of a timer notice display j is also displayed. As shown in FIGS. 243 (6) to (19), the timer notice display j is displayed so as to overlap the characters g1 and 爺 g2, the character name display h1, the balloon display i1, and the speech display. For example, in FIG. 243 (14) and after, the entire character name display h1 is displayed overlapping the timer notice display j, and the character name display h1 is not visible.

FIGS. 243 (20) and (21) show the same state as FIGS. 240 (20) and (21) except that the timer notice display j is displayed.
FIG. 243 (22) shows the same state as FIG. 240 (5).

  FIG. 243 (23) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is continued as in FIG. 240 (23). In FIG. 240 (23), the remaining time of the countdown display of the timer notice display j is 36.99 seconds.

  In FIGS. 243 (24) to (36), a conversation advance notice display is displayed as in FIGS. 240 (24) to (36). In this example, a countdown display of the timer advance notice display j is also displayed. As shown in FIGS. 243 (24) to (36), the timer notice display j is displayed so as to overlap the character of 爺 g2, the character name display h2, the balloon display i2, and the speech display. For example, in FIG. 243 (30), the entire character name display h2 is displayed overlapping the timer notice display j, and the character name display h2 is not visible.

  FIGS. 243 (37) and (38) show the same state as FIGS. 240 (37) and (38) except that the timer notice display j is displayed. Thus, the timer notice display j may be displayed together with the conversation notice display. Instead of the timer notice display j, other displays (ball removal error display, door opening error display, other notice display, change icon display of hold icon), and the like may be displayed. Further, as shown in the timer notice display j, the length of the display period of the character movement animation shown in FIGS. 243 (6) to (10) is the length of the character g1 shown in FIGS. 243 (19) to (36). It is shorter than the display period of the conversation notice display including the display h1, the balloon display i1, and the speech notice display.

Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 244 (1) to (38). FIGS. 244 (1) to (38) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. In FIGS. 243 (1) to (38), the same effects as the conversation notice display shown in FIGS. 240 (1) to (38) are performed. For this reason, detailed description of the conversation notice display in this example is omitted.
FIG. 244 (1) shows the same state as FIG. 240 (1).

  FIG. 244 (2) shows a state where the movable body k has moved to a position in front of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, the movable body k is moved before the display of the conversation notice display is started. The movable body k may reciprocate up and down, left and right in front of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, or may perform a vibration operation. In this example, the movable body k is positioned in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the start of the symbol variation display to the start of the reach effect.

FIGS. 244 (3) and (4) show the same state as FIGS. 240 (3) and (4) except that the movable body k is positioned in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. In FIGS. 243 (3) and (4), the entire button image f1 is hidden by the movable body k.
FIG. 244 (5) shows the same state as FIG. 240 (5).

  In FIGS. 244 (6) to (19), a conversation notice display is displayed as in FIGS. 240 (6) to (19), and in this example, the characters g1 and 爺 g2 and character names are displayed by the movable body k. At least a part of h1, the balloon display i1, and the speech display becomes invisible to the player.

FIGS. 244 (20) and (21) show the same state as FIGS. 240 (3) and (4) except that the movable body k is located in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. In FIGS. 244 (20) and (21), the entire button image f1 is hidden by the movable body k.
FIG. 244 (22) shows the same state as FIG. 240 (22).

  FIG. 244 (23) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is continued as in FIG. 240 (23). In FIGS. 244 (24) to (36), a conversation notice display is displayed in the same manner as FIGS. 240 (24) to (36). At least a part of h1, h2, balloon display i1, i2, and line display is invisible to the player.

  FIG. 244 (37) shows the same state as FIG. 240 (37) except that the movable body k is located in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 244 (38) shows a state in which the reach effect is started. When the reach effect is started, the movable body k moves from the position in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 and returns to the initial position. Thus, the moving effect of the movable body k may be performed together with the conversation notice display.

Next, an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 245 (1) to (38) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. In FIGS. 245 (1) to (38), the same effects as the conversation notice display shown in FIGS. 240 (1) to (38) are performed. For this reason, detailed description of the conversation notice display in this example is omitted.
FIG. 245 (1) shows the same state as FIG. 240 (1).

FIG. 245 (2) shows a state in which the pattern display m is displayed by the light guide plate arranged in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the pachinko machine 100 of this example, a light guide plate is arranged in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 as in the case of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIGS. 193 to 226, and a pattern display m can be displayed by light emission of the light guide plate. It is. As shown in FIGS. 245 (2) to (37), the pattern display m is displayed so as to overlap the display on the decorative symbol display device 208. For example, as shown in FIG. 245 (36), the pattern display m is displayed so as to overlap the first display such as the gutter g1 and the second display such as 爺 g2. In this way, the pattern display m and the error display (display of the ball removal error or the door opening error) are over the display of at least one of the first display such as 殿 g1 and the second display such as 爺 g2. May wrap,
FIG. 245 (38) shows a state in which the reach effect is started. When the reach effect starts, the pattern display m is deleted. Thus, the display by the light guide plate may be displayed together with the conversation notice display.

  Next, an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 246 (1) to (38) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. Since FIGS. 246 (1) to (5) show the same state as that shown in FIGS. 229 (1) to (5), description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 246 (6) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is started. In the conversation notice display of this example, the character image is displayed in a square frame, and the square frame is displayed in a predetermined color. The colors in the square frame are set to white, blue, and green in descending order of the big hit reliability. In FIG. 246 (6), the inside of the square frame surrounding 爺 g2 is displayed in white. Note that the conversation notice display of this example is the same as the conversation notice display shown in FIG. 229 except that the character is displayed within a square frame.

  FIG. 246 (7) shows a state where 爺 g2 is moving to the left. The square frame surrounding 爺 g2 is displayed in blue.

  FIG. 246 (8) shows a state where 爺 g2 is moving to the left. The square frame surrounding 爺 g2 is displayed in green.

  FIG. 246 (9) shows a state in which 爺 g2 changes to 殿 g1 while 爺 g2 moves to the left. The shrine g1 has moved to the left. The square frame surrounding the shrine g1 is displayed in blue.

  FIG. 246 (10) shows a state where the gutter g1 is stopped. As shown in FIGS. 247 (6) to (10), the decorative symbol display device 208 can display a moving animation of a character. The moving animation of the character in this example is a display including the gutter g1 and 爺 g2. The square frame surrounding the shrine g1 is displayed in white. Thus, the inside of the square frame surrounding the character changes in the order of white, blue, green, blue, and white. The order of the color change can be arbitrarily set. This color change is performed during the animation of character movement.

  The states shown in FIGS. 246 (11) to (21) are shown in FIGS. 229 (11) to (21) except that the gutter g1 is surrounded by a square frame and the inside of the frame is white. ), The description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 246 (22) shows a state where the player is operating the chance button 136.

  FIG. 246 (23) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is continued. In this example, first, when the conversation notice display is continued, 爺 g2 is displayed.爺 g2 appears from the lower left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The square frame surrounding 正方形 g2 is displayed in white.

  FIG. 246 (24) shows a state where 爺 g2 is moving to the right. The square frame surrounding 爺 g2 is displayed in blue.

  FIG. 246 (25) shows a state where 爺 g2 is moving to the right. The square frame surrounding 爺 g2 is displayed in green.

  FIG. 246 (26) shows a state where 爺 g2 is moving to the right. The square frame surrounding 爺 g2 is displayed in blue.

  FIG. 246 (27) shows a state where 爺 g2 is stopped. The square frame surrounding 爺 g2 is displayed in blue.

  The states shown in FIGS. 246 (28) to (36) are shown in FIGS. 229 (28) to (36) except that 爺 g2 is displayed surrounded by a square frame and the inside of the frame is blue. ), The description thereof will be omitted.

  246 (37) and (38) show the same state as FIGS. 229 (37) and (38). In this example, a conversation notice display character is displayed in a frame, and the frame is displayed in a predetermined color. The big hit reliability is set by the color in the frame.

  Next, an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 247 (a1) to (a20). FIGS. 247 (a1) to (a20) show examples of performance of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. Since FIGS. 247 (a1) to (a5) show the same state as that shown in FIGS. 229 (1) to (5), description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 247 (a6) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is started. In the conversation notice display of this example, display of the character and the character name display is started simultaneously. In FIG. 247 (a6), 爺 g2 and character name display h1 are moved to the left. The character name display is different from the character, and the character name of the conversation notice display is displayed from the beginning.

  FIG. 247 (a7) shows a state in which 爺 g2 and character name display h1 are moving to the left. Further, the balloon display i1 is started to be displayed.

  FIG. 247 (a8) shows a state in which 爺 g2, character name display h1, and balloon display i1 are moved to the left.

  FIG. 247 (a9) shows a state in which 爺 g2 changes to 殿 g1 while 爺 g2 moves to the left. Tono g1, character name display h1, and balloon display i1 have moved to the left.

  FIG. 247 (a10) shows a state where the shrine g1, the character name display h1, and the balloon display i1 are stopped. As described above, in the conversation notice display, the movement animation of the character name display h1 and the balloon display i1 may be displayed during the movement animation of the character.

  247 (a11) to (a13) show the same state as that shown in FIGS. 229 (20) to (22).

  FIG. 247 (a14) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is continued. In the conversation notice display of this example, display of the character and the character name display is started simultaneously. In FIG. 247 (a12), 爺 g2 and character name display h2 are moved to the left.

  FIG. 247 (a15) shows a state where 爺 g2 and character name display h2 are moving to the right.

  FIG. 247 (a16) shows a state where 爺 g2 and character name display h2 are moving to the right. Also, the balloon display i2 has started to be displayed.

  FIG. 247 (a17) shows a state in which 爺 g2, character name display h2, and balloon display i2 are moving to the right.

  FIG. 247 (a18) shows a state where 爺 g2, character name display h2, and balloon display i2 are stopped. Thus, in the conversation preview display, the movement animation of the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 may be displayed during the character movement animation.

  247 (a19) and (a20) show the same state as that shown in FIGS. 229 (37) and (38). As in this example, during the character movement animation, a movement animation of character name display or balloon display may be displayed. The balloon displays i1 and i2 may include a line display from the beginning of display.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 247 (b1) to (b20). 247 (b1) to (b20) show an example of the performance of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. Since FIGS. 247 (b1) to (b5) show the same state as that shown in FIGS. 229 (1) to (5), description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 247 (b6) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is started. In the conversation notice display of this example, display of the character and the character name display is started simultaneously. In FIG. 247 (b6), 爺 g2 and character name display h1 are moved to the left. The character name display is different from the character, and the character name of the conversation notice display is displayed from the beginning. In this example, three square images are displayed in the horizontal direction below the character. The three square images are displayed in white, blue, and green, respectively. At the time shown in FIG. 247 (b6), the left square image and a part of the middle square image are displayed. The left square image is white and the middle square image is blue. These square images also move to the left along with the character.

  FIG. 247 (b7) shows a state in which 爺 g2 and character name display h1 are moving to the left. At the time shown in FIG. 247 (b7), the left square image, the middle square image, and a part of the right square image are displayed. The left square image is blue, the middle square image is green, and the right square image is white. The display color of these square images changes while moving.

  FIG. 247 (b8) shows a state where 爺 g2, character name display h1, and balloon display i1 are moved to the left. At the time shown in FIG. 247 (b8), the left square image is green, the middle square image is white, and the right square image is blue.

  FIG. 247 (b9) shows a state where 爺 g2 changes to 殿 g1 while 爺 g2 moves to the left. Tono g1, character name display h1, and balloon display i1 have moved to the left. At the time shown in FIG. 247 (b9), the left square image is white, the middle square image is blue, and the right square image is green.

  FIG. 247 (b10) shows a state in which the hall g1, the character name display h1, and the balloon display i1 are stopped. The gutter g1 is displayed surrounded by a white frame display. As described above, in the conversation preview display, a frame surrounding the character is displayed in any one of the three squares displayed during the character movement animation. The display colors in the frame surrounding the character are white, blue, and green in descending order of jackpot reliability.

  247 (b11) to (b13) show the same state as that shown in FIGS. 229 (20) to (22).

  FIG. 247 (b14) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is continued. In the conversation notice display of this example, display of the character and the character name display is started simultaneously. In FIG. 247 (b12), 爺 g2 and character name display h2 are moved to the left. The character name display h2 is displayed in blue. In this example, three square images are displayed in the horizontal direction below the character. The three square images are displayed in white, blue, and green, respectively. At the time shown in FIG. 247 (b14), the square image on the right side and a part of the middle square image are displayed. The square image on the right is green and the square image in the middle is white. These square images also move to the right along with the character.

  FIG. 247 (b15) shows a state where 爺 g2 and character name display h2 are moving to the right. At the time shown in FIG. 247 (b7), the right square image, the middle square image, and a part of the left square image are displayed. The square image on the right is white, the square image in the middle is green, and the square image on the left is blue. The display color of these square images changes while moving.

  FIG. 247 (b16) shows a state where 爺 g2 and character name display h2 are moving to the right. Also, the balloon display i2 has started to be displayed. The balloon display i2 is displayed in blue. At the time shown in FIG. 247 (b16), the right square image is blue, the middle square image is white, and the left square image is green. The display color of these square images changes while moving.

  FIG. 247 (b17) shows a state in which 爺 g2, character name display h2, and balloon display i2 are moved to the right. At the time shown in FIG. 247 (b17), the right square image is green, the middle square image is blue, and the left square image is white.

  FIG. 247 (b18) shows a state where 爺 g2, character name display h2, and balloon display i2 are stopped. Further, 爺 g2 is displayed surrounded by a blue frame display. The character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 are also displayed in blue. These display colors are white, blue, and green in descending order of jackpot reliability.

  247 (b19) and (b20) show the same state as that shown in FIGS. 229 (37) and (38). The three square images displayed during the character movement animation are display color candidate displays within a frame surrounded after the character stops. As in this example, display color candidates in a frame surrounded after the character stops may be displayed during the character movement animation.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 248 (a1) to (a5), an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. 248 (a1) to (a5) show an example of the performance of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. 248 (a1) to (a5) show the movement animation of the character shown in FIGS. 229 (6) to (10).

  FIG. 248 (a1) shows a state in which the character movement animation is started.爺 g2 appears and moves to the left.

  FIG. 248 (a2) shows a state where a moving animation of the character is displayed.爺 g2 has moved to the left.

  FIG. 248 (a3) shows a state in which the character movement animation is displayed. During the movement of 爺 g2 to the left, lord g1 is displayed. The gutter g1 is displayed on the left side of the gutter g2, and a part of the gutter g1 overlaps with the gutter g2. Further, the gutter g1 is displayed with a transmittance of 50%, for example. Both lord g1 and 爺 g2 move to the left.

  FIG. 248 (a4) shows a state in which a character movement animation is displayed. A part of 爺 g2 is overlapped and displayed on g1. Further, 爺 g2 is displayed with a transmittance of 50%, for example. Both lord g1 and 爺 g2 move to the left.

  FIG. 248 (a5) shows a state where the moving animation of the character is finished.爺 g2 is deleted at the end of the moving animation.

  As in this example, the number of characters may increase during the movement animation of the character. In this example, the number of characters is increased by one, but may be two or more. In addition, the character may be displayed with a transmittance of 1 to 99% during the movement animation of the character. Further, one character may be displayed so as to overlap the other characters.

  Next, an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 248 (b1) to 248 (b5) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. 248 (b1) to (b5) show the character movement animations shown in FIGS. 229 (6) to (10) and the like.

  FIG. 248 (b1) shows a state in which the character movement animation is started. Tono g1 and 爺 g2 appear and move to the left. The gutter g1 is displayed on the left side of the gutter g2, and a part of the gutter g1 overlaps with the gutter g2.

  FIG. 248 (b2) shows a state where a moving animation of the character is displayed. The lord g1 and 爺 g2 have moved to the left. A part of 爺 g2 is displayed so as to overlap with the gutter g1.

  FIG. 248 (b3) shows a state in which a character movement animation is displayed. The lord g1 and 爺 g2 have moved to the left. A part of the shrine g1 is displayed overlapping the gutter g2.

  FIG. 248 (a4) shows a state in which a character movement animation is displayed. The lord g1 and 爺 g2 have moved to the left. A part of 爺 g2 is displayed so as to overlap with the gutter g1.

  FIG. 248 (a5) shows a state where the moving animation of the character is finished.爺 g2 is deleted at the end of the moving animation.

  As in this example, a plurality of characters may be displayed from the beginning of the character movement animation. The overlapping characters may change alternately between one character and another character.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 248 (c <b> 1) to (c <b> 5), an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. 248 (c1) to (c5) show an example of the performance of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. 248 (c1) to (c5) show the character movement animations shown in FIGS. 229 (6) to (10) and the like.

  FIG. 248 (c1) shows a state in which the character movement animation is started. Tono g1, 爺 g2 and princess g3 appear and move to the left.

  FIG. 248 (c2) shows a state where a moving animation of the character is displayed. Princess g3 has been erased.

  FIG. 248 (c3) shows a state in which a character movement animation is displayed.爺 g2 is erased.

  FIG. 248 (c4) shows a state in which the character movement animation is displayed. The shrine g1 has moved to the left.

  FIG. 248 (c5) shows a state where the moving animation of the character is finished.爺 g2 is deleted at the end of the moving animation.

  As in this example, a plurality of characters may be displayed from the beginning of the character movement animation, one character may be deleted one by one during the character movement animation, and one character may remain at the end.

  Next, an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 248 (d1) to 248 (d5) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. 248 (d1) to (d5) show the character movement animation shown in FIGS. 229 (6) to (10).

  FIG. 248 (d1) shows a state in which the character movement animation is started. Tono g1, 爺 g2 and princess g3 appear and move to the left.

  FIG. 248 (d2) shows a state in which a character movement animation is displayed. A chibi princess g4 is displayed in place of the lord g1, and a ninja g5 is displayed in place of the princess g3. Note that the character may be entirely changed from the beginning, or may be changed a plurality of times and the original character may be displayed again.

  FIG. 248 (d3) shows a state in which a character movement animation is displayed. Ninja g5 has been erased.

  FIG. 248 (d4) shows a state in which a character movement animation is displayed.爺 g2 is erased.

  FIG. 248 (d5) shows a state where the moving animation of the character is finished. Princess Chibi g4 has stopped.

  As in this example, a plurality of characters are displayed from the beginning of the character movement animation, another character is displayed instead of one character during the character movement animation, then the characters are sequentially deleted, and the last One character may be left on the screen. A plurality of characters may be erased at a time.

  FIG. 248 (e) shows a table used when determining the conversation notice display executed in the effect control process (step S409) shown in FIG. For example, the conversation notice shown in FIG. 229 is “conversation notice 1”, and the conversation notice shown in FIG. 230 is “conversation notice 2”. The pachinko machine 100 can select and execute an arbitrary conversation notice from a plurality of conversation notices. Also, for example, a plurality of conversation notices such as “conversation notice 1” and “conversation notice 2” can be executed in combination. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 can display the serif notice display shown in FIG. 174 during the conversation notice display of this example, and also displays the combination of the conversation notice display of this example and the serif notice display shown in FIG. 174. Is possible.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 100, when one of a plurality of effects not shown in “***” of the conversation effect determination table in FIG. 248 (e) is selected, After the balloon display of any one of FIGS. 174, 177 to 186, 188 to 192, 229 to 248, 1992, and 2005 to 2025 is displayed as the first balloon display, 174, 177 to 186, 188 to 192, 229 to 248, 1992, 2005 to 2025 can be displayed as the balloon display. In addition, the pachinko machine 100, when one of a plurality of effects not shown in “***” of the conversation effect determination table in FIG. 248 (e) is selected, 174, 177 to 186, 188 to 192, 229 to 248, 1992, 2005 to 2025 as a first balloon display, which is a combination of a plurality of balloon display elements. After the display is displayed, a plurality of balloon displays of any one of FIGS. 174, 177 to 186, 188 to 192, 229 to 248, 1992, and 2005 to 2025 are displayed as the second balloon display. It is possible to display a balloon display that combines these elements. Further, the pachinko machine 100 has three or more as one conversation notice when one of a plurality of effects not shown in “***” in the conversation effect determination table in FIG. 248 (e) is selected. Can be displayed. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 displays one symbol variation display when any of a plurality of effects not shown in “***” of the conversation effect determination table in FIG. 248 (e) is selected. Two or more conversation notices can be displayed during the period. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 displays the display when the other execution display or error display described in the embodiment or the drawing or the execution condition of the movable body display operation is satisfied during the display of the balloon display or the execution of the conversation notice. Or the operation can be executed.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display the conversation notice display shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display a serif notice display shown in FIG. For example, the conversation notice display shown in FIG. 229 may be displayed while the conversation notice display is being displayed or within the same symbol variation display as the conversation notice display.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display the conversation notice display shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present example can execute the preliminary notice effect during preparation shown in FIG. 193 and the timer notice effect shown in FIG. For example, a preliminary notice effect or a timer notice effect may be executed while the conversation notice display is being displayed or within the same symbol variation display as the conversation notice display.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display the conversation notice display shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can execute the meter increase effect and the item provision effect shown in FIG. For example, the meter increase effect and the item provision effect may be executed while the conversation notice display is being displayed or within the same symbol variation display as the conversation notice display.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display a conversation notice display in which the character display in the balloon display i1 shown in FIG. 229 is moved. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present example can display a conversation notice display in the effect display mode shown in FIG. For example, like the balloon display f4 shown in FIG. 311 (k), the balloons have different display sizes (small display size and large display size) from the balloon displays f1 and f2 shown in FIGS. 311 (b) and (e). A display may be displayed and a conversation notice display may be displayed. Note that the balloon display f1 illustrated in FIG. 311 corresponds to the balloon display i1 illustrated in FIG. 229, and the balloon display f2 illustrated in FIG. 311 corresponds to the balloon display i2 illustrated in FIG.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display a conversation notice display in which the character display in the balloon display i1 shown in FIG. 229 is moved. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present example can display a conversation notice display in the effect display mode shown in FIG. For example, as shown in FIGS. 311 (b) to 3 (f), in the movement animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward, the movement distance of the balloon display f1 is longer than the movement distance of the balloon display f2. The conversation notice display may be displayed. Note that the balloon display f1 illustrated in FIG. 311 corresponds to the balloon display i1 illustrated in FIG. 229, and the balloon display f2 illustrated in FIG. 311 corresponds to the balloon display i2 illustrated in FIG.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display a conversation notice display in which the character display in the balloon display i1 shown in FIG. 229 is moved. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present example can display a conversation notice display in the effect display mode shown in FIG. For example, the moving animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward is terminated at the time shown in FIG. 311 (e), and the conversation announcement is made so that a part of the balloon display f2 is displayed overlapping with other displays. An indication may be displayed. Note that the balloon display f1 illustrated in FIG. 311 corresponds to the balloon display i1 illustrated in FIG. 229, and the balloon display f2 illustrated in FIG. 311 corresponds to the balloon display i2 illustrated in FIG. The pachinko machine 100 may display at least one of the balloon display i1 or the balloon display i2 shown in FIG. 229 at a position where it overlaps with another display and displays it to display a conversation notice display.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display a conversation notice display in which the character display in the balloon display i1 shown in FIG. 229 is moved. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present example can display a conversation notice display in the effect display mode shown in FIG. For example, as shown in FIGS. 311 (b) to 3 (f), when the display of the balloon displays f1 and f2 is started, a moving animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward is performed. As shown in (t), when the display of the balloon display f1, f2 ends, the balloon display f1, f2 starts moving and the display ends so as to perform a moving animation in which the balloon displays f1, f2 move toward the right. The moving direction of the balloon display may be different depending on the case. The pachinko machine 100 may change the moving direction at the start of display and at the end of display of at least one of the balloon display i1 and the balloon display i2 shown in FIG.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display the conversation notice display shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can execute the pseudo-continuous effects shown in FIGS. 328 (g) to (p). For example, the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed while the conversation notice display is being displayed or within the same symbol variation display as the conversation notice display.

  Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 229 to 248 again.

(B1)
A gaming machine comprising display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of displaying a plurality of displays,
One of the plurality of displays is a first display (for example, a conversation notice display shown in FIG. 229 (19)),
One of the plurality of displays is a second display (for example, a conversation notice display shown in FIG. 229 (36)),
The first display is a display including a first line (for example, the morning weather is a “sunny mark”),
The first display is a display including a first character (for example, lord g1),
The second display is a display including a second line (for example, “daytime weather is“ cloudy mark ””),
The second display is a display including a second character (for example, 爺 g2),
The second display may be displayed after the first display is displayed,
The gaming table, wherein the second character may be displayed before the display of the first display.

  According to the gaming table having such a configuration, by notifying that the second display including the second character is displayed, the player expects that the second display may be displayed. May improve the interest of the player.

(B2)
The game stand according to B1 above,
A game table, wherein a third character (for example, princess g3) may be displayed before the display of the first display.

  According to the gaming table having the above configuration, by performing a gusset notice to display a character that does not appear in the first display, it is possible to change the character when the first display is displayed and strike the player's intention. In some cases, the interest of the player can be improved.

(B3)
The game stand according to B2 above,
One of the plurality of displays is a third display (for example, a conversation notice display shown in FIG. 238 (39)),
The third display is a display including a third line (for example, the afternoon weather is “rain mark”),
The third display is a display including the third character (for example, princess g3),
The game table, wherein the third display may be displayed after the second display is displayed (for example, see FIG. 238 (39)).

  By making the third character appear in the third display instead of the second display, the player's intention can be struck, and the player's interest can be improved.

(B4)
The game stand according to B3 above,
One of the plurality of displays is a first conversation notice display (for example, a conversation notice display shown in FIG. 238 (1)),
One of the plurality of displays is a second conversation notice display (for example, a conversation notice display shown in FIG. 238 (39)),
The first conversation notice display is a display including the first display,
The first conversation notice display is a display including the second display,
The game table, wherein the second conversation notice display is a display including the third display.

  According to the gaming machine having such a configuration, it is possible to strike the player's intention by making the third character appearing in the first conversation notice display appear in the second conversation notice display. May be improved.

(B5)
The game stand according to B4 above,
In a period in which one certain symbol variation display is displayed, the second conversation notice display may be displayed after the first conversation notice display is displayed (FIGS. 238 (1) to (39). )), A game table characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having such a configuration, it is possible to strike the player's intention by making the third character appearing in the first conversation notice display appear in the second conversation notice display. May be improved.

(B6)
The game stand according to any one of B1 to B5,
One of the plurality of displays is a first animation display (for example, a character movement animation shown in FIGS. 229 (6) to (10)),
The first animation display is displayed before the display of the first display,
The first animation display is a display including a movement display of the character,
The first animation display is a display including the first character,
The gaming table according to claim 1, wherein the first animation display is a display that may include the second character.

  According to the gaming machine having this configuration, since the second character is displayed in the first animation display, the player can expect that the first display may be performed by the second character. There are cases where it is possible.

(B7)
The game stand according to B6 above,
The game in which the first character and the second character are simultaneously displayed at a certain timing in the display period of the first animation display (see, for example, FIG. 248 (a3)). Stand.

  According to the gaming machine having such a configuration, the player may be able to entertain and entertain which character the first display is displayed on.

(B8)
The game stand according to B6 or B7 above,
In the first animation display, the game table is characterized in that the display start of the second character is before the display start of the first character.

  According to the gaming machine having such a configuration, when the first display is displayed with the second character, the player may be able to entertain and entertain.

(B9)
The game stand according to any one of B6 to B8 above,
One of the plurality of displays is a second animation display (for example, a character movement animation shown in FIGS. 229 (23) to (27)),
The second animation display is displayed before the display of the second display,
The second animation display is a display including a movement display of the character,
The second animation display is a display including the second character,
The game table characterized in that the second animation display is a display not including the first character.

  According to the gaming machine having such a configuration, there is a case where the character appearing in the first display can appear and the player can play without being awakened.

(B10)
The game table according to B9 above,
The gaming table characterized in that the number of characters in the second animation display is smaller than the number of characters in the first animation display.

  According to the gaming machine having such a configuration, there are cases where the player can be entertained by reducing the number of character candidates in the second display so as to increase the predictive accuracy of the character expected by the player.

(B11)
The game stand according to B9 or B10 above,
The game table characterized in that the first displayed character in the second animation display is different from the first character displayed in the first animation display.

  According to the gaming machine having such a configuration, there are cases where the player can be entertained by reducing the number of character candidates in the second display so as to increase the predictive accuracy of the character expected by the player.

(B12)
The game stand according to any one of B9 to B11 above,
The game table characterized in that the display period of the first animation display is shorter than the display period of the first display.

(B13)
The game stand according to any one of B1 to B12,
The first display is a display including a first color (for example, white),
The second display is a display including a second color (for example, blue),
The reliability in the first color is different from the reliability in the second color,
The game table, wherein a display including the second color may be displayed before the display of the first display.

  According to the gaming machine having the configuration, the reliability of the second display can be expected by notifying the reliability of the second display, and the interest of the player is improved. May be possible.

(B14)
The game stand according to B13 above,
The game machine characterized in that the reliability in the second color is higher than the reliability in the first color.

  According to the gaming machine having such a configuration, the player may be expected to display the second display by increasing the reliability of the second display to be displayed later.

(B15)
The game stand according to any one of B1 to B14,
The game table, wherein the first line is displayed before the display of the first display (for example, the display shown in FIG. 229 (19)).

  According to the gaming machine having such a configuration, even if the second character is displayed before the display of the first display, the player can expect that the first character appears by the first line. There are cases where it is possible.

(B16)
The game stand according to any one of B1 to B15 above,
The first display is a display including a first name (for example, “dono”),
The first name is the name of the first character,
The game table, wherein the first name is displayed before the display of the first display.

  According to the gaming machine having this configuration, even if the second character is displayed before the display of the first display, the player can expect that the first character appears by the first name. There are cases where you can.

(B17)
The game stand according to any one of B1 to B16,
An operation means (for example, chance button 136) that can be operated by the player is provided,
The gaming table, wherein the second display is displayed when the operation means is operated during the display of the first display.

(B18)
The game stand according to any one of B1 to B17,
The game table, wherein the second display is displayed after the first display is displayed.

(B19)
The game stand according to any one of B1 to B18,
A movable body (for example, a movable body k) movable to a position overlapping the display means;
The game table, wherein the movable body may overlap at least one of the first display and the second display.

(B20)
The game stand according to any one of B1 to B19,
A gaming table, wherein a display (for example, a pattern display m) may overlap with at least one of the first display and the second display.

(B21)
The game stand according to any one of B1 to B20 above,
The game table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).

(B22)
The game stand according to any one of B1 to B20 above,
The gaming table is a slot machine (for example, slot machines 1000 and 2000).

  The first display may be overlapped by another display, and the area where the first display is overlapped by the second animation is such that the first display is overlapped by the second display. It may be larger than the area to be wrapped. In this case, during the second animation, it is possible to make the second animation notice by greatly overlapping the first display, and during the second display, the relevance with the first display is ensured. There are cases where it is possible.

The area where the first dialogue is overlapped by the second animation may be larger than the area where the first dialogue is overlapped by the second display. In this case, during the second animation, the second animation can be noticed by greatly overlapping the first dialogue, and the relevance with the first dialogue is ensured while the second display is being displayed. There are cases where it is possible.
There may be cases where the dialogue notice dialogue does not match.

  A plurality of characters may be displayed in turn in the first animation, and a certain character may be displayed a plurality of times in the first animation.

  A plurality of characters may be displayed in turn in the first animation, and the order may make a round in the first animation.

  A plurality of characters may be displayed in order in the first animation, and the order may be rewound at a certain timing in the first animation.

  A plurality of characters may be displayed in turn in the first animation, and each character may animate in the first animation.

  A plurality of characters may be displayed simultaneously in the first animation, and the number of characters may be increased or decreased in the first animation.

  A plurality of characters may be displayed simultaneously in the first animation, and a certain character may change in the first animation.

A plurality of characters may be displayed at the same time in the first animation, and the first display may be displayed after the number of characters has decreased by one or more in the first animation.
You may transfer to the reach | attainment effect corresponding to a 2nd character after the display of a 2nd display.

  A conversation notice display is performed for each pseudo-variable display, the first conversation notice display is performed in the first pseudo-variable display, and the second conversation is displayed in the second pseudo-variable display after the first pseudo-variable display. An advance notice may be displayed.

  The movable body may operate for each pseudo-variable display, a part of the first conversation notice display may be overlapped with the movable body, and a part of the second conversation notice display may be overlapped with the movable body.

  A part of the first conversation notice display may be overlapped with the timer notice display, and a part of the second conversation notice display may be overlapped with the timer notice display.

  Next, other specific examples of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 249 to 273. Note that the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 249 to 273 are used only in the description of the embodiment shown in FIGS. 249 to 273 in principle, and even if the overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, The reference numerals 249 to 273 are prioritized.

<Item type>
Next, the types of items that the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 249 is a diagram illustrating an example of an item.

  Here, the item is a general term for benefits, equipment, functions, etc. that can be given to the player by the pachinko machine 100, and the items according to the present embodiment are largely classified into two types: custom items and non-custom items. Can be separated. The custom item is an item that allows the player to modify (customize) the display, sound, function, various probabilities, etc. of the pachinko machine according to his / her preference. Further, the non-custom item cannot be remodeled (customized) on the display, sound, function, various probabilities, etc. of the pachinko machine 100, but is a item that gives a predetermined profit to the player.

  The pachinko machine 100 is configured to give an item to a player when an item granting condition set for each item is satisfied. When a custom item is given, the player performs a setting operation of the given custom item using an effect customization screen (see FIG. 258 (q) or the like) described later, thereby displaying the pachinko machine 100. It is possible to modify (customize) the voice, function, various probabilities, etc. according to one's preference. In addition, when a non-custom item is given, the player can obtain a predetermined profit (for example, profit advantageous to the player such as a notice, a pre-read notice, a tutorial display, etc.) through the item.

  In the example shown in FIG. 249, for example, the item granting condition of item A (normal BGM custom 1), item B (normal BGM custom 2), or item C (normal BGM custom 3) is satisfied, and the item is given. In this case, it is possible to modify (customize) the background sound (BGM) in the normal game in the pachinko machine 100 according to his / her preference. In addition, when the item granting condition of item D (holding pedestal custom 1), item E (holding pedestal custom 2), or item F (holding pedestal custom 3) is established and the item is given, a pachinko machine A part of the display of the hold icon (hold display) in 100 (in this example, the image of the pedestal displayed under the hold icon) can be modified (customized) according to his / her preference.

  In addition, when the item granting condition of “heat” is established and the item is given, a notice 1 indicating that the result of the change is “hot (high expectation)” is performed, so that the player Can obtain information related to the winning result of the change (for example, information indicating that the winning result of the special figure variable game is a win or the possibility of winning is high). In addition, when the item granting condition of “Intense heat” is established and the item is assigned, the notice 2 indicating that the result of the change is “Intense heat (expectation is extremely high)” is performed. Thus, the player can obtain information related to the winning result of the change (for example, information indicating that the winning result of the special figure variable game is a big hit or a possibility of a big hit is high).

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect>
Next, a meter increase effect and an item provision effect will be described. Here, the meter increase effect is an effect executed in association with the ball entering the meter increase entrance 227 described with reference to FIG. 161. In this embodiment, a predetermined number (in this example, (10) gauges (scales) are displayed, and one sphere is displayed on the meter increase entrance 227, and each meter gauge is turned off (reduced) one by one (details) Later).

  By executing such a meter increase effect, the player can determine the number of balls that have entered the meter increase entrance 227 and whether the meter gauge is full (predetermined in the meter increase entrance 227). It is possible to grasp whether or not several (10 in this example) balls have entered. The aspect of the meter increase effect is not limited to this example. For example, even if a ball is lit at the meter increase entrance 227 and a meter gauge is lit (increased) each time it enters, the display is increased. Good.

  Further, the item granting effect is an effect executed in relation to the item granting. In this embodiment, when the meter gauge is full (a predetermined number (in this example, the meter increasing entrance 227). In the case of 10 balls), it is determined that the item granting condition has been established, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is used to display that the item has been given, the type of the item, etc. (Details will be described later). By executing such an item provision effect, the player can grasp that the item has been imparted, the type of the item, and the like. Note that the item granting conditions and item granting effects are not limited to this example. For example, the number and type of items already acquired may be displayed, and the item must be special (for rare items). May be displayed.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 1>
Next, the meter increase effect and the item provision effect according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 250 is a diagram illustrating the meter increase effect and the item provision effect according to the first embodiment in time series.

  Example 1 is an example in which an item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied during the symbol variation (the meter gauge is full). The game state shown in FIG. 250 (a) is a state in which a special game of variable game is being executed (during symbol change). Further, in this example, there is a special figure variable game held, and in the display area on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 variable game hold number is 3, and the special figure 2 variable game hold number is 3. In addition, it is indicated by a number that the holding number of the usual game is 0. In addition, in the display area below the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of hold of special figure variable games (special figure 1 variable game and special figure 2 variable game) is 6 by displaying six hold icons PI. 9 gauges are turned off and one gauge GG is turned on, resulting in a meter increase effect that nine balls have entered the meter increase entrance 227 (one more ball is If you enter, the gauge will fill up). Further, in the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is indicated that the custom item is not set by the player by performing the character display CD1 of “item not set”.

  During such symbol variation, as shown in FIG. 250 (b), when one sphere enters the meter increasing entrance 227, it is lit as shown in FIG. 250 (c). After executing the meter increase effect in which all ten gauges are extinguished by turning off one gauge, as shown in FIG. 250 (d), the character display CD2 of “full” is performed instead of the meter display. By executing the meter increase effect, a predetermined number (10 in this example) of balls enters the meter increase entrance 227 to notify that the item granting condition is satisfied.

  The subsequent state shown in FIG. 250 (e) is a state in which the item provision effect is started. In the item granting effect according to the present example, an image CG imitating the appearance of the capsule is stepwise over the period shown in FIGS. 250 (e) to (g) when the item granting condition is satisfied. While displaying in an enlarged manner, an animation is displayed that moves from the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the center, and as shown in FIG. 250 (h), information about the item appears from the inside of the image CG simulating a capsule. As shown in FIG. 250 (i), the item name (item A in this example) IN display and item description IT (in this example, description of item A) are displayed. (The contents are omitted in the figure).

  In this example, by displaying the display related to the item granting effect in front of the variation display of the decorative design, at least part of the display related to the item granting effect is at least one of the variable display of the decorative design. It overlaps with the part. With such a configuration, the visibility of the item granting effect is not hindered, so it is possible to accurately notify the player of information about the acquired item, and the visibility of the decorative pattern variation display is improved. In some cases, the effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing the effect.

  The state shown in FIG. 250 (j) is a state in which the button effect is started in addition to the item giving effect. In this example, the button for the period shown in FIG. 250 (j) to FIG. 250 (m) is triggered by the display of information about the item (in this example, item name and item description) in the item granting effect. Produce.

  In this example, the display related to the button effect is displayed in front of the display related to the item effect and the change display of the decorative design, so that at least a part of the display related to the button effect is related to the item grant effect. It overlaps at least a part of the display and the variable display of the decorative pattern. With such a configuration, the visibility of the button effect is not hindered, so it is possible to accurately notify the player of the operation by the operation means and the effective time thereof, and also the decorative display variation item and item There may be a case where the production effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing the visibility of the provided production.

  In this button effect, the appearance of a selection display SG that allows specific selection from a plurality of options (in this example, whether or not to set an acquired item) and the appearance of a chance button 136 that is valid for accepting operations are simulated. The button image BG1 including the displayed image and a character string that prompts the user to press the chance button 136 (PUSH in this example), and the left and right direction keys (not shown) that can accept operations are simulated. The button image BG2 and the operation effective period display TG including the meter display indicating the period during which the operation by the operation means (in this example, the chance button 136 and the left and right keys) is effective are displayed.

  In such a button effect, when the “Yes” option is temporarily selected and a pressing operation of the chance button 136 is accepted as shown in FIG. 250 (l), as shown in FIG. 250 (m). , By highlighting the “Yes” option, it is notified that the selection of “Yes” has been confirmed (the selection to set the acquired item has been made).

  The subsequent state shown in FIG. 250 (n) is a state in which the button effect is ended and the item provision effect is resumed. In the item granting effect after resumption, in FIG. 250 (n) to FIG. 250 (p) triggered by a specific selection (in this example, a selection for setting the acquired item) from a plurality of options in the button effect. After displaying the animation including moving the image including the item name step by step from the center of the decorative design display device 208 to the lower display area over the period shown in FIG. By performing the character display CD3 of “setting item A” instead of the character display CD1, it is indicated that the item A is set as a custom item by the player.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 2>
Next, a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 251 is a diagram illustrating the meter increase effect and the item provision effect according to the second embodiment in time series.

  The second embodiment is an example in which the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied during the SP (super) reach variation (the meter gauge is full). In the second embodiment, over the period shown in FIG. 251 (a) to FIG. 251 (b), the special figure fluctuation game develops from normal symbol fluctuation to SP reach fluctuation, and continues to FIG. 251 (c) to FIG. The SP reach effect is executed in addition to the SP reach variation over the period shown in FIG.

  During such SP reach fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 251 (d), when one sphere entered the meter increasing entrance 227, it was lit as shown in the following FIG. 251 (e). After executing the meter increase effect in which all 10 gauges are turned off by turning off one gauge, as shown in FIG. 251 (f), the character display CD2 of “full” is displayed instead of the meter display. By executing the meter increase effect to be performed, a predetermined number (10 in this example) of balls enters the meter increase entrance 227 to notify that the item granting condition is satisfied.

  In addition, since the subsequent meter increase effect, the item grant effect, and the effect mode of the button effect are the same as in the first embodiment except that the SP reach variation is being performed, the same reference numerals in FIG. Although description thereof is omitted, item granting is performed by displaying a display related to the item granting effect in front of the display and meter related to the SP reach effect over the period shown in FIGS. 251 (h) to (q). At least a part of the display related to the effect overlaps the display related to the SP reach effect and at least a part of the meter. With such a configuration, the visibility of the item granting effect is not hindered, so it is possible to accurately inform the player of information about the acquired item, and also the SP reach effect and meter visibility. In some cases, the effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing the effect.

  In addition, during the period shown in FIGS. 251 (k) to (o), at least a part of the decorative symbol variation display is displayed by displaying the decorative symbol variation display in front of the display related to the item provision effect. Is overlapped with at least a part of the display related to the item granting effect. With such a configuration, since the visibility of the variation display of the decorative symbol is not hindered, the progress of the variation game can be accurately notified to the player, and the visibility of the item granting effect is temporarily provided. In some cases, the effect can be enhanced by reducing the effect.

  Further, over the period shown in FIGS. 251 (l) to (o), the display related to the button effect and the variation display of the decorative design are displayed in front of the display related to the SP reach effect and the item grant effect. In this way, at least a part of the display related to the button effect and the variation display of the decorative design is overlapped with at least a part of the display related to the SP reach effect or the item giving effect. With such a configuration, the visibility of decorative symbols and button effects are not hindered, so it is possible to accurately inform the player of the progress of the variable game, the operation by the operation means, and the effective time. In addition, there may be a case where the effect of the presentation can be enhanced by temporarily reducing the visibility of the SP reach production or the item provision production.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 3>
Next, the meter increase effect and the item provision effect according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 252 is a diagram illustrating the meter increase effect and the item provision effect according to the third embodiment in time series.

  The third embodiment is an example in which the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the meter gauge is full) during non-symbol fluctuation (during symbol stop display). The game state shown in FIG. 252 (a) is a state in which a special-game variable game is not being executed (during non-design change). In this example, there is no reserved special figure variable game, and in the display area on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 variable game hold number is 0, the special figure 2 variable game hold number is 0, The figure shows that the number of suspensions of the variable game is zero. Further, in the display area below the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon PI is not displayed, so that the number of hold of the special figure variable game (special figure 1 variable game and special figure 2 variable game) may be zero. As shown, nine gauges are turned off and one gauge GG is turned on, resulting in a meter increase effect that nine balls have entered the meter increase entrance 227 (one more ball has entered). If this is done, the gauge will fill up). Further, in the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is indicated that the custom item is not set by the player by performing the character display CD1 of “item not set”.

  During such non-design variation, as shown in FIG. 252 (b), when one sphere entered the meter increasing entrance 227, it was lit as shown in the following FIG. 252 (c). After performing the meter increase effect in which all 10 gauges are turned off by turning off one gauge, as shown in FIG. 252 (d), the character display CD2 of “full” is displayed instead of the meter display. By executing the meter increase effect to be performed, a predetermined number (10 in this example) of balls enters the meter increase entrance 227 to notify that the item granting condition is satisfied.

  In addition, since subsequent meter increase production, item provision production, and the production mode of button production are the same as those in the first embodiment except that the SP reach is being changed, the same reference numerals are attached in FIG. Although description thereof is omitted, item display is performed by displaying the display related to the item provision effect in front of the stop display of the decorative symbol over the period shown in FIGS. 252 (j) to (m). At least a part of the display related to the performance is overlapped with at least a part of the stop display of the decorative symbol. With such a configuration, the visibility of the item granting effect is not hindered, so it is possible to accurately inform the player of information about the acquired item, and the visibility of the stoppage of the decorative pattern change is also ensured. In some cases, the effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing the effect.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 4>
Next, a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 253 is a diagram illustrating a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to the fourth embodiment in time series.

  In the fourth embodiment, the item granting effect is started during the symbol fluctuation based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the gauge gauge is full) while the symbol is not changing (while the symbol is stopped). This is an example. During the non-design variation shown in FIG. 253 (a), as shown in FIG. 253 (b), one sphere entered the meter increasing entrance 227, and in FIG. 253 (c), it was lit. A meter-increasing effect is performed to turn off one of the two gauges. Subsequently, during the non-design variation shown in FIG. 253 (c), as shown in FIG. 253 (d), it is based on the fact that a ball has entered the start opening (in this example, the first special figure start opening 230). In the following FIG. 253 (e), the symbol variation display is started.

  During such symbol variation, as shown in FIG. 253 (f), when one sphere enters the meter increasing entrance 227, it is lit as shown in FIG. 253 (g). After performing the meter increase effect in which all ten gauges are turned off by turning off one gauge, as shown in FIG. 253 (h), the character display CD2 of “full” is performed instead of the meter display. By executing the meter increase effect, a predetermined number (10 in this example) of balls enters the meter increase entrance 227 to notify that the item granting condition is satisfied.

  The state shown in FIG. 253 (e) is a state in which the item provision effect is started. In the item granting effect according to this example, an image CG simulating the appearance of the capsule is gradually obtained over the period shown in FIG. 253 (i) to FIG. While displaying in an enlarged manner, an animation is displayed that moves from the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the center. As shown in FIG. 253 (l), information about the item appears from the inside of the image CG simulating a capsule. After the animation display to be performed, as shown in FIG. 253 (m), the item image IG including the character display of “heat” is displayed. In this item image IG, the item granting condition of “heat” which is a non-custom item is satisfied, and the result of the special figure variable game is “hot (high expectation)” (the winning result of the special figure variable game is It is a win, or the possibility of a win is high).

  In this example, by displaying the display related to the item granting effect in front of the variation display of the decorative design, at least part of the display related to the item granting effect is at least one of the variable display of the decorative design. It overlaps with the part. With such a configuration, the visibility of the item granting effect is not hindered, so it is possible to accurately notify the player of information about the acquired item, and the visibility of the decorative pattern variation display is improved. In some cases, the effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing the effect.

  In the state shown in FIG. 253 (n), the item granting effect is finished and SP reach is started. In this way, if the display related to the item granting effect is erased before the start of SP reach, the visibility of SP reach will not be hindered. You may be able to inform.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 5>
Next, a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 254 is a diagram illustrating a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Example 5 in time series.

  In the fifth embodiment, the item granting condition is satisfied after shifting to the increasing mode (double mode) based on the ball entering the meter increasing entrance 227 during the symbol change in the state where the number of reserves is full. This is an example of starting the item granting effect based on what has been done (the meter gauge is full).

  The game state shown in FIG. 254 (a) is a state in which a special-game variable game is being executed (during symbol change). In this example, there is a special figure variable game on hold, and in the display area on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 variable game hold number is 3, the special figure 2 variable game hold number is 4, The figure shows that the number of suspensions of the variable game is zero. Also, in the display area below the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of reserved special figure variable games (special figure 1 variable game and special figure 2 variable game) is 7 due to the display of seven hold icons PI. 6 gauges are extinguished and 4 gauges GG are turned on, and 6 balls have entered the meter increase entrance 227 by the meter increase effect (4 more balls have been added). If you enter, the gauge will fill up). Further, in the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is indicated that the custom item is not set by the player by performing the character display CD1 of “item not set”.

  During such symbol variation, as shown in FIG. 254 (b), when one sphere entered the meter increasing entrance 227, it was lit 4 as shown in FIG. 254 (c). A meter-increasing effect is performed to turn off one of the gauges. Subsequently, during the symbol variation shown in FIG. 254 (c), as shown in FIG. 254 (d), a ball enters the starting opening (in this example, the first special figure starting opening 230), and the following FIG. As shown in (e), in the display area on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is indicated by a number that the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games has been increased from 3 to 4, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. In the lower display area, the number of holdings of special figure variable games (special figure 1 variable games and special figure 2 variable games) is increased from 7 to 8 due to the display of the eight hold icons PI. It has been shown.

  In this example, when the number of reserved special figure variable games (special figure 1 variable game and special figure 2 variable game) is full (8 in this example), the meter increase effect shifts to the increase mode. It is composed. Here, the increase mode of the meter increase production is a mode in which the gauge of the meter is advanced N times (N is a positive integer of 2 or more) every time one sphere enters the meter increase entrance 227. In this example, N is set to 2 and is referred to as a double mode.

  The state shown in FIG. 254 (f) is a state in which the meter increase effect has shifted to the increase mode (double mode). In this increase mode, as shown in FIG. 254 (g), when one sphere enters the meter increasing entrance 227, the three lights that have been lit as shown in FIG. 254 (h) continue. A meter increase effect is performed to turn off two of the gauges. Further, as shown in FIG. 254 (i), when one sphere enters the meter increasing entrance 227, as shown in the following FIG. 254 (j), one lit gauge is turned off. By doing so, while performing the meter increase production in which all 10 gauges are turned off, the right to erase another gauge can be carried over from the next game onward. The subsequent meter increase effects, item provision effects, and button effect effects are the same as in the first embodiment except that the meter increase effect is in the increase mode (double mode), and therefore the same in FIG. A reference numeral is attached and a description thereof is omitted.

  In this example, an example is shown in which the mode shifts to the increase mode (double mode) based on the ball entering the meter increase entrance 227 during the symbol change in the state where the number of reserves is full. When the above condition is satisfied, the mode may be shifted to the increase mode, and the increase mode is not limited to the double mode. Also, when the item granting conditions are met (when the meter gauge is full), the right to erase the meter gauge is carried over after the next game, but it is configured not to carry over. The number of games that can be carried over may be variable.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 6>
Next, a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 255 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item provision effect according to Example 6 in time series.

  The sixth embodiment starts an item granting effect based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied during the symbol change (the meter gauge is full), and in this item granting effect, a plurality of items (this example) Then, two types of custom items) are given. In addition, since the production | generation aspect of a meter increase production, an item provision production, and a button production is the same as the said Example 1 except giving a some item in an item provision production, it attaches | subjects the same code | symbol in FIG. A description thereof will be omitted.

  In the item granting effect according to the present example, as shown in FIG. 255 (h), after performing animation display in which information about two types of items appears from the inside of the image CG simulating a capsule, FIG. 255 (i) As shown in the figure, item information (in this example, item A, item B) IN1, IN2 display and item description (in this example, description of item A and item B (contents in the figure) Is omitted)) IT1 and IT2 are displayed. In addition, the item provided in an item provision effect may be three or more types.

  The state shown in FIG. 255 (j) is a state in which the button effect is started in addition to the item giving effect. In the button production according to this example, a selection display SG that allows a specific selection from a plurality of options (in this example, selection of whether or not to set the acquired item A or item B) and operation reception are effective. Of the button image BG1 including an image simulating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a character string (PUSH in this example) that prompts the user to press the chance button 136, and the up / down / left / right direction keys (not shown), the acceptance of the operation is valid. A button image BG2 simulating the appearance of the left and right keys, and an operation valid period display TG including a meter display indicating a period during which the operation means (in this example, the chance button 136 and the left and right keys) is valid. .

  In such a button effect, when the “item A” option is provisionally selected and a pressing operation of the chance button 136 is accepted as shown in FIG. 255 (l), as shown in FIG. 255 (m). In addition, the selection of “item A” is confirmed by highlighting the selection of “item A” (the selection of setting item A out of acquired item A and item B has been made). To do.

  The state shown in FIG. 255 (n) is a state in which the button effect is ended and the item provision effect is restarted. In the item granting effect after resumption, FIG. 255 is triggered by a specific selection from a plurality of options in the button effecting (in this example, selection of setting item A out of acquired item A and item B). (N) to animation display for moving from the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the lower display area while gradually reducing the image including the item name over the period shown in FIG. After that, by performing the character display CD3 of “setting item A” instead of the character display CD1 of “item not set”, it is shown that the item A is set as a custom item by the player.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 7>
Next, a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 256 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item provision effect according to Example 7 in time series.

  In the seventh embodiment, the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied during the symbol change (the meter gauge is full), and in this item granting effect, a plurality of items (this example) In this example, a custom item and a non-custom item are given. In addition, since the production | generation aspect of a meter increase production, an item provision production, and a button production is the same as the said Example 1 except giving a some item in an item provision production, it attaches | subjects the same code | symbol in FIG. A description thereof will be omitted.

  In the item granting effect according to the present example, as shown in FIG. 256 (h), after performing animation display in which information about two types of items appears from the inside of the image CG simulating a capsule, FIG. 256 (i) As shown in the figure, as information on two types of items, an item name (in this example, item A) IN display and item description (in this example, item A description (contents omitted)) IT1 display, The item image IG including the character display of “heat” is displayed. Note that the non-custom item to be given in the item granting effect may be another non-custom item (for example, pending change, model descriptions 1 to 3, lost, etc.) described with reference to FIG.

  The state shown in FIG. 256 (j) is a state in which the button effect is started in addition to the item giving effect. Since the subsequent item provision effects and the effect aspects of the button effects are the same as in the first embodiment, the same reference numerals are given in FIG.

<Demo screen>
Next, a demonstration screen in the pachinko machine 100 will be described using FIGS. 257 to 259. FIG. 257 is a transition diagram showing an example of screen transition in the pachinko machine 100, FIG. 258 is a diagram showing an example of screen transition in time series, and FIG. 259 is a menu screen where various menus are selected. It is the figure which showed an example of the screen transition at the time of being performed.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment displays at least a demo screen, a menu screen, a volume adjustment screen, a brightness adjustment screen, and a symbol variation display as shown in FIG. 257 (a) using the decorative symbol display device 208. It is configured to be possible. The demonstration screen is a screen that is displayed when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has been detected during non-design variation, and in this example, a menu screen, a volume adjustment screen, or a brightness adjustment. Displays a top menu screen that can transition to the screen. When the operation of the first operation means (in this example, the chance button 136) is received during the display of the demonstration screen, the display of the menu screen from which various menus can be selected is started.

  Also, when the operation of the second operation means (in this example, the right key) or the third operation means (in this example, the left key) is accepted while the demonstration screen (or brightness adjustment screen) is displayed The display of the volume adjustment screen capable of adjusting the volume of the speaker 120 or the like is started, and the fourth operation means (in this example, the up key) or the fifth volume is displayed while the demonstration screen (or the volume adjustment screen) is displayed. When an operation of the operating means (down key in this example) is received, display of a brightness adjustment screen capable of adjusting the brightness of the various lamps 418, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the like is started.

  When the operation of the second operating means (in this example, the right key) is accepted while the volume adjustment screen is displayed, a meter display indicating that the volume has been increased by one level and that the volume has been increased by one level is displayed. When the operation of the third operation means (left key in this example) is accepted while the volume adjustment screen is displayed, the meter display indicates that the volume is lowered by one step and the volume is lowered by one step Execute. When the operation of the fourth operating means (in this example, the up key) is accepted while the brightness adjustment screen is displayed, the meter display is executed to increase the brightness by one level and suggest that the brightness has increased by one level. When the operation of the fifth operating means (in this example, the down key) is accepted during the display of the brightness adjustment screen, the meter display that indicates that the brightness has decreased by one step and the brightness has decreased by one step is executed. To do.

  Furthermore, when the passage of a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) is detected during the display of the menu screen, the volume adjustment screen, or the brightness adjustment screen, the display of the demo screen is started, and the symbol variation display is started. When the start condition is satisfied, the symbol variation display is started.

<Demo screen / menu screen>
FIG. 257 (b) is a transition diagram showing an example of the transition of the menu screen. The menu screen according to this example is composed of four menus: production customization, mobile terminal linked service, initialization, and return to the demonstration screen. When each menu is selected, the production customization screen, mobile terminal It is configured to transition to the linked service screen, initialization confirmation screen, and demo screen.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 258, since the elapse of a predetermined time (30 seconds) was detected during the non-design variation shown in FIG. 258 (a), the demonstration screen (top menu screen) shown in FIG. Since the display is started and the operation of the fifth operating means (in this example, the lower key 161d) is accepted as shown in FIG. 258 (c) during the display of the demonstration screen, FIG. 258 (d) The display of the brightness adjustment screen shown in FIG.

  Subsequently, during the display of the brightness adjustment screen, as shown in FIG. 258 (e), the operation of the fifth operation means (down key 161d in this example) is accepted. As shown in the figure, a meter display is performed to indicate that the brightness has decreased by one level and that the brightness has decreased by one level, and as shown in FIG. 258 (g), the fourth operation means (in this example, the up key 161c). ) Is received, as shown in FIG. 258 (h), the meter display is executed to increase the brightness by one level and suggest that the luminance has increased by one level.

  Subsequently, during the display of the brightness adjustment screen, as shown in FIG. 258 (i), the operation of the second operation means (in this example, the right key 161a) is accepted. , The display of the volume adjustment screen shown in FIG. 258 (j) is started. Further, as shown in FIG. 258 (k), since the operation of the second operation means (in this example, the right key 161a) is accepted during the display of the volume adjustment screen, it is shown in FIG. 258 (l). As described above, the meter display is executed to suggest that the volume is increased by one level and the volume is decreased by one level.

  Subsequently, since the passage of a predetermined time (30 seconds) is detected during the display of the volume adjustment screen shown in FIG. 258 (l), the display of the demonstration screen (top menu screen) shown in FIG. 258 (m) is started. During the display of this demonstration screen, as shown in FIG. 258 (n), the operation of the first operation means (chance button 136 in this example) is accepted, so the menu screen shown in FIG. 258 (o). Is starting to display.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 258 (p), the operation of the first operation means (in this example, the chance button 136) is accepted with the effect customization menu temporarily selected on this menu screen. The display of the production customization screen has started. Further, during the display of the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 258 (q), as shown in FIG. 258 (r), the operation of the second operating means (in this example, the right key 161a) is accepted. As shown in FIG. 258 (t), the first operation is performed in a state where the light display is moved to the next selectable item (in this example, the item P) and the item P is temporarily selected. Since the operation of the means (the chance button 136 in this example) is accepted, the customization corresponding to the item P is validated, and the character display “setting item P” is displayed in the display area below the decorative symbol display device 208. It is shown that the item P is set as a custom item by the player.

<Demo screen / Menu screen / Mobile device linked service screen>
FIG. 257 (c) is a transition diagram showing an example of transition of the mobile terminal linked service screen. The mobile terminal linked service screen according to this example is composed of six menus: trial play, password input, data storage, data clear, quick start, and return to the menu screen.

  For example, when the menu of the mobile terminal link service is selected on the menu screen shown in FIG. 259 (b), display of the mobile terminal link service screen shown in FIG. 259 (b1) is started, and this mobile terminal link service is displayed. When the trial play menu is selected on the screen, the display of the trial play screen shown in FIG. 259 (b1-1) is started, and then new registration is selected on the trial play screen. Then, the display of the new registration screen shown in FIG. 259 (b1-2) is started.

  In addition, when the password input menu is selected on the mobile terminal link service screen shown in FIG. 259 (b2), the passwords as shown in FIG. 259 (b2-1) and FIG. Display of the input screen is started, and when an incorrect password is input on this password input screen, a screen for notifying an input error of the password as shown in FIG. 259 (b2-1-2) is displayed. On the other hand, when a correct password is input, display of a screen for notifying completion of password input as shown in FIG. 259 (b2-1-3) is started.

  When the data storage menu is selected on the mobile terminal link service screen shown in FIG. 259 (b3), the confirmation screen as shown in FIG. 259 (b3-1) is displayed. When “Yes” is selected in FIG. 25, display of the two-dimensional code display screen as shown in FIG. 259 (b3-2) is started, and “End” is selected during display of this two-dimensional code display screen. In such a case, display of a confirmation screen as shown in FIG. 259 (b3-2-1) is started.

  When the data clear menu is selected on the mobile terminal link service screen shown in FIG. 259 (b4), the confirmation screen as shown in FIG. 259 (b4-1) is displayed. When “Yes” is selected in FIG. 26, display of a completion screen as shown in FIG. 259 (b4-1-1) is started. When the quick start menu is selected on the mobile terminal link service screen shown in FIG. 259 (b5), the start screen display shown in FIG. 259 (b5-1) is started, and FIG. When the menu for returning to the menu screen is selected on the mobile terminal linked service screen shown in b6), the display of the top menu is started.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 8>
Next, a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 260 is a diagram illustrating a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to the eighth embodiment in time series.

  The eighth embodiment is an example in which the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied while the demo screen (top menu screen) is displayed (the meter gauge is full). The gaming state shown in FIG. 260 (a) is a state in which a demo screen (top menu screen) is displayed during non-design variation. Also, in this example, there is no reserved special figure variable game, and in the display area on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 variable game hold number is 0, and the special figure 2 variable game hold number is 0. In addition, it is indicated by a number that the holding number of the usual game is 0. Further, in the display area below the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon PI is not displayed, so that the number of hold of the special figure variable game (special figure 1 variable game and special figure 2 variable game) may be zero. As shown, nine gauges are turned off and one gauge GG is turned on, resulting in a meter increase effect that nine balls have entered the meter increase entrance 227 (one more ball has entered). If this is done, the gauge will fill up). Further, in the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is indicated that the custom item is not set by the player by performing the character display CD1 of “item not set”.

  When such a demonstration screen (top menu screen) is displayed, when one sphere enters the meter increasing entrance 227 as shown in FIG. 260 (b), as shown in the following FIG. 260 (c). After performing the meter increase effect in which all 10 gauges are extinguished by extinguishing one gauge that has been lit, as shown in FIG. 260 (d), “full tank” is substituted for the meter display. By executing the meter increase effect that performs the character display CD2, a predetermined number (10 in this example) of balls enters the meter increase entrance 227, and notifies that the item granting condition is satisfied.

  The subsequent meter increase effects, item provision effects, and button effects effects are the same as in the first embodiment except that the demonstration screen (top menu screen) is being displayed, and therefore the same in FIG. While the description is omitted, the display related to the item granting effect is displayed before the display related to the demo screen (top menu screen) over the period shown in FIGS. 260 (e) to (n). By displaying the above, at least a part of the display related to the item giving effect is overlapped with at least a part of the display related to the demonstration effect (top menu screen). With such a configuration, since the visibility of the item granting effect is not hindered, it is possible to accurately inform the player that the item has been given and information on the given item. There may be a case where the presentation effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing the visibility of the demonstration screen (top menu screen).

  In this example, the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 260 (l), but the display related to the button effect is displayed in front of the display related to the demonstration screen (top menu screen). , Rather than operations related to the demo screen (top menu screen) (in this example, menu selection, volume adjustment, or brightness adjustment operation), operations related to button effects (in this example, setting of items acquired by the player) To receive the operation) for priority.

  Therefore, when the operation with the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 260 (l) (the timing at which the button effect is displayed in front of the demonstration screen (top menu screen)), the operation related to the button effect (this example) In FIG. 260 (n), the timing (the button menu is not displayed and the demo screen (top menu screen) is displayed. When the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing when () is displayed), an operation related to the demo screen (top menu screen) (in this example, an operation for menu selection, volume adjustment, or brightness adjustment) As a result of accepting, the corresponding processing is performed. Note that even when the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 260 (l) (the timing at which the button effect is displayed in front of the demonstration screen (top menu screen)), the demonstration screen (top menu screen) is displayed. ) (In this example, an operation for menu selection, volume adjustment, or brightness adjustment) may be accepted and the corresponding processing may be performed.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 9>
Next, the meter increase effect and the item provision effect according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 261 is a diagram illustrating a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Example 9 in time series.

  In the ninth embodiment, the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied while the menu screen described with reference to FIGS. 257 and 258 is displayed (the meter gauge is full). It is an example. In addition, since the meter increase effect, the item giving effect, and the effect mode of the button effect are the same as those in Example 8 except that the menu screen is being displayed, the same reference numerals are given in FIG. Although explanation is omitted, in this example, by displaying the display related to the item granting effect in front of the display related to the menu screen over the period shown in FIGS. 261 (e) to (n), At least a part of the display related to the item giving effect is overlapped with at least a part of the display related to the menu screen. With such a configuration, since the visibility of the item granting effect is not hindered, it is possible to accurately inform the player that the item has been given and information on the given item. In some cases, the presentation effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing the visibility of the menu screen.

  In this example, the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 261 (l), but the display related to the button effect is displayed in front of the display related to the menu screen. Prioritizes operations related to button effects (in this example, operations for setting items acquired by the player) over operations (in this example, operations for selecting menus such as mobile terminal linked services). It is configured as follows.

  Therefore, when an operation with the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 261 (l) (timing at which the button effect is displayed in front of the menu screen), an operation related to the button effect (in this example, the player) 261 (n), the timing shown in FIG. 261 (n) (the button screen is not displayed and the menu screen is displayed) When an operation with the chance button 136 is accepted, an operation related to the menu screen (in this example, an operation for performing menu selection such as a mobile terminal link service) is accepted, and corresponding processing is performed. Note that even when an operation with the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 261 (l) (the timing when the button effect is displayed in front of the menu screen), the operation related to the menu screen (in this example, A corresponding process may be performed on the assumption that an operation for selecting a menu of a mobile terminal linked service or the like has been received.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 10>
Next, the meter increase effect and the item provision effect according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 262 is a diagram showing a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Example 10 in time series.

  In the tenth embodiment, the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the meter gauge is full) while the volume adjustment screen described with reference to FIGS. 257 and 258 is displayed. This is an example. In addition, since the meter increase effect, the item giving effect, and the effect mode of the button effect are the same as in the above-described embodiment 8 except that the volume adjustment is being displayed, the same reference numerals are given in FIG. Although explanation is omitted, in this example, by displaying the display related to the item granting effect in front of the display related to the volume adjustment over the period shown in FIGS. 262 (e) to (n), At least a part of the display related to the item giving effect is overlapped with at least a part of the display related to the volume adjustment. With such a configuration, since the visibility of the item granting effect is not hindered, it is possible to accurately inform the player that the item has been given and information on the given item. There may be a case where the production effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing the visibility of the volume adjustment.

  In this example, the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 262 (l), but the display related to the button effect is displayed in front of the display related to the volume adjustment. An operation related to button effects (in this example, an operation for setting an item acquired by a player) is given priority over an operation (in this example, an operation for adjusting the volume). .

  Therefore, when an operation with the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 262 (l) (timing at which the button effect is displayed before the volume adjustment), an operation related to the button effect (in this example, the player) 262 (n), the timing shown in FIG. 262 (n) (the timing at which the volume adjustment is displayed without the button effect displayed). When an operation with the chance button 136 is accepted, an operation related to volume adjustment (in this example, an operation for adjusting the volume) is accepted and corresponding processing is performed. Note that even when an operation with the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 262 (l) (the timing at which the button effect is displayed before the volume adjustment), the operation related to the volume adjustment (in this example, A corresponding process may be performed on the assumption that the operation for adjusting the volume) has been received.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 11>
Next, a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Example 11 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 263 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item provision effect according to Example 11 in time series.

  Example 11 starts an item granting effect based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the meter gauge is full) while the two-dimensional code display screen described with reference to FIG. 259 is displayed. It is an example. In addition, since the meter increase effect, the item grant effect, and the effect mode of the button effect are the same as those in the eighth embodiment except that the two-dimensional code display screen is being displayed, the same reference numerals are given in FIG. 263. In addition, although the description thereof is omitted, in this example, the display related to the item granting effect is displayed before the display related to the two-dimensional code display screen over the period shown in FIGS. 263 (g) to (n). By displaying the above, at least a part of the display related to the item granting effect is overlapped with at least a part of the two-dimensional code. With such a configuration, since the visibility of the item granting effect is not hindered, it is possible to accurately inform the player that the item has been given and information on the given item. There may be a case where the rendering effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing the visibility of the two-dimensional code.

  In this example, the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 263 (l). However, since the display related to the button effect is displayed in front of the two-dimensional code, the operation related to the two-dimensional code is performed. Prioritize operations related to button effects (in this example, operations for setting items acquired by the player) over operations (in this example, operations for ending the two-dimensional code display screen). It is composed.

  Therefore, when an operation with the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 263 (l) (the timing at which the button effect is displayed before the two-dimensional code), an operation related to the button effect (in this example, a game) The corresponding processing is performed on the assumption that the person has received the operation for setting the item acquired by the person, but the timing shown in FIG. 263 (n) (the button effect is not displayed and the two-dimensional code is displayed) When an operation with the chance button 136 is received at (timing), a corresponding process is performed assuming that an operation related to the two-dimensional code (in this example, an operation for ending the two-dimensional code display screen) is received. Note that even when an operation with the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 263 (l) (the timing when the button effect is displayed in front of the two-dimensional code display screen), In this example, it may be configured to perform a corresponding process on the assumption that an operation for ending the two-dimensional code display screen is received.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 12>
Next, the meter increase effect and the item provision effect according to Example 12 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 264 is a diagram showing a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Example 12 in time series.

  In the twelfth embodiment, the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the meter gauge is full) while the effect customization screen described with reference to FIGS. 257 and 258 is displayed. This is an example of setting an item using an effect customization screen. In addition, since the meter increase effect, the item grant effect, and the effect mode of the button effect are the same as those in Example 8 except that the effect customization screen is being displayed, the same reference numerals in FIG. Although explanation thereof is omitted, in this example, the display related to the item granting effect is displayed before the display related to the effect customization screen over the period shown in FIGS. 264 (e) to (o). Thus, at least a part of the display related to the item giving effect is overlapped with at least a part of the effect customization screen. With such a configuration, since the visibility of the item granting effect is not hindered, it is possible to accurately inform the player that the item has been given and information on the given item. There may be a case where the production effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing the visibility of the production customization screen.

  In this example, the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 264 (l). However, since the display related to the button effect is displayed in front of the effect customize screen, the operation related to the effect customize screen is displayed. An operation related to a button effect (in this example, an operation for setting an item acquired by a player) is given priority over an operation (in this example, an operation for determining an item to be set on the effect customization screen). It is configured.

  Therefore, when an operation with the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 264 (l) (the timing at which the button effect is displayed in front of the effect customization screen), an operation related to the button effect (in this example, a game) 264 (n), but the timing customization screen is displayed without displaying the button effect. When an operation with the chance button 136 is received at (timing), an operation related to the effect customization screen (in this example, an operation for determining an item to be set on the effect customization screen) is received, and corresponding processing is performed. Note that even when an operation with the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 264 (l) (the timing at which the button effect is displayed in front of the effect customization screen), the operation related to the effect customization screen (this example) Then, on the effect customization screen, it may be configured to perform a corresponding process on the assumption that an operation for determining an item to be set is accepted.

  In this example, in the state where the “Yes” option is temporarily selected during the button production, as shown in FIG. 264 (l), the pressing operation of the chance button 136 is accepted and as shown in FIG. 264 (m). In addition, even when the “Yes” option is highlighted, the process of setting the acquired item immediately is not performed, and the menu screen is displayed again as shown in FIGS. 264 (q) to (u). When the mobile terminal linked service screen is selected and the effect customization screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 264 (v), the item acquired in the item grant effect (item A in this example) can be set. It is configured as follows.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 13>
Next, a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Example 13 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 265 is a diagram illustrating a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Example 13 in time series.

  In the thirteenth embodiment, the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the meter gauge is full) while the effect customization screen described with reference to FIGS. 257 and 258 is displayed. This is an example in which an item is immediately set by an operation in a button effect.

  Since the meter increase effect, the item provision effect, and the button effect effect are the same as those in the above-described Example 12, the same reference numerals are given in FIG. 265 and the description thereof is omitted. In this example, FIG. j) to (k), when the “Yes” option is provisionally selected in the button production shown in FIG. 265 (l), when the pressing operation of the chance button 136 is accepted, as shown in FIG. As shown in (m), the “Yes” option is highlighted to notify that the selection of “Yes” is confirmed (the selection to set the acquired item A has been made). When an item is acquired while the effect customization screen is displayed, as shown in FIG. 265 (i), the item A is additionally displayed as a selectable item on the effect customization screen being displayed.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 14>
Next, the meter increase effect and the item provision effect according to Example 14 will be described using FIG. 266. FIG. 266 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item provision effect according to Example 14 in time series.

  In the fourteenth embodiment, the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the meter gauge is full) while the effect customization screen described with reference to FIGS. 257 and 258 is displayed. After that, the point that the item is set using the effect customization screen is the same as that of the twelfth embodiment described with reference to FIG. 264. However, in this example, the effect customization screen is displayed in front of the display related to the item grant effect. By displaying, at least a part of the effect customization screen is overlapped with at least a part of the display related to the item giving effect (in this example, all gauges of the meter).

  With such a configuration, the visibility of the effect customization effect is not hindered, so it is possible to accurately notify the player of information about the acquired item, and the visibility of the item granting effect is temporarily In some cases, the effect can be enhanced. In addition, you may comprise so that at least one part of an effect customization screen may not overlap with at least one part of the display regarding an item provision effect.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 15>
Next, the meter increase effect and the item provision effect according to Example 15 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 267 is a diagram illustrating a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Example 15 in time series.

  In the fifteenth embodiment, the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the meter gauge is full) while the effect customization screen described with reference to FIGS. 257 and 258 is displayed. This is an example in which the item giving effect is continued even when the symbol variation display is started during the display of the effect customization screen. In addition, since the meter increase effect, the item giving effect, and the effect mode of the button effect are the same as in the above-described Example 12 except that the effect customization screen is being displayed, the same reference numerals are given in FIG. The description is omitted.

  In this example, during the item granting effect shown in FIG. 267 (k), as shown in FIG. 267 (l), the ball enters the starting port (in this example, the first special figure starting port 230). In FIG. 267 (m), the symbol variation display is started, but the item giving effect is continued. With such a configuration, the item granting effect is not stopped at an unexpected timing of the player, and the player's willingness to play is not hindered.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 16>
Next, a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to the sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 268 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item provision effect according to Example 16 in time series.

  The present Example 16 is that the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied during the symbol change (the meter gauge is full), as described with reference to FIG. Although it is the same as 1, in this example, an item is displayed across two fluctuations of the fluctuation and the next fluctuation.

  Specifically, after the change is finished during the execution of the item giving effect shown in FIG. 268 (k) and the symbol is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. Based on this, a new floating game has started. Then, the button effect is continued even in the next symbol variation following the symbol variation in which the item granting condition is satisfied, and the button effect is obtained based on the reception of the pressing operation of the chance button 136 as shown in FIG. 268 (m). , The item granting effect is resumed, and the items acquired by the player are displayed. If the item can be displayed across multiple symbol variations as in this example, the item granting effect will not be interrupted with the stop or start of symbol variation, and the player's willingness to play Can be sustained. In addition, the symbol fluctuation | variation which continues the display of an item is not limited to 2 times, 3 times or more may be sufficient and it may not be a continuous symbol fluctuation | variation.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 17>
Next, a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Example 17 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 269 is a diagram illustrating a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Example 17 in time series.

  The present Example 17 is the example described with reference to FIG. 250 in that the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied during the symbol variation (the meter gauge is full). 1, but in this example, it is possible to detect the entry of the ball into the meter increase entrance 227 even during the execution of the item granting effect, and when the entry of the ball is detected, the meter increasing effect is executed. ing.

  Specifically, during the execution of the item granting effect shown in FIG. 268 (j), as shown in FIG. 268 (k), since the entry of the ball to the meter increasing entrance 227 is detected, the following FIG. 268 (l As shown in (2), during the display of the item by the item granting effect, the meter increasing effect for advancing the meter gauge is started. If the meter can be increased during the display of items as in this example, the player's willingness to play may be further enhanced. In addition to allowing the meter to increase while the item is displayed, the item granting condition may be met (the meter gauge may be full) In this case, you may comprise so that the right of item provision can be carried over after the next game.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 18>
Next, a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Example 18 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 270 is a diagram illustrating a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Example 18 in time series.

  In Example 18, a mini game is executed based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied during the symbol change (the meter gauge is full), and the item granting effect is started after the mini game ends. To do. FIG. 270 (e) shows a state in which a mini game is started. In this example, the display area for displaying the gauge of the meter is enlarged, and the Amida lottery is executed in the enlarged display area. Needless to say, the mini game may be another type of game.

  The start position of the character in the Amida lottery in this example may be a predetermined position, may be determined by lottery, may be determined based on the player's selection operation, or the player's selection operation Regardless, the result may be predetermined. In addition, the sign of “X” in the result of Amidaku is out of place, the image imitating the capsule means that the item has been acquired, and the letter E means that the item E has been acquired. Is configured to notify the item to be acquired. If the pattern or color of the image imitating the capsule is different from the usual, the appearance rate of a specific item may be high, and there may be multiple types of mini games. Depending on the type of mini game, Ease of acquisition and appearance rate of specific items may be different.

  In this example, since the result of the mini game (Amidakuji) was an image simulating a capsule, an item giving effect using the image is started, and items acquired by the player are displayed. With the configuration as in this example, there are cases where the player can be entertained without getting bored of the period from when the item granting condition is satisfied until the item is displayed.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / variation 1>
Next, a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Modification 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 271 is a diagram showing a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Modification 1 in time series.

  In the above embodiment, “the entry of the ball to the meter increasing entrance 227” is the trigger for the meter increasing production, but the present invention is not limited to this, and “the meter increasing entrance 227 is entered. Conditions other than “entrance of the ball” may be used as triggers for the meter increase effect. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIGS. 271 (a) to (b), the meter increases when a ball enters the starting port (in this example, the first special figure starting port 230) during non-design variation. An effect may be executed, and, as shown in FIGS. 271 (c) to (e), a ball enters the starting port (in this example, the first special figure starting port 230) during symbol variation. In this case, a meter increase effect may be executed.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 271 (e) to (g), the hold icon PI1 in the first display mode is changed to the hold icon PI2 in the second display mode based on the prefetched result of the variable game. In this case, the meter increase effect may be executed, or, as shown in FIGS. 271 (i) to (l), the meter increase effect may be executed when the pseudo-ream is executed.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 271 (m) to (o), even when the operation by the operating means (in this example, the chance button 136) is received during the execution of the button effect, the meter increase effect is executed. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 271 (p), a meter increase effect may be executed when a reach is executed, or when an SP reach or SP reach effect is executed as shown in FIG. 271 (q). The meter increase effect may be executed when the notice display (display of the princess character image in this example) is executed as shown in FIG. 271 (r). .

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Modification 2>
Next, a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Modification 2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 272 is a diagram showing a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Modification 2 in time series.

  The point of starting the item provision effect based on the fact that the item provision condition is satisfied during the display of the volume adjustment screen described with reference to FIGS. 257 and 258 (the meter gauge is full) is that FIG. In this example, the operation related to the volume adjustment (in this example, even if the display related to the volume adjustment is displayed in front of the display related to the button effect). The operation related to the button effect (in this example, the operation for setting the item acquired by the player) is received with priority over the operation for adjusting the volume.

  Specifically, when one sphere enters the meter increase entrance 227 as shown in FIG. 272 (d) while the volume adjustment screen shown in FIG. 272 (c) is being displayed, the following FIG. As shown in FIG. 272 (f), after executing the meter increase effect in which all 10 gauges are turned off by turning off one lit gauge as shown in FIG. Instead, by executing the meter increase effect that performs the character display CD2 of “full tank”, a predetermined number (10 in this example) of balls enters the meter increase entrance 227, and the item granting condition is satisfied. Is notified.

  The state shown in FIG. 272 (g) is a state in which the item provision effect is started. In the item granting effect according to the present example, an image CG simulating the appearance of the capsule is stepwise over the period shown in FIG. 272 (g) to FIG. While displaying in an enlarged manner, an animation is displayed that moves from the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the center, and as shown in FIG. 272 (j), information about the item appears from the inside of the image CG simulating a capsule. As shown in FIG. 272 (k), the item name (in this example, item A) IN and the item description IT (in this example, description of item A) are displayed. (Contents omitted)) is displayed.

  In this example, the display related to the item granting effect is displayed at the back side of the display of the volume control screen, so that at least part of the display of the volume control screen is at least part of the display related to the item granting effect. It overlaps with a part. With such a configuration, the visibility of the volume adjustment screen is not hindered, so it is possible to accurately notify the player of information related to the volume adjustment, and the visibility of the item provision effect is temporarily provided. In some cases, the effect can be enhanced by lowering.

  Further, in this example, the display related to the volume adjustment is displayed in front of the display related to the button effect, but as shown in FIG. 272 (n), the second operation means (in this example, the right key 161a). When the operation is received, the display for switching between “Yes” and “No” during the button production is executed without performing the process of raising the volume by one step, and the third operation means (this example) Then, when the operation of the left key 161b) is received, a display for switching between “Yes” and “No” temporarily selected during the button production is executed without executing the process of lowering the volume by one step.

  In the state where the “Yes” option is temporarily selected during the button production, as shown in FIG. 272 (r), when the pressing operation of the chance button 136 is accepted, after the button production is ended, FIG. 272 ( s) to animation display for moving from the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the lower display area while displaying the item name in a reduced scale over the period shown in FIG. In place of the character display CD1 “item not set”, the character display CD3 “item A is being set” is performed.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Modification 3>
Next, a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Modification 3 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 273 is a diagram showing a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Modification 3 in time series.

  In the above embodiment, “entrance of the ball to the meter increasing entrance 227” is the condition for establishing the item provision, but the present invention is not limited to this, and “the meter increasing entrance 227 is entered. Conditions other than “entrance of a ball” may be used as the conditions for establishing item grant. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIGS. 273 (a) to (c), the cumulative number of balls that have entered the variable winning opening 234 (for example, the total number of acquired balls during the big hit game) is a predetermined number (in this example, 10000 balls), the item may be given, or as shown in FIGS. 273 (d) to (h), when a specific operation is received by the operating means (in this example, the top Items may be assigned to the keys 161c → right key 161a → down key 161d → left key 161b.

  As described above, the gaming machine (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 159) according to the present embodiment is a gaming machine provided with display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 161). The display means is means capable of displaying an effect setting display (for example, an effect customization screen shown in FIG. 264, a volume adjustment screen shown in FIG. 262, and a brightness adjustment screen shown in FIG. 258). This is a display including one or a plurality of settings (for example, the item setting shown in FIG. 264, the volume setting shown in FIG. 261, and the brightness setting shown in FIG. 258). Apart from the effect setting display in the inside, the display (hereinafter referred to as “first display”) including one setting (for example, the setting of item A shown in FIG. 262 and FIG. 264). Shown in 4, a display suggesting imparted with Item (item name display and item description IT indication of IN)) can be displayed on the display means, it is the amusement machine characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, during the display of the effect setting display, the first display including one setting can be displayed separately from the effect setting display being displayed. In some cases, the player can be entertained even during display.

  In addition, there is provided count display means (for example, a gauge GG of a meter shown in FIG. 250 (a) or the like) capable of displaying a display in which the number or quantity increases or decreases, and the count display means displays a certain count display (hereinafter referred to as a count display). This is referred to as “first count display.” For example, all ten gauges shown in FIG.250 (c) or the like are turned off, or “full” character display CD2 shown in FIG. In this case, the first display may be displayed on the display unit, and the display by the count display unit may be a display that can be changed during a non-design variation display period.

  With such a configuration, the display of the count display means changes during the non-symbol variation display, so there are cases where the player can be made to play without getting bored. In addition, there is a case where the player is not aroused even if the floating game is no longer held.

  In addition, when the display of the count display means becomes the first count display, a second display different from the first display is displayed on the display means. (For example, display of the item image IG including the character display of “heat” shown in FIG. 253 (m), etc.).

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player by displaying a display other than the display including the setting.

  Further, when the display of the count display means becomes the first count display, the first display is displayed on the display means after the mini game (for example, the mini game shown in FIG. 270) is executed. May be.

  With such a configuration, the player may be able to be entertained for a period until the first display is displayed.

  Further, an operation unit (for example, a chance button 136 shown in FIG. 250 (l) or the like) is provided, and the display unit displays a display related to the operation unit (hereinafter referred to as “first operation”) during the display of the first display. For example, it is means capable of displaying a button effect shown in FIG. 250 (j) and the like, and the first operation display is an effective period display of the operation means (for example, FIG. 250 (j) and the like). The display including the operation valid period display TG) shown in FIG.

  With such a configuration, when the player can participate by operating the operation means even during the display of the first display, can increase the degree of intervention of the player, and can improve the interest of the player There is.

  Further, when the symbol variation display is started during the display of the effect setting display and the first display, the effect setting display may be deleted.

  With such a configuration, the first display can be displayed longer than the effect setting display to appeal to the player, and the player's willingness to play may be enhanced.

  Further, when the first display is displayed on the display unit, settings that can be selected in the effect setting display (for example, item settings shown in FIG. 264) may be increased.

  With such a configuration, there are cases where the number of options by the player can be increased and the player's willingness to play can be increased.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 273 (o) to (r), when a ball enters a predetermined game area during display of the effect setting display (for example, the effect customization screen) (for example, for meter increase) When the ball enters the entrance, or when the ball enters the start opening or the winning opening), the first display (for example, the player selects item A separately from the effect setting display being displayed). Display indicating that it has been acquired) can be displayed on the display means, and a setting corresponding to the first display (for example, item A) is added to one or a plurality of settings in the effect setting display It may be displayable on the display means.

  Note that the configuration of the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the above-described embodiment. For example, the symbol variation starts during the display of the item that appears during the non-design variation. Even in this case, it is not necessary to delete the item. Further, even when the change of the symbol starts while displaying the custom display and the item, only the custom display may be deleted without deleting the item. Moreover, even if the meter is difficult to visually recognize (or cannot be visually recognized) during the display of the custom display, an item may appear when the meter is full. In addition, the item may appear after the meter becomes full during non-symbol fluctuation.

  In addition, an item indicating reliability may appear after a meter that has been partially stored during non-design variation becomes full during the design variation. In addition, the item indicating the reliability (heat, intense heat, etc.) may be easier to appear when the symbol changes than when the symbol is not changing, or may not appear when the symbol is changed. Further, a button effective meter (operation effective period display) may be displayed during non-design variation. In addition, you can cancel the display of the demo screen (or without canceling), display the item, cancel the menu display (or without canceling), display the item, The item may be displayed by canceling the display of the two-dimensional code (or without canceling).

  Moreover, a meter may accumulate | store by opportunity other than ball passing. Further, there may be an increase mode in which the amount of increase of the meter is increased from the normal time. In this case, it may be configured to shift to the increase mode when the reserve is full or the electric support is completed. Also, the item may appear after the mini game when the meter is full. Moreover, you may perform the effect that an item appears even during SP reach. Further, the reach button production period may overlap with the customizable button production period, and the button may be effective for the other production rather than one. Further, the appearing item may change depending on the gaming state, each stage, or timing.

  In addition, when an item appears while the customization screen is displayed, the display of “?” On the customization screen may be changed (additional items are displayed), or the customization screen is displayed again without changing In addition, the display of “?” On the customization screen may be changed. Further, a notice of an appearing item may be given, and if the color of the meter is different from the normal time, a specific item may easily appear, or the color may be changed over time. In addition, the items may be displayed over a plurality of variations, the meter may be stored during the display of the items, or the meter may be filled up with one kind of trigger.

  Other display devices other than the decorative symbol display device 208 (for example, other liquid crystal display devices, one or a plurality of single-color or full-color LEDs, dot matrix display devices, 7-segment display devices, organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display devices, Meter display may be performed only with a reel (drum) display device, leaf display device, plasma display, or projector), or meter display may be performed with the decorative symbol display device 208 and another display device (for example, When the ball enters the meter increasing entrance 227, the meter display of the decorative design display device 208 and the meter display of the other display device are increased by the same increase amount). It is good also as a count display means which performs a meter display.

  Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to a pachinko machine, for example, a plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols, a start lever for instructing rotation of the reels, and each reel. , A stop button for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, lottery means for determining whether or not an internal winning of a plurality of types of winning combinations is won by lottery, and reel rotation based on the lottery result of the lottery means Whether the symbol combination displayed by the reel stop control means for performing stop control related to the stop of the reel and the reels stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means is a symbol combination determined in advance corresponding to the winning combination internally A determination means for determining whether or not the symbol stop mode is a predetermined winning mode, and a payout control unit that performs a game medium payout process for paying out a game medium corresponding to the predetermined winning mode; It is also suitable, such as a slot machine equipped.

  In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention can be applied to an enclosed gaming machine. Here, the “enclosed game machine” is one that circulates and uses game balls enclosed in the game machine. In addition, the main control unit, the first sub control unit, and the second sub control unit may be configured as a single chip, or the main control unit and the first sub control unit may be configured to allow bidirectional communication. Good. Moreover, while enabling bidirectional communication between the main control unit and the first sub control unit, communication from the first sub control unit to the second sub control unit may be one-way communication.

  Next, another specific example of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 274 to 327. It should be noted that the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 274 to 327 are used only in the description of the embodiment shown in FIGS. 274 to 327 in principle, and even if the overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings. The reference numerals 274 to 327 are prioritized.

Next, an example of an effect using the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 274 to 276.
FIG. 274 shows staged examples using the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 in stages.

  FIG. 274 (a) shows a state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 are located at an initial position above the decorative symbol display device 208. When each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is located at the initial position, the movable body 1 overlaps the movable body 2. For this reason, when each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is located at the initial position, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the movable body 2 by the movable body 1. The movable bodies 1 and 2 are movable bodies provided with light emitting means (for example, a plurality of LEDs), and are movable bodies that can emit light in various light emission patterns according to production. FIG. 274 (a) shows a state where the light emitting means of the movable bodies 1 and 2 are not emitting light. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 figure 4 aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 figure 4 aa4, the general figure hold number aa5, The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The area below the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 is an area for displaying a variation icon display, and a variation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed in the display area for the variation icon display. To the left of the display area of the variable icon display is a special figure 1 hold icon display area. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area, a hold icon ab1 in the merchant character form, and hold icons ab2 and ab3 in the default form are displayed. It is displayed. The hold icon in the form of a merchant character is a hold icon used as a prefetch notice. The right side of the display area of the variable icon display is a special figure 2 hold icon display area, and a hold icon ac1 of a default mode is displayed in the special figure 2 hold icon display area. In FIGS. 274 to 276, when the light emitting means provided in the movable bodies 1 and 2 emit light, the light emitting means is shown in light ink color, and when the light emitting means does not emit light, it is shown in white.

  The display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is composed of a plurality of layers. In the innermost layer, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the foremost layer, a ball removal error display h111 with a character string “please remove the ball” is displayed. Between the layer in which the decorative symbol is displayed and the layer in which the ball removal error display h111 is displayed, a button notice display imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date indicating the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 with a gauge. A display h112, and a notice display (or tutorial display) h113 by a balloon of “Tonochi” character and a “chance when reaching reach!” H113 are displayed.

  FIG. 274 (b) following FIG. 274 (a) shows a state in which the respective light emitting means emit light while the movable bodies 1 and 2 remain in the initial position.

  FIG. 274 (c) following FIG. 274 (b) shows a state in which the movable body 1 has moved from the initial position to approximately the center front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movable body 2 is positioned at the initial position. Yes. Since the movable body 1 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movable body 1 is a part of the decorative symbol, the number of reserved symbols aa5, the portion of the fourth symbol aa6 of the common symbol, and the button notice display h110. , Part of the ball removal error display h111, operation expiration date display h112, and part of the advance notice display (or tutorial display) h113. Note that the movable body 1 may be positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, so that the movable body 1 may overlap with other displays, or any one of these displays. There may be cases where the display does not overlap.

  FIG. 274 (d) following FIG. 274 (c) shows a state in which the movable body 1 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the deformation operation is being performed. The movable portion 11 of the movable body 1 rotates about 30 ° clockwise from the initial posture, the movable portion 12 rotates about 30 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture, and the movable portion 14 moves downward.

  FIG. 274 (e) following FIG. 274 (d) shows a state where the movable body 1 is positioned substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the deformation operation is completed. The movable portion 11 of the movable body 1 rotates about 120 ° clockwise from the initial posture, the movable portion 12 rotates about 120 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture, and the movable portion 14 moves downward. As the movable body 1 is deformed, a part of the hold icons ab1 to ab3, a part of the change icon ad1, a part of the hold icon ac1, another part of the button notice display h110, and a ball removal error display The other part of h111 is overlapped by the movable body 1. The movable body 1 may be deformed at a position approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, so that the movable body 1 may overlap with other displays. There may be cases where there is no overlap in the display.

  In FIG. 274 (f) following FIG. 274 (e), the movable body 1 moves to the initial position after performing the operation of returning to the shape before deformation, and the light emitting means of the movable bodies 1 and 2 are turned off. Indicates the state.

  Thus, in this production example, in the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 that are positioned in the front-rear direction in the initial position, only the movable body 1 on the front side falls forward of the decorative symbol display device 208. This is an example in which a deforming operation is performed. This production example may be performed as a pre-reading notice or as a notice of the change. When the present effect example is performed, there may be a case where the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the present effect example is not performed.

  FIG. 275 shows an example of effects using the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 275 (a) shows a state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 are located at the initial position above the decorative symbol display device 208. When each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is located at the initial position, the movable body 1 overlaps the movable body 2. For this reason, when each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is located at the initial position, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the movable body 2 by the movable body 1. The movable bodies 1 and 2 are movable bodies provided with light emitting means (for example, a plurality of LEDs), and are movable bodies that can emit light in various light emission patterns according to production. FIG. 275 (a) shows a state where the light emitting means of the movable bodies 1 and 2 are not emitting light. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 figure 4 aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 figure 4 aa4, the general figure hold number aa5, The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The area below the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 is an area for displaying a variation icon display, and a variation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed in the display area for the variation icon display. To the left of the display area of the variable icon display is a special figure 1 hold icon display area. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area, a hold icon ab1 in the merchant character form, and hold icons ab2 and ab3 in the default form are displayed. It is displayed. The hold icon in the form of a merchant character is a hold icon used as a prefetch notice. The right side of the display area of the variable icon display is a special figure 2 hold icon display area, and a hold icon ac1 of a default mode is displayed in the special figure 2 hold icon display area.

  The display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is composed of a plurality of layers. In the innermost layer, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the foremost layer, a ball removal error display h111 with a character string “please remove the ball” is displayed. Between the layer in which the decorative symbol is displayed and the layer in which the ball removal error display h111 is displayed, a button notice display imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date indicating the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 with a gauge. A display h112, and a notice display (or tutorial display) h113 by a balloon of “Tonochi” character and a “chance when reaching reach!” H113 are displayed.

  FIG. 275 (b) following FIG. 275 (a) shows a state in which the light emitting units emit light while the movable bodies 1 and 2 remain in the initial position.

  FIG. 275 (c) following FIG. 275 (b) shows a state in which the movable body 2 moves from the initial position to approximately the center front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movable body 1 is positioned at the initial position. Yes. Since the movable body 2 is positioned substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movable body 2 is a part of the decorative symbol, a part of the special figure 2 holding number aa3, the fourth symbol aa4 of the special figure 2, and a button notice. It overlaps with a part of the display h110, a ball removal error display h111, an operation expiration date display h112, and a notice display (or tutorial display) h113. Note that the movable body 2 may be positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, so that the movable body 2 may overlap other displays, or any one of these displays. There may be cases where the display does not overlap.

  FIG. 275 (d) following FIG. 275 (c) shows a state in which the movable body 2 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the deformation operation is being performed. Each of the pair of movable parts 23 of the movable body 2 is rotated about 70 ° clockwise from the initial posture.

  FIG. 275 (e) following FIG. 275 (d) shows a state where the movable body 2 is positioned substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the deformation operation is completed. Each of the pair of movable parts 23 of the movable body 2 is rotated about 90 ° clockwise from the initial posture. Due to the deformation of the movable body 2, a part of the hold icons ab1 and ab2 and the other part of the button notice display h110 are newly overlapped by the movable body 2. The movable body 2 may be deformed at a position approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, so that the movable body 2 may overlap with other displays. There may be cases where there is no overlap in the display.

  In FIG. 275 (f) following FIG. 275 (e), the movable body 2 moves to the initial position after performing the operation of returning to the shape before deformation, and the light emitting means of the movable bodies 1 and 2 are turned off. Indicates the state.

  Thus, in this production example, in the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 that are located at positions that overlap in the front-rear direction in the initial position state, only the movable body 2 on the rear side is in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. This is an example in which an operation of dropping and deforming is performed. This production example may be performed as a pre-reading notice or as a notice of the change. When the present effect example is performed, there may be a case where the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the present effect example is not performed. When this production example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where the production example shown in FIG. 274 is performed. The case where the example of production shown in FIG. 274 is performed rather than the case where it is displayed may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed.

  FIG. 276 shows an example of effects using the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 described in FIGS. 1812 to 1816 and the like in stages.

  FIG. 276 (a) shows a state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 are located at the initial position above the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. When each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is located at the initial position, the movable body 1 overlaps the movable body 2. For this reason, when each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is located at the initial position, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the movable body 2 by the movable body 1. The movable bodies 1 and 2 are movable bodies provided with light emitting means (for example, a plurality of LEDs), and are movable bodies that can emit light in various light emission patterns according to production. FIG. 276 (a) shows a state where the light emitting means of the movable bodies 1 and 2 are not emitting light. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 figure 4 aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 figure 4 aa4, the general figure hold number aa5, The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The area below the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 is an area for displaying a variation icon display, and a variation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed in the display area for the variation icon display. To the left of the display area of the variable icon display is a special figure 1 hold icon display area. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area, a hold icon ab1 in the merchant character form, and hold icons ab2 and ab3 in the default form are displayed. It is displayed. The hold icon in the form of a merchant character is a hold icon used as a prefetch notice. The right side of the display area of the variable icon display is a special figure 2 hold icon display area, and a hold icon ac1 of a default mode is displayed in the special figure 2 hold icon display area.

  The display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is composed of a plurality of layers. In the innermost layer, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the foremost layer, a ball removal error display h111 with a character string “please remove the ball” is displayed. Between the layer in which the decorative symbol is displayed and the layer in which the ball removal error display h111 is displayed, a button notice display imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date indicating the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 with a gauge. A display h112, and a notice display (or tutorial display) h113 by a balloon of “Tonochi” character and a “chance when reaching reach!” H113 are displayed.

  FIG. 276 (b) following FIG. 276 (a) shows a state in which the light emitting units emit light while the movable bodies 1 and 2 remain in the initial position.

  FIG. 276 (c) following FIG. 276 (b) shows a state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 start to move from the initial position at the same time and are positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the same time. Since the movable bodies 1 and 2 are positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 are part of the decorative symbol, part of the special figure 2 holding number aa3, 4 symbols aa4, ordinary figure holding number aa5, part of ordinary symbol 4th symbol aa6, part of button notice display h110, ball removal error display h111, operation expiration date display h112, and notice display (or tutorial display) h113 It overlaps with a part of. Further, since the movable bodies 1 and 2 are positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may overlap with other displays. There may be a case where the display does not overlap any one of the above. In addition, the timing of the movement start of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may be different. Further, even if the movement start timings of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 are different, the movement end timing may be the same, or the movement start timings of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may be the same. However, there may be cases where the timing of the end of movement is different.

  FIG. 276 (d) following FIG. 276 (c) shows a state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 are positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the deformation operation is being performed. The movable portion 11 of the movable body 1 is rotated about 30 ° clockwise from the initial posture, the movable portion 12 is rotated about 30 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture, the movable portion 14 is moved downward, and a pair of the movable body 2 is moved. Each of the movable parts 23 is rotated about 70 ° clockwise from the initial posture. The start timing of the deformation operation of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may be different.

  FIG. 276 (e) following FIG. 276 (d) shows a state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 are positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the deformation operations are completed at the same time. The movable portion 11 of the movable body 1 rotates about 120 ° clockwise from the initial posture, the movable portion 12 rotates about 120 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture, the movable portion 14 moves downward, and a pair of the movable body 2 Each of the movable parts 23 is rotated about 90 ° clockwise from the initial posture. As the movable bodies 1 and 2 are deformed, a part of the hold icons ab1 to ab3, a part of the change icon ad1, a part of the hold icon ac1, another part of the button notice display h110, and a ball removal Another part of the error display h111 is overlapped by the movable body 1 and the movable body 2. In addition, the movable bodies 1 and 2 may be deformed at a position approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, so that the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may overlap with other displays. The display may not overlap with any one of the displays. Note that the end timing of the deformation operation of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may be different.

  FIG. 276 (f) following FIG. 276 (e) shows a state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 start moving to the initial position and finish moving at the same time after the operations of returning the movable bodies 1 and 2 to the shape before deformation are simultaneously performed. 2 shows a state in which the respective light emitting means 2 are turned off simultaneously. In addition, the operation | movement which the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 return to the shape before a deformation | transformation may be started at a separate timing, and may be complete | finished at a separate timing. Further, even if the start timing of the operation of returning the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 to the shape before deformation is different, the end timing may be the same, or the deformation of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may be the same. Even when the start timing of the operation of returning to the previous shape is made the same, the end timing may be different. In addition, the timing of starting movement of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 to the initial position may be different, and the timing of starting movement of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 to the initial position may be different. Also good. Further, even if the timings of starting the movement of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 to the initial position are different, the timing of the movement end may be the same, or to the initial positions of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2. Even if the movement start timing is the same, the movement end timing may be different. The light emitting units of the movable bodies 1 and 2 may be turned off at different timings.

  As described above, in this production example, in the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 that are positioned in the overlapping position in the front-rear direction in the initial position state, both movable bodies fall simultaneously in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. This is an example in which an operation of deforming at the same time is performed. This production example may be performed as a pre-reading notice or as a notice of the change. When the present effect example is performed, there may be a case where the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the present effect example is not performed. When this production example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where the production example shown in FIG. 274 and the production example shown in FIG. 275 are performed. In addition, the case where the effect example shown in FIG. 274 and the effect example shown in FIG. 275 are performed is configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where the effect example is performed. There may be cases.

  Next, a movable body 90 and an effect example using the movable body 90 will be described with reference to FIGS. 277 to 285.

  The movable body 90 will be described with reference to FIG. 277 (a) is a schematic front view of the movable body 90, and FIG. 277 (b) is a schematic left side view of the movable body 90.

  The movable body 90 includes a movable body 90a, a movable body 90b provided at the lower left of the movable body 90a, a motor m1 and a rotating shaft d1 for operating the movable body 90b, and a movable body 90c provided at the lower right of the movable body 90a. And a motor m2 and a rotating shaft d2 for operating the movable body 90c. The movable body 90a has a plate-like horizontally-long rectangular substrate mounting base portion 90a1, an LED substrate 90a2, and a cover portion 90a3. The movable body 90b includes a plate-shaped fan-shaped substrate mounting base portion 90b1, an LED substrate 90b2, and a cover portion 90b3. The movable body 90c includes a plate-shaped fan-shaped substrate mounting base 90c1, the LED substrate 90c2, and a cover portion. 90c3.

  The LED substrate 90a2 of the movable body 90a is provided with light emitting diodes a11 to a35 arranged in an array of 3 rows and 6 columns (however, 2nd row, 1st column, 3rd row, 1st column, 2nd row, 6th column). , And the third row and the sixth column are not provided with a light emitting diode). The LED substrate 90b2 of the movable body 90b is provided with light emitting diodes b1 to b4 along the outer periphery of the arc portion, and the LED substrate 90c2 of the movable body 90c is provided with the light emitting diode c1 along the outer periphery of the arc portion. -C4 are provided. All of the light emitting diodes (a11 to c4) may be composed of light emitting diodes of a single color (same color or different color), or a part of the light emitting diodes may be a single color light emitting diode and the other part may be a full color LED. All may be composed of full-color LEDs. Moreover, you may use light sources other than a light emitting diode for the light emitting diode (a11-c4) mounted in the movable body 90a.

  The initial operation of the movable body 90 will be described with reference to FIG. 278 (a) to 278 (g) show the initial operation of the movable body 90 performed step by step when the pachinko machine 100 is turned on. In FIGS. 278 to 284, the case where the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable bodies 90a, 90b, and 90c are turned off is expressed in white, and the case where the light emitting diode is turned on is expressed in light ink. In FIGS. 278 to 284, the cover portions 90a3, 90b3, and 90c3 are not shown.

  FIG. 278 (a) shows a state in which the movable body 90 is located at the initial position and the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable bodies 90a, 90b, and 90c are turned off. The movable body 90 can move in the vertical direction by arm portions provided at both ends. The arm portions provided at both ends of the movable body 90 may be transparent, translucent, or colored, or may be capable of emitting light by arranging a light emitting diode. You may arrange | position the cable connected to the movable body 90 behind a arm part so that a player cannot visually recognize. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays a character string “in preparation”.

  FIG. 278 (b) following FIG. 278 (a) shows that all of the movable bodies 90a, 90b, and 90c mounted on the movable bodies 90a, 90b, and 90c are positioned approximately in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the movable body 90 moves. The state where the light emitting diode is lit is shown. Further, the display of the character string “in preparation” is overlapped by the movable body 90.

  FIG. 278 (c) following FIG. 278 (b) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90 b and 90 c provided on the movable body 90 is rotated. The movable body 90b is rotated about 60 ° counterclockwise, and the movable body 90c is rotated about 60 ° clockwise. Further, by rotating the movable bodies 90b and 90c, some of the light emitting diodes a32 to a35 of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c can be visually recognized.

  FIG. 278 (d) following FIG. 278 (c) shows a state where the movable bodies 90 b and 90 c provided on the movable body 90 are simultaneously rotated. The movable body 90b is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture, and the movable body 90c is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the initial posture. Further, by rotating the movable bodies 90b and 90c, all the light emitting diodes a11 to a35 mounted on the movable body 90a are visible.

  In FIG. 278 (e) following FIG. 278 (d), all the light emitting diodes provided on the movable body 90 are turned off, and the movable bodies 90b and 90c are each returned to their original postures. Indicates the state. The movable body 90b rotates about 30 ° clockwise from the posture of FIG. 278 (d), and the movable body 90c rotates about 30 ° counterclockwise from the posture of FIG. 278 (d).

  FIG. 278 (f) following FIG. 278 (e) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c has returned to the original posture. The movable body 90b is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the posture of FIG. 278 (d), and the movable body 90c is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the posture of FIG. 278 (d).

  FIG. 278 (g) following FIG. 278 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 90 has moved to the initial position.

  An example of the effect example of the movable body 90 will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 279 (a) to 279 (n) show examples of effects using the movable body 90 step by step.

  FIG. 279 (a) shows a state where the movable body 90 is positioned at the initial position and the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable bodies 90a, 90b, and 90c are turned off. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays a decorative symbol variation display.

  In FIG. 279 (b) following FIG. 279 (a), all the light-emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 are moved after the movable body 90 moves and is positioned substantially in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows the lighted state. In addition, before the movement of the movable body 90, all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be turned on, or all the light emission mounted on the movable body 90 during the movement of the movable body 90. The diode may be lit, or the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a22, a25, a32, a33, a34, and the like) overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c among the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90a. And a35) may be turned off.

  FIG. 279 (c) following FIG. 279 (b) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90 b and 90 c provided on the movable body 90 is rotated at the same time. The movable body 90b is rotated about 60 ° counterclockwise, and the movable body 90c is rotated about 60 ° clockwise. Further, by rotating the movable bodies 90b and 90c, the light of some of the light emitting diodes a32 to a35 of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c can be visually recognized.

  FIG. 279 (d) following FIG. 279 (c) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90 b and 90 c provided on the movable body 90 is rotated. The movable body 90b is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture, and the movable body 90c is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the initial posture. Moreover, the light of all the light emitting diodes a11-a35 mounted in the movable body 90a can be visually recognized because the movable bodies 90b and 90c rotate.

  In FIG. 279 (e) following FIG. 279 (d), all the light emitting diodes provided on the movable body 90 are turned off, and the movable bodies 90b and 90c are each returned to their original postures. Indicates the state. The movable body 90b is rotated about 30 ° clockwise from the posture of FIG. 279 (d), and the movable body 90c is rotated about 30 ° counterclockwise from the posture of FIG. 279 (d).

  FIG. 279 (f) following FIG. 279 (e) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c has returned to the original posture. The movable body 90b is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the posture of FIG. 279 (d), and the movable body 90c is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the posture of FIG. 279 (d).

  FIG. 279 (g) following FIG. 279 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 90 has moved to the initial position.

  FIG. 279 (h) following FIG. 279 (g) shows that all of the light emission mounted on the movable body 90 is shown in FIG. 279 (h). The state where the diode is lit is shown. In addition, before the movement of the movable body 90, all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be turned on, or all the light emission mounted on the movable body 90 during the movement of the movable body 90. The diode may be lit, or the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a22, a25, a32, a33, a34, and the like) overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c among the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90a. And a35) may be turned off.

  In FIG. 279 (i) following FIG. 279 (h), only the movable body 90b provided on the movable body 90 is rotated about 60 ° clockwise. As the movable body 90b rotates, the light of some of the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a32 and a33) of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable body 90b can be visually recognized.

  In FIG. 279 (j) following FIG. 279 (i), only the movable body 90b provided on the movable body 90 is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture. Moreover, the light of all the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a22, a32, a33) of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable body 90b is visible by rotating the movable body 90b.

  In FIG. 279 (k) following FIG. 279 (j), only the movable body 90c provided on the movable body 90 is rotated about 60 ° clockwise. By rotating the movable body 90c, the light of some of the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a34 and a35) of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable body 90c is visible.

  In FIG. 279 (l) following FIG. 279 (k), only the movable body 90c provided in the movable body 90 is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the initial posture. Further, by rotating the movable body 90c, light of all the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a25, a34, a35) among the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable body 90c can be visually recognized. The light of all the light emitting diodes provided is visible.

  FIG. 279 (m) following FIG. 279 (l) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c is simultaneously returned to the original posture after all the light emitting diodes provided in the movable body 90 are turned off. ing. The movable body 90b is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the posture of FIG. 279 (l), and the movable body 90c is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the posture of FIG. 279 (l). In addition, after each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c returns to the original posture at the same time, all the light-emitting diodes provided in the movable body 90 may be turned off, or each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c is returned to the original posture. While returning, all the light emitting diodes provided in the movable body 90 may be turned off. In addition, each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c may return to the original posture so as to return the operation of the movable bodies 90b and 90c in FIGS. 279 (i) to (l).

  FIG. 279 (n) following FIG. 279 (m) shows a state in which the movable body 90 has moved to the initial position and the reach effect of the decoration 7 has been started in the decorative symbol display device. The reach production of the decoration 7 may be started before the movable body 90 starts moving to the initial position, may be started while the movable body 90 moves to the initial position, or the movable body 90 is moved to the initial position. You may start after moving to.

  As described above, this effect example is an effect used as a notice of the change, but may be used as an effect of a prefetch notice. When the present effect example is performed, there may be a case where the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the present effect example is not performed. When this production example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the productions shown in FIGS. 280 to 283 is performed.

  An example of an effect using a modification of the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 277 will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 280 (a) to 280 (n) show stage effects using a modification of the movable body 90 step by step. In this modification of the movable body 90, the movable bodies 90b and 90c are configured to move in the vertical direction on the movable body 90a.

  FIG. 280 (a) shows a state in which the modification of the movable body 90 is located at the initial position, and the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable bodies 90a, 90b, and 90c are turned off. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays a decorative symbol variation display.

  FIG. 280 (b) following FIG. 280 (a) shows that all the light-emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 are moved after the movable body 90 moves and is positioned approximately in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows the lighted state. In addition, before the movement of the movable body 90, all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be turned on, or all the light emission mounted on the movable body 90 during the movement of the movable body 90. The diode may be lit, or the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a22, a25, a32, a33, a34, and the like) overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c among the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90a. And a35) may be turned off.

  FIG. 280 (c) following FIG. 280 (b) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90 b and 90 c provided on the movable body 90 is simultaneously moved upward. As the movable bodies 90b and 90c move, the light of some of the light emitting diodes a32 to a35 of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c can be visually recognized. The movable bodies 90b and 90c may move at different timings.

  FIG. 280 (d) following FIG. 280 (c) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c provided on the movable body 90 simultaneously moves further upward and stops at the target position. As the movable bodies 90b and 90c move upward, the light emitting diodes a11 to a16 mounted on the movable body 90a are overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c, and the light emitting diode a22 mounted on the movable body 90a. The light of ~ a35 is visible.

  FIG. 280 (e) following FIG. 280 (d) shows a state in which all the light emitting diodes provided on the movable body 90 are turned off, and the movable bodies 90b and 90c are simultaneously moving downward. Yes. By the movement of the movable bodies 90b and 90c, the light emitting diodes a22 to a25 are overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c, and the light emitting diodes a13 and a14 are visible.

  FIG. 280 (f) following FIG. 280 (e) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c is simultaneously returned to the original position. Each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c may return to the original position at different timings.

  FIG. 280 (g) following FIG. 280 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 90 has moved to the initial position.

  In FIG. 280 (h) following FIG. 280 (g), the movable body 90 moves from the initial position and is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The state where the diode is lit is shown. In addition, before the movement of the movable body 90, all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be turned on, or all the light emission mounted on the movable body 90 during the movement of the movable body 90. The diode may be lit, or the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a22, a25, a32, a33, a34, and the like) overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c among the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90a. And a35) may be turned off.

  In FIG. 280 (i) following FIG. 280 (h), only the movable body 90b provided on the movable body 90 moves upward, so that some of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable body 90b. Light from the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a32 and a33) can be visually recognized, and the light emitting diodes a11 and a12 are overlapped by the movable body 90b.

  FIG. 280 (j) following FIG. 280 (i) shows a state in which only the movable body 90b provided on the movable body 90 moves upward and stops at the target position. As the movable body 90bc moves upward, the light emitting diodes a11 to a13 mounted on the movable body 90a are overlapped by the movable body 90b, and the light from the light emitting diodes a22 and a23 mounted on the movable body 90a. Is visible.

  In FIG. 280 (k) following FIG. 280 (j), only the movable body 90c provided on the movable body 90 moves upward, so that a part of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable body 90c. Light from the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a34 and a35) can be visually recognized, and the light emitting diodes a15 and a16 are overlapped by the movable body 90c.

  FIG. 280 (l) following FIG. 280 (k) shows a state where only the movable body 90c provided on the movable body 90 moves upward and stops at the target position. As the movable body 90c moves upward, the light emitting diodes a14 to a16 mounted on the movable body 90a are overlapped by the movable body 90c, and the light from the light emitting diodes a24 and a25 mounted on the movable body 90a. Is visible.

  FIG. 280 (m) following FIG. 280 (l) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c is simultaneously returned to the original position after all the light emitting diodes provided in the movable body 90 are turned off. ing. In addition, after each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c is simultaneously returned to the original position, all the light emitting diodes provided in the movable body 90 may be turned off, or each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c is returned to the original position. While returning, all the light emitting diodes provided in the movable body 90 may be turned off. In addition, each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c may return to the original position so that the operations of the movable bodies 90b and 90c in FIGS. 280 (i) to (l) are returned.

  FIG. 280 (n) following FIG. 280 (m) shows a state in which the movable body 90 has moved to the initial position and the reach effect of the decoration 7 is started in the decorative symbol display device. The reach production of the decoration 7 may be started before the movable body 90 starts moving to the initial position, may be started while the movable body 90 moves to the initial position, or the movable body 90 is moved to the initial position. You may start after moving to.

  As described above, this effect example is an effect used as a notice of the change, but may be used as an effect of a prefetch notice. When the present effect example is performed, there may be a case where the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the present effect example is not performed. When this effect example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 279 to 283 is performed.

  An example of the effect example using the modification of the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 277 will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 281 (a) to 281 (n) show staged effects using a modification of the movable body 90 step by step. In this modification of the movable body 90, the movable bodies 90b and 90c are provided on the rear side of the movable body 90a.

  FIG. 281 (a) shows a state in which the modification of the movable body 90 is located at the initial position, and the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable bodies 90a, 90b, and 90c are turned off. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays a decorative symbol variation display.

  FIG. 281 (b) following FIG. 281 (a) shows that all the light-emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 are moved after the movable body 90 moves and is positioned approximately in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows the lighted state. In addition, before the movement of the movable body 90, all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be turned on, or all the light emission mounted on the movable body 90 during the movement of the movable body 90. The diode may be turned on, or the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes b1 to b3 and c1 to c3) mounted on the movable bodies 90b and 90c may be turned off.

  FIG. 281 (c) following FIG. 281 (b) shows a state where each of the movable bodies 90 b and 90 c provided on the movable body 90 is rotated at the same time. The movable body 90b is rotated about 60 ° counterclockwise, and the movable body 90c is rotated about 60 ° clockwise. Further, by rotating the movable bodies 90b and 90c, the light of some of the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes b1, b2, c1, and c2) of the light emitting diodes of the movable bodies 90b and 90c can be visually recognized.

  FIG. 281 (d) following FIG. 281 (c) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90 b and 90 c provided on the movable body 90 is rotated. The movable body 90b is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture, and the movable body 90c is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the initial posture. Moreover, the light of all the light emitting diodes mounted in the movable bodies 90b and 90c is visible by rotating the movable bodies 90b and 90c.

  In FIG. 281 (e) following FIG. 281 (d), all the light emitting diodes provided in the movable body 90 are turned off, and the movable bodies 90b and 90c are each returned to their original postures. Indicates the state. The movable body 90b rotates about 30 ° clockwise from the posture of FIG. 279 (d), and the movable body 90c rotates about 30 ° counterclockwise from the posture of FIG. 281 (d).

  FIG. 281 (f) following FIG. 281 (e) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c has returned to the original posture. The movable body 90b is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the posture of FIG. 279 (d), and the movable body 90c is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the posture of FIG. 281 (d).

  FIG. 281 (g) following FIG. 281 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 90 has moved to the initial position.

  FIG. 281 (h), following FIG. 281 (g), shows that all of the light emitting elements mounted on the movable body 90 are located in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 when the movable body 90 moves from the initial position. The state where the diode is lit is shown. In addition, before the movement of the movable body 90, all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be turned on, or all the light emission mounted on the movable body 90 during the movement of the movable body 90. The diode may be turned on, or the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes b1 to b4 and c1 to c4) mounted on the movable bodies 90b and 90c may be turned off.

  In FIG. 281 (i) following FIG. 281 (h), only the movable body 90 b provided on the movable body 90 is rotated about 60 ° counterclockwise. As the movable body 90b rotates, the light from the light emitting diodes b1 and b2 mounted on the movable body 90b is visible.

  In FIG. 281 (j) following FIG. 281 (i), only the movable body 90b provided in the movable body 90 is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture. Moreover, the light of all the light emitting diodes b1-b3 of the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90b is visible by rotating the movable body 90b.

  In FIG. 281 (k) following FIG. 281 (j), only the movable body 90c provided in the movable body 90 is rotated about 60 ° clockwise. As the movable body 90c rotates, the light from the light emitting diodes b1 and b2 mounted on the movable body 90c is visible.

  In FIG. 281 (l) following FIG. 281 (k), only the movable body 90c provided in the movable body 90 is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the initial posture. Moreover, the light of all the light emitting diodes c1 to c3 mounted on the movable body 90c is visible by rotating the movable body 90c.

  FIG. 281 (m) following FIG. 281 (l) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c is simultaneously returned to the original posture after all the light emitting diodes provided in the movable body 90 are turned off. ing. The movable body 90b is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the posture of FIG. 281 (d), and the movable body 90c is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the posture of FIG. 281 (d). In addition, after each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c returns to the original posture at the same time, all the light-emitting diodes provided in the movable body 90 may be turned off, or each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c is returned to the original posture. While returning, all the light emitting diodes provided in the movable body 90 may be turned off. In addition, each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c may return to the original posture so that the operations of the movable bodies 90b and 90c in FIGS. 281 (i) to (l) are returned.

  FIG. 281 (n) following FIG. 281 (m) shows a state in which the movable body 90 has moved to the initial position and the reach effect of the decoration 7 has been started in the decorative symbol display device. The reach production of the decoration 7 may be started before the movable body 90 starts moving to the initial position, may be started while the movable body 90 moves to the initial position, or the movable body 90 is moved to the initial position. You may start after moving to.

  As described above, this effect example is an effect used as a notice of the change, but may be used as an effect of a prefetch notice. When the present effect example is performed, there may be a case where the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the present effect example is not performed. When this effect example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 279 to 283 is performed.

  An effect example using the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 277 will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 282 (a) to (l) show examples of effects using the movable body 90.

  FIG. 282 (a) shows a decorative symbol variation display on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. In front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a movable body 90 in a state where all the light emitting diodes are visible is positioned. Further, a part of the decorative design, a part of the hold icon a1 in the default mode, a part of the hold icon a2 in the prefetch notice mode, and a part of the change icon ad1 are overlapped by the movable body 90.

  In FIG. 282 (b) following FIG. 282 (a), the confirmation display of “decoration 5 -decoration 6 -decoration 5” is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208. In front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a movable body 90 in a state where all the light emitting diodes are visible is positioned. Further, a part of the decorative symbol, a part of the hold icon a2 in the pre-reading notice mode, and a part of the change icon ad2 are overlapped by the movable body 90.

  In FIG. 282 (c) following FIG. 282 (b), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a decorative symbol variation display by digestion of the hold icon a2 in the pre-reading notice mode. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the display of the character string “Press the button!”, A button notice display h110, and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, and a button operation notice effect is performed. In front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a movable body 90 in a state where all the light emitting diodes are visible is positioned. Further, the movable body 90 includes a part of the decorative pattern, a part of the change icon ad3 of the merchant character mode, a part of the display of the character string “Press the button!”, The button notice display h110, and the operation expiration date display h112. It is overlapped.

  FIG. 282 (d) following FIG. 282 (c) shows that “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a when the player operates the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date. An image is displayed. In front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a movable body 90 in a state where all the light emitting diodes are visible is positioned. In addition, a part of the decorative design, a part of the merchant character mode variation icon ad1, and a part of the sun image are overlapped by the movable body 90.

  FIG. 282 (e) following FIG. 282 (d) shows that “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c when the player operates the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date. Has been started. In front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a movable body 90 in a state where all the light emitting diodes are visible is positioned. In addition, a part of the decorative design and a part of the merchant character-like variation icon ad <b> 1 are overlapped by the movable body 90.

  FIG. 282 (f) following FIG. 282 (e) shows that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the SP reach effect display by the character display displaying the character string “Jack!” Is started, and the decorative symbol display device On the upper right of 208, the decorative symbol variation display is reduced. In front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a movable body 90 in a state where all the light emitting diodes are visible is positioned. Further, a part of the SP reach effect display by the character display of Tono is overlapped by the movable body 90.

  FIG. 282 (g) following FIG. 282 (f) shows that the SP reach effect is finished in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decoration “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208. The combination of symbols is reduced and displayed as a temporary stop. In the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect display in which the character string “Win” and the confrontation scene between the character and the enemy character ends and the character of the character wins is displayed. In front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a movable body 90 in a state where all the light emitting diodes are visible is positioned. In addition, a part of the effect display won by the Tono character is overlapped by the movable body 90.

  In FIG. 282 (h) following FIG. 282 (g), “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped on the ornamental symbol display device 208. In front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a movable body 90 in a state where all the light emitting diodes are visible is positioned. A part of the decorative design is overlapped by the movable body 90.

  FIG. 282 (i) following FIG. 282 (h) shows a 1R jackpot game effect display of the 15R special jackpot game on the decorative symbol display device 208. On the upper left of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 7”, which is a big hit stop symbol, is displayed, and on the upper right, a character string “1R” indicating the number of rounds is displayed. A character string “80 balls” indicating the total number of numbers and a character string “number of jackpots: 1” indicating the number of jackpots are displayed on the lower right. In front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a movable body 90 in a state where all the light emitting diodes are visible is positioned. Further, a part of the 1R big hit game effect display is overlapped by the movable body 90.

  FIG. 282 (j) following FIG. 282 (i) shows a character string “Dito” after the 15R special jackpot game is completed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a movable body 90 in a state where all the light emitting diodes are visible is positioned. A part of the character string “Dito” is overlapped by the movable body 90.

  FIG. 282 (k) following FIG. 282 (j) is shifted to the electric support state after the end of the big hit game. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a decorative symbol variation display, a character string “Right-handed!”, A pattern that clearly indicates right-handedness, a variation icon ad4, and a special symbol 2 hold icon ac1 are displayed. . In front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a movable body 90 in a state where all the light emitting diodes are visible is positioned. In addition, a part of the decorative pattern change display, a part of the character string “Please do right-handed!”, A part of the pattern that clearly shows that right-handing is made, a part of the change icon ad4, and the special figure 2 hold A part of the icon ac1 is overlapped by the movable body 90.

  In FIG. 282 (l) following FIG. 282 (k), the electric support state is continued. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a decorative symbol variation display, a character string of “door opening error”, a character string of “sphere full error”, a variation icon ad5, and a special symbol 2 hold icon ac2 of a pre-reading notice mode are displayed. In front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a movable body 90 in a state where all the light emitting diodes are visible is positioned. Also, a part of the decorative symbol variation display, a part of the character string of “door opening error”, a part of the character string of “sphere full error”, a part of the variation icon ad5, and the special figure 2 hold icon of the pre-reading notice mode A part of ac2 is overlapped by the movable body 90.

As shown in this example, the movable body 90 may be positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 in various effects and gaming states. All of the above-described displays may be overlapped by the movable body 90, or the display overlapped by the movable body 90 may not be overlapped.
An effect example using the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 277 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 283 (a) shows a state in which a notice effect is performed by the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 279 when the player presses the chance button 136 during the operation valid period of the button button notice effect. Show. Note that even if the player does not operate the chance button 136 within the operation valid period of the chance button 136, a notice effect by the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 279 may be performed after the operation effective period of the chance button 136 ends. . Note that the series of effects shown in FIG. 283 (a) may be used as a notice of the change or may be used as a prefetch notice. Also, when the series of effects shown in FIG. 283 (a) is performed, the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the series of effects shown in FIG. 283 (a) is not performed. May be. When this effect example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 279 to 283 is performed.

  FIG. 283 (b) shows a state where the notice effect by the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 279 is performed after the countdown by the notice effect of the countdown is completed. Note that the series of effects shown in FIG. 283 (b) may be used as a notice of the change or may be used as a prefetch notice. In addition, when the series of effects shown in FIG. 283 (b) is performed, the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the series of effects shown in FIG. 283 (b) is not performed. In the case where the series of effects shown in FIG. 283 (b) is performed, the big hit symbol is easier to be finally displayed than in the case where the series of effects shown in FIG. 283 (a) is performed. In the case where the series of effects shown in FIG. 283 (a) is performed, the jackpot symbol is finally determined as compared to the case where the series of effects shown in FIG. 283 (b) is performed. You may comprise so that it may be displayed easily. When this effect example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 279 to 283 is performed.

  A modified example of how the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 277 looks at the initial position will be described with reference to FIG. The movable body 90 is located behind the game board 125 having game nails.

  FIG. 284 (a) shows an example in which the movable body 90 is positioned behind the structure 30a at the initial position. The structure 30a has a flat plate-like shape and includes a horizontally-long rectangular opening at a substantially central portion. The structure 30a is made of an opaque member. When the movable body 90 is located at the initial position, a part of the movable body 90a, a part of the movable body 90b, and a part of the movable body 90c of the movable body 90 are visually recognized through the opening of the structure 30a. It is possible. In addition, a part of any one of the movable bodies 90a to 90c may be visible and the other movable bodies may not be visible, or any of the movable bodies 90a to 90c may be visible. A part of the two movable bodies may be visible and the other movable body may not be visible.

  FIG. 284 (b) is an example in which the movable body 90 is positioned behind the structure 30b at the initial position. The structure 30b has a flat plate-like shape, and includes a vertically long rectangular cutout at a substantially central portion. The structure 30b is made of an opaque member. When the movable body 90 is located at the initial position, a part of the movable body 90a, a part of the movable body 90b, and a part of the movable body 90c of the movable body 90 are provided via the notch portion of the structure 30b. Visible. In addition, a part of any one of the movable bodies 90a to 90c may be visible and the other movable bodies may not be visible, or any of the movable bodies 90a to 90c may be visible. A part of the two movable bodies may be visible and the other movable body may not be visible.

  FIG. 284 (c) shows an example in which the movable body 90 is positioned behind the structure 30c at the initial position. The structure 30c is made of an opaque member. When the movable body 90 is positioned at the initial position, the movable body 90 is not visible to the player because it is overlapped with the structure 30c. Note that a transmissive liquid crystal device may be arranged in the structure 30c so that the movable body 90 positioned behind the structure 30c is more easily visible during non-display than during display in the transmissive liquid crystal device.

  A modified example of the position and moving operation of the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 277 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 285 (a) is a schematic view of the liquid crystal display device a208, the movable body 90, and the light emitting panel unit 919 as seen from the left side. In this example, the movable body 90 moves in the vertical direction in front of the liquid crystal display device a208 and behind the light emitting panel unit 919. Note that the liquid crystal display device a208 and the light-emitting panel unit 919 may be movable in the vertical direction, may be movable in the horizontal direction, and may be rotatable.

  FIG. 285 (b) is a schematic view of the transmissive liquid crystal display device b208 and the movable body 90 as viewed from the left side. In this example, the movable body 90 moves up and down behind the transmissive liquid crystal display device b208. Note that the transmissive liquid crystal display device b208 may be movable in the vertical direction, may be movable in the horizontal direction, or may be rotatable.

  FIG. 285 (c) is a schematic view of the movable liquid crystal display device c208 and the movable body 90 as viewed from the left side. In this example, the movable body 90 moves up and down behind and in front of the movable liquid crystal display device c208. The left diagram in FIG. 285 (c) shows the moving direction of the movable body 90 when the movable body 90 and the movable liquid crystal display device c208 are located at the initial positions. When the movable body 90 and the movable liquid crystal display device c208 are located at the initial position, the movable body 90 is located behind the movable liquid crystal display device c208, and the movable body 90 can move only in the vertical direction. The middle diagram in FIG. 285 (c) shows a state in which the movable liquid crystal display device c208 has moved downward. The diagram on the right side in FIG. 285 (c) shows a state where the movable body 90 has moved to the front of the movable liquid crystal display device c208 after the movable liquid crystal display device c208 has moved downward. When the movable body 90 is located in front of the movable liquid crystal display device c208, the movable body 90 can move in the vertical direction. Note that the movable liquid crystal display device c208 may be movable in the left-right direction or may be rotatable.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 286 to FIG. 296, an example of effect using the structure 247 will be described. A structure 247 used in the production examples of FIGS. 286 to 296 is a structure having a substantially circular front surface and a family crest pattern on the surface, and can be moved in the vertical direction. In FIGS. 286 to 295, the left diagram shows the state of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the structure 247, and the middle diagram shows the decorative symbol display device 208 in the state of the left diagram and the structure 247. The case of seeing through is shown. The diagram on the right side is an outline for determining whether or not a predetermined character display (for example, the Sabohani character display SB or the sun display su1) displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is visible depending on the angle of the player's line of sight. FIG. In the figure, the line of sight that the player can visually recognize the predetermined character display is indicated by ◯, and the line of sight that the player cannot visually recognize the predetermined character display is indicated by x. Note that the shape and arrangement position of the structure 247 of the present example are determined such that a predetermined character displayed behind the structure 247 has a predetermined eye angle (for example, a general sitting height (for example, a sitting height of 70 cm to 100 cm)). The angle of the line of sight in the player's normal gaming posture) may be calculated and designed so that it cannot be visually recognized. The decorative symbol display device 208 used in this example may be a movable liquid crystal display device or a transmissive liquid crystal display device.

  FIG. 286 shows an example of an effect using the structure 247 step by step. The left diagram in FIG. 286 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 figure 4 aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 figure 4 aa4, the general figure hold number aa5, The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area for displaying a fluctuation icon display, and a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b4 alternately in this order from left to right. It is displayed. Further, FIG. 286 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG.

  FIG. 286 (b) following FIG. 286 (a) shows that the Sabohani character display SB is displayed on the screen at a position overlapping the structure 247 during the display of the decorative symbol variation display on the decorative symbol display device 208. It is displayed to appear from below. The Sabohani character display SB is a display used as a notice of the change. In the state of FIG. 286 (b), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot visually recognize the Sabohani character display SB, while the player who is viewing from the substantially upper side is the Sabohani character. A part of the display SB can be visually recognized. In the description of the player's line of sight in this example and the example shown below, “substantially front” defines that the angle of the line of sight is within about ± 10 ° when the horizontal direction is 0 °. The substantially oblique upper direction defines an angle of the eyeline of about + 20 ° or more as substantially obliquely upward, and the substantially obliquely downward direction defines the angle of the eyeline of −about 20 ° or less as an approximately obliquely downward direction. Is not necessarily limited to these. In the description of the player's line of sight, it is only necessary that the position of the line of sight is higher than that of the front in the substantially oblique direction, and the position of the line of sight is lower than that in the substantially front direction.

  In FIG. 286 (c) following FIG. 286 (b), the entire Sabohani character display SB is displayed at the position overlapping the structure 247 in the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state of FIG. 286 (c), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot visually recognize the Sabohani character display SB, whereas the player who is viewing from the substantially upper side is the Sabohani character. At least a part of the display SB is visible.

  FIG. 286 (d) following FIG. 286 (c) shows a state where an animation display in which the Sabohani character display SB moves upward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The upper body portion of the Sabohani character display SB is displayed above the position of the upper end of the structure 247 and is displayed so as to overlap the special figure 2 holding icon b3. In the state shown in FIG. 286 (d), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front can visually recognize a part of the Sabohani character display SB, and the player who is viewing from substantially diagonally above is the Sabohani character display. The entire SB is visible.

  FIG. 286 (e) following FIG. 286 (d) shows a state in which an animated display in which the Sabohani character display SB moves further upward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. The Sabohani character display SB is displayed in the approximate center of the screen located above the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the medium decoration symbol.

  Thus, this example is an example in which the movement display is performed from the position where the Sabohani character display SB used for the notice of the change overlaps the structure 247 to the position where it does not overlap. Moreover, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. Moreover, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 287 to 295 is performed. It should be noted that the decorative symbol display device 208 does not move and display the Sabohani character display SB displayed at the position overlapping the structure 247, and at least one of the upward, downward, leftward, rightward, and rotation is displayed. One or a plurality of movements may be made so that a player viewing from substantially the front may be able to see at least a part of the Sabohani character display SB, or may be overlapped with the structure 247. While the Sabohani character display SB displayed at the position is moved and displayed, the decorative symbol display device 208 is moved in at least one of the upward direction, the downward direction, the left direction, the right direction, and the rotation, or a plurality of movements. Thus, there may be a case where a player who is viewing from substantially the front can visually recognize at least a part of the Sabohani character display SB.

  FIG. 287 shows an example of an effect using the structure 247 step by step. The left diagram in FIG. 287 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 figure 4 aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 figure 4 aa4, the general figure hold number aa5, The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area for displaying a fluctuation icon display, and a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b4 alternately in this order from left to right. It is displayed. Further, FIG. 287 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing a variable display of the decorative symbol.

  FIG. 287 (b) following FIG. 287 (a) shows that the entire sabotani character display SB is displayed at the position overlapping the structure 247 during the display of the decorative symbol variation display on the decorative symbol display device 208. It appears to appear from the bottom of the screen. The Sabohani character display SB is a display used as a notice of the change. In the state of FIG. 287 (b), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot visually recognize the Sabohani character display SB, whereas the player who is viewing from the substantially upper side is the Sabohani character. At least a part of the display SB is visible.

  FIG. 287 (c) following FIG. 287 (b) shows a state in which an animated display in which the Sabohani character display SB moves further upward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The Sabohani character display SB is displayed in the approximate center of the screen located above the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the medium decoration symbol.

  FIG. 287 (d) following FIG. 287 (c) shows a state where an animation display in which the Sabohani character display SB moves downward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The lower half of the Sabohani character display SB is displayed at a position where it overlaps with the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap with the special figure 2 holding icon b3. In the state of FIG. 287 (d), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front can visually recognize a part of the Sabohani character display SB, and the player who is viewing from substantially diagonally above is the Sabohani character display. The entire SB is visible.

  FIG. 287 (e) following FIG. 287 (d) shows a state in which an animation display in which the Sabohani character display SB moves downward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. The entire Sabohani character display SB is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247. In the state of FIG. 287 (e), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot visually recognize the Sabohani character display SB, whereas the player who is viewing from the substantially upper side is the Sabohani character. At least a part of the display SB is visible.

  As described above, in this example, after the Sabohani character display SB used for the notice of the change is moved from the position where it overlaps the structure 247 to the position where it does not overlap, the structure 247 is overlapped again. This is an example in which moving display is performed at the position to be displayed. Moreover, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. Moreover, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 286 to 295 is performed.

  FIG. 288 shows an example of an effect using the structure 247 and the structure 50t step by step. The structure 50t is a structure formed of an opaque thin plate, and the title of the game table is displayed on the surface. The left diagram in FIG. 288 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the structure 50t is located in front of the upper part. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 figure 4 aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 figure 4 aa4, the general figure hold number aa5, The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area for displaying a fluctuation icon display, and a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b4 alternately in this order from left to right. It is displayed. Further, FIG. 288 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG.

  FIG. 288 (b) following FIG. 288 (a) shows that the entire Sabohani character display SB is overlapped with the structure 247 during the display of the decorative symbol variation display on the decorative symbol display device 208. It appears to appear from the bottom of the screen. The Sabohani character display SB is a display used as a notice of the change. In the state of FIG. 288 (b), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot visually recognize the Sabohani character display SB, while the player who is viewing from the substantially upper side is the Sabohani character. At least a part of the display SB is visible.

  FIG. 288 (c) following FIG. 288 (b) shows a state in which an animation display in which the Sabohani character display SB moves further upward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The Sabohani character display SB is displayed in the approximate center of the screen located above the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the medium decoration symbol.

  FIG. 288 (d) following FIG. 288 (c) shows a state in which an animation display in which the Sabohani character display SB moves further upward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The upper half of the Sabohani character display SB is displayed at a position where it overlaps with the structure 50t, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the medium decoration symbol.

  FIG. 288 (e) following FIG. 288 (d) shows a state in which an animated display in which the Sabohani character display SB moves further upward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. The entire Sabohani character display SB is displayed at a position where it overlaps the structure 50t, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the interior decoration symbol. In the state of FIG. 288 (d), the player who is viewing the structure 50t from substantially the front cannot visually recognize the Sabohani character display SB, while the player who is viewing from the substantially oblique bottom is the Sabohani character. At least a part of the display SB is visible.

  As described above, in this example, the Sabohani character display SB used for the notice of the change is moved from the position where it overlaps with the structure 247 to the position where it does not overlap, and then overlapped with the structure 50t. It is an example which performs a movement display to a position. Moreover, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. Moreover, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 286 to 296 is performed. Also good.

  FIG. 289 shows an example of effect using the structure 247 step by step. The left side of FIG. 289 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 figure 4 aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 figure 4 aa4, the general figure hold number aa5, The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area for displaying a fluctuation icon display, and a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b4 alternately in this order from left to right. It is displayed. FIG. 289 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing variable display of decorative symbols.

  289 (b) following FIG. 289 (a) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the entire Sabohani character display SB appears from the lower left of the screen during the display of the decorative symbol variation display. Yes. The Sabohani character display SB is displayed so as to overlap a part of the variation icon ad1.

  FIG. 289 (c) following FIG. 289 (b) shows a state in which an animated display in which the Sabohani character display SB moves further to the right is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The lower right portion of the Sabohani character display SB is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247.

  FIG. 289 (d) following FIG. 289 (c) shows a state in which an animated display in which the Sabohani character display SB moves further to the right is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The entire Sabohani character display SB is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247. In the state of FIG. 289 (d), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot visually recognize the Sabohani character display SB, whereas the player who is viewing from the substantially upper side is the Sabohani character. At least a part of the display SB is visible.

  FIG. 289 (e) following FIG. 289 (d) shows a state in which an animation display in which the Sabohani character display SB moves further to the right is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. The entire Sabohani character display SB is displayed at a position that does not overlap the structure 247.

  Thus, in this example, the position where the Sabohani character display SB used for the notice of the change is not overlapped with the structure 247 after being moved from the position where it does not overlap with the structure 247 is displayed. This is an example of moving display. Moreover, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. Moreover, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 286 to 296 is performed. Also good.

  FIG. 290 shows an example of effects using the structure 247 step by step. The left diagram in FIG. 290 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 figure 4 aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 figure 4 aa4, the general figure hold number aa5, The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area for displaying a fluctuation icon display, and a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b4 alternately in this order from left to right. It is displayed. Further, FIG. 290 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing variable display of decorative symbols.

  FIG. 290 (b), which follows FIG. 290 (a), is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the entire Sabohani character display SB appears from the lower left of the screen during the display of the decorative symbol variation display. Yes. The Sabohani character display SB is displayed so as to overlap a part of the variation icon ad1. Further, the Sabohani character display SB of this example is larger than the Sabohani character display SB shown in FIG.

  FIG. 290 (c) following FIG. 290 (b) shows a state in which an animated display in which the Sabohani character display SB moves further to the right is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The lower right portion of the Sabohani character display SB is displayed at a position where it overlaps the structure 247, and the upper half of the Sabohani character display SB is displayed so as to overlap a part of the special figure 1 holding icon a3. ing.

  FIG. 290 (d) following FIG. 290 (c) shows a state in which an animation display in which the Sabohani character display SB moves further to the right is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. A substantially lower half of the Sabohani character display SB is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247. In the state of FIG. 290 (d), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front can visually recognize approximately the upper half of the Sabohani character display SB, and the player who is viewing from substantially above is the Sabohani character. At least a part of the display SB is visible.

  FIG. 290 (e) following FIG. 290 (d) shows a state in which an animated display in which the Sabohani character display SB moves further to the right is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. The entire Sabohani character display SB is displayed at a position that does not overlap the structure 247.

  In this way, in this example, the movement display is performed from a position where the Sabohani character display SB used for the notice of the change does not overlap the structure 247 to a position where a part of the Sabohani character display SB overlaps. This is an example in which a movement display is performed at a position that does not overlap with the structure 247 later, and a part of the Sabohani character display SB is an example of an effect that is always visible from a player with a substantially frontal eye. Moreover, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. Moreover, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 286 to 296 is performed. Also good.

  FIG. 291 shows staged examples using the structure 247 step by step. The left diagram in FIG. 291 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 figure 4 aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 figure 4 aa4, the general figure hold number aa5, The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area for displaying a fluctuation icon display, and a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b4 alternately in this order from left to right. It is displayed. FIG. 291 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG.

  FIG. 291 (b) following FIG. 291 (a) shows that the entire Sabohani character display SB is displayed at the position overlapped with the structure 247 during the display of the decorative symbol variation display on the decorative symbol display device 208. It appears to appear from the bottom of the screen. The Sabohani character display SB is a display used as a notice of the change. In the state of FIG. 291 (b), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot visually recognize the Sabohani character display SB, whereas the player who is viewing from the substantially upper side is the Sabohani character. At least a part of the display SB is visible.

  FIG. 291 (c) following FIG. 291 (b) is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the entire sun display su1 appears from the bottom of the screen at a position overlapping the structure 247. ing. The sun display su1 is a display used as a notice of the change. In the state shown in FIG. 291 (c), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot visually recognize the sun display su1 and the Sabohani character display SB, but is viewed from substantially obliquely above. Can visually recognize at least a part of the sun display su1 and at least a part of the Sabohani character display SB.

  FIG. 291 (d) following FIG. 291 (c) shows an animated display in which the Sabohani character display SB throws the sun display su1 upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the sun display su1 moves upward. This shows a state where an animated display is displayed. The substantially upper half of the sun display su1 is displayed at a position where it does not overlap with the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap with a part of the special figure 1 holding icon a3.

  FIG. 291 (e) following FIG. 291 (d) shows the sun display su1 in the decorative symbol display device 208 while the Sabohani character display SB is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247. The animation display which moves to is shown. The sun display su <b> 1 is displayed at the approximate center of the screen located above the structure 247 and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the interior decoration symbol.

  As described above, in this example, after the Sabohani character display SB and the sun display su1 used for the notice of the change are displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247, only the sun display su1 is displayed in the structure 247. It is an example which performs a movement display to the position which is not overlapped. Moreover, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. Moreover, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 286 to 296 is performed. Also good.

  FIG. 292 shows an example of an effect using the structure 247 step by step. The left diagram in FIG. 292 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 figure 4 aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 figure 4 aa4, the general figure hold number aa5, The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area for displaying a fluctuation icon display, and a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b4 alternately in this order from left to right. It is displayed. FIG. 292 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing variable display of decorative symbols.

  FIG. 292 (b) following FIG. 292 (a) is a diagram showing the entire Sabohani character display SB and the sun at a position overlapping with the structure 247 during the display of the decorative symbol variation display on the decorative symbol display device 208. Is displayed so as to appear from the bottom of the screen. Sabohani character display SB and sun display su1 are displays used as a notice of the change. In the state of FIG. 292 (b), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot visually recognize the Sabohani character display SB and the sun display su1, whereas the player who is viewing from substantially above. Can visually recognize at least part of the Sabohani character display SB and at least part of the sun display su1.

  FIG. 292 (c) following FIG. 292 (b) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation display in which the Sabohani character display SB and the sun display su1 move upward. The Sabohani character display SB and the sun display su1 are displayed at substantially the center of the screen located above the structure 247, and are displayed so as to overlap a part of the interior decoration symbol.

  FIG. 292 (d) following FIG. 292 (c) shows a state in which an animation display in which only the sun display su1 moves downward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. The substantially lower half of the sun display su1 is displayed at a position where it overlaps with the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap with the special figure 2 holding icon a3. In the state of FIG. 292 (d), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front can visually recognize a part of the sun display su1, and the player who is viewing from substantially diagonally above the sun display su1. The whole is visible.

  FIG. 292 (e), following FIG. 292 (d), shows that the sun display su1 is further downward in the decorative symbol display device 208 while the Sabohani character display SB is displayed at a position not overlapping the structure 247. The animation display which moves to is shown. The sun display su <b> 1 is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247. The player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot visually recognize the sun display su1, whereas the player who is viewing from substantially obliquely above can visually recognize at least a part of the sun display su1. .

  In this way, in this example, the Sabohani character display SB and the sun display are displayed after the Sabohani character display SB and the sun display su1 used for the notice of the change are overlapped with the structure 247. In this example, su1 is moved and displayed at a position where it does not overlap the structure 247, and then only the sun display su1 is moved and displayed at a position where it overlaps the structure 247. Moreover, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. Moreover, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 286 to 296 is performed. Also good.

  FIG. 293 shows an example of an effect using the structure 247 step by step. The left diagram in FIG. 293 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 figure 4 aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 figure 4 aa4, the general figure hold number aa5, The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area for displaying a fluctuation icon display, and a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b4 alternately in this order from left to right. It is displayed. In FIG. 293 (a), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the variation of the decorative symbol, and the effect image ef1 is displayed so as to protrude radially from the structure 247. The effect image ef1 is an effect image that covers the Sabohani character display SB used as a notice of the change, and is a display accompanying the Sabohani character display SB.

  FIG. 293 (b) following FIG. 293 (a) shows a substantially upper half of the Sabohani character display SB at a position overlapping the structure 247 during the display of the decorative symbol variation display on the decorative symbol display device 208. Are displayed so as to appear from the bottom of the screen, and the effect image ef1 is moved and displayed so as to appear from the bottom of the screen. In the state shown in FIG. 293 (b), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the Sabohani character display SB, but can see a part of the effect image ef1, but is substantially obliquely from above. The watching player can visually recognize at least part of the Sabohani character display SB and part of the effect image ef1.

  FIG. 293 (c), following FIG. 293 (b), shows the entire Sabohani character display SB at the position overlapping the structure 247 in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect image ef1 is displayed on the screen. It is moved and displayed so as to appear from below. In the state of FIG. 293 (c), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot visually recognize the Sabohani character display SB, while the player who is viewing from the substantially upper side is the Sabohani character. At least a part of the display SB is visible.

  FIG. 293 (d) following FIG. 293 (c) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation display in which the Sabohani character display SB and the effect image ef 1 move upward. The substantially upper body part of the Sabohani character display SB is displayed above the position of the upper end of the structure 247 and is displayed so as to overlap the special figure 2 holding icon b3. In the state shown in FIG. 286 (d), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front can visually recognize a part of the Sabohani character display SB, and the player who is viewing from substantially diagonally above is the Sabohani character display. The entire SB is visible.

  FIG. 293 (e) following FIG. 293 (d) shows a state in which an animation display in which the Sabohani character display SB and the effect image ef1 move further upward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. The Sabohani character display SB and the effect image ef1 are displayed at substantially the center of the screen located above the structure 247 and are displayed so as to overlap a part of the interior decoration symbol.

  As described above, this example is an example in which the display of the Sabohani character display SB used for the change notice is moved from the position where the Sabohani character display SB overlaps the structure 247 to the position where it does not overlap. Is displayed at a position where the effect image ef1 associated with the Sabohani character display SB is not overlapped with the structure 247 before being displayed at the position where the structure 247 is overlapped. Moreover, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. Moreover, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 286 to 296 is performed. Also good.

  FIG. 294 shows three presentation examples using the structure 247. The left diagram in FIG. 294 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 figure 4 aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 figure 4 aa4, the general figure hold number aa5, The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area for displaying a fluctuation icon display, and a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b4 alternately in this order from left to right. It is displayed. In FIG. 294 (a), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a variation of the decorative symbol. It is displayed so as to overlap a part. The balloon display h114 of the character string “Chance when a character is found!” Is a display for notifying that the Sabohani character display SB appears, and the Sabohani character display SB is a display used as a notice of the change.

  FIG. 294 (b) following FIG. 294 (b) shows that the entire Sabohani character display SB is displayed at the position overlapping the structure 247 during the display of the decorative symbol variation display on the decorative symbol display device 208. It appears to appear from the bottom of the screen. In the balloon display h114, a character string “Character appears!” Is displayed. The character string “character appears!” May be displayed before the appearance of the Sabohani character display SB, may be displayed simultaneously with the appearance, or may be displayed after the appearance. In the state of FIG. 294 (b), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot visually recognize the Sabohani character display SB, while the player who is viewing from the substantially upper side is the Sabohani character. At least a part of the display SB is visible.

  In FIG. 294 (c) following FIG. 294 (b), the sabotani character display SB displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247 in the decorative symbol display device 208 is enlarged. In the balloon display h114, a character string “Character expanding!” Is displayed. The character string “Character expanding!” May be displayed before the start of the expansion of the character display SB of Sabohani, may be displayed simultaneously with the start of expansion, or may be displayed after the start of expansion. In the state of FIG. 293 (c), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front can visually recognize a part of the Sabohani character display SB.

  Thus, in this example, before displaying the Sabohani character display SB used for the notice of the change at a position overlapping the structure 247, a display for notifying that the Sabohani character display SB is displayed. After the Sabohani character display SB is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247, a display notifying that the Sabohani character display SB is displayed is performed, and the position overlapping the structure 247 is displayed. This is an example in which the Sabohani character display SB displayed on the screen is enlarged and displayed to notify that the Sabohani character display SB is enlarged. Moreover, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. Moreover, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 286 to 296 is performed. Also good. Further, it may be configured such that the larger the size of the enlarged Sabohan character display SB, the easier it is to finally display the big hit symbol.

  The left diagram in FIG. 294 (A) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 294 (A) shows the display of the character display SB1 of the sabotani 1 and the sabotani 2 which are the notice display of the variation at a position where the decoration symbol display is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlapped with the structure 247. Character display SB2 is displayed. In the state of FIG. 294 (A), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the character display SB1 of the savohani 1 and the character display SB2 of the savohani 2, but is viewed from obliquely above. The player who is present can visually recognize at least part of the character display SB1 of Sabohani and at least part of the character display SB2 of Sabohani 2.

  Thus, this example is an example in which the character display SB1 of Sabohani 1 used for the notice of the change and the character display SB2 of Sabohani 2 used for the notice of the change are displayed at positions overlapping the structure 247. is there. Moreover, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. Moreover, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 286 to 296 is performed. Also good. Further, the larger the number of notice displays displayed at the position overlapping with the structure 247, the easier it may be to finally display the big hit symbol.

  The left side of FIG. 294 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the structure 50t is located in front of the upper part of the decorative symbol display device 208. Yes. In FIG. 294 (a), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol variation display, and the character display SB1 of the savory 1 serving as a notice display of the variation is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247. A character display SB2 of the savory 2 serving as a notice display of the change is displayed at a position overlapping with the structure 50t. In the state of FIG. 294 (a), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the character display SB1 of Sabohani 1 and the character display SB2 of Sabohani 2, but is viewed substantially obliquely from above. The player who is viewing can view at least a part of the character display SB1 of the Sabohani 1, and the player who is viewing from substantially obliquely below can view at least a part of the character display SB2 of the Sabohani 2.

  In this way, in this example, the character display SB1 of Sabohani 1 used for the notice of the change is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247, and the character display SB2 of Sabohani 2 used for the notice of the change is structured. It is an example displayed at a position overlapping with the body 50t. Moreover, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. Moreover, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 286 to 296 is performed. Also good. Further, the larger the number of notice displays displayed at the positions overlapping with the plurality of structures, the easier it is to make the big hit symbol finally displayed.

  FIG. 295 shows an example of an effect using the structure 247 step by step. The left diagram in FIG. 295 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 figure 4 aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 figure 4 aa4, the general figure hold number aa5, The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area for displaying a fluctuation icon display, and a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b4 alternately in this order from left to right. It is displayed. Further, FIG. 295 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG.

  FIG. 295 (b) following FIG. 295 (a) shows that the entire Sabohani character display SB is displayed at the position overlapped with the structure 247 during the display of the decorative symbol variation display on the decorative symbol display device 208. It appears to appear from the bottom of the screen. The Sabohani character display SB is a display used as a notice of the change. In the state of FIG. 295 (b), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot visually recognize the Sabohani character display SB, whereas the player who is viewing from the substantially oblique upper side is the Sabohani character. At least a part of the display SB is visible.

  FIG. 295 (c) following FIG. 295 (b) shows a state in which an animated display in which the Sabohani character display SB moves further upward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The Sabohani character display SB is displayed in the approximate center of the screen located above the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the medium decoration symbol.

  FIG. 295 (d) following FIG. 295 (c) shows a state in which the structure 247 moves upward and is positioned so as to overlap the Sabohani character display SB displayed at the approximate center of the screen. Is shown. In the state of FIG. 295 (d), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot visually recognize the Sabohani character display SB, but the player who is viewing from substantially diagonally below is the Sabohani character display SB. At least a portion is visible.

  As described above, in this example, after the Sabohani character display SB used for the notice of the change is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247, the display is moved to a position not overlapping the structure 247, and then the structure is displayed. This is an example in which the body 247 is moved and the Sabohani character display SB is overlapped by the structure 247. Moreover, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. Moreover, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 286 to 296 is performed. Also good. In this example, the structure 247 is moved behind the moving display of the Sabohani character display SB, which is a notice display, but the Sabohani character display SB is always displayed in accordance with the moving display of the Sabohani character display SB. The structure 247 may be moved so as to overlap, or the structure 247 may be moved first, and the movement display of the Sabohani character display SB may be delayed.

  FIG. 296 shows an effect example using the structure 247. FIG. 296 (a) shows a state in which the effect image ef1 and the Sabohani character display SB are displayed at positions where they overlap the structure 247. The Sabohani character display SB is a display used as a notice of the change. In FIG. 296 (b), the structure 247 is viewed from the upper left to the lower right. A player who is viewing the structure 247 from the front cannot see the Sabohani character display SB, although a part of the effect image ef1 is visible. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 296 (b), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from the upper left diagonal direction to the lower right visually recognizes a part of the effect image ef1 and substantially the entire Sabohani character display SB. is made of. Thus, by displaying the effect image ef1, it is possible to change the line of sight of the player who is viewing from the front. In addition, the production in this example may be performed as a pre-reading notice. Moreover, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 286 to 295 is performed. Also good.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 297 to FIG. 306, description will be given of an effect example using the hold icon and the change icon. Note that the arrows in the drawings of FIGS. 297 to 306 are for explaining the locus and movement direction of the hold icon and the variation icon, but the locus and movement of the hold icon and the variation icon are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It may be displayed as a display showing the direction of.

  FIG. 297 shows two examples of effects using the hold icon in stages. FIG. 297 shows an example of pattern 1 that performs the effects of FIGS. 297 (h) and (i) after FIGS. 297 (a) to (g), and FIG. 297 (j) after FIGS. 297 (a) to (g). The example of the pattern 2 which performs the production of (k) is shown.

<Example of pattern 1>
Hereinafter, an example of the pattern 1 of this production example will be described with reference to FIGS. 297 (a) to (i). FIG. 297 (a) shows, in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special symbol 1 fourth figure aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab. The special figure 1 hold icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 and b2 are alternately arranged in this order from left to right. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 297 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 297 (b) following FIG. 297 (a) shows a state in which an increased animation of the special figure 1 holding icon a 3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 297 (c), which follows FIG. 297 (b), shows the special mode 2 hold icon b3 in the default mode in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state where an increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 297 (d) following FIG. 297 (c) shows a state where the increase animation of the special figure 2 holding icon b 3 has been finished in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 297 (e) following FIG. 297 (d) shows a state where the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208. FIG.

  FIG. 297 (f) following FIG. 297 (e) shows that the special figure 1 hold icon a 3 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation is displayed that jumps out of the on-hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. In addition, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal on which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is displayed. In this example, the notice display m1 is a notice display used for producing a pseudo-continuous notice, but may be a notice display indicating that a pseudo-continuous notice is performed, or a display used as a notice of the change. It may be. Further, the notice display m1 may be a notice display informing that the operation effect display is performed, or may be a notice display informing that the SP reach effect is performed.

  FIG. 297 (g) subsequent to FIG. 297 (f) shows a notice display m1 in the middle symbol display area while the temporary stop display “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208. A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with “decoration 4” that is temporarily displayed in 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with “decoration 4” temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or “decoration 5” temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. May collide with all the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

  FIG. 297 (h) following FIG. 297 (g) shows a moving animation of a notice display m1 that returns to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The temporary stop display of “decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 5” is completed, and the decorative symbol variation display is displayed again. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo variation is performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1, or the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed after the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1.

  FIG. 297 (i) following FIG. 297 (h) shows a state in which the moving animation for returning to the position before the movement is ended with the notice display m1 as the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. .

<Example of pattern 2>
Hereinafter, an example of the pattern 2 of this production example will be described with reference to FIGS. 297 (j) and (k).

  FIG. 297 (j) following FIGS. 297 (a) to (g) shows that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the collision animation of the notice display m1 shown in FIG. 297 (g) ends and the notice display m1 is erased. The hold icon reappearance animation in which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 reappears is displayed on the pedestal on which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is completed and the decorative symbol variation display is displayed again. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo variation is performed is displayed. It should be noted that the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the announcement display m1 is erased, or the ornamental symbol variation display may be resumed when the announcement display m1 is erased. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed. Further, the reappearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 may be started at the timing of erasure of the notice display m1, or the reappearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 may be started before the notice display m1 is deleted. Alternatively, the reappearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 may be started after the notice display m1 is deleted.

  In FIG. 297 (k) following FIG. 297 (j), the reappearance animation of the special figure 1 holding icon a3 is finished on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the special figure 1 holding icon a3 is displayed at the position before the movement. It shows the state that was done.

  In this way, this example is an example in which a pseudo-continuous notice in which the decorative symbol variation display re-variates is performed when a predetermined hold icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as a preliminary announcement display during temporary stop display of the off symbol It is. When the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed and displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or when the effect of this example is performed May be configured such that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 297 to 306 is performed. In addition, when the hold icon used for pseudo continuous notice is not displayed, the change icon may be used as the notice display m1.

  FIG. 298 shows two examples of effects using the hold icon in stages. FIG. 298 shows an example of pattern 1 in which the effects of FIGS. 298 (h) to (j) are performed after FIGS. 298 (a) to (g), and FIGS. 298 (k) to (298) after FIGS. 298 (a) to (g). The example of the pattern 2 which performs the effect of (m) is shown.

<Example of pattern 1>
Hereinafter, an example of the pattern 1 of this production example will be described with reference to FIGS. 298 (a) to (j). FIG. 298 (a) shows, in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special symbol 1's fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special symbol 2's fourth symbol aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab. The special figure 1 hold icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 and b2 are alternately arranged in this order from left to right. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 298 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 298 (b) following FIG. 298 (a) shows a state in which the increased animation of the hold icon a 3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 298 (c), which follows FIG. 298 (b), shows that the special figure 2 hold icon b3 in the default mode is displayed in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state where an increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 298 (d) following FIG. 298 (c) shows a state where the increase animation of the special figure 2 holding icon b 3 is finished in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 298 (e) following FIG. 298 (d) shows a state in which the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208. FIG.

  FIG. 298 (f) following FIG. 298 (e) shows that the special figure 1 holding icon a 3 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation is displayed that jumps out of the on-hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. The pedestal that has been displaying the special figure 1 hold icon a3 most recently has a vertically long rectangular hold icon (hereinafter referred to as the "going out hold icon" with the character string "going out" displayed as the special figure 1 hold icon a3. Is sometimes displayed.) Is displayed. Instead of the on-the-go hold icon, a hold icon having a default shape with a lighter color may be used.

  FIG. 298 (g) following FIG. 298 (f) shows that the notice display m 1 is displayed in the middle symbol display area during the temporary stop display of “decoration 4 -decoration 4 -decoration 5” on the ornamental symbol display device 208. A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with “decoration 4” that is temporarily displayed in 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with “decoration 4” temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or “decoration 5” temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. May collide with all the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

  FIG. 298 (h) following FIG. 298 (g) shows a moving animation of a notice display m1 that returns to the pedestal where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The temporary stop display of “decoration 4 -decoration 5” is completed, and the decorative symbol variation display is displayed again. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo variation is performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1, or the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed after the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1.

  In FIG. 298 (i) following FIG. 298 (h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice animation m1 is displayed as the special figure 1 hold icon a3, and the movement animation for returning to the base before the movement is completed. The hold icon in the same mode as the notice display m1 is displayed so as to overlap the on-going hold icon.

  In FIG. 298 (j) following FIG. 298 (i), the on-going on-going icon is deleted in the decorative symbol display device 208.

<Example of pattern 2>
Hereinafter, an example of the pattern 2 of this production example will be described with reference to FIGS. 298 (k) to (m).

  FIG. 298 (k), following FIGS. 298 (a) to (g), is the decorative symbol display device 208, and the collision animation of the notice display m1 shown in FIG. 298 (g) ends, and the notice display m1 disappears. Is done. On the pedestal on which the on-the-go hold icon is displayed, a hold icon re-appearance animation is displayed in which the hold icon in the notice display m1 (default form) overlaps the on-the-go hold icon and reappears. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is completed and the decorative symbol variation display is displayed again. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo variation is performed is displayed. It should be noted that the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the announcement display m1 is erased, or the ornamental symbol variation display may be resumed when the announcement display m1 is erased. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed. Further, the reappearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 may be displayed at the timing of the disappearance of the advance notice display m1, or the reappearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 may be displayed before the advance of the advance notice display m1. Alternatively, the reappearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 may be displayed after the notice display m1 is deleted.

  In FIG. 298 (l) following FIG. 298 (k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reappearance animation of the special figure 1 holding icon a3 is finished, and the special figure 1 holding icon a3 in the default mode is not moved. The state displayed on the pedestal is shown. FIG. 298 (m) shows a state in which the on-going hold icon is deleted.

  In this way, this example is an example in which a pseudo-continuous notice in which the decorative symbol variation display re-variates is performed when a predetermined hold icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as a preliminary announcement display during temporary stop display of the off symbol In FIG. 5, an example of temporarily displaying a hold icon in another mode instead of the hold icon being moved is shown. When the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed and displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or when the effect of this example is performed May be configured such that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 297 to 306 is performed.

  FIG. 299 shows two examples of effects using the hold icon in stages. FIG. 299 shows an example of pattern 1 that produces the effects of FIGS. 299 (h) and (i) after FIGS. 299 (a) to (g), and FIG. 299 (j) after FIGS. 299 (a) to (g). The example of the pattern 2 which performs the production of (k) is shown.

<Example of pattern 1>
Hereinafter, an example of the pattern 1 of this production example will be described with reference to FIGS. 299 (a) to (i). FIG. 299 (a) shows, in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 retention number aa1, the special symbol 1's fourth symbol aa2, the special symbol 2's retained number aa3, the special symbol 2's fourth symbol aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab. The special figure 1 hold icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 and b2 are alternately arranged in this order from left to right. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 299 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 299 (b) following FIG. 299 (a) shows a state in which an increased animation of the special figure 1 holding icon a 3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 299 (c), following FIG. 299 (b), shows that the special figure 2 hold icon b3 in the default mode is displayed in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 on the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state where an increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 299 (d) subsequent to FIG. 299 (c) shows a state in which the increase animation of the special figure 2 holding icon b3 has been finished in the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG.

  FIG. 299 (e) following FIG. 299 (d) shows a state in which a temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208. FIG.

  FIG. 299 (f) following FIG. 299 (e) shows that the special figure 1 holding icon a3 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is displayed. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation is displayed that jumps out of the on-hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. In addition, a hold icon temporary movement animation is displayed in which the special figure 2 hold icon b3 temporarily moves to the pedestal displayed by the special figure 1 hold icon a3. Further, in this example, the notice display m1 is a notice display used for producing a pseudo continuous notice, but may be a notice display suggesting that a pseudo continuous notice is performed, and used as a notice of the change. Display may be used.

  FIG. 299 (g) subsequent to FIG. 299 (f) shows a notice symbol m1 in the middle symbol display area during the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” on the ornamental symbol display device 208. A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with “decoration 4” that is temporarily displayed in 208b is displayed. Further, in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, the hold icon temporary movement animation is continuously displayed, and the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is temporarily displayed on the pedestal on which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is displayed most recently. Is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with “decoration 4” temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or “decoration 5” temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. May collide with all the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

  FIG. 299 (h) following FIG. 299 (g) shows a moving animation of a notice display m1 that returns to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The temporary stop display of “decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 5” is completed, and the decorative symbol variation display is displayed again. In the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab, the hold icon temporary movement animation is continuously displayed, and the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is moved to the original pedestal. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo variation is performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1, or the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed after the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1.

  FIG. 299 (i), following FIG. 299 (h), shows that the moving animation for returning to the position before the movement is ended in the decorative symbol display device 208 with the notice display m1 as the special figure 1 hold icon a3. The hold icon a3 is displayed at the position before the movement. Further, the hold icon temporary movement animation of the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is finished, and the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is displayed at the position before the movement.

<Example of pattern 2>
Hereinafter, an example of the pattern 2 of this production example will be described with reference to FIGS. 299 (j) and (k).

  FIG. 299 (j) following FIG. 299 (a) to (g) shows that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the collision animation of the notice display m1 shown in FIG. 299 (g) ends and the notice display m1 is erased. The reserved icon reappearance animation in which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 reappears on the pedestal on which the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is temporarily displayed, and the hold icon in which the special figure 2 hold icon b3 moves toward the original pedestal A temporary movement animation is displayed. In this example, the hold icon appearing in the hold icon re-appearance animation is displayed so as to overlap the special figure 2 hold icon b3. However, the special figure 2 hold icon b3 becomes the hold icon appearing in the hold icon re-appearance animation. You may display so that it may overlap. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is completed and the decorative symbol variation display is displayed again. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo variation is performed is displayed. It should be noted that the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the announcement display m1 is erased, or the ornamental symbol variation display may be resumed when the announcement display m1 is erased. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed. Further, the reappearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 may be started at the timing of erasure of the notice display m1, or the reappearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 may be started before the notice display m1 is deleted. Alternatively, the reappearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 may be started after the notice display m1 is deleted.

  In FIG. 299 (k) following FIG. 299 (j), the reappearance animation of the special figure 1 holding icon a3 is finished on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the special figure 1 holding icon a3 is displayed at the position before the movement. Then, the holding icon temporary movement animation of the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is finished, and the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is displayed at the position before the movement.

  In this way, this example is an example in which a pseudo-continuous notice in which the decorative symbol variation display re-variates is performed when a predetermined hold icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as a preliminary announcement display during temporary stop display of the off symbol Is a temporary display of the hold icon on the right instead of the hold icon being moved, and when the hold icon being moved returns to the original position, the temporarily displayed hold icon returns to the original position. . When the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed and displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or when the effect of this example is performed May be configured such that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 297 to 306 is performed.

  FIG. 300 shows two examples of effects using hold icons in stages. FIG. 300 shows an example of pattern 1 that produces the effects of FIGS. 297 (h) and (i) after FIGS. 300 (a) to (g), and FIG. 297 (j) after FIGS. 300 (a) to (g). The example of the pattern 2 which performs the production of (k) is shown.

<Example of pattern 1>
Hereinafter, an example of the pattern 1 of this production example will be described with reference to FIGS. 300 (a) to 300 (i). FIG. 300 (a) shows in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth figure aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth figure aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab. The special figure 1 hold icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 and b2 are alternately arranged in this order from left to right. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 300 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 300 (b) following FIG. 300 (a) shows a state in which an increased animation of the special figure 1 holding icon a 3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 300 (c) following FIG. 300 (b) shows that the special figure 2 hold icon b 3 in the default mode is displayed in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a 3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state where an increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 300 (d) following FIG. 300 (c) shows a state where the increase animation of the special figure 2 hold icon b 3 has been finished in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 300 (e) following FIG. 300 (d) shows a state where the temporary stop display of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 300 (f) following FIG. 300 (e) shows that the special figure 1 holding icon a 3 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation is displayed that jumps out of the on-hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. In addition, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal on which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is displayed. In this example, the notice display m1 is a notice display of gas.

  FIG. 300 (g) subsequent to FIG. 300 (f) shows that the notice display m <b> 1 is displayed in the middle symbol display area during the temporary stop display of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” on the ornamental symbol display device 208. A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with “decoration 4” that is temporarily displayed in 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with “decoration 4” temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or “decoration 5” temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. May collide with all the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

  FIG. 300 (h) following FIG. 300 (g) shows a moving animation of a notice display m1 that returns to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The stop display “decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 5” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the character string “in preparation” is still displayed.

  FIG. 300 (i) following FIG. 300 (h) shows a state in which the moving animation for returning to the position before the movement is completed with the notice display m 1 as the special figure 1 hold icon a 3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. .

<Example of pattern 2>
Hereinafter, an example of the pattern 2 of this production example will be described with reference to FIGS. 300 (j) and 300 (k).

  FIG. 300 (j) following FIGS. 300 (a) to 300 (g) shows that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the collision animation of the notice display m 1 shown in FIG. 300 (g) ends and the notice display m 1 is erased. Recently, a hold icon reappearance animation in which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 reappears is displayed on the pedestal on which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is displayed, and the character string “in preparation” remains displayed in the tutorial display area tu1.

  In FIG. 300 (k) following FIG. 300 (j), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reappearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 ends, and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is displayed at the position before the movement. It shows the state that was done.

Thus, in this example, a pseudo-continuous notice that the decorative symbol variation display re-variates is performed when the predetermined hold icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as a gusset notice display during the temporary stop display of the off symbol. There is no example.
FIG. 301 shows an example of an effect using the hold icon step by step.

  301 (a) shows, in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth figure aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth figure aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab. The special figure 1 hold icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 and b2 are alternately arranged in this order from left to right. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 301 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 301 (b) following FIG. 301 (a) shows a state in which an increased animation of the special figure 1 holding icon a 3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 301 (c), which follows FIG. 301 (b), shows that the special figure 2 hold icon b 3 in the default mode is displayed in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a 3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state where an increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 301 (d) following FIG. 301 (c) shows a state in which the increase animation of the special figure 2 hold icon b 3 has been finished in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 301 (e) following FIG. 301 (d) shows a state where a temporary stop display of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 301 (f) following FIG. 301 (e) shows that the special figure 1 holding icon a 3 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation is displayed that jumps out of the on-hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. In addition, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal on which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is displayed. In this example, the notice display m1 is a notice display used for producing a pseudo-continuous notice, but may be a notice display indicating that a pseudo-continuous notice is performed, or a display used as a notice of the change. It may be.

  In FIG. 301 (g) following FIG. 301 (f), the notice symbol m 1 is displayed in the middle symbol display area while the temporary stop display “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208. A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with “decoration 4” that is temporarily displayed in 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with “decoration 4” temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or “decoration 5” temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. May collide with all the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

  FIG. 301 (h) following FIG. 301 (g) shows a moving animation of the notice display m 1 that returns to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a 3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The temporary stop display of “decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 5” is completed, and the decorative symbol variation display is displayed again. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo variation is performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1, or the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed after the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1.

  FIG. 301 (i) following FIG. 301 (h) shows a state in which the moving animation for returning to the position before the movement is ended with the notice display m 1 as the special figure 1 hold icon a 3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. .

  FIG. 301 (j) following FIG. 301 (i) shows a state where a temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 301 (k) following FIG. 301 (j), the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is displayed. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation is displayed that jumps out of the on-hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. In addition, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal on which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is displayed.

  In FIG. 301 (l) following FIG. 301 (k), the notice symbol m1 is displayed in the middle symbol display area during the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” on the ornament symbol display device 208. A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with “decoration 4” that is temporarily displayed in 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with “decoration 4” temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or “decoration 5” temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. May collide with all the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

  FIG. 301 (m) following FIG. 301 (l) shows a re-moving animation of the notice display m1 returning to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, The temporary stop display of “decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 5” is completed, and the decorative symbol variation display is displayed again. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 3” indicating that the third pseudo variation is performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1, or the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed after the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1.

  FIG. 301 (n) following FIG. 301 (m) shows a state in which the re-moving animation for returning to the position before the movement is completed with the notice display m1 as the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. Yes.

In this way, in this example, during the temporary stop display of the off symbol, a predetermined hold icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as a warning display, and the pseudo continuous notice that the decorative symbol variation display re-varies continuously continues multiple times. This is an example. When the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed and displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or when the effect of this example is performed May be configured such that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 297 to 306 is performed. In addition, when the hold icon used for pseudo continuous notice is not displayed, the change icon may be used as the notice display m1.
FIG. 302 shows step-by-step examples using the hold icon.

  302 (a) shows, in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special figure 1's fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2's reserved number aa3, the special figure 2's fourth symbol aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab. The special figure 1 hold icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 and b2 are alternately arranged in this order from left to right. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 302 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 302 (b) following FIG. 302 (a) shows a state in which an increased animation of the special figure 1 holding icon a 3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 302 (c) following FIG. 302 (b) shows that the special figure 2 holding icon b 3 in the default mode is displayed in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 holding icon a 3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state where an increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 302 (d) following FIG. 302 (c) shows a state in which the increase animation of the special figure 2 hold icon b 3 has been completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 302 (e) following FIG. 302 (d) shows a state where the temporary stop display of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 302 (f) following FIG. 302 (e) shows that the special figure 1 holding icon a 3 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of “decoration 4 -decoration 4 -decoration 5” is displayed. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation is displayed that jumps out of the on-hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. In addition, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal on which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is displayed. In this example, the notice display m1 is a notice display used for producing a pseudo-continuous notice, but may be a notice display indicating that a pseudo-continuous notice is performed, or a display used as a notice of the change. It may be.

  FIG. 302 (g) following FIG. 302 (f) shows a notice symbol m1 in the middle symbol display area while the temporary stop display “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is displayed on the ornament symbol display device 208. A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with “decoration 4” that is temporarily displayed in 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with “decoration 4” temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or “decoration 5” temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. May collide with all the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

  FIG. 302 (h) following FIG. 302 (g) shows a moving animation of the notice display m1 that returns to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The temporary stop display of “decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 5” is completed, and the decorative symbol variation display is displayed again. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo variation is performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1, or the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed after the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1.

  FIG. 302 (i) following FIG. 302 (h) shows a state in which the moving animation for returning to the position before the movement is ended with the notice display m1 as the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. .

  FIG. 302 (j) following FIG. 302 (i) shows a state in which a temporary stop display of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 302 (k) following FIG. 302 (j) shows that the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is displayed. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation is displayed that jumps out of the on-hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1. The notice display m1 and the special figure 2 hold icon b3 have the same display mode. Further, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal on which the special figure 2 hold icon b3 of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is displayed.

  FIG. 302 (l) following FIG. 302 (k) shows a notice symbol m1 in the middle symbol display area during the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” on the ornament symbol display device 208. A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with “decoration 4” that is temporarily displayed in 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with “decoration 4” temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or “decoration 5” temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. May collide with all the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

  FIG. 302 (m) following FIG. 302 (l) shows a re-moving animation of the notice display m1 that returns to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 2 hold icon b3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The temporary stop display of “decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 5” is completed, and the decorative symbol variation display is displayed again. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 3” indicating that the third pseudo variation is performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1, or the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed after the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1.

  FIG. 302 (n) following FIG. 302 (m) shows a state in which the re-moving animation for returning to the position before the movement is completed with the notice display m1 as the special figure 2 hold icon b3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. Yes.

Thus, this example is an example in which a pseudo continuous notice is performed a plurality of times using two different hold icons as the notice display m1 in one change. When the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed and displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or when the effect of this example is performed May be configured such that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 297 to 306 is performed. If there are not enough hold icons used for the pseudo-continuous notice, a change icon may be used as the notice display m1.
FIG. 303 shows step-by-step examples using the hold icon.

  FIG. 303 (a) shows, in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 holding number aa1, the special symbol 1 fourth figure aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab. The special figure 1 hold icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 and b2 are alternately arranged in this order from left to right. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 303 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 303 (b) following FIG. 303 (a) shows a state in which an increased animation of the special figure 1 holding icon a 3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 303 (c) following FIG. 303 (b) shows the default state of the special figure 2 holding icon b 3 in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 holding icon a 3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state where an increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 303 (d) following FIG. 303 (c) shows a state in which the increase animation of the special figure 2 hold icon b 3 has been finished in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 303 (e) following FIG. 303 (d) shows a state where a temporary stop display of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 303 (f) following FIG. 303 (e) shows that the special figure 1 hold icon a 3 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation is displayed that jumps out of the on-hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. In addition, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal on which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is displayed. In this example, the notice display m1 is a notice display used for producing a pseudo-continuous notice, but may be a notice display indicating that a pseudo-continuous notice is performed, or a display used as a notice of the change. It may be.

  FIG. 303 (g) following FIG. 303 (f) shows a notice symbol m 1 in the middle symbol display area during the temporary stop display of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” on the ornamental symbol display device 208. A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with “decoration 4” that is temporarily displayed in 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with “decoration 4” temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or “decoration 5” temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. May collide with all the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

  FIG. 303 (h) following FIG. 303 (g) shows a moving animation of the notice display m1 that returns to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The temporary stop display of “decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 5” is completed, and the decorative symbol variation display is displayed again. In the tutorial display area tu1, the character string “in preparation” is still displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1, or the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed after the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1.

  FIG. 303 (i) following FIG. 303 (h) shows a state in which the moving animation for returning to the position before the movement is ended with the notice display m1 as the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. .

  In FIG. 303 (j) following FIG. 303 (i), a reach effect by “decoration 4” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “reach!” Is displayed.

In this way, in this example, the predetermined hold icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as a notice display during the temporary stop display of the off symbol, so that the decorative symbol variation display is changed again and the reach effect is started. It is an example. When the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed and displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or when the effect of this example is performed May be configured such that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 297 to 306 is performed.
FIG. 304 shows an example of an effect using a variable icon step by step.

  304 (a) shows, in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth figure aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth figure aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab. The special figure 1 hold icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 and b2 are alternately arranged in this order from left to right. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 304 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  304 (b) following FIG. 304 (a) shows a state in which an increased animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG.

  In FIG. 304 (c) following FIG. 304 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 holding icon a3, the special figure 2 holding icon b3 in the default mode is displayed. It shows a state where an increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 304 (d) following FIG. 304 (c) shows a state in which the increasing animation of the special figure 2 holding icon b 3 has been finished in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 304 (e) following FIG. 304 (d) shows a state where a temporary stop display of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208.

  304 (f) following FIG. 304 (e), the variable icon ad 1 is displayed from the variable icon display area 280 while the temporary stop display of “decoration 4 -decoration 4 -decoration 5” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. A state is shown in which a moving animation is displayed that jumps out and moves as a notice display m2. The notice display m2 and the special variation icon ad1 have the same display mode. Further, no variation icon is displayed on the base of the variation icon display area 280. In this example, the notice display m2 is a notice display used for producing a pseudo-continuous notice, but may be a notice display suggesting that a pseudo-continuous notice is performed, or may be a display used as a pre-reading notice. May be.

  304 (g) following FIG. 304 (f) is a display of the middle symbol display area in the decorative symbol display device 208 during the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5”. A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with “decoration 4” that is temporarily displayed in 208b is displayed. The notice display m2 may collide with “decoration 4” temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or “decoration 5” temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. May collide with all the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

  In FIG. 304 (h) following FIG. 304 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation of the notice display m2 returning to the position (pedestal) of the variable icon display area 280 is displayed. This shows a state in which the temporary stop display of “Decoration 5” is finished and the decorative symbol variation display is displayed again. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo variation is performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the moving animation of the notice display m2, or the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m2. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed after the start of the moving animation of the notice display m2.

  304 (i) following FIG. 304 (h) shows a state in which the moving animation for returning to the position of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is ended with the notice display m2 as the fluctuation icon ad1 in the decorative symbol display device 208. .

  As described above, this example is an example in which a pseudo continuous notice that the decoration symbol variation display is re-variable is performed when the variation icon collides with the middle symbol of the decoration symbol as a notice display during temporary stop display of the off symbol. . When the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed and displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or when the effect of this example is performed May be configured such that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 297 to 306 is performed. Note that not only the default mode variable icon but also a variable icon other than the default mode may be used as the notice display m2 in this example. FIG. Show.

  305 (a) shows, in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth figure aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth figure aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab. The special figure 1 hold icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 and b2 are alternately arranged in this order from left to right. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 305 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 305 (b) following FIG. 305 (a) shows a state in which an increased animation of the special figure 1 holding icon a3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 305 (c), which follows FIG. 305 (b), shows that the special figure 2 hold icon b3 in the default mode is displayed in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 on the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state where an increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 305 (d) following FIG. 305 (c) shows a state in which the increase animation of the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is finished in the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG.

  FIG. 305 (e) following FIG. 305 (d) shows a state where a temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208. FIG.

  FIG. 305 (f) following FIG. 305 (e) shows that the special figure 1 holding icon a 3 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation is displayed that jumps out of the on-hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. In addition, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal on which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is displayed. In this example, the notice display m1 is a display used as a prefetch notice.

  FIG. 305 (g) following FIG. 305 (f) is a display in which the notice symbol m 1 is the middle symbol display area during the temporary stop display of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” on the ornamental symbol display device 208. A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with “decoration 4” that is temporarily displayed in 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with “decoration 4” temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or “decoration 5” temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. May collide with all the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

  FIG. 305 (h) following FIG. 305 (g) shows a moving animation of a notice display m1 that returns to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The stop display “decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 5” is displayed.

  FIG. 305 (i) following FIG. 305 (h) shows a state in which the moving animation for returning to the position before the movement is ended with the notice display m1 as the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. .

  FIG. 305 (j) following FIG. 305 (i) shows a state in which the next symbol variation is executed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed, and the hold icon movement animation in which the hold icon moves to the left and the hold / fluctuation icon move animation in which the hold icon moves to the change icon display area 208 are finished. .

  FIG. 305 (k) following FIG. 305 (j) shows a state where the temporary stop display of “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 3” is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 305 (l) following FIG. 305 (k) shows that the special figure 1 holding icon a 3 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 3” is displayed. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation is displayed that jumps out of the on-hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. In addition, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal on which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is displayed.

  FIG. 305 (m) following FIG. 305 (l) is a display of the preliminary symbol m1 in the middle symbol display area during the temporary stop display of “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 3” on the ornamental symbol display device 208. A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with “decoration 2” that is temporarily stopped and displayed in 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with “decoration 2” temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or “decoration 3” temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. May collide with all the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

  FIG. 305 (n) following FIG. 305 (m) shows a moving animation of a notice display m1 that returns to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The stop display of “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 3” is displayed.

  FIG. 305 (o) following FIG. 305 (n) shows a state in which the moving animation for returning to the position before the movement is ended with the notice display m1 as the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. .

  FIG. 305 (p) following FIG. 305 (o) shows a state in which the next symbol variation has been executed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed, and the movement animation of the hold icon in which the hold icon moves to the left and the hold / fluctuation icon movement animation in which the hold icon moves to the change icon display area 208 are finished. Yes.

  FIG. 305 (q) following FIG. 305 (p) shows a state in which a temporary stop display of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 8” is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 305 (r) following FIG. 305 (q) shows that the special figure 1 holding icon a 3 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 8” is displayed. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation is displayed that jumps out of the on-hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode and are used as a notice of the change. In addition, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal on which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is displayed.

  FIG. 305 (s) following FIG. 305 (r) is a display of the preliminary symbol m1 in the decorative symbol display device 208 during the temporary stop display of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 8”. A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with “decoration 7” that is temporarily displayed in 208b is displayed. Note that the notice display m1 may collide with “decoration 7” temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or “decoration 8” temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. May collide with all the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

  FIG. 305 (t) following FIG. 305 (s) shows a moving animation of a notice display m1 that returns to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The temporary stop display of “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 3” is finished, and the decorative symbol variation display is displayed.

  In FIG. 305 (u) following FIG. 305 (t), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice animation m1 is displayed as the special figure 1 hold icon a3, and the movement animation for returning to the position before the movement ends. Reach production will be performed.

As described above, this example is an example in which a predetermined hold icon is used as a notice display during the temporary stop display of the off symbol, and a continuous notice that collides with the middle design of the decorative design is performed over a plurality of fluctuations, thereby developing a reach effect. is there. In this example, the notice display that appears for the first time and the second time is used as a look-ahead notice, and the notice display that appears for the third time is used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily than in the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 297 to 306 is performed.
FIG. 306 shows step-by-step examples using the hold icon.

  FIG. 306 (a) shows in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special symbol 1's fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special symbol 2's fourth symbol aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab. The special figure 1 hold icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 and b2 are alternately arranged in this order from left to right. Is displayed. Further, the special figure 2 hold icon b2 is a hold icon in the form of a character. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 306 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c. Note that the hold icon in the form of a character may be used as a prefetch notice.

  FIG. 306 (b) following FIG. 306 (a) shows a state in which an increasing animation of the special figure 1 holding icon a 3 in the form of a character is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 306 (c) following FIG. 306 (b) is a special figure 2 in the form of a character of Tono in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 holding icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. A state in which an increasing animation of the hold icon b3 is displayed.

  FIG. 306 (d) following FIG. 306 (c) shows a state where the increase animation of the special figure 2 hold icon b 3 has been finished in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 306 (e) following FIG. 306 (d) shows a state where a temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208. FIG.

  FIG. 306 (f) following FIG. 306 (e) shows that the special figure 2 hold icon b <b> 2 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed. 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab jumps out and moves as notice display c1, special figure 1 hold icon a3 jumps out of special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab and moves as notice display c2, and special figure 2 hold icon A moving animation is displayed in which b3 jumps out of the special map 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display c3. The notice displays c1 to c3, the special figure 2 hold icon b2, b3, and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 are all in the same display mode. Further, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal on which the special figure 2 hold icons b2 and b3 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab are displayed. In this example, the notice displays c1 to c3 are displays used as a notice of the change, but may be a notice display used to produce a pseudo continuous notice or suggest that a pseudo continuous notice is performed. It may be a notice display or may be used in combination with a prefetch notice.

  306 (g) following FIG. 306 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice display c1 is changed to the notice display c1 ′, the notice display c2 is changed to the notice display c2 ′, and the notice display c3 is changed. The notice display c3 ′ shows a changed state. The notice displays c1 ′ to c3 ′ are all in the same display form, and have a display form in which a large-displayed character of Tono is fighting by pulling out a Japanese sword. In the decorative symbol display measure 208, while displaying the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5”, the notice display c1 ′ fights against “decoration 4” temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, A battle animation in which the notice display c2 ′ fights “decoration 4” temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208b and the battle animation fights “decoration 5” in which the notice display c3 ′ temporarily stops and displays in the right symbol display area 208c. It is displayed.

  FIG. 306 (h), following FIG. 306 (g), shows a notice in the decorative symbol display device 208 while the notice display c1 ′ changes to c1, the notice display c2 ′ changes to c2, and the notice display c3 ′ changes to c3. The notice c3 was displaying the special figure 2 hold icon b3 at the position where the display c1 was displaying the special figure 2 hold icon b2, the notice display c2 was showing the special figure 1 hold icon a3 The moving animation of the notice displays c1 to c3 returning to the position is displayed, and the temporary stop display of “decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 5” is completed, and the decorative symbol variation display is displayed again.

  In FIG. 306 (i) following FIG. 306 (h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice display c1 returns to the position before the movement as the special figure 2 hold icon b2, and the notice display c2 is the special figure 1 hold icon a3. The movement animation is returned to the position before the movement, and the notice display c3 returns to the position before the movement as the special figure 2 hold icon b3. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a reach effect of “decoration 7” is executed.

In this way, in this example, during the temporary stop display of the off symbol, a plurality of hold icons collide with a plurality of decorative symbols as a plurality of notice displays, so that the decorative symbol variation display re-varies and the reach effect is started. This is an example. When the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed and displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or when the effect of this example is performed May be configured such that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 297 to 305 is performed. In addition, when the number of the hold icons used as the notice display in this example is insufficient, the change icon may be used as the notice display.
Next, an example of a balloon display effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 307 to 327.
FIGS. 307 (a) to 307 (c) show an example of an effect using balloon display step by step.

  FIG. 307 (a) shows, in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special symbol 1's fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special symbol 2's fourth symbol aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 303 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  In FIG. 307 (a), a balloon display f1 is displayed at the center of the screen. The balloon display f1 displays the face image of the Tono character, the character image of “Tono” displayed on the face image of the Tono character, the character string “The weather in the morning”, and the pattern of the fine mark. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design.

  FIG. 307 (b) following FIG. 307 (a) shows a button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208. A state in which a notice effect that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 is performed is shown.

FIG. 307 (c) following FIG. 307 (b) shows that when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. , The balloon display f2 by the frog character is displayed above the balloon display f1. The balloon display f2 displays a face image of the frog character, a character image of “爺” displayed on the face image of the frog character, a character string of “noon weather” and a cloudy mark pattern. It is a display including a balloon part. The horizontal width of the balloon display f1 and the horizontal width of the balloon display f2 are the same, and the height of the balloon display f1 and the height of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, but the width and height are different from each other. There may be a case where only the width is different, or there may be a case where only the height is different. The same applies to the balloon indications f1 and f2 in the following description.
Next, an example of a balloon display effect will be described with reference to FIG.
FIGS. 308 (a) to (i) show step-by-step example effects using balloon display.

  FIG. 308 (a) shows in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 retention number aa1, the special symbol 1's fourth symbol aa2, the special symbol 2's retained number aa3, the special symbol 2's fourth symbol aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 308 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  308 (b) following FIG. 308 (a) is displayed such that a balloon display f1 by the character of Tono appears from the left end of the screen. The balloon display f1 displays the face image of the Tono character, the character image of “Tono” displayed on the face image of the Tono character, the character string “The weather in the morning”, and the pattern of the fine mark. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative design, and is overlapped with the general figure reservation number aa5 and the general design fourth symbol aa6.

  FIG. 308 (c) following FIG. 308 (b) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 that appears from the left end of the screen moves from left to right on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. Is displayed. Note that the balloon display f1 does not display the character string displayed in the balloon part and the pattern of the clear mark until the state immediately before being stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen (only the frame of the balloon part is displayed). Then, after stopping and displaying at the approximate center of the screen, the character string and the pattern of the clear mark may be displayed in order from the beginning of the character string, or the character string and the pattern of the clear mark may be displayed all at once. Good. The same configuration may be used for other balloon display.

  FIG. 308 (d) following FIG. 308 (c) shows a button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208. A state in which a notice effect that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 is performed is shown.

  FIG. 308 (e) following FIG. 308 (d) shows that when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. , The balloon display f2 by the frog character appears so as to appear from the right end of the screen. The balloon display f2 displays a face image of the frog character, a character image of “爺” displayed on the face image of the frog character, a character string of “noon weather” and a cloudy mark pattern. It is a display including a balloon part. In this example, the balloon display f2 is a display that is given priority over the balloon display f1. For this reason, when the balloon displays f1 and f2 overlap, the balloon display f2 is displayed so as to overlap the balloon display f1. In this example, a part of the pattern of the sunny mark in the balloon display f1 may overlap the balloon part of the balloon display f2, but a part other than the pattern of the sunny mark may overlap the balloon display f2. .

  FIG. 308 (e) shows a state in which a moving animation for moving the balloon display f1 upward is performed due to the appearance of the balloon display f2. In this example, the balloon display f1 is performed simultaneously with a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward and a moving animation in which the balloon display f2 moves toward the left.

  In FIG. 308 (f) following FIG. 308 (e), a balloon animation f 2 that appears from the right edge of the screen is moved to the left, and is displayed at the approximate center of the screen, and the balloon f 1 moves upward. The moving animation to be performed is shown in a state displayed at the upper center of the screen.

  FIG. 308 (g) following FIG. 308 (f) is a button notice display h 110 that imitates the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display at a position overlapping the balloon display f 1 and the balloon display f 2 in the decorative symbol display device 208. h112 is displayed, which indicates a state in which a notice effect for prompting the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  FIG. 308 (h), which follows FIG. 308 (g), erases the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136. The balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the left end of the screen. In the balloon display f3, a character image of “princess” displayed on the face image of the princess character, a character image of “afternoon weather”, and a rain mark pattern are displayed on the face image of the princess character. It is a display including a balloon part. In this example, the balloon display f3 is a display that is prioritized over the balloon display f2. For this reason, when the balloon displays f3 and f2 overlap, the balloon display f3 is displayed so as to overlap the balloon display f2. In this example, the character string in the balloon part of the balloon display f2 may overlap the balloon part of the balloon display f3, but a part other than the character string of the balloon part may overlap the balloon display f3. The horizontal width of the balloon display f3 is the same as the horizontal width of the balloon displays f1 and f2, and the height of the balloon display f3 is the same as the height of the balloon displays f1 and f2, but the horizontal width and height are different. There may be a case where only the width is different, or there may be a case where only the height is different. The same applies to the balloon displays f1 to f3 in the following description.

  FIG. 308 (h) shows a state in which the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 are moved upwards due to the appearance of the balloon display f3, and the balloon display f1 is erased so as to exit from the upper end of the screen. Is shown. In this example, the movement animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward and the movement animation in which the balloon display f3 moves to the right are performed simultaneously.

  In FIG. 308 (i) following FIG. 308 (h), a balloon animation f3 that appears from the left end of the screen is moved to the right, and is displayed at the approximate center of the screen, and the balloon f2 moves upward. The moving animation is performed and is displayed at the substantially upper center of the screen, and the balloon display f1 indicates a state where it is erased so as to exit from the upper end of the screen. Further, after this frame, the balloon display f2 of the samurai character and the balloon display f3 of the princess character may be deleted after the balloon display f2 is deleted, or the balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 may be deleted. The balloon display f2 may be erased at the same time or after the balloon display f3 is erased. In addition, at least one of the balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 may be deleted before the reach symbol in the decorative symbol variation display is displayed, or the nth (n is an arbitrary number) of pseudo continuous display ) May be deleted before starting, or may be deleted before displaying the temporary stop display. The balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 may be erased immediately on the spot, or may be erased so as to fade out on the spot, or the same as the balloon display f1 of the character. After displaying the moving animation that moves upward, the animation may be erased so as to exit from the upper end of the screen, or may be erased so as to exit from the direction of each appearance. The same applies to the balloon display described in the subsequent drawings.

The effect of this example may be used as a prefetch notice or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily than in the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 307 to 327 is performed. Note that the balloon display described in this example and the following drawings includes the components of the balloon display (weather mark (sunny mark, cloudy mark, rain mark) pattern, character string display, frame, character name display, character In each face image), at least a part of each component may be displayed as an animation, only a part thereof may be displayed as an animation, or all may be displayed as an animation. For example, an animation display in which the symbol of the clear mark rotates may be displayed, an animation display in which the character string display blinks may be displayed, or an animation display in which the character kisses may be displayed. The whole balloon display may be moved and displayed while displaying one or more of an animation display in which the pattern of the clear mark rotates, an animation display in which the character string display blinks, and an animation display in which the character kisses. Alternatively, the character string display may be displayed in order from the first character, and an animation display in which the character pokes up during the period when the number of characters displayed in the character string is increasing may be displayed. The animation display of each component of the balloon display may be a repeatable animation display in which operations from the beginning to the end of the animation display are connected. For example, one animation display that rotates and returns to the original posture may be repeated, one animation display that returns to the original size after enlargement or reduction may be repeated, or the original animation display after moving the position One animation display returning to the position may be repeated, one blinking animation display may be repeated, or one animation display in which the gloss display moves or changes may be repeated. Moreover, a part of at least one animation display of each component of the balloon display may overlap a part of another animation of each component of the balloon display. In addition, the balloon display is not limited to this example, and a part of each component of the balloon display may be transparent or translucent, only a part may be transparent or translucent, or all may be translucent.
Next, an example of a balloon display effect will be described with reference to FIG.
FIGS. 309 (a) to 309 (m) show an example of an effect using balloon display step by step.

  FIG. 309 (a) shows, in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special symbol 1's fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special symbol 2's fourth symbol aa4 The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 309 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 309 (b) following FIG. 309 (a) is displayed such that a balloon display f1 by the character of Tono appears from the left end of the screen. The balloon display f1 displays the face image of the Tono character, the character image of “Tono” displayed on the face image of the Tono character, the character string “The weather in the morning”, and the pattern of the fine mark. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative design, and is overlapped with the general figure reservation number aa5 and the general design fourth symbol aa6.

  FIG. 309 (c) following FIG. 309 (b) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 that appears from the left end of the screen moves from left to right on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. Is displayed.

  FIG. 309 (d) following FIG. 309 (c) shows a button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208. A state in which a notice effect that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 is performed is shown.

  FIG. 309 (e) following FIG. 309 (d) shows that when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. Then, a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is started.

  In FIG. 309 (f) following FIG. 309 (e), the moving animation that moves above the balloon display f 1 is temporarily interrupted, and the balloon display f 1 is stopped and displayed at the top of the screen.

  In FIG. 309 (g) following FIG. 309 (f), the balloon display f2 by the frog character appears from the right end of the screen after the movement animation of the balloon display f1 is interrupted. The balloon display f2 displays a face image of the frog character, a character image of “爺” displayed on the face image of the frog character, a character string of “noon weather” and a cloudy mark pattern. It is a display including a balloon part.

  FIG. 309 (h) following FIG. 309 (g) shows a state where a balloon animation f2 that has appeared from the right end of the screen moves to the left and is displayed at the approximate center of the screen.

  FIG. 309 (i) following FIG. 309 (h) is a button notice display h110 that imitates the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display at the position overlapping the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 in the decorative symbol display device 208. h112 is displayed, which indicates a state in which a notice effect for prompting the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  FIG. 309 (j) following FIG. 309 (i) shows that when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The balloon displays f1 and f2 show a state where a moving animation is performed in which the balloons move upward at the same speed. The balloon display f1 is erased so as to exit from the upper end of the screen.

  In FIG. 309 (k) following FIG. 309 (j), the balloon display f1 is erased from the upper end of the screen, the moving animation moving above the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted, and the balloon display f2 is stopped at the upper part of the screen. It is displayed.

  In FIG. 309 (l) following FIG. 309 (k), a balloon display f3 by the princess character appears so as to appear from the left end of the screen. In the balloon display f3, a character image of “princess” displayed on the face image of the princess character, a character image of “afternoon weather”, and a rain mark pattern are displayed on the face image of the princess character. It is a display including a balloon part.

  FIG. 309 (m) following FIG. 309 (l) shows a state where a balloon animation f3 that has appeared from the left end of the screen moves to the right and is displayed at the approximate center of the screen.

The effect of this example may be used as a prefetch notice or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily than in the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 307 to 327 is performed.
Next, an example of a balloon display effect will be described with reference to FIG.
310 (a) to (m) show step-by-step examples using balloon display.

  FIG. 310 (a) shows in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 holding number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth figure aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth figure aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 310 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  310 (b) following FIG. 310 (a) is displayed such that a balloon display f1 by the character of Tono appears from the left end of the screen. The balloon display f1 displays the face image of the Tono character, the character image of “Tono” displayed on the face image of the Tono character, the character string “The weather in the morning”, and the pattern of the fine mark. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative design, and is overlapped with the general figure reservation number aa5 and the general design fourth symbol aa6.

  FIG. 310 (c) following FIG. 310 (b) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f 1 that appears from the left end of the screen moves from left to right on the decorative symbol display device 208 and stops at the approximate center of the screen. Is displayed.

  FIG. 310 (d) following FIG. 310 (c) shows a button notice display h 110 that imitates the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h 112 on the decorative symbol display device 208 above the balloon display f 1. A state in which a notice effect that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 is performed is shown.

  FIG. 310 (e) following FIG. 310 (d) shows that the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h 110 and the operation expiration date display h 112. , The balloon display f2 by the frog character appears so as to appear from the right end of the screen. The balloon display f2 displays a face image of the frog character, a character image of “爺” displayed on the face image of the frog character, a character string of “noon weather” and a cloudy mark pattern. It is a display including a balloon part. In this example, the balloon display f2 is a display that is given priority over the balloon display f1. For this reason, when the balloon displays f1 and f2 overlap, the balloon display f2 is displayed so as to overlap the balloon display f1.

  FIG. 310 (f) following FIG. 310 (e) shows a state in which a balloon animation f 2 that has appeared from the right end of the screen moves to the left and is stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. . The position where the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is a position where the balloon part of the balloon display f2 exactly overlaps the balloon part of the balloon display 1. The balloon display f2 is a display that has priority over the balloon display f1, and therefore, the character string of “Morning weather” displayed in the balloon part of the balloon display f1, the pattern of the sunny mark, and the frame part of the balloon part. Is hidden in the balloon portion of the balloon display f2, but the face image of the character and the character image of “don” are not hidden in the balloon display f2.

  In FIG. 310 (g) following FIG. 310 (f), after the movement animation that moves toward the left of the balloon display f2 is completed, the movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is started. In FIG. 310 (g), the balloon display f1 moves upward, so that the character string “morning weather” and the symbol of the sunny mark and the frame of the balloon part hidden by the balloon part of the balloon display f2 are displayed. The upper half of is visible. It should be noted that at a certain timing between FIG. 310 (f) and FIG. 310 (g), the balloon portion of the balloon display f1 is in a state in which a part of the fine mark pattern is displayed and no character string is displayed. Become.

  In FIG. 310 (h) following FIG. 310 (g), the moving animation that moves above the balloon display f 1 is temporarily interrupted, and the balloon display f 1 is stopped and displayed at the top of the screen.

  FIG. 310 (i) following FIG. 310 (h) shows a button notice display h 110 that imitates the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display in a position overlapping the balloon display f 1 and the balloon display f 2 in the decorative symbol display device 208. h112 is displayed, which indicates a state in which a notice effect for prompting the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  FIG. 310 (j) following FIG. 310 (i) shows that the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h 110 and the operation expiration date display h 112. The balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the left end of the screen. In the balloon display f3, a character image of “princess” displayed on the face image of the princess character, a character image of “afternoon weather”, and a rain mark pattern are displayed on the face image of the princess character. It is a display including a balloon part. In this example, the balloon display f3 is a display that is prioritized over the balloon display f2. For this reason, when the balloon displays f2 and f3 overlap, the balloon display f3 is displayed so as to overlap the balloon display f2.

  FIG. 310 (k) following FIG. 310 (j) shows a state in which a balloon animation f3 that has appeared from the left end of the screen moves to the right and is stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. . The position where the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed is a position where the balloon part of the balloon display f3 is exactly overlapped with the balloon part of the balloon display 2. The balloon display f3 is a display that has priority over the balloon display f2. Therefore, the character string “morning weather” displayed in the balloon part of the balloon display f2, a cloudy mark pattern, and a frame part of the balloon part. Is hidden in the balloon portion of the balloon display f3, but the face image of the frog character and the character image of “爺” are not hidden in the balloon display f3.

  FIG. 310 (l) following FIG. 310 (k) shows a state in which a moving animation is performed in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed. In FIG. 310 (l), when the balloon display f2 moves upward, the character string “morning in the morning” and the cloudy mark pattern and the frame part of the balloon part hidden by the balloon part of the balloon display f3. The upper half of is visible. The balloon display f1 is erased so as to exit from the upper end of the screen.

  In FIG. 309 (m) following FIG. 310 (l), the balloon display f1 is erased from the upper end of the screen, the moving animation that moves above the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the top of the screen. Has been.

  The effect of this example may be used as a prefetch notice or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily than in the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 307 to 327 is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 311, two examples of effects of balloon display will be described. FIG. 311 shows an example of pattern 1 that produces the effects of FIGS. 311 (n) to (q) after FIGS. 311 (a) to (m), and FIGS. 311 (r) to (m) after FIGS. 311 (a) to (m). The example of the pattern 2 which performs the production of (t) is shown.

<Example of pattern 1>
FIG. 311 (a) shows, in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special symbol 1's fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special symbol 2's fourth symbol aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 311 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  In FIG. 311 (b) following FIG. 311 (a), a balloon display f <b> 1 by the character appears from the lower part of the screen (the border between the special figure 1 and 2 holding icon display area 208 ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. The balloon display f1 displays the face image of the Tono character, the character image of “Tono” displayed on the face image of the Tono character, the character string “The weather in the morning”, and the pattern of the fine mark. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design.

  FIG. 311 (c) following FIG. 311 (b) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f 1 that appears from the bottom of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. The displayed state is shown.

  In FIG. 311 (d) following FIG. 311 (c), a button notice display h110 and an operation expiration date display h112 simulating the chance button 136 are displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208. A state in which a notice effect that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 is performed is shown.

  In FIG. 311 (e) following FIG. 311 (d), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h 110 and the operation expiration date display h 112. The moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is resumed, and the balloon display f2 by the frog character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. The balloon display f2 displays a face image of the frog character, a character image of “爺” displayed on the face image of the frog character, a character string of “noon weather” and a cloudy mark pattern. It is a display including a balloon part.

  In FIG. 311 (f) following FIG. 311 (e), a moving animation in which the balloon display f 1 moves upward is performed, and a moving animation in which the balloon display f 2 that appears from the bottom of the screen moves upward. The balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position where the balloon display f1 was stopped and displayed previously. Further, although the speed of movement of the balloon display f1 and the speed of movement of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. Thus, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward.

  311 (g) following FIG. 311 (f) is a position where the scroll display of the balloon display f 1 and the balloon display f 2 is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps the balloon display f 1 and the balloon display f 2. A button preview display h110 and an operation expiration date display h112 simulating the chance button 136 are displayed, indicating a state in which a preview effect for prompting the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 311 (h) following FIG. 311 (g), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. At the same time as the moving animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, a character image of “princess” displayed on the face image of the princess character, a character image of “afternoon weather”, and a rain mark pattern are displayed on the face image of the princess character. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is erased so as to exit from the upper end of the screen.

  In FIG. 311 (i) following FIG. 311 (h), a moving animation in which the balloon display f 2 moves upward is performed, and a moving animation in which the balloon display f 3 that appears from the bottom of the screen moves upward. The balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f3 shows a state of being stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f3 is stopped is the position where the balloon display f2 was stopped before. Further, although the speed of movement of the balloon display f2 and the speed of movement of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different.

  FIG. 311 (j) following FIG. 311 (i) is a button notice display h110 that imitates the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display in a position overlapping the balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. h112 is displayed, which indicates a state in which a notice effect for prompting the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 311 (k) following FIG. 311 (j), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. At the same time as the moving animation in which the balloon displays f2 and f3 move upward at the same speed, the balloon display f4 by the Sabohani character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f4, a character image of “honey” displayed at a position where the character image of Sabohani and the character image of Sabohani overlap, and a character string and a pattern of “Lance when reach” are displayed. It is a display that includes a speech balloon. In addition, the height of the balloon part of the balloon display f4 is configured to be approximately half that of the balloon part of the balloon display f1 or the like.

  FIG. 311 (l) following FIG. 311 (k) shows a state where the scroll display of the balloon displays f2 to f4 is temporarily interrupted. The balloon part f4 that has appeared from the lower part of the screen is stopped and displayed at the position where it has appeared, and the movement above the balloon display f3 is also temporarily stopped and displayed. The substantially lower half of the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the upper end of the screen.

  In FIG. 311 (m) following FIG. 311 (l), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed at positions overlapping the balloon display f2. , A state in which a notice effect for prompting the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  FIG. 311 (n) following FIG. 311 (m) shows a state in which the scroll display of the balloon displays f2 to f4 is resumed and the balloon display f5 is displayed from the bottom of the screen. The balloon display f5 is a balloon section in which a face image of a gale character, a character image of “gaze” displayed on the face image of a gale character, a character string and a pattern of “hot” are displayed. It is a display including. Further, the height of the balloon part of the balloon display f5 is configured to be approximately twice that of the balloon part such as the balloon display f1.

  In FIG. 311 (o) following FIG. 311 (n), the scroll display of the balloon displays f3 to f5 is performed, and the balloon display f3 is erased so as to exit from the upper end of the screen.

  In FIG. 311 (p) following FIG. 311 (o), the balloon displays f4 and f5 are scroll-displayed, and the balloon display f4 is erased so as to exit from the upper end of the screen.

  311 (q) following FIG. 311 (p) shows a state in which the scroll display of the balloon display f5 is interrupted or terminated, and the balloon display f5 is stopped. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays the entire balloon display f5. Thereafter, the balloon display f5 may be erased and the reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon is changed may be performed.

<Example of pattern 2>
311 (r) following FIGS. 311 (a) to 3 (m) is displayed such that the balloon display f5 appears from the left end of the screen, and the balloon display f2 which has been stopped in FIG. 311 (m). A moving animation for simultaneously moving f3 in the right direction is shown. That is, this example is an example in which an effect of scrolling the balloon displays f2 to f5 to the right is performed after the effect of scrolling the balloon displays f1 to f4 upward.

  In FIG. 311 (s) following FIG. 311 (r), scroll display is performed toward the right of the balloon displays f2 to f5, and the balloon displays f2 to f3 are erased so as to come out simultaneously from the right end of the screen. .

  FIG. 311 (t) following FIG. 311 (s) shows a state where the scroll display of the balloon display f5 is interrupted or terminated and the balloon display f5 is stopped. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays the entire balloon display f5. Thereafter, the balloon display f5 may be erased and the reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon is changed may be performed.

  The effect of this example may be used as a prefetch notice or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily than in the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 307 to 327 is performed. Further, when the example of pattern 1 of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the example of pattern 2 of this example is performed. When the example of the pattern 2 is performed, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily than when the example of the pattern 1 of the present example is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 312, two examples of effects of balloon display will be described. FIG. 312 shows an example of pattern 1 that performs the effects of FIGS. 312 (k) and (l) after FIGS. 312 (a) to (j), and FIG. 312 (m) after FIGS. 312 (a) to (j). The example of the pattern 2 which performs the production of (n) is shown.

<Example of pattern 1>
FIG. 312 (a) shows, in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 retention number aa1, the special symbol 1's fourth symbol aa2, the special symbol 2's retained number aa3, the special symbol 2's fourth symbol aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 312 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  In FIG. 312 (b) following FIG. 312 (a), a balloon display f 1 by the character appears from the lower part of the screen (the border between the special figure 1 and the hold icon display area 208 ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. The balloon display f1 displays the face image of the Tono character, the character image of “Tono” displayed on the face image of the Tono character, the character string “The weather in the morning”, and the pattern of the fine mark. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design.

  FIG. 312 (c) following FIG. 312 (b) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 that appears from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. The displayed state is shown.

  FIG. 312 (d) following FIG. 312 (c) shows a button notice display h110 that imitates the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208. A state in which a notice effect that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 is performed is shown.

  FIG. 312 (e) following FIG. 312 (d) shows that when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is resumed, and the balloon display f2 by the frog character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. The balloon display f2 displays a face image of the frog character, a character image of “爺” displayed on the face image of the frog character, a character string of “noon weather” and a cloudy mark pattern. It is a display including a balloon part.

  In FIG. 312 (f) following FIG. 312 (e), a moving animation in which the balloon display f 1 moves upward is performed, and a moving animation in which the balloon display f 2 that appears from the bottom of the screen moves upward is displayed. The balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position where the balloon display f1 was stopped and displayed previously. Further, although the speed of movement of the balloon display f1 and the speed of movement of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. Thus, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward.

  FIG. 312 (g) following FIG. 312 (f) is a position where the scroll display of the balloon display f 1 and the balloon display f 2 is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps the balloon display f 1 and the balloon display f 2. A button preview display h110 and an operation expiration date display h112 simulating the chance button 136 are displayed, indicating a state in which a preview effect for prompting the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 312 (h) following FIG. 312 (g), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button preview display h 110 and the operation expiration date display h 112 are erased. At the same time as the moving animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, a character image of “princess” displayed on the face image of the princess character, a character image of “afternoon weather”, and a rain mark pattern are displayed on the face image of the princess character. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is erased so as to exit from the upper end of the screen.

  In FIG. 312 (i) following FIG. 312 (h), a moving animation in which the balloon display f 2 moves upward is performed, and a moving animation in which the balloon display f 3 that appears from the bottom of the screen moves upward is displayed. The balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f3 shows a state of being stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f3 is stopped is the position where the balloon display f2 was stopped before. Further, although the speed of movement of the balloon display f2 and the speed of movement of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different.

  FIG. 312 (j) following FIG. 312 (i) is a button notice display h 110 that imitates the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display in a position overlapping the balloon display f 2 and the balloon display f 3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. h112 is displayed, which indicates a state in which a notice effect for prompting the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  FIG. 312 (k), following FIG. 312 (j), erases the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 by pressing the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136. The erased balloon display f1 is displayed so as to appear from the upper end of the screen, and the balloon displays f1 to f3 are scrolled and displayed downward.

  FIG. 312 (l) following FIG. 312 (k) shows a state in which the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 and f2 is once interrupted or terminated. The balloon display f1 reappearing from the upper part of the screen is stopped and displayed at a position near the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the substantially center of the screen. Thereafter, the balloon displays f1 and f2 may be erased and the reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon is changed may be performed.

<Example of pattern 2>
FIG. 312 (m) following FIG. 312 (a) to FIG. 3 (j) shows that the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, so that the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. Is displayed so that the balloon display f1 ′ appears from the upper end of the screen, and the balloon displays f1 ′, f2, and f3 are scrolled and displayed downward. The balloon display f1 ′ is a balloon in which the face image of the lord character, the character image of “dono” displayed on the face image of the lord character, the character string and the pattern of “pseudo chance!” Are displayed. It is a display including a part.

  FIG. 312 (n) following FIG. 312 (m) shows a state where the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 ′ and f2 is once interrupted or terminated. The balloon display f1 ′ that appears from the upper part of the screen is stopped and displayed at a position near the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the substantially center of the screen. Thereafter, the balloon indications f1 ′ and f2 may be erased, and a pseudo continuous notice effect or reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon is changed may be performed. Good.

The effect of this example may be used as a prefetch notice or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily than in the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 307 to 327 is performed. Further, when the example of pattern 1 of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the example of pattern 2 of this example is performed. When the example of the pattern 2 is performed, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily than when the example of the pattern 1 of the present example is performed.
Next, an example of a balloon display effect will be described with reference to FIG.
313 (a) to 313 (i) show step-by-step effects using balloon display.

  FIG. 313 (a) shows, in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special pattern 1 fourth figure aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth figure aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 313 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  In FIG. 313 (b) following FIG. 313 (a), a balloon display f1 ′ by the character appears from the lower part of the screen (the border between the special figure 1 and the hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). Is displayed. The balloon display f1 ′ is a balloon in which the face image of the lord character, the character image of “dono” displayed on the face image of the lord character, the character string and the pattern of “pseudo chance!” Are displayed. It is a display including a part. The balloon display f1 ′ is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design.

  FIG. 313 (c) following FIG. 313 (b) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 ′ appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. Is displayed.

  In FIG. 313 (d) following FIG. 313 (c), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 above the balloon display f1 ′. This shows a state in which a notice effect for prompting the user to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  FIG. 313 (e) following FIG. 313 (d) shows that when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The moving animation in which the balloon display f1 ′ moves upward is resumed, and the balloon display f2 by the frog character appears so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. The balloon display f2 displays a face image of the frog character, a character image of “爺” displayed on the face image of the frog character, a character string of “noon weather” and a cloudy mark pattern. It is a display including a balloon part.

  FIG. 313 (f) following FIG. 313 (e) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 ′ moves upward and the balloon display f2 that appears from the bottom of the screen moves upward. The balloon display f1 ′ is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position where the balloon display f1 ′ was stopped and displayed previously. Further, the movement speed of the balloon display f1 ′ and the movement speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, but may be configured to be different. Thus, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward.

  FIG. 313 (g) following FIG. 313 (f) shows that the scroll display of the balloon display f 1 ′ and the balloon display f 2 is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps the balloon display f 1 ′ and the balloon display f 2. A button notice display h110 and an operation expiration date display h112 simulating the chance button 136 are displayed at the positions to be displayed, indicating a state in which a notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 313 (h) following FIG. 313 (g), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. While the balloon display f1 ′ is stopped, a moving animation in which f2 moves upward is performed, and at the same time, a balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, a character image of “princess” displayed on the face image of the princess character, a character image of “afternoon weather”, and a rain mark pattern are displayed on the face image of the princess character. It is a display including a balloon part. Further, the balloon display f2 is erased without being displayed above the position where the balloon display f1 ′ is displayed. Further, by displaying the speech balloon display f1 ′ with priority over the speech balloon display f2, when the speech balloon display f2 is moving behind the speech balloon display f1 by scroll display, the speech balloon display f1 of the speech balloon display f2 is displayed. It may be configured not to display a portion where 'is overlapped. In this case, the face image of the frog character and the character image of the heel in the balloon display f2 are not overlapped with the balloon display f1 ′, and are thus scroll-displayed to the position at the upper end of the screen. Thus, in this example, when a balloon display with high jackpot reliability appears, the balloon with higher reliability is prioritized and deleted, so that a balloon display with high reliability remains on the screen. It is configured.

  FIG. 313 (i) following FIG. 313 (h) shows a balloon display in which a balloon animation f3 'that appears from the bottom of the screen moves upward while the balloon display f1 ′ is stopped and displayed. f3 shows a state in which it is stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f3 is stopped is the position where the balloon display f2 was stopped before. Thereafter, the balloon displays f1 ′ and f3 may be erased and a reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon is changed may be performed.

The effect of this example may be used as a prefetch notice or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily than in the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 307 to 327 is performed.
Next, an example of a balloon display effect will be described with reference to FIG.
FIGS. 314 (a) to (i) show step-by-step example effects using balloon display.

  FIG. 314 (a) shows, in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 retention number aa1, the special symbol 1's fourth symbol aa2, the special symbol 2's retained number aa3, the special symbol 2's fourth symbol aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 314 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  In FIG. 314 (b) following FIG. 314 (a), a balloon display f 1 ′ by the character appears from the lower part of the screen (between the special figure 1 and 2 holding icon display area 208 ab and the effect display area). Is displayed. The balloon display f1 displays the face image of the Tono character, the character image of “Tono” displayed on the face image of the Tono character, the character string “The weather in the morning”, and the pattern of the fine mark. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design.

  FIG. 314 (c) following FIG. 314 (b) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. The displayed state is shown.

  FIG. 314 (d) following FIG. 314 (c) shows a button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208. A state in which a notice effect that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 is performed is shown.

  FIG. 314 (e), following FIG. 314 (d), erases the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 by pressing the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136. After the balloon display f2 by the frog character appears so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, the moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is resumed. The balloon display f2 displays a face image of the frog character, a character image of “爺” displayed on the face image of the frog character, a character string of “noon weather” and a cloudy mark pattern. It is a display including a balloon part. In this example, since the balloon display f2 is displayed so that it appears from the lower part of the screen and the balloon display f1 moves upward, the balloon display f2 is substantially below the balloon display f1. It appears to overlap in half.

  In FIG. 314 (f) following FIG. 314 (e), a moving animation is shown in which the lower half of the balloon display f 1 is overlapped with the balloon display f 2 and both move upward. Thus, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward.

  FIG. 314 (g) following FIG. 314 (f) shows that the scroll display of the balloon displays f 1 and f 2 is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the opportunity to overlap the balloon display f 1 and the balloon display f 2 is a chance. A button advance notice h110 imitating the button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, which shows a state in which the advance notice effect that prompts the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  FIG. 314 (h), following FIG. 314 (g), deletes the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 by pressing the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136. The balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen while the balloon displays f1 and f2 are stopped. In the balloon display f3, a character image of “princess” displayed on the face image of the princess character, a character image of “afternoon weather”, and a rain mark pattern are displayed on the face image of the princess character. It is a display including a balloon part. Also, the balloon display f3 is displayed so as to overlap the substantially lower half of the balloon display f2. In this example, a part of the balloon part of the balloon display 1 (a character string “Today's weather is”, a fine mark pattern or a frame part of the balloon part) is part of the balloon part of the balloon display f2 (“Today's weather is” It overlaps with a part of the character string, cloudy mark pattern and balloon part), and the balloon part of the balloon display 2 ("Today's weather" character string, cloudy mark picture and balloon part frame part) ) Overlaps with a part of the balloon part of the balloon display f3 ("Today's weather is a character string", a rain mark pattern, or a part of the balloon part frame). There may be cases. For example, the face images of each character may overlap, the character images of each character's name may overlap, or the character's face image overlaps the balloon There may be a case where the balloon part overlaps the face image of the character, or there may be a case where the character image of the character name overlaps the balloon part.

  FIG. 314 (i) following FIG. 314 (h) shows the position where the upper end of the balloon part f1 and the lower end of the balloon part f3 fit on the screen after moving animation is performed with the balloon displays f1 to f3 moving upward. The state where the movement animation of the balloon displays f1 to f3 is interrupted or terminated is shown. Thereafter, the balloon displays f1 to f3 may be erased and the reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon is changed may be performed. In this example, two balloon displays are overlapped. However, two or more balloon displays may be overlapped. For example, the greater the number of overlapped balloon displays, the higher the reliability of the big hit. It may be. Further, in this example, the overlapping state of each balloon display is configured to be equal, but the overlapping state of each balloon display may be configured not to be equal. For example, the area where the balloon displays f1 and f2 overlap may be smaller or larger than the area where the balloon displays f2 and f3 overlap. The balloon displays f1 and f2 may overlap and the balloon displays f2 and f3 may not overlap, or the balloon displays f1 and f2 may not overlap and the balloon displays f2 and f3 may overlap.

The effect of this example may be used as a prefetch notice or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily than in the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 307 to 327 is performed.
Next, an example of a balloon display effect will be described with reference to FIG.
315 (a) to 315 (i) show step-by-step example effects using balloon display.

  FIG. 315 (a) shows, in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special symbol 1 fourth figure aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 315 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  In FIG. 315 (b) following FIG. 315 (a), a balloon display f1 by the character appears from the lower part of the screen (the border between the special figure 1 and the hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. The balloon display f1 displays the face image of the Tono character, the character image of “Tono” displayed on the face image of the Tono character, the character string “The weather in the morning”, and the pattern of the fine mark. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design.

  FIG. 315 (c) following FIG. 315 (b) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. The displayed state is shown.

  FIG. 315 (d) following FIG. 315 (c) shows a button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208. A state in which a notice effect that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 is performed is shown.

  FIG. 315 (e) following FIG. 315 (d) shows that when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The balloon display f2 by the frog character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, and an animation that moves upward after the balloon display f1 is reduced is displayed. The balloon display f1 may be gradually reduced while moving upward. In addition, the reduction degree of the balloon display is not limited to this example, and a part of each of the balloon display components (weather pattern, character, frame, character name, character face image) may be reduced, Only a part may be reduced, the whole may be reduced, or the reduction rate may be different for each configuration.

  FIG. 315 (f) following FIG. 315 (e) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward and a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 that appears from the bottom of the screen moves upward. The balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position where the balloon display f1 was stopped and displayed previously. Further, although the speed of movement of the balloon display f1 and the speed of movement of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. Thus, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward.

  FIG. 315 (g) following FIG. 315 (f) is a chance that the decorative symbol display device 208 temporarily interrupts the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 and f2, and takes a chance to overlap the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2. A button advance notice h110 imitating the button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, which shows a state in which the advance notice effect that prompts the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  FIG. 315 (h), following FIG. 315 (g), erases the button preview display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 by pressing the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136. The balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, and an animation in which the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 move upward is displayed. Further, the balloon display f2 is configured to be reduced and displayed before moving upward, but the balloon display f2 may be gradually reduced while moving upward. The reduction degree of the balloon display f2 may be the same as or different from the reduction degree of the balloon display f1. Further, either one of the balloon indications f1 and f2 may be reduced larger or smaller than the other, and the configuration of reducing one and the other may be different.

  FIG. 315 (i) following FIG. 315 (h) shows a state in which the animation moving toward the balloon displays f2 and f3 is interrupted or terminated and stopped. Thereafter, the balloon displays f2 and f3 may be erased and the reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon is changed may be performed.

The effect of this example may be used as a prefetch notice or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily than in the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 307 to 327 is performed.
Next, an example of a balloon display effect will be described with reference to FIG.
FIGS. 316 (a) to 316 (k) show step-by-step effects using balloon display.

  316 (a) shows, in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special symbol 1's fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2's reserved number aa3, the special symbol 2's fourth symbol aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 316 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  In FIG. 316 (b) following FIG. 316 (a), a balloon display f1 by the character appears from the lower part of the screen (the border between the special figure 1 and the hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. The balloon display f1 displays the face image of the Tono character, the character image of “Tono” displayed on the face image of the Tono character, the character string “The weather in the morning”, and the pattern of the fine mark. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design.

  316 (c) following FIG. 316 (b) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 that appears from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. The displayed state is shown.

  In FIG. 316 (d) following FIG. 316 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a button notice display h110 and an operation expiration date display h112 simulating the chance button 136 are displayed above the balloon display f1, and the player is displayed. A state in which a notice effect that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 is performed is shown.

  FIG. 316 (e), following FIG. 316 (d), erases the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 by pressing the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136. A balloon display f1 ′ by the character of Tono is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, and an animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is displayed. The balloon display f1 ′ is a balloon in which the face image of the lord character, the character image of “dono” displayed on the face image of the lord character, the character string and the pattern of “pseudo chance!” Are displayed. It is a display including a part.

  FIG. 316 (f) following FIG. 316 (e) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward and the balloon display f1 ′ that appears from the bottom of the screen moves upward. The balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f1 ′ indicates a state where it is stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f1 ′ stops and displays is the position where the balloon display f1 stopped and displayed before. Further, the movement speed of the balloon display f1 and the movement speed of the balloon display f1 ′ are configured to be the same, but may be configured to be different. Thus, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward.

  FIG. 316 (g) following FIG. 316 (f) shows a position where the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 and f1 ′ is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f1 ′. A button preview display h110 and an operation expiration date display h112 simulating the chance button 136 are displayed, indicating a state in which a preview effect for prompting the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 316 (h) following FIG. 316 (g), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The animation in which only the balloon display f1 moves upward is displayed, and the balloon display f1 is erased so as to exit from the upper end of the screen. Further, an animation in which the balloon display f1 ′ is changed to the balloon display f1a is performed. In the animation, the balloon part of the balloon display f1 'expands, and the character string of the balloon part of the balloon display f1a floats instead as the character string of the balloon part gradually disappears. . The balloon display f1a is a balloon displaying a character image of “Tono”, a character image of “SP reach” displayed on the face image of the character, and a character string and a pattern of “SP reach confirmation”. It is a display including a part. The height of the balloon part of the balloon display f1a is approximately twice the height of the balloon part of the balloon display f1. In this example, the old balloon display f1 is configured to move up and be erased in response to a change in the new balloon display f1 ′. Or may be overlapped by the changed balloon display f1a without moving, or may be erased so as to fade out on the spot.

  In FIG. 316 (i) following FIG. 316 (h), the balloon display f1a is stopped and displayed so as to be within the frame of the screen.

  In FIG. 316 (j) following FIG. 316 (i), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed at a position overlapping the balloon display f1a. , A state in which a notice effect for prompting the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 316 (k) following FIG. 316 (j), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. , The character string “SP reach confirmation” is deleted and the character string “all rotation reach confirmation” is displayed. The character string “confirm all rotation reach” is displayed so as to protrude from the balloon portion of the balloon display f1a. The character string “confirm all rotation reach” includes a decorative pattern, a character image of the shrine, a hold icon, a change icon, a special figure 1 hold number aa1, a special figure 1 figure 4 aa2, a special figure 2 hold number aa3, a special figure The display may be overlapped with the display of the second 4th symbol aa4, the number of common figure hold aa5, the 4th symbol aa6 of the normal diagram, the display of the character string in the tutorial display area tu1, or the like.

  The effect of this example may be used as a prefetch notice or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily than in the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 307 to 327 is performed. Thereafter, the balloon display f1a may be erased and the SP reach effect or the full rotation reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon is changed may be performed.

The effect of this example may be used as a prefetch notice or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily than in the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 307 to 327 is performed.
Next, an example of a balloon display effect will be described with reference to FIG.
FIGS. 317 (a) to (i) show an example of effect using balloon display step by step.

  FIG. 317 (a) shows, in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special symbol 1's fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2's reserved number aa3, the special symbol 2's fourth symbol aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 317 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  In FIG. 317 (b) following FIG. 317 (a), a balloon display f1 by the character appears from the lower part of the screen (the border between the special figure 1 and the hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. The balloon display f1 displays the face image of the Tono character, the character image of “Tono” displayed on the face image of the Tono character, the character string “The weather in the morning”, and the pattern of the fine mark. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design. In addition, a princess character display m3 is displayed from the left end of the screen. The princess character display m3 is overlapped with the 4th symbol aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the 4th symbol aa4 of the special figure 2, the universal figure hold number aa5, and the 4th figure aa6 of the normal figure. Yes.

  FIG. 317 (c) following FIG. 317 (b) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 that appears from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. The displayed state is shown. The princess character m3 is displayed with an animation of moving to the right, and the princess character m3 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the face image of the character in the balloon display f1.

  FIG. 317 (d) following FIG. 317 (c) shows a button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208. A state in which a notice effect that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 is performed is shown. In addition, the princess character m3 displays an animation that moves to the right, and the princess character m3 overlaps with substantially the entire face image of the character in the balloon display f1 and substantially the entire character image of “dono”. It is displayed to do. If the balloon display f1 is stopped until the player presses the chance button 136, the princess character m3 may also be configured to stop moving in the right direction.

  FIG. 317 (e) following FIG. 317 (d) shows that the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, and the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are deleted. The moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is resumed, and the balloon display f2 by the frog character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. The balloon display f2 displays a face image of the frog character, a character image of “爺” displayed on the face image of the frog character, a character string of “noon weather” and a cloudy mark pattern. It is a display including a balloon part. In addition, the princess character m3 displays an animation of moving to the right, and the princess character m3 is displayed on the left character portion of the balloon portion of the balloon display f1 and on the left character portion of the balloon portion of the balloon display f2. It is displayed to overlap.

  In FIG. 317 (f) following FIG. 317 (e), a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and a moving animation in which the balloon display f2 that appears from the bottom of the screen moves upward. The balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position where the balloon display f1 was stopped and displayed previously. Further, although the speed of movement of the balloon display f1 and the speed of movement of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. Thus, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward. In addition, the princess character m3 displays an animation of moving to the right, and the princess character m3 overlaps the middle character portion of the balloon portion of the balloon display f1 and the middle character portion of the balloon portion of the balloon display f2. It is displayed to do.

  FIG. 317 (g) following FIG. 317 (f) shows a position where the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2. A button preview display h110 and an operation expiration date display h112 simulating the chance button 136 are displayed, indicating a state in which a preview effect for prompting the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed. In addition, the princess character m3 displays an animation of moving to the right, and the princess character m3 includes a character part on the right side of the balloon part of the balloon display f1, a pattern part of a clear mark, and a balloon part of the balloon display f2. It is displayed so as to overlap the character part on the right and the pattern part of the cloudy mark. The princess character m3 is displayed so as to overlap with a part of the button notice display h110 and a part of the operation expiration date display h112.

  In FIG. 317 (h), following FIG. 317 (g), the player presses the chance button 136 within the expiration date of the operation of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. At the same time as the moving animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, a character image of “princess” displayed on the face image of the princess character, a character image of “afternoon weather”, and a rain mark pattern are displayed on the face image of the princess character. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is erased so as to exit from the upper end of the screen. In addition, the princess character m3 displays an animation of moving to the right, and the princess character m3 has a rain mark on the right side of the balloon part of the balloon display f3 and a cloudy mark pattern part on the right side of the balloon part of the balloon display f2. It is displayed so as to overlap the pattern portion of the mark and a part of the face image of the frog character.

  FIG. 317 (i) following FIG. 317 (h) shows a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f3 that appears from the bottom of the screen moves upward. The balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f3 shows a state of being stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f3 is stopped is the position where the balloon display f2 was stopped before. Further, although the speed of movement of the balloon display f2 and the speed of movement of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. The princess character m3 displays an animation that moves to the right and is erased so as to exit from the right end of the screen. A part of the princess character m3 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the face image of the samurai character. Thereafter, the balloon displays f2 and f3 may be erased and the reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon is changed may be performed.

The effect of this example may be used as a prefetch notice or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily than in the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 307 to 327 is performed.
Next, an example of a balloon display effect will be described with reference to FIG.
FIGS. 318 (a) to 318 (i) show an example of an effect using balloon display step by step.

  FIG. 318 (a) shows, in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special pattern 1 fourth figure aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth figure aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 318 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  In FIG. 318 (b) following FIG. 318 (a), a balloon display f1 by the character appears from the lower part of the screen (the border between the special figure 1 and the hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. The balloon display f1 displays the face image of the Tono character, the character image of “Tono” displayed on the face image of the Tono character, the character string “The weather in the morning”, and the pattern of the fine mark. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design. Moreover, the state which the structure 247 has moved to the approximate center front of the decorative design display apparatus 208 is shown. The structure 247 makes it difficult to visually recognize the frame portion of the balloon display f1.

  FIG. 318 (c) following FIG. 318 (b) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 that appears from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. The displayed state is shown. In addition, a structure 247 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The structure 247 makes it difficult to visually recognize the frame portion of the balloon display f1, the character string portion, and part of the fine mark pattern.

  In FIG. 318 (d) following FIG. 318 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1, and the player is displayed. FIG. 318 (e) following FIG. 318 (d) shows a state in which a notice effect that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 is performed. When the button is pressed, the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased, the moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is resumed, and the balloon display f2 by the frog character appears from the bottom of the screen. It is displayed to do. The balloon display f2 displays a face image of the frog character, a character image of “爺” displayed on the face image of the frog character, a character string of “noon weather” and a cloudy mark pattern. It is a display including a balloon part. In addition, a structure 247 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The structure 247 makes it difficult to visually recognize the frame portion of the balloon display f1, the character string portion, and part of the fine mark pattern.

  FIG. 318 (f) following FIG. 318 (e) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward, and a moving animation in which the balloon display f2 that appears from the bottom of the screen moves upward. The balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position where the balloon display f1 was stopped and displayed previously. Further, although the speed of movement of the balloon display f1 and the speed of movement of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. Thus, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward. In addition, a structure 247 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The structure 247 makes it difficult to visually recognize the frame portions of the balloon displays f1 and f2, the character string portion, and part of the pattern of the clear mark and the cloudy mark.

  FIG. 318 (g) following FIG. 318 (f) shows a position where the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2. A button preview display h110 and an operation expiration date display h112 simulating the chance button 136 are displayed, indicating a state in which a preview effect for prompting the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed. In addition, a structure 247 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The structure 247 makes it difficult to visually recognize the frame portions of the balloon indications f1 and f2, the character string portion, part of the pattern of the clear mark and the cloudy mark, the button notice display h110, and the operation expiration date display h112.

  In FIG. 318 (h), following FIG. 318 (g), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. At the same time as the moving animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, a character image of “princess” displayed on the face image of the princess character, a character image of “afternoon weather”, and a rain mark pattern are displayed on the face image of the princess character. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is erased so as to exit from the upper end of the screen. In addition, a structure 247 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The structure 247 makes it difficult to visually recognize the frame part of the balloon display f2, the character string part, a part of the cloudy mark pattern, and the part of the frame part of the balloon display f3.

  FIG. 318 (i) following FIG. 318 (h) shows a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f3 that appears from the bottom of the screen moves upward. The balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f3 shows a state of being stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f3 is stopped is the position where the balloon display f2 was stopped before. Further, although the speed of movement of the balloon display f2 and the speed of movement of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. In addition, a structure 247 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The structure 247 makes it difficult to visually recognize the frame portions, the character string portions, the cloudy marks, and the rain marks of the balloon displays f2 and f3.

  In this example, the balloon display is configured to move while the structure 247 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, while the structure 247 is positioned at the initial position. In other words, the balloon display may be configured to move, or the balloon display may be moved while the structure 247 overlaps the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

The effect of this example may be used as a prefetch notice or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily than in the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 307 to 327 is performed.
Next, an example of a balloon display effect will be described with reference to FIG.
FIGS. 319 (a) to (i) show step-by-step effects using balloon display.

  FIG. 319 (a) shows, in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special symbol 1's fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special symbol 2's fourth symbol aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 319 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  In FIG. 319 (b) following FIG. 319 (a), a balloon display f1 by the character appears from the lower part of the screen (the border between the special figure 1 and the hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. The balloon display f1 displays the face image of the Tono character, the character image of “Tono” displayed on the face image of the Tono character, the character string “The weather in the morning”, and the pattern of the fine mark. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design. In addition, a smiling character is displayed on the light-emitting panel in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Due to the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize the frame portion, the character string portion, and part of the fine mark pattern of the balloon display f1.

  FIG. 319 (c) following FIG. 319 (b) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 that appears from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. The displayed state is shown. In addition, light emission display is performed by a light emission panel in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Due to the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize the frame portion, the character string portion, and part of the fine mark pattern of the balloon display f1.

  FIG. 319 (d) following FIG. 319 (c) shows a button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208. A state in which a notice effect that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 is performed is shown. In addition, light emission display is performed by a light emission panel in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Due to the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize the frame portion of the balloon display f1, the character string portion, a part of the clear mark pattern, the button notice display h110, and the operation expiration date display h112.

  FIG. 319 (e) following FIG. 319 (d) shows that when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is resumed, and the balloon display f2 by the frog character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. The balloon display f2 displays a face image of the frog character, a character image of “爺” displayed on the face image of the frog character, a character string of “noon weather” and a cloudy mark pattern. It is a display including a balloon part. In addition, light emission display is performed by a light emission panel in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Due to the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize the frame portions, character string portions, clear marks, and cloudy marks of the balloon indications f1 and f2.

  FIG. 319 (f) following FIG. 319 (e) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward, and a moving animation in which the balloon display f2 that appears from the lower part of the screen moves upward. The balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position where the balloon display f1 was stopped and displayed previously. Further, although the speed of movement of the balloon display f1 and the speed of movement of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. Thus, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward. In addition, light emission display is performed by a light emission panel in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Due to the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize the frame portions, character string portions, clear marks, and cloudy marks of the balloon indications f1 and f2.

  FIG. 319 (g) following FIG. 319 (f) is a position where the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2. A button preview display h110 and an operation expiration date display h112 simulating the chance button 136 are displayed, indicating a state in which a preview effect for prompting the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed. In addition, light emission display is performed by a light emission panel in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Due to the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize the frame portions of the balloon displays f1 and f2, the character string portion, part of the pattern of the clear mark and the cloudy mark, the button notice display h110, and the operation expiration date display h112.

  In FIG. 319 (h) following FIG. 319 (g), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. At the same time as the moving animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, a character image of “princess” displayed on the face image of the princess character, a character image of “afternoon weather”, and a rain mark pattern are displayed on the face image of the princess character. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is erased so as to exit from the upper end of the screen. In addition, light emission display is performed by a light emission panel in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Due to the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize the frame parts of the balloon displays f2 and f3, the character string part, the cloudy mark, a part of the pattern of the rain mark, the button notice display h110, and the operation expiration date display h112.

  FIG. 319 (i) following FIG. 319 (h) shows a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f3 that appears from the bottom of the screen moves upward. The balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f3 shows a state of being stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f3 is stopped is the position where the balloon display f2 was stopped before. Further, although the speed of movement of the balloon display f2 and the speed of movement of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. In addition, light emission display is performed by a light emission panel in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Due to the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize the frame portions, character string portions, cloudy marks, and rain marks of the balloon displays f2 and f3.

  In this example, the balloon display is configured to move when the light emission display is performed by the light emission panel located in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, but only while the light emission display by the light emission panel is not performed. The balloon display may be configured to move.

The effect of this example may be used as a prefetch notice or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily than in the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 307 to 327 is performed.
Next, an example of a balloon display effect will be described with reference to FIG.
320 (a) to 320 (i) show step-by-step example effects using balloon display.

  320 (a) shows, in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 holding number aa1, the special symbol 1's fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2's reserved number aa3, the special symbol 2's fourth symbol aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 320 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  In FIG. 320 (b) following FIG. 320 (a), a balloon display f1 by the character appears from the lower part of the screen (the border between the special figure 1 and the hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. The balloon display f1 displays the face image of the Tono character, the character image of “Tono” displayed on the face image of the Tono character, the character string “The weather in the morning”, and the pattern of the fine mark. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design. In addition, a first display is performed in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The first display overlaps the frame portion of the balloon display f1.

  FIG. 320 (c) following FIG. 320 (b) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f 1 that appears from the bottom of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. The displayed state is shown. In addition, a first display is performed in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The first display is over part of the frame part of the balloon display f1, all of the character string part, part of the pattern of the weather mark, part of the face image of the Tono character, and all of the characters of Tono. Wrapping.

  In FIG. 320 (d) following FIG. 320 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a button notice display h 110 and an operation expiration date display h 112 simulating the chance button 136 are displayed above the balloon display f 1, and the player A state in which a notice effect that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 is performed is shown. In addition, a first display is performed in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The first display is over part of the frame part of the balloon display f1, all of the character string part, part of the pattern of the weather mark, part of the face image of the Tono character, and all of the characters of Tono. Wrapping.

  In FIG. 320 (e) following FIG. 320 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button preview display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is resumed, and the balloon display f2 by the frog character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. The balloon display f2 displays a face image of the frog character, a character image of “爺” displayed on the face image of the frog character, a character string of “noon weather” and a cloudy mark pattern. It is a display including a balloon part. In addition, a first display is performed in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The first display overlaps substantially all of the balloon part of the balloon display f1, part of the face image of the lord character, part of the character “dono”, and part of the frame part of the balloon display f2. .

  FIG. 320 (f) following FIG. 320 (e) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f 1 moves upward and a movement animation in which the balloon display f 2 that appears from the bottom of the screen moves upward. The balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position where the balloon display f1 was stopped and displayed previously. Further, although the speed of movement of the balloon display f1 and the speed of movement of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. Thus, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward. In addition, a first display is performed in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The first display is a part of the frame portion of the balloon display f1, a part of the pattern of the clear mark, a part of the face image of the character, the substantially whole part of the balloon part of the balloon display f2, and the face of the samurai character. It overlaps part of the image.

  FIG. 320 (g) following FIG. 320 (f) is a position where the scroll display of the balloon display f 1 and the balloon display f 2 is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps the balloon display f 1 and the balloon display f 2. A button preview display h110 and an operation expiration date display h112 simulating the chance button 136 are displayed, indicating a state in which a preview effect for prompting the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed. In addition, a first display is performed in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The first display includes a part of the frame portion of the balloon display f1, a part of the pattern of the clear mark, a substantially whole part of the balloon part of the balloon display f2, a part of the face image of the frog character, and a button notice display. h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 all overlap.

  In FIG. 320 (h) following FIG. 320 (g), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. At the same time as the moving animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, a character image of “princess” displayed on the face image of the princess character, a character image of “afternoon weather”, and a rain mark pattern are displayed on the face image of the princess character. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is erased so as to exit from the upper end of the screen. In addition, a first display is performed in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The first display overlaps substantially the entire balloon part of the balloon display f2, part of the face image of the frog character, part of the frame part of the balloon display f3, and part of the character image of “princess”. Yes.

  In FIG. 320 (i) following FIG. 320 (h), a moving animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward is performed, and a moving animation in which the balloon display f3 that appears from the bottom of the screen moves upward is displayed. The balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f3 shows a state of being stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f3 is stopped is the position where the balloon display f2 was stopped before. Further, although the speed of movement of the balloon display f2 and the speed of movement of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. In addition, a first display is performed in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The first display is a part of the frame part of the balloon display f2, a part of the cloud mark pattern, a part of the face image of the frog character, a part of the frame part of the balloon display f3, the entire character string, the rain mark A part of the picture of the princess character and a part of the face image of the princess character overlap all the character images of the “princess”.

  In this example, the balloon display is configured to move when the first display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but the balloon display is performed only while the first display is not displayed. May be configured to move. In addition, the first display is hold display, hold icon, change icon, notice icon, icon area display, decorative design, 4th design, mini decorative design, notice display, pre-reading notice display, tutorial display, pseudo-continuous display, reach Display, right-handed display, left-handed display, character display, background display, jackpot display, round display, big bonus display, AR display, RT display, consecutive game count display, acquired number of balls display, acquired number display, volume adjustment display, It may be at least one of light amount adjustment display, button press display, error display, ball removal display, door open display, and abnormality occurrence display.

The effect of this example may be used as a prefetch notice or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily than in the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 307 to 327 is performed.
Next, an example of a balloon display effect will be described with reference to FIG.
FIGS. 321 (a) to (h) show an example of effect using balloon display step by step.

  FIG. 321 (a) shows, in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special symbol 1's fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special symbol 2's fourth symbol aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 321 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  In FIG. 321 (b) following FIG. 321 (a), a balloon display f1 ′ by the character appears from the lower part of the screen (the border between the special figure 1 and the hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). Is displayed. In the balloon display f1 ′, the face image of the Tono character, the character image of “Tono” displayed on the face image of the Tono character, and the character string and the pattern of “Pseudo chance!” Are displayed. It is a display that includes a speech balloon. The balloon display f1 ′ is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design.

  FIG. 321 (c) following FIG. 321 (b) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 ′ appearing from the bottom of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. Is displayed. Also, the special figure 1 hold icon a4 is newly displayed in the special figure 1 and hold icon display area 280ab.

  FIG. 321 (d) following FIG. 321 (c) shows a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 on the decorative symbol display device 208 above the balloon display f1 ′. This shows a state in which a notice effect for prompting the user to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  FIG. 321 (e) following FIG. 321 (d) shows that when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The balloon display f2 ′ by the frog character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, and an animation in which the balloon display f1 ′ moves upward is displayed. In the balloon display f2 ′, the face image of the moth character, the character image of “爺” displayed on the face image of the moth character, the character string “Holding change” and the cloudy mark pattern are displayed. It is a display including a balloon part.

  FIG. 321 (f) following FIG. 321 (e) is a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 ′ moves upward, and the balloon display f2 ′ that appears from the bottom of the screen moves upward. Animation is performed, and the balloon display f1 ′ is stopped and displayed at the top of the screen, and the balloon display f2 ′ is stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 ′ stops and displays is the position where the balloon display f1 ′ stopped and displayed before. Moreover, although the speed of movement of the balloon display f1 ′ and the speed of movement of the balloon display f2 ′ are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different.

  FIG. 321 (g) subsequent to FIG. 321 (f) shows a state in which the cloudy mark pattern displayed in the balloon display f2 ′ is moving toward the special figure 1, hold icon display area 280ab. Yes.

  In FIG. 321 (h) following FIG. 321 (g), the pattern of the cloudy mark displayed in the balloon display f2 ′ is displayed as the special figure 1 hold icon a4 in place of the default figure special hold icon a4. Has been. Thereafter, the balloon displays f1 ′ and f2 ′ may be erased and the SP reach effect or the full rotation reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon is changed may be performed. Also good.

The effect of this example is an example in which a continuous notice is given by the balloon display f1 ′ and the balloon display f2 ′. The balloon display f1 ′ is used for a notice of the change, and the balloon display f2 ′ is used for a prefetch notice. Also, in this example, the cloudy mark image that was displayed inside the balloon part of the balloon display is moved and displayed as a hold icon, but the fluctuation or prefetching displayed outside the balloon part is also an example. The notice icon used may be moved and displayed inside the balloon part, or the icon displayed inside the balloon part may be overwritten with the notice icon. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily than in the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 307 to 327 is performed.
Next, an example of a balloon display effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIGS. 322 (a) to (i) show step-by-step example effects using balloon display. In FIGS. 322 to 324, a sub liquid crystal a 208 is provided on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a sub liquid crystal b 208 is provided on the right side.

  FIG. 322 (a) shows that the sub liquid crystal a208 has a special figure 1 holding number aa1, a special figure 1 fourth figure aa2, a special figure 2 holding number aa3, a special figure 2 FIG. The usual 4th symbol aa6 is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 322 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 322 (b) following FIG. 322 (a) is a balloon display by the character from the lower part of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 (the border between the special figure 1 and the hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). At the same time that a part of f1 appears, a balloon is blown out from the lower part of the screen of the sub liquid crystal a208 (part of the same height as the border between the special figure 1 and the hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). Another part of the display f1 is displayed so as to appear. A part of the balloon display f1 is a balloon part in which a character string “Morning is in the morning” and a pattern of a fine mark are displayed, and another part of the balloon display f1 is a face image of the character and the temple. This corresponds to the character image of “dono” displayed on the face image of the character and a part of the balloon.

  FIG. 322 (c), which follows FIG. 322 (b), shows a part of the balloon display f1 in the decorative symbol display device 208 and another part of the balloon display f1 in the sub liquid crystal a208 simultaneously facing upward. The moving animation which moves is displayed and it has shown the state stopped and displayed in the screen center of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 or the sub liquid crystal a208.

  FIG. 322 (d) following FIG. 322 (c) shows a button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208. A state in which a notice effect that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 is performed is shown.

  FIG. 322 (e), following FIG. 322 (d), shows that when the player presses the chance button 136 within the expiration date of the operation of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation valid are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The deadline display h112 is deleted, and a part of the balloon display f2 by the frog character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, and an animation in which a part of the balloon display f1 moves upward is displayed. Further, in the sub liquid crystal b208, another part of the balloon display f2 appears from the lower part of the screen of the sub liquid crystal b208 (part of the same height as the border between the special figure 1 and the hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed to do. A part of the balloon display f2 is a balloon part in which a character string “morning weather is” and a cloudy mark pattern are displayed, and another part of the balloon display f2 is a face image of the frog character The character image of “爺” displayed on the face image of the character and a part of the speech balloon correspond to this.

  FIG. 322 (f) following FIG. 322 (e) shows a balloon display f 2 that appears from the bottom of the screen while moving animation in which a part of the balloon display f 1 moves upward in the decorative symbol display device 208. A part of the balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the top of the screen, and a part of the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. ing. The position where a part of the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is a position where a part of the balloon display f1 was stopped and displayed before this. Further, although the speed of movement of the balloon display f1 and the speed of movement of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. Further, in the sub liquid crystal a208, a moving animation in which another part of the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed and stopped at the upper part of the screen, and another part of the balloon display f2 is displayed in the sub liquid crystal b208. A moving animation that moves upwards is performed and stopped at the bottom of the screen.

  FIG. 322 (g) following FIG. 322 (f) shows a button notice display h110 and an operation expiration date display h112 at a position overlapping with a part of the balloon display f1 and a part of f2 in the decorative symbol display device 208. It is displayed.

  FIG. 322 (h) following FIG. 322 (g) shows that the player presses the chance button 136 within the expiration date of the operation of the chance button 136, so that the button notice display h110 and the operation valid are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The deadline display h112 is deleted, an animation in which a part of the balloon display f2 moves upward is displayed, and a part of the balloon display f3 is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. Further, in the sub liquid crystal b208, another part of the balloon display f1 is erased so as to exit from the upper end of the screen, and the balloon display f3 is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In addition, in the sub liquid crystal c208, an animation in which another part of the balloon display f2 moves upward is displayed. A part of the balloon display f3 is a balloon part displaying a character string “Afternoon weather is” and a rain mark pattern, and another part of the balloon display f3 is a face image of the princess character and the princess. This corresponds to the character image of “Princess” displayed on the face image of the character and a part of the balloon.

  FIG. 322 (i) following FIG. 322 (h) shows a balloon display f 3 that appears from the bottom of the screen while a moving animation in which a part of the balloon display f 2 moves upward is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208. A part of the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the top of the screen, and a part of the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. ing. The position where a part of the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is a position where a part of the balloon display f1 was stopped and displayed before this. Further, although the speed of movement of the balloon display f2 and the speed of movement of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. Further, in the sub liquid crystal b208, a moving animation in which another part of the balloon display f2 moves upward is performed and stopped at the top of the screen, and another part of the balloon display f3 is displayed in the sub liquid crystal a208. A moving animation that moves upwards is performed and stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen.

The effect of this example may be used as a prefetch notice or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily than in the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 307 to 327 is performed.
Next, an example of a balloon display effect will be described with reference to FIG.
FIGS. 323 (a) to (i) show step-by-step example effects using balloon display.

  FIG. 323 (a) shows that the sub-liquid crystal a208 has a special figure 1 hold number aa1, a special figure 1 figure 4 aa2, a special figure 2 hold number aa3, a special figure 2 figure 4 aa4, an ordinary figure hold number aa5, The usual 4th symbol aa6 is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 323 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 323 (b) following FIG. 323 (a) is a balloon display by a character from the lower part of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 (the border between the special figure 1, the hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed so that f1 appears. The balloon display f1 displays the face image of the Tono character, the character image of “Tono” displayed on the face image of the Tono character, the character string “The weather in the morning”, and the pattern of the fine mark. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design.

  FIG. 323 (c) following FIG. 323 (b) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. The displayed state is shown.

  FIG. 323 (d) following FIG. 323 (c) shows a button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208. A state in which a notice effect that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 is performed is shown.

  FIG. 323 (e), following FIG. 323 (d), deletes the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 by pressing the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136. The balloon display f2 by the frog character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, and an animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is displayed.

  FIG. 323 (f) following FIG. 323 (e) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the balloon display f2 that appears from the bottom of the screen is displayed upward. The moving animation which moves toward is performed, the balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position where the balloon display f1 was stopped and displayed previously. Further, although the speed of movement of the balloon display f1 and the speed of movement of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. Thus, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 following FIG. 323 (f), FIG. 323 (g) temporarily stops the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 and f2 in the decorative symbol display device 208, and then displays the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2. A button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed at positions overlapping each other, indicating a state in which a notice effect that prompts the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  FIG. 323 (h), following FIG. 323 (g), shows that when the player presses the chance button 136 within the expiration date of the operation of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation valid are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The deadline display h112 is deleted, and a balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, and an animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward is displayed. Further, from the upper end of the sub liquid crystal b208, the already erased balloon display f1 is displayed so as to appear reduced in accordance with the size of the sub liquid crystal b208.

  In FIG. 323 (i) following FIG. 323 (h), an animation of moving toward the balloon displays f2 and f3 is continuously performed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the balloon display f1 is displayed on the sub liquid crystal b208. Is moved downward, and a balloon display is displayed in the lower part of the sub liquid crystal b208. Thus, the effect of this example is an effect of storing the balloon display erased in the decorative symbol display device 208 in the sub liquid crystal b208. When the sub liquid crystal b208 is filled with the balloon display, the old balloon display may be deleted, the new balloon display may be deleted, or all the balloon displays may be deleted. You may make it erase a half balloon display.

The effect of this example may be used as a prefetch notice or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily than in the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 307 to 327 is performed. In this example, the balloon display f1 displayed on the sub liquid crystal b208 is configured to be smaller than the balloon display f1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. However, the balloon display f1 displayed on the sub liquid crystal b208 is decorated. You may comprise so that it may become larger than the balloon display f1 displayed on the symbol display apparatus 208, and you may comprise so that it may become the same magnitude | size.
Next, an example of a balloon display effect will be described with reference to FIG.
FIGS. 324 (a) to 324 (m) show an example of an effect using balloon display step by step.

  FIG. 324 (a) shows a sub-liquid crystal a208 with a special figure 1 holding number aa1, a special figure 1 fourth figure aa2, a special figure 2 holding number aa3, a special figure 2 FIG. 4 aa4, a general figure holding number aa5, The usual 4th symbol aa6 is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 324 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 324 (b) following FIG. 324 (a) is based on the character at the bottom of the screen of the sub liquid crystal b208 (the same height as the border between the special figure 1 and the hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to appear. The balloon display f1 displays the face image of the Tono character, the character image of “Tono” displayed on the face image of the Tono character, the character string “The weather in the morning”, and the pattern of the fine mark. It is a display including a balloon part.

  FIG. 324 (c) following FIG. 324 (b) shows a state in which a moving animation is displayed on the sub liquid crystal b208 in which the balloon display f1 that appears from the lower part of the screen moves upward.

  FIG. 324 (d) following FIG. 324 (c) shows a state in which “decoration 3—decoration 8—decoration 4” is stopped on the ornamental symbol display device 208. Further, during the display of the stop display, the movement of the balloon display f1 of the sub liquid crystal b208 is also stopped.

  In FIG. 324 (e) following FIG. 324 (d), the next change is started, and the decorative symbol change display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the sub liquid crystal b208, a moving animation of the balloon display f1 is started.

  In FIG. 324 (f) following FIG. 324 (e), in the sub liquid crystal b 208, a moving animation in which the balloon display f 1 moves upward is performed, and the balloon display f 2 that appears from the bottom of the screen faces upward. A moving animation that moves is performed. Thus, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward.

  In FIG. 324 (g) following FIG. 324 (f), the balloon displays f1 and f2 are continuously scrolled on the sub liquid crystal b208.

  In FIG. 324 (h) following FIG. 324 (g), the balloon displays f1 and f2 are continuously scrolled on the sub liquid crystal b208.

  FIG. 324 (i) following FIG. 324 (h) shows a state where “decoration 2—decoration 8—decoration 9” is stopped on the ornamental symbol display device 208. In FIG. 324 (h), the balloon display f1 and f2 are continuously scroll-displayed on the sub liquid crystal b208 even while the decoration symbol is stopped, and the balloon display f3 appears from the bottom of the screen. .

  In FIG. 324 (j) following FIG. 324 (i), the next variation is started, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the balloon displays f1 to f3 are scrolled on the sub liquid crystal b208. Is ongoing.

  In FIG. 324 (k) following FIG. 324 (j), in the sub liquid crystal b208, the balloon displays f1 to f3 are continuously scrolled and displayed so that the balloon display f6 appears from the lower part of the screen. Yes. The balloon display f6 is a character image of “Chibi princess” displayed on the face image of the Chibi princess character and the face image of the Chibi princess character, and a character string of “evening weather” and “reach?” It is a display including a balloon part on which a pattern of clear marks is displayed. The balloon display f6 in this example is a display used as a notice that the reach will be performed in the fluctuation.

  In FIG. 324 (l) following FIG. 324 (k), in the sub liquid crystal b208, the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 to f3 and f6 is continuously performed, and the balloon display f1 is erased from the upper end of the screen, and the lower part of the screen is displayed. The scroll display of the balloon displays f2, f3, and f6 is interrupted or terminated at the stage where the entire balloon display f6 that appeared from is displayed.

  FIG. 324 (m) following FIG. 324 (l) shows a state where the reach effect of “decoration 4” is being performed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Thus, this example is an example in which the balloon display continues to be displayed across a plurality of variations. Even when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the sub-liquid crystal may continue to produce the balloon display effect.

  The effect of this example may be used as a prefetch notice. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily than in the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 307 to 327 is performed.

  FIG. 325 shows two examples of effects using the hold icon in stages. FIG. 325 shows an example of pattern 1 that produces the effects of FIGS. 325 (i) to (k) after FIGS. 325 (a) to (h), and FIG. 325 (i ′) after FIGS. 325 (a) to (h). The example of the pattern 2 which performs production | production of-(l ') is shown.

<Example of pattern 1>
Hereinafter, the example of the pattern 1 of this production example is demonstrated using FIG. 325 (a)-(k).

  FIG. 325 (a) shows, in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special symbol 1 fourth figure aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 325 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  In FIG. 325 (b) following FIG. 325 (a), a balloon display f1 by a character appears from the lower part of the screen (the border between the special figure 1 and the hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. The balloon display f1 displays the face image of the Tono character, the character image of “Tono” displayed on the face image of the Tono character, the character string “The weather in the morning”, and the pattern of the fine mark. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design.

  FIG. 325 (c) following FIG. 325 (b) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. The displayed state is shown.

  FIG. 325 (d) following FIG. 325 (c) shows a button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208. A state in which a notice effect that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 is performed is shown.

  FIG. 325 (e) following FIG. 325 (d) shows that when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. A second balloon display f1 is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, and an animation in which the two balloon displays f1 move upward is displayed. Note that three or more of the same balloon display may continue.

  In FIG. 325 (f) following FIG. 325 (e), a moving animation is performed in which both balloon displays f1 move upward. Thus, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward.

  FIG. 325 (g) following FIG. 325 (f) shows the chance button 136 at a position where the scroll display of the balloon display f1 is temporarily interrupted and overlaps the balloon display f1 in the decorative symbol display device 208. The button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, and a notice effect that prompts the player to operate the chance button 136 is shown.

  FIG. 325 (h), following FIG. 325 (g), erases the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 by pressing the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136. The animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is displayed, and immediately before the balloon display f1 is erased so as to exit from the upper end of the screen. Also, a balloon display f1b appears from the bottom of the screen. The balloon display f1b includes the face image of the Tono character and the character image of “Tono” displayed on the face image of the Tono character. It is a display that includes a speech balloon that displays a character string and a pattern that are visible and below are wisdom but foolish. The balloon portion of the balloon display f1b is a size that does not fit on one screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 325 (i) following FIG. 325 (h) shows a state where the upper end of the balloon display f1b is located at the upper end of the screen.

  FIG. 325 (j) following FIG. 325 (i) shows a state where the scroll display of the balloon display f1b is being performed.

  FIG. 325 (k) following FIG. 325 (j) shows a state in which the balloon display f1b is scrolled until the lower end of the balloon display f1b is visually recognized.

<Example of pattern 2>
Hereinafter, an example of the pattern 2 of this production example will be described with reference to FIGS. 325 (i ′) to (l ′).

  FIG. 325 (i ′) following FIGS. 325 (a) to (h) shows a state where the scroll display of the balloon f1b is temporarily stopped. The scroll display of the balloon part f1b may stop once or a plurality of times.

  FIG. 325 (j ′) following FIG. 325 (i ′) shows a button notice display h110 that imitates the chance button 136 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and an operation expiration date display that represents the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 with a gauge. The state where h112 is displayed is shown.

  In FIG. 325 (k ′) following FIG. 325 (j ′), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the expiration date of the operation of the chance button 136, the scroll display of the stopped balloon part f1b is resumed. The

  FIG. 325 (l ′) following FIG. 325 (k ′) shows a state where the scroll display of the balloon display f1b is performed until the lower end of the balloon display f1b is visually recognized. Thereafter, the balloon display f1b may be erased and the SP reach effect or the full rotation reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon is changed may be performed. Further, the button notice effect may be performed every time the scroll display of the balloon display f1b is stopped, or the button notice effect may not be performed. In the scrolling display of the balloon display f1b, all of the character strings “when all are placed on a person look stupid but wisdom and what is below is wisdom but stupidly look.” There may be a case where is scroll-displayed and a case where all are not scroll-displayed. When all the character strings are scroll-displayed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when all the character strings are not scroll-displayed.

The effect of this example may be used as a prefetch notice or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily than in the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 307 to 327 is performed.
Next, an example of a balloon display effect will be described with reference to FIG.
FIGS. 326 (a) to 326 (g) show an example of effects using balloon display step by step.

  FIG. 326 (a) shows, in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special symbol 1's fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special symbol 2's fourth symbol aa4 The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 326 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 326 (b) following FIG. 326 (a) is displayed such that two balloon displays f1 appear simultaneously from the upper right and lower right of the screen, and an animation that moves to the left at the same speed is displayed. . The balloon display f1 displays the face image of the Tono character, the character image of “Tono” displayed on the face image of the Tono character, the character string “The weather in the morning”, and the pattern of the fine mark. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design. Three or more same balloon displays may appear at the same time.

  FIG. 326 (c) following FIG. 326 (b) shows an animation in which the balloon displays f2 and f3 appear simultaneously from the right end of the screen on the decorative symbol display device 208 and move to the left at the same speed. It is displayed. Two or more different balloon displays may appear at the same time. In the upper and lower balloon displays f1, an animation that moves to the left at the same speed is started.

  FIG. 326 (d) following FIG. 326 (c) shows an animation in which the balloon displays f1 to f3 move to the left at the same speed in the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG.

  FIG. 326 (e) following FIG. 326 (d) shows an animation in which the balloon displays f1 to f3 move to the left at the same speed in the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG.

  FIG. 326 (f) following FIG. 326 (e) shows an animation in which the balloon displays f1 to f3 move to the left at the same speed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and exit from the left end in the order of appearance. The state immediately before being erased. Further, in this example, an animation in which all the balloon displays move in the same direction at the same speed is performed, but an animation in which each balloon display moves in a different direction at a different speed may be performed. In addition, the balloon display used for the change notice or the prefetch notice may be moved in a different direction from the notice that is not used for the change notice or the prefetch notice, or moved at a different speed. There may be cases.

  FIG. 326 (g) following FIG. 326 (f) shows an animation in which the balloon displays f1 to f3 move to the left at the same speed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and exit from the left end in the order of appearance. The state after being erased is shown. Thereafter, an SP reach effect or a full rotation reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon is changed may be performed. In this example, the upper balloon display f1 and the lower balloon display f1 that have started to be displayed at the same time have ended simultaneously, but one of the upper balloon display f1 and the lower balloon display f1 precedes the other. The display may end at the end, or one of the upper balloon display f1 and the lower balloon display f1 may move faster than the other. In addition, the balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 that have started to be displayed at the same time are ended simultaneously. However, one of the balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 may be ended before the other, or the balloon may be displayed. One of the display f2 and the balloon display f3 may be faster than the other.

The effect of this example may be used as a prefetch notice or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily than in the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 307 to 327 is performed.
Next, with reference to FIG. 327, two examples of effects of balloon display will be described.

  FIG. 327 (a) is an effect example when the balloon display f2 is displayed in a state where the balloon display f1 is displayed. The right side of FIG. 327 (a) is an example in which the balloon display f1 is not moved when the balloon display f2 is displayed at a position overlapping the balloon display f1. In this example, since the balloon display f1 is overlapped with the balloon display f2, it is impossible to visually recognize the character lines displayed in the balloon display f1 and the character lines displayed in the balloon display f2.

  FIG. 327 (b) is an effect example when the balloon display f2 is displayed in a state where the balloon display f1 is displayed. The right side of FIG. 327 (b) is an example in which the balloon display f1 is moved upward when the balloon display f2 is displayed at a position overlapping the balloon display f1. By moving the balloon display f1 upward, there may be a case where the character lines displayed in the balloon display f1 and the character lines displayed in the balloon display f2 can be simultaneously viewed.

  Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 159 to 327 again.

(E1)
First movable means (for example, movable body 90a) (for example, see FIG. 277),
A second movable means (for example, movable body 90b) (for example, see FIG. 277),
A first light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a22, a32, a33) (for example, see FIG. 277),
A game table including second light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a11 to a16, a23, a24) and (for example, see FIG. 277),
The first movable means is means having the second movable means (for example, see FIG. 277),
The first movable means is means having the first light emitting means (see, for example, FIG. 277),
The first movable means is means having the second light emitting means (see, for example, FIG. 277),
In the first state, one of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means overlaps the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 278 (b)),
In the second state, both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means do not overlap the second movable means (for example, see FIG. 278 (d)),
The light emission mode of the first light emitting means is the same light emission mode in both the first state and the second state (see, for example, FIGS. 278 (b) and (d)),
The light emitting mode of the second light emitting means is the same light emitting mode in both the first state and the second state (see, for example, FIGS. 278 (b) and (d)). Amusement stand.

  In some cases, the appearance of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be changed, and the interest of the player can be improved.

(E2)
The game table according to e1,
In the first state, the first light emitting means can emit light (see, for example, FIG. 278 (b)),
In the first state, the first light emitting means is overlapped with the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 278 (b)), a gaming table.

(E3)
The game table according to e1 or e2,
The game table characterized in that the first light emitting means is a means that may be overlapped with a structure (for example, the structure 30c) (see, for example, FIG. 284 (c)).

(E4)
The game stand according to any one of e1 to e3,
A gaming table, characterized in that, in an initial state, the first light emitting means overlaps with the second movable means (for example, see FIG. 278 (a)).

(E5)
The game stand according to any one of e1 to e4,
The first light emitting means is a means capable of shifting from the initial state to the second state through at least the first state (for example, see FIGS. 278 (a) to (d)). To play.

(E6)
The game stand according to any one of e1 to e5,
The first movable means is means having third light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a25, a33, a34),
The first movable means is means having third movable means (for example, movable body 90c) (for example, see FIG. 277),
In the first state, the third light emitting means overlaps the third movable means (for example, see FIG. 278 (b)),
In the second state, the third light emitting means does not overlap with the third movable means (see, for example, FIG. 278 (d)).

(E7)
The game stand according to any one of e1 to e6,
The second movable means is means having a light emitting substrate (for example, LED substrate 90b2) (for example, see FIG. 277),
A gaming table characterized in that, in an initial state, the first light emitting means overlaps the light emitting substrate (for example, see FIG. 278 (a)).

(E8)
A gaming machine according to e7,
In the first state, the first light emitting unit may overlap the light emitting substrate (see, for example, FIG. 278 (d)), and the gaming table.

(E9)
The game stand according to any one of e1 to e8,
The first movable means is means having a cover (for example, a cover portion 90a3) (for example, see FIG. 277 (b)),
A gaming table characterized in that, in an initial state, the first light emitting means is a means that overlaps the cover (for example, see FIG. 278 (a)).

(E10)
The game stand according to any one of e1 to e9,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the first state is a state at a certain timing during the operation of the first movable means (for example, see FIG. 278 (b)).

(E11)
The game stand according to any one of e1 to e10,
The game machine characterized in that the second state is a state in which the first movable means is not operating (for example, see FIGS. 278 (c) to (e)).

(E12)
The game stand according to any one of e1 to e11,
A substrate (for example, LED substrate 90a2) (for example, see FIG. 277 (b)),
The substrate is a substrate having both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means (for example, see FIG. 277 (b)),
The game machine characterized in that the first movable means is means having the substrate (for example, see FIG. 277 (b)).

(E13)
The game stand according to any one of e1 to e12,
A game board having game nails (for example, game board 125),
The gaming table characterized in that the first movable means is means operable behind the game board (for example, see FIG. 284).

(E14)
The game stand according to any one of e1 to e13,
The game table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).

(E15)
The game stand according to any one of e1 to e13,
The gaming table is a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 1000).
The light emitting mode of the first light emitting unit may be the same light emitting mode in both the first state and the second state, and the light emitting mode of the second light emitting unit may be the first state and the second state. The same light emission mode may be used in both states.
The first light emitting unit and the second light emitting unit may be a unit covered with the first cover.
In the initial state, at least a part of one of the first movable unit and the second movable unit may be overlapped with the structure.
In the initial state, at least a part of the other of the first movable unit and the second movable unit may be overlapped with the structure.
-The light emission aspect of a 1st light emission means may be a light emission aspect different in a 1st state and a 2nd state, and one may be non-light emission.
-The light emission aspect of a 2nd light emission means may be a light emission aspect different in a 1st state and a 2nd state, and one may be non-light emission.
-A 1st light emission means and a 2nd light emission means may be covered by a separate cover.
The first light emitting unit and the second light emitting unit may be included in the second movable unit.
-A 2nd movable means may be located back rather than a 1st movable means.
The second light emitting unit may be a unit that does not overlap the second movable unit in the initial state, the first state, and the second state.
-Both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be full color LEDs, both may be single color LEDs, one may be a single color LED and the other may be a full color LED, A high-intensity LED and the other may be a normal LED.
A movable display unit may be provided, and the first movable unit may move from the rear to the front of the display unit after the display unit has moved.
A transmissive liquid crystal display device may be provided, and the first movable means may operate behind the transmissive liquid crystal display device.
A transparent panel capable of emitting a pattern may be provided, and the first movable means may operate behind the transparent panel.
-At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate after the count notice is counted.
-At least one of a 1st movable means and a 2nd movable means may operate | move according to digestion of the holding | maintenance icon which suggests operation | movement of a movable object.
-At least one of a 1st movable means and a 2nd movable means may operate | move after the preliminary announcement which suggests operation | movement of a movable object.
The operation of the first movable means, the operation of the second movable means, the light emission of the first light emitting means, and the light emission of the second light emitting means may be performed as a preliminary announcement, or may be performed as a pre-reading preliminary announcement. Good.

(F1)
First movable means (for example, movable body 90a) (for example, see FIG. 277),
A second movable means (for example, movable body 90b) (for example, see FIG. 277),
A first light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a22, a32, a33) (for example, see FIG. 277),
A game table including second light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a11 to a16, a23, a24) and (for example, see FIG. 277),
The first movable means is means having the second movable means (for example, see FIG. 277),
The first movable means is means having the first light emitting means (see, for example, FIG. 277),
The first movable means is means having the second light emitting means (see, for example, FIG. 277),
In the first state, one of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means overlaps the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 278 (b)),
In the second state, both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means do not overlap the second movable means (for example, see FIG. 278 (d)),
The first light emitting means is a means covered with a first cover (for example, the cover portion 90a3) (for example, see FIG. 277 (b)),
The game table characterized in that the second light emitting means is means covered by the first cover (for example, see FIG. 277 (b)).

  In some cases, the appearance of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be changed, and the interest of the player can be improved.

(F2)
A gaming machine according to f1,
In the first state, the first light emitting means can emit light (see, for example, FIG. 278 (b)),
In the first state, the first light emitting means is overlapped with the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 278 (b)), a gaming table.

(F3)
A gaming machine according to f1 or f2,
The game table characterized in that the first light emitting means is a means that may be overlapped with a structure (for example, the structure 30c) (see, for example, FIG. 284 (c)).

(F4)
The game stand according to any one of f1 to f3,
A gaming table, characterized in that, in an initial state, the first light emitting means overlaps with the second movable means (for example, see FIG. 278 (a)).

(F5)
The game stand according to any one of f1 to f4,
The first light emitting means is a means capable of shifting from the initial state to the second state through at least the first state (for example, see FIGS. 278 (a) to (d)). To play.

(F6)
The game stand according to any one of f1 to f5,
The first movable means is means having third light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a25, a33, a34),
The first movable means is means having third movable means (for example, movable body 90c) (for example, see FIG. 277),
In the first state, the third light emitting means overlaps the third movable means (for example, see FIG. 278 (b)),
In the second state, the third light emitting means does not overlap with the third movable means (see, for example, FIG. 278 (d)).

(F7)
The game stand according to any one of f1 to f6,
The second movable means is means having a light emitting substrate (for example, LED substrate 90b2) (for example, see FIG. 277),
A gaming table characterized in that, in an initial state, the first light emitting means overlaps the light emitting substrate (for example, see FIG. 278 (a)).

(F8)
A gaming table according to f7,
In the first state, the first light emitting unit may overlap the light emitting substrate (see, for example, FIG. 278 (d)), and the gaming table.

(F9)
The game stand according to any one of f1 to f8,
The first movable means is means having a second cover (for example, a cover portion 90b3) (for example, see FIG. 277 (b)),
A gaming table characterized in that, in the initial state, the first light emitting means overlaps with the second cover (for example, see FIG. 278 (a)).

(F10)
The game stand according to any one of f1 to f9,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the first state is a state at a certain timing during the operation of the first movable means (for example, see FIG. 278 (b)).

(F11)
The game stand according to any one of f1 to f10,
The game machine characterized in that the second state is a state in which the first movable means is not operating (for example, see FIGS. 278 (c) to (e)).

(F12)
The game stand according to any one of f1 to f11,
A substrate (for example, LED substrate 90a2) (for example, see FIG. 277 (b)),
The substrate is a substrate having both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means (for example, see FIG. 277 (b)),
The game machine characterized in that the first movable means is means having the substrate (for example, see FIG. 277 (b)).

(F13)
The game stand according to any one of f1 to f12,
A game board having game nails (for example, game board 125),
The gaming table characterized in that the first movable means is means operable behind the game board (for example, see FIG. 284).

(F14)
The game stand according to any one of f1 to f13,
The game table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).

(F15)
The game stand according to any one of f1 to f13,
The gaming table is a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 1000).
The light emitting mode of the first light emitting unit may be the same light emitting mode in both the first state and the second state, and the light emitting mode of the second light emitting unit may be the first state and the second state. The same light emission mode may be used in both states.
The first light emitting unit and the second light emitting unit may be a unit covered with the first cover.
In the initial state, at least a part of one of the first movable unit and the second movable unit may be overlapped with the structure.
In the initial state, at least a part of the other of the first movable unit and the second movable unit may be overlapped with the structure.
-The light emission aspect of a 1st light emission means may be a light emission aspect different in a 1st state and a 2nd state, and one may be non-light emission.
-The light emission aspect of a 2nd light emission means may be a light emission aspect different in a 1st state and a 2nd state, and one may be non-light emission.
-A 1st light emission means and a 2nd light emission means may be covered by a separate cover.
The first light emitting unit and the second light emitting unit may be included in the second movable unit.
-A 2nd movable means may be located back rather than a 1st movable means.
The second light emitting unit may be a unit that does not overlap the second movable unit in the initial state, the first state, and the second state.
-Both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be full color LEDs, both may be single color LEDs, one may be a single color LED and the other may be a full color LED, A high-intensity LED and the other may be a normal LED.
A movable display unit may be provided, and the first movable unit may move from the rear to the front of the display unit after the display unit has moved.
A transmissive liquid crystal display device may be provided, and the first movable means may operate behind the transmissive liquid crystal display device.
A transparent panel capable of emitting a pattern may be provided, and the first movable means may operate behind the transparent panel.
-At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate after the count notice is counted.
-At least one of a 1st movable means and a 2nd movable means may operate | move according to digestion of the holding | maintenance icon which suggests operation | movement of a movable object.
-At least one of a 1st movable means and a 2nd movable means may operate | move after the preliminary announcement which suggests operation | movement of a movable object.
The operation of the first movable means, the operation of the second movable means, the light emission of the first light emitting means, and the light emission of the second light emitting means may be performed as a preliminary announcement, or may be performed as a pre-reading preliminary announcement. Good.

(G1)
First movable means (for example, movable body 1);
A game machine comprising second movable means (for example, movable body 1),
The first movable means is means capable of executing a first operation (for example, an operation of moving downward) (for example, see FIG. 274 (c)),
The second movable means is means capable of executing a second operation (for example, an operation of moving downward) (for example, see FIG. 275 (c)),
The initial position of the second movable means is located behind the initial position of the first movable means (for example, see FIG. 274 (a)),
The position of the second movable means that has performed the second operation is located behind the first movable means that has performed the first operation (see, for example, FIG. 276 (c)). A characteristic game stand.

  In some cases, the appearance of the second movable means can be changed depending on the positional relationship with the first movable means, and the interest of the player can be improved.

(G2)
a gaming table according to g1,
The direction in which the first movable means moves in the first operation is the same as the direction in which the second movable means moves in the second operation (for example, see FIG. 276 (c)). A game stand characterized by that.

  There are cases where the appearance of the second movable means can be changed during execution of the second operation.

(G3)
A gaming machine according to g1 or g2,
In a state where at least a part of the first movable unit and a part of the second movable unit overlap in the front-rear direction, the other part of the second movable unit is visible from the front. A characteristic game stand.
In some cases, the appearance of the second movable means can be changed.

(G4)
The game stand according to any one of g1 to g3,
Display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the position of the display means is located behind the position of the second movable means that has executed the second operation (see, for example, FIG. 276 (c)).
In some cases, the appearance of the display means can be changed.

(G5)
a gaming table according to g4,
The display means is means capable of displaying a first error display (for example, display of a character string “please remove the ball”) (for example, see FIG. 276 (b)),
At least a part of the first error display may be overlapped by at least one of the first movable means and the second movable means (for example, see FIG. 276 (c)). A game table.
In some cases, the appearance of the first error display can be changed.

(G6)
a gaming table according to g5,
The first error display is a ball removal display (see, for example, FIG. 276 (b)).
In some cases, the appearance of the ball-free display can be changed.

(G7)
The game stand according to any one of g1 to g6,
The game table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).

(G8)
The game stand according to any one of g1 to g5,
The gaming table is a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 1000).
The direction in which the first movable means moves in the first motion may be upward, leftward, rightward, or downward, and the first motion may be falling, the front-rear direction component or the left-right direction The orientation may include at least one of the above components and the vertical component.
The direction in which the second movable means moves in the second operation may be upward, leftward, rightward, or downward, and the first operation may be falling, the front-rear direction component or the left-right direction The orientation may include at least one of the above components and the vertical component.
-Both a 1st operation | movement and a 2nd operation | movement may be performed simultaneously, the other may be performed after one is performed, and only one or the other may be performed.
After both the first operation and the second operation are performed, both the first movable means and the second movable means may return to the initial position at the same time, and after one returns, the other returns Also good.
-While one of the first movable means and the second movable means operates and returns to the initial position, the other may operate.
-During the first operation, the LED of the second movable means may perform a light emission effect, or may perform the same light emission effect as the LED of the first movable means.
-During the second operation, the LED of the first movable means may perform a light emission effect, or may perform the same light emission effect as the LED of the second movable means.
-Even if the first movable means is located in front of the second movable means, the LED of the second movable means may perform a light emission effect, or even if it performs the same light emission effect as the LED of the first movable means Good.

(H1)
First movable means (for example, movable body 90a) (for example, see FIG. 277),
A second movable means (for example, movable body 90b) (for example, see FIG. 277),
A first light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a22, a32, a33) (for example, see FIG. 277),
A game table including second light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a11 to a16, a23, a24) and (for example, see FIG. 277),
The first movable means is means having the second movable means (for example, see FIG. 277),
The first movable means is means having the first light emitting means (see, for example, FIG. 277),
The first movable means is means having the second light emitting means (see, for example, FIG. 277),
In the first state, one of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means overlaps the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 278 (b)),
In the second state, both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means do not overlap the second movable means (for example, see FIG. 278 (d)),
In an initial state, at least a part of one of the first movable means and the second movable means is overlapped with a structure (for example, the structure 30a) (for example, see FIG. 284 (a)). , A game stand characterized by that.

  In some cases, the appearance of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be changed, and the interest of the player can be improved.

(H2)
The game table according to h1,
In the first state, the first light emitting means can emit light (see, for example, FIG. 278 (b)),
In the first state, the first light emitting means is overlapped with the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 278 (b)), a gaming table.

(H3)
A gaming machine according to h1 or h2,
The game table characterized in that the first light emitting means is a means that may be overlapped with a structure (for example, the structure 30c) (see, for example, FIG. 284 (c)).

(H4)
The game stand according to any one of h1 to h3,
A gaming table, characterized in that, in an initial state, the first light emitting means overlaps with the second movable means (for example, see FIG. 278 (a)).

(H5)
The game stand according to any one of h1 to h4,
The first light emitting means is a means capable of shifting from the initial state to the second state through at least the first state (for example, see FIGS. 278 (a) to (d)). To play.

(H6)
The game stand according to any one of h1 to h5,
The first movable means is means having third light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a25, a33, a34),
The first movable means is means having third movable means (for example, movable body 90c) (for example, see FIG. 277),
In the first state, the third light emitting means overlaps the third movable means (for example, see FIG. 278 (b)),
In the second state, the third light emitting means does not overlap with the third movable means (see, for example, FIG. 278 (d)).

(H7)
The game stand according to any one of h1 to h6,
The second movable means is means having a light emitting substrate (for example, LED substrate 90b2) (for example, see FIG. 277),
A gaming table characterized in that, in an initial state, the first light emitting means overlaps the light emitting substrate (for example, see FIG. 278 (a)).

(H8)
The game table according to h7,
In the first state, the first light emitting unit may overlap the light emitting substrate (see, for example, FIG. 278 (d)), and the gaming table.

(H9)
The game stand according to any one of h1 to h8,
The first movable means is means having a cover (for example, a cover portion 90a3),
A gaming table characterized in that, in an initial state, the first light emitting means is a means that overlaps the cover (for example, see FIG. 278 (a)).

(H10)
The game stand according to any one of h1 to h9,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the first state is a state at a certain timing during the operation of the first movable means (for example, see FIG. 278 (b)).

(H11)
The game stand according to any one of h1 to h10,
The game machine characterized in that the second state is a state in which the first movable means is not operating (for example, see FIGS. 278 (c) to (e)).

(H12)
The game stand according to any one of h1 to h11,
A substrate (for example, LED substrate 90a2) (for example, see FIG. 277 (b)),
The substrate is a substrate having both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means (for example, see FIG. 277 (b)),
The game machine characterized in that the first movable means is means having the substrate (for example, see FIG. 277 (b)).

(H13)
The game stand according to any one of h1 to h12,
A game board having game nails (for example, game board 125),
The gaming table characterized in that the first movable means is means operable behind the game board (for example, see FIG. 284).

(H14)
The game stand according to any one of h1 to h13,
The game table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).

(H15)
The game stand according to any one of h1 to h13,
The gaming table is a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 1000).
The light emitting mode of the first light emitting unit may be the same light emitting mode in both the first state and the second state, and the light emitting mode of the second light emitting unit may be the first state and the second state. The same light emission mode may be used in both states.
The first light emitting unit and the second light emitting unit may be a unit covered with the first cover.
In the initial state, at least a part of one of the first movable unit and the second movable unit may be overlapped with the structure.
In the initial state, at least a part of the other of the first movable unit and the second movable unit may be overlapped with the structure.
-The light emission aspect of a 1st light emission means may be a light emission aspect different in a 1st state and a 2nd state, and one may be non-light emission.
-The light emission aspect of a 2nd light emission means may be a light emission aspect different in a 1st state and a 2nd state, and one may be non-light emission.
-A 1st light emission means and a 2nd light emission means may be covered by a separate cover.
The first light emitting unit and the second light emitting unit may be included in the second movable unit.
-A 2nd movable means may be located back rather than a 1st movable means.
The second light emitting unit may be a unit that does not overlap the second movable unit in the initial state, the first state, and the second state.
-Both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be full color LEDs, both may be single color LEDs, one may be a single color LED and the other may be a full color LED, A high-intensity LED and the other may be a normal LED.
A movable display unit may be provided, and the first movable unit may move from the rear to the front of the display unit after the display unit has moved.
A transmissive liquid crystal display device may be provided, and the first movable means may operate behind the transmissive liquid crystal display device.
A transparent panel capable of emitting a pattern may be provided, and the first movable means may operate behind the transparent panel.
-At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate after the count notice is counted.
-At least one of a 1st movable means and a 2nd movable means may operate | move according to digestion of the holding | maintenance icon which suggests operation | movement of a movable object.
-At least one of a 1st movable means and a 2nd movable means may operate | move after the preliminary announcement which suggests operation | movement of a movable object.
The operation of the first movable means, the operation of the second movable means, the light emission of the first light emitting means, and the light emission of the second light emitting means may be performed as a preliminary announcement, or may be performed as a pre-reading preliminary announcement. Good.

(I1)
Display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208);
A game machine comprising a structure (e.g., structure 247),
The display means is means capable of displaying a first display (for example, Sabohani character display SB) at a first position (for example, lower center of the display area) (see, for example, FIG. 286 (c))
At least a part of the structure is located at a position overlapping with a part of the display means (for example, see FIG. 286),
The gaming table characterized in that the first display displayed at the first position is a display that may overlap the structure (for example, see FIG. 286 (c)).

  In some cases, the player can be provided with the pleasure of playing by changing the direction of viewing the game platform, and the interest of the player can be improved.

(I2)
A gaming machine according to i1,
The structure is a movable structure (for example, see FIG. 295),
The gaming table, wherein the first display displayed at the first position is a display that does not overlap the structure after the structure is moved.

  In some cases, the appearance of the first display can be changed, and the interest of the player can be improved.

(I3)
A gaming machine according to i1 or i2,
The display means is a movable display means (see, for example, FIGS. 1965 to 1971),
The gaming table, wherein the first display displayed at the first position is a display that does not overlap the structure after the display means is moved.

  In some cases, the appearance of the first display can be changed, and the interest of the player can be improved.

(I4)
The game stand according to any one of i1 to i3,
The display means is a means capable of displaying the first display at a second position (for example, the center of the display area),
The gaming table characterized in that the first display displayed at the second position is a display that does not overlap the structure (for example, see FIG. 286 (e)).

  In some cases, the appearance of the first display can be changed, and the interest of the player can be improved.

(I5)
The game table according to i4,
The gaming table may be displayed at the second position after the first display is displayed at the first position (see, for example, FIG. 286).

  In some cases, the appearance of the first display can be changed, and the interest of the player can be improved.

(I6)
The game stand according to any one of i1 to i5,
The game table characterized in that the first display is a notice display (for example, see FIG. 286).

  In some cases, the appearance of the notice display can be changed, and the interest of the player can be improved.

(I7)
The game stand according to any one of i1 to i6,
The game table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).

(I8)
The game stand according to any one of i1 to i6,
The gaming table is a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 1000).
The first display may be a pre-reading notice display, a display including characters, an icon display, a hold icon display, or a variable icon display It may be a character display or an error display.
The first display displayed at the second position may be overlapped with the structure.
The first display displayed at the second position may be overlapped with the structure after the display means is moved.
-A structure may be provided with a display means, may be provided with a LED board, and may be movable.
-The display means may be movable.
The structure may be a transmissive liquid crystal device, and the first display may be performed behind the display of the transmissive liquid crystal display.
-The light emitting panel may be sufficient as a structure, and a 1st display may be performed back during the light emission display of a light emission panel.

(Drawing)
・ Example where the notice display moves from the first position where it overlaps the structure to the second position where it does not overlap ・ The second position where the notice display does not overlap from the first position where it overlaps the structure Example of moving to the first position again after moving to the third position ・ The notice display is moved from the first position where it overlaps the structure to the second position where it is not overlapped. Move to a position ・ Example of moving to a fifth position that does not overlap after moving from the fourth position that overlaps the structure to the first position that overlaps with the structure An example in which the notice display is displayed at the first position where it overlaps the structure and the other notice display moves to the second position where it does not overlap. Example where the other notice display moves to the first position and the notice display moves from the first position where it overlaps the structure to the second position where it does not overlap, and the effect display is first The example of the notice display is shown before the notice display is displayed at the first position overlapping the structure. The example of the notice display is enlarged. The notice display is displayed at the second position. An example in which the notice display of the second position is hidden by the movement of the structure or the display means (j1)
A gaming machine comprising display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of displaying a decorative symbol variation display,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of icons,
One of the plurality of icons is a hold icon,
During the display of the decorative symbol variation display, an animation by the icon (hereinafter referred to as “first animation” (for example, a moving animation of the notice display m1)) may be displayed.
A game table characterized in that a first effect display (for example, an effect of pseudo continuous variation) may be performed in the decorative symbol variation display after the first animation is displayed (for example, see FIG. 297).

  In some cases, the player's attention can be drawn to the decorative symbol variation display, and the player's interest can be improved.

(J2)
A gaming machine according to j1,
The game machine characterized in that the display means is means for displaying the hold icon as a variable icon.
You may be able to enjoy the behavior of hold icons and variable icons.

(J3)
A gaming machine according to j1 or j2,
The gaming machine characterized in that the first animation is an animation including a change display of the icon (see, for example, FIGS. 306 (f) and (g)).
You may be able to enjoy the behavior of the icon.

(J4)
The game stand according to any one of j1 to j3,
The game machine characterized in that the first animation is an animation including a moving display of the icon (for example, see FIGS. 297 (f) to (i)).
You may be able to enjoy the behavior of the icon.

(J5)
The game stand according to any one of j1 to j4,
The game machine characterized in that the first animation is an animation including a reduced display of the icons (see, for example, FIGS. 297 (f) and (g)).
You may be able to enjoy the behavior of the icon.

(J6)
The game stand according to any one of j1 to j5,
The game machine characterized in that the first animation is an animation including an increased display of the icons (for example, see FIGS. 297 (j) and (k)).
You may be able to enjoy the behavior of the icon.

(J7)
A gaming table according to j6,
A game table characterized in that an increase display in one icon may be displayed a plurality of times (for example, see FIG. 301).
There are cases where the behavior of one icon can be more enjoyed.

(J8)
The game stand according to any one of j1 to j7,
The gaming table characterized in that the first effect display is a pseudo continuous variation display in the decorative symbol variation display (see, for example, FIG. 297 (h)).
In some cases, the player's attention can be drawn to the decorative symbol variation display.

(J9)
The game stand according to any one of j1 to j8,
The gaming table characterized in that the first effect display is a reach variation display in the decorative symbol variation display (for example, see FIG. 303 (j)).
In some cases, the player's attention can be drawn to the decorative symbol variation display.

(J10)
The game stand according to any one of j1 to j9,
The gaming table according to claim 1, wherein the first effect display is an operation effect display in the decorative symbol variation display.
In some cases, the player's attention can be drawn to the decorative symbol variation display.

(J11)
The game stand according to any one of j1 to j10,
The first animation is displayed when the icon is displayed in an icon display area (for example, special figure 1, hold icon display area 208ab) (for example, see FIG. 298 (f)),
In at least a part of the display period of the first animation, another display (for example, an icon displaying a character string “in preparation”) may be displayed in the icon display area (for example, (See FIG. 298 (g)).
In some cases, the player's attention can be gathered in the display of the icon display area.

(J12)
The game stand according to any one of j1 to j11,
During the display of the decorative symbol variation display, an animation by two or more icons (hereinafter referred to as “second animation”) may be displayed (see, for example, FIG. 306 (f)).
The game table, wherein the first effect display may be performed in the decorative symbol variation display after the second animation is displayed (see, for example, FIG. 306 (h)).
There are cases where the behavior of two or more icons can be more enjoyed.

(J13)
The game stand according to any one of j1 to j12,
The game table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
-The icon may move and nothing may be displayed in the original icon display area, a temporary icon display may be displayed instead, or other icons may be moved (packed) and displayed. May be.
-When the icon is moved and displayed again (returned display) in the original icon display area, it may be displayed in an increased manner, may be displayed so as to overlap other icon displays, or another icon display May be displayed to dismiss.
・ The decorative design may change after the first animation, it may be erased (destroyed), the display may change from shaking display to change display, or the special design is temporarily stopped on the middle design. Also good.
-The 1st production display does not need to be performed after the 1st animation.
-The first animation may be performed a plurality of times during one decoration symbol variation display.
-A plurality of first animations may be performed with one icon during a plurality of decorative symbol variation displays.
-An icon with high expectation may be easier to perform the first animation than an icon with low expectation, or vice versa.
The first animation may be easier in the case of the reserved full tank than in the case of the reserved non-full tank, or vice versa.
-A notice display may be made to suggest that the first animation will be performed.
-A count notice display (timer effect) indicating the start time of the first animation may be performed.
The first animation may be performed when an icon (mini item) different from the hold icon or the fluctuation icon is digested.
The first animation may be performed when the result of the mini game is the first result.

(Drawing)
297 to 306 are examples in which the hold icon hits the middle symbol of the decorative symbol and the decorative symbol variation display is re-variable (pseudo-continuous) during fluctuation variation of the off symbol.
FIG. 298 is an example in which a temporary icon is displayed on a holding base while the holding icon is moving.
FIG. 299 shows an example of returning to the original position when the back hold icon is packed back while the hold icon is moving.
FIG. 300 is an example of a gaze effect that does not develop even if the hold icon hits.
FIG. 301 is an example in which the same hold icon performs the first animation multiple times with one change.
FIG. 302 is an example in which different hold icons perform the first animation in one change.
FIG. 303 shows an example of reaching after the first animation of the hold icon.
FIG. 304 is an example in which the variation icon hits the middle symbol of the decorative symbol.
FIG. 305 is an example in which the same hold icon collides with a plurality of variations and develops to reach.
FIG. 306 is an example in which a plurality of hold icons collide with a decorative symbol at the same time and reach.

(K1)
A game machine provided with a display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208),
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of displays,
One of the plurality of displays is a first balloon display (for example, balloon display f1) (for example, see FIG. 308 (f)),
One display of the plurality of displays is a second balloon display (for example, balloon display f2) (for example, see FIG. 308 (f)),
While the first balloon display is being displayed in the first display area, the second balloon display may be displayed (for example, see FIG. 308 (e)).
At least a part of the first display area and at least a part of the second balloon display may overlap (for example, see FIG. 308 (e)).

  Since the player can visually recognize the second balloon display without changing his / her line of sight, the player can concentrate on the game and improve the interest of the player.

(K2)
a gaming table according to k1,
The display means is means capable of displaying a movement animation of the first balloon display (hereinafter referred to as “first movement animation” (for example, upward movement animation)) (for example, FIG. 308 (d)). ), (E))
The first movement animation may be displayed after the first balloon display is displayed in the first display area (see, for example, FIGS. 308 (d) and (e)). A game table.

  In some cases, the player's interest can be attracted to the destination of the first balloon display.

(K3)
a gaming table according to k2,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a movement animation of the second balloon display (hereinafter referred to as “second movement animation” (for example, a movement animation that moves to the left)).
After the second moving animation is displayed, the second balloon display is displayed (for example, see FIG. 308 (f)), and the gaming table.

  In some cases, the player can be attracted to the destination of the second balloon display.

(K4)
A gaming table according to k2 or k3,
After displaying another movement animation of the first balloon display (hereinafter referred to as “third movement animation” (for example, a movement animation that moves to the right)), the first balloon is displayed in the first display area. A display is displayed (see, for example, FIGS. 308 (b) and (c)),
The gaming machine characterized in that the first movement animation and the third movement animation may have different movement directions of the first balloon display (see, for example, FIG. 308).

  There are cases in which the player's expectation can be enhanced by changing the direction of movement by moving animation.

(K5)
The game stand according to any one of k1 to k4,
At least a part of the first balloon display may overlap with at least a part of the second balloon display (see, for example, FIG. 308 (e)).

  In some cases, the player's interest can be attracted to both the first balloon display and the second balloon display.

(K6)
The game stand according to any one of k1 to k5,
At least a part of the first balloon display may be overlapped with at least a part of the second balloon display (for example, see FIG. 308 (e)).
There are cases where the player's interest can be attracted to the second balloon display in front.

(K7)
The game stand according to any one of k1 to k6,
The first balloon display is a display including a character (for example, a character of Tono),
The second balloon display is a display including a character (for example, Tono character),
The game table characterized in that the first balloon display character and the second balloon display character may be the same (for example, see FIGS. 325 (f) and (g)).

  In some cases, a balloon display of the same character is continuously displayed, so that a player's expectation can be enhanced.

(K8)
The game stand according to any one of k1 to k7,
Operating means (for example, a chance button 136),
When the operation means is operated after the first balloon display is displayed, the second balloon display may be displayed (see, for example, FIGS. 308 (d) and (e)). A game stand characterized by that.
In some cases, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased.

(K9)
The game stand according to any one of k1 to k8,
The game table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).

(K10)
The game stand according to any one of k1 to k8,
The gaming table is a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 1000).
The balloon display may be moved and displayed while being overlapped with another display (for example, a notice, an error display, a ball removal display).
-A part of the balloon display may disappear after moving display, two or more balloon displays may disappear, or two or more balloon displays may be simultaneously or in sequence.
The size of the balloon display may be the same as the first balloon display, may be double, or may be half.
-It may be displayed again after the balloon display disappears (the erase animation may be reversely played and the appearance animation may be performed after the erase animation is performed).
A part of the redisplayed balloon display may be changed (the color may be changed to red, gold, or rainbow, or the character may be changed to a character with high expectation).
When displaying a new balloon display, a balloon display with a high expectation level may remain and other balloon displays (a balloon display with a low expectation level) may disappear preferentially.
A display in which the balloon display is enlarged may be performed, or a display in which the balloon display characters protrude from the frame of the balloon display may be performed.
-The balloon display may disappear regardless of the operation of the operating means.
-You may animate a character during the movement animation of a balloon display.
-A balloon display may be displayed over a plurality of variations.
-A prefetch notice may be performed in a balloon display.
The balloon display may be performed by the second display means, the balloon display may be performed across the display means and the second display means, or one of the display means and the second display means to the other The balloon display may be displayed in a moving manner, or the balloon display may be displayed on one of the display means and the second display means, and the character corresponding to the other may be displayed.

(Drawing)
FIG. 307 is an example of a conversation notice.
FIG. 308 is an example of a conversation notice. The appearance animation moves horizontally, and the animation when a new speech balloon appears is vertical movement (a new speech balloon animation and an old speech balloon animation simultaneously).
FIG. 309 is an example of a conversation notice / animation when the appearance animation moves horizontally, and the animation when a new balloon appears, moves vertically (an example of timing variation / an animation of a new balloon after an animation of an old balloon).
FIG. 310 shows an example of a conversation announcement / an animation that appears horizontally, and an animation that appears when a new speech balloon appears, which is a vertical movement (an example of timing variation / an animation of an old speech balloon after an animation of a new speech balloon).
FIG. 311 shows an example of a conversation notice, an example in which the appearance animation is vertically moved, and the size of the balloon is different from normal, half, and double.
FIG. 312 shows an example of a conversation notice, an example in which a disappeared character returns, or an example in which the content changes after returning.
FIG. 313 is an example in which a specific notice balloon (for example, a balloon with high expectation) is not deleted.
FIG. 314 is an example in which conversation announcements and speech balloons overlap.
FIG. 315 is an example of a conversation announcement / an old balloon is reduced.
FIG. 316 is an example of a conversation notice, an example in which balloons of the same character continue, an example in which the balloon expands, and an example in which the content of the balloon protrudes from the balloon.
FIG. 317 is an example of a conversation notice / an example in which a balloon moves while the notice character is moving.
FIG. 318 is an example of a conversation notice / an example in which a balloon moves while the movable body is operating.
FIG. 319 is an example of a conversation announcement / an example in which a balloon moves while the light emitting panel in front of the display device emits light.
FIG. 320 shows an example of a conversation notice / an example in which a balloon moves while the first display is displayed.
FIG. 321 is an example of a conversation notice / an example of a balloon prefetch notice (changes the hold icon to a prefetch icon).
FIG. 322 is an example of a conversation notice / character and a balloon displayed on separate display means.
FIG. 323 is an example of a conversation notice / balloon moving to another display means.
FIG. 324 is an example in which a speech announcement example / balloon is displayed over a plurality of variations.

(L1)
A game machine provided with a display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208),
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of displays,
One of the plurality of displays is a first balloon display (for example, balloon display f1) (for example, see FIG. 308 (f)),
One display of the plurality of displays is a second balloon display (for example, balloon display f2) (for example, see FIG. 308 (f)),
While the first balloon display is being displayed in the first display area, the second balloon display may be displayed (for example, see FIG. 308 (e)).
While the second balloon display is being displayed, the first balloon display may be displayed in the second display area (for example, see FIGS. 308 (e) and (f)). Amusement stand.

  By displaying the first balloon display in a separate display area while the second balloon display is displayed, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the relationship between the two balloon displays, so that he can concentrate on the game, Can be improved.

(L2)
The gaming table according to l1,
The display means is means capable of displaying a movement animation of the first balloon display (hereinafter referred to as “first movement animation” (for example, upward movement animation)) (for example, FIG. 308 (d)). ), (E))
The first movement animation may be displayed after the first balloon display is displayed in the first display area (see, for example, FIGS. 308 (d) and (e)). A game table.

  In some cases, the player's interest can be attracted to the destination of the first balloon display.

(L3)
A gaming machine according to l1 or l2,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a movement animation of the second balloon display (hereinafter referred to as “second movement animation” (for example, a movement animation that moves to the left)).
After the second moving animation is displayed, the second balloon display is displayed (for example, see FIG. 308 (f)), and the gaming table.

  In some cases, the player can be attracted to the destination of the second balloon display.

(L4)
The game stand according to any one of l1 to l3,
At least a part of the first balloon display may overlap with at least a part of the second balloon display (see, for example, FIG. 308 (e)).

  In some cases, the player's interest can be attracted to both the first balloon display and the second balloon display.

(L5)
The game stand according to any one of l1 to l4,
At least a part of the first balloon display may be overlapped with at least a part of the second balloon display (for example, see FIG. 308 (e)).
There are cases where the player's interest can be attracted to the second balloon display in front.

(L6)
The game stand according to any one of l1 to l5,
The first balloon display is a display including a character (for example, a character of Tono),
The second balloon display is a display including a character (for example, Tono character),
The game table characterized in that the first balloon display character and the second balloon display character may be the same (for example, see FIGS. 325 (f) and (g)).

  In some cases, a balloon display of the same character is continuously displayed, so that a player's expectation can be enhanced.

(L7)
The game stand according to any one of l1 to l6,
Operating means (for example, a chance button 136),
When the operation means is operated after the first balloon display is displayed, the second balloon display may be displayed (see, for example, FIGS. 308 (d) and (e)). A game stand characterized by that.
In some cases, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased.

(L8)
The game stand according to any one of l1 to l7,
One display of the plurality of displays is a third balloon display (for example, balloon display f5) (for example, see FIG. 311 (q)),
While the first balloon display is being displayed in the first display area, the third balloon display may start to be displayed (see, for example, FIG. 311 (n))
The width of the first balloon display and the width of the second balloon display are the same,
The gaming table characterized in that the width of the first balloon display and the width of the third balloon display are different (for example, refer to FIG. 311 (q)).

  In some cases, the player's expectation can be enhanced by varying the width of the balloon display.

(L9)
The game stand according to any one of l1 to l8,
The game table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).

(L10)
The game stand according to any one of l1 to l8,
The gaming table is a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 1000).
The balloon display may be moved and displayed while being overlapped with another display (for example, a notice, an error display, a ball removal display).
-A part of the balloon display may disappear after moving display, two or more balloon displays may disappear, or two or more balloon displays may be simultaneously or in sequence.
The size of the balloon display may be the same as the first balloon display, may be double, or may be half.
-It may be displayed again after the balloon display disappears (the erase animation may be reversely played and the appearance animation may be performed after the erase animation is performed).
A part of the redisplayed balloon display may be changed (the color may be changed to red, gold, or rainbow, or the character may be changed to a character with high expectation).
When displaying a new balloon display, a balloon display with a high expectation level may remain and other balloon displays (a balloon display with a low expectation level) may disappear preferentially.
A display in which the balloon display is enlarged may be performed, or a display in which the balloon display characters protrude from the frame of the balloon display may be performed.
-The balloon display may disappear regardless of the operation of the operating means.
-You may animate a character during the movement animation of a balloon display.
-A balloon display may be displayed over a plurality of variations.
-A prefetch notice may be performed in a balloon display.
The balloon display may be performed by the second display means, the balloon display may be performed across the display means and the second display means, or one of the display means and the second display means to the other The balloon display may be displayed in a moving manner, or the balloon display may be displayed on one of the display means and the second display means, and the character corresponding to the other may be displayed.

  Each event (each production) may be executed in series or in parallel.

  Each event (each effect) can be a combination of a part or all of a certain event (a certain effect) and a part or all of another event (an other effect).

Each event (each effect) may be executed in series or in parallel.
Each event (each effect) may only be executed in series.
Each event (each effect) may only be executed in parallel.

  Here, serial execution means that an event (an effect) starts after an event (an effect) ends, and execution in parallel means an event (or an effect) And other events (other effects) may be performed at the same time, the start timing and end timing of an event (certain effect), the start timing of another event (other effects) A combination of the end timing and the end timing is possible as appropriate.

  In addition, each event (each production) may be configured to be executable in parallel and / or serial only in a certain state, or may be configured to be executable without being distinguished by the state. .

  The certain state may be a state that is shifted by a player operation, or may be a state that is shifted regardless of the player operation (for example, the transition is performed regardless of the player operation after the player operation). In this case, it may be a final opportunity or an initial opportunity.)

  Here, “transition without player operation” may be a transition based on a lottery, a transition state corresponding to a control state, or a combination of both. It may be.

  Here, the “lottery” may be a lottery related to the advantage to the player or may be a lottery not related to the advantage to the player.

  Here, the “control state” may be a state related to the advantage for the player or a state not related to the advantage for the player (for example, the control state 1 and the control state 2). And the player's advantage may be different or not different.)

  The state where the advantage for the player is different will be described in detail. In the case where there are the control state 1 and the control state 2, if the advantage is different due to staying in the control state N, staying itself In, there is no difference in advantage, there may be a difference in advantage in the state after stay, any of which may be.

  The image used in the explanation of each figure (each event (each effect)) is an image for explanation. Of course, other images may be used, for example, an image of Tono-sama (male character). It is also possible to replace the image with a princess (female character).

  In addition, even if an image explaining a certain effect and an image explaining another effect are the same image, the image explaining the other effect is replaced with another image, It is also possible to perform other effects in parallel and / or in series.

  In addition, when an image explaining a certain effect and an image explaining another effect are the same image, it is not possible to execute them in parallel and / or in series, but as an alternative. Also good.

  In addition to the case where the images are the same, there are cases where the timing is the same (for example, both are in super reach production) and the location is the same (for example, both are on hold display areas).

Specifically, even if the timing is the same, for example, the first half and the second half of super reach may be executed in series, and even if the locations are the same, they may be executed in parallel at different locations. Or in series with the first half of Super Reach at the same location.
Each event (each effect) is realized by a certain means (effect means).

  A certain means (production means) may be composed of a plurality of devices (plural production devices).

  Each event (each effect) performed by each of a plurality of devices (a plurality of effect devices) may be performed by one device (effect device).

  Each event (each effect) performed by one device (effect device) may be performed by a plurality of devices (a plurality of effect devices).

  In addition, as a device (production device), a display device such as a decorative symbol display device 208, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, a movable body 700, 702, or the like. The movable body is mentioned.

  In addition, each event (each production) may be described by taking one device (production device) as an example. For example, if it is a notification, it is applied to another device (a production device) capable of notification. Is possible.

  Further, for example, in the case of notification, it may be configured to be realized by a plurality of devices (a plurality of rendering devices).

  Further, in a case where it can be realized by a plurality of devices (a plurality of rendering devices), part or all of a certain notification characteristic may be applied to each of the plurality of devices (a plurality of rendering devices).

Each configuration in each event (each production) may only be illustrated, and even if only one of each event (each production) has a configuration, the other configuration May be combined with each other, or may be combined after deleting a configuration provided only on one side.
Further, the combination may be denied due to the difference in configuration.

  Next, another specific example of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 328 to 343. Note that the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 328 to 343 are used only in the description of the embodiment shown in FIGS. 328 to 343 in principle, and even if the overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings The reference numerals 328 to 343 are prioritized.

<Direction using the second decorative design>
With reference to FIG. 328 to FIG. 343, as one embodiment of the present invention, a part of the configuration is appropriately extracted for an effect example using the second decorative symbol executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. This will be described with reference to an enlarged view.

<Example A>
FIG. 328 is a diagram showing an example of effects centered on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment.

  First, the timing shown in FIG. 328 (a) indicates a state in which the variation of the first decorative symbol is stopped (the state in which the variation is stopped). In the first image display device 2081, “decoration 3” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The combination (decoration symbol combination) of the decoration symbol (first decoration symbol) of “decoration 1-decoration 4” is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, a white variation icon h0 is displayed at the right end of the icon display area 800, and four suggestion displays (in this example, pedestals) are displayed on the left side, and the hold icons h11, h12 and h13 are displayed to notify that the hold in FIG. On the other hand, the hold icons h12 and h13 are displayed in white (default), whereas the hold icon h11 is displayed in blue and a pre-reading notice is executed. In the explanation display area TT1, a tutorial display “Panda is a master of the lord” is executed.

  In the second image display device 2082, a meter (button image) is displayed, but at this timing, all the meters are filled with white to notify that the meter is zero. In the stage name display area, “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town.

  In the third image display device 2083, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown. In the upper part of the display area of the third image display device 2083, the hold of the special figure 1 is “3”. Special figure 1 and special figure 2 indicating the number of holdings in special figure 2 are “0”.

  The 4th symbol display device 284 displays both the special figure 1 (rectangle) and the special figure 2 (round shape) in gray, indicating that the off state is stopped. In addition, the chance buttons 136 and 137 have the built-in LEDs lit white. In the family crest member 224, the built-in LED emits blue light in conjunction with the pre-reading notice of the hold icon h11, and is waiting (stopped) at the initial position (in this example, below the first image display device 2081). In the Yatsushiro character 224B and the general character 244C, the built-in LED emits white light, and is waiting (stopped) at the initial position (in this example, above the first image display device 2081). Audio output from the speaker 120 is not performed at this timing.

  In the following description, the description will mainly focus on effects that have changed from previous effects with the passage of time.

  The timing shown in FIG. 328 (b) is a state in which one hold (hold corresponding to the hold icon h11 in FIG. 3 (a)) has been consumed, and symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 (not shown) has started. In the 4th symbol display device 284, the special figure 1 (square) is displayed in white and the special figure 2 (round) is displayed in gray, indicating that the variable game of the special figure 1 is being executed. .

  At this timing, in the first symbol display area 208X (symbol display areas 208a to 208c) of the first image display device 2081, the variation display (first variation display) of the first decorative symbol is performed. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol variation display (first variation display and second variation display) is represented by a downward white arrow (hereinafter, the same applies to other examples). Moreover, the white arrow shown to the same figure (b) is an elongate arrow, and shows that the decoration design is fluctuating at high speed in the aspect which has permeability | transmittance in this case. On the other hand, when the white arrow is displayed as a short (thick) arrow (for example, (e) in the same figure), it indicates that the decorative symbol fluctuates at a low speed. In the case of low-speed fluctuation, the speed may be such that the decorative symbol can be recognized.

  In addition, with the suspension of the hold, in the icon display area 800, the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are moved and displayed by moving animations, and the hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h11 moves to the right end of the icon display area 800. Is displayed as a blue fluctuation icon h0, and a pre-reading notice is made. In addition, the hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h12 becomes the hold icon h11 on the left side of the change icon h0, the hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h13 becomes the hold icon h12, and the left of the change icon h0. The white hold icons h11 and h12 are respectively displayed on the two pedestals to notify that the hold in FIG.

  In the upper part of the display area of the third image display device 2083, the special figure 1 hold is "2" and the special figure 2 hold is "0". Number display is performed.

  In the explanation display portion TT1, the characters “Panda is a master of the panda” are still displayed. Thus, the explanation display in the explanation display unit TT1 may be performed across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 328 (c), in the left symbol display area 208a of the first image display device 2081, the decorative symbol (here “decoration 6”) fluctuates (temporarily stops). The timing shown is a state in which the decorative design (here “decoration 6”) has been shaken (temporarily stopped) in the right design display area 208c of the first image display device 2081, and is pretending to be a reach (tempered pie). .

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E is a state in which the decorative symbol (“decoration 6”) that has been subjected to fluctuation fluctuation (temporary stop) in the right symbol display area 208c starts to fluctuate again. Note that the fluctuation of “decoration 6” in the right symbol display area 208c at this timing is a low-speed fluctuation as indicated by a white short (thick) arrow. In addition, the state in which the decorative symbol starts to fluctuate (temporarily stop) and then starts low-speed fluctuation may be referred to as “decorative symbol slips” or “decorative symbol is slell”.

  In the present embodiment, when the decorative design (first decorative design) shifts, a continuous effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect) may be started. In this example, the case where the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol) shifts as one of the start conditions of the pseudo-continuous effect will be described. However, other start conditions may be used as the start condition of the pseudo-continuous effect. The design (first decorative design) may always be misaligned, may or may not be misaligned, or may not be misaligned. The same applies to the pseudo-continuous effects described below. It is.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6F is a state in which the decorative symbol (here “decoration 7”) is changing in the right symbol display area 208c (temporarily stopped). In this way, when a certain decorative design (here “decoration 6”) is shifted and another (next) decorative design (here “decoration 7”) is shaking (temporarily stopped), The stopped decorative pattern (“decoration 7”) may be referred to as a “shift eye”.

  In the present embodiment, the occurrence of misalignment of the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol) is one of notifications that the pseudo-continuous effect may be started. Note that the notification that the pseudo-continuous effect may be started may be other notifications, and may not be the occurrence of misalignment.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5G is a state in which the first animation has started in the middle symbol display area 208b where high-speed fluctuation has been performed. In this example, the first animation is an animation with a special symbol (first symbol). Here, the special symbol is a symbol of a different type from the decorative symbol representing a number, for example, one symbol among the symbols related to the execution of the continuous effect (first effect). The special symbol is also one of the decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol of the present embodiment). Specifically, the special symbol refers to a symbol in which a continuous effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect or a continuous notice effect) is started when the symbol is stopped and displayed.

  As an example, the first animation of the present embodiment is an animation (a special symbol stop animation) that indicates whether or not a special symbol is stopped and displayed in at least one of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. In the present embodiment, as an example, a case where the first animation is an animation (middle symbol beat animation) that indicates whether or not the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b will be described as an example. Here, the stop display of the special symbol may be a shaking fluctuation stop display (temporary stop display), which is the same in the following embodiments.

  When the middle symbol beat animation ends, the special symbol may be stopped and displayed, and when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the continuous effect may be executed.

  Here, the special symbol is a symbol of the character (dono) as shown in FIG. 5G, and when this special symbol (the symbol of the character (donor)) is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, for example, The pseudo-continuous production is executed as the continuous production. Thus, the special symbol related to the start of the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect may be referred to as a pseudo-continuous symbol.

  The continuous effect (pseudo-continuous effect) is started when a certain symbol (three symbols) is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. In this case, the animation that beats (first animation) may be an animation that beats whether or not the last symbol of the three symbols is stopped and displayed. In addition, the stop display in this case refers to a stop display other than the fixed display such that at least one of the three symbols includes a fluctuation fluctuation.

  That is, the timing shown in FIG. 5G is the first animation (whether the middle symbol is turned on) whether or not the pseudo-continuous design (which is a start condition) related to the start of the pseudo-continuous effect is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. (Animation) is being performed.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 11 (h), the pseudo continuous symbol temporarily stops in the middle symbol display area 208b, and at the timing shown in FIG. ing. That is, the pseudo-continuous symbol in FIG. 11H has the same display size as the decorative symbols (“decoration 6” and “decoration 7”) in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. The width of the pseudo continuous pattern (i) is increased. As a result, the right end of “decoration 6” in the left symbol display area 208a and the left end of “decoration 7” in the right symbol display area 208a start to overlap with the left end and the right end of the pseudo-continuous symbol, respectively.

  In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 5I, the second symbol display area 208Y for displaying the second decorative symbol is displayed on the upper part of the second image display device 2082. At this timing, only the second symbol display area 208Y (the frame portion indicated by a white square in the drawing) starts displaying, and the second decorative symbol is not displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6J shows a state in which the horizontal width of the pseudo-continuous symbol is further enlarged. At this timing, the “decoration 6” in the left symbol display area 208a and the “decoration 7” in the right symbol display area 208a are completely overlapped by the pseudo-continuous symbols, and cannot be visually recognized by the player (left symbol display). The decorative symbols of the area 208a and the right symbol display area 208a are both difficult to be visually recognized by the player as compared to the pseudo-continuous symbols.

  In addition, at this timing (at least a part of the state in which the first animation display (medium symbol beat animation) is displayed), the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y. Change, temporary stop display). The second decorative symbol at this timing is stopped and displayed with the symbol combination shown in FIG. 329 (o), for example. In other words, the decorative symbol (here “decoration 6”) is displayed in the left symbol display area 208k as a swing variation (temporary stop), and the decorative symbol (here “decoration 7”) is displayed in the right symbol display region 208g. ) And a pseudo-continuous symbol (in this case, the symbol of the same character (dono) as in Fig. 11H) is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208l.

  In addition, as shown in the figure (i), as shown in the figure (j), without displaying "only the frame" of the 2nd design display area 208Y as a display plan area of the 2nd decoration design, as shown in the figure (j). The second decorative symbol may be displayed in the symbol display area 208Y (the second symbol display area 208Y can be recognized by the player by the start of the display of the second decorative symbol).

  At this timing, the first decorative symbol is invisible to the player due to the enlarged display of the pseudo-continuous symbol (for example, more difficult to see than the pseudo-continuous symbol or the displayed second decorative symbol), and the first animation The first decorative symbol after the end of (the state of the first decorative symbol variation stop) is unconfirmed, but the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped by the second decorative symbol (the middle symbol display region 208l of the second symbol display region 208Y). The presence or absence of the display can be recognized by the player. In other words, for advanced users, by gazing at the second decorative symbol, at this timing, the state of the first decorative symbol is stopped, that is, the special symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol) is stopped and displayed continuously. It becomes possible to recognize whether or not (pseudo-continuous production) has been started. In this way, the state of the first decorative symbol change stoppage is unconfirmed, but the second decorative symbol can be recognized by the player as to whether or not the special symbol is stopped (the presence or absence of the continuous performance) (first state). In the present specification, the “first barre” is a state in which the state is notified in place of the first decorative symbol that is invisible (difficult to see) to the player in the symbol display area 208X.

  The timing shown in FIG. 10 (k) shows a state in which the horizontal width of the pseudo-continuous symbol is further enlarged and displayed. At this timing, the “decoration 6” in the left symbol display area 208a and the “decoration 7” in the right symbol display area 208a are completely overlapped by the pseudo-continuous symbols, and cannot be visually recognized by the player (left symbol display). The decorative symbols of the area 208a and the right symbol display area 208a are both difficult to be visually recognized by the player as compared to the pseudo-continuous symbols. Further, the left and right end portions of the enlarged pseudo-continuous pattern are displayed in part of the display area of the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083, respectively. That is, one pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed over (spanning) a plurality of image display devices 208 ′ (first image display device 2081, second image display device 2082, and third image display device 2093).

  More specifically, in the second image display device 2082, the enlarged left end of the pseudo-continuous design overlaps the second decorative design, the meter, and the stage name display area. For example, the left end of the pseudo-continuous design is at least the first (In this example, the left end portion of the pseudo-continuous symbol is overlapped with the second decorative symbol, the meter, and the stage name display area). In the second decorative symbol, the symbol combination stop display in FIG. 329 (o) continues.

  In the third image display device 2083, the enlarged right end portion of the pseudo-continuous pattern is overlapped with a part of the display in the third image display device 2083 (in this example, a character on the stage, And overlapped with the second hold number display in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2).

  At this timing, a part of the movable body (in this example, the family crest member 244A) starts to rise and overlaps a part of the first image display device 2081 (overlaps with the first image display device 2081). . Thereby, a part of the display displayed on the first image display device 2081 is overlapped with the family crest character 224A and cannot be visually recognized by the player (or the second decorative design or movable body (family crest character 224A or the like). ) Is more difficult to see). Specifically, a pseudo-continuous pattern (a part), a part of the display of the icon display area 800 (in this example, the fluctuation icon h0 (all), the hold icon h11 and a part of the pedestal), and an explanation display A part of the tutorial display in the area TT1 is invisible to the player (or more difficult to see than the second decorative symbol or movable body (family crest character 224A, etc.)).

  In the timing shown in FIG. 11 (l), the enlarged display of the pseudo-continuous pattern is finished (the enlargement is stopped at the same size as the pseudo-continuous pattern shown in FIG. 10 (k)), and the elevated family crest character 244A is raised. , And a sound effect “don” is output from the speaker 120.

  At this timing, the symbol combination of the first decorative symbols is not visually recognized (difficult to visually recognize) by the enlarged display of the pseudo-continuous symbols, but the first decorative symbol is determined to be in a variable stop state. That is, at this timing, the player can recognize the stop display state of the special symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol) and the start of execution of the continuous effect (pseudo-continuous effect). The second decorative design is the same as that in FIG. 10 (k) (the state in FIG. 329 (o)).

  Therefore, even if the player does not notice the pseudo-continuous symbol stop display (first ballet) in the second symbol display area 208Y at the timing of FIG. It can be recognized that the pseudo-continuous symbol stop display and the execution start of the pseudo-continuous effect are confirmed by the operation (here, the rotation operation) of the family crest actor 244A) and / or the sound effect from the speaker 120.

  For example, the family crest character 244A starts rotating after the pseudo-continuous symbol stop display and the execution start of the pseudo-continuous rendering are confirmed. Note that the family crest member 224A may rise after starting rotation at the initial position (the position below the first image display device 2081 shown in FIG. 6 (j)). After the stop display and the start of execution of the pseudo-continuous production are confirmed, the display moves to the stop position after the ascent (position (l) in the figure).

  Note that the family crest member 244A performs movements such as ascending and descending and rotating operations even during other effects. In addition, the family crest character 244A may be configured not to perform operations such as movement and rotation such as ascending and descending during other effects, or to perform movement and rotation such as ascending and descending during other effects. Some of the operations may be performed, or only some of the operations may not be performed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (m) shows a state where the stop display of the pseudo-continuous symbol in the first symbol display area 208X is visible to the player after the first animation display is completed. Although illustration is omitted, an animation of a reduced display of an enlarged pseudo-continuous pattern is executed between FIG. 1 (l) and FIG. 1 (m), and as shown in FIG. (Display size equivalent to “decoration 6” in the left symbol display area 208a and “decoration 7” in the right symbol display area 208c). As a result, “decoration 6” that is fluctuated (temporarily stopped) in the left symbol display area 208a of the first symbol display area 208X, and a special symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol) that is fluctuated (temporarily stopped) in the middle symbol display area 208b. In addition, “decoration 7” that fluctuates (temporarily stops) in the right symbol display area 208c becomes visible to the player, and the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect is confirmed. The second decorative design is the same as that in FIG. 10 (k) (the state in FIG. 329 (o)). That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 5 (m), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are visible to the player at the same time in the same display mode ((temporary) stop display of the same symbol combination). Yes.

  It should be noted that the animation of the pseudo-continuous symbol reduction display executed between FIG. 1 (l) and FIG. 1 (m) is the animation display of the pseudo-continuous symbol enlarged display (for example, FIG. The execution time may be the same as that in FIG. (K)), may be short, or may be long. Moreover, the animation of the reduced display of pseudo-continuous symbols may not be executed.

  In general, as shown in FIG. 6 (m), the player stops and displays a special symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol) in the middle symbol display area 208b of the first image display device 2081 (first symbol display area 208X). This makes it possible to recognize that the start of the execution of the continuous production (pseudo-continuous production) has been confirmed. Alternatively, the player who is used to the game cannot visually recognize the state of the first decorative symbol (whether the symbol combination or (temporary) stop display is present) by the first animation display as shown in FIG. Even if it is difficult to visually recognize), it may be possible to recognize that the start of the continuous production (pseudo-continuous production) has been confirmed by the operation (in this case, the rotation operation) of the movable body (family crest actor 224A). .

  In the present embodiment, the state of the first symbol display area 208X is invisible (difficult to see) by the first animation display at a timing before those (FIG. (M), (l)). However, as shown in FIG. 6 (j), the player recognizes that the execution of the continuous production (pseudo-continuous production) has been confirmed by the second decorative symbol that is not overlapped in the first animation display. There is a case that can be made.

  In this example, the timing at which the display of the special symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol) shown in FIG. 5G is set as the start timing of the first animation, but the start timing of the first animation is limited to this timing. Absent. For example, the start timing of the first animation may be the timing at which the player can visually recognize the special symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol) shown in FIG. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the timing at which the pseudo-simultaneous symbols are temporarily stopped may be used, or the display mode of the special symbols changes at a timing later than (h) in the same figure (in this example, the pseudo-simulation as shown in (i) in the same figure). It may be the timing when the enlarged display of the continuous symbols is started).

  Also, the end timing of the first animation is, for example, until the special symbol is stopped and displayed in (m) of the first animation, or until the special symbol is stopped and displayed in (m) of FIG. When the special symbol reduction animation is executed during the same figure (m), until the reduced animation is completed, until the reduced animation is started, or until the enlarged animation is completed in the same figure (l). , And so on.

  That is, the display period of the first animation is a period defined as any combination of the start timing and the end timing of the above-mentioned first animation, but as an example, before the figure (m) When the special symbol reduction animation is executed, the first animation is displayed until the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the same figure (g) to (m). Before the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the figure (m), or before the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the figure (i) to (m). In addition, if the special symbol reduction animation is not executed before (m) in the same figure (when ending with the enlarged display), the display period of the first animation is from (g) to (l) in the same figure. (H) to FIG. (L), or (i) to (l), etc., and the same applies to the following embodiments.

  The timing shown in FIG. 9 (n) shows a state in which display of a second animation different from the first animation is started in the display area of the first image display device 2081.

  The second animation that is displayed at this timing (after the quasi-continuous symbol is stopped) is an animation that is displayed during the period until the quasi-continuous production starts, and here, it continues multiple times (for example, twice). This is an animation indicating that the execution of the pseudo-continuous production is confirmed.

  In this example, the second animation displays the character (dono) from the center to the left as shown in (n) of the figure, and the character (dono) moves to the center as shown in (o) of the figure. However, this is an animation in which the display size expands and the text “Still More !!” is displayed. In this example, the second animation is displayed only on the first image display device 2081. However, the second animation may be displayed over a plurality of image display devices 208 ′.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7 (p) shows a state in which execution of a pseudo-continuous effect that continues multiple times is started, and there is no change in the display of the icon display area and the digestion of the hold.

  At this timing, in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (first symbol display area 208X) of the first image display device 2081, the combination of the first decorative symbols “decoration 6-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. . In addition, it overlaps with a part of the first decorative design (in this example, a part of “decoration 6”) and is referred to as a display relating to the number of pseudo-continuous effects (hereinafter referred to as “pseudo continuous display”). “× 2”) indicating the number of times is displayed.

  Further, in the symbol display areas 208k to 208g (second symbol display area 208Y) of the second image display device 2082, the second decoration in the state of FIG. 329 (o) similar to FIG. The display of symbols (decorative symbols including pseudo-continuous symbol stop display) continues to be displayed. As described above, in the present embodiment, even when the display of the first image display device 2081 is changed, accurate information (in this example, simulated information) is displayed according to the second decorative symbol displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y. The player can recognize that the rendition effect is being executed. In other words, the second decorative symbol displayed on the second image display device 2082 (second symbol display area 208Y) is a decorative symbol in which some information is notified to the player by displaying the decorative symbol (a combination of decorative symbols). It can be said that it is a symbol that is displayed so as to exhibit its original function. In other words, the second decorative symbol is the first decorative symbol even when the state of the first decorative symbol (whether the symbol combination or (temporary) stop display is present) is not visible or difficult for the player to see. Guarantee of information notification by.

  In this way, when a continuous effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect) is executed, a special symbol (for example, a pseudo-continuous symbol) is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b after the first animation (medium symbol beat animation) is displayed. Is stopped. Thereafter, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is resumed, a symbol other than the special symbol (for example, the decorative symbol of the same number as the right symbol display region 208c (here, “decoration 7”)) is displayed in the middle symbol display region 208b. indicate. That is, at this timing, the symbol combination of the second decorative symbol (“decoration 6-special symbol-decoration 7”) is different from the symbol combination of the first decorative symbol (“decoration 6-decoration 7-decoration 7”). It is a combination.

  In this example, in the state where the variable display of the first decorative symbol is resumed, the numerical decorative symbol is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. However, in the state where the variable display of the first decorative symbol is restarted. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the same symbol as the second decorative symbol (that is, a special symbol) may be displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 11 (q) is the same for the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol and first decorative symbol in the first symbol display region 208X of the first image display device 2081 and the second symbol display region 208Y of the second image display device 2082, respectively. This shows a state in which the variation display (high-speed variation) of the second decorative design has been resumed. Further, with the start of the decorative symbol variation display, an animation in which the pseudo-continuous number display (in this example, “× 2”) is reduced and displayed is executed.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 7 (r), the first symbol display area 208X continues to display the first decorative symbol (high-speed variation), while the second symbol display area 208Y (second decorative symbol) It is hidden.

  In the above example, after the timing shown in (i) in the figure, after displaying the variation display of the second decorative symbol as shown in (q) in the second symbol display area 208Y, ) May be temporarily stopped (stop display of pseudo-continuous symbols).

  In addition, the second decorative symbol stop display (the second decorative symbol (FIG. 329 (o) shown in FIG. 3J) including the special symbol stop symbol on the second image display device 2082 is the first image display device. It is only necessary for the player to be able to see the first decorative symbol including the special symbol 2081 before the stop display (FIG. (M)). For example, at the timing shown in FIG. The stop display of the second decorative symbol including the display (FIG. 329 (o)) may be displayed, or the second decorative symbol including the stop display of the special symbol may be displayed at the timing shown in FIG. You may display the stop display of 2 decoration symbols (FIG. 329 (o)).

  In the same figure (j), the timing (first timing) when the right symbol (“decoration 6”) and the left symbol (“decoration 7”) are overlapped with the enlarged middle symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol), The display timing of the second decorative symbol (second timing) may be the same timing, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the first timing is after the second timing. It may be.

  In addition, in the same figure (p), even if the display timing (first timing) of the pseudo continuous display is the same timing as the display start timing (resume timing, second timing) of the first decorative symbol. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the first timing may be after the second timing.

  In addition, in the same figure (q), the start timing (first timing) of the variable display of the first decorative symbol and the start timing (second timing) of the variable display of the second decorative symbol are the same timing. Alternatively, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the first timing may be after the second timing.

  In addition, the pseudo continuous number display may be started from (q) in the same figure. In this case, the display timing of the pseudo continuous number display (first timing) and the start timing of the second decorative symbol variation display (first timing). The second timing may be the same timing, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the first timing may be after the second timing.

  Also, in FIG. 8 (r), the timing at which the pseudo continuous display is reduced from the size shown in (q) (first timing) and the timing of erasing the second decorative symbol (second timing) are as follows. The same timing may be used, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the first timing may be after the second timing.

<Matters common to each embodiment>
Matters common to the embodiments shown in FIGS. 328 to 343 including this embodiment are described.

  First, in the decorative symbol state (decorative symbol combination), which is the condition that the pseudo-continuous effect starts (may be), a shift occurs in the left symbol or right symbol (there is a special symbol in the middle symbol after that) Stop), the left symbol and the right symbol become a template (when stopped at the same symbol), the special symbol stops in the middle symbol, or the special symbol stops in the middle symbol regardless of the left symbol and right symbol Whether or not (only), etc.

  In addition, in a configuration in which a pseudo-continuous effect may be started when a misalignment occurs in the left symbol or the right design, if there is no misalignment, it becomes a tempered, and then the decorative pattern of the tempered number If the decorative pattern of the number added with 1 passes, it will develop to reach. On the other hand, when the pseudo-continuous effect is not started, if a misalignment does not occur, it becomes a temper, and thereafter, it is stopped and displayed with a numeral decorative symbol obtained by adding 1 to the tempered numeral decorative symbol.

  Also, in the configuration where the pseudo-continuous effect may be started when the left symbol and the right symbol are tempered, there is a state whether the pseudo-simultaneous symbol is stopped first, and then the number of the tempered number is displayed. If the decorative pattern of the number which added 1 to the decorative pattern passes, it will develop to reach. On the other hand, when the quasi-continuous effect is not started, the display is stopped with the numeral decoration symbol obtained by adding 1 to the numeral decoration symbol that has been tempered, and the display is lost.

  Also, for example, the left symbol is “decoration 6”, the middle symbol is “special symbol”, and the right symbol is “decoration 7” (the symbol combination “decoration 6-special symbol-decoration 7” is stopped). When the continuous production starts, the left symbol “decoration 6”, the middle symbol “special symbol”, and the right symbol “decoration 7” are stopped and displayed in the next pseudo-series production. “Decoration 6”, the right design is “decoration 6”, and it is configured to be a temperament (referred to as “decoration 6 temper”). In this case, “decoration 6 temper” is configured to have a higher probability of jackpot than reach other than “decoration 6 temper”.

  Therefore, in the second decorative symbol, for example, as shown in FIG. 6J and FIG. 329O, among the symbol combinations “decoration 6-special symbol-decoration 7”, “decoration 6” on the left symbol is the player. When it becomes visible, the player may be able to recognize whether or not it will become a “decoration 6 tempered” when developed into a super reach, and may increase the player's expectation.

  Some temperament designs have different expectations of jackpots. For example, the left design is “decoration 7”, the right design is “decoration 7”, and the tempering (referred to as “decoration 7 tempering”) is followed by “hot” development. Become. In such a case, it becomes possible to visually recognize that the symbol combination of “decoration 7-special symbol-decoration 8” is stopped and displayed by the second ornament symbol, so that the subsequent development is “hot” to the player. May be recognized.

  In addition, the first animation (stopping animation of special symbol) includes an enlarged display, but it may also include a rotation display, and is attached to the symbol rather than an enlarged display of the symbol itself. The effect display may include a display that gradually expands. Moreover, the display other than the second decorative pattern may be overlapped by the enlarged display of the first animation.

  In addition, the second decorative symbol will be described by taking as an example a configuration in which the second decorative symbol may be displayed or hidden, but the second decorative symbol is excluded except for a configuration in which a third decorative symbol to be described later is displayed (FIG. 337). May be displayed constantly.

  In addition, in one of the roaring animations of the special symbols (first animation, special symbol stop-spinning animation, middle symbol roaring animation), the second decorative symbol may occur, There is no decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol, and there may be a symbol that is caused by a stop display of the second decorative symbol by a symbol other than the special symbol.

  In addition, the stop display (redisplay) of the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol) that occurs after the pseudo-continuous effect does not include a special symbol in order to prevent the false continuous symbol from being falsely recognized again. Is desirable.

  In addition, when there are a plurality of pseudo-continuous times, the display mode of the change icon h0 changes (or can change) as the number advances (increases) increases. In this configuration, the hold icon and the fluctuation icon may be hidden at a certain timing.

  Moreover, although the case where there are a plurality of pseudo-continuous times is described as an example, the number of pseudo-continuous times may be one. The greater the number of pseudo-continuations (the longer the pseudo-continuous productions are), the higher the degree of expectation for jackpots. In addition, in each effect example described in this specification, there may be an effect with a higher degree of jackpot expectation than a pseudo-ream effect, or an effect with a lower jackpot expectation than a pseudo-ream effect. May be.

<Example B>
Next, other examples of effects will be described. FIG. 329 is a diagram showing another example of effects centered on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment in a stepwise manner.

  This production example is an example when the special symbol is not stopped and displayed after the first animation display is finished (that is, when the continuous production is not started). FIG. 329 (a) to FIG. Since the timing is the same as that shown in FIGS. 328 (a) to 328 (i), description thereof is omitted. In other cases, the description of the same configuration as that of the effect example A shown in FIG. 328 may be omitted.

  The timing shown in FIG. 329 (j) shows a state in which the horizontal width of the pseudo-continuous symbol is further enlarged. At this timing, the “decoration 6” in the left symbol display area 208a and the “decoration 7” in the right symbol display area 208a are completely overlapped by the pseudo-continuous symbols, and cannot be visually recognized by the player (left symbol display). The decorative symbols of the area 208a and the right symbol display area 208a are both difficult to be visually recognized by the player as compared to the pseudo-continuous symbols.

  In the second image display device 2082, the second decorative symbol is displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y in which only the frame portion (white square frame) has started to be displayed at the timing shown in FIG. Is done. The second decorative design in this case is displayed in the state shown in FIG. In other words, the decorative symbol (here “decoration 6”) is displayed in the left symbol display area 208k as a swing variation (temporary stop), and the decorative symbol (here “decoration 7”) is displayed in the right symbol display region 208g. )Is displayed. On the other hand, in the middle symbol display area 208l, the variation display (high-speed variation) of the decorative symbol (second decorative symbol) is being performed.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 6 (k), an animation of the reduced display of the enlarged pseudo-continuous symbols is executed in the first symbol display area 208X. As shown in FIG. The display is reduced to “decoration 6” of 208a and the display size equivalent to “decoration 7” of the right symbol display area 208c), and an animation (middle symbol scrolling display) that descends from above in the middle symbol display area 208b is executed. It shows the state.

  At this timing, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y. The second decorative design in this case is displayed in the state shown in FIG. That is, the decorative symbol (here “decoration 6”) is displayed in the left symbol display area 208k in a swinging manner (temporarily stopped), and the decorative symbol (second symbol, here “decoration 8”) is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208l. Is displayed in a stopped state, and a decorative symbol (in this case, “decoration 7”) is displayed in the right symbol display area 208g. That is, at this timing, both the first symbol variation area 208X and the second symbol variation area 208Y are visible to the player, but the state of the first decorative symbol (whether there is a symbol combination or (temporary) stop display) And the state of the second decorative symbol (whether or not there is a symbol combination or (temporary) stop display) is different. Hereinafter, simply “decorated symbol state” refers to a state (display mode) such as a combination of decorative symbols and the presence or absence of (temporary) stop display.

  The timing shown in FIG. 11 (l) shows a state in which a numerical decoration symbol (here, “decoration 8”) is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b after the first animation display in the first symbol variation area 208X. Show. That is, after the first animation display, it is determined that the special symbol (in this case, the pseudo-continuous symbol) is not stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the continuous effect (pseudo-continuous effect) due to the stop of the special symbol is not executed. It is in the state. Here, the first animation display refers to an animation with pseudo-continuous symbols (character (donor) symbols) in FIG.

  Further, at this timing, the stop display (swing fluctuation display) of the second decorative symbol shown in (q) of the same figure is continued in the second symbol display area 208Y. That is, at this timing, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are visible to the player in the same state (a temporary stop state where the combination of decorative symbols is “decoration 6-decoration 8-decoration 7”).

  Thus, in this example, the case where the execution of the continuous effect (for example, the pseudo-continuous effect) does not start after the first animation display is shown, and in this case, the middle symbol display of the first symbol display area 208X In the area 208b, a special symbol (for example, a pseudo-continuous symbol) is not displayed in a stopped state, and a symbol of a different type from the special symbol (for example, a decorative symbol of a number) is displayed in a stopped state (a fluctuation variation display or a temporary stop display). Further, in this case, the decorative symbol (here “decoration 8”) that is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b is the numeral decorative symbol (in FIG. 328 (p)) that is displayed when the continuous effect is executed. This is a decorative symbol (third symbol) with a number different from the decorative symbol ("decoration 7") that is stopped and displayed in the symbol display area 208b.

  The timing shown in (m) of FIG. 6 shows a state in which the second decorative symbol is erased in the second image display device 2082, and the timing shown in (n) of FIG. The decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (here, the second decorative symbol (the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 6-decoration 8—decoration 7”) is stopped and displayed.

  In general, as shown in FIG. 1 (l), after the first animation has been displayed, the player can display a special image in the middle symbol display area 208b of the first image display device 2081 (first symbol display area 208X). Since the symbols (pseudo-continuous designs) are not stopped and displayed, it is possible to recognize that it has been determined that the continuous production (pseudo-continuous production) will not be executed. Alternatively, the player who is used to the game can move the movable body even when the state of the first symbol display area 208X is not visually recognized (difficult to visually recognize) by the first animation display as shown in FIG. It may be possible to recognize that the start of continuous production (pseudo-continuous production) has been confirmed by the operation (in this case, the rotation operation) of (family crest actor 224A).

  In the present embodiment, even if the stop display of the first decorative symbol is not fixed at the timing before that (the first animation display is being executed), as shown in FIG. It is determined that the continuous effect (pseudo-continuous effect) is not executed by the second decorative symbol (FIG. 329 (q)) in which the decorative symbols (numeric decorative symbols) other than the pseudo-continuous symbols are stopped and displayed in the display area 208l. In some cases, the player can recognize this.

  Alternatively, even when the first animation display is being executed at a timing prior to the timing shown in FIG. 10L, as shown in FIG. (The pseudo-continuous design is not stopped and displayed)) The second decorative design (FIG. 329 (p)) can make the player recognize that it is determined that the continuous production (pseudo-continuous production) will not be executed. There is a case.

  In addition, in the same figure (k), if the pseudo-continuous symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b moves downward (shifts), it may return to the upper side and stop displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. Is a stop display of the pseudo-continuous symbol shown in FIG. 328 (m), and the pseudo-continuous effect is started as in FIGS. 328 (n) to (r). In this case, if the player has previously viewed the second decorative symbol with the special symbol stopped on the middle symbol, the first symbol is displayed with the special symbol stopped on the middle symbol of the second decorative symbol. If the middle symbol of the decorative symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b) is shifted downward, the player may recognize that it is shifted and can recognize that it returns upward (becomes a first ball).

  Note that the method of the case where the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a normal stop mode may be configured such that the expectation degree of jackpot is higher in the method in which the special symbol is shifted downward and then returned to the upper position and stopped.

  As described above, during the execution of the first animation ((j) and (k) in the figure), the first decorative symbol after the end (the state in which the variation of the first decorative symbol is stopped) is undetermined. Due to the second decorative symbol (the pseudo-continuous symbol is not stopped and displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y), the fact that the continuous effect (pseudo-continuous effect) is not performed is prejudice. That is, for example, an advanced user, etc., pays attention to the second decorative symbol, so that the state of the stop display of the special symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol) and the continuous effect (pseudo-continuous effect) before the stoppage of the variation of the first decorative symbol. ) Can be recognized.

  For example, the second decorative symbol (FIG. 329 (q)) in which the middle symbol is stopped may be displayed at the display timing of the second decorative symbol shown in FIG.

  In addition, when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed as shown in FIG. 328, there is no prior ballet due to the display of the second decorative symbol, and only when the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed as shown in FIG. You may do it.

  In addition, it is also possible to cause a prior ballet both when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed as shown in FIG. 328 and when the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed as shown in FIG.

  Also, in FIG. 329 (k), the timing at which the pseudo-continuous symbol scroll display animation starts (first timing) and the timing at which the second decorative symbol is displayed (second timing) are the same. Alternatively, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the first timing may be later than the second timing.

<Example C>
FIG. 330 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of effects centered on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

(Example C-1)
FIGS. 7B to 7F show that the first image display device 2081 has a second symbol display area 208 </ b> Y for executing the variation display (second variation display) of the second decorative symbol. It is an example of production when there is.

  That is, FIGS. (B) to (f) correspond to the timings shown in FIGS. 328 (h) to 328 (l), respectively, and in FIGS. 328 (h) to 328 (l), The second decorative symbol displayed on the two-image display device 2082 is displayed on the second symbol display area 208Y provided on the first image display device 2081.

  Specifically, at the timing shown in FIG. 330 (b), the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stops in the middle symbol display area 208b, and at the timing shown in FIG. The right end of “decoration 6” in the left symbol display area 208a and the left end of “decoration 7” in the right symbol display area 208a start to overlap the left end and right end of the pseudo-continuous symbol, respectively. For example, on the upper left side of the one-image display device 2081, only the second symbol display area 208 </ b> Y for displaying the second decorative symbol (the frame portion indicated by a white square in the drawing) starts displaying (first symbol). 2 decorative symbols are not displayed).

  In the timing shown in FIG. 6D, the horizontal width of the pseudo-symbol pattern is further enlarged, and “decoration 6” in the left symbol display area 208a and “decoration 7” in the right symbol display area 208a are both pseudo-continuous. The symbols are completely overlapped with each other and cannot be visually recognized by the player (both decorative symbols in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208a are more difficult for the player to see than the pseudo-continuous symbols).

  In addition, at this timing (at least a part of the state in which the first animation display (medium pattern beat animation) is displayed), the state shown in FIG. 329 (o) is displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y. A second decorative symbol is displayed. In other words, the decorative symbol (here “decoration 6”) is displayed in the left symbol display area 208k as a swing variation (temporary stop), and the decorative symbol (here “decoration 7”) is displayed in the right symbol display region 208g. ) Is displayed, and the second decorative symbol is displayed in a state in which a pseudo-continuous symbol (here, the symbol of the same character (donor) as in Fig. 11H) is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208l. That is, before the end of the first animation, the stop display of the pseudo-continuous symbol in the middle symbol display area 208l is in the state of the first ballet, and at this timing (or later timing), the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect is performed. Confirmation may be recognizable to the player.

  At this timing, at least a part of the second decorative symbol or the second symbol display area 208Y overlaps a part of the first animation.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 5E, the width of the first decorative symbol pseudo-continuous pattern is further expanded, and one pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed on a plurality of image display devices 208 ′ (first image display device 2081, second image display). The image is displayed across the device 2082 and the third image display device 2093). The second decorative symbol (FIG. 329 (o)) including the pseudo-continuous symbol stop display is being displayed, and overlaps the pseudo-continuous symbol of the first decorative symbol. Also, the family crest character 244A starts to rise and overlaps a part of the first image display device 2081 (overlaps with the first image display device 2081).

  In the timing shown in FIG. 5F, the enlarged display of the pseudo-continuous pattern of the first decorative design is finished, the raised family crest member 244A rotates at the raised position, and a sound effect “don” is heard from the speaker 120. The output status is shown. The second decorative symbol (FIG. 329 (o)) including the stop display of the pseudo-continuous symbol is being displayed.

  As described above, in this embodiment (production example), the pseudo-continuous design of the first decorative design to be enlarged first overlaps the second decorative design (overlapped by the second decorative design), and then the second image display device. Display is started at 2082.

  Even if the player is unaware of the stop display of the pseudo-continuous symbol in the second symbol display area 208Y shown in FIG. 4D, the player operates the movable body (family crest object 244A) shown in FIG. It can be recognized that the stop display of the pseudo-continuous symbol and the start of execution of the pseudo-continuous production thereby have been confirmed by the sound effect (here, rotating operation) and / or the speaker 120. Other configurations are the same as those in FIG.

(Example C-2)
FIG. 330 (h) to FIG. 330 (l) are diagrams showing other examples of effects, and are examples of effects in which a part of the first decorative design is hidden during the execution of the first animation.

  330 (h) to (l) correspond to the timings shown in FIGS. 328 (h) to 328 (l), respectively.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 330 (h), the pseudo continuous symbol is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display region 208b of the first symbol display region 208X, and at the timing shown in FIG. 330 (i), the horizontal width of the pseudo continuous symbol is gradually increased. Start displaying. At this timing, the decorative symbols (first decorative symbols) in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208a are not displayed. In addition, for example, at the upper part of the second image display device 2082, only the second symbol display area 208Y (the frame portion indicated by a white square frame in the figure) for displaying the second decorative symbol starts displaying. (The second decorative design is not displayed).

  In the timing shown in FIG. 6J, the horizontal width of the pseudo-continuous symbol is further enlarged and the second decorative symbol is displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y. This second decorative design is in the state shown in FIG. In other words, the decorative symbol (here “decoration 6”) is displayed in the left symbol display area 208k as a swing variation (temporary stop), and the decorative symbol (here “decoration 7”) is displayed in the right symbol display region 208g. ) And a pseudo-continuous symbol (in this case, the character (donor) symbol) is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208l. Thereby, before the end of the first animation, the stop display of the pseudo-symbol symbols in the middle symbol display area 208l is in the state of the first barre, and at this timing (or later timing), the pseudo-sequential effects are executed. May be recognized by the player.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 5 (k), the width of the first decorative symbol pseudo-continuous pattern is further expanded, and one pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed in a plurality of image display devices 208 ′ (first image display device 2081, second image display). The image is displayed across the device 2082 and the third image display device 2093). The second decorative symbol (FIG. 329 (o)) including the stop display of the pseudo-continuous symbol is being displayed. At least a part of the second decorative symbol or the second symbol display area 208Y overlaps a part of the first animation displayed on the second image display device 2082.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 11 (l), the enlarged display of the pseudo-continuous pattern of the first decorative design is finished, the raised family crest member 244A rotates at the raised position, and a sound effect “don” is heard from the speaker 120. The output status is shown. The second decorative symbol including the pseudo-continuous symbol stop display is being displayed. Other configurations are the same as those in FIG.

  As described above, in the present example (production example), the pseudo-continuous design of the first decorative design to be enlarged is first displayed on the second image display device 2082, and then the second decorative design (FIG. 329 (o)). ) (Overlapped by the second decorative pattern).

  In this production example, the decorative symbols in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208a that are not displayed in FIG. 6 (i) are at least a second animation (pseudo) shown in FIG. 328 (n). In a state before the non-display at the timing (for example, the timing of the animation executed in the period until the start of the continuous production) (for example, the timing shown in FIG. 328 (m)), in the left symbol display area 208a, “ The decoration symbol “decoration 6” and the decoration symbol “decoration 7” are redisplayed in the right symbol display area 208a.

  As described above, when the first decorative symbol is not displayed during the execution of the first animation, the player can recognize the state of the decorative symbol by displaying the second decorative symbol. Note that the display start timing of the second decorative symbol is the same as in the case of the effect example in FIG.

(Example C-3)
FIG. 330 (n) to FIG. 330 (o) are diagrams showing another effect example, and are an effect example in the case of becoming a temper (reach) in FIG. 328 (d).

  FIG. 330 (n) corresponds to the timing shown in FIG. 328 (d). In FIG. 328 (d), an effect that looks like a temper (not actually a temper) is performed, but the timing shown in FIG. 330 (n). Shows the state of becoming a temperament.

  The timing shown in FIG. 330 (o) indicates a state in which a tempering (reach) effect is being executed. In this example, the decorative symbols (first decorative symbols, for example, the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208a). , “Decoration 6”) are displayed in an enlarged manner, and the decorative symbol (eg, “decoration 6”) is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b as compared to the decorative symbols in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208a. An animation that is displayed in a poorly visible state is being executed.

  Further, since the left symbol and the right symbol which are enlarged are overlapped, the high-speed fluctuation of the middle symbol itself is difficult for the player to see compared to the left symbol and the right symbol.

  Here, “animation displayed in a poorly visible state for a player” means an animation that is less visible than the left and right symbols due to high-speed fluctuation of the middle symbol, For example, an animation displayed in a state where the transmittance is higher than that of the right symbol (a state where the decorative symbol is displayed lightly).

  In this case (in the case of a template), the second decorative design is not displayed on any of the image display devices 208 ′. In other words, in this embodiment, the animation display with the right symbol and / or the left symbol is in a state where the visibility of the scroll display of the middle symbol is hindered (the state where the information notification by the first decorative symbol is hindered). However, the display of the second decorative symbol (notification of the information) is not performed.

  In FIG. 4D, the display of the second decorative symbol is started, but the pseudo continuous symbol is overlapped with the second decorative symbol by the display start timing of the second decorative symbol and the expansion of the pseudo continuous symbol. The timing may be simultaneous, or may be such that after the second decorative symbol starts displaying, the pseudo continuous symbol is overlapped with the second decorative symbol by expanding the pseudo continuous symbol, After the continuous symbols are enlarged, the display may be started so that the second decorative symbols overlap the pseudo continuous symbols. The same applies to FIG.

<Example D>
FIG. 331 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect centered on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 6A, for example, the first decorative symbol variation display as shown in FIGS. 328B to C is executed, and the timing shown in FIG. 331B follows the left symbol. For example, the decorative pattern “decoration 6” in the display area 208a and the decorative symbol “decoration 7” in the right symbol display area 208a are fluctuated (temporarily stopped), and the decorative symbol is changing at high speed in the middle symbol display area 208b. Is shown.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6C corresponds to the timing shown in FIG. 328 (g), and is the state where the first animation has started in the middle symbol display area 208b where high-speed fluctuation has been performed. In this example, the first animation is an animation with a special symbol (first symbol), but is a special symbol (in this case, the character (princess) symbol) different from the pseudo-continuous effect stopped and displayed? This is an animation that sings about how to do it. For example, when a special symbol different from the pseudo-continuous effect (here, the character (princess) symbol) is stopped and displayed, it is the same type as the pseudo-continuous effect but another continuous effect (for example, a mini character MC described later). For example, a continuous production by a program, a continuous announcement production, etc.).

  At the timing shown in FIG. 6C, the middle symbol scrolling animation in which the special symbol of the character (princess) descends from above is executed in the middle symbol display area 208b.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 4D, in the middle symbol display area 208b, the special symbol of the character (princess) is stopped and displayed, and then, for example, a rotating animation (second position) is left unchanged. Running animation).

  In the middle symbol display area 208b, the timing shown in FIG. 5E is determined as the execution of the continuous performance is determined as the special symbol of the character (princess) is stopped and displayed in FIG. The state (for example, before a continuous production start) (2nd animation) regarding the continuous production is shown. Here, the second animation is an animation including an image in which an image of a character (princess) is displayed and a character “chance !!” is displayed.

  That is, in this production example, the display period of the first animation is, for example, until the special symbol is stopped and displayed in FIG. 4D (until the character (princess) symbol is rotated in FIG. ) Period.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (f) is the stop display of the first decorative symbol (here, “decoration 6-decoration 7-decoration 7” symbol combination stop display (swing fluctuation, temporary change) in the first symbol display area 208X. Stop)) is being executed.

  At this timing, a small character (mini character MC) is displayed above the explanation display area TT1. In this example, the mini character MC is a mini character (princess), and this display is a continuous effect (an effect display constituting at least a part of the continuous effect).

  In this example, the special symbol is a different symbol from the pseudo-continuous symbol. However, after the animation after the special symbol is stopped and displayed (second animation) is finished, the decorative symbol is displayed (stop display). In the case of re-displaying, the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208a are displayed in the decorative pattern ("decoration 6") of the left symbol display area 208a when the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed in FIG. ) And the same decorative symbol as the decorative symbol (“decoration 7”) in the right symbol display area 208a are displayed.

  In such a case, the decorative symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b is the same as the decorative symbol ("decoration 7") in the right symbol display area 208a (or the same as the decorative symbol in the left symbol display area 208a ("decoration 6")). Decorative symbols may be stopped. That is, at this timing, the special symbol (character (princess)) is stopped and displayed, and the display of the first decorative symbol resumed after the animation (second animation) is displayed, as shown in FIG. For example, the decoration display of the decoration combination of “decoration 6—decoration 7—decoration 7” is stopped (fluctuation fluctuation, temporary stop).

  The timing shown in FIG. 6G indicates that the special symbol 1 (rectangle) and the special diagram 2 (round) are both displayed in gray in the fourth symbol display device 284, and are in a state in which the disconnection is stopped. Show. In the first symbol display area 208 </ b> X of the first image display device 2081, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed (stopped with the symbol combination “decoration 6-decoration 7-decoration 7”, which is a combination of the symbols that are out of place).

  In the timing shown in FIG. 11H, one hold (hold corresponding to the hold icon h11 in FIG. 11G) has been consumed, and symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 (not shown) has started. In the 4th symbol display device 284, the special figure 1 (square) is displayed in white and the special figure 2 (round) is displayed in gray, indicating that the variable game of the special figure 1 is being executed. .

  At this timing, in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the first image display device 2081, the variation display (first variation display) of the first decorative symbol with high-speed variation is performed.

  In addition, with the suspension of the hold, in the icon display area 800, the hold icons h11 and h12 are moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h11 moves to the right end of the icon display area 800. It is displayed as a white variation icon h0. Further, the hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h12 becomes the hold icon h11 on the left side of the change icon h0, and the white hold icon h11 is displayed on the left base of the change icon h0. Is informed that the hold of 1 is 1.

  In the upper part of the display area of the third image display device 2083, the special figure 1 hold is "1" and the special figure 2 hold is "0". Number display is performed.

  Note that the mini character (princess) of the information in the explanation display part TT1 continues to be displayed (display is continued (carried over) until the next change). The number (display number) of mini characters (princesses) is increased by a special symbol (here, character (princess)) is stopped (see (d) in the figure)) during the subsequent games, As the number of displays increases, for example, the expectation degree of jackpot increases, and the player's expectation degree increases. That is, the effect of increasing (appearing) the display number of the mini character (princess) can be said to be the same kind of effect as the pseudo-continuous effect in terms of continuous effect.

  On the other hand, the pseudo-continuous production is a continuous production within one variation, while the production in which the mini character (princess) of the present embodiment appears is a continuous production (continuous production called a horizontal series) that spans multiple variations. It can be said that it is a different kind of continuous production.

Further, the effect of increasing (appearing) the display number of the mini character (princess) can be referred to as an effect display similar to the meter display in that the player's expectation level increases as the display number increases. Therefore, instead of the effect of increasing (appearing) the display number of the mini character (princess), an effect of meter display (display in which the meter increases (or decreases)) may be used.
Further, the display number of the mini character (princess) may correspond to the number of continuous effects.

  In this example, the display of the second decorative symbol is not performed on the image display device 208 ′ (no prior blurring occurs).

  In this example, the case where the special symbol of the character (princess) is rotated in the second animation display has been described. However, the configuration may be enlarged similarly to the pseudo-continuous symbol.

<Example E>
FIG. 332 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect centered on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

(Example E-1)
Since the timings shown in FIGS. 7A to 7C are the same as the timings shown in FIGS. 331A to 331C, description thereof will be omitted.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 332 (d), the special symbol of the character (princess) is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display region 208b of the first symbol display region 208X. Running, rotating animation.

  At this timing, the second decorative symbol is displayed (stopped) in the second symbol display area 208Y of the second image display device 2082. The second decorative symbol in this case is the state shown in the right figure of FIG. Specifically, in the left symbol display area 208j of the second symbol display area 208Y, a numerical decorative pattern (for example, “decoration 6”) is displayed with fluctuation (temporarily stopped), and in the middle symbol display area 208k, a numerical decoration is displayed. A symbol (for example, “decoration 7”) is stopped and displayed, and in the right symbol display area 208l, a numerical ornament symbol (for example, “decoration 7”) is displayed with fluctuation (temporary stop).

  The timings shown in FIGS. 3E to 3H are the same as the timings shown in FIGS. 331E to 331H except that the second decorative symbol is displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y. It is.

  That is, in the same figure (e), the second animation (an animation including an image in which an image of the character (princess) is displayed and a character “chance !!”) is executed is executed, and (f) in FIG. Is executed in the first symbol display area 208X by the stop display of the first decorative symbol (here, stop display of the symbol combination “decoration 6-decoration 7-decoration 7” (fluctuation fluctuation, temporary stop)). At the same time, a mini character (princess) is displayed above the explanation display area TT1. The second decorative design maintains the state shown in the right diagram of FIG.

  In addition, the timing shown in FIG. 6G is a state in which the special symbol 1 (square) and the special diagram 2 (round) are both displayed in gray in the fourth symbol display device 284, and the deviation is stopped. It is shown that. In the first symbol display area 208 </ b> X of the first image display device 2081, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed (stopped with the symbol combination “decoration 6-decoration 7-decoration 7”, which is a combination of the symbols that are out of place). The second decorative design maintains the state shown in the right diagram of FIG.

  Thus, in the same figure (d) and the same figure (e), the 2nd decoration symbol of the combination of the same decoration design as the 1st decoration design displayed in the figure (f) and the same figure (g) is stopped and displayed. There is a tip-up.

  In this way, in this embodiment, even if the symbol is a special symbol other than the pseudo-continuous symbol, the second decorative symbol causes a tip-up, but the symbol displayed in the second decorative symbol does not include a special symbol ( There is no special symbol), and there is a tip-barre due to the combination of all decorative symbols that do not include special symbols.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 11H, one hold (hold corresponding to the hold icon h11 in FIG. 11G) is consumed, and the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the first image display device 2081 have high-speed fluctuation. The first decorative symbol variation display (first variation display) is performed, and also in the symbol display areas 208j to 208l of the second image display device 2082, the high-speed variation second ornament symbol variation display (second variation). Display). Since other configurations are the same as those in FIG. 331, description thereof is omitted.

  In this example, the display timing (first timing) of the second decorative symbol that starts display in FIG. 4D may be the same as the stop timing (second timing) of the special symbol. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the first timing may be after the second timing.

  In addition, the display timing (first timing) of the second decorative symbol for starting display in FIG. 9 (d) and the rotation start timing (second timing) of the special symbol may be the same, The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the first timing may be after the second timing.

  In addition, the start timing (first timing) of the variable display of the second decorative symbol starting in FIG. 11 (h) is the same as the start timing (second timing) of the variable display of the first decorative symbol. Alternatively, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the first timing may be after the second timing.

(Example E-2)
FIGS. 332 (m) to (o) are diagrams showing other examples of effects, and examples of effects when other special symbols are displayed.

  The timings shown in (m) and (n) are the same as the timings shown in (a) and (b). The timing shown in FIG. 10 (o) is the same as the timing shown in FIG. 10 (c), but is different from the special symbol of the character (princess) in the middle symbol display area 208b of the first symbol display area 208X. (A) An animation in which a special symbol is scroll-displayed (first animation) is being executed. The special symbol in this example is, for example, a special symbol related to the high-speed pseudo-ream (for example, a special symbol displayed as “continue”), and when the special symbol related to the high-speed pseudo-ream is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. A high-speed pseudo-ream effect is executed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7 (p) shows a state in which the special symbol related to the high-speed pseudo-ream is stopped and displayed (swing fluctuation, temporary stop) in the middle symbol display area 208b of the first symbol display area. In the timing shown in (q), when the special symbol related to the high-speed pseudo-ream is stopped and displayed, the first decorative display variation display (first variation display) starts in the first symbol display area 208X, and the high-speed pseudo-ream starts. This shows a state in which the production is executed. In this case, for example, the number of executions of the high-speed pseudo-ream (in this example, “second shot”) is displayed above the icon display area 800. In the production of the high-speed pseudo-ream, a special symbol (for example, a special symbol displayed as “continue”) is scrolled, stopped (temporarily stopped), and first changed (re-changed) is displayed at a high speed, for example 100. Repeated (until the display of the number of executions of the high-speed pseudo-ream is “100th”).

  In this effect example, the special symbol may include a special symbol related to the high-speed pseudo-ream, a pseudo-continuous symbol (character (donor) symbol) as shown in FIG. 328, and a symbol in another effect mode. .

  Further, in this effect example, the second decorative symbol is not displayed and no prior ball is generated, but the second decorative symbol may be displayed. In this case, the display start timing of the second decorative symbol may be any timing from (n) to (p) in FIG. In addition, the second decorative symbol may be displayed in the figure (q). In this case, for example, the same stop display as the first decorative symbol in FIG. Display similar to the display in the first symbol display area 208X in FIG.

  It should be noted that the high-speed pseudo continuous effect may be developed after the normal pseudo continuous effect shown in FIG. 328, or only one of them may be executed.

<Example F>
FIG. 333 is a diagram showing step by step another example of an effect (for example, an effect of a high-speed pseudo-ream) centering on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6B to FIG. 6C is the second decorative symbol variation display (second variation display, FIG. 8F) in the second symbol display area 208Y of the second image display device 2082. ) Is the same as the timing shown in FIGS. 332 (n) to (o) except that the display is performed, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 4D, a special symbol (for example, a special symbol displayed as “continue”) related to the high-speed pseudo-ream is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display region 208b of the first symbol display region 208X. , Temporarily stopped). Even at this timing, the second decorative symbol variation display (second variation display) continues to be displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y of the second image display device 2082 (not stopped).

  In the timing shown in FIG. 6E, when the special symbol related to the high-speed pseudo-ream is stopped and displayed, the first decorative symbol variation display (first variation display) starts in the first symbol display area 208X, and the high-speed pseudo-ream starts. A state in which a pseudo-ream effect is being executed is shown. Also at this timing, the second decorative symbol variation display (second variation display) continues to be displayed (not stopped) in the second symbol display area 208Y. Other configurations are the same as those in FIGS. 332 (n) to 332 (q).

  In this example, the variation display (second variation display) of the second decorative symbol is displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y of the second image display device 2082 during the period from FIG. 333 (b) to FIG. continuing. And in the period of Drawing 333 (b)-the figure (d), the 1st decoration design and the 2nd decoration design are in a different state. As described above, when the effect of the high-speed quasi-continuation is executed (even if a break (such as a temporary stop of a special symbol) may be provided during the performance of the high-speed quasi-continuation, the second variation display is continued. It may be.

  In this example, since there is no stop display (temporary stop display) of the second decorative symbol, there is no prior blurring. However, if the way of viewing is changed, there is no stop display (temporary stop display) of the second decorative symbol (the display of variation of the second decorative symbol (second variation display) continues to be displayed), so that the normal pseudo-continuation is displayed. It can also be said that the player may be able to recognize whether it is an effect or a high-speed pseudo-ream effect (for example, it can be recognized by an advanced player).

<Example G>
FIG. 334 is a diagram showing another example of the effect centering on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment in a stepwise manner, and is an example of the effect when the button effect is executed.

(Example G-1)
The timing shown in FIG. 6B is the same as that in FIG. 328 (j) except that the second decorative symbol is displayed in the state of FIG. 329 (p). That is, the decorative symbol (here “decoration 6”) is displayed in the left symbol display region 208j of the second symbol display region 208Y, and the decorative symbol (here “decoration 7”) is displayed in a stopped manner (swaying fluctuation) , Temporarily stopped), and the middle symbol variation display (high-speed variation) is executed in the middle symbol display area 208k.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 5C, the pseudo continuous symbol that has been enlarged and displayed in the first symbol display area 208X stops its enlarged display. The display size of the pseudo-continuous symbol at this timing is, for example, the same display size as that in FIG. 10B, and more specifically, the display of the pseudo-continuous symbol (such as FIG. 328 (g)) that is scroll-displayed. The size is larger than the size and does not exceed the display area of the first image display device 2081 (a level where pseudo-continuous symbols are not displayed on the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083).

  At this timing, an effect related to the operation means (button effect) is executed. That is, an animation related to the button effect is displayed in front of the enlarged pseudo-continuous pattern (overlapping a part of the pseudo-continuous pattern). The animation related to the button effect includes, for example, a display that prompts the operation of the operation means (for example, the chance button 136) and a display that indicates a valid reception period of the operation of the chance button 136. The display for prompting the operation of the operation means is, for example, an image imitating the chance button 136 (button image BG), a character “arrow!” And an arrow, and a display indicating a valid reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 ( The elapsed time notification image TG) displays, for example, the entire reception valid period as a colored (other than white) painted image, and the filled image becomes smaller as the reception valid period elapses (the meter subtracts (decreases)). This is the display that executes the animation. In accordance with this, the chance button 136 notifies that the built-in LED is lit red and that the operation is possible.

  In this example, the button image BG and the elapsed time notification image TG are overlapped on the front of the enlarged pseudo-simulated symbol. Although the example in which the image BG and the elapsed time notification image TG overlap each other is shown, at least the elapsed time notification image TG in which a meter is subtracted and displayed on at least a part of the front of the enlarged pseudo-simultaneous symbol is shown. You may be comprised so that a part may overlap.

  Further, at this timing, in the second symbol display area 208Y, the state of FIG. 329 (p) continues in the second decorative symbol as in FIG.

  The timing shown in FIG. 4D shows a state in which the chance button 136 is operated within the valid reception period of the operation of the chance button 136. In this embodiment, until the chance button 136 is operated in the button effect, the animation of the enlarged display of the pseudo-continuous pattern is stopped, and the chance button 136 is operated within the valid reception period of the operation of the chance button 136. If this happens, the animation of the enlarged display of pseudo-continuous symbols is resumed.

  Further, at this timing, in the second symbol display area 208Y, the state of FIG. 329 (p) continues in the second decorative symbol as in FIG.

  That is, in the figure (b)-the figure (d), the state of the 1st decoration design and the 2nd decoration design differs.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E shows a state in which the enlarged display of the pseudo-continuous symbols of the first decorative symbol is resumed by the operation of the chance button 136 and the width is further enlarged. At this timing, the left and right ends of the pseudo-continuous pattern are displayed in part of the display area of the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083, respectively. That is, one pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed over (spanning) a plurality of image display devices 208 ′ (first image display device 2081, second image display device 2082, and third image display device 2093).

  Further, in the middle symbol display area 208k of the second symbol display area 208Y by the operation of the chance button 136, as shown in the lower diagram of FIG. (Provisional stop display) with the symbol combination of “pseudo-symbol-decoration 7”, and thus, the start of the pseudo-continuous effect has been confirmed (not visible in the first symbol display area 208X (difficult to see) (Instead of the first decorative symbol), a stop display of pseudo-continuous symbols is informed). In the second image display device 2082, the enlarged left end portion of the pseudo-continuous symbol overlaps the second decorative symbol, the meter, and the stage name display area. For example, the left end portion of the pseudo-continuous symbol is at least the second decorative symbol. (In this example, the left end of the pseudo-continuous symbol is overlapped with the second decorative symbol, the meter, and the stage name display area).

  In the third image display device 2083, the enlarged right end portion of the pseudo-continuous pattern is overlapped with a part of the display in the third image display device 2083 (in this example, a character on the stage, And overlapped with the second hold number display in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2).

  At this timing, the family crest member 244A starts to rise and overlaps a part of the first image display device 2081.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 6 (f), the enlarged display of the first decorative symbol pseudo-continuous pattern is finished (enlargement is stopped at the same size as the pseudo continuous symbol shown in FIG. 5 (e)), and the family crest character that has risen 244A rotates at the raised position, and a sound effect “don” is output from the speaker 120. In the state where the button image is not displayed ((e) and (f) in the figure), the first image display device 2081 and the second image display device 2082 (and the third image display device 2083) are spread over. A pseudo-continuous pattern of the first decorative design is displayed. In the second decorative design, the state shown in FIG.

  Other configurations are the same as the configurations described with reference to FIGS. 328 (k) to 328 (n), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  In this example, the button effect is executed during the execution of the first animation (stopping animation of special symbols, animation of middle symbols). That is, the first animation includes an animation related to the button effect (button effect animation). In this case, the button effect animation is displayed only on the first image display device 2081. The button effect animation may be displayed only on the second image display device 2082 (or the third image display device 2083), or may be displayed on each of the plurality of image display devices 208 ′. One button effect animation may be displayed over the image display device 208 ′.

  When the button effect is executed, until the button effect starts (for example, until the button effect animation shown in FIG. 10C starts displaying), the first symbol display device 2081 displays an enlarged display of pseudo-continuous symbols. When (enlarged animation) is executed and the button effect starts, the enlarged display of the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped. Then, when the chance button 136 is operated within the acceptance valid period of the operation of the chance button 136, the enlarged display of the pseudo continuous symbols is resumed.

  In addition, from the start of the button effect until the chance button 136 is operated, the decorative symbol is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208k of the second image display device 2082 (the second decorative symbol is shown in FIG. 329 (p)). In this state, the operation of the chance button 136 causes the decorative design (in this case, pseudo-continuous design) to be stopped and displayed in the middle design display area 208k of the second image display device 2082 (the second decorative design is shown in FIG. 334 (e)). In the first image display device 2081, the enlarged display of pseudo-continuous symbols is resumed.

  That is, when the chance button 136 is operated at the time t1 from the start of the button effect, the second time is earlier than when the chance button 136 is operated after the time t2 (t2> t1) from the start of the button effect. The decorative symbol can be stopped and displayed, and the presence or absence of execution of a continuous effect (here, a pseudo-continuous effect) can be recognized at an early stage (a leading ball is generated by the second decorative symbol).

  In this example, after the operation of the chance button 136, the second image display device 2082 performs the stop display of the second decorative symbol (first timing), and the first image display device 2081 displays the pseudo-continuous symbol. The timing at which the enlarged display resumes (second timing) may be the same timing, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing is earlier than the first timing. It may be early.

  Note that even when the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 10D, the second decorative symbol (medium symbol) is not stopped and the variable display may be continued in FIG.

(Example G-2)
FIGS. 11 (h) to 11 (l) show a case where the button effect is executed during the execution of the first animation, and the operation is not performed within the valid reception period of the operation of the chance button 136. The timings shown in FIGS. 1H to 1L correspond to the timings shown in FIGS. 1B to 1F, respectively, and therefore redundant description is omitted. To do.

  Even in the case where the button effect is started in (i) in the same figure, as shown in (j) and (k) in the same figure, no operation is performed within the valid reception period of the operation of the chance button 136. In this case, the stop display of the second decorative symbol (middle symbol) is not performed, and the variable display is continued (the state of FIG. 329 (p)).

  The timing shown in FIG. 11L indicates a state in which the acceptance period for the operation of the chance button 136 has ended. In this case, when the time expires, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and in this example, the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208k (the state shown in the lower diagram of FIG. 334 (e)).

  Further, since the operation of the chance button 136 is not performed, and the enlarged display animation of the pseudo-continuous pattern in the first image display device 2081 cannot be resumed, at the timing shown in FIG. The maximum size pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed.

(Example G-3)
FIGS. (N) to (r) are cases where the button effect is executed during the execution of the first animation, and the operation is performed within the valid reception period of the operation of the chance button 136. This is an example of the case where the pseudo-continuous symbol of the first decorative symbol is not stopped and displayed, and the timings shown in (n) to (r) of the same figure are shown in (b) to (f) of FIG. Since it corresponds to the timing shown, overlapping description is omitted.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7 (p) shows a state where the chance button 136 is operated. Then, at the timing shown in (q) in the figure, the enlarged display of the pseudo-continuous design of the first decorative design is completed, and the display size before enlargement (in the initial state) in the middle design display area 208b of the first image display device 2081 is displayed. The display size) pseudo-continuous pattern shows a state where scroll display is started. Further, in the second image display device 2082, stop display (swing fluctuation, temporary stop) of the second decorative symbol is executed. The second decorative symbol in this case is the state shown in the lower diagram of (q) in the figure, and is a (temporary) stop display of a symbol combination of a numerical decorative symbol (for example, “decoration 6-decoration 8-decoration 7”). . Thereby, the fact that the pseudo-continuous symbols of the first decorative symbols are not stopped and displayed (the execution of the pseudo-continuous effects does not start) is prejudice.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 7 (r), the first decorative symbol (for example, “decoration 6-decoration 8-decoration 7”) having the same symbol combination as the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the first symbol display area 208X. Fluctuating, temporarily stopping), and notifying that the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect does not start.

  In the present embodiment, the pseudo-continuous pattern in the first symbol display area 208X is shown in the figure (q) from the display size shown in the figure (p) between the figure (p) and the figure (q). An animation that is reduced to the display size may be executed, or after the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 10 (p), the enlarged display is temporarily resumed and enlarged to a predetermined size (for example, the maximum size). An animation that is later reduced to the display size shown in FIG.

  When the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed, when the chance button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 8 (p), the second image display device 2082 displays a second decorative pattern of numbers (for example, “decoration 6-decoration 8- That the decorative combination of the symbol combination “decoration 7” is stopped (temporarily stopped) and the first image display device 2081 executes the animation of the reduced display of the pseudo-continuous symbols, and then the pseudo-continuous effect does not start to be executed. The suggested pseudo-continuous symbols are scrolled ((p) in the figure).

  Note that the scroll display of the middle symbol (special symbol) of the first decorative symbol does not start execution of the continuous effect (pseudo-continuous effect) because the special symbol does not stop at a predetermined position and the scroll display starts. There is also a configuration in which a special symbol is stopped and displayed in a false manner (a continuous effect (a pseudo-continuous effect) is executed), and the present embodiment can be applied even with this configuration. In that case, for example, at the timing shown in FIG. 14 (q), in the second symbol display area 208Y, the second decorative symbol including the pseudo-continuous symbol stop display is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol so that the first barre occurs. Alternatively, at the timing shown in FIG. 7 (r), the first decorative design and the second decorative design (decoration of the same design combination) including the stop display of the pseudo-continuous design in the middle design as shown in FIG. (Design) may be stopped and displayed.

<Example H>
FIG. 335 is a diagram showing another example of the effect centering on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment in a stepwise manner, and is an effect example performed after the big hit temporary stop display.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5B is a state where reach is formed, and the decorative symbol (here “decoration 6”) fluctuates (temporarily stops) in the left symbol display region 208c of the first symbol display region 208X. In the right symbol display area 208c, the decorative symbol (here “decoration 6”) fluctuates (temporarily stops), and in the middle symbol display region 208b, the middle symbol fluctuates at high speed.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 5C, the middle symbol changes to low speed fluctuation in the middle symbol display area 208b. In this low-speed fluctuation, for example, when the middle symbol passes “decoration 7”, other than the deviation is determined. Further, when the middle symbol stops before “decoration 5”, or when the middle symbol stops at “decoration 7”, the deviation is determined.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6D is a state in which an effect (notice effect) indicating that there is a possibility of developing into a super reach (for example, a swordsman reach) has been started. That is, in the first image display device 2081, a reduced display animation is executed in which the left symbol and the right symbol are gradually reduced while temporarily stopped. In addition, at a certain timing during the execution of the animation of the reduced display, the second image display device 2082 starts displaying the variation display of the second decorative symbol. In the icon display area 800, a pedestal appears below the change icon h01.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E is a state in which the animation of the reduced display of the left symbol and the right symbol is further advanced in the first image display device 2081, and the first image is displayed while the left symbol and the right symbol are reduced. An animation that moves so as to be spaced apart from each other in the upper left and upper right of the display area of the device 2081 is executed. The variation display of the second decorative symbol is continued.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6F is a state in which a display (notice effect) for notifying that the super reach (for example, swordsman reach) effect is started is executed, and the first image display device 2081 cuts the swordsman. An in-image (here, a character (swordsman) and an image on which characters “swordsman see !!”) are displayed.

  In the icon display area 800, the pedestal of the change icon h0, the other hold icons h11 and h12, and the pedestal of the hold icon are deleted, and only the change icon h0 is displayed. The variation display of the second decorative symbol is continued.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6G shows a state in which the scene changes in the first image display device 2081, the confrontation scene between the character (dono) and the character (swordsman) is displayed, and the super reach production has started. Yes.

  Further, in the second symbol display area 208Y of the second image display device 2082, as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 5G, the left symbol display area 208j and the right symbol display area 208l each have a decorative symbol (both in this example). “Decoration 6”) is temporarily displayed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the display starts with the second decorative symbol in the variable display state in the reach effect ((d) in the figure), and after the notice effect (super (f) in the figure) of the super reach effect is executed. When the super reach production is started, a temporary stop of the left symbol and the right symbol of the second decorative symbol is displayed ((g) in the figure).

  The timing shown in FIG. 11H shows a state where a special effect (special display EX) is being executed in the second symbol display area 208Y. The special effect is, for example, one of the notice effects informing that the promotion effect is executed. The special effect is an effect that is not executed in the first symbol area 208X, and is, for example, a display that reduces the visibility of the second symbol display area 208Y. In this example, the character display “CHANCE” is displayed (special display EX) on the front side of the second decorative symbol shown in the right diagram of FIG. 5G, that is, over the symbol display areas 208j to 208l. )It is carried out. The special effects may or may not be executed, and the ratio of execution (appearance) varies. In other words, the probability that the special effect is executed differs depending on the super reach effect being executed. Another production having a higher jackpot expectation than a certain production is configured such that the execution probability of the special production is higher when other conditions are the same. The probability that this special effect is executed (appearance) is 0%, 5%, 10%, 30%, 50%, 70%, 100%, and the like.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6I is a state in which the scene immediately after the confrontation is displayed on the first image display device 2081. At this timing, the special display EX in the second symbol display area 208Y is erased, and the second decorative symbol in the state shown in the right diagram of FIG.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 6J, the scene where the character (dono) wins is displayed on the first image display device 2081 and the decorative symbol (here “decoration 6”) fluctuates in the middle symbol display area 208b. It shows the state of being (temporarily stopped). Also, in the second symbol display area 208Y, as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 8 (j), the decorative symbol (here “decoration 6”) fluctuates (temporarily stops) in the middle symbol display area 208k, and the big hit The second decorative design fluctuates (temporarily stops) in the symbol combination (in this example, “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6”).

  The timing shown in FIG. 10 (k) shows a state where the button effect has started to be executed. This button effect is, for example, a jackpot symbol promotion effect, and a large button image BG that makes the first decorative symbol invisible or difficult to be viewed by the player is displayed overlapping the first decorative symbol. A display prompting an operation of 136 (in this example, a character “press!” And an image of an arrow) and an elapsed time notification image TG indicating a valid reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 are displayed.

  The display of the button image BG makes it difficult to visually recognize the first decorative symbol in the first symbol display area 208X, but the second decorative symbol is the same jackpot symbol combination as the first decorative symbol (in this example, the same symbol (J) Fluctuation fluctuation (temporary stop) by the symbol combination “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6” shown in the right figure is visible to the player.

  When the chance button 136 is operated at this timing (within the operation acceptance period indicated by the elapsed time notification image TG), the first symbol display area 208X and the second symbol display are displayed as shown in FIG. In any of the areas 208Y, the jackpot symbol combination after the promotion (here, the decoration symbol of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” sways and fluctuates (temporarily stops) and becomes visible to the player. If the opportunity button 136 is not operated during the acceptance valid period and time is up, the promotion may be promoted and the display shown in FIG.

  In this effect example, when the button effect shown in FIG. 5K is executed, it is difficult to visually recognize the first decorative symbol in the first symbol display area 208X, and the second decorative symbol is visually recognized by the player in the second symbol display area 208Y. Although it is possible, the first ballet in the second decorative symbol (the first ballet of the combination of the decorative symbols after promotion shown in FIG. 1 (l)) does not occur.

  Thus, even in the case of developing into a super reach effect, the second decorative symbol is displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y at least at any timing before the development.

  For the player, the most interesting point is the result of the success or failure of the super reach production. Therefore, even if it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the first symbol display area 208X in the super reach effect, it is necessary to convey the state of the decorative symbol to the player by the second decorative symbol displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y. The nature is low. Therefore, when the second decorative symbol is displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y during execution of the super reach effect, the special effect related to the second decorative symbol (for example, the visibility of the second decorative symbol is reduced). Such as production). This special effect is executed with a certain probability (0%, 5%, 10%, 30%, 50%, 70%, 100%, etc.) depending on the situation.

  In FIG. 4D, the timing at which the display of the second decorative symbol starts (first timing) and the timing at which the reduced display of the first decorative symbol starts (second timing) are the same timing. Alternatively, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

  Also, in the same figure (g), the timing when the left symbol and the right symbol of the second decorative symbol temporarily stop (first timing) and the timing when the super reach production starts (second timing) are the same timing. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

  Moreover, the timing at which the special effect (special display EX) of the second decorative symbol starts is not limited to the timing in FIG.

  Also, in FIG. 6 (j), notification is made of the timing at which the middle symbol of the second decorative symbol temporarily stops (first timing) and the result of whether or not the super reach effect is achieved (in this example, the character (donor) has won). The display timing (second timing) to be displayed may be the same timing, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing. Good.

  In FIG. 1L, the timing at which the first decorative symbol after promotion is displayed (first timing) and the timing at which the second decorative symbol after promotion is displayed (second timing) are the same. It may be timing, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

<Example I>
FIG. 336 is a diagram showing another example of the effect centered on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment in a stepwise manner, and is another example of the effect performed after the big hit temporary stop display.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6B is the same as the timing shown in FIG.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5C shows a state in which the button effect has started to be executed. This button effect is, for example, an extra ball effect, and a button image BG on the first image display device 281 and a display urging the user to operate the chance button 136 (in this example, the text “Add extra ball!”) An arrow image) and an elapsed time notification image TG representing a valid reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 are displayed.

  At this timing, in the second symbol display area 208Y, the jackpot symbol combination after promotion (for example, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” shown in the right figure of FIG. 10C) is temporarily stopped and displayed. Barre is occurring.

  That is, as a result of the determination of success / failure, it is assumed that 16R jackpot is actually won, but in FIG. 4B, for example, a 4R jackpot symbol combination (for example, “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6”) is temporarily stopped and displayed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 5C, the ball-out effect is executed, and in the second symbol display area 208Y, the 16R jackpot symbol combination (for example, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”) is temporarily stopped. As a result, the player may be able to recognize that the 16R jackpot has been won (first ballet by the second decorative symbol).

  In the timing shown in FIG. 6D, when the chance button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 5C, the number of extra balls is displayed (out of ball display TT2). This is a state in which an effect of notifying that the player has been added is being executed. Here, the extra ball display TT2 is a display of an image of “+600”, thereby notifying that 600 balls have been added. The state of the second decorative design is the same as the right diagram of FIG.

  In addition, the player who has visually recognized the number of extra balls displayed TT2 may be able to predict the number of rounds actually won from the number of extra balls displayed. That is, if the maximum number of balls (prize balls) in the case of 16R big hit is 2400 balls (= 15 balls × 10 counts × 16R) as an example, for example, as shown in FIG. The number of balls obtained by a combination (for example, “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6”) is 600 balls (= 15 balls × 10 counts × 4R).

  In other words, the player who has visually recognized the display of the number of extra balls shown in (d) of the figure can actually use this number (or its addition) (even if the actual number of winning rounds by the second decorative symbol is unknown). Can predict how many R jackpots are. In other words, the display of the number of extra balls in this case is a notification relating to the jackpot (notification regarding how many R jackpots the actual jackpot is (the number of rounds actually won)).

  In (e) to (i) in the figure, the button effect (progress on the ball appearance) (chance button 136 operation by the player) and the display number TT2 on the ball appearance on the ball are repeated several times. At the timing shown, an extra ball number display TT2 (in this example, “MAX”) indicating that the extra ball number has reached the maximum number is executed.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 10 (k), the 16R big hit symbol combination (for example, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”) is temporarily stopped and displayed in the first symbol display area 208X. It is notified that the number of balls (the number of prize balls) is a big hit of 2400 balls). During the period from FIG. 10C to FIG. 10K, the temporary stop display of the 16R jackpot symbol combination (for example, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”) continues in the second symbol display area 208Y. (The first ballet with the second decorative pattern is continuing).

  In this example, the maximum number of balls (prize balls) in the case of 16R big hit (for example, 2400 balls) and the number of balls that are added in the same figure (d), figure (f) and figure (h) Depending on the display TT2 (total), the player may be able to recognize that the player has won the 16R jackpot at the timing shown in FIG. In other words, it can be said that the tip ball is generated by the extra ball number display TT2 shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 8C, the timing at which the display of the second decorative symbol on the second image display device 2082 starts (first timing), and the timing at which the button effect on the first image display device 2081 starts (second). May be the same timing, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

  In this manner, in one effect (for example, the jackpot symbol promotion effect shown in FIGS. 335 (k) to 335 (l)) performed after the jackpot temporary stop display, the second decorative symbol is displayed before the chance button 136 is operated. In the other effects (for example, effects such as the appearance of adding a ball as shown in FIG. 336 or the effect of adding a bonus R number shown in FIG. 336) of the effects performed after the jackpot temporary stop display, the second decorative design is used. The first burr (FIG. 336 (c)) may occur.

<Example J>
337 (a) to 337 (g) are diagrams showing another example of the effects centering on the image display device 208 'of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment in stages, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol. In addition to the above, it is an effect example in which the third decorative symbol is displayed.

(Example J-1)
FIGS. 337 (a) to 337 (f) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 330 (a) to 330 (f) except that the third decorative symbol is displayed in the third symbol display area 208Z. Therefore, the description will mainly focus on the different points, and the other description will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 6B, the third decorative symbol is a decorative symbol displayed in the third symbol display area 208Z separately from the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol. As an example, the image display device One of 208 ′ (in this example, the first image display device 2081) is always displayed at least during the decorative symbol variation game (timing during execution of the decorative symbol variation display or stop display) (first display). 2 is a decorative symbol (displayed even if no decorative symbol is displayed). In addition, the display size of each of the third decorative symbols is at least smaller than the display size of each of the first decorative symbols, and the overall display size of the third decorative symbol is at least larger than the entire display size of the first decorative symbol. It is a small decorative design (mini decorative design). In the following description, when “the third decorative symbol is always displayed” is described, it means “the third decorative symbol is always displayed during the period in which the decorative symbol is displayed”. .

  The display of the third decorative symbol is continued during the period of FIG. 10 (a) to FIG. 10 (g). During the display, for example, as shown in FIG. You may comprise so that the position of 208Z may move.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 5G, for example, after the timing shown in FIG. 5F, the other movable bodies (the eight generations 224B and the generals 224C) descend from the initial position, and the first image display device 2081 is displayed. It is in the state which overlaps with the upper front. At this timing, a part of the pseudo-continuous symbol and a part of the second decorative symbol displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y are covered by the Yatsushiro character 224B and the general character 224C so that it can be visually recognized by the player. It is difficult (not visible).

  In the example shown in FIGS. 337 (a) to 337 (g), the first image display device 2081 is provided with the third symbol display area 208Z and is always displayed during the variable game of FIG. Yes. In this example, since the period shown in FIGS. 337 (b) to 337 (g) is during the variable game shown in FIG. 1 (timing during decorative display of the decorative symbol), the first decorative symbol is not visible to the player. Even at the timing ((d) to (g) in the figure), the second decorative symbol is not displayed (difficult to see) (the timing (b), (c), (g) in the figure) The third decorative symbol is always displayed. Note that even if a special symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol) is stopped and displayed on the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, the third decorative symbol does not have a special symbol and is displayed in a stopped state. There is no.

  Further, the third symbol display area 208Z is configured to be movable. As shown in FIGS. 9E to 9F, for example, a movable body or the like moves to the front of the image display device 208 ′, and Even when at least part of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol is difficult to visually recognize by the movable body, the third decorative symbol is always visible to the player by the movement of the third symbol display area 208Z. .

(Example J-2)
FIGS. (N) to (r) are diagrams showing another example of effects centering on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment in stages. This is another example of the effect in which the third decorative symbol is displayed in addition to the decorative symbol.

  FIGS. (N) to (o) are the same timings as the production examples in FIGS. 335 (c) to 335 (d), but the second symbol is displayed on the upper left of the first image display device 2081, for example. An area 208Y is provided to display a second decorative symbol, and a third symbol display area 208Z is provided above the explanation display area TT1 to constantly display the third decorative symbol. That is, there is a case in which a plurality of mini decorative symbols may be displayed (simultaneously) on one image display device (first image display device 2081). However, the states of the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol are different.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 11 (n), the right symbol and the left symbol (for example, “decoration 6”, respectively) of the second decorative symbol are stopped and displayed, and the middle symbol is changing rapidly (FIG. 335 (g) right Figure state). In addition, the third decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 10 (o), a reach effect is started and a reduced movement animation of a first decorative symbol (for example, a right symbol and a left symbol in which “decoration 6” is temporarily stopped, respectively) is being executed. It is. The second decorative symbol continues the state shown in the right diagram of FIG. 335 (g), and the third decorative symbol performs variable display.

  In the figure (p) and the figure (q), the first decorative symbol approaches the second decorative symbol due to the reduced movement animation, and a part of the first decorative symbol overlaps the second decorative symbol. Is in a state where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize (not visible). The second decorative symbol continues the state shown in the right diagram of FIG. 335 (g), and the third decorative symbol performs variable display.

  FIG. 7 (r) shows a state where one (the first decorative symbol in this example) is not displayed after the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are substantially overlapped. The second decorative symbol continues the state shown in the right diagram of FIG. 335 (g), and the third decorative symbol performs variable display.

  In addition, in the example of production shown in (n) to (r) in the figure, the second decorative design is displayed on, for example, the second image display device 2082, and the first decoration is shown in (p) to (q) in the figure. The left symbol and the right symbol of the symbol move to the left and right respectively, the left symbol of the first decorative symbol is displayed on the second image display device 2082, and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol is displayed on the third image display device 2083. You may comprise. In this case, it may be configured such that the left symbol of the first decorative symbol moves in the direction of the second decorative symbol in the second image display device 2082, and is erased (not displayed) when it overlaps.

  In this example, the second decorative symbol is a decorative symbol that is displayed only for a certain period when a certain condition is satisfied, whereas the third decorative symbol is a decorative symbol that is always displayed.

  In addition, although each Example (production example) described in this specification can be applied in appropriate combination, when applied in combination with the present Example, the second decorative design in each Example is always displayed. It will never be done.

  Further, the design of the third decorative design may be different from the design of the first decorative design and the second decorative design. Even in this case, the third decorative design is always displayed.

  Also, as shown in (g), (p), and (q) in the figure, the second decorative symbol is overlapped by the first decorative symbol, a movable body, etc., and it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize (not visible). However, the third decorative symbol (which is configured to be able to move and display) is always displayed even if the first decorative symbol or the movable body moves.

  On the other hand, the third decorative symbol is configured to be visible to a player whose decorative symbol is mainly displayed in a variable manner, and it is difficult to specify the symbol compared to the second decorative symbol. Further, since the third decorative symbol does not include a special symbol, the combination (state) of the decorative symbol is not notified to the player as an alternative to the first decorative symbol, unlike the second decorative symbol.

<Example of production K>
FIG. 338 is a diagram showing another example of effects centered on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment in stages, a second image display device (left sub liquid crystal) 2082, a third image display. It is an effect example related to the operation of the device (right sub liquid crystal) 2083.

(Example of production K-1)
FIGS. 9A to 10B show an example of effects produced by the second image display device (left sub liquid crystal) 2082 and the third image display device (right sub liquid crystal) 2083. In this example, the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 2081 is provided with a second symbol display area 208Y for displaying a second decorative symbol.

  FIG. 18A shows the timing corresponding to the timing shown in FIG. 331B. The second image display device (left sub liquid crystal) 2082 and the third image display device (right sub liquid crystal) 2083 are background images. Only displayed. At this timing, the left sub-liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub-liquid crystal 2083 are in the initial positions and are farthest from each other, and the left sub-liquid crystal 2082 overlaps with the left end portion of the main liquid crystal 2081 and is arranged on the left of the main liquid crystal 2081. The right sub liquid crystal 2083 overlaps the right end portion of the main liquid crystal 2081 and is arranged on the right side of the main liquid crystal 2081.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5B shows a state in which one special symbol (for example, a pseudo-continuous symbol) is divided and displayed on the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083 at the initial position. At this timing, only the frame portion of the second symbol display area 208Y starts displaying on the main liquid crystal 2081. In this embodiment, when the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083 are moved to predetermined positions, the pseudo continuous symbols are stopped and the execution of the pseudo continuous effect is confirmed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6C is a state in which the second decorative symbol starts to be displayed on the main liquid crystal 2081 and a part thereof is overlapped by the left sub-liquid crystal 2082 and cannot be visually recognized by the player. In this example, the middle symbol display area 208k of the second decorative symbol is not overlapped with the left sub-liquid crystal 2082 at the timing shown in FIG. In the state shown in j), a special symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol) is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208k. Therefore, the player who has visually recognized this may be able to recognize the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol (execution of the pseudo-continuous effect) (the first decorative symbol has occurred).

  The timing shown in FIG. 6D is a state in which the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083 start moving (sliding) in front of the main liquid crystal 2081 so as to be close to each other. Due to the movement of the left sub liquid crystal 2082, the second decorative pattern of the main liquid crystal 2081 is completely overlapped, and the whole is not visible to the player.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E is a state in which the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083 are in contact (adjacent) at the front center of the main liquid crystal 2081 and stopped. When the left sub-liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub-liquid crystal 2083 are in contact with each other, the pseudo continuous images that are divided and displayed on both the sub-liquid crystals 2082 and 2083 are integrated (strand) over both the sub-liquid crystals 2082 and 2083. Is displayed. Thereby, it becomes the state of the stop display of a pseudo | simulation continuous symbol, and execution of the pseudo | simulation continuous effect is started after this. The first decorative design of the main liquid crystal 2081 is overlapped with the two sub liquid crystals 2082 and 2083, and most of them cannot be recognized by the player.

  On the other hand, the second decorative design once overlapped by the left sub-liquid crystal 2082 is exposed from the left side of the left sub-liquid crystal 2082, and is again visible to the player. The second decorative symbol is in the state shown in FIG. 6 (j). Similar to the display of the pseudo decorative symbol of the first decorative symbol by the two sub liquid crystals 2082 and 2083, the pseudo decorative symbol is temporarily displayed in the middle symbol display area 208k. Stop is displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6F is a state in which the left sub-liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub-liquid crystal 2083 again start moving in directions away from each other toward the initial position. At this timing, the first decorative symbol of the main liquid crystal 2081 that has been overlapped by the two sub liquid crystals 2082 and 2083 is again visible to the player. In this example, in the state where the special symbols are continuously displayed on the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083, another symbol (in this case, “decoration”) is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b of the main liquid crystal 2081. 7 ”is temporarily stopped and the combination of the first decorative symbols“ decoration 6-decoration 7-decoration 7 ”is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (first symbol display area 208X). Has been. Further, a pseudo continuous number display (in this example, “× 2” indicating two times) is displayed.

  At this timing, the second decorative design of the main liquid crystal 2081 is again overlapped with the left sub-liquid crystal 2082.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5G is a state in which the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083 are moved to the initial positions, and the special symbols displayed on both the sub liquid crystals 2082 and 2083 are not displayed. Further, at this timing, a part of the second decorative design (FIG. (J)) of the main liquid crystal 2081 is not visible to the player by overlapping with the left sub-liquid crystal 2082.

  The timing shown in FIG. 11H shows a state in which the second symbol display area 208Y and the second decorative symbol of the main liquid crystal 2081 are not displayed. The timing shown in FIG. It shows a state in which the variation display (first variation display) of the first decorative symbol is resumed.

  Note that the display start timing (first timing) of the second decorative symbol and the start timing of movement of the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083 (second timing) in FIG. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

  In addition, the second decorative symbol non-display timing (first timing) and the completion timing (end of movement) of the left sub-liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub-liquid crystal 2083 to the initial positions in FIG. 2) may be the same timing, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

  In this production example, at least one sub liquid crystal is displayed in at least one of the states in which a continuous production (pseudo-continuous production) is executed (a state corresponding to a stop display of a special symbol (pseudo-continuous design)). (At least one of the left sub-liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub-liquid crystal 2083) is configured to move to a certain position.

  The second decorative pattern is overlapped by the moving sub liquid crystal in at least a part of the period when the sub liquid crystal moves.

(Example of production K-2)
FIGS. 338 (m) to (r) show other examples of effects by the moving left sub liquid crystal 2082 and right sub liquid crystal 2083. FIG. In this example, one of the movable sub liquid crystals (for example, the left sub liquid crystal 2082) is provided with a second symbol display area 208Y for displaying a second decorative symbol.

  (M) to (r) in the same figure, except that the second symbol display area 208Y and the second decorative symbol are displayed on the left sub-liquid crystal 2082, respectively (b) to (g). Since the configuration is the same as that shown, only different portions will be described and redundant description will be omitted.

  That is, as in the same figure (b) to (g), in this production example, in a state of notifying that a continuous production (pseudo-continuous production) is executed (a special symbol (pseudo-continuous design) is stopped) In at least one of the corresponding states, at least one of the sub liquid crystals (at least one of the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083) is configured to move to a position.

  At this time, since the second decorative symbol (FIG. (J)) is displayed on the left sub-liquid crystal 2082 after the timing of FIG. 9 (n), the second decorative symbol is displayed while the second decorative symbol is being displayed. (N) to (r)) are not overlapped by other configurations and are always visible to the player.

  The second decorative design slides in front of the main liquid crystal 2081 in the left-right direction as the left sub liquid crystal 2082 moves.

  In this way, the (auxiliary) second decorative symbol that is an alternative to the first decorative symbol is always visible to the player during the display, and is moved and displayed, so that the decorative symbol can be changed or displayed. The player can easily recognize the state such as a temporary stop display.

  In the example of production shown in FIG. 338, an example in which one special symbol is displayed by the two sub liquid crystals 2082 and 2083 has been described. However, a plurality of liquid crystals including at least one sub liquid crystal (image display device 208 ′) Two special symbols may be displayed. For example, the main liquid crystal 2081 and the left sub liquid crystal 2082 may be configured to display one special symbol, the main liquid crystal 2081 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083 may be configured to display one special symbol, or all the liquid crystal display devices 208 may be configured. A configuration may be used in which one special symbol is displayed by '.

<Example of production L>
FIG. 339 is a diagram showing another example of the effect centered on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment in a step-by-step manner. The operation of the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083 is shown in FIG. It is another related production example.

  The second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083 may be arranged above and below the first image display device 208, respectively. As an example, the image display device arranged on the upper side of the first image display device 2081 is the second image display device 2082, and the image display device arranged on the lower side is the third image display device 2083.

  As an example, the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083 have a length in the vertical (height) direction that is shorter than a half of the length of the first image display device 2081, and also have a length in the width direction. Slightly short. Further, at the initial position, the second image display device 2082 has at least the lower end side portion thereof overlapping the front side of the upper end side portion of the first image display device 2081, and the third image display device 2083 has at least the upper end side thereof. The portion overlaps the front side of the lower end side portion of the first image display device 2081.

  In this example, the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083 are arranged so that the front of the first image display device 2081 is close to or separated from each other along the display surface of the first image display device 2081. It is configured to be movable in the vertical direction (sliding movement).

(Example L-1)
First, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 339 (a) to (c), the second image display device 2082 and the second symbol display area 208Y for displaying the second decorative symbol are provided.

  The timing shown to (a) of the figure is the state which has started the variable display of the 1st decoration symbol. As described above, in this embodiment, the first symbol display area 208X is provided on a plurality of image display devices 208 ′ (in this example, the first image display device 2081, the second image display device 2082, and the third image display device 2083). The variable display of the first decorative symbol is displayed across the three image display devices 208 ′.

  In addition, in the case of stop display (determined display), the first decorative symbol may be configured not to straddle the three image display devices 208 ′, or the first decorative design may be displayed on the first image display device 2081. A part of the decorative design may be configured to straddle the second image display device 2082 (or the third image display device 2083), and among the first decorative symbols displayed on the first image display device 2081 Only the middle symbol may be configured to straddle the second image display device 2082 (or the third image display device 2083).

  The timing shown in FIG. 6B is the first animation (special symbol) in the first image display device 2081 that is visible to the player from between the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083. Is a state in which a stop-swing animation and a medium-scheming animation) are being executed. Further, the first animation in this case is an animation including a button effect animation, and a button image BG on the front of the special symbol (so as to overlap), an image suggesting button operation (here, “Press!”) And an elapsed time notification image TG are displayed.

  At this timing, the first animation is executed on the first image display device 2081 so that the player cannot visually recognize the first decorative symbol. On the other hand, in the second image display device 2082, at this timing, the display of the second decorative symbol in the state shown in FIG. ), A special symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol) is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208k, and a decorative symbol (in this example, “decoration 7”) is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display region 208l, and the execution of the continuous effect (pseudo-continuous effect) is started. Is informed of the decision. In FIG. 339, all the second decorative symbols are in the state shown in FIG. 329 (o).

  In this example, the first animation is executed only on the first image display device 2081, but a part thereof may be executed on the second image display device 2082 and / or the third image display device 2083.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 5C, in response to the operation of the chance button 136, an effect of notifying that a continuous effect (here, a pseudo-continuous effect) is performed (in this example, a long scroll “ The notice effect in which the characters “continue” are displayed is executed. Behind the notice effect, a temporary stop display of the first decorative symbol is performed, and the left symbol (“decoration 6”) and the right symbol (“decoration 7”) are visible to the player. The symbol is overlapped with the notice effect and is not visible to the player.

  This notice effect is displayed across the three image display devices 208 ′. That is, a part of the notice effect (in this example, a part of the scroll) is also displayed on the second image display device 2082, but the second decorative design is displayed overlapping the notice effect. The decorative design is visible to the player. In other words, the first decorative symbol (particularly the middle symbol) of the first image display device 2081 is not visible to the player, but the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped by the second decorative symbol (the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed). Is recognized by the player.

  In this embodiment, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is displayed across a plurality of image display devices 208 ′, but the special symbol or button image does not straddle the plurality of image display devices 208 ′. The image is displayed on the one-image display device 2081. Here, in this embodiment, “displayed over a plurality of image display devices 208 ′” includes “displayed over a plurality of all image display devices 208 ′”. In other words, as shown in FIG. 5A, the first image display device 2081, the second image display device 2082, and the third image display device with the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083 separated from each other. This means that the first decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner across 2083.

  In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the structure by which the scroll display of the symbol (for example, middle symbol) with a 1st decoration symbol is displayed ranging over several image display apparatus 208 'may be sufficient. In addition, you may replace the structure which performs the button effect shown in FIG. 334 with a present Example.

(Example L-2)
The effect examples shown in (d) to (e) of the figure are examples in which the notice effect is executed by the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 6D, the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083 slide and move toward each other, abut (adjacent up and down), and the first decorative design is visually recognized by the player. It is a disabled state. Even at this timing, it is possible for the player to recognize the temporary stop state of the decorative symbol (the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed) by the second decorative symbol.

The timing shown in FIG. 5E is a state in which the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083 are separated and return to the initial position. At this timing, the same display as in FIG.
(Example L-3)
FIG. 339 (g) to FIG. 11 (h) show other examples of effects.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5G corresponds to the timing shown in FIG. 4C, and a continuous effect (here, a pseudo-continuous effect) is performed in response to the operation of the chance button 136. This is a state in which an effect of notifying that (in this example, a notice effect in which the characters “continue” are displayed on the scroll) is being executed. The notice effect is executed only by the first image display device 2081, and behind that, a temporary stop display of the first decorative symbol is performed, and the left symbol (“decoration 6”) and the right symbol (“decoration 7”) are displayed. Although it is visible to the player, the middle symbol is overlapped by the notice effect, and is not visible to the player.

  At this timing, the second decorative symbol is displayed on the second image display device 2082, and the player recognizes that the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped (the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped) by the second decorative symbol. It is possible.

  The timing shown in FIG. 11H is a state in which the second image display device 2082 slides downward and overlaps a part of the notice effect displayed on the first image display device 2081 (above the scroll). . In this case, a part of the notice effect displayed on the first image display device 2081 is also displayed on the second image display device 2082, and the entirety of the notice effect is visible to the player.

  In addition, the second decorative symbol moves relatively downward as the second image display device 2082 moves, but does not overlap with the notice effect displayed on the two-image display device 2082, and is visually recognized by the player. It is possible.

(Example L-4)
FIGS. 339 (i) to (j) show other examples of effects. In this example, the second decorative symbol is displayed above the first decorative symbol of the first image display device 2081.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5I is a state in which the first decorative design is displayed on the first image display device 2081 and a notice effect is executed overlapping with a part thereof. Behind the notice effect, a temporary stop display of the first decorative symbol is performed, and the left symbol (“decoration 6”) and the right symbol (“decoration 7”) are visible to the player. The symbol is overlapped with the notice effect and is not visible to the player.

  On the other hand, it moves to the 1st image display apparatus 2081, a 2nd decoration symbol is displayed above the 1st decoration symbol, and it can be visually recognized by a player.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6J is a state in which the second image display device 2082 slides downward and overlaps a part of the notice effect displayed on the first image display device 2081 (above the scroll). . In this case, a part of the announcement effect displayed on the first image display device 2081 is also displayed on the second image display device 2082, and the entire announcement effect is visible to the player.

  On the other hand, the second decorative symbol displayed on the first image display device 2081 is overlapped by the movement of the second image display device 2082, and a part of the second decorative symbol is not visible to the player.

(Production example L-5)
FIG. 339 (k) to FIG. 11 (l) show other examples of effects. The timing shown in FIG. 10 (k) is the same as the timing shown in FIG. 10 (i), and the second decorative symbol moves to the first image display device 2081 and is displayed above the first decorative symbol. .

  The timing shown in FIG. 6L is a state in which the second image display device 2082 slides downward and overlaps a part of the notice effect displayed on the first image display device 2081 (above the scroll). . In this case, a part of the announcement effect displayed on the first image display device 2081 is also displayed on the second image display device 2082, and the entire announcement effect is visible to the player.

  At this timing, the second decorative symbol displayed on the first image display device 2081 moves to the second image display device 2082 and is visible to the player.

  The timing at which the second decorative symbol moves may be before the second image display device 2082 is overlapped, may be at the same time as the overlap, or overlaps the second image display device 2082. It may be after.

  Thus, in the present embodiment (FIG. (A) to (c), FIG. (D) to (e), (g) to (h)), there are a plurality of special symbols. Displayed on each of the image display devices (here, the first image display device 2081 and the second image display device 2082), and the other image (here, the image of the notice effect) is displayed only on the front of one of the special symbols. The notice effect is displayed across a plurality of image display devices 208 ′ by the movement of the second image display device 2082 (or the third image display device 2083).

  In this embodiment (FIG. (K) to (l)), the image display device (here, the second image display device 2082) is moved and another image display device (here, the first image display device is here). In the case of overlapping the second decorative symbol displayed in 2081), the second decorative symbol moves to the second image display device 2082 and maintains a state that can be recognized by the player. In this case, the other display (for example, the first decorative design) does not move to the second image display device 2082, but the other display (for example, the image of the notice effect) that is overlapped by the movement of the second image display device 2082 (Part of the image) is displayed on the second image display device 2082 (moved to the second image display device 2082).

  Further, as shown in FIGS. (I) to (j), the second decorative design may not move even if it is overlapped by the moving second image display device 2082.

<Example M>
FIG. 340 is a diagram showing another example of effects centered on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment step by step.
(Example of production M-1)
The same figure (b)-the same figure (e) are the example of effects during a big hit.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5B is a state before the big hit game is started, and a jackpot symbol combination (for example, “1” is displayed as the first decorative symbol in the first symbol display area 208X of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 2081. “Decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”) is temporarily stopped and the built-in LED of the chance button 136 is rainbow-colored. In the second symbol display area 208Y of the second image display device (left sub liquid crystal) 2082, a second decorative symbol having the same contents as the first decorative symbol is displayed as shown in the lower diagram of FIG.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5C is a state of a big hit game (for example, during a round game), and an effect during a big hit is executed in the main liquid crystal 2081 (including the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083). Yes. During the big hit game, in principle, the second decorative symbol is not displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 4D is a state in which the big hit game is continued, but is a state in which the error is notified by the occurrence of an error (for example, a lower pan full tank error). The error notification is, for example, an error display E1 on the main liquid crystal 2081 (in this example, display of characters “please remove the ball”). In this case, for example, the left sub-liquid crystal 2082 displays the second decorative symbol (decorative symbol in which the big hit symbol combination (for example, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”) is temporarily stopped and displayed).

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E is a state in which the error display E1 in the main liquid crystal 2081 is not displayed due to the cancellation of the error. At this timing, the second decorative symbol is also not displayed again.

  In this case, in FIG. 4D, the timing at which the second decorative symbol is displayed (first timing) and the timing at which the error display E1 is displayed (second timing) may be the same timing. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

  In FIG. 9E, the timing at which the second decorative symbol is not displayed (first timing) and the timing at which the error display E1 is not displayed (second timing) may be the same timing. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

(Example of production M-2)
Next, (g) to (l) in the figure are examples of effects in the case of performing effects using the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 5G, in the first symbol display area 208X of the main liquid crystal 2081, the same symbol (for example, “decoration 1”) is temporarily stopped for the right symbol and the left symbol, and the middle symbol is changing. Thus, the reach production has been started. In this case, for example, in the second symbol display area 208Y of the left sub liquid crystal 2082, the second decorative symbol having the same symbol combination as the first decorative symbol (the state shown in FIG. 5F) is displayed.

  The timing shown in FIGS. 11H to 11L is a state in which the middle symbol countdown display is executed in the middle symbol display area 208b of the first symbol display area 208X. On the other hand, in the second symbol display area 208Y, the second decorative symbol continues to be displayed in the state shown in FIG. 5F (the countdown display is not performed). Thus, in the case of performing an effect using the middle symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b of the first symbol display area 208X (not limited to the countdown display), the middle symbol fluctuates in the second symbol display area 208Y. The display may be continued.

(Example of production M-3)
Next, (m) to (o) in the figure are examples of effects when a triple line reach effect is performed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (m) is a state in which a triple line reach effect by the first decorative symbol is being executed, and in this case, the second decorative symbol is not displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 9 (n) is a state in which the turning effect of the line with the first decorative symbol (in this example, “decoration 7”) is being executed. In this case, as shown in the lower diagram of FIG. 9 (n), the second decorative symbol is displayed in the same symbol combination as the decorative symbol of the line (in this example, “decoration 7”).

  The timing shown in FIG. 5 (o) is a state in which the turning effect of another line of the first decorative design (in this example, “decoration 8”) is being executed. In this case, the second decorative symbol is not displayed. Is displayed.

  In this example, the second decorative design may be displayed when a certain line is produced in the ripple line reach, and the second decorative design may be hidden in the case of double line reach.

  In addition, in the same figure (n), the timing (1st timing) at which a 2nd decoration symbol is displayed, and the start timing (2nd timing) of the roaring effect of a 1st decoration symbol are the same timing. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

  In FIG. 5 (o), the timing at which the second decorative symbol is not displayed (first timing) and the timing at which the first decorative symbol is turned on (second timing) are the same timing. Alternatively, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

(Example of production M-4)
FIG. 341 (b) to FIG. 341 (e) are examples of effects when the second decorative symbol is displayed, for example, between FIG. 328 (g) and FIG. 328 (h).

  The timing shown in FIG. 6B is the same as the timing shown in FIG. 328 (g), and the main liquid crystal 2081 is in a state where the scroll display of the middle symbol (special symbol) is being executed.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 5C, in the main liquid crystal 2081, the first decorative symbol is temporarily stopped (the special symbol is stopped), and the second decorative symbol is also in the same state as the first decorative symbol (FIG. 329 (o) state). At this timing, the main liquid crystal 2081 performs an effect (hereinafter, referred to as “display group integrated effect”) in which the display mode is integrally changed for a plurality of displays (display group G) in the display area. As an example of the display group integrated production, the display group G can be integrally enlarged, reduced, tilted, and rotated (production of one or a combination of these), or the display group can be shaken integrally. An effect to be displayed (shake vision effect) or an animation effect including these scenes. In this example, as shown in FIG. 5C, a display group integrated effect is performed to incline the display group G integrally.

  Specifically, a plurality of displays in the display area of the main liquid crystal 2081 (a plurality of display groups G including a background display) are integrally tilted with respect to an outer frame (physical frame) of the main liquid crystal 2081 ( Scene). In such a display group integrated production, a plurality of display groups G including a background display are slightly reduced and tilted integrally, so that a space is generated in the actual display area, and the space is filled with, for example, black. Is displayed.

  In this example, the second decorative design is displayed on the main liquid crystal 2081 even while the display group integrated effect is being executed. In this example, the second decorative design is not inclined and is displayed in a predetermined area. The display content (symbol combination) of the second decorative symbol is the same as the display content (symbol combination) of the first decorative symbol displayed in the display group integrated production. In this example, “decoration 6-special symbol ( It is a symbol combination of a decorative symbol of "Pseudo-continuous symbol)-Decoration 7".

  The second decorative design is displayed so as to overlap a space (black filled display) generated by the inclination of the display group G over at least a part of the inclined display group G. The second decorative symbol may be displayed so as to overlap only in the space (black fill display) generated by the inclination of the display group G, or overlap only in the inclined display group G. It may be displayed. Further, the second decorative design may be displayed with an inclination at the same angle as the display group G.

  Even if the display group integrated effect may make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the first decorative design, the combination of the decorative design (its state) may be recognized by the player using the second decorative design (second). It is possible to make a ballet with decorative designs).

  The timing shown in FIG. 6D is a state in which the display group integrated production is finished. At this timing, the display group G displayed in an inclined manner returns to the normal display state, and the second decorative symbol continues to be displayed at the same position. In this example, a part of the first decorative symbol (“decoration 6” on the left symbol) that has returned to the normal display is overlapped with the second decorative symbol. The state of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol is the same.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6E is the same as the timing shown in FIG. 328H, and the second decorative symbol is not displayed.

  In addition, in the same figure (c), the timing which the display start of the 2nd decoration symbol (1st timing) and the start timing (2nd timing) of a display group integrated production may be the same timing. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

(Example of production M-5)
(G) to (i) in the figure are examples of effects when the design of the decorative symbols changes in, for example, the special figure 1 variable game and the special figure 2 variable game.

  For example, the maximum number of reserves is 8, and the specifications differ between the special figure 1 variable game and the special figure 2 variable game (for example, the special 1 variable game has a probability variation of 50% and the special 2 variable game has a probability variation of 100%, or 16R big hit In other cases, the design of at least a part of the decorative symbol may be different between the decorative symbol that performs the variable display of the special figure 1 and the decorative symbol that performs the variable display of the special symbol 2. The present embodiment is a display example of the second decorative symbol in such a case.

  Specifically, in this example, the floating game of the special figure 2 has a higher advantage than the floating game of the special figure 1, and for example, the special figure 2 has a symbol combination of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”. 16R is a big hit in the case of the symbol combination of “decoration 3-decoration 3—decoration 3”, whereas FIG. 1 shows 16R only in the case of the symbol combination of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”. It will be a big hit.

  Further, it is assumed that the design for the 16R jackpot is different in design from at least a part of other decorative designs. For example, the mark M indicating the 16R big hit symbol is given to the right symbol (“decoration 7”) in FIG. That is, in the variable game of the special figure 1, the mark M is given only to the decoration symbol “decoration 7”, and in the special game of the special figure 2, the mark M is given to the decoration symbols “decoration 3” and “decoration 7”. Is done.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (g) is a combination of symbols shifted to the first symbol display area 208X of the main liquid crystal 2081 as a result of the variable game shown in FIG. 1 (for example, the symbol combination “decoration 3-decoration 8-decoration 7”). The first decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed.

  Since it is the variable game of special figure 1, the mark M is given only to the right design ("decoration 7") of the first decorative design, and the mark M is not given to the left design ("decoration 3").

  At this timing, the special figure 1 hold is 2, the special figure 2 hold is 2 (the total of the hold is 4), and the icon display area 800 displays the change icon h0 at the right end thereof, and the change icon On the left of h0, hold icons h11 and h12 corresponding to the hold in FIG. 1 and hold icons h21 and h22 corresponding to the hold in FIG. 2 are alternately displayed.

  In the right sub-liquid crystal 2083, the second reserved number display ("2 2" in this example) shown in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2 is performed.

  In the left sub-liquid crystal 2082, as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 10G, the second decorative symbol in the same state as the first decorative symbol is (temporarily) stopped and displayed.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 6H, the variable game of the special figure 1 is stopped, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are out of combination (for example, the symbol combination “decoration 3-decoration 8-decoration 7”). Are stopped and displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (i) is a state in which one hold in FIG. 2 has been consumed and the variable game in FIG. 2 has started. In the first symbol display area 208X of the main liquid crystal 2081, the decorative symbol fluctuation display (first fluctuation display) of the special figure 2 is started, and in the icon display area 800, the fluctuation icon h0 corresponding to the fluctuation is displayed at the left end. On the left, hold icons h11, h22, and h12 are displayed. In the right sub liquid crystal 2083, the second reserved number display (in this example, “2 1”) of the special drawings 1 and 2 is performed.

  Further, in the left sub-liquid crystal 2082, as shown in the right diagram of (i), the second decorative symbol of the symbol combination (for example, the symbol combination of “decoration 3-decoration 8-decoration 7”) is continuously stopped and displayed. However, since the variable display of the special symbol 2 is being executed, the mark M is given to the “decoration 3” of the left symbol and the “decoration 7” of the right symbol of the second decorative symbol. That is, the mark M is added to “decoration 3” of the left symbol of the second decorative symbol as compared with the state of FIG.

  When the floating game of the special figure 1 is changed to the floating game of the special figure 2, the mark M is also given to the “decoration 3” which is the 16R jackpot symbol and is notified to the player, but in the first symbol display area 208X, the high speed is displayed. It is very difficult to recognize the decorative design to which the mark M has been given since the fluctuation has started.

  Even in such a case, if the corresponding decorative design (in this example, “decoration 3”) is included in the second decorative design that is stopped and displayed, the mark M is added to the decorative design. Thus, it is possible to notify the player of the 16R jackpot symbol.

  It should be noted that, in the first decorative design and the second decorative design, the manner in which the design is switched (the manner in which the mark M is applied and erased) and the timing in which the design is switched (the timing in which the mark M is applied and erased) are made different. It may be the same or the same.

(Example of production M-6)
FIG. 5M is another example of the second decorative design, for example, a display during execution of the super reach effect.

  In general, for example, a player is often not interested in a combination of decorative symbols (which symbol is used as a template) during execution of a super reach effect. In such a case, since it is less necessary to report accurate information in the second decorative symbol, an effect using the second decorative symbol may be performed.

  In this example, for example, a special display EX (here, as a notice effect) is overlapped with the second decorative symbol (the same state as the right diagram in FIG. 335 (g)) so that the player can hardly see the second decorative symbol. Then, an effect of displaying “CHANCE” is displayed.

  Further, in addition to the second decorative symbol, another decorative symbol (third decorative symbol whose display size is smaller than the first decorative symbol) may be displayed, which makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize (notice effect is provided). Instead of the second decorative symbol (executed), the state of the decorative symbol may be displayed in the third decorative symbol. In this example, in the third symbol display area 208Z provided in the first image display device 2081, the third decorative symbol shown in the left diagram of FIG. Status) is displayed.

<Example N>
FIG. 342 is a diagram showing another example of the effect centering on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment in a stepwise manner, in the case where the ball removal display E2 and the second decorative design are displayed. It is a production example.

  Note that FIG. 342 illustrates an effect example in the case of performing the ball removal display E2 in the configuration described so far, and the description of the above-described configuration is omitted.

  Here, the ball removal display E2 is a display that is displayed on the image display device 208 ′ when the lower pan full error has occurred, and notifies the player of the occurrence of the error, and is one of the error displays. The lower plate full tank error is an error that occurs when the lower plate 128 is full. When the lower plate full state is resolved by operating the ball discharge lever 132, the lower plate full tank error is cleared and the ball removal display E2 is displayed. Is also hidden.

(Example N-1)
The timings shown in FIGS. 2B and 2C correspond to the timings in FIGS. 328 (i) and 328 (j), respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 6B, at the timing when the width of the special symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol) gradually starts to be enlarged, for example, a part of the first decorative symbol of the main liquid crystal 2081 (in this example, the left symbol The ball removal display E2 is displayed so as to overlap with (part).

  On the other hand, at this timing, the pseudo continuous symbol does not overlap with the ball removal display E2. Further, neither the icon display area 800 nor the explanation display area TT1 overlaps the ball removal display E2.

  Although the second symbol display area 208Y is displayed on the left sub liquid crystal 2082, the display start timing (first timing) and the display start timing (second timing) of the ball removal display E2 are the same timing. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

  As shown in FIG. 6C, when the enlarged display of the pseudo-continuous symbols proceeds, a part of the pseudo-continuous symbols is overlapped by the ball removal display E2. At this timing, the second decorative design (the state shown in FIG. 329 (o)) is displayed on the left sub-liquid crystal 2082.

  The display start timing (first timing) of the second decorative symbol in the state shown in FIG. 329 (o) and the timing (second timing) at which a part of the pseudo continuous symbol is overlapped by the ball removal display E2 are as follows. The same timing may be used, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

(Example N-2)
The timings shown in FIGS. 5 (e) and (f) correspond to the timings shown in FIGS. 331 (d) and 331 (f), respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 4E, in the middle symbol display area 208b, the special symbol (character (princess)) is stopped and displayed (temporarily). A ball removal display E2 is displayed above the display area TT1. In this case, the ball removal display E2 does not overlap with any display.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 5F, the mini character (princess), which is a display related to the continuous performance, starts displaying and overlaps the ball removal display E2.

(Example N-3)
The timings shown in (h) and (i) in the figure correspond to the timings in FIGS. 334 (d) and 334 (e), respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 11H, at the timing when the chance button 136 is operated (or just before the operation) within the valid reception period of the operation of the chance button 136, the ball removal display E2 is displayed below the special symbol. At this timing, the ball removal display E2 does not overlap with any display.

  The display start timing (first timing) of the second decorative symbol (here, the state shown in FIG. 329 (p)) and the display start timing (second timing) of the ball removal display E2 are the same timing. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

  Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 5I, the special symbol resumes the enlarged display by the operation of the chance button 136, and the ball removal display E2 overlaps the enlarged display. The second decorative symbol at this timing is the state shown in FIG. 329 (o). In this case, the display start timing (first timing) of the second decorative symbol (FIG. 329 (o)) and the timing at which a part of the pseudo-continuous symbol is overlapped by the ball removal display E2 (second timing). May be the same timing, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

(Example N-4)
The timings shown in FIGS. 3 (k) to (m) correspond to the timings shown in FIGS. 338 (c) to 338 (e), respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 10 (k), at the timing when the second decorative design (the state of FIG. 329 (o)) starts to be displayed on the main liquid crystal 2081 and a part thereof is overlapped by the left sub-liquid crystal 2082. The ball removal display E2 is performed below the first decorative symbol (for example, the left symbol). At this timing, the ball removal display E2 does not overlap with any display.

  Even if the display start timing (first timing) of the second decorative symbol (the state shown in FIG. 329 (o)) and the display start timing (second timing) of the ball removal display E2 are the same timing. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

  Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 6L, the left sub-liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub-liquid crystal 2083 slide and move so that the left sub-liquid crystal 2082 overlaps the ball removal display E2. In this case, at least a part of the ball removal display E2 is difficult for the player to visually recognize.

  In addition, the timing shown in FIG. 6M is a state where the left sub-liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub-liquid crystal 2083 are in contact (adjacent) and stopped. Are overlapped, and at least a part of it is difficult for the player to see. Note that at least the different parts of the ball removal display E2 are overlapped by the left sub-liquid crystal 2082 between the timing shown in FIG. That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 11L, at least the left end of the ball removal display E2 is overlapped by the left sub liquid crystal 2082 (the right end is not overlapped), and at the timing shown in FIG. At least the right end portion of the blank display E2 is overlapped by the left sub liquid crystal 2082 (the left end portion is not overlapped). The second decorative design (FIG. 329 (o)) is exposed from the left sub-liquid crystal 2082, and is visible to the player.

  Further, there may be a timing at which both ends of the ball removal display E2 are not overlapped by the left sub-liquid crystal 2082 and are visible to the player at the timing between FIG. .

(Example N-5)
The timings shown in (o) and (p) correspond to the timings shown in FIGS. 339 (i) and 339 (j), respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 10 (o), the first image display device 2081 displays the first decorative design, and overlaps a part of the first design symbol at the timing when the notice effect is executed. The ball removal display E2 is performed below. At this timing, the second decorative symbol (the state shown in FIG. 329 (o)) is also displayed below the second image display device 2082 (from the ball-free display E2 at a substantially symmetrical position with a notice effect (display) in between. .

  Even if the display start timing (first timing) of the second decorative symbol (the state shown in FIG. 329 (o)) and the display start timing (second timing) of the ball removal display E2 are the same timing. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

  In addition, the timing shown in FIG. 6 (p) is a state in which the second image display device 2082 slides downward and overlaps with a part of the notice effect displayed on the first image display device 2081 (above the scroll). It is. In this case, a part of the announcement effect displayed on the first image display device 2081 is also displayed on the second image display device 2082, and the entire announcement effect is visible to the player. Further, the second image display device 2082 that has moved partially overlaps the ball removal display E2, but the overlapped portion is also displayed on the second image display device 2082, and the ball removal display E2 is It becomes visible to the player as a whole.

  On the other hand, the second decorative pattern (the state shown in FIG. 329 (o)) displayed on the first image display device 2081 is overlapped by the movement of the second image display device 2082, and a part thereof is a player. Is invisible.

  As described above, in this production example (production example N), the display example of the ball removal display E2 has been described. However, the ball removal display E2 is hidden when the ball removal operation is performed and the lower dish full tank error is resolved. (Erased).

  In addition, when the ball removal display E2 is performed, a notification sound may be output from the speaker 120 together.

  Further, instead of the ball removal display E2, another error display (for example, a door opening error) may be displayed.

  Moreover, in the production example N-1 to the production example N-5, the ball removal display E2 is displayed at a different position, but as an example of the ball removal display E2 being displayed, the production example N-1 to the production example N- The display positions of 5 are listed. Actually, the ball removal display E2 is displayed at one predetermined location. For example, in the pachinko machine 100 configured to display the ball removal display E2 at the positions shown in FIGS. 5E and 5F, when the effects shown in FIGS. The ball removal display E2 is displayed above the explanation display area TT1 in FIGS.

  Thus, by displaying the ball removal display E2 in accordance with the second decorative symbol, the special symbol, the continuous effect (display about the continuous effect, a part of the continuous effect), etc. of the present embodiment, the player However, by focusing on the ball removal display E2, it may be possible to easily recognize the second decorative symbol, the special symbol, the continuous effect, and the like of the present embodiment.

  Alternatively, the player can display the ball removal display E2 in accordance with the second decorative symbol, the special symbol, the continuous effect (display related to the continuous effect, a partial display of the continuous effect), and the like. 2 In some cases, it is possible to make it easier to recognize the ball removal display E2 by paying attention to decorative symbols, special symbols, continuous effects, and the like.

  Further, by displaying the ball removal display E2, the user is motivated to erase the ball removal display E2 at an early stage and enjoy the effect display performed on the image display device 208 ′, and eliminate the lower plate full tank error (ball removal) ) May be prompted.

  In addition, by displaying the ball removal display E2, it is possible to focus attention on an effect display that is important when attention is paid to the ball removal display E2, and it may be possible to give a chance to remove the ball after the effect display ends. is there.

<Example of image control>
FIG. 343 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of image control related to the display of the second decorative symbol of the present embodiment.

  FIG. 4A is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the VRAM 436, and FIG. 4B is a schematic diagram showing the image display device 208 ′ (left sub liquid crystal 2082, main liquid crystal 2081, and right sub liquid crystal 2083). .

  FIGS. 7C and 7D are schematic diagrams for explaining general image control, and FIGS. 9E to 11H are adopted for partial display of the present embodiment. It is the schematic explaining the image control performed.

  As shown in FIGS. 4A and 4B, the VRAM 436 includes frame buffers A, B, and R corresponding to the left sub liquid crystal 2082 (B), the main liquid crystal 2081 (A), and the right sub liquid crystal 2083 (C), respectively. C and a work area W (for example, an area in which image data compressed in the ROM 408 is expanded and stored). Actually, two sets of frame buffers A, B, and C are provided in order to switch the display alternately (for swapping).

  For example, as shown in FIGS. 342 (g) and (h), when a second decorative symbol having the same symbol combination as the first decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal 2081 is displayed on the left sub liquid crystal 2082, for example, Then, image control as shown in FIGS. 343 (c) and (d) is performed.

  First, as shown in FIG. 343 (c), the VDP 434 reads out the image data of the decorative design (for example, the decorative design variation display shown in FIG. 342 (g)) stored in the ROM 406, and uses the work area W of the VRAM 436. Then, the image data is temporarily stored while being decompressed to generate a display image. Then, the display image is developed in the first set of frame buffers A1 and B1 designated in the drawing area. At this time, for example, the frame buffer A1 is expanded at the same magnification, and the frame buffer B1 is expanded and contracted in accordance with the size of the second decorative symbol.

  By swapping the designation of the drawing areas of the frame buffers A1 and B1 and the second set of frame buffers A2 and B2, the images stored in the frame buffers A1 and B1 that are not designated as the drawing areas become the main liquid crystal 2081 and It is displayed on the left sub liquid crystal 2082.

  On the other hand, for example, in the productions such as FIGS. 328 (h) to (j), the first decorative symbol (the decorative symbol including the middle symbol animation display (first animation display)) and the second decorative symbol (middle symbol). The display is different from the decorative design including the temporary stop display of the symbol.

  In this case, the VDP 434 reads the image data of the decorative design (for example, the first decorative design shown in FIG. 328 (h)) stored in the ROM 406 as shown in FIG. The image data is used and temporarily stored while being decompressed to generate a display image.

  Then, as shown in (f) of the figure, the generated display image is reduced (or kept as it is) to generate another set.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 5G, a part of one display image (which becomes the first decorative design) is processed (in this case, the image of the middle design is enlarged), and the other ( The display image that becomes the second decorative design is processed as necessary (for example, reduction of the image).

  The first set of frame buffers A1 in which the display image of the first decorative design after processing and the display image of the second decorative design (after processing) are designated as the drawing area as shown in FIG. , B1 respectively (with the same size), and swapping the designation of the drawing areas of the frame buffers A1, B1 and the second set of frame buffers A2, B2, so that the frame buffer A1, which is not designated as a drawing area, The image stored in B1 is displayed on the main liquid crystal 2081 and the left sub liquid crystal 2082. Thereafter, the same processing is continuously performed in accordance with the progress of the production (animation).

  As described above, the gaming table (for example, pachinko machine 100) according to the embodiment of the present invention includes display means (for example, the image display device 208 ′, the first image display device 2081, the second image display device 2082, A gaming machine equipped with a third image display device 2083), wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display, and one of the plurality of types of display is a first decoration. This is a variation display (hereinafter referred to as “first variation display”) of a symbol (for example, a decorative symbol displayed in the first symbol display region 208X (the symbol display regions 208a to 208c)), One of the displays is a variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second variation display”) of a second decoration symbol (for example, a decoration symbol displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y (the symbol display areas 208k to 208g)). .)so The second decorative symbol (for example, the second decorative symbol at the time of final display, at least one second decorative symbol at the time of final display, the middle symbol illustrated in FIG. 328 (m), FIG. 329 (o), etc.) The first decorative symbol (for example, the first decorative symbol at the time of finalizing display, at least one first decorative symbol at the time of finalizing, FIG. 328 (m), etc., than the decorative symbol displayed in the display area 208k) The display size of the decorative symbol displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b shown in FIG. 5 is larger, and in the first variable display, the first animation display (for example, special symbols in at least one of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c). An animation may be displayed that indicates whether the symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped) (for example, a special symbol stop animation or a middle symbol animation). Thus, the gaming machine is characterized in that the second variation display is displayed in at least a part of the states in which the first animation display is displayed.

  Note that “the first animation display may be displayed in the first variation display” means that “the first animation display is started in the first variation display. Yes. In addition, the first variation display and the first animation display may be displayed at different timings, or may not be displayed at different timings.

  In addition, “the second variation display is displayed in at least a part of the state where the first animation display is displayed” means “the first animation display is displayed. In at least some of the states, a display in which the second variable display is started may be made. " Further, the second variation display and the first animation display may be displayed at different timings, or may not be displayed at different timings.

  According to such a configuration, for example, when the first animation display is started, the contents of the first variation display (the type of decorative symbol) and the state (the presence or absence of the fixed display) are unconfirmed. Even if the content or state of the first variation display may be difficult for the player to see compared to the first animation or the second variation display, the first variation display causes the first variation display to The player may be able to recognize (guess) the content and state of the display, or the subsequent effects (for example, effects related to the jackpot expectation level) May be). Thereby, the interest of a player may be able to be improved.

  In addition, there are cases where the state of symbol variation can be accurately conveyed to the player by displaying the second decorative symbol.

  In addition, for advanced players who are accustomed to the game, the result of the presentation can be recognized at an early stage by displaying the second decorative symbol (first ballet), and the motivation for the game may be increased.

  In addition, the first animation display is one of the animation displays indicating whether or not the first symbol is stopped and displayed, and after the first animation display ends, the first symbol is displayed. The first symbol may be displayed in a stopped manner, and the first symbol is a first effect (for example, a continuous effect, a pseudo-continuous effect, a continuous notice effect, an effect shown in FIGS. 328 (p) to 328 (r), FIG. 331). (F) to a symbol related to the start of execution of the effects shown in FIG. 331 (h) (hereinafter referred to as “first effect symbols (for example, special symbols, pseudo-continuous symbols, middle symbols in FIG. 328 (h), FIG. d) medium symbol, FIG. 332 (p) medium symbol, etc.) ”).

  The first symbol may be one of the symbols displayed in the first variable display.

  In addition, “the first symbol may be stopped after the first animation display is finished” means that “the first symbol is stopped after the first animation display is finished”. Display may be made ".

  In addition, the first animation display and the first symbol stop display may be displayed at different timings, or may not be displayed at different timings.

  According to such a configuration, for example, when the first animation display is started, the first effect symbol related to the start of the execution of the first effect is stopped and displayed after the end of the first animation display. Even if it is undecided or it may be difficult for the player to see compared to the first animation or the second variation display, the first effect design is displayed by the second variation display. In some cases, the player may be able to recognize (guess) the first performance (for example, performance related to the big hit expectation) whether or not the display is stopped (the second variation display may cause the first May be possible). Thereby, the interest of a player may be able to be improved.

  In addition, for example, there may be a case where the state of the symbol variation can be accurately conveyed to the player by displaying the second decorative symbol while enhancing the player's interest by performing a continuous effect based on the stop display of the special symbol. .

  In addition, for advanced players who are accustomed to the game, the result of the presentation can be recognized at an early stage by displaying the second decorative symbol (first ballet), and the motivation for the game may be increased.

  In addition, the first symbol may not be stopped after the first animation display, and the first symbol may be stopped after the first animation display. Before the end of the animation display, the second symbol (eg, special symbol, pseudo-continuous symbol, middle symbol in the second symbol display area 208Y shown in FIG. 328 (j), FIG. 329 (o ) And the second symbol display area 208Y of FIG. 332 (d) are stopped and displayed, and the second symbol is the first symbol of the first effect symbol. It may be a separate design.

  The second symbol may be one symbol among symbols displayed in the second variable display.

  In addition, “After the first animation display ends, the first symbol may not be stopped and displayed” means that “the first symbol does not stop and display after the first animation display ends. , May be made. "

  Further, “before the end of the first animation display, the second symbol is stopped and displayed in the second variation display” means “the second variation display before the end of the first animation display”. The display in which the second symbol is stopped and displayed may be made. Further, the first animation display and the second symbol stop display may be displayed at different timings, or may not be displayed at different timings.

  According to such a configuration, for example, when the first effect design is stopped and displayed after the first animation display is finished, the first animation display is started, whereby the first animation display is started. After the end, even if it is uncertain whether or not the first effect symbol is displayed in a stopped state, or it may be difficult for the player to visually recognize the first animation or the second variation display, Whether or not the first effect symbol is stopped and displayed by the second symbol that is stopped and displayed in the second variation display, the player recognizes the first effect (for example, an effect related to the jackpot expectation). In some cases, it may be possible to make a (guess) (the second symbol of the second variation display may enable a first ballet). Thereby, the interest of a player may be able to be improved.

  In addition, for example, there may be a case where the state of the symbol variation can be accurately conveyed to the player by displaying the second decorative symbol while enhancing the player's interest by performing a continuous effect based on the stop display of the special symbol. .

  In addition, for advanced players who are accustomed to the game, the result of the presentation can be recognized at an early stage by displaying the second decorative symbol (first ballet), and the motivation for the game may be increased.

  Further, in the first variation display, a display in which the first symbol is enlarged (for example, a display as shown in FIGS. 328 (i) to 328 (l)) may be displayed. In the variable display, the display in which the second symbol is enlarged may not be displayed, and the first animation display may be a display including a display in which the first symbol is enlarged.

  In addition, after the first animation display is finished, a third symbol (for example, a decorative symbol different from the special symbol displayed in the middle symbol display region 208b of the first symbol display region 208X, as shown in FIG. 329 (l)). In the second variation display, when the third symbol is stopped and displayed after completion of the first animation display, the middle symbol “decoration 8” or the like of the middle symbol shown in FIG. The fourth symbol (for example, a decorative symbol different from the special symbol displayed in the middle symbol display region 208k of the second symbol display region 208Y, such as the symbol “decoration 8” of the middle symbol shown in FIG. 329 (q)). Is stopped and displayed, the third symbol is one symbol different from the first effect symbol, and the fourth symbol is one symbol different from the first effect symbol. Separate from the third design of It may be a symbol.

  Note that “the third symbol may be stopped and displayed after the end of the first animation display” means that “the third symbol is stopped and displayed after the end of the first animation display”. , May be made ". In addition, the first animation display and the third symbol stop display may be displayed at different timings, or may not be displayed at different timings.

  In addition, “the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the second variation display” means “the fourth symbol may be stopped and displayed in the second variation display”. It is.

  One of the plural types of displays is a display prompting to discharge the game ball (hereinafter referred to as “ball discharge display (for example, error display E1 shown in FIG. 340 (d))”). Yes, at least a part of the first animation display displayed in a state where the ball discharge display is displayed may be overlapped with the ball discharge display.

  In addition, during the display of the first animation display, at least a part of the display of the second variation display may be overlapped by the first animation display.

  Further, during the display of the first animation display, at least a part of the display of the first animation display may be overlapped by the second variation display.

  Further, during the display of the first animation display, at least a part of the display of the first variation display may be overlapped by the first animation display.

  Further, in the first variation display, a second animation display (for example, an animation display before the start of a continuous effect, an animation display shown in FIGS. 328 (n) and (o), an animation display shown in FIG. 331 (e), etc.) ) May be displayed.

In addition, a first display unit (for example, the first image display device 2081) and a second display unit (for example, the second image display device 2082) are provided, and the display unit is the first display unit. Yes, the first variation display may be displayed on the first display means, and the second variation display may be displayed on the second display means.
The game machine may be a pachinko machine.

  In addition, for example, the term “first x xx” such as “first display” and “second display” is merely named to improve readability, and “first x xx” is used. "Is not a special term.

  In addition, what was called a lamp | ramp and illumination until now is an example of a light emission means, and if a lamp | ramp emits light, such as LED and a cold cathode tube, it can replace.

  For example, the above embodiment can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that circulates and uses game balls enclosed in a game machine. For example, the pachinko machine may be an enclosed pachinko machine that encloses a sphere and circulates the enclosed sphere in the pachinko machine, and this enclosed pachinko machine uses the enclosed sphere as a launch ball, The ball payout may be executed by electronic display.

  Note that the items described in the above detailed description, in particular, the items described in the examples and the modifications can be combined.

  In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is used as an example of a game table, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine 2000 as shown in FIG.

  The game table according to the present invention corresponds to each reel shown in FIG. 344, “a plurality of types of symbols 2002, a plurality of reels 2002 that are rotationally driven, a start lever 2004 for instructing the rotation of the reels, and each reel. A stop button 2006 for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, lottery means for determining whether or not an internal winning of a plurality of types of winning combinations is won by lottery (winning prize internal lottery), and based on the lottery result of the lottery means The combination of symbols displayed by the reel stop control means (reel stop control processing) that performs stop control for stopping the rotation of the reels and the reels stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means corresponds to the winning combination. And determining means (winning determination process) for determining whether or not the symbol combination is predetermined, and when the symbol stop mode is a predetermined winning mode, In addition to payout control means (medal payout process 2008) for performing game medium payout processing for paying out game media to be played, the effect means 2010 for executing effects based on the lottery result of the lottery means is provided. A launching device 2014 that launches a ball into the game area 2012, a winning port 2016 configured to be able to enter a ball launched from the launching device, a detection means 2018 that detects a ball that has entered the winning port 2016, A payout means 2020 for paying out a ball when the detection means 2018 detects a ball, a variable display device 2022 for variably displaying a predetermined symbol (identification information), and a shutter 2024 movable to a position where the variable display device 2022 is shielded. And a movable body 2026 that operates in a predetermined operation mode, and the variable display device 2022 is designed to be triggered by a game ball entering the winning opening. And in is stopped and displayed after the change, it is also suitable to the slot machine 2000 ", which is the effect device 2010, such as to produce a game.

  The game table according to the present invention is shown in FIG. 345 (a). “Insert a bill into the bill insertion slot 3002, execute the lottery based on the bet 3004 and the start 3006 operation, and display the lottery result on the lottery result display device 3008. Then, at the time of winning, the number of bonus coins is added to the remaining credit number, and when cashout 3009 is selected, a casino machine 3000 that issues a receipt with a code corresponding to the remaining credit number from the receipt issuing machine 3010. It may be.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 5B, the cellular phone 4000 having a storage unit for storing the electronic data for realizing the present invention, and the electronic data for realizing the present invention as shown in FIG. The present invention may be applied to a portable game machine 5000 provided with a storage unit for storing the image data and a home video game machine 6000 provided with a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention.

  More specifically, the cellular phone 7000 in FIG. 5B includes an operation unit operated by the player, a data acquisition unit that acquires game-related data through a mobile phone line, and acquired game-related data (this book And a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  The portable game machine 5000 in FIG. 6C includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to the game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and acquired data related to the game (the present invention). And a control unit for controlling the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit. The home video game machine 6000 in FIG. 6D includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to the game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and acquired data about the game ( And a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 5E, the present invention may be applied to a data server 7000 that stores electronic data for realizing the present invention. In some cases, the electronic data for realizing the present invention is downloaded from the data server 7000 to the home video game machine 6000 shown in FIG.

  In addition, a game can be executed by applying the present invention to a game program that simulates the operation of a real machine such as a pachinko machine for a home game machine. In that case, a DVD-ROM, CD-ROM, FD (flexible disk), or any other recording medium can be used as a recording medium for recording the game program.

Furthermore, the present invention has been described by taking a pachinko machine and a slot machine as examples of game machines, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and may be applied to an arrangement ball game machine, a ball ball game machine, a smart ball, and the like.
The present invention according to the above embodiment can be summarized as follows.

(Appendix a1)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is means capable of displaying a certain type of line notice display,
The certain type of notice notice display is a display that may include a character display of contents related to a certain character,
A gaming table characterized in that a mini-game may be started in connection with the certain type of serif notice display.

(Appendix a2)
A game machine according to appendix a1,
With operating means,
The result of a certain mini game can be derived without operation of the operation means,
When a certain result (hereinafter referred to as “first result”) is derived as a result of a certain mini game, display of a certain effect display is started.
When a certain result (hereinafter referred to as “second result”) different from the first result is derived as a result of a certain mini game, the display of a certain effect display is not started. And
The variation display in which the display of a certain effect display is started by the derivation of the first result is more final than the variable display in which the display of a certain effect display is not started by the derivation of the second result. A game table characterized in that it is structured so as to be confirmed and displayed in a big hit mode.

(Appendix a3)
A game machine according to appendix a2,
The certain type of dialogue notice display is a display including a speech bubble,
The balloon may be displayed in a plurality of types,
One aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is a first aspect,
One aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is a second aspect,
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects,
Rather than a certain mini-game in which the balloon mode is started in connection with the certain type of serif notice display of the first mode, the balloon mode is the certain type of serif of the second mode. A game table characterized in that a certain mini-game started in connection with a notice display is configured such that the first result is more easily derived.

(Appendix a4)
A gaming machine according to appendix a3,
A game table configured to play a mini-game in the balloon.

(Appendix a5)
The game stand according to appendix a3 or a4,
A certain type of character display representing a character's speech can be displayed in the balloon,
A plurality of types of character display can be displayed as the certain type of character display,
One character display of the plurality of types of character display is a first character display,
One character display of the plurality of types of character display is a second character display,
The first character display and the second character display are different character displays,
The variable display in which the second character display is displayed is finally displayed in the big hit mode rather than the variable display in which the first character display is displayed without displaying the second character display. A game table characterized by being easily configured.

(Appendix a6)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a3 to a5,
A game table configured to display a suggestion of the form of the speech balloon before the display of the certain type of notice notice display is started.

(Appendix a7)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a2 to a6,
A game table characterized in that a certain effect display is a display of the certain type of line notice display.

(Appendix a8)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a2 to a7,
A game table, wherein a display about a certain mini-game may be erased after a certain mini-game is started and before a result is derived.

(Appendix a9)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a2 to a8,
Provided with a symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol variation display,
The display means is configured to be able to display a decorative symbol variation display corresponding to the symbol variation display,
The symbol display means is configured to be able to display a symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “losing symbol variation display”) in which the final symbol pattern is finally displayed.
The symbol display means is configured to be able to display a symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as a “hit symbol variation display”) in which the jackpot symbol mode is finally displayed.
The display means is configured to be able to display a decorative symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as a “loss variation variation display”) displayed in correspondence with the loss symbol variation display.
The display means is configured to be able to display a decorative symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as a “hit variation variation display”) displayed corresponding to the jackpot symbol variation display.
The loss variation display is a variation display that finally displays a fixed display of a certain combination of decorative symbols (hereinafter referred to as “first fixed display”).
The jackpot variation display is a variation display that finally displays a certain combination of decorative symbols different from the first confirmation display (hereinafter referred to as “second confirmation display”).
The display of the first fixed display is started in response to the end of the loss symbol variation display,
In response to the end of the jackpot symbol variation display, the display of the second confirmation display is started,
“Variable display in which display of a certain effect display is started by derivation of the first result, rather than a variable display in which the display of a certain effect display is not started by the derivation of the second result” Is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in a big win mode in the end ”means that“ the display of a certain effect display is not started by the derivation of the second result ”than the variation display of the decorative pattern. The display of the decorative design whose display of the certain effect display is started by the derivation of the first result is configured so that the second fixed display can be displayed more easily. A game table that features

(Appendix a10)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a2 to a9,
A game table characterized by being configured to be able to display a display suggesting that a certain effect display is displayed before a certain mini-game is started.

(Appendix a11)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a2 to a10,
It is configured to be able to execute the timer notice effect,
A game table, wherein the certain effect display may be displayed in association with the timer notice effect.

(Appendix a12)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a2 to a11,
The game table, wherein the certain effect display is a display that is started only by derivation of the first result.

(Appendix a13)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a1 to a12,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a display representing a plurality of types of certain characters,
One of the displays representing the plurality of types of characters is a first character display,
One of the displays representing the plurality of types of characters is a second character display,
The first character display and the second character display are separate displays,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of decorative symbols,
One of the plurality of types of decorative symbols is a decorative symbol including the first character display (hereinafter referred to as “certain decorative symbol”).
Among the certain types of serif notice displays, the serif notice display is a display including the second character display (hereinafter referred to as “certain notice display”).
A certain chance including the certain decorative design (hereinafter referred to as “certain chance”) is configured to be displayed,
The gaming table is configured such that after the certain chance is stopped and displayed, the certain dialog notice display is displayed.

(Appendix a14)
A game machine according to appendix a13,
Before the certain chance eye is stopped and displayed, a display of a combination of decorative symbols that are not chance eyes (hereinafter referred to as “non-certain chance eyes”) may be stopped and displayed.
A game table characterized in that an effect of changing the non-certain chance to the certain chance is executable.

(Appendix a15)
A gaming machine according to appendix a13 or a14,
A gaming machine characterized by being configured to display the certain chance in a certain state among a plurality of types of state.

(Appendix a16)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a1 to a15,
The certain type of dialogue notice display is a display including any one of a plurality of types of characters,
A game that is configured to be able to display a display that suggests a character included in the certain type of serif notice display before the display of the certain kind of serif notice display is started. Stand.

(Appendix a17)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a1 to a16,
“A certain mini-game may be started in connection with the certain kind of line notice display” described in the appendix a1 means “after the display of the certain kind of line notice display is started” , A certain mini-game may be started before the display of the certain type of notice notice display is ended.

(Appendix a18)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a1 to a17,
A certain type of serif notice display (hereinafter referred to as “second type serif notice display”) is different from the certain type of serif notice display (hereinafter referred to as “first type serif notice display”). Configured to be viewable,
There is a state in which both the first type serif notice display and the second type serif notice display are displayed,
A configuration in which a certain mini-game is not started when only the second type serif notice display of the first type serif notice display and the second type serif notice display is displayed. A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix a19)
A game machine according to appendix a18,
With operating means,
As the response display of the operation of the operation means, the display of a certain serif notice display of the second type serif notice display is started,
When an operation of the operation means is performed in a state where a display indicating the appearance of the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “operation display”) is displayed, a response display of the second type serif notice display It is configured to start the display of a certain dialog notice display,
A gaming table, wherein at least a part of the display of the first type of dialogue notice display is overlapped by the operation display.

(Appendix a20)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a1 to a19,
A gaming table characterized in that a mini-game includes a variable display.

(Appendix a21)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a1 to a20,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine.

(Appendix a22)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a1 to a20,
A gaming machine, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine.

(Appendix b1)
A game machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays,
One display of the plurality of displays is a first display;
One display of the plurality of displays is a second display;
The first display is a display including a first line,
The first display is a display including a first character,
The second display is a display including a second line,
The second display is a display including a second character,
The second display may be displayed after the first display is displayed,
The gaming table, wherein the second character may be displayed before the display of the first display.

(Appendix b2)
A game machine according to appendix b1,
A game table, wherein a third character may be displayed before the display of the first display.

(Appendix b3)
The game stand according to appendix b2,
One display of the plurality of displays is a third display,
The third display is a display including a third line,
The third display is a display including the third character,
The gaming table, wherein the third display may be displayed after the second display is displayed.

(Appendix b4)
The game stand according to appendix b3,
One display of the plurality of displays is a first conversation notice display,
One display of the plurality of displays is a second conversation notice display,
The first conversation notice display is a display including the first display,
The first conversation notice display is a display including the second display,
The game table, wherein the second conversation notice display is a display including the third display.

(Appendix b5)
The game stand according to appendix b4,
A gaming machine, wherein the second conversation notice display may be displayed after the first conversation notice display is displayed during a period in which one certain symbol variation display is displayed.

(Appendix b6)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices b1 to b5,
One display of the plurality of displays is a first animation display,
The first animation display is displayed before the display of the first display,
The first animation display is a display including a movement display of the character,
The first animation display is a display including the first character,
The gaming table according to claim 1, wherein the first animation display is a display that may include the second character.

(Appendix b7)
A gaming machine according to appendix b6,
The game table, wherein the first character and the second character are simultaneously displayed at a certain timing in the display period of the first animation display.

(Appendix b8)
A gaming table according to appendix b6 or b7,
In the first animation display, the game table is characterized in that the display start of the second character is before the display start of the first character.

(Appendix b9)
The game stand according to any one of appendices b6 to b8,
One display of the plurality of displays is a second animation display,
The second animation display is displayed before the display of the second display,
The second animation display is a display including a movement display of the character,
The second animation display is a display including the second character,
The game table characterized in that the second animation display is a display not including the first character.

(Appendix b10)
A game machine according to appendix b9,
The gaming table characterized in that the number of characters in the second animation display is smaller than the number of characters in the first animation display.

(Appendix b11)
A gaming machine according to appendix b9 or b10,
The game table characterized in that the first displayed character in the second animation display is different from the first character displayed in the first animation display.

(Appendix b12)
The game stand according to any one of appendices b9 to b11,
The game table characterized in that the display period of the first animation display is shorter than the display period of the first display.

(Appendix b13)
The game stand according to any one of appendices b1 to b12,
The first display is a display including a first color,
The second display is a display including a second color,
The reliability in the first color is different from the reliability in the second color,
The game table, wherein a display including the second color may be displayed before the display of the first display.

(Appendix b14)
A gaming machine according to appendix b13,
The game machine characterized in that the reliability in the second color is higher than the reliability in the first color.

(Appendix b15)
The game stand according to any one of appendices b1 to b14,
The game table, wherein the first line is displayed before the display of the first display.

(Appendix b16)
The game stand according to any one of appendices b1 to b15,
The first display is a display including a first name;
The first name is the name of the first character,
The game table, wherein the first name is displayed before the display of the first display.

(Appendix b17)
The game stand according to any one of appendices b1 to b16,
It has operating means that can be operated by the player,
The gaming table, wherein the second display is displayed when the operation means is operated during the display of the first display.

(Appendix b18)
The game stand according to any one of appendices b1 to b17,
The game table, wherein the second display is displayed after the first display is displayed.

(Appendix b19)
The game stand according to any one of appendices b1 to b18,
Comprising a movable body movable to a position overlapping the display means;
The game table, wherein the movable body may overlap at least one of the first display and the second display.

(Appendix b20)
The game stand according to any one of appendices b1 to b19,
A gaming table, wherein a display may overlap at least one of the first display and the second display.

(Appendix b21)
The game stand according to any one of appendices b1 to b20,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine.

(Appendix b22)
The game stand according to any one of appendices b1 to b20,
A gaming machine, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine.

  In the description so far, a configuration expressed as “first to (first)”, “second to (second)”, “third to (third)”,. Is merely used for convenience to improve readability, and does not have a special meaning for limiting the configuration.

  As described above, all the examples (production examples) described in the present embodiment can be implemented in combination as appropriate. In other words, the gaming table of the present invention is configured to be able to execute all the above-described embodiments (production examples), and is appropriately configured to be able to execute at least some of the embodiments (production examples). Alternatively, only a part of the above-described embodiment (effect example) may be alternatively performed.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display a first decorative symbol (deca decorative symbol) and a second decorative symbol (mini decorative symbol) as shown in FIG. 14 and FIG. It is possible to stop display the content corresponding to the content (state or mode) of the design of one decorative design. Further, the pachinko machine 100 of this example can execute the effects shown in FIGS. 15 to 29 related to the effects shown in FIG. 14, and execute the effects shown in FIGS. 30 and 32 to 39 related to FIG. 31. Is possible. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 of the present example can be implemented by appropriately combining the production examples shown in FIGS. 14 to 39 and the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols shown in FIGS. 14 to 39.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display a first decorative symbol (deca decorative symbol) and a second decorative symbol (mini decorative symbol) as shown in FIG. 14 and FIG. It is possible to stop display the content corresponding to the content (state or mode) of the design of one decorative design. Moreover, the pachinko machine 100 of the present example can execute the expectation notification effect shown in FIG. Further, the pachinko machine 100 of this example can execute the effects shown in FIGS. 41 to 55 related to the expectation notification effect shown in FIG. 40, and the first decorative symbols (deca The effect examples shown in FIGS. 41 to 55 may be executed in combination with the effect example of displaying the decorative symbol) and the second decorative symbol (mini decorative symbol).

  The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display a first decorative symbol (deca decorative symbol) and a second decorative symbol (mini decorative symbol) as shown in FIG. 14 and FIG. It is possible to stop display the content corresponding to the content (state or mode) of the design of one decorative design. In the pachinko machine 100 of this example, as shown in FIG. 66 and the like, music including a song is output from the speaker 120, and lyrics corresponding to the song are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 of the present example can execute the effects shown in FIGS. 67 to 76 related to the effect shown in FIG. 66, and the first decorative symbols (deca decorative symbols) shown in FIGS. The effect examples shown in FIGS. 66 to 76 may be executed in combination with the effect example of displaying the second decorative symbol (mini decorative symbol).

  The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display a first decorative symbol (deca decorative symbol) and a second decorative symbol (mini decorative symbol) as shown in FIG. 14 and FIG. It is possible to stop display the content corresponding to the content (state or mode) of the design of one decorative design. Moreover, the pachinko machine 100 of the present example can execute a selection effect executed by the first effect means and the second effect means as shown in FIG. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 of the present example can execute the effects shown in FIGS. 97 to 156 related to the effect shown in FIG. 96, and the first decorative symbols (decorative decorative symbols) shown in FIGS. 96 to 156 may be executed in combination with the effect example of displaying the second decoration symbol (mini decoration symbol).

  The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display a first decorative symbol (deca decorative symbol) and a second decorative symbol (mini decorative symbol) as shown in FIG. 14 and FIG. It is possible to stop display the content corresponding to the content (state or mode) of the design of one decorative design. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 of the present example is combined with the production example displaying the first decorative symbol (deca decorative symbol) and the second decorative symbol (mini decorative symbol) shown in FIG. One or a plurality of effect examples of the effect example shown in 55, the effect examples shown in FIGS. 66 to 76, and the effect examples shown in FIGS. 96 to 156 can be executed in combination.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display a first decorative symbol (deca decorative symbol) and a second decorative symbol (mini decorative symbol) as shown in FIG. 14 and FIG. It is possible to stop display the content corresponding to the content (state or mode) of the design of one decorative design. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 of the present example is combined with the production example displaying the first decorative symbol (deca decorative symbol) and the second decorative symbol (mini decorative symbol) shown in FIG. An example of an expectation notification effect shown in 55, an effect example shown in FIGS. 66 to 76, an effect example shown in FIGS. 96 to 156, a serif notice display as shown in FIG. 174, and the like can be displayed. 194 to 198, FIG. 200, FIG. 202 related to the effect that the mini-game can be performed, the preliminary notice effect during preparation shown in FIG. 193, the timer notice effect shown in FIG. 201, and the preliminary notice effect during preparation shown in FIG. 204, 206, and 208 to 213 can be executed in combination with one or more examples of the preliminary announcement effects shown in preparation.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display a first decorative symbol (deca decorative symbol) and a second decorative symbol (mini decorative symbol) as shown in FIG. 14 and FIG. It is possible to stop display the content corresponding to the content (state or mode) of the design of one decorative design. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 of the present example is combined with the production example displaying the first decorative symbol (deca decorative symbol) and the second decorative symbol (mini decorative symbol) shown in FIG. An example of an expectation notification effect shown in 55, an effect example shown in FIGS. 66 to 76, an effect example shown in FIGS. 96 to 156, a serif notice display as shown in FIG. 174, and the like can be displayed. One of the effects of performing the mini-game, the effect of executing the conversation notice display shown in FIG. 229, and the effect of executing the conversation notice display shown in FIGS. 230 to 248 related to the conversation notice display shown in FIG. Alternatively, a plurality of production examples can be executed in combination.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display a first decorative symbol (deca decorative symbol) and a second decorative symbol (mini decorative symbol) as shown in FIG. 14 and FIG. It is possible to stop display the content corresponding to the content (state or mode) of the design of one decorative design. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 of the present example is combined with the production example displaying the first decorative symbol (deca decorative symbol) and the second decorative symbol (mini decorative symbol) shown in FIG. An example of an expectation notification effect shown in 55, an effect example shown in FIGS. 66 to 76, an effect example shown in FIGS. 96 to 156, a serif notice display as shown in FIG. 174, and the like can be displayed. 251 to 256 and 260 to 273 related to the effect of performing the mini game, the meter increase effect and the item giving effect shown in FIG. 250, the meter increasing effect and the item giving effect shown in FIG. One or a plurality of examples of an increase effect and an item grant effect can be executed in combination.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display a first decorative symbol (deca decorative symbol) and a second decorative symbol (mini decorative symbol) as shown in FIG. 14 and FIG. It is possible to stop display the content corresponding to the content (state or mode) of the design of one decorative design. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 of the present example is combined with the production example displaying the first decorative symbol (deca decorative symbol) and the second decorative symbol (mini decorative symbol) shown in FIG. An example of an expectation notification effect shown in 55, an effect example shown in FIGS. 66 to 76, an effect example shown in FIGS. 96 to 156, a serif notice display as shown in FIG. 174, and the like can be displayed. The production effect of the movable bodies 1 and 2 being executed even during the display of the balloon display shown in FIG. 274 and the production operation of the movable bodies 1 and 2 shown in FIG. One or more examples of effects of the movable bodies 1 and 2 shown in FIGS. 275 and 276 can be executed in combination.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display a first decorative symbol (deca decorative symbol) and a second decorative symbol (mini decorative symbol) as shown in FIG. 14 and FIG. It is possible to stop display the content corresponding to the content (state or mode) of the design of one decorative design. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 of the present example is combined with the production example displaying the first decorative symbol (deca decorative symbol) and the second decorative symbol (mini decorative symbol) shown in FIG. An example of an expectation notification effect shown in 55, an effect example shown in FIGS. 66 to 76, an effect example shown in FIGS. 96 to 156, a serif notice display as shown in FIG. 174, and the like can be displayed. 308-327 related to the effect of performing the mini game, the effect of the balloon display shown in FIG. 307, and the effect of the balloon display shown in FIG. 307 are combined. Can be executed.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display a first decorative symbol (deca decorative symbol) and a second decorative symbol (mini decorative symbol) as shown in FIG. 14 and FIG. It is possible to stop display the content corresponding to the content (state or mode) of the design of one decorative design. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 of the present example is combined with the production example displaying the first decorative symbol (deca decorative symbol) and the second decorative symbol (mini decorative symbol) shown in FIG. An example of an expectation notification effect shown in 55, an effect example shown in FIGS. 66 to 76, an effect example shown in FIGS. 96 to 156, a serif notice display as shown in FIG. 174, and the like can be displayed. One of the effects shown in FIGS. 328 to 342 related to the pseudo-continuous effects shown in FIGS. 328 (g) to (p) and the pseudo-continuous effects shown in FIG. A plurality of production examples can be executed in combination.

  Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention only list the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what was done. In addition, in some cases, the content described in one configuration among a plurality of configurations described in the embodiments may be applied to other configurations to further widen the game.

  For example, even if the configuration requirements are included only in the description of the embodiment, examples, modifications, various examples, supplementary notes, etc. described above, the configuration requirements are not limited to other embodiments, examples, You may apply to a modification, various examples, an appendix, etc. That is, unless there is a factor that prevents the application, the configuration requirements included only in the description of the embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, supplementary notes, and the like are not included in the other embodiments, examples, and modifications. When applied to examples, various examples, supplementary notes, and the like, and all or a part of the components are combined with each other or interchanged, they can be realized as a single technical idea. Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention only list the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what was done.

  Further, the first sub control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700 may be configured as separate substrates, respectively, or the VRAM 436 may be used as a substrate (first sub substrate 160) constituting the first sub control unit 400. Alternatively, a configuration in which a VDP 434 or the like is mounted and the effect control and the liquid crystal control are executed by the CPU 404 of one first sub-control unit 400 may be used.

  In addition, the main control unit, the first sub control unit, and the second sub control unit may be configured as a single chip, or the main control unit and the first sub control unit may be configured to allow bidirectional communication. Good.

  Moreover, while enabling bidirectional communication between the main control unit and the first sub control unit, communication from the first sub control unit to the second sub control unit may be one-way communication.

  In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention can be applied to an enclosed gaming machine. Here, the “enclosed game machine” is one that circulates and uses game balls enclosed in the game machine. That is, the pachinko machine may be an enclosed pachinko machine that encloses a sphere and circulates the enclosed sphere in the pachinko machine, and this enclosed pachinko machine uses the enclosed sphere as a launch ball The ball payout may be executed by credit.

  Alternatively, a predetermined number of game balls are encapsulated as encapsulated balls, the encapsulated spheres are fired into a game area to play a game, and a predetermined game value is given to a player based on the fact that the encapsulated balls win a predetermined entry area. It is also possible to use an enclosed ball game table that can be circulated by launching the enclosed ball that has won the predetermined entry area or the enclosed ball that has not won the prize into the game area.

  As described above, the example in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine (bullet ball game machine) has been described in detail. However, the game table of the present invention is not limited to this example. For example, a medal or a game ball (pachinko ball) is used. The present invention can also be applied to a spinning machine (slot machine) to be used. That is, the pachinko machine 100 described so far is a pachinko (1 type + 1 type), but other pachinko (eg, 1 type, 2 types, 3 types, 1 type + 2 types, etc.), slot etc. Parrot, jade ball). More specifically, when a medal (game medium) is inserted and the start lever is operated to rotate the reel, the winning combination is determined internally by internal lottery, and the stop button is operated to stop the reel In addition, if a combination of symbols predetermined according to the internal decision is displayed on the symbol display window, a winning combination is established, and if a winning combination with a medal payout is established, a prescribed number of medals are paid out, etc. It may be a spinning machine (slot machine) that gives a privilege to the player.

  Also, for example, a plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols, a start lever for instructing rotation of the reels, and a stop for individually stopping the rotation of the reels provided for each reel. A lottery means for determining whether or not internal winning of a plurality of types of winnings is determined by lottery, a reel stop control means for performing stop control for stopping rotation of the reel based on a lottery result of the lottery means, and a lottery result of the lottery means Determining means for determining whether or not the symbol combination displayed by the reels stopped based on the symbol is a symbol combination predetermined corresponding to the internal winning combination, and the symbol stop mode is a predetermined winning mode In this case, the present invention is also suitable for a slot machine provided with a payout control means for performing a game medium payout process for paying out a game medium corresponding to a predetermined winning mode.

  Furthermore, the present invention has been described by taking a pachinko machine and a slot machine as examples of game machines, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and may be applied to an arrangement ball game machine, a ball ball game machine, a smart ball, and the like.

  The game machine according to the present invention can be applied to game machines represented by a spinning machine (slot machine) and a ball game machine (pachinko machine).

100 Pachinko machine 208, 208 'Image display device (decorative pattern display device)
226 General winning opening 228 Universal drawing start opening 230 Special figure 1 starting opening 232 Special figure 2 starting opening 234 Variable winning opening 300 Main control section 400 First sub control section 500 Second sub control section 208X First symbol display area 208Y Second Symbol display area 2081 First image display device 2082 Second image display device 2083 Third image display device

Claims (12)

A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a variable display of a set of decorative symbols (hereinafter referred to as “first display”),
The display means is a means capable of displaying a variable display of a set of decorative symbols separate from the first display (hereinafter referred to as “second display”),
The second display has a display size different from the first display,
The first display and the second display are configured to be displayed in parallel,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a special symbol,
A special symbol is a symbol representing the development of a certain reach production.
A special symbol is a symbol that is not used as a symbol representing a big hit,
In the first display of one time, it is configured such that execution of a certain reach effect may be started after a stop display of a certain special symbol is displayed,
In at least a part of the state where a certain reach effect is being executed, the second display is configured to be able to notify the temper symbol.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 1,
It is configured to be able to execute the first jackpot game,
It is configured to be able to execute the second jackpot game,
The second jackpot game is a jackpot game with a higher profit for the player than the first jackpot game,
The display means is configured to display a first jackpot effect display corresponding to the first jackpot game,
The display means is configured to display a second jackpot effect display corresponding to the second jackpot game,
In the first display, it is configured to be able to display a first variation display that finally displays a first confirmed display,
In the first display, it is configured to be able to display a second variation display in which a second confirmed display is finally displayed
The first confirmation display is a confirmation display of a set of three of certain decoration symbols (hereinafter referred to as “first decoration symbols”) of the first type of decoration symbols,
The second confirmation display is a confirmation display of a set of three of certain decoration symbols (hereinafter referred to as “second decoration symbols”) of the second type of decoration symbols,
The first jackpot effect display is configured to be displayable after the first display is displayed,
The second jackpot effect display is configured to be displayable after the second display is displayed,
The Tempe design may be configured by the first decorative design,
The Tempe design may be constituted by the second decorative design,
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 1 or 2,
In a state where a certain reach effect is being executed, the first display is configured to be able to display an animation display relating to a temperament symbol (hereinafter referred to as “a certain animation display”).
The certain animation display is an animation display including a first scene,
The certain animation display is an animation display including a second scene,
The first scene is a scene in which it is difficult to identify the type of decorative design that constitutes the template.
The second scene is a scene that can identify the type of decorative symbols that make up the template.
According to claim 1, “in at least a part of a state where a certain reach effect is being executed, it is configured to be able to notify a tempering symbol in the second display”. In at least a part of the state in which the certain animation display of the first scene is displayed, it is configured so that the temper symbol can be notified in the second display.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 3 quoting claim 2 or claim 2,
The display means includes
In a certain state among the states in which the second variable display is displayed, a stop display of a set of three decorative symbols of the first type of decorative symbols in the second display (hereinafter, “ "First stop display") is displayed,
In the state in which the second variable display is displayed, a stop display (hereinafter referred to as “second stop display”) of a set of three decorative symbols of the first type of decorative symbols in the first display. ”)) Is displayed,
In the first display, the first stop display is displayed after the execution of the promotion effect is started, and the second stop display can be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claim 1 thru | or 4, Comprising:
The display size of the first display is larger than that of the second display.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claim 1 thru | or 5, Comprising:
“A certain reach production” according to claim 1 is “a certain reach production”.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claim 1 thru | or 5, Comprising:
“A certain reach production” according to claim 1 is “a certain kind of reach production”.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claim 1 thru | or 7, Comprising:
The “design representing development to a certain reach production” according to claim 1 is a “design representing development to a certain kind of reach production”.
The configuration of claim 1, wherein, in the first display of one time, execution of a reach effect may be started after a stop display of a certain special symbol is displayed. Is "configured so that the execution of a certain kind of reach effect may be started after the stop display of a certain special symbol is displayed in the first display once," That is,
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claim 1 thru | or 8, Comprising:
Other special symbols are related to certain effects,
Other special symbols are symbols that are not used as symbols that represent loss,
In the first display, an animation display related to other special symbols (hereinafter referred to as “other animation display”) can be displayed.
After the display of the other animation display is started, a stop display of other special symbols may be displayed in the first display,
In at least some of the states in which the stop display of other special symbols is displayed in the first display, the stop display is configured to be displayed in the second display.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claim 1 thru | or 9, Comprising:
The display means can display a certain chance.
The first display is configured to be able to display a stop display of a certain chance.
The stop display is displayed in the second display in at least a part of the states in which the stop display of a certain chance is displayed in the first display.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 10, Comprising:
The “stop display” according to claim 1 is “a certain stop display other than the fixed display”.
A game stand characterized by that. The game table according to claim 11,
The first display is a display with three decorative symbols,
A certain stop display other than the fixed display is a stop display including fluctuation fluctuation in at least one of the three decorative symbols.
A game stand characterized by that.